《HxH: God of Choice System》 Chapter 1: Hunter X Hunter World! Chapter 1: Hunter X Hunter World! On a quiet ind, a teenager suddenly opened his eyes in a daze. ¡°Where is this?¡± An looked at his surroundings nkly! ¡°Maybe I¡¯m dreaming after I dozed off slightly in the ssroom?¡± An pinched his cheek and felt pain, which indicated that this wasn¡¯t a dream. ¡°Did I just transmigrate into another world after I slept?¡± Such an absurd idea appeared in An¡¯s mind. He was a senior high school student, he often read novels in his spare time, and most of the times, the Protagonist of these novels cross to another world due to being hit by Truck-Kun, or some god¡¯s fault. There were even some who got sucked into the toilet. These Transmigrators would often get some cheating ability or A System to aid them in their journey. And here he was, crossing to another world while he was sleeping peacefully just a minute ago. An noticed some captivating scenery around him. A simple forest full of trees, grass, and flowers, but to someone who lived in the city, it was mesmerizing. He noticed how tall the trees were and instantly knew that he was no longer on earth. An was deep in thoughts, wondering about his whereabouts when suddenly¡­ [Ding! Detecting a Host! God Choice System is Activated!] [World: Hunter X Hunter!] An was stunned! It¡¯s here! His Gold-Finger (Cheat) is here. Not only did he cross to Hunter X Hunter, but he also obtained a system! But after the excitement he felt, An sighed. After all, Hunter X Hunter¡¯s world is one of the most dangerous Anime worlds. An ordinary person without any cheat transmigrating in such a world full of danger meant death, and even now, as An got his System, he won¡¯t bepletely safe, maybe safer, but he won¡¯t be living in peace. ¡°So, what does this God Choice system offer?¡± Just as An wondered, he heard ¡®Ding¡¯ in his head. [1: Survive 100 Days in Hunter X Hunter world: Reward: 10 x strength!] [2: Survive 500 days in Hunter X Hunter world: Reward: Basic of Nen, Nen of me: Ten, Zetsu, Ren, Hatsu!] [3: Survive 1000 days in Hunter X Hunter world: Reward: Nen Talent!] Nen Ability, the main power in Hunter X Hunter¡¯s world! Only by learning Nen can a hunter truly be strong in this world and witness the incredible things it contains. An couldn¡¯t choose one as all of them gave enticing rewards! ¡°Ah, what do I chose? All of them are good.¡± [Please choose within 60 Seconds, or else the choice won¡¯t be epted!] ¡°There is a time limit as well!!!¡± An shouted in surprise and quickly started analyzing his choices. There is no doubt that the third choice gives the best Reward, but the first one was the fastest and most useful. The second choice would allow him to learn how to use Nen¡¯s basics, but An knew that his development would be significantly limited if his talent was ordinary. After all, bing a first-rate Nen user always depended on the talent that same person had. And as a Transmigrator, An had a broad mindset and wouldn¡¯t limit himself while he just started. Therefore, after hesitating, An¡¯s choice was thest one, which had the most advantages. [Ding! You chose to survive for 1000 days in Hunter X Hunter¡¯s world. Reward: Nen Talent!] [Description of Nen talent: The host¡¯s talent would reach the extent to be called a genius. Any Nen ability can be used by just knowing the theory behind it and mastered in a short time. Anyone with this talent has the potential to be a top Nen user in the world.] ¡°It¡¯s a great reward!¡± An eximed with delight! Although he had to wait about three years to get this Reward, it should be worth it. By that time, he would need that talent in the world stage! Right now, An wasn¡¯t in a hurry to learn Nen. Don¡¯t get him wrong, he was eager to learn it, but he still had his priorities. The first thing he needs now is to know where he was exactly. An decided to start walking around the forest in the hope of finding any resident living here. Half an hourter, An arrived at ake. As he got closer, he was surprised when he saw his reflection on the water surface. He had slightly long and spiky brown hair and a handsome young face, which meant that he didn¡¯t just transmigrate. Did I possess another person¡¯s body? An wondered aloud. An tried to recall anything that belonged to this body¡¯s owner, but nothing surfaced to his mind other than his memories. Right now, An didn¡¯t care about the physical change as much as his current location. He wanted to know where he was to start nning for his future in this world. Although the Hunter x Hunter World was big, humans only upied a smallndpared to the dark continent. Thinking of this, An panicked: ¡°Don¡¯t tell me!!! Damn it!! Please, someone, tell me that I¡¯m not in the Dark Continent?¡± An quickly calmed down: ¡°Breath in! Breath out!¡± An thought about it quickly, before concluding that he wasn¡¯t in that terrifying ce because apart from some small animals, there was no danger at all. As far as he knew, there is no way he would be able to survive in the Dark Continent, where creatures asrge as a skyscraper existed. This was more like a ce in the human part world. An looked around a few times before his gazended on a tall tree. Focusing on it, An was suddenly stunned. It wasn¡¯t the tree in particr that shocked him, but the person who sat on it. A boy who was a few years younger than him, given his appearance, sat cross-legged on a branch while holding a fishing rod and a lotus leaf on his head. He sat motionless like a statue keeping his fishing posture and looking too focused. Chapter 2: Getting a reward for befriending the Protagonist Chapter 2: Getting a reward for befriending the Protagonist ¡°Is that Gon?¡± An couldn¡¯t believe his luck. He rubbed his eyes repeatedly, but the boy was still there. He just met Gon. ¡°I¡¯m on Whale Ind, then?¡± An whispered to himself. In the Original plot, Gon¡¯s Home ind was called Whale Ind. The residents of this ind lived on fishing, and aside from Gon, most people living in his home town were older people. [Ding! The host has encountered the Protagonist of the plot; please make a Choice!] [1: Go forward and Talk to Gon and be his friend: Reward: Lucky Treasure chest x1] [2: Ignore Gonpletely and leave Whale Ind: Reward: Ten Million Jenny!] [Ding! Please make your choice in the next 60 seconds!] An: ¡°So I have to choose again!!¡± He must choose one of the two options, or else he won¡¯t be getting a reward. An hesitated a little before choosing the first option even though the second would help him more. He didn¡¯t have money, and a sum of ten million isn¡¯t small for someone like him. However, looking at the long run, the first option should be better and that without mentioning the Reward, just befriending Gon would help him greatly in the future. ¡®you can¡¯t be enticed by the immediate wealth. You should look far ahead and make the best out of every situation.¡¯ An thought to himself, trying to divert his attention from the money. Moreover, the Reward for the first choice depended on his luck, which he concluded from the name. Everyone has that adventurous side, being pulled toward the unknown and taking gambles that depended on luck, and An was the same. Compared to ten million jenny, a treasure chest that could contain many wonders made him excited. He may even be able to get the ¡®One piece¡¯ out of this box. An smiled widely as he walked toward Gon. Just as he raised his hand and was about to greet Gon, a bear rushed toward him. Seeing this, An instantly paled and took off running away as if his life depended on it, which is was the case right now. ¡®What kind of joke is this? Am I going to die to a bear just after crossing to this world? Aaaaah¡¯ ¡°Stop! Don¡¯t hurt him!¡± The Bear directly stopped attacking as soon as he heard this voice. An heard this as well and continued running until he felt safe before he looked back while panting. He saw Gon who jumped down from the tree stopping the Bear, and in doing so, saved his life. Gon was patting the Bear and calming it down. The aura around Gon was calming. He radiated innocence and kindness that would make any wild animal feel safe around him. After sending the Bear away, Gon directly looked at the dazed An in concern and said: ¡°Are you okay? Sorry, that Bear is the guardian here. Seeing a stranger intrude on his turf, he attacked, but I already told him not to attack you again, so you are safe.¡± An breathed a sigh of relief and shook his head, gesturing that everything is alright. As someone who crossed from another world, he should have more courage. But if Gon didn¡¯t interfere, he would be dead. ¡°By the way, I didn¡¯t see you here before, are you a tourist?¡± Gon asked An curiously. After asking, Gon seemed to realize something and touched the back of his head with an innocent smile: ¡°Ah, sorry, because it¡¯s been a long time since I saw someone my age, I was a little excited.¡± An nodded, expressing his understanding. Whale ind didn¡¯t have many teenagers, as most of them would go to big cities looking for either work or adventure, so most people that remained here are old. Gon is almost the only teen on this ind, which exins his current happiness. ¡°Just call me An, as you can see, this is my first time here, and yeah, I can be considered a tourist.¡± ¡®as I just crossed to this world¡¯ An thought to himself while faintly smiling at Gon. ¡°Oh, where are you from?¡± ¡°I¡¯m¡­¡± An was speechless. He didn¡¯t prepare for such a question yet and didn¡¯t expect Gon to ask like a curious child. ¡°Mm¡­ Well, from a very distant ce.¡± An could only be as vague as possible. He didn¡¯t want to say ¡®Hey, I juste from another world where this world is just a show on TV that I liked.¡¯ An started thinking about a background story. ¡°A faraway ce¡­¡± Gon nodded thoughtfully before started firing question: ¡°Then why are you here? Did youe here by boat alone? Why are you alone? Why did you choose Whale Ind for your tour?¡± An sweatdropped. He helplessly replied: ¡°I will tell you these things in the future. Well, you kept asking me, but I don¡¯t even know your name.¡± ¡®Although I already know it.¡¯ The most significant trouble while talking to a Character from the Original show is to pretend not to know them. Otherwise, it would be too suspicious if An just went ahead and said: ¡°Hey, you¡¯re Gon.¡± ¡°Ahh, I still didn¡¯t introduce myself yet!¡± Gon rubbed the back of his head and grinned: ¡°My Name is Gon Freecss, just call me Gon.¡± An nodded and stretched out a hand as a sign of friendship: ¡°It¡¯s nice to meet you, Gon.¡± Gon grasped An¡¯s hand and said with an innocent smile: ¡°Me too, I¡¯m d to meet you, An.¡± Suddenly, An heard the System¡¯s notification in his head. [Ding! You have sessfully befriended Gon. You obtained a Lucky Treasure chest x1!] An didn¡¯t expect Gon to consider him a friend as soon as they met. He was too na?ve. However, his innocence made the cold-blooded Killua, who was born in a family full of assassins, became his friend. An sighed before thinking about his Reward. He suddenly was stunned to find himself in a white space with a golden treasure chest in front of him. Chapter 3: Specialist’s Ability Chapter 3: Specialist¡¯s Ability [Ding! You have obtained a Lucky Treasure Chest, Do you want to open it?] ¡®Yes, Open it.¡¯ [Ding! You opened the Lucky Treasure Chest and gained a (Specialist¡¯s ability): Grim¡¯s Hand!] An was taken aback with a mouth wide open! He didn¡¯t expect a specialist¡¯s ability toe out of the chest. But he didn¡¯t even master the basics of Nen yet. Can he use this specialist¡¯s Ability now? ¡°Don¡¯t I need to learn Nen before using the specialist¡¯s ability?!!¡± An wanted to curse the first ancestor of the system for getting him so excited for nothing. But he changed his mind as he thought that maybe, just maybe, he could use it without the need of Nen. An knew that Specialists were the most mysterious out of every Nen type. It was the only Ability that can even be passed by blood. It was like a bloodline of a sort. Suddenly, An remembered a person without any Nen training that used a specialist¡¯s Ability. It was Neon Nostrade, the daughter of Light Nostrade of the Nostrade Family. Her Ability is called Lovely Ghostwriter, which is basically fortune-telling. Neon¡¯s fortunes take the form of a poem with four or five quatrains of four lines each. Each verse represents a week of the current month. The target must handwrite his name (aliases and handles count), full date of birth, and blood type on the piece of paper on which she will write the poem. A picture of the target¡¯s face is necessary if he isn¡¯t present. The only problem of this Ability is that she can¡¯t use this Ability on herself. But it¡¯s a fact that she didn¡¯t train to use Nen before, but she could use her Specialist¡¯s Ability. Which made An conclude that the Grim¡¯s hand he just got can be used without Nen as well. Sure enough, the system informed An of the conditions to use the Grim¡¯s Hand. [Grim¡¯s hand¡¯s description: By touching a target, the user can rip off the target¡¯s luck, therefore increasing his own. Once the luck umtes to a certain point, the user can enter a short state of invincibility. When the invincibility state is activated, there is a chance that the opponent¡¯s bad luck will be ripped off and added to the user¡¯s luck, which will decrease his luck until it turns into bad luck. Once the bad overwhelms the good, the user would be weak and unable to activate Nen¡¯s ability or encounter unlucky events. It¡¯s a double-edged ability that could save the user¡¯s life as well as kill him. The conditions to activate this Ability: 1: The user¡¯s hand must touch any part of the target¡¯s body for a full five seconds. 2: The user must know the target¡¯s name. 3: Only one hand can be used, either right or left, for this Ability. 4: The user won¡¯t be able to use Nen and will enter a state of Zetsu 5: This Ability can only be used once per day, and on one target in their lifetime.] ¡­ An sighed after learning about the Grim¡¯s Hand. This Ability contained too many conditions for use, and it has some mean disadvantages like stealing someone¡¯s bad luck. But in general, it is a useful ability. An didn¡¯t notice any change, but he also understood that this Ability isn¡¯t felt or seen. But it existed, which matters most. Moreover, it can make An¡¯s life much easier. At this time, Gon brought An back to reality: ¡°An, I caught a fish, and I¡¯m grilling it, do you want to eat?¡± ¡°Hmm, okay!¡± An rubbed his stomach as he smelt the fragrant grilled fish. After eating, An looked at Gon as if he was looking at a prey. He was thinking about using the Grim¡¯s Hand on Gon to get his luck. After all, he was eager to try and use this Ability to see how effective it was. Gon noticed An¡¯s gaze and asked timidly: ¡°An, do I have something on my face?¡± Gon felt as if An wanted to eat him out. Chapter 4: I’m a Noble! Chapter 4: I¡¯m a Noble! Facing the doubtful Gon, An realized that his expression was a little strange, but fortunately, Gon wasn¡¯t suspicious. ¡®It seems that I have to wait, now isn¡¯t the time to use my Grim¡¯s Hand. I hope I can use it soon.¡¯ ¡°By the way, An, you still didn¡¯t tell me why are you here alone? Where are your parents? And where are you from?¡± Gon asked curiously again. An felt a headache and thought: ¡°Gon had to ask about his Origin, didn¡¯t he!¡± At this moment, a notification appeared again. [Please choose from the following options!] [1: Tell Gon the truth, tell him about your transmigration: Reward: double mental power] [2: Fabricate a lie and convince Gon: Reward: double physical strength!] Note: Physical strength of ordinary people is 10 points. [3: Jump on Gon and knock him out: Reward: tenfold in both physical strength and mental power!] An didn¡¯t want to deceive anyone, he wasn¡¯t the kind of person who would tell lies to get away from things, but looking at thest choice, he almost choked and fell on the ground. ¡®What does he mean to jump on Gon and Knock him out?!!!¡¯ The first and second choices are typical, but the third was just too much!! Although Gon was still young, it was apparent in the show how strong he was, and here is the choice telling An, who had an average powerpared to a normal human from Earth, to knock such a monster down. The third option is impossible for obvious reasons so, now he had to think about the first and second options. An finally settled for the second option. He wasn¡¯t about to tell Gon that he was from another world, and he knew everything that will happen in thetter¡¯s life. He had no option but to lie currently. [Ding! You picked the second option! Host¡¯s physical strength is doubled!] An felt his body getting more robust, his power increased a lot due to this reward. An looked up and said: ¡°Sorry, Gon, I lied to you about being a tourist. I¡¯m not here for sightseeing.¡± ¡°Well, I guessed that from the start.¡± Gon¡¯s words surprised An. Gon then added: ¡°Because Whale ind isn¡¯t a tourist attraction ind, there is nothing to watch here and usually, no tourist wille here. Therefore, I knew that you didn¡¯t tell me the truth when you said you were one.¡± An was stunned: ¡®And here I thought that this kid was na?ve, it turned out he was sharp, maybe still na?ve, but not like a kid.¡¯ An smirked in his thoughts and decided to start telling his bluff. Thinking for a bit, An said: ¡°That¡¯s right, Gon, I¡¯m a noble.¡± ¡°Noble?¡± Gon tilted his head slightly in confusion. ¡°Yeah.¡± An nodded and continued his nonsense: ¡°Ie from a kingdom called basta. My father, Nefertari Cobra, is the king of basta, and my full name is Nefertari An, the crown prince of basta.¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t once get hungry, orck clothing since I was little, everything I wanted I would get, but that kind of life got boring, I didn¡¯t even have a single true friend.¡± ¡°That¡¯s why, one day, I told my father, the king, that I wanted to go in an adventure and get to see the world for myself.¡± ¡°But since I¡¯m the crown prince, the one who will inherit the throne, my father didn¡¯t agree, and after we quarreled, I just silently left in anger and sneaked out of the kingdom.¡± ¡°But after some time, all my money was spent, and I couldn¡¯t go anywhere, in desperation, I just got into the first boat I saw, which happened to be headed to Whale ind.¡± ¡°After getting here, I wandered around and got lost in the forest, before I found you, Gon.¡± Finally, An recited the story he prepared. He acted as if he felt heartache while thinking about his father and kingdom, showed anger when the king denied his adventure, and finally, showed longing at the end as if he missed his home. His acting skill definitively deserved an Oscar, and the innocent Gon was no match for such performance that he directly believed him and almost shouted: ¡°An, you¡¯re a prince?¡± ¡°Shhh! Don¡¯t yell. I don¡¯t want anyone to know that.¡± An made a flustered gesture, which made Gon directly cover his mouth and whispered: ¡°So your father, the king, doesn¡¯t know you¡¯re here?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± An nodded. ¡°What are you going to do then? Are you going back there?¡± Hearing Gon¡¯s words, An shook his head: ¡°Maybe someday, but I¡¯m not going for now.¡± He sighed with a lonely expression.¡°Forget about it, it was my decision, and I will take responsibility for my action. Don¡¯t worry about me, even if I die, it¡¯s not your fault, you are maybe myst friend in this life, and I hope even if something happened to me, you¡¯d remember my name, An Nefertari!¡± After saying this, An directly waved his hand and pretended to go away as he said: ¡°Goodbye Gon, I¡¯m going, and I hope your life will be better than mine.¡± Just when An walked two steps away, Gon directly shouted: ¡°Wait a minute.¡± ¡®Hehehe, it worked¡¯ An rejoiced but kept his expression full of sadness and asked: ¡°Is there something, Gon?¡± Gon stayed silent for a bit before he raised his head and said: ¡°I¡¯m also alone with no parents, my father left me here with my aunt to go adventure in the world¡­ I can feel your pain somewhat!¡± ¡°Really?¡± ¡°Yeah,¡± Gon nodded and said: ¡°I haven¡¯t seen my mother before either. You can say I never felt the love of my parents as a child.¡± An looked at him with sympathy and said: ¡°Gon, your pain is far greater than mine!¡± Gon grinned and replied: ¡°It¡¯s okay, I¡¯m already used to it. So, you don¡¯t have to give up, because I¡¯m here with you now.¡± An lowered his head and said: ¡°But I have nowhere to go.¡± Gon thought for a bit and eximed as if he had a bright idea: ¡°Ah, since you have nowhere to go, why don¡¯t you live in my house? What do you think?¡± An was ecstatic, it seems like he won¡¯t be having a problem with food and amodation in the future. Gon was an interesting friend. An didn¡¯t ept it immediately. Instead, he seemed to hesitate and said: ¡°Is that all right? Won¡¯t I cause trouble for you?¡± ¡°Haha, don¡¯t worry, only my aunt and grandmother live there, and they love me very much, so it won¡¯t be a problem when I tell them you are my friend.¡± Gon smiling while patting his chest. ¡°Well, I thank you for this.¡± An thanked Gon sincerely. ¡°Haha, It¡¯s okay, we¡¯re friends.¡± Gon grinned. Looking at Gon¡¯s bright smile, An didn¡¯t know why he suddenly felt guilty as if he just deceived a little child. But still, An remembered Gon¡¯s favor and would work to pay him back. Chapter 5: My stupid Brother! Chapter 5: My stupid Brother! Gon cleaned his Fishing rod and put out the fire with some water, then looked at the setting sun and said: ¡°An, we should go back, it¡¯s gettingte, and I don¡¯t think catching the master of the swamp is possible today.¡± An nodded and followed Gon. On the way, he asked as if he didn¡¯t know: ¡°Gon, why do you want to catch the master of the swamp?¡± Gon replied with a glint in his eyes: ¡°Because if I can catch it, I can go to the hunter¡¯s exam.¡± ¡°Hunter?¡± ¡°My father Ging is a hunter, and I want to be one as well and then find him.¡± An nodded thoughtfully. Indeed, Gon¡¯s father, Ging Freecss, was a very powerful hunter. But he was a scumbag. Leaving his young son behind to look around the world and adventure, he doesn¡¯t even have a little bit of responsibility. Such a father is too much, and Gon still wants to find him. The entire story started with Gon looking for his father, which led to his awesome and dangerous adventure. To sum the story up, it can be referred to as ¡®A fart-boy that was joined by a bro-coned kid on a journey to find the first¡¯s father that has left him inbor to join a group of fools that he abandoned just the moment they needed him.¡¯ Also known as ¡®Where is Dad?¡¯ An still pretended as if he didn¡¯t know anything when he asked: ¡°So, you want to be a hunter?¡± ¡°Yeah!¡± Gon nodded and asked An back: ¡°How about you, An, do you want to go back to basta and inherit your father¡¯s throne, or stay here?¡± An was stunned: ¡®Damn! I didn¡¯t think he would believe mepletely. If I was truly a prince, then, of course, I¡¯d go inherit the throne!¡¯ Unfortunately for him, and fortunately for us, he isn¡¯t. He looked at Gon with fake hesitation and said: ¡°Let¡¯s talk about itter. I¡¯m very confused now.¡± To be honest, he didn¡¯t want to be a hunter; he wanted to live a safe life in this world without the danger thates with being a hunter. He wanted to be a ¡®salted fish¡¯ in this life. Gon hoped that An would go with him to the Hunter Exam because he wanted a friend on his journey. But he won¡¯t force An, because everyone had their dreams to follow. As they continued forward, a house appeared not far away. At this time, An frowned as he remembered a crucial matter, only Gon would believe the nonsense he spouted about being a prince. He needed Gon to stay quiet about this, so he directly put a hand on Gon¡¯s shoulder and said: ¡°Gon,ter, if someone asked you about me, please don¡¯t tell them my true identity.¡± ¡°Huh? Why?¡± Gon asked in confusion. ¡°It¡¯s because I ran away from home, and most likely, my father¡¯s guard wille after me to force me to inherit my father¡¯s throne, and maybe if someone here was to know about me, they would be in danger, okay?¡± Gon seemed aware of the seriousness of the matter and nodded: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, your secret is safe with me. I promise to take it with me to the grave!¡± An patted Gon¡¯s shoulder as if he was deeply moved and said: ¡°Gon, Thank you, you¡¯re my best friend in this world, and maybe the only one as well.¡± Gon was touched: ¡°An, you¡¯re also my only friend.¡± ¡°It seems like we have the same circumstances, that¡¯s why we are sopatible.¡± The system chose this exact time to ruin this brotherly moment. [Ding! Please make a choice!] [1: Be Gon¡¯s sworn brother: Reward: Basics of Nen, The Nen of me!] (T/L: The basic of Nen or Nen of me: Ten (point) Focus the mind, reflect upon the self, and determine the goal. Zetsu (tongue) Put it into words. Ren (temper) Intensify your will. Hatsu (rel¨¦ase) Put it to action.) [2: Be a couple with Gon: Reward: Advanced Application of Nen!] (T/L: The advanced application refers to the ability to use the basic better, like Gyo, for advanced Ren application. Gyo: Focusing Nen in the eyes to see the Nen of others or oneself.) An rolled his eyes after reading the choices. Was the system trying to make a joke or something? Start a rtionship with Gon. Is that even a thing? Is it because we seemedpatible? Damn!! The system¡¯s sense of humor is really messed up. The evil system made another sound! [Ding! Please make your choice in the next 60 seconds, or else the reward won¡¯t be given afterward] An made his choice without hesitation! It was such an easy choice, after all! An then stared at Gon affectionately and sincerely said: ¡°Gon, since we are sopatible, why don¡¯t we be a couple?¡± ¡°Couple? What are you talking about?¡± Although Gon was na?ve, he knew what it meant to be a couple. He suddenly looked at An weirdly with suspicion. An quickly corrected himself: ¡°Sorry, sorry. That came out wrong! I meant partner, not a couple.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± Gon looked in a daze as he didn¡¯t know what that meant. An then exined: ¡°I mean sworn brothers, Gon.¡± ¡°Oh, okay, I don¡¯t have any brother, either.¡± Gon readily agreed. As an only child, having a brother was like a dreame true for Gon. An¡¯s proposition made him really happy. After all, now he has a brother. An then stretched his pinky and said: ¡°A pinky promise that can¡¯t be broken even after a hundred years!¡± Gon hooked his pinky with An before separating! It was a symbolic ceremony, as Gon was still a child, he could ask him to drink a cup of Sake with him. Well, technically, he was also a child as well. An then said: ¡°Well, Gon, we are brothers now, and since I¡¯m a few years older than you, I¡¯m the big brother, and you¡¯re the little brother.¡± ¡°Yeah, no problem.¡± Gon didn¡¯t care whether he was the little or the big brother because all that mattered to him now is that he has a brother. An had the urge to call Gon something now. He wanted so badly to mimic Itachi and say ¡®My foolish little brother,¡¯ but he refrained from saying so. [Ding! You seeded in bing Gon¡¯s Sworn Brother and obtained the knowledge of Nen of me!] In an instant, a flood of information invaded An¡¯s head containing everything that should be known about the Nen of me. Chapter 6: First Step! Chapter 6: First Step! An beamed with joy. He can start training in Nen, a dream he had since the moment he came here. Now he knows the theory behind the Nen of me. He only needed to start training and open his pores to release Nen, which is the starting step. An quickly calmed down and said to Gon: ¡°Gon, now that we are Sworn brothers, it¡¯s best to not talk about it, we should call each other just with our names, without adding that we are brothers.¡± ¡°Hmm.¡± Gon nodded obediently. Not long after, they finally reached the vige under Gon¡¯s guidance. A woman with a short orange hair stood at the door of Gon¡¯s house looking at thetter: ¡°Gon, you¡¯re back, how was your day? Did you catch the Master of the Swamp?¡± ¡°No, but I won¡¯t give up.¡± Gon imed full of determination. ¡°Oh, then you should work hard.¡± The woman patted Gon¡¯s head and finally noticed An behind Gon. ¡°Hmm, who are you?¡± asked the woman in confusion while looking at him from head to toe and wondering where such a handsome young man came from. Gon directly replied: ¡°He¡¯s my friend. His name is An.¡± Then turned toward An and introduced: ¡°An, this is Aunt Mito. She¡¯s the one who raised me.¡± An looked at Mito and thought: ¡®Wow, this woman is at least three times prettier than in the show.¡¯ Finally, he said: ¡°Hello, Mito-nee-san, I¡¯m An!¡± ¡°huh?¡± Mito was taken aback: ¡°Did you just call me, Sister?¡± Gon scratched his head and asked: ¡°Yes, An, how can you call Aunt Mito Sister? She is almost thirty, and she¡¯s as old as your mother.¡± A blue vein appeared on Mito¡¯s forehead and then ¡®Bang¡¯!! Her fist mmed Gon on the head, then she asked with a sweet smile on her face that promised pain: ¡°Gon, are you saying that I¡¯m an old woman?¡± ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Aunt Mito.¡± Gon clutched his head while apologizing to Mito. An was mostly surprised by the power disyed by Mito. She looked so frail, but the influence she exerted on Gon proved otherwise. He directly looked at Gon and said: ¡°Gon, this is your fault.¡± Gon still didn¡¯t know why it was his fault; after all, he only told the truth. An ignored him and looked at Mito and smiled: ¡°Aunt Mito looks very young to me.¡± Mito blushed inexplicably and said: ¡°You are such a sweet talker.¡± An stepped forward and asked seriously: ¡°Aunt Mito, do you mind if I call you, sister?¡± Mito once again blushed and said: ¡°No, I don¡¯t mind.¡± Every woman wanted to feel younger, and with Mito being already close to thirty, she was happy that someone would make her feel young again. What made her even happier is that the one calling her sister is someone so young and handsome. Gon pulled Mito¡¯s sleeve and asked: ¡°Aunt Mito, can An stay with us? He doesn¡¯t have anywhere to live.¡± ¡°Nowhere to live?¡± Mito frowned and looked at An: ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± Gon directly tried to help An and said: ¡°An quarreled with his parents and ran away from home.¡± Hearing this, Mito didn¡¯t think much about it and readily agreed: ¡°You can live here with us, but I hope you can contact your parentster. After all, they should be worried about you.¡± An nodded and replied: ¡°I don¡¯t want to go back for now, but I will tell them that I¡¯m fine.¡± Mito didn¡¯t want to interfere too much in An¡¯s family affair, so she said: ¡°You have to keep that in mind.¡± This way, An got to stay in Gon¡¯s house, which solved food and amodation. A few dayster, An found a quiet ce in the forest to start learning Nen. Nen was life energy, and learning how to manipte this energy makes someone a Nen user. Anyone can train in Nen, as this energy is present inside anything alive. But to master it, talent is crucial. Currently, only a few people in the world are trained in Nen and could teach others. Fortunately, An received that knowledge from the system, making him directly know everything about the Nen of me. The only thing left is to open the pores of his body and guide the life energy out. The Manifestation of this energy is what people call Aura or Nen. The stronger the life energy, the stronger Nen bes. The Nen can be controlled and used for attack and defense. Mastering the Nen of me means bing a beginner Nen user. An was sitting in a meditative state on the ground while trying to open his pores. Suddenly, he felt a surge of energy filling his body from head to toe. An¡¯s face was filled with joy as he couldn¡¯t calm his heart down from the excitement he felt. He could feel the difference. He felt much stronger as he took his first step into being a Nen user. Chapter 7: Smashing The Rock! Chapter 7: Smashing The Rock! Even though An open the pores in his body to let Nen gush out, he knew that this was just the first step. To master Nen, he needed much training. Fortunately, the Nen of the me is deeply imprinted in his head, and he only had to practice and master them. And if An had a good enough talent, his Nen mastery would reach first-ss with training. From that day forward, An kept practicing his Nen in the forest. An wore Gon¡¯s clothes daily, but they were somewhat small and not suitable for training, as they restricted his movement. So as soon as he gets into the forest, he would take off his top and practice bare-chested. Gon followed him, of course, but he would always go fishing leaving An to his own thing. Gon tried for days and still couldn¡¯t catch the master of the swamp. It was a rumor here that this creator existed, but no one saw it, but Gon still had faith. Gon didn¡¯t know what An is doing these days. He only knew that An said he was training to get more powerful. Gon looked at An, who was standing in a horse stance, clenching his fists and looking forward, with confusion. As he focused a little, he saw An was sweating a lot, even though he didn¡¯t move at all. As he got closer, he felt oppression pushing him back the nearer he got to An. Gon felt that An changed to another personpletely.If Gon knew how to use Nen, he would see An exuding an amazingly Huge Aura. It¡¯s just this aura isn¡¯t something normal people could see, but they still could feel the life Energy. The Nening out of his body is just the application of Ten. This exercise helps to increase the amount of Nen, Aura, or as the systems express them, Mental power. Next, he would use Zetsu, Ren, and Hatsu. Mastering these four would be a great help in advancing further in his Nen training. After a while, An stopped training. He saw Goning closer, but he didn¡¯t want to stop his practice, so he ignored Gon until he finished. So he looked at Gon and asked: ¡°Gon, why did you stop fishing?¡± Gon sighed: ¡°I couldn¡¯t catch it again. I¡¯m bored over there alone, so I came over to y with you.¡± Gon paused for a second as he remembered what he saw and asked curiously: ¡°By the way, what were you doing? Why were you sweating so much without moving?¡± An didn¡¯t hide this from Gon and directly answered: ¡°I was practicing Nen!¡± ¡°Nen?¡± Gon was confused and asked: ¡°What kind of training makes you sweat so much while you¡¯re standing in the same ce?¡± An answered: ¡°It¡¯s because I was using my Energy. It¡¯s normal to sweat if you burn your Energy.¡± ¡°So, what is Nen?¡± Gon asked like a child. An thought for a while and said: ¡°Nen is magical Energy in every living being. Mastering the usage of that Energy would make anyone much stronger.¡± ¡°Oh, it can make me strong?¡± Gon¡¯s eyes lit up, thinking about the idea and directly asked: ¡°Can you teach me then?¡± An was about to answer, but suddenly, he heard a ding inside his head. [Ding! Please chose.] [1: Help Gon unlock his Nen and teach him nen of mes: Reward: Advanced application of Nen {Shu, En, Ken, In, Gyo, Ko, Ryu}] [2: reject Gon¡¯s request: Reward: Mental Power X 2] Almost without waiting for the system to remind him about the 60 seconds to make a choice, An made his choice. Obviously, he would have helped Gon even without the system, but now with that kind of reward, he would be stupid if he rejected Gon. It¡¯s just that An nned on teaching him another time because he just started learning Nen himself, and he didn¡¯t reach the level of bing a teacher yet. But since Gon took the initiative to ask, and the system gave him such an enticing reward, he will teach him now. In this way, he would teach Gon like he nned to from the start and get a reward, which was a very good bonus. Seeing that An was in deep thoughts, Gon thought that An was contemting his request, which made him say: ¡°haha, don¡¯t worry about it, since it¡¯s inconvenient, you don¡¯t need to teach me.¡± Hearing this, An came to his senses and directly exined: ¡°Don¡¯t get me wrong Gon, I¡¯m not hesitating about teaching you, but it¡¯s just that I¡¯m starting this myself, and I don¡¯t¡¯ see myself in such a high level that I could teach someone. I¡¯m afraid that I won¡¯t be a good teacher, but if you¡¯re okay with that, I will teach you.¡± Gon immediately nodded his head. He just misunderstood An and bowed his head in shame. An nced at the sky to gauge the time. Seeing that he still plenty of time, he looked back at Gon and said: ¡°Let¡¯s start now then.¡± Gon raised his head and asked: ¡°What should I Do?¡± An answered: ¡°I will tell you what Nen is, and if you understand, I will teach you.¡± Gon nodded, and An started talking about Nen. Gon often asking about things, and An would take his time in teaching him whatever he didn¡¯t understand. An exined about the Life energy, Nen, and everything rted to it. After exining the basics, An walked toward a rock, turned his head to Gon, and said: ¡°Now, I will disy the power of Nen.¡± An took a deep breath and clenched his fist. If Gon leaned Nen, he would see something hazy covering An¡¯s fist. But even if he didn¡¯t see, he could feel the difference between An¡¯s fist and a normal one. An, at this time, breathed out and with a low grunt, sted his fist toward the rock. Boom! The rock cracked under An¡¯s fist and many pieces scattered away. Gon, who was intently watching, couldn¡¯t believe his eyes. Just one punch and the rock was destroyed. Is this the power of Nen? Chapter 8: Aura Chapter 8: Aura ¡°I¡¯m so strong already?¡± An was surprised by his own power. Just now, he expected to be able to deal some damage to the rock, but he didn¡¯t think that using Nen on his fist would result in such explosive power. At most, he thought he would crack the rock a little. An¡¯s power was beyond what he was expecting from himself, which made him happy. However, since he wasn¡¯t ustomed to Nen, that single blow was enough to consume a huge chunk of his Energy. Sighing, An looked at Gon and said: ¡°See that, that¡¯s how powerful Nen is.¡± An¡¯s voice was dripping with pride. Gon¡¯s face was full of admiration as he saw An smashing a rock with a punch. His eyes were filled with stars as he looked at An, filled expectation, and said: ¡°When can I learn to do that? I want to learn this quickly.¡± An replied calmly: ¡°It¡¯s not hard to learn this, but you won¡¯t get stronger overnight.¡± Gon didn¡¯t care: ¡°I know, but I still want to learn.¡± An patted his chest before he said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I will teach you.¡± Raising his head, An noticed the setting sun and decided to stop here for today: ¡°Let¡¯s go back today. We will continue tomorrow.¡± Although Gon was disappointed, he nodded obediently and walked home with An. After eating a simple meal, the two of them went to the vige looking for Mito. Mito had a bar on Whale Ind, and although it wasn¡¯t big, it was quite popr. There is nothing to do for entertainment on the ind, so a bar was the only ce to have fun and pass the time. Most fishermen who returned from the sea would gather in pairs of two or three and share a drink while talking about their day. Mito wasn¡¯t just the owner, but she was also the bartender, the workers, and everything in the bar. Basically, she worked there alone and did everything herself. Fortunately, Gon woulde and help her from time to time, which helped her rx a bit. After learning about this, An asked Mito if it was okay to help in the bar as a way to pay for his food and amodation. Mito agreed without hesitation. After all, she could use help around the bar. And furthermore, An was about 1.7 meters tall and quite handsome, which will make the bar popr withdies and mid-aged women. Every female customer would tease An a few times before she ordered a drink, and that became usual in the bar. An sighed. If these were beautiful women, he wouldn¡¯t care, but most of them are past their prime. They¡¯re in theirte thirties or forties with bodies full of muscles due to the odd jobs they were doing. An could only ask Mito to only cut fruits and do odd jobs at the bar while Gon served the drinks, which she agreed to. Even though the female customers were ¡®thirsty¡¯, they wouldn¡¯t make a move on Gon, who still didn¡¯t hit puberty. An wouldn¡¯t be able to bear staying here for too long, so he will wait till proficiency in Nen reached a certain level before leaving. At least he would be able to protect himself when he embarked on his journey. The next day, Gon started shaking An¡¯s body until he woke up. ¡°An, get up, you promised me that today you would teach me Nen.¡± ¡°Later.¡± An still wanted to sleep. He was training the past few days and stayedte at Mito¡¯s bar to help. He was awake until two or three o¡¯clock in the morning, so he wasn¡¯t really eager to get up early. But Gon was different. He was bustling with Energy. He saw An smash a rock with his bare hands and was very eager to learn Nen. Gon continued his shaking and urged: ¡°Don¡¯t go back to sleep, the sun is already high up in the sky.¡± An finally got up, reluctantly. After washing up and eating breakfast, Gon dragged him toward the forest. When they finally reached the training Area they chose yesterday, An said: ¡°To learn Nen, you must first open the Aura Nodes of your body, and there are two ways to do so. The first one is to open them naturally by meditating and feeling the Energy inside your body, but that could take a great amount of time, even for someone talented. The second one is relying on another Nen user to forcefully push his own Nen into your body, opening your Aura Nodes in the process, which was the fastest way to learn Nen. So which method do you chose?¡± Gon looked at Ana and said without hesitation: ¡°Of course, the sooner I learn Nen, the better.¡± ¡°So, the second method?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± An hoped that Gon would choose the first method as he did, but since he chose the second method, he didn¡¯t argue with him. ¡°Okay, I will push my Nen into your body to open every Aura Node in it and guide the energy out.¡± Gon nodded. An didn¡¯t forget to remind him: ¡°There is a certain risk in doing this. If the Energy fails to open your Aura Nodes, you may get hurt. You must also be prepared to control that Energy as soon as you feel it. Otherwise, if it rushes out of your body entirely, you may die.¡± Gon looked seriously at An and replied: ¡°I understand, let¡¯s start.¡± An immediately raised his hand and said: ¡°Gon, turn around, I will push the Nen into your back. This technique is called Hatsu.¡± Gon turned around obediently with his back now facing An. An lightly put his hand on Gon¡¯s back and pushed his Nen, using Hatsu into Gon¡¯s body through his palms. In an instant, Gon felt a violent air pushing him from his back and into his body, making him open his mouth unconsciously. In the next second, he was startled as he noticed the Energy from his body was leaking out with nothing stopping it. Seeing this, An sighed and smiled: ¡°Sess!¡± At the same time, a voice from the system rang in his ears. [Ding! You sessfully introduced Gon to the wonders of Nen. Reward: Advanced Nen Application.] Chapter 9: Challenge Chapter 9: Challenge In an instant, information about the advanced application of Nen filled An¡¯s head with each greatly detailed. The advanced application was just skill derived from the basic four ability, the Nen of the me, {Ten, Zetsu, Hatsu, and Ren}. These advanced skills are {Gyo, In, En, Ko, Shu, Ken, and Ryu}. For example, Shu is an advanced application of Ten, which allowed the user to shroud an object with his Aura strengthening it. An immediately picked up a rock from the ground and applied Shu to it and then threw it away. The stone moved through the air like a missile before hitting arge boulder with a loud boom. A meter-long crack appeared on the boulder as if it was struck by lightning. An frowned slightly and muttered: ¡°It¡¯s not broken.¡± He expected the boulder to crack in half, at least, as the Aura around it was enough to crush it if he was to use it on his fist. The power wasn¡¯t that great as the crack on the boulder can¡¯t be called big. He recalled everyst detail about Shu and what he did to the stone, and finally, he figured it out. The stone was covered by his Aura to increase its hardness, but the stone wasn¡¯t part of him, so once it left his hand, the Aura around it started dissipating, slowly till it hit the boulder. If he directly smashed the stone on the boulder, it would cause the reaction he was after. In order to verify his guess, An picked up a small stone as big as the previous one, and instead of throwing it after using Shu, he held it tightly with more than its half exposed. He moved toward a boulder and smashed it with the stone in his hand. The boulder couldn¡¯t take the impact and crumble down into countless pieces. An sighed in satisfaction as he figured out the correct way to use Shu. Gon, who witnessed all of this, opened his mouth wide that I could easily fit five eggs at least. He couldn¡¯t understand how a small stone could almost destroy a boulder. An turned his head and noticed Gon¡¯s expression and said with a little pride in his voice: ¡°Did you see that Gon? This is the magical ability called Nen. You should train really hard, and soon you will be able to do that as well.¡± ¡°Really?¡± ¡°Of course, did I lie to you before? You¡¯re my Ototo (Little brother), after all.¡± Gon nodded vigorously with a wide smile on his face. He just started training in Nen and wasn¡¯t good at it yet. But with An here to guide him, he would be able to advance quickly. Now that his Aura Nodes arepletely open, he can freely control his Aura. An wasn¡¯t idle after teaching Gon. He looked at the open space in front of him and started practicing the advanced Nen application he just learned. Although these new skills werepletely imprinted in his mind, An still needed to train to use them proficiently. An nned to master these skills as quickly as possible, and when he was sure he could survive, he would leave Whale ind. This ce is only suitable for practice or short-term vacation. It wouldn¡¯t do him any good to settle down here. He also understood the reason for Ging¡¯s departure. The Ind was boring. Life here was almost the same each day, without any excitement. This was unbearable to people with even a small ambition. He also understood why Gon wanted to go to Ging. It¡¯s not just to find his father, but it was also to see the world for himself. Just like that, a few months passed by, and each day, Gon and An practiced in the forest the entire day before they return to the town and Help Mito with the Bar. Although their days were ordinary, they were quite fulfilling as they felt the fruit of their training each day. Although Gon didn¡¯t advance really fast, his talent in Nen was top notch. Within a few months, he was already proficient in the basic skills of Nen. That was apparent, as now he was standing in front of a boulder as he used Ren to burst out with an astonishing amount of Aura, then he used Hatsu to punch the boulder. The boulder exploded in small stones, which showed how much power was behind that punch. An nodded in satisfaction aspared to a few months ago. Gon¡¯s progress was drastic, to say the least. As for his own training, it wasn¡¯t bad. Other than mastering the basics, he was quite good with the advanced Nen skills. Although the gap between his own skills and a top-notch master was still wide, it was only a matter of time before he closes that gap. ¡°The only thing I¡¯m missing now isbat experience.¡± or so were An¡¯s thoughts. Practicing all the time wouldn¡¯t help him advance much further, and if he wanted to get stronger, he would need to improve and leave Whale Ind. In the past few months, he was already quite ustomed to the lifestyle, and it will be hard for him to leave for now. Today both An and Gon arrived at their training ground in the forest like usual, and like An, Gon was no longer satisfied with the current training, so he looked at An and said: ¡°An, Let¡¯s fight.¡± An raised a brow and was about to answer, but suddenly, the voice of the system rang once again in his head after being absent for so long. [Please make a choice.] [1: ept Gon¡¯s challenge and beat him. Reward: Double your current Mental Power.] [2: Reject Gon¡¯s challenge and taunt him. Reward: Double your current physical strength.] The reward from the two choices had their advantage. Improving physical strength was equivalent to increasing power, reaction, speed, and so on. While doubling the Mental power means his current Aura will be doubled, and thus increasing his power greatly and making himst longer against his foes. An directly made his choice and agreed to Gon¡¯s challenge. The two immediately faced each other and took a stance before releasing their Aura at the same time. Chapter 10: Gon Chapter 10: Gon An raised his hand and said: ¡°Gon, you¡¯re my dear (stupid) little brother, I will let you attack first.¡± An was Gon¡¯s teacher, so it¡¯s expected for the former to be more proficient in Nen. Gon knew this all too well, but if he didn¡¯t ept a challenge, he wouldn¡¯t get stronger. Now An allowed him to make the first attack. Gon won¡¯t decline such an advantage. Stepping forward, Gon¡¯s feet cracked the ground as heunched himself toward An. An didn¡¯t evade Gon, who was trying to punch him. Instead, he covered his fist with Nen before meeting Gon¡¯s fist head-on. The two Nen covered fists collided, creating a small shock wave. Gon didn¡¯t relent. He directly started punching and kicking at An without any rest, which caused Gon¡¯s stamina to drop at a fast rate as he was using Nen. As he slowed down, An directly kicked him on the chest and sent him away like a cannonball. Gon got up after hitting the ground and asked: ¡°Can we fight again?¡± ¡°Yes, of course.¡± Gon Supported himself with one hand before standing up straight. During this time, An surely could take him down again, but he didn¡¯t do so. He didn¡¯t have any noble reason, but he felt it was unnecessary. Gon rubbed his chest as it still hurt slightly. Fortunately, his instincts helped hone his skill to follow the direction of the hit he was receiving, which reduced a great deal of damage. Otherwise, that kick he just got would render him unconscious without any doubt. An gestured for gone with a finger and said: ¡°Come!¡± Gon took a deep breath, clenched his fist, and suddenly, his Aura burst out astonishingly. Although he was still young, he was stubborn still and didn¡¯t ept defeat no matter what. Once again, Gonunched himself toward An like a wild animal as he started attacking. One punch, two kicks, three punches¡­ Bang! Bang! Bang! Gon attacked without stop while An blocked and evaded everything. Gon didn¡¯t manage tond a hit. An¡¯s Nen techniques were superior to Gon¡¯s as Gon only knew those basics of the Nen of me. He has only a small chance to hit An as he was currently. A rule is known throughout the world, the greater the difference in power, the smaller the chance of winning the weaker party had. That rule applied to Nen users as well. An wasn¡¯t in a hurry to win, after all, except for Gon, he didn¡¯t have any sparring partner in the ind. Although Gon only learned the Nen¡¯s basics, he had good physical power and fitness, and too much will power. An himself knew that his own will power and strength couldn¡¯tpare to Gon¡¯s. His advantage was his knowledge of Gon¡¯s fighting style and also his superior skills in Nen. After struggling for a while, Gon finally seeded innding a hit on An¡¯s face. With a tone full of surprise, Gon said: ¡°I really managed tond a hit.¡± His face was almost splitting from smiling too widely. But then he was stunned. He saw that An almost didn¡¯t feel his punch and was shocked when he heard An say: ¡°It hurts a little bit.¡± ¡°How can this¡­¡± Gon immediately received a heavy punch, and then he was kicked by An. After a while, Gon got up and felt a little embarrassed about his defeat. ¡°Can you still fight?¡± An asked with a rxed stance. Whether it was the technique or amount of Nen, he was currently stronger than Gon. So, no matter how much Gon wanted to fight, he was fine with it. He wanted just to convince Gon, who was obviously a stone-headed kid that wasn¡¯t easily convinced. His stubbornness was probably something he inherited from his father. Now, Gon wasn¡¯t just unconvinced, but he was also puzzled. A few months ago, when he asked An to teach him Nen, he clearly remembered that An said he didn¡¯t start training in Nen for too long. He thought that since there wasn¡¯t such a huge gap in time from when both started Nen, he could catch up to him. But after the spar just now, he could tell that he wasn¡¯t An¡¯s opponent, and that¡¯s the source of his doubt and confusion. Am I stupid? Maybe I don¡¯t have talent? Or did I not work hard enough? Gon was starting to doubt himself. An saw him muttering without hearing what he said and could only walk over and ask: ¡°What are you doing?¡± Gon raised his head and asked: ¡°An, be honest with me. How long have you been practicing Nen?¡± ¡°Longer than you have,¡± An replied calmly. Gon didn¡¯t notice the guilt An hid within his tone and asked again: ¡°How much longer?¡± ¡°Two or three years.¡± An made up a time casually because he knew that Gon wouldn¡¯t let it go. If the time he chose was below that, Gon would still doubt himself. ¡°Where did you learn it?¡± An shrugged and replied: ¡°Of course it¡¯s my home, the Kingdom of basta.¡± Gon scratched his head as he remembered An¡¯s ¡®identity¡¯ and said: ¡°Yes, you¡¯re a prince. You probably had a teacher training you in Nen.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± An wanted tough as he wondered if the system can be considered his teacher. ¡°That¡¯s why you¡¯re so powerful.¡± Gon Said. ¡°I¡¯m not that good.¡± An replied humbly.¡± ¡°It¡¯s still better than I am.¡± Gon sighed. ¡°That¡¯s true.¡± An didn¡¯t deny the truth. Although Gon¡¯s doubts mostly vanished, after all, An practiced Nen for two or three years, so it was normal for him to lose. When ites to practice, he had to call An his Sensei (teacher). But he didn¡¯t know why, he just didn¡¯t want to admit defeat so easily, so he still raised his head and said with great intensity: ¡°An, let¡¯s fight again.¡± Chapter 11: Gon’s defeat Chapter 11: Gon¡¯s defeat An looked at the sky, and seeing it was still early, he looked at Gon and nodded: ¡°No problem.¡± For him, sparring with Gon will help him gain experience. But the point of all of this is to make Gon admit defeat or else the challenges won¡¯t end. Gon quickly rushed forward and raised his fist toward An¡¯s face. An didn¡¯t underestimate that punch. After all, Gon learned Nen, and that seemingly normal punch can kill an ordinary man easily. Gon was already able to destroy rocks with his bare hands, which is more than enough for An to not underestimate him. An wrapped his hand in Nen and stretched it out to catch Gon¡¯s fist. As soon as Gon¡¯s fist touched An¡¯s hand, he immediately changed his tactics andshed out with a high kick. An quickly moved his head back as he felt the kick almost touch his chin. Gon¡¯s high kick failed, but he didn¡¯t give up. Instead, heunched himself up and dropped his leg with an axe kick toward An¡¯s chest. An quickly grabbed Gon¡¯s right ankle with one hand, then stepped back and grabbed Gon¡¯s left ankle with his other hand. With most of his strength, An pulled Gon¡¯s legs and directly tossed him far away. Gon flew away with great speed, andnding on his feet was difficult. Fortunately, Gon¡¯s instinct kicked in as he pushed his hands on the ground and backflipped, and finally, hended on his feet far away. Gon left behind two small hand imprints on the ground from the power of hisst push showing how strong An¡¯s toss was. ¡°Oh?¡± An was a little surprised by Gon¡¯s reaction speed and thinking. Gon gasped for breath before calming down and once again rushed toward An. Once again, An blocked each of Gon¡¯s attacks before kicking him away. Gon supported himself as he slowly rose from the ground after being kicked, and despite knowing he didn¡¯t stand a chance, his expression showed reluctance. An knew that if he continues like this, Gon would just keep on standing with great perseverance. He rolled his eyes and deliberately said: ¡°Should I let you rest?¡± Gon shook his head and said seriously: ¡°Don¡¯t look down on me.¡± An exined: ¡°I¡¯m not looking down on you. You should understand your own power better than I do. You don¡¯t stand a chance against me as you are now.¡± ¡°I¡¯m getting stronger.¡± ¡°What?!¡± Gon¡¯s words startled An greatly. Gon exined: ¡°If I¡¯m beaten by you once, I will be stronger, and if you beat me ten times, I will get even stronger. As long as I keep fighting, one day, I will surpass you.¡± An was stunned. Can that really happen? An saw Gon¡¯s serious expression and knew that he wasn¡¯t joking. This guy thinks that he can beat him if he keeps fighting. Everyone would know that Gon¡¯s not the only one getting stronger when they fight. Gon was thinking like a na?ve child again. He thinks that he was the only one improving. ¡®Well, it seems like I need to be the one wake him up to reality.¡¯ An thought. Besides, it¡¯s enough training for today. An looked at Gon and gestured for him toe at him: ¡°Then, you can try again.¡± Gon rushed immediately, the same move, without anything added other than power. But there is another difference this time, Gon¡¯s fist connected with An¡¯s face without any resistance. Bang! Bang! Bang! Gones to his senses after punching An ten times quickly. The dull sound of his fist hitting An made him startled. Seeing that An didn¡¯t avoid or attack him, Gon got slightly angry as he yelled: ¡°Why aren¡¯t you fighting back?¡± An sneered and said confidently: ¡°Even if I stand still, you won¡¯t be able to beat me.¡± ¡°That¡¯s not possible.¡± Gon couldn¡¯t ept that. ¡°Then you can try again,¡± An said, full of confidence. Gon consumed a lot of his power with thest punches, and only one third remained. The reason why An didn¡¯t fight back was simple. It was to make Gon frustrated and beat the over-confidence out of him. It¡¯s clear that he wanted to beat An, but he still had a long way to go. Gon hesitated for a while before once again threw a punch after another at An. The Punches hit An¡¯s chest with a dull sound, but it was clear that he can¡¯t damage him at all. Gon felt An¡¯s Aura block every attack without any difficulty, and after the tenth punch, Gon grew tired. He finally sighed, scratched his head, and said: ¡°I give up.¡± An was waiting for this sentence and smiled: ¡°It¡¯s not easy to make you give up Gon.¡± Gon then asked: ¡°An, did you do something when I was punching you?¡± Gon wondered as he knew that if An allowed each punch tond, he should have confidence that he won¡¯t be harmed. He also knew that An did so to make him give up. An said: ¡°Of course.¡± ¡°Really?¡± Gon was curious about what made his punches ineffective. An directly exined: ¡°Because I was using Ken, and you attacked me with Hatsu, which isn¡¯t enough to prate my defense.¡± ¡°Ken?¡± Gon was taken aback: ¡°What is Ken?¡± ¡°That is one of the advanced Nen applications. It¡¯s abination between Ren and Ten.¡± An exined. Ken is a primarily defensive technique where a Nen user maintains a state of Ren for a prolonged amount of time. The amount of aura surrounding the user¡¯s body during Ken is about 10 times higher than during Ten. Ken allows a Nen user to guard against attacks from any direction, but therge amount of aura produced makes it tiring to maintain. Gon heard this, and although he didn¡¯t understand itpletely, he knew it was strong: ¡°Sensei (teacher), I want to learn it.¡± Gon asked without hesitation, and with An¡¯s rtionship with Gon, he couldn¡¯t refuse. ¡°Okay, if you can knock me down in half a year¡¯s time, I will teach you the advanced application of Nen. It¡¯s not just Ken, as there are other techniques as well.¡± Gon happily agreed: ¡°No problem, I will defeat you in half a year.¡± An smiled and said: ¡°I¡¯m doing this for your own benefits. It¡¯s not suitable for you to learn the advanced techniques yet. You should fully master the Nen of the mepletely. Only when you do that can you start learning the advanced techniques.¡± Gon nodded obediently. Although he was young, he understood that An was doing this for his own good. You don¡¯t learn to run before you can walk. It¡¯s a step by step process. An looked at Gon and wished that he can have the same persistence thetter had. An didn¡¯t take as much as Gon to master the Nen of the me mainly because he had the System, which transferred the knowledge directly into his mind. It was equivalent to mastering everything theoretically, leaving him only to learn how to apply that theory afterward. At this moment, the System¡¯s voice invaded An¡¯s thought process. [Ding! You have defeated Gon. Reward: Double your current Mental Power.] In an instant, An squeezed his fist as he felt all the power he used before return to his body and then doubled. He smiled as he thought: ¡®it¡¯s not that hard to be strong, is it?¡¯ Chapter 12: Water Divination Chapter 12: Water Divination Some time passed, Half a year exactly. After thest fight, An and Gon constantly sparred in the forest. They could be found sparring fiercely even now. Boom! Explosions filled the ce from time to time as the two of them got even stronger, and thest one was due to An¡¯s kick that sent Gon flying. Even though Gon seemed tattered, his determination never faltered and diminished in the slightest. ¡°Enough, for now, Gon.¡± An raised his hand to stop the spar. In the past six months, Gon¡¯s growth was astonishing, to say the least. But An grew at the same rate as well. His talent wasn¡¯t bad. Both of them had the potential to be top-notch Nen users. An constantly trained himself with that thought in mind. An¡¯s Nen¡¯s reserves skyrocketed. In terms of Nen reserve, An¡¯s was at least three times Gon¡¯s Nen. At this time, Gon sighed and said: ¡°I still can¡¯t beat you.¡± An encouraged Gon: ¡°Nheless, you are way stronger than half a year ago.¡± Gon himself could tell how much stronger he was after training for half a year. He was also close to mastering the Nen of the me. ¡°Although you still can¡¯t beat me, you are now ready to start learning the advanced application of Nen. I will start teaching you tomorrow.¡± Hearing this, Gon smiled widely, but then he declines: ¡°I¡¯m happy to get that opportunity, but you can teach me another time.¡± ¡°Why?¡± ¡°January 7th is the day when the Hunter Exam begins. Now there is more than a month before that, and I need to catch the Master of the Swamp before I can leave.¡± An nodded, knowing that Mito won¡¯t let Gon leave. He didn¡¯t catch the Master of the swamp: ¡°If that¡¯s the case, I will teach youter. During this time, you can go and start fishing peacefully.¡± ¡°Ok.¡± Gon said before he left with his fishing rod looking very optimistic. An stayed behind and continued his training. After mastering the Nen techniques, he could now further develop his Nen. An now had the reward from his system, which was the special ability, Grim¡¯s Hand, which can reap the luck of others. He didn¡¯t use this ability before, not even once. But what he didn¡¯t expect was actually forming a real friendship with Gon during his stay here. An wasn¡¯t a selfish person. He didn¡¯t want to be one as well, so he didn¡¯t use that ability on Gon even though he considered doing so at first. If Gon¡¯s luck was reaped by An, he wouldn¡¯t be able to catch the Master of the swamp, and he won¡¯t be participating in the Hunter Exam as a result. In addition to this ability, An wanted to develop his own ability. Before doing so, he first needs to check his specialty. Nen was divided into six categories, Enhancement, Transmutation, Emission, Conjuration, Maniption, and Specialization. There were two ways to know what your Nen type was. An brought a ss of water and put a leaf on top of it. He will be using Water Divination, which was very simple. You just had to surround the ss of water that has a leaf floating atop of the water with both hands and channel your Nen toward the ss. ording to the change in the water, you can distinguish which type you are. If the volume of the water changes, then the user is an Enhancer. If the taste of the water changes, then the user is a Transmuter. If impurities appear in the water, then the user is a Conjurer. If the color of the water changes, then the user is an Emitter. If the leaf moves on the water¡¯s surface, then the user is a Maniptor. If apletely different change appears, then the user is a Specialist. After preparing everything, An ced his hands beside it and channeled his Nen. As his Nen poured toward the ss, nothing changed in any way. The volume of the water didn¡¯t change, which meant he wasn¡¯t an enhancer. The color didn¡¯t change, which meant he wasn¡¯t an Emitter¡­ An excluded four types already. An almost guessed what type of Nen he had. He immediately stretched his finger and dipped into the water before putting it in his mouth. Sweet! The water¡¯s taste was sweat. This change showed that An was a Transmuter. An already guessed this, so no surprise was shown on his face. This didn¡¯t change anything to An. It only showed him the path to his future development. The Transmutation was a rtively wide-ranged Nen typepared to other ones. A transmuter can change the shape and nature of his Nen. Just as An was thinking about his options, the system interrupted him like always and presented six choices from which he had to pick. [Ding! Please make your choice!] [1: Change your Nen nature into Lightning: Reward: Double the Nen¡¯s Nature Change.] [2: Change your Nen nature into Rubber: Reward: Double the Nen¡¯s Nature Change.] [3: Change your Nen nature into Fire: Reward: Double the Nen¡¯s Nature Change.] [4: Change your Nen nature into Ice: Reward: Double the Nen¡¯s Nature Change.] [5: Change your Nen nature into Light: Reward: Double the Nen¡¯s Nature Change.] [6: Change your Nen nature into Barrier: Reward: Double the Nen¡¯s Nature Change.] Chapter 13: Abilities and Paths Chapter 13: Abilities and Paths An was stunned by the number of choices, but looking closely, he noticed that each reward was the same. The difference lies in the element he would train that each granted different developing direction. An scratched his head as he couldn¡¯t pick one of the choices over the others. Fortunately, there was no time limit for him to choose from, so he didn¡¯t have to worry about time. He immediately sat cross-legged on the ground and started thinking. In the Show, he remembered four famous characters with Transmutation ability, which were Killua, Hisoka, Feitan Portor, and Machi Komacine, with thest two belonging to the Phantom Brigade. The four of them were Transmuters, but each had a different ability. For example, Killua could change his Aura into an Electric current, which granted him the ability to efficiently kill and paralyze his enemies. He takes advantage of the characteristics of electricity to increase his power and speed as well. Although he only uses ordinary electric current, it was the closest to lightning. If An wanted to develop toward that direction, he would need to shock himself with electricity constantly to build immunity and get a feel for its nature. And that¡¯s without mention the word ¡®lightning,¡¯ the system said, which means he would have to face lightning, not just Electric current. Because the transmuters¡¯ training method is one of the hardest, if the transmuter wanted to change the property of his Nen, he needs to be familiar with that element or object, so the change can ur. In the show, Killua mentioned on many asions that he received the worst torture from his family, and being electrified was one of the methods of torture, which was the reason he could develop his ability. (T/N: Btw, Nen and Aura are basically the same. That¡¯s why you find me changing from one to another.) Hisoka could change his Aura into Chewing Gum, which means he often ate chewing Gum when he was young that it allowed him to be very familiar with its nature and properties. An first thought was to eliminate lightning from the options. And his reason was simple, his body wasn¡¯t trained like Killua, and even a normal electric current would be too much for him to handle currently. Chewing Gum is the rubber ability without the ability to stick to other surfaces because Chewing gum contains rubber. An didn¡¯t like to have the same ability as others, and he didn¡¯t particrly like Chewing Gum or Rubber, so he gave up on them as well. The remaining were Fire, Light, Ice, and Barrier. From these four, the Fire can be directly eliminated. Like lightning, he didn¡¯t want to burn himself with Fire. An was not familiar with the Light, and he knew that he needed a strong source of Light nearby, likezes, sh bombs, and so on, to understand Light enough. If he can learn it, it will be just a BUG ability in this world, at least in speed, so he didn¡¯t banish this choice yet. When it came to the Barrier, An¡¯s only thought was to turn his Aura into a ss-like substance, and this ability seemed more like a defensive one, so he wasn¡¯t interested in it and directly ruled it out. The only one remaining was Ice, and after thinking deeply about it, No one in Hunter X Hunter world learned it. Changing the Aura properties into the properties of Ice is a novel idea and had a lot of room for development. When it was strong enough, he may even freeze his enemies into ice sculptures. It was fun just thinking about it. An finally chose his future path. He chose to get the Ice nature change. Only after choosing a goal can you move forward in life after all. [Ding! You chose to change your Aura properties into Ice. Reward: the Nen¡¯s nature change has been Double!] An tried to feel the change in his body, but unfortunately, he felt nothing at all. But now wasn¡¯t the time to think about this, he needs to start training as a Transmuter, and the first step is Nen Numbers. It¡¯s the most basic training for Transmuters, which require them to form numbers from 1 to 9 with Nen above their fingers. If they can finish going from 1 to 9 in 5 seconds, then it means the first level is mastered. With An¡¯s current ability, it was a piece of cake because he already Mastered Nen very well. An stretched his index finger directly and controlled his Nen to form the numbers in less than five seconds, and he seeded. As he finished with the first level, An directly started practicing the next level, which is forming moreplex forms with Nen, like creating a stone or a dagger with Nen. These were not that difficult for the current An, so he easily finished them as well. As there is no problem now with the change of form, he can now try training in the change of Nature. The so-called Nature can also be called a trait., which represents the properties of the element, or in this case, Ice. Nen didn¡¯t have a trait by itself, so what An had to do is add that trait himself. His goal was to add the Ice element to his Nen, and Ice was abination of Water and Wind (T/N: Naruto¡¯s Yuki n? Haku?) Chapter 14: Ice Chapter 14: Ice An stood and walked toward the depth of the forest. After climbing a mountain, he reached a waterfall. An made his mind to start training in the water aspect of ¡®Ice¡¯. The Water fell straight down to the mountainside, which created a breathtaking sight. An took off his shirt, revealing his well-trained body. After training for so long, An¡¯s figure changed greatly as his muscles were chiseled like a masterpiece. He jumped down to the waterfall¡¯s center into a smooth rock while the Water from the waterfall pushed him down. To understand Water¡¯s characteristics, He needed a direct and personal experience with it, and this was the most effective way he can think about. As he sat down on the Rock, An activated his Nen, using Ten to cover his entire body, which will help him greatly as this process didn¡¯t just involve his body experiencing Water, but even his Nen had to experience it. One day, two days, three days¡­ On the ninth day, An stood up and jumped out of the waterfall. After days of being under the waterfall, An was sure that he knew the water characteristics as he experienced firsthand. It¡¯s an experience that can¡¯t be described with words as it was just something he could feel with his heart. The characteristics of Water are already imprinted in his mind and body. An left the waterfall and started climbing the highest mountain on the ind. On that same mountain, a huge tree stood straight, almost reaching the skies. After jumping a few times, An stood on top of the tree. This was his way in training in Wind, because the top of the mountain contains the strongest Wind he can think of, An can get the experience he wanted here. An once again used Ten to cover his entire body with Nen as he started feeling the Wind. He opened his arms and let his entire body get the experience he needed, and in the same way, nine dayster, An had what he needed. His understanding of Wind rivaled his understanding of Water. With persistence, An was currently familiar with the two attributes he needed to form his Nen¡¯s trait. Thest step was to understand the Coldness of Ice. An left the mountain toward Mito¡¯s bar on the ind. The bar was yet to open as Mito was making preparation. Seeing Aning over, Mito asked in confusion: ¡°An, where were you thest few days?¡± An briefly exined what he was doing. Hearing that he stood under a waterfall for nine days straight before going on top of a mountain and standing in the Wind for another nine days made Mito think he was crazy and was d he didn¡¯t catch a cold. An briefly informed Mito of his purpose, and although she didn¡¯t understand what he meant, she knew that it was important to An. After hearing his reasons foring here, Mito was concerned and asked: ¡°Are you sure you want to use the freezer for training?¡± An nodded: ¡°Yeah, I want to experience being Frozen.¡± Mito suddenly put a hand on An¡¯s forehead and was confused: ¡°Strange. You don¡¯t have a fever.¡± An was speechless. Mito was treating him as if he was crazy. Well, he was crazy, as normal people won¡¯t entertain the thought of being frozen. In fact, he didn¡¯t want to do this himself, but there was no snow on the ind, and the only way for him to understand the Coldness of Ice is to experience it in the freezer. But the freezer had more advantages as well because he won¡¯t just experience the Coldness, but he can even experience what it was like to be frozen. Mito was still puzzled, but An directly said: ¡°Just let me borrow it.¡± Mito finally epted after seeing his determination: ¡°Well, you can use it.¡± An directly chose a vertical freezer and took everything that was inside it, and removed them with their shelf. After cleaning it up, he put the freezer down, plugged it in power, and adjusted the temperature before going in and closing the door. To understand the Ice attribute, there is nothing better than lying down inside a freezer. But from another perspective, it seemed like he was lying in an Ice coffin, which was creepy. Anid down inside the freezer and started using Ten. An felt like he was in a world of Ice as the Coldness invaded his body. Less than an hourter, An was trembling from the cold. The Coldness passed through his Nen and into his chest without any resistance. His consciousness started fading as he started freezing. At this time, Mito pulled the door of the freezer open and pulled An out. As soon as she touched An¡¯s body, she felt Coldness coursing through her body and quickly retracted her hand. Looking at An again, she saw frost already forming on An¡¯s eyshes. His whole body was releasing a freezing cold air, and even his breaths were cold. ¡®What a lunatic,¡¯ thought Mito while feeling very worried. She was a woman, and she couldn¡¯t understand how men thought, the same way men couldn¡¯t understand a woman¡¯s thoughts. An quickly regained consciousness and rubbed his hands together in an attempt to warm himself a little. Fortunately, his body was strong, and he could hold on a little longer. If he was an ordinary person, he wouldn¡¯t be able to actually stand such pain. Even if he was stronger than ordinary people, if he stayed inside the freezer for a little bit longer, he might¡¯ve died. He lost consciousness, and if Mito didn¡¯t intervene in time, he would be an ice sculpture by tomorrow. Mito didn¡¯t say a word as she hurriedly took An and put him inside a hot bath. As An soaked in the bathtub, the Water¡¯s temperature dropped suddenly, and finally, Ice started forming on top of it. Meanwhile, An still didn¡¯t notice anything. After a while, Mito walked in and saw An soaked in the bathtub while sleeping, and couldn¡¯t help shaking her head. As she put a hand in the water to feel the temperature, she quickly retracted it. She was shocked by the cold water that started to freeze. Mito immediately woke An up. As he looked at the Water, he felt strange as he could¡¯ve sworn that he fell asleep in a bathtub filled with hot water. He didn¡¯t realize that the Nen he released, whether intentionally or not, contained an Ice-cold property. He thought the Water be cold due to his body being so cold that it cooled the Water down. Mito once again filled the bathtub with hot water and asked him to hop in. As An did so, the Water once again grew colder, and a few minutester, Ice-covered its surface. Chapter 15: Icicle Chapter 15: Icicle An was surprised as he saw the water turn colder by the second and Ice forming out of nowhere and eximed: ¡°I did it?!¡± An was taken aback and directly grabbed another bucket of water and used Nen this time. As soon as his Aura touched the water, its temperature dropped sharply before finally turning into Ice. ¡°It seems that the System did indeed doubled my Nature Change. Otherwise, I wouldn¡¯t be able to freeze all the water at once so quickly.¡± An felt the coldness released from his Aura, and everything he touches with it will turn into Ice. ¡°I need to try this.¡± An immediately started using his Nen. A Frost white Energy erupted from his hand, and in a blink of an eye, a crystal-like Icicle floated above his hand. He was trying to make a sharp Icicle, and it really seeded. ¡°I need to know how strong this is.¡± An directly went to the clearing behind the warehouse and shed a rock using the Icicle. The Icicle shattered while the rock split in half. The power is there, but the hardness was not enough. An wasn¡¯t disappointed at all. Instead, he started making another Icicle. This time, he hit a boulder and split it in half while the Icicle was intact with not even a sign of damage. An beamed with joy. By wrapping the Icicle with Nen using Shu, its offense and defense skyrocketed. An was really excited as he continued to test his new ability. He squatted down with one palm touching the ground and channeled his Nen. A st of cold air swept out of his hand, directly covering the ground in Ice with him in the center. Therger the Area was, the more Nen he consumed. But seeing such results, An couldn¡¯t hide his joy. An returned to the bar and quickly thanked Mito for saving his life. Without her Freezer, he would still be struggling with understanding Ice, and if she didn¡¯t get him out of it, he would¡¯ve turned into an Ice Sculpture by now. Mito still couldn¡¯t understand and asked: ¡°Why are you thanking me for no reason?¡± An smiled and said: ¡°I will show you a magic trick.¡± ¡°Magic?¡± Mito was a little confused, but she was eager to see this Magic as no one ever performed in front of her before. An brought an empty ss and filled it with Wine. He held the cup with his right hand and used his Aura. Suddenly, the Wine inside the cup froze in an instant. Mito opened her mouth wide. This is the first time she saw such a magical scene in her life: ¡°Is this Magic? It¡¯s amazing. How did you freeze the Wine? Did you change it when I wasn¡¯t paying attention?¡± An shook his head and said: ¡°Neither.¡± ¡°How did you do it then?¡± She seemed to have the same strong curiosity Gon had. An smiled: ¡°I used Nen.¡± ¡°Nen?¡± Mito didn¡¯t understand what Nen meant. She knew that An trained in Nen because he did exin that, but she didn¡¯t know what it was exactly. An nodded. In this world, as long as you learn Nen, anything should be possible. Mito suddenly eximed: ¡°I want to learn it too.¡± An was taken aback. She looked at An with her Amber eyes and asked: ¡°An, can you teach me?¡± An didn¡¯t know what to say, but as always, the System made its appearance. {Ding! Please Choose.] [1: Promise Mito and sessfully teach her Nen. Reward: Double the Nen¡¯s Nature Change.] [2: Reject Mito and ignore her request. Reward: Double the Aura Shape change mastery.] An just drank the frozen Wine ss without making a choice. Doubling the Aura Shape change meant he would be able to form manyplicated shapes with his Nen. Double the Change in nature was just the same reward he got previously. The Nature Change would increase the power and efficiency of his Ice attribute, making him much stronger. Between the two, An was more inclined toward the first Choice. Mito saw that An was deep in thought and felt a little frustrated: ¡°I¡¯m sorry.¡± Seeing her like this made An want to tease her: ¡°I can teach you Nen, but I won¡¯t be easy.¡± Mito was a smart woman, and upon hearing An¡¯s words, she knew that he wanted something, so she hurried said: ¡°I will agree with anything.¡± An raised his brows and said: ¡°Really?¡± Mito nodded her head and said: ¡°Well, as long as you teach me, Nen, I will agree to anything you want.¡± She thought that since An will teach her, he wouldn¡¯t ask for something impossible. An looked at her and suddenly became serious: ¡°You know, there is a saying that goes like this, behind every strong man, there is a woman who supported him.¡± ¡°What do you mean?¡± Mito asked in confusion. An pointed at her and said: ¡°It¡¯s very simple, really, you will be my woman.¡± ¡°What?¡± Mito was startled and blushed like crazy. An didn¡¯t speak and only looked at Mito. Mito was blushing even more as her heartbeats increased. She looked at him and said: ¡°You¡­ What are you talking about? Don¡¯t you know that I¡¯m a lot older than you?¡± ¡°It¡¯s only a few years.¡± An didn¡¯t mind. ¡°That¡¯s still too old for you.¡± Mito seemed to mind the age difference, but she didn¡¯t reject An. She didn¡¯t even think that she was worthy of being with An, who was still a teenager. An disagreed: ¡°Age doesn¡¯t matter if love exists.¡± Mito was speechless for a while. She never considered this before Even when she grew up, she¡¯s never been in love with a boy, let alone hold hand with one or anything for that matter. It¡¯s clear that she reached the age of marriage a long time ago, but she never found a suitable person. In fact, she often felt lonely, hoping to find someone to rely on, but no one on the ind met her standards, and she often thought that her standards were a little too high. As she took a quick nce at An, she inexplicably found herself blushing further. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 51 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these 10 chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 16: Allan-Sensei Chapter 16: An-Sensei Fearing An noticing her nces, Mito quickly withdrew her gaze as she felt guilty of even entertaining such thoughts. But she confirmed one thing, this boy, no, this young man is up to her standards. If she was to end up with him, it wouldn¡¯t be a bad thing. After mustering up her courage, she looked at An to give him an answer, but before she could talk, An patted her shoulder and said: ¡°Okay, Okay, I¡¯m kidding, don¡¯t get so nervous.¡± ¡°Eh? Kidding?¡± Mito was taken aback and looked at An dumbfoundedly. For a while, Mito tried to sort out herplicated feeling as she was obviously ready to agree to his request, but he went and said that he was kidding. What is this? Is it fun ying with my feelings? Mito bit her teeth and red at An fiercely. An avoided her gaze as he didn¡¯t in his wildest dreams think that Mito would look at him so favorably. He only thought that she red at him because of his joke. ¡°Well, I shouldn¡¯t have made such a joke. I promise I will teach you Nen to make it up for you.¡± Mito was still unhappy. She felt that it didn¡¯t matter whether she learned Nen or not because she was currently too mad at him. With her strong character and stubbornness, she wasn¡¯t willing to let it go. After making up her mind, she decided to train hard and let the boy notice her charm as a woman. Mito directly said: ¡°Than teach me as fast as you can.¡± Seeing that she was no longer angry, An took her to the forest, where he usually practiced. The ce was a bit away from the vige, about three or four Kilometers away from the vige. When they reached the forest, An didn¡¯t speak, and this got in Mito¡¯s nerves, so she asked: ¡°Now, what are we going to do?¡± ¡°What should you do? Mm, let me think for a bit.¡± An pretended to be deep in thoughts before he yfully said: ¡°I think you should, first of all, call me Sensei.¡± ¡°What?¡± Mito thought she misheard him and asked: ¡°You want me to call you Sensei? Why?¡± ¡°If you ask me to teach you, then you should call me Sensei, right?¡± Mito was speechless. This wasn¡¯t excessive, but she really couldn¡¯t say it. ¡°S-S¡­ Sensei.¡± Finally, she stuttered and was red from shyness before she could say it. ¡°No, that not right.¡± An corrected her: ¡°You should call me, An-Sensei.¡± Mito blushed even harder. She knew that An was doing this on purpose, but she couldn¡¯t do anything. ¡°You¡­¡± After she tried to retort, she swallowed it away and said while struggling: ¡°A¡­ A¡­ An¡­ An-Sensei.¡± Hearing her saying ¡®An-Sensei¡¯ made him feel very happy. Mito saw his enjoyment and couldn¡¯t help saying: ¡°An, I¡¯m older than you, shouldn¡¯t you be kind to your elders.¡± ¡°Of course.¡± An nodded. He can live here thanks to Mito, and he knows that he should treat her kindly. Mito finally sighed in relief. But again, An did let her go: ¡°But this and that are two different matters! I¡¯m now your teacher, so since you are the student, it normal for you to call me Sensei, right?¡± Mito felt that his words were reasonable, but calling him Sensei was one thing, but adding An to that made her too embarrassed. ¡°Hai, An-Sensei, please teach me Nen! I will be obedient.¡± In the end, she surrendered. A victory smile appeared on An¡¯s lips. He felt aplished, as if he just conquered this woman. Mito blushed and lowered her head without daring to look at An in his eyes. ¡°Then, let me first teach you the Theoretical knowledge about Nen before we start anything else.¡± Mito listened carefully as the boy started teaching her. She was determined to train hard and prove to the boy that she wasn¡¯t an ordinary woman. An was also teaching her seriously. Mito was gifted in Nen the same way Gon and Ging were, and this was probably because they had The Freecss family blood in their veins. Rumors said that the Freecss had an ancestor called Don Freecss 300 years ago, who was a very powerful character. (T/N: Don Freecss is supposedly the Ancestor of Gon, who was the one to write the Journey to the new world, which was a book about the dark continent, but this isn¡¯t confirmed yet in the Manga.) And Mito was different from Gon. She wasn¡¯t dumb, so she quickly understands what Nen was after just his first exnation. And with her understanding of what Nen is, she can start training in it. Like with Gon, An gave Mito a choice to choose if she wanted to learn Nen gradually with Meditation or use the same method as Gon and forcefully open her Aura Nodes. Mito¡¯s choice was the first one. Three days passed like this, and on the fourth day, Mito sessfully opened her Aura Nodes by relying on herself. An used Gyo, only to see Mito¡¯s body Exuding a great amount of Nen. Mito felt the energy coursing through her body and was happy with her achievement. ¡°Congrattions, you sessfully took your first step in learning to use Nen.¡± An¡¯s words were sincere, as he really felt happy for her. She only took three days, which was indeed an aplishment. ¡°So this is what Nen is like. It¡¯s really amazing.¡± Feeling the amazing energy moving through her body, Mito raised her head and said gratefully: ¡°An, Thank you.¡± ¡°No, these aren¡¯t the right words to say.¡± An shook his head directly. Mito blushed and immediately corrected herself and said in a low voice: ¡°Thank you, An Sensei!¡± ¡°You¡¯re wee,¡± An said happily. ¡°Next, I will teach you the basic skills of Nen, so you need to train hard to master them.¡± ¡°I will train hard,¡± Mito answered seriously. She felt that a new world was about to open in front of her because of this boy. While An smiled, looking at the serious Mito who can be a first-ss Nen user in the future. And he can proudly say at that time: ¡°Do you know her? She is my student.¡± As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 51 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these 10 chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 17: Moon Walk! Chapter 17: Moon Walk! Half a monthter, with An¡¯s guidance, Mito could use the basics of the Nen of the me. She was as good as Gon or slightly better in terms of progress. An looked at her with admiration. Originally, he thought that she was just an ordinary beautiful woman, but he didn¡¯t expect her talent to be not only good but maybe even better than Gon. ¡°An, thanks for your guidance in the past half a month.¡± Mito looked at him with sincerity. She was just an ordinary woman, but now, she had realized how magical Nen was. Nen can easily make her stronger. Now, she won¡¯t have trouble fighting a few big guys alone. An smiled mysteriously as Mito thanked him and replied: ¡°It wasn¡¯t hard at all. This is what I should do.¡± An was already rewarded by the System as he taught Mito, and now, his Ice was even stronger than before. It meant that his ability to make Ice is now even stronger than it was previously. Mito didn¡¯t know what An was thinking, but she looked at him and blushed again: ¡°Well, you don¡¯t need to be polite now, I did promise you anything if you teach me, so I have to keep my end of the deal.¡± ¡°Well, in that case, let me think for a bit.¡± An thought for a while, making Mito nervous. ¡°Have you decided?¡± Mito asked, and without knowing why she was slightly nervous about his request. An nced up and down, sizing Mito up deliberately, and said: ¡°Well, Generally speaking, there are two ways to thank me.¡± ¡°Which are?¡± ¡°The first one is a verbal thanks, which is almost meaningless.¡± ¡°What about the other one?¡± An looked at Mito and said: ¡°Well, it¡¯s simple. You will have to agree to the previous matter.¡± Mito Blushed with a puff of smoke above her head. An couldn¡¯t contain himself any longer and burst outughing: ¡°Haha, just kidding. I¡¯m not a scum who would take advantage of others like that.¡± Mito immediately looked at An fiercely. This wasn¡¯t his first time teasing her, after all. There is nothing to do on the ind except for training, and he got happy each time he teased Mito and seeing her blush. Fortunately for him, Mito wasn¡¯t angry. She suddenly remembered something and became seriously: ¡°By the way, An, can I ask you to do me a favor?¡± ¡°Okay.¡± An said readily: ¡°What is it?¡± Mito hesitated for a moment before she said: ¡°An, can I ask you to go with Gon to the Hunter Exam?¡± ¡°Why?¡± An was taken aback. To be honest, he wasn¡¯t interested in the Hunter exam. Mito exined: ¡°Gon grew up here where I could watch him, he is a child with a simple heart, and the outside world would most likely be really dangerous. I don¡¯t want Gon to do anything he shouldn¡¯t do, so I hoped that you could apany him. If you are with him, I will be relieved.¡± An nodded thoughtfully: ¡°So, you are worried that Gon will meet some bad guys?¡± ¡°Well, that right. Gon is too na?ve and easy to deceive.¡± Mito was really worried about Gon. An couldn¡¯t help smiling when he heard this, because that¡¯s quite possible. With Gon single-cell brain, he would definitively be deceived. At this moment, the System gave An a choice. [1: ept Mito¡¯s request and participate in the Hunter Exam. Reward: Marine¡¯s Rokushiki, Geppo (Moon walk)] [2: Reject Mito¡¯s request and let Gon fend for himself. Reward: Marine¡¯s Rokushiko, Soru.] An was shocked. The reward this time was from another world entirely. It was from One Piece, the Rokushiki (Six powers of the Marine). This was a rare ability for An and quite helpful as well. As far as he knows, the Rokushiki are, Soru, Geppo, Tekkai, Shigan, Rankyaku, and Kami-e. Soru and Geppo (Moon walk) are movement techniques, and An was more inclined to learn Geppo. Soru is a high-speed movement technique that requires steeping on the ground a dozen times in less than a second, generating enough speed to disappear instantly and appear at the targeted location. But this can be achieved normally in Hunter X Hunter world by concentrating Nen in the legs to increase speed. But Geppo was different because stepping on the air isn¡¯t possible with just a bit of training in this world. Being able to fly wasn¡¯t something normal Nen users are able to do. And once Geppo is mastered, it would be like being gaining supremacy in the air. In a battle, gaining supremacy over the air is an overwhelming advantage. Even if he couldn¡¯t win, he would be able to run away without any trouble. Therefore, An directly chose the first option. He raised his head and patted his chest: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I will go with Gon to the Exam, leave Gon to me.¡± ¡°An, Thank you.¡± Mito was very grateful. An helped her more than anyone else in her life. ¡°No problem.¡± An waved his hand. He looked calm, but he was about to jump from joy. Because just now, the System gave him his reward. [Ding! You obtained Geppo (Moon Walk), from the Marine¡¯s Rokushiki.] In an instant, An learned the method to use Moon Walk. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 53 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these 10 chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 18: Master of the Swamp Chapter 18: Master of the Swamp Time soon flew by as January arrived, leaving one weak before the Exam starts. An sessfully registered online so he can enter the Exam, but the problem was Gon. Although Mito agreed that he could participate in the Exam even if he didn¡¯t catch the Master of the Swamp, Gon stubbornly refused and vowed to catch the damn thing. Early in the Morning, An went to Gon, who was fishing in the swamp. ¡°Gon, did you catch it yet?¡± ¡°Not yet.¡± Gon replied with a tone full of depression. He didn¡¯t know what was going on, but the Master of the Swamp was nowhere to be seen. An even started doubting that it was here at all. ¡°Gon, did you see the Master of the Swamp before?¡± An asked curiously. He still remembered how easily Gon managed to catch that big monster. But now, Gon wasn¡¯t sessful, which meant something was wrong. Hearing An¡¯s question, Gon shook his head: ¡°I didn¡¯t see it before. It is said to be a veryrge fish, more than ten meters long. I heard that someone in the vige fell into the swamp, but no one saw him after that. So, the rumor says that the Master of the swamp is the one who ate him.¡± ¡°Who did you hear it from?¡± ¡°Auntie Mito.¡± ¡°Mito?¡± An frowned. He is now a little skeptical about the Master of the Swamp. It could be just a fake story that Mito fabricated, so Gon won¡¯t participate in the Hunter Exam. That may be the reason why Gon still didn¡¯t catch it. ¡°Gon, you don¡¯t suspect that maybe there is no Master of the Swamp in here?¡± Gon was taken aback before he replied firmly: ¡°I believe Aunt Mito won¡¯t lie to me.¡± ¡°Too innocent.¡± An sighed and said: ¡°In that case, let me check if he is really down there.¡± Although Gon didn¡¯t believe that Mito would lie to him, hearing An¡¯s suspicious, he couldn¡¯t help but wonder if it truly was there. After a while, he agreed: ¡°Okay, what will you do, though?¡± ¡°It¡¯s easy. I will just force it out.¡± An immediately moved to the shore and squatted down, rolled his cuffs, and gently put his hand on the water¡¯s surface. A frost-like white air spread out of An¡¯s hand immediately and gradually froze theke¡¯s surface. The surface wasn¡¯t the only thing affected, as the coldness traveled down deep into theke. Within a moment, the entireke was frozen. Like a clear gem, the Ice was transparent while strong enough to support anyone who stands on top of it. An named this technique Sen-Kiro Ice Field (Thousand Kilometers Ice Field). Of course, with his current ability, he wouldn¡¯t dream of actually freezing a thousand kilometer, but it wasn¡¯t difficult to freeze a small swamp. He froze up to a kilometer away at best currently, but this already stunned Gon, who asked right away: ¡°An, what is this ability? You froze the swamp!!¡± An didn¡¯t conceal anything as he exined with a smile: ¡°This my Nen Ability. It can freeze anything Ie in contact with and turn it to Ice.¡± ¡°Amazing!¡± Gon had stars in his eyes as he looked at An in worship. But suddenly he remembered something and panicked: ¡°Oh no, now that the swamp is frozen, how can we confirm that the Master of the swamp in there or not?¡± An sighed and said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry so much. If there is such a thing down there, it wille out.¡± ¡°It will show up by itself?¡± ¡°You will see.¡± Seeing An¡¯s confidence, Gon started to believe that An could do it. They started waiting patiently. Before long, An started walking on the Ice while looking down. Since the Ice was crystal clear, he could see underwater easily. But the water wasn¡¯t as clear, and he could only see three or four meters down. He could only see dark green color deep down the swamp, which made him conclude that the swamp was ten meters deep. After ten minutes passed, An quickly stepped away from his position as he saw a huge shadow swimming quickly under the Ice. An sneered: ¡°It looks like there is indeed a master of the Swamp.¡± ¡°Did you see it?¡± Gon was surprised. ¡°Yeah.¡± An nodded. He didn¡¯t make a mistake, he saw it, and indeed, it was a very big creature, but he wasn¡¯t sure if it is a fish or not. When confirmed it, Gon was cheerful: ¡°Great, I know that Aunt Mito won¡¯t lie to me.¡± He said to An: ¡°An, what you just saw must be the Master of the Swamp.¡± An was about to answer, but his pupil shrank and a huge creature crashed against the frozen surface of the swamp. Crack! The Ice cracked due to the hard m it received from the creature. An jumped away in a hurry and sighed: ¡°It¡¯s dangerous.¡± Once again, the Ice was hit hard by the creature. Crack! A giant fish more than ten-meters long broke out of the Ice. The fish was green, with scales forming an armor. It looked quite ferocious and nothing like a fish. Moreover, it has numerous legs, which helped it crawl. All of a sudden, it¡¯s gaze was fixed on An and directly ran toward him. ¡°Is that the Master of the Swamp?¡± Gon was taken aback. It waspletely different from what he imagined. He almost vomited as he said: ¡°It¡¯s so ugly!¡± An also thought that this creature was ugly. Seeing ite running at him, he didn¡¯t evade it at all. Instead, he attacked it and froze it. ¡°Gon, carry it back, whether it¡¯s the Master of the Swamp or not, I don¡¯t think that there is any bigger fish down there.¡± Gon agreed. After all, his agreement with Mito was for him to catch the biggest fish in the swamp. So whether it was the one or not, it would be enough. ¡°Here we go.¡± Gon was very strong, so he easily picked the frozen Master of the Swamp and walked to the town looking for Mito. An breathed a sigh of relief as Gonpleted his promise. Now, it¡¯s time to leave Whale Ind. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 53 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these 10 chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 19: Out in the Sea Chapter 19: Out in the Sea A weekter, a ship slowly docked at the Port of Whale Ind. Unlike fishing boats, this ship was the one carrying Hunter candidates that wanted to join the Exam. An and Gon already departed early morning to get on board of the ship early. Both of them carried their luggage with some daily necessities inside, such as clothes that Mito prepared for them. When they were about to board the ship, Mito stood in front of them, intent on seeing them off. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Aunt Mito. I will pay attention and stay safe. Furthermore, I will be a hunter, I promise.¡± Seeing Gon so energetic, Mito looked at An and said: ¡°An, please take care of him.¡± ¡°Well, you don¡¯t have to worry, he is my friend, and I take care of my friends,¡± An said coolly. Gon was his first friend in this world, and he won¡¯t leave him alone. ¡°Also, take care of yourself, and if you have time, don¡¯t forget to visit. You¡¯re always wee here.¡± ¡°Of course, I will definitivelye back.¡± An shrugged, but he was avoiding meeting Mito¡¯s eyes. He had no attachment to Whale Ind. If there isn¡¯t an emergency, he wouldn¡¯t want toe back here. He just didn¡¯t want to be blunt with Mito. ¡°Mito, why don¡¯t youe to take the Exam yourself anyway? You already learned Nen and can protect yourself.¡± Mito shook her head and declined An¡¯s invitation. She truly wanted to go, but she wasn¡¯t as strong as she wanted to be now, and that didn¡¯t allow her to go. Although she came in contact with Nen for a short while, she knew that the outside world was full of strong people, and she didn¡¯t want to burden An with her protection. An already understood what she was thinking about and said: ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then I won¡¯t force you. I hope by the next time I see you, you will be much stronger.¡± Mito nodded and raised her head: ¡°I will train hard. And when I¡¯m stronger, I will just drag both of you back here if you don¡¯te back.¡± ¡°Then, we will wait and see.¡± After saying goodbye to Mito, An and Gon got on the ship headed toward the Hunter Exam¡¯s location. Many people gathered on the deck. From middle-aged Man in their forties to young boys like Gon, they all hoped to be hunters by the end of the Exam. Ny percent of the participants were males, and the rest were females. An nced at Gon and said after remembering his promise with Mito: ¡°Gon, don¡¯t run around.¡± After saying this, An ignored Gon and looked at the candidates one by one. Ten minutester, An shook his head as he didn¡¯t see the two candidates he was looking for. ¡°How could they not be here? In the show, the other two were here as well with Gon.¡± He was talking about Kurapika and Leorio. An couldn¡¯t see them on the ship, which confused him. ¡°Did my existence change the plot? Because of me, the people who should be on this ship missed it?¡± An started thinking about the aftereffect of such things happening in the future. As a transmigrator, his greatest advantage was his knowledge about the world, events, and characters. If the events were to change, his advantage would be small to nothing at all. Although he wasn¡¯t clear about everything, he still remembered major events, and Kurapika and Leorio missing now change many things. That meant that the hunter exam could be different from what he remembered in the show, which will affect him greatly. He was prepared for the same Exam Gon passed in the show. An sighed, and although he was unhappy, he could do nothing about this. He could calcte each step carefully from now on. ¡°Hmm, where did Gon go?¡± After a while, An nced around him and realized that Gon disappeared. ¡°Hey, what is that kid doing?¡± Suddenly someone shouted. An looked around before noticing Gon climbing the mast of the ship. ¡°Gon¡­¡± An muttered to himself before he understood what¡¯s Gon doing: ¡°He must be observing the weather.¡± Sure enough, after a while, Gon rushed down and shouted: ¡°Everyone, be careful, there is a super storming. Get in the cabin and stay there. Otherwise, you will be swept by the wind and wave and fall into the sea.¡± As soon as they heard this, the examinees on the deck couldn¡¯t calm down anymore. They stood up to look at the sky and sea, only to find the sea as calm as it could be and a blue sky without a signle cloud all around them. ¡°Is there truly a storming?¡± ¡°The weather looks good, but the wind is a bit strong, maybe.¡± ¡°That kid isn¡¯t joking, is he?¡± All the candidates talked to each other before someone asked: ¡°Hey kid, how did you know that?¡± Gon exined: ¡°Because the wind is slightly wet, and also it tastes salty. Besides, the seagulls hovering above us are warning each other and fleeing away in groups.¡± ¡°What are you talking about, kid? Do you understand bird Language?¡± All the candidates were surprised by Gon¡¯s words, while at this time, An¡¯s full attention fell onto someone else on the deck. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 53 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these 10 chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 20: The Gen’ei Ryodan Appears Chapter 20: The Gen¡¯ei Ryodan Appears Hearing that a storm wasing, many candidates started evacuating the deck and entering the cabin. Everyone was afraid of the storm, and since they were in the middle of nowhere, it would be the end of anyone who falls into the sea. Even if some of them still doubted Gon¡¯s words, they would rather take caution than being swept out of the ship. Wouch! Gon easily jumped down from the mast back on the deck and arrived beside An. Seeing him motionless, he became curious. ¡°An, why are you, daze? A storm ising. Let¡¯s get inside.¡± But An seemed oblivious of Gon as he was staring at someone not far away. He thought that person was familiar and was trying really hard to remember him. The man had a pair of earing embedded with blue gems, ck hairbed back, a blue suit, and a book in his hand. The most eye-catching thing is the purple tattoo on the man¡¯s forehead. An concentrated on the tattoo before finally recognized the man. He was the leader of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan (Phantom Brigade), Chrollo Lucilfer. ¡°I didn¡¯t expect him to be in this ce,¡± An muttered with a trembling heart. It seems he came here to participate in the Hunter Exam. Otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t be here on this ship. ¡®I truly didn¡¯t notice him before because I was looking for Kurapika and Leorio, or was he in the cabin before?¡¯ An¡¯s brain was working at extreme speed. Looking back, he saw a woman that had short, straight, blonde hair reaching down to her neck. Her most prominent feature was her aquiline nose. Her attire consisted of a dark purple suit, reminiscent of a working woman suit, which exposed much of her cleavage, and a pair of t, pink shoes. She walked out of the cabin and went to Chrollo¡¯s side. This was Pakunoda, from Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. As for the big ugly guy, An did not doubt that it was Uvogin from Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. An greatly rmed, Chrollo was enough to give him a heart attack, and now three of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan were on board the ship. At this time, Chrollo seemed to feel An¡¯s gaze and nced at him, but An already moved his eyes away and said to Gon: ¡°Gon, I¡¯m sorry, I was just deep in thoughts.¡± Gon looked at An helplessly and said: ¡°It¡¯s okay. I¡¯m already used to it. You often do the same when we were on the ind.¡± An smiled with guilt before he walked with Gon to the cabin. Only Chrollo, Pakunoda, and Uvogin remained on the deck while everyone else entered the cabin. ¡°What¡¯s the matter, Chief? Is there someone you know?¡± Uvogin noticed Chrollo¡¯s gaze and couldn¡¯t help asking. Chrollo shook his head gently and said: ¡°No. Maybe I¡¯m thinking too much. Someone was staring at me just now, so I was concerned.¡± ¡°Chief, your presence is different from ordinary people, so, normally, people would look at you,¡± Uvogin said. ¡°Compared to Chief, you¡¯re more eye-catching, Uvo. You¡¯re so big and look wild.¡± Pakunoda stated. Hearing this, Uvogin¡¯s gaze on Pakunoda¡¯s proud twin peaks and counterattacked: ¡°I can¡¯t be as noticeable as you are.¡± Pakunoda sneered and warned: ¡°Be careful, or I will pluck your eyes out.¡± Uvogin snarled and said: ¡°Who told you to wear something so revealing. You just want people to look in that kind of clothes. Besides, you aren¡¯t losing anything even if people look at you.¡± Pakunoda gritted her teeth and said: ¡°What clothes I wear is my problem. I always dressed like this, and if you dare talk any more nonsense, I will pull your tongue out of your mouth.¡± Uvogin was about to fight back, but Chrollo said coldly: ¡°Enough.¡± This simple word was enough for the two to stop before they even start. Chrollo nced at the two and said: ¡°I don¡¯t want to be noticed when I participate in the exam this time. If someone finds out that Gen¡¯ei Ryodan¡¯s members are participating, it will be troublesome, so don¡¯t fight.¡± ¡°Yes, we will pay attention to that,¡± Uvogin said. In the entire organization, only Chrollo can make him obedient. At this time, Pakunoda asked: ¡°Chief, all those guys are inside the Cabin, is there a storming?¡± Chrollo looked at the sea before he nodded: ¡°Yeah, that kid with simr hair to a hedgehog is right. A terrible storm ising.¡± At this time, the sea breeze started changing. The Seagulls were already out of sight, and the originally blue sky darkened. The situation changed really fast. Further away from them, a thin line connected the sky to the sea, and if closely observed, anyone can tell that a tornado was forming. The clouds in the sky be darker as time passed. Thunder roared like an angry beast out of nowhere, which made most candidates in the cabin tremble in fear. The most frightening experience is encountering a storm in the middle of the sea. Chrollo closed his book and said: ¡°Let¡¯s go into the Cabin.¡± Pakunoda and Uvogin silently followed behind him as they entered the cabin. There were threeyers to the cabin, with each one holding up to two hundred people. And more than 700 candidates were on the ship, which made it overloaded. What made this even more exaggerated is that other than this ship, their dozens or hundreds of other ships filled with candidates as well. The number of candidates for this exam reached is in the tens of thousands or even more. And the people who had a chance to reach the first exam is less than 10% of all of those. After this nightmare of a test, more than 90% of the candidates will be eliminated. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 53 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these 10 chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 21: Precluded Chapter 21: Precluded Boom! Thunder roared, and rain fell heavily on the ship. The sea started raging, making the ship sway from side to side as waves pped from each side. The candidates were immediately struggling with seasickness, and others were unable to keep their bncing and fell. Only a few weren¡¯t affected by the storm. On the first floor of the cabin, the long hedgehog-haired Uvogin looked at the groaning candidates with a grin and sneered: ¡°What a bunch of weaklings. You dare participate in the exam, and you can¡¯t even withstand this.¡± In contrast, Pakunoda and Chrollo kept quiet. On the second floor, the same situation was urring. All the candidates were whining, and only Gon and An weren¡¯t affected. After a storm this strong, only a few out of the 700 candidates were allegeable to continue the exam. Only five candidates retained their consciousness and weren¡¯t affected by the storm. When An and Gon went out toward the deck, they passed by Chrollo and the others walking out of the first floor. An already expected them to be alright after the storm, so he just nced at them before retracting his gaze. He just apanied Gon to the hunter exam to help him. He didn¡¯t want to deal with dangerous people like the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. So he didn¡¯t say anything, but Gon didn¡¯t as usual, did the stupidest thing, and waved at them: ¡°You¡¯re all amazing. It seems that the storm didn¡¯t affect you at all.¡± An almost facepalmed as he looked at Gon and shook his head. This kid doesn¡¯t know that those three are cold-blooded demons who killed without remorse. Fortunately, Chrollo ignored Gon and went straight to the deck. Uvogin walked behind Chrollo and unexpectedly said: ¡°I thought that except for the three of us, the others weakling on this ship wouldn¡¯t make it. I didn¡¯t expect two out of all the trash to be somewhat decent.¡± Chrollo calmly said: ¡°There are too many people participating, and two slightly stronger candidates are normal.¡± Pakunoda said: ¡°That kid with green clothes was cute. I couldn¡¯t help responding to him just now.¡± ¡­ An directly reached the deck and waved to Gon not far away. ¡°What¡¯s the matter, An?¡± ¡°Gon, listen closely, don¡¯t mess with them, okay?¡± An reminded, which puzzled Gon: ¡°Mess with them? No, I just said hello to them, but they just ignored me.¡± ¡°Anyway, don¡¯t talk to them,¡± An said seriously. He knew Gon¡¯s character very well. He was just too innocent for his own good. He also had the kind of personality that let him befriend people the same age and even much older than him. In case he befriended the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan, Gon would either be affected by them or be a dark Gon. If the person¡¯s heart was innocent, it could be tainted by darkness really quickly. Once Gon fall on the wrong path, he will be the real final boss in this world. An didn¡¯t want Gon going astray. He was his friend, after all. He didn¡¯t want him to go make friends with such dangerous people. And he did promise Mito to take care of Gon. So An was determined to prevent Gon from contacting the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. At this time, the long-lost System¡¯s voice echoed in Roja¡¯s brain with two choices for him to choose from. [Ding! Please Make the following Choices.] [1: Prevent Gon from contacting the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. Reward: Kenbunshoku (Observation) Haki (Novice).] [2: Help Gon contact the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. Reward: Busoshoku (Armament) Haki (Novice).] An scratched his head as he was in front of a difficult choice. Whether it was Armament or Observation Haki, he loved both techniques. They were some of his favorite skills. But at this stage, An is more inclined to get observation Haki as it was more useful to him. His reason was very simple. Armament Haki was the ability to enhance both offensive and defensive physical attacks. That was all, and with Nen, he can use Ten, Shu, and Ken to get the same effect as Armament Haki. But Observation Haki was different. It enhances one¡¯s five senses greatly and detects threats as well as reads the enemy¡¯s movement. It was a great perception skill. Therefore, An immediately chose the first option, and even without the System, An would prevent Gon from contacting them anyway. An once again was in a daze, and Gon could only wait patiently as always. Gon looked at An and sighed: ¡°An is really a weird person. He was clearly talking to me, then he suddenly stops and be dazed.¡± As An returned to his senses, he saw Gon looking at him with a helpless expression and smiled: ¡°Ah, I¡¯m sorry, Gon, I was lost in thoughts again.¡± ¡°It¡¯s okay. I¡¯m already used to it.¡± Gon looked at him as if nothing was strange about An anymore. An sighed helplessly. Every time the System gives him a choice, he would look as if he was dazed. He was doing a multiple-choice question, so can you me him! ¡°By the way, Gon, do you remember what I told you? Don¡¯t talk or mess with those three.¡± An nced at them and said with a low voice. ¡°Why?¡± Gon was puzzled. ¡°Well, they are bad people. Do you understand?¡± An seemed as if he was coaxing a child. Gon scratched his head before ncing at Chrollo and the others and said: ¡°An, how do you know that they are bad people? Do you know them?¡± ¡®Of course, it¡¯s not possible for me to tell you that I do know them very well¡¯ An shook his head and said: ¡°I don¡¯t, but it¡¯s just my instinct.¡± ¡°Instinct?¡± Gon looked confused. An sighed and said: ¡°For example, some people¡¯s appearance may be fierce, but they are kind-hearted, while other people looked kind, but they are really dangerous and scary.¡± Gon suddenly understood and said: ¡°In other words, you think those three people are dangerous, right?¡± An nodded and smiled: ¡°You really can understand!!¡± ¡°Well, Aunt Mito told me to listen to you when we are outside. Since you don¡¯t want me to talk to them, then I won¡¯t.¡± An nodded and was extremely happy with Gon¡¯s obedience, which made him more at ease. [Ding! You sessfully prevented Gon from Contacting the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. Reward has been imed: Observation Haki (Novice).] In an instant, An felt his body transform, and his five senses greatly improve. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 57 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these 10 chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 22: Shar Pei Gon Chapter 22: Shar Pei Gon ¡°Is this Observation Haki?¡± An¡¯s excitement shot up the roof as he felt the change in his body. Now, he had a clear understanding of Observation Haki. There were three main points to this change. First, his perception improved greatly. He can now detect the presence of a faraway target. Second, his hearing improved immensely, and now he can hear the breathing sound and heartbeats of his target. Third, all of his senses were enhanced. This didn¡¯t refer to a single organ, but it was an overall improvement. When there is a threat to his life, even without seeing the threat came from, and locate it urately by listening to the heartbeats. If he raises his sense to a higher level, he would be able to even predict the future for a short time. Observation Haki increased perception in general. Everything that helps with perception is improved to the point of transcending a Human¡¯s senses. This ability is linked to the spirit and mental fortitude of the user. The stronger the mental power is, the stronger the Haki will be, and the more focused it gets, the more urate I would be as a result. An focused a little and activated his Observation Haki. An intangible and invisible sphere spread all around with him in the center. The Observation Haki was simr to the advanced Nen application, En, but the difference is that Observation Haki didn¡¯t use Nen, can¡¯t be detected, and also had a wider range. But now, An discovered that his Observation Haki could only cover ten meters radius, which he directly linked to it being at a Novice Level. Beyond those Ten Meters, An couldn¡¯t feel anything. ¡°This is a bit embarrassing.¡± An was embarrassed because his current En can reach a distance of 20 meters easily. In other words, his current Observation Haki isn¡¯t as practical as his En. However, since the Observation Haki doesn¡¯t use Nen, unlike En, he can keep it active at all times when he fights. A fairly elderly man with a short and stocky build came out of the cabin holding a bottle of wine in his hand. He nced at An and Gon before looking at Chrollo and the other three. He took a mouthful of wine before saying: ¡°Haha, it seems that only the five could handle the storm.¡± He took the bottle once again into his mouth before saying again: ¡°I¡¯m the captain of this ship. You can call me captain or Captain-san. You guys now tell me your names.¡± His words sounded like he was ordering them, which irritated Uvogin: ¡°I don¡¯t care that you¡¯re the captain, why should I tell you my name?¡± The old man took another mouthful of wine before ncing at Uvogin like a drunk: ¡°Hehehe, what a grumpy guy. If you don¡¯t want to tell me your name, then don¡¯t, but don¡¯t regret itter.¡± He nced away toward An and said: ¡°You too, you don¡¯t need to answer, but like him, don¡¯t regret itter.¡± ¡°This drunk is trying to scare us. Let me see what you can do.¡± Uvogin said disapprovingly. If he didn¡¯t consider the exam and his chief¡¯s words about not causing trouble, he would¡¯ve just thrown the old man into the sea to be shark¡¯s food. Chrollo stared at the old man as if he was thinking about something, but he didn¡¯t state his name. An, on the other hand, was staring at the old man and already guessed his identity. He is probably a temporary examiner from the Hunter Association. But a temporary examiner is an examiner nheless. Whether they pass the test or not depends on his words. If he offends him now, he will be likely eliminated in the next exam, and that¡¯s why the old man warned Uvogin and said he would regret it. Thinking about this, An directly stepped forward and introduced himself: ¡°Hello, Captain-san, my name is An Yeager, just call me An.¡± After he said this, he pointed at Gon and said: ¡°This is my little brother, Gon.¡± ¡°Well, okay, I will remember you, An-boy, and Gon-boy.¡± Compared to the violent Uvogin, the old man was satisfied with An¡¯s polite answer. Gon, on the other hand, heard An changing his name and looked at An with confusion and whispered: ¡°An, isn¡¯t your full name An Nefertari? When did it change to Eren Yeager? Which one is the real one?¡± ¡®Idiot, both of them are made up.¡± An thought, but he wouldn¡¯t dare say that. Instead, he leaned toward Gon¡¯s ear and whispered: ¡°Gon, the world isn¡¯t a good ce. People¡¯s hearts aren¡¯t always good. Of course, I can¡¯t use my real name in such a public ce, especially myst name. That¡¯s why I made a pseudo name for our safety.¡± ¡°Oh, I understand.¡± Gon said as if he realized something and said: ¡°An, you¡¯re really very reliable.¡± An smiled with a guilty conscience and said: ¡°Hehe, Really? Then you should always listen to my words.¡± Gon nodded quickly and said: ¡°Yes, can I also use a pseudo name? for example Shar-Pei Gon.¡± ¡°Shar-Pei? Shar-Pei Gon?¡± An was taken aback. ¡°Yeah, don¡¯t you think it sounds cool? Just like a foreign name.¡± Gon said smugly. He felt that he was so smart now that he could think of such a name. An didn¡¯t speak as he looked at Gon nkly. He wasn¡¯t able to understand how Gon found a dog¡¯s breed as cool. It was a dog¡¯s breed, for god¡¯s sake. Seeing Gon still very proud of himself, An couldn¡¯t help ask him: ¡°Where did you learn that name? Is there such a Do¡­, I mean strange name in this world?¡± Gon shook his head and smiled: ¡°Hehe, I don¡¯t know if there is such a surname, but the vige Chief had a Shar-Pei. I didn¡¯t expect it to go so well with my name.¡± ¡°Uh¡­¡± An was unable toin, but in the end, he sternly said: ¡°Gon, the Name Shar-Pei Gon sounds like a stray dog¡¯s name. You can¡¯t use it as a Pseudo name.¡± ¡°Why¡­¡± Gon was hit in the head by An. He shut up and looked at An: ¡°Than what Pseudo Name should I use?¡± An patted him on the shoulder and said: ¡°Just use your name, Gon.¡± ¡°No, I want a pseudo name like An.¡± Seeing Gon¡¯s stubbornness raising, An thought for a bit before he said: ¡°Well, then how about Kakarot Gon?¡± ¡°Kakarot Gon?¡± Gon¡¯s eyes lit up as he nodded: ¡°That¡¯s a good name, slightly better than Shar-Pei Gon.¡± An was speechless. ¡®Why is this guy so attached to the Dog¡¯s breed!!!¡± But now, he could finally sigh in relief. Fortunately, An watched a lot of animes; otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t be able to get such a pseudo name anytime soon. At this time, the old man shouted: ¡°An-boy, Gon-boy, what are you both mumbling about? Please answer my second question.¡± As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 53 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these 10 chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 23: Fall out Chapter 23: Fall out An and Gon looked at the old man and said in unison: ¡°What is it?¡± The old man once again took a mouthful of wine and said: ¡°Why do you want to be hunters? What is your purpose?¡± ¡°I will answer first.¡± Gon happily raised his hand and said: ¡°Ie to take the test, then go and find my father.¡± ¡°So, your father is a Hunter?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Gon nodded as stars appeared in his eyes. The old man looked at his eyes and thought: ¡®His eyes are so clear, but his path will be full of thorns.¡¯ Then said to Gon sincerely: ¡°I hope you find your father soon.¡± ¡°Thank you, Captain-san.¡± The old man looked at An and said: ¡°What about you, An-boy?¡± ¡°I have already said the reason.¡± The old man was taken aback and asked: ¡°When did you say that?¡± He shook the wine bottle and hupped. He isn¡¯t that drunk to forget about something just happened. An said: ¡°In the ce where I grew up, my name has an extraordinary meaning. Yeager is pronounced as Jaeger (Jager), and that means Hunter in German, Eren (An), means Honor in German. An Yeager means that I want to be an honorable Hunter, which is a great hunter who is admired for his great achievement. That is my goal.¡± Hearing this, the old man rubbed his beard thoughtfully before he said: ¡°That¡¯s really a great name.¡± In contrast, Gon was stunned hearing this. ¡°An, I didn¡¯t think your goal was that grand.¡± Gon felt that his purpose of bing a hunter was too smallpared to An. An patted Gon¡¯s shoulder and wanted so much to tell Gon that you¡¯re too na?ve, that the Honorable hunter this is just B.S. The old man looked at An and Gon before he cleared his throat and said: ¡°Ahem! Now, I will announce that both of you have passed the test on the ship, and I will take you to the first test¡¯s location.¡± ¡°Hey, we qualified?¡± Gon was taken aback by the announcement. An smiled as he was right. The old man was an examiner, so he just exined to Gon: ¡°Gon, the hunter exam started the moment we boarded the ship. The storm was a test, and Captain-san is the examiner of the test. He asked our names and reasons to be a hunter to give his report to the reviewmittee to determine whether we are qualified to pass or not.¡± ¡°Really, An? You¡¯re so smart. You discovered this from the start.¡± Gon looked at his Mysterious Brother. An¡¯s mouth curved into a smile before he said: ¡°It¡¯s nothing. As long as you pay attention to details, you can make the same guess.¡± At this moment, Uvogin, who was standing on the deck, called: ¡°Hey, old fart, wait.¡± The old man frowned and said with displeasure: ¡°Young man, keep a clean mouth. You¡¯re only allowed to call me, Captain, understand?¡± ¡°Who cares about you.¡± Uvogin nced at An and Gon and said: ¡°You just said that both of them are qualified. What about the three of us?¡± The old man nced at them, took another mouthful of the seemingly endless bottle of wine, and said: ¡°I¡¯m sorry, the three of you are eliminated.¡± ¡°What did you say?¡± Uvogin was beyond angry. The old man exined: ¡°Although the three of you sessfully passed the storm and are quite strong, when I asked you something, you didn¡¯t put me in your eyes at all, and didn¡¯t give me your names. Especially you, the big guy. You even dared call me an Old fart, and I hate disrespectful people the most. Therefore, the three of you are eliminated, and 90% of the me is on you. Soe again next year, and I hope you won¡¯t run into me again. Otherwise, you would have to take the exam the year after that.¡± ¡°Bastard, you want to die.¡± Uvogin¡¯s killing intent emerged out as he appeared just in front of the old mand grabbed his threateningly: ¡°Old fart, I will give you ast chance, if you dare to eliminate the three of us, I will immediately throw you into the sea to be food for sharks.¡± Not far, Gon¡¯s sense of justice overwhelm him, and he almost rushed forward to help. An quickly put his hand on Gon and said: ¡°Gon, don¡¯t be impulsive.¡± ¡°But, that big guy said he would throw Captain-san into the sea. I can¡¯t just stay and watch.¡± Gon was really anxious and worried about the old-man. He turned to An and said: ¡°An, you are right. Those people are really bad guys. They want to kill Captain-san.¡± An raised his head and nced at the old man who didn¡¯t seem to care about Uvogin¡¯s intimidation at all. It seemed like he already epted his death long ago. Therefore, he wasn¡¯t intimidated by Uvogin¡¯s threat and said fearlessly: ¡°I¡¯m an Old man, I lived enough, so feel free to do whatever you want. Either way, you¡¯re not passing the exam, especially you, rude boy.¡± Originally, An didn¡¯t want to get involved, but Gon was just so kind-hearted that he didn¡¯t want to see anyone getting killed in front of him and do nothing. Had An let him go, he would¡¯ve already rushed to fight Uvogin. In this case, An¡¯s choices were limited. There are only two choices for him, one is to help the old man, and as a result, he would have to fight Uvogin and maybe even the other two, which will put him at a great disadvantage, and he may die just to save the old man. Such a result without any reward wasn¡¯t exactly his kind of deals. The second choice is not to help, but as a result, Gon would hate him, but he would avoid shing with the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. But he couldn¡¯t bear the thought of Gon staring coldly at him after this. So what should he do? An struggled with this choice. But as if the system heard that there was a choice, it directly intervened. [Ding! Please make a choice] [1: Make a move and help the Captain and defeat Uvogin. Reward: Rokushi technique, Rankyaku (Novice).] [2: It doesn¡¯t matter if you don¡¯t help, even if the Captain dies, just be yourself. Reward: Rokushiki technique: Tekkai (Novice).] Just when An already made his choice, Uvogin received an unyielding answer from the old man, and his anger reached the pinnacle: ¡°Hey, since you¡¯re not afraid of death, then go feed the fishes.¡± Without waiting even for a second, Uvogin threw the old man into the sea. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 59 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these 10 chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 24: Strong Opponent Chapter 24: Strong Opponent Even though the storm did stop, the Sea was still raging and full of waves, and if anyone falls, he will die. Seeing the captain being thrown down, Gon suddenly shouted anxiously: ¡°An, let me go. I¡¯m going to rescue Captain-san!¡± Gon took the fishing rod in his hand, which was his exclusive weapon, with the simple idea of catching the captain with it and pull him back into the Ship. This was his only way to save the captain. At this moment, Gon said seriously: ¡°Gon, leave it to me.¡± As he said this, An directly jumped down at a great speed. And as if defying gravity, he started stepping on the air. Moon Walk! This was the first time An got to use Moon Walk, so he was slightly scared currently. After all, if he failed and fell, he would die, so this was no joke. But Moon Walk proved to be easy to use. As long as he maintains bnce and uses the air as his support, he didn¡¯t have to worry about falling down the Sea. ¡°Wow, An, you¡¯re flying!!¡± Gon on the Ship was extremely surprised. Uvogin was the same. He didn¡¯t expect An to have the ability to fly. The power to defy gravity and fly in the air was an eye-opener. ¡°Damn it! Where did that kide from?¡± Uvogin clenched his fists as he stared at An. He felt provoked by An for rescuing the old man. Puff! Puff! Puff! An rushed toward the old man as fast as he could while kicking the air. Every step will leave slight friction behind that made a slight puff sound. The sound he produced while stepping on the air was like a popping of a balloon. When the old man was about to reach the water, An grabbed him by the cor. ¡°Huh, Okay, I caught you.¡± An breathed a sigh of relief and kept stepping on the air to prevent his fall. Because An couldn¡¯t achieve true flight, he couldn¡¯t stop moving in the air, or else he would fall. ¡°Okay, time to go back.¡± Puff! Puff! Puff! An sessfully returned toward the Ship with the Old Man in his hand. The Old man fell on the deck without registering what just happened. ¡°An, you¡¯re amazing!¡± Gon walked up and looked at An with admiration. An gave Gon a wry smile. He didn¡¯t realize how incredible it was to walk on air until he stepped back on the Ship. The old man stood up and said: ¡°An, I owe you my life. If there is anything I can help you with in the future, just tell me, and I will definitively help you even if I die.¡± An was about to respond, but an angry shout interrupted him: ¡°Boy, you should stick your nose where it doesn¡¯t belong.¡± An looked up and saw Uvogin staring at him angrily. Not far behind him, Chrollo and Pakunoda stared at him as well. They stared at him with a wait and see attitude. An wasn¡¯t afraid at all. Cowering back will only make Uvogin more arrogant. So, he stepped forward and sneered: ¡°Excuse me, you¡¯re just a big guy who likes to bully an old man like captain-san.¡± ¡°What did you say?¡± Uvogin furiously looked at An. He was even more angered if that was possible. ¡°I said, you¡¯re just a bully who picks on an old man, aren¡¯t you ashamed?¡± ¡°Good!¡± Uvogin squeezed his fist as his face was full of killing intent: ¡°I will kill you.¡± An was already prepared to fight, so once Uvogin finished talking, he used Moon Walk to rush forward. Moon Walk wasn¡¯t limited to flying. It can be deployed onnd as well to move faster. Uvogin was startled. He didn¡¯t expect An to take the initiative to attack, but his reaction was slow at all. He immediately raised his fist and punched An. An ducked sideways, avoiding the punch, but a hole appeared on the deck as a result. Boom! Taking advantage of Uvogin¡¯s open guard, An directly sent a kick to his neck. The force behind the kick sent Uvogin away at a great speed. ¡°Damn it!¡± Uvogin put his hands on the deck to stop his slide and cracked his neck. He only felt slightly sore due to the kick, but he was extremely startled by it nheless: ¡°Such a strong kick, this kid isn¡¯t easy! He can use Nen.¡± Although Uvogin was confident in his physical defenses, that kick still made him feel threatened. ¡°Boy, you sessfully angered me!¡± With Gyo activated, An could see Uvogin¡¯s red Nen explode out of his body. ¡°So strong!¡± Anplimented. In the show, Uvogin was an enhancer type, first-ss Nen user. Not only could he stop bullets with his teeth, but he can also even redirect a rocket and even blow armored vehicles with his bare hands. Even after when the Nostrade¡¯s bodyguard used his sword along with Nen to pierce Uvogin¡¯s body, it could only go two inches before it stopped and broke at the end. An deliberately targeted Uvogin¡¯s neck because it was one of the few parts that should be rtively fragile, but he underestimated Uvogin¡¯s defense. Although he seemed to have kicked Uvogin away, it didn¡¯t cause him any harm at all. And with that, An realized that he wouldn¡¯t be able topete with Uvogin with just physical power. In other words, a head-on fight isn¡¯t possible. Ordinary attacks won¡¯t work on him, and even if he used his strongest physical attack, it would slightly damage Uvogin at best. And if Uvoginnded a punch on him, he would be left with bone fractures or even be a cripple. There is still a big gap between their abilities, but An¡¯s attacks weren¡¯t limited to physical ones. Although he was at a disadvantage up close, he still had a few aces up his sleeve. Seeing Uvogin dashing toward him, An sneered and activated his Observation Haki. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 59 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these 10 chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 25: Observation Haki Chapter 25: Observation Haki An managed to see the trajectory of Uvogin¡¯s attack with Observation Haki. When the punch seemed close to hitting An, for some reason, it hit nothing. Uvogin was startled because An was standing in the same ce as if he didn¡¯t move. ¡°His body didn¡¯t move, but his head leaned to the side?¡± At this moment, Uvogin was shocked by An¡¯s brazen way of avoiding his attack. ¡°Is this all you¡¯ve got?¡± An mocked aloud. He was extremely frightened when he did that, and if he wasn¡¯t using Observation Haki, that punch would¡¯ve killed him. But he just taunted Uvogin to make him angrier and lead him into making mistakes. He wanted Uvogin to attack him irrationally, so he could take advantage of his rage and counterattack. An¡¯s taunt worked a little too well as Uvoginughed angrily: ¡°What an arrogant guy, do you think that you¡¯re so great just for avoiding a punch? If you think that this is all of my power, then your death will be quite the ugly one.¡± He squeezed his fist and said: ¡°But sorry, I only need a third of my power to kill you.¡± Uvogin¡¯s face resembled a fierce wild animal with a wicked smile. An¡¯s mouth raised slightly: ¡°Do you want to kill me with a third of your power? You have greatly underestimated my power.¡± He raised four fingers and continued to taunt Uvogin: ¡°Then I will use four, ten precents of my power against you.¡± ¡°Ten percent?¡± Uvogin frowned. An smiled faintly and said: ¡°That¡¯s 40%, you idiot.¡± ¡°You¡­¡± Uvogin¡¯s anger reached a new high, but he suppressed himself as he looked at An with a sneer: ¡°I hope your as strong as your mouth, otherwise I will tear you and your mouth apart.¡± ¡°I also hope your fist is stronger, or else, you¡¯ve got no chance to even hit me.¡± An mocked again. Currently, they were two meters apart and within each other¡¯s reach. The two of them seemed in a staring contest, but actually, they were contemting their next course of action. They were waiting for the best moment to attack. Uvogin was 100% confident that he can overwhelm An with speed and power within such a short distance. Without further thoughts, Uvogin punched An¡¯s head. An quickly tilted his head to the right, avoiding the fist. The wind howled beside An¡¯s cheek as Uvogin¡¯s punch passed by. Once again, Uvogin was stunned as his fist for the second time couldn¡¯t touch its target. ¡°How are you¡­¡± Uvogin¡¯s confidence turned into shock within seconds. He was shocked because, this time, he was just 2 meters away from his opponent, but the boy was able to avoid his punch the same way as before. ¡°Damn it! I don¡¯t believe you can avoid all of my punches.¡± This time, he no longer aimed at An¡¯s head. Instead, he aimed at his chest. Uvogin¡¯s physical strength was tremendous to the point that he could shatter rocks and pierce iron te without Nen¡¯s use. If such a punch was to hit an ordinary person, he would die on the spot. And even those who can use Ren or Ken for defense are at risk. In the past ten years, at least one thousand people died under his punches. Eight hundred of the one thousand corpses were described as killed by a beast, not a human with w marks and teeth marks. With An¡¯s provocation, Uvogin¡¯s punches were already filled with Nen, which was several times stronger than his normal punch. Because of the power behind it, a violent sound resonated from it as it moved across the air. Seeing the punch move toward his chest, An immediately stepped aside and barely avoided it. ¡°Did I miss again?¡± Uvogin¡¯s surprise kept growing as he didn¡¯t expect An to avoid hisst punch within such a close distance. It¡¯s as if the boy already knew where the punch was moving. It¡¯s like the boy predicted and knew where to move to avoid his punch before he even attacked. He squinted his eyes before looked at An suspiciously and thought: ¡®This guy¡­ Did he see through my attack?¡± In order to verify his guess, Uvogin punched again and again like a raging storm. With the help from his Observation Haki, An avoided each punch without much effort. Or that¡¯s what it looked like, but in fact, An needed to concentrate really hard to avoid Uvogin¡¯s flurry of attacks as his Observation Haki was only at the Novice level. If his Observation Haki was of a higher level, he wouldn¡¯t need to concentrate as much, and he would be able to counterattack without much problem. Although An seemed calm, he was very focused as he was facing someone so strong. He didn¡¯t dare to get careless even for a second, or else he would die. Chrollo was watching the fight without any change in expression at first, but as An kept on avoiding Uvogin¡¯s attacks, a faint light appeared in his eyes. ¡°It¡¯s not easy. That guy is avoiding Uvogin¡¯s attacks with the smallest amount of movement possible.¡± Pakunoda heard this and became curious: ¡°Chief, is that guy predicting Uvogin¡¯s attacks?¡± Chrollo nodded and said: ¡°Not just that, he is trying to consume Uvogin¡¯s power while dodging his attacks with the smallest movement and not counterattacking. But that¡¯s not a sign of weakness or fear. He is trying to save his energy and stay on standby, waiting for the right moment to counterattack. He is really a calm headed guy. In contrast, Uvogin¡¯s attacks are wide and full of openings. Each punch was simple and used wide movement, which consumes several times more energy than his opponent. Over time, even if Uvogin had the advantage when ites to Nen, once he gets tired, the gap between them will narrow, and maybe that guy can even overpower him.¡± Hearing Chrollo¡¯s analyses, Pakunoda was a little bit surprised: ¡°I didn¡¯t expect Uvogin to encounter this kind of opponent. He isn¡¯t good at dealing with such strategic enemies. Do I need to go there and help?¡± As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 61 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these 10 chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 26: Power Chapter 26: Power Chrollo shook his head slightly and said: ¡°No, Uvogin¡¯s power isn¡¯t that simple. Furthermore, I¡¯m a little bit interested in that guy. So, let¡¯s just take this opportunity to observe his battle with Uvogin.¡± Hearing this, Pakunoda looked at An and paid more attention to the fight: ¡°There are not many guys that can catch the Chief¡¯s eyes. Does Chief want to bring him into the group?¡± ¡°If he can survive, we can consider getting acquainted with him.¡± Chrollo smiled with a calcting expression. At this moment, Uvogin turned his head and looked at Chrollo with a startled expression: ¡°Chief is smiling?¡± His simple mind came to a weird conclusion: ¡°It must be because I haven¡¯t finished the battle just yet. And now, the Chief isughing at me.¡± In previous fights, Uvogin always crushed his targets with his overwhelming strength. He was known for finishing his targets quickly, but now facing An, he couldn¡¯t fully use his advantage in strength. The guy seemed to predict every attack heunched with ease making him miss every single punch. Uvogin stared at An with anger as he said: ¡°Damn it, I will get serious now.¡± Suddenly, an astonishing Aura surrounded Uvogin like a violent volcano. His Nen was extremely powerful that it made An think he was facing an angry beast. ¡°Very scary!!¡± Not far behind, Gon and the old man felt the ferocity Uvogin was emanating and were quite shocked. Although the old man didn¡¯t practice Nen, he could feel that Uvogin was currently more terrifying than a beast. Gon didn¡¯t learn Gyo yet, so he couldn¡¯t see Nen around Uvogin¡¯s body, but he knew that the Aura was stronger than anything he felt before. ¡°An, I will help you.¡± Gon took a deep breath and suppressed his fear. He stepped forward to help An and fight alongside him. After all, he was the reason An had to fight Uvogin in the first ce. If he didn¡¯t insist on saving the old man, An wouldn¡¯t be fighting Uvogin right now. Therefore, Gon knew that he should be fighting with An. However, with Uvogin¡¯s Aura, Gon almost couldn¡¯t move forward. ¡°His Nen is just too powerful.¡± Gon was startled and stared at An¡¯s back and thought: ¡®It turns out that An was fighting such a powerful opponent, no wonder he told me to not contact them. The kind of Nen he was using is changing the atmosphere even. I probably wouldn¡¯t be able to even scratch him.¡¯ ¡°Gon, don¡¯te over, just stay with Captain-san,¡± An shouted without looking back. Facing a monster like Uvogin prevented him from rxing even for a second. Otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t be able to react even with Observation Haki. Simultaneously, An¡¯s Nen exploded out of his body to try and match Uvogin, butparing the two, it was apparent that Uvogin was stronger. ¡°An¡­¡± The old man noticed the situation, hurriedly pulled Gon into the wheelhouse, and said: ¡°Little Gon, don¡¯t worry. I believe that An can handle it. We need to stay away, so he doesn¡¯t get distracted.¡± ¡°Mm.¡± Gon nodded. He already knew that it was not a battle he could join, and it would only add the burden on An if he did. But if An can¡¯t handle it, he was ready to go andy his life helping him. Uvogin wasn¡¯t in a hurry to attack. He looked at the Nen An was releasing and smiled disdainfully: ¡°Heh! I think you started training in Nen for three or four years at most. I started training more than ten years ago, so you¡¯re not my opponent at all.¡± ¡°Really?¡± An¡¯s mouth curved into a smile as he sarcastically said: ¡°You¡¯ve been training for so many years, and you still rely on pure Nen to win? Although you¡¯re Nen is indeed stronger than mine and is muchrger in quantity than mine, certain variables are in a Nen battle. Because of that, victory is never absolute. Take our situation for example; even if you are stronger than me, you will only win if you manage to hit me, which you still didn¡¯t. If your fist can¡¯t touch me, then all you have is brute strength that means nothing at all.¡± A vein bulged out on Uvogin¡¯s forehead as he heard An¡¯s sarcasm and angrily said: ¡°Do you think you can escape a full power punch from me?¡± He sneered and said: ¡°Let¡¯s see you try avoiding my full power punch!¡± An¡¯s expression became serious as he thought: ¡®Is that idiot going to use a special attack finally?¡¯ In the show, Uvogin was a top-notch Enhancer. Even if he was faced with hundreds of people, he would kill them with his bare hands. His Big Bang Impact should be his strongest attack, which he used to punch and destroy Worm, one of the four Shadow Beast who was deep underground along with arge piece ofnd he was hiding in. It¡¯s just a super-powered punch. ¡°Chief, what is Uvogin going to do? Do you want me to stop him?¡± Pakunoda couldn¡¯t help ask Chrollo. Chrollo shook his head: ¡°No, I want to see what happens to that guy facing Uvogin¡¯s Big Bang Impact. Will he stay alive or die? This is interesting.¡± ¡°But, if we do that, we will be eliminated from the exam.¡± ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter, the hunter exam is held every year, but it¡¯s notmon to find such an interesting guy.¡± Hearing this, Pakunoda stopped talking, and her eyes fell on An and Uvogin, just like Chrollo. At this moment, Uvogin raised his right hand, which was clenched, and started gathering an astonishing amount of Aura in it. He knew that if Uvogin¡¯s fist fell on the ship, the entire ship would be destroyed. By then, all the people on the ship had no chance of survival. Although An didn¡¯t think of himself as a good person, this was a battle between him and Uvogin. Involving innocent bystanders isn¡¯t something he was willing to do, so he wouldn¡¯t allow Uvogin to destroy the ship. An knew that he could avoid the punch with his Observation Haki, but he wasn¡¯t willing to watch hundreds of life destroyed just like that. So his only path was to resist this punch. ¡°Hoo~.¡± An inhaled and said: ¡°I can only try that!¡± As soon as he said this, a cold Aura started radiating around him, and the surrounding temperature started dropping at an rming rate. The white Frosty air spread from his feet, directly moving toward Uvogin and freezing the ship¡¯s surface in the process. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 61 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these 10 chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 27: Breaking The Ice Chapter 27: Breaking The Ice Everyone could see the deck¡¯s surface be white before it was turned into a crystal clearyer of Ice. Uvogin was extremely surprised. The Cold air crawled on the deck and reached his legs. Ice started forming around them quickly before moving to his upper body, trying to turn him into an Ice Sculpture. The coldness already invaded Uvogin¡¯s body, which made him grunt before he directly swung his fist toward An. His feet were covered in Ice, and he couldn¡¯t get closer to An, so he directly sent his fist to try and break the Ice. Although he didn¡¯t use his full power, it was at least 70% of it. When he tried to break free, it was already toote because once again, An struck quickly, and his Cold Nen erupted like a storm. Uvogin knew that he was in a bad situation and attacked the Ice with everything he had. A huge amount of Nen shot out of Uvogin, shattering the Ice covering his feet as he lunged at An like a tiger. An wasn¡¯t afraid of danger. He was relying on his Observation Haki to avoid any and all punches Uvogin sent toward him. His actions seemed dangerous, but everything was within his calction. Uvogin was extremely angry as he punched nonstop, vowing to kill An. An just kept dodging left and right. Every attack was seen through using his Observation Haki. Uvogin finally changed his attacks by jumping in the air then locking into An before dropping down with a Superman Punch. An already noticed this and took action to resist. He created two Ice cones in the air to stop Uvogin¡¯s attack. ¡°Humph! an ant trying to shake a tree.¡± Uvogin snorted coldly before colliding with the Ice Cones breaking them apart, and continued toward An. As Uvogin was about to seed in hitting An for the first time, thetter¡¯s figure shed and avoided again. Boom! One-third of the deck was destroyed, and splinters flew everywhere. An¡¯s forehead was covered in cold sweat as he floated in the air. It was really a close call. Fortunately, he used the Ice Cones to reduce the damage, or else the entire ship would¡¯ve sunk. ¡°Get down here!¡± Uvogin roared as he jumped toward An. An sneered as he thought, ¡®What does he think he is doing? I have Moon Walk, you Idiot. I¡¯m superior mid-air.¡¯ An immediately rushed forward toward Uvogin, who was taken aback by this. He didn¡¯t expect An would take the initiative to get close to him, so he instantly sent a punch toward An. An¡¯s Observation Haki already predicted Uvogin¡¯s attack and helped him avoid it with his Moon Walk and kicked Uvogin mercilessly. Since he was in the air, Uvogin blocked with his hand as his body started to fall. An predicted that Uvogin would block and instantly kicked with his other leg that connected without a problem. Boom! Uvogin was shot down like a cannonball toward the ship and collided hardly. An didn¡¯t want Uvogin to record, so he directly moved down with Moon Walk while pointing his fingers at Uvogin. Instantly, Sharp icicles formed in the air and struck down Uvogin as fast as lightning. ¡°Ah~.¡± A pained cry escaped Uvogin¡¯s mouth as the Icicles that were harder than steel touched his chest. He looked down and saw the Icicles embedded into his chest and blood gushing out from his wounds. Uvogin was shocked and eximed: ¡°What?! Blood?¡± An was happy. His attacknded as he expected. Of course, if an ordinary sharp object hit Uvogin, there is no way it could prate his defense. Still, since An added the Ice element, the Icicle¡¯s prative power increased immensely, and even a body like steel wouldn¡¯t be able to resist. Chrollo smiled slightly and said: ¡°He did a good job breaking Uvogin¡¯s defense and hurt him.¡± ¡°Indeed.¡± Pakunoda felt the same way: ¡°Uvogin¡¯s body can¡¯t be even hurt by rockets.¡± Other than physical power, Enhancers had a unique advantage in recovery. They can use Nen to elerate their recovery. Right now, the damage done by An¡¯s blow was already healing. Uvogin¡¯s vitals weren¡¯t hurt at all, but this injury made Uvogin feel shame. He looked at An in mid-air and angrily roared: ¡°Get Down Here!!!¡± Uvogin had no way to fly, and this meant he couldn¡¯t catch An at all. Even if he relied on his powerful legs to jump at An, An would have full control of the situation once he is there. So, even though he was furious, he didn¡¯t lose his mind and jump. Suddenly, a trident formed in An¡¯s hand before he swooped down toward Uvogin. ¡°Damn it!¡± Uvogin shouted and punched with his right fist. Boom! The collision between the Trident and the punch sent shockwave all around the ship while breaking a few waves apart. Crack! The Trident couldn¡¯t withstand Uvogin¡¯s punch and instantly broke down. But this caused Uvogin¡¯s punch to almost freeze from the cold energy released as the Trident broke. An felt his hand numbing from thest collision. The two of them were evenly matched in thest exchange. But in the blink of an eye, Uvogin lunged forward with great speed toward An. An was startled. He didn¡¯t expect Uvogin¡¯s speed to increase so much. It was already toote to avoid Uvogin¡¯s punch, and he could only try to resist by punching back. Boom! With the head-on attack, An was immediatelyunched back with great ferocity due to Uvogin¡¯s attack¡¯s mighty force. Thetter took advantage of this and instantly chased after An with full power, adamant about finishing him off. An could tell that he was in extreme danger and reacted quickly by forming a huge ice wall in front of him. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 63 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 28: Fear Chapter 28: Fear As soon as the Ice wall formed, Uvogin mmed it and broke it apart. Boom! As soon as the wall broke, small crystal-like Ice pieces scattered in the air. At the same time, An struck Uvogin with an uppercut thatnded firmly on thetter¡¯s jaw. In that punch, An applied Ryu, which concentrates Nen on any part of the body. He used almost 70% of his Nen on that punch, hoping to deal the most amount of damage. Uvogin was hit so hard that he felt that his jaw was about to split, causing him to lose consciousness for a second. An stretched one had and shouted: Freeze!!¡± The Cold Nen erupted out of An¡¯s body and directly covered Uvogin, turning him into an Ice Sculpture. ¡°Hu~.¡± An exhaled loudly as this was his first serious battle in this world. He didn¡¯t expect an elite just as he left Whale Ind. Had he not received Observation Haki, and Moon Walk, he stood no chance in front of someone like Uvogin even if he relied on his Ice. Fortunately, after some struggle, he managed to freeze him. ¡°An, you are amazing. You actually froze that guy.¡± Gon immediately shouted joyfully. ¡°This is just temporary.¡± An frowned. He knew that he couldn¡¯tpletely freeze someone of Uvogin¡¯s level with his current power. Hearing this, Gon said in shock: ¡°Then what if hees out of the Ice?¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°What else can I do? I will just keep freezing him.¡± Gon was taken aback. This method seemed simple and somewhat stupid. But it was the most practical. Since he can¡¯t kill his opponent, trapping him was the best solution. Chrollo and Pakunoda looked at the frozen Uvogin, and their faces changed slightly. ¡°What should we do, Chief? Do you want me to go and help?¡± Pakunoda asked. Pakunoda was about to reply, but he heard a sudden crack and saw cracks started spreading on the Ice covering Uvogin. ¡°Retreat. The Ice is about to break.¡± An was startled and quickly pulled Gon back. In the next instant, a bang resounded as Ice shards flew around. Uvogin currently seemed like a snow tiger breaking through Ice. His Nen erupted stronger than before. But although he seemed fierce, his breathing was hard and looked really tattered. Uvogin broke the Ice, but he was somewhat slow and allowed the Cold force to invade his body. At this moment, he was trying to use his Nen to expel the cold from his body. At this moment, a figure suddenly rushed toward him, and that figure was An obviously. He calcted when Uvogin would break his Ice, and he knew that he would be damaged afterward, which is why he was now seizing this opportunity to attack. An Icicle mmed down toward Uvogin¡¯s head, wanting to prate it. Uvogin was startled and, without thinking, sent a punch toward the Icicle in An¡¯s hand. The collision between the fist and the Icicle generated a strong shock wave that fortunately didn¡¯t destroy the Ship. Uvogin¡¯s power was enough to defend against the Icicle even without concentrating. As soon as An noticed his attack not working, he whipped a kick like lightning toward his chest. Uvogin saw it, but his reaction was slower with his body so cold, and he couldn¡¯t react in time. As a result, he was sent flying. An jumped in the air with a pair of Icicle in his hands, then used Moon Walk to dive down toward the flying Uvogin like an eagle. Uvogin was shocked and couldn¡¯t stabilize himself to send a punch out. Just as An was above Uvogin and was about to finish him off, a figure shed in front of him and blocked the blow meant for Uvogin. An¡¯s pupil shrunk; it was Chrollo. Chrollo stood in front of An, holding a mysterious book in his left hand and a horned shield in his right hand, which stopped the icicles. Chrollo opened his mouth and said: ¡°If you want to continue this fight, I will be your opponent.¡± An directly closed his hand and withdrew. His eyes looked at the book in Chrollo¡¯s hand with fear. That wasn¡¯t an ordinary book. It was Chrollo¡¯s special ability, the book can steal people¡¯s Nen abilities, and it¡¯s known as Skill hunter (Bandit¡¯s secret). With a few conditions, Chrollo would be able to steal the Nen ability and seal it inside that book. And he can only activate the stolen skills when he had the book in his hand. That Horned Shield should be one of the stolen abilities of Chrollo. An¡¯s eyes almost looked at Chrollo with jealousy. He used his strongest attack to kill Uvogin, but just one ability he had in the book could stop him effortlessly. The Atmosphere in the Ship became tense as An just stared at Chrollo without rxing. He could deal with Uvogin with his current power, but Chrollo was an entirely different matter. At this moment, Chrollo opened his mouth and said: ¡°Don¡¯t be nervous. I won¡¯t attack.¡± Hearing this, An was taken aback and asked: ¡°What do you mean?¡± ¡°Just what I said, but of course, if you want to fight, I will apany you.¡± After saying this, Chrollo¡¯s shield disappeared. Seeing this, An breathed a sigh of relief. It seems like Chrollo really didn¡¯t want to fight. Uvogin currently finished recovering from the cold that invaded his body. He looked at Chrollo and said: ¡°Chief, I¡¯m sorry, I troubled you. Now, let me finish this kid off. This time I will use my full power without holding anything back.¡± The Atmosphere once again tensed, as An¡¯s heart that rxed, once again tightened. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 63 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 29: Ignored Chapter 29: Ignored Seeing Uvogin ready to fight a battle of life and death made An determined. When both were about to engage again, Chrollo stepped forward between the two and said faintly: ¡°This fight ends now.¡± Uvogin was taken aback. He stared at Chrollo and said with a hint of displeasure: ¡°Chief, give me a reason why I shouldn¡¯t kill the kid now; otherwise, I won¡¯t be convinced.¡± Hearing this, Chrollo nced at Uvogin and said seriously: ¡°You don¡¯t have any kind of problem with him. There is no need for a fight without any reason, right?¡± Uvogin was startled and couldn¡¯t refute Chrollo¡¯s words. In fact, he didn¡¯t even have any reason to fight An to death. The battle just made him really on edge, and wanted to vent his anger on An. Since Chrollo spoke, he wouldn¡¯t go against his leader¡¯s words. Uvogin reluctantly replied with an ¡°Um¡± and nced at An, his gaze no longer held his previous arrogance. An was surprised by Uvogin¡¯s Aura that receded back into his body. He didn¡¯t expect this tiger to have such an obedient side. An couldn¡¯t help looking at Chrollo with fear and Admiration. He was capable of restraining this tiger. He can even make him obey his orders. He was indeed a master. Chrollo cast his gaze at An and said: ¡°I stopped Uvogin. It¡¯s up to you now.¡± Hearing this, An stayed silent. He, of course, didn¡¯t want to fight Uvogin at all, let alone a fight to the death. Therefore, he didn¡¯t have any killing intent when he fought Uvogin previously, and even thetter didn¡¯t release any killing intent. However, if the fight continues, they will definitively kill each other. At that time, there won¡¯t be just a normal fight. It would be a fight to the death. Even though An would¡¯ve died if he received a serious punch from Uvogin, it wasn¡¯t a fight to the death. Now that Chrollo stepped forward to end the fight, An had no reason to continue. But just as he was about to ept, the system gave him a new choice. [1: Give Chrollo¡¯s face and don¡¯t fight Uvogin. Reward: Increase Observation Haki by one level] [2: Provoke Chrollo and sessfully anger him. Reward: Armament Haki (Intermediate)] Seeing the Intermediate Armament Haki, An¡¯s eyes lit up. Before he could be happy, he saw the condition to get that reward and immediately gave up. Angering Chrollo wasn¡¯t a good choice at all. An knew very well that if Chrollo wanted, he would be dead now. If he was to provoke him, he would be just seeking death. He didn¡¯t want to risk his life and die just because of a reward. Instantly, An chose the first option. [Ding! You have chosen the first option. Reward: Observation Haki increased by one level.] An felt his Observation Haki improve. Previously, his Observation Haki could give him insights, but now, he could feel danger with his eyes closed and even make precise predictions of his enemy¡¯s attacks. It¡¯s a pity that his fight with Uvogin came to an end now. Because of Chrollo¡¯s interference, An didn¡¯t get the Rankyaku. The condition for that reward is defeating Uvogin. Strictly speaking, An didn¡¯t manage to do that yet. So he was not given the reward by the system. However, he knew that he could get Rankyaku another day, so he wasn¡¯t disappointed. At this time, the dispute settled, Chrollo directly brought Pukunoda and Uvogin toward An. An instantly activated his Observation Haki just to be safe. After his Observation, Haki increased by one level. He could predict danger efficiently now. With his Observation Haki, An could tell that Chrollo didn¡¯t have any hostility toward him, which made him rx slightly: ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± Chrollo smiled faintly: ¡°How about we get to know each other? My name is Chrollo.¡± After saying this, he introduced Uvogin and Pakunoda to him. An was surprised. Chrollo made it clear that he wanted to befriend him, which was unexpected. An didn¡¯t know how to answer. But at this time, the system gave him another choice, which was surprising. [1: Ignore Chrollo and treat him as if he doesn¡¯t exist. Reward: Increase your Nen reserve by 3,000] [2: Respond to Chrollo and befriend him. Reward: Increase Moon Walk¡¯s level by one.] An scratched his head as those choices made him uncertain about what to do. When he fought Uvogin, he realized howcking his Nen reserve was. So, the increase in the amount of Nen he had was attracting. Of course, Moon Walk yed a huge role in his battle as well. If he didn¡¯t have it, he wouldn¡¯t havested that long. However, in general, An believed that the most important thing now is to increase his Nen. As for making friends with the Spiders? Well, An didn¡¯t want to get involved in their business for now. The Spiders were well-known thieves with level A bounties. An didn¡¯t want to be seen with criminals wanted all over the world. Immediately, An made his own choice and nced at Chrollo before ignoring him and walking toward Gon directly. [Ding! You ignored Chrollo. Reward: 3,000 Nen added to your reserve.] In an instant, An¡¯s Nen skyrocketed, and the consumed Nen from the fight was refilled again by the system. He was overjoyed, but he thought: ¡°I don¡¯t know what will Chrollo do now.¡± To be honest, he now wanted to look back and see Chrollo¡¯s expression after he ignored him. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 65 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 30: 100 Million Chapter 30: 100 Million For a while, Chrollo was stunned. This was the first time someone actually ignored him. Uvogin and Pakunoda were the same. They didn¡¯t expect An would be so defiant. After regaining his senses, Uvogin directly shouted: ¡°Bastard, Stop!¡± An turned his head calmly and looked at Uvogin: ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± Uvogin asked sternly: ¡°Our chief is talking to you and you dare ignore him. Who do you think you are?¡± ¡°Whoever I¡¯m doesn¡¯t concern you, that¡¯s my attitude, bite me.¡± An was ncing at Chrollo to decern his reaction to being ignored. Chrollo was calm and deep in thoughts, but An couldn¡¯t tell if he was just suppressing his anger. He was kind on the surface, but he looked like a Rakshasa when he got angry. But since Chrollo wanted to befriend An, thetter knew that Chrollo wouldn¡¯t be angry now. Since he wanted to befriend him, he must have something to gain from An. And it was indeed the case. Chrollo raised his hand to stop Uvogin and directly said to An: ¡°It¡¯s okay. If you don¡¯t want to be acquainted with us, then forget it.¡± An smiled: ¡°It seems like you¡¯re somewhat reasonable.¡± Then he nced at Uvogin to deliver his meaning. Uvogin, of course, understood that An was mocking him. He indirectly called him unreasonable. Although he was angry, he didn¡¯t make a move. Chrollo paused and then looked at An: ¡°Although you don¡¯t want to be friends with us, I hope you can help me with something.¡± Hearing this, An was slightly surprised. He couldn¡¯t think of anything he can do that the leader of the Spiders couldn¡¯t. But he still asked: ¡°What do you need?¡± Chrollo immediately exined: ¡°The three of us should¡¯ve passed the test like you, and you know that. But we didn¡¯t expect that the shameless old man was actually an examiner hired by the association. We didn¡¯t expect that if we don¡¯t answer his questions, we will get eliminated. Uvogin has a grumpy temper. He is easily angered. That¡¯s why he threatened him, which I¡¯m deeply sorry for that. Now that you saved his life, he should be very grateful to you, so I hope you can call in your favor to make the three of us qualify for the exam.¡± ¡°So that what it was about.¡± An nodded, but he sneered in his heart. If he didn¡¯t know Chrollo¡¯s true face, he would be really deceived by him. He actually said he was sorry for Uvogin almost killing the old man, which was really funny because he himself was a demon. But he could tell that the Exam was really important to Chrollo. Otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t go to such length to pass. Thinking about this, An said indifferently: ¡°It¡¯s really a pity. Actually, you three are masters and would be a great addition to the association if you passed. You would have very likely passed the exam and got your license by the end.¡± Uvogin listened to An and snorted: ¡°As we need you to tell us that.¡± An nced at him, ignored him, then turned toward Chrollo and said: ¡°Although that¡¯s true, why should I help you with nothing to gain from it?¡± Chrollo raised his mouth slightly and said: ¡°Of course, I won¡¯t let you help us withoutpensation.¡± ¡°Oh?¡± An raised his eyebrows: ¡°What kind ofpensation? Maybe I will consider it if it¡¯s good.¡± Chrollo raised his index finger and said: ¡°One hundred million.¡± ¡°What?¡± An was startled. ¡°If you can help us, I will pay 100 million.¡± Chrollo smiled. When An heard this, he was attracted to the offer. Although he wasn¡¯t a greedy person, 100 million was an astronomical figure. If he had that kind of money, not to mention this lifetime, he wouldn¡¯t worry about money for several lifetimes. Therefore, An directly nodded: ¡°Okay, I will try, but I don¡¯t know if I can help you.¡± ¡°We are waiting for you then.¡± Chrollo smiled. He seemed quite confident that An would be able to help them. An directly turned around and entered the Wheelhouse to find the old captain. The old man was paying attention to Chrollo and An, but he couldn¡¯t hear their conversation. So when An came, he directly asked: ¡°An, what did they tell you?¡± An didn¡¯t conceal anything and said: ¡°The three of them hope that I can ask you to give them another chance in the exam.¡± The old man already guessed this and was not surprised. He looked at An seriously and said: ¡°You really want to help them?¡± An nodded, but he thought in his head were: ¡®Of course I will help them, I¡¯m not that rich to refuse 100 million, okay?¡¯ but a serious expression was drawn on his face as he said: ¡°They all are quite strong. I¡¯m quite sure that they can pass the exam if you let them. A professional Hunter is quite precious for the association, and you should know that better than me, right? Therefore, it would be a pity to eliminate them this way.¡± The old man pondered for a while before he said: ¡°Well, you saved my life. I have no reason to reuse. Fortunately for them, I still didn¡¯t make the report to the organizer yet. The three of them are back into the exam then.¡± Hearing this, An was overjoyed. He directly went back to Chrollo and the others to tell them the news. ¡°Thank you, An¡± Chrollo smiled, but An was taken aback by Chrollo saying his name. Then he remembered that Gon was yelling his name quite a few times before, which is probably the reason Chrollo knew it as well. Of course, Chrollo didn¡¯t exin how he knew, but instead, he changed the topic: ¡°An, about the 100 million, I will send someone to you with them after the exam is over. Or you can tell me your ount number, and I will transfer the money now.¡± An still didn¡¯t process any bank ount, and Gon was the same, so he could only ept the first proposal. ¡°Well, I hope you don¡¯t go back on your words.¡± Chrollo smiled and said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry.¡± An was really not worried that Chrollo would renege on his words since he was the leader of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. Let alone 100 million, even if it was 1 billion, he would be fazed. Whether he will pay without trouble or not, that matter is for another time. At this time, the old man came back and said: ¡°Although you three regained your qualification to be hunters, I still need to ask you why you want to be hunters the same as before.¡± After saying this, he looked at Uvogin and said: Big guy, you first.¡± As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 65 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 31: Birdman Chapter 31: Birdman Uvogin was very upset by the old man¡¯s question, but he answered in the end: ¡°I¡¯m called Uvogin. Ie to the exam because I made a bet with someone.¡± Although he gave his reason, he still seemed very arrogant. His personality can be decerned with a nce. He was very hot-headed. Pakunoda then whispered softly: ¡°My name is Pakunoda. I want to be a hunter to make my work easier.¡± Chrollo wasst: ¡°I¡¯m Chrollo Lucifer, I want to get something, but I must be a hunter first.¡± When he said ¡®something¡¯, his face changed slightly as if he was excited before he said: ¡°It¡¯s a very rare thing, and I can only get it by bing a hunter.¡± His words made An concerned. He didn¡¯t know what the Spider¡¯s leader motive was. It should be very rare, indeed. After hearing their reasons, the old man said: ¡°Okay, you three passed as well.¡± Then he made a statement: ¡°Please stop fighting, for the time being, the ship can¡¯t handle destruction anymore, and if it is destroyed, none of you will be able to participate in the exam.¡± Although he seemed to talk to all of them, his words are meant for Uvogin. After all, Uvogin and An were fighting before, and as long as he wasn¡¯t blind, he could tell the crazy beast was the one who caused destruction. Uvogin could tell that the words are meant for him and started getting angry, but Chrollo was there, and he didn¡¯t dare to disobey thetter¡¯s orders. He could only endure this for now. A few hourster, the ship approached the harbor and finally docked. At the same time, other ships started docking as well. Those ships were hired by the Hunter Association to screen the candidates. The candidates who sessfully reach this ce are very few, and some of the ships didn¡¯t have any passing candidate. Only those who passed the initial screening had a chance to actually take the test. After getting off the ship, the old man gave each of the five a guide sheet for the hunter test, which briefly introduced the exam¡¯s rules and regtions. The time and approximate location of the exam. After bidding farewell to the old man, An took Gon and left. He didn¡¯t walk with Chrollo and the others. Chrollo naturally didn¡¯t force An to go with them. After all, everyone is apetitor in the Hunter Exam. The fewer thepetition in the exam, the higher their chances to pass. Therefore, not everyone can make friends in this exam. An wasn¡¯t in a hurry. After passing by Chrollo and the others, he directly took Gon to a Coffee to rest. ording to the guide, An pondered a little; the first exam will be held in Zaban city, which was the same location on the show. And the examiner should be Satotz. The test will start in 24 hours, which means that they need to find the location in these 24 hours. If they passed the time limit, they would automatically be eliminated. After a short break, An took Gon to take a cab and head toward Zaban city. The night in this ce was scary, as there was no sound and no light source. The cab was moving normally, but suddenly a bang was heard as the middle-aged man driving suddenly yelled: ¡°Oh no, I hit something.¡± Before he hurriedly got out of the car to check. Inside the car, An and Gon looked at each other when they noticed a shadow on the road. But neither of them moved. They just sat inside the car silently. They could react quickly to anything, so they weren¡¯t concerned. Suddenly, the driver¡¯s horrified cry came from outside, and then silence prevailed. Nothing seemed to happen; however, the driver didn¡¯te back. The car¡¯s headlights were the only light source around, but it could only reach a limited Ten meters ahead. At this time, the car shook as if something was attacking it. An and Gon instantly escaped from the car. They could see what was attacking the car. It was actually a birdman, a magical winged beast. They seemed like Birdman actually, because except for their wings, their features were that of a human. The only difference was their pupil, which seemed extraordinarily green. Suddenly, the Birdman turned its gaze toward An and Gon, and it¡¯s green pupil shined in the dark night. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 67 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 32: Exam’s Venue Chapter 32: Exam¡¯s Venue Gon was taken aback: ¡°Wow! What is that?¡± ¡°It¡¯s just a birdman.¡± An calmed down quickly and shrugged. The Birdman stared at the two with glowing eyes. In the dark night, the atmosphere was intense, but An was still standing in the same ce without making a move. His eyes concentrated as he was sure that there was another existence nearby. Although that existence¡¯s presence was well hidden, he couldn¡¯t hide from An¡¯s Observation Haki. This presence was hidden behind the first Birdman covered by the ck wings. An¡¯s eyes rolled as he said to Gon: ¡°Gon, this time, you deal with this.¡± Gon nodded and took a deep breath, then dashed toward the Birdman. Gon didn¡¯t know that another presence was hidden behind the Birdman. At this moment, the person hidden in the darkness approached Gon. It was another one of these birdmen. Gon¡¯s gaze was on the Birdman flying in the sky. He didn¡¯t expect another one to appear. A momentter, An interfered and appeared in front of Gon. Boom! An kicked the Birdman directly, sending away till he crashed into the car on the road. The car was dented due to the impact as the Birdman almost saw stars dancing above his head. After dealing with one, An looked up toward the second Birdman flying down with great speed toward him. An sneered. He instantly kicked the air and flew toward it using Moon Walk. The Birdman was taken aback as it didn¡¯t expect that An knew how to fly and detect him in the night¡¯s darkness. Boom! The Birdman was kicked to the ground, and he happened to crash into the car as well. Now the car waspletely ruined. The two birdmen stared at An fiercely. But when they saw him approaching, one of them spoke urgently: ¡°Wait~.¡± Gon on the side was surprised and eximed: ¡°Wow, it can speak human¡¯snguage.¡± An was rtively calm as he already knew it wasn¡¯t exactly how it seemed. There was something strange about how these creatures appeared here for no reason. An didn¡¯t want to think about it much, so he directly asked: ¡°Who are you?¡± The Birdman said: ¡°We are Kiriko living in the nearby mountain. We are recruited by the Hunter Association to atone for our evil deeds. This road is on the way to Zaban city. We are here to screen the candidates.¡± ¡°So that it!¡± An nodded. Gon asked: ¡°Where is the driver?¡± ¡°We scared him away.¡± The Kiriko replied. Hearing this, An solemnly said: ¡°Now, our driver is driven away by you, and the car is destroyed, surely you have a way to take us to our destination, right?¡± The Kiriko directly nodded: ¡°Yes, we also serve as guides. Since easily defeated us, you¡¯re qualified to go to the Exam venue. Now, let us take you to the first Exam¡¯s location in Zaban City.¡± An and Gon didn¡¯t say anything. Immediately, the Kiriko¡¯s took An and Gon and flew in the air toward the Venue. With enormous wings attached to their backs, they flew in the night sky with astonishing speed. Less than two hourster, Ana and Gon sessfully arrived in Zaban city, and with the guidance of the Kiriko, they found the entrance to the Exam¡¯s Venue. It was a concealed entrance inside a restaurant. After taking the elevator down, they reached a colossal passage underground. It was a profound and very long passage. When An and Gon arrived, there were hundreds of candidates already there. A lean man passed distributed numbered badges to the hundreds of candidates present. An received Number 123 while Gon got number 223. They were that far apart because the numbers on the badges were randomized. An put the badge on his chest as he started looking at the candidates. This is the first Exam¡¯s Venue, which means that the candidates that passed the screening are all present here. If Kurapika, Leorio, and Killua participated in this year¡¯s Exam, they should be here. Of course, An didn¡¯t want to befriend them. He just wanted to see these guys. However, after scanning everyone present, An didn¡¯t see them. There were only two possibilities for this. The first one is because they didn¡¯t take this Exam. The second is because they still didn¡¯t find this ce. There were about 10 hours before the time limit. At this time, An saw someone eye-catching. It was a fat-headed guy. This person was Tompa, the self-proimed Rookie crusher. ¡°Hi, I¡¯m Tompa.¡± As he said this, Tompa stretched his hand. His intentions were clear. He wanted to get to know An and Gon and befriend them. Gon didn¡¯t think about it and directly and stupidly stretched his hand and said: ¡°Hello, I¡¯m Gon.¡± Tompa smiled and stretched his hand toward An. An didn¡¯t want to talk to this guy, but suddenly he thought of something. This was the best opportunity to use Grim¡¯s Hand. It was the first ability he got when he was transmigrated to Hunter X Hunter world. Now was the best opportunity to reap someone¡¯s luck, and Tompa was the best test subject. His Grim¡¯s Hand can reap any kind of luck, be it fortune, bad luck, rtionship luck, career luck, misfortune, And So on¡­ The disadvantage of this ability is reaping bad luck from others. As far as An knows, Tompa failed the Exam dozens of times. He was anxious about receiving his lousy luck. But it didn¡¯t matter. He still had to try. After all, this ability can be handy, depending on its effect. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 67 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 33: Tompa, the Rookie Crusher Chapter 33: Tompa, the Rookie Crusher There are five conditions to activate the Girm¡¯s Hand ability. 1: The user¡¯s hand must touch any part of the target¡¯s body for a full five seconds. 2: The user must know the target¡¯s name. 3: Only one hand can be used, either right or left, for this Ability. 4: When this ability is activated, the user will enter a vulnerable state. Nen can¡¯t be used. 5: This Ability can only be used once per day and on one target in their lifetime. As soon as An recited the conditions, he stretched his hand and smiled faintly at Tompa: ¡°Hello, I¡¯m An.¡± Tompa smiled naively and prepared to withdraw his hand, but An didn¡¯t let go. The Grim¡¯s Hand was activated. An fulfilled the second, third, fourth, and fifth conditions. What¡¯s left is the first condition, which is to touch the target¡¯s body for five seconds. At this time, An was secretly counting down in his heart. 5 4 3 2 1 The five seconds passed, and An directly retracted his hand. Tompa looked at An weirdly and said: ¡°Brother, it¡¯s just a handshake, no need to get passionate, right?¡± ¡°Excuse me, my hand just cramped.¡± Anughed. Of course, Tompa didn¡¯t believe him, but he didn¡¯t say anything about it. An stopped paying attention to Tompa because he suddenly saw a big hand reach out from the void toward Tompa. Tompa didn¡¯t seem to notice this. The hand passed through Tompa, and a golden light orb appeared inside it. The golden light represents fortune. An was overjoyed. He was quite satisfied with getting this from the first time he used the Grim¡¯s Hand. If you have fortune, you will make money. Whether he was doing business and buying lottery tickets, he is surely going to get money out of it. Tompa¡¯s fortune was robbed by An. He would never get money from anything now. No matter what he does, it would be fortunate for him to just have something to eat from now on. At this time, Tompa took out two cans of drink from his backpack and handed each of Gon and An one can. ¡°This a juice from my hometown. It tastes sweet and delicious. You must be thirsty from the journey, right? Here, have one.¡± Tompa looked at them with a silly smile. People who didn¡¯t know him would think he was sincere. A sneer appeared on the corner of An¡¯s mouth as he knew that Tompa was the Rookie crusher. He uses every method to eliminate neers. If they drink that Juice, they would probably spend the next two days in the toilet. ¡°Why don¡¯t you drink?¡± Tompa asked. An was about to answer, but the system interrupted him. [Ding! Please make a choice.] [1: Drink Tompa¡¯sxative Juice. Reward: A great sword that can cut steel as if it was mud.] [2: Make Tompa drink his Laxative Juice. Reward: Mysterious Treasure Chest X 1] An instantly chose the second option without any hesitation. ¡®Are you kidding me? You want me to drinkxative willingly?¡¯ As for the reward for the first choice, it wasn¡¯t attractive at all. In contrast, he was more interested in the Mysterious Treasure Chest. It also just happened that he wanted to make things difficult for Tompa, to see if he dared drink his own Juice or not. If he didn¡¯t dare drink it, then he would have a reason to make him drink it. Either way, Tompa will drink it. An suddenly opened his mouth and said: ¡°Tompa-san, is your juice really good?¡± ¡°Of course, there is no problem with it.¡± Tompa Smiled, but his answer came too fast. A sneer appeared on An¡¯s mouth as he said: ¡°If that¡¯s the case, how about you take a sip first?¡± Tompa looked embarrassed as he didn¡¯t expect An to say that. He put a powerfulxative in the Juice himself, and ordinary people would need three days and three nights to recover from it. Fortunately, he brought the Anti-dote. In order to Make An and Gon, Tompa gritted his teeth and took a sip of the Juice. ¡°Look, there is no problem at all, right?¡± Tompa wiped the corner of his mouth and smiled. ¡°Well, it seems so.¡± An nodded. At the same time, the system¡¯s prompt appeared. [Ding! You sessfully made Tompa Drink his own Laxative Juice. You¡¯ve been Awarded: Mysterious Treasure Chest X 1.] An didn¡¯t open the Treasure Box immediately; instead, he kept it in the system forter. Besides, it was not the time to look into the Treasure chest now. Seeing An not responding, Tompa suddenly felt tricked and shouted: ¡°I drank it all, why don¡¯t you drink?¡± An was about to reply, but suddenly, he noticed something up in the distance. He saw Chrollo, Uvogin, and Pakunoda just arriving at the Venue. He said to Tompa casually: ¡°Tompa-san, do you see those three people? They seem thirsty. Why don¡¯t you go give them Juice.¡± Tompa took a look and saw that Chrollo and the others were new faces and immediately walked over. As for getting An to drink, he gave up. After a while, An saw Uvogin take Tompa¡¯s Juice and drink it readily. As for Chrollo and Pakunoda, they just ignored Tompa from the moment he approached them. One can, two cans, three cans, Uvogin drank a few cans as if he was really thirsty. He was quite fit physically, andxatives had no effect on him. Tompa was dumbfounded. He didn¡¯t think that the world had such monsters. Tompa was like a clown in An¡¯s eyes. He expected that Uvogin would teach Tompa a lesson, but Uvogin seemed to be enjoying the drink instead. Looking again, An found that Tompa moved away from Uvogin to talk to a silver-haired Kid. Tompa was talking to Killua, who had one foot on his skateboard and leaning against the wall, and gave him his drink as well. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 69 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 34: Gathering of Characters Chapter 34: Gathering of Characters A treacherous smile appeared on Tompa¡¯s face as he already could imagine Killua staying in the toilet for three days straight. However, when he saw Killua drinking a can after the others, his face stiffened. It was the same situation with Uvogin. Killua just drunk the Juice as if there is nothing with it at all. Tompa was ready to cry. ¡®Why did so many freaks join the Exam this year! Even a youngd is a freak!¡¯ Tompa thought. Uvogin and Killua both knew that the Juice contained something strange, but they were confident in their bodies and were thirsty, so they ignored it and drank readily. n was paying attention to Tompa, and after seeing Killua and Uvogin almost torturing him without even noticing, he was happy. He looked at Tompa yfully as thetter looked around for other preys. Not long after, four more candidates came to the exam venue. The first was a tall guy with strange needles stuck on his face and looked terrifying. An instantly recognized him. He was Killua¡¯s big brother, Illumi Zoldyck. Special needles stuck on Illumi¡¯s face to change his appearance. He is quite handsome without those needles. He participated in this Exam to follow his little brother Killua. Illumi, who was looking at his brother, gazed at the approaching Tompa, and said: ¡°Is there a problem?¡± Tompa¡¯s blood almost froze as his body was covered in cold sweat. He directly stopped any thoughts about tricking this guy and said: ¡°No, it¡¯s okay.¡± An followed his gaze and saw Tompa approaching a bold guy who was doing pushups. This bald guy had an excellent facial feature and a pair of sharp eyes. He was Hanzo, a Ninja. He was quite alert and declined Tompa¡¯s Juice. Tompa once again started his search, and his eyes fell on another two people. A person wearing a blue suit, he was tall, thin, and wore sunsses. The other person had short blond hair. They were Leorio and Kurapika. The two walked closely as they obviously knew each other. When Tompa approached them, they were vignt. Tompa tried a few times, but he couldn¡¯t get them to ept his Juice. He felt really depressed. He really didn¡¯t expect the neers this year to be so challenging to deal with. An¡¯s mouth raised slightly as he enjoyed Tompa¡¯s misfortune. But now, he is more interested in the Exam and what it will bring. Illumi, Killua, Hanzo, Leorio, Kurapika, and many others from the show appeared now. Besides, Chrollo, Pakunoda, and Uvogin were here as well. This Exam will be really interesting. At this time, someone seemed to scream as if he was big being ughtered. An looked back and saw someone on the ground screaming pain as dozen ying cards were embedded into his body. His injuries weren¡¯t fatal, and the one who hit him obviously just wanted to teach him a lesson. In front of him stood a tall man. This man¡¯s face had a teardrop-shaped tattoo on his left cheek and a star-shaped one on his right cheek. His hair was erect and pointing to the back. He held ying cards in his hand while a yful expression appeared on his face. Obviously, he was the one who hurt the person on the ground. Many eyes fell on him, but he didn¡¯t seem to care at all. Instead, he looked at the injured guy and said: ¡°Be careful next time. You have to apologize when you bump into someone.¡± The onlookers suddenly realized that the man on the ground bumped into that guy and didn¡¯t apologize, making him retaliate. But wasn¡¯t it excessive to injure him so much just because he bumped into you? An looked at the man fixedly before turning his gaze away and sneered with a thought: ¡®Even Hisoka is here, it seems like this year¡¯s Exam is interesting indeed.¡± The number of candidates increased as time went by, and during this time, An noticed that Ponzu and Pokkle. They were had small parts in the Exam, but they were somewhat interesting. Pokkle is average, but with some luck, he became a professional hunter. In the Chimera Ant arc in the show, Pokkle and Ponzu both discovered the Chimera Ant and wanted to report them, but they weren¡¯t lucky this time and were eaten. They were the Tragedy Duo of the Hunter X Hunter series. All the characters appeared, and no matter if they were strong or weak, An remembered them. After a long 24 hours, a man wearing a dark coat adorned with a red tie appeared. He hadvender hair curled at the end and blue eyes as well as a long-pointed chin. His most distinctive feature is his mustache andcking a mouth. This person is Satotz, the examiner for this part of the Exam. He looked around at the examinees with surprise and said: ¡°It seems that this test is quite lively.¡± As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 69 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 35: Race to The Finish Line Chapter 35: Race to The Finish Line The first Exam was very simple. All they had to do was follow Satotz through the passage and reach the second Exam. Many examinees followed Satotz dazedly. The long passage without an end in sight increases the psychological pressure on their mind. What seemed like a simple test was actually a test of physical strength and endurance, and mental fortitude. Only a few people were actually rxed as if they didn¡¯t feel any pressure. The total number of Candidates in the first Exam was 639, but before the Exam even started, Tompa left because of depression. So, the official number of people is 638. An led Gon and followed the candidates without any dy. There was no need to rush andplete the Exam after all. He just had to follow from behind. As they ran, An felt the candidates in front of him elerating. He knew that Satotz was moving faster. So the candidates had no choice but to speed up as well. At this time, another choice from the system prompted in front of An. [Ding! Please choose!] [1: Cross the passage at your fastest speed and reach the first. Reward: Increase the Amount of Nen by 2,000] [2: Cross the passage at your fastest speed and reach the first while eliminating 50 candidates using reasonable methods. Reward: Conqueror Haki (Hoashoku Haki) (Novice)] An was delighted. He didn¡¯t think that Conqueror Haki would appear now. The rewards were getting more and more advanced as time passed by. Without hesitation, An directly picked the second option. The reward isn¡¯t given immediately as he needed to eliminate 50 candidates while reaching the finish line as fast as possible. An wasn¡¯t in a hurry. With his current ability, it wasn¡¯t difficult to finish this task. Of course, he could do it if Uvogin doesn¡¯tpete with him. He knew that three people here could hinder him from being first: Chrollo, Uvogin, Hisoka, and Illumi, Killua¡¯s brother. These four are first-ss Nen users, they practiced Nen for a long time, and it won¡¯t be easy topete with them. As for Killua, Hanzo, and Kurapika, An didn¡¯t care at all. Because all of them still didn¡¯t learn their Nen, and their true potential was buried deep within their bodies. Therefore, he needs to be careful about the first four. An needed to surpass them all and reach the finish line as quickly as possible. An looked at Gon beside him and said: ¡°Gon, I will speed up, try to keep up.¡± Gon nodded: ¡°Ok.¡± An directly elerated. After a while, An already passed half of the candidates. An passed by like a gust of wind between them. ¡°Wow, be careful, you bastard!¡± When An passed by Kurapika and Leorio, thetter was taken aback and almost fell. Leorio cursed as he was ready to catch up to An, but thetter already disappeared from their view. Kurapika looked at An¡¯s back, disappearing, and said: ¡°Give up, Leorio, you can¡¯t catch him.¡± ¡°Damn it, if I ran into that guy, I would beat him up really good,¡± Leorio said with anger, but he had to admit that he couldn¡¯t catch up. Suddenly, a boy with sea urchin hair quickly passed them, and once again, Leorio almost fell. ¡°Hey, bastard! Not another one, stop there!¡± Leorio bellowed in anger. Gon, who was chasing An, heard this and turned back to apologize: ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I didn¡¯t mean to bump into you. By the way, my name is Gon. If you feel wronged,e see me at the end of this Exam, I want to chase after An now, so I¡¯m going ahead.¡± Leorio saw Gon innocently apologizing, and his anger was reduced by half, but he was still angry nheless: ¡°Huh, what the hell is that kid. He actually introduced himself so I can find himter. And who the hell is that An? Why is Gon chasing him?¡± ¡°The one named An should be the one who almost bumped into you the first time, right?¡± Kurapika guessed. Leorio was taken aback: ¡°In other words, they are together?¡± Kurapika nodded: ¡°Well, it should be. Before the Exam started, I paid attention to both of them, so I recognized them.¡± Hearing this, Leorio smiled and said: ¡°That¡¯s good then. After we finish this Exam, I will go find Gon. I don¡¯t want Gon to apologize, but that An kid has to apologize. He almost ran into me and didn¡¯t even say sorry.¡± ¡°I¡¯m afraid that would prove difficult,¡± Kurapika said almost without interest. As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 71 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 36: Race! Chapter 36: Race! The underground passage was like a bottomless pit, and the longer people ran, the helpless they felt. After 40 Kilometers, the first person was mentally broken as he fell back from the group. At this time, An was already advancing as fast as he could. He looked up and saw Killua on his skateboard with his hands in his pockets, moving forward leisurely. An didn¡¯t mind Killua as he continued forward and passed him. Killua, who was leisurely moving forward, immediately felt provoked by this and eximed: ¡°You think you¡¯re the fastest? Okay, we¡¯ll see.¡± Killua¡¯s expression became serious as he started going faster. At this time, a Hedgehog headed guy caught up to him. Killua saw Gon running so fast and couldn¡¯t help asking: ¡°Hey, are you chasing that guy?¡± ¡°Hmm.¡± Gon Nodded before his eyes lit up and eximed: ¡°Wow, your skateboard is so cool!!¡± ¡°Do you want to y?¡± ¡°Yes!¡± ¡°How old are you?¡± ¡°Twelve.¡± Killua felt happy and said: ¡°We¡¯re the same age!¡± ¡°Hehe, then we¡¯re probably the youngest candidates in this Exam.¡± Gon said sheepishly. ¡°My name is Killua. What is your name?¡± Killua rarely saw someone his age, so he had to ask. ¡°My Name is Gon.¡± ¡°Gon, did youe by yourself?¡± ¡°No, I came with An.¡± ¡°An?¡± Killua frowned: ¡°Is it the guy who just passed me?¡± ¡°It is.¡± Gon said. ¡°Why is he running so fast?¡± Killua wondered. Gon shook his head and said: ¡°I don¡¯t know, probably because he was bored running so slowly. So he wanted to reach the finish line quickly.¡± ¡°Hmm¡­ is it fun to race?¡± Killua muttered. ¡°Hey, Killua, I want to catch up to An, so I will go first.¡± Gon¡¯s Aura instantly enveloped him as his speed exploded. Killua, on the side, was stunned, he thought that Gon was better than normal kids at best, but he didn¡¯t expect to be so strong. ¡°That felt so strong. What is your background, Gon?¡± Killua muttered to himself, then put away the skateboard. Killua¡¯s mouth raised in a smile as he looked at the disappearing back of Gon: ¡°Interesting. It seems that this Exam can¡¯t be taken lightly. This hunter Exam is full of hidden masters.¡± Immediately, Killua disappeared from his ce as he started chasing after Gon with astonishing speed. He was born as a killer because he was one of the Zolyck. He received hellish training from an early age, and in terms of speed, even people with Nen can¡¯t match him. Hisoka and the disguised Illumi were advancing together unhurriedly at this time. ¡°Really unexpected from you, Illumi. You¡¯re actually here to participate in the Hunter Exam.¡± As he said this, Hisoka nced at Illumi with interest and continued: ¡°Moreover, you made yourself look like this, is there someone here you know?¡± ¡°Because Killua also is here to take part in the Hunter Exam, so I followed to watch it.¡± Hisoka was confused: ¡°Killua?¡± he raised his brows and said: ¡°Who is that?¡± ¡°Killua is my little brother,¡± Illumi said. Illumi was talking like a cold machine with an indifferent voice. Hisoka raised his brows even further and said: ¡°Well, well, I didn¡¯t think that you had a side of you that care about your little brother even though you¡¯re a cold killing machine. This is really unusual, Illumi.¡± Illumi didn¡¯t say anything back. At this time, a figure ran between the two of them and continued forward. An looked back and sighed in relief when the two didn¡¯t chase after him and muttered: ¡°Good, these two aren¡¯t going to chase after me. Only Chrollo and the others are left.¡± At this time, Illumi said: ¡°Who is that?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡± Hisoka shrugged. ¡°His Aura is quite powerful; you have to pay attention to him.¡± ¡°I know.¡± Hisoka smiled. ¡°Are you going to chase after him?¡± Illumi asked. Hisoka shook his head: ¡°I don¡¯t really want to go after him, but I already remembered his presence so that I can meet himter. What about you?¡± ¡°I¡¯m toozy to chase after him, and even if catch up to him, it won¡¯t give me any money, so it¡¯s meaningless.¡± Hisoka was speechless when he heard Illumi¡¯s reason. At this time, the hedgehog haired Gon passed through them. Hisoka looked at Gon¡¯s back, and his eyes squinted a little: ¡°a Little Kid?¡± ¡°Look as old as my little brother,¡± Illumi said. ¡°That¡¯s aura he was using.¡± Hisoka licked his lips: ¡°He has great potential if he learned Nen at such a young age.¡± Illumi nced at him and said: ¡°Do you want him?¡± ¡°Mm~, that¡¯s a delicious fruit that has yet to mature. I really want to pick him off.¡± Hisoka¡¯s eyes squinted like a pervert with a hint of excitement. ¡°If you see my brother, you will definitively look forward to him growing up even more than that kid.¡± ¡°Oh~, really?¡± At this time, Killua passed between them quickly while holding the skateboard in his hand. ¡°The one just now, is he your brother?¡± Hisoka stared at Killua¡¯s back. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s Killua.¡± Illumi nodded sincerely. Hisoka smiled: ¡°Not bad, is he like you, a professional Killer?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Illumi nodded: ¡°Killua is really good. In the future, he may be the one who inherits our father¡¯s business and be the head of the Zoldyck.¡± Hisoka¡¯s eyes lit up as he eximed: ¡°That¡¯s really incredible.¡± As promised, here is the new novel, and currently, the only Hunter X Hunter tranted Fanfiction. I¡¯m always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why I chose this novel. It¡¯s a novel from B.Faloo. Obtaining the chapters was quite challenging because getting a VIP is almost impossible for none Chinese. But in the end, I did everything I could, and I brought you this fantastic novel. I also promise that there will be many chapters this month. I¡¯ve also published chapter 71 on Patreon Plenty to read, and I¡¯m nning on adding more before the end of this month. I should also remind you that God of Choice System shares the same patreon as God Of Soul System and The Strongest Hokage. So by joining my patreon, you will get ess to three novels, which one of them (goss) has already been finished. If not, ament or a five stars review will be more than enough ?? Hope you¡¯ve enjoyed reading these chapters, and believe me when I say it¡¯s only getting better from now on. Chapter 37: Ice Field Chapter 37: Ice Field At the forefront, Chrollo, Uvogin, and Pakunoda were running behind Stotz. By the time An caught up to them, Satotz and the others were climbing a long staircase. An¡¯s eyes narrowed as he looked at the Staircase. The Staircase was very steep, and it will take a lot of effort to climb it quickly. Many candidates were sweating miserably right now. They thought it was just a rxing marathon, but they didn¡¯t expect it to be hard. This was hard because the tunnel was 100 below the ground, and Fresh Air was scarce in this ce. And with the limited space and the number of participants, the oxygen in the Air became even thinner. Therefore, they consumed much more energy than they usually would in this case, which increased the pressure on them. At this time, Satotz led the group up the Staircase with Chrollo and the others just behind him. They weren¡¯t even making an effort to climb the stairs. After all, they were masters of Nen. Something like climbing a staircase is effortless. An was now ten meters behind them. An had a n as he looked at them up ahead and directly jumped up. Moon Walk! An directly rushed forward while in the Air. Compared to running up the stairs, using Moon Walk was less straining than walking up the stairs. It consumed less energy and was way faster. In a short while, An surpassed Chrollo and the other two and even passed Stotz. ¡°What?! It¡¯s that bastard from the boat. He dares to jump over our heads.¡± Uvogin was angry and shocked, while Chrollo and Pakunoda didn¡¯t say a word and continued following Stotz. As for Satotz, he was shocked speechless for a while. He knew many abilities, but never in his life did he see someone walk on the Air and couldn¡¯t help eximing: ¡°Walking on the Air? What kind of ability is that? This is really an eye-opener.¡± An sessfully passed everyone using Moon Walk. When he was about to reach the end of the tunnel, he stopped. At this time, all candidates were still running and climbing the stairs. An¡¯s mouth raised into a smile. Now that he reached the finish line, he needs to eliminate 50 candidates and get his reward. He thought for a bit before he squatted down and touched the ground. Soon, his aura changed into Ice that covered the entire Staircase. Sen-Kiro Ice Field (A thousand Kilometers Ice Field) The Ice extended all the way down the Staircase. As long as it was frozen, then the difficulty will be doubled. An sneered, seeing Ice Field extend further and further from him. He just had to wait for 50 candidates to drop out due to his Ice before he passes the finish line, which is the door beside him. At this moment, Satotz, Chrollo, and the others stopped suddenly. They saw the stars frozen crystal, it was a beautiful scene, but for many candidates, it was like a nightmare. The steep Staircase was now frozen, and anyone who can¡¯t keep his bnce will slide down to the bottom. ¡°Hehe, did the candidate who ran in front of us do this? Interesting! Did he want to eliminate other candidates using this?¡± Stotz instantly understood An¡¯s intentions. But this move could offend him as the examiner and a couple of hundreds of candidates. Uvogin angrily shouted: ¡°That bastard, I will beat him up when I see himter.¡± Chrollo was dissatisfied with this as well. An¡¯s move undoubtedly provoked him. Chrollo directly said: ¡°Let¡¯s go up first, then talk.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Uvogin nodded. A few people took a step on the Ice without a problem, but they knew that if someone took a step carelessly, he would slip and slide down to his doom. In the end, a few candidates rolled down the stairs and knocked a few others with them. They were close to the examiner, but now, they were quite a distance away, and even if they seed and reach the end of the stairs, the examiner would¡¯ve left already, and they won¡¯t be able to get to the second Exam¡¯s site. That was equivalent to being eliminated from the Exam. An stood quietly at the top of the stairs while looking at the people down, being unable to climb with a sneer on his face. Finally, he looked at the exit and went out. As soon as he stepped out of the door, the System handed over his reward. [Ding! The Host is the first candidate to reach the end of the tunnel and sessfully eliminated more than 50 candidates using reasonable means. Reward: Conqueror Haki (Haoshoku Haki) (Novice)] Chapter 38: Milsy Wetlands Chapter 38: Milsy Wends The Conqueror¡¯s Haki is something that can instill fear in any being. It¡¯s the disposition of a king forming a force that can intimidate all beings. Whoever is exposed to that force would fall unconscious if his own will is weak. And at this moment, An gained such power. Haki is divided into three levels, namely, Novice, Intermediate, and Advanced. With each level, the requirement for his mental and physical power will increase. Right now, An¡¯s Conqueror¡¯s Haki was merely Novice level, so he can¡¯t control it at all. He can¡¯t use it on a single target for the time being. But he wasn¡¯t disappointed at all, since he knew only with when it reaches higher levels can his will control it. As long as he grows physically and mentally, An would be able to master the Conqueror¡¯s Haki gradually. His current goal is toplete the Hunter Exam. An looked back at the tunnel and sat down cross-legged. He turned two-thirds of the stairs into ice, which doubled the difficulty for the candidates. The next phase of the exam is passing through Milsy Wends. Many rare birds and exotic animals live in this forest; it was also known as the Swindler¡¯s Swamp because half of its creatures are cunning and greedy by nature. Like the Man-faced Ape, Noggin Lugging Tortoise, Frog-In-Waiting, Hypnosis Butterfly, Ruse Raven, ymore Mushroom¡­ Most of these animals use illusion and traps to get their prey, and that¡¯s the reason why this ce is called the Swindler¡¯s Swamp. Once you step into this forest, there is a high chance that you will be tricked. And to reach the second test, the candidates need to pass through this forest. Although An knew about this, he wasn¡¯t familiar with the road, so he could only wait for the time being for the others to get here. At this time, someone said from afar: ¡°Hey,e here.¡± An looked at the man walking out of the forest. ¡°Who are you?¡± An asked. Then, his brows frowned unconsciously. The man replied: ¡°I¡¯m the guide responsible for leading the Candidates through the forest.¡± ¡°Guide?¡± An looked at him suspiciously. ¡°Don¡¯t stand there in a daze. I will take you to the next Exam Venue.¡± ¡°What about the other candidates? Don¡¯t you need to wait for them?¡± ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter. I will leave a way for them to track us and pass the test. You¡¯re the first person to arrive here, so I will personally lead you there.¡± An pondered a little as he heads this, then he smiled: ¡°Then I will trouble you, Guide-san.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t mention it. It¡¯s my job.¡± The Guide said and walked toward the forest. An looked around and sneered before the following. After entering the forest, the surrounding quietened as if danger was approaching. An followed the Guide before stopping abruptly. ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± The Guide turned his head and asked An. An looked back: ¡°Guide-san, shouldn¡¯t we take the road? Why should we pass through the forest? Did you do this on purpose to lead me into the grove and then do me in?¡± The Guide suddenly panicked and instantly exining: ¡°Walking into the forest is faster, and there are no obstacles here.¡± ¡°Is there really no obstacle?¡± The Guide¡¯s face darkened, hearing An¡¯s question. ¡°What do you mean by your question? Do you doubt my identity?¡± ¡°That¡¯s it.¡± An replied as if he already knew everything, which he indeed did and said: ¡°That¡¯s the end of this trick, Guide-san. Ah, that¡¯s wrong, you¡¯re not even the Guide.¡± ¡°Since I was discovered, I will kill you first.¡± Suddenly, the Guide¡¯s face started changing. His face became hairy, his teeth sharpened, and his stature becamerger. In a blink of an eye, he turned into an ape-like animal. An sneered, seeing this: ¡°It¡¯s really a disguise, you¡¯re a Man-faced Ape?¡± The Man-faced Apes are dangerous creatures living in the Milsy Wends. They can imitate anything about a person, be it his appearance or his behavior. Although they are like this, they can¡¯t deal with humans without traps, and that¡¯s what this ape was currently doing. An realized this so-called Guide was a Man-Faced Ape as soon as it came out. He wanted to see what it wanted, so he pretended that he didn¡¯t know its tricks. Seeing the ape revealing himself, An directly used his Observation Haki and discovered that lurking around them. There were lots of apes. ¡°Come out. We can share this human.¡± As he said this, more than a dozen Man-Faced Ape immediately rushed out and surrounded An. Chapter 39: Public Enemy Chapter 39: Public Enemy ¡°You guys are dead!¡± Suddenly, An released his Conqueror¡¯s Haki out. All the grinning Man-Faced Apes fell on the ground with the impact, and their eyes turned white. An looked at them in disdain. A beast will always be a beast. Their wills are too weak, and even if they gained wisdom, they are helpless when faced with a mental attack. However, even humans with a strong will and mental fortitude won¡¯t face such an overwhelming impact. An looked at the unconscious Apes and smiled in satisfaction. Conqueror¡¯s Haki was efficient in cleaning out the trash without any effort. A few minutester, An walked out of the woods and returned to the tunnel¡¯s exit. At the entrance, Satotz, Hisoka, Chrollo, Uvogin, Illumi, Pakunoda, Kurapika, Leorio, Hanzo, and many other outstanding candidates stood waiting for the other candidates to gather. ¡°Ah, An, where have you been? I thought you already went ahead.¡± Gon was surprised and delighted when An appeared. ¡°Is he An?¡± Killua, by the side, asked Gon. They are already acquainted and somewhat friends now. An was about to answer Gon, but suddenly his expression changed as a ying carde flying at him like a shuriken. An snorted coldly and dodged the cards, then looked at Hisoka in the distance. Only Hisoka would use ying Cards as a means of attack after all. ¡°Sorry, it¡¯s just to make sure it¡¯s really you. I hope you don¡¯t mind.¡± Hisoka looked at An and smiled. ¡°Make sure it¡¯s me?¡± An frowned and said: ¡°What do you mean?¡± Gon beside him exined: ¡°An, just when we came out with Examiner Satotz, a guy pretended to be the real examiner, so Hisoka-san threw a few cards at both of them to see who is the real examiner. It turned out that a creature that could disguise as a human was the fake examiner. It was an ape-like creature.¡± An nced around and saw a corpse of a Man-Faced Ape. ¡°I also ran into a few Man-Faced Apes now, he pretended to be a Guide, so I followed him.¡± ¡°Then?¡± Gon was startled. ¡°Of course, I dealt with them and came back,¡± An said with a rxed tone. ¡°That¡¯s good.¡± Gon breathed a sigh in relief. ¡°Then¡­¡± An looked at Hisoka and said: ¡°Since there is a reason for this, let¡¯s forget about it, but next time you attack like this, I will think you¡¯re just trying to start a fight.¡± ¡°So, what will you do then?¡± Hisoka said curiously. ¡°I will make you pay, that simple,¡± An said coldly, and everyone knew that he wasn¡¯t joking. Suddenly, Conqueror¡¯s Haki overwhelmed them instantly and disappeared, which caused even Hisoka to profoundly and seriously look at An. This was something more potent than any killing intent. ¡°I see. I won¡¯t do it anymore then.¡± He returned to his rxed expression and smiled. No one could tell what¡¯s on his mind. An snorted coldly. He believed that his Conqueror¡¯s Haki could be used to discourage anyone from fighting him. After half an hour, candidates started appearing from the exit of the tunnel one after the other. After some time, a bald man started shouting: ¡°Which damn bastard froze the stairs down there? It made us consume so much energy to get here.¡± Following Baldy¡¯s roar, many started agreeing with him as well. ¡°Yes, who did it?¡± ¡°If you have the balls, stand up, don¡¯t be a coward.¡± And at this time, the people who knew who it was couldn¡¯t help and look at An, and amongst them is Satotz and Chrollo. An didn¡¯t escape and instantly cleared his throat with a cough and said: ¡°I¡¯m the person you¡¯re looking for.¡± His voice wasn¡¯t loud, but it instantly attracted the crowd¡¯s attention. An was already their number one enemy, the number one enemy of the public. ¡°It¡¯s that guy, right?¡± ¡°It seems so.¡± ¡°Examinee #123.¡± There were lots of discussions in the crowds, and at this time, the Baldy instantly roared: ¡°Bastard, why did you do that? Do you know how much effort it costed us to climb up?¡± All the examinees looked at An with hostility and anger. Without exception, everyone thought that what An did was excessive. An expected something like this already, but he didn¡¯t care because, even if all of them attacked together, they wouldn¡¯t be able to beat him. The only ones he was afraid of were people like Chrollo. But since Chrollo was silent, it didn¡¯t seem like he would interfere, which made An sigh in relief. Because once one of the Nen masters here like Hisoka, Chrollo, or Illumi wanted to fight, it will get troublesome for him. An faced the dissatisfied Candidates and shrugged: ¡°I think you all know that although this is the Hunter Exam, it¡¯s still apetition between candidates. The fewer thepetitors, the higher the chance to pass the exam, right? Therefore, you who can pass the test can be considered somewhat outstanding as for those who failed, they were weak. Even if I didn¡¯t do something, they would¡¯ve already be eliminated for various reasonster. So, strictly speaking, I reduced the number ofpetitors for you. You should thank me for that.¡± The Candidates were still not convinced by An¡¯s words and directly shouted: ¡°You bastard, you wanted to eliminate us as well.¡± ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right, if I can eliminate you, of course, I would.¡± An sneered. Everyone was shocked when they heard this. They didn¡¯t expect him to be so honest about it. His remark made them suddenly realize something; he was right. This was apetition. Suddenly, a voice sneered and said: ¡°Huh, then, if I kill you here, then I can be considered as reducing the number ofpetitors, right?¡± Hello everyone,Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled now. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 80 over there.Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful!Enjoy! Chapter 40: Fighting Again Chapter 40: Fighting Again An recognized the voice and also knew who said those words. It was Uvogin¡¯s voice. An already expected a conflict with Uvogin from the start. Because of the battle on the Ship, Uvogin wouldn¡¯t let it go. And although An found it troublesome, he wasn¡¯t afraid of fighting Uvogin at all. If he backed down here, it means he will get eliminated. His power improved slightly from when he fought Uvogin on the Ship, so even if he can¡¯t beat Uvogin, he can survive without injuries. Uvogin saw An¡¯s calm look and directly released his Aura. ¡°Come, let¡¯s fight again. This time, I will use my full power.¡± Uvogin showed a ferocious smile. ¡°Although you are strong, you can¡¯t beat me by yourself.¡± As he said this, An looked at Chrollo and Pakunoda and said: ¡°I suggest that yourrades help you here.¡± Uvogin was arrogant, and even though Chrollo was his leader, he wouldn¡¯t let anyone fight with him. So, An¡¯s suggestion seemed like an insult to him. And An was betting on this all along. He didn¡¯t want Chrollo to join the fight, or else he didn¡¯t have any chance to survive. And he was right. As long as Pakunoda and Chrollo don¡¯t interfere, he can deal with Uvogin. At this moment, Uvogin¡¯s punch was already in front of An. With An¡¯s recent experience, he dodged easily, and as soon as itnded on the ground, it exploded. ¡°What? You want to y hide and seek as you did on the Ship?¡± Uvogin failed tond a hit on An, but he wasn¡¯t angry. Instead, he sneered at An. He was implying that An was a coward that can¡¯t face him head-on. ¡°Well, since you want to fight head-on, let do so.¡± An¡¯s words made Uvogin smirk: ¡°Huh, fighting me, head-on? Okay, I will beat you to a pulp then.¡± ¡°Humph!¡± An snorted coldly. He knew that Uvogin was strong, and he was nervous fighting him. As soon as Uvogin started moving for the next punch, An already made an Icicle in his hand that directly collided with Uvogin¡¯s fist. In an instant, a shockwave brutally spread all around them, almost knocked down the other candidates. Seeing this kind of fight made the other candidates shocked speechless. Satotz didn¡¯t stop the conflict at all. He just stood by the side like a bystander. He nced at the time and said: ¡°I have no right to intervene in your fight, but I have to remind you that if one of you died because of a fight, then the other person will be eliminated no matter what.¡± The implication was simple: if this is a life and death battle, then it didn¡¯t matter if either of them won since elimination is certain for both of them. This was not good for both of them, but for the others, it was great news. If those two powerful candidates were eliminated, they would have a higher chance of passing the exam. An and Uvogin, of course, knew this, but neither of them stopped fighting at all. Upon seeing this, Satotz shook his head and said: ¡°Listen well, everyone, we will pass through the forest to the second exam next. Whoevergs behind and doesn¡¯t get there in time will be eliminated. Remember that well.¡± At this time, the tunnel¡¯s exist slowly closed. Dozens of candidates who were still climbing were desperate as they saw the light at the end of the tunnel disappeared. But no matter how much they cry or shout, they won¡¯t make it in this exam. At this time, Satotz started moving forward and leading the Candidates toward the second Exam location, Visca Forest Preserve. In the blink of an eye, only a few people stayed behind. After all, even though An¡¯s and Uvoging¡¯s fight was worth watching, they were here for the Hunter Exam. They didn¡¯t want to miss this opportunity to see a mere fight between two people. The people who stayed behind were Chrollo, Pakunoda, Hisoka, Illumi, Hanzo, Kurapika, Leorio, Gon, and Killua. An and Uvogin were extensively focused even to look away. Kurapika and Hanzo were both amazed by this fight, especially since they didn¡¯t train in Nen. An and Uvogin released their Aura without restrains. The momentum alone made Kurapika terrified. An helps half a meter-long icicle in his hands as he attacks Uvogin¡¯s fists. If this were a normal Icicle, it wouldn¡¯t even withstand one hit from Uvogin, but he used Shu to strengthen it. The collision between the two was akin to two angry beasts fighting for their territory. At this time, Uvogin¡¯s mind was really in turmoil. He felt An¡¯s current power, which was much stronger than he was before. The current An can face him head-on even though he isn¡¯t an Enhancer. ¡°Did this guy hold back when we fought on the Ship? Impossible! This is impossible!¡± Uvogin¡¯s Aura erupted like a volcano as he decided to end this fight quickly. Nen rushed to his fist as he prepared his most potent attack. An¡¯s eyes narrowed as he frowned. ¡®You think I¡¯d let you use your big bang impact that easily?¡¯ An used most of his Aura to condense a five-meter-long ice pir and threw it at Uvogin without holding anything back. This blow can¡¯t be underestimated at all, and Uvogin knew that. ¡°Damn it!¡± Uvogin¡¯s Big Bang Impact was interrupted by the ice pir, which angered Uvogin much. After a loud bang, the ice pir burst open. An took advantage of the cold Aura in the air and directly used another original attack. Ice Storm! In a blink of an eye, Uvogin was frozen in the Ice. Crack! Crack! A momentter, Uvogin used hi Aura and broke through the Ice. His eyes held his wrath as he looked at An. Hello everyone,Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled now. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 80 over there.Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful!Enjoy! Chapter 41: Battle! Chapter 41: Battle! An frowned slightly. He didn¡¯t expect Uvogin to free himself in less than three seconds. His Nen was too strong. ¡°Hu~.¡± But apparently, it wasn¡¯t easy for him to do so. Uvogin breathed heavily. He forcefully broke the Ice, but the cold Aura already invaded his body. Even if his body was more robust than steel, the low temperature caused some bodily functions damage. The low temperature weakened his strength, speed, and reaction. Seeing this, An clenched his hand, creating an Icicle, andunched an attack. Uvogin instantly poured Nen into his fist and punched the Icicle. As soon as he met the fist met the Icicle, the coldness prated Uvogin¡¯s hand, directly moving toward his heart. Uvogin was shocked and instantly used his Nen to drive away from the coldness. Once again, An attacked. Uvogin poured even more, Nen out to strengthen his body¡¯s offense and defense. As time went by, the onlookers each had a different thought. ¡°Are you a Transmuter?¡± An mmed his Icicle once again at Uvogin and stayed silent. The Aura around him turned into sharp Icicles andunched at Uvogin. Uvogin coldly snorted and faced them with his fist. Boom! The sharp Icicles shattered due to the impact. ¡°By changing the nature of Nen into Ice, the offense and defense improved a lot. The Ice can restrict the enemy¡¯s movement, and forming projectiles, such as Icicles and spears¡­¡± ¡°So, are you scared?¡± An sneered and interrupted Uvogin. ¡°So, I will use my fist to destroy your Ice. No matter what shape it takes, it will break facing my fists.¡± Anughed as he heard Uvogin¡¯s words. Indeed, Uvogin is strong; however, he wasn¡¯t the strongest. An¡¯s palm radiated his cold Aura as the air¡¯s moisture immediately condensed and turned into Ice crystals and sted out toward Uvogin. Uvogin readied his fists, and both hands punched toward the Crystals. Shortly after, a strong wind erupted out of his fists and directly smashed hundreds of crystals. ¡°As I said, I will crush your Ice,¡± Uvogin said with triumph. In the next second, his pupil contracted as a thick Icicle fell at him from the sky. Under An¡¯s controls, the Icicle fell on Uvogin¡¯s head, causing a massive explosion. After the dust and the small Ice crystals dispersed, revealing Uvogin whose blood fell on the ground. Even though his body was as hard as steel, thest blow from An prated his defenses and injured him. At this moment, Uvogin was standing motionless with a gloomy face. It was like a behemoth about to lose control. ¡°This isn¡¯t good.¡± An felt Uvogin¡¯s anger, and instantly looked at Gon and said urgently: ¡°Gon, you should go. First, there is an exam going.¡± Gon hesitated. Killua felt that this fight was about to get dangerous even for bystanders, so he directly pulled Gon and said: ¡°Let¡¯s go, Gon. That guy named An is pretty good, so he should be able to deal with the big guy, so let¡¯s keep up with the Examiner.¡± ¡°Well, An, be careful.¡± Although Gon wanted to stay, he knew that this was a one on one match between An and Uvogin, so he had no way of helping here. Illumi saw Killua and Gon leave, so he quietly followed. ¡°Ah~, well, I will leave as well.¡± Hisoka, who was a good friend with Illumi, naturally followed him. Kurapika, Leorio, and Hanzo also took their leave when they saw the others leave. After all, their purpose was to take the Hunter Exam, not watch this fight. If the Examiner gets too far away, they will risk elimination. But the main reason for their leave was the Aura Uvogin was radiating. They felt threatened, just staying there. If they stay here, they will also get dragged into this fight. And they knew very well that this wasn¡¯t someone they could hope to fight. ¡°Chief, Pakunoda, you go ahead first as well,¡± Uvogin said while controlling his anger with incredible difficulty. Chrollo didn¡¯t say a thing. He just looked at An deeply, then took a step forward, and Pakunoda followed after him. Seeing that everyone had left, Uvogin looked at An with a grim expression and said: ¡°Okay, let¡¯s see how you¡¯re going to die? Will you be squashed like an ant, or will you be blown away without leaving a body behind?¡± An coldly said: ¡°Idiot!¡± As a wise man, he didn¡¯t want to fight Uvogin right now, and it¡¯s meaningless to fight him now as well. Uvogin wasn¡¯t someone the current him could kill. So he knew his limit. Besides, An angered him too much when he drew the first blood. Therefore, Uvogin won¡¯t give up with just beating him up now. ¡°I will kill you!¡± Uvogin violently shouted as he punched at An, who was already highly alert. An ice wall rose and blocked Uvogin, but it couldn¡¯t resist even a second before it shattered. An instantly shed forward and shed with his Icicle at Uvogin. Uvogin reacted quickly and sent a fist toward the Icicle shattering it, while An already expected this using Observation Haki and sent a kick at the unguarded chest of Uvogin. Uvogin moved back a few steps. ¡°Come again!¡± Uvogin rubbed his chest, which was aching, and shouted. A Crimson red aura enveloped him as he was ready to unleash everything he had. ¡°Idiot, I¡¯m already one step ahead.¡± An didn¡¯t want to fight anymore, so he directly used Moon Walk, stepped over Uvogin¡¯s head, and went toward the Forest. With his current speed, it won¡¯t be hard to catch the other candidates. Uvogin gritted his teeth in anger, and although he was stronger than An, he couldn¡¯t do anything to thetter when he was flying. An was escaping, and he could do nothing about it. He could only watch An bitterly as he left and give up. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 82 over there. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 42: Mist Chapter 42: Mist An walked in the air and quickly distanced himself from Uvogin. He quickly caught up with Gon and his group. Gon and Killua were in the front, while Illumi and Hisoka were silently following them six or seven meters behind. Behind them were Hanzo, Kurapika, and Leorio. Chrollo and Pakunoda were at the end, and since Satotz and the other examiner were the first to move, they were some distance ahead of the rest. An didn¡¯t go down to meet Gon, but instead, he overtook him and directly went toward Satotz¡¯s group. Even though he was moving high up in the air, the Mist still followed. This fist was the most dangerous part of the Forest, because it¡¯s full of traps. All the creatures of this Forest use this Mist to ambush people. Once you step in, you will be attacked. At this time, Satotz led the candidates into the thick fog, and instantly as he did, the systems gave him a choice. [Ding! Please make a choice!] [1: Take the opportunity to eliminate 50 candidates in the Forest. Reward: Mysterious Treasure Chest x 1] [2: Kill 50 forest creatures and eliminate 50 candidates. Reward: Shunpo (sh Steps)] sh Steps from the world of Bleach? An¡¯s eyes lit up. sh Steps is more advanced than Soru. Moreover, it was definitively better than relying on Nen to augment his speed. As for the first option¡¯s reward, An already had a Mysterious Treasure Chest that he still didn¡¯t open yet. Therefore, it¡¯s natural that he chooses the second option. His current target: Kill 50 Creature from the Forest, and Eliminate 50 candidates. Aaaaaaaah! An suddenly heard a screaming from the fog, he easily decerned the source of the scream. They were the candidates who fell into the traps of the monsters in the Forest. However, even when trapped, they could deal with it; after all, they weren¡¯t average candidates at this point. It wasn¡¯t easy for the creatures to eat them. An instantly used Observation Haki to increase his senses. Whether it¡¯s a monster or a candidate, no one can hide from him in ten meters radius. Now, all he had to do was eliminating 50 candidates and killing 50 monsters. One, two, three¡­ An started finishing monsters quickly. He will eliminate anything that enters his perception. If it¡¯s a monster, he will kill it. If it was a candidate, he would knock them out. After all, no matter what, he couldn¡¯t kill candidates. After all, he wasn¡¯t someone who can kill innocent people. If it were a quest from the system, he wouldn¡¯t hesitate, but he wouldn¡¯t do it since there is no need to kill. For his goal, he wouldn¡¯t spare any effort. In just ten minutes, he killed 20 monsters and eliminated 30 candidates, and the number was still growing. All of this was for the sh Steps. Aaaaah! He knocked out another two candidates. Suddenly, An felt the ground under him tremble, and in the next moment, a huge mouth emerged from the ground, trying to swallow him. It was the Frog in Waiting! Because it was too big and slow, this monster hides underground, waiting for anything to pass above it and directly swallow it. But this time, it met An, who swung an Icicle at it killing it without mercy. ¡°Wow, help, can someone help me?¡± Several meters away, a turtle was attacking an examinee. This turtle had a few flowers on its back. When it meets a prey, it will directly open its mouth, swallow it, and then digest it slowly. But in a sh, An shed in front of the turtle, killing it in one swift attack. ¡°Thank you. You saved me.¡± The candidate who was rescued thanked An. ¡°You don¡¯t need to. I¡¯m not here to save you.¡± An sneered and directly kicked the man knocking him out on the spot. Fainting here is the same as being killed. The huge monsters here would love a prey like this one. But An didn¡¯t care; he had been merciful and only knocked him out, so if he lives or dies, it¡¯s his fate. The Candidates who were moving at the front noticed something strange. He soon concluded that besides monsters, there are candidates attacking others under the cover of the Mist. ¡®This is too much! This is just pure evil,¡¯ they thought. ¡®They want to reduce the number ofpetitors¡¯ others thought. Although the Satotz noticed this, he didn¡¯t care. After all, his task is to lead the candidates, not protecting them. Right now, the Mist blocked their vision, and only those who reach the second Exam¡¯s venue had a chance to be hunters. This is the harsh truth of the Exam; after all, everyone participating in this Exam should be ready toy his life down from the start. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 82 over there. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 43: Killing Intent! Chapter 43: Killing Intent! In the mist, screams and shouts for help continued to echo from time to time. Five candidates at this time were banded together while looking vigntly at the approaching An. In their eyes, An was a cold-blooded killer. Not only did he kill arge number of Monsters, but also dozens of candidates as well. He was attacking anyone regardless if it was an enemy or not. And unfortunately for them, An spotted them. ¡°As long as I kill a few more, my quest will bepleted.¡± An sneered. He counted his victims, and he only needed five more candidates to get his reward. The five of them looked at An with puzzled looks and asked: ¡°Wait! We didn¡¯t do anything to you. Why do you want to attack us?¡± ¡°Attack?¡± An almost chuckled as if he heard a joke: ¡°Then, I will give you a chance to attack me. Let¡¯s see what you can do.¡± The five candidates gritted their teeth and made their mind to attack An. Even though they were some of the few people that passed the underground tunnel, they still couldn¡¯t face a monster like An. At this moment, an invisible force was radiating from An. ¡°This, what is this?!¡± Boom! The feeling came from the depth of their soul, a fear that made them tremble. The five candidates couldn¡¯t move at all. Their body was being suppressed, and their legs couldn¡¯t even take a step forward. And finally, their consciousness became hazy. ¡°Oh? Not bad, you able to remain standing in front of my Conqueror¡¯s Haki. It seems like you¡¯re not just some random trash.¡± An said with surprise. But the next sentence was said in a cold tone: ¡°But, look at you, I¡¯m standing here, can you kill me?¡± With the Conqueror¡¯s Haki pressing them, it was hard for the five candidates even to stay conscious. As long as they rxed for a second, they will fall unconscious. Finally, they couldn¡¯t bear it any longer and fainted. As soon as they fell, An heard a Ding in his head. [Ding! You sessfully killed 50 Monster and Eliminated 50 candidates. Reward: sh Steps] ¡°So, this is the way to use sh Steps of the Shinigami?¡± The information about sh Steps appeared in An¡¯s head as soon as he got the reward. Suddenly a smile bloomed on his face. This kind of technique was handy; it was better than Soru by a few times, at least. Not to mention, increasing speed using Nen wasn¡¯t as fast or as efficient as sh steps. It only relied on Stamina and was much faster. In other words, even if he was using Zetsu, he can still use sh Steps. Now, he could use Moon Walk, Conqueror¡¯s Haki, Observation Haki, and sh Steps, each one of those skills didn¡¯t need Nen at all. They were skills outside the scope of Nen. Therefore, An had a significant advantagepared to others. Even if he can¡¯t use Nen, his power won¡¯t be significantly affected as long as he possesses the ability. ¡°Then, I should head toward the next Exam.¡± An¡¯s figure shed as if he disappeared. He moved along the Forest with great speed using the newly acquired sh Steps. As for Gon, An believed that he could pass through the Forest without any problem. An guessed that after passing through this Forest, Gon would be friends with Kurapika and Leorio. It¡¯s like when they were in the Underground tunnel. Even without Gon and Killua deliberately befriending each other, they would still be attracted to each other. Simrly, Gon, Kurapika, and Leorio can be friends as quickly. Therefore, An wasn¡¯t worried at all. At this time, Hisoka, who was following Gon and the others, licked his lips as he looked at Illumi by his side with an evil smile. ¡°What should I do? I want to kill that Hedgehog headed kid. The three with him also seem delicious.¡± ¡°Ah, of course, you can do whatever you want,¡± Illumi said indifferently. ¡°Where Can I find Killua? Can I Kill him as well?¡± Hisoka¡¯s mouth twitched as he nced at Illumi. Suddenly, terrible killing intent filled the ce as a head looked at Hisoka nkly. ¡°Then, I will kill you, Hisoka.¡± ¡°Ah~, what a terrible Killing Intent. It doesn¡¯t seem like you¡¯re joking.¡± Hisoka squinted: ¡°I didn¡¯t think that you care about your brother so much!¡± At this time, Killua, who was walking in the front, stopped suddenly as his face was filled with cold sweat. ¡°What¡¯s wrong, Killua? Why did you stop?¡± Gon was a little confused as he asked. Killua didn¡¯t reply before he felt this terrible presence belonged to none other than his brother. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 83 over there. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 44: Bro-Con Chapter 44: Bro-Con ¡°Is brother participating in the Hunter Exam as well?¡± Feeling the terrifying Killing Intent, Killua instantly turned his head and looked back. But due to the mist, he couldn¡¯t see who was behind him. He could only see two silhouettes standing beside each other. ¡°That magician ying with cards should be the one who was behind us, along with the guy full of needles on his face. Behind them should be the blond boy and the uncle wearing sunsses along with that Baldy. Thest one is the man with a cross tattoo in the center of his forehead with the woman. The Killing intent was released by one of them. It¡¯s most likely the magician or the needle face.¡± Killua¡¯s expression suddenly changed as he thought: ¡°Could it be that strange needle face is my brother in disguise? That¡¯s possible! Brother is a disguise master. It¡¯s not a problem for him to pretend like someone else. The Killing intent was just too simr to my brother, almost the exact same, and this kind of killing intent can¡¯t be mimicked, which means that the needle man is my brother Illumi. Damn it, why is that guy here. Does he want to monitor me like before? What a control freak!¡± Breaking his train of thoughts, Killua directly looked at Gon and said: ¡°Gon, let¡¯s go.¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Gon nodded and didn¡¯t ask what happened. He just nced behind and muttered: ¡°I don¡¯t know how¡¯s An fight with Uvogin going. I hope he can hurry and catch up to us.¡± Hisoka seemed to notice Gon and Killua speeding up and said: ¡°Illumi, they are speeding up. It seems that your Killing Intent scared them.¡± ¡°Ah, this isn¡¯t good.¡± Illumi suddenly realized something and said: ¡°Killua probably noticed that my killing intent.¡± ¡°Oh?¡± Hisoka was a little surprised: ¡°Is your brother so sensitive to your killing intent?¡± ¡°I¡¯m his big brother, after all,¡± Illumi said with a hint of pride. ¡°I think there is more to it than that,¡± Hisoka said with a smile. Illumi turned his head and looked at him: ¡°Do you think that he is my son?¡± Hisoka was speechless as he wondered how does Illumi¡¯s brain work. He just changed the topic: ¡°So, your brother Killua now knows that you¡¯re following him?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Illumi nodded: ¡°It¡¯s very likely that he already guessed that I¡¯m here.¡± ¡°Indeed. No matter how your appearance change, your presence can¡¯t be disguised. I didn¡¯t think someone of your caliber would make such a newbie¡¯s mistake. I think you should hide your Killing intent.¡± Illumi looked at Hisoka nkly and said: ¡°It¡¯s your fault for irritating me.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t say that. I just wanted to see how much you care about your brother, but in the end, and unfortunately, you¡¯re a total Bro-con.¡± ¡°Brother Control?¡± Illumi looked at Hisoka with a dull expression and asked: ¡°What does that mean?¡± ¡°It means that you¡¯re the kind of person that loves his brother too much and wants to control everything in his life.¡± Illumi: ¡°You¡¯re not any better yourself.¡± Hisoka: ¡°¡­¡± ¡°Okay, I have to follow Killua. Let¡¯s get going.¡± Hisoka sighed as he saw Illumi disappear as he muttered: ¡°That is really too much. He values his brother too much and is so cold to his friends. He clearly said that we could y together, but then he went off alone.¡± Kurapika, Leorio, and Hanzi were walking in fear inside the mist. Although their vision was blocked, there is a lingering smell of blood in the air. Massive corpses of monsters appeared from time to time, and along them were corpses belonging to other candidates. ¡°Many people died.¡± Kurapika frowned. The cruelty of the Hunter Exam was beyond his expectation. The forest is only the way toward the second Exam, and it was so dangerous. ¡°However, thanks to the team ahead, we didn¡¯t encounter any danger.¡± Hanzoughed. He is a professional Ninja, so even the cruel scenes he saw didn¡¯t bother him much. ¡°Ah, what can be this hard.¡± Leorio suddenly hit something. Looking up, all three of them saw an Ice sculpture. ¡°This is¡­¡± Kurapika frowned. ¡°That guy named An did this. He seems to have an ability to freeze people.¡± Hanzo guessed. Leorio was surprised hearing this and eximed: ¡°What?! He was fighting that big guy at the tunnel¡¯s exit. How did he get here?¡± ¡°The battle here probably ended for a while now, which means he is ahead of us already.¡± Hanzo analyzed. ¡°No, I didn¡¯t see him at all. Does he know how to fly?¡± Leorio couldn¡¯t believe such a thing. Kurapika said in a low tone: ¡°Let¡¯s go. We need to be careful. Maybe he is waiting in front of us, so the three of us must work together. We can¡¯t die here.¡± ¡°We can die?¡± Leorio almost shouted from fear. ¡°Get out of here if you¡¯re afraid, Leorio.¡± Kurapika nced at him and shook his head. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 85 over there. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 45: Dangerous Guys Chapter 45: Dangerous Guys Leorio felt that Kurapika was mocking him, so he instantly walked forward and puffed his chest out. ¡°Who said I¡¯m scared? If that guy dares to attack me, I will beat him to a pulp.¡± After trying to sound cool, Leorio took a dagger out of his pocket. Seeing this, Kurapika almost hit Leorio: ¡°Give up on that Leorio, even adding Hanzo and me, we three can¡¯t even be his opponents. Not just An, in this Exam, at least for candidates are way above our level. If these few want to attack the other candidates, we will be killed by them without any way to defend against them. This is what the Hunter Exam is like. Only the strong can pass. What we have to do is try to avoid them as much as possible.¡± Leorio fell silent, but Hanzo spoke. ¡°Excuse me, Kurapika, don¡¯tpare me to the two of you.¡± ¡°What?¡± Kurapika was taken aback by Hanzo¡¯s words: ¡°Do you mean that you¡¯re better than the two of us?¡± ¡°Of course.¡± Hanzo nodded: ¡°I¡¯m a Ninja, don¡¯t underestimate me. I¡¯m not at the same level as you two.¡± Hearing Hanzo¡¯s words, Kurapika and Leorio weren¡¯t happy. ¡°Keep bragging, you baldy.¡± Leorio mocked. ¡°I¡¯m not bald. It¡¯s a skinhead.¡± Hanzo corrected as he was concerned about this. Kurapika sized Hanzo up and down then said: ¡°Don¡¯t think that you¡¯re the only one who received professional training. I¡¯m trained as well, and from what I can see, you¡¯re not that scary. Therefore, you¡¯re not much stronger than me. Maybe you¡¯re slightly stronger, but you¡¯re certainly can¡¯tpare to the others. In my opinion, there are at least five people stronger than you in this Exam.¡± ¡°Oh? Tell me then, who are they?¡± Hanzo looked at Kurapika with interest because he already knew them himself. Leorio looked at Kurapika curiously and wanted to know who can make Kurapika this afraid. After thinking for a bit, Kurapika said: ¡°First of all, there is An and Uvogin. You already saw their power when they fought. The guy named An is beyondmon sense since he can use Ice to attack and freeze others. As for the big guy, Uvogin, he feels like a beast instead of a human, and his body seems stronger than iron. His most terrifying aspect is his explosive power, which most likely surpassed the limits of humans.¡± Hanzo put a hand on his chin and said: ¡°Um¡­ You¡¯re right. Ordinary humans can¡¯t go beyondmon sense. I think they can use Nen.¡± ¡°Nen?¡± Kurapika looked at Hanzo, puzzled as he didn¡¯t recognize the word. Hanzo was more informed than both Kurapika and Leorio, so he exined: ¡°I don¡¯t know the specifics of that power, but people can freely manipte life energy in their bodies, and this energy is called Nen.¡± ¡°Anyone can use it? I can learn it as well then.¡± Kurapika thought for a while and made up his mind to learn Nen after the Exam. Of course, Leorio was thinking of learning Nen after hearing this. Hanzo coughed and said: ¡°It seems that I have told you two something you didn¡¯t know about; shouldn¡¯t you thank me?¡± Kurapika looked at him and said: ¡°I¡¯m not sure about this Nen thing, but thanks anyway. But let¡¯s go back to the previous topic. It doesn¡¯t matter whether An and Uvogin are Nen users. They are better than you.¡± Hanzo shrugged and said: ¡°Well, that¡¯s obvious seeing the way they fought. What about the remaining three?¡± ¡°The guy with the ying cards called Hisoka, the guy that has needles all over his face, and the guy that has a cross tattoo on his forehead. These three are very strong and dangerous.¡± Hanzo nodded and nced at Kurapika in admiration and said: ¡°Your instincts are spot on. Those three are indeed quite strong; I can¡¯t feel their presence, which shows how strong they are.¡± Leorio stopped their talk and said: ¡°Okay, okay, stop with the mystery. They are powerful, so what do we do now?¡± ¡°Indeed, our only chance is for us to fight together when someone like that decides to attack.¡± Kurapika frowned. Looking at both of them, Hanzo touched his head with a confident smile all over his face and said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, no matter what danger we face, we will move forward, right?¡± Hearing this, Kurapika and Leorio both brightened up, and the tense atmosphere dispersed. ¡°That¡¯s right. We are here to take part in the Hunter exam. No matter what enemy or obstacle we face, we will deal with it.¡± ¡°Okay then, let¡¯s go! Hurry up. We need to get out of this mist and reach the next part of the Exam.¡± The three temporarily formed a party. Behind them, Uvogin already caught up to Chrollo and Pakunoda. ¡°Chief, let¡¯s go faster.¡± Uvogin urged. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, let the ones ahead open a path for us. We only need to follow behind.¡± Chrollo calmly said. Pakunoda nced at Uvogin and asked: ¡°You just want to catch up to that guy named An, right?¡± Uvogin angrily said: ¡°Of course, he dared to run away in the middle of our fight.¡± ¡°About that, did he use that trick he used before to walk on air?¡± Chrollo asked. ¡°Well, that¡¯s what he did.¡± Uvogin angrily nodded. ¡°Chief, what is that ability? Is it Nen?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡± Chrollo shook his head and changed the topic: ¡°But I¡¯m very interested in it.¡± ¡°Then, Chief, you can find a chance and use your skill the Bandit¡¯s secret to steal his ability.¡± Uvogin eagerly suggested. ¡°As long as he can¡¯t run away using that, I can kill him.¡± ¡°It¡¯s called Skill Hunter.¡± Uvoginughed: ¡°Haha, sorry. What is your decision, Chief?¡± ¡°The ability to steal other¡¯s skill isn¡¯t simple; there are many conditions toplete.¡± Chrollo said in a deep tone: ¡°He is very vignt of us, and I think he may already know our true identity from the time we were on the Ship.¡± Uvogin and Pakunoda were surprised by this. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 85 over there. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 46: Great Stamp Chapter 46: Great Stamp After two hours, 180 people passed the forest and reached Visca Forest Preserve, where the second part of the Exam is taking ce. The number of candidates dropped from the 700 gathered in the underground Tunnel, and An alone caused 100 eliminations. The other 400 were eliminated by various incidents in the forest as well as exhaustion in the Tunnel. The candidates gathered here are the best of the best amongst the ten thousand participants. Amongst the current candidates were An, Gon, Killua, Kurapika, Leorio, Hanzo, Hisoka, Illumi, Chrollo, Uvogin, Pakunoda, and even Pokkle and Ponzu were here. The atmosphere was quite tense since everyone had a waking call on how cruel this Exam was. An stood with Gon and Killua. No one dared to get close to him after seeing his fight with Uvogin. He wore a nonchnt expression on his face while Gon was pondering something and asked: ¡°An, I have a question. You stayed behind to fight Uvogin, but how did you get here faster than us?¡± Killua was also interested in this. An said he used Moon Walk to fly over, which caused Gon and Killua to have different reactions. Gon seemed to understand and nodded because he saw An use Moon Walk already. But Killua, who never saw Moon Walk before, didn¡¯t believe that someone can fly. He only believes what he sees. He still had his guard up against An like the other candidates. He felt threatened by the power An used against Uvogin. If Gon wasn¡¯t friends with An, he would distance himself as much as he could. An didn¡¯t bother with other people¡¯s thoughts, as his goal was finishing the Hunter Exam. He only participated because of Gon in the end. Suddenly, the bell rang, announcing the start of the second part of the Exam. A woman with a starfish hairstyle walked out along with a fat man with a body like a mountain. ¡°Wee to the second part of the Hunter Exam. I¡¯m the head examiner Menshi.¡± ¡°I¡¯m the assistant examiner Buhari.¡± After a brief introduction, Munshi announced the topic of the second part of the Exam: ¡°For this part, we will test your cooking.¡± An instantly took Gon with him before Menshi finished talking. ¡°Let¡¯s go, Gon,e with me.¡± Killua saw this and said: ¡°Hey, where are you going? We still don¡¯t know what this Exam is about, right?¡± ¡°I already know. If you want, juste with us.¡± After hearing this, Killua hesitated a little but followed them in the end. Although he was wary of An, he didn¡¯t fear Gon, and since Gon believed in An, he will try trusting An. On the other hand, Killua felt something indescribable from An. As the three left, some people noticed but didn¡¯t dare follow them, except for one person, Illumi. He was paying attention to his little brother, and seeing him following An, he followed after them. Of course, since Illumi followed, Hisoka couldn¡¯t help ask him: ¡°Illumi, don¡¯t you need to listen to the examiner for the next part?¡± ¡°The one named An seems to know what this exam is about in advance, and I saw Killua following him,¡± Illumi said nkly. ¡°Well, you can go then. I will stay here to confirm what we should do.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Illumi nodded stiffly. An looked around in the Visca Forest Preserve with Gon and Killua tagging along. ¡°An, where are we going?¡± Gon asked curiously. ¡°We¡¯re here.¡± An pointed at arge group of what seemed like a boar, but the most eye-catching feature of this boar was its nose, which was just too big. ¡°Wow, what is that? A wild boar?¡± Gon eximed in surprise. ¡°It¡¯s a wild boar with a nose that could smash a tree. It¡¯s the most violent wild boar in the world.¡± An exined. ¡°So, this pig is rted to the second part of the exam?¡± Killua guessed. An nodded: ¡°Yes, there are two steps to this part of the Exam. The first part is roasting this big, so we need to get one and go back.¡± Killua and Gon didn¡¯t question An about his knowledge. Because one already trusted An, and the other trusted Gon. At this time, the wild boars discovered An and the others using their sense of smell. The leader of the pack instantly rushed at them while the other wild boars followed it. In their eyes, An and the others were invading their territory. ¡°You stay back. I will deal with this.¡± An said solemnly. Gon and Killua were ready to attack, but the moment they heard An¡¯s words, they fell back obediently and jumped up a tree. The group of rushing wild boars was already in front of An, who didn¡¯t seem concerned at all. Instantly, Conqueror¡¯s Haki erupted from his body. Under its impact, the pigs fell one by one after their eyes rolled back into their head. Their huge bodies fell on the ground with a thud. ¡°Oh, amazing!!¡± Gon Eximed loudly. ¡°What happened just now? What did you do?¡± Killua looked at this scene in awe. An didn¡¯t move his body, but the wild boars all fell unconscious as if a boulder crashed their heads. ¡°Arge group of beasts fell within a second. Even grandfather and father can¡¯t do it, so how?¡± Killua was in awe. He already respected An. He was strong and young. ¡°Come on. You have to go back first.¡± The two quickly agreed. They carried a wild boar and started heading back. Humans were at the top of the food chain, so no matter how powerful a beast is, it was just lunch. There is no escape for it from being served on their dining table. ¡°An, aren¡¯t you going back as well?¡± Gon looked back and asked. ¡°You can go first. I have something to do.¡± An waved his hand at them. ¡°Oh, okay.¡± Gon nodded without asking much. Killua did the same as well, and the two left. An looked behind him and said: ¡°Come out.¡± Not far away, a figure walked out slowly from behind a tree. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 87 over there. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 47: Illumi Chapter 47: Illumi The one who was hiding was Killua¡¯s big brother, Illumi. Observation Haki came in handy. Since without it, there is no way for An to notice him. Illumi was surprised by the fact that An sensed him. After all, he was a renowned assassin. Hiding his presence was one of his best traits, and even a first-ss Nen user would be hard-pressed to notice him. But at this moment, he hid the fact that he was Killua¡¯s brother and introduced himself: ¡°I¡¯m the candidate with the tag Number 301. I lost my way in the forest. Fortunately, I found you here.¡± ¡°No!¡± An shook his head and smirked: ¡°Illumi Zoldyck,e on. I¡¯m not that clueless.¡± Illumi didn¡¯t react; his face was still holding his impassive expression. ¡°I¡¯m Gittarackur, a candidate with the #301 tag.¡± Illumi didn¡¯t say anything else. An was about to say something else, but the system interrupted him. [Ding! Please choose] [1: Anger Illumi and make him attack you in any way. Reward: Maniption Nen: Disguise!] [2: Anger Illumi and initiate an attack. Reward: First-rate assassination technique!¡± Disguise and assassination? Disguise is handy. Impersonating people will prove helpful in the future for various activities. Assassination techniques are the specialties of the Zoldyck. Killua often used their techniques in the show. But currently, An was more interested in Illumi¡¯s disguise. As a professional assassin, Illumi can judge his opponent¡¯s power and seize the best opportunity to take him out. An didn¡¯t dare think that he could kill or win against Illumi, but at least he can annoy him or anger him with just a few words. An knew Illumi¡¯s weakness, his only weakness known in the show, which is Killua. Thinking for a bit, An smiled and said: ¡°Killua Zoldyck should be your brother, right?¡± Illumi didn¡¯t react even a little bit. But he was still surprised. He didn¡¯t expect that this person knew about Killua being from the Zoldyck. This made him a little bit interesting to see How much An knew. ¡°You¡¯re here for Killua, right?¡± An sneered. Illumi still didn¡¯t respond. If this guy knows too much, I will get rid of him here. He wouldn¡¯t risk his and his brother¡¯s safety. He was a professional assassin. That¡¯s why he won¡¯t attack someone with a mysterious origin. An looked at Illumi and smiled: ¡°As an older brother, you seem to care a lot about little Killua.¡± Seeing that Illumi was still unresponsive, he smiled again and said: ¡°It seems like I made a mistake. You¡¯re not Killua¡¯s brother.¡± He stayed silent for a bit, then asked: ¡°Then it wouldn¡¯t matter if I kill Killua, right?¡± Illumi¡¯s killing intent erupted and locked into An. [Ding! The Host has sessfully angered Illumi and made him attack using his Killing Intent. Reward: Maniption Nen: Disguise!] An was stunned. It was so easy, angering Illumi after all. Illumi didn¡¯t attack him yet, but his killing intent was considered an attack by the system. But the problem now is how will he deal with the angered Illumi. ¡°Such a strong Killing Intent. It seems like I was right. Killua is your brother.¡± Illumi looked nkly at Ana said with a cold tone: ¡°If you dare touch Killua, I will kill you.¡± Despite releasing his Killing intent, Illumi hasn¡¯t attacked yet. He was still assessing his opponent¡¯s strength at this moment. But since An received his reward, he didn¡¯t need to continue doing this and directly spoke: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t attack Killua. I was joking with you. I just wanted to see your reaction.¡± Instantly the killing intent disappeared as if there wasn¡¯t any in the first ce¡­ Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 87 over there. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 48: Nen’s Stomach! Chapter 48: Nen¡¯s Stomach! ¡®He is definitively a Bro-con, just because I threatened Killua, he released that terrifying Killing Intent, and when he knew that no one would harm Killua, the Killing Intent disappeared without a trace. A total Brother Control type.¡¯ An thought. Illumi looked at n and said: ¡°So it was a joke. I almost killed you.¡± An was speechless. This guy¡¯s killing intent appeared and disappeared as if he was pushing a button. But as expected from a professional assassin from the Zoldyck family, they are just monsters. ¡®He can conceal his Nen and presence so well that if I didn¡¯t know who he was, I would assume he is a normal person.¡¯ ¡°Aren¡¯t you angry?¡± An asked curiously. ¡°Mm, didn¡¯t you feel my killing intent overflowing out of my control?¡± Illumi asked in confusion. ¡°What about now?¡± An was curious. ¡°It¡¯s gone since you were joking. I don¡¯t need to be angry.¡± An guessed that Illumu¡¯s answer was logical in their current situation. After all, Illumi was confident that he can kill An now, but if someone had the power to threaten him, Illumi wouldn¡¯t let him go after making such a joke. ¡°So, is the test this time about the wild boar over there?¡± Illumi asked as he pointed at the unconscious wild boards. An nodded: ¡°Well, it¡¯s to roast the whole boar.¡± ¡°Is it okay if I take two?¡± Illumi asked. ¡°Do whatever you want. I don¡¯t need that many anyway.¡± After saying this, An walked toward the wild boar and picked it up to return to the venue. Illumi did the same, but he picked two wild boars. The extra one was for Hisoka. On the way back, An encountered many candidates entering the forest searching for the wild boar. All of them had the same thought: ¡®We just learned about the wild boar, and here he ising back with one. There is something fishy in this exam.¡¯ Because only the examiner of the current part exam would know his test¡¯s content, no one, not even the other examiners, would know about this. An ignored them. After returning to the venue, he killed the wild boar and started roasting it. The most important thing to roast a pig was heat control. The seasoning was secondary because pork in itself was delicious. He will roast it till the outer part is crispy, but the inside stays tender. That would make it brittle and juicy at the same time. Although An didn¡¯t roast a pig before, he has eaten one, and he can try to recreate the same taste if the roasting goes smoothly. The candidates returned to the venue one after the other, each carrying a Great Stamp (The Wild Boar¡¯s name). Suddenly, a fragrant smell permeated the area causing everyone to look at the source of that smell. ¡°It seems delicious, Menshi, that roasted pig belonging to Candidate #123 looks so delicious.¡± ¡°Well, it¡¯s alright.¡± Menshi nodded and said: ¡°It¡¯s indeed better than the others.¡± Buhara, who was already hungry, walked toward An and asked: ¡°I can¡¯t wait. Can I have a bite?¡± An shook his head: ¡°No, you must wait till I finish roasting it before you can enjoy it.¡± An did want to get it over with at first, but the system gave him a choice with an enticing reward. [1: Attract Examiner Buhara with the roasted pig¡¯s fragrance, and make his drool. Reward: Strength increase by 100 points.] [2: Attract Examiner Buhara with the roasted pig¡¯s fragrance, and get praised by him. Reward: Specialists Ability: Nen¡¯s Stomach. (Nen¡¯s Stomach: The user can digest a Ton of food and convert it into Nen. Note: One Kilogram of food can be converted into 10 Nen Points. Maximum capacity is One Ton, the maximum conversion capacity is 10,000 Nen points.)] Without any doubt, An¡¯s choice was the second option. That¡¯s why he must make Buhara wait. An needed Buhara¡¯s praise when he eats the Roasted Pig to finish that quest. At this time, Gon and Killua already finished their Roasted pig. They were the first of the bunch to finish roasting and gave their pigs to Buhara. The condition for a pass is simple, as long as the examiner is satisfied, you can pass. After eating two whole pigs, Buhara put a hand on his stomach and said: ¡°Although these Roasted Pigs were mediocre, they tasted delicious because I¡¯m hungry, so both of you pass.¡± ¡°Yes, Great!¡± Gon and Killua high fived, but Menshi interrupted their celebration; ¡°Don¡¯t be too happy, you just passed Buhara¡¯s test, you didn¡¯t pass mine yet. Let me say this. I¡¯m very strict, don¡¯t get your hopes high yet.¡± Gon and Killua felt that this examiner was scary. ¡°It¡¯s okay, we have An with us.¡± Gon patted Killua and said. Killua nodded: ¡°Well, maybe he already guessed what Examiner Menshi¡¯s test is going to be.¡± At this time, many candidates already offered their roasted pigs to Buhara, who ate them all without stopping. His stomach was like a ck hole, which surprised many examiners. After eating more than twenty boars, he still looked fine. ¡°What¡¯s wrong with that guy¡¯s stomach? What is it made off?¡± Leorio brought his pig up, and Buhara ate it in less than thirty seconds. Kurapika felt the same way. After this, All of Hisoka, Illumi, Chrollo, Uvogin, and Pakunoda passed Buhara¡¯s test one after the other. After eating 50 pig in a row, Buhara came to An again and asked: ¡°Well, is it done yet? I really want to taste it.¡± An said lightly: ¡°Almost done.¡± ¡°Then can I try?¡± Buhara said with a gleam in his eyes. An nodded: ¡°Well, yes, but remember to give me a good review.¡± ¡°Hmm, of course.¡± Buhara instantly picked up An¡¯s wild boar and took a bite. It was Tender and crispy, and the gravy was overflowing. He almost had a Food-Gasm. ¡°This is delicious, so delicious!! It¡¯s ten times better than everyone else¡¯s.¡± Buhara mouth spouted praise one after the other, which made An¡¯s mouth raise with a smile. ¡®Now, the Quest is done after such praise.¡¯ Sure enough, the system¡¯s voice Echoed in An¡¯s head. [Ding! You sessfullypleted the Quest. Reward: Specialist¡¯s Ability: Nen¡¯s Stomach!] In an instant, all the information about Nen¡¯s stomach appeared in An¡¯s head, which made him smile in satisfaction. This ability was quite good. Even if he didn¡¯t need the 10,000 Nen points, he can store them in his stomach and use them when needed. It¡¯s like a Nen battery. Of course, it has a limit of 10,000, even if he wanted to store them. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 89 over there. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 49: Sushi Chapter 49: Sushi The second part of the Exam was divided into two parts. The first is roasting the wild boar that assistant examiner Buhara supervised. And 133 candidates passed this test, with a rating close to 70%. The second test belonged to Menshi, which is also the final test in the second part of the Exam. The objective she gave was to make [Sushi]. ¡°Killua, did you ever eat Sushi before?¡± Gon asked. Killua shook his head and said: ¡°No, what about you?¡± Gon shook his head as well. Suddenly both of them turned their head and looked at An: ¡°An, did you even eat Sushi before?¡± An nodded. As a transmigrator, of course, he ate Sushi before. Gon and Killua were overjoyed and said at the same time: ¡°Wow, we¡¯re saved.¡± ¡°Listen well. Sushi is cold cooked rice dressed with vinegar that is shaped into pieces and topped with raw or cooked fish, or formed into a roll with fish, egg, or vegetables and often wrapped in seaweed.¡± Gon and Killua looked at each other in confusion as they weren¡¯t proficient in cooking at all. Seeing this, An said: ¡°If you don¡¯t understand, then follow my instruction. I will teach you how to do it.¡± After this, An took Gon and Killua out of the venue. Aside from An, only another two knew what Sushi is from the 133 candidates. Those two were quite confident and smiled after hearing the topic of this test. However, the vast majority of the candidates were confused. They never heard about Sushi before. Even the well informed Hisoka and Illumi weren¡¯t an exception. Illumi looked dully at Hisoka and asked: ¡°What is Sushi?¡± Hisoka looked the same: ¡°You¡¯re asking me, but who am I going to ask?¡± ¡°You don¡¯t know either?¡± ¡°Never ate it before.¡± At this time, Illumi noticed his little brother Killua following Gon and An out of the venue and said: ¡°It seems that guy named An knows about Sushi. He took Killua and that other kid named Gon with him to prepare the ingredients.¡± Hisoka narrowed his eyes and said: ¡°In that case, let¡¯s follow them.¡± The two directly followed behind and kept a certain distance from An. On the other hand, Leorio turned his eyes and looked at Kurapika in the hope that he knew what is Sushi: ¡°Hey, Kurapika, do you know what is Sushi?¡± Kurapika stayed quiet while searching his memory for relevant information about Sushi but found none. Hanzo¡¯s mouth formed a sly smile as he prepared to leave the venue to prepare the ingredient to make Sushi secretly. Kurapika and Leorio were aware of this, and both looked at Hanzo at the same time. ¡°Hanzo, let¡¯s be honest. You know what Sushi is, right?¡± Leorio¡¯s voice was loud enough to attract most candidates¡¯ attention. ¡°Leorio, you idiot!!¡± Hanzo saw the gazes of everyone looking at him and decisively shook his head in denial. Kurapika on the side saw this and whispered: ¡°Hanzo, did you forget that we¡¯re cooperating now? If you know about it, then please tell us.¡± Hanzo thought for a while, then snorted: ¡°Okay, I will only tell you two,e closer.¡± As Hanzo was telling Leorio and Kurapika about Sushi, Chrollo, along with Pakunoda and Uvogin passed by them, moving toward the forest. ¡°Chief, do you know what is Sushi?¡± Uvogin asked carelessly. Chrollo nodded: ¡°Well, I ate it a few times before. Let¡¯s prepare the ingredients. The main ingredient is fish.¡± When people saw An, Hanzo, and Chrollo leave the venue, the candidates could only follow them. An led Gon and Killua to ake a few Kilometers away and said: ¡°You go into the water and catch us some seafood. Fishes, Shrimps, anything like that.¡± Gon and Killua took off their clothes and directly jumped into the water. An sat leisurely on the shore while tilting his legs down in the water. After a while, he felt two presences approaching from behind and said: ¡°Don¡¯t hide, you towe out.¡± With Observation Haki, nothing that gets close to him can hide. Hisoka and Illumi¡¯s suppressed their Aura and almost seemed nonexistent at the moment, but Observation Haki can still detect them. The two of them came out from behind a tree, which didn¡¯t surprise An at all. Illumi was still confused: ¡°You sensed me again.¡± Hisoka¡¯s eyes narrowed as hemented: ¡°You have a keen intuition.¡± An nced at them and said: ¡°You two here to steal the secret about Sushi, right?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Illumi nodded. Hisoka was speechless by Illumi¡¯s bluntness. An was the same. Illumi was just too straightforward. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 89 over there. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 50: Illumi’s Plan Chapter 50: Illumi¡¯s n Hisoka looked at theke and asked: ¡°Gon and Killua are catching fishes, so fishes are one of the ingredients in making Sushi, right?¡± ¡®Hisoka is really sharp.¡¯ An thought then said: ¡°Sorry, I have no obligation to answer your question.¡± ¡°That¡¯s true.¡± Hisoka shrugged. ¡°Then, what about me?¡± Illumi asked. ¡®Why do you think you¡¯re different?¡¯ An was speechless for a bit, then replied: ¡°The same for you.¡± ¡®Does he think since he is Killua¡¯s brother, he will get special treatment?¡¯ Hisoka stayed silent for a bit before he said: ¡°Let¡¯s be frank here. I hope you can tell us how to make Sushi.¡± Hisoka was clearly threatening An, but thetter didn¡¯t falter: ¡°Why should it tell you? What benefit do I get out of this?¡± As he said that, An instantly released his Conqueror¡¯s Haki. Even though the Conqueror¡¯s Haki only works on weak ordinary people and Illumi and Hisoka didn¡¯t belong to that group of people, it can work as a deterrent as well. With his Haki released, An¡¯s message was clear. 1: It¡¯s not easy to mess with me. 2: If you want to fight, I will apany you at any time. 3: No one can take advantage of me. Hisoka and Illumi looked at each other as they felt the invisible pressure from An. They could tell that this was neither Killing Intent nor Nen. The atmosphere tensed for a while as the three of them stared at each other. After a minute, Hisoka said: ¡°What do you want then?¡± Illumi offered his service: ¡°I can help you kill someone for free.¡± Hisoka squinted with a smile: ¡°Me too.¡± ¡°Hey, hold up. Are you two murderers? I don¡¯t need you to kill for me, ok?¡± An was speechless. ¡°So, what do you need?¡± Hisoka asked. An thought for a while before he said: ¡°I don¡¯t need anything special for now, but it doesn¡¯t mean that I will give you anything for free. As you know, there is nothing such as a free lunch in this world. I can¡¯t tell you the way to make Sushi just out of the Kindness of my heart.¡± Hisoka nodded, expressing his understanding. An continued: ¡°I will tell you one thing for free, though.¡± Hisoka smiled and said: ¡°I would like to hear it.¡± An then seriously said: ¡°I can guarantee that this test won¡¯t be as easy as roasting a wild boar. The examiner Menshi is a 1-star food hunter, and her standards are way too high. If I don¡¯t tell you how to make Sushi, there is no way for you to pass. And even if tell you, it¡¯s still not clear whether you will pass or not, because that examiner, Menshi, is tough to deal with.¡± Illumi and Hisoka believed his words since they couldn¡¯t detect any lie from him. In other words, this test is too tricky that most candidates won¡¯t be able to pass. ¡°So, how about killing her?¡± Illumi suggested. ¡°Then, the association will eliminate you.¡± An shook his head, speechlessly. Illumi was an assassin through and through. The easiest way for him is to kill the examiner. ¡°As long as I do it secretly without being discovered, the association won¡¯t eliminate me, right?¡± Illumi asked as he was confident in his assassination technique. An froze that instant. ¡®This guy wasn¡¯t joking, alright!¡¯ But Illumi¡¯s train of thoughts was right, if he killed Menshi, then the hunter association would send another examiner, and the new examiner won¡¯t give the same test as Menshi. This way, they would get another chance at the exam. Hisoka also guessed this, but he didn¡¯t express his opinion yet, as he was making a n right now. ¡°What do you think, Hisoka?¡± ¡°Not a bad idea.¡± Hisoka squinted. ¡°Then, who will be responsible for the assassination?¡± Illumi asked. ¡°You¡¯re the one who proposed the idea, so you do it. Moreover, you¡¯re better suited for assassination since you¡¯re an assassin yourself.¡± Hisoka replied logically. Illumi shook his head: ¡°No, I think you should do it, Hisoka.¡± ¡°Why?¡± Hisoka asked in confusion. ¡°It¡¯s because I¡¯m a professional assassin, and ording to the rules of the industry, I can only assassinate others if I receive money as a reward. While you, Hisoka, can ignore the rules and kill anyone as you like. Furthermore, you already killed an examiner before, so you¡¯re more experienced in this aspect.¡± Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 89 over there. Sorry for not releasing chapters fast enough, but chapters started getting longer as I went on. I will try my best in tranting as much as possible though. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 51: Cooperation Chapter 51: Cooperation Hisoka shook his head decisively after hearing Illumi¡¯s persuasion: ¡°No, I¡¯m here to participate in this exam seriously this time, if I kill an examiner, I will be eliminated.¡± ¡°Didn¡¯t I say you will kill her without anyone discovering it?¡± Illumi said. Hisoka shook his head and replied: ¡°The target is a 1-star hunter. She¡¯s not some trash that I can kill in seconds. Moreover, the head examiner has a partner. It¡¯s almost impossible to kill her discreetly.¡± ¡°Then, I will take care of the fat man.¡± Illumi persuaded. ¡°That¡¯s¡­¡± Hisoka seemed to think about it seriously now. An was stunned there as he saw the two of them nning a murder in in sight. But if they killed both Menshi and Buhara, then the whole second part of the exam will be invalid. In other words, his advantage as a transmigrator will be gone. An decided to stop the two from killing Menshi. Before he could even speak, the system¡¯s notification sound echoed in his head. [Ding! Please make a choice] [1: Prevent Illumi and Hisoka from assassinating the examiner so that the exam can continue as normal. Reward: (Naruto) Konoha secret Taijutsu Techniques!] [2: Join Illumi and Hisoka in assassinating the examiner. Reward: (One Piece) Okama fist art!] This¡­ An was powerless as he saw the rewards. The system even gave him the Okama fist technique as a reward. It means the techniques belonged either to Mr.2, Bon y or to Ivankov of the revolutionary army. No matter who it belonged to, he won¡¯t choose this Okama fist art. The thought alone made him feel disgusted. It¡¯s the first time that he felt disgusted by a reward from the system. However, even if it were another reward, An would still choose the first option. The risk of changing the exam was too great for his liking. He needed to hold to his advantage, or else no one will know what will happenter. An decisively chose the first option. ¡°Hey, guys, stop saying that you will kill the examiners like it¡¯s something normal.¡± Illumi looked at An in confusion: ¡°Why?¡± ¡°Rather than assassinating them and making the association change the examiner, wouldn¡¯t it be easier to cooperate?¡± ¡°So, what do you mean by cooperating?¡± Hisoka asked curiously. An nced at the due and said: ¡°I will tell you how to make Sushi, or I will make two for each of you to give to the examiner. If you pass the test, you will owe me one. A favor, how about it?¡± ¡°Sounds good,¡± Hisoka said with narrowed eyes. ¡°Then, what do you want to do with that favor? Killing?¡± Illumi asked. ¡®What the hell is wrong with you? Is killing all you can think about?¡¯ An almost eximed loudly. He rolled his eyes at Illumi. But it was expected, after all, Illumi was from a family renowned for having the best assassins in the world. Hisoka reacted differently from Illumi as he squinted and asked: ¡°So, what do you want us to do?¡± An waved his hand and said: ¡°I don¡¯t know for now, but if I want something, I may trouble you. Anyway, you have to remember that you owe me a favor.¡± ¡°That¡¯s okay.¡± Hisoka nodded. ¡°However, it sounds like we are on the losing side here,¡± Illumimented. He was a killer and never made a loss when doing business. Because of this, he doesn¡¯t want to owe favors to others. An was worried that this guy wouldn¡¯t cooperate, so he quickly assured him: ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I won¡¯t ask for too much. If it¡¯s within your power, you do it, but if you don¡¯t want to, then you can refuse, and you will still owe me a favor. In short, this is sincere cooperation, don¡¯t worry.¡± ¡°In that case, I agree.¡± Illumi thought for a while and agreed in the end. ¡°Let¡¯s do it this,¡± Hisoka said more readily. It was apparent that he didn¡¯t want to kill the examiner with Illumi, and cooperating with An was the better option. An was relieved as both of them agreed. He waved his hand at them and said: ¡°Then, both of you can go back to the exam venue. First, I will give you your share there.¡± ¡°Shouldn¡¯t we do it ourselves?¡± Illumi asked. An shook his head: ¡°No, even if I tell you how to make Sushi, you have no experience, and so it won¡¯t taste delicious.¡± Both Hisoka and Illumi were almost depressed by this, but they admitted that he was right. They knew nothing about cooking. They didn¡¯t say anything else after agreeing with An. An will take care of everything and give them the Sushi so they can pass the examter. Illumi waved his hand and said: ¡°Then Hisoka and I will go back first. By the way, Killua must also pass. I came to the exam for him. If he fails, there would be no meaning to this.¡± An made an okay gesture toward Illumi. Illumi¡¯s weakness was Killua. He was the key to negotiating with Illumi. Therefore, he will definitively make Killua pass the test. Of course, there is also Gon. An firmly believed that a good rtionship with the Protagonist would be full of benefitster. There also his far sight in this matter. An believed that the Protagonist will always defeat the viin in the end. Illumi and Hisoka left, and Gon and Killua finally came out of theke. Both of them caught a lot of seafood. An greeted them and told them to rush back with the seafood, and he will be right after them. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 92 over there. Sorry for not releasing chapters fast enough, but chapters started getting longer as I went on. I will try my best in tranting as much as possible though. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 52: Making Sushi Chapter 52: Making Sushi An deliberately stayed behind to try Konoha¡¯s Taijutsu secret techniques. The reward included: Leaf Whirlwind (Konoha Senp¨±): A swift leg-based sweep or aerial attack that causes considerable damage to the receiving party. Leaf Gale (Konoha Repp¨±): The user delivers a spinning low kick from behind. Leaf Great Whirlwind (Konoha Daisenp¨±): a series of kicking attacks, starting from a low kick and linking into a middle kick and high kick, then finishing off with a heel drop. Leaf Strong Whirlwind (Konoha G¨­riki Senp¨±): The user concentrates all his skill into a spinning backward kick. Leaf Rising Wind (Konoha Sh¨­f¨±): Using a high kick to disarm the opponent. Remark: Might Guy uses all the versions above. Ah yeah, there is another ultimate secret technique, Konoha secret finger art: Thousand years of pain (Kakashi version). The experience of using Konoha¡¯s Taijutsu techniques were now imprinted into his brain. He didn¡¯t need to train hard to use them. It was as if the system passed Might Guy¡¯s and Kakashi¡¯s (One thousand years of pain) experience to An, allowing him to master those moves directly. ¡°Leaf Strong Whirlwind!¡± An swiftly kicked a huge tree and snapped it in half. This power was unparalleled. The power he exerted surprised him much. He alreadycked closebat techniques, but with Konoha¡¯s taijutsu techniques, he patched a huge shoring he had. The next time he encounters someone like Uvogin, he is confident in his closebat. An noticed many candidates didn¡¯t leave the venue. It seems that they didn¡¯t know how to make Sushi and were about to go crazy here. As for Menshi, she didn¡¯t seem to care at all. She only reminded them that the essential ingredient of Sushi is Rice. Other than that, she gave no hint. As soon as they saw An, they were filled with hope. They already guessed that Sushi needed seafood when they saw Gon and Killua, bringing in various seafood. The examiner already provided Rice and many other ingredients, so they need to go and catch some fishes. However, they didn¡¯t understand the proper depth of making Sushi. An ignored them and ordered Gon and Killua to wash the fishes and shrimps. Gon asked: ¡°An, do you need any help?¡± An waved his hand and said: ¡°No, you just need to stay back and leave the rest to me.¡± Gon nodded obediently and said to Killua: ¡°Okay, Killua, let¡¯s not disturb An.¡± Killua nodded and followed Gon back. When An was about to start making Sushi, the systematic voice echoed inside his head. [1: Make a Sushi that Examiner Menshi would admire. Reward: A Storage Ring.] [2: Make a Sushi that would give Examiner Menshi Diarrhea. Reward: A Great Steel Sword.] Although the sword was good, An didn¡¯t need a weapon right now. It wasn¡¯t his style. So obviously, An picked the first option. Of course, that wasn¡¯t the reason for choosing the first option. If he gives Menshi a dish that will cause her Diarrhea, she would eliminate him and beat him up. It wasn¡¯t right to offend an examiner for a sword. But it wasn¡¯t easy to make Menshi admire his dish. Fortunately, An used to work part-time in a Sushi restaurant and has a certain degree of understanding of how to make it. At least, he had a unique advantagepared to the hundreds of candidates here. He believed that he couldn¡¯t pass this part of the exam, then no one can. The examiner prepared a kitchen counter for each candidate and gave them necessary kitchen tools. Most of the ingredients were provided here, like vinegar, wasabi, seaweed, spices, and kitchen tools like knives, sinks, etc. There are many types of Sushi, and An decided to make Nigiri Sushi. The ingredients needed for Nigiri Sushi are simple: Rice, Vinegar, Fish fillet. The production steps were: 1: Pinch the Rice to form a ball in your hand and then press the Rice into the fish fillet. Gently knead it into shape till the Rice and fish fillet are tightly joined. 2: Fold the seaweed inward, stick the Rice to form a cup shape, and then fill the top with fish roe. Following these steps, An made four copies of this Sushi for Illumi, Hisoka, Gon, and Killua. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 92 over there. Sorry for not releasing chapters fast enough, but chapters started getting longer as I went on. I will try my best in tranting as much as possible though. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 53: The Strick Menshi Chapter 53: The Strick Menshi The taste of Sushi was almost the same everywhere. That¡¯s why the appearance was important. The appearance of Sushi must be up to standards. It should be neat and clean that it makes people swallow their saliva just looking at it. An put five pieces of Nigiri Sushi together and called Gon and Killua over. Gon and Killua looked at the Sushi in awe and eximed: ¡°Wow.¡± ¡°An, is this sushi?¡± Gon asked in surprise. An nodded and asked: ¡°What do you think?¡± ¡°It looks amazing!¡± Gon nodded heavily. ¡°What do you think, Killua?¡± An asked. ¡°Although it¡¯s the first time I saw Sushi, it is simr to what I¡¯ve imagined. So there shouldn¡¯t be any problem.¡± Killua replied. The Sushi An made was the same as the one Killua imagined, which made him feel strange. ¡°In that case, you can give those to the examiner first.¡± Hearing this, Killua and Gon nodded. An briefly talked about the type of Sushi he made. After both of them remembered everything, they directly went toward Menshi for the evaluation. Menshi sat down while discussing with Buhara about how many can pass this test. The conclusion they came up with was Zero. In the venue, examinees were bringing their Sushi for evaluation one after the other. ¡°What the hell! Are those candidates all stupid?¡± ¡°Redo!¡± ¡°Redo!¡± ¡°What kind of crap is this?¡± ¡°Go back and redo it.¡± The candidates didn¡¯t know what Sushi is, so they just put a fish into the rice and brought it for evaluation. For a food hunter like Menshi, this was an insult to cuisine. At this time, a bald youth stepped out to give his dish to Menshi. ¡°Haha, a bunch of idiots. Now, I will be the first one to pass this part of the Exam.¡± With absolute confidence in himself, Hanzo stepped forward with Kurapika and Leorio behind him and showed the Sushi to Menshi. ¡°Oh?¡± Menshi, who wasn¡¯t expecting anything special, smile: ¡°Well, finally, some decent Sushi.¡± ¡°Hey, of course, I made this with great effort,¡± Hanzo said confidently. Kurapika and Leorio, who heard this, gained some confidence as well. Both of them learned how to make Sushi together from Hanzo, and their Sushi looked decent. Judging by appearance alone, they passed. ¡°Don¡¯t be too happy, although it looks good. I have to taste it myself.¡± Menshi picked one and took a bite. Then she took one each from Kurapika and Leorio¡¯s te and took a bite. ¡°No, this tastes bad. Take it back and redo it. Also, all three of yours taste the same.¡± Menshi said casually. When Hanzo heard the evaluation, his confidence crumbled as he felt slight anger: ¡°Smelly woman, you are making things difficult for us. Form a ball of rice in your hand, then add slices of Sashimi and wasabi with Vinegar. It¡¯s one thing to want us to make Sushi, and another thing if you want to eat a five-star dish here, ok?¡± Suddenly, all the candidates who were attracted by the yelling Hanzo understood how to make Sushi. Hanzo¡¯s teeth trembled in anger. At this time, Menshi snorted: ¡°What are you talking about, you baldy. You just learned a few things, and you think you¡¯re the best. Are you the Examiner, or am I?¡± ¡°Damn it.¡± Although he was unconvinced, Hanzo had gone and told every participant in this Exam how to make Sushi. At this time, Gon and Killua came to the Examiner and gave her the Sushi An made. Menshi was angry because of Hanzo, so when she saw Gon and Killua, she said: ¡°You two, aren¡¯t you afraid after what I did to that baldy? Be careful of I will beat you up if I don¡¯t like the Sushi.¡± ¡°Why don¡¯t you take a look first, Examiner-san?¡± Gon smiled. ¡°Yes, Examiner-san, don¡¯t vent your anger on innocent people. Let the cooking speak.¡± Killua followed. ¡°What stinky brats, you dare rebut me.¡± Menshi curled her lips unhappily. Then she was stunned when she saw the Sushi Gon and Killua brought. ¡°Oj? Nigiri Sushi and Roe Battleship Sushi.¡± ¡°How is it?¡± Gon asked, hopefully. ¡°Is this made by you two?¡± Menshi took a deep breath and asked in disbelief. Because of the appearance alone, this Sushi was a grade higher than Hanzo and the others. It¡¯s neat and in uniform size, which made her want to eat them. ¡°You pass in terms of appearance, but I still have to taste it.¡± Menshi prepared herself and gave it a bite. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 94 over there. Sorry for not releasing chapters fast enough, but chapters started getting longer as I went on. I will try my best in tranting as much as possible though. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 54: Behind The Scene Chapter 54: Behind The Scene ¡°I say, did you make this?¡± After tasting the Sushi served by Gon and Killua, Menshi couldn¡¯t help asking with surprise. Not only did the Sushi look good, but it also tasted utterly ok. It was kind of hard to believe that the two small boys made this Sushi. Because the preparation may be simple, achieving such a presentation level wasplicated and required a lot of effort. Gon and Killua didn¡¯t look like the type to be into cooking. ¡°Uh, in fact¡­¡± Gon was never a good liar, so after the repeated questioning of Menshi, he was about to reveal the truth. Killua noticed this and immediately covered Gon¡¯s mouth and said: ¡°Yes, we made them.¡± He was smart and knew that as soon as Gon mention that this was prepared by someone else, Menshi would severely criticize them and remake the Sushi themselves. After all, it is definitively an insult to a food hunter if someone used someone else¡¯s food as their own, not just an insult to the hunter, but also an insult to the food itself. They would end up eliminated for that. Menshi could tell that Killua was lying, but she didn¡¯t expose him. Instead, she just questioned: ¡°You two made the exact same Sushi, both of you made Nigiri Sushi and Roe Battleship Sushi. Aside from how it looks, the taste is the same as well, which means that the same person prepared them.¡± ¡°That¡¯s because we have a good rtionship. As for the taste, our level is the same, so the taste is also the same.¡± Killua defended. Gon just nodded without uttering a word. ¡°Since you are so sure of yourself, make one in front of me now. We¡¯ll see if it¡¯s the truth or not then.¡± ¡°Ah, what?¡± Gon and Killua eximed at the same time. Both looked at Menshi in a daze as they didn¡¯t expect her to be so harsh. Menshi crouched down and said: ¡°What? Are you worrying about something? If you tell me the truth, I can forgive you this time. After all, both of you are cute. So, you can rx.¡± ¡°Huh, wait for us,¡± Killua said as he took Gon away. ¡°I¡¯ll wait for you.¡± Menshi smiled, then she seriously warned: ¡°If you dare deceive me, I will definitively eliminate you both.¡± After leaving, Killua was unhappy as he cursed: ¡°That damn, stinky, woman is making this difficult on purpose.¡± ¡°What should we do now, Killua?¡± Gon asked. ¡°There is no other way than asking An to teach us a step by step.¡± Gon nodded as he epted the proposal: ¡°Yeah, good idea.¡± ¡°What happened? What¡¯s the result?¡± Seeing Gon and Killuaing back, An asked curiously. ¡°I¡¯m sorry we failed.¡± Gon sighed. ¡°Why?¡± An was taken aback as he murmured: ¡°I tried it just now, and it tastes good. If this doesn¡¯t guarantee a pass, then no one will pass.¡± Killua shook his head: ¡°No, we didn¡¯t mean that the Sushi wasn¡¯t good. On the contrary, because the Sushi was good, we were suspected by the Examiner.¡± An realized the problem: ¡°So she asked you toe back and do it again, Right?¡± Gon nodded and said: ¡°Yeah, and she also said that she would observe how we make the Sushiter.¡± An frowned: ¡°This will be hard.¡± ¡°Even if it¡¯s hard to do, we can¡¯t just give up. I can only ask you to teach us how to make Sushi now. Gon and I will try mastering it as fast as we could.¡± [Ding! Please make a choice] [1: Agree to Gon and Killua¡¯s request and personally teach them how to make Sushi. Reward: Physical strength increase by 100 points.¡± [2: Reject Gon and Killua¡¯s request and discourage them frompleting the Hunter Exam. Reward: Mushi Mushi No Mi (Insect Insect Devil fruit), Model: Praying Mantis.] An nned to teach both of them, which he would do regardless of the reward. However, he was much surprised by the reward nheless, because a Devil fruit appeared this time. An wasn¡¯t impressed by the devil fruit itself. After all, it was a weak Zoan fruit at most. Maybe if he ate it, his agility would skyrocket as a praying mantis was agile. Generally, whoever ate a Zoan Devil fruit can transform into an animal, but the Zoan users were too ugly, and it waspletely uneptable. If it were Logia or Paramecia, An would be tempted, but it was just a Zoan type fruit. An broke his train of thoughts and directly replied: ¡°Well, hurry up and follow me to clean the fishes first, then slice it and start shaping the Rice into balls to make Nigiri Sushi.¡± ¡°Understood.¡± Gon and Killua answered like good students. Illumi and Hisoka, who just received the Sushi An made, went to the Examiner for evaluation. ¡°Did you make these yourselves?¡± Menshi tasted Illumi and Hisoka¡¯s Sushi and suddenly felt her IQ insulted. Why? Because it was the same taste as the Sushi Gon and Killua served before. Not only the appearance but also the taste. Therefore, from her years of experience, she knew that the same person made this Sushi. In other words, whether it is Gon, Killua, Hisoka, or Illumi, all of their Sushi was made by someone else. Who was this person? Menshi got curious. After she sent Illumi and Hisoka away, Menshi started wandering back and forth in the venue before her eyesnded on An. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 94 over there. Sorry for not releasing chapters fast enough, but chapters started getting longer as I went on. I will try my best in tranting as much as possible though. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Enjoy! Chapter 55: 55 passers Chapter 55: 55 passers About an hourter, and with An¡¯s careful guidance, Gon and Killua finally mastered the basics of making Sushi. An gave their Sushi a passing review when he tried it. ¡°Although I¡¯m not sure whether you can pass Examiner Menshi¡¯s requirement, I think this is the best you can do now. After all, there is a time limit, and if you can¡¯t pass even with this, we can do nothing about it.¡± Gon and Killua nodded as they understood this as well. It only took them an hour to learn how to make Sushi, and it was all they can do as the Exam¡¯s time limit restricted them. Menshi will decide on whether they pass or not. He can do nothing now. Both Illumi and Hisoka also came to An because they were in the same situation as Gon and Killua. With no other way around it, An spent dozens of minutes teaching both of them as well. Fortunately, they were fast learners. While they were learning, Menshi was looking at them. An, who was supposed to be the first to finish the test, became thest one instead. But he didn¡¯t have any choice in this matter since he had to teach Gon, Killua, Hoska, and Illumi. Fortunately, all four of them brought good news after going to Menshi for evaluation. The four of them passed, and with this, An breathed a sigh of relief. ¡®My effort didn¡¯t go in vain,¡¯ An thought almost with a tear in his eye. He also received his reward from the system, and his Physical strength increased by 100 points. The increment in his physical strength didn¡¯t just mean row power, but all aspects of his body were enhanced. The improvement covered his speed, strength, immunity, nervous system, five senses, and so on. Half an hourter, An moved toward Menshi to serve his Sushi, which made all eyes lock on him and Menshi. Right now, he was the only one who still didn¡¯t submit his Sushi for evaluation yet. Menshi gave every candidate two opportunities to make Sushi, and there is no third time. As soon as they failed twice, they would be eliminated instantly. ¡°So, you are the one who helped the four cheaters, Gon, Killua, Hisoka, and Gittarackur (Illumi¡¯s false identity), right?¡± An was speechless for a moment as he didn¡¯t find any way to refute her words. He knew he was caught red-handed. ¡°For those who help others cheat, I usually eliminate them directly. However, considering the fairness of the test, I gave each candidate two opportunities. So this is considered as your second andst chance.¡± ¡°I see.¡± An nodded and brought his Sushi for Menshi to inspect. ¡°Please.¡± ¡°This is¡­¡± Seeing An¡¯s Sushi, Menshi was quite surprised. An directly said: ¡°Yes, I made Hako Sushi.¡± The Hako Sushi or Box Sushi is simply putting various ingredients together, such as Rice, Eel, Shrimp, and so on, inside a wooden box, press them then cut them into Sushi pieces. They will look like a box hence the name. This is the best Sushi An can make, and he was sure that he could pass. Menshi picked a piece and gave it a bite. The Assistant Examiner, Buhara, sitting behind Menshi, swallowed hard: ¡°It looks so delicious.¡± One, Two, and three. After eating the third piece, Menshi realized that everyone was staring at her. Menshi blushed and said: ¡°Um, although I don¡¯t want to admit it, this Sushi is delicious, and the only one here that can receive such a review.¡± ¡°Thank you!¡± An breathed a sigh in relief. At the same time, the Systematic voice rang in his head. [Ding! The Sushi you made have won Menshi¡¯s approval. Reward: A Storage Ring.] A secondter, An felt something on his right middle finger, and as he looked, he saw an obsidian ring. This is the Storage Ring the System rewarded him with. The storage ring had ten cubic meters of space inside, which can store everything except living beings. To store things, he only needed to touch the item with the ring, and taking them out was simpler as he only needed a mentalmand for an item to be brought out. An was quite satisfied with this reward because as long as he has this ring, he would have a mobile storehouse wherever he went. The ring weighed less than 50 grams, which is almost the same as not wearing anything at all. At this time, Gon and Killua came over, and the former instantly said: ¡°An, thank you.¡± Killua put his hands in his pocket and said with a cool expression: ¡°Thank you.¡± An waved his hand. But he gained two favors out of this. Gon and Killua felt like they owed An for his help, but this was just an investment made by An. He would gain ten or even a hundred times what he gave today in that investment. And with no risk as to speak. After a while, Hisoka and Illumi walked over and thanked An. ¡°I couldn¡¯t pass without you.¡± Hisoka squinted and smiled. ¡°We owe you a favor,¡± Illumi said. An smiled and said: ¡°Just remember that.¡± So, about 55 candidates passed the second test of the second part of the Exam. Menshi eliminated the rest. In addition to Kurapika, Leorio, Hanzo, and the others, Chrollo, Uvogin, and Pakunoda passed as well. Pokkle and Ponzu passed along with others like Siper and Bodoro. Actually, the Sushi they made either looked bad or tasted terrible, but Menshi reduced the test¡¯s difficulty, allowing them to pass. The reason was simple: if she actually judged them ording to her standards, only Hanzo, Chrollo, and An would pass. It can be said all the others basked in the light of those three. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 95 over there. Sorry for not releasing chapters fast enough, but chapters started getting longer as I went on. I will try my best in tranting as much as possible though. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: I¡¯m really overwhelmed with joy that everyone ismenting on and discussing this novel. Thank you Very Much For The Support!!!! Enjoy! Chapter 56: Weird Flying Beasts Attack Chapter 56: Weird Flying Beasts Attack Afterpleting the second part of the Exam, the candidates boarded an airship prepared by the association to transport them into the third part of the Exam. The Airship flew slowly in the dark night¡¯s sky with an altitude of more than a thousand meters. To ensure that the candidates didn¡¯t go with an empty belly, the association also prepared the meals for the candidates boarding the ship. After an entire night, the Airshipnded on top of a tall tower where the third part of the Exam will start. This tower is called the Trick Tower, which is a ce holding hundreds of cruel criminals. This test¡¯s goal is simple; everyone needs to reach the bottom of the tower within 72 hours, whether in a group or alone. ¡°48 candidates are participating in this part of the Exam right now. I wish everyone the best of luck. Goodbye.¡± The pilot instantly got into the Airship to leave the tower. ¡°Hey, wait. There were 55 candidates, right? Why are there only 48 now?¡± Gon, Killua, Leorio, and the other had the same question. All the Examinees present had the same question because seven people were missing. Only a few people knew the inside story. The seven candidates were killed in the Airship. To not cause panic, the Examiner apanying the candidates withheld the information. Killua put his hands in his pocket and with coolly: ¡°Gon, someone killed them.¡± ¡°Really?¡± Gon was doubtful. Killua looked at An and said: ¡°If you don¡¯t believe me, you can ask An. He knows about this.¡± Gon immediately looked at An: ¡°Were the seven missing people really killed An?¡± An nodded. Not only does he know that they were killed, but he also knows who killed them. Latest night, Hisoka killed four people in the bathroom because those four identally blocked his path. He was as dangerous as theye. And the other three were killed by Chrollo and Uvogin in an aisle. Because there was no proof of the killing, the Examiner let it go as this was not the only time people die in the Exam, and it won¡¯t be thest. It would not be against the rules if the Examiner didn¡¯t see it happen. As for the killing purpose, none whatsoever. When someone bes dangerous? It¡¯s when he kills for the sake of killing. Because even if you don¡¯t offend him, he will hunt you. When dealing with those kinds of Psychopaths, you will have to be extremely vignt. After a while, everyone focused on their objective and forgot about the seven missing candidates. The top of the toward was hundreds of meters high and looked like arge chimney. At this time, an examinee who was confident in his climbing skills decided to go down the tower directly. He seemed to forget that this wasn¡¯t a typical tower. As he climbed about ten meters down, an rm sound echoed out of the building, and a group of strange birds with six legs appeared, making loud noises. They were the Six-legged Flying Beast! The Six-Legged Flying Beast grabbed the climber using its ws and flew up before it started eating. The Examinees who were looking at this all threw away any thought of climbing down. At the same time, they were rejoicing that it wasn¡¯t them that ended miserably like that. However, when they sighed in relief, they found out that the Six-legged Flying Beasts were looking straight at them after eating the unfortunate Examinee. ¡°Hey, they areing toward us,¡± Leorio shouted as he grabbed the dagger he carried in his pocket. These monsters were strong, they can tear a person¡¯s body quickly, and everyone here already witnessed that, so when they were attacking now, no one cked off. As long as they maintain enoughposure, they can efficiently deal with them. But those Six-legged Flying Beasts came in waves. In just a few minutes, a few hundred of them gathered near the tower. The Six-legged Flying Beasts considered the Candidates on top of the tower as their lunch. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that i won¡¯t! Thest three tiers in Patreon are filled. For those interested, please check my patreon page since I just released HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 95 over there. Sorry for not releasing chapters fast enough, but chapters started getting longer as I went on. I will try my best in tranting as much as possible though. Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: I¡¯m really overwhelmed with joy that everyone ismenting on and discussing this novel. Thank you Very Much For The Support!!!! Enjoy! Chapter 57: Fighting the Monsters Chapter 57: Fighting the Monsters The third test had already started when the climber triggered the rm and attracted the flying beasts. At this moment, the candidates were fending off the Six-legged Flying Beasts that vastly outnumbered them. Furthermore, they were at a disadvantage since there was nowhere to hide on top of the tower. Therefore, many candidates were fighting and taking down as many beasts as possible to ensure their survival. However, amongst the candidates, there are some extraordinary ¡®monsters.¡¯ They were scarier than those Six-legged Flying Beasts. Suddenly, several ying cards shot out like darts from Hisoka¡¯s hand, killing two Six-legged Flying Beasts simultaneously. His ying cards were as sharp as a de. At the same time, Illumi pulled out two needles from his face, jumped up, and pierced the brains of two Six-legged Flying Beasts. As a first-ss maniptor, Illumi can use the needles to disguise himself and also control his targets. The Six-legged Flying Beasts that were hit by Illumi¡¯s needles were now like puppets under his control as they started attacking theirpanions. ¡°I thought that you could only use your needles on people. I didn¡¯t think you would use them on monsters as well. This really opened my eyes.¡± Hisoka said. Illumi turned his head, pulled another needle from his face, and said nkly: ¡°Hisoka, do you want me to stick one in you as well? I will control you that way.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t do it. You will ruin me.¡± Hisoka squinted with a smile. Illumi: ¡°¡­¡± While Hisoka flirted with Illumi, Chrollo was dealing with the Monsters as well. Uvogin was just one punching the Six-legged Flying Beasts. One punch was enough to kill one monster. Pakunoda was holding her pistol and killing the Six-legged Flying Beasts from a distance without leaving them any chance to get close. Nen strengthened the bullets, and as soon as it touches a monster, he would explode. She could only shoot six bullets and then wait six seconds to shoot again, and that¡¯s her only disadvantage. It takes one second to form a bullet. That¡¯s the reason Pakunoda had to wait six seconds. Therefore, Pakunoda would shoot six times than avoid the Six-legged Flying Beasts before firing again. Although she was abatant, she has an extraordinary skill that wasn¡¯t inferior to professionally trained agents. That¡¯s why she can fight the Six-legged Flying Beast even if she didn¡¯t have bullets for a while. In less than five minutes, the candidates killed more than 50 Six-Legged Flying Beasts. Most of the credits went to Hisoka, Illumi, Uvogin, and Pakunoda, while Chrollo was dodging them gracefully with his left hand in his pocket and his right hand holding a book. He didn¡¯t put those birds in his eyes. However, even after killing 50 Six-legged Flying Beasts, more than half of them remained. On the other side, Hanzo was also having a fierce fight with the Six-legged Flying Beast. ¡°Look at my Shadow Shuriken.¡± Hanzo threw two Shuriken, and after he made a few hand signs, the two Shuriken turned into hundreds before striking down a Six-legged Flying Beast. (T/N: Hanzo really did use Shadow Shuriken No Jutsu, made by Hiruzen Sarutobi from Naruto!) Not far away, a blond boy jumped fiercely toward the Six-legged Flying Beast and directly struck a pair of daggers into its brain, killing it on the spot. ¡°Good job, Kurapika,¡± Leorio eximed. ¡°Leorio, look behind you.¡± Kurapika¡¯s words surprised Leorio, and as he looked back, a Six-legged Flying Beast was already pouncing on him. Fortunately for Leorio, he dodged in thest second and avoided being hit by the Six-legged Flying Beast¡¯s ws, but the beast still grabbed his suit and dragged him up. Looking down, Leorio saw how high he was and directly turned toward the Six-legged Flying Beast that grabbed him and fiercely kicked it on its stomach. The Six-legged Flying Beast let out a scream while letting go of Leorio, who fell on top of the tower and breathed heavily. He was a medical student and not someone specialized inbat. That kick was the strongest move he could make, and it was fueled by his desire to survive. ¡°Good job, Leorio.¡± Kurapika praised. Leorio was speechless as he said the same thing to Kurapika half a minute ago. On the other side, An, Gon, and Killua had it rtively easy. Killua used his assassination technique to make his hand and nails sharper before shing it toward the Six-legged Flying Beast, directly decapitating it in a sh. His actions were swift and decisive, worthy of being an assassin from the Zoldyck family. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: Here is the first chapter for this month and expect more chapters. I wanted to let you know that I will be breaking the chapters into two parts since they are getting longer. So any chapter that is too long will be in two parts. Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 4.0/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 58: Conqueror’s Haki! Chapter 58: Conqueror¡¯s Haki! Different from Killua¡¯s brutality, Gon clenched his fist and sent them flying with a punch. His fist shone with a pale golden light as he released tremendous powerpared to his small body. Killua saw this and sighed: ¡°Gon, with that kind of power, you won¡¯t have any difficulty opening the Testing Gate.¡± ¡°Testing Gate?¡± Gon asked in confusion. Killua waved his hand and said: ¡°Well, I mean, you may be stronger than me.¡± Gon touched the back of his head and smiled sheepishly: ¡°I didn¡¯t just use pure physical strength.¡± Killua nodded as he figured that out already: ¡°Yeah, I also feel that you didn¡¯t use brute strength to punch that bird, but another strange power. That power is strong. I¡¯ve seen many uses it before, for example, My brother, Hisoka, and Gittarackur. Furthermore, An uses it too, and then you. I think all of you are using the same power, but each one is using it differently.¡± Gon was stunned and didn¡¯t react for a few seconds before smiling: ¡°Haha, Killua, I see that you still didn¡¯t learn Nen yet.¡± ¡°Nen?¡± Gon nodded and said: ¡°Well, that strange power you felt is called Nen. I will tell you about itter after we finish those Birds.¡± Just when the two were about to go back fighting, an amazing force converged around them. They looked back at An, who is amazingly the source of that force. They felt uncertain and anxious, just standing there. It wasn¡¯t typical Aura or Killing Intent; it was more impactful. All the Beast attacking them fell one after the other. The impact was enough to render them unable to fly, and some of them even lost consciousness. Killua walked toward the nearest Beast and kicked its head: ¡°It¡¯s still breathing, but it fainted.¡± Gon murmured: ¡°So great! An did this, right?¡± Killua nodded and looked at An and asked: ¡°An, how did you do this?¡± An nced around and was surprised to see all the beasts on the ground. ¡°My Conqueror¡¯s Haki seems stronger than before. Maybe because my physical stats increase, which increased its power.¡± An murmured. ¡°What is Haki?¡± Killua asked curiously. ¡°It¡¯s a king of inexplicable power. It is what made those Beast lose consciousness. It¡¯s called Conqueror¡¯s Haki.¡± An exined. ¡°Conqueror¡¯s¡­ Haki?¡± Killua murmured deep in thoughts. He was born in a family of killers, so he can tell that Haki wasn¡¯t Killing Intent. This power seems to directly target the spirit of the target, making them lose consciousness. ¡°The Killing Intent my father or Grandfather releases can¡¯t do this. At most, they would make their targets fear death even more. But An¡¯s power caused the targets to lose consciousness, which was even more terrifying in a sense since the Killing Intent of his father and Grandfather was at the top of the world. No, not only that, even I was affected just now. Only because my will power was strong did I not faint. If it were an ordinary person, he would lose consciousness like those beasts.¡± The more he thought about it, the more awestruck Killua felt by this power An used. ¡°Just now, it was an attack that can¡¯t differentiate between allies and foes, right?¡± Killua asked suddenly. An just nodded: ¡°Hmm, yeah, sorry, I¡¯m still unable to control it precisely, so everything around me will be affected. But I know that this level of Conqueror¡¯s Haki can¡¯t affect you much. This is just a skill I use to clean up trashy opponents.¡± An believed that Gon and Killua would be affected by his Haki if it reached the Advanced level. After dealing with those beasts, the candidates started trying to find a way down the tower. People started disappearing from the roof, which made everyone realize that the floor had several trapdoors. And those trapdoors were their way to finish this part of the Exam. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: Here is the first chapter for this month and expect more chapters. I wanted to let you know that I will be breaking the chapters into two parts since they are getting longer. So any chapter that is too long will be in two parts. Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 4.0/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 59: Ponzu Chapter 59: Ponzu Soon, candidates disappeared one after the other into the tower, and the number of people on the roof was decreasing. An just stepped on a floor tile and felt that it was hollow. After tapping it a little, he heard an Echo indicating that it was a Trapdoor. Most Trapdoors allowed a single candidate to enter, so others could only find another trapdoor. Although An knew that it was a trapdoor, he didn¡¯t know whether it was meant for a single person or a group. A single trapdoor allowed one person to enter, while the group trapdoor permitted a minimum of two and no known upper limit. However, it didn¡¯t matter because An already decided to go along anyway. After waving goodbye to Gon, he jumped into the trapdoor. In the next moment, he appeared inside a closed room with nothing but a timer. There were a monitor and a speaker as well in the upper left corner. ¡°Please put on the timer and start your challenge. If you reach the ground within 72 hours, you will pass the test. But there are various tests on the way, and whether you can get to the ground or not depends on your ability.¡± A man¡¯s voice came out of the speaker. An already knew that this was the Examiner of the Third Phase of the Exam, who monitored all candidates. An didn¡¯t say anything and put on the timer and pressed the countdown button without hesitation. At this time, the closed-door automatically opened. An walked out of the room and passed through a corridor. Suddenly, the corridor split into two passages, one left and one right, which led to nowhere. At this moment, An noticed a young girl with a delicate face, wearing a pink dress and pink hat stood in front of the two passages. It was Candidate #246, Ponzu. But An knew more than this; he knew that she was one of the unfortunate souls that would get eaten by the Chimera Ant. At this time, Ponzu, who was still hesitating in front of the passage, noticed An behind her. ¡°Ah, it¡¯s you.¡± She shouted and sounded slightly flustered. ¡°Do you know me?¡± An was slightly surprised. It was the first time they met, so although they saw each other in the test before, they didn¡¯t even make eye contact. This meeting is considered their first. Ponzu avoided An¡¯s eyes as she turned around and said: ¡°I mean, I know all the candidates who reached this level.¡± An nodded because it sounded right. He also liked to observe people. He could now recognize the people who didn¡¯t even appear in the Show. And for the first time after a while, the System¡¯s voice Echoed in An¡¯s head. [Ding! The System detected that the host is making contact with a plot character. Please make a choice] [1: Ignore Ponzupletely and refuse any interaction with her. Reward: Great Sword x 1] [2: Help Ponzu with the current difficulty and interact with her. Reward: Advanced Treasure Chest x 1] [3: Show off in front of Ponzu, lead her to pass the Exam¡¯s third phase, and add her to your Harem. Reward: Diamond Treasure Chest x 1] [Note: Please make your choice within 60 seconds.] ¡®Hey?¡¯ An almost yelled, but he suppressed himself. The sudden appearance of the System made him confused. He raised his head and nced at Ponzu and thought: ¡®She has a good figure, and she is beautiful. If I can get her, it won¡¯t be a bad idea to choose thest option, and that option has the best reward out of the three choices as well.¡¯ But at the same time, it the most challenging option. An was confident in helping Ponzu pass the third phase of the Exam, but he wasn¡¯t sure if Ponzu liked him or not to the point she epts joining his Harem. At this time, Ponzu noticed An¡¯s abnormality and asked: ¡°Mm, what wrong with you?¡± An regained his senses as he shook his head, indicating that he was okay before asking: ¡°You¡¯re the examinee #246, Ponzu, Right?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Ponzu nodded in surprise: ¡°I didn¡¯t expect you to know my name.¡± ¡°Well, you¡¯re cute, after all. It¡¯s not hard to notice you.¡± An¡¯s words made Ponzu blush a little as she lowered her head and said: ¡°Um, your name is An, right?¡± Seeing Ponzu¡¯s reaction, An¡¯s eyes shed. ¡®Since she knows my name, it means that she had a deep impression of me. And from her reaction just now, she doesn¡¯t hate me. Maybe there is a chance after all.¡¯ An tried his best to look ¡®normal.¡¯ His top priority is to lead her sessfully out of the third phase of the Exam. He will interact with her, and step by step, gain her favor. This way, making her join in his Harem won¡¯t be hard. At this time, Ponzu asked: ¡°An, which way should we go? I can¡¯t decide. I want to hear your opinion.¡± At first nce, the left corridor didn¡¯t seem dangerous, while the right one screamed danger. The walls seemed to spurt mes every once in a while, which blocked any passing attempt, and even a wrong step would be fatal. ¡°Most people would choose the left corridor because it seemed safe.¡± Ponzu nodded her head: ¡°Yes, it is true, but the safer the ce seems, the more danger it contained.¡± An nced at her and said: ¡°Then, you want to go to the right?¡± Ponzu shook her head: ¡°That way is hazardous. Even if I want to, I can¡¯t make it.¡± An looked at her in slight surprise. This girl was very aware and knew her skills. She didn¡¯t dare take the risk alone, but she wouldn¡¯t go on the left corridor, which seemed safe as well. Well, she¡¯s not wrong. Staying here was safer, but they would fail if they did so. The time limit is 72 hours. If they don¡¯t get to the ground, they won¡¯t pass this phase of the Exam. The Examiner deliberately prepared this ce to make candidates waste their time here. It was using their sense of crisis against them. Therefore, the best option when encountering a choice like this is choosing as fast as possible. ¡°An, which way will you go?¡± Ponzu asked. ¡°Most people would choose the left corridor, but I¡¯m not them. I will choose the right one.¡± ¡°But how will you avoid those mes? If it touches you, you will be finished.¡± Ponzu said worriedly. She also preferred taking the right corridor. But that choice required incredible skills. An nced at her and smiled: ¡°If you follow me, I can guarantee that you will be safe.¡± ¡°Really?¡± Ponzu was a little doubtful. ¡®Probably,¡¯ An smiled without speaking. Ponzu hesitated before she nodded and said: ¡°Well, I will follow you through the right corridor.¡± ¡°Good. you made the right choice.¡± After saying this, An gestured for Ponzu to step back and walk into the right corridor. Suddenly, a coldness flowed into the air out of An¡¯s body as he used his Thousand Kilometers Ice Field. The methrowers started freezing, and after a few seconds, not a single methrower could spew me anymore. The entire corridor was covered in Ice, without a single spot spared. ¡°Wow! That¡¯s amazing!¡± Ponzu looked at this in awe. An smiled and said: ¡°Let¡¯s go. You don¡¯t have to worry about the danger.¡± ¡°Mm.¡± Ponzu nodded. An¡¯s performance left a deep impression in Ponzu¡¯s heart. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: Here is the first chapter for this month and expect more chapters. I wanted to let you know that I will be breaking the chapters into two parts since they are getting longer. So any chapter that is too long will be in two parts. Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 4.0/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 60: Dead End! Chapter 60: Dead End! Twenty minutester, An took Ponzu smoothly through the right corridor. At the end of the corridor, the passage split into three forks. ¡°Sigh, here we go again.¡± An felt that it wouldn¡¯t take 72 hours to go down the tower, but it seems reaching the end won¡¯t be easy. ¡°An, which corridor should we go through?¡± Ponzu raised her head and asked. She felt dependent on An already. But suddenly she realized that she did something wrong and said quickly: ¡°Sorry, you already helped me once, I shouldn¡¯t trouble you anymore, please don¡¯t worry about me.¡± Unexpectedly, Ponzu was so thoughtful. An immensely admired this and directly waved his hand: ¡°It¡¯s okay since we were destined to meet here. We¡¯ll continue together.¡± Ponzu lowered her head and nodded: ¡°Um, I will listen to you then.¡± An looked at the three forks and said: ¡°There should be a lot of folks in the tower. The danger we could encounter in each way is unpredictable. It would take a lot of time to choose the way. Maybe after passing the ones in front of us, we will encounter even more forks. So we need to choose the right way in the shortest time possible.¡± After hearing An¡¯s exnation, Ponzu agreed with him. She thought for a while before saying: ¡°Then, let me choose this time, I have away.¡± An nodded. He tried using Observation Haki to see the situation in each way, but he found nothing.After that, he tried using [En], but as expected, he detected nothing. An knew that would happen anyway since his [En] wasn¡¯t strong enough and observation Haki wasn¡¯t mature enough. His current limit with Observation Haki is about 22 meters, while [En] had a radius of 20 meters. It wasn¡¯t enough to perceive the corridor since it was at least 1 Kilometer long. As for Ponzu¡¯s way to know the way, An already guessed. ¡°Come out, My darlings.¡± Ponzu raised her hand and touched her hat. Suddenly, dozens of bees flew out of her pink hat and gathered in her hand, acting like her servants. Those bees were slightly bigger than ordinary bees and looked quite fierce, but they were docile in Ponzu¡¯s hand. ¡°You will use the bees to find the way?¡± An asked. He knew about Ponzu¡¯s ability from the Show. Ponzu was surprised. An already guessed her n as soon as he saw the bees. She looked at the bees dotingly and said: ¡°Those bees are my babies; I have raised them for a long time, and I can give them any order, and they will obey it. Look at this.¡± Ponzu pointed her hand toward the forks and said like a queen ordering her servants: ¡°Go.¡± The bees formed three groups, and each one flew toward a corridor. An¡¯s eyes were wide as he eximed: ¡°They¡¯re obedient. It must¡¯ve taken a lot of effort to raise them, right?¡± Ponzu seemed to think about the sad and happy days when she was training them and said: ¡°Well, it¡¯s super difficult. It took a lot of hard work to train them, so under normal circumstances, I won¡¯t use them because I¡¯m afraid of losing them.¡± Hearing this, An apologized: ¡°Sorry.¡± Ponzu smiled: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, you helped me a lot already. I should return the favor, right? Moreover, before reaching the ground, we are partners, so we should help each other.¡± An nodded, but his thoughts were different: ¡®This woman is so innocent; I will feel terrible if I deceive her feelings. Forget it; let¡¯s take one step at a time.¡¯ Although he had chosen the third option, An¡¯s thoughts were simple, whether heplete it or not is his own choice in the end. Therefore, if Ponzu didn¡¯t want to be with him and join his harem (Inexistent for the moment), he won¡¯t get punished by the system. He just won¡¯t receive the reward. Time passed by, and twenty minutester, four bees flew back from the second corridor. ¡°What is it?¡± An asked Ponzu. ¡°It¡¯s Powder,¡± Ponzu replied. ¡°Well, they brought back powder from a brick wall,¡± Ponzu exined. ¡°What does it mean?¡± An was confused. Ponzu thought for a bit and said: ¡°I think there is a brick wall in the second corridor.¡± ¡°Is that so.¡± An nodded thoughtfully. If that¡¯s the case, then the second corridor may be a dead end. ¡°By the way, it¡¯s been thirty minutes now. Why aren¡¯t the beesing back yet?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡± Ponzu shook her head as she was worried herself. Upon seeing this, An didn¡¯t ask again. Ponzu trained those bees for a long time, and she was worried about them. After another ten minutes, Ponzu became hopeless and said calmly: ¡°The bees sent to the first and third corridors aren¡¯t returning. It seems something is wrong with those passages. Let¡¯s go to the second corridor.¡± ¡°What if they came back?¡± An asked in concern. Ponzu replied: ¡°If they are still alive, as long as I¡¯m not too far away, they wille and find me, don¡¯t worry.¡± An nodded: ¡°Then let¡¯s go.¡± An and Ponzu walked toward the second corridor carefully. The second corridor maybe is safer than the other two, but it didn¡¯t mean it waspletely safe. After ten minutes, a tall brick wall appeared in front of them. ¡°Ah, it¡¯s really a dead end. The power my darlings brought was from this wall.¡± Ponzu sighed in disappointment. This meant that they made a trip in vain, and they needed to go back to choose the first or third fork. An looked at the brick wall with sharp eyes and said earnestly: ¡°I think three is a way to get past this wall.¡± ¡°Really?¡± Ponzu raised her head and looked at An in surprise. An pointed at the wall and said: ¡°Look, the color of this wall is different. It means that it was newly made for the Hunter Exam. The purpose is to create a dead-end for the candidates and consume even more time.¡± ¡°So it¡¯s like that.¡± Ponzu came to a realization. ¡°But we don¡¯t have any tools with us. How are we going to go through it.¡± Hearing this, An smiled and said: ¡°We will blow it up.¡± ¡°What?¡± Ponzu couldn¡¯t believe what she heard. At this time, An already took a step forward and raised his hand into a fist before sending a powerful punch toward the wall. Boom! The brick wall shattered entirely under An¡¯s punch. As the dust settled down, a quiet stairway appeared in front of An and Ponzu. The stair was leading down, but they didn¡¯t know where exactly. An didn¡¯t hesitate and said: ¡°Let¡¯s go. This should lead us to the ground. We made the right choice.¡± ¡°An, you¡¯re amazing,¡± Ponzu said in admiration. She really admired his power. Thirty minutester, An and Ponzu reached the ground smoothly. There were already five people who reached the ground faster than them. They were Hisoka, Illumi, Chrollo, Pakunoda, and Uvogin. Seeing Aning with Ponzu, the atmosphere changed. Hisoka, Illumi, and Chrollo all turned around to look at An. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: Here is the first chapter for this month and expect more chapters. I wanted to let you know that I will be breaking the chapters into two parts since they are getting longer. So any chapter that is too long will be in two parts. Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 4.0/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 61: The Last Fight Chapter 61: The Last Fight ¡°Tsk, those guys are fast.¡± An nced at Hisoka and Chrollo before taking Ponzu and walked to the side. He is aware that there is some rtionship between Hisoka, Illumi, and the Ryuudan, or Chrollo, to be specific, especially since Hisoka should be the fourth member of the Ryuudan. And here in the hunter test, they pretended that they didn¡¯t know each other. Even now, while there is no one here, they weren¡¯t talking at all. But they were familiar with each other. There were five dangerous people here, and An needs a lot of effort to get out unscathed. ¡°Ah, there are here.¡± Suddenly Ponzu said. An turned his head only to see Hisoka and Illumi walking toward him. ¡°Don¡¯t worry.¡± An said calmly. Although those two were dangerous, they knew each other from the second part of the Exam, and they both owed him a favor. An was sure that they wouldn¡¯t do anything to him. However, Hisoka and Illumi weren¡¯t ordinary people and shouldn¡¯t be judged as such. So even if they attacked, it was expected, which is why An was on guard. When they arrived in front of him, Hisoka smiled: ¡°An, you arrived very quickly. It seems like you have taken a shortcut.¡± Hearing this, An said as if he was upset: ¡°What? You and Illumi arrived faster.¡± Initially, An thought that he was fast, it only took him 3 hours to get down here, but five people were faster than him. ¡®I really don¡¯t know how those guys did it. Is there a faster way than going down the stairs?¡¯ An was curious, but he smelt blood. He frowned and looked at Hisoka and said: ¡°You were injured?¡± ¡°Ah, you could tell?¡± Hisoka asked in surprise. An nodded and said: ¡°You smell of blood, and it¡¯s not someone else¡¯s. It¡¯s your own.¡± ¡°Your nose is excellent.¡± Hisoka squinted smiled. ¡°You¡¯re too close. Step away from me.¡± An said in disgust. ¡°Okay.¡± Hisoka walked to the other side obediently and then sat down against a pir. ¡°By the way, how did you get hurt?¡± An asked curiously. With Hisoka¡¯s power, it¡¯s almost impossible for ordinary people to hurt him. And since he came here fast, it means something happened. Hisoka pondered for a bit before he said: ¡°A madman hacked me.¡± ¡°Madman?¡± ¡°it¡¯s not a madman. It¡¯s an Examiner from the previous Exam. He nned to take revenge on Hisoka and made a trap in the tower for him, but Hisoka killed him in the end.¡± Illumi exined. Hearing this, An remembered that there was indeed such a thing in the original show. To injure Hisoka, that Examiner indeed has some power, but he picked the wrong target. Because Hisoka sometimes doesn¡¯t care even if he is injured to achieve his purpose. Hisoka nced at Ponzu beside An and asked in interest: ¡°By the way, An, who is that girl next to you, where is Gon?¡± ¡°Yeah, what about Killua? Didn¡¯t the two of them follow you?¡± Illumi asked as he noticed Ponzu as well. Candidate #44, Hisoka. Candidate #301, Gittarackur. Ponzu recognized both of them and knew how dangerous they were. The ¡®Danger¡¯ she recognized wasn¡¯t how dangerous they seemed, but how much her instinct screamed danger when she looked at them. At this time, Ponzu got nervous when the two targeted her verbally and looked at An in distress. An already knew that Hisoka and Illumi would ask about Ponzu since Gon wasn¡¯t here and he was interested in Gon, while Illumi would ask because Killua wasn¡¯t here. After thinking for a while, An replied: ¡°She¡¯s Ponzu. I met her in the tower. As for Gon and Killua, they should be in the tower.¡± ¡°In other words, you were alone, right?¡± Illumi asked. An said without denying it. ¡°It turns out you are more than friends!¡± Hisoka smiled. An was stunned before ring at Hisoka: ¡°Hey, don¡¯t speak nonsense.¡± Illumi said: ¡°Taking a beautiful girl with you and leaving your friends behind. So, you¡¯re a ¡®dates before mates¡¯ type.¡± Hearing their words, An knew that they were half-joking half ridiculing him. His tone became agitated as he said: ¡°You two, are you trying to provoke me to fight here?¡± Seeing the cold air radiating from An, Hisoka knew that they went too far and said: ¡°Although I want to fight you, An, but I¡¯m injured, and I will lose if we fight now. Let fight another time.¡± An looked at Illumi and said: ¡°What about you?¡± Illumi said: ¡°I¡¯m a professional assassin, I collect my money before killing, I don¡¯t engage in meaningless fights.¡± An said: ¡°Very well then, shut up and don¡¯t bother me. As for Gon and Killya, they¡¯re strong. They wille down for sure. Just wait for them.¡± Hearing this, Hisoka and Illumi said nothing and moved away. However, as he dealt with one wave, another one started. As soon as Hisoka and Illumi went away, another guy jumped in front of him. Of course, it was Uvogin, who else would bother An except for him. He is #11 in the Ryuudan, and other than fighting, he has no further interest. Uvogin directly looked at An and said: ¡°If they don¡¯t want to fight you, I will.¡± He was referring to Hisoka and Illumi when he said ¡®they.¡¯ Suddenly, the system¡¯s choice appeared in front of An. [1: Defeat or kill Uvogin. Reward: Armament Haki (Intermediate) Or Zoan devil fruit, Cat Cat fruit, Model: Leopard.] [2: Ignore Uvogin¡¯s provocation, and don¡¯t fight him. Reward: Advanced Treasure Chest x 1] It seems that a battle is inevitable after all. Therefore, An made his choice: ¡®the first option it is.¡¯ If An can¡¯t do it, he won¡¯t get any reward, but if he defeats Uvogin or Kills him, he would get Armament Haki or Cat Cat Fruit, Model: Leopard, which will significantly increase his power. After making his decision, An raised his head and said: ¡°I will fight with you, but I have a condition.¡± Uvogin frowned and said: ¡°What condition?¡± ¡°One, this battle is between the two of us. No one can intervene.¡± ¡°Two, this is thest battle between the two of us. Whether we live or die, we won¡¯t fight again. No matter who wins or loses, or who lives or dies, no one is allowed to seek revengeter, what do you say?¡± ¡°No problem!¡± Uvogin directly agreed and said with a grin: ¡°This time, I will kill you here.¡± The killing intent in his eyes was no joke. ¡°I will say the same to you,¡± An said using Conqueror¡¯s Haki. The deration of a life and death battle caught everyone¡¯s attention. Hisoka didn¡¯t care about anything as he said: ¡°There is a good show about to begin.¡± Illumi said: ¡°They¡¯re really energetic.¡± Chrollo looked at this silently, while Pakunoda couldn¡¯t help asking: ¡°Chief, shouldn¡¯t we stop Uvogin?¡± Chrollo nced at her and asked: ¡°Why should we stop him? Do you think he will lose?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡± Pakunoda shook her head and said: ¡°Uvogin fought that An twice, and he didn¡¯t gain any advantage. This is theirst fight, so they won¡¯t hold anything back, so it¡¯s impossible to predict the oue.¡± Chrollo tapped his finger lightly, and his eyes shed: ¡°Then I will be on Uvogin and win.¡± Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: Here is the first chapter for this month and expect more chapters. I wanted to let you know that I will be breaking the chapters into two parts since they are getting longer. So any chapter that is too long will be in two parts. Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 4.0/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 62: Ice Fist and Throwing Machine Chapter 62: Ice Fist and Throwing Machine The ground floor of the Trick tower was just an empty hall. The atmosphere in this same Hall was taut. An and Uvogin stood in the center in front of each other as their Aura rose. The power of a Nen user is determined by the amount of Nen they possess. Uvogin, as the No.1 fighting maniac in the Ryuudan, had a powerful Nen. Although An¡¯s Aura wasn¡¯t as strong as Uvogin, his Aura contained an icy cold touch. Suddenly, the air around him turned colder and colder as it moved toward Uvogin like a blizzard. After fighting with An twice, Uvogin understood that An could freeze anything. Uvogin snorted as he punched the blizzard straight away. The punch was powerful enough to stop the air from moving forward, making small ice cubes dance in the air. At this moment, Uvogin¡¯s pupil shrank as An rushed at him. ¡°Too fast!¡± Uvogin was shocked. He couldn¡¯t react in time as he received An¡¯s uppercut. But as a first-ss Enhancer, Uvogin used his physical strength to withstand the attack and retaliated with a punch. An was already using his Observation Haki, and as soon as Uvogin punched, he was already eight steps away from him. Uvogin didn¡¯t chase after An, who stepped back, but he spat a mouthful of blood as he felt half of his face paralyzed. ¡°A punch can hurt me? Is he that powerful?¡± Uvogin was suspicious. He didn¡¯t think that the other party was that strong, so he looked at his hand, and sure enough, Ice covered his fists. He immediately understood that An gloved his hands with Ice to increase his power. That¡¯s indeed what An was doing as he already figured out that typical attacks did not affect Uvogin. Therefore, he covered his hands with Ice forming a glove of Ice. It can protect his hand and improve his attack. Uvogin didn¡¯t get angry. Instead, he grinned ferociously at An. His only enjoyment in life was fighting, and the stronger his opponent, the more excited he would get. Boom! His body was suddenly covered by Aura as he rushed toward An like a bull while raising his fist. Blue veins bulged out of his arm, highlighting the amazing power that single punch contained. sh Steps! An¡¯s figure disappeared from Uvogin¡¯s view as his fist hammered the ground leaving a massive crater behind. At the same time, this attack left his back fully open, which made Uvogin feel bad. He hurriedly turned around only to see An¡¯s attack already reaching him. Leaf Strong Whirlwind! ((Konoha G¨­riki Senp¨±!) An¡¯s kicknded on Uvogin, sending him sliding like a cannonball to a pir. The Huge pir was smashed apart due to the power behind An¡¯s kick. ¡°Hoo~.¡± An¡¯s let out a deep breath. From start to finish, it all took 2 seconds. While using Observation Haki to avoid Uvogin¡¯s attacks, he used Shunpo to get behind him and poured out every ounce of his physical strength to use Might Guy¡¯s Leaf Strong Whirlwind (Konoha G¨­riki Senp¨±). Even if Uvogin¡¯s body was as strong as steel, he wouldn¡¯t be able to get out unscathed from this attack. This was proved right away. Uvogin was tattered as his Aura decreased slightly. Of course, it is impossible to defeat this guy relying on Leaf Strong Whirlwind alone. An knew that well. Uvogin roared as he got up while pushing the pile of stones from the destroyed pir with a hideous expression. That kick can bepared to a heavy truck hitting him at a speed of 100 km/H. Fortunately, his defense was strong enough to block most of the impact. If someone else took that hit, he would¡¯ve died without any second chance. He stared at An as he understood something. An was much stronger than the previous two times. ¡®This guy has a very keen perception. He can instantly predict my attacks, coupled with that teleporting thing and his powerful kick that doesn¡¯t lose in powerpared to my fist. he had an overwhelmingbination of skills.¡¯ Uvogin thought. Uvogin no longer rushed forward crazily. Although he never liked to use his brain, it¡¯s different in a fight as he can be very flexible with his strategy. An¡¯s power exceeded his expectation by leaps and bounds. Therefore, Uvogin decided to change his strategy. He picked up a few stones from the ground andunched them at An. An instantly guessed that Uvogin was using Shu to strengthen the stone, and immediately thought shed in his mind. ¡°Don¡¯t block this!¡± An decisively sh Stepped away from the projectiles. Boom! As the stones hit the tower¡¯s wall, they pierced it without stopping, leaving behind a fist-sized hole while the stones kept flying far away. ¡°Hahaha, again!¡± Uvoginughed as An didn¡¯t dare block his attack. He immediately picked a few egg-sized stones from the ground and started throwing them with two hands while wrapping them in Nen. They wereunched like rockets toward An. As An was a master in Enhancement, he didn¡¯t dare block the stones, so with Observation Haki in full use, he started teleporting around, leaving behind countless After Images. (T/N: Teleporting is just a term; he is using Shunpo (sh Steps) to move around at an extremely high speed that, to everyone else, it may seem like he was teleporting.) The wall behind An became like a ho nest due to the sheer amount of stones that pierced it, while Uvogin seemed to transform into a Baseball thrower. An knew that he couldn¡¯t keep this up, as space around them was limited. Overtime, Uvogin would be able to follow his movement and send a well-aimed attack at him. At that time, An wouldn¡¯t be able to react even with sh Steps. Also, the continuous use of sh Steps consumes too much Stamina. Therefore, An was continually looking for an opportunity to approach Uvogin. To stop Uvogin¡¯s long-ranged attacks, the most effective way is to get close to him. But Uvogin had a rich fighting experience, so he would keep his distance every time he threw the stones at An. The power behind the stones he threw depended on the distance between them. If the distance shrunk, the rocks would lose a great deal of power. The power required to throw the stones at such a high speed and power was quite enormous. Uvogin wouldn¡¯t be able to keep up for long even if he had a monstrous physical strength. This is why Uvogin was preserving his power. He was using his full strength but still managed to turn into an automatic turret with a high firing rate. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: Here is the first chapter for this month and expect more chapters. I wanted to let you know that I will be breaking the chapters into two parts since they are getting longer. So any chapter that is too long will be in two parts. Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 4.0/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 63: Advantages Chapter 63: Advantages In just two minutes, Uvogin alreadyunched hundreds of small stones with amazing strength, enough to prate an armored Vehicle. The wall behind An is in ruins already. Uvogin¡¯s expression was already hideous. He was so concentrated on throwing stones at An that he ignored his surroundings. And now, he was standing in his ce stunned as he didn¡¯t find any stone to throw. The broken pir¡¯s Rocks were all thrown at An already, leaving him with nothing to throw. ¡°Ah, there are no more stones.¡± He said dumbfoundedly. An already predicted this in advance. He was paying attention to the stones on the ground in addition to the ones Uvogin threw at him. He decisively seized this opportunity to step forward and attack Uvogin with a Leaf Strong Whirlwind. Uvogin, who didn¡¯t react, was kicked on the chest and flew away like a cannonball again. He was smashed into a wall leaving a human-sized crack on the wall. ¡°Damn, that kick hurts¡­¡± Uvogin rubbed his rising and falling chest with difficulty as he felt pain all over his body. ¡°This is my chance!¡± An took advantage of the fallen Uvogin and directly rushed toward him while covering his fist with Ice. He started punched Uvogin continuously as the wall behind him cracked even further. Boom! Boom! Boom! In a few seconds, Uvogin was punched dozens of times, and even with his defense, he was in pain. Instantly, his expression turned ferocious as he roared. ¡°Damn you!¡± ¡®His punches weren¡¯t too strong, but the coldness that seeped out of them into my body made my Nen slow down and prevented me from fighting back.¡¯ Uvogin gritted his teeth as he thought. An was punching with everything he got, with a single purpose in mind, which is killing Uvogin. It wasn¡¯t just pure power, as his Killing Intent mixed with every blow. If he doesn¡¯t defeat or Kill Uvogin, he would be dead. An knew this very well. So he didn¡¯t show any mercy and used all of his power like mad. An¡¯s fist continued raining on top of Uvogin¡¯s body without stopping. Uvogin had a rusty taste in his mouth as he spurted a mouthful of blood. The blood aroused Uvogin¡¯s Primitive survival instinct turning him into a beast. His Aura erupted from his body in waves and surged around him, making An step away instantly and raise his guard. Uvogin moved! He shot at An at lightning speed. ¡°So fast!¡± An was shocked and had no time to escape, but his reaction was slow. He put his arms in front of him for the first time as he used Ken to block the punch. An flew back and mmed into a stone pir, breaking it apart. An stood up and spurted a mouthful of blood. His eyes looked at Uvogin gravely. ¡®This guy is a monster. He took so many of my punches, but he still can strike back with such force. He indeed deserves his title as the number one fighting maniac of the Ryuudan.¡¯ An thought. ¡°I¡¯m just returning the favor.¡± Uvogin grinned as he jumped and mmed his fist at An, who didn¡¯t dare to block it again. He hurriedly rolled to the side as he wanted to recover some strength. Uvogin already expected An to dodge, so he immediately chased behind him, only for An to use sh Steps to getaway. Uvogin¡¯s expression changed. He depended on his instinct and instantly turned around and punching at An, who appeared behind him. An once again kicked Uvogin using Leaf Strong Whirlwind (Konoha G¨­riki Senp¨±). Boom! One punch and one kick collided as the gust of wind howled on the Trick Tower¡¯s ground floor. At the same time, Uvogin and An moved back. An frowned: ¡®Damn it! I consumed a lot of power, and my physical strength hasn¡¯t recovered yet. I can use Leaf Strong Whirlwind (Konoha G¨­riki Senp¨±) at full power.¡¯ The same can be said for Uvogin. The battle consumed a lot of his power. However, as an enhancer, he is faster and more resilient than a Transmuter like An. This is his advantage. Therefore, after ten seconds, Uvogin once againunched an attack at An without giving the slightest opportunity to recover his strength. An recovered a little, but it was far from enough to fight Uvogin, so instead of fighting, he used his advantage, Observation Haki, to dodge Uvogin¡¯s attacks while recovering. He didn¡¯t want to use sh Steps as it cost too much stamina. If he used it repeatedly, his energy would deplete in 20 minutes, so he tried to avoid using it. Uvogin couldn¡¯t touch An at all. An avoided seven or eight punches making Uvogin Angry. ¡°A Punch, that¡¯s all I need. As long as Ind a hit, I win.¡± Uvogin stared at An. He knew that thetter wasn¡¯t as good as him physically or in Nen quantity. If the two of them used Ken to defend, Uvogin¡¯s defense would be 100, and An¡¯s would be 90. The difference of 10 points isn¡¯t the difference of their Ken, but instead the difference between their Nen. Although the gap isn¡¯t that huge, it was still a considerable gap. That¡¯s why An could barely defend using Ken. An injury would reduce the overall power, speed, and reaction time of someone, and if An received another blow now, it would definitively be the end of the battle. It¡¯s a pity for Uvogin. An has Observation Haki, which made it almost impossible for Uvogin tond a hit. An dodged left and right while concentrating his Aura. Suddenly, arge thick ice wall condensed in front of him. It was two meters high and a one-foot thick wall that appeared instantly. Uvogin didn¡¯t care and directly punched the wall without a second thought breaking it. The wall could hardly stop him for even a second as it broke like ss. Although An¡¯s defense wasn¡¯t as good as Uvogin, he can make it useful if he makes fair use of his Nen. Right now, he stopped Uvogin¡¯s attack with the Ice wall. Even though he broke it, he couldn¡¯t hit An. Compared to using Ken to defend, using it to create an Ice wall consumes less Nen and was more useful as it can block Uvogin¡¯s attack. There is nothing but anger in Uvogin¡¯s eyes as he looked at An. The only thought in his head was ¡®Kill An.¡¯ As he continued his attack, his speed was significantly decreasing, and his power behind each punch was weaker. An noticed his and his Killing Intent soared: ¡®His Stamina is almost out, and it¡¯s time to fight back.¡¯ sh Steps. Suddenly, An disappeared, and Uvogin felt danger and turned around as fast as he could, but¡­ ¡°Too slow!¡± A cold voice echoed behind him, and in the next moment, a kicknded on Uvogin¡¯s neck¡­ Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: Here is the first chapter for this month and expect more chapters. I wanted to let you know that I will be breaking the chapters into two parts since they are getting longer. So any chapter that is too long will be in two parts. Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 4.0/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 64: Ice Slash! Chapter 64: Ice sh! The neck is one of the most vulnerable parts of a human¡¯s body. Once it is injured, the rest of the body would be slightly paralyzed or cause death. Crack! A crisp bone-cracking sound echoed. Even if Uvogin¡¯s body was like steel, his neck cracked after Annded a Leaf Strong Whirlwind on it. ¡°My neck¡­¡± Uvogin¡¯s head was covered in cold sweat as An¡¯s kick almost torn his head off his body. ¡°This is bad!¡± Although cracking his neck didn¡¯t do too much damage, he was still affected. He couldn¡¯t makerge movements anymore as the severe pain from torn muscles and shattered bones in his neck was unbearable. Right now, Uvogin could only grit his teeth and try to move his neck back into its original position. If he moved it too fast, he wouldn¡¯t be able to reposition it back smoothly, but the pain would be severe if he moved too slow. However, as he tried to move his damaged neck back into position, An shed in front of him. Leaf Whirlwind (Konoha Senpu)! Although this attack was slightly weaker than Leaf Strong Whirlwind, no one can underestimate it. Uvogin hurriedly raised his arms to block the attack, but this kick was just a faint. ¡°There!¡± An sneered. As soon as Leaf Whirlwind was blocked, he turned around and punched. Uvogin was unable to guard against this attack, and instantly Coldness spread over his body. Uvogin was stunned by An¡¯s attacks. He couldn¡¯t predict any pattern in his attack from start to finish. ¡°No, if he freezes me, it¡¯s over.¡± This thought crept into Uvogin¡¯s head as he instantly controlled his Nen to fight the Coldness. Roar!! Uvogin¡¯s Nen once again burst out, dispelling the Coldness. An jumped up in the air with Moon Walk. Then he sharply looked at Uvogin. He spread his hands, and the cold Aura erupted around him, forming an Icicle. An held the Icicle, thenunched it toward Uvogin. As soon as Uvogin raised his head, pain assaulted him from his neck. But he didn¡¯t care about the pain at this moment. He poured Nen into his fist and faced An¡¯s Icicle head-on. With a loud bang, Uvogin¡¯s punch crashed the Icicle. Simultaneously, An used Moon Walk to crush down toward Uvogin with a kick to the head. With Uvogin¡¯s current injury, he can¡¯t receive any blow to the head, or else he is done for. Therefore, An aimed his attacks at Uvogin¡¯s sore spot, his neck. Uvogin gritted his teeth and roared. He could only endure the pain as he once again punched. Boom! The ground under Uvogin cracked, but An didn¡¯t finish his attack yet. Without giving any chance to Uvogin, he rolled around and covered his hands with Ice gloves and punched. Login didn¡¯t dare to be careless. He instantly punched out again. His neck¡¯s injury was getting severe with each movement he made. He changed from a fierce beast to an injured animal. And even though An was tattered as well, he didn¡¯t receive much damage. He was in good shapepared to Uvogin. ¡°Damn it! What A Joke! I¡¯m the strongest!!!¡± Uvogin roared angrily as his Aura soared. He concentrated all of his remaining Nen into his fist before mming it down. Big Bang Impact! In an instant, Uvogin¡¯s hand turned red as he hit the ground. Uvogin¡¯s fist created a giant crater on the ground with a loud bang as the Tower¡¯s floor tiles scattered with the impact. The entire Tower shook slightly as if an earthquake or a missile just hit it. This was Uvogin¡¯s strongest attack. He aimed to make it as strong as a nuclear warhead, but he still didn¡¯t reach that power yet. He wanted to have the power to level a city with one punch. But even though he wasn¡¯t that strong yet, his punch was as powerful as a small missile. The Trick tower was built specially to hold prisoners, so even with Uvogin¡¯s attack, it wasn¡¯t destroyed and only shook slightly. The ground floor was destroyed, though. In the center of the Crater, Uvogin stood straight. ¡°Hoo~.¡± After using Big Bang Impact, Uvogin¡¯s Nen was depleted, and his breathing was ragged. ¡°That guy, where did he go?¡± Uvogin didn¡¯t rx as he remained vignt while looking around for An. He knew that his punch didn¡¯t affect An. At this moment, he felt a crisis approaching him and directly looked up, ignoring the severe pain from his neck. He noticed a huge Icicle rapidly descending on him. ¡°This is Bad!¡± Uvogin¡¯s Nen was depleted and couldn¡¯t muster enough power to punch the Icicle away. He could only block it with his body. He was sted down and smashed into the crater he created before the Icicle broke apart. Uvogin vomited a mouthful of blood. His injury was severe. An sh Stepped in front of him. Thanks to Moon Walk, An was able to stay away from Uvogin¡¯s Big Bang Impact. He used that opportunity to prepared a giant Icicle to finish Uvogin off. All this happened so quickly that which caught Uvogin off guard. An was no longer afraid as he is confident that he can kill Uvogin. ¡°Shit!¡± Seeing An¡¯s haughty expression, Uvogin shouted unhappily as he resisted the pain in his body and punched An. ¡°Humph!¡± An snorted and avoided the punch with the Observation Haki¡¯s help. Simultaneously, he lifted his leg and punched Uvogin¡¯s chest. Uvogin flew upside down while An moved quickly with a Kick. Leaf Whirlwind! An kicked Uvogin¡¯s stomach sending him sliding on the ground before he hit a pir far away. An continued his attack as he approached with sh Steps before kicking again. After five or six kicks, Uvogin was almost losing consciousness. Blood spurted out of his mouth after each kick as his body was dyed red with blood. He was angry, his pupils were bloodshot, and a growl escaped his throat. An didn¡¯t give him a chance to get back up as he made an Icicle in his hand and shouted. ¡°Die!!¡± Ice sh!! An shed Uvogin with the Icicle intending on killing him. Chrollo, Hisoka, and Illumi, who already moved away as soon as Uvogin used his Big Bang Impact, stared with wide eyes at the scene in front of them. Chrollo resisted the urge to rescue Uvogin as he only stared at An shing his partner. Uvogin¡¯s Ken shattered, and the sh hit his bare flesh without any resistance. Blood spattered as a thirty-centimeter wound appeared on Uvogin¡¯s body. If Uvogin¡¯s body wasn¡¯t so tough, that sh could¡¯ve chopped him in half. Uvogin¡¯s pupils were wide open. His face looked at the wound on his body in disbelief before intense pain spread all over. ¡°Aaaaah!¡± A violent roar escaped Uvogin¡¯s hoarse throat like a demon. His gaze was filled with anger, hatred, and Killing Intent. Suddenly his eyes were fixed on An as he clenched his teeth, and veins bulged out of his body rapidly. ¡°Oooooooooh!¡± His Aura erupted once again as he roared. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: Here is the first chapter for this month and expect more chapters. I wanted to let you know that I will be breaking the chapters into two parts since they are getting longer. So any chapter that is too long will be in two parts. Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 4.0/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 65: Full Power To The End! Chapter 65: Full Power To The End! Uvogin¡¯s hair was fluttering in the wind, and the bloodstain on his chest made him look like a monster. His eyes were red with madness. Killing Intent and Anger burst out of his body in waves. The only thing that mattered was defeating the person in front of him. ¡°This Guy¡­¡± An frowned with a gloomy face. The Enhancers were special; their powers can increase due to their emotions. Initially, as Uvogin consumed so much of his Nen, he shouldn¡¯t have this much left. But because of his anger, his body generated Nen like crazy, and a few moments, he returned to his peak. But with his current injuries, the pain Uvogin was experiencing would render a grown man to a crying mess, but Uvogin didn¡¯t care at all. An was impressed by Uvogin¡¯s Aura. He was standing ten meters away, but he still felt the Aura like hot mes burning. ¡°What is this?¡± Suddenly, An¡¯s face changed. He looked at the wound on Uvogin¡¯s body, and to his surprise, it was healing at speed visible to the naked eye. Enhancers were among the few Nen types that can increase the healing rate using their Aura. ¡°Damn it!¡± An said darkly. If Uvogin recovered, everything he did from start to now would go down the drain. An was preparing tounch a surprise attack. Uvogin gave up healing his wound and jumped up to intercept An and punched him. sh Steps. An directly avoided using sh Steps. Uvogin¡¯s punched empty air, but it sent a massive shockwave that damaged the ground like a hammer. An was surprised by the power that casual punch had. If An gets hit by that punch, his bones will crack. ¡°Die!¡± Uvogin was still in a frenzy. His fist started ramming down like a machine gun. After a while, the dust created by Uvogin¡¯s punches was lifted, and dozens of pits appeared on the ground with varying sizes. The smallest pit was 3 meters wide, while thergest was 10 meters. However, Uvogin wasn¡¯t happy. He was panting heavily as his eyes looked around. Suddenly, he caught on the figure approaching him quickly. With air Superiority, An escaped thest outburst unscathed. An was holding a crystal Icicle with both hands as he used sh Steps to increase his momentum. Although Uvogin consumed a lot of energy in his frenzied attack, his reaction wasn¡¯t affected as he avoided An¡¯s attack by stepping to the side. The Icicle passed dangerously close to Uvogin¡¯s body. At the same time, he punched him with the back of his hand. An used the Icicle to block the punch, but it broke. Uvogin¡¯s punch rushed toward An without decreasing in speed. An instantly kicked with his legs and jumped to the air to distance himself from Uvogin. Boom! Uvogin picked up two rocks from the ground and threw them at An, who was in the air, but thetter dodged while looking for an opportunity to approach Uvogin. He was saving his energy for a heavy blow. His gaze locked on Uvogin¡¯s head and neck. That was the only way he could injure him. ¡®Damn it! My neck hurts more and more, and if I leave it alone, I won¡¯t be able to performrge movements. I must move my neck back to its original position; otherwise, I will be restricted.¡¯ An saw Uvogin stop throwing rocks and twisted his neck. Taking advantage of this moment, Anunched his attack directly. Leaf Strong Whirlwind. An kicked while falling from the sky, and Uvogin had no choice but to use a single hand to block this attack. However, he underestimated this kick as he almost fell to his knees. An turned around and kicked again. Uvogin couldn¡¯t defend himself, and his face was kicked. His neck injury aggravated as intense pain spread all over his body like an electric current. Uvogin¡¯s concentration broke as sweat beads covered his forehead. An knew that this was a rare opportunity and immediately poured what little power he still had and used Konoha¡¯s Taijutsu techniques to attack Uvogin repeatedly. At this moment, Uvogin grabbed An¡¯s wrist and took a deep breath. An felt immense danger arise from his heart. He knew what Uvogin was about to shout. He knew this attack from the show, but he isn¡¯t clear how loud Uvogin¡¯s roar could be. If he was unprepared, his eardrums would burst out, and he would die. ¡°Damn, I can¡¯t avoid this.¡± An¡¯s brain was trying its best to find a way to cope with Uvogin¡¯s Roar. Roooooooaaaaar!! Uvogin roared. Almost everyone in the tower could hear this roar, and it made nearly all of them tremble. Gon, Killua, Kurapika, Leorio, and many other candidates in the tower and the prisoners all paled after hearing this roar. When Uvogin was about to shout, An instantly used Conqueror¡¯s Haki without restrain and used it to protect himself. He used Conqueror¡¯s Haki to diverse the sonic impact while also impacting Uvogin¡¯s consciousness. (T/N: I have no idea if that¡¯s possible, but that¡¯s what the Author wrote.) An felt ufortable. Although he used his Conqueror¡¯s Haki to withstand the Sonic boom in time, the distance was too close, and his eardrums were affected, and his head was buzzing. For the time being, both sides stared at each other without doing anything. ¡°You are getting better and better as time passes,¡± Uvogin said. After such a fierce, An¡¯s power exceeded his imagination. Although they were enemies, Uvogin felt amazed by An¡¯s progress. An said: ¡°So?¡± ¡°I¡¯m very excited. Let¡¯s continue.¡± Uvogin said with a grim expression. Uvogin already put back his neck to its position, and although he still felt pain, it wasn¡¯t that intense anymore, and his movement greatly improved. An didn¡¯t show any weakness, although he used most of his stamina. When the two were still fighting, someone wearing sses and had a rooster¡¯s haircut intervened. ¡°Stop!¡± ¡°Go away!¡± Uvogin angrily shouted. An frowned and looked at the other party, quickly recognizing him as the examiner of this phase of the Exam. ¡°Are you the examiner?¡± Sure enough, the Rooster head replied. ¡°Yes, I¡¯m Lippo. I¡¯m warning you two. If you don¡¯t stop, I will eliminate you from the Hunters Exam.¡± An frowned. Uvogin didn¡¯t care if they eliminated him. His eyes were on An, wanting to defeat him. Lippo nced at the two of them and said: ¡°This is the Hunter Exam, not somewhere you two could fight. If you have grudges, you can settle them after you leave. Moreover, you two already rendered the tower into such a sorry state; if you two continue, you will destroy the Tower.¡± An said coldly: ¡°That big guy is to me. He inflicted 80% of the damage. It has nothing to do with me. He attacked and forced me to defend myself.¡± ¡°What are you talking about.¡± Uvogin red at An. He didn¡¯t expect An to be so shameless. Although he did cause most of the damage, it was because An dodged his attacks. An looked at him provocatively. He wouldn¡¯t give in to someone as rude as Uvogin, or else thetter would think he was afraid of him. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: Here is the first chapter for this month and expect more chapters. I wanted to let you know that I will be breaking the chapters into two parts since they are getting longer. So any chapter that is too long will be in two parts. Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 4.0/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 66: Intervention Chapter 66: Intervention Seeing a fight about to break out again, Lippo hurriedly shouted: ¡°Stop! Don¡¯t try anything. This is the territory of the Hunter Association.¡± Uvogin was already grumpy and cursed: ¡°Who cares about your crap association! Can you stop us? Get out of here, or I will kill you as well.¡± ¡°He¡¯s right, Examiner-san. Please get out of the way.¡± An said indifferently. Lippo fixed his sses and looked at An and Uvogin: ¡°Both of you are indeed powerful Nen users, and I can¡¯t stop you alone. However, if you continue to fight here, I will ask the Association to take the corresponding measure to deal with both of you, and it won¡¯t be a simple elimination from the Exam. No matter how good you are, you won¡¯t be able to face the Hunter Association.¡± ¡°Damn, are you threatening me?¡± Uvogin growled. He never liked threats, and he wasn¡¯t afraid of anyone. Even though the Hunters Association held thergest authority in the world, he wasn¡¯t afraid. Not just because he was a member of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan, but because he was Uvogin from Meteor City. Lippo pushed his sses facing the arrogant Uvogin and said: ¡°It¡¯s not a threat, but a warning. Of course, if you have someone behind you and think he is strong enough, you can bring him along as well. The Hunter Association isn¡¯t afraid of anyone.¡± ¡°You¡­¡± Uvogin gritted his teeth. He was one of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan, and he was proud of it. He was outraged as the meaning behind Lippo¡¯s words was simple; the Hunter¡¯s Association was not afraid of anyone, which meant the Hunter¡¯s Association is the strongest. Although the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan were a bunch of thieves in the eyes of many, he believed it was the strongest. No one could stand in front of it, even if it were the Hunter¡¯s Association. Just as Uvogin was about to punch Lippo, An suddenly said: ¡°I see, let¡¯s stop then.¡± Uvogin was taken aback and shouted: ¡°Hey, what are you talking about?¡± An nced at him and said: ¡°I won¡¯t fight anymore.¡± ¡°What did you say?¡± ¡°I said, I won¡¯t fight you anymore.¡± Uvogin angrily yelled: ¡°Are you kidding me? I won¡¯t give up today, whether I win or lose.¡± Stop it, idiot! We are here to participate in The Hunter¡¯s Exam and get The Hunter¡¯s License. Now we have reached the third Phase of the Exam and about to go to the fourth. The Hunter¡¯s Exam has five or six Phases, and it will be stupid to give up now, right? So, I decided to stop. You just do the same thing.¡± Uvogin looked at him in disdain and said: ¡°I don¡¯t need The Hunter¡¯s License.¡± After that, he looked at Lippo and said: ¡°Just wait, I will deal with this Examiner here, and then I will kill you. You can wait and see; I won¡¯t give up until we decide a winner.¡± ¡®This lunatic wants to kill me.¡¯ Lippo looked at Uvogin with vignce. He didn¡¯t expect someone to dare make a move on the Hunter¡¯s Association. An snorted, stepped aside, and said: ¡°It¡¯s your business if you want to kill the Examiner, but I won¡¯t fight you nheless. I still need to get The Hunter¡¯s License, which is more important than killing you.¡± An was looking forward to Uvogin attacking Lippo, and with that, the Association will eliminate him. In that way, he won¡¯t bother An anymore. Although Uvogin was currently not in his peak condition, he was still confident in dealing with the Examiner. However, before he had the chance to kill Lippo, a voice echoed behind him. ¡°Uvogin, stop!¡± Uvogin was stunned as he stopped. That voice was Chrollo¡¯s. When Chrollo watched the fight between Uvogin and An, he had no choice because it was a duel. But Since Uvogin wanted to Kill the Examiner, he can interfere. And in this way, he can also prevent Uvogin from fighting An for a while as well. Uvogin looked at Chrollo and asked: ¡°Chief, why are you stopping me?¡± Chrollo didn¡¯t exin much and only said: ¡°Isn¡¯t it enough? If you continue to fight, we won¡¯t benefit anything.¡± ¡°But captain, I still have to settle this score with that guy,¡± Uvogin said unhappily. ¡°No, the winner has already been decided,¡± Chrollo said calmly. ¡°What?¡± Uvogin was stunned, and An looked at Chrollo in confusion. He and Uvogin fought for forty minutes, but neither of them lost. ¡®How did Chrollo/Chiefe to the conclusion that someone had won?¡¯ Both An and Uvogin thought ¡°Chief, what do you mean?¡± Uvogin asked with a frown. Chrollo said: ¡°You have not been able to win after fighting for more than 30 minutes. If this was a tournament, it would¡¯ve already ended in a tie.¡± ¡°That¡¯s why we need to fight again to find who is stronger.¡± Uvogin clenched his fists and said. Whether it will take an hour or two, a day or two, he didn¡¯t care as long as an oue is decided. Chrollo sighed helplessly: ¡°Anyway, just listen to me this time.¡± Uvogin¡¯s face was gloomy. After a while, he finally decided topromise and obeyed Chrollo¡¯s order. Lippo breathed a sigh of relief. He witnessed the fight between An and Uvogin and was afraid of Uvogin¡¯s power. As for An, he looked at Chrollo coldly. If he didn¡¯t interfere, Uvogin would¡¯ve been eliminated. It¡¯s a pity! An was less relieved now that Uvogin wasn¡¯t eliminated. After the previous fight, he understood that it wouldn¡¯t be easy to kill Uvogin. Even with the power he received from the system and his own Nen, they were evenly matched. ¡®Forget it. I will wait after getting The Hunter¡¯s License.¡¯ An thought as he leaned on the wall. At this time, Uvogin made his way to An, startling him, but as he noticed that Uvogin didn¡¯t have any intention to fight, he asked: ¡°What are you doing? Do you still want to fight?¡± Uvogin groaned: ¡°This battle isn¡¯t finished. We were stopped before deciding a winner, so let¡¯s continue another time.¡± An looked at him and said: ¡°Fight till the end!¡± These simple words made Uvogin¡¯s fighting spirit ignite again, but he held back as he looked forward to the next duel with An. Next time, it will be thest fight between them. There are still 67 hours left before the third phasees to an end. In other words, they will have to stay here for at least two days and a half before they can go to the next phase location. For now, only seven candidates passed this phase of the Exam. They are Hisoka, Illumi, An, Ponzu, Pakunoda, Uvogin, and Chrollo. Because the fight destroyed the ground floor, they were asked to leave the trick tower and wait outside until the next phase. ¡°Are you all right, An?¡± Ponzu walked over toward An with a worried expression. Although she didn¡¯t witness the fight, she saw how much destruction it caused and could imagine how fierce it must¡¯ve been. An waved his hand, gesturing that he was alright. ¡°Are you really okay?¡± This voice made An startled as he looked behind only to see Hisoka and Illumi walking side by side toward him. Ponzu couldn¡¯t help take a step back, as her sixth sense already marked those two as dangerous, but she was anxious about An because Illumi and Hisoka¡¯s eyes were fixed on An. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: Here is the first chapter for this month and expect more chapters. I wanted to let you know that I will be breaking the chapters into two parts since they are getting longer. So any chapter that is too long will be in two parts. Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 4.0/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 67: Chrollo’s Invitation Chapter 67: Chrollo¡¯s Invitation An frowned and said: ¡°What are you doing here?¡± Hisoka¡¯s eyes narrowed as he said: ¡°I just came here to see you, nothing else.¡± Illumi said: ¡°Awesome. You¡¯re really strong!¡± An didn¡¯t want to pay too much attention to these two, and after a few words, he took Ponzu to the forest to hunt some food. After the fierce battle with Uvogin, he was really exhausted and needed to replenish his energy urgently. The fastest way to do so is to eat meat. And probably because this was the Association¡¯s territory, the forest was rich with wildlife. Of course, while hunting, An didn¡¯t forget to keep an eye on his surroundings. After all, he couldn¡¯t guarantee that no one will take advantage of his current weakness and deal with him. Fortunately, no one attacked him. After a fulfilling meal, he transformed all of the meat he ate into Nen to quickly regain his strength. At this moment, Ponzu said: ¡°Someone ising over here.¡± She released her bees to scout the surroundings and notice anyone approaching them. The bees she released are named Sentry bees, a special breed used for guarding. An was puzzled right now. If she had some bees like this, why didn¡¯t she release them in the show when she worked in the NGL Expedition team. But it wasn¡¯t time to think about this now, since she noticed someone approaching, he took a look to see who it was. An was stunned. The one who came was Chrollo. He immediately became vignt. He is very familiar with the show and knew that Chrollo could steal Nen Ability, but he didn¡¯t know the conditions. He needed to be careful. Compared to Uvogin, who is simple-minded, Chrollo was very difficult to deal with. But, once he noticed that Chrollo came alone, he felt relieved. Neither Pakunoda nor Uvogin apanied him, which means, Chrollo wasn¡¯t here to cause trouble. After making Ponzu retreat temporarily, An asked: ¡°Okay, can you tell me what do you want?¡± ¡°Then, I will directly say it. You know who we are, right?¡± An didn¡¯t answer directly. He didn¡¯t expect Chrollo to ask this, but he nodded in the end: ¡°That¡¯s right.¡± ¡°Sure enough.¡± Chrollo wasn¡¯t surprised when he heard this. An was abnormal when he saw Chrollo on the ship, which made Chrollo suspect that he knew their identities. ¡°Have you seen us before?¡± ¡°No.¡± ¡°How did you recognize us?¡± ¡°Secret.¡± ¡°Well, besides confirming my guess, I have something else to ask you.¡± ¡°What is it?¡± An already guessed what Chrollo wanted, but he still asked. Chrollo thought for a bit before he said: ¡°You¡¯re strong. I want to invite you to join us.¡± As An expected, Chrollo wanted to recruit him: ¡°It¡¯s an honor that the leader of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan is personally inviting me.¡± An didn¡¯t say anything for a while before he asked: ¡°What if I refuse?¡± Chrollo was taken aback for a moment before he smiled: ¡°It¡¯s okay; you have the right to choose. I won¡¯t force such a thing. Moreover, I know that you can¡¯t merely agree to join us. After all, for those who know about the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan, it isn¡¯t the right ce to go.¡± An frowned and asked back: ¡°If that¡¯s the case, why would you invite me?¡± ¡°Because we are short of people,¡± Chrollo replied without revealing much. An doubted that, but Chrollo¡¯s mouth rose slightly: ¡°This time, we¡¯re here to take the Hunter Exam to take the License as well as observe if there are any suitable candidates to invite to join us, and you are one of them.¡± ¡°Okay then, it¡¯s an honor, but let me refuse. I don¡¯t want to join the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan.¡± Chrollo already knew that An would refuse, but he still smiled: ¡°Okay, but if you change your mind, you can contact me anytime.¡± After saying this, Chrollo took out his Card from his coat, handed it to An, and said: ¡°That Card has my contact information. You are wee to call me anytime.¡± After saying this, Chrollo turned around and left, while An picked up the Card and before coldly saying: ¡°Tsk, what good would I gain from joining the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan? I don¡¯t want to be a criminal.¡± However, a choice appeared in front of him. [Ding! ept Chrollo¡¯s Invitation to join the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. Reward: Magma Magma Devil Fruit.] This time, The system gave him one choice without any time limit. However, the reward moved An¡¯s heart. The Magma Magma fruit was a logia fruit with one of the strongest attacks in One Piece¡¯s world. With that power, An would be strong instantly. When the timees, even if Uvogin attacked him, he would melt without any choice. If he decided to join the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan, he would instantly gain such power. If it were anyone else, he would almost immediately agree to join the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. However, An didn¡¯t have any intention to join them. His reasoning was simple: he didn¡¯t want to work under them. If he bes one of them, he would be forced to do things against his principle. So after thinking this thoroughly, An didn¡¯t make a choice. The Magma Magma fruit was good, but An preferred Aokiji¡¯s Ice Ice Fruit and Kizaru¡¯s Light Light Fruit in terms of preference. The Ice fruit waspatible with his Nen, and it will significantly enhance his power. As for Light Fruit, he would be able to reach light speed. Even Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva wouldn¡¯t be able to touch him. Other than those, he also liked Kuma¡¯s Paw-Paw Fruit. If the reward given by the system were those fruits, he might have joined the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. Unfortunately, the reward wasn¡¯t any of these fruits. Of course, even if An didn¡¯t want to join the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan now, it didn¡¯t mean he can¡¯t change his mind in the future. Time flew by as the 67 hours of the third Phase of the Exam passed. Candidates reached the Trick Tower¡¯s ground floor one after the other. However, An didn¡¯t see Killua or Gon. This made him puzzled. Could the test be soplicated that even with Gon and Killua¡¯s power, they couldn¡¯t pass? Or did they encounter someone they couldn¡¯t deal with? Even Hisoka and Illumi were worried¡­ If Gon was really eliminated like this, it would be a shame. Hisoka¡¯s joy was discovering interesting youths in the Exam and watch them grow stronger. As for Illumi, he was concerned about Killua. If his little brother failed the test, he wouldn¡¯t have any reason to continue participating in this Exam. Fortunately, one minute before the 72 hourse to an end, Gon and Killua got out of the tower. At the same time, Leorio, Kurapika, Hanzo and Pokkle got out as well. The six of them were in the same group. Because they were six people, conflicts were inevitable between them, which wasted time. Otherwise, with Gon and Killua¡¯s abilities, they would have passed in the first ten hours. After this test, Gon got acquainted with Kurapika and the others, and they became friends. An felt a little bit interested now. Because, in the end, Gon and Kurapika became friends in the Hunter Exam. Lippo gathered the crowd after the Third Phase came to an end and announced. ¡°A total of 31 candidates passed the third Phase of the Exam. One died, two are seriously injured and can¡¯t continue in the Exam, so 28 candidates are remaining. Please board the Airship prepared by the Association to reach the fourth Phase¡¯s location, but before that, please draw a card first.¡± After that, Lippo took out a box and ced it in front of everyone. ¡°Why do we need to draw cards?¡± Gon raised his hand and asked like a good student in a ssroom. Lippo paused then said: ¡°Well, who can guess?¡± An, who knows how this Phase will be, said: ¡°It should be rted to the next phase.¡± ¡°Bingo, you are right.¡± Lippo nced at An in appreciation and exined to everyone: ¡°In the fourth phase, everyone will have a prey, and they are the prey of others, and those cards decide that.¡± Hearing this, many candidates frowned. Although it wasn¡¯t possible to know the detail of the test, they somewhat guessed it. A few people, such as Hisoka and Uvogin, showed quite an exciting expression. Hunting people was one of their best hobbies¡­ There were 28 candidates, and each one will draw a card. The first person to reach the tower is the first to draw a card and so on. Hisoka was the first to draw a card, followed by Illumi, Chrollo, Pakunoda, and Uvogin. An was the sixth to draw a card, and Ponzu was the seventh. Gon and Killua were thest to draw their cards. The Number written on the Card corresponds to the Number the prey will have. In other words, everyone here is a prey and a hunter at the same time. You can hunt others, and others can hurt you. This is the fourth Phase of the Exam. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: Here is the first chapter for this month and expect more chapters. I wanted to let you know that I will be breaking the chapters into two parts since they are getting longer. So any chapter that is too long will be in two parts. Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 4.0/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 68: Zevil Island Chapter 68: Zevil Ind In this Phase, no one is to know who is hunting them. The Examiner only allowed them to look at their prey. Because of this, even An, who watched this as a show, didn¡¯t know each candidate¡¯s target. For example, in the show, Gon¡¯s target was number 44, which is Hisoka, but right now, An couldn¡¯t confirm if it was still the case. This made An slightly ufortable. The drawing was done by firste, first served. The first to reach the tower is the first to draw a card, and thest to get there is thest to draw a card, even though everyone wanted to pick their card early. Although manyined about this, in the end, they could only follow this rule. They know that if they don¡¯t follow the rules, the Examiner will eliminate them. And in only one minute, all 28 candidates drew a card from the box. The numbers in the box are exactly the numbers on the badges of the remaining candidates. So, everyone here is a hunter, but also a prey. At the moment, An was thinking about the numbers he knew about. Hisoka is #44, Illumi is #301, Kurapika is #404, Hanzo is #294, Leorio is #403, Ponzu is #246, Killua is #99, and Pokkle is #53. As for Chrollo, Pakunoda, And Uvogin, they had #33, #18, and #100, respectively. Like Hisoka, those three wore their number badges without hiding them at all. For them, it doesn¡¯t matter who tried because no one can take them away. This is the Ryodan¡¯s confidence. An did the same. He didn¡¯t hide his badge, so all candidates here knew his number. The rules of this Phase are simple; you need to get 6 points to pass. Getting your prey¡¯s badge earns you three points, and keeping your badge gets you another three points. Each badge that isn¡¯t your target gets you 1 point. If someone couldn¡¯t get his target¡¯s badge, he needs three badges from other people to pass. Anyone who didn¡¯t have 6 points by the end of the time limit has failed to pass. After getting their number, An and the other 27 candidates boarded the Airship prepared by the association toward the next destination. They reached an isted Ind after 3 hours. This Phase is conducted on this ind. Looking at the ind from a high point, it funnily looked like a bra. The candidates had to finish this Phase within a week on this ind. The ind had more than two thousand small cameras arranged in advance by the Hunter¡¯s Association to monitor the Hunters¡¯ every move. Strictly speaking, there is only one rule that restricts the candidates, which never kill each other. If someone snatched someone¡¯s badge by killing them, the Examiner would eliminate them from the Exam. Uvogin was the most ufortable by this rule. He initially thought that he could fight on this ind, but Uvogin felt restricted once he heard this rule. This was convenient for Hisoka, who enjoys toying with opponents rather than killing them. ¡°An, who is your target?¡± Before entering the Ind, Gon approached An and asked curiously. ¡°I will keep it a secret for now.¡± An gave him a mysterious smile. He didn¡¯t want to reveal his target to anyone, including Gon. Hearing this, Gon couldn¡¯t help being curious about this, but since An said he wanted to keep it a secret, he didn¡¯t ask again. However, he muttered: ¡°I won¡¯t reveal it either then.¡± ¡°Maybe we are each other¡¯s target.¡± An smiled. Gon froze before he scratched the back of his head and said: ¡°I don¡¯t know if I¡¯m your target, but I can assure you that you¡¯re not mine.¡± An raised his brows: ¡°Really?¡± ¡°Yeah, of course.¡± Gon nodded and pointed at An¡¯s badge: ¡°An, you¡¯re #123. This isn¡¯t the number I drew from the box.¡± ¡°Well, then I will tell you that you¡¯re not my target as either.¡± Gon was relieved. ¡°Great, when I saw you smiling at me, I thought that I¡¯m your target.¡± ¡°So, Gon, if you were my target, what would you do? Would you hand your badge directly? Or would fight till the end?¡± Looking at An¡¯s expression, Gon thought for a while: ¡°Well, I would fight till the end, even if it¡¯s you, An, I won¡¯t give up easily.¡± ¡°I knew you¡¯d say that.¡± An smiled. He knew Gon¡¯s character well and knew how stubborn he could be. An¡¯s tone changed as he said gravely: ¡°Gon, I want to ask you something.¡± ¡°What is it?¡± Gon wondered. ¡°Is your target #44?¡± An asked seriously. Gon was about to answer, but Killua walked up with his hands in his pockets and said: ¡°What, Gon, is your target #44? What bad luck, #44 is Hisoka.¡± Seeing Killua¡¯s expression, Gon shook his head and said: ¡°No, my target isn¡¯t #44.¡± ¡°Really?¡± An was a little suspicious. Killua whistled: ¡°If it¡¯s not #44, then it won¡¯t be a problem. If it were, it would be troublesome.¡± Gon confirmed: ¡°It¡¯s really not Hisoka, so don¡¯t worry.¡± Hearing this, An nodded and didn¡¯t say anything else. He knew that initially, Gon¡¯s target was Hisoka. However, even with that, he managed to grab Hisoka¡¯s badge. But this time, his target isn¡¯t Hisoka, but it will be unknown whether he can get his target¡¯s badge or not. ¡°By the way, who is your target, Killua?¡± Gon asked. ¡°I will temporarily keep that a secret.¡± Killua smiled. An was speechless. Those two learn too fast. He suddenly regretted not sharing his target with them because now, he was curious about it. But he didn¡¯t ask nheless. ¡°By the way, An, do you want to go together in this exam?¡± Gon asked. An shook his head: ¡°No, let¡¯s go separately. After all, it would be meaningless if we teamed up in this Exam.¡± ¡°Well, I think so as well.¡± Killua nodded as he agreed with An. Gon was a little disappointed that both Killua and An didn¡¯t want to go together in this Exam. This time, he had to rely on his power toplete the fourth Phase. Soon after, the Airshipnded on the ind, and the candidates were released in the same orders as before. The first to finish thest test is the first to go into the ind. The interval between each candidate going into the ind is ten minutes. And since this test had a time limit, thest candidate, who is Gon, or Killua, lost about 270 minutes from that time. When it was their turn, it was already dark outside. An didn¡¯t rush toward his target but instead found made a camp and started a fire. Since it was the first day, there was no need to hurry. An knew that Hisoka, Illumi, Chrollo, Uvogin, Pakunoda, Killua, and Kurapika had the same idea. On the first day, they would find a ce to camp before making ns. After all, this Phase time limit is a whole week, which was more than enough to get to their targets. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Ps: Here is the first chapter for this month and expect more chapters. I wanted to let you know that I will be breaking the chapters into two parts since they are getting longer. So any chapter that is too long will be in two parts. Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 69: Respective Targets Chapter 69: Respective Targets On the first day, all candidates spent their night peacefully. An healed himself the entire night, he wasn¡¯t in a perfect state currently, but he recovered all of his energy. After washing himself by ake, An started making ns. His target is #18. That badge belonged to Pakunoda. Although she wasn¡¯t a strong fighter, Pakunoda was smart. An knew that in a one on one confrontation, he would be able to snatch her badge, but he wasn¡¯t 100% sure because nothing is certain in this world. He was indeed superior inbat power, but she was too smart, and he can¡¯t deal with her quickly. Pakunoda most likely won¡¯t act alone. She will be with Chrollo and Uvogin. He wasn¡¯t about that because this Phase of the Exam is different from previous ones, but if she was alone, he could sessfully snatch her badge. If she weren¡¯t alone, it would be tough to finish this test. Even with all of his power, he wouldn¡¯t be able to sneak in and snatch Pakunoda¡¯s badge, which means he had to deal with Chrollo and Uvogin as well. If she wasn¡¯t alone, An had to find another way. Suddenly, the system¡¯s notification echoed in his head. [1: Snatch target¡¯s badge within the time limit. Reward: Increase Nen Quantity by 2,000 Point.] [2: Take five points in one week. Reward: Senzu Beans x 1] An¡¯s eyes lit up. The first option was his goal. Even without the reward, he will still try it. Therefore, he decided on the second option. Since he would get Pakunoda¡¯s badge, that¡¯s three points, and he would need two more badges. Although it was difficult, the reward was satisfactory. A Senzu Bean is a magical bean from Dragon ball. Anyone who takes a Senzu Bean can go for ten days without eating, and if you¡¯re exhausted and injured, it will heal you almost instantly. As An was nning his strategy, other candidates were also making their moves. Gon leaned against a tree as he thought about how to proceed. At this moment, Gon was frowning. Hisoka wasn¡¯t his target, which was indeed fortunate. Instead, it was Uvogin. ¡°My target is that big guy who is constantly fighting with An. I don¡¯t think I can win at all¡­ I¡¯m really unlucky.¡± Gon sighed. Although he never fought Uvogin, he knew that thetter was a master Nen user. ¡®He is too strong. I can¡¯t fight him head-on; otherwise, it would be impossible for me to snatch his badge.¡¯ Gon thought. He tried to think of a way to fight Uvogin in his head, but Uvogin would just m him down each time. In other words, he had no chance in fighting Uvogin head-on. But, even knowing how strong his target was, Gon didn¡¯t think even once about giving up. ¡®I can¡¯t just give up because he is strong. Staying here is also not an option. I should get going and make a n.¡¯ Gon jumped down from the tree and started moving. He needed to move fast, find his target within a week, and snatch his badge, or else he won¡¯t pass. In another part of the forest, Uvogin and Chrollo met. ¡°Chief, who is your target?¡± As soon as they met, Uvogin casually asked. Chrollo smiled: ¡°It¡¯s #246, the girl named Ponzu.¡± ¡°Ponzu? Girl?¡± Uvogin was dumbfounded and shook his head: ¡°I don¡¯t seem to remember her.¡± ¡°It¡¯s the girl who stayed with An in the Trick Tower.¡± ¡°Oh, that girl.¡± Uvogin remembered her and said yfully: ¡°Chief, will you be able to do it? She is cute. Maybe it¡¯s not convenient for you. I can help you deal with this if you want.¡± Chrollo shook his head: ¡°No, I will do it myself.¡± ¡°Uvogin, who is your target?¡± Chrollo asked. Uvogin replied: ¡°It¡¯s #404. Do you know who it is, Chief?¡± ¡°#404?¡± Chrollo frowned. Uvogin saw the frown and curiously asked: ¡°What¡¯s the matter, Chief?¡± Chrollo replied: ¡°Uvogin, #404 isn¡¯t an ordinary guy.¡± Uvogin was taken aback: ¡°Who is it? It¡¯s not Hisoka, is it?¡± Chrollo shook his head: ¡°Hisoka is #44.¡± ¡°So, is it Illumi Zoldyck?¡± ¡°Illumi is #301.¡± ¡°No, mm¡­ Is it An?¡± Chrollo shook his head: ¡°A wrong answer again, An is #123.¡± Uvogin didn¡¯t find any other candidate to make Chrollo: ¡°Chief, who is #404?¡± Chrollo thought for a bit then said: ¡°Uvogin, #404 is the blonde guy, do you remember him?¡± Uvogin thought for a bit before he said: ¡°The blonde guy, I remember his name is Kura-something.¡± Chrollo nodded: ¡°Yes, that¡¯s him. Hispanions seem to call him Kurapika.¡± Uvogin gave Chrollo a thumb up and said: ¡°Chief, you really know everyone. I barely remember a few.¡± Chrollo said: ¡°Uvogin, there is one more thing I think you should know.¡± ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± Uvogin asked, a little confused. ¡°You may not recognize that guy, but he seems to be a survivor of the Kurta n. ¡°Kurta n?¡± Uvogin frowned as he tried remembering them. ¡°Did you remember? It¡¯s the n with the scarlet eyes.¡± Hearing this, Uvogin shouted as he remembered them: ¡°Really!! Is that guy one of the red-eyed people? They were wiped by us a few years ago, right?¡± Chrollo thought for a bit and said: ¡°Although I¡¯m not sure if he is one of them, he is wearing the iconic clothes of the Kurta n. Maybe he was away when we attacked the n and escaped afterward.¡± Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 70: Hunting Chapter 70: Hunting After listening to Chrollo, Uvogin grinned with excitement. ¡°Chief, that mission wasn¡¯t easy. Those guys from the Kurta n were quite strong.¡± Chrollo nodded: ¡°Yes, once they get angry, their eyes turn scarlet red like a beautiful fire, and their power increase very much. They were impressive.¡± Uvogin said: ¡°But, Chief, you sold those beautiful eyes in the end, right?¡± ¡°Because once I obtained them, they weren¡¯t as exciting as before. We humans are such creatures, we covet what isn¡¯t in our hands, but once we obtain it, we lose interest.¡± Chrollo said calmly. Although he felt sorry for killing all of the Kurta n, he didn¡¯t repent or care at all now. It was as if his past-selfmitted those crimes, and it had nothing to do with the current him. Uvogin was the same, he once got interested in woman, doing different things with them, but after a while, he found out that fighting is more interesting. Still, Uvogin showed a slight interest in the Kurta n¡¯s survivor. ¡°Chief, when did you know that #404 is a survivor of the Kurta n?¡± Chrollo replied truthfully: ¡°When I saw him in the First Phase of the Exam. His clothes were very eye-catching, so I instantly remembered them.¡± ¡°I originally didn¡¯t intend to pay attention to that guy since he survived that catastrophe. But since he is your target, I told you about him. What will you do, Uvogin?¡± ¡°I will, of course, take his badge and kill him, so he won¡¯t be able to take revenge in the future.¡± Uvogin was eager to fight and kill Kurapika. Chrollo shook his head: ¡°If you do that, you will be eliminated.¡± Uvogin nodded: ¡°Well, I will take his badge and break his legs.¡± ¡°Well, just don¡¯t kill him.¡± Chrollo agreed. Uvogin grinned: ¡°Chief if I let him know that we are the one who killed his n, what would be his reaction?¡± ¡°He will get angry, and his eyes will turn red in an instant.¡± It¡¯s not hard to imagine how angry Kurapika would get if Uvogin told him. Login grinned evilly and said: ¡°That¡¯s exciting. Chief, do I let him know?¡± ¡°No, you can¡¯t do that.¡± Chrollo denied his request. ¡°Why?¡± Uvogin was puzzled. Chrollo exined: ¡°Uvogin, you are only doing this for your pleasure. You want to see him angry and full of hatred, right? But this will bring instability to the group. Although I don¡¯t think he can do anything as the Sole Survivor, deliberately revealing about identity will do us no good here. At least, wait till the exam is over and do whatever you want.¡± Uvogin was a little unhappy, but he still epted: ¡°I understand, I won¡¯t make messy.¡± ¡°Then, I will see youter. I¡¯m going to find my target.¡± Chrollo said. ¡°Aren¡¯t we going together?¡± Uvogin was a little surprised because they always went together. Chrollo shook his head and said: ¡°No, let¡¯s take our badges and meetter. Also, if youe across Pakunoda, bring her along. We can¡¯tmunicate on the ind, so I don¡¯t know where she is, but she should be going after her target.¡± ¡°By the way, Chief, who is Pakunoda¡¯s target?¡± Uvogin asked curiously. ¡°She told me it was #99.¡± ¡°Who is that?¡± ¡°The silver-haired kid with the little hedgehog named Gon who is with An. His name is Killua.¡± ¡°Oh, it¡¯s that kid. He doesn¡¯t seem ordinary, but Pakunoda should be able to handle him.¡± ¡°Well, don¡¯t underestimate her,¡± Chrollo said. ¡°Then, I¡¯ll go now, Chief. I will deal with #404 first. His name is Kurapika, right?¡± ¡°I think it is.¡± ¡°Okay, then I¡¯m leaving. See youter.¡± Uvogin directly jumped on a tall tree and roared like a beast: ¡°#404, wait for me.¡± On the north side of the Ind, Kurapika, who was walking through the wood, suddenly stopped. He was sure that no one was following him, but he had an uneasy feeling in his heart for some reason. He also heard something from the other side, but he couldn¡¯t understand what was said because of the dense trees. He didn¡¯t think much about it and continued his n. Although this exam¡¯s time limit is a week, it wasn¡¯t easy to find his target. His target was #44, the magician, Hisoka. Although Kurapika didn¡¯t speak with Hisoka before, he observed him closely, and his intuition told him that Hisoka was dangerous. If possible, Kurapika didn¡¯t want to find trouble with him. But there is no way now. He needs to take that #44 badge. If he gave up on getting Hisoka¡¯s badge, he would have to take three other badges, which was difficult. So he decided to go for Hisoka first, and if he couldn¡¯t do it, he would change his goal. ¡°I need to find Hisoka¡¯s location, then make a n and be careful of anyone going after me.¡± Kurapika muttered. In the west of the ind, Hisoka was leaning against a tree and enjoying the breeze. Hisoka yawned with azy expression. Several butterflies flew around his shoulder. His wound was quite deep, but Hisoka didn¡¯t care much about it. He can handle it casually. He used his ¡®Texture Surprise (Flimsy Lies)¡¯ to cover his injury. As he removed the Flimsy Lies from his shoulder, his wound had already healed quite a bit. But it wasn¡¯tpletely healed either. Anyone with a good nose can smell the blood, which was why those butterflies danced around Hisoka. They weren¡¯t normal butterflies. They are known as Hemotropic Butterfly, and they can detect the scent of blood from a good distance. Hisoka didn¡¯t care about this. He jumped on top of a tall tree and ced his right hand over his eyes to act as a spectacle, and looked far away. Soon, he found his target. (T/N: Uvogin -> Kurapika Gon -> Uvogin Pakunoda -> Killua An -> Pakunoda Chrollo -> Ponzu) Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 71: Hisoka’s Killing Intent Chapter 71: Hisoka¡¯s Killing Intent An walked in the bushes without hiding his figure. He didn¡¯t hide anything at all. An hung his badge on his chest without any fear. If someone came looking for him, he could see his number without any hindrance, and if he wanted to take it, he made it seem easy. He wanted to expose himself deliberately. There were two reasons for this: he wanted to attract other candidates to try and take his badge, and he waszy. Although he still didn¡¯t know who is after him, he was confident in keeping his badge from whoever that is after him. After walking for a while, An suddenly heard a scream not far away. The scream was quite pained. It seems someone fell into a trap. It can also be a strategy to attract others to the sound in the hope of getting a badge for free. Even if it was a trap, An wanted to take a look. Driven by his curiosity, An turned around and walked toward the source of the scream. About a kilometerter, An saw a man lying down on the ground. An didn¡¯t have any impression of this person. He only knew that he was one of the 28 candidates but didn¡¯t know his name. At this time, there were several ying cards struck on his body. The man continued to scream as he lost his mobility. The cards were embedded on both of his legs, arms, abdomen, shoulders, and face. An knew who was responsible for this instantly. It was one of Hisoka¡¯s masterpieces. At this moment, a few ying cards flew toward An swiftly. An was aware of his surroundings and moved his body slightly to the side, avoiding them. At this time, Hisoka walked from behind a tree. ¡°Hisoka, do you want to die?¡± Seeing Hisoka appearing, An frowned with displeasure and said in an angry tone. If someone else were here, he would definitively be dead now. Hisoka squinted his eyes and smiled: ¡°Don¡¯t be angry. I¡¯m just saying hello.¡± An snorted: ¡°I don¡¯t like your greeting. If you attack me next time, I will fight back.¡± Hisoka smiled and changed the subject: ¡°An, who is your goal?¡± An said coldly: ¡°It is not you anyway.¡± ¡°That¡¯s great. If I¡¯m your target, I would be in danger.¡± Hisoka sighed, ¡®In relief.¡¯ An didn¡¯t believe Hisoka in the slightest. If his target was really Hisoka, thetter would be very excited. An pointed at the man lying on the ground and asked: ¡°Is he your target?¡± Hisoka shook his head and said: ¡°He is #118, and I don¡¯t know his name. I just happened to see him; he isn¡¯t my target.¡± Hearing this, An frowned. Hisoka seemed to hunt anyone he stumbles upon randomly. If that¡¯s the case, would Hisoka fight him now? Seeing An¡¯s wary expression, Hisoka squinted his eyes and said: ¡°Although I intended to find three people to get my points, I¡¯m not going to fight you.¡± ¡°Who is your target?¡± An asked suddenly. Hisoka replied truthfully: ¡°My goal is #80.¡± ¡°#80?¡± An wanted to make sure. ¡°Do you know who it is?¡± Hisoka asked. An replied: ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter. You will hunt others anyway, whether it¡¯s #80 or not.¡± ¡°No, I changed my mind. I want to get #80 now.¡± An sighed. Seeing An sigh, Hisoka suggested: ¡°An, in exchange for the information about #80, I will give you the #118 badge I just got. How about it? It is worth 1 point.¡± An rxed and said: ¡°Well, listen well. It should be Uvogin.¡± Hisoka was stunned for a moment: ¡°Is it true?¡± An secretly smiled as he saw Hisoka¡¯s expression. It seems like he was reluctant in provoking Uvogin. ¡°What is it, Hisoka? Are you scared?¡± An teased. ¡°No, it¡¯s just troublesome. That lunatic is not easy to deal with.¡± Hisoka seemed to have a headache. However, as he looked at An¡¯s smiling face, Hisoka knew something. He directly looked at An and said: ¡°You¡¯re lying, aren¡¯t you? #80 isn¡¯t Uvogin, right?¡± An knew that he shouldn¡¯t continue ying with Hisoka, if he believed him and fought Uvogin, it would¡¯ve been good, but since he didn¡¯t believe it, it wasn¡¯t good to continue deceiving him. ¡°Okay, okay, #80 is a girl named Piper. She uses a sniper.¡± Hisoka thought for a bit and nodded: ¡°So it¡¯s her, I know which one now.¡± Hisoka gave An the #118 badge as he promised, and with it, An needed another 4 points. He wanted to get those four points with only two badges. One is Pakunoda¡¯s and another random badge. An decided to take the second point first before going after Pakunoda. An raised his head and looked at Hisoka, who said: ¡°What¡¯s the matter? Are you still trying to get me a badge?¡± An sneered: ¡°I thought about it, but forget it. It too much trouble for almost nothing.¡± After saying this, An waved his hand and said: ¡°I¡¯ll take my leave then.¡± Hisoka suddenly remembered something and asked: ¡°Speaking of which, An, you know who is Chrollo and the others, right? Including Illumi and I.¡± An nodded: ¡°Yes, I know many things about everyone, including the fact that you¡¯re a fake spider.¡± As he said this, An directly left using sh steps without waiting for Hisoka to reply. He didn¡¯t want to be questioned by Hisoka after all. Seeing An leave, Hisoka narrowed his eyes: ¡°He even knows that I¡¯m a fake member of the Ryodan, so most likely, he knows that I joined them to fight Chrollo. Who is this guy? How does he know so many secrets? This is really making me curious.¡± ¡°No one knows about that except for Illumi. Did he tell An? No, I don¡¯t think so. Illumi isn¡¯t someone with a big mouth. So who told An?¡± Thinking about this, Hisoka suddenly thought of something else: ¡°If An tells Chrollo, what will Chrollo do? I look forward to it. But I will be in trouble. Maybe he would kick me out of the Ryodan and then hunt me down himself.¡± Hisoka felt so excited that he couldn¡¯t hold his Killing Intent down. ¡°No, I was provoked by An and couldn¡¯t tone down my Killing Intent. I must kill someone quickly.¡± As he said this, Hisoka looked at the Cameras in the bushes that would supervise all candidates in this Exam¡¯s phase. ¡°There are cameras everywhere. If they saw me kill someone, they will eliminate me from the Exam, but I must kill someone. My Killing Intent is already aroused.¡± His eyes fell on the #11 Candidate on the ground. ¡°No, this person is already defeated by me. Even if I kill him, it won¡¯t quell my Killing Intent. I must find another target¡­¡± With his Killing Intent shrouding him, Hisoka started walking with a scary face. If he finds anyone right now, he will kill him no matter what, or else his Killing Intent won¡¯t calm down. On the other hand, An suddenly felt the Killing Intent. ¡°This Killing Intent, is it Hisoka¡¯s? Did he release this much Killing Intent because I knew he was a fake spider, which provoked his Killing Intent?¡± An thought. To be safe, An wanted to make sure. He took a closer look at Hisoka¡¯s Killing Intent and found out that it looked kind of Evil as if demons were dancing around Hisoka. Then he realized that Hisoka wasn¡¯t going toward him; instead, he was moving away. While An was confirming his guess, an arrow was released at him from behind a tree 30 meters away. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 72: Pokkle Chapter 72: Pokkle An¡¯s figure disappeared, and the arrow struck a tree in the distance. An reappeared beside the arrow and took it in his hand. It was a 30 cm long arrow, with an stic head, whichcked prative powers. Such an arrow can¡¯t kill anyone, but the arrowhead must be dipped in anesthetic, which will numb and incapacitate the target. An thought for a moment and knew who targeted him. There is only one person amongst the 27 Candidates who uses a bow. It was candidate #53, Pokkle. Pokkle hid behind a tree and didn¡¯t dare stick his head out. When someone concentrates on something, they won¡¯t detect the dangering from other things. Therefore, Pokkle picked the time when An was concentrating on Hisoka¡¯s Killing Intent to attack. However, he didn¡¯t expect An to dodge it easily. It¡¯s almost as if he had eyes on the back of his head. Pokkle¡¯s chest was rising and falling violently, and it wasn¡¯t because he was exhausted, but because he failed his sneak attack and was anxious. ¡°Since he can dodge the arrow from behind, my location is probably known to him now, right?¡± Pokkle took a deep breath as he calmed his breathing and prepared to leave without making a sound. But as he moved, An jumped suddenly behind him and said: ¡°Found you, sneaky little mouse.¡± ¡°What?¡± Pokkle immediately took out an arrow reflexively and ced it on his bow, aiming at the voice source. An stood still staring at Pokkle. When An concentrated on Hisoka¡¯s Killing Intent, he was in the most vignt state possible, and to his surprise, the person who attacked him was Pokkle. Looking at An, Pokkle was surprised and couldn¡¯t say anything. Obviously, this is the first time something like this happened to him. He was confident in his archery and hiding, but An still caught him. So, as Pokkle looked at An in disbelief, he asked: ¡°How did you find me?¡± ¡°It¡¯s very simple. I followed the trajectory of the arrow.¡± An replied. ¡°No, I mean, did you know that I was following you from early in the morning?¡± Asked Pokkle. An shook his head: ¡°I didn¡¯t.¡± ¡°What?¡± Pokkle eximed. An sneered: ¡°If you didn¡¯t attack me, I wouldn¡¯t have noticed you at all. That doesn¡¯t mean I¡¯m defenseless. On the contrary, I was prepared for any sneak attacks.¡± Pokkle looked at An in surprise: ¡°In other words, you are deliberately making yourself looking careless to bait others into attacking you!!¡± ¡°Bingo, but you get no reward.¡± Pokkle sighed: ¡°No wonder you didn¡¯t seem to be vignt at all. It turned out you are acting as bait.¡± ¡°So, are you ready?¡± An stepped forward and sneered. ¡°What do you want?¡± Pokkle asked. Although he aimed his arrow at An, he didn¡¯t dare shoot. He knew that if he confronted An directly, he wouldn¡¯t be able to defeat him. An said coldly: ¡°I¡¯m your target, right?¡± Pokkle nodded with an ugly expression. He drew #123, which is An¡¯s badge number. He felt unlucky to get this target. Since he failed his sneak attack, he couldn¡¯t do anything at all to An. An pointed at his badge and said: ¡°Now, my badge is right here. Come and get it if you have the skill to do so.¡± Pokkle hesitated as he looked at An¡¯s badge in front of him; however, he realized that it¡¯s impossible. If he stretched his hand and take it, his hand would most likely fall down into the ground, right. Although An didn¡¯t have any sharp weapon, Pokkle still had this hunch and felt danger stronger than ever before. Pokkle hesitated before he raised his hands and said: ¡°I surrender.¡± ¡°Very well, you got your life back,¡± An said. If Pokkle dared to take a step forward and grab his badge, An would¡¯ve shed this stupid guy. Fortunately for him, Pokkle was aware of the danger here, and after hearing An¡¯s words, he became even more frightened. He squeezed a bitter smile and said: ¡°An, I will give you the badge, and this is over, okay?¡± An sneered: ¡°Of course I will take the badge, but you sneak attacked me. I can¡¯t let that go, now can I?¡± Pokkle was shocked: ¡°Then, what do you want? Do you want to kill me? I did attack you before, but I didn¡¯t want to kill you. The arrow was covered in anesthesia. My purpose was to numb you and take your badge. I definitively didn¡¯t have any intention to kill you.¡± An puckered his ear with his little finger and said: ¡°Don¡¯t be nervous. I, of course, know that. Otherwise, do you think you will be standing now if you attacked to kill me?¡± At his current level, An can feel the Killing Intent easily, and he can also know whether the attacker wanted to kill him or not. Pokkle didn¡¯t lie. The arrow he shot was aimed to incapacitate him and not kill, and because of this, he didn¡¯t want to hurt Pokkle. However, it is a fact that Pokkle still attacked him. Breathing a sigh of relief, Pokkle asked: ¡°Since you won¡¯t kill me, can you let me go?¡± ¡°I have a simple task for you. Find someone for me, and I will let you go.¡± An said. Pokkle¡¯s ears perked as he asked: ¡°Who is it?¡± ¡°#18, the woman named Pakunoda,¡± An replied. Pokkle thought for a bit before he said: ¡°#18? Is it that blonde woman with a hooked nose and revealing clothes?¡± ¡°That¡¯s her.¡± An nodded. Pokkle was revealing, knowing that #18 was An¡¯s target. ¡°So, she is your target, huh.¡± Pokkle said in a deep voice: ¡°That woman isn¡¯t easy to deal with. Do you want my help to get her badge?¡± An sneered and said sarcastically: ¡°You can deal with ordinary people with your skills, but dealing with people like them is simple suicide for you. You can¡¯t even touch that woman. I only need you to tell me about her location.¡± Although he felt ufortable as An ridiculed him, Pokkle could only admit that it¡¯s the truth. An said: ¡°I will give you two days. After that, head west to find me.¡± An thought for a bit, then added: ¡°If you can help me find her, I will consider giving you back your badge.¡± Hearing this, Pokkle couldn¡¯t hide his joy: ¡°Are you serious?¡± ¡°Of course.¡± An narrowed his eyes. ¡°Okay, I do my best.¡± Pokkle patted his chest. Looking his back, A faint smile appeared on An¡¯s mouth. With Pokkle¡¯s help, his chance of finding Pakunoda was doubled. No, it¡¯s more than double, since that guy can search for people better than him. ¡®Now, this didn¡¯t take much effort at all. Not only did I get pokkle¡¯s badge, but I also got a helped to find my target.¡¯ An thought with satisfaction. As for Pokkle running away, An wasn¡¯t worried at all. Because if he finds Pakunoda, Pokkle can get his badge back. He would do his best to get it back. ¡°Well, I just have to move to the west of this ind now.¡± As he thought about it, An was already moving toward the west. He now had two badges, the first is #118 he got from Hisoka, and the second is #53 he got from Pokkle. Next, he just needed the #18 Badge, and he would have collected the required five points to get the Senzu Bean. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 73: #99, Killua Zoldyck Chapter 73: #99, Killua Zoldyck Three men wearing hats surrounded a silver-haired boy on the south side of the ind on the third day. No, it should be said that the Silver Haired boy was the one who cornered the three men, as he stared at them like prey with a sneer on his mouth. Those three were candidate #197, Amori, Candidate #198, Imori, and Candidate #199, Umori. The silver-haired boy was Killua, with the #99 Badge. The Amori brothers were quite upset. They were grown-up men, and here is a boy targeting them. No one would be happy if they were looked down on so much. Umori red at Killua. ¡°Boy, why are you blocking our way?¡± ¡°Because one of you is my target,¡± Killua replied with a rxed expression. His eyes fell on Candidate #198, Imori. Although his target is Imori, thetter didn¡¯t separate from his brothers, so he could only follow the three brothers. After confirming that they won¡¯t separate, he didn¡¯t want to wait anymore and decided to attack the three of them together. Imori was the youngest brother and the most afraid of death. He never was courageous, but he was a cautious person. When he saw Killua, he was shocked because he felt that Killua was ready to attack at any given moment. His older brothers saw him nervous and immediately scolded him: ¡°Hey, Imori, are you afraid of a kid?¡± Imori felt dull as his brothers reprimanded him. He rushed at Killua: ¡°Go to hell, boy.¡± He was trying to encourage himself with each word. Killua sighed: ¡°Stupid guy.¡± AS Imori threw a fist at Killua, thetter disappeared before his eyes. ¡°What?¡± Imori was taken aback. ¡°Behind you, Imori.¡± His two brothers warned him at the same time and rushed forward to rescue him. But Killua was faster, his nails sharpened as he ced them on Imori¡¯s neck. ¡°Don¡¯t do anything rash if you want to live.¡± ¡°Damn it!¡± Umori gritted his teeth and cursed. ¡°What do you want?¡± Amori, the eldest brother, asked with a frown. Killua exceeded their expectations. Imori was captured, and they could do nothing right now. They were thinking about how to counter-attack, and suddenly, one of the brothers said: ¡°Yes, this test forbid us from killing the target to get the badge. If you kill him, the Examiner will eliminate you.¡± ¡°Yes, let Imori go, we will let you go if you do, and you can leave.¡± Umori stepped up after Amori tried to pressure Killua with the exam¡¯s rule. Killua squinted and said coldly: ¡°Don¡¯t be so na?ve. Do you think that I care about the rules? I can kill him anytime, including both of you.¡± The killing Intent emanated by Killua made them nervous. It¡¯s definitively wasn¡¯t a bluff. ¡°If you dare threaten me or provoke me, not only Imori, but you two will die as well.¡± The indifferent voice made them fear this boy. They were horrified and finally understood. Even if Killua didn¡¯t take Imori as a hostage, he could kill them easily if he was unhappy. Amori took a deep breath and pretended to be calm: ¡°I see, you can take Imori¡¯s badge. We won¡¯t go after you.¡± ¡°No, you will hand over your badges as well.¡± Killua sneered and put away his Killing Intent. Although his goal was only Imori¡¯s badge, he didn¡¯t want to let go of Amori and Umori as they annoyed him. Both brothers looked upset when they heard Killua¡¯s words, but their lives were more important than the Hunter Exam. If they don¡¯t hand over the badges, their brother will die, and they would follow right after. Therefore, they threw their badges without hesitation toward Killua. ¡°Bye.¡± After getting the badges, Killua disappeared. ¡°With this, I can pass the exam, and I have two extra points. How should I use them? Maybe I should go to Gon and give him the extra ones if he needs them.¡± On the way, Killua heard a bang. It was a gunshot, a very close one. Killua felt danger approaching. At the moment he felt danger, Killua jumped away like a cheetah. A bullet passed by, then a second one, then another one. Killua kept dodging the bullets and hid behind a tree. He couldn¡¯t see where the bullets wereing from at all. After the Gunshot stopped, a tall blond woman in revealing clothes stepped out, holding a revolver in her hand pointing at the tree Killua was hiding behind. Killua, who was rxed before, was now serious as he felt the danger around him. ¡®Is it the Amori brothers?¡¯ ¡®No, it¡¯s not them.¡¯ ¡®The three idiots don¡¯t have guns, and they aren¡¯t this good.¡¯ ¡®The uracy of those bullets could threaten me. They were very urate. Who is it?¡¯ Killua quickly jumped up high into the tree and stood on a branch before looking down to see a blond woman holding a gun. ¡°So, it¡¯s that girl.¡± Killua was a little surprised. This blonde woman was Pakunoda. ¡°It seems like I¡¯m her target.¡± Killua thought. Very quickly, Pakunoda turned the muzzle toward Killua and fired without hesitation. Killua avoided the bullets one by one as he jumped from a tree to another. ¡®The pistol should be able to fire at max 15 bullets. After 15 bullets, she will need to reload, and I can go and kill her at that time.¡¯ Killua made his n. Bang! Bang! After a few more shots, Killua continued dodging while waiting for an opportunity to attack. After the thirteenth shot, Pakunoda stopped shooting. ¡°Is she going to reload?¡± Killua hesitated as he didn¡¯t know whether to attack or not because there should be two more bullets inside the magazine. ¡°Don¡¯t hide. This Onee-chan will let you go if you hand over your badge.¡± Pakunoda said with her unique charm. An average kid won¡¯t refuse this, but Killua sneered as his voice traveled from behind a tree: ¡°Ok, Onee-chan, but you have to throw your gun over, and I will give you the badge.¡± ¡°Annoying kid.¡± Pakunoda fired without hesitation. Killua was startled because the bullet arrived from the side, which means that Pakunoda already knew his location. Killua turned over quickly, but he couldn¡¯t escape as the bullets blocked his path. At the same time, he saw another bullet. Pakunoda stopped firing, and Killua immediately turned around and ran toward her. However, before he could do anything, Pakunoda was already aiming her gun at him. She quickly pulled the trigger, and the sixteenth bullet flew. ¡°Oops, my mistake.¡± Killua¡¯s pupil dted as he watched the bullet moving toward him. Bang! Blood sshed as the bullet hit Killua¡¯s left shoulder. ¡°oh?¡± Pakunoda was startled. She didn¡¯t expect Killua to twist his body and avoid the bullet like that. However, it didn¡¯t end there. Killua endured the pain on his shoulder and quickly rushed forward and kicked the gun from her hand beforeunching his counter-attack. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! 11 Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 74: The Law of The Jungle Chapter 74: The Law of The Jungle Pakunoda didn¡¯t expect a kid like Killua would have such an amazing speed. As Killua kicked the gun, he proceeded to kick her on the abdomen. Pakunoda felt blood in her throat; it has been so long since thest time she was hurt. She was even more surprised by Killua¡¯s power. At this time, Killua took advantage of his time and directly tried to sh Pakunoda¡¯s shoulder. As a killer, he knew that you must end the fight in one attack. If you can¡¯t, then you have to deal as much damage as you can. Although hisst blow wasn¡¯t aimed to kill Pakunoda, it was enough to instantly make anyone lose power in their body. Killua¡¯s Purpose was to make Pakunoda lose her ability to move. ¡°Don¡¯t be too smug, smelly kid.¡± Pakunoda blocked Killua¡¯s attack with her hand to his surprise. She caught his wrist, but Killua didn¡¯t give up as he sharpened his nails in his other hand and thrust it forward. Since he was born, Killua received hellish training, and due to that training, he was able to change the muscle structure in specific parts of his body, making them stronger. His five fingers trick is the same, and he made them resemble the ws of beasts. Moreover, if he wanted to, he can take out even a beating heart from the chest instantly. However, Pakunoda wasn¡¯t an average person. She used her chest muscle to mp Killua¡¯s hand. Killua¡¯s hand plunged into her chest,pletely unable to prate it, and it was stuck there. ¡°That is very dangerous, kid. I didn¡¯t expect you to know how to change your muscle¡¯s structure to increase your power. If I didn¡¯t use Ten to defend, I might¡¯ve been injured.¡± Pakunoda said with a sigh of relief. ¡®Damn it. I can¡¯t pull my hand out. I didn¡¯t expect this woman to know the same technique as me. Is she an assassin?¡¯ Killua thought as he was cornered. But he could feel strange energy on Pakunoda¡¯s body, and he heard her say she used Ten. And suddenly, he remembers Gon talking about something like that, the energy of life in any living body that some people could harness to attack and defend, Nen. This woman can also use Nen. Killua stared sharply at Pakunoda while thetter said coldly. ¡°Little monster, now I will give you a choice: Obediently hand over your badge, or die here.¡± ¡°Dammit!!¡± Killua tried to break free but couldn¡¯t move at all. He can feel that if he continued to resist, Pakunoda would kill him. ¡°Don¡¯t struggle boy, you have great potential, but you¡¯re currently not my match. If you die here, it will be meaningless.¡± Pakunoda reminded Killua: ¡°My patience is limited, don¡¯t try to challenge my bottom line.¡± Killua coldly snorted like a kid before e said: ¡°I understand, let go, you hag.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Pakunoda let him go without hesitation, which made Killua surprised and asked: ¡°Aren¡¯t you afraid that I will escape?¡± Pakunoda replied calmly: ¡°You have a gunshot wound, so you can¡¯t escape.¡± ¡°I see.¡± Killua nodded. Indeed, his left shoulder was injured, and if he doesn¡¯t stop the bleeding, he will lose consciousness or even die. It was impossible to escape this. Killua took out his badge before he said: ¡°Wait.¡± Pakunoda frowned: ¡°What is it? Are you regretting your decision?¡± Killua shook his head and said: ¡°Actually, I have four badges. One of them is mine, and the others I got from the Amori brothers. Although I¡¯m your target, I can give you the three badges which amount to three points, the same as my badge.¡± Pakunoda didn¡¯t think about it, and resolutely refused: ¡°No, I just want your badge.¡± ¡°Why?¡± Killua asked in confusion. Pakunoda said coldly: ¡°Because you¡¯re my target, I¡¯m not interested in other badges.¡± ¡°Dammit!!¡± Killua didn¡¯t expect Pakunoda to be so hard to deal with. In other words, she is a woman with principle. She won¡¯t take the badges of others, except for her target. Even though he was unhappy, Killua could only hand over his badge. As a professional assassin, it was shameful for him to be robbed by a woman. But he had no other way, she was stronger than him, and as an Assassin, he knew that the Weak eats the strong, thew of the jungle. The strong can take anything from the weak, and the weak could only obey. Just like now, if he doesn¡¯t hand over his badge, she would kill him. It was unnecessary to sacrifice his life for his badge. But to have him hand it over himself was an insult for him. ¡°I must get it back!¡± Killua thought secretly while clenching his fist. But before that, Killua lowered his head and nced at his shoulder. Although the bullet didn¡¯t prate his entire shoulder, it was still inside his cor bone. If he leaves it alone, his life will be in danger due to blood loss and possible infection. But he can resolve the problem himself. In just two minutes, Killua removed the bullet with two fingers and stopped the bleeding. The bullet was round, so it has no prative power. Which meant, from the start, Pakunoda didn¡¯t want to kill him. Killua already knew she didn¡¯t want to kill him when she attacked because he didn¡¯t feel any killing intent. ¡°Damn that woman, are you looking down on me?¡± Killua didn¡¯t thank Pakunoda for her kindness; instead, he felt insulted. His pride received a huge impact. ¡°I must take back my badge from that woman, but I have to be careful about how to do it,¡± Killua vowed in his heart. He knew that this was just the third day, and four days remained till the deadline. The time was enough, but his strength wasn¡¯t enough. Killua knew that even if he weren¡¯t injured, he wouldn¡¯t be able to fight Pakunoda. Although he didn¡¯tckbat experience, he was far behind in terms of power. The most severe disadvantage is that he didn¡¯t train in Nen. And now, he had a gun wound on his shoulder. Although he removed the bullet and stopped the bleeding, he can¡¯t use too much power, which will affect his recovery. So, he can¡¯t rely on himself to get back the badge. ¡°Well, who is the one hunting Pakunoda?¡± If I find him, maybe I can cooperate with him and get back my badge.¡± But there is a problem, he still didn¡¯t know who is targeting her, and it won¡¯t be easy to find him. Another point is, does the one hunting her have more power than Pakunoda? ¡°The ones who are stronger than she is, are Hisoka, Gittarackur, who is always with Hisoka, and the other two partners of this woman, and of course, An. Assuming that one of them targets Pakunoda, the only one who will cooperate with me is An. It¡¯s obviously impossible for her partners to cooperate, and Hisoka and Gittarackur are difficult to deal with as well. So, the only one left is An. But I¡¯ve got no idea if An was hunting Pakunoda or not.¡± Killua could only follow Pakunoda, as it was useless to find An if he wasn¡¯t targeting her. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 75: Tracking Chapter 75: Tracking Pakunoda was thinking about meeting with Chrollo and Uvogin while Killua followed her without her knowing. Themunication on this ind is blocked, and there is no way to contact anyone, and it wasn¡¯t easy to find them. ¡°With Uvogin and the Chief¡¯s power, it isn¡¯t difficult to get their target¡¯s badge. They may have already returned to the starting point.¡± Pakunoda looked around for a while before deciding to return to the starting point. However, after getting there, Pakunoda didn¡¯t find anyone at all. ¡°Chief and Uvogin aren¡¯t here, which means that they still didn¡¯t get their target¡¯s badge. Or they got them but didn¡¯t rush back. Uvogin is a fanatic after all, and only Chief can control him. Should I stay here and wait for them? or should I go ahead and find them?¡± Pakunoda frowned. There are still four days before the end of this phase of the exam. If she stayed on the ind, it means that someone can target her. ¡°Other than Chief and Uvogin, only three people from the remaining 25 candidates can pose any danger to me. They are Hisoka, Gittarackur (Illumi), and An. If one of them is after me, and I stay alone, they will attack at any time. Therefore, to ensure my safety, I must join with Chief and Uvogin. As long as I¡¯m with them, the risk is minimized.¡± No one attacked Pakunoda yet, but this didn¡¯t mean that no one was targeting her. However, waiting at the starting point is a significant risk because this ce was vacant. So, staying here is equivalent to exposing oneself. For example, just now, Pakunoda felt that someone was observing her from the forest. Although she couldn¡¯t pinpoint his location, she definitively felt a gaze on her. This might be the candidate after her badge. ¡°Could it be that silver-haired kid is following me?¡± Pakunoda thought secretly but quickly discarded this suspicion. ¡°No, that¡¯s very unlikely. That kid is an Assassin. He should be clear about the gap between the two of us. But this doesn¡¯t rule out the possibility of him following me. All in all, if I stay here and wait, it will be easy for anyone to attack me.¡± Pakunoda acted decisively and once again entered the forest. In the forest, Pokkle stood on a branch of a big tree as he looked at Pakunoda. ¡°Sure enough, returning to the starting point is the easiest way to find her. That woman got her target¡¯s badge already and is waiting for the exam to end at the starting point. But why did she leave again? Is she going to find herpanions?¡± ¡°If that woman is allowed to join herpanions, then even An won¡¯t be able to get her badge. Forget it. It none of my business. I just need to tell An about her whereabouts. I hope he can keep his promise and return my badge.¡± After memorizing the way Pakunoda went, Pokkle moved to the west of the ind. After Pokkle left, a silver-haired kid jumped down from a tree. ¡°That guy is Pokkle?¡± Killua frowned as he saw Pokkle leave. ¡°Why did he follow Pakunoda? Is that woman his target? Or is he like me?¡± As he thought about the second possibility, Killua ruled it out after remembering Pakunoda¡¯s words. She said she wouldn¡¯t take anything other than her target¡¯s badge. In other words, Pokkle is probably tracking Pakunoda waiting for an opportune moment to attack. This seems to be the most reasonable exnation. However, Killua wasn¡¯t optimistic about Pokkle¡¯s power. Although he wasn¡¯t bad, he was but a rookie in front of Pakunoda. There is absolutely no meaning to cooperate with him. At this time, Killua saw Pokkle move to the west, which made Killua suspicious. ¡°Is he helping someone looking for his target? Is there someone going after Pakunoda?¡± Killua made a guess. At dusk, on the west of the Ind, An sat cross-legged in front of a campfire. He was roasting an unknown beast that was as big as a buffalo. The fragrant smell of grilled meat spread all over, permeating while An waited for the beast to get ready. He got a new ability in the second Phase of the Exam. It was Nen¡¯s Stomach. He can turn food into Nen. One Kilogram is equivalent to ten points, and he can consume a ton at a time. His Limit is 10,000 Points currently. A beast weighing about three hundred kilograms was devoured by An in less than one hour, leaving a skeleton behind. Although An¡¯s food intake was higher than ordinary people, he can eat a few servings than them. The only reason he could eat this much now is due to Nen¡¯s Stomach. This meal allowed him to recover his stamina and covert the excess to Nen and store it in his body. Those points won¡¯t increase the quantity of Nen An had, but they will serve as a battery. ¡°I¡¯m soid-back, if Pokkle doesn¡¯t find Pakunoda, I will have to go find her myself, which is troublesome.¡± Anid on the ground while looking at the night sky. At this time, a figure appeared beside An. ¡°You¡¯re here?¡± Feeling the familiar Presence, An sat up and looked at Pokkle. At this time, Pokkle was panting. He was running the entire day without rest. When he smelt the grilled meat fragrance that still lingered in the air, his stomach grumbled as he said with dissatisfaction: ¡°Here I¡¯m looking for your target, while you sit here, eat and look at the stars by yourself.¡± ¡°That must¡¯ve been hard on you, but I didn¡¯t force you to find my target, right? You volunteered to find my target to retrieve your badge, no?¡± Pokkle couldn¡¯t find any word to refute An¡¯s. An smiled and said: ¡°It seems that you have found her? Where is she?¡± ¡°She is going south,¡± Pokkle answered Truthfully. ¡°Is she alone?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Pokkle nodded. If what Pokkle said is true, then now is the best time to move. He needs to get her badge before she joins up with Chrollo and Uvogin. Pokkle asked: ¡°An, I have told you her location. Can you give me back my badge?¡± An shook his head and smiled: ¡°I¡¯m sorry; it¡¯s impossible to do so now.¡± Pokkle was surprised: ¡°Why? Are you going back on your words?¡± ¡°I need you to lead me there now, and then I will return the badge to you,¡± An said. Pokkle said solemnly: ¡°In other words, you don¡¯t believe me, right? Do you think I¡¯m lying?¡± ¡°It¡¯s not that I don¡¯t believe you. I just want to confirm it.¡± Anughed. He should make sure that Pokkle did find Pakunoda. It wasn¡¯t a question of belief, but a basic in every transaction. ¡°Okay, lead the way.¡± An put out the fire and said to Pokkle. Although Pokkle was dissatisfied, he led the way obediently to retrieve his badge. An¡¯s eyes were shining. This time, he was confident. If Pakunoda willingly hands over her badge, nothing will happen, but if she resists, then he can only use force. As of whether this will offend the Ryodan or not, he can consider thister. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! 2 Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 76: Ignoring The Warning Chapter 76: Ignoring The Warning At night, Killua, who was following Pakunoda the entire time, was waiting on a tree trunk while observing her. Because it was dark, Pakunoda didn¡¯t want to risk traveling and decided to set camp and wait until daybreak to find Uvogin and Chrollo. She leaned against a tree, and her eyes were slightly closed with her hand folded on her chest. If a man sees her right now, he will try his hardest to control himself, but Killua was a killer and didn¡¯t have such emotions. What¡¯s more, he is still a kid and doesn¡¯t have any interest in the opposite gender. As a kid, he doesn¡¯t have any interest in a woman¡¯s body, no matter how enticing they seem. His only goal is to snatch back his badge. He received intense training from childhood. His father wanted to see how capable his son was, so he gave him a target. The goal was far beyond Killua¡¯s power and reach. He was a rank higher than Killua, simply put, if Killua¡¯s power is ranked as C, then his target¡¯s rank is B. Killua at that time had no chance to win against his target head-on, and the only way he could finish him of his assassination. Killua took up the challenge and stalked his target for three days and three nights without sleep or food. His eyes were bloodshot from staring at his target for so long, and finally, after waiting for that long, his mark rxed. Even though it was only for a moment, he decisively attacks and sessfully killed him and returned to his father. Killua was sure that even if this woman is strong, she will drop her guard in the end, and at that moment, he would attack. Killua was currently standing on a branch motionlessly, and although he looked at Pakunoda intently, he didn¡¯t release Killing Intent at all. This time, his purpose wasn¡¯t killing her. He wanted to grab his badge back. However, Pakunoda wasn¡¯t an average person. ¡°Even when she rest at night, she seems to be on guard. She is really troublesome.¡± Killua was quite upset by Pakunoda¡¯s vignce. He had to admit that Pakunoda was the trickiest target he even followed. She seemed to be resting with her eyes closed, but he could notice that she was extremely vignt just from a look. Any move would attract her attention. At this moment, Killua noticed Pakunoda¡¯s eyes opening sharply. ¡°Come out!¡± Pakunoda suddenly said, her voice cold and filled with displeasure. It seems that she was grumpy because her rest was interrupted. Killua was shocked: ¡°Huh, did she find me?¡± Just when Killua hesitated whether toe out or not, two people walked out of the woods and stood in front of Pakunoda. The first person was Pokkle, and the second one is An. ¡°So that¡¯s why Pokkle followed Pakunoda earlier? So, An is hunting Pakunoda?¡± Killua was a little excited. This meant that he could retrieve his badge. Pakunoda was surprised when An appeared. She thought that Killua was the one following her. She didn¡¯t expect An to be here. She nced at Pokkle and quickly understood: ¡°I felt your presence before.¡± Pokkle quickly apologized: ¡°Sorry, don¡¯t me me. I¡¯m just doing an errand.¡± Pakunoda ignored Pokkle and looked at An. ¡°I¡¯m your target?¡± She asked. An nodded: ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°What will you do then?¡± She asked again. An smiled slightly: ¡°It¡¯s very simple, hand over your badge, and I will immediately leave.¡± Pakunoda sneered: ¡°Do you think I will?¡± An said: ¡°I hope you can be smart.¡± She guessed what he meant. ¡°I don¡¯t want to fight you.¡± An once again said: ¡°You should know very well that you can¡¯t defeat me.¡± She snorted, and a gun appeared in her hand, pointing directly at An. ¡°I will give you three seconds to leave, or I will shoot.¡± She gave a warning. If An dared to stay, Pakunoda would pull the trigger without hesitation. If it were someone else, they would¡¯ve already surrendered and left, but An didn¡¯t. He was given a choice by the system again. [1: Don¡¯t retreat. Take Pakunoda¡¯s badge. Pakunoda will hate you, and there is a certain chance to provoke the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. Reward: ck Sword Shusui.] [2: Take a step back and let Pakunoda Go, you will gain Pakunoda¡¯s favor. Reward: Horm-Horm Fruit (T/N: Ivankov¡¯s Hormone fruit).] He wouldn¡¯t let her go. An won¡¯t feel happy even if she favored him. She was a member of the Ryodan, after all. Although she was beautiful, he wouldn¡¯t go after her. ¡®Besides, What the hell is with the reward? Hormone fruit?¡¯ An thought. He didn¡¯t want that fruit that will mess him up. He is already pleased with his gender. The other choice¡¯s reward was a sword, and it was inevitable. As for being hated by Pakunoda or provoking the Ryodan, he will consider thatter. At this moment, An didn¡¯t heed Pakunoda¡¯s warning. When he took the first step forward, Pakunoda directly pulled the trigger. Bang! The bullet flew at An, but thetter dodged with minimal movement. Pakunoda knew that she couldn¡¯t deal with An easily and continued to pull the trigger at high speed. An predicted the bullets¡¯ trajectory using his Observation Haki and avoided them one after the other. Pakunoda was shooting and keeping her distance from An. She reloaded her gun so quickly that it seemed like she didn¡¯t stop shooting at all. In just one minute, over fifty bullets were fired at An, while he dodged all of them. An could easily block the bullets even if he didn¡¯t evade them. He can use Ken to block them, but since Pakunoda is probably using Shu to coat the Bullets in Nen, it will be quite painful to block them directly. So he would only block them when he can¡¯t avoid them. He can also use Nen to create an Ice Wall directly blocking the bullets, which is more effective than Ken. Pakunoda snorted, and a white gun appeared on her other hand. ¡°Try this!¡± Pakunoda pulled the trigger, and directly a firebird flew toward An. This wasn¡¯t a typical bullet, but a bullet made with conjuration. The power behind the firebird was amazing, but An wasn¡¯t afraid. He instantly released his Nen and formed an Ice Wall to block this firebird. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! 3 Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 77: Great White Tiger Chapter 77: Great White Tiger Boom! The firebird bullet collided against the Ice wall and melted it. ¡°The power behind this bird is good.¡± An¡¯s eyes narrowed as he approved of Pakunoda¡¯s power. As far as he knows, Pakunoda was a specialist who can see people¡¯s memories, and her weapons are Guns. She can shoot a bullet at herpanions and share her memory or the memory of someone else. Now, An was surprised that she could make other types of bullets like the firebird one. Although it was powerful, itcked prative power. If not for An¡¯s Ice ability, that bullets would¡¯ve burned him. The night lightened up by the mes, but the water from An¡¯s Ice extinguished the fire. On a tree trunk not far away, Killua watched the battle with curiosity and awe. ¡°So, this is the battle between Nen users? This is interesting.¡± A trace of yearning appearing in Killua¡¯s eyes as he imagined himself learning such ability. After the hunter exam, he decided that he would learn Nen and be a master at it. Unlike Killua, Pokkle retreated to the side as he was afraid of being involved in the fight. He stayed far away with hesitation. He was surprised by An¡¯s power to make Ice out of thin air, and he didn¡¯t know how Pakunoda shot a bullet that turned into a firebird. He wasn¡¯t familiar with Nen, so the scene in front of him was like magic. At this time, Pakunoda pulled the trigger three times, sending three firebirds toward An. An¡¯s eyes were sharp as he pointed his palm toward Pakunoda and shot arge Icicle toward the firebirds. The firebirds and the Icicle canceled each other and turned into steam. The firebirds consumed too much energy, and after firing three at the same time, Pakunoda started feeling tired. On the other hand, An was rxed. Pakunoda knew that the firebirds didn¡¯t threaten An in the slightest. To cause damage to a powerful enemy, a powerful attack is needed. ¡°You only have one trick.¡± Pakunoda¡¯s eyes turned cold as she looked at An. At the same time, her Aura started to grow and radiate from her body. Her Gun was covered in a dense quantity of Nen that made An be alert. He could feel that the next attack will carry the full power of Pakunoda. He was very curious about this new bullet she will use, but he was sure it would be stronger than the firebird. ¡°You will regreting to get my badge.¡± Pakunoda let out a cold grunt and pulled the trigger. Roar~. When the bullet escaped the muzzle of her Gun, a tiger roared. The roar scared most of the animals in the forest as birds and beast alike fled. Pakunoda shouted ¡®Byakko¡¯ through clenched teeth as she seemed somewhat tired. It seems that this move consumed a considerable amount of Nen that it left her exhausted. The bullet transformed into a white tiger looking at An fiercely. The White Tiger¡¯s body was five meters long with the word ¡®king¡¯ in the center of its forehead. It was like the King of beasts. Seeing this Tiger, An frowned. ¡®Unexpectedly, Pakunoda had such a move up her sleeve.¡¯ Before he could react, the Tiger rushed forward and pounced on him. This move was one of the strongest Moves Pakunoda could use, it was a finishing move that depleted a considerable amount of her Nen, and if we turn the amount it consumes into points, it would be around 20,000 Point. Pakunoda could only use this move once a day, and it will put a great burden on her body. Byakko roared as it opened its mouth and bit at An. It was already toote for An to retreat, so he could only hold the Tiger¡¯s mouth with his hand and kick at its stomach. Byakko immediately roared in pain, while An used this opportunity to get up. While An still on one knee, the Tiger instantly jumped at him. An seeing this could only use Leaf Strong Whirlwind to kick the Tiger away. The Lead Strong Whirlwind can easily break arge tree. Sending the Tiger away won¡¯t be harder than that. Byakko was kicked away several meters away while An retreated two meters back. ¡°What a tiger.¡± An bnced himself as he was amazed by this Tiger¡¯s power. After this short fight, he could tell that it was stronger than a real tiger. If it was an ordinary tiger, he could have kicked it away easily, but this Tiger used its ws to defend. He couldn¡¯t help looking at Pakunoda, standing behind Byakko, and saw how tired she was. He could tell that Byakko was her trump card. Byakko pounced at An once again. An sh stepped away as he avoided Byakko¡¯s ws and appeared by his side and used Leaf Cyclone. Byakko was hit hard, but he didn¡¯t suffer much damage and quickly got up. Since ordinary attacks can¡¯t kill this Tiger, An will use stronger attacks. He flew into the air using Moon Walk and created an Icicle. In an instant, a three meters trident appeared in his hand and plunged toward Byakko. Byakko saw the tridenting down. It roared angrily at the sky. The roar caused shockwaves to spread and shattered the trident. This power shocked An much as he didn¡¯t expect the Tiger to be so strong. This Tiger was more than ten times stronger than ordinary ones. An directly ascended till he reached 100 meters from the ground, a ce that Byakko couldn¡¯t hope to reach. ¡°What is that guy nning to do?¡± Pakunoda was surprised and confused. She could tell that An was releasing a vast amount of Nen currently. An raised his hand as the coldness surrounded him spread, creating a giant Icicle. ¡°Smash it for me.¡± The giant Icicle flew down like a meteorite from a hundred meters above the ground toward Byakko. Byakko wasn¡¯t afraid as it raised its head and roared once again. However, this Icicle was too giant. The roar could only slow it down and crack it slightly on the surface. Pakunoda bit her teeth and raised her Gun, and shot toward the Icicle as she saw Byakko¡¯s death near. Another tiger pounced out and plunged toward the Icicle in mid-air,bining two tigers¡¯ power to confront the Icicle. An descended as soon she saw this, and with a strong kick, the giant Icicle elerated and pierced through the Tigers and embedded them into the ground. In an instant, the ground cracked open as it sent a loud impact. Hello everyone, Another month, and more chapters to go! I wish you a good read and thanks for supporting this novel!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! 7 Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 78: Evolution Chapter 78: Evolution The impact of the massive Icicle caused a crater on the ground. In the deep crater, two white tigersid down about to breathe theirst. No matter how fierce they were or how much defense and vitality they possessed, they couldn¡¯t stop the Icicleing down like a meteor. ¡°Byakko¡­¡± Pakunoda looked at the tigers with surprise on her cold face. Byakko was her trump card. Even a rocket shouldn¡¯t be able to prate its defense. Even if Uvogin wanted to kill it, he had to use Big Bang Impact, or else he wouldn¡¯t be able to break their defense. Seeing the two tigers dying, Pakunoda knew that An¡¯sst attack was stronger than Uvogin¡¯s Big Bang Impact. Fifty meters up in the air, An looked down with surprise at the two tigers. He didn¡¯t expect them to have such resilience. However, looking at the Nen they had with Gyo, An could tell that they were about to die. He only needed to deliver thest blow now. Even though An used such a strong move, he still had 70% of his Nen. He stretched his hand and made an icicle before holding it and rushed down with great speed toward them. A cold light shed, and hot blood sshed. The sh-cut down the tiger¡¯s head. The tiger¡¯s head separated from its body, but it still didn¡¯t close its eyes. It was worthy of the title ¡®King.¡¯ Finally, one of the tigers disappeared. Although Byakko was more ferocious than a normal tiger, it wasn¡¯t a real tiger. It was but a manifestation of Nen. Once it is fatally injured, it will turn into energy and disappear. After taking down the first tiger, An directly moved to behead the second one. An¡¯s eyes didn¡¯t hold any killing intent. Instead, they were filled with joy. He initially thought that he wouldn¡¯t need much effort in taking down Pakunoda, a nonbatant member of the Ryodan, but once Byakko was summoned, he felt eager to win. He felt a great sense of aplishment when he killed the first tiger, and just when he was about to kill the second one, Pakunoda fired a bullet at him. One of the tigers was killed, which meant a significant loss for Pakunoda, and if the other died, she would be defenseless against An. Bang! Bang! Bang! Bullets left Pakunoda¡¯s gun one after the other, with An as their target. An snorted and blocked them with his Icicle, but as he did, the dying tiger recovered and jumped toward An with its ws. An shed toward the ws with his Icicle. ¡°Oh?¡± An was slightly surprised. He felt the tiger was wholly rejuvenated, as if he wasn¡¯t dying at all. Even the Icicle in his hand started cracking. Roar~! Byakko roared and increased the power behind its ws. An¡¯s Icicle shattered as the ws moved forward unhindered. Suddenly, An disappeared, and the ws tore the ground apart. ¡°Huu~.¡± An wiped out his sweat. It was a thrilling experience. He didn¡¯t expect the tiger to recover quickly, which made him conclude that this beast wasn¡¯t an ordinary Nen beast. It was just too strong. It was just like fighting a beast shaped Uvogin. Generally speaking, many people can use their ability to manifest a Nen beast, but the Nen beast¡¯s characteristics depend on their Summoner. The most popr users of Nen beast are Conjurers, Maniptors, and Emitters. The Nen beast can have different appearances, be it human, animal, monsters, or a creature that doesn¡¯t exist. The white tiger Pakunoda summoned had an animal form and possessed high fighting power and resilience stronger than a tank. So An concluded that this wasn¡¯t just an animal Nen Beast, but a mixed breed between a monster and an animal. Nen beasts are the product of their user¡¯s essence and inner self. Pakunoda wasn¡¯t good at fighting, so her Nen beast was intense due to her power desire. Its primary purpose is to fight in her stead and protect her from harm, which An confirmed when he saw Byakko move back toward Pakunoda to protect her. But An was already faster than it was, so he seemingly teleported in front of Pakunoda and used a Leaf Strong Whirlwind directly at Pakunoda¡¯s face. Pakunoda could only raise her arms in an attempt to protect herself, but the kick still sent her flying away. At this time, Byakko pounced at An from behind. An snorted and blocked Byakko¡¯s ws and grabbed itsrge body, and threw it away. Byakko a few several meters away beforending unharmed. He roared and red at An. An looked at it and taunted using Rock Lee¡¯s infamous beckoning gesture. But unexpectedly, Byakko didn¡¯t rush forward. Instead, he jumped in front of Pakunoda to defend her and looked at An with vignce. So, the tiger is protecting its master. Byakko feared that An would attack Pakunoda again. An squinted as he looked at Pakunoda, getting up with a few bruises on her arms. Anyone can see how much power An used when attacking Pakunoda. Even with her Ken, she couldn¡¯t block his attack. However, An knew that Pakunoda wouldn¡¯t stop most of his attacks because her Nen is getting close to depletion. On the other hand, Byakko seemed to be full of vitality as if nothing happened. There was only one exnation for that. ¡°Are you still feeding it your Nen?¡± An suddenly asked. Because he noticed Pakunoda¡¯s Nen was flowing through Byakko. At this moment, Byakko was releasing an astonishing amount of Nen, but Pakunoda¡¯s Nen was declining. ¡°Stop it! Even if you transfer most of your Nen to it, it can¡¯t fight me.¡± An said. ¡°That¡¯s not necessarily true.¡± Pakunoda said solemnly: ¡°Looking down on a woman won¡¯t do you any good.¡± An frowned. He could tell that as soon as Pakunoda was angry, her Nen suddenly increased, and Byakko¡¯s body started changing. On its back, a pair of snow-white wings sprouted out and spread. Heavenly White Tiger. It evolved. As its wings spread open, a gust of wind swept out like a hurricane. An put his arms in front of him and resisted the violent wind. His eyes were fixed on Byakko. He didn¡¯t expect it to evolve and turn into a flying beast. However, as soon as it evolved, Pakunoda¡¯s Nen was significantly reduced, as if she consumed all of it. The wind blew a few trees away, but An was still standing in the same ce. He nced around to see many trees uprooted and colliding with other trees far away. Just a sweep of its wings caused such a typhoon. This made An take this seriously. If he gets careless, it won¡¯t be fun getting hit by something that strong. He could feel the connection between the tiger and Pakunoda and knew that if he doesn¡¯t deal with the tiger, Pakunoda won¡¯t give up resisting. An resolved himself and knelt on one knee and touched the ground with his hands. Suddenly, coldness spread around him as the ground started freezing. The Nen consumption of this move depended on the area he was freezing. If he thoroughly used this ability now, he can freeze two Kilometers. His Nen moved at great speed and froze the ground, moving directly toward the white tiger and Pakunoda. Hello everyone, This month, i will release as many chapters as I can, I hope everyone enjoy!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 79: Beheaded Knight Chapter 79: Beheaded Knight Byakko roared as he saw the ground freezing in a straight line toward him. That roar turned into a sound wave and collided with the Ice. ¡°It¡¯s really violent.¡± An stopped his Ice field. He was just testing the water with his ice field because he had no way to freeze the Tiger right now. The guy evolved and obtained a pair of wings, but that wasn¡¯t all he got, as his overall power was enhanced as well. It was the strongest Nen beast Pakunoda created to date. At this moment, The Heavenly Byakko moved, a gust of wind swept the battlefield, and he appeared in front of An in an instant. ¡°So Fast!¡± An was surprised, even though sh Steps was still faster, but the Tiger¡¯s speed increase by arge margin. A hurricane blew over, making it hard for An to open his eyes. Fortunately, Observation Haki saved him as he backed away from the ws about to bisect him. The Tiger jumped again and again as he shed at An with extreme speed. Even though it had a massive body, it disyed a surprising speed. The current fight was extremely dangerous because An could only use sh Steps to avoid the sharp ws. As the next attack arrived, An directly jumped up and Kicked the Tiger¡¯s forehead heavily. That kick frustrated the Tiger as it let out a roar and spread its wings and waved them. Suddenly, An found himself facing two wind des. His only option was using an Ice Wall to block the wind des. With a bang, the Ice wall shattered while the wind des dispersed, but the Tiger didn¡¯t stop as he once again pounced at An with his fangs, and before the blow reached the Latter¡¯s forehead, powerful oppression exploded out of An¡¯s body. Instantly, Byakko was dazed. Its ws slowed down and allowed An to retreat. In the next moment, Byakko recovered and let out an angry roar. ¡°Sure enough, even Conqueror¡¯s Haki is hardly effective on it.¡± An was jumped in the air using Moon Walk while frowning when looking down at the Tiger. His Conqueror¡¯s Haki wasn¡¯t strong enough to influence Byakko and render him unconscious. If he had the highest level of Conqueror¡¯s Haki, like Dark King Rayleigh or Red-Haired Shanks, it would be easy. ¡°Hmm, do I use that superrge Icicle to kill this guy as well?¡± An rubbed his chin as he thought. Ordinary attacks can¡¯t seem to affect that Tiger, even more so after he evolved. This evolution greatly enhanced its speed and defense. If he doesn¡¯t kill it in one shot, it would be easy to kill it slowly. While An was deep in his thoughts, Byakko roared and broke his train of thoughts. Looking down, he saw Byakko fluttering his wings and started flying toward him. He was 100 meters up in a blink of an eye with his paw moving down toward An¡¯s head. ¡®If a tiger doesn¡¯t show its might, you would treat it like a cat?¡¯ An snorted as a seven feet long Icicle appeared in his hand and blocked the Tiger¡¯s paw. In the pitch-ck sky, An and Byakko collided 100 meters above the ground. Although An didn¡¯t know any swordsmanship, he can correctly predict Byakko¡¯s attacks relying on his Observation Hako while using his Icicle to attack. At first, the Icicle and the sharp ws collided, and the former almost shattered instantly. An instantly used Shu to cover the Icicle, greatly enhancing it. He relied on the flexibility of Moon Walk to maneuver around Byakko and attacking him. After a few bouts, several wounds appeared on Byakko¡¯s body. The hot blood covered the cold Icicle. The injured Byakko roared as his wings spread out, sending feathers like arrows toward An. He was trying to make An looked like a ho nest. An didn¡¯t expect Byakko to have this kind of attack. While he was shocked, he didn¡¯t stop moving as he swung the Icicle in his hand to block, but feathers kepting and raining on him. A few feathers managed tond on his body, leaving a few wounds. But fortunately, he used Ken. The feather couldn¡¯t prate him and only scratched him slightly. But being overwhelming with this attack wasn¡¯t going to end in his favor. Instantly, his Nen erupted from his body and turned into hundreds of Ice arrows that shot out and collided with the feathers. In terms of speed and power, the feathers and Ice Arrows were equally matched. So, An and the Tiger werepeting on the amount they could produce. After several waves of feathers against Ice Arrows, the number of Feathers was reduced, and as a result, several Ice Arrows prated the Tiger¡¯s body. Although the Arrows were 18 centimeters long, they could hardly damage Byakko¡¯s big body, but the wounds kept umting, and the Tiger was weakened. ¡°This is the best time to kill you~!¡± An once again condensed a hard Icicle in his hand and rushed toward the Tiger, who raised its ws to attack back. The most noticeable change was Byakko¡¯s speed that dropped considerably. Within a minute, An wounded the Tiger¡¯s body several times as the fur on its body was dyed red. Even its ws were nicked from the constant defending. Byakko didn¡¯t care about his injuries. It rushed toward An regardless. It was determined to defeat An no matter what. An didn¡¯t fight back as he moved higher and higher. Byakko didn¡¯t care as he followed after him while attacking with his feathers. When An reached an altitude of 500 meters, he sneered and stopped, then turned toward Byakko and shed. Byakko reacted instantly by opening its mouth and biding the Icicle. But An didn¡¯t stop and kicked the Tiger¡¯s head up before dropping another kick on its forehead. Due to that kick¡¯s power, Byakko started falling from an altitude of 500 meters like a cannonball. At this time, a figure burst out from the trees, quietly moving toward Pakunoda. That person used the dark night as a cover as he restrained his breathing and approached quietly. Pakunoda was too focused on the fight between Byakko and An to notice anything strange. Killua approached quietly and wanted to knock Pakunoda out with one blow from behind. But when he got close enough, Pakunoda noticed him and instantly turned around and blocked Killua¡¯s attack. Killua used all of his power, thrust his hand into Pakunoda¡¯s chest, and directly broke her ribs. Pakunoda snorted and withdrew while look at Killua: ¡°Smelly kid, you were following me.¡± ¡°Give me back my badge,¡± Killua said. ¡°It¡¯s here if you can take it, that is.¡± Pakunoda stretched her hand, bringing out Killua¡¯s badge, and shook it provocatively. ¡°Damn it!¡± Killua looked upset. He was hiding in a distant tree the whole time waiting for an opportunity, and when he saw Pakunoda focused on An and the Tiger, heunched his attack, but it failed. However, it wasn¡¯t aplete failure. Although the surprise attack failed, he still broke her ribs. Moreover, he could feel that Pakunoda was too weakpared to before. Bang! Pakunoda took her gun and directly shot at Killua. Seeing this, Killua immediately used his Rhythm Echo as he turned into several after images avoiding the bullets. While shooting at Killua, Pakunoda started moving back. Because she summoned Byakko twice, she used almost 40,000 Nen points because each one requires 20,000 Points. Her maximum Nen output was about 70,000 Nen points. So, when An killed the first Tiger, she lost 20,000 Points, then to heal the remaining Tiger, she used 10,000 Points and more than 10,000 to make the Tiger evolve. She, at most, has 1,000 Nen points. She doesn¡¯t have enough power to subdue Killua in her current state. However, Killua wasn¡¯t any better since the gunshot wound on his left shoulder still didn¡¯t recover. However, if Killua¡¯s goal were to kill this woman from the start, he would¡¯ve killed her. But his goal was to knock her out and get his badge back. ¡°Return my badge to me, and I will immediately leave,¡± Killua said seriously. Pakunoda shot another bullet at him. This was her answer. Killua immediatelyunched forward toward Pakunoda with killing intent this time. However, suddenly a violent wind came from behind him as Byakko appeared and, with one swing of his paw, send Killua flying into the forest. Pakunoda was excited when she saw Byakko appearing. However, seeing it covered in blood and its body full of the wound made her expression turn cold. ¡°Byakko, you did your best to protect me.¡± Pakunoda stretched her hand and patted Byakko¡¯s head. Although it was just a Nen beast, it was still the knight that guarded her. Byakko lost its previous bearing as it crawled on the ground and obediently let Pakunoda caress it. At this moment, Pakunoda¡¯s expression suddenly changed as a terrible killing intent exploded from the sky. And from above, An swept down with his Icicle in hand toward Byakko. Byakko instantly stood up in front of Pakunoda and defended with thest of his powers. An¡¯s Icicle didn¡¯t have mercy as it directly beheaded Byakko, which Made Pakunoda¡¯s face gloomy. Seeing Byakko disappearing and turning into nothing, she raised her head and said: ¡°I won¡¯t forgive you.¡± Hello everyone, This month, i will release as many chapters as I can, I hope everyone enjoy!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 80: Rubbing the Spider’s Nose in The Dirt Chapter 80: Rubbing the Spider¡¯s Nose in The Dirt Pakunoda seemed ready to kill him, which made An smile: ¡°Drop it, Pakunoda-San, you have already lost, and it won¡¯t do you any good to fight further.¡± ¡°Dying is better than submitting to you.¡± Pakunoda pointed her gun at An and shot it without hesitation. ¡°Huh, is this your final answer?¡± An sneered. He just killed the Heavenly White Tiger; does she think a normal bullet will kill him? An disappeared and appeared in front of Pakunoda, who couldn¡¯t react and disarmed her. ¡°I will temporarily confiscate this dangerous toy for now.¡± An twisted his hand and broke her wrist, and easily took her gun off. Although he was a bit rude, he did not pity a woman like Pakunoda. At this time, Pakunoda snorted and kicked An between his legs. ¡°Pakunoda-San, you shouldn¡¯t kick a man there.¡± When An saw the kicking, he mped his legs to ensure his little brother¡¯s safety. An restrained Pakunoda, causing her to shout: ¡°Let me go!¡± An arrogantly gazed at her body and said: ¡°I can let you go, but you have to hand over your Badge. That the only thing that matters to me. Hand it over, and I won¡¯t do anything to you.¡± Although he didn¡¯t know where Pakunoda hid the Badge, he could guess that she hid them on her ¡®Oppai¡¯ since there was no other ce to hid them looking at her clothes. 2D Oppai¡¯s space is infinite. They can hold anything. Pakunoda turned her head around proudly and said: ¡°Give up, you won¡¯t take my badge.¡± Anughed and wasn¡¯t angry! ¡°Up to you.¡± Seeing that An was about to do something, Pakunoda tried her best to struggle out of An¡¯s hold, but she wasn¡¯t strong enough. ¡°Pakunoda-San, you aren¡¯t strongpared to the other spiders, are you?¡± An guessed this from the power Pakunoda was exerting to struggle out of his hold. So, he concluded that she was at the bottom of the Ryodan in strength. An tried to suppress her gently, but her struggle started to annoy him. ¡°Pakunoda-San, you can stop the needless struggle. If you dare move again, I will do this seriously.¡± After saying this, An stretched his left hand and grabbed Pakunoda¡¯s neck, lifting her four or five centimeters above the ground. The moment An picked her up, she seemed like a weak woman that couldn¡¯t defend herself. Pakunoda¡¯s specialty should be espionage. This is why she wasn¡¯t as strong as the other members. An didn¡¯t let her go. He wanted to make this woman feel the fear of death. Although she wasn¡¯t afraid of death, it was still worthwhile to let her understand a thing or two about it. While she didn¡¯t struggle anymore, Pakunoda still had no intention to give An her Badge. She had that look on her face that said: ¡®I¡¯d rather die than surrender.¡¯ As a member of the Ryodan, her pride doesn¡¯t allow her topromise. And another thing, they were the Ryodan, they were the ones to do the robbing when was it the other way around? That¡¯s why she was reluctant to hand over her Badge. If shepromises, she felt that it would be the defeat of the Ryodan as a whole. ¡°Pakunoda-San, you sure are a proud woman.¡± Seeing her like this, An¡¯s smiled as he decided to crush this woman¡¯s pridepletely. He tightened his hand around her neck, making her face red. ¡°Pakunoda-san, how do you feel about suffocating?¡± An sneered as his hand tightened further. Pakunoda couldn¡¯t breathe anymore, and her consciousness became blurry. She felt death approaching bit by bit. ¡®Is this guy truly going to strangle me to death?¡¯ When she saw An¡¯s sneer, Pakunoda realized that he was joking or scaring her. He really nned on killing her. An finally said: ¡°Listen, Pakunoda-san, I will give you onest chance. Although I know that you¡¯re not afraid of death, is it worth it to die for a numbered badge? Moreover, even if you don¡¯t give it to me, I can still kill you and take it from your corpse. That pride won¡¯t do you any good.¡± An¡¯s words shook Pakunoda. Indeed, if she calmed down a bit, she would realize that death is not worth a badge in an Exam. Seeing her reaction, An spoke: ¡°Pakunoda-san, if you don¡¯t hand over your badge willingly, then I will even do something hi to you.¡± Although Pakunoda wasn¡¯t experienced in that field, she wasn¡¯t too dense to not understand his meaning. She coldly said as An threatened: ¡°Do you dare threaten me?¡± An simplyughed: ¡°Yes, it¡¯s a threat. You should be clear about your current predicament. You have no choice. If you don¡¯t cooperate, even if you are a member of the Ryodan, I will still follow through my threat.¡± Pakunoda red at An: ¡°If you dare touch me, I promise you will regret it.¡± An sneered: ¡°Why? Do you think Chrollo will kill me? Or do you want all of the Ryodan to chase me down?¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, Pakunoda could tell that An knew them very well: ¡°Who are you?¡± ¡°You don¡¯t need to know who I¡¯m. I won¡¯t hesitate to kill you even if you¡¯re a member of the Ryodan. That¡¯s what you need to know. If they annoy me, I will just kill them all.¡± Of course, An was bluffing. If someone wanted to fight with all the Ryodan, unless they are as powerful as the Zoldyck or a monster like Netero, they wouldn¡¯t be able to do anything. So he just wanted Pakunoda to know that he wasn¡¯t easy to deal with. He understood the Spiders and knew each of their weaknesses. An was making a bet. He wanted to see if he can subdue Pakunoda. He won the bet as Pakunoda handed over the Badge to An without a word. Not just one but two. One was her Badge, and the other was Killua¡¯s. An frowned because he knew that Badge #99 belonged to Killua. ¡°I got this badge from the silver-haired kid,¡± Pakunoda said honestly. ¡®Sure enough,¡¯ An immediately asked: ¡°It shouldn¡¯t be so easy for him to give his Badge to someone. How did you get it?¡± ¡°Of course, I took it by force. Do you think someone will just hand over his Badge to others?¡± Pakunoda said coldly. An shrugged. He didn¡¯t care about her current reaction. ¡°By the way, you didn¡¯t kill Killua, did you?¡± An changed the subject subtly. He knew that the Ryodan didn¡¯t care about life at all. They would kill anyone standing in their way, but he didn¡¯t believe that she could kill Killua. ¡°Killua? Is it that silver-haired kid?¡± Pakunoda said coldly. ¡°He tried to attack me just now, but he was sent flying by my Nen Beast. I don¡¯t know if he is alive.¡± An was surprised, but he wasn¡¯t worried about Killua. Even without Nen, he could survive an attack from that tiger with his physical strength, but he probably hurt. Pakunoda thought for a bit before she said: ¡°Listen well, An, don¡¯t think that just because you won today, I will give up. You took something from, and I will get it back, so for now, keep the #18 badge, and I will take it back someday.¡± An didn¡¯t refuse: ¡°Okay, I will be waiting for the, but¡­¡± He looked at her and sneered: ¡°If you fail, you will most likely be enlightened about the thing that happens between a man and a woman.¡± Pakunoda understood his meaning and snorted before walking into the forest. Although nothing is wrong if you look at her, her body was injured. First, she used too much Nen that her body was current like a desert, wholly deprived of Nen, then Killua broke a few ribs, An broke her wrist, then almost suffocated her. Therefore, she needed a quiet ce on the ind to rest before the hunter Exam is over. She won¡¯t be able to move freely in the next few days. Hello everyone, Sorry for not uploading new chapters for so long as I had something to do!!I will release 6 chapters today to gain your forgiveness!!1/6I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 81: Reward Chapter 81: Reward The System¡¯s notification suddenly echoed inside An¡¯s head as soon as Pakunoda left. [Ding! You attacked Pakunoda and sessfully took her Badge. Reward: ck Sword Shusui!] Suddenly, a ck sword appeared in front of An out of thin air. Shusui is one of the 21 O Wazamono swords, and he is one of the few ck ded swords. This Sword was extremely tough. Even if a giant step on it, it won¡¯t bend even a millimeter. When An touched the Sword, a strange feeling spread through his body. He first felt heaviness, but the Sword itself wasn¡¯t heavy. The weight he felt was some kind of pressure released from the Sword. Without a certain amount of power, it is impossible to wield a ck sword. The second feeling he got was life, not the from the Sword itself, but its existence. An clearly felt that something was inside the Sword. It was emitting a presence that didn¡¯t belong to the Sword. However, Shusui itself wasn¡¯t an ordinary sword, so even if it had a sword spirit, it wouldn¡¯t be surprising. However, Shusui didn¡¯t mean anything to An because even when he got a good sword, he didn¡¯t know how to use it. He wasn¡¯t a swordsman. To be able to use Shusui, he at least had to learn the Rhythm of All Things. So, for now, Shusui was just a weapon in his possession. With his Nen, he can make Icicles whenever he wanted after all. An tried waving Shusui a few times, hoping to send a flying sh easily like Zoro. ¡®Who am I kidding? This is the first time in my life that I held a sword, and I want to be like Zoro? Did Gon rub on me that much?¡¯ An thought sarcastically beforeforting himself. He won¡¯t be a master overnight. Zoro started training from when he was a child in the Dojo after all. ¡°So, should I try to take the swordsman path?¡± Getting Shusui made An think about it. If he wants to be a swordsman, then regr training won¡¯t be enough. An thought for a while and concluded that he needed a master swordsman to help him train, and with his knowledge, he could only think of two people that can be described as swordsmen. The First one is Nobunaga from the Ryodan, and if we can consider Feitan Portor as a half swordsman and he is also a member of the Ryodan. But even though they are swordsmen, they have no honor, which means they aren¡¯t real swordsmen. An decided to let it go. He doesn¡¯t need to train as a swordsman. For him, Shusui was just a weapon. It made no difference if he had it or other weapons. An directly stored Shusui into his storage ring. He will put it there until a time when he needs it. At this time, another notification echoed in his head. [Ding! You have scored five points before the time limit. Reward: Senzu Bean x1] Senzu Bean Origin: Dragon Ball World Effect: Heal any kind of injury and restore stamina. Special Reminder: If you eat this when you¡¯re on the verge of death, you will be ¡®resurrected.¡¯ In other words, it can save you as long as you are still breathing. An looked closely at the abilities of the Senzu bean and was quite satisfied with its power. With a Senzu Bean, it was like having two lives. An decided to cherish this Senzu Bean because he didn¡¯t know when the System would give out another one. An was in an excellent mood at the moment. He had the #118 Badge that Hisoka gave him, the #53 badge he took from Pokkle, the #18 that belonged to Pakunoda, and Killua¡¯s Badge along with his own. Now that he had Pakunoda¡¯s Badge, his total points were enough to pass this part of the exam. ¡°Ano, An?¡± An suddenly heard someone calling out to him and turned around to see Pokkle. ¡°Why are you still here?¡± Pokkle sweatdropped and said: ¡°I want to go already, but An, you didn¡¯t give me my badge as you promised yet.¡± ¡°Oh, I almost forgot about that.¡± An didn¡¯t need the extra points as he already got the reward from the System, so he directly returned Pokkle¡¯s Badge. Pokkle directly thanked him and left. He was hiding far away, observing the fight, and after seeing An¡¯s power, he didn¡¯t want to provoke him at all. He didn¡¯t know An¡¯s personality that well, so he wasn¡¯t sure that An would return his Badge. ¡®Oh, now that I think about it, what happened to Killua?¡¯ An suddenly remembered Pakunoda¡¯s words. Although he wasn¡¯t that close to Killua, he can¡¯t ignore him now. ¡°Let¡¯s look for him.¡± After using Observation Haki for a while, An felt something weak but alive, not far away. ¡°That should be Killua.¡± Soon he found Killua lying upside down with blood over his mouth. Fortunately, he wasn¡¯t dead or heavily injured. An admired this guy. He should¡¯ve been the original protagonist instead of Gon. ¡°Do you want help?¡± ¡°No, I can handle this.¡± An only asked as a courtesy anyway. And he also knew that Killua didn¡¯t ept help because he didn¡¯t want to owe favors, just like his brother. ¡°By the way, what happened to that woman?¡± Killua asked as he sat up. ¡°Dead.¡± ¡°What?¡± Looking at Killua¡¯s surprise, An burst outughing: ¡°Just kidding. I didn¡¯t kill her, just a few wounds here and there.¡± Killua then asked instantly: ¡°Then, you got her badge?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± An nodded and threw a badge to Killua: ¡°This is yours, right, she also gave it to me, but I don¡¯t need it. You can have it back.¡± Killua was surprised: ¡°Is it okay to give it to me? After all, she took it away because I¡¯m weak, and you took it from her because you¡¯re stronger than her.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry about the details.¡± An smiled: ¡°I don¡¯t have any need for it anyway. You¡¯re not my target, so there is no point in having more points.¡± Killua took his Badge and smiled bitterly before saying: ¡°Okay, I will remember this favor.¡± Like this, Killua owed An a favor because he knew that no matter how much he would¡¯ve tried, he won¡¯t be able to snatch his Badge back from Pakunoda. So, he had to ept. ¡°Well, maybe I will have something in the future that would require a professional Assassin.¡± Anughed. Pakunoda already promised to take revenge on him, so he can¡¯t let an opportunity to get the Zoldyck¡¯s favor go to waste. Of course, An didn¡¯t fancy Killua¡¯s favor, but the Zoldycks as a family, because Killua had his family behind him. If he needed something and asked Killua, thetter would do almost anything to return the favor, even if it means to ask his father or grandfather for help. Moreover, when Pakunoda left, she said she woulde back to take the Badge from him, which means she nned to do it herself without involving the Ryodan. If that was the case, An could sigh in relief because he would still be safe from the Ryodan. An patted Killua on the shoulder as he threw all of those ideas to the back of his head: ¡°Then, I will go find Gon first. You can find a ce to rest.¡± ¡°I will go too,¡± Killua spoke. An nodded: ¡°I don¡¯t mind, but is your injury okay?¡± ¡°It¡¯s just a small matter.¡± Killua smiled. But An could see that Killua was trying his best to endure the pain. ¡°You¡¯re seriously injured, aren¡¯t you? Find a ce to take a rest. I will go to Gon by myself.¡± An said with concern. Killua realized that An saw through him and nodded. He took two badges and threw them at n: ¡°I don¡¯t need those badges, give them to Gon if he needs them.¡± An didn¡¯t say anything. He just epted them and said: ¡°Well, I will tell Gon that you¡¯re the one who gifted those two badges then.¡± Hello everyone, Sorry for not uploading new chapters for so long as I had something to do!!I will release 6 chapters today to gain your forgiveness!!2/6!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 82: Kurta Clan’s Survivor Chapter 82: Kurta n¡¯s Survivor Killua gave An two badges, one was Amori¡¯s, and the other was Umori¡¯s. As for Imori¡¯s badge, it was his target, so he kept it for himself. With this, Killua had six points and can pass this phase of the Exam. However, there are still three days and a half left before the end of this phase. During this time, no one is guaranteed to pass the Exam. Furthermore, Killua suffered a gunshot wound and a few fractured ribs, which is why An suggested that he should take a rest and tend to his injuries. On the other hand, with the badges he had now, An umted 9 points, so he nned on giving Gon the extra three points he had if Gon couldn¡¯t take his target¡¯s badge. Although An didn¡¯t know who Gon¡¯s target was, he believed that Gon could keep his badge. This way, as long as An gives him the extra three points, Gon would pass this Phase of the Exam. However, the most challenging thing now is finding Gon on this ind. If he were lucky, he would need half a day. If he wasn¡¯t lucky, he might not find him till this phase ends. ¡°I hope I can find him before this test ends.¡± ¡­ Time passed, and thest day of the test arrived. There were less than 8 hours left before the end of this test. However, An still wandered around the ind. He was moving for about three days without finding Gon, which made him worried. ¡°Did something happen to on?¡± Although he didn¡¯t want to believe this spection, he still couldn¡¯t deny the possibility of that happening. After all, Gon was the same Gon from the show; there are a few things that weren¡¯t the same as the show as the plot deviated from An¡¯s interaction. At this time, about ten kilometers away from An, a blond young man was running through the forest as a fierce man was rushing toward him. No matter how fast or agile he moved, the man behind him was getting closer. Everyone should¡¯ve guessed already, Uvogin was chasing after Kurapika. Suddenly, Uvogin leaped ahead of Kurapika and blocked his path. Kurapika coldly looked at Uvogin and said: ¡°Why are you attacking me?¡± ¡°Well, I¡¯m here to hunt you. Of course, I will attack you. By the way, my name is Uvogin. If you beg for mercy, I might let you go!¡± Uvogin grinned like a beast. ¡°I¡¯m not interested in knowing your name.¡± The blond said coldly. Uvogin sneered: ¡°Before I attack, let me confirm, you¡¯re Kurapika, candidate #404, right?¡± Although he didn¡¯t know where that guy heard about him, there is no denying it at this point. Uvogin grinned as Kurapika stayed silent: ¡°Hey, are you afraid?¡± ¡°Damn it!¡± Kurapika took a fighting stance facing Uvogin. This was the greatest challenge he encountered so far. He already obtained the six points needed to pass this test. If no trouble found him in thest hours, he would have passed this test, but Uvogin intervened. He already saw the fight between Uvogin and An, so he directly turned around and ran as soon as he saw Uvogin. However, he underestimated Uvogin¡¯s determination, as thetter eventually caught up. He was fortunate enough to witness An and Uvogin¡¯s fight and knew very well that no matter what he does, he won¡¯t be able to fight against Uvogin. But now, there was nothing else he can do except fighting Uvogin. But Uvogin was like a beast ying around with its prey. ¡°I will let you escape for ten seconds and then start attacking. How about that? I¡¯m verypassionate, aren¡¯t I?¡± Uvogin started to count, and at that moment, Kurapika realized that this would be hisst opportunity to escape. He started running without hesitation, which made Uvogin touch the back of his head and mutter: ¡°What the hell, he run away?¡± But Uvogin didn¡¯t catch up and just waited for ten seconds. ¡°I remember the Kurta n weren¡¯t so easily scared; this kid seems like a wimp.¡± Uvogin looked at Kurapika running away with disdain¡­ He remembered when they ughtered that n. No one ran away even after knowing they would die in the end. They all chose to defend the tribe with their lives. Although they died in the end, the way, they fought left a good impression on him. However, Kurapika didn¡¯t hesitate to escape just now, which made the Kurta n¡¯s heroism in his eyes diminish greatly. ¡°Did the leader make a mistake? Is this kid a survivor of the Kurta n? He doesn¡¯t have many simrities to those red-eyed people.¡± Initially, when he gave Kurapika ten seconds to escape, he expected him to feel humiliated and angry, which will make him rush forward and get beaten to death. But Kurapika ran away without hesitation. Uvogin didn¡¯t n on letting him go, and as soon as ten seconds passed, Uvogin followed after him quickly. Because Kurapika running away made Uvogin want to torture him even more. Kurapika was the only remaining member of the Kurta n. His only goal in life after that day was to avenge his family. After investigating for some time, he found out that the ones who murdered his n were the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. So he started to train and train, and after five years, his body was healthy, while he didn¡¯t have any excess muscles to hinder his movement. In those ten seconds, Kurapika ran 500 meters in one breath, which gave him some hope. ¡°If I can pull the distance, even more, I will be able to get away and find somewhere to hide. I must pass this test; I must not give my badge away.¡± Kurapika suddenly noticed someone approaching him fast. He couldn¡¯t help ncing back, only to see Uvogin almost right behind him, there were about 20 meters between them, and the distance was gradually shrinking. ¡°Damnit!¡± Kurapika cursed as he ran as hard as he can. ¡°You¡¯re quite fast.¡± Uvogin said with excitement. In his eyes, Kurapika was like amb waiting to be ughtered, and when thatmb run away, it made the hunter very excited¡­ Hello everyone, Sorry for not uploading new chapters for so long as I had something to do!!I will release 6 chapters today to gain your forgiveness!!3/6!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 83: Death Road Chapter 83: Death Road After ten minutes, Kurapika stopped running. A fifty meters cliff appeared in front of him, leading directly toward the sea. Although he won¡¯t die if he jumps down, he will be seriously injured. Hisst option now is to fight against Uvogin, as jumping down was hisst resort. ¡°It seems that you¡¯re out of luck.¡± Uvogin stood eight meters behind Kurapika with a sneer on his face as he looked at thetter yfully. Kurapika looked at Uvogin vigntly. ¡°If you have given me your badge honestly, I would¡¯ve let you go, but it won¡¯t be easy now.¡± Uvogin said excitedly. Although his goal was getting the badge, he is more interested in hunting others as he was a sadistic bastard. With Kurapika hitting a dead end, Uvogin was looking forward to the former¡¯s reaction. Will he jump down the cliff, Surrender, or fight back? Kurapika gazed at Uvogin coldly and understood that he was crazy. When encountering those types of psychopaths, showing weakness can guarantee your death. There is just one way out, and it¡¯s fighting back. ¡°Although he looks strong, I didn¡¯t train those past few years to die easily. I endured what normal people can¡¯t imagine, to reach where I¡¯m now.¡± Seeing Kurapika taking a fighting stance, Uvogin was surprised: ¡°Weren¡¯t you running just now? Are you going to fight because I drove you to a dead end? You¡¯re weak. You can¡¯t defeat me, so just give up and kneel, beg for mercy, and I will let you go.¡± Uvogin looked at Kurapika in contempt, which made him angry. ¡°Who do you think you are? I¡¯m not weak. What I have to endure is something that you can¡¯t even imagine.¡± Kurapika pulled out two des from under his clothes and clenched them tightly. ¡°I will let you see if I¡¯m weak or not, you bastard.¡± Kurapika rushed forward with swords in hand before shing at Uvogin fiercely. ¡°Good power.¡± Uvogin showed a slight approval, but he still didn¡¯t make any movement as if he looked down on Kurapika¡¯s attack. When the de made contact with Uvogin¡¯s shoulder, Kurapika felt that he struck a steel te. Kurapika was taken aback because his full power attack couldn¡¯t even scratch his opponent¡¯s skin. Instead of hurting his opponent, his hand felt numb from the impact instead. His de cracked before breaking in half. ¡°What the hell is this guy?¡± Kurapika was shocked and quite shaken by Uvogin¡¯s power. He thought that even if he can¡¯t deal with his opponent, at least he can trade some injuries. However, he was na?ve. He overestimated his power and underestimated his foe. Uvogin¡¯s body was as strong as a steel wall. It was almost invulnerable. ¡°Is this your power? just so so.¡± Facing someone like Uvogin, Kurapika started doubting everything he experienced and the result of his training. Uvogin grinned as he raised his fist and mmed it at Kurapika. ¡°Try not to die. If this punch hits you, your dead.¡± Uvogin grinned as he bought his fist down at Kurapika, who was terrified now. Boom! At thest second, Kurapika managed to retreat and avoid Uvogin¡¯s punch. The fist mmed on the stop he was at before, and the ground split open like a spider web of cracks spread on the rocky surface. Kurapika regained his bnce as he sighed in relief. However, he didn¡¯t rx. Uvogin was too strong. He wasn¡¯t a match for this monster. ¡®I used all my power in my attack, but he didn¡¯t even raise a hand to block, and when he randomly punched me, I could¡¯ve died.¡¯ Kurapika realized the gap between their strength. Kurapika tried looking for a path he can escape from, but he could only think of the cliff behind him. But if he jumps down, he wasn¡¯t sure he could survive the fall. Jumping down was hisst choice. Kurapika clenched his fists before he remembered his revenge. ¡°You¡¯re seeking revenge,¡± Uvogin said suddenly. ¡°What?¡± Kurapika looked at Uvogin in surprise as he wondered how thetter knew this. He never told anyone about his origin, but Uvogin knew about his secret. This guy knows about his origin and the Kurta n massacre. That is the only exnation. ¡°Who are you?¡± Uvogin moved his index as he provoked Kurapika: ¡°If you want to know,e defeat me.¡± ¡°Damn it!! This guy definitively knows something.¡± Kurapika finally drew another weapon from his clothes. ¡°I have one chance to seed. If he let me attack like before as the first time, I should be able to pull this off.¡± Kurapika took a deep breath andunched himself toward Uvogin. He swung the new weapon at Uvogin with all his might. As Kurapika expected and hoped, Uvogin ignored his attack. However, when the dagger was about to hit him, he sent a backhanded punch at Kurapika¡¯s head. Kurapika avoided this punch in thest possible moment, as it was about to blow his head off. At the same time, Kurapika swung his dagger and shed Uvogin¡¯s arm fiercely. When he seeded in his attack, Uvogin once again attacked. Kurapika couldn¡¯t dodge the second punch, and in desperation, he ced his hands in front of him and blocked with all his might. The power behind the punch sted Kurapika away toward the cliff. Fortunately, he stopped before falling. Uvogin ignored Kurapika as he looked at the three-centimeter cut on his arm and frowned: ¡°You scratched me? That dagger is sharp.¡± ¡°You reap what you sow. You shouldn¡¯t have allowed me to attack you.¡± Kurapika stared at Uvogin coldly. ¡°Huh?¡± Uvogin was surprised that Kurapika was able to get up: ¡°After receiving my punch, you can stand up? You definitively surprise me there. However, I guess your hands are currently useless, at least for some time.¡± Indeed, Kurapika blocked Uvogin¡¯s attack with his hands, which broke them. He couldn¡¯t even move his hands right now. However, Kurapika didn¡¯t care at all, as he sneered at Uvogin. ¡°Although my hands are temporarily useless, I achieved my goal.¡± ¡°Goal?¡± Uvogin frowned. In the next second, Uvogin felt numbness spreading all over his body. ¡°What?¡± hisplexion changed slightly as he suddenly realized: ¡°So, you coated your dagger in Anesthetic.¡± Kurapika sneered: ¡°It seems the effect has finally kicked in. I have to say. Your body is too strong. It took more than ten seconds for you to feel numb. Fortunately, you¡¯re an arrogant guy. If you attacked me before, then you most probably would¡¯ve killed me. Contempt is the most stupid act you can do when facing an unknown opponent.¡± ¡°What the hell are you talking about, don¡¯t underestimate me. Some Anesthetic can¡¯t affect me¡­¡± Before he could finish speaking, Uvogin knelt on the ground with a bang as he put his hand on the ground. Kurapika sneered: ¡°Do you think that the Anesthetic I used was just a normal one? It was extracted from the ck Queen Bee¡¯s sting, an endangered species with a super Anesthetic. 0.5 gram of it can render an elephant unconscious in seconds, and I put five grams on the dagger. It¡¯s enough to put down dozens of elephants. Even if your body is strong, you can¡¯t be immune to it. In another half a minute, you won¡¯t be able to move at all. ¡°Bastard!¡± Uvogin started feeling numb all over his body and realized that Kurapika wasn¡¯t exaggerating. Thinking that his body would be unable to move just because of a three centimeters scratch on his skin made Uvogin almost boil in anger and shame. ¡°I will kill you.¡± Uvogin zed at Kurapika as he roared viciously. Hello everyone, Sorry for not uploading new chapters for so long as I had something to do!!I will release 6 chapters today to gain your forgiveness!!4/6!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 84: Anger Chapter 84: Anger Unfortunately for Uvogin, the Anesthetic was beyond his imagination. He was losing all feeling in his body quickly. As time went by, most of Uvogin¡¯s body lost the power to move. He couldn¡¯t move and attack Kurapika, but he refused to let him go like that. ¡°Don¡¯t¡­ Think¡­ You¡­ Can¡­ Get¡­ Away¡­¡± It was extremely difficult for him to open his mouth. ¡°What a terrifying guy! He can still talk, what a monster!¡± Kurapika frowned as he stared at Uvogin coldly. ¡°However, no matter how strong his body is, he won¡¯t be able to stay up for long. The effect of the Anesthetic will get stronger as time pass. As long as he loses consciousness, I can leave.¡± At this time, Uvogin raised his left hand and clenched his fist. Arge amount of Nen concentrated on his hand. Even though he can¡¯t move his body, he can control his Nen easily. He injected arge amount of Nen into his hand that could barely move. Kurapika¡¯s expression changed as he felt the sudden change in the atmosphere, Although he didn¡¯t learn Nen yet, he can feel the terrifying energy Uvogin emanates from his body. ¡°If I¡¯m hit with that attack, I will definitively die. I need to get away from here.¡± Kurapika became anxious. ¡°However, I¡¯m at least seven or eight meters away from him. He can¡¯t attack me from this distance with his paralyzed body. In other words, he is aiming at the ground to throw me off the cliff?¡± Kurapika instantly wanted to get away from the cliff, but Uvogin was on his way and will attack him as soon as he gets closer. At this moment, Uvogin already brought his fist down. ¡°I won¡¯t let you run! Take my Big Bang Impact!¡± Uvogin thought. Uvogin poured at least 20,000 Nen point in that Big Bang Impact. Instantly, the ground was destroyed. The impact threw Kurapika into the air and toward the sea, fifty meters down. ¡°Damn it! Is this how it ends? I will probably die after I fall into the sea.¡± At this moment, something moved from the Forest and attached itself to Kurapika¡¯s clothes before yanking him back toward the ground. But he already fainted due to the shock from the Big Bang Impact. When Kurapika woke up, he found himself lying on the grass inside the Forest. ¡°What happened?¡± As he slowly opened his eyes, Kurapika saw a Hedgehog hair wearing green clothes and holding a fishing rod. ¡°Gon?¡± Gon nodded: ¡°Kurapika, you¡¯re finally awake.¡± ¡°You saved me?¡± Kurapika couldn¡¯t believe this. Gon nodded again: ¡°Well when you fell off the cliff, I caught you using my fishing hook and pulled you back the same way I pull a fish.¡± ¡°So, that¡¯s what happened,¡± Kurapika remembered falling toward his doom before feeling something pulling him back. He definitively didn¡¯t expect a fishing hook to save his life. Kurapika thought for a bit before asking: ¡°By the way, Gon, how long was I out?¡± ¡°About four hours. It¡¯s 2 Pm.¡± ¡°That long huh¡­¡± Kurapika murmured. He knew that it was due to Uvogin¡¯s attack, but not to that extent. ¡°What kind of power was that? How can a human have such power?¡± Even though he was rescued, he was still afraid of such power. ¡°That¡¯s Nen.¡± Gon answered, even though Kurapika was muttering to himself. Kurapika was taken aback: ¡°How do you know that, Gon?¡± ¡°Because I learned Nen, although I¡¯m considered just a beginner.¡± Gon replied honestly. Kurapika frowned and said: ¡°Gon, I didn¡¯t think you were that strong. Can I ask you what is Nen?¡± ¡°Hmm¡­¡± Gon thought for a bit before he touched the back of his head and said: ¡°Nen is just the life energy we have inside our bodies. When we learn how to harness it, we call that Nen.¡± Kurapika understood the main point: ¡°So it¡¯s life energy? This means that everyone can learn it, right?¡± ¡°Well, yes, but I don¡¯t know too much because I haven¡¯t been training for long.¡± Gon looked down as he felt slightly ashamed about his inability to help. Kurapika smiled: ¡°Gon, you¡¯re really amazing, you are younger than me, but still much strong. I¡¯m envious of you.¡± ¡°Hehehe, do you want to learn Nen, Kurapika?¡± Gon smiled. Kurapika clenched his fist unconsciously: ¡°Well, if I have a choice, I would like to learn because I need to avenge my family.¡± ¡°Well, after the Hunter Exam is over, you can ask An to teach you.¡± Gon said. ¡°An? Is he the one that participated in the exam with you?¡± ¡°Yeah, you should already know him.¡± ¡°I have an impression. Although I didn¡¯t talk to him, he seemed quite strong.¡± Kurapika answered. ¡°An is great.¡± Gon eximed. ¡°So, Gon, you learned Nen from An?¡± Kurapika asked curiously. ¡°Yes.¡± Gon nodded vigorously. ¡°So, if I asked An, will he teach me?¡± Kurapika asked. Gon thought for a while then said: ¡°I think he would because An is a good guy. As long as you be his friend, he will teach you unconditionally.¡± ¡°Just be his friend¡­¡± Kurapika smiled and said: ¡°I can rest assured after hearing your words, Gon. I will ask An after the exam. Let¡¯s keep quiet for the time being.¡± ¡°Okay, no problem.¡± Gon gave him a thumbs up. Suddenly, Kurapika realized that his arms were bandaged. ¡°Gon, did you do this for me?¡± Gon nodded: ¡°Yeah, I have set them back in their ce, used some herbs I picked nearby to heal them, and then bandaged them. It shouldn¡¯t be a big problem anymore. But you can¡¯t move yet. You should rest for some time.¡± Kurapika was grateful: ¡°Thanks a lot for your help, Gon.¡± ¡°Hehehe, don¡¯t worry, we¡¯re friends.¡± Gon waved his hand shyly as he wasn¡¯t used to anyone thanking him. ¡°By the way, Gon, why were you there?¡± Kurapika asked. Gon didn¡¯t hide anything from Kurapika. He told him about Uvoign being his target and how he followed him secretly for days but couldn¡¯t attack since he knew that he wasn¡¯t Uvogin¡¯s match. ¡°When I found that you were his target, I knew that my opportunity ising. So, I waited in the Forest.¡± Gon then apologized: ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Kurapika. I didn¡¯te out to help you instantly.¡± ¡°It¡¯s okay, Gon. That guy is too strong. Even if you came out, the two of us wouldn¡¯t have any chance against him. Hiding in the Forest and waiting for an opportunity is the best choice. You helped me in the end, and that¡¯s what matters.¡± Kurapika smiled. Gon shyly touched the back of his head and said: ¡°You¡¯re wee. We are friends, after all.¡± ¡°Gon, did you take that guy¡¯s badge?¡± Kurapika asked. Gon nodded: When you were attacking him, I used my fishing rod to steal his badge from his chest.¡± ¡°That¡¯s good then, Gon. You can pass this Phase of the Exam now.¡± Kurapika sighed in relief. Gon said: ¡°There are still four hours before the test is over. We should wait till then.¡± Kurapika frowned at this moment: ¡°I don¡¯t think Uvogin would give up easily. That guy is a maniac.¡± Gon smiled and said: ¡°It¡¯s okay, as long as he meets An, Uvogin won¡¯t be able to do anything to us.¡± However, as soon as Gon¡¯s voice fell, both heard a roar not far away. The Roar was full of anger, which made their expression change. ¡°It¡¯s Uvogin.¡± Gon said. ¡°How is that possible? Did he recover from the Anesthetic that fast?¡± Kurapika was surprised: ¡°That is a super Anesthetic, you know, I can make dozens of elephants sleep for hours, one a few hours passed and he already recovered?¡± ¡°Kurapika, although your Anesthetic is strong, a guy like Uvogin won¡¯t be affected by it for long. His will power is extreme, and his body is above that of a human, and an Anesthetic can¡¯t affect him for long.¡± Sure enough, just as Gon said, after the roar, the astonishing aura was approaching them. At this moment, Uvogin was extremely angry. He woke up and realized that someone snatched his badge. He was already angry when Kurapika tricked him and paralyzed him, but now, he was dead furious. ¡°A$$holes, you dare to snatch my badge and escape. No matter who you are, I will find you, and I will kill you.¡± Although Uvogin didn¡¯t see who took his badge, he sensed Gon in the Forest. ¡°There are two presences in the forest, one is the Kurta¡¯s Survivor, and the other should be the one who took my badge.¡± Feeling Gon and Kurapika¡¯s presence, a cruel smile appeared on Uvogin¡¯s face. At this moment, An, who was looking for Gon, felt Uvogin¡¯s Aura. ¡°That¡¯s Uvogin, and he seems angry. I will go take a look.¡± An immediately turned around and went toward Uvogin. He already fought him three times and was very familiar with his aura and presence. ¡°That guy is as violent as ever. I don¡¯t know who angered him this time.¡± On the other side, Gon and Kurapika were hiding as best as possible, but Uvogin was still getting closer. Hello everyone, Sorry for not uploading new chapters for so long as I had something to do!!I will release 6 chapters today to gain your forgiveness!!5/6!!I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 85: Chase Chapter 85: Chase Feeling Uvogin approaching, Gon looked at Kurapika: ¡°Kurapika, hide here. I will go and lead him away. You take that opportunity to slip away.¡± Kurapika tly refused: ¡°Gon, I won¡¯t leave you behind.¡± ¡°Kurapika, you¡¯re injured. If Uvogin finds you, he will definitively kill you.¡± Gon exined. Kurapika had nothing to refute. Indeed, he was useless right now. Even if he stays, he can¡¯t fight Uvogin and will drag Gon back. ¡°But, Gon, this is too risky. If you be the bait, Uvogin will kill you.¡± Kurapika said worriedly. Kurapika knew how strong Uvogin was. Gon won¡¯t be able to fight him. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Kurapika.¡± Gon looked at him with confidence: ¡°Although he is powerful, I was raised in a forest, and no one can find me inside.¡± ¡°Well, Gon, please be safe.¡± Kurapika knew that Gon won¡¯t change his mind no matter what and could only pray he will be safe. He was slightly hopeful that Gon could get away from Uvogin. ¡°Cool, I will go out now and lead him away. You need to go as far as you can.¡± Gon stood up and got ready. Kurapika lowered his head and said: ¡°I know, I won¡¯t run away. I will find An. He¡¯s your friend, so he wille to help you.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know where An is, but if you can¡¯t find him, then you should hide and wait till this phase ends.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, but Gon, please be careful and avoid going head-on against Uvogin.¡± Gon nodded before rushing out from the bushes. When Uvogin saw Gon rushing out, he shouted: ¡°Little kid, so it was you.¡± Uvogin was slightly stunned before shouting again: ¡°You took away my badge when that kid drugged me, right?¡± ¡°Well, yeah, I did.¡± Gon took out Uvogin¡¯s badge from his pocket and showed it to him. ¡°Damnit! You dared to take what is mine.¡± Uvogin growled. ¡°Now, even if you give it back to me, I won¡¯t let you go.¡± ¡°Who said anything about giving it back to you? I just wanted to let you know that I have it.¡± After saying this, Gon provoked Uvogin by sticking his tongue out before running away into the forest. Uvogin was about to chase him, but Suddenly, he stopped and nced at the bushes: ¡°Don¡¯t think that you can hide there. I know that the kid is trying to lure me away; however, he seeded in angering me. You can wait for me toe back and kill you after killing that kid. You just wait in fear, Kurta Tribe¡¯s Survivor.¡± Uvogin directly started moving toward Gon at full speed. Kurapika clenched his fist and thought: ¡®If that¡¯s the case, I don¡¯t have to run. I must find An instead. Otherwise, Gon will die.¡¯ Kurapika instantly moved, but to his surprise, he saw An appear in front of him. An was following Uvogin¡¯s aura and happened to stumble on Kurapika. Kurapika never thought it would be that easy to find An. An looked at Kurapika in surprise. ¡®Was Uvogin chasing Kurapika?¡¯ However, he quickly denied that suspicion as Uvogin was going further away from here, which meant that he was chasing someone else. At this moment, Kurapika reacted and stepped forward: ¡°Hello, although we never met before, I¡¯m Gon¡¯s friend, my name is Kurapika.¡± Although he didn¡¯t expect Kurapika to take the initiative to greet him, An nodded politely, and replied: ¡°Well, I know you, Kurapika, you also should know my name, so I won¡¯t need to say anything.¡± ¡°So, what happened?¡± An asked. ¡°Gon is in danger. To help me get away, he led Uvogin away. Uvogin is now chasing him. I was about to look for you. Please help Gon.¡± An frowned, ¡®so Gon was the one being chased by Uvogin?!¡¯ An couldn¡¯t feel Gon¡¯s presence because Uvogin¡¯s presence covered up the entire ce. As An was ready to move to help Gon since he was in danger, the System gave him two choices. [Ding! Please Choose an option.] [1: Agree to Kurapika¡¯s request and rescue Gon. Reward: One Sword Style Swordsmanship (Novice)] [2: Reject Kurapika¡¯s request, Ignore Gon¡¯s life. Reward: Increase amount of Nen by 10,000 points.] (T/N: Either the Author changed his mind about Mental strength, or it is another attribute that can increase Nen.) The second reward was more attractive to An, but he won¡¯t ignore Gon¡¯s life. Sacrificing a friend¡¯s life for the sake of profit isn¡¯t his thing. He isn¡¯t a scumbag. An immediately said: ¡°I¡¯m going to find Gon now, don¡¯t worry.¡± ¡°Thank you,¡± Kurapika said gratefully. ¡°Don¡¯t thank me, Gon is my friend, and it¡¯s natural for me to save him if I can. And I made a promise to keep him safe.¡± After saying this, An directly rushed forward in the direction of Uvogin¡¯s aura. ¡®I must save Gon.¡¯ ¡®I promised Mito to keep him safe, and I won¡¯t forget that Gon was my first friend in this world and also my benefactor who took me in when I had nothing.¡¯ ¡­ Gon was rushing through the forest with all his might, using Nen to elerate. However, Gon was underestimating Uvogin, who soon overtook him quickly. Uvogin directly punched Gon, who didn¡¯t dare face it head-on as he felt the power contained in that punch. Big Bang Impact! Boom! The punch destroyed the ground forming a huge pit. The terrifying shockwave sent Gon skidding several meters away. Gon was slightly injured, but he was shocked by the difference in strength between them. ¡°This is dangerous. If he strikes at me with that fist, I will die.¡± Gon looked at Uvogin solemnly. Gon maintained [Ten] to defend himself even slightly. Although he can¡¯t go head-on with Uvogin, he can improve his power and speed, and defense when he wraps his body in Nen. No matter how strong his enemy is, he will not give up even if his chance to win is 0.01%. That¡¯s Gon. Seeing the Nen around Gon¡¯s body, Uvogin was slightly surprised: ¡°Oh? You can use Nen.¡± Although he said this, Uvogin was more surprised that Gon could avoid his Big Bang Impact. ¡°It seems that An thought you some tricks.¡± Uvogin narrowed his eyes and looked at Gon. He fought An a few times and was quite impressed by him, but An wasn¡¯t here, so he can kill Gon easily. ¡°I will kill you, kid.¡± Uvogin directly rushed at Gon like a beast and punched. Gon couldn¡¯t block or resist at all, and in the next second, three ribs broke, his left arm broke, many bones all over his body fractured without any resistance. Gon fell on the ground, dying. ¡°It looks like this is yourst moment.¡± Uvogin looked at Gon with an evil smile as he cruelly held his hand high and prepared to end Gon¡¯s life with onest punch. Hello everyone, Sorry for not uploading new chapters for so long as I had something to do!!I will release 6 chapters today to gain your forgiveness!!6/6!!! Six Chapters Delivered Sessfully! More toe tomorrow! <>I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! 4!! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 86: Scarlet Eyes Chapter 86: Scarlet Eyes Suddenly, a figure appeared and blocked Uvogin¡¯s fist. ¡°It¡¯s you?¡± Uvogin¡¯s pupil shrunk as he saw An block his punch with one hand. An looked at Gon while ignoring Uvogin and said: ¡°Sorry, Gon. I¡¯mte.¡± However, Gon could no longer respond. He lost consciousness and was dying from all the broken bones and internal injuries. An frowned as Icy cold Killing Intent emanated from him, making Uvogin¡¯s expression change as he snorted: ¡°He tried to provoke me by showing me my badge after he snatched it from me.¡± ¡°So, you ignored the rules and wanted to kill him, Right?¡± ¡°Yes, if you didn¡¯te, I would¡¯ve killed him already.¡± Uvogin snorted as he was unhappy that An stopped him. ¡°Very well! I will remember this.¡± An raised his head gloomily and warned: ¡°You will pay dearly for this. I guarantee this.¡± ¡°Huh, as if you have the ability.¡± Uvogin grinned. He wasn¡¯t afraid of An¡¯s threat. Instead, he felt excited. An knew that he can¡¯t fight right now, or else Gon will die. He looked at Uvogin coldly before he said: ¡°I don¡¯t have time to fight you now, so I will just take Gon away.¡± ¡°As if that¡¯s up to you.¡± Uvogin took action and punched An. An didn¡¯t want to fight, so he directly avoided Uvogin¡¯s punch with sh Steps before using it once again and punching Uvogin in the face. This punch was filled with An¡¯s anger. Even Uvogin, who is hailed for his defense, was sent flying back with a nosebleed. The anger behind that punch was evident. An was furious that Gon was in his current state. An ignored Uvogin and directly took Gon and retreated as he knew that he can¡¯t deal with Uvogin right now. If he fought against him out of anger, it would take a while, and Gon can¡¯t wait that long. If Gon isn¡¯t treated as soon as possible, he will die. That wasn¡¯t something An wanted to see. ¡°A$$hole!!¡± An escaped while holding Gon while Uvogin roared. [Ding! You have sessfully rescued Gon. Reward: One Sword Style (Ittoryu) swordsmanship (Novice)] On the way, An heard the System¡¯s notification, and immediately, his mind was flooded with information concerning swordsmanship. However, he wasn¡¯t in the mood to pay attention to it. Gon¡¯s situation was getting worse, and if he doesn¡¯t receive help as soon as possible, he will die. If it weren¡¯t for his strong body, he would be already dead by now. An was thinking about how to help Gon. It was impossible to ask for the Association¡¯s help because they won¡¯t help while the Exam is taking ce. Gon won¡¯t recover alone, his natural recovery was monstrous, but at this point, there is no way it can save him. The only option now is to find Leorio. Since An knew that Leorio was a medical student, he should stabilize Gon¡¯s injuries for now. As for why the Association won¡¯t help, because casualties were usual during the test. Otherwise, if every candidate were injured to ask for help, the test would be meaningless. The only person that can help right now is Leorio. But finding him will take a while. ¡°Gon, I hope you can hold on.¡± An looked at Gon as he elerated. ¡°Gon?¡± At this time, Kurapika, who secretly followed An because he was worried about Gon, spoke. When he saw the state Gon was in, anger flooded his heart. His eyes turned scarlet red as he knew that Uvogin was the one who did this to Gon. An didn¡¯t notice Kurapika¡¯s change as he asked: ¡°Kurapika, do you know where is Leorio?¡± Kurapika didn¡¯t answer, and An couldn¡¯t help ncing at him only to be taken aback: ¡°Kurapika, your eyes?¡± Seeing Kurapika¡¯s Scarlet Eyes, An was surprised as he didn¡¯t expect Kurapika to be that Angry. Kurapika realized that his eyes were scarlet and said solemnly: ¡°I¡¯m from the Kurta Tribe. When I¡¯m emotional, mostly angry, my eyes will turn red.¡± An knew about that already, but he didn¡¯t expect that Kurapika would be that Angry for Gon. Kurapika clenched his fists as he med himself: ¡°Gon is like this now because of me.¡± An said coldly: ¡°Of course, you¡¯re slightly responsible, but you can¡¯t be med. After all, Gon¡¯s target is Uvogin, so he would¡¯ve angered him, whether he helped you or not.¡± Kurapika said with a voice filled with Killing Intent: ¡°I will go kill that bastard.¡± Kurapika was so angry that his sanity was disappearing. Even though his power will increase when his eyes turn red, An knew that no matter how strong he is now, there is no way he can face Uvogin. Kurapika thought that he could kill Uvogin in his current state. Looking at the situation from a bystander¡¯s point of view, An is sure that Kurapika¡¯s current power is far from enough. His current chance of winning is less than 0.01%. [Ding! Make a choice] [1: Prevent Kurapika from going after Uvogin to avenge Gon. Reward: Increase Nen by 1,000 Points.] [2: Let Kurapika go after Uvogin to avenge Gon. Reward: Increase Nen by 800 Points.] [3: Talk to Kurapika and calm him down. Reward: Increase Nen by 1,500 Points.] Unexpectedly, the System decided to jump out now of all times. It seems like Kurapika is an essential character to the System. An immediately chose the third option. ¡°Wait, Kurapika.¡± Seeing him moving away, An directly put a hand on his shoulder and stopped him. ¡°Don¡¯t stop me!¡± Kurapika shouted in anger. An said coldly: ¡°I¡¯ll say this only once, if you go after, then it¡¯s your choice.¡± ¡°What do you want to say?¡± ¡°Even if in your current state, you will not be able to fight Uvogin, don¡¯t lose your sanity because of anger, or else, you¡¯d die.¡± ¡°If it weren¡¯t for me, Gon wouldn¡¯t have been in that state. All I can do is kill Uvogin and avenge Gon.¡± Kurapika said with clenched fists. Of course, he knew that Uvogin was strong, but he felt guilty about Gon¡¯s current state, and he couldn¡¯t forgive himself. An patted his shoulder and said: ¡°I understand how you feel. Gon is also my friend, and seeing him like this hurt. But you can¡¯t just throw your life for nothing. Is your life worth nothing? Don¡¯t you still want to avenge your people?¡± Hearing the second sentence, Kurapika looked at An in surprise: ¡°How do you know that I want to avenge my family?¡± An didn¡¯t expect Kurapika to notice this, but he already has an exnation. ¡°As far as I know, the Kurta Tribe was annihted a few years ago. Since you are a survivor of that massacre, it¡¯s only a matter of facts that you would seek revenge.¡± Hearing this, Kurapika was silent. Indeed, he wanted revenge. He is living right now to seek revenge. If he died, his efforts over the years would be in vain. After thinking about this, Kurapika calmed down and said: ¡°I won¡¯t go after that guy now, but I won¡¯t forget this. I will definitively avenge Gon.¡± Seeing his red eyes disappearing, An heaved a sigh of relief and said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry about that, I will take care of Uvogin.¡± An paused slightly and nced at Kurapika: ¡°But you will meet them sooner orter. Until then, you need to get stronger.¡± Kurapika couldn¡¯t understand An¡¯s words and didn¡¯t know who he meant by ¡®them.¡¯ After calming Kurapika, An received his 1,500 Nen points, but he didn¡¯t pay attention. ¡°Kurapika, you haven¡¯t answered me. Do you know where is Leorio?¡± Kurapika understood why An asked. Leorio is a medical student, so that he can help Gon. He immediately said: ¡°Thest time I saw him was on the southeast of the ind. We parted ways yesterday afternoon. I think he should be still there.¡± An nodded: ¡°It¡¯s not toote. Let¡¯s go find him.¡± Two hourster, An and Kurapika finally met Leorio. Leorio didn¡¯t take his target¡¯s badge and was sitting down below a tree. He looked depressed as he looked at the sky. Seeing An appearing in front of him with Gon on his back, Leorio was taken aback. ¡°Why is he like that?¡± ¡°There is no time to exin. Leorio, you¡¯re a medical student. Please help Gon.¡± Kurapika urged. ¡°Put him down. I will try everything I can.¡± Leorio said with a solemn face. An put Gon on the ground, and instantly Leoiro took his med-kit and started treating him. A few minutester, Leorio¡¯s forehead was full of sweat. Apart from a few scratched on Gon¡¯s face, there were no other injuries that Leorio didn¡¯t take a look at, but his rescue stopped as he clenched his fist. ¡°What¡¯s the matter, Leorio?¡± Seeing him like this, Kurapika was a little puzzled, but he could guess the reason and hoped he was wrong. ¡°I¡¯m sorry I can¡¯t save him.¡± After a moment, Leorio said. ¡°Why¡­¡± Kurapika¡¯s face changed. ¡°Gon¡¯s internal injuries are too severe. At least a dozen bones are broken, including hands, feet, ribs, spine¡­ They¡¯re all out of ce and broken a few times over. Even with a professional doctor, this kind of injury is almost impossible to heal. Moreover, Gon¡¯s internal organs are damaged, this no longer treatable.¡± ¡°How could this be¡­¡± Kurapika couldn¡¯t believe this. Leorio¡¯s words were equivalent to a Death Sentence for Gon. ¡°Dmanit!!¡± Kurapika shouted as his eyes grew red once again. His killing intent radiated from him as he couldn¡¯t take it anymore. Leorio was taken aback as he said: ¡°Kurapika, what wrong with your eyes?¡± Kurapika didn¡¯t answer but said solemnly: ¡°Take care of Gon. I¡¯m going to kill Uvogin.¡± At this moment, An, who was silent, said: ¡°Wait a moment; I have a way to save Gon.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 87: Super Powerful Senzu Bean Chapter 87: Super Powerful Senzu Bean Both Leorio and Kurapika looked at An in surprise as they heard his words. Leorio was stunned, he knew Gon¡¯s condition best, and there is no way he can be saved out here without any medical equipment, and even that would have its risk. ¡®How will An save Gon? And if he can save him, why did he wait till now to talk?¡¯ Kurapika had the same thoughts as Leorio, but he knew that An wouldn¡¯t talk big like that without reason, so he asked: ¡°You have a way to save Gon?¡± An nodded: ¡°I do have away, but I¡¯m not sure if it will be effective. But since Gon has reached his current state, then I can only try it.¡± ¡°How sure are you that it will work?¡± Kurapika asked. ¡°In theory, 100%, but I didn¡¯t experiment on it before, so I¡¯m not sure.¡± ¡°Is there a way that will 100% make Gon recover?¡± If there is such a way, Leorio as a Medical student would doubt his life. An nced at the two of them and said: ¡°May I ask you two to leave me alone with Gon for a bit?¡± Kurapika and Leorio nodded and temporarily left without saying anything. ¡°Kurapika, do you think that An has a way to save Gon?¡± ¡°Maybe.¡± ¡°You don¡¯t believe it, do you?¡± ¡°Well, someone like you said that Gon couldn¡¯t be saved, and we are not in a hospital, so if An managed to save him, then he has an ability that transcends the boundaries of modern medicine.¡± ¡°That¡¯s hard to say,¡± Leorio said. An sighed and looked at Gon. He took out a thumb-sized green been from his storage ring. A Senzu bean can heal and almost revive anyone that is still breathing. It¡¯s a cheat like an item in the Dragon Ball world. An hesitated before reluctantly feeding Gon the Senzu Bean. He made his mind to save Gon, his first friend in this world, no matter what. Even if he doesn¡¯t get another Senzu Beanter, it will be worth it. If the Senzu Bean can save the life of his friend, then it served its purpose. No, saving Gon was more valuable than a Senzu Bean. An nervously looked at Gon, waiting for him to recover, then suddenly Gon¡¯s eyes opened as he sat up. Seeing him jumping up, An was stunned for a moment before he smiled and said: ¡°Great!! It worked.¡± Gon saw An and surprisedly asked: ¡°An, why are you here?¡± Kurapika and Leorio heard Gon¡¯s voice and hurriedly ran back. When they saw him standing up, their eyes almost fell from surprise as if they were looking at a Ghost. ¡°Kurapika? Leorio? Why are you guys here?¡± Gon looked at them puzzledly, not sure what is happening. ¡°Gon, you¡¯re alright?¡± ¡°Um, what¡¯s wrong with me?¡± Gon scratched his head. Seeing Gon confused, Kurapika exined: ¡°Gon, you went to bait Uvogin away, did you forget?¡± Gon remembered all of a sudden and was startled: ¡°I was beaten to the ground. That Uvogin is too strong, I¡¯m not his match at all. I felt all my bones break with a single punch from him.¡± Gon thought for a bit, then said: ¡°I thought I was dead.¡± ¡°If An didn¡¯t save you, you¡¯d be dead.¡± Kurapika said in a deep voice: ¡°He saved you from dying.¡± ¡°Really?¡± ¡°Yeah, Gon, even someone studying Medicine like me couldn¡¯t save you, but he did,¡± Leorio said. Gon knew that he almost died, and from what everyone is saying, An saved him. ¡°Thank you, An.¡± Although he said only three short words, An could feel his gratitude. Gon wasn¡¯t someone good at expressing himself, so just that thank you is enough for An. ¡°You¡¯re wee Gon, after all, we are friends, right? And friends help each other.¡± An smiled. Although the loss of a Senzu Bean made him feel pity, he wouldn¡¯t have forgiven himself if Gon died. He didn¡¯t regret using it to save Gon. [Ding! Congrattions for triggering a hidden Quest: reach the highest level of friendship with Gon Freecess, the world¡¯s protagonist. Reward: Golden Treasure Chest x1] An was stunned for a moment. There were Hidden Quests in the system? An didn¡¯t save Gon expecting any reward, but unexpectedly, the system gave him a treasure chest¡­ System: [Do you want to open the Golden Treasure Chest?] ¡®Open it!!¡¯ An didn¡¯t hesitate at all. [Ding! Opening Golden Treasure Chest¡­ Congrattions, you obtained three Explosive tags.] An didn¡¯t expect that at all. He thought that he¡¯d get something like a Devil Fruit or a Saijo O Wazamono sword, but the Explosive Tags were good as well. At this time, the knowledge about the power and their use of the Explosive tags flowed in An¡¯s mind. The Explosive tags were advanced Seals that can detonate after some time from using them. The Explosive tag produces a small-scale explosion close to a fire release Jutsu. An needed to use half ram or tiger seal to detonate it. An put the three Explosive tags into the Storage ring and smiled. Those tags were equivalent to small bombs. No one would care about a piece of paper so that it will take them by surprise. An thought of the only person that would make him use those three tags right now. It was Uvogin. Even if Uvogin¡¯s body was as strong as steel, he wouldn¡¯t be safe from that explosion. At this time, Gon asked: ¡°An, what are you thinking about? Why do I feel that you¡¯re thinking about something bad?¡± Kurapika and Leorio were also suspicious. An smiled and shook his head: ¡°I was just thinking about something interesting.¡± Kurapika curiously asked: ¡°An, what was in your hands just now?¡± ¡°Secret weapon.¡± An smiled mysteriously without exining further. ¡°Secret weapon?¡± Although Kurapika and the others were curious, they didn¡¯t ask much. n patted Gon¡¯s shoulder and asked: ¡°Gon, are you alright now?¡± ¡°Well, I¡¯m good.¡± Gon nodded. ¡°Really?¡± An smiled and punched Gon. Gon was taken aback, but he reacted quickly and blocked the fist. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 88: Nen Teacher Chapter 88: Nen Teacher An nodded as he felt Gon¡¯s power: ¡°Yes, it seems you fully recovered.¡± It was a good thing that Gon recovered, but Kurapika and Leorio were puzzled. Leorio couldn¡¯t help asking An: ¡°It¡¯s so weird, An. Please tell me, how did you heal Gonpletely like that? It¡¯s incredible.¡± Kurapika was curious as well but still didn¡¯t ask: ¡°Leorio, even if An tells you, you can¡¯t understand.¡± ¡°Kurapika is right.¡± An thought for a bit before continuing: ¡°I can understand that you doubt your medical knowledge, but rest assured, the method I used isn¡¯t by any means rted to medicine.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not rted?¡± Leorio was shocked before asking: ¡°Is it a special ability or something?¡± ¡°If it was, then I can understand why Gon recovered,¡± Kurapika said. They were aware that treating Gon in that state was impossible. ¡°Is it a Nen Ability?¡± Kurapika asked curiously. An shook his head and said: ¡°It wasn¡¯t Nen, but I used something. It can be called an elixir which can heal anyone as long as he is still breathing.¡± ¡°Is there such a thing in the world?¡± Leorio and Kurapika asked in a daze. ¡°What is it?¡± Gon asked. ¡°A Senzu Bean,¡± An said. ¡°Senzu Bean?¡± The three of them stared nkly as they never heard of such a thing before. Leorio was interested int as he said: ¡°Do you still that Senzu Bean? Can I take a look?¡± An looked at him as if he was stupid and said: ¡°Do you think such an elixir grows on trees? I only had one and used it to heal Gon.¡± Leorio didn¡¯t expect the Senzu bean to be so precious and looked at An apolitically without asking further. ¡°So that thing was An¡¯s trump card when your life is in danger, right?¡± An shrugged: ¡°There is no such thing as a trump card. For me, it¡¯s enough that it saved Gon.¡± Leorio and Kurapika fell silent when they heard this. Gon stood up and said: ¡°I¡¯m sorry, An, you used something so precious to save me.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. What are friends if they don¡¯t save each other.¡± An smiled. Kurapika and Leorio could only admire An from the bottom of their hearts. Gon already regarded An as his life savior. At this time, Kurapika asked: ¡°There are less than three hours till the exam ends. Have you collected your six points?¡± ¡°Someone already took away my badge.¡± Leorio was the first to speak with a gloomy expression. ¡°Who took it?¡± Gon asked. ¡°It¡¯s Gittarackur. That guy is terrifying.¡± Leorio sighed. ¡°So, it¡¯s him, huh.¡± An¡¯s mouth raised as he didn¡¯t expect Illumi¡¯s target to be Leorio. An patted Leorio¡¯s shoulder and said: ¡°He is a top-notch assassin. You should be thankful that you¡¯re still alive. He only took away your badge. You cane back next year.¡± ¡°What kind of Assassin is he, An? Do you know him?¡± Kurapika asked. ¡°I know his detail,¡± An said. ¡°Who is he?¡± Leorio asked. An cleared his throat and said: ¡°It¡¯s okay to tell you, he is Illumi, Killua¡¯s brother in disguise.¡± ¡°Really?¡± ¡°He¡¯s Killua¡¯s brother.¡± Kurapika, Leorio, and Gon were surprised. They didn¡¯t look anything alike. An smiled: ¡°Of course, it¡¯s not his true face. His face isn¡¯t scary.¡± ¡°So, does Killua know that his brother is here?¡± Gon asked. An shook his head: ¡°He doesn¡¯t.¡± ¡°By the way, An, you already have enough points, right? I have enough points as I snatched Uvogin¡¯s badge.¡± ¡°What about you, Kurapika?¡± ¡°I have six points,¡± Kurapika said. Leorio sighed: ¡°I envy you. It seems that I¡¯m the only one that doesn¡¯t have six points.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be disappointed, Leorio. There is still a chance next year.¡± Gonforted. ¡°If you don¡¯t get stronger, next year you might not be able to pass as well,¡± Kurapika warned. Leorio couldn¡¯t refute Kurapika¡¯s words. ¡°Gittarackur didn¡¯t do anything this time. He just made him hand over my badge and let me go. I may seem like a fool that handed over his badge when asked, but¡­ but at that time, I was so scared that I couldn¡¯t even say a word of refusal. I couldn¡¯t control my body.¡± Leorio said with lingering fear. ¡°You didn¡¯t learn Nen yet, so it¡¯s impossible to do anything against him,¡± An said sharply. Illumi must¡¯ve used his Killing Intent to make Leorio submit. ¡°An, what is that Nen you¡¯re talking about?¡± Leorio said puzzledly. It¡¯s the first time he heard of the term. ¡°Yes, An, why don¡¯t you show us what it is,¡± Kurapika asked curiously. Both of them want to get stronger, and it seemed that learning Nen could improve their stronger. An is not a selfish person. Since he can help Kurapika and Leorio, he would indeed help them. Moreover, it is useless to know Nen if you don¡¯t have the potential and hard work. An knew that Kurapika had monstrous talent and his specialist ability that manifest with his scarlet eyes, which makes him a master in all Nen types. With such talent, it wasn¡¯t a problem for him to learn Nen early. As for Leorio, his talent wasn¡¯t as good, but it¡¯s not bad either. In the election of the Zodiac, he relied on his technique of Nen punch to defeat him. At this time, the system¡¯s notification made its appearance. [Ding! Please select an option.] [1: Teach Kurapika and Leorio Nen as a friend. Reward: Increase Nen by 5,000 Points.] [2: Teach Kurapika and Leorio Nen as a teacher. At least make them teach them the basics of Nen. Reward: Increase Nen by 12,000 points.] An doesn¡¯t mind teaching Leorio and Kurapika, but judging from the reward, it¡¯s evident that being their teacher is better. Immediately An looked at Leoiro and Kurapika and asked: ¡°Kurapika, Leorio, I have to ask. Do you want to learn Nen?¡± Hearing this, Kurapika and Leorio were surprised. Kurapika said excitedly: ¡°Could it be that you will teach us Nen?¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°I will.¡± ¡°This is great,¡± Leorio shouted happily. ¡°However, you will have to listen to me.¡± An smiled slightly. ¡°What do you mean?¡± Kurapika frowned. ¡°Do you want teaching fees?¡± Leorio scratched his head. Kurapika said hurriedly: ¡°If it¡¯s money, I can pay.¡± Leorio also said: ¡°Well, although I don¡¯t have much money, if I can be stronger, I¡¯m willing to pay.¡± An stopped the two of them: ¡°You misunderstood. I mean, I¡¯m not teaching you as a friend, but as a teacher, do you get it?¡± The two suddenly realized what he meant and respected him even more because of it. Indeed, they weren¡¯t close friends, so if An thought them Nen as ¡®friends¡¯ won¡¯t feel sincere. But if he thought of them as a teacher, it would be more reasonable. Kurapika looked at An and said solemnly: ¡°You will teach me Nen, so it¡¯s normal for me to teach you.¡± Leorio directly shouted: ¡°An-sensei, Leorio greets you.¡± An was dumbfounded for a bit and said: ¡°Okay, you don¡¯t have to do that, we are about the same age, so just call me by my name.¡± ¡°No problem.¡± Kurapika and Leorio nodded. Seeing that both of them epted, An looked at Gon and said: ¡°Then before teaching both of you, I need both of you to feel Nen. Gon use [Ten].¡± ¡°Okay.¡± An knew that they would understand Nen only if they experienced it first hand. Gon obeyed An¡¯s request and started using [Ten], and suddenly an astonishing amount of Nen was released from his body. ¡°Wow, this is amazing,¡± Leorio shouted. ¡°Is this Nen?¡± Kurapika muttered as he felt the Aura radiating from Gon. It wasn¡¯t the first time they felt this, but since it was released by Gon without any purpose behind it, they could feel how powerful it was. Just as the two of them sighed, and oppressing, Aura quickly approached them. Both Kurapika and Gon knew who this Aura belonged to, and they were terrified. Only Leorio didn¡¯t know it as he asked sluggishly: ¡°what¡¯s the matter, what is this?¡± ¡°Be careful, that guy is here,¡± Kurapika said solemnly. ¡°Uvogin is here.¡± Gon frowned. ¡°Uvogin?¡± Leorio was taken aback before his face changed: ¡°Is it the guy that almost killed Gon?¡± They fought against Uvogin and could perceive his Aura. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 89: Challenge Chapter 89: Challenge Seeing Gon and Kurapika nervous, Leorio suggested: ¡°I think we should run away.¡± ¡°Leorio, you can go first. I¡¯m staying to settle the ount.¡± Kurapika said coldly. He never forgot the fact that Uvogin almost killed Gon to save him. If An weren¡¯t here, Gon would¡¯ve died. In other words, Uvogin was an enemy who almost killed his friend. Kurapika decided not to run away. ¡°I want to stay too.¡± Gon said. ¡°You two¡­¡± Leorio sighed helplessly before firmly announcing: ¡°Since both of you are staying, I won¡¯t leave.¡± ¡°Hey, you three¡­¡± Seeing the three stupid guys and their bromance, An was speechless: ¡°Rx, will you. I¡¯m here. Calm down.¡± Gon, Kurapika, and Leorio finally remembered that An was with them. All of them panicked and totally forgot about An due to Uvogin¡¯s Aura. As soon as An spoke, the three of them rxed a bit and felt relieved. There is no doubt that An was the strongest out of the three of them. He is the only one who can fight Uvogin. Kurapika instantly said: ¡°Let¡¯s put learning Nen aside, for now, An, what are we going to do?¡± ¡°What else can we do? We can only face danger head-on.¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°You won¡¯t die as long as I¡¯m here.¡± Hearing such reassuring words made the three of them rx a lot. However, Uvogin¡¯s Aura was getting closer, and their hearts tightened again. An knew that it¡¯s impossible to make them rx with such a foe in front of them. [Ding! Please make a choice] An wasn¡¯t surprised as he expected something like this from his understanding of the system. Whenever an original character encounters an event, he would have to make a choice. [1: Protect Gon and the others and defeat or behead Uvogin. Reward: Swordsmanship Rhythm of All Things. (The ability to cut steel)] [2: Lead Gon and the others away and avoid fighting Uvogin. Reward: Ryo Wazamono Sword.] The options were within An¡¯s expectation, and both rewards were good, but it paled inparison to the Rhythm of all things. Because he already had a great weapon, which is Shusui. So, any other weapon didn¡¯t pick his interest currently. If he defeats Uvogin this time, he will get Rhythm of All Things and advance his swordsmanship, which he just got as well. If he uses advanced swordsmanship with Shusui, the result will be devastating. In this world, using Nen to defend was expected, and the stronger the Nen of the user, the stronger his defense will get. For example, if someone is defending using Ken and concentrates around 10,000 Nen points into his defense, to break that defense, the attacker¡¯s power needs to exceed 10,000 Nen Point. The bigger the gap between two fighters, the smaller the chance for the weakest to win and vice versa. If we want to calcte the amount of Nen Uvogin had, we can assume that it reached 90,000 Points, and if he was pushed beyond his limit, he could break 100,000 Points easily. As for An, he currently had 70,000 Points, which means the gap between their Nen is about 20,000 Points. An wasn¡¯t worried because, in addition to Nen, he had other techniques, such as Moon Walk, sh Steps, Leaf Taijutsu style, etc. Those techniques didn¡¯t need Nen, as they relied on stamina. An now had two methods to break through Uvogin¡¯s defense. The first one is the Explosive Tags. The Explosive Tags problem is that they need about a second to detonate, which Uvogin can use to avoid the st. However, An knew that Uvogin was too confident in his defense to be concerned about it. The second thing is Shusui. With that sword, An was confident in breaking through Uvogin¡¯s defense. After all, it isn¡¯t an ordinary sword. It¡¯s rumored that Ryoma used Shusui to kill a dragon. An believed that this sword could kill Uvogin. However, that is if he can use it. The Meito (Famous swords) need corresponding strength to show their powers. After getting One sword style swordsmanship (novice), An can now swing a sword. He is now a beginner swordsman. An took out Shusui from his storage ring and held it in his hands. Gon, Kurapika, and Leorio looked at An in surprise as the presence around him changed. ¡°An, what with that sword?¡± Kurapika asked: ¡°It¡¯s a ck sword.¡± He could feel that Shusui wasn¡¯t normal. He could feel something inside it. Gon, who had the most honed instinct between them, said: ¡°An, that sword seems mighty.¡± Leorio interjected: ¡°Yes, it has a ck de and some unique pattern on it.¡± An said in a deep, inspiring voice: ¡°This ck sword is Shusui. It once killed a dragon. I will use itter to kill Uvogin, as it should be enough to break his defense.¡± The three were surprised hearing about the dragon as Gon eximed: ¡°It killed a dragon. That¡¯s so cool!!¡± Kurapika looked at the sword again before saying: ¡°Indeed, this sword looks sharp. I think it should be fine.¡± An nodded. He stayed silent for a bit, then said: ¡°I got a n that will help us get rid of that guy quickly. I will hide there, and you three deal with him as best as you could and get his attention. When that opportunity arises, I will behead him from behind.¡± ¡°I¡¯m in!¡± Gon said, and the others nodded. They didn¡¯t find anything wrong with his proposal. Soon after, An hid as Uvogin approached. Finally, he fell from the sky with a boom as he cracked the ground. As the dust dispersed, Uvogin¡¯s figure appeared to all of them. He relied on his senses to find them. At first, he couldn¡¯t pinpoint their direction, but as soon as Gon used [Ten], he sensed him and came here as fast as possible. ¡°Hahahaha, Kids, let¡¯s see how you will run this time.¡± Uvogin cracked his neck as grinned furiously. Kurapika said coldly: ¡°We won¡¯t be running away.¡± ¡°Yes, we aren¡¯t running away.¡± Gon eximed loudly. ¡°Me too, I¡¯m with them,¡± Leorio shouted boldly. However, he was almost shivering from fear as he thought: ¡®What a terrifying guy, his Nen is astonishing. It¡¯s several times greater than Gon¡¯s.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, you just made this easier.¡± Uvogin snorted as he waved his hand. Suddenly, a strong wind rushed toward them, which made them even more fearful. Just a wave of his hand generated such a strong wind. The only thought in their heads currently was: ¡®Uvogin was extremely strong!¡¯ It¡¯s definitively not an opponent they could fight. Gon was doing his best as he resisted Uvogin¡¯s oppressing Aura while Kurapika was slightly worse, but even so, he couldn¡¯t somehow resist it. Leorio almost couldn¡¯t breathe. He was the most ordinary of the three, after all. ¡°Hehehehe, Let¡¯s see how long you can hold for.¡± Uvogin wasn¡¯t nning on killing them directly. Instead, he wanted to y around with them first. He wanted to torture the three of them first, before killing them. As Uvogin released his Aura, even more, the pressure got stronger by the second. Gon made a move and stood in front of Kurapika and Leorio before releasing his Aura to protect them. ¡°Oh? Not bad kid.¡± Uvogin looked at Gon and sneered: ¡°Kid, you are lucky you didn¡¯t die previously, but who will rescue you now.¡± As he said this, Uvogin¡¯s doubts were aroused. Because Gon was severely injured previously, but nowhere is he standing without any injury after one hour. This made him puzzled and curious at the same time. Of course, he knew that An was rted to this. However, An wasn¡¯t here. He didn¡¯t rule out that An was using Zetsu and hiding right now. His gazended on Leorio, and as soon as he saw him holding a medicine box, he assumed that he was the one who saved Gon, which made him angry. Suddenly, Uvogin raised his fist and violently attacked Leorio. ¡°This is bad!¡± Gon and Kurapika knew that Uvogin wanted to attack Leorio, and it was toote to dodge, so they could only stand in front of Leorio and block this punch for him. Leorio was in the back, with Kurapika in the middle and Gon in the front. Gon released all of his Nen to defend against Uvogin¡¯s punch, while Kurapika held Gon as hard as possible to absorb the impact as best as he could. As soon as the punch was released, the three of them flew in the air. Simultaneously, a figure suddenly appeared from behind andunched an Attack at lightning speed. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 90: Beheaded Chapter 90: Beheaded One Sword Style (Ittoryo): Dragon fangs (Ryuu no Kiba)! An appeared like a ghost behind Uvogin while swinging Shusui at full force toward Uvogin¡¯s head. Uvogin¡¯s face changed as he felt the crisis. It was toote to avoid, and all he could do was turn around and block with his hand awkwardly. The ck Sword shed with cold light and passed through Uvogin¡¯s block. Instead of his head, his hand, which he raised to defend, flew in the air. Blood sshed on the ground. His entire arm was sliced off. The cut was smooth without any resistance at all. It wasn¡¯t a simple thing to do against someone with a tough body like Uvogin. If An didn¡¯t try his best to wield Shusui when trying to slice Uvogin¡¯s head off, the power behind it wouldn¡¯t be so drastic. After all, An was a novice in swordsmanship. At this moment, An was panting as he put most of his power behind that attack. It wasn¡¯t a simple matter to cut a monster like Uvogin after all. Uvogin was stunned as he stared at his left arm on the ground as if he couldn¡¯t believe it. Aaaaaaaaah~!! Uvogin¡¯s roar resounded across the ind. It wasn¡¯t a roar of pain due to his chopped off arm, but it was a roar of anger. ¡°I¡¯m going to kill you!!!!¡± Uvogin endured the pain as he rushed toward An with a Big Bang Impact. An wasn¡¯t fully ready to resist Uvogin¡¯s punch after hisst attack, so he immediately sh Stepped away without any hesitation. Boom! The ground was torn apart as if a meteor just hit the ground leaving behind arge pit. As the dust dispersed, Uvogin stood in the middle of the crater, breathing heavily. His blood gushed out harder after using Big Bang Impact. But what drove him crazy is that in his anger, he used Big Bang Impact, which destroyed his just cut off arm. If that arm were still intact, he would¡¯ve been able to re-attach it easily, but now, there is no way for him to regain his arm again. At this moment, he became a one-armed man. This caused his anger to soar as he shouted at An: ¡°You coward!! You dare attack from behind!¡± If An didn¡¯t attack him from behind like that, he wouldn¡¯t have lost his arm! Although he guessed that An might be hiding from the start, he didn¡¯t expect him to attack as soon he attacked Gon and the others. Moreover, he didn¡¯t expect that An would be able to cut off his arm with a single sh. At this moment, Uvogin looked at the Sword in An¡¯s hand. He could feel that it wasn¡¯t an ordinary sword. An looked at Uvogin without flinching. Although he cut off thetter¡¯s arm, his original intention was killing him with one blow. ¡®What a pity that attack should¡¯ve killed him.¡¯ However, without his left hand, his power would drop significantly. Right now, An didn¡¯t fear him. If they continue fighting, Uvogin will die. ¡°Remember this well, the sword that will kill you is called Shusui.¡± An waved Shusui toward Uvogin, but thetter never admits defeat as he angrily shouted: ¡°You are a hundred years too young to kill me.¡± Uvogin¡¯s Nen erupted from his body as he stopped the bleeding from his left shoulder. Perhaps due to Shusui slicing off his hand, Uvogin became fearful of that Sword. He didn¡¯t dare to block it directly. Instead, he avoided it. ¡°This is the first time you evaded. Why? Are you scared? Aren¡¯t you proud of your strong body?¡± An taunted, and Uvogin became furious. He was arrogant. He couldn¡¯t bear An¡¯s ridicule. An waved his Sword again, and this time, Uvogin punched the Sword instead of evading it. His fist is the strongest part of his body, after all. It was the only thing he was sure that wouldn¡¯t get injured by that Sword. The fight escted inside the forest as shock waves after shock waves generated with every collision. Even so, An managed to wound him several times. Uvogin¡¯sbat efficiency dropped by a lot without his hand, even though his Aura was still the same. Relying on his right arm alone wasn¡¯t enough to block Shusui. sh! sh! sh! An¡¯s attacks became faster as he danced around with Shusui. Each sh will make his Sword heavier and faster. Although he can¡¯t disy Shusui¡¯s power with Beginner Swordsmanship, he can at least wield the Sword. Uvogin felt more pressure as time passed. He couldn¡¯t deal with An, who is bing faster and stronger with each sh. The battle was at its climax. Sparks flew in the air due to a sword and a fist colliding. Suddenly, An flickered to Uvogin¡¯s side and shed Uvogin from the top. The Sword shed across Uvogin¡¯s body, making another massive wound in the already scarred figure. ¡°Damnit!!¡± Uvogin roared as cold sweat covered his forehead. Although he defended all dangerous attacks with [Ken], the attack still pass through his defense. The wounds weren¡¯t deep, but they are painful. His best mean of defense is his right hand, but that hand is also his strongest mean of attack. That¡¯s why each time he attacks, his would be wide open. Uvogin¡¯s body was covered in wounds, and he bled. However, he refused to lose. Even if he is seriously wounded, he will fight till the end. ¡°Big Bang Impact!!¡± This time, Uvogin didn¡¯t use the normal Big Bang impact. Instead, he concentrated Nen on his fist, then shot it out toward An like a Cannon. An¡¯s face changed slightly as he didn¡¯t expect a ranged attack from Uvogin. Big Bang Impact was a strong AOE (Area Of Effect) attack, but this Cannon was condensed. It¡¯s indeed strong. If An was hit by it, he would be disabled if not die. An readied his Sword. He concentrated Nen into the de with [Shu] to raise its power before facing the Nen Cannon Uvogin sted at him. As the st hit Shusui, an incredible impact resounded, which sent An flying into the air. That attack didn¡¯t even nick Shusui. If it were an ordinary sword, it would¡¯ve been broken. ¡°Worthy of your fame, Shusui.¡± An got up with a slight injury. However, it wasn¡¯t much as it didn¡¯t affect his power. An narrowed his eyes and looked at Uvogin. ¡°Using everything you have to destroy Shusui was stupid.¡± An sneered. ¡°Damnit!¡± Uvogin has never been looked down upon like this in his life before. Uvogin gained a bit of momentum after that punch, which made him take that opportunity to attack once again. An held Shusui in his right hand while he raised his left hand to make an ice wall in front of him. Boom! The Ice shattered as Uvogin passed through the wall with his fist moving forward toward An. However, to his surprise, An already disappeared from behind the Ice wall, which caused Uvogin to frown. He suddenly felt his Aura from behind, and without thinking, he sent another fist out. The Sword was faster than Uvogin¡¯s fist as half a meter wound appeared across Uvogin¡¯s chest. Uvogin roared in pain. Anyone ten kilometers away would be able to hear this roar. An couldn¡¯t defend against a sound attack, so he felt slightly dizzy as his mind buzzed. Even so, Uvogin couldn¡¯t take advantage of An¡¯s current state because he was severely injured right now. Blood gushed out of his chest, and no matter how fast he heals, there is no way to recover from that now. Moreover, even a slight movement would cause him to feel pain all over his body. An recovered from the sound attack and said: ¡°This time, you¡¯re dead.¡± An held Shusui and rushed toward Uvogin in an all-out attack. Uvogin felt An rushing toward him and immediately tried to fight back, but he was no longer An¡¯s opponent. After several minutes after attacking and defending, Uvogin could no longer take it. His hand was cut off. His body was full of wounds, and blood gushed all over the ce. He knelt on the ground as his injuries restricted his movement. An was panting heavily as he held Shusui and stood in front of Uvogin with a cold expression. ¡°I won, and I will kill you now.¡± ¡°Damn it!! Is this the end?¡± Uvogin raised his head weakly. He can¡¯t fight anymore. Uvogin¡¯s re was oozing with hatred as An readied himself to kill. ¡°Die!¡± An said and directly dropped his Sword. Suddenly, a figure appeared out of nowhere, blocking An¡¯s Sword. An¡¯s pupil shrunk slightly as his expression changed. The person in front of him was Chrollo. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 91: Passing the Third Phase! Chapter 91: Passing the Third Phase! When An was still looking at Chrollo in surprise, Pakunoda shot several bullets at him. An had to retreat and defend using Shusui. At this time, he looked around to look at Pakunoda before frowning. ¡°It¡¯s troublesome now,¡± An said. Uvogin was just one strike away from death, but Chrollo had to appear. Although he wanted to retort about Chrollo¡¯s perfect timing, he decided to stay silent. Uvogin sighed in relief as he saw Chrollo and said: ¡°Chief, it¡¯s about time you got here.¡± Chrollo said earnestly: ¡°I heard your scream, so I came as fast as I could.¡± Uvogin replied: ¡°Sorry, chief if you didn¡¯t rush here, I might¡¯ve been dead.¡± Seeing Uvogin covered in blood, Chrollo said: ¡°Although I don¡¯t know why you went after An again, it looks like you¡¯ve lost.¡± Although he wasn¡¯t convinced, Uvogin didn¡¯t refute Chrollo¡¯s words. It was a fact that he lost this time. Pakunoda nced at him and said: ¡°By the way, you look the worst I¡¯ve seen you so far. I didn¡¯t expect you will be forced to such a state. Even your left hand was cut off. It looks like it will be hard for you to remain in your position now.¡± Hearing Pakunoda¡¯s words, Uvogin angrily roared: ¡°Damn it! If he didn¡¯t sneak up on me, I would¡¯ve killed him.¡± Chrollo said coldly: ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter if he did or not. What matters is that he almost managed to kill you. That shows his power.¡± ¡°I¡¯m not convinced,¡± Uvogin grunted. He always believed that no one could hurt him, and he is unwilling to ept that An could defeat him without stupid tricks. ¡°It¡¯s your business if you don¡¯t want to be convinced. Without me here, you would have died.¡± Chrollo said indifferently, making Uvogin speechless. Chrollo nced at An thoughtfully and said: ¡°Let¡¯s leave it at that. I will deal with this now.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Although he was unwilling, Uvogin knew very well that he was unable to fight An now. An stared at Chrollo. From what he could tell from their conversation, he might have to fight Chrollo next. An knew that Chrollo could steal other people¡¯s abilities, and he should have a big arsenal of skills already in his small book. An couldn¡¯t think of a strategy against someone like Chrollo because he didn¡¯t know what kind of ability thetter would use. After staring at each other for a long time, Chrollo didn¡¯t seem too eager to fight, which made An confused as he asked: ¡°What do you want?¡± ¡°I suggest that we stop here,¡± Chrollo responded. ¡°What?¡± An didn¡¯t expect this at all. He knew that Chrollo wouldn¡¯t joke like this, and from his calm face, he isn¡¯t lying. Chrollo said coldly: ¡°An if you want to continue this, I will apany you to the end.¡± This wasn¡¯t a threat but a warning. An frowned and said nothing. He used most of his strength to fight against Uvogin, and now he can¡¯t fight against Chrollo at all. ¡°I almost killed yourpanion, and you to stop? What are you thinking about?¡± An asked. ¡°It is simple, you and Uvogin were already fighting from the start, so if I intervene, it will only make things troublesome.¡± An knew that this wasn¡¯t all there is to it. That kind of reason didn¡¯t fit with Chrollo¡¯s character. There must be something else here. Sure enough, what Chrollo said next cleared An¡¯s doubt. ¡°I said this before, I admire your power very much, and I hope you can consider joining the Gen¡®ei Ryodan.¡± An sneered. It turned out he wanted to win him over. ¡°I¡¯ll still answer the same way as before. Currently, I have no reason to join you.¡± An refused. ¡°It¡¯s okay. I believe you will change your mind in the future.¡± Chrollo smiled. An only said that he had no reason to join them, which mean he didn¡¯t altogether refuse to join them. That alone made Chrollo satisfied. ¡°Then let¡¯s put an end to this grudge between you and Uvogin. I don¡¯t know what you think about this, but if you insist on killing him, then I, as the leader of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan, can only fight back, and this will escte this matter. It will be something between you and the whole Gen¡¯ei Ryodan.¡± An frowned deeply as he was well aware of this. However, if he let Uvogin go this time, he will cause trouble again in the future. Just when An was struggling to make a choice, the system, like always, made its appearance. [1: Kill Chrollo. Reward: Zanpakuto: Senbonzakura Kageyoshi!¡± [2: Give Chrollo some face and stop the matter here. Reward: Increase Nen by 3,000 Nen Points.] Although the first reward was the best out of everything he got, it was also an impossible task. With his current power, it is impossible to kill Chrollo. Therefore, he can only pick the second option. An suddenly said: ¡°Okay, you can take him away, and the matter will end here. However, if hees looking for trouble again in the future, I won¡¯t be talking about it even if you intervene.¡± Chrollo nodded. He wasn¡¯t surprised by what An said. [Ding! You Nen has increased by 3,000 Points.] In an instant, An felt his Nen increase. It may not be a lot, but it was better than nothing. At this time, the problem is resolved, but Uvogin can¡¯t ept this. ¡°Chief, you don¡¯t need to help me in the future, but I will never leave that guy alive. When I recover, I will go settle this ount with him.¡± Uvogin said while ring at An. Chrollo replied: ¡°If you go against him, you will take full responsibility for your actions. Whether you kill him or die, the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan won¡¯t help you anymore.¡± ¡°I know, this a personal grudge between us, and I won¡¯t involve the organization in my conflicts,¡± Uvogin promised that he didn¡¯t intend to rely on the Ryodan¡¯s power to fight An. His pride won¡¯t allow it. He will win with his power. Seeing Uvogin already deciding on this, Chrollo said: ¡°Since you have decided, then, next time both of you fight, I won¡¯t interfere.¡± Uvogin nodded. Chrollo looked at Pakunoda and said: ¡°Pakunoda, you take Uvogin back¡­¡± ¡°What about you, chief?¡± Pakunoda asked. Chrollo said: ¡°I have enough points to pass this test so that I will go to the fourth phase of the exam. I think the next phase is the final one. So, when I pass that one, I will take the Hunter License.¡± Pakunoda nodded: ¡°Sorry, Chief. Then I will go ahead then.¡± After saying this, Pakunoda helped Uvogin, who is almost crippled, and left. An watched the situation from the side and asked: ¡°Chrollo, you don¡¯t intend to interfere in my next fight against Uvogin?¡± Chrollo then said: ¡°I said that already, An. I appreciate you so that I won¡¯t interfere.¡± An said: ¡°In other words, when Uvogin recovers, he wille to fight me, and even if I kill him, you won¡¯t seek revenge, is that it?¡± Chrollo nodded: ¡°Yes, I just helped Uvogin for thest time. I don¡¯t n on doing so in the future. If you kill him or if he kills you, I won¡¯t do anything about it, nor will the spiders.¡± ¡°I¡¯m relieved then.¡± An sneered: ¡°You should prepare arge coffin for him then, because next time, he will definitively die.¡± Chrollo smiled: ¡°I will prepare; however, I don¡¯t know for who the coffin will be.¡± ¡°Hmph, you can rest assured that I won¡¯t be me.¡± An sneered. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 92: End Of the Third Phase Chapter 92: End Of the Third Phase [Ding! You defeated Uvogin. Reward: Swordsmanship: Rhythm of All Things.] As soon as Chrollo left, the system gave An his Reward. An was stunned for a moment as the Reward was dyed for some reason. He didn¡¯t kill Uvogin, and the Reward was issued, which made him think that he failed. But now he got the Reward because he defeated Uvogin, and that meant he has the power to kill him. ¡°So I got the reward after all,¡± An muttered as he focused on his Reward. This Reward was different from any reward he got previously as this one was information about a skill or a materialistic object. It is something equivalent to enlightenment. The Rhythm of All Things gives the ability to cut steel to a swordsman. An could feel something different when he held Shusui in his hand. As if the sword was an extension of his arm. Shusui was an excellent weapon with the ability to cut steel, but not anyone can have the ability to use it. An ordinary person holding Shusui wouldn¡¯t be able to use it at all. It may even kill him. But for a swordsman, Shusui can cut anything in the world. To be able to use it, there is a qualification that you need to meet, which is the Rhythm of all things. Listening to the sound of all things and decide which item to cut and which to leave intact. When An cut off Uvogin¡¯s hand, he used every bit of his power to do so, but the current An can be more rxed doing the same feat. Next time, An was determined to kill Uvogin, no matter who wants to stop him. An believed that the real reason for the system to give him the Rhythm of All Things is to kill Uvogin. In the Hunter X Hunter World, Nobunaga was the only real swordsman. And he¡¯s an expert in quick draw, and An did not doubt that Nobunaga is powerful. He can most likely cut steal easily. As far as he knows, only Nobunaga canpete with him in swordsmanship, and An knows that Uvogin and Nobunaga were best friends, and there is no way he would let the matter rest when he finds Uvogin missing a hand. When the two of them fight together, they be stronger, and An won¡¯t cope with them. ¡®I must prepare for when both of theme seeking revenge.¡¯ An wasn¡¯t confident that he could fight both of them with his current strength. He needs a lot of improvement to deal with them, or else he will surely die. ¡°With this sword, I will kill all my enemies and protect whoever I want to protect!¡± An looked at Shusui in his hand and made up his mind. ¡°Now that I think about it, I didn¡¯t check on Gon and the others. They didn¡¯t die, right?¡± An knew that Uvogin¡¯s punch most likely injured them, and Gon should be the most injured out of them because he was the one blocking most of the force. An could only pray that they were alright and especially Gon. Otherwise, he can¡¯t help him because he didn¡¯t have the Senzu Bean this time. An started searching for them and soon sensed them in a nearby bush. If there is a presence, it means they are alive. This made An relieved. As long as they are alive, then they could recover. The three of them won¡¯t be able to fight for some time. Leorio didn¡¯t wake up yet, while Kurapika and Gon started to regain their consciousness, but they couldn¡¯t stand up. ¡°An, are you okay?¡± Gon asked weakly. An said softly: ¡°Don¡¯t worry about me, Gon, you look pretty battered.¡± Gon said: ¡°My arms are fractured, and I probably won¡¯t be able to move normally for a while.¡± Kurapika said: ¡°My left hand is broken along with two ribs. Leorio¡¯s situation is more serious.¡± An frowned. They will have problems when they participate in the next phase. After a while, An rxed. After all, they weren¡¯t severely injured, which is good. An looked at the sun setting and knew that the test is about to end. He directly said: ¡°Let¡¯s go back to the starting point. There one hour left, and most examinees with enough points should have gathered there already.¡± Gon and Kurapika nodded before standing up and helping each other move forward, looking like brothers. Leorio was unconscious, so An had to carry him on his shoulder. As soon as the sun went down, an announcement echoed all over the ind: ¡°The Fourth Phase of the Hunter Exam hase to an end. Please return to the starting point as soon as possible. Everyone has an hour to return, and whoever doesn¡¯t will be eliminated. Please note that the test has ended, and no one is allowed to snatch someone else¡¯s badge. If such a thing were detected, the candidate would be immediately eliminated and banned from participating again for ten years.¡± An and the others finally reached the starting point after half an hour, where an airship lightened the area. An nced around. He knew all of the ones here. They were Hisoka, Illumi, Chrollo, Hanzo, Killua, Pokkle, and Bodoro. Half an hourter, the 11 candidates who passed boarded the Hunter Association¡¯s airship and moved toward the next location. The other candidates who didn¡¯t pass departed on a boat belonging to the Hunter Association. And like this, the Fourth Phase of the Hunter Exam came to an end. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 93: Meeting President Netero Chapter 93: Meeting President Netero On the airship, all the candidates that passed thest phase of the Exam had a week of rest. An sat in his room, resting with closed eyes as he was quite tired after his fight with Uvogin. But on the bright side, his power increased again, and all he needed to do is get used to his improvement before the next phase starts. The next phase is about duels between the candidates, and although he was confident to pass, three people could pose a threat to him, consisting of Hisoka, Chrollo, and Illumi. If he was to fight one of them, he needs to fight to the best of his ability. Suddenly, someone knocked on the door to his room. ¡°You can enter. The door is unlocked,¡± An said softly. An didn¡¯t drop his guard at all, even while resting, which is why he could tell that someone was behind the door before they knocked. Of course, he knew it was Gon and the others, which is why he replied softly. As soon as the door opened, Gon, Killua, and Kurapika entered the room. ¡°How are your injuries?¡± An looked at them and asked. He didn¡¯t just ask Gon, but Kurapika and Killua as well. The three of them were bandaged, and Gon looked like a Mummy. It was funny. Of the three, Killua should be the least injured. After himes Kurapika, Gonesst as the ones who received Uvogin¡¯s punch head-on. Gon looked at the bandage and said: ¡°The doctor who just treated me said that it would take at least six to eight months for me to recoverpletely. So he advised me to drop from the Exam this time.¡± An raised his brows and said: ¡°And you refused, right?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Gon nodded with determination oozing through his eyes. An sighed: ¡°I also know that you won¡¯t give up that easily. But, in the next test, it will be hard for you to pass.¡± Gon grinned: ¡°It¡¯s okay. I¡¯m only interested in participating. Even if I lose, I cane back next year anyway.¡± An was surprised and pleased by Gon¡¯s optimism. As for his injuries, An wasn¡¯t worried, because unlike the doctor, he knew that Gon would be fully recovered in a month or two. At this time, Kurapika asked: ¡°An, what happened to Uvogin? Did you get rid of him?¡± An shook his head and said: ¡°It¡¯s a pity; he got away at the end.¡± After talking about the battle, Kurapika replied seriously: ¡°Although you defeated him and he got away with serious injuries, he will most likelye back for revenge in the future.¡± ¡°I know, so next time we meet, one of us will die.¡± An raised his head as his eyes shed coldly. Kurapika stayed silent for a bit before he said: ¡°I will help you then. So, until then, I hope you can teach me how to use Nen.¡± An gave him a nice guy pose and said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, however, considering that Leorio isn¡¯t here, we have to wait till the Exam ends before I can give you formal lessons.¡± Kurapika nodded: Okay, I will notify Leorio.¡± An smiled and said: ¡°With your talents, it won¡¯t be that hard to learn, Nen.¡± Kurapika was happy with An¡¯s reassurance. ¡°What are you talking about, An? Are you going to teach Kurapika and Leorio Nen?¡± Killua couldn¡¯t help asking. Seeing An nodding, Killua hesitated for a bit before he asked in a pleading tone: ¡°In that case, can you please teach me as well?¡± This came as a shock to An as he didn¡¯t expect Killua to almost beg him like this. After all, Killua was from the Zoldyck family, the masters of Assassination and Nen masters almost unrivaled in the world. At this moment, Killua let go of his arrogance and showed how much he valued Nen training. An wanted to tell both Kurapika and Killua that anyone is willing to teach both of them, even if he doesn¡¯t. After all, most Nen masters should be able to see the potential in these two. However, he didn¡¯t want to refuse them. At this time, The system gave him two options. [1: Agree to Killua¡¯s request and teach him Nen. Reward: Rare Treasure Chest x1] [2: Tactfully refuse Killua¡¯s request and ask him to find another teacher. Reward: Increase Nen by 3,000 Points.] An immediately picked the first option. At this time, Killua saw An being thoughtful and concluded that An didn¡¯t want to teach him, which felt like a heavy blow. However, in the next second, An raised his head, patted Killua¡¯s shoulder, and said: ¡°Okay, I will teach you.¡± Killua was happy, and that became apparent when he showed a pure smile. As he said to Kurapika, An asked Killua to wait after the Hunter Exam before teaching him. Killua had no objection as he gave him a thumb up. To An¡¯s disappointment, the system didn¡¯t reward him immediately. ¡®Well, it said that I need to teach him after epting his request after all.¡¯ There is no free lunch in this world. However, An suddenly remembered the treasure chest he is yet to open. He was so busy with the Exam that he almost forgot about it. He directly reached to the system with his thoughts and asked it to open the treasure chest. [Ding! You opened a Mysterious Treasure Chest and obtained Demonic Illusion: Tree Binding Death.] (T/N: The Genjutsu Kurenai used against Itachi.) Instantly, An¡¯s mind received all the information concerning the Demonic Illusion: Tree Binding Death. An couldn¡¯t hide his surprise. ¡®Surprisingly, the Chest gave me a Genjutsu.¡± This was a handy technique. Genjutsu is based on the five senses of the target, and there is almost no one in Hunter X Hunter world that can detect a Genjutsu or dispel one. Although this skill doesn¡¯t cause any physical damage, it¡¯s useful to paralyze the target and finish him instantly. It¡¯s somewhat a good technique for torturing as well. At this moment, an announcement was made in the airship: ¡°Whoever hears his badge number, please proceed to meet president Netero.¡± Gon and the others were taken aback as they didn¡¯t expect President Netero to interview them in person. An instantly confirmed that the next phase was still the same when he heard the announcement. The first person they called in was Killua, the holder of the #99 badge. Killua shrugged before he said: ¡°Well, I go first.¡± After entering the room, Killua saw Netero sitting inside. ¡°It turned out the president is this bald old man.¡± Killua thought. ¡°Hehehe, although I¡¯m a bald old man, I¡¯m still very energetic,¡± Netero said with a smile as if he guessed what Killua¡¯s thoughts. Killua was startled as he vowed to never look down on this old man again. Netero then said: ¡°Killua, I will ask you a few questions, and you have to answer them truthfully.¡± Killua nodded. ¡°First, I want to ask you why you want to be a hunter? And what are you going to do after bing one?¡± Killua pretended to think before he said: ¡°I heard someone say that this profession was the greatest in the world, so I wanted to try bing a professional hunter. As for what I will do after bing one, I will let my family know that I¡¯m good on my own, and I don¡¯t need to rely on them anymore.¡± Netero smiled: ¡°Hehe, so that¡¯s how it is.¡± Killua smiled. He was feeling slightly guilty for lying to the old man. ¡®Couldn¡¯t he see that I was lying?¡¯ Netero didn¡¯t care as he asked: ¡°Then, let me ask you the second question. Of the remaining candidates, who do you think is the best? Who is the most dangerous, and who is the most powerful?¡± Killua became speechless for a while before he answered: ¡°Well, the most outstanding person from the people I have contact with is undoubtedly candidate #123, An. The people who are dangerous are candidates #44, Hisoka, #301, Gittarackur. And I don¡¯t know who is the strongest. An, Hisoka, Chrollo, and Gittarackur are very strong, but I don¡¯t know who is the strongest. But I think it can be An cause he defeated Candidate #100, Uvogin.¡± Upon hearing this, Neteroughed: ¡°I saw that battle on camera. It was indeed a good battle.¡± Killua nodded and asked: ¡°Are there any other questions?¡± Netero said: ¡°Thest question. Killua, who do you want to fight the most? Who do you fight the least?¡± Killua put his hand on the back of his head and said: ¡°There is no one who I want to fight as if have no interest in duels. As for the who I don¡¯t want to fight, there are at least four, because it will cause a headache as I can¡¯t picture myself winning against them. But the person I don¡¯t want to fight is An since he will be my teacher and train me in Nen.¡± Neteroughed again: ¡°I understand, you can go back now.¡± Killua asked: ¡°Is this interview rted to the next test?¡± Netero smiled without answering. ¡°Strange old man,¡± Killua muttered before he got up and left. After he left, Netero took out a notebook and ranked the candidates ording to Killua¡¯s view, so he put An first, then Hisoka, Gittarackur, and Chrollo together. He didn¡¯t rank the others yet as he still needed more information. Fifteen minutes after Killua left, Netero called the next person in. This time it was Hanzo. ¡°Killua, what did the president ask you?¡± Kurapika asked as Killua returned to An¡¯s room. ¡°It¡¯s nothing, just some ordinary questions, like the purpose of your participation, who do you want to fight, and who you don¡¯t want to fight.¡± Gon and Kurpaika started guessing how Netero will arrange the next test while An was already 100% sure that the next test will be duels. What he was curious about is how will they be arranged. After a while, Kurapika was called in, and one by one, they were called in by Netero. Gon, Hisoka, Pokkle, Chrollo, Bodoro, Gittarackur, and finally, An¡¯s turn. After An walked into the room, he saw Netero sitting in his seat as he nced at him. He wore the same clothes from the show and looked the same as well. ¡°Hello, President Netero.¡± An took the Initiative to greet Netero. ¡°Hehe, Please, sit down, my boy, An,¡± Netero said politely. Hello everyone, This is the First Chapter for this month, sorry it came sote as I was quite busy. I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 94: Netero’s Group Chapter 94: Netero¡¯s Group After sitting down, Netero repeated the question he asked all the other candidates to An. ¡°An, why do you want to be a hunter? And what will you do after bing one.¡± [Ding! Make a choice] [1: Answer Netero¡¯s question honestly and arouse his curiosity. Reward: Paramecia Devil fruit: Gomu Gomu No Mi (Rubber Rubber Fruit!).] [2: Just avoid answering Netero¡¯s question. Reward: Increase Nen by 3,000 Points.] At first, An wanted to avoid answering Netero¡¯s question, but he could only answer honestly seeing the Rubber Rubber Fruit. Even though he didn¡¯t like that Devil fruit, its value is astronomical. An thought seriously before answering the question as he wanted the reward and had to answer honestly. But after a while, he honestly couldn¡¯t find any reason for bing a hunter. In the beginning, he apanied Gon because of the system¡¯s choice, but now, he was interested in bing a hunter. As for what to do after getting the license, he will probably just get a job rted to hunters. So after a while, he looked at Netero with a serious face and said: ¡°Well, my reason for joining the Hunter exam is mostly due to curiosity. After bing a hunter, I will probably take some hunter rted work. Maybe when I get bored or tired, I will retire.¡± ¡°Hehehe, Interest? That¡¯s quite the interest. You seem to be a willful guy.¡± Netero was genuinely surprised by An¡¯s answer. An shrugged: ¡°I think when you were young, Mr. President, you were quite the willful guy as well.¡± Hearing this, Netero was stunned for a moment before burst outughing: ¡°Oh, you are right about that. I caused a lot of headaches to people when I was young.¡± An believed that Netero was a very headstrong guy when he was young. He was the world¡¯s strongest, or at least that¡¯s what most people knew nowadays. (T/N: referring to Maha Zoldyck as the strongest character in Hunter X Hunter.) Netero then asked his second question: ¡°An, among the nine remaining candidates, who do you want to fight with the most and who do you want to avoid.¡± An thought for a bit, then answered: There is no one I want to fight. As for who I want to avoid, it should be Gon. He is half a brother to me.¡± An honestly answered. After all, he didn¡¯t want to fight anyone as he was no Uvogin, a fighting maniac, or a psychopath like Hisoka. Netero nodded: ¡°Okay, that¡¯s it. You can go back now.¡± An nodded and headed out of the room. As soon as he got out, the system gave him his reward. [Ding! You answered Netero¡¯s questions honestly and aroused his curiosity. You obtained Devil Fruit, Gomu Gomu No Mi.] In an instant, An found a purple fruit in his hand. ¡°Is this the Rubber fruit that Luffy ate?¡± An stared at the devil fruit curiously. This was a Paramecia Devil Fruit, and after anyone eats it, he will turn into rubber. Although it doesn¡¯t sound great, this devil fruit has great potential. However, An wasn¡¯t interested in it, because he wanted a logia fruit, especially Aokiji¡¯s Ice fruit. Therefore, An stored it in his storage ring while thinking about who he should give it to. There is Gon, Killua, and Kurapika. An even thought about Illumi and Hisoka but changed his mind in the end. They all will be outstanding Nen masters in the future, and if they ate the Rubber Fruit, it would affect their future development. ¡®I will try selling it in the future then.¡¯ An thought. In One Piece, a Devil Fruit can be sold for at least 100 million berry. So, in Hunter X Hunter world, it should at least have the same price. An temporarily decided to wait and see if he got a chance to sell it. After interviewing all the candidates, Netero decided on the duels based on their answers. An and the others received the news from Netero that the next Phase will be duels between candidates. The rules are simple. You should make your opponent surrender without killing him. If you looked at the situation normally, you could see that only one person will be eliminated, which means that 90% of the candidates would pass the exam. But that¡¯s far from the truth. The weakest won¡¯t probably make it that far, and he will be eliminated almost surely. As for the strong candidates, they will be protected. Basically, Gon and Kurapika are both at risk of being eliminated. They are currently injured, and they can¡¯t fight properly. However, this depended on their opponents. Considering that some candidates were still recovering, Netero didn¡¯t start the test immediately. He made an official statement that thest Phase will begin in 3 days. In these three days, everyone can eat their fill and recover their strength. An was quite rxed right now because he will be at full power by the time the three days passes. Three days passed in a sh, and on the fourth day, the airshipnded on the Hunter Association¡¯s headquarters. An and the others stepped out of the airship and looked at the tall building. It was more than a hundred meters tall with a huge Hunter Logo printed on the front. This ce is known as the safest ce globally, as hundreds of professional hunters stationed here all year round. There are also the 12 Zodiacs along with Netero himself. With such a huge force, no one will be stupid enough to attack that ce unless he wants to die. An and the others sighed at the magnificent building. The duel will take ce in the hall on the 56th floor. In addition to Netero, the previous examiners will also be present. The first examiner, Satotz, the second Examiners Menshi and Buhara, the third Examiner Loppo. In addition to them, there are some new faces that An recognized. They are the twelve Zodiacs: Mizaistom: Ox, Kanzai: Tiger, Cheadle: Dog, and the Vice President, Pariston: Rat. ¡°This is quite the lineup for the Hunter Association.¡± An was a little surprised as he saw five of the twelve Zodiacs present here. It wasn¡¯t just An looking at them. Hisoka and Chrollo were also focusing on them. As for Illumi, he only looked at Killua and was wandering who injured him so he can have a ¡®friendly¡¯ little chat with them. ¡°Chairman, the number of candidates this year is much higher than the previous years.¡± Vice President Pariston looked at the candidates thenmented. ¡°It¡¯s not much. But it is quite the difference. Last year no one passed the exam, but this year it seems that nine out of ten will pass and be hunters. Next year, the number of candidates will definitively go back down.¡± ¡°Chairman, out of all the candidates, which one do you think is the best.¡± ¡°Um, everyone is quite good.¡± Netero pretended to be dumb and didn¡¯t answer Pariston¡¯s question. Because once he said which one he admired the most, then Pariston will pay special attention to him. ording to Netero, both parties can use any weapon without restriction in the duel, but to win, you need to make your opponent concede defeat. But if they kill someone, they are directly eliminated. Netero stood up and said: ¡°Now then, the first duel can start.¡± Suddenly the atmosphere changed as Netero pondered for a while and said: ¡°The first duel, candidate #123, An, against candidate #294, Hanzo.¡± An was shocked by this unexpected arrangement. ncing at Netero, An found him kindly smiling, but that smile seemed mischievous. Hanzo was also stunned, not because he started first, but because he didn¡¯t expect his opponent to be An. ¡°Dammit, the old man arranged such a difficult opponent for me.¡± After a fewints, Hanzo stepped to the center. An looked at Hanzo indifferently, but his expression changed as the system gave him another choice. [1: Knock out Hanzo within one minute. Reward: Increase Nen by 3,000 points.] [2: Make Hanzo admit defeat. Reward: Afterimage Clone.] An thought for a while before picking the second option. He will show his strength and make Hanzo concede. Seeing the duel about to start, Hanzo suddenly said: ¡°Wait, I have a question.¡± ¡°What is it?¡± Netero asked. ¡°The rules of the duel, as long as the opponent says [I Lost], you win? If the opponent is unconscious, how will that be considered.¡± ¡°In that case, the match will continue until the opponent admits defeat,¡± Netero said while touching his beard. ¡°I understand.¡± Hanzo was relieved. An looked at Hanzo and said: ¡°I guess you think that as long as I don¡¯t admit defeat, maybe I will win, right?¡± ¡°That¡¯s not it.¡± Hanzo denied it as if his thoughts were read and said: ¡°I¡¯m just thinking about how to defeat you. Also, don¡¯t underestimate me. I¡¯m a Ninja.¡± An shrugged without care. Hanzo was good indeed. In the show, he was second only to Hisoka and Illumi. Even Kurapika won¡¯t hold a candle to Hanzo even with his scarlet eyes. However, An was way more powerful than Hanzo. He could even beat Uvogin, let alone Hanzo, who didn¡¯t learn Nen yet. Following Neteromencing the fight, Hanzo rushed toward An quickly. His figure suddenly appeared in front of An in a disy of speed. His hand rose, and a hidden weapon appeared out of his sleeve descending upon An. Hello everyone, This is the First Chapter for this month, sorry it came sote as I was quite busy. I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 95: Professional Hunter Achievement Chapter 95: Professional Hunter Achievement As the de fell on An¡¯s head, thetter suddenly disappeared. Hanzo¡¯s pupil contracted as his sword passed through empty air. ¡°So fast!¡± Hanzomented in his heart before retreating a few meters. ¡°Your speed is alright.¡± An said calmly, before smiling and taunted: ¡°I don¡¯t know if you can go even faster.¡± Hanzo coldly replied: ¡°It looks like you¡¯re confident in your speed. Be prepared. My next attack will be faster.¡± Hanzounched himself with great speed at An but once again failed to make contact with An. ¡°What?!¡± Hanzo couldn¡¯t maintain hisposure as An avoided his attack again. The first time can be a fluke, but not the second time. ¡°Can you hurry up?¡± An taunted him with his index finger. Regardless of being a Ninja or not, Hanzo is arrogant and couldn¡¯t bear An¡¯s provocation. He once again shed and swung the hidden weapon at An fiercely. An didn¡¯t fight back. Instead, he relied on his Observation Haki and dodged. He wanted to make Hanzo realize the difference between their power and make his surrender. The first step was destroying Hanzo in terms of speed. As a ninja, he must be confident in his speed. An wanted to keep Hanzo attacking and make him lose confidence in his speed. Attack after attack headed toward An, who swayed slightly avoided each time without any effort. Gon and Kurapika were nervous as they looked at An. Hanzo was fast, and it seemed like an attack could connect at any moment. But An avoided each time when the de seemed the closest to him. On the other hand, Killua looked indifferently. As an expert, he could see what An is doing better than the other two. In terms of skills, Killua wasn¡¯t inferior to Hanzo. Therefore, he could gauge Hanzo¡¯s power without a problem. Hanzo had great speed, but he was far behind An. Only when your speed is greater than your opponent can you dodge at thest moment like An is doing. An¡¯s face wasn¡¯t red, he wasn¡¯t breathing hard, and from time to time, he would taunt Hanzo. It¡¯s clear that An was way beyond Hanzo in terms of skills. With Observation, Killua found out that An relied on a movement technique or some kind of footwork. And it was quite advanced as well. This was simr to the footwork of his family, but An¡¯s was much more advanced. Gon and Kurapika couldn¡¯t see this clearly, making them frightened and worried about An¡¯s safety. Killua couldn¡¯t help exin: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, An is just ying with Hanzo.¡± Kurapika was surprised: ¡°You mean that An wasn¡¯t serious all this time?¡± Killua shrugged: ¡°I can¡¯t say he wasn¡¯t serious. After all, Hanzo is quite good, but if An were truly serious, Hanzo would be dead.¡± ¡°I¡¯m very surprised as well because An is really strong, but he is only dodging Hanzo¡¯s attack without counterattacking. When Killua exined, I understood what An is trying to do. He should be trying to prove the difference between them and force Hanzo to admit defeat.¡± Gon said. Kurapika nodded: ¡°That should be it. After all, the rule is clear. You need to make your opponent surrender, not defeat it. If An started to fight with defeating Hanzo in his mind, it would be easy. But as Hanzo is stubborn, he won¡¯t admit defeat.¡± Kurapika and Gon were relieved as they discovered An¡¯s strategy. At this time, Vice President Pariston nced at Netero and said: ¡°Chairman, the candidates this year are quite strong. They are showing us such a wonderful fight from the start.¡± Cheadle nced at Pariston and Netero before saying: ¡°The Chairman didn¡¯t invite you, and you still have the cheek toe here, uninvited.¡± Pariston squinted with a smile: ¡°I¡¯m still the Vice-Chairman. I have that much authority.¡± ¡°Hmph!¡± Cheadle snorted, toozy to retort. This time, Netero specially invited them and didn¡¯t invite Pariston, but thetter came here uninvited. This made her very upset as a member of Netero¡¯s faction. Because what Pariston did means that he thought less and less of Netero as the president. At this time, Netero, who was watching the duel, suddenly said: ¡°This old man wants to join them in fun.¡± Pariston squinted: ¡°If the president¡¯s hands are itchy, you can just ask everyone from the Twelve Zodiacs for a spar. This is your original intention of making them anyway.¡± The present Twelve Zodiac¡¯s members red at Pariston and said: ¡°Pariston, Shut up! Why do you have to be so troublesome?!¡± ¡°Yes, if you want to spar with the Chairman, you can be the first to go, as the vice president.¡± The Ox said. Pariston said readily: ¡°Okay! If the president wants a spar with me, I will be delighted.¡± Netero waved his hand and said: ¡°I don¡¯t want to y with any of you at the moment. I¡¯m only interested in those neers.¡± Pariston said: ¡°Since chairman is interested in them, I will arrange for a spar with them, is that okay?¡± Cheadle said: ¡°Pariston, I will take care of the Chairman¡¯s affairs. You aren¡¯t allowed to act toward those neers.¡± Pariston raised his hand in surrender: ¡°Well, I won¡¯t interfere.¡± Cheadle ignored him, but she was still vignt. She knew that Pariston wasn¡¯t someone who kept his words. As long as it is someone he is interested in, he will intervene. At this time, the battle between An and Hanzo changed. Hanzo couldn¡¯tnd any hit on An and finally decided to use his secret skill. Shadow Clone! Hanzo made some hand seals, and in an instant, three clones appeared around him. Right now, there are four Hanzo¡¯s in the scene. Each one moved in a different direction. An narrowed his eyes slightly as he seemed interested in Hanzo¡¯s Ninjutsu. One of them said: ¡°You can¡¯t avoid our attack now.¡± After saying this, the four Hanzo¡¯s Attack An from four different directions. An¡¯s expression didn¡¯t change, as he used Observation Haki and avoided each attack without any difficulty. Hanzo didn¡¯t expect An to be so strong that he can avoid all those attacks. He knew that he had no hope to win against An, but he didn¡¯t give up instantly as he wanted tond a hit at least. But it wasn¡¯t easy to do because, since the start, he didn¡¯t even manage to touch An. Taking a deep breath, Hanzo decided to perform hisst secret technique. Hanzo started circling An quickly before he was no longer visible to the naked eyes. ¡°So fast!¡± Killua, Kurapika, and Pokkle all eximed. At the moment, they knew that if they were the ones inside that encirclement, they had no way of escape. Only a few ck afterimages kept shing around An as Hanzo was preparing tounch a surprise attack. Even Hisoka and Chrollo looked at this technique in interest. Hanzo¡¯s speed wasn¡¯t that amazing, it was average or below average in their eyes, but the technique itself was good. They were also curious about whether An could avoid this attack like before or not. At this time, An finally showed a serious expression. His eyes flickered left and right, catching Hanzo moving around. In the next second, he sneered and disappeared. Leaf Strong Whirlwind!! Suddenly, An was in front of Hanzo and kicked him away. The three clones disappeared instantly as soon as Annded the kick. Hanzo was lying on the ground with a shoe print on his chest due to An¡¯s kick. He broke two ribs! ¡°Was that a coincidence?¡± Hanzo got up with a pained expression. An shook his head as he already noticed Hanzo¡¯s technique¡¯s weakness. The so-called shadow clones are just an illusion. ¡°As long as you hit the original, the others will naturally disappear.¡± Hanzo was taken aback as he didn¡¯t expect An to see through his technique. Indeed, it was just an illusion technique and didn¡¯t inflict any damage if a nnded a hit. The purpose of this technique is to put pressure on the opponent to distract them. He was the only attacker. ¡°So, should we continue?¡± ¡°No.¡± Hanzo shook his head with a wry smile: ¡°There is no need to continue. I lost.¡± Through this battle, Hanzo realized that he wasn¡¯t strong enough to fight An. He was convinced of his loss. No matter how much he fights, he is not An¡¯s opponent. At this time, An obtained his reward. [Ding! You sessfully convinced Hanzo to admit defeat through your power. Reward: Ninja Art: Afterimage Clones.] After getting the information about the Afterimage Clone technique, he understood something. The so-called Afterimage clones technique is a high-speed movement skill used to confuse the opponent, but unlike normal techniques, each clone had some weight behind it. It¡¯s like how the Byakugan can see shadow clone. Ordinary Afterimage clone: Create a physical clone that can attack and defend. Double Afterimage Clone: Make two Afterimage clones that can attack and defend. Triple Afterimage Clone: Simr to double Afterimage clone, but each clone is stronger. It can confuse anyone who witnessed the Double Afterimage Clone. Multiple Afterimage Clone: A more power clone technique. It can create dozens of Clones. The only disadvantage of this technique is they can¡¯t attack at the same time. This technique may not be useful for An now, but it¡¯s better to have more skills. An didn¡¯t dislike having more skills from the system because he believed that each skill could be useful in certain circumstances. At this time, Netero announced: ¡°Winner of the first match, An. Pleasee up here.¡± Hearing Netero calling him, An didn¡¯t hesitate as he walked onto the stage directly. Netero said to Cheadle: ¡°Cheadle, bring it out.¡± ¡°Yes, Chairman.¡± Cheadle took out a license with An¡¯s photo in it and handed it out to Netero. An¡¯s eyes were attracted to the ID photo in the Hunter¡¯s license. Neteroughed and said: ¡°An, congrattion on bing the first Hunter to pass in the 287th hunter exam. From now on, you¡¯re a professional hunter.¡± ¡°Thank you, Chairman.¡± An took his license with a satisfied smile. Although it wasn¡¯t necessary to him, it showed his hard work. From this moment, he had an identity in the Hunter X Hunter world. Suddenly, An heard the System notification in his head. [Ding! Hidden achievement unlocked: Be a hunter. Reward: Lucky Draw.] Hello everyone, This is the First Chapter for this month, sorry it came sote as I was quite busy. I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 96: Fight Between Friends Chapter 96: Fight Between Friends An was a little stunned as he heard the System¡¯s notification. He didn¡¯t expect toplete a system achievement. Once again, he heard the System¡¯s voice echoed in his head: [You have won a lucky draw, do you want to use it?] An thought for a while before deciding against using the lucky draw. If something incredible happened when he used it, it would attract too much unwanted attention, especially since Pariston was standing next to Netero and looked at him. Although he was smiling like a harmless person, An knew his personality well. He didn¡¯t like the feeling of someone watching him, so he greeted them and went back to Gon and the others. Kurapika and Gon looked at the hunter license in envy, especially thetter. Kurapika then congratted: ¡°Congrattions, An, you¡¯re now a professional Hunter.¡± An shrugged and said in a rxed tone: ¡°Yeah, I¡¯ve done it. I will wait for you guys next.¡± At this time, Netero announced the next duel: ¡°For the second duel, #99, Killua, against #405, Gon.¡± As soon as they heard the announcement, Kurapika said in surprise: ¡°How were the duels arrange? They actually made Killua and Gon fight each other.¡± Gon said in a daze: ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡± ¡°That old man must¡¯ve done this intentionally.¡± Killua red at Netero. After hearing this, Hisoka¡¯s eyes narrowed as he smiled: ¡°Interesting.¡± Illumi said: ¡°Gon will definitively lose.¡± An heard this and walked over: ¡°Now, now. It¡¯s too soon to determine the winner.¡± Illumi said: ¡°Gon is injured, and it¡¯s impossible for him to match Killua. Moreover, even if Gon isn¡¯t injured, it¡¯s difficult for him to defeat Killua, who received professional training since he was a child.¡± An shook his head and said: ¡°Although Killua is strong, Gon isn¡¯t ordinary as well. Moreover, this isn¡¯t about defeating someone, and it¡¯s about making them surrender.¡± Hisoka agreed: ¡°That¡¯s right, Gon won¡¯t be admitting defeat so easily. Especially since both of them are the same age.¡± Even when An and Hisoka exined this, Illumi was confident in his brother and said: ¡°Killua has received a lot of training and can make Gon surrender. He can scare Gon to the point it will leave a trauma.¡± An¡¯s mouth raised as he said: ¡°So, Illumi, how about a bet?¡± ¡°What are we betting on?¡± Illumi asked. ¡°Just who will emerge victorious between Gon and Killua.¡± Illumi thought for a while before he said: ¡°Although I have no interest in gambling since it¡¯s Killua, I will bet.¡± An nodded and nced at Hisoka: ¡°Hisoka, can you be the witness?¡± Hisoka squinted and said: ¡°I can. I¡¯m also interested in Gon and Killua.¡± When he said this, Hisoka looked at Chrollo and asked: ¡°Are you going to be as well?¡± Chrollo nced at them, then at An before shaking his head: ¡°I¡¯m not interested.¡± Chrollo wasn¡¯t Hisoka, he can control himself, and he wasn¡¯t interested in both of them as well. Hisoka knew this but deliberately asked Chrollo: ¡°All right.¡± An nced at Hisoka and said:¡± Did you think Chrollo is too bored too because he was alone, so you tried to call him?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Hisoka smiled and said: ¡°After all, he had twopanions before, but because of you, he is alone now.¡± Hisoka didn¡¯t need to remind An because he already knew this. Although Chrollo said that he would not interfere with Uvogin¡¯s revenge, Pakunoda¡¯s matter was another thing entirely. An could guess that Chrollo knew of this, and he must be dissatisfied despite him looking calm. After all, he is the leader of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan, and An defeated and almost killed one of his men. If Chrollo lets it go, it will be like a face p to him. However, An knew that Chrollo didn¡¯t pursue the matter because he still wanted him into the Spiders. Furthermore, Uvogin and Pakunoda were both arrogant and prideful; they wouldn¡¯t use Chrollo or anyone else to go against him. So An can temporarily discard this matter and worry about itter. At this time, Illumi said: ¡°They are about to start. Do you still want to bet?¡± An said: ¡°Of course.¡± Illumi: ¡°What do I get if I win?¡± An thought for a bit and said: ¡°You and Hisoka owe me a favor. How about if you win, the favor is null?¡± Illumi said: ¡°If I lose?¡± ¡°Then you will owe another favor.¡± Anughed and said: ¡°That¡¯s fair, right?¡± Illumi nodded and said: ¡°Yes.¡± Hisoka squinted: ¡°You promised something like that. You¡¯re a bro-con, and you trust Killua too much.¡± Illumi replied: ¡°Of course, anyone will unconditionally believe and support their brother.¡± Hisoka: ¡°I don¡¯t have a brother, so I don¡¯t know how you feel.¡± An then said: ¡°Well, who will win out of those two?¡± Illumi said: ¡°Killua will win.¡± An and Hisoka were speechless. An didn¡¯t bother to argue with this bro-con. An wasn¡¯t 100% confident that Gon will win. Arge part of him made this bet because Gon is his friend. Also, he understood Gon better than anyone here. In the end, An believed that Killua wouldn¡¯t be cruel to Gon because Gon was Killua¡¯s first friend. Killua had a good side of him even with his cruel childhood. He won¡¯t be cruel to his friends and the people loyal to him. When Gon fought Neferpitou, he sacrificed almost his life to defeat her. To save him, Killua took out his System to rescue Gon even though he was going against his family. That¡¯s how much Killua appreciates Friendship. He cared a lot for his friend under that cold fa?ade. Once he recognized someone as a friend, he wouldy his life for them without question. But this kind of person is always the most terrifying because there is only a thread between love and hatred. If one day Gon and Killua fought and each went their path, one of them would die. Fortunately, those two will be best of friendster. Therefore, An believed that Killua wouldn¡¯t be cruel to Gon. Gon can¡¯t win this fight because his arms are broken, and it¡¯s impossible for him to fight Killua, but to win, someone has to admit defeat, and Gon won¡¯t, no matter what happens. Gon and Killua, right now, we¡¯re on the stage waiting for the fight to start. Many people were paying attention to them, especially Netero and Pariston. After all, both of them were young, and reaching this phase of the exam was a testimony of their talent. ¡°Killua, I won¡¯t admit defeat.¡± Gon dered with a firm look on his face. ¡°I know that.¡± Killua nodded before looking up at Netero and said: ¡°Old man, I give up.¡± When Killua said this, most people here were shocked. An was surprised as well. He did guess that Killua will give up, but not that fast. It seems that he never thought about fighting Gon in the first ce. In his eyes, the hunter¡¯s license is nothingpared to his Friendship with Gon. At this time, the most affected person is Gon. ¡°Killua, why did you admit defeat?¡± Gon asked. Killua shrugged: ¡°Because I don¡¯t want to y in that old man¡¯s game. He arranged our fight just to see us fight. I will not give him what he wished for.¡± Hearing this, Gon looked at Netero and said: ¡°Chairman, is that true?¡± Netero was stunned as he didn¡¯t expect Killua to point the me at him, and he didn¡¯t expect Gon to ask him. ¡°Well, no, this old man didn¡¯t ask you to fight for his pleasure.¡± After hearing Netero¡¯s answer, Gon looked at Killua and said: ¡°Killua, did you hear that? He didn¡¯t do it for that reason.¡± Gon was giving Killua a headache. He sighed: ¡°Okay, I don¡¯t want to fight you, it¡¯s that simple.¡± ¡°Why?¡± ¡°Because I don¡¯t want to kill you, and I won¡¯t be able to find a way to make you admit defeat. So I had to surrender and not waste everyone¡¯s time.¡± After hearing this, Gon said bluntly: ¡°Killua, although I don¡¯t want to admit defeat, I don¡¯t want you to sympathize with me.¡± ¡°So, what do you want?¡± Killua rolled his eyes and asked. ¡°Let¡¯s fight.¡± Gon said sincerely. ¡°Will you admit defeat then? ¡°No.¡± ¡°So, even if I beat you, you won¡¯t admit defeat, right?¡± ¡°You idiot!¡± Killua eximed as he punched Gon. ¡°Gon, are you an idiot? Since you¡¯re not willing to admit defeat, then why would I continue to fight you. That doesn¡¯t make sense.¡± Gon¡¯s face swelled slightly, but he grinned at Killua: ¡°Okay, Killua, you attacked me, so the match started.¡± Killua was taken aback and realized that Gon was deliberately angering him. Killua dodged Gon¡¯s attack then appeared behind him with a kick. God was aware of the danger, but because his hands were bandaged, he had no way to defend himself. He could only release Nen from his body to defend. Boom! In the next instant, Killua Kicked Gon heavily and sent him flying away. ¡°Enough, Gon. I already said that I surrender.¡± Killua said quickly. Gon didn¡¯t relent and got up: ¡°I said I don¡¯t need your sympathy, Killua. We are the same age. If you show me sympathy, then you¡¯re underestimating me. As your friend, I don¡¯t want to be underestimated by you. So I will fight till the end till you recognize me as your equal.¡± Killua stood in ce dazed. At this time, Gon rushed toward Killua and kicked. Killua defended with his hands, but Gon¡¯s strength made him retreat several meters. Killua felt his arms numb and said in surprise: ¡°What a strong kick, you used Nen there.¡± At this time, Gon rushed once again, and Killua could only fight back seriously. For a while, Gon and Killua were fighting fiercely. The current Gon was far stronger than the one in the show. He learned from An how to use Nen, which made him stronger. In the show, Gon was always weaker than Killua since he received professional training since he was a child. On the other hand, Gon was just special since he lived on the ind and yed in the forest all the time, but he didn¡¯t receive any training. Only when An appeared did he start training and gainedbat experience. Gon fought fiercely with Killua and managed to reach a stalemate. At least, in terms of strength, both of them were close, but Killua was faster. That¡¯s because Gon was using Nen to strengthen himself, making him a few times stronger than normal. ¡°Well, I admit, I underestimated you, Gon. I will be serious now.¡± Killua started treating Gon as a challenge, and ten minutester, Killua saw an opportunity and hit Gon on the back of his neck, knocking him out. Seeing Gon fainted, Killua looked at Netero and said: ¡°I admit defeat.¡± After saying this, Killua nced at Gon and thought: ¡°Sorry, Gon. If you weren¡¯t injured, I wouldn¡¯t have admitted defeat. I want to fight you, but in your current state, I will be just taking advantage of you.¡± Netero stroke his beard and looked at Killua with admiration: ¡°Killua admits defeat. Gon wins!¡± ¡°Killua, why did you surrender?¡± When he came back, Kurapika asked, although he guessed the reason. Killua shrugged and said: ¡°Gon is injured. He can¡¯t fight me at full power. But I knew he¡¯s stubborn and wouldn¡¯t admit defeat. I don¡¯t want to kill him, and I don¡¯t want to waste time, so I just admitted defeat.¡± Kurapika replied: ¡°I think Gon will be quite angry when he wakes up.¡± Killua said: ¡°Does it matter? I still have a chance, and I won¡¯t admit defeat in the next match. When I get my hunter license, he won¡¯t say anything.¡± Kurapika nodded: ¡°That¡¯s true.¡± Gon didn¡¯t wake up, so he was taken away by Satotz. An nced at Illumi and said: ¡°It looks like I won the bet.¡± Illumi looked confused: ¡°Why did Killua give up?¡± An smiled: ¡°It¡¯s simple. He gave up because they are friends.¡± ¡°Friends?¡± ¡°Because for Killua, Friendship is more important than victory.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t get it.¡± Illumi was still puzzled. An nced at Hisoka and said: ¡°So if you fight Hisoka, will you give up?¡± Illumi said: ¡°Why would I?¡± An said: ¡°Then, what if Hisoka surrendered?¡± Illumi said: ¡°Well, I can ept that.¡± Hisoka nced at An and said: ¡°Although we are friends, we¡¯re nothing like Gon and Killua. What they have is pure Friendship, but the adult world isplicated. A friend today can be an enemy tomorrow.¡± Illumi nodded: ¡°That¡¯s right. Hisoka and I are friends, but we can be enemies in the future.¡± An understood that Illumi is a rational guy, not an emotional one. He became Hisoka¡¯s friend because they had the same interest. In the end, An just dropped the topic: ¡°Then, since I won the bet, you owe me two favors now, right?¡± ¡°What are you talking about?¡± Illumi said, faking shock. ¡°Don¡¯t pretend to be stupid.¡± An said: ¡°I have a witness here, right, Hisoka?¡± ¡°Well, he is right.¡± Hisoka nodded and said to Illumi: ¡°You don¡¯t want to go back on your words, right?¡± Illumi thought for a while then said: ¡°Well, I owe you two favors. When you want me to pay you back, call me.¡± An gave him a thumb up. He raised his head and nced at Netero on the stage. At this time, Netero announced the third duel. The third match is between Kurapika and Hisoka. An, who was originally nning to go ahead and visit Gon, stopped. Killua said: ¡°Kurapika, admit defeat. You can¡¯t defeat Hisoka.¡± Kurapika knew that Killua is right, but he still wanted to try: ¡°I want to try my luck.¡± Killua shrugged and said: ¡°Well, you have another chance if you lose now anyway.¡± Kurapika knew that without Nen, he had no way of defeating Hisoka. But despite that, it was a rare chance to fight Hisoka, so he wanted to try. If he admits defeat directly, everyone will look at him as if he was weak. An didn¡¯t say anything because he knew that the gap was too big, and no matter how much Kurapika tries, he can¡¯t beat Hisoka. Unless there is a miracle, Kurapika won¡¯t win. Suddenly, An remembered that in the show, Hisoka admitted defeat when he faced Kurapika, so maybe he would do that this time as well. But in the show, Hisoka admitted defeat because he knew that Kurapika¡¯s enemy is the spiders. That¡¯s why he cooperated with Kurapika. But now, An didn¡¯t know if Hisoka knew about that yet. ¡°Hisoka, you don¡¯t want to give up, do you?¡± An asked Hisoka before thetter moved to the stage. Hisoka smiled: ¡°Why do you think I will give up?¡± An thought for a while and said: ¡°Well, I just have an intuition. I think you look at Kurapika like you do to Gon and Killua, so I think you are interested in Kurapika¡¯s growth, no? You aren¡¯t the type to pick unripe fruit.¡± Hello everyone, This is the First Chapter for this month, sorry it came sote as I was quite busy. I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 97: Grand Prize Chapter 97: Grand Prize ¡°You will knowter.¡± Hisoka¡¯s answer made An frown as he couldn¡¯t guess what Hisoka would doter. Hisoka moved to the center of the stage. He looked at Kurapika and said: ¡°Come, I won¡¯t use Nen to fight you.¡± Kurapika was angered: ¡°Are you looking down on me?¡± Hisoka squinted: ¡°I just want to test you.¡± Kurapika clenched his fist as he knew that he couldn¡¯t defeat Hisoka no matter what he did. Kurapika coldly said: ¡°If you want to test me, then I will let you have a taste of my power. If I identally kill you, then I¡¯m sorry in advance.¡± Seeing Kurapika¡¯s expression, Hisoka¡¯s eyes squinted, and smiled: ¡°Yes, that kind of look is what I¡¯m looking for, that Anger¡­ Come, I will enjoy this fight.¡± To avenge his n, he went to hell and back practicing each day so that he won¡¯t back down now. Kurapika took out his weapon, which is two short swords, and vigorously waved them. Hisoka avoided each attack with his flexible body. Everyone was reminded of An¡¯s match against Hanzo. Everyone, including An, thought that Hisoka would copy An¡¯s way to defeat his opponent. No one can deny that it was a good strategy. Kurapika red at Hisoka: ¡°I¡¯m not Hanzo, don¡¯t think you can make me admit defeat. If you want to beat me,e and fight.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Hisoka smiled and suddenly rushed at Kurapika. Kurapika was startled, but he quickly used a front kick on Hisoka¡¯s abdomen to push him back. Unfortunately, Hisoka grabbed his leg and twisted it before throwing him away. Kurapika fell ten meters away while Hisoka threw out his weapons. The oue was clear, even without Nen, Hisoka was stronger. Even so, Kurapika didn¡¯t¡¯ give up. He quickly got up and threw some hidden weapons at Hisoka, or more like darts. Hisoka squinted before stepping aside, avoiding the darts. He reached his hand and grabbed a dart and threw it back at Kurapika, who was rushing forward. With a ding, Kurapika blocked the dart with another short sword before thrusting the sword at Hisoka. Thetter bent over ny degrees and avoided Kurapika¡¯s attack. Kurapika continued his attacks while Hisoka simply dodged. Hisoka smiled creepily: ¡°Yes, your physical strength is good, and if you learn Nen, your power will increase very much.¡± He looked at Kurapika like a pervert and said: ¡°I didn¡¯t misjudge you. You¡¯re a delicious fruit. I¡¯m tempted to pick you off right now.¡± Kurapika felt a chill pass through his body as he saw the look on Hisoka¡¯s face and heard his words. ¡®He described me as a delicious fruit that he can pick.¡¯ Kurapika kept attacking without stop as he felt his attacks were closer and closer to hitting Hisoka. In the end, Hisoka stopped his sword with his bare hand and said: ¡°Don¡¯t y with such dangerous toys.¡± Hisoka flicked the sword after saying this, and it broke instantly while kicking Kurapika on the stomach. He flew up and fell several meters away. Hisoka narrowed his eyes and said: ¡°Will you continue?¡± Kurapika grabbed his stomach without replying. Instead, he rushed toward Hisoka again. He wasn¡¯t afraid of death. The only thing on his mind is defeating Hisoka. Hisoka looked at Kurapika in admiration, or that¡¯s what most people thought it was as he knocked him down several times over. Kurapika didn¡¯t relent. He kept getting up, not thinking about giving up. He had broken bones all over the ce, but he still got up. He didn¡¯t want to go down like this. He wanted to get stronger, and he will move forward no matter what. Hisoka¡¯s smile disappeared as he looked at Kurapika with some seriousness. Kurapika¡¯s tenacity exceeded his expectations. ¡°I originally thought that you were a good fruit, but now it seems that I¡¯m wrong. You are a new star that will shine, and I will look forward to your future performance.¡± After saying this, Hisoka looked at Nitro and said: ¡°I surrender.¡± The audience was in an uproar when they heard this. Naturally, Kurapika was the most shocked. He was barely standing as he looked at Hisoka in disbelief. ¡°Hisoka, why are you surrendering?¡± Kurapika asked Hisoka, who was about to leave. Hisoka paused as he shed in front of Kurapika and whispered something in his ears, making Kurapika¡¯s expression change. He became surprised and slightly angry as his eyes turned scarlet for an instant. But it quickly disappeared and returned to normal. Hisoka¡¯s mouth rose into a sly smile before he walked off, while Chrollo seemed a little angry. An understood that Hisoka told Kurapika about the spiders, and that caused his Anger. Just like the show, Hisoka was nning on cooperating with Kurapika, and Chrollo probably noticed Kurapika¡¯s eyes turn scarlet for a second. He probably remembered the Kurta n as he was the one who killed them and knew now that Kurapika was a survivor of that n. An started wondering if Chrollo would cut the weed to the roots or will he let Kurapika live. He stayed back for a while to see the next fight, which happened to be between Illumi and Pokkle and then Chrollo against Bodoro. Illumi won his match, and Chrollo won his. The next round will be between the five who didn¡¯t win, who are Hisoka, Hanzo, Killua, Pokkle, and Bodoro. They will fight, and the candidate who lost all his matches will fail the exam. It¡¯s mostly certain that Killua, Hisoka, and Hanzo will pass one after the other, and thest match will probably be between Pokkle and Bodoro. An was no longer interested in watching the fights anymore and left. After asking around about Gon¡¯s whereabout, The other hunters told An that any hunter would have the privilege to enjoy medical service with almost no fees. A hunter would only need to pay 5% of the treatment fee, and the remaining 95% will be taken care of by the Hunter Association. At this moment, Gon is a professional Hunter, so he enjoyed such a privilege. He was in a VIP ward with a doctor performing surgery on his injuries. After two hours, Gon¡¯s injuries were stabilized, and he only needed to stay in the hospital for a month. At this time, An remembered the Lucky Draw. So, he directly took a room provided by the Association for free for some privacy. In a room on the 26th floor, An prepared to start the lucky draw. He was hoping to get a Logia Devil Fruit, like Ice Ice Fruit or Lightning Lightning Fruit. [Ding! Start the Lucky Draw!] A giant roulette appeared in front of An, full of prizes. There were many avatars of anime Characters, like Hagoromo Otsutsuki, Tsunade Senju, and even Minato Namikaze. There or also Monkey. D. Dragon, Whitebeard, and even Mihawk. There are even Dragon Ball characters, Like Goku, No. 18, Bulma, and many others. An started the Roulette instantly. [Ding! Congrattions, you won a Character Card.] Character Card? And it¡¯s a time limit Card? An froze for a moment. He doesn¡¯t want any character cards; he wants a devil fruit. However, he can¡¯t change anything now. The lucky Roulette disappeared. An looked at the card that appeared in his hand. The card about the size of the hunter¡¯s license. An looked at it with disappointment wanting to see which character he got. If it¡¯s a good character, then he didn¡¯t lose out. If it is someone useless, he will throw it away. When he saw the card, he was stunned. The character he got was non-other than Boa Hancock. The Empress Boa Hancock, one of the Shishibukai and the Captain of the Kuja Pirates, and the queen of Amazon Lily. She was one of the three top beauties of One Piece¡¯s World. She is called the most beautiful because she is better known in the world and no man can keep calm when he sees her. She ate the Love-Love Fruit that can turn the target into stone with a look. She was also proficient in Haki, all three types. And now, this character belongs to An. An looked at the card and saw the description of how to use it. When the character is summoned, it will be bound to the summoner who can fully control the character. The card time limit is 365 days, which is precisely a year. In other words, An can unconditionally enjoy the ownership of Boa Hancock for a year. An couldn¡¯t remain calm anymore. His initial disappointment turned into excitement and expectation. He imagined a scene where Boa Hancock is subdued at his feet, and his mouth rose into an evil smile. After calming down a bit, An started the summoning, which was very simple. He just needed to chant the words on the card. An took a deep breath and started silently reciting. From One Piece, The Princess of Amazon Lily, The Daughter of the sea¡­ Boa Hancock. Hello everyone, This is the First Chapter for this month, sorry it came sote as I was quite busy. I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 98: Pirate Empress Part 1 Chapter 98: Pirate Empress Part 1 Inside an elegant room, Boa Hancock sat on her throne with her pet snake Salome. Suddenly the ground under her rippled as if it was made of water before a ck hole formed. Boa Hancock was startled as she quickly grabbed Salome, who responded quickly and wrapped its body around a pir. However, it didn¡¯t matter, as the attraction force was too strong, and they were both sucked into the ck hole. At this time, An was in his room whispering: ¡°Boa Hancock! Boa Hancock!¡± Suddenly a ck hole appeared from the ceiling, and Boa Hancock, along with her pet, fell. Seeing Boa Hancock on the ground, An wasn¡¯t distressed at seeing her fall, but he still moved forward and extended his hand to help her up. Boa Hancock didn¡¯t understand what was happening as she felt dizzy. When she returned to her senses, she found a man before her and was scared at first. Then the fear turned to anger as she kicked at An. ¡°Perfume Femur!¡± Hancock sent a petrification Kick at An, who knew this will happened from the start and blocked her leg. Boa Hancock frowned as her kick was blocked by the man¡¯s hand without petrifying him. ¡®Why isn¡¯t His hand petrified?¡¯ putting this thought to the back of her mind for a moment, Boa Hancock scanned the room for a bit. She was in an unfamiliar room with an unfamiliar man. She clearly remembered that she was in her room just now and was preparing to change and take a shower, but a ck hole appeared out of nowhere, and she was sucked in. She couldn¡¯t tolerate being in the same room as Boa Hancock, especially since he touched her hand just now. This made her extremely angry, and she wanted to kill n to vent her anger. But before that, she still has some questions she needed answered. She leaned back slightly, stretched her hand, and pointed at An haughtily before demanding: ¡°Who are you? Why did I appear here in this room?¡± An knew of Hancock¡¯s arrogance. He didn¡¯t give her face and answered coldly: ¡°Boa Hancock, don¡¯t keep using that arrogant attitude. This isn¡¯t Amazon Lily.¡± ¡°Where are you talking about?¡± Boa Hancock frowned. An looked at her and couldn¡¯t deny her beauty even though she is frowning. Boa Hancock once again started questioning An: ¡°Where is this ce? And How did you bring me here?¡± An didn¡¯t answer her as she asked with an arrogant tone but instead said: ¡°Boa Hancock, you¡¯re no longer the Pirate Empress you were. You are now mine, my servant.¡± Hancock¡¯s anger red as she jumped up and kicked Ana gain. ¡°I¡¯m going to kill you, Perfume Femur!¡± However, she was surprised to find that her body was no longer under her control. She looked up and saw An¡¯s face full of sarcasm: ¡°I said you¡¯re my servant, didn¡¯t I.¡± ¡°How dare you say such a thing? As if this Princess will submit to you.¡± Hancock gritted her teeth. An shrugged: ¡°That¡¯s the truth because I finished the contract with you, I became your master, and as long as I think about it, you won¡¯t be able to move.¡± Boa Hancock couldn¡¯t believe his words. But to her surprise and horror, she couldn¡¯t move her body. Not only can he control her, but she will lose control of her body whenever she wants to attack An. ¡°This is impossible.¡± Hancock couldn¡¯t believe this; she can¡¯t ept a man controlling her. However, it was reality. ¡®Am I really contracted with this man?¡¯ seeing Hancock doubting life, An felt really refreshed. It was not because he was a sadist or anything; it felt good conquering such an arrogant woman. An looked at his palm and saw a hydra skull tattoo on his palm. This was the contract between both of them. ¡°You bastard, you dare make me your servant!¡± Hancock shouted and red at An. An replied: ¡°I already said that your attitude and identity are useless here. You¡¯re my servant, and you will do anything I ask of you.¡± Hancock snorted coldly: ¡°Huh, who do you think you are? It¡¯s just a contract, and you think I will listen to you?¡± ¡°You don¡¯t believe me?3 An sneered. ording to the character cards¡¯ description, when the character is summoned and the contact is formed, the host can fully control the character. [Ding! Please choose.] [1: Made the proud Pirate Empress Kneel on one knee. Reward: Conqueror Haki (Advanced)] [2: Make the Pirate Empress p herself twice: Reward: Armament Haki (Intermediate)] [3: Make the Pirate Empress lick your shoes. Reward: Perfume Femur] Hello everyone, This is the First Chapter for this month, sorry it came sote as I was quite busy. I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 98: Pirate Empress Part 2 Chapter 98: Pirate Empress Part 2 Looking at the options, An could only sigh. The System was ruthless. To smash the Empress¡¯s arrogance, he needs to slowly go at it, or else she won¡¯t be honest. The third option was just too much, and An didn¡¯t want Hancock¡¯s face all swollen if she pped herself. An wasn¡¯t that kind of pervert to choose the third option. It¡¯s not that he is a gentleman or something, but it¡¯s just he looked down on that kind of behavior. So, in the end, he just picked the first option. He looked at her and ordered: ¡°Boa Hancock, Kneel on one knee!¡± ¡°You want me to kneel? Do you want to die?¡± Hancock didn¡¯t expect such an order, but to her surprise, her body moved. She looked at her body as it moved and knelt on one knee without being able to resist. {Ding! You made the Proud Pirate Empress Kneel on one knee. Reward: Conqueror Haki (Advanced)] An felt his Conqueror Haki get stronger. He felt that his Conqueror Haki is now as strong as Silver Rayleigh. Looking at Hancock kneeling, An said: ¡°Boa Hancock, you should know now that I can control you, and you can¡¯t resist.¡± At this time, Salome saw its owner kneeling and suddenly opened its mouth and jumped to bite An. But before it coulde close to An, it stopped by an invisible force. Boa Hancock looked at An in surprise. ¡°That¡­ Just now, that is the Conqueror Haki? The same Conqueror Haki that I have, why does this man have this ability? Could it be that he is like me? Does he have the qualification to be a king?¡± An looked at Boa Hancock and smiled slightly: ¡°I think that you don¡¯t doubt me now, right?¡± Hancock snorted coldly. Although she was shocked by the Conqueror¡¯s Haki, she wouldn¡¯t submit so easily. ¡°Man, you should let me go, or else I will kill you.¡± An shook his head: ¡°It seems you didn¡¯t recognize the status quo yet.¡± He took a step forward and pinched her chin without his hand and leaned closer: ¡°You should remember, you are neither the Pirate Empress, nor are you a Shichibukai. You are my servant. If you don¡¯t understand this and keep being arrogant, I will p your behind.¡± However, it seems that An underestimated the arrogance of this woman. ¡°You¡¯re so rude to this Princess. I will not let you go. When I return to Amazon Lily, I will do my best to kill you.¡± An sighed. [Ding! Make a choice] [1: p the Pirate Empress Hancock twice. Reward: Double Physical strength.] [2: Humiliate The Pirate Empress Hancock and let her feel shame. Reward: Double Physical Strength.] [3: Punish your arrogant servant the way a man punishes a woman by pping her butt. Reward: Armament Haki (Advanced)] An decisively ignored the first and second options. He wasn¡¯t about to beat a woman or humiliate her. He wasn¡¯t such a scumbag. Only the third article is in line with An¡¯s wishes. Only that way can he crush her arrogance. Moreover, the reward so good that he won¡¯t let this opportunity pass. An immediately used the contract force and made Hancock stand up. ¡°Man, what are you trying to do to me?¡± Seeing An approaching, Hancock became vignt. Although she wanted to attack An, her body couldn¡¯t move. An said coldly: ¡°Since you don¡¯t want to ept reality, I have to punish you.¡± ¡°You, what do you want to do to me.¡± Hearing the word punishment made Hancock nervous. An looked at her and said: ¡°Boa Hancock, I will use the strongest way for men to punish his woman, prepare yourself.¡± ¡°The strongest way?¡± Boya Hancock was taken aback. Hancock was on the bed face down two hourster as she couldn¡¯t sit straight from the pain as An looked in satisfaction at the bloody red butt he just finished pping. (T/N: Yes, the author is only leaving Hints!) At this time, the System¡¯s notification echoes in An¡¯s mind. [Ding! You used the strongest Physical Punishment on the pirate Empress to crushed her arrogance. Reward: Armament Haki (Advanced)] An raised his hand, and a thickyer of ck material covered it. He could tell that with Haki, his fist is as hard as steel or harder. An was quite satisfied with the Empress¡¯ crushed arrogance along with the Armament Haki and Conqueror Haki. An nced at Boa Hancock, who was in a trance, and said: ¡°From now on, you will stay by my side. You will follow me wherever I go, and if you don¡¯t obey, I will keep using this punishment.¡± After a long silence, Hancock nodded her head unwillingly. She looked at An bitterly as she couldn¡¯t forgive An for what he¡¯d done to her. But she can¡¯t be arrogant anymore, as she knew that An could control her at will. So, she could only swear that if the opportunity arises, she will kill that man. An knew that Boa Hancock was now vowing to kill him, but at least she wasn¡¯t arrogant anymore. Although it was a little despicable to punish her by beating her butt, at least she calmed down now. Having her as an attendant is like having a powerful ally. At this time, Boa Hancock suddenly asked: ¡°If I obey your orders, can you let me go back?¡± An thought for a while and said: ¡°Yes if you want to regain your freedom, don¡¯t defy me. If I¡¯m happy, I will let you go back.¡± Hancock didn¡¯t speak anymore, as she seemed skeptical about An¡¯s words. After all, Hancock couldn¡¯t trust An. He was a demon with a smiley face. An didn¡¯t care about Hancock¡¯s thoughts. After a while, he took Hancock and left the room, ready to check if the exam was over while the snake, Salome, followed after its mistress. Hello everyone, This is the First Chapter for this month, sorry it came sote as I was quite busy. I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! !! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 99: The Empress’ Power Part 1 Chapter 99: The Empress¡¯ Power Part 1 ¡°Where are you taking me?¡± Boa Hancock asked as she left the room. An stopped and nced at her: ¡°It¡¯s not where I want to take you, but starting today, you will follow me wherever I go.¡± Hearing this, Hancock frowned: ¡°Don¡¯t go too far. No one has even made this Empress follow him.¡± An said: ¡°Then I will be the first, and the only one.¡± Hancock bit her teeth as she was unwilling to follow him, but she can¡¯t control her body even if she wanted. She could only give up bitterly and stopped asking questions. The only thing that gave herfort was her pet Salome who was still following her. It has been three hours since An left the exam hall. So the exam should¡¯ve ended already. Still, he didn¡¯t discard the possibility of a break between each round. ¡°By the way, my name is An, and you can call my name directly, I don¡¯t mind. Also, regarding my identity, you should know that I became a professional Hunter three hours ago.¡± After getting into the elevator, An briefly introduced himself to Hancock. He thought that he should at least tell her the most basic information. Hancock snorted: ¡°Who do you think you are? This Empress isn¡¯t interested in knowing your name.¡± An¡¯s mouth rose into a smile: ¡°Although you say that, you¡¯re really curious, aren¡¯t you.¡± ¡°What?!¡± Hancock was shocked as she looked at An. An seemed to know what she was thinking, and he confirmed it: ¡°You¡¯re right. Not only can I control your body, but I can read your thoughts as well.¡± An didn¡¯t brag much about this, but he really can read her thoughts when he concentrated on the character card. At this time, Hancock thought: ¡®What a terrifying man, can he really read my mind? If that¡¯s true, won¡¯t I be his servant forever? Can it not resist his control?¡± An¡¯s mouth rose slightly as he said: ¡°You don¡¯t have to resist me and don¡¯t talk back. Otherwise, I will punish you ordingly.¡± Hancock gritted her teeth and said nothing. An¡¯s punishment gave her great shame, she never suffered such a shame only once before, and she didn¡¯t want to suffer another time. Realizing this, the proud Empress finally lowered her head in front of An. When they reach the exam hall, the fights didn¡¯t end as they were taking a break. Those who still didn¡¯t finish their fights were Hisoka, Hanzo, Killua, Bodoro, and Pokkle. Kurapika, Illumi, and Chrollo already won their first matches and obtained their hunter¡¯s license. As he stepped in, An attracted the attention of almost everyone in the room. As the first person to pass the exam and show absolute strength, he gained almost everyone¡¯s respect. However, soon they noticed the peerless beauty beside An and could stop staring. They never before in their life saw a woman as beautiful. Her bearing, her face, her body, everything seemed out of a fantasy novel, and with the snake beside her, it made her look like a noble. At this moment, except for An, everyone was looking at Hancock. Except for a few weird guys, like Hisoka, Illumi, and Chrollo, all people present were attracted to her. They all had the same thought: ¡®How could such a woman exist in this world?!¡¯ Their eyes seemed stuck like glue on Hancock¡¯s body. They looked at Hancock and knew that the word ¡®Beauty¡¯ was invented to describe a woman like Hancock. Even Netero, who lived for a hundred years, was looking at Hancock with hearts in his eyes, which somehow made An think of Master Roshi (Muten Roshi, Kamesen¡¯nin) from dragon ball. An blocked Hancock from everyone¡¯s view and said: ¡°What the matter, haven¡¯t seen a beautiful woman before?¡± An¡¯s words caused everyone to awaken from their mesmerization, and some of them looked sheepish. At this time, Netero waved at An. An said: ¡°Is there something, President?¡± Netero coughed twice and said: ¡°An, the final is currently being held here, except for the candidates and professional hunters. No one is allowed here.¡± Netero nced at Hancock as he said this and continued: ¡°So, can you tell me, who is¡­ thatdy beside you?¡± An was about to answer, but Hancock assumed her arrogant pose reflexively and pointed at Netero. ¡°Smelly old man, don¡¯t you even know who this Empress is?¡± Hancock opened her eyes and looked at everyone in the hall arrogantly, which made everyone stunned at how she addressed herself. Hancock said: ¡°Listen well, This Empress is Boa Hancock, the Empress of Amazon Lily and captain of the Kuja Pirates, one of the Shichibukai. You lowly people should call me your majesty, or Empress if you call me Miss or Lady again, I will kill you.¡± Netero and the others are dumbfounded. Regardless of the titles are true or not, Netero and the others were convinced that she is a narcist. And because nobles had such temperament already, and with her saying she was an empress, they can¡¯t question her. The Tiger, Kanzai, looked at the Ox, Mizaistom beside him, and whispered: ¡°Isn¡¯t this woman too arrogant? How dare she call the President a smelly old man, and she called herself the Snake empress¡­¡± Ox nced at Netero before whispering back: ¡°Well, the president seems to be indifferent.¡± Kanzai was taken aback as he could see Netero¡¯s gaze stuck to Hancock and wasn¡¯t bothered by her rudeness. He looked back at Ox and said: ¡°Isn¡¯t the old man too old already? Is he eyeing that girl?¡± Kanzaki said dumbfoundedly. The Ox, Mizaistom, said: ¡°I can¡¯t me him really, that woman is simply too beautiful. To be honest, I didn¡¯t see any woman so beautiful all my life.¡± Seeing Mizaistom, who already seemed calm, mesmerized as well, Kanzai was a little anxious: ¡°Don¡¯t be tricked, the president seemed to be confused by that woman, she must have some ability to attract everyone¡¯s attention to her, so be careful.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± Hancock heard Karzai¡¯s words and pointed at him. ¡°Insolence, who allowed you to talk about this Empress? This Empress¡¯ beauty isn¡¯t something you can talk about.¡± Hearing this, Kanzai was stunned for a moment before he said in retort: ¡°Who says you¡¯re beautiful? You arrogant, narcissistic woman. Also, who do you think you¡¯re calling Insolent? I¡¯m a member of the Twelve Zodiac, The Tiger, Kanzai.¡± Hancock didn¡¯t look at him at all. She titled her head and said arrogantly: ¡°This Empress won¡¯t remember an Insolent¡¯s Name, and this Empress¡¯ Beauty is beyond doubt.¡± ¡°You¡­ You woman, you¡¯re too arrogant. I will teach you a lesson.¡± Kanzaki said furiously. Seeing Kanai was about to attack, Mizaistom discouraged him; ¡°Stop, Kanzai, hitting a woman isn¡¯t very gentlemanly.¡± ¡°You think I don¡¯t know that you want to help her because she¡¯s beautiful?¡± Kanzai eximed. Mizaistim quickly exined: ¡°No, I, I¡¯m not attracted to her, I just think that the Twelve Zodiacs should follow our own rule and not use force without authorization, especially against women.¡± Mizaistom is a double star crime hunter and always abide by the rules. Therefore, his words were his own without being influenced by Hancock¡¯s beauty. But somehow, Mizaistom blushed inexplicably after saying this. Kanzaki looked speechless for a while before saying: ¡°It looks like you and the President were fascinated by this woman. I should take action and break her control over you.¡± Just as he finished talking and prepared to attack, Hancock already sent a kick at him. Perfume Femur! Feeling the power behind the kick, Kanzai was surprised, but he reacted fast enough and jumped away, avoiding it. After hended, he looked at Hancock as if she were his prey. Hancock snorted coldly: ¡°You actually avoided my kick. It seems like you are slightly strong.¡± Kanzai stared at Boa Hancock and gritted his teeth angrily: ¡°You¡¯re really awless woman since you attacked me. First, I will fight back.¡± Hancock didn¡¯t bother talking to him as she sent a kick after the other. Kanzai kept avoiding her attack and finally jumped away, but he found another kick moving toward him as hended. ¡°Fast!¡± Kanzai quickly crossed his arms in front of him, blocked the kick, and skidded back a few meters. Karzai¡¯s expression sank. Although he blocked the kick, the impact made his arms numb. He could tell that she attacked with killing him as her objective. ¡°Damn it, I¡¯m getting serious,¡± Kanzai eximed. Although he is fast to anger, he didn¡¯t like to use force on a woman. If she didn¡¯t force him, he wouldn¡¯t have done it. As Kanzai was about to fight back, his expression changed. ¡°What? What is this?¡± Hello everyone, This is the First Chapter for this month, sorry it came sote as I was quite busy. I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! 7!! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 99: The Empress’ Power Part 2 Chapter 99: The Empress¡¯ Power Part 2 He saw part of his arm that he defended with turn into stone. His attention was on Hancock, so he didn¡¯t notice it, but now that he tried to move his arm, he felt something, and as he looked, he saw his arm petrified. Kanzai quickly thought: ¡®If this continues, my arm will be gone.¡± Mizaistom, Cheadle, and the others noticed this, and their faces changed. ¡°Is this that woman¡¯s Nen Ability? After kicking Kanzai, his arm was petrified.¡± Mizaistom frowned. Hancock said coldly: ¡°This will be the end of your disrespect for this Empress.¡± Anyone who is quickly by her Perfume Femur will be petrified, whether it¡¯s a male or female. This is the ability granted to her by her Devil Fruit. In closebat, no matter if you block the kick or not, you will be petrified as long as it touches you. Kanzai used his Nen to defend against her attack, or else his arm would have been petrified on the spot and maybe even shattered. It¡¯s precisely because of the Nen defense that the petrification process was reduced, but even so, it still took effect. Hancock didn¡¯t use more than 70% of her power, but even so, Kanzai only covered his hand with ayer of Nen. He didn¡¯t even Ken to defend. Right now, Karzai¡¯s face was hideous. He discovered to his horror that the Petrification didn¡¯t stop on the surface, but even his blood vessels showed signs of Petrification. He knew that if he didn¡¯t deal with this quickly, his arms would be destroyed. He immediately used his Ren to exude Nen from his pore and counter the Petrification. Karzai¡¯s method was barbaric, but it got the job done. The Nening out of his body managed to make the Petrification stop and recede until it vanished. When the others saw this, they were relieved. Especially, Mizaistom, who had a good rtionship with Kanzai. An narrowed his eyes slightly as he knew how strong Hancock¡¯s Petrification is. Most people wouldn¡¯t have a way to deal with Hancock¡¯s Mero Mero fruit, but Kanzai¡¯s way, although barbaric and straightforward, was proven effective. An had to sigh. Nen was quite versatile. After learning even the basics of it, you can do many things with it. It can turn into many things, like Electricity, Ice, Chains, Bullets, weapons, Etc. Ren may be one of the basics of Nen, but Karzai¡¯s use of it was appropriate. When the petrification problem was solved, Hancock showed surprise: ¡°You can actually resist the Petrification of this Empress. You¡¯re slightly capable.¡± Kanzai raised his head and red at the woman, then said: ¡°Damn it! I¡¯m angry. You are dangerous. I will arrest you.¡± Hancock didn¡¯t show weakness as she pointed her hand at him: ¡°Whatever this Empress does, will be forgiven.¡± ¡°I won¡¯t forgive you.¡± Kanzai rushed at Hancock. Perfume Femur! Hancock directly sent a kick without any hesitation, and since Kanzai knew what the kick could do, he didn¡¯t dare block it. He avoided the kick and rushed to her side. ve Arrow!! Hancock immediately put her hand on her lips, and a big pink heart appeared. She pinched the heart with her hand andunched hundreds of arrows that will turn anything that touches them into stone. Kanzai saw the hundreds of the love Arrow fired toward him, and hisplexion changed a little. He didn¡¯t dare block and started dodging the arrows. However, Hancock already sealed off the area with nearly two hundred arrows. An arrow shot Kanzai on his left tight, and it started to turn into stone. Karzai¡¯s face was hideous as the Petrification started spreading all over his body. He couldn¡¯t deal with the Petrificationpletely, and if he doesn¡¯t, he will turn to stone in ten seconds. In three-second, his lower body was turned to stone, and he couldn¡¯t dy anymore as he used Ren once again to fight against the Petrification. Under the constant release of his Nen, the Petrification stopped, andyers of cement-like things fell to the ground. After that, Kanzai was panting as he used too much Nen just now. If he continues to fight, he will be hard-pressed as the amount of Nen needed to eliminate the Petrification wasn¡¯t small. But this wasn¡¯t the worst of it at all. If that woman attacked him while he is using Ren, he would be hard-pressed to defend. Although he didn¡¯t want to admit it, he will lose if this continues. At this moment, Hancock saw that Kanzai removed the Petrification twice and was about to attack him again. ve Arrow! Once again, she formed the pink heart and was about tounch countless arrows at Kanzai, but seeing the situation turning for the worst, An finally said. ¡°Enough, Hancock.¡± Hearing this, Hancock stopped and released the pink heart. ¡°This Empress wants to kill that guy,¡± Hancock said. Although she can¡¯t be arrogant in front of An, it doesn¡¯t mean that her arrogancepletely disappeared. She will be arrogant to anyone but An. Karzai¡¯s rudeness made her unhappy, and she wanted to kill him. ¡°Get back here. Do you want to defy me?¡± An said coldly, and finally, Hancock returned beside him. She was upset, but she didn¡¯t want to experience An¡¯s punishment again. However, Kanzai didn¡¯t feel that it was enough and didn¡¯t want things to end this way, so he said: ¡°President, didn¡¯t you see? That woman is dangerous. I suggest that we catch her or drive her away from the association.¡± Faced with Karzai¡¯s usation, Hancock said arrogantly: ¡°No matter what this Empress does, it will be forgiven. After all, this Empress is beautiful.¡± After saying this, Hancock flicked her hair back, which made her dazzling. An nced at kanzai and found him blushing with everyone except the known freaks. Even the women were blushing. An could only sigh. Her most incredible power wasn¡¯t her Mero Mero Fruit, but her beauty. Only four peoplecked a reaction at this time; they were Illumi, Hisoka, Chrollo, and pristine. ¡°Oh, what a dangerous woman.¡± Parkstone squinted. As he said this, he looked at An and asked: An, can you tell us who she is? If you don¡¯t, then we will ask her to leave.¡± An thought about a response, but the system interrupted his thoughts. [Ding! Make your choice!] [1: Tell Paristone and the others that Hancock is your secretary. Reward: Increase amount of Nen by 5,000 Points.] [2: Tell Paristone and the others that Hancock is your contract servant. Reward: Paramecia Explosion Fruit (Mr.5 from basta¡¯s arc).] [3: Tell Paristone and the others that Hancock is your fianc¨¦, and make the Empress kiss you in public. Reward: Logia Ice Ice Fruit.] Hello everyone, This is the First Chapter for this month, sorry it came sote as I was quite busy. I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! 7!! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 100: Getting the Ice Ice Fruit Chapter 100: Getting the Ice Ice Fruit ¡®It actually gave out the Ice Ice Fruit?!¡¯ An¡¯s eyes lip up after seeing the Reward of the third option. He confirmed a few times that it¡¯s really the Ice Ice Fruit and directly chose the third option excitedly. He truly didn¡¯t expect such a reward. Although he will wrong Hancock with his choice, he didn¡¯t regret it. After all, Hancock belonged to him for an entire year, and for the sake of his favorite fruit, he will do it. So even if he temporarily wronged her by calling her his fianc¨¦e and making her kiss him, she can¡¯t disagree or resist. Almost everyone here was curious about the Empress¡¯ identity. Although she imed to be the Empress of Amazon Lily, somewhere no one here knew about except Ana and Hancock herself, they still didn¡¯t believe herpletely. However, with her power, everyone got curious about her and her rtionship with An. An immediately faced Pariston and said: ¡°Well, she¡¯s my fianc¨¦e.¡± A simple sentence, but it caused a massive reaction from everyone hearing it. Everyone looked at An in surprise. They never imagined that An would have such a beautiful fianc¨¦e at such a young age. Netero smiled: ¡°Hehe, I didn¡¯t think that you would already have a fianc¨¦e when you¡¯re so young, and it¡¯s actually such a beautiful woman as well. I really envy you.¡± ¡°Yeah, I¡¯m lucky.¡± An smiled with satisfaction. At this time, Boa Hancock almost cried in her heart. ¡°Damn, man! What is he talking about? When did I be his fianc¨¦e?¡± If it weren¡¯t for the contract, Hancock would¡¯ve already attacked An. But she wasn¡¯t as impulsive as before. She didn¡¯t want to experience that punishment again. Therefore, although she was unhappy, Hancock didn¡¯t say anything to refute An. Pariston could see the abnormality in Hancock¡¯s face and looked at An, saying: ¡°An, you said that she is your fianc¨¦e, is there any evidence?¡± Hearing this, An nced at Pariston and frowned. As someone who watched the show, he was clear about Pariston¡¯s personality. He may seem friendly and polite, but under his smile is a sharp knife. He is a ck-bellied guy. Therefore, he didn¡¯t have a good impression of Pariston, and since h questioned his rtionship with Hancock, it made An a little unhappy. An looked at Pariston, and his tone no longer polite: ¡°Vice Chairman, even Chairman Netero didn¡¯t question my rtionship with Hancock, so what Qualification do you have to do so as a Vice-Chairman?¡± An¡¯s sudden outburst stunned Pariston. He was stunned because An always seemed gentle and polite, but now he seemed fierce and ignored him as the vice Chairman. The other members of the Twelve Zodiacs present were happy to see someone put Pariston in his ce. As they often worked together, they were clear about Parsitone¡¯s personality. After being stunned for a while, Pariston smiled and said: ¡°An, I don¡¯t want to question you, but I¡¯m the Vice Chairman of the Association and responsible for things like this. The Empress beside you is powerful, but we aren¡¯t sure if she is your fianc¨¦e or not, and if she really isn¡¯t, she cannot stay here.¡± After this, Pariston nced at Netero and said: ¡°Am I wrong, Chairman?¡± Netero nodded: ¡°Well, that¡¯s right, if the Empress is your fianc¨¦e, then please prove it. Otherwise, she has to leave.¡± ¡°Okay, then.¡± An shrugged. Since Netero himself asked, he would have to show some evidence. After saying this, An opened his arm and put it on Hancock¡¯s waist, pulling her closer to him. Boa Hancock didn¡¯t expect this as she felt An¡¯s strong arm around her waist, pulling her closer to his body. She was shocked by the intimate situation that she never felt before. She wanted to get rid of An right now. However, as soon as a thought of resistance appeared in her mind, Hancock couldn¡¯t act on it and could only give up. At this time, An gave Hancock and order to show affection. ¡°Hancock, cooperate with me in front of everyone, and kiss me.¡± This order was directly transmitted into Hancock¡¯s mind, and Hancock could only say in desperation. ¡°This Empress¡­ It is true that this Empress is his fianc¨¦e. No doubt about it.¡± After saying this, Hancock took the initiative to kiss An on the cheek. Suddenly, a pale pink lip print appeared on An¡¯s cheek. This scene attracted the envy of most guys in the room. Pariston could say nothing else. After all, they have witnessed how arrogant the Empress was and knew that she wouldn¡¯t let it go if An touched her, let alone kiss him herself if she wasn¡¯t his fianc¨¦e. The show of affection made people unable to question their rtionship anymore. At the same time, a voice rang in An¡¯s mind. [Ding! You seeded in making Pariston believe that Hancock is your fianc¨¦e. Reward: Logia Ice Ice fruit.] [Ding! The System detects that the current environment of the host isn¡¯t suitable for handing out the Reward. Do you want to store the Reward in the System¡¯s Inventory?] An was quite surprised by the System¡¯s intelligence. And now, it seems that there is an Inventory function as well. Considering that everyone is here, An wanted to avoid their attention and directly chose to store the Reward in the Inventory. [Ding! The Reward is given and stored in the Inventory.] An breathed in relief, and at this time, Netero said: ¡°Since it is proven that the Empress is An¡¯s fianc¨¦e, then I announce that she can stay in the association as An¡¯s family.¡± Netero¡¯s words are equivalent to giving Hancock the right to enter and exit the association freely. An nced at Netero gratefully, while everyone else didn¡¯t have any objection. The only one who didn¡¯t want to ept this was Kanzai since Hancock beat him, but he didn¡¯tment. An next brought Hancock and went to stand beside Kurapika. ¡°An, is she your fianc¨¦e?¡± An nodded and took Hancock¡¯s hand and said: ¡°She is Boa Hancock, but I suggest that you don¡¯t call her as such.¡± Kurapika and the other nodded as they saw her character and knew that only An could call her by her name. Boa Hancock nodded arrogantly without saying anything. She was thinking about escaping from An¡¯s grasp while An pretended that he didn¡¯t know. As long as she stayed obedient, An won¡¯t do anything excessive. At most, he would hug her waist or hold her hands. Although Hancock was very upset about this, she was helpless and could only cooperate temporarily with An. Maybe if he is happy one day, he will send her back. Of course, it was a slight possibility. At this time, Netero on the stage said: ¡°Okay, it¡¯s time for the second round. Let¡¯s continue the Exam.¡± There are currently five contestants, Hisoka, Killua, Hanzo, Pokkle, and Bodoro. If Hanzo doesn¡¯t face Hisoka, he will mostly pass the Exam. While Killua is strong, Hanzo had a longer time to train and could defeat him right now. ¡°Then, for the first match, #44, Hisoka, against #53, Pokkle.¡± Hisoka nced at Pokkle and walked onto the stage. Pokkle was frustrated. He looked at Netero and said: ¡°Chairman, I have something to say?¡± ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± Netero asked. Pokkle boldly said: ¡°I will be blunt, but the matching is very unfair.¡± ¡°How so?¡± Netero asked again, but everyone knew that he was pretending to be confused. Poole pondered for a bit, then said: ¡°Everyone can see that Hisoka is stronger, and I won¡¯t be able to fight him. Chairman, you arranged this match unfairly.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry. This isn¡¯t a duel won by knockout. As long as you don¡¯t admit defeat, you won¡¯t lose. And Hisoka can¡¯t kill you, or he will be eliminated.¡± ¡°It has to be me!¡± Pokkle said desperately as he walked onto the stage. The match started, and Pokkle instantly took out his bow and arrows without hesitation and aimed at Hisoka. Hisoka stretched his hand, and as the arrow flew toward him, he grabbed it with two fingers. Then he gently twisted his fingers and snapped the arrow. The next second, Hisoka disappeared and arrived in front of Pokkle. Pokkle was shocked and released another arrow, only to hear Hisoka¡¯s voice from behind. ¡°I¡¯m here.¡± Hisoka said with a yful tone as Pokkle felt a chill run through his spine. ¡°Don¡¯t move! Be careful. You might lose your head.¡± Hisoka said with a smile. He saw Hisoka¡¯s hand holding a ying card that drew some blood as it pressed against his neck. Hisoka smiled and said: ¡°You should know what to do now.¡± Pokkle sighed and said: ¡°Okay, I admit defeat.¡± ¡°Well, smart choice, so you don¡¯t get hurt,¡± Hisoka said with a smile and put away the card. Netero announced that Hisoka is the winner and Pokkle will get another chance to fight. ¡°Next match, Killua against Bodoro. Hanzo will fight in the next round.¡± Netero announced. Hello everyone, This is the First Chapter for this month, sorry it came sote as I was quite busy. I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! 7!! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 101: The Eight New Hunters Chapter 101: The Eight New Hunters Hearing Netero¡¯s words, Hanzo was stunned for a moment, and then he thought he was lucky that he passed by forfeit. This way, he wouldn¡¯t have to fight now and wouldn¡¯t get tired if he lost his match. He thought that Netero saw his potential and valued him. After Netero¡¯s announcement, Killua walked to the center of the venue with his hands in his pocket while Bodoro walked to the stands with a serious expression. Different from Killua, who was a twelve years old kid, Bodoro was a middle aged man that is old enough to be Killua¡¯s father. He was also a martial artist. In the original show, Killua went crazy due to Illumi¡¯s influence and attacked and killed Bodoro when Leorio was fighting him. Illumi and Killua didn¡¯t face each other since this time, Illumi didn¡¯t drop his disguise. He won¡¯t attack Killua or reveal who he is now. The reason he revealed himself in the original show was to make Killua admit defeat. Since Illumi won¡¯t be fighting him, so there was no need for him to show himself. So now, Killua was mentally stable and quite rational. He won¡¯t kill Bodoro. ¡°Come on, kid,¡± Bodoro said. ¡°Uncle, I¡¯ll let you attack first,¡± Killua said with his hands inside his pocket. He didn¡¯t put Bodoro in his eyes. As a martial artist, Bodoro found Killua¡¯sment full of disrespect, and with a cold snort, he immediately sent his palm toward Killua¡¯s chest. Killua avoided his attack without effort, making Bodoro attack again. Killua continued evading Bodoro¡¯s attacks as all thetter could hit Killua¡¯s afterimage. This was one of Killua¡¯s technique, Shadow Steps. It¡¯s a move that is most suited for assassination, but it can be used to avoid attacks as well. Bodoro wasn¡¯t bad. He was a well-known martial artist with 20 years of experience but faced a professional assassin with high talent like Killua. He wouldn¡¯t be able to do much. ¡°Uncle, it¡¯s my turn now.¡± Killua shed with his Shadow steps and quietly appeared behind Bodoro. Bodoro¡¯s expression changed slightly, and before he could react, Killua sent him flying. Killua activated his Elder Abuse mode and started beating Bodoro without letting him fight back. But Killua was merciful as he didn¡¯t attack him with all of his power. Whether it was strength, speed, or reflex, Bodoro was beaten in all aspects. However, he still didn¡¯t admit defeat. His reason was simple, as a well known martial artist, he has his own dignity and pride. He wasn¡¯t willing to lose to such a small monster who didn¡¯t hit puberty yet. If he admits defeat, he won¡¯t be able to show his face in the martial arts world again. Killua noticed this and reminded him: ¡°Uncle, if you give up now, you will still have a chance to fightter, but if you don¡¯t, I will attack seriously and at that time, let alone fight, you might have to spend some time in the hospital.¡± As he said this, Killua released his Killing Intent. His target was Bodoro. As a professional Assassin, Killua¡¯s killing intent was potent that it made others feel their impending death. Bodoro felt death near and could only sigh and said: ¡°I admit defeat.¡± ¡°A wise choice, Uncle.¡± The killing intent disappeared without a trace as Killua¡¯s expression returned to normal. Netero directly announced: ¡°Killua wins, pleasee up to get your hunter License.¡± Killua put his hands on his pockets and walked with a rxed face. He took the Hunter License from Cheadle and returned beside the others. ¡°Well, for the remaining three, how about we have a Rodeo between you three, and when someone is defeated, the other two be hunters. Is there someone who has something to say?¡± ¡°I do.¡± Pokkle stood up. Netero said: ¡°You again, what is it this time?¡± Pokkle nced at Hanzo and Bodoro and said: ¡°I¡¯m maybe the weakest out of the three, so if we use that new rule, I will most likely lose, so why not follow the previous rule, which sounds fair?.¡± Netero thought for a while and said: ¡°No, we will use the new rule.¡± Pokkle was speechless and wanted to say another thing but was denied. This made him curse Netero in his heart, but he couldn¡¯t do anything as Netero was the Association¡¯s Chairman. Quickly, Bodoro, Pokkle, and Hanzo stood on the stage in 20 meters circle. The two remaining in the circle will be hunters, while the one thrown out will be disqualified. Soon, the battle started. Pokkle and Bodoro seemed to have agreed, and as soon as the match started, both attacked Hanzo. One attacked from the right and the other from the left. Hanzo became serious as he felt the danger. He avoided Bodoro¡¯s palm and attacked Pokkle, who retreated immediately and aimed an arrow at Hanzo. Woush! He shot an arrow at Hanzo, who easily avoided it, but at this time, Bodoro rushed from behind and sent a double palm strike at his back. Hanzo leaped up and shouted: ¡°Ninja Art: Shadow Clone.¡± Two Hanzo stood on the stage. One of them was a clone, one rushed at Bodoro, and the other ran at Pokkle. Both of them were fast. In the blink of an eye, they were in front of Pokkle and Bodoro. Boom! At the same time, Bodoro and Pokkle were knocked out by Hanzo. Everyone saw both Pokkle and Bodoro out of the circle at the same time. Hanzo did a great job as he knocked both of them out at the same time. Hanzo, who was still in the circle, showed a winning smile. If they didn¡¯t team up against him, he wouldn¡¯t have knocked both of them out like that. They were asking for it. Therefore, in the match that was supposed to let two passes, only one passed. And like this, the 287th Hunter Exam came to an end. Eight people passed the exam. They were An, Gon, Kurapika, Illumi, Chrollo, Hisoka, Killua, and Hanzo. Netero stood up and announced to everyone. ¡°There will be a celebration Banquet at eight tonight in the hotel next to the Association building. It for our new Hunters to get to know their colleagues.¡± Netero then looked at An and the others and said: ¡°If there is a problem, you can choose not to go.¡± Kurapika directly asked An: ¡°An, are you going?¡± An replied: ¡°Although the Chairman said that it was a celebration banquet for the eight of us, it is like a meeting between colleagues, and if we don¡¯t go, we will be hated.¡± Killua said: ¡°There are a banquet and free food. If you don¡¯t have anything else, you should go.¡± ¡°That¡¯s it. We should go and take a look.¡± After saying this, An continued: ¡°I¡¯m going to the Hospital to see Gon. He would like to go as well.¡± Hearing this, Kurapika and Killua both wanted to visit Gon as well. At this moment, Hisoka raised his hand and said: ¡°President, I have something to do so that I won¡¯t go.¡± ¡°Is it urgent?¡± Netero asked. Hisoka smiled! ¡°I just don¡¯t want to ruin the fun.¡± Netero said: ¡°Huh, what a silly person. Okay, Hisoka, you can leave first.¡± Netero¡¯s tone wasn¡¯t like it used to be of that gentle old man, as Hisoka not going was like not giving him face. And like this, Hisoka was the first to leave the room. After this, Chrollo directly said: ¡°Sorry, Chairman, I have something to do as well, so I won¡¯t go.¡± Netero was getting dissatisfied now and asked: ¡°Is it urgent?¡± Chrollo smiled and said: ¡°Mypanions are still waiting for me, I must go meet them, so I can¡¯t go.¡± Netero said in displeasure: ¡°Can¡¯t you let them wait? This banquet is specially made for the new hunters.¡± Chrollo said: ¡°I¡¯m really sorry.¡± Netero waved his hand. Chrollo was second to leave the room. ¡°Is there anyone else who can¡¯t attend?¡± Netero asked with displeasure filling his face. ¡°Ah, I can¡¯t go as well, I have something to do, so I can¡¯t stay here,¡± Illumi said. Netero frowned and said: ¡°Is it an urgent matter?¡± Illumi nodded and said: ¡°Well, I have to assassinate someone before midnight, so I can¡¯t really participate.¡± Netero nodded slightly and said: ¡°So you¡¯re an assassin.¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Illumi nodded. He was still hiding with that disguise of his, so except An and Hisoka and the ones An told, no one knew who he was, not even Netero. However, when he was walking out, he suddenly walked toward Killua. Killua became vignt for a moment as he stared at Illumi. The aura around him made Killua feel inexplicably familiar. ¡°You, what do you want?¡± ¡°Killua, you still didn¡¯t know who I¡¯m?¡± Illumi said in surprise. At this moment, even his voice changed. Killua¡¯s expression changed when he heard the familiar voice. He looked at Illumi nervously and asked: ¡°Could it be that you¡¯re Illumi?¡± ¡°You have to call me Big Brother, Killua.¡± As he said this, Illumi pulled the needles from his face. Finally, he revealed his real face in front of everyone. ck hair, ck pupil, and a very handsome face. Killua suddenly turned pale and said in horror: ¡°Big¡­ Big brother?¡± Hello everyone, This is the First Chapter for this month, sorry it came sote as I was quite busy. I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 102: Getting Rid of Illumi’s Control Part 1 Chapter 102: Getting Rid of Illumi¡¯s Control Part 1 Illumi looked at Killua expressionlessly and said: ¡°It¡¯s been a long time, Killua.¡± ¡°Why are you here, Big Brother?¡± Killua asked in fear. ¡°Because there is a mission that requires the hunter¡¯s license, so I came here to get one. The other reason is that our father told me to follow you. I heard you hurt mother, so father asked me to bring you back to apologize to mother.¡± Hearing this, Killua shook his head and said: ¡°I, I don¡¯t want to go back.¡± Illumi said: ¡°That¡¯s not something for you to decide. This is Father¡¯s order, and of course, mine as well.¡± ¡°I¡­ I don¡¯t want to go back there, don¡¯t force me.¡± Killua lowered his head and clenched his fist while struggling. Illumi coldly said: ¡°Killua, do you want to disobey Father and me?¡± Killua shook his head: ¡°I respect Father and you as well, but I don¡¯t want to go back, I want to stay with my friends.¡± ¡°Friends?¡± Illumi¡¯s eyes narrowed as he nced at Kurapika and An. An said: ¡°Don¡¯t look at me. Killua is mostly referring to Gon.¡± Illumi looked at Killua and said: ¡°Killua, you are an assassin. You don¡¯t need friends.¡± Hearing this, Killua hesitated before he said: ¡°Don¡¯t you have friends as well, Big brother?¡± Illumi replied: ¡°Are you talking about Hisoka?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Killua nodded. ¡°Killua, I don¡¯t have a pure friendship with Hisoka, unlike you and Gon,¡± Illumi exined. Killua lowered his head and whispered: ¡°I really want to stay here, please don¡¯t force me to go back.¡± Illumi heard him and said: ¡°Don¡¯t disobey orders, Killua.¡± With this, Illumi extended his hand, and instantly, Killua started trembling all over. As if there were a pair of hands controlling him. Illumi looked at Killua and ordered: ¡°Killua, go take the airship back, and I will talk with father. As long as you be obedient, father won¡¯t punish you, and mother will forgive you.¡± Kurapika was scared when he saw Killua. Illumi was going too far, and he couldn¡¯t just watch this unfold without doing anything: ¡°Hey, what did you do to Killua? You are his brother, right? Why does he seem so afraid of you?¡± Illumi looked at Kurapika and asked: ¡°Are you his friend too?¡± ¡°I think I am,¡± Kurapika replied. Although he didn¡¯t know Killua for that long, they still got along well. Illumi snorted coldly: ¡°If you are his friend, then please stand aside obediently and don¡¯t interfere in our family¡¯s business.¡± Kurapika replied in a deep tone: ¡°I don¡¯t want to meddle in your family¡¯s affair, but Killua is obviously terrified of you, and he doesn¡¯t want to go back, if you are his brother, you can¡¯t force him like that.¡± With a wave of his hand, Illumi sent a few needles into his body. In an instant, Kurapika¡¯s entire body was paralyzed. Illumi coldly said: ¡°I will spare your life this time because you are Killua¡¯s friend, but if you start talking again, I will kill you.¡± Seeing that Kurapika was injured because of him, Killua gritted his teeth and said: ¡°Don¡¯t attack my friends, I wille back with you.¡± Illumi instantly smiled and said: ¡°That¡¯s good.¡± Seeing Killua being taken away by Illumi, Kurapika looked at An and said: ¡°An, are you going to sit back and watch?¡± Hearing this, An frowned. To be honest, he really didn¡¯t care about this. After all, it was a family affair, and he had Nothing to do with it. However, he knew why Killua is so afraid of Illumi. It was mostly because Illumi nted a small needle into Killua¡¯s forehead to manipte him. But if An helped Killua, it would offend Illumi, and it wasn¡¯t worth it right now. At this moment, the System interfered in An¡¯s stead as it gave An the incentive. [Ding! Make a Choice!] [1: Help Killua take out the needle in his head and get rid of Illumi¡¯s control, but you may offend Illumi. Reward: Six Powers. Rankyaku!¡± [2: Be a bystander, but you might lose Killua and Kurapika¡¯s trust. Reward: Six Powers. Tekkai.] An sighed, he originally wanted to avoid this, but he decided to help now. Although he might offend Illumi, An currently wasn¡¯t afraid of him. Furthermore, with Hancock here, she is enough to kick Illumi¡¯s behind. But it was still not worth it to offend Illumi now, so he thought about a way to help without offending Illumi and getting the reward. He looked up and saw that Killua was about to leave the room and directly shed in front of them. Illumi frowned and said: ¡°An, what do you want?¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°Nothing, but I just remembered that I have a question for Killua. Can I borrow him for two minutes?¡± ¡°No.¡± Illumi directly refused. An knew that he would refuse, so he smiled and said: ¡°Then, how about I exchange one favor with this? You lend me Killua for two minutes, and one of the favors is dropped. Is that a good deal?¡± Illumi thought for a while because, as an Assassin, owing others favors isn¡¯t good for business. And now, he owes An two favors. Since lending Killua would drop one of the favors for two minutes, it¡¯s indeed a good deal. He didn¡¯t have to do anything, and the favor will be written off. He looked at An and said: ¡°Well, just two minutes.¡± ¡°Thanks.¡± Hello everyone, This is the First Chapter for this month, sorry it came sote as I was quite busy. I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Enjoy! Chapter 102: Getting Rid of Illumi’s Control Part 2 Chapter 102: Getting Rid of Illumi¡¯s Control Part 2 An directly pulled Killua to the side and called Hancock to block the view between them, which made her think: ¡®What a terrible man, he wants this empress to block the view.¡¯ But she still did it in the end. Two minutes weren¡¯t short or long, and that¡¯s all the time An needed. He looked at Killua and said directly: ¡°Killua, listen closely, I will help you get rid of your bother¡¯s control over you. I hope you will cooperate.¡± Hearing this, Killua said, puzzled: ¡°What do you mean? Are you going to help me deal with my big brother?¡± An shook his head and said: ¡°No, I¡¯m going to make the long story short. Actually, there is a needle in your head right now. Illumi put it there to control you. That is the reason you are so afraid of him. Now, what I¡¯m going to do is help you take that needle out from your head, and your brother won¡¯t control you anymore.¡± Killua was doubtful because he didn¡¯t feel anything abnormal at all. As a professional Assassin, no one should know his body¡¯s condition better than himself. But now, An actually said that he had a needle in his head¡­ However, he knew that An seriousness, he believed him a bit, and he always wondered why he was always afraid of Illumi. ¡°Killua, do you believe me?¡± An asked. Killua nodded: ¡°Although I don¡¯t understand this very well, I know you won¡¯t harm me.¡± ¡°Okay, then you do as I tell you to take that needle out,¡± An said. ¡°So, where is this needle exactly?¡± Killua asked. An said: ¡°The needle should be in the center of your eyebrows. It shouldn¡¯t be too deep. Use your Hand technique to sharpen your fingers and look for it. However, be careful not to insert it further and cause brain damage.¡± Killua nodded. Although it seemed impossible to remove a needle without surgery, Killua¡¯s assassination skills were superb, and it wasn¡¯t that difficult for him. After all, he could easily remove a human¡¯s heart with his bare hand without said opponent¡¯s knowledge. Killua took a deep breath and started looking for the needle inside his forehead. After a few seconds, Killua whispered: ¡°Found it.¡± After finding it, Killua removed it in less than two seconds and raised his hand in front of him to look at the golden needle. ¡°Is this the needle that Illumi inserted in my head?¡± Killua asked with surprise. Killua knew that if it weren¡¯t for An, he wouldn¡¯t even know about this needle¡¯s existence, let alone remove it. An checked the needle using Gyo and found a lingering Nen from Illumi. ¡°Yes, this needle controls you and dominates you. It makes you feel fear toward Illumi. But it¡¯s okay now since you removed it.¡± Killua nodded and looked gratefully at An: ¡°Thank you, I won¡¯t forget this favor.¡± An waved his hand, gesturing that it was okay and he was wee. At this time, An heard the System¡¯s voice that he came to enjoy. [Ding! You sessfully helped Killua take out the needle from his head, freeing him from Illumi¡¯s control. Reward: Six Powers. Rankyaku.] After learning how to use Rankyaku, An looked at Killua and asked: ¡°Now that the needle is taken care of, you still want to go home?¡± Killua nodded: ¡°My family is a bit special, I did sneak out this time and injured my mother in the process, so I have to go back and apologize.¡± ¡°Okay, take care of yourself.¡± An didn¡¯t say anything else as Hancock said: ¡°That man is here.¡± An looked up and saw Illumi arrive. He looked at An and said: ¡°The two minutes are up. I will take Killua now.¡± An shrugged: ¡°Go ahead.¡± Killua cooperated with Illumi. He was surprised that he didn¡¯t fear Illumi like before. Although he was still fearful, it was his instinct warning him, Nothing else. Of course, Killua didn¡¯t show it. He acted very obediently, or else Illumi might discover what they did. Killua believed that Illumi would put another needle again. That is the reason why he decided to act as if he was still under Illumi¡¯s control for the time being. He wasn¡¯t worried about being discovered by Illumi, as thetter would only use that needle when Killua is disobedient. And as long as Illumi doesn¡¯t use it again, he won¡¯t know that Killua has taken it off. ¡°Goodbye, An, Kurapika. Please tell Gon that I bid him farewell. I hope we meet again in the future.¡± Said Killua before leaving. He gained a lot from his trip, he managed to get a hunter¡¯s license, bing a professional hunter, and he also made friends, which made him satisfied. After seeing Killua leaving with Illumi, An took Hancock and left. Kurapika frowned and asked: ¡°An, what did you say to Killua? Although he still followed his brother, he didn¡¯t seem as afraid as before.¡± An was surprised by how observant Kurapika was as he managed to pick the little changes in Killua. After all, even Illumi didn¡¯t notice the change. An briefly exined how he helped Killua take out the needle Illumi used to control him. Kurapika frowned and said: ¡°I didn¡¯t think Killua¡¯s brother is such a terrible guy. He actually wants to control his brother like that.¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°That guy is a super bro-con after all.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 103: Visiting Gon Chapter 103: Visiting Gon An brought Hancock, Kurapika, and Hanzo to the medical center to visit Gon. Gon was happy about the visit, but he was stunned when he saw Hancock: ¡°An, who is this beautiful Onee-san? Why haven¡¯t I met her before? Is she your friend?¡± An smiled and nodded. Unexpectedly, even the simple-minded Gon was stunned by Hancock¡¯s beauty. ¡°Gon, she is my fianc¨¦e. You can call her Snake princess.¡± An exined it to Gon. ¡°She¡¯s a princess?¡± Gon looked at An in surprise: ¡°And she is your fianc¨¦e.¡± An nodded and took Hancock¡¯s hand and said: ¡°Yes, look, I even gave her an engagement ring.¡± Wow, a pretty diamond ring.¡± Gon eximed. Although Hancock was dissatisfied with An¡¯s nonsense, she didn¡¯t say anything to refute his words. She can¡¯t control her body if she resists, and most importantly, she liked the Diamond Ring. Hanzo was irritated and said: ¡°When I save enough money, I will go find a beautiful fianc¨¦e for myself as well.¡± ¡°Speaking of which, why did Killuae here?¡± Gon asked confusion. He thought that they were good friends, Killua even surrendered in their fight, which means that Killua regarded him as a real friend tool. So Killua not visiting him now made him worried. Kurapika and Hanzo were a little hesitant about telling him, but they left that responsibility with An in the end. An directly exined what happened to Killua, making Gon quite angry at Illumi. He sat up from the bed and said: ¡°I¡¯m going to find Killua.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be impulsive, Gon.¡± ¡°Yes, Gon, Killua went back willingly. It¡¯s better for us to not interfere in their family.¡± ¡°Moreover, Killua¡¯s family is special. They are a family of assassins. If you go by yourself, I¡¯m afraid that they will treat you as an enemy, and at that time, let alone seeing Killua, you won¡¯t even get out alive.¡± After some discussion, Gon was convinced that he shouldn¡¯t look for Killua. ¡°Gon, Chairman Netero held a banquet at the nearby hotel so that new hunters can get to know their peers. Do you want to participate?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Gon nodded. ¡°Okay then, rest for now, and we¡¯lle to get youter.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± After leaving Gon¡¯s ward, An took Hancock and went to his room. He couldn¡¯t wait to eat the Ice Ice Fruit. Hanzo and Kurpaika followed An for a bit before asking: An, now that the Hunter Exam is over, regarding your promise, when are we going to begin?¡± ¡°Eh? What is it?¡± An was a little puzzled. Kurapika suddenly became embarrassed and said: ¡°An, didn¡¯t you promise to teach Kurapika and me how to use Nen?¡± An remembered that promise, but hepletely forgot about it as he was focused on the Ice Ice Fruit. An thought for a bit and said: ¡°Okay, you should find Leorio, and I will teach you both.¡± Kurapika nodded as he didn¡¯t have any problem. ¡°Then, I will leave for now.¡± An was in a hurry to eat the devil fruit already, but at this time, Hanzo spoke: ¡°Please wait.¡± ¡°Huh, you¡¯re still here?¡± Hanzo was speechless of a bit: ¡°My presence isn¡¯t that thin, okay.¡±.An didn¡¯t both talking nonsense and directly asked: ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± Hanzo nced at Kurapika and scratched his head, and said with embarrassment: ¡°Well, can you teach me Nen as well?¡± An was stunned. He didn¡¯t expect Hanzo¡¯s request. His rtionship with Hanzo wasn¡¯t that good, which is why Hanzo was currently embarrassed. Seeing An not answering, Hanzo knew that he was pushing his luck, but he still said: ¡°I know that this request is presumptuous, but I admire your power and hope you can teach me. I promise that I will do my best.¡± At this time, the system gave him a choice. [Ding! Make your choice] [1: Promise Hanzo to teach him the Nen of me. Reward: Swordsmanship, Flying sh.] [2: Refuse Hanzo¡¯s request. Reward: Increase Nen by 2,000 Points!] An¡¯s eyes shed as he saw the Flying sh. For the sake of that reward, he looked at Hanzo and nodded. ¡°Well, since everyone knows each other, I will teach you. I will be your teacher from now on, so you better be obedient.¡± ¡°Of course.¡± Hanzo rejoiced. He admired An¡¯s strength, even more when he fought him and believed that An could teach him well. Although he didn¡¯t know anything about Nen, he noticed one thing about it. Once you learn it, you will get stronger. ¡°So when will we start?¡± Hanzo asked. ¡°After Kurapika finds Leorio,¡± An answered. He didn¡¯t want to teach them one by one as it is too time-consuming. He already promised three, and adding Hanzo wasn¡¯t a problem. The real problem is that Illumi took Killua away, so he can¡¯t teach him for now.¡± ¡°What should I do now then?¡± Hanzo asked. ¡°Gon is still in the hospital now. I think he is quite bored, if you don¡¯t have anything to do, you can apany him to relieve your boredom.¡± ¡°Okay, I will go then.¡± Hanzo didn¡¯t say anything else and returned to Gon¡¯s room. ¡°Then I will go contact Leorio,¡± Kurapika said. ¡°Okay, go ahead.¡± After dismissing Kurapika and Hanzo, An looked at Hancock, who was looking at him silently, and asked: ¡°What? You didn¡¯t see anyone as handsome as me before?¡± ¡°Humph, this Empress is just thinking about who you are. Also, what is that Nen thing that baldy was talking about with the Blonde? Why didn¡¯t I hear anything about it?¡± An smiled: ¡°Of course you don¡¯t know about that. You¡¯re not from here after all.¡± Hancock frowned and asked: ¡°So, what is here exactly?¡± ¡°Do you want the truth?¡± ¡°Of course I want the truth.¡± An shrugged. ¡°The truth is, you aren¡¯t in your original world.¡± Hancock¡¯s expression changed when she heard this. ¡°What did you say?¡± An spread his hand and said: ¡°It means that in this world, although there are pirates, it isn¡¯t the same as where youe from. There are no Shichibukai, no Yonko, no World government, no Marine Headquarters, and no celestial Dragons. Although there are seas in this world, there is no Grand Line.¡± ¡°Then, where is my country? how can I go to Amazon Lily, and where are my people?¡± ¡°Of course, none of them exists here,¡± An said simply, but this had a huge impact on Hancock. ¡°No, I don¡¯t believe that. That¡¯s impossible.¡± Hancock eximed. This was too shocking for her, and she couldn¡¯t believe it. Regardless of that, An said: ¡°Listen well, Hancock, this is another world entirely. Another dimension I call the Hunters world. Here the main profession is the hunter¡¯s profession. That¡¯s why no one knew about you.¡± ¡°What?¡± Hearing this, Hancock gritted her teeth. ¡°Then, how did you bring me here? What is your purpose?¡± Hancock asked grumpily. ¡°Of course, I summoned you. I don¡¯t have any purpose in summoning you. I just wanted to try.¡± ¡°You bastard!¡± Hancock wanted to kill him, and if she could, she would¡¯ve already killed him. An smiled slightly: ¡°Sorry, I was too straightforward. Rest assured, as long as you listen to me. I will send you back. After, I¡¯m a person who keeps his promise.¡± ¡°A$$hole!¡± Hancock red at An. ¡°Hmm, even though you¡¯re angry, you¡¯re still beautiful.¡± An smiled while Hancock still red at him. ¡°You bastard, This Empress will kill you someday,¡± Hancock swore with gritted teeth. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 104: Eating the Ice Ice Fruit in a High-End restaurant Part 1 Chapter 104: Eating the Ice Ice Fruit in a High-End restaurant Part 1 Two hourster, An stretched his back after massaging Hancock. Hancock was looking coldly at An. An smiled and said: ¡°Don¡¯t look at me like that. You enjoyed it too.¡± Upon hearing this, Hancock blushed and turned her head with a snort. She was indeed resistant at first, butter, An¡¯s massage techniques improved, and she could only rx. The proud Empress couldn¡¯t help admit that the feeling wasfortable. She even had some inexplicable thoughts. However, as a Shichibukai, she had her arrogance and pride. So even though she felt ufortable, she didn¡¯t want to show it. [Ding! Congrattion for sessfully conquering Hancock andpleting a hidden Achievement: Charm Master. Reward: Physical strength doubled, Endurance tripled, charm attribute increased by eight folds.] An instantly felt his power increase a lot. Most of all, he feels like he can do it ten times now. Immediately, Allen looked at the Empress again. The Empress was initially staring at Allen, and for some odd reason, she felt her heartthrob as she looked at his eyes. ¡®What¡¯s going on? Am I being tempted by him now?¡¯ Hancock felt her heart beat faster and faster, and finally, she blushed and looked down, not daring to look at him directly. An was taken aback by this. He didn¡¯t think that the charm increase would have such drastic results. ¡°Well, why are you staring at this Empress?¡± Hancock said in a low voice without her normal arrogance. An smiled: ¡°Nothing, you are so beautiful Hancock, I can¡¯t help but look at you more.¡± ¡°Of¡­ Of course, no one can match this Empress¡¯ Beauty.¡± Hancock blushed, and her heart was in chaos because she discovered that An¡¯s praise made her happy. ¡°Hancock, let¡¯s go for another massage.¡± Hancock didn¡¯t speak, and it looked like she agreed. But she felt really strange because she obviously wanted to refuse, but the words couldn¡¯te out of her mouth. Seeing her reaction, An smiled as Hancock wasn¡¯t as arrogant as before to him, and she started to fall. Five hourster. An took Hancock to a restaurant near the association to enjoy a meal. It was a high-end restaurant, and people who came here are either rich or nobles. ¡°Excuse me, sir, do you have a reservation?¡± A middle-aged man in a suit asked at the entrance of the restaurant. An frowned and said: ¡°Who are you?¡± ¡°My name is Robert. I¡¯m the manager.¡± An said: ¡°I didn¡¯t have a reservation; can¡¯t I get in?¡± Upon hearing this, the manager said: ¡°I¡¯m really sorry, the restaurant regtions state that you need a reservation made at least half a day in advance. I¡¯m sorry, but you can¡¯t enter. If you don¡¯t mind, you can go to the cafeteria on the first floor.¡± An frowned. It was troublesome just to eat a meal here. Although the manager was polite, he is stubborn and will act ording to the rules. ¡®I won¡¯t be able to buy him with money. After all, being a manager for such a restaurant means that he is well off himself.¡¯ ¡°Manager, is there really no way?¡± An said. ¡°I¡¯m really sorry, Sir, but I can only abide by the rules. Even if the president of the Hunter Associationes, he needs an appointment in advance to eat here.¡± Manager Robert exined. His tone was sincere and humble. That¡¯s why An couldn¡¯t get angry at him. With a sigh, An prepared to take Hancock to another ce. However, Hancock stood up and pointed at Robert with her arrogant pose and said: ¡°Insolent man, This Empress is here to eat, you should be honored, but instead you want me to make a reservation?¡± As soon as Hancock spoke, she drew Robert¡¯s full attention and made his eyes almost fall off his head. ¡®Amazing!! This is the most beautiful woman I ever saw in my life.¡¯ Robert eximed in his mind. There is no shortage of beautiesing to this restaurant, but someone like Hancock was a rarity. No, rarity is an understatement, as Hancock is one of a kind, and no other woman is as beautiful as her. She was too beautiful to make her leave. Robert came back to his senses and quickly said: ¡°I will arrange a ce for thedy, please follow me.¡± ¡°Done, let¡¯s go.¡± Hancock nced at An. An smiled. Even when she¡¯s so willful, she is beautiful. Just as An was about to go with Hancock, Robert said: ¡°Sir, what is your rtionship with thatdy?¡± An said: ¡°She¡¯s my fianc¨¦e, why are you asking?¡± ¡°What?¡± Robert was taken aback and couldn¡¯t believe such a thing. ¡°Is she really your fianc¨¦e?¡± ¡°What are you talking about? Don¡¯t you see how good we look together?¡± An said irritably. Although An¡¯s handsomeness wasn¡¯t as high as Hancock¡¯s Beauty, he was still up there. ¡°Madam, is what he said true?¡± The middle-aged manager looked at Hancock as he didn¡¯t want to give up. ¡°What do you mean?¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 104: Eating the Ice Ice Fruit in a High-End restaurant Part 2 Chapter 104: Eating the Ice Ice Fruit in a High-End restaurant Part 2 Hancock nced at Robert before she went up to An and hooked her arm with his, admitting their rtionship. Robert nced at An enviously and said: ¡°Sir, you are so blessed to have such a beautiful fianc¨¦e. I hope you treat her well.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not up to you,¡± An said. Robert smiled embarrassedly, then took An and Hancock to the restaurant¡¯s best location and gave them a couple of top-ss dishes for free. An didn¡¯t refuse a free meal and enjoyed it with Hancock. Hancock was silently eating with a bowed head. An saw this and directly smiled: ¡°Hancock, I didn¡¯t expect you to take the initiative to grab my hand. Do you like me?¡± An teased. Hancock immediately blushed hard and exined: ¡°This Empress was hungry and didn¡¯t want to look at another ce to eat, so I cooperated with you, don¡¯t get any wrong idea.¡± ¡°Yes, Yes, you are the Proud Snake Princess. How could you like someone like me?¡± Hancock was already a mess right now. She initially hated An and wanted to kill him, but as she looked at An¡¯s smiling face and piercing eyes, she couldn¡¯t hate him. Moreover, at first, An was the epitome of the man she hated from the start, but now, she saw him as a handsome, stalwart, and sweet man. She felt something special from him when he looks at her, and when he calls her Hancock, she felt electrocuted, and her heartbeats sped up. ¡°Um, I¡¯m going to the bathroom.¡± ¡°Do you want me to apany you?¡± ¡°No, I know how to go.¡± Seeing Hancock leaving, An smiled. He had absolute control of Hancock and wasn¡¯t afraid of her leaving him, and he also read her thoughts and found out that she almost in love with him. She was going to the bathroom just to calm herself. ¡°I think I should eat that now.¡± An suddenly remembered something really important. Suddenly, a strange fruit appeared in his hand. An took out the Ice Ice fruit from the Inventory to eat along with the meal. He put it on an empty te, took his knife, and cut it into four pieces. As long as someone ate one bite of a devil fruit, he will gain that devil fruit¡¯s ability without the need to fully eat the rest. An picked a piece and brought it to his lips before eating it. He frowned at the taste, which was exactly how it was described. However, to gain the Ice Ice fruit ability, he can tolerate the horrible taste. At this moment, Hancock came back, and seeing the leftover of the Devil fruit on An¡¯s te, she immediately recognized it. ¡°Why is there a devil fruit here?¡± Hancock wondered. ¡°No, you¡¯re wrong.¡± An lied and felt a little guilty doing so. He didn¡¯t want to admit that he ¡®enjoyed¡¯ a devil fruit alone while his fianc¨¦e went to the bathroom. ¡°I¡¯m not. That¡¯s a devil fruit.¡± Hancock said again. An denied: ¡°No, No, it¡¯s not, this isn¡¯t the same world as the one you¡¯re from, so how can there be a devil fruit here? This is just an ordinary fruit.¡± Hancock said: ¡°This Empress Already ate the Mero Mero Fruit, so I can tell by the fruit¡¯s appearance. Although each fruit is different, that texture is only present on a devil fruit.¡± ¡°This is just an ordinary fruit. If you don¡¯t believe me, you can eat a piece.¡± ¡°No, This Empress already ate one, and if I eat another one, I will explode. Also, there is a three-piece, and one is missing, which means you ate one piece of the fruit, and now the rest is just an ordinary bad tasting fruit. Because the devil fruit loses its effect as soon as someone eats even one bite of it.¡± An was stunned by Hancock¡¯s knowledge of devil fruit. ¡°Well, it is a devil fruit, and I already ate some of it, so I gained its power.¡± An could only admit it even though he wanted to keep a low profile. Hancock looked at him fixedly and asked: ¡°I want to know where did you get that devil fruit, and also what kind is it? Logia? Zoan, or Paramecia? And what can it do?¡± ¡°Where it came from is a secret that I won¡¯t tell you about now. As for which type it is, you will know it when you see it, but don¡¯t forget to pick your jaw after I show you.¡± Under the expectant gaze of Hancock, An touched the table with his finger, and instantly, the tabletop was frozen in an instant. Hancock was really surprised and looked at him in the face: ¡°This is¡­ The Ice Ice Fruit of Admiral Aokiji? Did you eat that fruit?¡± An snapped his finger and smiled: ¡°Bingo!! Since your answer is correct, I will reward you in the evening.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 105: Testing Ice Fruit Part 1 Chapter 105: Testing Ice Fruit Part 1 Ice Ice Devil Fruit was one of the top Logia fruits in One Piece, like the Magma and Lightning. Whoever has this fruit can freeze the sea. When the Freezing ability is developed to a certain extent, it can change the natural environment and climate of a country. An ate that kind of Devil fruit. Furthermore, he has Armament Haki, Observation Haki, and Conqueror Haki, which made him as strong as an Admiral from One Piece. No, he is stronger than an ordinary admiral since he had other abilities like sh Steps, his swordsmanship, and Leaf¡¯s Taijutsu techniques. Hancock was quite surprised that An had that fruit, and what made her even more surprised, An seemed to have good control of that ability. As far as she knew, anyone who gets an ability as strong as the Ice Ice fruit won¡¯t be able to control it so well as soon as they ate it. Aside from that, she knew for sure that An got the Ice Ice fruit, but there is no way a fruit will be duplicated, and Aokiji had that fruit, which made her wonder how did An had the Ice Ice fruit. ¡°As far as I know, no devil fruit had the same ability as another one, and the only way to obtain a certain fruit is to kill the current user and wait for it to form again somewhere in the sea. Could it be you killed Aokiji and took his fruit?¡± An shook his head in denial: ¡°I didn¡¯t take it from Aokiji, but you don¡¯t need to know where I got it now.¡± Although Hancock was curious, she didn¡¯t ask again. An wasn¡¯t going to say that he has a system that can give him awesome rewards. Right now, he couldn¡¯t wait to find somece to try the Ice Ice fruit¡¯s power. He could feel that he was really strong right now. He felt that he could freeze a few miles with a wave of his hand. The Devil Fruit ability was stronger and more convenient than turning his Nen into Ice. Not to mention, the greatest function of a Logia fruit is turning into an element. That is something Nen can¡¯t do. He is immune to physical attacks. Furthermore, even if he encountered a transmuter like himself, thattter¡¯s attacks won¡¯t affect him unless it¡¯s his counter element. Just when An was quietly thinking about the advantages of the Ice Ice Fruit, he heard a voice from the side. ¡°Hey Beauty, do you want to enjoy a drink with me?¡± An looked up and saw a blond man inviting Hancock to a drink. The blond was quite handsome. There were two bodyguards behind the blond man, who made An conclude that the blond wasn¡¯t an ordinary person. At this time, many people noticed the blonde and started whispering amongst each other. ¡°Look, isn¡¯t that the big star Edward Wells?¡± ¡°Yes, that¡¯s him, he seems to be after that ck haired beauty in cheongsam.¡± The beauty they were talking about was, of course, Hancock, and this Edward Wells was the blonde man. From the moment Hancock entered the restaurant, the guests were ncing at him and never stopped. But those guests were somewhat polite and hadmon sense, so they just looked from a distance and didn¡¯t daree to talk to her. However, An didn¡¯t expect that someone would have enough courage to actually talk to Hancock. Seeing that Hancock ignored him, the blond was embarrassed and said: ¡°Oh, I didn¡¯t introduce myself yet. I¡¯m Edward Wells, you should know me from the two Movies [Love in the City] and [Flowers of Tomorrow], I starred in both.¡± However, Hancock didn¡¯t spare him a nce as she looked at An as if nothing else there mattered. No, she asionally looked at the food as well. She was the same arrogant Hancock that didn¡¯t put anyone in her eyes, and currently, not many could make her pay attention to them. ¡°So, do you want to join me for a drink?¡± Edward still asked again. ¡°Disgusting Fly, get out of this Empress sight.¡± Hancock suddenly said with a disgusted expression without even looked at Edward. Edward froze for a moment, as he didn¡¯t expect the other party would say he was disgusting and describe him as a fly on top of that. Suddenly, malice shed in his eyes, but he still squeezed a smile and said: ¡°I just wanted to buy you a ss of wine, nothing else.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 105: Testing Ice Fruit Part 2 Chapter 105: Testing Ice Fruit Part 2 At this time, An, who was sitting across Hancock, stood up. Originally, he thought that this person would have enough self-respect and go away after being rejected. He didn¡¯t think his skin would be that thick and still bothered Hancock, which made An a little unhappy. ¡°She told you to go away. Are you deaf?¡± Edward moved his gaze toward An with a gloomy face and said with polite words, but angry tone: ¡°Sir, what did you just say, did you call me deaf? And you want to me go away?¡± ¡°It looks like you¡¯re not deaf after all.¡± An sneered: ¡°Since you¡¯re not deaf, scram, or you will regret it.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, are you threatening me?¡± ¡°Oh, it¡¯s not a threat. It¡¯s a warning.¡± An said coldly. ¡°What if I don¡¯t? What can you do to me?¡± As soon as Edward said that, an invisible force instantly fell on him. His eyes rolled back as he fell to the ground, knocked out. Suddenly, the whole restaurant erupted in an uproar. The guests were horrified while the bodyguards rushed toward Edward. ¡°Edward-sama?¡± The bodyguards almost fainted as they saw Edward on the ground, then they looked at An. Although An didn¡¯t do anything, they weren¡¯t fools. Edward fainted for no reason, but An must¡¯ve done something. ¡°What did you do to Edward-sama?¡± One of the bodyguards stepped forward and put a hand on An¡¯s shoulder to question him. However, the moment his hand touched An¡¯s shoulder, thetter sneered and used his Ice Ability, turning the bodyguard into an Ice Sculpture. Another uproar filled the restaurant as the guests looked at An in horror. They didn¡¯t understand how the bodyguard turned into an Ice sculpture, but they were impressed. The second bodyguard directly pulled out his gun and aimed at An, and said: ¡°You, what have you done? Are you someone who can use Nen?¡± ¡°Oh? You actually know about Nen.¡± An said with slight surprise. Then he smiled and said: ¡°But, you don¡¯t know how to use it.¡± The bodyguard gritted his teeth and said angrily: ¡°Damn it! No matter who you are, this is the Hunter Association¡¯s jurisdiction, and Edward-sama is rted to the Association, don¡¯t think you can get out of this!¡± ¡°Why are you spouting so much nonsense? Go ahead and shoot!¡± An wanted to try the immunity he gained from the Ice Ice fruit. The bodyguard was in business for more than ten years. This is the first time he heard someone urge him to shoot. ¡°If you don¡¯t shoot me, I will attack.¡± An pretended to raise his hand to attack, and the already nervous bodyguard directly pulled the trigger. Bang! Suddenly, a bullet hit An¡¯s body and directly passed through his chest. However, there was no blood out of the wound. Instead, Ice condensed from thin air and repaired the hole. Even his clothes were intact. An smiled in satisfaction. ¡°Monster!!¡± The bodyguard saw this and looked at An in horror. Bang! He shot An twice, but the same weird thing happened, and the two holes closed up like it was nothing. At this time, the bodyguard almost peed his pants as he turned around and ran out of the restaurant. ¡°Want to escape? No way!¡± An sneered and thrust his foot on the ground sending a cold force into the ground that traveled directly toward the running bodyguard. As soon as he stepped out of the restaurant, he was caught and turned into an Ice Sculpture. Hancock looked at An in surprise. The Ice Ice fruit should be really hard to control, she could understand from the previous time An showed her his ability that he can control it well, but she didn¡¯t expect his control to reach such high in such a short time. After all, using a ranged ability and not losing control and freezing everything around him the first time he used this ability for real was an aplishment. But it wouldn¡¯t be that surprising if she knew that An had experience in manipting Ice before he got the Ice Ice fruit. Although the power and effect were different, it stillid a good foundation for the ice Ice Fruit. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± An took Hancock¡¯s hand and walked out of the restaurant under the jealousy of almost every male there. As for Edward Wells, and his bodyguards, An didn¡¯t really care much. After all, he didn¡¯t want to just kill him because he made him unhappy. If he was a threat to him, he would¡¯ve killed him, but An didn¡¯t put him in his eyes. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 106: Complains About 287th Hunter Exam Part 1 Chapter 106: Comins About 287th Hunter Exam Part 1 The Banquet for the new Hunter will be inside a five-star hotel that had 66 floors and was 500 meters away from the Hunter Association. An took Gon and Hanzo along to attend the Banquet that was hosted by Netero. Hancock naturally followed along as she was An¡¯s fianc¨¦e and could go wherever she wanted. However, apart from An, Hanzo, and Gon, no other new hunter was present. Chrollo, Hisoka, and Illumi left early. Kurapuka went looking for a way to call Leorio and Illumi took Killua with him when he left. So only three out of eight new hunters are participating in this Banquet. However, they were the center of attention because they looked young, especially Gon. Hanzo and An were adults, but Gon looked like a kid. For three youngsters to pass the harsh Hunter exam showed their potential. However, they were arrogant and didn¡¯t bother even getting closer to An and the others, while An took Gon and ignored them. He only attended this Banquet to give face to Netero. Otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t havee. Many people were present, even the twelve Zodiacs that were present in the Exam, along with the examiners. However, Pariston wasn¡¯t amongst them this time. Many hunters wondered about the reason Netero held this Banquet. Only a few of the people present knew the real reason for this Banquet and the real situation inside the Association. After the Banquet started, Netero came out and arranged for An and the others to sit beside him with the examiners from thest Exam. Satotz, Menshi, Buhara, and the others, along with Mizaistom, Kanzai, Cheadle, and the others. Halfway through the Banquet, the reason for this Banquet was revealed. This Banquet was held because there was no fresh blood in the Association in thest few years. Various Hunters were disappearing in strange idents every year, and no new recruits took their ce. Although the Test was there to recruit new people, it was a harsh exam that only a few could pass. There are even a few years where no one could pass the Test with a 100% failure rate. This led people to question the Hunter association. Netero was criticized many times by many high ranked people because the Test was getting harder each year, and due to this, he was being pressured into stepping down as the Chairman. But this year¡¯s Exam was different. Finally, eight new hunters passed the Exam. This allowed Netero to secure his position as the Chairman of the Hunter Association. Many hoped that the new recruits could bring prosperity to the Hunter Association, and this was the main reason Netero held this Banquet. Because he saw the future of the Association in the new recruits. However, some people still raised questions. Many were talking in the audience as their eyes fell on An and the other two. After all, Netero seemed to exaggerate when he said that the future of the Association is with those new recruits. Seeing that An, Hanzo, and Gon were so young made them frown. Since they were young, it wasn¡¯t wrong to doubt their strength. Therefore, everyone here raised their doubt without hesitation. Suddenly, a man smoking a cigar stood up and said: ¡°What bullshit is this about the 287th Exam having the future of the Association. I question the Examiners who made the Exam so easy that eight passed it, even a kid did.¡± As soon this was said, an uproar broke into the hall because this guy didn¡¯t just almost insult the Examiners, but Netero himself. Because, in thest Exam, Netero was the one who checked the integrity and difficulty of the tests. In other words, Netero made the Exam easy. That¡¯s why so many people passed. Many were discussing amongst each other now. ¡°Damn, why is that guy talking nonsense?¡± Hanzo gritted his teeth angrily: ¡°How dare he question us? Who is he to question us?¡± ¡°An, what do you think?¡± Gon asked calmly. An didn¡¯t say anything and just gazed at the man who spoke. This man had a big beard and was crossing his leg smugly. Obviously, he was proud of his questions. By his side, many hunters were already raising the same questions. After a while, An looked at Cheadle and asked: ¡°Cheadle-san, who is that?¡± Cheadle answered: ¡°His name is Adolf. He is a one-star bounty hunter and often questions other. He belongs to the Vice-Chairman¡¯s faction and very close to him.¡± ¡°So, does Cheadle-san suspects that Pariston is behind this?¡± Cheadle nodded: ¡°Well! Yes, I think Adolf is doing this to question Chairman¡¯s power, which Pariston would benefit from.¡± ¡°What is his purpose?¡± Cheadle made a guess: ¡°Although the president is the highest person in charge of the Association, Pariston has many supporters. Therefore, with Chairman¡¯s decline in power and reputation throughout the Association, Pariston canpete and get the position of Chairman.¡± An frowned. If what she said is true, then it means that this Pariston is smarter than he was originally. While An and Cheadle were still talking, Menshi suddenly pped the table and angrily: ¡°Adolf, you are saying that we made the Test easy? Do you have any evidence? If not, then close your mouth and obediently sit down.¡± As soon as she said this, the audience was silenced. Many people looked at Menshi with fear. Although she was young, she was strong and temperamental, so most people didn¡¯t want to offend her. Menchi was one of the Examiners. She was a food hunter, so her Test naturally tested them on food, but it wasn¡¯t an easy test, and she didn¡¯t allow people to pass if they weren¡¯t the ones who made the dish. That¡¯s why she was angry and shouted at Adolf. Adolf nced at Menshi and sneered: ¡°Hehehe, ¡°so it turns out you are amongst the examiners. No wonder so many people passed. I really don¡¯t understand why Chairman Netero would appoint someone like you as an Examiner.¡± ¡°Did you just say someone like you? Did you say that?¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 106: Complains About 287th Hunter Exam Part 2 Chapter 106: Comins About 287th Hunter Exam Part 2 Menshi gritted her teeth as Adolf mocked her. If it weren¡¯t for the fact that many Hunters were present here, she would¡¯ve already rushed toward Adolf and taught him a lesson. Adolf sneered: ¡°Menshi, I don¡¯t look down on you, but you¡¯re too young, and it¡¯s been a few years since you became a hunter. I don¡¯t think you¡¯re qualified to be an Examiner. Someone needs more experience to be an Examiner, and if Chairman Netero let someone like you control a test, then it¡¯s no wonder that so many people passed.¡± ¡°So, you think that I¡¯m not qualified to be an Examiner?¡± Menshi said angrily. She was okay with questioning her, but to despise and belittle her, that she can¡¯t tolerate. ¡°I¡¯m a one-star food Hunter, and I was studying food before I even became a hunter. In terms of food, how many people in the Association can match me? I asked about food naturally, and although the difficulty wasn¡¯t very high, it was high. So tell me, why I¡¯m not qualified to be an Examiner?¡± ¡°I have already said you¡¯re too young and no experience to be an Examiner,¡± Adolf said with a sneer. ¡°Bastard!¡± Menshi couldn¡¯t bear it. ¡°I will teach that shameless fellow a lesson.¡± Suddenly, Nen exploded out of her body. Even though she was a food hunter, it didn¡¯t mean anyone can underestimate her. Seeing this, Adolf didn¡¯t show any weakness: ¡°Although I don¡¯t want to beat a woman, you¡¯re a savage, and I won¡¯t mind beating you.¡± An was nning to watch, but suddenly, a system choice filled his head. [Ding! Make a choice!] [1: Help Menshi and teach Adolf a lesson. Reward: Increase Nen by 3,000 Point!] [2: Be a bystander and turn a deaf ear about what¡¯s happening. Reward: Ten Million ring!] [3: Issue a 1v1 challenge against Adolf, defeat him in front of everyone and erase everyone¡¯s doubt using your strength. Reward: Magic Jar x1] Magic Jar? An didn¡¯t want to take part in this, but since there is a reward in front of him, he didn¡¯t want to let it go. He immediately said: ¡°Menchi-sempai, please calm down. Let me deal with this.¡± ¡°That guy said that we helped you guys bing hunters by cheating. I can¡¯t let that go.¡± Menshi said. ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter who questions it. I can assure all the Sempais present that you didn¡¯t show any favoritism.¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, Menshi was stunned as she didn¡¯t expect An to stand up and defend them. At this time, Adolf raised a question again: ¡°Huh? Who knows if you aren¡¯t colluding together? Since the Examiners made it easy to pass, the candidates would be grateful. And since we didn¡¯t see you take the Test, you can say whatever you want.¡± An didn¡¯t get angry and just asked: ¡°What should we do then?¡± ¡°I think we should cancel this year¡¯s Qualification and take your license and make you take the Exam again. If you pass this Test, then everyone can see that you passed it yourselves without help.¡± Many started discussing Adolf¡¯s suggestion. However, many Examiners saw this, and their expressions sank. If they remade the Exam, then it will be as if what Adolf is saying is true. Menshi and the others directly stepped forward to refute Adolf¡¯s suggestion. Satotz directly said: ¡°Conducting another test will not only consume a lot of resources, but it will also waste everyone¡¯s time. That kind of proposal is stupid.¡± Adolf sneered: ¡°Don¡¯t make excuses. I think you are just feeling guilty and don¡¯t want to hold another test, so you don¡¯t get exposed, right?¡± Menshi said: ¡°You just want to cause trouble.¡± Adolf sneered: ¡°Look, you are angry because I guessed it right.¡± At this time, An said: ¡°Adolf-san, what do you think is the priority for someone to be a Hunter? In other words, which part is the most important for a hunter, is it knowledge, wealth, or strength?¡± ¡°Of course, it¡¯s strength.¡± Adolf said: ¡°If an examinee doesn¡¯t have enough power, he will not be qualified as a hunter.¡± Hearing this, An smiled and said: ¡°So, Sempai, since you think that strength is the most important in being a hunter, then, surely our strength should be far apart, right? I have a suggestion. Let me represent the candidates who passed this year and fight with you.¡± As soon as he said this, many became upset. Adolf started at An coldly: ¡°Are you challenging me in a one-on-one match?¡± An shrugged: ¡°I just want to prove it to you. Since you think strength is everything, then I can only challenge you in strength.¡± Adolf¡¯s face was gloomy as he said: ¡°Don¡¯t be a too proud kid, you are just a new hunter and can¡¯t even be called a trainee yet. What qualification do you have to fight me?¡± An wasn¡¯t angry at all. He just raised his mouth and sneered: ¡°Adolf-san, are you afraid of losing to a neer? That¡¯s why you don¡¯t want to fight?¡± ¡°Bastard.¡± Adolf clenched his fist and gritted his teeth, then said to An: ¡°Okay, I will fight you. I will make you regret your decision and show you how far you are from being a hunter. Don¡¯t me me for being merciless.¡± Hearing this, An smiled and said: ¡°Adolf-san, you seem confident in your strength.¡± Adolf said coldly: ¡°I won¡¯t be merciful.¡± An nodded, and his face turned cold: ¡°Since you¡¯re my sempai, I will let you attack first.¡± ¡°Arrogance.¡± Adolf¡¯s forehead was blue with veins as he rushed toward An and the match started. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 107: Armament Haki Part 1 Chapter 107: Armament Haki Part 1 Adolf rushed toward An, who stood still, which confused many onlookers. ¡®Is this guy so afraid that he couldn¡¯t move?¡¯ Many had the same thought, and only a few people who witnessed An¡¯s power were calm. Adolf threw a fast punch toward An, who didn¡¯t move until thest second and avoided it in the end. Adolf¡¯s confident face changed to surprise, not because An avoided his punch, but because he did it effortlessly. He continued attacking relentlessly, and An avoided each punch the same way, leaving an afterimage behind due to his speed. An¡¯s observation Haki read all of Adolf¡¯s movements easily, which made avoiding his punches simple. Adolf was getting frustrated as he couldn¡¯t evennd a hit on An. The more he fought, the angrier he got. Suddenly, Nen erupted from Adolf¡¯s body. ¡°An Enhancer?¡± An squinted as he remembered thest Enhancer he faced, Uvogin. From the Nen he released, he wasn¡¯t weaker than Uvogin. An knew that a Professional Hunter is just a general term, and each hunter has a specialty, like Bounty hunter, relic hunter, food hunter, and so on. Among them, the bounty hunters and crime hunters were prominent, and that¡¯s because there were many criminals in the world that needs strength to deal with. When Adolf released his Nen, An could tell that his speed and strength increased greatly. Enhancers can increase their power and speed with Nen, so their fighting style is crude and simple, and their strongest weapon is their fist. They can easily smash rocks and lift tons. That¡¯s why Enhancers were most suited for closebat. Adolf took advantage of this and attacked An with all his might. The Hunters moved to one side as they watched the fight with interest. Among them is Netero, who watched the fight with interest instead of stopping them. The other hunters were also looking at the fight with interest. Because of the doubts raised by Adolf, many of the onlookers were doubting An¡¯s power. At this moment, An¡¯s performance is directly rted to whether Netero¡¯s ims are right about the 287th exam passers or not. While Adolf was attacking An, thetter¡¯s performance already proven them wrong. As a new Hunter, An can face Adolf, who was going all out, and this certainly can prove that An was as strong as an experienced Hunter. Adolf was amongst the top fifty in the hunter association, and now, a newer was able to hold his ground against him. There is no need for doubt anymore. Now, even if An admits defeat, the others won¡¯t question him. But An had no intention of admitting defeat. Only a few people could tell who was stronger currently. At this moment, Adolf seemed to push An back, but Adolf couldn¡¯t evennd a hit. His fierce attack missed the target, no, it¡¯s not that it failed, but An avoided all of it. ¡®Why can¡¯t I hit him?!!¡¯ Adolf was confused, while the onlookers were surprised. They could tell that Adolf¡¯s speed was enough to hit An, but An could avoid his attacks. Even members of the twelve Zodiacs were surprised. They have seen An¡¯s match against Hanzo, and the former was currently using the same strategy. No matter how much Adolf attacked, he never managed to touch An. ¡°Did that An see through all of Adolf¡¯s attacks?¡± Pyon the Rabbit Zodiac eximed. Ginta, also one of the twelve Zodiacs, replied: ¡°Yes, An has seen through all of Adolf¡¯s attacks. No, Adolf fell into An¡¯s rhythm from the start, which allowed An to y with him. As a result, his attacks became more and more urgent as he wanted to end the fight quickly.¡± ¡°In other words, An¡¯s true power is much higher than Adolf¡¯s?¡± Pyon was a little surprised as she asked Ginta, who replied: ¡°I think so.¡± ¡°Unbelievable.¡± Pyon looked at An in surprise: ¡°So, isn¡¯t he strong enough to challenge us? Ginta, can you defeat him?¡± Ginta shook his head: ¡°I don¡¯t know if I can beat him.¡± ¡°But, you¡¯re strong,¡± Pyon said with a hand on her chin. Ginta scratched his head and said: ¡°An didn¡¯t just see through Adolf¡¯s attacks. He also perfectly dodged each one, which means he is faster. If I were fighting Adolf, I wouldn¡¯t be able to do the same feat. Therefore, An is faster than I¡¯m.¡± Pyon looked at Ginta before sighing: ¡°Yes, your body is too big and heavy. You can¡¯t move that fast. Well, I think you would have the advantage when ites to strength.¡± Mizaistom interjected: ¡°If you can¡¯tnd a hit, no matter how strong you are, it will be useless.¡± Hearing this, Ginta smiled awkwardly as what Mizaistom said was true. Even if your strength is superior, you won¡¯t win if you can¡¯tnd a hit. The current situation with Adolf was the best example. Even though Adolf was an enhancer who should be stronger than An, he couldn¡¯tnd a single hit on An. Adolf was frustrated as he shouted in anger: ¡°Damn it! Don¡¯t hide like a mouse, you coward.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± An also thought it was almost time to end this. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 107: Armament Haki Part 2 Chapter 107: Armament Haki Part 2 He raised his mouth slightly in a smile and said: ¡°if that¡¯s what you want, then I will attack.¡± In the next second, An¡¯s figure disappeared and reappeared behind Adolf. Adolf reacted as fast as he can and turned around to see a ck hand gleaming in the light falling on him. The fistnded on Adolf¡¯s chest, directly bending his breastbone. Boom! Adolf was sent flying like a cannonball as he was knocked out. The audience fell into silence. They took several seconds to react and finally realized that Adolf was taken down in one punch. The onlookers were in shock as they broke out in a heated discussion. ¡°He¡¯s fast!¡± ¡°Moreover, that power isn¡¯t something normal people can have. He knocked Adolf into the air, even though thetter is an enhancer.¡± ¡°Is that guy a monster?¡± An wasn¡¯t just faster than Adolf. He was also stronger, even though thetter was an enhancer. As for the person himself, An was a little surprised by the power Armament Haki had. It was his first time using it, and he didn¡¯t expect such strength. [Ding! You defeated Adolf in front of Everyone and face pped those who questioned your strength. Reward: Magic Jar!] [Note: The reward is transferred into the system¡¯s Inventory, and Host can take it out anytime.] An checked the Inventory and saw a ck pot resembling a y pot. ording to the description, the Magic Jar is a type of Treasure Chest. As long as he smashes the jar, he would get a random reward. At this time, Adolf got up from the ground as ced his hand on his chest. An punch actually broke a few bones, which made Adolf look at An in disbelief. He could help ask: ¡°This is impossible, how are you stronger than me? Are you an Enhancer as well?¡± An shook his head. He didn¡¯t use Nen at all. He simply covered his fist with Armament Haki. But Adolf¡¯s suspicion is understandable since Armament Haki was so powerful, it made everyone think that An is an Enhancer. Only an enhancer can have that kind of strength, but Adolf didn¡¯t feel any Nen, which made him even more shocked. If he isn¡¯t an Enhancer, did he even use Nen? Was that attack pure physical power? Adolf was almost going crazy. An didn¡¯t say much. He wasn¡¯t stupid. After all, this wasn¡¯t an anime anymore. He wouldn¡¯t talk about his ability to a potential enemy. He didn¡¯t even use his most powerful trump card, which he originally wanted to use, but considering the surrounding, he abolished such thoughts as it may cause some risks in the future. If others knew about his ability, people might think of a way to counter it, so he didn¡¯t want to expose himself yet. At this moment, Gon and Hanzo came over, and thetter directly said: ¡°Good job.¡± Gon eximed: ¡°I knew that An would win.¡± An smiled and said: ¡°No one would question us now.¡± It¡¯s indeed true. No one looked down on An and the others after seeing Adolf¡¯s defeat. Menshi came over and patted An¡¯s shoulder and said: ¡°Boy, good job. I¡¯ve been angry with Adolf for a long time, and your punch vented most of that anger away.¡± Satotz came over and said: ¡°An, have you been getting stronger? You way stronger than before.¡± An nced at Satotz, who was extremely observant, and nodded. After all, with the system, it wasn¡¯t difficult to get stronger. And the power he showed was just the tip of the Iceberg. If he used the Ice Ice Fruit, An was sure that only a handful of people in the Association would be able to match him. Someone like Adolf wasn¡¯t enough to even enter his eyes. If An was serious, he would defeat him in seconds. Seeing An¡¯s confidence, Satotz said: ¡°An, you have a huge potential. I can tell that you will be the representative of the new generation of the Hunter Association. Work hard. Chairman has a high expectation from you.¡± Hearing the second half of the sentence, An was taken aback. He looked up at Satotz and asked: ¡°Satotz-senpai, did chairman say anything?¡± Satotz smiled: ¡°The Chairman just praised you slightly in front of the Twelve Zodiacs.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± An was confused. But he still could guess. ¡°In other words, the Chairman is very optimistic about me and may arrange about me to be part of the Twelve Zodiacs?¡± Satotz nodded: ¡°Well, I don¡¯t rule out that possibility.¡± Hearing this, Menshi patted An¡¯s shoulder and said: ¡°Wow, kid, your future is bright.¡± ¡°Ahem, what bright about it? Is being a member of the Twelve Zodiacs profitable?¡± An replied. Menshi said: ¡°Who¡¯s talking about money? Your vision is quite short. I mean, if you enter the Twelve Zodiac, then maybe you can be the Chairman in the future.¡± ¡°You¡¯re exaggerating, Menshi-senpai,¡± An said. Menshi replied: ¡°I¡¯m not exaggerating at all. The Twelve Zodiacs are all qualified topete for the seat of the Chairman, if you can join them, you will have that qualification as well.¡± I¡¯m so sorry for making you wait so much for chapters, but chapter 163 of HxH: G.O.C.S isn¡¯t avable as the author wanted to edit it or something and I had to wait to see if it will be uploaded or not. Unfortunately, it hasn¡¯t and there will be one missing chapter in the story. I have all 15 (10 normal releases and 5 stacks in thest tiers of Patreon.) chapters for this month tranted already, and I will be publishing 3 each day and fill thest tiers on thest day like always. Also, I¡¯m taking this month a break from TSH, and I will resume updating it next month. Chapter 108: Netero’s Invitation Part 1 Chapter 108: Netero¡¯s Invitation Part 1 An just smiled at Menshi and didn¡¯t take her words seriously. Entering the Twelve Zodiacs isn¡¯t an easy thing, and even though An is a super neer and has the qualification to be a member, he knew that his achievement wasn¡¯t enough for that. And defeating a one-star bounty hunter wasn¡¯t something to be proud of. Even if Netero is optimistic about his future, he can¡¯t just be a Twelve Zodiacs member. After all, each member had a certain qualification that he should meet. Furthermore, An never thought of bing a member of the Twelve Zodiacs. Bing a Professional Hunter was enough. ¡°An, the Chairman is looking for you.¡± At this time, Cheadle came over and said. ¡°Looking for me?¡± An scratched the back of his head and asked: ¡°Why is he looking for me? Is it because I injured Adolf-Senpai?¡± ¡°You¡¯re overthinking it.¡± Cheadle assured: ¡°Even if someone wanted to settle the score with you, it wouldn¡¯t be the Chairman.¡± An knew this, as the one who would deal with him is Pariston. When ites to scheming, Pariston was a master. As for his power, it should be alright since he could be the Vice-chairman. An then asked: ¡°Why is the Chairman looking for me then?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know. However, based on what I know, it seems like he is itching for a fight.¡± Cheadle guessed. ¡°Itching for a fight?¡± ¡°Yeah, simply put, the Chairman wants to fight you,¡± Cheadle exined. An froze: ¡°Fight?¡± ¡°Probably because he saw your battle and decided to spar with you.¡± As a member of the Twelve Zodiacs, Cheadle knew Netero very well. ¡®is this a joke?!¡¯ An eximed in his mind. ¡®So Chairman Netero wants to fight me?!¡¯ An murmured. But thinking carefully about it, An knew that Cheadle¡¯s guess was spot on. After all, he knew Netero was a battle maniac. He liked the challenge, and even though he seems like an idiot at times, he spends his entire life pursuing martial arts and always weed a challenge. However, because he was too strong, he didn¡¯t have anyone to challenge him anymore. Although his strength declined due to his age, he was still the strongest known figure in the world. And now, such a monster wants to fight him. An first thought about slipping away as he didn¡¯t want to fight against a monster like Netero, but his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva is the strongest known Nen ability in the world so far. His attacks were so fast the Meruem could only get pped by it. Such a speed would render his Observation Haki useless. And the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva power wasn¡¯t something the current him could defend against. He didn¡¯t even know if the Elementalization of his Devil Fruit would work or not. All in all, An didn¡¯t want to fight Netero. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Promise Cheadle to meet Netero in the Association. Reward: Senzu Bean.] [2: Slip away and ditch Netero. Reward: Increase Nen by 3,000 Points] ¡®Senzu Bean?!¡¯ An¡¯s eyes lit up. Thest time he got a Senzu bean, he had to give it to Gon. An decisively chose the first option and decided to go see Netero. [Ding! You have obtained a Senzu Bean. The reward has been stored in the Inventory.] An directly took a look at it. He bid farewell to Gon and Hanzo before he took Hancock along and then followed Cheadle to the Association. Cheadle was a little envious of the seemingly close rtionship between An and Hancock. Suddenly, An stopped ahead of him, and someone blocked the road. He was a tall person with a cigar in his mouth. It was Adolf who came looking for An for revenge against the previous humiliation. ¡°Adolf, we need to go,¡± Cheadle said in displeasure. She was a member of Netero¡¯s Faction, while Adolf was someone under Pariston, so she wasn¡¯t polite at all when talking to him. An smiled disdainfully and said: ¡°Is there something you need?¡± ¡°You¡­¡± Adolf looking at An gloomily and gritted his teeth: ¡°The duel at the Banquet was my carelessness. Let¡¯s fight again, and this time, you won¡¯t be able to sneak attack me again.¡± ¡°Sneak attack?¡± An¡¯s smile receded as he said: ¡°Do you really think that you lost because I sneak attacked you?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Adolf nodded. ¡°So you want to fight me again now?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Adolf grinned coldly: ¡°If you don¡¯t want to fight, then you won¡¯t leave this ce.¡± ¡°Excuse me, I¡¯m going to see Chairman Netero, and I don¡¯t have time to fight with you.¡± An waved his hand and didn¡¯t pay attention to Adolf. However, as soon as he finished his words, the System intervened. [Ding! Make a choice.] [1: Beat Adolf down. Reward: Increase Nen by 1,000 Points] [2: Mock Adolf and crush himpletely with your strength. Reward: Marine¡¯s Six Powers-Soru.] A thousand points were too little, which made An take the second option. Looking at Adolf, An shrugged and said: ¡°Since you want to be beaten so much, then I will reluctantly fight you. This time, I will fight head-on. We will use our fists to determine the winner.¡± Adolf sneered at An¡¯s proposal. ¡°Do you want to you directly attacks? Don¡¯t regret itter. Don¡¯t you know my Title?¡± An shook his head, and Adolf directly announced proudly: ¡°It¡¯s Adolf the Iron Fist.¡± An puckered his ear and said: ¡°Well, let¡¯s see whose fist is stronger.¡± Suddenly, Adolf unleashed his Nen before strengthening his fists. ¡°Come on!¡± Adolf punched with all his power, while An didn¡¯t release his Nen from the start. He raised his fist and greeted him with Armament Haki covering them. As soon as the fists collided, a small shockwave spread. Since Adolf was an Enhancer, his fist was indeed hard after he used Nen to strengthen them. ¡°See, My Iron Fist isn¡¯t weaker than your ck fist.¡± ¡°ck fist?¡± An was speechless as his Armament Haki was described as a ck fist. (T/L: In Chinese, ck hand means someone who is unlucky.) Ignorance was terrifying. ¡°I didn¡¯t use my full power yet,¡± An said. ¡°Really? Thene on, I, Adolf of the Iron Fist, won¡¯t lose to a neer.¡± As soon as Adolf¡¯s voice fell, An has already raised his hand clenched his fist hard. Busoshoku: Koka (Armament Type: Hardening!) Adolf¡¯s face was full of disbelief as his face was smashed. He flew away and hit the ground. I¡¯m so sorry for making you wait so much for chapters, but chapter 163 of HxH: G.O.C.S isn¡¯t avable as the author wanted to edit it or something and I had to wait to see if it will be uploaded or not. Unfortunately, it hasn¡¯t and there will be one missing chapter in the story. I have all 15 (10 normal releases and 5 stacks in thest tiers of Patreon.) chapters for this month tranted already, and I will be publishing 3 each day and fill thest tiers on thest day like always. Also, I¡¯m taking this month a break from TSH, and I will resume updating it next month. Chapter 108: Netero’s Invitation Part 2 Chapter 108: Netero¡¯s Invitation Part 2 An didn¡¯t forget to taunt him now: ¡°Is that all?¡± At this time, the System¡¯s notification Echoed in An¡¯s head. [Ding! You sessfully crushed and mocked Adolf. Reward: Marine¡¯s Six power-Soru.] Soru was a speed movement technique that requires its user to step on the ground ten times in the blink of an eye. The user would disappear suddenly and appear seemingly teleporting. An didn¡¯t feel the need to learn it, but having it was better than nothing. Because skills were like money, you won¡¯t have too much of them. After walking for a few minutes, An and Cheadle reached the Association building and directly went toward Netero¡¯s secret room. ¡°This is the Martial arts hall that the chairman use for mediation and Practice,¡± Cheadle exined. Netero was already waiting inside the room wearing sportswear while meditating. An squinted his eyes as he observed Netero¡¯s body. ¡°Snake Princess, can you please go out of the room? I have something to discuss with An.¡± Hearing this, Hancock replied arrogantly: ¡°Bald Old man, don¡¯t order this Empress around.¡± ¡°Haha.¡± Netero smiled and said: ¡°This old man is indeed bald. After all, when people reach a certain age, their physical functions will decline. This is a fact in the world that no creature can escape. But I could live for at least a hundred years! At that time, you will also be an old woman.¡± ¡°Rude Old Man, this Empress¡¯s beauty is eternal, and my body will never age,¡± Hancock said with slight anger. ¡°Hehehe, Yes, that eventually will happen. After all, there is no beauty in this world that can withstand the passing of time. If there is, I really want to see it.¡± Neteroughed. ¡°Well, Chairman, maybe you can see it,¡± An said. Netero was already over a hundred years old, but An knew that with his current body and power, it wouldn¡¯t be strange for him to live another hundred years. However, Hancock didn¡¯t know how horrifying Netero could be. ¡°Hancock, please go out first with Miss Cheadle, and wait for me.¡± An directly decided toply with Netero. Although Hancock was slightly upset, she obediently left the room with Cheadle. ¡°Hehehe, the Snake empress only listen to you.¡± Netero¡¯s words were full of envy. An smiled and said with triumph: ¡°After all, I¡¯m so attractive. But I guess when the president was young, you must have attracted quite a few girls, right?¡± ¡°Haha, it¡¯s okay. When I was young, there were indeed a few girls around me.¡± Netero Laughed. An nodded. He didn¡¯t think that Netero was bragging at all. After all, this guy was so powerful when he was young, and it¡¯s normal for him to have a few girls around him. ¡°Speaking of which, where is Chairman¡¯s wife?¡± Ana asked suddenly. ¡°This old man is married!¡± Netero said. ¡°Liar!¡± ¡°Huh?!¡± Netero didn¡¯t expect An to question him suddenly and was startled. An then said: ¡°I guess that you were married, and maybe you have a child somewhere.¡± Netero¡¯s expression changed slightly, and An picked the change, but he quickly regained his calm expression. Netero coughed a couple of times with guild and said: ¡°An, this old man is alone, how can I have a child?¡± ¡°Haha, I just guessed, since Chairman said he was popr with thedies when he was young.¡± An remembered that Netero had a child named Beyond Netero. After Netero died, Beyond jumped out and made a public appearance. Moreover, he was quite ambitious, as he has always wanted to explore the dark continent. Netero stared at An for some time, then smiled. ¡°Hahaha, when I was young, I had some romance for a while. Maybe I have some child out there.¡± An didn¡¯t say anything as Netero was trying to hide his son. ¡°By the way, Chairman, why did you ask for me toe here? It isn¡¯t for a simple chat, right?¡± Netero smiled and turned serious: ¡°I want to fight you.¡± An was stunned for a moment. He didn¡¯t expect Netero to be straightforward. ¡°Don¡¯t take me for an old man. When I was young, I defeated many people, how about it? Are you interested in a spar?¡± Netero said. An thought for a while and was about to answer, but suddenly the System gave him another choice. [1: Have a fight with Netero. Reward: Increase Nen by 10,000 Points.] [2: Reject Netero. Reward: Increase Nen by 5,000 Points.] [3: Embrace your warrior soul and fight with everything you have against Netero, it doesn¡¯t matter if you win or lose, go all out. Reward: The Eight Inner Gates (Hachimon Tonkou).] ¡®The Eight Inner Gates?¡¯ An¡¯s eyes lit up as he looked at this reward. The Eight Inner Gates technique almost the strongest Technique in Naruto. When Maito Gai used it, he could defeat all Kage and even Madara. If An has this Technique, he could walk like he owns the ce anywhere in the world. Of course, this Technique has its risques. The more gates you open, the greater the side effect on your body. If the Eight gates were fully opened, the user would die in the end. But that doesn¡¯t make it any less awesome. After thinking about it, An picked thest option. He will fight Netero with everything he had without holding back even a bit. Seeing An staying silent, Netero was slightly anxious: ¡°What do you say, An? Do you want to fight this old man? If I enjoy the fight, I will even let you enter the Twelve Zodiacs.¡± An didn¡¯t care about Netero¡¯s offer. All he cared about was the eight inner gates technique. He raised his head and said: ¡°Chairman, as the strongest person in the world, it¡¯s my honor to have a fight against you. I can¡¯t refuse such Honor.¡± Netero squinted and smiled: ¡°Hehe, it¡¯s rare for a young man to be so humble. It seems I didn¡¯t judge you wrongly.¡± ¡°Then,e on, president.¡± An took off his ck suit and flung it aside while assuming a fighting pose. Netero also got serious and folded his hands together and said: ¡°Thene, An.¡± I¡¯m so sorry for making you wait so much for chapters, but chapter 163 of HxH: G.O.C.S isn¡¯t avable as the author wanted to edit it or something and I had to wait to see if it will be uploaded or not. Unfortunately, it hasn¡¯t and there will be one missing chapter in the story. I have all 15 (10 normal releases and 5 stacks in thest tiers of Patreon.) chapters for this month tranted already, and I will be publishing 3 each day and fill thest tiers on thest day like always. Also, I¡¯m taking this month a break from TSH, and I will resume updating it next month. Chapter 109: All out! Chapter 109: All out! Soru~! An shed as if teleporting, and the next second he kicked Netero using Leaf Strong Whirlwind along with Armament Haki! Netero¡¯s eyes shed as his palm moved slowly toward An. But time seemed to stop as the palm moved while An is still in the air. Suddenly, terrifying shockwaves spread out like a hurricane as the whole room trembled. Netero was surprised by the ck-colored kick and looked at An with curiosity. An¡¯s power exceeded his expectations. An¡¯s heart was beating like crazy after his strongest physical attack was blocked so easily by Netero. ¡®What a crazy old man! He is too strong! Is he really in his hundreds?¡¯ ¡°Again.¡± Neteroughed. ¡°Okay, here Ie.¡± An nodded. He knew well that Netero was letting him attack, so he didn¡¯t shrink back and attacked. Armament-type: Hardening! An clenched his fist, and his arm instantly turned ck. An instantly unleashed the strongest punch he could master at Netero while thetter was grinning: ¡°I knew I was right! You are so young and promising!¡± Netero looked at An in appreciation as he lightly sent a palm strike toward An¡¯s fist. His palm glowed with a golden light that seemed strong enough to lighten up the world. A golden palm met with a ck fist! Hm~! The moment they collided, the ck and the golden light intertwined as a great shockwave burst out. After the fierce collision, An directly pulled back and retreated ten meters from Netero. An looked at Netero seriously as he reached a certain conclusion, which was: ¡®The damn old man is way stronger than I expected!!!¡± An knew that if hepetes with Netero using Nen, he would¡¯ve lost already. Thanks to his Armament Haki, he could at least challenge him slightly, even though Netero could end the fight anytime if he was serious. At this moment, Netero suddenly asked: ¡°An, Your fist is so strong because of that ck energy coating them, right?¡± ¡°It¡¯s called Armament Haki.¡± An didn¡¯t hide anything. ¡°It can freely cover any part of the body like Nen, and this can improve the offense and defense of the user.¡± ¡°So, it can be used like Nen, but it isn¡¯t something produced by Nen, right?¡± ¡°Yes, The Armament Haki isn¡¯t produced by Nen, but the two are somewhat simr to each other.¡± ¡°Then,e again, I want to see which is better, this armament Haki, or Nen!¡± Netero eximed. ¡°Then, here Ie, Chairman!¡± An instantly shed out and appeared in front of Netero with Armament Haki covering his fist! Netero sent out a palm with Nen covering it and strengthening it. The ck fist and golden palm kept shing out as they collided at a high-speed, causing an explosion from Time to Time that could be heard all over the Association¡¯s building. An was using Soru and sh Steps at the same time, which resulted in extreme speed that left after images behind while Netero¡¯s speed didn¡¯t lose to the former. The ck Fist and Golden Palm collided for the hundredth time, but neither of them was hit. From Time to Time, A bodhisattva would block An¡¯s attacks, but despite that, An didn¡¯t cease his attacks. His greatest advantage in this fight is his body, which should be more durable than Netero¡¯s old aging body. Of course, if Netero was serious, An would be on the floor almost as soon as the fight started. An continued his attack, kicking and punching Netero with Armament Haki covering his limbs. Suddenly, An sent a flying sh by kicking the air using Rankyaku. The sh was ck, unlike the usual blue because An used Haki Along with it increasing its power. This attack should be enough to force Netero to use another get slightly serious. Netero¡¯s eyes shed slightly as a golden bodhisattva¡¯s arms suddenly appeared behind him and blocked the attack. At this Time, An stood in the air using Moon Walk as if waiting for an opportunity, and almost as soon as the attack collided with Netero¡¯s bodhisattva¡¯s palm, An rushed down. He sent another toward Netero¡¯s back. Feeling the attack from behind, Netero suddenly shed out, and in the next moment, the Rankyaku mmed on the ground, creating a deep gash on the ground. ¡°Hooh~ That seems dangerous.¡± Netero looked at the deep gully on the ground as if sighing in relief because he wasn¡¯t hit. An frowned slightly, as Netero¡¯s reaction was quite fast. Netero¡¯s avoiding the Rankyaku didn¡¯t mean he couldn¡¯t stop the attack. An wasn¡¯t that na?ve to think he could face Netero and defeat him. However, the power needed to dodge an attack was far less than the one needed to block it. From this, it is clear that Netero wasn¡¯t a brainless fighter. An started sending Rankyaku attacks all over the ce, hoping to prevent Netero from dodging. Sure enough, Netero¡¯s eyes shed as he sped his hands together. Immediately a faint golden light burst out from his palms, forming a curtain covering him. Boom! Boom! Boom! The Rankyaku shes continuously mmed into the curtain, which caused ripples as if the curtain was made of water, but nothing else happened, and the curtain remained strong. As soon as An touched the ground, he once again fierce kicked the air, and this Time, another sh quickly formed out and moved toward Netero at a high-speed. The sh assumed a bird shape as it moved toward Netero¡¯s golden curtain. ¡°Break it!¡± An¡¯s figure shed as he once again sent another sh with all of his power. Inside the Curtain, Netero¡¯s felt a slight pressure, but he didn¡¯t move, and in the end, the golden light around him repelled An¡¯s attackpletely. ¡°Sure enough, it failed.¡± Seeing this, An sighed. He used all of his power, but he still couldn¡¯t break through Netero¡¯s defense. However, An stopped that train of thoughts. After all, he was fighting the world¡¯s strongest here. Only a few people could even dream of matching him. Even though he was old and his power declined, his Nen was as strong as ever. ¡°Your moves are quite interesting and powerful. I was a little overwhelmed.¡± Netero said. He wasn¡¯t exaggerating, as he believed that An¡¯s techniques were quite interesting, fierce, and held a lot of power. And he could tell that none of his attacks used Nen. It¡¯s like another system of power independent of Nen. This made him feel strange, and he couldn¡¯t help asking An. ¡°An, can you tell me, what were those moves?¡± ¡°Of course.¡± An smiled slightly as he wasn¡¯t afraid that Netero could steal his moves. ¡°The Air sh I used just now is from what is called Rankyaku, from the six powers. There are six techniques, which are quite apparent from the name, and each one is different. The movement technique I use is called Soru, which generates quite the speed. The upgraded version of this technique is Moon Walk, which allows me to fly, and as for the other three techniques, I still didn¡¯t learn them yet, so I can¡¯t tell you about them.¡± ¡°Hehe, it¡¯s okay.¡± He admired An, who was unreserved about his abilities, and smiled slightly: ¡°Aren¡¯t you afraid that I will learn those techniques? Or do you have something to counter them?¡± An shook his head and said: ¡°If it was someone else, I would really worry, but if it¡¯s you, Chairman, I won¡¯t have to worry about that. Because you are stronger than I¡¯m, moreover, my techniques are suitable for me, I don¡¯t think others can learn them. Therefore, worrying about this wasn¡¯t necessary.¡± ¡®Hehehe, He¡¯s really good!!¡¯ Netero smiled and asked with Interest: ¡°Then, do you have any other abilities? Show me what you got.¡± ¡°Of course, I have. If Chairman wants to see, then I must go all out.¡± An showed confidence on his face, which meant he had an ace up his sleeve. ¡°Come on then. I will take it seriously.¡± Netero smiled. ¡°Here Ie!¡± In the next second, Cold air started filling the room as the mist formed out of nowhere. An¡¯s ace was the ability of his Devil Fruit. The first thing he needs to do is turn the battlefield into a natural advantage. Ice Field! With An as the center, Ice spread all over the room, freezing the ground and the walls around very quickly. The room turned into an Ice cube. In three seconds, the room waspletely frozen. The ground, walls, ceiling, corners, and anything in between were sealed in Ice. An looked at the freezer he created in satisfaction. He now had the home Advantage (Battlefield advantage). This is a battlefield specifically created to benefit and increase the power of his Ice Ice Fruit. An wasn¡¯t confident enough to defeat Netero, but he would try his best to do so. At this moment, Netero is standing on the Ice looking at the Ice covered room, and his face showed a serious expression, finally. Thanks everyone for your support. The HXH arc is getting quite interesting right now with fights and so on. I¡¯m enjoying it quite much and hope you all do as well.The author also confirmed world jumping as well for those askingabout it. Once again I thank you for your constant supportandments, especially Greycat, since he almostments on every novel and chapter, almost spoils every one of them with his theories, which ends up True most of the times. I know At least one person who hates you for that Greycat, in a good way, (can you guess who from the team?). So, I thank you very much, and everyone else, don¡¯t worry I¡¯m mentioning each one next, one by one xD! Chapter 110: 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva! Chapter 110: 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva! ¡°Ah! This is terrifying indeed! You turned the entire room into a world of Ice¡± Netero looked at the room with slight seriousness. He can feel the power in the Ice, and if an ordinary person was here, he would freeze in 10 minutes, enter aa in 30 minutes, and turn into an ice sculpture in a day. But Netero wasn¡¯t an ordinary person. Far from it, he was the strongest man in the world. Netero frowned as he could feel the pressure this time, but he was excited as well. ¡°Now, this Old Man can be serious.¡± The power An showed made him excited. He started flexing his muscles as if he was warming up. Netero is definitively a Martial Arts Idiot. After stretching for a while, his body adapted to the new environment. An stood still while maintaining some distance from Netero. This is a fair showdown. That¡¯s why An didn¡¯t attack when Netero was getting ready, or else he wouldn¡¯t get the reward from the system. ¡°Okay, An, I¡¯m warmed up. You can attack me with everything you have.¡± ¡°Okay then, here Ie, Chairman.¡± An looked at the excited Netero for a second before he made his move. Suddenly, Ice shot out of An¡¯s hands directly toward Netero, who was surprised, and although he was prepared for the fight, he couldn¡¯t react quickly to this attack. In an instant, he waspletely frozen inside a Ball. The Ice ball was crystal clear, and Netero¡¯s figure inside it was clear. At this time, Netero¡¯s Palm was already stretched as he prepared to counter the attack, but unfortunately, his physical condition wasn¡¯t at its peak due to age, so his reflex was slightly weaker than usual. The Power behind the Ice was terrifying as they froze Netero as soon as they touched him. This move was used by Aokiji when he froze the Whitebeard. The attack is called Ice Ball. Whitebeard and Netero both had something inmon. They were both old monsters. Therefore, this wasn¡¯t enough to freeze Neteropletely. In the next second, cracks appeared in the Ice Ball from inside out before shatteringpletely. ¡°Ah, that¡¯s really dangerous. I froze and almost couldn¡¯t get out,¡± Netero said after getting out of the Ice. ¡°You praise me, Chairman.¡± An didn¡¯t have time to chat with Netero as he immediatelyunched another attack. Partisan! Two Tridents formed from Ice before they tore through the air toward Netero, who wasn¡¯t caught by surprise this time as he brought his hand down. This movement wasn¡¯t aimed at the Tridents. It wasn¡¯t aimed at anything at all. But suddenly, a giant golden palm fell down and blocked the tridents. An didn¡¯t stop an attack and directly spread his hands and shouted. Ice Block: Ten Finger Bullets. In an instant, An¡¯s fingers turned into a machine gun as he shot Ice bullets out of them. Although these bullets were the size of a thumb, their speed and power were astonishing. Each bullet had enough power to prate rocks and severed limbs. Netero didn¡¯t block this time. Instead, he started dodging the attacks with elegant moves. ¡°Hahaha, this is exciting, again!¡± While evading An¡¯s bullets, Netero said happily. An knew that he must go all out now. ¡°Then here Ie again, Chairman.¡± Ice Saber! An opened his hand and a sword instantly formed in his hand. ¡°let¡¯s try melee attacks.¡± Soru, in the next instant, An appeared next to Netero and shed at Netero. Netero¡¯s quickly sent a palm out and blocked the Ice sword, but a shiver coursed through his body as he touched it. It seems the sword can send the coldness as well. Armament-type: Hardening, Leaf Strong Whirlwind! Taking advantage of Netero¡¯s surprise, An directly attacked the former¡¯s chest with a strong kick covered in Haki. Suddenly, Netero¡¯s eyes shed as a giant golden hand shed and blocked An¡¯s kick. An¡¯s expression changed as he eximed: ¡°What?!¡± He hurriedly used sh Steps and pulled back without hesitation. Just as he disappeared, a big golden hand fell down where he previously stood. If that Palm hit him, he would¡¯ve been ttened to the ground. The floor broke as the Ice Covering it cracked. An breathed in relief. Netero finally used his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva! If An didn¡¯t have Observation Haki, thatst attack would¡¯ve connected, and he wasn¡¯t sure if he would be able to stay alive after that. An¡¯splexion changed again as he perceived the slight fluctuation in Netero¡¯s body, which was a unique way for him to use his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva! Sure enough, in the next instant, a big golden hand moved toward him like a bulldozer. It seemed slow, but it was the fastest thing An saw until now. If he didn¡¯t know it wasing, he wouldn¡¯t have responded. Ice Wall! Suddenly, a huge, ten-meter-tall wall made of Ice rose in front of An. ¡°This is bad!¡± An knew that the wall couldn¡¯t hold in front of the giant Golden Palm and directly created two more walls. The Golden Palm broke the first wall easily, then shattered the second wall, and was on to the third. At this time, An concentrated most of his Armament Haki onto his hand as he clenched it into a fist. As soon as the third wall broke, An used all of his power and punched the Golden Palm. Lightning seemed to sh as the Fist and Palm collided. After ten seconds, An retreated while breathing heavily while Netero seemed unfazed. The 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva was worthy of its fame, but An blocked one attack from it. Still, An consumed too much energy in doing so, as he could tell that two-thirds of his stamina was gone blocking that attack. If he continued to fight with such intensity, An knew that 30 minutester, he will bepletely exhausted. Although Netero¡¯s physical body deteriorated due to age, the exact opposite happened to his Nen. The more time passes, the stronger Netero¡¯s Nen became. What surprised An greatly was Netero using 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva to fight him. Because as far as he knows, 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva was Netero¡¯s strongest Nen Ability. So Netero using it means that he regards An as a worthy opponent. Faced with a serious Netero, An knew that he mustn¡¯t spare any effort. Ice Block: Ground Thorns! An pped his hands on the ground, and directly coldness filled the ce. Netero could feel the air around him getting colder and was on guard while looking at the ground. His hunch was correct as Sharp spears suddenly emerged from the ground toward him. He instantly retreated back, avoiding them. But the spears didn¡¯t stop as they emerged more and more, chasing after Netero, who avoided them all. ¡°This is dangerous.¡± Netero stopped moving, and an Ice Spear directly approached him. In a few seconds, hundreds of spikes filled the room upying most of it. Netero realized that An wanted to corner him and defeat him in one move, so he no longer dodged. Instead, he jumped and sent a palm strike at the ground. Instantly, a huge golden hand emerged and struck the ground. Boom! The Ice spikes on the ground were sted away, and Ice crystals fell everywhere. The entire room shook violently under the might of Netero¡¯s Palm, and the Ice all around the room shook and shattered. An¡¯s pupil shrank at the power of the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva. No, this should be the real power of 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva! An created a huge Ice Wall in front of him to block the shockwave. After the shockwave passed, An looked around the room and was amazed by the might that single palm strike had. Thanks everyone for your support. The HXH arc is getting quite interesting right now with fights and so on. I¡¯m enjoying it quite much and hope you all do as well.The author also confirmed world jumping as well for those askingabout it. Once again I thank you for your constant supportandments. Now for the logical voice in thements, Night, your theories about power and plot are always the most logical, and always make sense although we are talking about things that don¡¯t make sense (anime and imaginary powers), which is weird!! But you¡¯rements are always fun to read and I enjoy replying to them!Fortunately, no one hates you for that, or at least, no one to my knowledge xDThank you very much for your support andments!! Chapter 111: Ice Mirrors Chapter 111: Ice Mirrors An didn¡¯t dare to look down on Netero with his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva out! He knew that Netero couldn¡¯t use killer moves against him, which was the best assurance he had. After a short break, An got up and continued his attacks. Rankyaku: Silver Fox form!! An kicked the air and sent an air sh that took a fox form. This was his original technique derived from the Rankyaku and swordsmanship. Netero pped the fox away, easily destroying it. Taking advantage of the time he bought, An used another version of Rankyaku. Rankyaku: Silver Wolves pack form! An quickly kicked five times, sending five shes that turned into wolves rushing toward Netero angrily. Netero¡¯s eyes brightened slightly as he looked at the wolves. ¡°Those attacks are good, but they can¡¯t work against this old man.¡± Netero looked at An in the distance before pping the wolves away with ease and smiled. ¡°Really? Let¡¯s see then, Chairman!¡± An sneered. He knew that the Rankyaku attacks couldn¡¯t hold a candle against Netero, but he only attacked to by time for his next move. Netero saw An¡¯s expression and felt a bad omen. He looked around to release that around him. Countless mirrors made of Ice sprung out from the ground, ceiling, and walls. There were hundreds of Mirrors and no apparent pattern to them as they filled the room. Those Ice Mirror were the same as normal mirrors. Netero could see his reflection on them. As an old man, Netero¡¯s eyes shouldn¡¯t be that good! Netero had a thoughtful look as he wondered what An nned to do. He could feel that An nned something, but he didn¡¯t know what exactly. Therefore, he raised his vignce to the highest level and looked at the Mirrors around him. At this time, An¡¯s figure breaks like a mirror before he appeared behind Netero,ing out of a random mirror like a ghost. As soon as he emerged out, An used Armament Haki to cover his leg and kicked Netero, who felt the danger toote. An took less than a blink to appear behind Netero, which caught thetter by surprise even though he was extremely vignt. Boom! Netero was sent flying. As he stabilized his figure, and before he could regain his calm, An appeared from another Mirror and attacked Netero¡¯s side. While approaching Netero, An used [Zetsu] to eliminate his presence and avoid Netero¡¯s senses. Once again, An¡¯s attack connected with Netero. An heard a dull crack sound, and he knew that some of Netero¡¯s bones broke. Netero¡¯s body was sent away like a cannonball, as An almost used all of his power in this punch. An knew that if he didn¡¯t go all out against an old monster like Netero, it would be like insulting him. ¡°Oops, it seems that attack was too much. I hope Chairman isn¡¯t angry.¡± After that punch, An didn¡¯t continue his attack. After all, he knew that if Netero took him seriously, he wouldn¡¯tst a second. He directly turned into Ice and hid inside the Mirror, intending to observe Netero¡¯s emotion before considering another attack. ¡°Oh, my old bones almost shattered.¡± At this time, Netero got up and said jokingly. Of course, he didn¡¯t take damage to that extent as he used Nen to block most of An¡¯s power and he was only slightly damaged. He was filled with joy as he felt real pain after so long. ¡°Well?¡± At this time, Netero realized that An¡¯s figure was gone again. But he guessed what An did. He could tell now that An was hiding in the Ice Mirrors, and by now, the old monster should¡¯ve probably concluded An¡¯s fruit ability. He also knew that An¡¯s power wasn¡¯t Nen but another systempletely. This kind of power is like a supernatural ability. ¡°Chairman, I¡¯m sorry, are you okay?¡± At this time, An¡¯s voice appeared from inside a Mirror. He was observing Netero¡¯s change, and as soon as he saw him not angry butughing instead, he directly spoke. ¡®Did I hit him too hard and made him silly?¡¯ Of course, An was joking. He knew the real reason for Netero tough. It¡¯s probably because no one was able to actually hit Netero for a long time. Hearing An¡¯s voice, Netero turned around and replied: ¡°Hahaha, This old man is okay. It¡¯s just that I haven¡¯t felt this kind of pain for a long time now.¡± ¡®So it¡¯s really like that, huh!¡¯ An once again spoke: ¡°Chairman, do we continue the fight?¡± ¡°Of course, we need to do that. It¡¯s been a long time since I could have this much fun.¡± Netero stretched his arms excitedly. ¡°Well then, be careful, chairman!¡± An kindly said. ¡°Hahaha,e on, this old man will be serious.¡± As soon as Netero¡¯s voice fell, An appeared behind him again. Armament-Type: Hardening! His fist was covered in Haki as he punched. Netero avoided the attack by jumping back without even looking behind. He looked at the Ice Mirrors vigntly as he knew that An would appear from one of them. An was imitating Haku¡¯s Demonic Mirroring Ice Crystals Technique. And since An is an Ice human, he had more control over Ice than Haku. So, the Ice Mirrors can be easily repaired and rebuilt, unlike Haku¡¯s. As for his speed, An almost reached teleportation, as he can move between one Mirror and another in less than 0.3 seconds. This caused an after-image effect as An¡¯s figure appeared into all of the Mirrors, making it harder for Netero to determine his exact location. Suddenly, nunched another surprise attack as his body emerged from a Mirror on top of Netero¡¯s head. He was holding an Ice Sword in his hand, intending on piercing Netero¡¯s shoulder. However, as soon as the sword touched Netero, immense Nen covered him as he relied on it to block the attack andunch his own attack. An already stopped attacking by the time Neterounched his own attack and directly teleported inside a Mirror in the wall and waited for another opportunity. He knew very well that with Netero¡¯s wits, he could adapt to any situation and deal with it almost instantly. If heunched another attack directly, he knew that Netero wouldn¡¯t give him another opportunity. Indeed, Netero already regards An as a serious opponent, and therefore, he won¡¯t give An other opportunities to attack him freely. Once An appears, he will instantly attack. Thanks everyone for your support. The HXH arc is getting quite interesting right now with fights and so on. I¡¯m enjoying it quite much and hope you all do as well.The author also confirmed world jumping as well for those askingabout it. Once again I thank you for your constant supportandments. Thest person I will mention today is someone we all know, and I will use his catchphrase, ¡®Interesante!¡¯ It¡¯s been a long time since I saw yourment man, and I hope to see it again, I Miss the always first InteresanteThank you again for brightening our days!! Chapter 112: Glacier Dragon Chapter 112: cier Dragon ¡°Hahaha, Sly brat, are you hiding again?¡± After destroying the Ice Mirror on the ceiling, Netero knew that he didn¡¯t hit Ana as thetter must¡¯ve hidden in another Mirror. ¡°Those really can really make me dizzy!¡± As he said this, Netero sent a palm strike toward the Mirrors on the wall while controlling his strength to not destroy the wall. Boom! Boom! Boom! The Ice Mirrors covering the walls shattered within two seconds, but the wall remained intact. This was Netero¡¯s control that reached an extreme height. Soon the Ice Mirrors that were destroyed rbined into new Ice Mirrors. The most annoying aspect of the Ice Mirror is that as long as there is Ice, the Mirrors can be rebuilt indefinitely. Therefore, this technique can be called: Ice Mirror Reassemble! Netero looked at the Ice mirror that was reassembled and froze for a second before he said: ¡°This ability is really troublesome.¡± He didn¡¯t bother destroying them again because he could tell that no matter how much he destroys them, they will just appear again. It was a waste of energy. Therefore, his only choice was to look for An¡¯s real body and strike. But An didn¡¯t appear again since thest attack. Netero knew that An was still inside the room if the Ice Mirrors were any indication. The room was quiet, and Netero could even hear his heartbeat. Netero¡¯s hearing was very sensitive. He could hear the jumps clearly. An was changing location from time to time to avoid being detected by Netero, and because he is moving in the form of Ice, Netero couldn¡¯t see him. An also knew that even if he made a small movement, Netero would be on him in no time. Therefore, An didn¡¯t rush. Instead, he waited for opportunities in Guerri warfare. In a head-on battle, the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva was too fast, and An couldn¡¯t avoid them even with all of his skills. After a few minutes, An noticed Netero rxing slightly and decisively attacked him. Suddenly, the cold air hit Netero¡¯s body and instantly froze him. Netero won¡¯t take long before he breaks free again, at most, three seconds. No one second was enough. Netero needed some effort to get out of the Ice, and in that time, An adjusted his breath and recovered his strength. He knew that the best way to fight Netero is by persisting as he wasn¡¯t strong enough to defeat Netero currently. In short, as long as Netero can¡¯t hit him, he won¡¯t be defeated. So, he needed to prolong the fight until one of them is beaten, or Netero stops the fight. At this time, An¡¯s face changed slightly as he looked at the Frozen Netero. Netero squinted his eyes, and then cracks formed from inside the Ice till itpletely broke. As soon as the Ice fell, Netero jumped out. ¡°That¡¯s really cold. I thought I would freeze to death.¡± Netero moved his arms and neck as the cold made his blood boil. At this time, his face changed as he looked up, only to see a huge pyramid of Ice above his head. The point of the Pyramid was facing his direction as it dropped down. In the distance, An waved his hand down as he controlled the Ice to m Netero directly. (T/L: For the first time, our long-lost friend made its appearance in our novels!!) It was as if Mount Tai was pressing down on Netero! Netero¡¯s eyes shed as he stretched his hands toward the Ice Pyramid. The veins in his hand bulged directly. He caught the Pyramid with both hands and said: ¡°Back to you.¡± Netero directly threw the Pyramid at An, who jumped up and punched it with Haki. The Pyramid broke apart, and at this time, An felt a huge pressure released from Netero. Looking up, An saw the huge statue of 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva behind Netero. An¡¯s face became serious. ¡®Coming!¡¯ An¡¯s Observation Haki was stressed to the extreme as he almost foresaw Netero¡¯s strike. Sure enough, Netero¡¯s attack came in the next second. The Huge 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva statue followed his hand gesture and attacked An. The Golden Palm carried an extremely fierce momentum. Boom! However, An managed to dodge the strike at thest instant. ¡°What a quick reaction!! Did he manage to notice my attack?¡± Netero¡¯s eyes shed with surprise. Only a few people can avoid his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva strike, and he can count them on one hand. Unless he foresaw this attack, it¡¯s almost impossible to avoid it. But An did it, which shows his great ability to predict his opponent¡¯s moves and his great reflexes. Otherwise, even if he managed to predict the attack, his body won¡¯t keep up with his mind. Netero greatly appreciates An, and that¡¯s why he must finish the fight. ¡°Next will be a serious attack.¡± Netero folded his hands together, and then each hand-formed an orchid.¡± (T/L: This gesture is performed by pressing the tip of the thumb against the tip of the middle finger to form an oval and raising the other fingers slightly, so they are curved above the middle finger in a manner that resembles the petals of an orchid.) Then, the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva behind Netero moved. Each palm of the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva was different. No matter how fast An¡¯s reaction was, Netero didn¡¯t think that An can escape. Netero raised his fingers one after another as the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva behind released a bright golden light. In the next instant, a golden wave of energy destroyed all of the mirrors in the room. Without the mirrors, An didn¡¯t have anywhere to hide. After pushing An out, Netero decisivelyunched a fierce attack. Although An was aware of the danger due to his Observation Haki, he had no time to dodge, and with a bang, he was bombarded and sent flying and finally the wall. However, An was surprised to find that his Elementalization can¡¯t make him immune to the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva attack. At this moment, Netero sent another attack, and the golden hand pped An. Boom! The was sunk before it sted to pieces. ¡°Well?¡± After this palm strike, Netero looked uncertain because he couldn¡¯t find An. ¡°Did I miss?¡± ¡°No, it should¡¯ve hit him. He couldn¡¯t have avoided it.¡± ¡°Hm?¡± Netero¡¯s face suddenly changed as An¡¯s figure reformed from the Ice. ¡°This is¡­¡± Netero looked at this with astonishment. Just at the moment he was about to get hit, An decided to try something. Since his body can¡¯t change into Ice when he is hit, can he be immune if he turned himself willingly?! He wasn¡¯t sure why his body doesn¡¯t react on its own against the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva, but when he turned into Ice, the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva didn¡¯t hurt him. Maybe it was because Nen is life energy, An was sure. Netero suddenly said: ¡°An, your ability is really convenient. Not only can you make Ice, but your body can turn into Ice as well. It seems like I have to show my real skills.¡± ¡°Come on then, Chairman.¡± An was also prepared to do his best. cier Dragon. Suddenly, an imposing Dragon made of Ice emerged out and charged out toward Netero. At this time, the Golden Light of the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva brightened as Netero waved his hand toward the cier Dragon like a knife. The cier Dragon was directly hit by the Golden hand, and a loud bang resounded all over. Thanks for the Support!! We¡¯re currently at chapter 176 on Patreon for those interested!! Chapter 113: Eight Inner Gates Technique Chapter 113: Eight Inner Gates Technique Netero has lived for a long time, over a hundred years, and his interest in most things already diminished greatly. There was only one thing that he was interested in right now: his pursuit of Martial Arts. Although An didn¡¯t satisfy himpletely, it was a long time since he felt so excited about a battle. The battle between the twosted until dawn. As soon as the first sunray pierced the sky, the battle came to an end. The oue of the battle wasn¡¯t known to anyone except the two of them. However, for the next few days, Netero had a cold, while An couldn¡¯t move from his bed. The blows by the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva caused enough damage to crack his bones and tear some of his muscles. Through the Battle, An realized that his Devil Fruit couldn¡¯t protect him and make him immune to Nen Attacks. He needed to turn into his element on his own before he is hit, or else he would be hurt. Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva was a pure Nen ability, which made An¡¯s elementalization ineffective. After the Battle, An received his reward: The Eight Inner Gates. The gates were as follow: First Gate: The Gate of Opening! Second Gate: The Gate of Healing! The Third Gate: The Gate of Life! The Fourth Gate: The Gate of Pain! The Fifth Gate: The Gate of Limit! The Sixth Gate: The Gate of View! The Seventh Gate: The Gate of Wonder! The Eighth Gate: The Gate of Death! Opening each Gate would release great power. An wasn¡¯t a Ninja and didn¡¯t have Chakra, but since the system adapts every technique to him, each Gate will release the energy contained in his Cells. Therefore, An won¡¯t be afraid of death if he trained really hard to get his body to its peak and opened the Eighth Gate. The power inside his cells is different than chakra, so even if he exhausts it, he won¡¯t die but will only be weakened. A human¡¯s body contained 30 trillion cells, and since An¡¯s arrival to the Hunter x Hunter world, his body got stronger and stronger, and now, his body should have triple or quadruple that amount in his body. Therefore, as long as he got stronger, opening the Eight Gates won¡¯t pose any harm to him. However, this didn¡¯t mean that he can use it constantly, as it always puts a great burden on his body. With his current strength, even without the Eight Gates, An could count the number of people that could harm him on both hands. After resting for two days, An took Hancock out to try the power of Eight Inner Gates. He went to a rocky valley and stood on top of a rock. Not far from him, Hancock looked at him and asked: ¡°Why did you bring this Empress here?¡± Hancock asked. ¡°Just watch.¡± As he said this, An clenched his fist and started concentrating on opening the First Gate. Gate of Opening: Open! An gave a low shout, and suddenly huge energy burst out of his body. Looking at the steam of energy emerging from his body, An didn¡¯t panic. Instead, he was overjoyed. This meant that he seeded in opening the first Gate. Although it was only the first Gate, An could feel that he became faster and stronger. The first Gate is basically lifting the limit of the brain, making the body exert 100% of its power. In a blink of an eye, An crossed ten meters without using any technique. ¡°So Fast!!¡± An wasn¡¯t surprised. An couldn¡¯t imagine his power if he opened the Eighth Gate. Not far away, Hancock saw An¡¯s speed and the energy released from his body and was surprised. An decisively opened the second Gate. ¡°Gate of Healing: Open!¡± An¡¯s body released stronger energy, and the steam around him doubled. The second Gate can lift the fatigue limit of the body and muscle, overloading the strength that the body can exert. Sure enough, An¡¯s speed doubled, and the fatigue caused by the first Gate¡¯s opening disappeared. An didn¡¯t feel any pressure after opening the second Gate, so he decisively chooses to open the third Gate. ¡°Gate of Life: Open!¡± After opening the third Gate, An¡¯s body turned red, and a green light was emitted from his body along with the steam. The third Gate was thest safe ce in the Eight Inner Gate Technique. From the fourth Gate onward, the body could be damaged. Therefore, as long as he stays in the third Gate state, his body won¡¯t be damaged. An was a lunatic whenes to power, and even though he knew that he could damage his body if he went further, he still opened the fourth Gate. ¡°Gate of Pain: Open!¡± After opening the fourth Gate, the power and speed are greatly enhanced, but the body will be damaged from using it. An felt the pain in his body and gritted his teeth, but he was strong, and he wouldn¡¯t relent because of a small injury. Although he only opened the first four gates, his power increased several times over. Boom! Boom! Boom! An suddenly moved around the rocky valley so fast that he seemed a blur to Hancock. He didn¡¯t use anything, no Soru, no sh steps, no Nen. All of this was pure speed granted to him when he opened the fourth Gate. ¡°This power is great if I opened all eight gates¡­¡± An was amazed. If he indeed opened the eighth Gate, then he wouldn¡¯t be afraid of Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva. The Eight Inner Gate Technique was a forbidden technique because it puts a great burden on the body and harms the user. An could cope easily in his current state, but if he were to open the fifth Gate, the damage and pain he felt would be doubled. If he opened the fifth Gate, he would reach the speed of sound. After closing the gates, An suddenly felt soreness and fatigue overwhelm him. Ignoring the fatigue, An felt hungry. ¡°Let¡¯s go eat.¡± An took Hancock to the restaurant fromst time. Although Hancock was astonished by An¡¯s power just now, she didn¡¯t ask him about it and just followed him obediently. The restaurant manager, Robert, was standing in front of the door, and as soon as he saw An and Hancock, he directly led them to the best table in the restaurant. However, An didn¡¯t notice that Robert ran outside after leading them in and made a call. Half an hourter, An felt full and directly took Hancock and went out of the restaurant. Before he got far, several ck cars blocked the road, and dozens of ck-suited men wearing sunsses surrounded An and Hancock. Then a blond young man wearing a white suit got out from one of the cars. This guy is surprisingly the guy An beatst time in the restaurant. The Superstar Edward Wells. Getting out of the car, Edward was apanied by men, one short and one tall. ¡°Huh, don¡¯t think about leaving this ce.¡± Edward looked at An coldly and solemnly said: ¡°This time, I will get my revenge.¡± An didn¡¯t put this small guy in his eye, but he got annoyed now. He was in a good mood today, so he said: ¡°I will give you guys three seconds to get out of the way.¡± Hearing An¡¯s tone, Edward angrily roared: ¡°Get him!¡± Suddenly, an invisible power emerged out of An¡¯s body, directly making all the bodyguards faint. Edward panicked and directly called the two men behind him: ¡°Tall guy, short guy, it¡¯s up to you guys.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s teach that brat a lesson and take his money.¡± The short man said, and the tall guy nodded and ran straight toward An. An looked at them and knew they weren¡¯t normal people and were slightly capable. [Ding! Make a choice.] [1: Kill the tall guy in a second. Reward: 50 Million jenny.] [2: Kill the tall man and the short man in a second, and eliminate the superstar Edward Wells. Reward: Mysterious Treasure Chest.] [3: Be a good person and let them go, then take Hancock away. Reward: A sports car.] Thanks for the Support!! We¡¯re currently at chapter 176 on Patreon for those interested!! Chapter 114: Great Reward Chapter 114: Great Reward Even if there was no system reward, An already nned on dealing with those guys. Watching the short and tall guys approaching him, An looked at them with disdain. They weren¡¯t worthy for him to get serious. After all, he is someone who fought a slightly serious Netero. ¡°Be careful. That guy isn¡¯t an ordinary person.¡± Seeing An¡¯s sneer, the short man felt panic. He heard about An¡¯s ability to freeze his opponents or make them faint without doing anything, which he just witnessed. ¡°Let me take the lead. I will hold him down while you attack from behind.¡± The tall guy said. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s do this.¡± The short man agreed. Boom! Nen erupted from both of them, and their speed increased. They were both enhancers, and both were confident in their skills. Soru! An rushed up toward the Tall man and appeared next to him. The short man¡¯s face changed as he shouted: ¡°Be careful!!¡± However, his reminder was toote. Armament-type: Hardening! Boom! An directly punched the tall guy, rendering his internal organs into mush, killing him on the spot. The short man¡¯s eyes widened and directly reacted. He realized that the person they wanted to kill was more powerful than they expected and directly tried to escape. ¡°Damned monster!¡± The short man was scared! ¡°You want to run?¡± An sneered coldly. ¡°Let¡¯s how far you can run.¡± An raised his hand and pointed it at the escaping man. Partisan! An Ice Trident appeared in front of him before heunched it at the short man, who tried avoiding it but was instantly frozen. Rankyaku! An sent a quick kick toward him, directly cutting the short man in half. The short fell down and shattered. After killing both short and tall guys, Hancock reminded: ¡°That guy ran away using a car.¡± ¡°Hmph! He can¡¯t escape.¡± Frozen Ice Field! From An¡¯s feet, Ice spread out rapidly along the road, freezing hundreds of meters instantly. Soon, the road became as smooth as crystals, and Edward Wells, who drove away, was quickly overtaken by the Ice. The sports car slid on the Ice and directly mmed into a light pole. Edward wasn¡¯t seriously injured as he got out of the car. An shed and appeared in front of him with his hand lifted up. ¡°Wait, Wait, I will give you money, just let me go, okay?¡± An snorted coldly. Regardless of Edward¡¯s begging, he will die tonight. After eliminating Edward, the system handed over the reward to An. [Ding! You obtained a Mysterious Treasure Chest. Do you want to open it now?¡± ¡°Open it.¡± An wasn¡¯t worried and directly opened it. [Ding! You acquired Special Ability: Heaven¡¯s Eye.] ¡®Heaven¡¯s Eye?¡¯ An was surprised for a second. He didn¡¯t expect to get another Nen ability from a treasure chest. This was really unexpected for him. An directly used Nen and tried using this ability. As he activated it, an Eye suddenly manifested above his head and floated in the air. Heaven¡¯s eye wasn¡¯t that of a human but more of a cat. This ability shared its vision with the user, so whatever the eye sees, An can see in real-time transmission. Heaven¡¯s eye can see five-time better than normal humans, and it also didn¡¯t have any blind spot. In other words, I can see in a 360 degree. Those are the most important functions of Heaven¡¯s eye. It can be used for spying and detecting enemies, but it needed a huge amount of concentration, or else it will disappear. An concentrated and brought the eye toward the Hunter Association, wanting to see what Netero was doing. Soon An spotted Netero¡¯s figure on the 98th floor of the Association building. He was in a meeting with Pariston. An didn¡¯t keep an eye there as he knew that Netero would definitively notice it. Netero¡¯s senses were insane after all. Sure enough, Netero turned his head toward Heaven¡¯s eyes, but fortunately, An already canceled the ability. In general, this ability wasn¡¯t useful for An, but it¡¯s notpletely useless. An remembered that he also had the Magic Jar. He took it outside and broke it. [Ding! Congrattion on getting an S-ss Ninjutsu Experience card.] An was stunned. ¡°Great! I can use S ss Ninjutsu!¡± An picked up the Experience card and couldn¡¯t wait to check it out. The Ninjutsu in the Card was Kirin, the Lightning Ninjutsu developed and used by Sasuke Uchiha. This Ninjutsu was quite strong since it draws its power from Nature. An was really excited about getting this skill. Right now, he had the Ice Ice Fruit, Armament Haki, and Taijutsu and movement skills. Kirin is a great addition to his arsenal. Although he can only use it once with the card, An knew that having it is the same as having a killer move. When encountering someone he can¡¯t defeat, An can use this card which can seriously injure him or even kill him. Two dayster, An visited Gon and found that he had basically recovered from his injuries and asked Hanzo to help him with the discharge procedure. After leaving the Hospital, Hanzo proposed a spar with Gon and made An the referee. As for why Hanzo wanted topete with Gon, the former had two reasons. The first one is that he has been obeying An¡¯s order by apanying Gon in the Hospital, which was quite boring, so he wanted to vent this boredom on someone, and this person happened to be Gon. The second reason is simple. He wanted to see how much Gon can improve when he uses Nen. An knew that Hanzo was stronger than Gon initially. But since Gon learned Nen, the gap between them wasn¡¯t as big anymore. Therefore, Hanzo couldn¡¯t beat An instantly. In the spar, Hanzo was very aggrieved since Gon was so stubborn that he didn¡¯t admit defeat no matter what. However, the spar really opened Hanzo¡¯s eyes to the wonders of Nen. Especially since Gon was an Enhancer, and after using Ren to defend, Hanzo couldn¡¯t even scratch him with his sword. This made Hanzo more determined to learn Nen. An didn¡¯t let them finish the spar since they won¡¯t give up anytime soon, so he ended it. After the contest, Hanzo asked An about his promise to teach him Nen, and An directly agreed and contacted Kurapika. A dayter, Kurapika arrived with Leorio and took him to the Hotel room An was staying in to take Nen lessons. An was looking forward to the rewards he will receive from the system when he teaches them the Basics of Nen, like the Flying sh from teaching Hanzo. When he teaches Kurapika and Leorio, he will get 12,000 points in Nen. This reward was already generous. Therefore, An naturally didn¡¯t spare any effort as he carefully tutored the three of them. As for Killua, since his father wanted him to return home, An wasn¡¯t able to teach him for now. Thanks for the Support!! We¡¯re currently at chapter 176 on Patreon for those interested!! Chapter 115: Spider Appears Chapter 115: Spider Appears Time flew by. Three months exactly passed while An taught Kurapika, Leorio, and Hanzo Nen, and finally, they mastered the four basics of Nen. An received his rewards which are the 12,000 Point increase in Nen and the flying sh attack. As for the advanced Nen application, An didn¡¯t teach them that yet because Nen needs time and a gradual process of learning. Therefore, An believed that a strong foundation is the best he can do for them now. During this period, Gon wasn¡¯t staying idle as An took charge of his training to further his arsenal. An¡¯s special training was rough as he was Gon¡¯s sparring partner. At first, Gon couldn¡¯t keep up with An¡¯s speed, but he got better over time and could now barely react to An. This was a huge improvement. ording to An, Gon¡¯s physical strength was now close to Killua. As for Hancock, she just always stood beside An without doing much, and after a while, she was interested in Nen. An was stingy and took the initiative to teach her Nen. Since her talent was extremely high, she quickly mastered the basics of Nen quickly. A few dayster, Kurapika, Hanzo, and Leorio¡¯s training came to an end. Each of them expressed their sincere gratitude for An¡¯s teaching. At this time, Gon stopped his special training and proposed to An to go find Killua. ¡°An, I¡¯m going to find Killua. Are youing with me?¡± [Ding! Make A Choice] [1: ept Gon¡¯s invitation and go find Killua together. Reward: Teigu-March of the Dead: Yatsufusa!] [2: Refuse Gon¡¯s proposal and separate for the time being. Reward: Teigu- Cutter of Creation: Extase!] ¡®Teigu?!¡¯ An was extremely happy seeing the rewards. Both options gave him a Teigu. This means it didn¡¯t matter if he went with Gon or not. He will get a Teigu. However, now the problem was which one should he chose. Yatsufusa was a de with a ck scabbard belonging to Kurame. Anyone who is killed by it can be a body controlled by its special ability. The limit number is eight corpses. The disadvantage of this Teigu is the burden it puts on the body the more corpses it controls. The second Teigu was Extase. A scissor-shaped Teigu said to cut anything in the world. But only the inner de of the Teigu can actually have the cutting effect. The disadvantage of this Teigu was its flexibility. After thinking about it for a while, An finally decided on Yatsufusa. Since he is a swordsman, he can use Yatsufusa better along with Shusui. When Gon heard that An was going with him, he was overjoyed. Since An is going with him, he wasn¡¯t worried anymore. ¡°Kurapika, do you want to go with us?¡± Gon turned to Kurapika and asked. Kurapika shook his head and said: ¡°Sorry, although I also want to find Killua, I still have things to do.¡± An knew that Kurapika was going to find the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan and didn¡¯t ask much. Although they had a teacher and student rtionship and were good friends, Kurapika took his Tribe¡¯s destruction personally and wouldn¡¯t ask anyone for help to achieve his revenge. ¡°What about you, Leorio?¡± ¡°Sorry¡­¡± Leorio touched his head and said: ¡°I still haven¡¯t finished my studies and can¡¯t apany you guys.¡± Gon sighed. He was too na?ve as he hoped his friends would go with him. ¡°Hanzo, what about you?¡± ¡°Well, let me think about it. I already got the hunter license, now I already learned Nen, so I think I should go back to the vige.¡± ¡°Back to the vige?¡± An asked ¡°This is where I grew and taught like a Ninja. It¡¯s a very mysterious ce. If you want, then I can bring you there to take a look.¡± ¡°Well, if I have an opportunity, I will visit your ninja Vige, Hanzo.¡± An was quite interested in meeting the Ninjas of this world. Hanzo said: ¡°Okay then, bring Gon with you.¡± ¡°Goodbye, Hanzo.¡± Gon and the others waved goodbye to Hanzo, who became their friend in the past three months. After a while, Kurapika also stood up and said: ¡°Okay, guys, I¡¯m leaving as well. An, Gon, and Leorio let¡¯s meet again.¡± Leorio also stood up and said: ¡°Well then, I should go back to school then.¡± Seeing them leaving, Gon was a little depressed: ¡°Kurapika, Leorio, I hope we can see each other again.¡± ¡°We will.¡± Kurapika and Leorio nodded at the same time, and An said: ¡°Take care.¡± ¡°Well, you guys take care as well.¡± Kurapika waved goodbye and left with Leorio. Gon was a little bit down because of this, So An directly cheered up: ¡°Gon, today¡¯s separation is only temporary. You will meet them in the future. Everyone is working hard for their goals, so don¡¯t feel disappointed about that. Before you meet them again, you have to reach your own goal as well.¡± Gon said: ¡°Although I don¡¯t fully understand, I will work hard.¡± At this time, Gon suddenly thought of something important and asked: ¡°By the way, where is Killua¡¯s home?¡± ¡°Leave that to me.¡± Although An wasn¡¯t sure about the ce, it wasn¡¯t hard to find the Zoldycks using his identity as a Hunter. An also remembered the Zoldycks who lives on top of Kukuroo mountain. There are avable transport means like trains and nes toward that ce. But using trains or ships would take a long time, So An directly booked a ne directly. Although a ne ticket was more expensive than trains or ships, it didn¡¯t bother An. After buying three tickets for himself, Gon, and Hancock, An took both of them out for dinner. When they arrived at the Hotel¡¯s lobby, the manager greeted them. ¡°An-san, ady just asked me to give you this.¡± The manager handed a ck suitcase to An. Although An was a bit confused, he took the suitcase. He was curious about it but didn¡¯t open it immediately. He looked at the manager and said: ¡°Do you know where the person who gave me this suitcase is?¡± The manager said: ¡°Thedy left the hotel after giving me the suitcase and instruction.¡± ¡°Is she alone?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°How long has it been since she gave it to you?¡± ¡°About five or six minutes.¡± ¡°What are her characteristics?¡± ¡°She is a very youngdy wearing a light white short kimono with a purple belt around her waist. She is petite and cute.¡± Hearing this, An nodded: ¡°Okay, I see.¡± After this, An took 10,000 Jenny and gave them to the manager as a tip. After that, he looked at Gon and Hancock and said: ¡°Hancock, you and Gon go to the restaurant. First, I will catch upter.¡± After saying this, An looked around the scare and didn¡¯t see any woman matching the manager¡¯s description. An directly activated his Heaven¡¯s Eye to look for this woman. He didn¡¯t activate it in the open since he needs great concentration to use it. Instead, he went into a remote ce. The eye was like a drone that flew into the air, looking around. Suddenly, he found the woman outside a caf¨¦ two Kilometer away, and when the eye was 100 meters away from her, An could clearly see the woman. His face was stunned as he knew who that was. That was Machi. ¡®Why did the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan appear here?¡¯ Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 116: Genjutsu Part 1 Chapter 116: Genjutsu Part 1 An didn¡¯t immediately cancel his Heaven¡¯s Eye. After observing Machi for a while, he didn¡¯t see any other member of the spiders. She was dressed the exact same way the hotel manager described her, which made him certain that machi was the one who left the suitcase for him. But there is a problem. He didn¡¯t know what is inside the suitcase. An decided to open the suitcase and take a look. Even if there is something dangerous inside, An was confident that he could react quickly. However, it seems like he was overly cautious. After opening the box, he found money inside with a note. It was a message that said: ¡°I¡¯m Chrollo. These are the one hundred million Jenny that I promised before.¡± Seeing the note, An remembered the deal with Chrollo in the Exam. An smiled. He didn¡¯t expect Chrollo would keep his end of the deal and send 100 million Jenny. However, the question was, why didn¡¯t the spiders give him the money directly? An thought for a bit and concluded that Machi didn¡¯t want to show her face. An directly put the money in his storage ring. After that, he looked at Machi again. Machi was inside a coffee sitting as if waiting for someone. She ordered a cup of tea and looked at the scene outside as if enjoying it. Just when An was about to leave, the System stopped him. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Kill Machi, and be an Enemy with the Ryodan. Reward: Paramecia Devil Fruit, Cut Cut Fruit.] [2: Take the initiative to talk with Machi and make her have a deep impression of you. Reward: Light Light Fruit experience card!] ¡®What?!¡¯ Seeing the options, An was a little shocked. He wasn¡¯t Kurapika. There is no hatred between him and the Ryodan, apart from the conflict with Uvogin and Pakunoda during the test. Now, if he kills Machi for the devil fruit, it would just make him the Ryodan¡¯s target. But he wasn¡¯t a demon who would kill needlessly. He could kill Machi easily, but he had no reason to kill her. Even if he got the Devil fruit, he wouldn¡¯t be able to eat it since he already got one, and there is no need to be an enemy of the Spiders. The Second option was better since the reward was an experience card for one of the top devil fruits. Even if that ability can only be used once, it would be a good trump card. Therefore, An decided on the second option. Making Machi remember him and have a deep impression of him won¡¯t be easy. Even though she looked cute, she was cold-hearted. It wasn¡¯t an easy task, but An had away. There are many ways to make someone have a deep impression of you. And An knew of those ways. But he still hesitated, the first method was rough and will hurt Machi to make her remember him, and the other one is sneaking toward her and lifting her skirt up before giving her butt a good p and run away. But that would make her pester him almost every day, and it will cause quite a headache for him. It was the way to gain a stalker who wanted to kill you. As for crushing her using strength, it will make her ufortable, but it will make her remember him. An already formed a n in his head and immediately released Heaven¡¯s Eye and walked toward Machi. Machi was sitting in a coffee, quietly drinking tea, and eating a dessert cake, but suddenly she noticed someone approaching. A handsome young man was approaching her. An stood in front of Machi and asked: ¡°Do you mind if I sit here?¡± ¡°I mind,¡± Machi said indifferently. Although the young man was handsome and an ordinary woman couldn¡¯t resist him, she wasn¡¯t an ordinary woman. An didn¡¯t seem to hear her words and pulled a chair and sat down in front of Machi. Machi frowned and said: ¡°There are many seats here.¡± ¡°But I want to sit here. I can¡¯t?¡± An¡¯s willfulness made Machi unhappy: ¡°I will give you three seconds to move away.¡± ¡°What if I refuse?¡± Machi didn¡¯t answer, but she started counting down in her head. 3 2 1 As the three seconds passed, she immediately attacked An. However, something strange happened, An¡¯s figure disappeared. Machi was shocked, and before she could react, she was horrified to find tree branches growing from below her and restraining her movements. In the blink of an eye, she was bound to a tree,pletely restricted. Machi was surprised. Only a short second passed since she attacked An, but in that second, she was already bound to a tree. An used a Genjutsu on Machi, Tree binding death technique. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 116: Genjutsu Part 2 Chapter 116: Genjutsu Part 2 To people outside, Machi seemed suddenly nervous, as if it was because the young man was pestering her. An was sitting in his seat without moving. ¡°Damn it, who the hell is that guy?¡± Machi, who was still inside the Illusion, couldn¡¯t help wondering as she tried to free herself. ¡°A$$hole! Let me go.¡± Machi angrily yelled. An smiled darkly and said: ¡°It¡¯s easy to do that, but let me ask first, don¡¯t you know me?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know, let me go.¡± Machi gritted her teeth. ¡°If you don¡¯t know, why would you send money for Chrollo to me?¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, Machi was taken aback. She seemed to understand something and said:¡± So you are An, the one Chief talked about?¡± ¡°Yes, that¡¯s me,¡± An said. Machi replied angrily: ¡°I¡¯m just taking a trip to give you the money, Chief, promise you, and I¡¯m not interested in knowing you, let me go.¡± ¡°It¡¯s okay. You will remember me now.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t want to remember you. Let me go.¡± Machi angrily said. ¡°You don¡¯t have to resist; you must remember me. And In order for you to do so, I must do something.¡± An took out a paintbrush and put it on Machi¡¯s face, drawing something¡­ The people looking at the two just saw An get upholding a paintbrush and drew something on Machi¡¯s face. In Machi¡¯s mind, she was restrained by the tree branches and wasn¡¯t able to move. Machi angrily shouted: ¡°A$$hole, what are you doing, stop this instant.¡± However, even if she shouted with everything she got, An didn¡¯t seem to hear her. ¡°Don¡¯t get excited. I¡¯m just doing some makeup for you.¡± An smiled. After a while, An stopped his movement and said: ¡°It¡¯s done. It¡¯s looking good.¡± ¡°A$$hole!¡± Machi¡¯s face was matching a tigress at this moment. However, no matter how fierce she was, she wasn¡¯t able to break free from the Illusion. ¡°Okay, I¡¯m leaving first. By the way, if you see Chrollo, tell him I¡¯ve received the money.¡± An directly turned around and left. He believed that with this, Machi would remember him. Soon after An left, the Illusion holding Machi dropped. She nced around and couldn¡¯t see any big trees around, and nothing was holding her from start to finish. She immediately understood what happened. She was inside an illusion. She felt ashamed. The more she thought about it, the more shamed she felt, and that shame quickly converted into anger. She looked around and found many people pointed at her andughing. She took out a mirror and looked at her reflection, and found out that she was wearing smokey makeup. If it was pretty, she wouldn¡¯t mind it, but she looked like a ghost. Wiping off the makeup, she wanted to vent her anger, and she found a few people mocking her. In a few seconds, seven or eight people died. But it wasn¡¯t enough for Maki to vent her anger. ¡°A$$hole, I won¡¯t let you go.¡± Machi gritted her teeth and clenched her small fists as she remembered An¡¯s smile. On the other hand, An received his reward. [Ding! You sessfully made Machi remember you. Reward: Light Light Fruit experience card.] A golden card suddenly appeared in An¡¯s hand as he nced at it. This card can only be used once, and after that one time, the card will disappear. This experience card was very precious. If he used it casually, he would waste it. Therefore, An decisively put it away and saved it for future use. An walked back to the restaurant to where Gon and Hancock were and directly said: ¡°After eating, let¡¯s go and find Killua.¡± Gon Eximed: ¡°Great.¡± Hancock asked: ¡°Did you find who gave you the suitcase?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± ¡°Who?¡± ¡°A woman.¡± Hancock stayed silent for a moment and then asked: ¡°What is in the box?¡± An raised his and said: ¡°Are you curious?¡± Upon seeing his smile, Hancock snorted coldly and said: ¡°If you don¡¯t want to say it, then forget about it.¡± An smiled and said: ¡°Well, I will just tell you. It was money.¡± ¡°Money?¡± ¡°Well, about a hundred million Jenny, to be exact.¡± Anughed. The money Chrollo sent was enough to solve their current need for money. ¡°One Hundred Million Jenny? How much is that?¡± Hancock asked, and An thought for a bit and said: ¡°If you use the current from where you came, it would be around one hundred million Belly.¡± Hancock nodded without asking again. She was an empress and had her own ind. Let¡¯s not talk about one hundred million. Even one billion was nothing to her. After eating, An, Gon, and Hancock returned to their hotel rooms and packed up their luggage, and directly made their way to the airport. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 117: Kukuroo Mountain Part 1 Chapter 117: Kukuroo Mountain Part 1 An looked at the time as they reached the airport and found out that there is still an hour before their flight. So, they just went to the waiting area. The technology in the Hunter X Hunter world was weird. They didn¡¯t have nes, but aircraft instead. In fact, there is no difference between a ne and an Aircraft. Both were developed by humans to fly in the sky. Of course, the aircraft wasn¡¯t as good as a ne, but it was the main flying vehicle in the Hunter X Hunter world. At this time, An, who was waiting, felt a thin threat moving around. He looked up and saw a woman staring at him. It was Machi who An abused in the Genjutsu. ¡°Who is she?¡± Hancock frowned as she noticed Machi staring from a distance as well. ¡°A tigress,¡± An said. He didn¡¯t expect Machi to find him so quickly. ¡°She¡¯sing,¡± Hancock said. An looked up and saw Machi walking toward them. He knew that she wanted revenge, but he stayed calm as she didn¡¯t pose a threat at all. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Let Hancock deal with Machi. Sit and watch the two women fight. Reward: String String experience card.] [2: Let Gon deal with Machi. Sit and Watch Gon getting Abused. Reward: Chop Chop experience card.] [3: Deal with Machi yourself. Reward: Increase Nen by 3,000 Points.] An chose the first option and looked at Hancock. ¡°Hancock, do me a favor and deal with her.¡± Hancock said: ¡°Why?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t hit women,¡± An said casually. There is no such thing in An¡¯s dictionary. He believed in gender equality, after all. If someone provoked him, it didn¡¯t matter if it was a man or a woman. But Hancock believed his words and stepped ahead: ¡°What a gentleman. Okay, I will make an exception and help you this time.¡± In fact, regardless if Hancock wanted to or not, as long as An gave his order, she wouldn¡¯t be able to refuse. However, An didn¡¯t do this. After the time he spent with Hancock, their rtionship improved a lot, and An no longer controlled her forcibly. Hancock¡¯s willingness to help was the biggest proof. Seeing Hancock walking straight toward Machi, thetter felt ashamed. At this moment, Hancock beat her in both appearance and figure. She was like a small star beside the moon. She seemed insignificant. At this moment, Hancock said: ¡°What do you want?¡± Machi looked at An behind Hancock and said: ¡°I want to kill that man.¡± After saying this, she walked beside Hancock and prepared to attack An, but Hancock kicked. Perfume Femur! Machi directly avoided the kick and withdrew. Hancock was a little surprised by Machi¡¯s reaction speed, but she didn¡¯t stop her attacks and kicked again. Machi moved away and looked at An behind Hancock. An was just sitting down and watching both women fight with interest. Seeing the yful expression on An¡¯s face, Machi was even angrier. At this time, An said: ¡°You¡¯re not my match. If you want to get revenge, go and ask Chrollo toe here himself. However, I don¡¯t think he will. At that time, be prepared to be wronged again.¡± The so-called wronging An talked about was the Genjutsu he caught her in previously, which made Machi seething. Machi gritted her teeth and said: ¡°You wait for me; I will definitively settle this ount.¡± After saying this, Machi nced at Hancock again before she angrily left. Hancock turned around and looked at An: ¡°What did you do to that woman? She seems to hate your guts.¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°Nothing, I just teased her a little bit.¡± When Machi left, An received his reward. This card was the same as the other one. He could use it one time for five minutes. As time passed by, their flight was ready as they boarded the Aircraft toward Kukuroo Mountain that belonged to the Zoldyck family. After two days, An and the others reached Dentora Region and directly went toward Kukuroo mountain. Kukuroo mountain was one of the most popr tourist sites in the Dentora Region, as well as the home for the most famous assassin family. Although the Zolyck was an assassin¡¯s family, they were different from others since they don¡¯t conceal their profession like other assassins. To outsiders, this family was very mysterious. An directly took Gon and Hancock toward the tourist bust, which was going to Kukuroo mountain. An hourter, the bus stopped in front of the gate on top of the mountain. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 117: Kukuroo Mountain Part 2 Chapter 117: Kukuroo Mountain Part 2 ¡°Wow, the door is so big. It¡¯s so spectacr!¡± Gon eximed. ¡°That¡¯s the Gate to the underworld.¡± The tour guide introduced it to the tourist: ¡°Anyone who enters that gate won¡¯te back alive.¡± The tourists were dubious about what the guide said. An stared at the door as he knew that this wasn¡¯t the Gate to the underworld but the Testing Gate. The reason it¡¯s known as the Gate to the underworld by the outsiders is that no one cane alive after entering it. There is a scaryrge dog named Mike. Anyone who steps into its territory will be eaten. ¡°Okay, let go to other sites.¡± The tour guide said to the tourists. However, at this time, a few tourists ran to the Gate: ¡°Wow, this door is too heavy. It seems to be made out of Iron.¡± A man tried pushing the door but couldn¡¯t make it budge. The remaining three people with him walked over and tried to push it together but failed. ¡°Damn, I¡¯m exhausted.¡± ¡°Damn, I used all of my strength.¡± ¡°What kind of door is this heavy?!¡± Some of them swore and kicked the door in anger. ¡°Hey, what are you doing? Leave now.¡± A middle-aged uncle in his fifties walked out of a small door and scolded the tourists. ¡°Damn it, old man, go away.¡± One of the tourists replied. ¡°I¡¯m the guard here, and I¡¯m responsible for this door.¡± Said the guard uncle. ¡°So you¡¯re the guard here, then take us in.¡± One of them said in amanding tone. ¡°Hurry up, smelly old man.¡± The others looked impatient as well. ¡°If you want to go in, push the door and go in. I won¡¯t take you in.¡± The Guard said unhappily. ¡°Damn it. You will take us in.¡± The tourists red fire at the Guard. ¡°You really want to go in?¡± ¡°Stop talking nonsense, and take us in.¡± ¡°Well, I won¡¯t stop you if you insist on dying.¡± As he said this, the Guard took a key and threw it to one of the tourists and said: ¡°That key can open the small door. You can get in from there.¡± They saw the small Gate beside the Testing, and Gate ran over it directly. After a while, screams were heard from the four who entered the small Gate. When the other tourists heard the screams, they were scared and directly fled. Only Gon, An, and Hancock stayed behind. At this time, when Gon heard the scream, he asked: ¡°What happened to those people?¡± Hancock frowned and said: ¡°There is something big behind the door.¡± ¡°What is it?¡± Gon looked curiously. An said: ¡°A fierce beast.¡± ¡°Yes, behind the door, there is indeed a fierce beast.¡± The Guard walked over and approved An¡¯s words. ¡°What kind of beast, uncle?¡± Gon asked. ¡°Its name is Mike, and it¡¯s a watchdog raised by the Zoldyck family. Anyone who trespasses will be eaten.¡± Hearing this, Gon looked surprised: ¡°So, just now, those four tourists were eaten by Mike?¡± The Guard nodded: ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°That¡¯s terrible.¡± Gon swallowed. ¡°Hurry up and leave us well. You can¡¯t stay here.¡± Gon said: ¡°We¡¯re here for Killua. We can¡¯t leave like this.¡± ¡°You¡¯re looking for master Killua?¡± The Guard was taken aback. ¡°Why are you looking for Master Killua?¡± ¡°We¡¯re friends, and I have something to tell him, so Ie here.¡± Gon replied honestly. ¡°What? Master Killua¡¯s friend?¡± The Guard looked surprised: ¡°How can Master Killua have friends? It¡¯s impossible.¡± ¡°Believe it or not, we are here to find Killua, so we can¡¯t leave.¡± Gon said stubbornly. Upon seeing this, the Guard said: ¡°Even if you are Master Killua¡¯s friends, it¡¯s very dangerous. You can¡¯t get in. You saw what happened to the few who entered. You will be eaten by Mike.¡± ¡°I¡¯m not afraid.¡± Gon replied. The Guard said: ¡°No one is not afraid of Mike. If you see mike, you will be afraid.¡± ¡°Anyway, I have to try.¡± Gon said with determination. ¡°Wait, Gon,¡± An said to Gon, and at the same time, the System gave him a choice. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Help Gon enter from the Testing Gate and at least open three doors. Reward: Increase Nen by 10,000 Points.] [2: Take Gon and directly bypass the Gate and enter into the Zoldyck¡¯s territory. Reward: Mysterious Treasure Chest x1] [3: Break the Testing Gate. Reward: Devil Fruit, Ancient Zoan Brachiosaurus form!] Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 118: Testing Gate Part 1 Chapter 118: Testing Gate Part 1 Seeing the rewards, An was excited, especially the third reward. Because as far as he knew, the Dragon Dragon fruit, Brachiosaurus, was the Fruit of Queen, one of the three gues of Kaido. This fruit¡¯s defense and power were quite astounding, and it belonged to the Ancient Zoan type. However, An chose the first option after pondering for a while. Although the Ancient Zoan fruit was strong, An knew that Gon came to Killua as a friend. If he broke the Gate, it would be like provoking the entire Zoldyck family. That wasn¡¯t the development he was after. An directly turned to look at the guard uncle and said: ¡°Uncle, if we open the Testing Gate, will we be able to go in and find Killua?¡± The Guard replied in a deep voice: ¡°If you can open the Testing gate, of course, you can go in. However, this is Zoldyck¡¯s private property, so I can¡¯t guarantee what will happen after that.¡± ¡°Okay, I will give it a try.¡± An smiled and walked to the Gate. ¡°Little Brother, are you sure?¡± Upon seeing An walking toward the Gate, the Guard couldn¡¯t help reminding: ¡°There are beasts that eat people inside. I advise you to leave. Even if you go inside, it¡¯s impossible to see Master Killua.¡± ¡°Well, I¡¯m already here. It will be such a shame to return empty-handed, right? Let me try.¡± Since An was serious, the Guard didn¡¯t say anything anymore. At this time, Gon asked: ¡°An, do you want me to help?¡± An shook his head: ¡°No, I can do it myself, just stay there and watch.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Gon nodded. Hancock said: ¡°Do you want me to help? I can just kick the door open.¡± ¡°No, I can break the door as well, but if we do, we will be enemies to the Zoldyck since we destroyed their door.¡± Hancock didn¡¯t say anything else after hearing An¡¯s exnation. ¡°Okay, watch!¡± An took off his suit, rolled up his sleeves, and put his hands on the Testing Gate. After taking a deep breath, his whole body started exerting force. There are a total of seven gates, and each one was heavier than the next. At this moment, An¡¯s muscles bulged out as he used all of his power. With a low growl, a blue aura surrounded An¡¯s body like a vast ocean. The first Gate was opened! The Second Gate was opened! The Third Gate was opened! The Fourth Gate was opened! An directly opened 4 of the eight gates and pushed the fifth Testing Gate. Since he achieved his purpose, An didn¡¯t continue with the fifth Gate. [Ding! You sessfully opened three of the Testing Gate. Reward: Increase Nen by 10,000 Points] An instantly felt his Nen increase greatly and estimated that his current max was 80,000 points. As An let go of the gates, they closed with a bang. ¡°An, you¡¯re amazing. You actually opened four gates.¡± Gon eximed with admiration. ¡°It¡¯s okay if I worked harder, I could open the fifth, and a little more, I could¡¯ve opened the sixth, and if went all out, I can open all seven.¡± ¡°Wow, that¡¯s amazing!¡± An¡¯s words didn¡¯t just surprise Gon, but the Guard was also surprised as he stared at An with an open mouth. The Guard knew that each Gate was heavier than the other, and each time you go up a gate, it will be double the weight of the previous one. The first Gate was 4 tons, the second was eight, and the third was 16. An opened the fourth, which was 32 tons. This was already scary. But An actually said that if he went all out, he would be able to open all seven gates. ¡°It¡¯s even hard for master Illumi to open all gates. I¡¯m afraid that only the Patriarch and Master Zeno could do it. And you actually said you could open all seven?¡± The Guard stared at An with surprise. When An released his Aura, the Guard felt amazed, but that alone wasn¡¯t enough to push the Seventh Gate. An chuckled: ¡°I just feel that I can do it. I have to try to know if I really can do it or not.¡± ¡°Then, can you give it a try?¡± The Guard asked. ¡°No.¡± An refused instantly. The Guard was taken aback for a moment: ¡°Why? Didn¡¯t you say you can open them?¡± Seeing An smile without saying anything, the Guard touched the back of his head in embarrassment: ¡°To be honest, I didn¡¯t see anyone open all gates before. If you can open them, I want to see it.¡± An smiled and said: ¡°Although I think I can open them all, it will consume a lot of power. I won¡¯t gain anything from that, so it won¡¯t do it.¡± After hearing An¡¯s words, the Guard didn¡¯t say anything else. He knew that An was right, the gates were heavy, and he wouldn¡¯t gain anything from opening them. At this time, Gon also walked toward the Gate and said: ¡°I will give it a try as well.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 118: Testing Gate Part 2 Chapter 118: Testing Gate Part 2 Seeing this, the Guard said: ¡°Little kid, it¡¯s impossible for you to push it open, give up.¡± ¡°I want to try.¡± Gon said stubbornly,pletely unaffected by the Guard¡¯s words. ¡°By the way, uncle, how many doors can Killua open when he came back?¡± Gon suddenly turned around as asked. The Guard thought for a bit and said: ¡°When Master Killua came back, he opened the third gate.¡± Hearing this, Gon looked a little irritated and refused to admit defeat: ¡°Then I won¡¯t lose to KIllua.¡± An saw that Gon was serious. He knew that Gon was irritated because Killua surrendered in Hunter Exam. He didn¡¯te here just to y with Killua, but to say that he won¡¯t lose. Gon was growing up, and he paid more attention to winning and losing. As Killua was his peer and was better than him, he naturally wanted to catch up. Gon put his hands on the door and exerted all of his power along with the Nen in his body. Suddenly, a cloud of golden Nen emerged from him as he started to push the gates. The Guard looked at the Aura erupting with Gon in the center, shocked. Boom! The first Gate opened! Boom! The second Gate opened! Boom! The third Gate opened! With a full burst of power, Gon pushed open three gates in a second. Moreover, he was still pushing the fourth Gate with all his might. ¡°This is scary.¡± The Guard was stunned, and An looked calmly as if it was natural for Gon to do this. After all, the current Gon surpassed the Gon that should¡¯ve reached this ce in the show due to his training. So opening the fourth Gate was no longer a problem. Boom! Sure enough, An pushed open the fourth Gate. ¡°He really opened it?¡± The Guard¡¯s mouth was opened wide as looked at the kid opening the fourth Gate that weighed 32 ton. Hancock was a little surprised by Gon¡¯s performance and said: ¡°That kid is stronger than before.¡± ¡°Of course, he will continue to grow stronger in the future.¡± Anughed. After opening the fourth Gate, Gon stopped. He was breathing heavily as he said: ¡°I¡¯m so tired, this gate is too heavy.¡± An patted his shoulder and said: ¡°But you finally proved that you¡¯re not weak, right?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± An nodded. At this time, Gon admired An even more because An opened the fourth Gate in a second, and he could only do it after exerting all of his power. The Guard came over and said: ¡°Gon, you¡¯re so amazing. You actually opened the fourth Gate.¡± Gon said: ¡°I just wanted to prove that I don¡¯t lose to Killua.¡± ¡°What?¡± The Guard was surprised. Anughed: ¡°Gon just wanted to prove that he wasn¡¯t weaker than Killua, so he pushed open the Testing Gate.¡± ¡°This¡­¡± The Guard was a little dazed. An said seriously: ¡°Okay, uncle, we should be able to enter now, right?¡± Hearing this, the Guard said: ¡°You can open the Testing Gate, of course, you can enter. But that¡¯s the private property of the Zoldyck Family, other than Mike. There are many professionally trained butlers. It¡¯s best to be careful inside. I hope you can get to meet Master Killua smoothly.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, uncle, we will definitively meet Killua.¡± Gon assured confidently. An directly pushed open the first Gate and entered along with Gon and Hancock. The three of them found themselves inside a forest. ¡°Wow, is this a forest inside of Killua¡¯s house? It¡¯s so big.¡± Gon looked at his surrounding with surprise. ¡°The ce where Killua lives should be far from here. Let¡¯s get through the forest first.¡± An said. ¡°Ah, look at that.¡± Gon eximed. Looking at where Gon was pointing, they saw a pool of blood and bones not far away. ¡°It should be the corpses of the tourists who entered just now,¡± An said. ¡°Is Mike the one who ate them?¡± Gon muttered. ¡°It¡¯s disgusting,¡± Hancock said. An looked around and said: ¡°Be careful, guys.¡± At this time, An was vignt and alert. He seemed to feel something and suddenly turned his head and said: ¡°It¡¯s here.¡± Roar!! A huge beast suddenly appeared from the woods and stood in front of the trio. Seeing this, Gon was slightly stunned. Hancock looked somewhat wary of the beast. ¡°This dog is really big.¡± An sighed as he looked at the behemoth in front of him. This dog was Mike, the watchdog raised by the Zoldyck Family. At this time, Mike¡¯s scarlet eyes stared at the trio. Suddenly, a notification from the system echoed in An¡¯s mind. [Ding! Make a choice] [1: Kill Mike. Reward: Devil Fruit, Dog-Dog Fruit, Model: wolf.] [2: Knockdown Mike. Reward: Devil fruit, Dog-Dog Fruit, Model: Dalmatian Dog!] [3: Defeat and Tame Mike. Reward: Devil fruit, Mythical Zoan, Dog-Dog Fruit model: Cerberus!] Chapter 119: Mike Chapter 119: Mike Seeing the reward from the system, An was surprised. They were all devil fruit, and they were all Dog Dog fruit with different models. He won¡¯t choose the first option no matter what. As the saying goes, only the owner can beat his dog. Since Mike was the watchdog of the Zoldyck family, killing it was tantamount to pping the Zolyck family in the face. An didn¡¯t want to provoke such a troublesome family, and they came here to find Killua, not to start a war. As for the second option¡­ What kind of crap fruit is that? A Dalmatian Dog fruit, it was such a useless fruit¡­ In that case, An picked thest option. He was confident that he could beat Mike, but he was unsure about taming it. At this moment, Mike felt An¡¯s eyes on it, and it hostilely raised its paw to tten An and the others. Hancock and Gon directly jumped away. Boom! The giant w made a dull sound as they touched the ground. ¡°An?!¡± Gon was worried as An didn¡¯t avoid the w. Hancock on the side said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, he¡¯s fine.¡± As soon as she said this, An¡¯s figure quickly reappeared. The elementalization of the Ice fruit made him immune to physical attacks. Seeing this, Mike once again attacks An. An jumped high and appeared on top of Mike¡¯s head. Armament-Type: Hardening! Boom! With a strong punch, Mikeid on the ground. Roar! Mike roared and quickly got up. ¡°Oh?¡± An was a little surprised. He didn¡¯t expect Mike to resist that punch. ¡°Since one punch doesn¡¯t work, then try another one.¡± After avoiding Mike¡¯s attack, An once again mmed a punch on Mike¡¯s head. Now that Mike stayed down, An only needed to tame it. At this time, Mike was struggling to get up as he red at An. ¡°Get down!¡± An invisible aura radiated from An¡¯s body as he looked at Mike. Facing the Conqueror¡¯s Haki radiating from An, Mika felt a terrifying pressure and, in the end, it obediently fell to the ground. Its fierce eyes disappeared as it looked at An like a puppy. [Ding! You sessfully tamed Mike. Reward: Devil fruit, Mythical Zoan, Dog-Dog Fruit model: Cerberus!] Hearing the system¡¯s notification, An opened the Inventory to check the reward. Right now, a new Devil fruit appeared beside the Rubber Rubber fruit he already had. In One Piece world, each fruit could get them 100 million Belly, but the concept of Devil fruit is inexistent in the Hunter X Hunter world. So people won¡¯t believe that this fruit can give anyone powers. An was nning on holding an auction for the devil fruits that he obtains since he already ate one, and he could only eat one. However, now that An obtained 100 million Jenny from Chrollo, he wasn¡¯t short on money, so he decided to keep the devil fruits. Moreover, he felt that the devil fruits given to him by the system might be the pure version of the fruit, and maybe he can eat two or even three of them, maybe even more. Of course, this was just a guess made by An. The system didn¡¯t inform him of such a thing, and he had no one to ask. At this moment, Gon and Hancock walked over, while Gon looked at Mike on the ground then at An with admiration: ¡°An, you¡¯re so amazing!¡± Hancock nced at An and said: ¡°You used Conqueror¡¯s Haki, right?¡± An nodded: ¡°Well, only Conqueror¡¯s Haki can tame fierce beasts.¡± ¡°What is Haki?¡± Gon heard the new term and asked. ¡°I will tell you next time.¡± An didn¡¯t exin much. Instead, he looked at Mike and said: ¡°Mike, take us to look for Killua.¡± Hearing the name Killua, Mike roared. He obviously knew Killua seeing this reaction. An directly said: ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± With An taking the lead, the three of them rode on Mike¡¯s back. Mike didn¡¯t seem to mind as it stood up and rushed inside the forest. Since Mike was too fast, the trio on its back could only hold tightly so they won¡¯t be thrown off. At this time, the butler of the Zoldyck family was looking at the screen. He saw everything unfold and couldn¡¯t help wonder: ¡°That guy defeated Mike and even tamed it. Who is he?¡± This man was Gotoh, who was responsible for taking care of Killua. Hearing the mutter of Gotoh, the butler next to him replied: ¡°A few minutes ago, the guard at the Testing gate informed us of them. These three are not here to make trouble but to see Master Killua.¡± ¡°Looking for Master Killua?¡± Gotoh frowned. ¡°Yes, they imed to be Master Killua¡¯s friends. ording to the guard at the Testing gate, the young man who defeated Mike is An, and he opened the fourth gate without any trouble.¡± ¡°What?¡± Hearing this, Gotoh stared at An in disbelief. ¡°Unexpectedly, he can open the fourth gate in a second. It seems like he is quite strong. No wonder he was able to tame Mike, just when did Master Killua make such friends?¡± The butler couldn¡¯t answer Gotoh¡¯s question. ¡°What should we do now?¡± ¡°Rx. Although he tamed Mike, he¡¯s absolutely loyal to the Zoldyck Family. You can go to the courtyard first, and I will report to Patriarch Silva.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± At this moment, there were dozens of butlers in the Zoldyck¡¯s courtyard. As for Gotoh, he headed toward the vi on top of the mountain to report about An and the others. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 120: Kalluto Zoldyck Chapter 120: Kalluto Zoldyck Mike was moving very fast. After passing through the dense forest, An saw arge vi on the hill where the Zoldyck family resides. Seeing the Vi, An couldn¡¯t help exim: ¡®The Zoldyck are really rich!¡¯ The vi was built on a mountain peak, where everything there belongs to them, wasn¡¯t that awesome? Soon, Mike stopped moving. An looked up and saw a courtyard in front of him. The courtyard was full of butlers and maids. About twenty of them blocked the way. An narrowed his eyes as he looked at the servants of the Zoldyck family one by one and said: ¡°We are here to find Killua. Please ask him toe out.¡± A butler stood up and said: ¡°Without the permission of the Patriarch, no outsider can enter the Zoldyck¡¯s family ground. Since you¡¯re invaded this private property, you can¡¯t meet Master Killua.¡± An shrugged: ¡°So we won¡¯t discuss this?¡± ¡°Just leave now.¡± Just as An was about to say something, the system gave him 3 choices. [1: Get rid of the Butlers. Reward: Mysterious Treasure Chest x1] [2: Insist on staying until meeting Killua, and use the Ice Ice Fruit to freeze the Butlers. Reward: Random Skill Card x1] [3: Turn around and leave. Reward: Increase Nen by 2,000] An thought for a moment before deciding on the second option. He didn¡¯t want to destroy the bridge with the Zoldyck Family, so he wouldn¡¯t just kill them. The third option is out of the question as well. Since they came all the way here, they wouldn¡¯t return without achieving their goal. ¡°If we don¡¯t see Killua, we won¡¯t leave.¡± An¡¯s words made the Butlers gloomy. ¡°Since you insist on not leaving, then we won¡¯t go easy.¡± ¡°Do it.¡± In the next moment, the butlers rushed toward them. An signaled to Gon and Hancock not to do anything as he jumped down from Mike¡¯s back. ¡°You¡¯re nothing more than Butlers in the Zoldyck Family.¡± Facing An¡¯s Provocation, all of the butlers and maids rushed toward him, but in a blink of an, everything was frozen solid. The Butlers and maids turned into Ice Sculpture before they could get close to An. At the same time, An received his reward from the system. The reward was a random skill card that he could activate just by holding it in his hand. He can use the skill card without any effort from the user, which was the advantage of having it, but the skill card¡¯s cooldown was a week. The skill he got was called [Gaara¡¯s sand defense]. The skill was quite good, and although its cooldown was seven days, it can effectively save his life when it matters. Putting away the card, An nced at the butlers and maids and then gestured for Gon and Hancock to move forward. ¡°An, is it okay to freeze them?¡± Gon asked An in worry. An waved his hand and said: ¡°It¡¯s okay, this won¡¯t kill them.¡± Most people couldn¡¯t withstand his ice, but they were butlers and maids from the Zoldyck family. They won¡¯t die from this. They only needed to melt the Ice slowly or wait for someone to free them. Looking at the vi on top, An said: ¡°Well, let¡¯s go. We¡¯re not far from where Killua is.¡± Gon directly followed An along with Hancock. Simultaneously, in the vi, the current Patriarch of the Zoldyck Family, Silva Zoldyck, was talking with an old man. ¡°Silva, what are you going to do?¡± The Silver Haired old-man asked Silva. ¡°I will ask Killua first, then decide what to do.¡± The Silver Haired old man said again: ¡°Just now, there is a report saying that the butlers and maids that were blocking them are all frozen in the courtyard. Now they are heading this way. It seems like they are quite capable.¡± Hearing this, Silva was slightly surprised: ¡°If you can, I will trouble father to deal with them first.¡± ¡°Well, leave it to this old man.¡± The silver-haired old man was Zeno, Silva¡¯s father. On the other side, An, Gon, and Hancock already arrived in front of the Vi. Suddenly, a violent gust of wind roared out of nowhere and swept toward the trio. An¡¯s face didn¡¯t change as he waved his hand and created an Ice wall that stopped the win easily. A girl with short ck hair and wearing a Kimono, holding a paper fan in her hand, came out and looked at them coldly. The girl was surprised a little when she saw Anpletely disintegrate the gust of wind without effort. An¡¯s eyes fell on the adorable girl that she can¡¯t be a boy. Gon on the side asked: ¡°Who is she?¡± ¡°Kalluto Zoldyck, Killua¡¯s Sister,¡± An said casually. Whether Kalluto was a male or female, he wasn¡¯t sure, but she didn¡¯t seem like a boy ording to her appearance. So An just said what he thought was true, and Gon won¡¯t believe him if he said it was a guy. ¡°Killua¡¯s sister?¡± Gon was a little surprised and waved at Kalluto: ¡°Hello, Killua¡¯s sister, we are here looking for Killua. Could you ask him toe out?¡± In the yard, Kalluto heard Gon¡¯s words and snorted coldly. Instead of answering, she raised the paper fan in her hand and waved vigorously. The wind rushed forward fiercely toward Gon, but Gon didn¡¯t evade. Seeing the situation was getting dangerous, An was about to make a move, but Gon said: ¡°An, please don¡¯t move.¡± ¡°Okay!¡± An shrugged and stepped aside with Hancock. The wind was like sharp des cutting Gon¡¯s body. Right now, Gon¡¯s body had a dozen of wounds, but Gon didn¡¯t find back. Instead, he epted the attack head-on. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 121: Zeno Zoldyck Chapter 121: Zeno Zoldyck Hancock couldn¡¯t help asking An after seeing Gon¡¯s behavior: ¡°Why isn¡¯t the kid avoiding these attacks?¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°Probably because he wants to prove that we aren¡¯t here to cause trouble.¡± Hancock shook her head and said: ¡°That¡¯s very na?ve.¡± ¡°It is.¡± An smiled: ¡°But it¡¯s because of Gon¡¯s innocence that he can make real friends, right?¡± Hancock snorted, obviously disagreeing with An¡¯s words. As a Shichibukai, she didn¡¯t have friends or allies. At this moment, Kalluto saw that Gon didn¡¯t dodge her attacks and was slightly surprised. However, she didn¡¯t stop, and she regarded Gon¡¯s behavior as stupid. Another wind de shot out of her fan and tore a new wound on Gon¡¯s body. Gon clenched his fist and tried his best to ignore the pain. His blood was already dripping on the floor, and the sight was terrifying. However, even with such severe injuries, Gon didn¡¯t fall. Kalluto stared at Gon, who was panting. She almost exhausted her strength after so many wind attacks, but Gon didn¡¯t fall. ¡°Why don¡¯t you fight back?¡± Kalluto couldn¡¯t help the curiosity as she asked. Her voice was cold yet delicate. Gon replied with a weak voice: ¡°Because¡­ You¡¯re Killua¡¯s sister, so I can¡¯t attack you.¡± ¡°Idiot.¡± As she heard Gon¡¯s words, Kalluto couldn¡¯t understand his reason. ¡°Even if you¡¯re brother¡¯s friend, I won¡¯t be merciful.¡± Kalluto raised her Fan and said: ¡°This will be thest attack.¡± At this moment, someone from behind Kalluto said: ¡°Enough, Kalluto!¡± Hearing this voice, Kalluto immediately stopped her fan from moving and looked behind. She saw a silver-haired old-man walking with his hands behind his back. ¡°Grandpa? Why are you here?¡± Kalluto was a little surprised. At this time, An¡¯s eyes fell on the silver-haired old man. It was Zeno, Killua¡¯s Grandfather. He was wearing a ck and white robe with some words on them. Zeno moved toward Gon and asked: ¡°Little kid, aren¡¯t you afraid of death?¡± Hearing this, Gon raised his head and said: ¡°I¡¯m afraid of death!¡± Zeno then asked curiously: ¡°Since you¡¯re afraid, why didn¡¯t you avoid Kalluto¡¯s attacks?¡± ¡°Because I want to see Killua!¡± Gon replied. Zeno asked in a deep voice: ¡°Are you really Killua¡¯s friend?¡± Gon nodded heavily: ¡°Well, of course, at least I think of Killua as my friend.¡± ¡°What about Killua? Does he treat you as a friend?¡± Zeno asked. ¡°I think he does.¡± Gon said without hesitation. Zeno stayed silent for a bit and asked: ¡°Boy, what¡¯s your name?¡± ¡°Gon Freecss, you can call me Gon.¡± Hearing his, Zeno¡¯s eyes changed as he looked at Gon more intently: ¡°Your surname is Freecss?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Gon nodded. After receiving Gon¡¯s confirmation, Zeno looked at Gon deeply before saying: ¡°Gon, I¡¯m Killua¡¯s Grandfather, Zeno.¡± ¡°Hello, Grandpa Zeno.¡± Gon said politely. ¡°Gon, are those two friends of Killua as well?¡± as he said this, Zeno looked at Hancock and An. ¡°Grandpa Zeno, they came with me. His name is An, and he saved Killua once. That woman is An¡¯s fianc¨¦e, The Snake Princess.¡± ¡°Is that so.¡± Zeno nodded thoughtfully before he looked at Hancock then at An. ¡°Pushing the fourth Gate in seconds, using Mike as a mount, and Freezing the Butlers and maids into Ice. You guys seem really capable.¡± An looked at Zeno without fear. On the surface, Zeno seemed topliment him, but in fact, he was slightly dissatisfied. An was helpless about that. He was just apanying Gon and to find Killua. He didn¡¯t want to find trouble with the Zoldyck. However, at this moment, the system gave him a Choice. [1: Provoke Zeno and fight him. Reward: Golden Treasure Chest x1] [2: Insist on Fighting Zeno. Reward: Wolf Fang Fist style (Yamcha¡¯s Fighting Style From Dragon Ball!] [3: Ignore Zeno and fight him. Reward: Increase Nen by 10,000 Points] Seeing those rewards, An directly said: ¡°Master, you must be joking. I just apanied Gon to find Killua. If I offended you, please forgive me.¡± Zeno said: ¡°Of course you offended us. We, the Zoldyck, have a few guests. As killers, most of our acquaintances are enemies.¡± An smiled slightly: ¡°We are really not here to look for trouble.¡± Zeno nodded and said: ¡°Anyway,e in first. Gon lost a lot of blood. If we don¡¯t deal with it quickly, he might die. As Killua¡¯s Grandfather, I don¡¯t want to see Killua¡¯s friend die like this.¡± ¡°This old man seems to like Killua very much.¡± After that, An took Gon and Hancock and followed Zeno into the vi. Upon seeing this, Kalluto on the side couldn¡¯t help asking: ¡°Grandpa, will you really bring them inside?¡± Zeno said: ¡°Anyone who can pass the Testing Gate is a guest. Let the old man call the shots.¡± Hearing this, kalluto didn¡¯t say anything else. Zeno is her grandfather. No matter how much she hated outsiders, she couldn¡¯t say anything to him. ¡°It seems like I can only look for mother. If mother knows that someone was looking for Brother Killua, she would be very unhappy.¡± Kalluto found an excuse to leave Zeno¡¯s side. Zeno nced at Kalluto and shook his head. He already guessed what she wanted to do, but he didn¡¯t anything about it. An followed behind Zeno while thinking about a way to fight with Zeno. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 122: Meeting Killua Chapter 122: Meeting Killua Zeno was a superb professional Assassin for a long time, and his power was unfathomable. But An wasn¡¯t worried about losing to Zeno. He was worrying if he could fight Zeno. Zeno was a killer, unlike the martial art idiot Netero. He is a businessman who doesn¡¯t do a losing deal. It¡¯s obviously impossible for a fight between warriors to unfold between them. An didn¡¯t want to provoke Zeno. After all, he was Killua¡¯s Grandfather. But at the same time, he didn¡¯t want to give up the reward. If there is a chance, he wanted to fight Zeno. After thinking for a bit, An said: ¡°I have heard about you for so long, Master Zeno, and your reputation is impressive.¡± Hearing this, Zeno waved his hand and said: ¡°This old man is just a killer. It¡¯s not a big deal. But I¡¯m still somewhat famous in this line of work. If you want to kill someone, then for the sake of Killua, I will give you a 20% discount.¡± An was speechless. ¡°Thank you, Master Zeno, but I don¡¯t have anyone I want to kill right now,¡± An replied. In fact, with his current power, he doesn¡¯t need others to help him as he can deal with almost everyone himself. If there was someone An wanted to kill, it is Uvogin, but he was confident in killing him easily if he appeared before him. An¡¯s current Goal was Zeno, but he couldn¡¯t think of a good way to make Zeno fight him. After thinking for a bit, An spoke directly. ¡°Master Zeno, other than finding Killua, I also apanied Gon to have a fight with you.¡± Hearing this, Zeno shook his head: ¡°Haha, I am sorry, I can¡¯t agree to this request.¡± ¡°Why?¡± Although An knew Zeno would say this, he was still asking for a reason. Zeno replied: ¡°This old man isn¡¯t a warrior, but a killer. I only ept assassination requests, and I don¡¯t like fighting uselessly.¡± An nodded: ¡°I understand, but I still hope we can have a spar.¡± ¡°Do you really want to fight me?¡± Zeno stopped and looked straight at An. ¡°Yes, please fight me,¡± An said without fear. Zeno looked at An deeply before he retracted his gaze and turned his back, and walked ahead. When An wondered what Zeno would say, thetter¡¯s voice came: ¡°This old man will think about it.¡± Hearing this, An was overjoyed. Although Zeno didn¡¯t agree directly, his answer meant that he would probably agree. Gon looked at An as if he didn¡¯t understand and asked: ¡°An, why do you want to fight Killua¡¯s Grandpa?¡± ¡°Because that old man is powerful. As someone who wants to get stronger, I need to fight strong foes. It¡¯s kind of like training. You will understandter.¡± Gon nodded and didn¡¯t ask anything else. He was here for Killua, so he wasn¡¯t interested in anything else. Hancock on the side nced at An and said: ¡°It was the other old manst time, and now it¡¯s this old man¡­ You seem to like fighting old man very much.¡± ¡°Well, it¡¯ because they are strong,¡± An said embarrassedly. The one Hancock is talking about is obviously Netero. Hancock nodded and said: ¡°From his aura, he is indeed not ordinary.¡± An smiled and said: ¡°The old man I foughtst time is Netero, the Hunter Association chairman. And this is the top Assassin in the Zoldyck. By the way, let me tell you a secret.¡± ¡°What secret?¡± Hancock was a little curious. An said: ¡°That old man isn¡¯t ordinary. He looks younger than he should.¡± ¡°What?¡± Hancock was surprised. ¡°I mean, Netero is over a hundred years old, and Zeno is around 70 years old. Compared to Chairman Netero, Zeno is a young man. Also, Chairman Netero belongs to Zeno¡¯s Grandfather¡¯s generation.¡± Hancock could only sigh: ¡°What a monster!¡± Then she said: ¡°I also know a few old men; I think they are monsters as well.¡± An smiled: ¡°Are you talking about The Yonko, Whitebeard, The Hero Garp, and The Dark King Rayleigh?¡± ¡°You, how do you know them?¡± Hancock looked at An in surprise. An nodded: ¡°Of course, they are the top powerhouses in the previous Pirate¡¯s Era. Although they are old, their power is still terrifying.¡± Hancock couldn¡¯t help asking: ¡°How do you know this?¡± An shrugged as a transmigrator. He, of course, knew characters like Whitebeard and the others. However, An looked at Hancock and said mysteriously: ¡°Secret!¡± Hearing this, Hancock said: ¡°I¡¯m really curious about who you are now.¡± ¡°You will knowter.¡± Anughed. However, Hancock will never know because An won¡¯t tell anyone about his secret. After entering arge living room, Zeno said: ¡°Sit here for a while. This old man will go and see my grandson.¡± ¡°Killua?¡± Gon asked. ¡°Of course.¡± Zeno smiled. At this time, a man wearing sses and a butler¡¯s suit came to An and the others with tea: ¡°The road should¡¯ve been long, and you may be thirsty, please have some tea.¡± An recognized Gotoh, the chief butler of the Zoldyck Family. ¡°Thank you.¡± Gon took the teacup and started drinking, as he was thirsty. An narrowed his eyes slightly. When Gotoh saw this, he asked: ¡°Aren¡¯t you going to drink?¡± ¡°Thanks, but we are not thirsty,¡± An replied in a deep voice. Gotoh nodded and then said:¡± You two are worried that I put something in the tea, right?¡± An shook his head: ¡°The Chief Butler from the Zoldyck Family wouldn¡¯t use something like that, right?¡± Gotoh¡¯splexion changed slightly: ¡°Do you know me?¡± An smiled: ¡°Only slightly.¡± Gotoh was surprised because he has been in this ce for 20 years and didn¡¯t leave the Zoldyck ground that often. ¡°Did Master Killua tell you?¡± Gotoh could only think about this. An shrugged and didn¡¯t deny anything since Gotoh guessed this on his own. Although Gotoh was still doubtful, he didn¡¯t ask anything else. At this moment, Gon clutched his head and said dizzily: ¡°I feel so dizzy, I really want to sleep.¡± After a while, Gon copsed on the Sofa. ¡°Sure enough, something was added to the Tea?¡± An frowned and looked at Gotoh. Gotoh said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, It¡¯s not poison. He will wake up after a good sleep.¡± So why did you do that?¡± An asked curiously. ¡°It¡¯s just to test if you are here with bad intentions,¡± Gotoh exined. ¡°Test?¡± ¡°To see if you are here to find Master Killua or for another purpose.¡± ¡°So what did you test exactly?¡± ¡°Gon drank the tea from a stranger without any hesitation, which indicates he is a na?ve person. So it is concluded that he is here toe to find Master Killua sincerely.¡± An nodded, as Gon was really na?ve. ¡°As for you, you¡¯re not Master Killua¡¯s friends.¡± Gotoh said sharply as he looked at An and Hancock. An didn¡¯t deny it and shrugged: ¡°We are apanying Gon. We really aren¡¯t friends with Killua. We also know that Gon is too na?ve. So as his temporary Guardian, I should watch over him.¡± ¡°Temporary guardian?¡± Gotoh was a little surprised. ¡°Well, it¡¯s simr to a role model or a big brother.¡± An said, and Gotoh nodded, then he asked: ¡°Can you tell me how Master Killua and Gon met? I¡¯m really curious.¡± [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Tell Gotoh about Gon and Killua. Reward: Silver Treasure Chest x1] [2: Refuse to tell anything to Gotoh. Reward: Increase Nen by 1,000 Points.] An directly decided on the first option since he had nothing to lose and said: ¡°Okay, I will tell you everything I know.¡± ¡°Then, I will listen intently,¡± Gotoh said gratefully. Although he was just a butler, he watched Killua grow since he was a child, and his rtionship with Killua surpassed that of an ordinary master-servant rtionship. ¡°Gon and Killua met during the Hunter Exam, they¡­¡± From the First Phase of the Exam till their duel, and Killua¡¯s surrender to make Gon pass the Exam, An told Gotoh everything. After hearing An¡¯s words, Gotoh stayed silent. After a long time, he said: ¡°I didn¡¯t expect Master Killua to surrender so that Gon can win. I¡¯m really impressed.¡± ¡°Indeed, he was trained as a killer since he was a child, and he actually became a friend with someone as innocent as Gon, which is incredible,¡± An said. ¡°So Gon came here to look for Master Killua. Is there anything he wants to tell him, or does he want to take him away?¡± Gotoh asked. ¡°It should be both,¡± An said. Gotoh said: ¡°Master Killua can leave if Master Silva allowed it. If he doesn¡¯t allow it, Master Killua won¡¯t be able to leave.¡± An, who knew from the show that Silva would give his consent, wasn¡¯t worried about it. ¡°I think Killua will get his father¡¯s understanding and consent.¡± Seeing how confident An was, Gotoh pushed his ssed and asked: ¡°I don¡¯t know why you¡¯re confident, since Master Silva isn¡¯t an ordinary person.¡± An replied: ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter. There is always one thing beyond all else. He is Killua¡¯s Father, and a father and son understood each other.¡± Hearing this, Gotoh nodded, as he felt that was reasonable. Indeed, Silva always treated his family harshly, but it was because he hoped for his children to excel. Killua was trained since he was a child and wasn¡¯t allowed to have friends. However, since he already made one, it will be a new experience for him. It was different from the cold Assassin route. He would go with his friends and grow together with them. Half an hourter, Killua arrived with Zeno into the living room. ¡°Hi, long time no see.¡± An raised his hand and said hello. ¡°An, you are here as well?¡± Killua asked in surprise: ¡°I thought that Gon came here alone.¡± ¡°No way. I¡¯m Gon¡¯s temporary Guardian. I can¡¯t let him risk himself toe here alone. After all, your house is dangerous.¡± An said jokingly. But it was the truth, with Gon¡¯s current power, it will be hard for him to see Killua, and he may even face danger. Killua also knew that his family was special, so he apologized: ¡°Sorry, I made you run all the way here. By the way, what¡¯s wrong with Gon?¡± ¡°He¡¯s just asleep,¡± Gotoh said. ¡°He fell asleep?¡± ¡°Your butler put something in the tea as he wanted to test Gon¡¯s sincerity. As a result, Gon drank it without hesitation and without even being alert.¡± Hearing this, Killua frowned and looked at Gotoh: ¡°Gotoh, how can you treat my friend like that?¡± Gotoh was embarrassed and quickly bowed: ¡°I¡¯m very sorry. I did this because I care about Master Killua.¡± Killua snorted coldly: ¡°Don¡¯t do this next time, or I will hate you. I know who Gon is and whether he came here with an ulterior motive or not. He is a friend I recognize, and I won¡¯t allow anyone to hurt him.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± Gotoh nodded as cold sweat oozed from his Forehead. Killua could make Gotoh disappear with just one word after all. Killua turned toward Zeno and said: ¡°Grandpa, I want to keep Gon and the others here for a few days, okay?¡± ¡°Of course, no problem.¡± Zeno nodded. ¡°Thank you, Grandpa.¡± Killua smiled heartedly and said to Gotoh: ¡°Gotoh, prepare two rooms, please.¡± ¡°Two?¡± ¡°Well, one for Gon and one for An and his fianc¨¦e, is that okay, An?¡± Killua asked. ¡°That¡¯s fine.¡± Gotoh efficiently worked and prepared two rooms for An and the others to rest. Outside the room, Killua said: ¡°An, you can stay for a few days.¡± An nodded and said: ¡°Of course, it just happens that I have something to do.¡± ¡°What is it?¡± Killua asked curiously. An didn¡¯t hide anything and said: ¡°I want to fight with your grandpa.¡± ¡°What?¡± Killua was taken aback: ¡°Why are you fighting? Do you have some conflict with him?¡± ¡°No.¡± An shook his head and exined: ¡°I just want to challenge your grandpa because as a warrior, I need to challenge stronger people to get stronger myself.¡± ¡°But my grandpa probably won¡¯t ept.¡± Killua said and exined: ¡°He is a killer, not a warrior. He doesn¡¯t make a losing deal.¡± An smiled: ¡°I already asked him, and he said he would consider it. I think he will agree to fight with me.¡± Hello everyone, Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 123: Duel Chapter 123: Duel Soon after, Gon woke up, and as he saw Killua, he was delighted. Killua was Gon¡¯s first true friend, in a sense. They were about the same age, and their personalitiesplimented each other. Killua was happy as well and wanted to y with Gon here for several days. At some point, Killua brought Gon to the courtyard to talk with him. But suddenly Gon said: ¡°Killua, thest time we fought, you surrendered and gave up your chance to be a hunter directly, that makes me very concerned.¡± Killua didn¡¯t expect Gon to talk so suddenly and replied: ¡°That¡¯s because you won¡¯t admit defeat no matter what. I had to surrender to reserve my strength. And it doesn¡¯t matter now, since I also got Hunter¡¯s License after that.¡± ¡°No, it¡¯s not about that.¡± Gon shook his head: ¡°It¡¯s because you think I¡¯m not strong enough, and you didn¡¯t want to hurt me.¡± ¡°So, what do you want now, Gon?¡± Killua said seriously. ¡°I want to fight again, Killua.¡± Gon looked at Killua with determination. ¡°Are you serious?¡± Killua asked. ¡°Of course, Ie here to look for you and have a fight with you as well.¡± Killua lowered his head and thought for a bit. ¡°Killua, I have gone through special training with An. Now I¡¯m stronger than I was in the hunter exam.¡± Killua looked up at Gon and said: ¡°So, you want to say that you can beat me now?¡± ¡°Yes!¡± Gon said confidently. Killua replied: ¡°Idiot, how can you defeat me when you didn¡¯t finish your training?¡± ¡°Although I didn¡¯t finish my training, I have something that I mastered before Killua, and I¡¯m a step ahead in it.¡± ¡°What?¡± Killua frowned as he was thinking about something before his eyes widened as he asked: ¡°Are you talking about Nen?¡± Gon nodded: ¡°Yes, I can use Nen to mend the gap between our strength.¡± Hearing this, Killua looked down. He experienced Nen before, and it¡¯s undeniable a magical power that greatly enhances the user¡¯s power. Now since Gon mastered Nen before him, he was indeed strong enough to fight equally with him. After thinking for a while, Killua finally said: ¡°Okay, Gon, since you really want to fight me that much, we will have a match. Let me see how much you improved in the past few months.¡± ¡°I won¡¯t let you down, Killua.¡± Gon¡¯s eyes were shining. Gon was a verypetitive person, so even if Killua is his friend, he wouldn¡¯t go easy. The news about Gon and Killua¡¯s match reached Zeno and An. Soon everyone who is in the Zoldyck vi knew about it. For a little while, the Zoldyck vi became lively. After all, Killua was a candidate for the seat of the patriarch of the Zoldyck Family. Although he was young, his assassination technique has reached a professional level, and his future potential was immeasurable. And now, Gon, an outsider, wanted to fight with Killua, which made most people think that Gon was ignorant. Killua and Gon found Zeno and An, respectively, and had the two be witnesses of their fight. An naturally had no problem, and in fact, he knew this would¡¯ve happened sooner orter. But Zeno looked surprised. He didn¡¯t understand why Gon and Killua will fight even though they were friends. However, he still agreed to the battle between the two. In a huge arena, both Gon and Killua started their battle. Their witnesses were Ana and Zeno, who respectively supported Gon and Killua. An nced at Zeno and asked: ¡°Master Zeno, who do you think is stronger, Gon or Killua?¡± Zeno pondered for a bit before he said: ¡°Well¡­ There is a good chance that Killua will win.¡± ¡°What¡¯s your reason for saying that?¡± ¡°Killua was trained to be a killer, and now he is apetent assassin. Even his techniques are first rated. Whether it is speed or skills, he is outstanding. And the most important point is that Killua is only twelve this year, and there is a lot of room for growth. His future potential is unfathomable. I¡¯m not the only one who thinks like this, but most of the family is the same.¡± An nodded: ¡°Killua does indeed have great potential, but I think Gon isn¡¯t worse.¡± Hearing this, Zeno nodded in agreement unexpectedly. As a superb Assassin, his eyes can see many things, and he could see how extraordinary Gon¡¯s body was. Even more, Gon released an extraordinary amount of Nen, which really surprised Zeno. ¡°To master Nen to such a degree at such a young age, his future is indeed boundless.¡± An coughed and said: ¡°I was the one who taught him. But Gon¡¯s talent is indeed high. His talent won¡¯t lose to Killua.¡± Zeno said: ¡°It seems that Killua made a good friend.¡± ¡°Exactly.¡± An smiled. At this time, a big fat man with a white shirt walked to their side and holding a bag of chips in his hands. He was stuffing chips while watching the fight. An nced at him and recognized him instantly. It was Milluki. Although this big guy wasn¡¯t good at fighting, he is a technology genius and was very good at handling guns and other things. Of course, since he is a Zoldyck, he does have decent proficiency in assassination techniques. But because he has such arge body, he can¡¯t be flexible like Killua. ¡°Grandpa, that little kid named Gon is quite powerful. Killua won¡¯t win easily.¡± Milluki said. ¡°Hmph, Milluki, you should have some confidence in your cousin.¡± Cold sweat leaked from Milluki¡¯s forehead as he said: ¡°Grandpa, of course, I have confidence in Killua. But that kid is really extraordinary. Judging from Killua¡¯s appearance, it¡¯s not an easy fight.¡± At this time, An said: ¡°The final victor might not be Killua.¡± Hearing this, Milluki looked at An and walked beside him: ¡°In that case, do you want to make a bet?¡± An nced at him and asked: ¡°What are you betting?¡± ¡°We will bet 100 million Jenny if Gon wins, you win, and if Killua wins, I win.¡± [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Agree to Milluki¡¯s bet. Reward: Increase Nen by 3,000 Points.] [2: Reject Milluki. Reward: Increase Nen by 1,000 Points.] [3: Agree to the bet and win. Reward: Golden Treasure Chest x1] After thinking about the benefit of the three options, An smiled and said: ¡°Then I will bet on Gon and win.¡± ¡°Okay, I will bet on Killua then,¡± Milluki said. ¡°I will definitively win.¡± ¡°Not necessarily.¡± At this time, the fight between Gon and Killua entered a stalemate. Gon relied on Nen to increase his power, speed, and defense. On the other hand, Killua relied on his techniques and speed. ¡°Well, it¡¯s good to master Nen at such a young age.¡± Zeno appreciated Gon¡¯s talent. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 124: Way Over His Head Chapter 124: Way Over His Head The duel between Gon and Killuasted for nearly a day, and the result was unexpected. Neither of them lost. Even though they were exhausted, they didn¡¯t fall or concede defeat. Even when they hurt all over, they were still fighting one punch each. It was apetition of willpower. If the fight continues, their lives would be at risk, so An and Zeno directly interfered to stop the match. The match ended in a draw. Gon looked at Killua and said: ¡°Killua, next time, we must decide the winner.¡± Killua nodded and said: ¡°Of course, I won¡¯t lose to you.¡± Because the fight between them ended in a draw, the bet with Milluki didn¡¯t have a winner. After Gon and Killua left, An said: ¡°Master, they are finished. It should be our turn now, right?¡± Zeno thought for a while before he said: ¡°Well, since you want to fight this old man, then I will make an exception today and have fun with you.¡± Anughed: ¡°I¡¯m looking forward to it.¡± Milluki, on the side, was surprised and said: ¡°What?! You guys will fight?¡± ¡°Oh, you can be our witness,¡± An said. Milluki clenched his fist and said: ¡°Are you kidding? You want to fight my grandfather?¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°Yeah, why? I can¡¯t?¡± ¡°Of course, you can¡¯t.¡± Milluki looked at Zeno and said: ¡°My grandpa is a top-notch Assassin. You are about the same age as my older Cousin Illumi. You belong to that generation. How can you qualify to challenge my Grandfather?¡± An wasn¡¯t angry as he looked at Milluki. ¡°So, you mean that I¡¯m getting ahead of myself?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right?¡± Milluki nodded and said again: ¡°It¡¯s not that I look down on you, but I think you¡¯re not qualified to challenge my Grandpa now. In terms of seniority, you are a junior. And in terms of power, you¡¯re less likely my grandpa¡¯s opponent. So, I advise you not to fight him and stop that stupid behavior.¡± An couldn¡¯t help butugh at the end of Milluji¡¯s speech. ¡°What are youughing at?¡± Milluki asked. ¡°Nothing.¡± An shook his head and smiled before he seriously said: ¡°It¡¯s because your grandpa is strong that I want to challenge him. Whether I win or lose, it doesn¡¯t matter. That¡¯s my choice.¡± Seeing that An was determined, Milluki snorted coldly: ¡°Well, since you insist on challenging Grandpa, then I will wait to see how he will get you off your high horse.¡± After this, Milluki looked at Zeno and said: ¡°Grandpa, teach that guy a lesson.¡± Zeno red at Milluki and said: ¡°Shut up and just watch from the side.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Milluki no longer said anything and retreated to the side. ¡°Please, go ahead, An,¡± Zeno said. ¡°Sorry to offend you.¡± When they both joined the Arena, Zeno said: ¡°I won¡¯t bully you. You can go ahead and have the first strike.¡± An shook his head and said: ¡°Master, you¡¯re my senior. It¡¯s better if you attack first.¡± ¡°Hehe, alright then! Since you are so sincere, this old man will attack first.¡± As soon as he said this, Zeno disappeared. Yes, hepletely disappeared without a trace. But it was only an illusion, using extreme speed to make it seem that he disappeared. In the next moment, Zeno appeared in front of An and attacked him directly with his knife-hand. An¡¯s observation Haki already caught up to Zeno even though thetter was fast. With a shift of his body, An directly avoided Zeno¡¯s attack, and while dodging, he lifted his left foot and kicked Zeno. Zeno blocked An¡¯s kick with his right hand and used his other hand to aim his hand, which seemed like an eagle¡¯s w at An¡¯s neck. An instantly moved his head back to escape Zeno¡¯s w, which made Zeno surprised that his attack failed. After this brief exchange, both made some distance. Zeno was looked at An sharply. Through this brief encounter, he revaluated An again. An was stronger than he imagined. The response speed is like he was reading Zeno¡¯s moves ahead of time. ¡°This old man is really strong,¡± An said as his eyes gleamed with excitement. An felt that he was facing a viper instead of a human. ¡°You¡¯re not bad, you can avoid my attacks, but this time, I¡¯m going to be serious.¡± Zeno started walking toward An step by step while staring at him, which made An feel extreme pressure. In the next instant, Zeno disappeared as he rushed at An. Boom! Boom! Boom! Boom! The two started moving too fast for Milluki to see, and even the air was vibrating with each exchange. Milluki looked at the Arena with wide eyes as he couldn¡¯t capture both figures. ¡°They¡¯re too fast.¡± ¡°That guy can actually keep up with Grandpa¡¯s speed and his fighting back.¡± ¡°How is he so strong?¡± Milluki was shocked. Although he could see that An was strong, he didn¡¯t think he was strong enough to challenge his Grandfather. He was even more shocked since he could tell that An was even stronger than Illumi. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 125: Zeno’s Power Chapter 125: Zeno¡¯s Power An¡¯s and Zeno¡¯s figures appeared and constantly disappeared in the Arena as they exchanged blows. Both of them pushed their speed to the extreme and fought fiercely. They only used the most basic fighting skills without using any abilities. Boom! Boom! Boom! Boom! Boom! Boom! An¡¯s fist constantly collided with Zeno¡¯s palms, produced loud sounds of metal hitting metal. Suddenly, their aura erupted, Zeno¡¯s purple gold aura and An¡¯s dark blue. Their Nen¡¯s collision was like a gorgeous star in the sky. After the collision, they separated. The two stood ten meters apart with their eyes fixed on each other. Zeno sighed and said: ¡°I didn¡¯t think you¡¯d be so strong at such a young age. Compared to this old man, you¡¯re talented.¡± An smiled: ¡°You praise me too much.¡± Zeno then said solemnly: ¡°I will be serious next, be careful.¡± An nodded: ¡°I¡¯m ready, sir.¡± ¡°Haa!¡± With a low shout, Zeno¡¯s Nen condensed into his hand as he sent a palm strike toward An. An knew that Zeno was a transmuter like himself, but thetter used an emitter¡¯s attack. He was really strong. An waved his hand in front of him and directly created an Ice wall to block Zeno¡¯s attack. Boom! Zeno¡¯s attack hit the Ice wall, negating it. At this time, Zeno¡¯s eyes shed with surprise. ¡°Ice?¡± ¡°Is he a transmuter?¡± To verify this, Zeno sent two attacks toward An simultaneously, which An faced without panic. An simply waved his hands and created two Icicles, and sent them directly at Zeno¡¯s attacks. With a loud bang, both attacks canceled each other in the air. ¡°Is his Nen turning into Ice? It seems that he should be a Transmuter or else he is a specialist.¡± Zeno thought. ¡°Then let¡¯s see if you can deal with this.¡± Zeno stepped forward with his left hand behind his back, and his right lifted in a knife shape. Nen erupted and covered Zeno¡¯s extended hand. Seeing this, An was surprised as he thought: ¡®That¡¯s quite amazing. If the old man stabs me, my aura alone can¡¯t block against that, but I could stop it if I add Armament Haki. Still, it¡¯s not worth it.¡¯ An decided not to contend head-on with Zeno. Rankyaku! An sent an air sh using Rankyaku, which made Zeno¡¯s astonished. He never thought that An, who was a Transmuter, could use a long-range attack. Zeno jumped and avoided An¡¯s Rankyaku. As the air sh hit the wall behind Zeno, it directly split it apart. Zeno¡¯splexion changed slightly. An sent several other Rankyaku¡¯s toward him, and Zeno couldn¡¯t avoid all of them, so instead of dodging, he made a w with his hands and waved them fiercely. Zeno¡¯s hands resembled dragon ws as he tore through the Rankyaku. ¡°As expected of a top-notch assassin.¡± An appreciated Zeno¡¯s power. Zeno realized that An was stronger than he thought. ¡°If that¡¯s the case, let¡¯s try this.¡± As he said this, Zeno put his right foot forward, bowed his body slightly, formed a w with his hand, and stretched his index and middle finger. His thumb and ring finger were retracted, making his hand resemble a sword. Seeing Zeno¡¯s posture, An was slightly surprised. ¡®Could he intend to use that?¡¯ Sure enough, as An thought, Zeno¡¯s Nen suddenly turned into a dragon head. An narrowed his eyes, readying himself to block this attack. In the next second, Zeno shouted: ¡°Dragon Lance!¡± Roar! A golden purple dragon directly rushed at An. An directly jumped into the air! ¡°Where do you think you¡¯re going.¡± Zeno waved his hand, and the Dragon immediately turned toward An in mid-air. An looked at the Dragon indifferently and quickly formed Icicles to meet with it. Roar! The Dragon roared and directly shattered the Icicles An threw at it. An directly returned to the ground and mmed both hands on the ground, creating five Ice walls. ¡°Come on, let me see how strong that Dragon is!¡± An sneered. Boom! The first Ice Wall broke, The second Ice wall broke, the third¡­ ¡°Haha! Break it!¡± Zeno pushed forward as he controlled the Dragon. Only two Ice Walls were remaining, and as soon as they copse, the Dragon would reach An. An didn¡¯t panic even though thest of the Ice walls were smashed. Instead, he smiled slightly and said: ¡°It¡¯s about time.¡± Roar!! A giant cier Dragon appeared above An¡¯s head, and under thetter¡¯s control, it collided with Zeno¡¯s Dragon. An avnche sound was produced as soon as the two Dragon Collided with each other. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 126: Double Reward! Chapter 126: Double Reward! The collision between the cier Dragon and the Golden Purple Dragon caused a massive explosion. Many in the Zoldyck Family ground felt the tremor and were startled. Zeno was the most surprised at this moment. Zeno and An looked at each other after the explosion resided. After a few moments of silence, Zeno said: ¡°It looks like this old man lost.¡± An was a little surprised at hearing this: ¡°Master Zeno, are you giving up now?¡± An knew that it was at most a tie, and they both were unharmed, which made him puzzled by Zeno¡¯s words. Zeno exined: ¡°Although it looks like we are equally matched, you can beat this old man at such a young age, which proves your power. You should know that when this old man was your age, I wasn¡¯t as strong as you are. Moreover, I can see that you still have other things ready. In other words, you went easy and didn¡¯t use all of your power when facing me. That shows how strong you are. If we continue to fight, I might lose even after going all out. So it¡¯s my loss.¡± An didn¡¯t expect Zeno to give up so easily, but he knew that Zeno was old, and he wasn¡¯t Netero, who could still be so powerful even after passing a hundred years. An also knew that Zeno still preserved 30% of his power, at least. However, since Zeno didn¡¯t want to fight anymore, An didn¡¯t insist on continuing. As a result, the fight ended in An¡¯s victory. Milluki couldn¡¯t believe that his grandfather lost and looked at An in surprise. His previous arrogance fell. There is no way he could maintain that haughty air in front of him when he is so young and already won against his grandfather. [Ding! You sessfully provoked Zeno, fought him, and won. Reward: Golden Treasure Chest, Wolf Fang Fist] ¡®What?!! I got two rewards?¡¯ An was shocked. ¡®Is it because I insisted on fighting Zeno and also provoked him?¡¯ An happily took the reward; the wolf fang style was Yamcha¡¯s fighting style from Dragon Ball. The moves of this style are simple and crude. It was simply a style that imitated wolf attacks. Even though it was simple, it was a fierce style, and it made An satisfied. Next came the golden chest, which wasn¡¯t the same as a Mysterious Treasure chest because the probability of something gooding out was 100%. [Ding! You opened a Golden Treasure Chest and obtained the pure version of the A level Ninjutsu, Chidori.] ¡®Ahhh! I got Chidori!!¡¯ An was so excited that he almost yelled out loud. The information about Chidori poured inside his brain, and he instantly mastered it. The Chidori was an A-ss Ninjutsu that formed lightning around the hand of the user. It¡¯s named Chidori due to the sound it makes, which resembled a thousand birds chirping. Although it¡¯s somewhat hard to control due to the tunnel vision from the speed it requires, it is an assassination technique. But if it hits its target, it¡¯s a one-shot kill technique. An slowly raised his right hand and opened his palm. After a short while, blue light emerged from his hand. The chirping of birds filled the ce as lightning covered An¡¯s hand. This was the Chidori! Zeno saw Chidori and was stunned: ¡°That¡¯s¡­ Lightning?¡± An nodded: ¡°It¡¯s called Chidori!¡± ¡°It seems dangerous. I can tell that it would cause quite the damage if it hits.¡± Seeing Zeno¡¯s look, An smiled and dispersed the Chidori. Zeno looked deeply at An and said: ¡°Fortunately, I gave up early. Otherwise, it would¡¯ve been bad if that hit me.¡± ¡°Master Zeno, we are just sparring to be friends, so why would I use something like that in a spar,¡± An said. Zeno nodded and turned around: ¡°You¡¯re very strong. How about bing an Assassin?¡± An was stunned for a bit as he didn¡¯t expect Zeno would ask this. After thinking about it, he said: ¡°Does it bring a lot of money?¡± Zeno was stunned for a moment, as he didn¡¯t expect An to ask something like this, then he smiled and said: ¡°Haha, of course, you can make a lot of money. Otherwise, how would the Zoldyck family survive for so long?¡± ¡°That¡¯s true.¡± An nodded. He didn¡¯t know how long the Zoldyck family stood in the world, but he was certain that Zeno¡¯s grandfather was an Assassin as well as the strongest man known in the world. So Killua was already a fifth generation of the Assassin family. An didn¡¯t know how much money the Zoldyck got, but it should be a vast fortune. But they are the top Assassins in the world. Their ie can¡¯t bepared to ordinary Assassins. Seeing An¡¯s doubt, Zeno said: ¡°Ordinary Assassins can¡¯t make much money because there are two things that are needed to be a professional Assassin.¡± ¡°What are those two things?¡± An asked curiously. Zeno said earnestly: ¡°To be a professional assassin, you need to be strong because if you¡¯re not, you won¡¯t be able to finish the mission, and you need to be famous. If you¡¯re not famous, you won¡¯t be able to receive a good mission and only go to the ck market looking for small targets that didn¡¯t bring much money. Only by umting fame can you make a living from this profession.¡± ¡°I see.¡± An nodded in understanding. Zeno said: ¡°With your current power, you¡¯re more than enough to join the business. The only thing youck is fame. No one will know about you, and you won¡¯t receive good missions.¡± An raised his head and said: ¡°In other words, I must start as an unknown Assassin and climb the ranks?¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 127: New Nen Ability Chapter 127: New Nen Ability Zeno said: ¡°Neers entering this industry start from the bottom, but with your power, you don¡¯t need to do that.¡± An asked: ¡°So, you¡¯re going to help me at the start?¡± ¡°I can get you acquainted with a few bosses that can pay good money,¡± Zeno exined. An nodded. He is now a professional Hunter. If he changes his job, it wouldn¡¯t be good for him. Seeing An hesitating, Zeno patted his shoulder and said: ¡°With your power, I can guarantee that you will be famous in no time. How about it, are you interested?¡± [Ding! Please Make a Choice] [1: ept Zeno¡¯s offer and be a Professional Assassin. Reward: Increase Nen by 10,000 Points.] [2: ept Zeno¡¯s Offer, and be an Assassin driven by interest. Reward: Ability Treasure Chest x1] [3: Reject Zeno¡¯s offer and exin that you¡¯re not interested in bing an Assassin. Reward: 10 Million Jenny.] An¡¯s heart pounded in his chest as he saw the second option. It seems like he can gain an ability from that Treasure Chest, which he was greatly interested in. An decisively chose the second option and said: ¡°Well, I can¡¯t be a professional Assassin since I¡¯m a professional Hunter now. Instead, Assassination will be my side job. I will ept the jobs I¡¯m interested in.¡± Zeno nodded: ¡°Well, that is also good. You can retain your original upation and have a side job.¡± ¡°Then let¡¯s do it like that for the time being. If you want anything from me, just ask me.¡± An and Zeno took their phones and added each other¡¯s contact members. After that, Zeno went with Milluki after saying he¡¯d contact An directlyter. Seeing Zeno leave, An couldn¡¯t wait and instantly opened the Treasure Chest. [Ding! You obtained a specialist¡¯s Ability: Devour!] An¡¯s eyes lit up as he looked at the description of The Devour. [Devour: After activating this Ability, the user will be able to devour the target¡¯s Nen and enhance his own with no upper limit to the process. There is a certain chance to obtain the target¡¯s Nen ability after devouring his Nen. Risk: When activating this Ability, the user will be in a state of Zetsu and can¡¯t use Nen. Also, if the target has made an oath or has some lingering obsession, there is a significant risk for a bacsh to ur.] An frowned. This Ability was pretty good as it can enhance his Nen greatly by swallowing the Nen of others. And there is no limit to devouring, and there is a chance to obtain the target¡¯s Nen ability, which was great, but the shoring of this Ability is obvious. He didn¡¯t care about Zetsu since he has the Ice fruit and many other abilities he can use without Nen, but the problem was getting the target¡¯s Oaths and Obsessions. The Oaths can provide great power to the user but at high risk. The first person who used an Oath in the show was Kurapika; he limited himself to use his chains against the spiders, which provided him with great power when facing them. The second was Gon, who sacrificed his future and everything to obtain the power to defeat Pito. The third was Pito, who Gon killed, but due to her fear of Gon threatening the Ant King, and her loyalty to him, she activated her Nen after death which can be said as her obsession to protect her king. The fourth was Hisoka, who ced used an Oath before he died to Chrollo and, as a result, was resurrected after. An had quite the impression of the Oath. Therefore, devouring one will be dangerous. The Devour ability is a double-edged sword. He had to be careful on who to use it or else it will bring him a great risk. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 128: Leaving the Zoldyck Family Chapter 128: Leaving the Zoldyck Family Two dayster, An took Hancock and Gon to leave the Zoldyck Family. ¡°Gon, Killua won¡¯te?¡± Seeing that Killua didn¡¯te, An asked Gon in confusion. Gon shook his head and said: ¡°I don¡¯t know, I already told Killua, but he said that if he doesn¡¯t show up by noon, then we can go alone.¡± An nodded and looked at the time. It was 11:30 Am. If Killua didn¡¯t show up after half an hour, it means that he won¡¯t be going with them. It means that he wasn¡¯t allowed to leave the Zoldyck family. An¡¯s guess was on the money since, currently, Killua was inside the mansion talking to his father. ¡°Dad, I want to go with Gon.¡± ¡°What about work?¡± Silva asked. ¡°I¡¯m still going to work even when outside,¡± Killua said. ¡°Well, you can go then.¡± ¡°Really?¡± Killua didn¡¯t expect his father to agree so readily to his request. Silva said sternly: ¡°Of course. Killua, you¡¯ve grown up, and I can¡¯t just lock you up inside our home, like what father used to do to me. You have your own future and life, and you decide what you want to do with it.¡± Hearing this, Killua was a little stunned. He didn¡¯t expect that his father would be this understanding. Silva¡¯s words moved him. Finally, Silva stood up and deeply bowed toward Silva and said: ¡°Dad, thank you, I won¡¯t let you down.¡± Silva¡¯s unsmiling face showed a slight smile, and he waved his hand: ¡°Well, go, don¡¯t let your friends wait.¡± ¡°Goodbye, Dad.¡± Killua turned around and left. Silva¡¯s face turned serious the moment Killua was Gon. In the courtyard, An, Gon and Hancock were waiting patiently. ¡°It seems that the silver-haired kid won¡¯te,¡± Hancock said. Gon was somewhat disappointed as he agreed with Hancock. An nced at the time, and it was indeed close to noon, but Killua still didn¡¯t show up. At this moment, An felt something and raised his head to look at the Mansion and said: ¡°Killua is here Gon.¡± ¡°Really?¡± Gon looked up in surprise. Sure enough, a white figure quickly came down from the mountain toward the courtyard. At this time, Gotoh was waiting with An and the others in the courtyard and other butlers. An nced around and found Canary amongst them. When Killua appeared, the solemn faces showed rare softness because most of the butlers and maids loved Killua sincerely. ¡°Killua, you¡¯re really here. This is great.¡± Gon stepped forward excitedly and hugged Killua. Killua wasn¡¯t adapt to Gon¡¯s enthusiasm and said: ¡°Ahem, people are watching, please let me go, Gon.¡± Gon let go and said: ¡°Killua, are you going with us?¡± ¡°Well, of course, my dad approved,¡± Killua replied happily. At this time, Gotoh walked over and said: ¡°It¡¯s great. Master Killua, I didn¡¯t expect the Patriarch to permit you to go out.¡± Killua nodded and said: ¡°Thank you for taking care of me, Gotoh. I will take care of myself from now on, so don¡¯t worry.¡± As they walked out, a giant dog was lying at the door. It was mike. ¡°I will let Mike take you back to the gate,¡± Gotoh said. ¡°Thank you, Gotoh.¡± The four of them jumped on top of Mike. After a short while, they reached the gate and jumped down. Gon said: ¡°Killua, when I came in to look for you, I opened four gates, but the gate said that you could open three gates, is that your limit?¡± ¡°Of course not.¡± Killua denied. ¡°If I try my best, I can open four gates as well.¡± ¡°Really? Killua, you still didn¡¯t learn Nen, so it won¡¯t be easy to open four gates.¡± Gon said suspiciously. He was suspicious because he used all of his strength along with Nen and could barely do it when he pushed the fourth gate. Killua didn¡¯t know how to use Nen yet, and it wasn¡¯t a simple matter to only use pure strength. ¡°Since you don¡¯t believe me, I will open them now.¡± With that said, Killua took a step forward and took a deep breath, and put his hand on the Testing Gate. And with a low shout, Killua¡¯s arms bulged as he used his full power. He instantly pushed the first and second gate, and after a few seconds, he pushed the third. At this time, he was trying to push the fourth gate open. ¡°Come on!¡± Gon encouraged him. An was also surprised because he didn¡¯t expect Killua to be so strong. Boom! The fourth gate was finally pushed open. Afterward, Killua copsed while sping his hands weakly as he felt exhausted. Killua¡¯s potential and strength was really something An could look forward to. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 129: Hisoka Chapter 129: Hisoka Two dayster, An and the others booked an aircraft, and their destination was the heavens arena. Killua was the one who suggested going to the Heaven¡¯s Arena, as he visited that ce when he was six years old with his father to train. The Heavens Arena was a paradise for fighters, as fighters from all around the world gathered there. It was an excellent ce to train for Gon and Killua, who wanted to get stronger. On the aircraft, Gon and Killua were drinking juice while talking about their childhood. An was older than both, so he wasn¡¯t interested much, so instead, he brought Hancock to the rest area. ¡°What a coincidence, I didn¡¯t expect to meet you here.¡± Someone said behind An. Hearing this voice, An turned around in surprise. He saw Hisoka ying with his cards. ¡°Hisoka? Why are you here?¡± ¡°It¡¯s a coincidence,¡± Hisoka replied. ¡°A coincidence?¡± An didn¡¯t think so. Hisoka: ¡°I¡¯m going to the heavens arena. What about you?¡± An looked at Hisoka and said: ¡°I seriously suspect that you¡¯re following us now.¡± Hisoka looked uncertain before saying: ¡°Hmm? Could it be you¡¯re going to the Heaven¡¯s Arena as well?¡± An: ¡°Exactly!¡± ¡°Oh? It¡¯s entirely a coincidence. I¡¯m not following you there.¡± Hisoka said with a smile. An saw Hisoka and could tell that thetter wasn¡¯t lying, so he said: ¡°It does seem like a coincidence. By the way, are you alone here? Isn¡¯t Illumi with you?¡± ¡°We separated after the hunter exam. We haven¡¯t seen each other since then already, but we call each other sometimes. He is on a mission.¡± Unexpectedly, Hisoka answered An honestly. Illumi was a professional Assassin, and he only got the hunter¡¯s license for his job. Hisoka looked around and saw that only An and Hancock were there and was a little curious: ¡°By the way, are you alone with your fianc¨¦? Where¡¯s Gon?¡± An said in a deep voice: ¡°You came for Gon after all.¡± ¡°Although I like fruits like Gon, I didn¡¯te for him. I was just curious about what he is doing.¡± ¡°Well, I can tell you, he is chatting with Killua over there.¡± ¡°Oh? Killua¡¯s here as well?¡± Hisoka was a little surprised. ¡°They¡¯re going to the heavens, Arena as well? Interesting, it seems like it won¡¯t be a boring journey.¡± Seeing Hisoka so excited, An didn¡¯t react at all. With his current power, he is no longer afraid of Hisoka. Therefore, it didn¡¯t matter what he wanted to do as long as he didn¡¯t go too far. But looking at Hisoka, An knew that he would likely attack Gon and Killua. At this time, the system¡¯s voice echoed in his head. [Ding! Make a Choice.] [1: Let Hisoka help train Gon and Killua. Reward: Rasengan!] [2: Prevent Hisoka from fighting Gon and Killua. Reward: Fire Release: Fireball Technique!] Rasengan was better. An directly looked at Hisoka and said: ¡°By the way, Hisoka, I will trouble with you something.¡± ¡°What is it?¡± Hisoka asked puzzledly. An replied without hesitation: ¡°I want you to help me train Gon and Killua a little bit.¡± ¡°Training?¡± Hisoka frowned and looked weirdly at An as if he didn¡¯t expect such a request. An said again: ¡°Just teach them.¡± ¡°Why are you asking me?¡± Hisoka asked. ¡°The two of them are going to the Heaven¡¯s Arena to train, and you can tortu¡­ threaten them one, but don¡¯t go too far. Just make them realize they are still too weak.¡± ¡°So that what you mean.¡± Hisoka understood An¡¯s n. He wanted to borrow Hisoka¡¯s help to strike Gon and Killua¡¯s current pride and make them grow up. But that wasn¡¯t good for Hisoka since he will be a target for Gon and Killua. Although Husoka didn¡¯t mind it very much, he wasn¡¯t happy to be used that way. ¡°Hisoka, what do you think? Can you help me with this?¡± An asked since Hisoka didn¡¯t reply. Hisoka raised his head and said: ¡°I don¡¯t think I will agree.¡± An instantly replied: ¡°Don¡¯t forget that you owe me a favor.¡± Hisoka directly froze and remembered that he did owe An a favor. ¡°It seems like there is such a thing. Okay, I will do it.¡± An nodded: ¡°Well, the matter is in your hands then.¡± ¡°No problem, leave Gon and Killua to me. I will help them grow.¡± Hisoka smiled evilly. An knew that Hisoka was weird, but he wasn¡¯t worried much about Gon and Killua. Even if he went too far, An can intervene and stop him. ¡°By the way, can you ask why you want me to do this? In the heavens, Arena, there is no shortage of strong opponents. In fact, you can even do it yourself, so why ask me?¡± An shrugged and replied: ¡°Because you¡¯re more suitable.¡± ¡°I¡¯m more suitable?¡± Hisoka asked puzzledly. An nodded: ¡°Well, you look more like a viin.¡± Hisoka was dumbfounded: ¡°I thought that I looked kind. I didn¡¯t think I looked like a viin. I¡¯m so sad.¡± An patted his shoulder and said: ¡°Anyway, I will leave that matter to you. But you shouldn¡¯t appear in front of Gon and Killua for the time being.¡± Hisoka nodded regretfully. ¡°Well, I will surprise them in The Heaven¡¯s Arena then.¡± After saying this, Hisoka left. At the same time, An received the reward from the system. Ransegan!! Instantly, a blue ball of energy appeared in An¡¯s palm. Rasengan was an A-ss technique much like Chidori. While Chidori causes damage to the surface of the body, Rasengan messes up the insidespletely. Hancock, beside An, looked at the Rasengan and said: ¡°What kind of skill is that!! It looks dangerous. Where are you learning those things?¡± An smiled: ¡°This is called Rasengan. As for where I learned it, that¡¯s a secret.¡± ¡°By the way, do you want the two kids to fight against that Hisoka person? He seems very dangerous.¡± ¡°As expected of you, you have good eyes. Hisoka indeed is dangerous, but there is no need to worry that he will do anything since he promised to help. You should know that the stronger the man, the less he would break a promise.¡± At this time, Gon and Killua shuddered at the same time. They looked at each other and felt numb, as if someone sold their souls to the devil. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 130: Heavens Arena Chapter 130: Heavens Arena The Heaven¡¯s Arena was on the same continent as The Republic of Padokea, Killua¡¯s Zoldyck country, but on the opposite side of the continent on the eastern part. After riding the aircraft for a day, An and the others arrived at the city where The Heaven¡¯s Arena was located. Since it waste, the four found a hotel nearby to stay the night temporarily. Killua and Gon shared a room, and An shared one with Hancock. The next day, after eating breakfast, the four of them took a bus and went to The Heaven¡¯s Arena. The Heavens Arena was the fourth-tallest building globally, with a height that reaches 991 meters and 251 floors. Almost all of The Heaven¡¯s Arena floors have a battle ring in them, and the fighters could only go to the upper floors when they win their fights in the Arena. ording to data, more than a million fighters are gathering here from all around the world. In addition to that, at least four thousand fighterse and go each day, which brings this ce¡¯s poprity. Half an hourter, An and the others got out of the bus one after the other. The tower seemed to reach the sky when they stood in front of it. ¡°Wow! This is the Heavens Arena? It¡¯s so tall.¡± Gon looked like a country bumpkin who just came out of a mountain somewhere and never seen the world before. However, no one can really me him because even An and Hancock felt awe when looking at the tower. Hancock said: ¡°This is the first time I see such a majestic building.¡± ¡°This is the Heavens Arena.¡± An sighed. You can only feel this shock when standing in front of the tower personally. Killua wasn¡¯t shocked since he¡¯s been here before, so he directly said: ¡°Let¡¯s go register on the first floor.¡± The registration office was located on the first floor with five reception windows. Each one of them had a long line. The lines reached outside into the hall. ¡°Wo, there are so many people.¡± Gon eximed in surprise. ¡°Four thousand people register every day in The Heaven¡¯s Arena after all,¡± An exined. ¡°It hasn¡¯t changed at all.¡± Killua sighed as he remembered the first time he came here. ¡°Let get in line.¡± Gon and Killua directly started lining up. ¡°What are you going to do?¡± An looked at Hancock and asked. Hancock was attracting gazes from all over the ce. It was like this everywhere they went. An has long been ustomed to the envious and jealous gazes. After all, Hancock was a beauty that can destroy an empire. Of course, they can only look from a distance since they knew their worth. To be worthy of such a woman, a man can¡¯t be simple. And An was the man beside her, which means that they can¡¯t mess with him. Although he looked young, he was handsome, and his face can match that of Hancock. Hancock waszy to deal with them, so she looked at An and said: ¡°You go in line, I won¡¯t.¡± An nodded as he knew that Hancock wasn¡¯t interested in this ce. She was only here because An was here. Two hourster, An, Gon, and Killua finally registered and became official fighters in the Arena. ording to the rules, all participants must fight a preliminary match on the first floor. The three of them directly headed toward the vast area on the first floor, which contained many fighting rings. There were sixteen fighting rings on the first floor, which means that thirty-two participants will fight in each round. Each participant had three chances to fight, and the judges would determine which floor the participant would ascend to. The better the performance, the higher the floor. The best can be directly promoted to the 199th floor. Participation numbers were issued to each participant. Killua¡¯s number was 2054, and Gon¡¯s was 2055. As for An, his number was 2068. When An brought Hancock to the fighting hall, Killua and Gon¡¯s fights were already arranged. They were fighting middle-aged men. Gon only used his right hand and pushed hard to knock out his opponent, while Killua knocked them with a chop to the back of their head. Gon was directly assigned to the 50th floor. And since Killua had already participated before, the referee appointed Killua to the 180th floor. However, he didn¡¯t want to get ahead of Gon, so he refused and requested to be assigned to the 50th floor like Gon. ¡°You performed well,¡± An said. ¡°If we can¡¯t even pass the first floor, then it will be really awkward.¡± Killua shrugged. After a while, An heard his number being called and said: ¡°It¡¯s my turn. I will be back soon.¡± Both Gon and Killua expressed sympathy for An¡¯s opponent. Sure enough, An entered the ring and came out in less than three seconds. His opponent was someone famous and ¡®strong,¡¯ but a light palm strike knocked him out. The referee directly decided that An can directly go to the 100th floor. However, he did the same thing as Killua and stayed on the 50th floor. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 131: Zushi Chapter 131: Zushi After finishing their fights, An and the other directly ascended to the fiftieth floor of The Heaven¡¯s Arena. Several people were on there handing over the tickets given to them by the referee. In The Heaven¡¯s Arena, you get a bonus on each fight below the 200th floor. Every winner on the 50th floor can get 50,000 Jenny as a reward. And the higher the floor, the more money they received. ording to Killua, he reached the 190th floor thest time, and he received about 200 Million Jenny. With such a huge bonus, even An was excited. Two Hundred Million Jenny isn¡¯t a small sum. An, Gon, and Killua arrived at the waiting area for the fighters on the 50th floor, while Hancock was invited to the staff¡¯s audience area since she wasn¡¯t a participant. Many participants looked quite fearsome, and they even released their killing intent without holding back. An and the others didn¡¯t feel anything because they already know how to restrain their aura, and the weak killing intent being released didn¡¯t bother them in the slightest. People who can¡¯t control themselves may seem strong to ordinary pedestrians, but they were just an empty shell to an expert. Soon, An and the others were called for their fight. Killua¡¯s opponent was a middle-aged man named Zal. Killua didn¡¯t bother with his opponent and directly chopped him on the neck from behind, intending on knocking him out, but to his surprise, Zal was stunned and didn¡¯t faint. Killua quickly used his assassination technique and once again appeared behind Zal and chopped again. This time, he used about one-third of his power, which should be enough to knock Zal out. But to his shock, Zal didn¡¯t fall, and at this time, Killua realized that Zal was using Nen to defend against his attacks..Although Killua didn¡¯t learn Nen yet, he knows that Nen can improve power and defense since he fought with Gonst time. Killua looked at him and said: ¡°Do you think that I can¡¯t knock you out because you¡¯re using Nen?¡± After saying this, Killua quickly rushed toward Zal, who couldn¡¯t react in time to Killua¡¯s speed. Killua almost used all of his power this time, chopping Zal on the back of his neck. Zal¡¯s Bones cracking sound echoed as he fell to the ground. ¡°Damn, kid!!¡± Zal was unwilling. He didn¡¯t understand why he lost while Killua didn¡¯t know how to use Nen. Killua realized that although Zal could use Nen, he wasn¡¯t as good as Gon. In other words, Zal wasn¡¯t close enough to be a match to Killua. This also made him want to learn Nen even more. It was now Gon¡¯s turn, and his opponent was a Nordic giant. Gon seemed like a small cat in front of a tiger. He was a little bit frightened but got over it when the fight started. The giant threw a punch at Gon, and thetter didn¡¯t avoid it. Instead, he punched back. Gon¡¯s fist seemed pitifully smallpared to the giant¡¯s fist. However, the tiny fist¡¯s power was terrifying. As soon as the fists collided, the giant clutched his arms and backed away in disbelief¡­ The audience was stunned. Unexpectedly, the little kid was so powerful!! The giant once again mmed his other fist toward God. Gon punched back, and the giant¡¯s entire arm made a crisp bone-cracking sound as it directly shattered. Gon won the fight smoothly, and now it was An¡¯s turn. An¡¯s opponent was a young boy in a white karate uniform, who seemed younger than Gon and Killua. An was a little surprised seeing him as he knew who it was. It was Zushi. ¡°Unexpectedly, you¡¯re my opponent.¡± Anughed. ¡°Do you know me?¡± Zushi was a little puzzled. ¡°No, it¡¯s the first time we met,¡± An replied. ¡°Okay, please advise,¡± Zushi said politely. An nodded and said: ¡°I will.¡± Zushi heard this and said: ¡°Please don¡¯t underestimate me, or you will regret it.¡± An wasn¡¯t underestimating Zushi. After all, he knew that this kid already learned Nen at this time. Sure enough, as soon as the fight started, Zushi wrapped Nen around his body directly. An could see theyer of Nen wrapping around Zushi, but it was pretty weak. An directly appeared in front of Zushi, who was taken aback, as he couldn¡¯t react. An just lightly chopped Zushi on the head, making thetter fall clenching his head in pain. ¡°This¡­ How is this possible? You hit me gently, but it is so powerful.¡± Zushi couldn¡¯t believe what happened. An just stood in front of Zushi and said to him: ¡°You are too weak.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 132: Wing-Sensei Chapter 132: Wing-Sensei Zushi was defeated. He was utterly defeated. When he walked out of the ring, Zushi was extremely frustrated. An¡¯s words still echoed in his ears. He doubted whether his effort so far was for naught. ¡°Zushi!¡± Zushi heard the gentle voice of his master. Wing was wearing ck trousers, a white shirt, and round sses. It seems like he didn¡¯t have time to arrange his clothes and went out a little messy. ¡°Wing-Sensei, half of your shirt is hanging out again.¡± Zushi reminded his master. ¡°Sorry, sorry, I just came out of the bathroom.¡± Wing hurriedly arranged his clothes and looked at Zushi. ¡°Wing-sensei, sorry, I lost,¡± Zushi said dejectedly as he couldn¡¯t look into Wing¡¯s eyes. ¡°I saw it. Zushi, don¡¯t feel dejected. Your opponent was way stronger than you are. You didn¡¯t have a chance to win against him, and I don¡¯t me you because of this.¡± Zushi raised his head and said: ¡°Really?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Wing nodded. He saw Zushi¡¯s match, and although An didn¡¯t use much power, he could clearly see how strong thetter was. ¡°Wing-sensei, that person was so powerful, he just used one blow to defeat me, and I even though I used all of my power, I couldn¡¯t do anything.¡± Zushi said with fear. ¡°Moreover, that person said that I¡¯m weak, I¡¯m really weak, Wing-sensei?¡± Wing pushed his sses and said: ¡°Zushi, calm down. You¡¯re not weak. Compared to most people your age, you are a genius. It¡¯s just that person isn¡¯t at the same level as you, so he isn¡¯t wrong when he said you are weakpared to him, which means you just need to practice harder from now on.¡± After winning the matches, Killua, Gon, and An run into Zushi and Wing in the corridor after receiving the money. Zushi looked at An, and thetter said: ¡°Hello, what a coincidence.¡± ¡°Wing-sensei, that him,¡± Zushi said. ¡°I know.¡± Wing nodded at Zushi and said to An: ¡°Hello, I¡¯m wing, Zushi¡¯s teacher.¡± An smiled and said: ¡°My name is An. I fought against Zushi today. I hope he doesn¡¯t mind my words.¡± Wing said: ¡°An-san, you¡¯re also a Nen master, right?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± An nodded. Wing asked: ¡°Is this the first time you came to the Heaven Arena?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right.¡± An nodded and introduced Gon, Killua, and Hancock behind him. ¡°He¡¯s Gon, that¡¯s Killua, and that¡¯s my fianc¨¦e.¡± Wing¡¯s gaze fell on Hancock. He was taken aback for a bit before saying: ¡°An-san¡¯s fianc¨¦e is really breathtaking. You really are blessed.¡± After saying this, Wing¡¯s eyes fell on Gon and Killua, then pushed his sses and said: ¡°I have seen you two fight. You performed very well.¡± Then his gaze was fixed on Killua: ¡°Killua, from your fight previously, you¡¯re an Assassin, right?¡± Killua shrugged and said: ¡°Yeah, I¡¯m indeed one, and a professional one at that.¡± Then looking at Gon, he said: ¡°Gon, from your fight before, you learned Nen, right?¡± Gon nodded and asked: ¡°Wing-san, from your words, you are also a Nen user, right?¡± Wing pushed his sses and said: ¡°Well, yes.¡± Gon asked: ¡°Wing-san must be very strong then, right?¡± ¡°Haha, I¡¯m not that strong,¡± Wing replied modestly. ¡°By the way, Gon, can I ask how long have you been learning Nen, and how much did you learn?¡± Wing asked curiously. ¡°An taught me Ten, Zetsu, Ren, and Hatsu, the basics of Nen.¡± Wing was surprised: ¡°Have you already learned them all? It seems that your talent is quite good.¡± ¡°No, it¡¯s just that An teaches well.¡± Gon, who was rarely praised, touched the back of his head in embarrassment. Wing nodded and said: ¡°Of course, a good teacher has a great influence on a student.¡± After saying this, Wing looked at Zushi and said: ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I have been teaching you for more than half a year, and you¡¯ve yet to grasp the Nen of me. I¡¯m really ashamed.¡± Hearing this, Zushi said: ¡°Wing-sensei, please don¡¯t me yourself. If you want to me someone, it¡¯s me, who doesn¡¯t have any talent and learn slowly.¡± ¡°Zushi¡­¡± ¡°Wing-sensei¡­¡± The master and student hugged each other, which seemed touching, while An thought of something else entirely ¡®Are they the reincarnation of Gai and Lee?¡¯ Killua sighed and said: ¡°Oh, you all know about Ne, but I haven¡¯t learned it yet¡­¡± An chuckled: ¡°Killua when we reach the 200th floor. I will keep my promise and teach you Nen.¡± ¡°Really?¡± Killua¡¯s eyes lit up. ¡°Of course, did I lie to you before?¡± An said. ¡°Then it¡¯s settled. I will definitively reach the 200th floor very quickly.¡± Killua was exceptionally motivated. Wing pushed his sses and said: ¡°If An-san doesn¡¯t teach you, I can teach you too, Killua.¡± Hearing this, Killua was stunned for a moment. He didn¡¯t understand why Wing was being this good to him, but he still said: ¡°Thank you, Wing-san, but I still hope that An would teach me.¡± ¡°It¡¯s okay, as long as you learn Nen, it doesn¡¯t matter who is the one who taught you.¡± Wing said as he didn¡¯t mind being rejected. An thought of something and said: ¡°By the way, Wing-san, are you a professional Hunter?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Wing nodded. ¡°I know you guys. You are the candidates from the 287th hunter exam. You¡¯re currently very famous in the association. Since eight candidates passed that exam and got a hunter license, and was referred as the Golden Generation by Chairman Netero.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, Get ready for the new Novel, it¡¯s on the way!! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 133: Deal Chapter 133: Deal After exchanging a few words, An took An and Gon to continue climbing The Heavens Arena. Each fight, they can climb ten floors before they reach the 200th floor. After winning on the fiftieth floor, Gon, An, And Killua received 60,000 Jenny each. After that, An and the other two continued to fight and win sessfully till the 90th floor. Their matches were fast since they didn¡¯t waste time and directly knocked out their opponent, and they have yet to encounter a powerful foe. An was looking forward to seeing their reaction when they see Hisoka. Hisoka is already above the 200th floor, so An was certain that they would meet him after reaching the 200th floor. Hisoka was most likely observing Gon and Killua from somewhere. At four in the evening, An, Gon, and Killua reached the 100th floor. ording to the rules, contestants who reach the 100th floor can get a private room for free. However, if they lose even once, you will fall back to the 90th floor. Those, who can climb to the 100th floor, are somewhat strong, and to remain there, they will do their best to fight. They won¡¯t show mercy to their opponents. Since it waste, the three of them decided to stop climbing today and continue tomorrow. Although they are on the same floor, their rooms weren¡¯t close to each other, so each went to his room to rest. Since they each had a room, An took Hancock over to his room, saving amodation costs. It has been months since An summoned Hancock to the Hunter X Hunter World, and she was already used to living with An. And even though she was disobedient at the start, she was now obedient and no longer arrogant when dealing with An. An no longer forced her to stay here and gave her control to decided whether she wants to stay here or not. After being in this world for a few months, Hancock became interested and was no longer in a hurry to return. The next day, after having breakfast, An and the other two continued climbing the tower. On this day, An, along with Gon and Killua, reached the 150th floor and won a lot of money. This continued the third day as well, and on this day, they reached the 190th floor. An¡¯s fights were concluded the fastest as he only needed one attack to end the battle, which gave him the nickname ¡®One-Punch Man!¡¯ in The Heavens Arena. In The Heavens Arena, a strong contestant will attract the audience¡¯s attention and be a celebrity. When An¡¯s match, the audience would mourn his opponent before the fight starts. Although Gon and Killua performed really well, their opponent became stronger and stronger, and they were no longer effortless. Even so, they gained a great response from the audience as the rising stars. They were young and strong, so of course, they are popr. When they get into the ring, the audience will call their names and cheer them. Killua was embarrassed by this, but Gon felt very good about it. After reaching the 190th floor, An didn¡¯t immediately rush to the 200th. Gon and Killua reached the 190th floor a weekter after An. ¡°They performed very well; it was slightly beyond my expectations.¡± An saw Hisoka looked fascinated. ¡°Are you residing on the 200th floor?¡± An asked. ¡°Well, I was here a few years ago, and I¡¯m a frequent visitor,¡± Hisoka replied truthfully with a yful expression. ¡°Are you going to meet Gon and Killua on the 200th floor?¡± An asked again. ¡°Well, it seems like I can¡¯t hide anything from you,¡± Hisoka replied. An nodded and said: ¡°The 200th floor is the line between Nen Masters and ordinary contestants. Are you going to use Baptism on them?¡± Hisoka¡¯s face changed: ¡°You even know about this. Have you been to the 200th floor?¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t reach there yet, but I know about it.¡± An didn¡¯t exin much. ¡°Their fundamental strength is enough, so the Baptism is necessary. Even though Gon has learned Nen, his Nen isn¡¯t strong enough, so I will use this opportunity to teach him that. As for Killua, he might feel the horror of Nen since he didn¡¯t learn it yet. In short, I will give both of them a good baptism. You wait and see.¡± After saying this, Hisoka left the corridor. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, Get ready for the new Novel, it¡¯s on the way!! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 134: Testing Shusui Chapter 134: Testing Shusui After two days, An decided to go for the 200th Floor, which means he had to win on the 190th Floor. Since there were only 10 floors between the two, the contestant there weren¡¯t average. The foes from that point on are stronger than others and any challenger requires significant power to defeat them. An was already in ce on top of the ring. Looking around, he could see the stand full of people waiting to see an amazing fight. Amongst the spectators, he could see Gon, Killua, and Hancock. There was also Zushi and Wing, and even Hisoka was there. This game will determine if An could advance to the 200th Floor, which those who knew his power knew that he could get there easily. The audience voted for the most likely person to win, and 40% of the votes were in An¡¯s favor, while the remaining 60% were against him. ¡°It seems that most people here think that I¡¯d lose.¡± Although An was surprised that he only had 40% of the votes, this caused his curiosity to be piqued. ¡®Having 60% of the vote in favor of him winning, it seems like my opponent is strong.¡¯ An directly nced at his foe on the other side and saw a man wearing a purple Yukata, arge saber on his waist, and an X-shaped scar on his face. This guy¡¯s name was Kentaro, and he is An¡¯s opponent in this match. ording to the Heavens Arena¡¯s rules, contestants were prohibited from using weapons below the 200th Floor. After reaching that Floor, the rules be rxed, allowing weapons. Kentaro held the de¡¯s sheath with his left hand while his right hand was on the hilt, ready to draw his sword at any second. ¡°It looks like a good sword.¡± An¡¯s gaze fell on the sword on Kentaro¡¯s waist andmented. ¡°I will end this match with one blow,¡± Kentaro said in a deep voice. ¡°You seem confident.¡± An smiled and said: ¡°Well, since you are going to use a sword, then I will fight with a sword as well.¡± Kentaro frowned at An as thetter wasn¡¯t carrying any weapon. ¡°The sword is here.¡± An said before the storage ring on An¡¯s finger gleamed strangely. In the next instant, Shusui appeared in An¡¯s hand. An looked at Shusui apologetically since he didn¡¯t use it for a long time now. It was an excellent opportunity to use it now. Kentaro stared at Shusui in An¡¯s hand, and he could tell that it wasn¡¯t an ordinary sword. As for how the sword appeared in An¡¯s hand, Kentaro didn¡¯t care. ¡°This sword is Shusui, and it didn¡¯t taste blood for a while; no, yours is the first in a long time.¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, Kentaro snorted coldly. ¡°Arrogant fellow, you will swallow your wordster.¡± The referee used his hand to gesture the beginning of the match, and instantly Kentaro drew his sword out and shed at An. An directly lounged at him with Shusui. In a sh of light, the two passed each other in a second. Blood dripped down on the ground from Shusui as An turned around and looked at Kentaro. At this time, Kentaro wasn¡¯t moving at all, and suddenly the sword in his hand snapped in two. Blood dripped from Kentaro¡¯s body, and soon it formed arge patch on the ground. Silence filled the stands. They couldn¡¯t see how the fight began or how It ended. They only saw the result of the battle. An wasn¡¯t affected by the silence and directly looked at the referee: ¡°You can call the match.¡± An nced at Kentaro, then at the referee. Aftering out of his stunned silence, the referee directly entered the ring to talk with Kentaro. ¡°Kentaro, can you continue the fight?¡± but Kentaro didn¡¯t respond as he remained motionless. The referee realized something and touched Kentaro¡¯s shoulder. Thud! Kentaro directly fell in the pool of his blood. His eyes widened, and his expression bewildered, the referee eximed: ¡°Dead, Dead?¡± Not only the referee but even the spectators were taken aback. Kentaro was dead. He died after a single moment by An¡¯s sword. When Kentaro¡¯s sword was broken, his life was taken as well. A swordsman didn¡¯t fear death since the path of a sword was filled with death. But Kentaro¡¯s expression showed shock, fear, and regret. He couldn¡¯t believe that he would die by An¡¯s hand. Instantly, the referee announced the winner, and An advanced to the 200th Floor. Walking out of the ring, Gon, Killua, and the others gathered around An. Gon directly said: ¡°An, you¡¯re cruel.¡± Killua disagreed with Gon and said: ¡°It was a good strike. Gon, you¡¯re native.¡± ¡°I¡¯m Na?ve?¡± ¡°Well, you probably don¡¯t know Kentaro, but he wanted to kill An in this match.¡± ¡°Really?¡± ¡°It¡¯s just that he wasn¡¯t as strong as An, so he was killed. If he were stronger, An would be the one dead.¡± Gon nodded without saying anything as if he understood something. ¡°But then again, An, I didn¡¯t expect you to be so good with words. How many things are you hiding?¡± Killua asked curiously. ¡°Swordsmanship is just a hobby.¡± Anughed. After chatting for a bit, An and Hancock went away, which Hancock took the chance to ask An: ¡°I seem to know the sword that you have.¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°You have good eyes. This is Shusui, one of the O Wazamono series. It¡¯s a product from your world.¡± ¡°No wonder it looks familiar.¡± Hancock nodded and didn¡¯t question An from where he got it because she knew he wouldn¡¯t answer. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, Get ready for the new Novel, it¡¯s on the way!! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 135: Nen Baptism Chapter 135: Nen Baptism After sessfully advancing to the 200th floor, An directly went up to register. Each contestant had a luxury suite on this floor, but that suite will be taken back if you fall from the 200th floor. Therefore, many contestants fight desperately to maintain the luxury they got. In addition to this, there were no bonuses from now onwards. It didn¡¯t matter if the contestant won or lost. They won¡¯t receive any money. ¡°You¡¯re finally here.¡± After registering at the information desk, An saw Hisoka in the hallway. Hisoka smiled at An: ¡°I watched your match and was surprised that you¡¯re a swordsman. I didn¡¯t know you have that many cards up your sleeve.¡± An shrugged: ¡°Swordsmanship is just one of my hobbies. As for other hidden cards, you will see thatter.¡± ¡°Then I will wait.¡± Hisoka replied and then gazed at An: ¡°I look forward to that day.¡± An asked: ¡°You want to fight me?¡± ¡°If there is a chance, I would be happy to, wouldn¡¯t you?¡± Hisoka said with interest. ¡®He¡¯s a fighting maniac who doesn¡¯t back down from a fight.¡¯ An thought helplessly. [Ding! Make A Choice] [1: Agree to fight with Hisoka. Reward: Increase Nen by 5,000 Points.] [2: Refuse to fight Hisoka. Reward: Increase Nen by 3,000 Thousand points.] [3: Agree to fight Hisoka and defeat him. Reward: ??!!!] (T/L: Author be like ¡®interesting, but I won¡¯t tell you now, he really didn¡¯t write the reward there.) Faced with the rewards, An naturally (mysteriously) picked thest one. After pondering for a bit, An said: ¡°Hisoka, I can promise to fight you, but not now.¡± ¡°No problem, as long as you agree, there will be a time in the future.¡± Hisoka smiled. ¡°At the moment, I¡¯m more interested in Gon and Killua. I don¡¯t know when they wille up.¡± An replied: ¡°They already applied for a match. It will be the afternoon after tomorrow. With their current power, it shouldn¡¯t be hard to advance. When the timees, you will have to handle this.¡± ¡°Of course, I will give them a surprise.¡± Hisoka smiled as he narrowed his eyes. Two dayster, Gon and Killua sessfully passed the 190th floor and advanced. Both of them reached the 200th floor with ease with no pressure all along. This made them feel strong andcent. Of course, this is normal because it took them less than two weeks to advance to the 200th floor. The two of them took the elevator to the 200th floor to register, because ording to the rules, whoever doesn¡¯t register within the specified time limit will have to go back to the first floor again. And since this was Killua¡¯s second time in The Heavens Arena, he wouldn¡¯t be able to get in again. As they walked out of the elevator, both felt a strong aura oppressing them and hindering them from moving forward. ¡°Damn it, who is releasing such a frightening Killing Intent?¡± As a professional Assassin, Killua was far more sensitive than Gon when ites to killing intent, and to his surprise and horror, this killing intent wasn¡¯t any weaker than Illumi¡¯s. In other words, the person releasing it was as strong as Illumi. ¡°Killua, hide behind me.¡± Gon suddenly said. ¡°Why?¡± Killua looked at Gon in confusion. ¡°This killing intent isced in Nen. I can use Nen to ease the oppression.¡± As he said this, Gon instantly released his Nen to block the Killing intent. After seeing this, Killua¡¯s face changed, but he didn¡¯t hide behind Gon and instead said: ¡°Gon, go ahead and register first.¡± Killua said. ¡°What about you, Killua?¡± Gon asked puzzledly. ¡°I don¡¯t want to hide behind you and be protected by you. I don¡¯t want to be looked down upon by someone my age.¡± ¡°Killua, I¡¯m not looking down on you. The other person can use Nen, and it disadvantageous for you to face him like this. That¡¯s why I asked you to hide behind me.¡± Faced with Gon¡¯s kindness, Killua shook his head and said: ¡°No, I have to rely on myself.¡± ¡°Killua is right, Gon. You should go register first.¡± A yful voice echoed in the corridor as the strong Killing Intent disappeared. Killua felt relieved while Gon stopped using Nen and frowned. When he saw Hisoka appearing at the end of the corridor, Gon eximed: ¡°Hisoka?!¡± Killua also noticed Hisoka and was a little surprised. ¡°Haha, it¡¯s been a long time, Gon, Killua.¡± Hisoka greeted them with a smile and then sat down with his back against the wall. ¡°Hisoka, why are you here?¡± Gon asked. Hisoka yed with his cards and said: ¡°This is the holynd of fighters, and I admire fighting the most. Isn¡¯t it normal for me to be here?¡± Killua frowned and said: ¡°Hisoka, you were the one using Killing Intent just now?¡± Hisoka nodded: ¡°Bingo, correct answer, but there is no reward.¡± ¡°Why are you doing this? We have no conflict with you, right?¡± Killua frowned. Hisoka smiled: ¡°I just want to see how much you¡¯ve grown.¡± ¡°You¡¯re just bullying us,¡± Killua shouted. ¡°Killua, I didn¡¯t expect you to be so na?ve. Did you forget where we are? This is The Heavens Arena. In this ce, everyone is hostile against each other. Preventing you from registering is just removing an obstacle.¡± Hearing this, Killua was speechless. Gon looked at Hisoka and said: ¡°Hisoka, Killua hasn¡¯t learned Nen yet. It¡¯s unfair that you¡¯re using Nen to deal with him. Just get out of the way and let us register.¡± Hisoka shook his head: ¡°Gon, this is the baptism of Nen. Every contestant who reaches the 200th floor has to go through it. When confronting my Killing Intent previously, you dealt with it well, so you can go and register. As for Killua, he isn¡¯t qualified to pass yet.¡± ¡°No, Killua must go with me.¡± With this said, Gon pulled Killua over. However, Killua shook Gon¡¯s hand and said: ¡°Gon, Hisoka is right. I¡¯m not qualified to pass yet! You go register first.¡± ¡°But Killua, what will you do?¡± ¡°I will pass before midnight, anyway. You should go first.¡± Killua was determined, and there is noway Gon could change his mind. Hisoka looked at Killua in surprise and said: ¡°So, Killua, do you want to stay and try or go back first?¡± ¡°Hisoka, wait here for me. Before midnight, I will be back.¡± Leaving those words behind, Killua turned around and left. ¡°I¡¯m waiting for you, Killua,¡± Hisoka said yfully. After Killua left, An¡¯s figure appeared from the end of the corridor. Hisoka saw him and smiled: ¡°How about it, is the baptism to your liking? Killua looked pissed off.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, Get ready for the new Novel, it¡¯s on the way!! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 136: Learning Nen Chapter 136: Learning Nen An nodded at Hisoka. He was already here when Gon and Killua arrived and witnessed the whole ordeal. Facing Hisoka Killing Intentced with Nen, Gon¡¯s reaction was good, and An felt that his effort wasn¡¯t wasted. As for Killua, he didn¡¯t learn Nen yet, so he had no way to deal with Hisoka¡¯s Killing Intent. But as long as An trains him, he will quickly pass. ¡°Now, Killua should realize that his power isn¡¯t enough.¡± Anughed. ¡°So, what are you going to do now?¡± Hisoka asked. [Ding! Make A Choice] [1: Bet with Hisoka that Killua will pass the Baptism. Reward: Increase Nen by 2,000 points.] [2: Bet with Hisoka that Killua will pass the Baptism within a limited time. Reward: Increase Nen by 5,000 points.] An pondered for a moment and said: ¡°Hisoka, how about a bet?¡± ¡°What are we betting on?¡± ¡°We bet whether I can help Killua pass through here before midnight.¡± Hearing this, Hisoka looked An in the eyes and asked: ¡°Do you n on helping him open the pores on his body and learn Nen in such a short time?¡± ¡°Well, with his qualification, it should be possible,¡± An said. ¡°But, there is less than three hours left before midnight. It¡¯s not easy to help him in such a short time.¡± Hisoka said. An shrugged: ¡°You don¡¯t need to worry. Isn¡¯t that what a bet all about? Whoever wins gets 10 Million Jenny.¡± Hisoka thought for a bit before nodding with interest: ¡°Well, I will ept the bet.¡± An was overjoyed. He didn¡¯t expect Hioska would agree to this and directly nodded: ¡°Well, I will go find Killua now. You wait for him here; I think you¡¯d be surprised.¡± At this time, Killua, who came down from the 200th floor, met Zushi and Wing. He didn¡¯t know whether it was a coincidence or not. Seeing Killua¡¯s sad face, Wing pushed his sses and said with a smile: ¡°Looking at you, I can tell you¡¯re in trouble. Can I help you?¡± ¡°No need.¡± Killua shook his head. ¡°You probably encountered someone who had Nen, right? As a result, you couldn¡¯t go to register on the 200th floor.¡± Hearing this, Killua looked at Wing in surprise: ¡°How do you know?¡± ¡°As long as a contestant reach the 200th floor, he will be faced with that problem. Without Nen, they won¡¯t be able to pass and register. But since Gon mastered Nen, he sessfully passed through and went to register first, while you couldn¡¯t, right?¡± Wing¡¯s words were like needles that pierced straight to Killua¡¯s heart. He lowered his head with an ugly expression on his face. He felt humiliated and a deep sense of powerlessness. What made it even more hurtful was that his friend Gon, who was the same age as him, learned Nen before him and sessfully registered while he couldn¡¯t. This made it even more uneptable for him. ¡°Killua, if you don¡¯t mind, I can help you.¡± ¡°Help me?¡± ¡°Well, I can help you master the basics of Nen, and at that time, you will be qualified to go and enter the 200th floor.¡± Upon hearing this, Killua was a little moved. At this time, An just came down from the 200th floor and ran into Killua and Wing conversing. Seeing An appear, Killua¡¯s eyes lit up as if he found his savior. ¡°Killua, where is Gon?¡± An asked, pretending not to know what happened. Killua told An about the Baptism, and after hearing him, An nodded: ¡°Well,e with me, I will help you with Nen.¡± ¡°Okay, I will be in your care,¡± Killua said gratefully. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I always keep my promises.¡± An said. During the Hunter Exam, he promised to teach Killua, and now he was ready to fulfill his promise. ¡°Wing-san, I¡¯m sorry, I¡¯m leaving now.¡± Killua turned to Wing and apologized. ¡°Well, I hope you can pass smoothly.¡± Wing smiled as he didn¡¯t mind being rejected by Killua. Watching Killua leave with An, Zushi, who was standing beside the Wing, couldn¡¯t help ask: ¡°Wing-sensei, Killua rejected your kindness, aren¡¯t you angry?¡± ¡°Of course not.¡± Wing shook his head gently. On the other side, An took Killua to his private suite on the 200th floor. When they entered the suite, An directly said: ¡°Killua, due to limited time, I will briefly exin Nen to you. I willter use my Nen to open your pores and stimte you Nen forcefully. After that, you will need to control it yourself¡­¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Killua nodded seriously. Even though what An said seemed simple, it wasn¡¯t that easy to do. Freely manipting the life Energy emitted from the body is what is called Nen. There are two ways to open up the pores on the body to ess that energy. The first one uses Meditation to feel and control your life energy, and the second method is opening those pores forcefully through external force. Because of the limited time, Killua couldn¡¯t just sit down and meditate, so An decided to use the second method. An put his hand on Killua¡¯s backstopping a few centimeters before touching him. ¡°Killua, rx. I¡¯m going to use Nen now.¡± At the next second, An¡¯s Nen surged through Killua¡¯s body and forcefully opening every pore on the way. For an instant, Killua felt tremendous power gushing through his body continuously. ¡°It looks like it¡¯s sessful.¡± An smiled. ¡°Is this Nen?¡± Killua raised his hand. At this time, he could clearly see the white aura bursting out of his body. ¡°This is amazing,¡± Killua eximed. ¡°Because the Pores on your eyes are open as well, you can see Nen,¡± An exined. ¡°Is it done now?¡± Killua asked. An shook his head slightly: ¡°No, this is just the first step. Next, you need to calm down and manipte that energy, and press it down so it can¡¯t surge out and leave your body. If you don¡¯t control it, then your life energy will keep on draining until you copse and die.¡± ¡°Control it? Let me try.¡± Soon, Killua calmed his emotion and began controlling the Life Energy gushing out of his body. He was worthy of being a professional Assassin. His control over his emotion was top-notch. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, Get ready for the new Novel, it¡¯s on the way!! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 137: Challenging Hisoka Chapter 137: Challenging Hisoka Under An¡¯s guidance, Killua quickly controlled his Nen smoothly. ¡°Now that you learned how to use Ten, you can maintain your current state and challenge Hisoka.¡± ¡°Is this really enough?¡± ¡°Well, you should feel it already. You¡¯re already different from the past, and blocking his killing intent won¡¯t be a problem.¡± An assured Killua, who thanked him gratefully and left to register on the 200th floor. Hisoka was leaning on the wall in the corridor leading to the registration window ying with his cards, and Gon was there as well. ¡°Gon, don¡¯t you want to go search for Killua?¡± Hisoka asked. ¡°No, I believe that Killua wille here soon.¡± Gon said firmly. Time passed slowly, and half an hour before midnight, Killua arrived. ¡°Oh?¡± Seeing the aura around Killua¡¯s body, Hisoka was slightly surprised, but his expression turned yful soon. Gon finally rxed as he saw Killua. ¡°Come on, Hisoka, I won¡¯t back down this time.¡± Killua looked directly at Hisoka and challenged him. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s see if you can pass through here.¡± Hisoka raised his hand and used Nen. A Strong Killing Intent mixed with Nen erupted and filled the corridor. Killua didn¡¯t back down and blocked it with his Nen without flinching. ¡°Good job.¡± Seeing that Killua sessfully blocked his Killing Intent, Hisoka smiled: ¡°Well, how about going up a notch?¡± Hisoka used Hatsu to form a wall of Nen in front of Killua. To pass, Killua had to break through the wall. The corridor wasn¡¯t long, but it became harder for Killua to move forward with each step he took because Hisoka¡¯s Nen got stronger the closer Killua got. However, Killua didn¡¯t give up. He moved forward through the wall of Nen step by step and finally reached Hisoka. Hisoka looked at Killua and smiled: ¡°Good job, Killua.¡± ¡°Stop talking nonsense. I am qualified to stay on the 200th floor now, right?¡± Killua looked at Hisoka coldly. ¡°Of course, since you learned the basic of Nen, but there is still arge room to improve.¡± Hisokaughed. Killua snorted coldly: ¡°You wait and see, sooner orter, I will master Nen.¡± ¡°Nen is a profound art, and it¡¯s not simple to learn, don¡¯t be too proud, or you will fail.¡± Killua didn¡¯t appreciate Hisoka¡¯s reminder at all, and at this time, Gon directly came over and said: ¡°Killua, you need to register, quickly.¡± Hisoka stood up and said: ¡°Okay, then I will go first. Have a good time. We will see each other again.¡± ¡°Stop Hisoka!¡± Gon called out. ¡°What is it?¡± Hisoka stopped. Gon replied: ¡°I want to challenge you to a fight.¡± Hearing this, Hisoka smiled: ¡°Hahaha, are you serious, Gon?¡± ¡°Of course.¡± Gon said firmly. Hisoka smiled: ¡°Well, if you can win ten matches on the 200th floor, I¡¯m willing to ept your challenge.¡± ¡°No problem, just wait and see.¡± Gon agreed without thinking. ¡°I will see you then.¡± Hisoka directly left. After Killua finished his registration, he came back only to find out that Gon challenged Hisoka. He looked at Gon speechlessly for a while before he reprimanded: ¡°You Idiot, you can¡¯t beat Hisoka as you are.¡± ¡°But I want to fight him. That guy actually dared to bully us because we are young. I want to fight him and punch him hard in the face.¡± Seeing Gon waving his fist, Killua was amused: ¡°Haha, Gon, you are really an idiot. Do you know how terrifying Hisoka is? You actually said you want to beat him?¡± Gon¡¯s face was serious: ¡°I have already talked to Hisoka. As long as I can win ten matches on the 200th floor, he is willing to fight me.¡± Killua was surprised. He knew that Gon was straightforward and very stubborn, so he couldn¡¯t say anything to change his mind. ¡°By the way, Gon, do you know how difficult it is to win ten times above the 200th floor?¡± Gon scratched the back of his head and said: ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter, does it? I will give it all I have, and we can be stronger, right? If we don¡¯t try, how can we be stronger?¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Killua was defeated. On the other side, An also knew about Killua passing Hisoka¡¯s test and Gon challenging him. He went to meet Hisoka to get his 10 Million Jenny after he won the bet with Hisoka. Hisoka transferred the money and said: ¡°An, this is the first time I actually bet with someone and lost.¡± An replied: ¡°You lost because you underestimated an amazing talent, and you underestimated me as well.¡± ¡°Hahaha, it seems so. However, if I bet with you again, I will definitively win.¡± Hisoka said. ¡°What do you want to bet on?¡± An asked curiously. ¡°We bet on whether Gon can win ten games on the 200th floor in 5 months or not.¡± Hisoka suggested before continuing: ¡°It won¡¯t be easy for Gon to win ten matches with his current power.¡± An said: ¡°If he wins ten games, then he can challenge a floor master, so that means you¡¯re a floor master, right, Hisoka?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Hisoka nodded. ¡°I don¡¯t think that Gon can win ten matches,¡± Hisoka said. ¡°Then let¡¯s bet on that,¡± An said. ¡°Okay.¡± Hisoka nodded. ¡°So, if Gon can win ten matches in 3 months, I will win. On the other hand, if he doesn¡¯t, you will win.¡± Hisoka nodded again as he epted that. ¡°5 months isn¡¯t short, but it¡¯s not long as well. We will wait and see.¡± Hisoka said. ¡°We bet 100 Million Jenny, Hisoka, don¡¯t go back on your words if you lose.¡± An said, and Hisokaughed. ¡°I won¡¯t lose to you this time.¡± Hisoka looked at An¡¯s back as thetter left and thought. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, Get ready for the new Novel, it¡¯s on the way!! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 138: Three-way match Chapter 138: Three-way match The rules of the matches above the 200th floor arepletely different from the 190th, as the matches weren¡¯t randomly arranged. Each person needs to fight a match in three months, or else that person would be disqualified and drop down. Regarding the promotion from each floor, each person needs to win ten games in total to ascend, but if they lose four games before winning ten, they will lose their qualification to continue. Winning ten games allows anyone to challenge the floor master. Each floor from the 220th to the 250th floor is owned by a floor master. Floor masters can participate in Battle Olympia, where the winner gets to live on the 251st floor. Because there is a lot of time currently, An intends to stay in The Heaven¡¯s Arena for a while, so he wasn¡¯t in a hurry to fight. The rooms provided here are luxurious, and it saves a lot of money. It was quite a good ce for An since he also could watch the fights in here. The next morning, Gon and Killua found An and ate breakfast together with Hancock. ¡°I hope you can continue teaching me, Nen.¡± Killua was straightforward with his request. ¡°No problem!¡± An naturally agreed since he still had a mission toplete. As for Gon, he didn¡¯t ask for An¡¯s training because he already mastered the basics and what hecks isbat experience. So he decided to apply for a match to improve while fighting. At the same time, he was preparing to win ten matches and challenge Hisoka. An agreed and then asked Hancock to go back first. He apanied Gon to the reception with Killua to apply for a match. When they reached the reception, they found three people there. An wasn¡¯t surprised because he already noticed those three guys. He knew they were targeting them as soon as they reached the 200th floor. An looked at the three weirdly dressed guys and sneered. They were the trio who targeted neers in the show. They were Gido, Riehlvelt, and Sadaso. They weren¡¯t strong. At best, they can bully neers. They are aware of their weakness, so they specifically look for neers who don¡¯t have much experience fighting. Right now, An, Gon, And Killua were undoubtedly neers. Therefore, they are eying them. An remained unmoved and asked: ¡°What¡¯s the matter with you three?¡± ¡°We are also here to apply for our matches,¡± Reihvelt said. Killua heard this and nced at them coldly and said: ¡°You see that we are neers, so you think we are easy to bully? nning on applying for a match along with us so you can fight uster?¡± The three didn¡¯t expect Killua to see through their ploy and say it. Sadaso was slightly embarrassed as he said: ¡°Hehe, now that you know about it, what will you do?¡± [Ding! Make A Choice.] [1: Directly kill those three now. Reward: Increase Nen by 3,000 Points.] [2: Join Gon and Killua in a three vs. three battle against Sadaso and the others and Kill them. Reward: Golden Treasure Chest x1.] Seeing the reward, An picked the second option without hesitation. Compared to killing them here, killing them on stage is generous. ¡°Since you want to fight neers, let¡¯s fight then.¡± Hearing this, the trio nced at each other and couldn¡¯t believe their ears. ¡°Are you sure?¡± An nodded: ¡°Of course, there are three of us on our side and three on your side. Let¡¯s have a three-vs-three match.¡± ¡°Three-vs-three match? What do you mean?¡± Sadaso asked. ¡°It¡¯s team battle,¡± An replied. ¡°The Heavens Arena doesn¡¯t have that type of battle, only one vs. one.¡± ¡°As long as all of us apply for such a match, they will ept.¡± Sadaso discussed this with the others for a while. ¡°Do you have anything to say?¡± An looked at Gon and Killua and asked. Killua was already dissatisfied with those three, so he shrugged: ¡°No problem.¡± Gon said: ¡°I also don¡¯t have any problem. As long as I can fight, it doesn¡¯t matter who my opponent is.¡± ¡°Okay, it¡¯s decided then.¡± At this moment, An, Gon, and Killua, with the other trio, applied for a three vs. three match. There was no precedent for that kind of battle in The Heavens Arena, and after some discussion between the officials of The Heavens Arena, they agreed to the match. The officials wanted to use this opportunity to gauge the audience¡¯s reaction to this kind of battle. The battle will be in ten days, and in those ten days, The Heavens Arena will promote this new kind of match to attract as many spectators as possible. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, Get ready for the new Novel, it¡¯s on the way!! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 139: Compete Victory Part 1 Chapter 139: Compete Victory Part 1 Ten dayster, the team battle officially started. On the Heaven¡¯s Arena 212th floor, An, Gon, and Killua were on one side of the ring, while GIdo, Sadaso, and Riehlvelt were on the other side. The ce was filled with people as this was the first-ever team battle in The Heavens Arena, and more than 8,000 spectators were here to watch it. If it wasn¡¯t for a limited space, more than ten thousand people would be on the stands. Therefore, The Heavens Arena opened a broadcast mode so that whoever couldn¡¯t enter The Arena could still see what happened. Inside the ring, the two teams were ready. Sadaso looked at An and said: ¡°Do you n to fight altogether, or one on one separately?¡± ¡°Do as you like. We don¡¯t care.¡± An shrugged. ¡°Then, let¡¯s go one on one. Since you are neers, we will let you decided who you want to fight.¡± An smiled at the confidence of the trio. He looked at Gon and said: ¡°Gon, who do you want to fight?¡± ¡°I will pick Gido.¡± Gon said. An looked at Killua and asked: ¡°What about you, Killua?¡± ¡°Sadaso,¡± Killua said. An nodded. Since they both picked their opponent, he was left with Riehlvelt. The game soon started, An and Killua moved back to the edge of the ring to watch the match. Sadaso and Riehlvelt did the same and retreated. Gon and Gido moved to the center of the ring, and the match started. Gido instantlyunched Ten of his Nen-enhanced tops from his sleeves. The ten tops surrounded Gon as they span crazily under Gido¡¯s control. Facing the fast-moving tops, Gon decisively twisted his body and vigntly looked at the spinning tops. At this moment, a top attacked Gon from behind and mmed on his back at high speed. One after the other, Gon¡¯s back was hit constantly by the tops. Gon groaned painfully as if he was hit by a car. The impact from the tops was unexpectedly strong. Fortunately, Gon used Ren to improve his Defense, and this helped him defend against the tops. However, because Gidonded a hit on Gon, he gained two points. ording to the rules, whoever can umte ten points first win. Gon didn¡¯t care at all. His gaze caught up to the spinning tops around him, trying to capture their trajectory. Facing so many spinning tops at the same time, Gon knew that he wouldn¡¯t be able to see all of them with his eyes. At this time, Gidounched another attack. When the Top was about tond on Gon¡¯s unprotected back, thetter sensed something and moved sideways, easily escaping from the attack. ¡°Humph!¡± Gido immediately manipted the tops to attack Gon again. Gon¡¯s eyes saw the Top moving from his left and directly kicked it. Boom! The Top was sent away by Gon¡¯s kick. ¡°What?!¡± Gido was shocked. Gon blocked his sneak attack and sent his Top out of the ring. As soon as itnded outside the ring, the Top quickly stopped spinning and fell. ¡°You still have nine more.¡± Gon nced at the remaining tops around him. ¡°Asshole, you dare destroy my tops.¡± Seeing one of his tops destroyed, Gido was furious. At this moment, three tops collided behind Gon and rushed toward him. Gon fought back for the first time as he clenched his fist and punched the spinning Top. Boom! The Top was destroyed again, and at this time, another two tops collided with each other and rushed toward him. Gon directly jumped up, avoiding the tops before kicking them fiercely. Another two tops were destroyed. ¡°Six remaining.¡± Gonnded on the ring and once again kicked another top. In less than a minute, Gon destroyed five spinning tops from the original ten, which made Gido furious. He finally figured out that Gon was nning on destroying all of his tops. ¡°Damn fellow, I¡¯m going to kill you.¡± Since his beloved spinning tops were destroyed one after the other, Gido nned on killing Gon. Suddenly five tops surrounded Gon, cornering him. ¡°They are faster than before and seem more powerful as well.¡± Gon thought. If he is hit once, Gon wouldn¡¯t be able to defend against them. He directly activated his Ren and Nen erupted around him like crazy. Seeing this, Gido was surprised. He didn¡¯t expect Gon to not only know Ten, but also Ren. If using Ten can greatly increase Defense, Ren can increase explosive power and durability to another Hight. Right now, Gido was feeling panic. Feeling fearful of Gon¡¯s power, Gido took the lead and attacked in one full swoop intending to kill him. The five tops hit Gon at high speed from different directions. Aaaaaaah! Gon shouted violently as the five tops mmed against his body, but it was like hitting an iron wall. ¡°What?!¡± Gido¡¯s eyes widened. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, Get ready for the new Novel, it¡¯s on the way!! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 139: Compete Victory Part 2 Chapter 139: Compete Victory Part 2 Then Gon waved his hands and hit the spinning tops one after the other. All the spinning tops were destroyed. ¡°A madman!! You¡¯re a madman.¡± Gido shouted. Gon¡¯s actions were indeed crazy. When he knew that he couldn¡¯t avoid the spinning tops, he just defended with his body. However, Gon didn¡¯t care. Instead, he looked at Gido triumphantly. ¡°Your tops were defeated. You¡¯re next.¡± Gon looked at Gido and rushed toward him. Gido snorted: ¡°Do you think that you can defeat me by destroying my tops? That¡¯s na?ve.¡± The next instant, Gido started spinning quickly like arge spinning top. Seeing this, Gon stopped his momentum. If he rushed in carelessly, he would definitively be knocked up into the air. Gon gathered Nen into his right fist and directly punched at the human spinning top. Boom! With a loud noise, Gido was blown away out of the ring. His entire chest sank, and his eyes were white. Gon knocked him out with one punch. Gido¡¯spanions looked at this dumbfoundedly. They never thought that Gon was so powerful. ¡°Good job, Gon.¡± Killua looked at Gon and said. Gon felt guilty and said: ¡°It seems like I identally killed Gido!¡± (T/N: Out of character much. He said previously that An was cruel because he killed his opponent, but now he did it.) Killua replied: ¡°He deserves it.¡± An on the side looked at Gon andmented: ¡°Gon, although that move was strong, it took too much time to umte Nen, so you need to use it with caution in the future. I think you should train in that skill for a long time so you can use it quickly.¡± Gon nodded at An¡¯s advice. The game wasn¡¯t over, it was the first match of three, and immediately, it was Killua¡¯s turn. Killua moved to the center of the ring coolly. When Sadaso saw Gido die, he was no longer confident. Sadaso stared at Killua, not daring to look down on him. ¡°Go to hell! Shadow Snake Hand.¡± Two ck snakes sprung from Sadaso¡¯s sleeves andunched an attack at Killua. Killua¡¯s figure shed as he disappeared from his position. Sadaso was shocked as he saw Killua¡¯s image around him and could only order his snakes to attack. Killua was using Rhythm Echo, the assassination skill that confuses an opponent¡¯s eyes into seeing after images even though the user is walking. Sadaso was frightened and couldn¡¯t even react as Killua appeared behind him suddenly, and with a simple move from Killua¡¯s hand, Sadaso¡¯s heart separated from his body. Sadaso¡¯s heart was still beating in Killua¡¯s hand. Sadaso looked in shock as he fell to the ground and died. The audience was stunned. They couldn¡¯t think that a twelve years old boy could be that cruel. As Killua returned back to Gon and An¡¯s side, Gon said: ¡°Killua, you didn¡¯t have to kill him, right?¡± Killua shrugged: ¡°Gon, this is The Heavens Arena, its only about winning and losing, regardless of like and death. Besides, Sadaso is more than guilty. What do you think happened to all neers after they reach the 200th floor?¡± Gon couldn¡¯t refute Killua¡¯s words. He already identally killed Kido, so he wasn¡¯t qualified to say otherwise to Killua. So he shut up obediently. ¡°Next, it¡¯s your turn, An.¡± Killua changed the subject, and An nodded and walked onto the center of the ring. There was only one person left, who was very afraid right now, since his twopanions died. Facing An, Riehlvelt wanted to admit defeat directly, but he thought that maybe An wasn¡¯t as strong as the other two, and he had a chance. ¡°Let me try the power of a new skill on you,¡± An said suddenly. ¡°What?!¡± Riehlvelt didn¡¯t know what An was thinking, but he directly assumed a defensive position. Almost instantly, An¡¯s figure disappeared and appeared behind Riehlbelt. Blue lightning danced in An¡¯s hand, making a thousand birds chirping sound. Before Riehlvelt could react, the Chidori prated his chest, killing him instantly. An pulled out his hand and nced at the corpse and thought: ¡®Chidori is really great. It could one-shot almost anyone if itnded.¡¯ An¡¯s performance surprised the audience, including Gon and Killua. Gon and Killua didn¡¯t think that An was that strong. It was really an eye-opener for them. The audience didn¡¯t expect three from the same team to die so easily. All that mattered in The Heavens Arena was winning, and death was a normal urrence here. The three of them dying can be attributed to them being too weak. After that battle, Gon, Killua, and An made a name for themselves with just one match. They called them the three evil stars now. It means that they killed their opponent without mercy and decisively. After the match, An won his golden Treasure Chest and was eager to open it. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, Get ready for the new Novel, it¡¯s on the way!! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 140: Target and Opponent Part 1 Chapter 140: Target and Opponent Part 1 After parting with Gon and Killua for a while, An turned back toward the Arena and asked the staff where the bodies were. The staff directly said that they were brought to the morgue of a local hospital. An directly left The Heavens Arena and changed his appearance along the way. This was the skill An got in the Hunter Exam, Disguise. It allowed him to easily change his appearance. At the moment, An was disguised as a familiar person, Illumi. Soon after, An arrived at the hospital¡¯s first floor and was stunned by the guards and stuff inside. They didn¡¯t block An, so he easily went to the morgue and searched for the trio¡¯s bodies. Finding them, An directly activated his predator skill. An felt like he became like a vacuum cleaner as his hand swallowed the Nen of the trio. As soon as he started using that skill, An was forced into Zetsu State and couldn¡¯t use Nen. Fortunately, the predation process was fast, and in less than a minute, An felt his Nen increase. An¡¯s skill worked on a single target, and the first target was Sadaso¡¯s corpse. After the absorption ended, An could tell that his Nen increases by 3,000 Points. As for why there were so few points, An felt it was because Sadaso was dead, and Nen was a kind of life energy that dissipated with time after death. So much of his Nen dissipated after an hour of his death. Without further ado, An directly activated the skill on the other two, one after the other. After finishing the absorption, An could tell that there wasn¡¯t much difference between Sadaso and the other two. This was the first time An used the predator skill, so no matter how small the amount of Nen he absorbed, it was worth it. Adding the three of them, he took 9,000 Nen point. Of course, using the predator skill was risky, but he dared to use it on them because he knew they were cowards. There is no way those cowards would use the restrains of Nen. And he was right about that. After leaving the Hospital, An lifted his disguise and changed to his original appearance before returning to The Heavens Arena. An remembered that thest time he got a golden Treasure Chest, he received Chidori. And he looked forward to what wille this time. [Ding! You opened a Golden Treasure Chest and received Fishman Karate Secret Skill: Buraikan (Vagabond Drill)] ¡®Is this Jimbei¡¯s Buraikan? The skill that can send a shockwave through anyone by targeting the water in a person¡¯s body that can ignore defense?¡¯ Of course, this skill wasn¡¯t all that good for the current An, but it was better than nothing.After the team battle, Killua and An didn¡¯t apply for further matches. Killua used the time he had to learn from An all about Nen. An acted as Killua¡¯s training partner all this time and practiced with him. Gon was injured by the spinning tops and was hospitalized for about half a month. Originally, his injury should at least take three months for him to recover, but Gon¡¯s regeneration was abnormal. When he stayed in the Hospital, Gon couldn¡¯t participate in any matches as the high intensity of the fights would damage his body further before full recovery. So he practiced along with Killua and acted as thetter¡¯s training partner under An¡¯s supervision. Killua made rapid progress in his Nen training and almost mastered the basics of Nen. However, since he just learned Nen for a short while, his use of it was masterful yet. In that regard, Gon was better since he started using Nen for half a year already. As for An, he would train with Gon for a while before taking Hancock to watch the fights in the Arena. As for training Nen, there was no need for special training at his current level, and he should pay attention to the amount of Nen and his control of it instead. After a while, Gon applied for his second match, and on the day of the match, An brought three tickets to watch the battle. This time, Gon¡¯s opponent was Yamamaru, a strong man but seemed overweight. He has a record of three wins and one defeat, so he was more famous than Gon, who was a fledgling rookie. But many people supported Gon. After all, he could kill someone with just one punch which was something all the audience couldn¡¯t forget. As soon as the match started, Yamamaru rushed toward Gon. Seeing this and being as stubborn as he is, Gon faced his head-on. Boom! Gon¡¯s small body actually blocked Yamamaru¡¯s huge body. Gon only stepped back half a meter before stopping Yamamaru¡¯s charge. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, Get ready for the new Novel, it¡¯s on the way!! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 140: Target and Opponent Part 2 Chapter 140: Target and Opponent Part 2 This made the audience who supported Gon explode in cheers. Gon used Ren to resist Yamamaru¡¯s attacks, who was fierce despite his look. In terms of strength, both were equally matched, but to break the stalemate, Yamamaru directly lifted his hand and pped Gon on his stomach. Gon let out a painful cry, but he wasn¡¯t sent flying or knocked down unexpectedly. An astonishing amount of Nen emerged from Gon¡¯s body as his anger exploded. With this, Gon¡¯s power skyrocketed, thrusting Yamamaru¡¯s huge body backward before falling. Gon actually defeated Yamamaru in terms of strength, which made the audience dumbstruck. But the fight didn¡¯t end, as Yamamaru, who fell out of the ring, climbed back up and quickly returned to the ring. He was angry and couldn¡¯t bear losing to a kid, so he decisively let loose his Nen and instantly overwhelmed Gon with his huge build. However, Gon was scared. Instead, he felt excited. The stronger his opponent, the stronger he would get. Boom! Boom! Boom! Boom! Boom! Boom! The battle continued as bothnded hits on each other for a while. After twenty minutes, the game finally came to an end. Gon managed to force Yamamaru out of the ring once again and knock him out. Gon didn¡¯t win because he was stronger than Yamamaru, but because he was more determined and his willpower was astonishing. After the battle, Gon was hospitalized for another week or so. It was unavoidable since, in the battle with Yamamaru, he was exhausted and hit a few times. As for Yamamaru, he would need half a year before he could have a rematch. After recovering, Gon participated in the third match, and his opponent¡¯s record was the same as his. Two wins and zero losses. His opponent¡¯s name was Kenji Ichiro. An took Hancock to watch the match. As for Killua, he wanted to catch up as soon as possible, so he refused to attend and continued training. Needless to say, as long as Gon¡¯s opponent wasn¡¯t stronger than him by much, he wouldn¡¯t lose. In the end, An was surprised as Gon won his match. The battle didn¡¯t take long. Even though both seemed to have the same record, Gon improved the most when he was fighting, and it didn¡¯t take him long to win the fight. So far, Gon won three matches without losing once. Gon was trying his best because he wanted to fight Hisoka. Gon had five months to win ten games and challenge Hisoka. He even put a mark on his calendar for that day. Now, he won three games and still needs to win seven more in 4 months. Gon didn¡¯t feel tired or had any thought of retreating from this challenge. He was even firmer than before. Therefore, he soon applied for his fourth match, and unexpectedly, Killua applied for a match as well. Killua hadn¡¯t participated in any matches since the team battle, but now he wanted to see the result of his training. Gon and Killua weren¡¯t matched against each other, to the disappointment of the spectators, since they were eager to see the two of them fight. But their matches still attracted many people at the end. Gon won three games, and many people thought he would win his fourth, but Gon encountered a strong opponent. His opponent was much stronger than thest three games and not at the same level at all. When An saw Gon¡¯s opponent, he couldn¡¯t help but freeze because his opponent was actually Kastro. Kastro was the person who challenged Hisoka and was killed in the ring. Although Hisoka killed him, it didn¡¯t mean that Kastro was weak. In fact, he was quite strong. Hisoka may have won and killed him, but his hands were cut. An knew that Gon wouldn¡¯t be able to win this match. At this time, Kastro looked really calm. He looked at Gon and said: ¡°I have watched your previous games; you were very good.¡± Faced with Kastro¡¯s appreciation, Gon looked at him in the eye and said: ¡°I¡¯m sorry, but I want to win this match as well.¡± ¡°Quite brave,¡± Kastro said with a smile. After a few seconds, the match started. Gon discovered that both he and Kastro were enhancers, and first time, Gon felt exhausted and overwhelmed. He used Ten, Ren, and Hatsu one after the other in quick session just as the match started and was feeling quite tired. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! There will be 40 Chapter of the new Novel on Patreon Soon, It¡¯s a Dragon Ball Fanfic!! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 141: Kastro Chapter 141: Kastro There was a great gap between Gon and Kastro. Whether it was skills, experience, or Nen, Kastro was better. One was strong, and the other was weak. Even the ordinary audience could tell this. However, facing such a powerful enemy, Gon wasn¡¯t discouraged at all. Instead, he was excited to win. The stronger his foe, the stronger he could be. The battlested for about ten minutes. Gon only hit Kastro once and scored two points. However, Kastro didn¡¯t want to kill Gon, so he just umted 10 points. After the game, Gon was taken to the hospital without any dy. Gon was admitted to the emergency room directly because thest blownded on his head. ¡°Hello, I¡¯m Kastro, who fought Gon previously. Ie to visit Gon. How is he?¡± An saw Kastro and heard his word. He could tell that thetter was sincere. ¡°Although Gon is still young, he is tough and determined, and I learned much from the fight.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t need you to care about him. Please leave.¡± Killua said as he red at Kastro. If he didn¡¯t know that Gon would get angry if he did anything, Killua would¡¯ve already pounced on Kastro. Kastro looked at Killua and said: ¡°You must be Gon¡¯s good friend. Sorry, I hit him slightly hard.¡± Killua said coldly: ¡°Leave, I don¡¯t want to see you.¡± At this moment, An stood up and said to Kastro: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Gon won¡¯t die that easily. I¡¯m not sure what you want, but pleasee backter.¡± ¡°Okay, I will go back now and hope we can meet once again.¡± After saying this, Kastro left. ¡°Damn that guy. He even darede here and lie about seeing Gon.¡± ¡°I think he was sincere.¡± Anughed. ¡°I want to fight him,¡± Killua said suddenly. Hearing this, An immediately looked at him and said: ¡°You can¡¯t.¡± ¡°Why?¡± Killua looked at An, confused. ¡°Do you think I will lose?¡± Killua asked him. An nodded: ¡°That right, you¡¯re still not strong enough for someone like him.¡± ¡°I won¡¯t necessarily lose.¡± Killua retorted. ¡°Ny percent probability that you¡¯d lose,¡± An said. He didn¡¯t say one hundred percent only because Killua had great potential. But under normal circumstances, the current Killua wouldn¡¯t be able to win against Kastro. Although Killua didn¡¯t want to admit it, he knew that An was right after calming down. An patted him on the shoulders and asked him to concentrate on his battle tomorrow. The next day, It was time for Killua¡¯s battle. This was his second match after arriving on the 200th floor. After a month, he stood on the ring again with his confident expression. He was always confident about his power, and now that he learned the basics of Nen, he was even more confident. This time, Killua¡¯s opponent was Takeuchi, with an impressive record of four wins and zero losses. This made him look at Killua with contempt because Killua seemed to be a kid. However, Takeuchi wasn¡¯t good. He clearly knows anyone who reaches the 200th floor. It isn¡¯t simple. The little kid in front of him must also be extraordinary. When he saw Killua¡¯s confidence, he knew that the kid was confident about his own strength. This made Takeuchi feel excited as he wanted to crush Killua¡¯s confidence and defeat him. At the start of the match, Killua used Ten which effectively improved his attack and defense. Maintaining [Ten] when fighting was the most basic ability of Nen users. Takeuchi was doing the same. Nen covered his body like ayer of armor. Killua¡¯s figure disappeared suddenly. He appeared in front of Takeuchi and shed at him with his hand. Takeuchi was surprised by Killua¡¯s speed, but he could still react and leaped back, avoiding Killua¡¯s attack. ¡°Oh?¡± Killua was slightly surprised and smiled: ¡°Not bad, your reaction is good. It seems that this match will be interesting.¡± Takeuchi is a young man in his twenties, but Killua didn¡¯t say his words to mock him. Takeuchi won¡¯t allow himself to lose against a twelve years old kid. He directly shouted and punched Killua. Killua¡¯s figure disappeared, and Takeuchi¡¯s fistnded on the floor and created a hole. ¡°Oh? You¡¯re an enhancer, it seems.¡± Takeuchi was indeed an enhancer, so his fists were his weapons. Enhancers strengthen themselves and use their bodies as a weapon. Takeuchi was attacking Killua¡¯s fiercely while thetter used his agility and movement skills to evade. ¡°Stop hiding and face me head-on.¡± Takeuchi became frustrated and shouted. ¡°Well, I will attack then.¡± Killua¡¯s expression changed, and his face turned cold. After a while, Killua hit Takeuchi five-time and won directly. ¡°Impossible.¡± Hearing the Referee¡¯s decision, Takeuchi couldn¡¯t believe it. He yelled loudly: ¡°I actually lost to a kid.¡± Killua frowned and said: ¡°Please be careful of what you say. Although I¡¯m a kid, it¡¯s in your best interest to not treat me as one, or you will regret it.¡± ¡°Sorry.¡± Realizing his behavior was bad, Takeuchi directly apologized. ¡°It¡¯s okay.¡± Killua waved his hand and then walked out of the stage. An was waiting for him and said: ¡°Good match.¡± An smiled. Takeuchi was a good opponent for Killua. ¡°Thanks.¡± Killua raised his head triumphantly when An praised him. Ten dayster, Gon recovered fully. The doctors couldn¡¯t understand Gon¡¯s terrifying resilience. ¡°This child will probably be back and trouble you again in the future. Please take care of him.¡± ¡°Of course.¡± Although the doctor found An¡¯s word a little weird, he replied politely. As soon as Gon recovered, he applied for a game directly. Because he lost previously, his current record was three wins and one loss. Any participant who loses four times on the 200th floor will lose the qualification to stay on the 200th floor, and his win record would be deleted. Fortunately for Gon, this game went smoothly. Although his opponent was good, he wasn¡¯t strong enough. While Gon keptpeting for his ten victories, An applied for a match as well. ording to Killua, An was too strong for the normal matches in The Heavens Arena. He was only here to kill time and bully some participants. An¡¯s opponent was someone with a five-win record. He never lost, and his record was very good. He was quite famous on the 200th floor and was regarded as a rookie who will be a floor master in the future. On the day of the match, thousands of people filled the Arena awaiting the exciting match. An walked up the ring, but his opponent waste for several minutes. An decided to teach him a lesson since he wants to bete. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also There will be 40 Chapter of the new Novel on Patreon Soon, It¡¯s a Dragon Ball Fanfic!! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 142: Hisoka The Magician! Part 1 Chapter 142: Hisoka The Magician! Part 1 An¡¯s opponent arrived, wearing a ck cloak. From the referee, An learned that his opponent¡¯s name was Chihu. ¡°You will pay for yourteness!¡± An said without the slightest hint of emotion. Hearing this, Chihu sneered and said: ¡°Who do you think you are?¡± ¡°The one who wants your life,¡± An replied. ¡°That depends on your ability.¡± Chihu didn¡¯t bother talking anymore, and Nen erupted from his body like a ck mist. The ck fog spread across the ring, covering An in it. The audience was in an uproar as this ck mist prevented them from seeing anything. When the cold ck mist approached An, thetter was already using Kenbunshoku Haki for the first time since he came to The Heavens Arena. Although his sight was affected, his Haki can easily locate his target. To use this ck mist to hinder his enemy¡¯s line of sight was undoubtedly an assassination technique. This showed Chihu¡¯s job. In the ck mist, Chihu pulled out a dagger from his cloak andunched an Attack at An. An sneered, facing Chihu¡¯s attempted assassination without and didn¡¯t do anything else. When the ck dagger approached An¡¯s throat, it collided with something hard and stopped after it made a nging sound. Chihu was shocked. The next moment, he was shocked to find a cold chill rush toward him. In an instant, half of his body was frozen. ¡°You¡¯re caught!¡± A voice like the death god¡¯s whispered in Chihu¡¯s ear, making him shocked, and in the next moment, he felt death. In the ck mist, when An caught Chihu with his Ice Ice Fruit Ability, a ck sword appeared in his hand. It was Yatsufusa, a sword that makes anyone in by it a poppet under the sword wielder¡¯s control. An stabbed Chihu¡¯s heart without hesitation and ended his life. Chihu, who died, got cursed by Yatsufusa and now turned into a puppet for An. Yatsufusa can control up to eight puppets, and the ability of each puppet is the same as he was alive. The only deficiency of Yatsufusa was energy consumption. The more controlled puppets, therger a burden is put on its wielder. An used Yatsufusa to control Chihu and ordered him to lift the mist. No one knew what happened in the mist except for An. As soon as the mist was dispersed, An lifted the curse from Chihu, leaving his corpse behind. After the match, An went to Chihu¡¯s body and used his Predator, gaining 5,000 Nen points. Time flew by fast, and three months passed quickly. At this time, four months have passed since An and the others came to The Heavens Arena. In the past few months, Gon won 8 matches and lost 2, which meant he needed two wins before challenging Hisoka. Killua performed well as he won five matches without losing. As for An, he quickly won ten games and had the right to challenge a floor master. However, An wasn¡¯t in a hurry to get that position yet. Because being a floor master was something he could get any time, and there was no need to rush. ¡°Gon, Killua, there is an interesting game today. I hope youe and watch.¡± An took out a few tickets and gave Gon and Killua one each. Of course, he gave one to Hancock as well. ¡°Who is fighting?¡± Gon asked curiously. ¡°You will know when you get there,¡± An said mysteriously. After that, An took them to the 200th floor to watch the game. When An and Gon saw the two standing on the ring, both were surprised. It was Hisoka, facing Kastro. ¡°How is it? You¡¯re surprised, right?¡± An asked after seeing their reactions andughed. ¡°Why is Hisoka fighting with Kastro?¡± Gon was surprised. ¡°It¡¯s better to say Kastro is challenging Hisoka,¡± Killua said. ¡°I heard that Kastro lost to Hisoka when he first came here and wanted to challenge Hisoka for his revenge. They agreed on fighting after two years, so here we are.¡± An said after recalling some of that information. ¡°I fought Kastro before, and I know he is strong.¡± Gon said. ¡°I think Hisoka is stronger,¡± Killua stated. ¡°Why?¡± Gon asked and looked at Killua. ¡°Instinct, he doesn¡¯t have an aura as strong as Hisoka,¡± Killua replied as he looked at the ring. ¡°So you can tell how strong someone is based on his aura?¡± Gon asked as if he understood something. ¡°That Aura can oppress someone, but it doesn¡¯t represent strength most of the time. It can¡¯t be used as an indicator all the time. From experience with Nen and skills, Hisoka is better than Kastro.¡± An said. ¡°So, Kastro will lose?¡± Gon asked curiously. ¡°Most likely,¡± An replied. ¡°If I can, I want to fight against Kastro again.¡± Gon muttered. He was worried about his previous loss against Kastro and always thought about challenging him back to verify how much he improved. Killua could help to hit him on the head and said: ¡°From Hisoka¡¯s personality, Kastro will probably die today.¡± ¡°Really? Hisoka will kill Kastro?¡± Gon¡¯s expression changed. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! I already released 40 chapter on Patreon for anyone interested in reading it ahead of anyone! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 142: Hisoka The Magician! Part 2 Chapter 142: Hisoka The Magician! Part 2 Killua gave Gon and weird look and said: ¡°What? Do you think Hisoka is a good person? That guy is the same type as me, and I don¡¯t know how much blood is on his hand already.¡± ¡°In other words, Hisoka killed a lot of people, right?¡± Gon asked ¡°Yeah.¡± Killua nodded. An then said: ¡°Gon, take this opportunity to see how strong Hisoka is. I think Kastro should be able to force Hisoka to show some skills. You can take this opportunity to know more about your target.¡± ¡°I understand.¡± Gon nodded. At this point, the game already started. Hisoka and Kastro didn¡¯t start fighting from the start as they talked about something. Afterward, they saw Kastro¡¯s stance change. Then he directly attacked Hisoka. An saw Kastro using his tiger bite fist, which was indeed fierce. If a hitnds, it would seem like a tiger¡¯s bite. Kastro didn¡¯t learn Nen the right way, so his Nen ability wasn¡¯tpatible with his Nen type, and which Hisoka used to disrupt him. Kastro used his body double to unleash his True tiger bite fist. He sessfully cut off Hisoka¡¯s left hand. However, Hisoka didn¡¯t panic at all and wore a confident expression all the time. After a bit, he revealed the secret behind Kastro¡¯s clone, confusing him. Then Hisoka used his ability to attack his hand to his body and make it seem like he regenerated. This made Kastro panic, and the course of the battle changed. It happened the same way as the show, with Kastro defeated and Hisoka killing him. Gon felt a little regretful about Kastro¡¯s death, and at the same time, he realized that he was too na?ve about challenging Hisoka. After the game ended, An found an excuse to get out and directly searched for Kastro¡¯s body before using Predator on him, gaining 10,000 Nen points, and to his surprise, Kastro¡¯s Nen ability was Tiger Bite Fist was added to his skills as well. An tried to use Tiger Bite Fist and found out that it was simr to Yamcha¡¯s Wolf Fang Fist. The difference was strength and agility. The Tiger Bite Fist imitated a tiger which was fiercer and stronger than a wolf, while the Wolf fang Fist imitated a wolf, which was more agile and faster than a tiger. An was quite intrigued about what would happen if he merged the two styles together. What kind of Style would he end up with? It would be more powerful and fiercer than Wolf Fang Fist but also more agile than the Tiger Bite Fist. After returning, An copied wing and took the recording of Hisoka and Kastro¡¯s fight for Gon and Killua to watch. Then he asked them to find out Hisoka¡¯s ability. ¡°What kind of Ability did Hisoka use when he fought Kastro, it seems very mysterious.¡± Gon asked as he stared at the recording. ¡°I can¡¯t tell.¡± Killua was slightly frustrated as he turned toward An and asked: ¡°An, can you exin?¡± ¡°Of course.¡± An stood up and walked toward the TV before started exining. ¡°Hisoka used two abilities, the first is called Bungee Gum, and the second is Texture Surprise. Bungee Gum is turning Nen into Gum like substance that can stick to targets like gum. It also has the ability of rubber. Texture Surprise can turn Nen into various kind of texture, like skins texture which he used in the fight to make it seems like his hand was reattached. This ability can reproduce any kind of texture, and it is only limited by the user¡¯s imagination.¡± ¡°But we can¡¯t see Hisoka using Nen.¡± Gon said. ¡°That¡¯s because Hisoka used an advanced form of Zetsu, which can hide Aura well. This technique is called [In] as in ¡®conceal,¡¯ which make Nen hard to detect without stopping the aura flow like Zetsu.¡± ¡°So that what happened. Kastro didn¡¯t notice anything at all then?¡± Killua asked. An nodded: ¡°You can say so.¡± ¡°So, how can we see through [In]?¡± Gon asked. ¡°It¡¯s not difficult, you only need to apply the principle of Ren to focus part of you Nen into your eyes, and you can see his Nen clearly. This is an advanced Technique of Ren and called Gyo. If you want to see what¡¯s Hisoka¡¯s doing, you have to learn it.¡± Upon hearing this, Gon and Killua immediately tried to gather Nen to their eyes and see through Hisoka¡¯s [In]. An reminded them: ¡°Gyo is a high-level technique, and if you want to learn it, you need to be highly proficient in using Ren. Otherwise, even if you can barely use it, you will not be able to see Hisoka¡¯s Nen. Because Hisoka is quite clever in using Nen, he can almost hide itpletely, and a half-hearted Gyo won¡¯t be able to see through him.¡± ¡°We understand.¡± Gon and Killua replied in unison. After that, they directly started training. Seeing this, An didn¡¯t disturb them and went out of the room quietly. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! I already released 40 chapters on Patreon for anyone interested in reading it ahead of anyone! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 143: Machi Chapter 143: Machi An walked around The Heavens Arena with Hancock, who was very displeased staying in The Heavens Arena recently. ¡°This is annoying. Men here stare at me all the time as if it was their first time seeing a woman.¡± ¡°That¡¯s because you¡¯re so beautiful. They probably didn¡¯t even see a woman as beautiful as you.¡± An smiled and said lightly. With this said, An put his hand on Hancock¡¯s waist and walked in front of the passers-by, who looked at him in envy. ¡°I really don¡¯t like to stay in that ce. When are you nning on leaving?¡± ¡°Well, we¡¯ll leave after Hisoka and Gon fight. They will fight next month most likely.¡± Hearing this, Hancock nodded before she noticed someone and said: ¡°Look, isn¡¯t that the woman who caused you trouble in the airport?¡± An turned around to look and found a familiar face. It was Machi from the Ryodan. ¡°Why is she here?¡± An was a little surprised. ¡°Is she here for me?¡± An shook his head as he remembered that Machi was here for Hisoka. At this time, Machi noticed An and remembered what happened before, and directly red angrily at him. ¡°What a coincidence, I didn¡¯t expect to meet you here.¡± An took the initiative and greeted her. Machi snorted coldly: ¡°I didn¡¯te to find you, but you delivered yourself to me. Very good, I will kill you here.¡± A threat suddenly appeared on Machi¡¯s hand andunched it as An. The Thread cut through the air fiercely. An was already on guard and directly raised his hand and blocked. An knew that Machi was a transmuter, and her main ability was the Nen threads. The Thread can have many functions, like attacking and strangling, and it can also stitch wounds. Even though it was very thin, it was tougher than a thick rope. She can even stick a needle to it and use it for tracking. The strength of the Threat is proportional to the length it stretched to. Once it became too long, its strength will decrease. Seeing An easily block her attack, she directly jumped forward with a w attack on his chest. Looking closely, An could see the threads wrapping around Machi¡¯s fingers. When the attack was about tond, An avoided easily by stepping sideways. Unwilling to give up, Machi once again sprung forward with her ws and once again failed. An seemed to be teasing a cat. While Machi was fiercely attacking him, he was just smiling. ¡°You¡­ Damn it!¡± Machi was frightened and angry at the same time. She thought she was good before, but she couldn¡¯t even touch An¡¯s clothes with her attacks. No matter how she attacked, An seemed to see through her and avoid easily. This is the first time she had such a predicament. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s end this game.¡± An easily grabbed Machi¡¯s hands from the wrist. ¡°Don¡¯t be rush!¡± An smiled lightly. ¡°Bastard.¡± Machi gritted her teeth. She couldn¡¯t keep up with this guy¡¯s speed at all. She was once again subdued by this man. Thinking about how An yed with her thest time, she was extremely angry. ¡°What do you want?¡± Seeing An being silent, Machi asked. ¡°Um¡­ I¡¯m just thinking, should I kill you?¡± Machi¡¯s pupils shrunk hearing this. ¡°Afraid?¡± Seeing her expression, An asked again. ¡°Huh, you can do that if you have the ability,¡± Machi said coldly. She was mentally prepared to die. However, she didn¡¯t expect to die at the hands of someone like An. Hearing Machi¡¯s answer, An shrugged and said: ¡°Okay, as you which.¡± At this time, a card flew over and interrupted An. An raised his brow and looked at Hisoka, who appeared from somewhere. ¡°I don¡¯t know what happened between you two, but it seems like I came at the right time,¡± Hisoka said. ¡°Don¡¯t be nosy, Hisoka.¡± An nced at him, unfriendly. Then he looked at Machi and said: ¡°Although I don¡¯t want to be nosy, I sill owe that woman a favor, so I hope you can let her go.¡± An looked straight at him and said: ¡°Are you pleading for her?¡± ¡°Almost,¡± Hisoka said. [Ding! Make A Choice] [1: Give Hisoka face and let Machi go. Reward: Golden Treasure Chest x1] [2: Kill Machi directly. Reward: Devil fruit: String String Fruit.] [3: Hold Machi hostage and threaten the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan once. Reward: Nen Ability: Holy Prayer of Light.] Seeing the options, An frowned. All three rewards were good, actually. The second option was indeed great. Domingo¡¯s devil fruit was very powerful. If developed properly, its power won¡¯t lose to a Logia fruit. However, An had the Ice Ice fruit and didn¡¯t need the String String Fruit. On the other hand, An was curious about the third option. Judging from the name, this ability wasn¡¯t ordinary and may even be a healing ability. After thinking for a while, An finally chose the third option. An looked at Hisoka and said: ¡°Hisoka, it¡¯s not impossible for me to let her go. However, she attacked me and wanted to kill me, so I can¡¯t just let her go like that.¡± Hisoka nodded and asked: ¡°So what do you want?¡± An thought for a bit and said: ¡°Let¡¯s do this. Hisoka, you go to Chrollo and tell him that Machi is in my hand, if he wants her, then take out a Billion Jenny as an exchange.¡± ¡°Billion?¡± ¡°Is it too much?¡± ¡°No, Chrollo has the money, and it isn¡¯t that much for him,¡± Hisoka said. ¡°That¡¯s fine then. Please go tell him.¡± An said. ¡°I can go meet him, but An, are you really ckmailing Chrollo? You know that the Ryodan is a notorious criminal organization. They have always been the ones who steal from others.¡± An lightly replied: ¡°You don¡¯t need to worry about that.¡± ¡°Alright then.¡± Hisoka stopped talking and took out his phone to call Chrollo. Machi was still subdued by An and saw that he wanted to use her to ckmail Chrollo. She good did nothing but grit her teeth and said: ¡°Damn it, you dare use me to ckmail the chief, I won¡¯t let you go.¡± ¡°Shut up.¡± An shut Machi up. If it wasn¡¯t for the reward and the Billion Jenny, he would have let her go so easily. On the other side of the phone, Chrollo heard his phone ringing and directly picked up. ¡°Hello, Hisoka?¡± ¡°Yeah, Chief, it¡¯s been a long time.¡± Hisoka smiled. ¡°Hisoka, what¡¯s the matter?¡± Chrollo asked. ¡°You asked Machi toe to The Heavens Arena to inform me about what¡¯sing, but it seems like there is trouble.¡± Chrollo frowned: ¡°Trouble? What troubling you?¡± ¡°It¡¯s not me who is in trouble. It¡¯s Machi,¡± Hisoka said. Chrollo asked in surprise: ¡°What did you say? What happened to Machi?¡± ¡°Maki is now in An¡¯s hands.¡± Hisoka¡¯s sentence made Chrollo¡¯s face sink: ¡°Is An also in The Heavens Arena?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°How did Machi end up in his hands? What happened?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know the details, but it seems there is a conflict between them, and Machi attacked him first and wanted to kill An. As you know, with her power, it¡¯s impossible for her to harm him, so she ended up in his hand, but she isn¡¯t hurt.¡± ¡°Is that so.¡± Chrollo breathed a sigh of relief after hearing that she is okay. ¡°So, What¡¯s An going to do now?¡± Chrollo asked in a deep voice. ¡°An asked me to tell you that if you want him to let her go, you have to give him a Billion Jenny. Otherwise, he would kill her.¡± Hisoka stated. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! I already released 40 chapters on Patreon for anyone interested in reading it ahead of anyone! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 144: Transaction Part 1 Chapter 144: Transaction Part 1 After finishing the call, Chrollo called Pakunoda. ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± Pakunoda entered the room and saw Chrollo frowning. ¡°Machi was caught,¡± Chrollo said solemnly. Pakunoda was surprised: ¡°What?¡± ¡°A few days ago, I asked Machi to go to The Heavens Arena to inform Hisoka about the n in York City on August 30th, I don¡¯t know why An was there. They were at odds¡­.¡± ¡°And then, what does that fellow wants?¡± Pakunoda met An in the Hunter Exam before, and she fought with him and was very impressed by his power. ¡°An wants me to send one Billion Jenny to redeem Machi, or he will kill her.¡± Hearing Chrollo¡¯s words, Pakunoda said coldly: ¡°He is using this opportunity to ckmail us, Chief. What are you going to do? Are you going to pay him?¡± Chrollo didn¡¯t answer directly but asked: ¡°Have they contacted Uvogin?¡± ¡°Well, he is with Nobunaga. I have notified them about the gathering.¡± Chrollo nodded and stood up: ¡°Get ready, we¡¯ll set off now.¡± ¡°Where to? Yorknew City, or Heavens Arena?¡± ¡°Heavens Arena.¡± Chrollo closed the book in his hand. ¡°Would you like me to inform Uvogin?¡± Pakunoda said. ¡°No need.¡± Chrollo shook his head and said: ¡°Uvogin had a conflict with An during the Hunter Exam, he chopped one of his hands, and if they were to meet, Uvogin would definitively fight, which isn¡¯t something I want to see.¡± ¡°Chief, are you afraid of him?¡± Chrollo didn¡¯t answer. ¡°Chief, it¡¯s undeniable that this guy is strong, but if we go alone, we still have you here, and you are more than his opponent. And in the end, he is only one person. If we join hands, we can definitively kill him.¡± Chrollo shook his head and said: ¡°Not necessarily.¡± ¡°Why?¡± Chrollo paused for a bit then said: ¡°Remember what we said when the Ryodan was founded. We are spiders with a mind that is responsible for issuing orders and twelve feet to execute them. No matter whether it¡¯s the head or the feet, they can be changed. However, once the head and feet are severely injured at the same time, the spider is finished.¡± Hearing this, Pakunoda frowned and said: ¡°Chief, do you mean that even if we can kill An, we will pay a heavy price? And this price is something that we can¡¯t afford, really?¡± Chrollo shook his head: ¡°It¡¯s not that we can¡¯t bear to kill him, but the price is higher than not killing him. It¡¯s not worth it.¡± ¡°I understand.¡± Pakunoda stopped asking and said: ¡°I will go prepare one Billion Jenny.¡± On the other side of the call, inside The Heavens Arena. ¡°I¡¯ve already told Chrollo about Machi¡¯s situation.¡± After hanging up, Hisoka turned around and said to An. An nodded and carried Machi on his shoulder after knocking her out and said: ¡°If Chrollo or someone elsees, you lead him to my room directly. Remember, tell them to bring the money, or else they will collect her body.¡± Seeing An¡¯s cold expression, Hisoka narrowed his eyes and smiled: ¡°You really don¡¯t have any pity for Machi. She is one of the few women that I appreciate. Wouldn¡¯t it be a pity to just kill her?¡± An stopped and looked at him: ¡°A guy like you actually appreciate a woman? And a fierce woman like her?¡± ¡°I¡¯m a man after all, and seeing a beautiful woman is fascinating,¡± Hisoka said with a smile. ¡°That¡¯s also true.¡± An nced at Hancock next to him then returned to the room with Machi on his back. ¡°What are you going to do to her?¡± Hancock asked after they were in their room. ¡°What can I do? If they bring the money, I will keep my promise and let her go.¡± While talking, An threw Machi on the sofa and tied her up firmly. Of course, An didn¡¯t expect a normal rope to prevent her from escaping. The reason he did this was to remind her that her current situation wasn¡¯t good and to not act rashly. ¡°So, who is this woman? Why does she want to kill you? What kind of force is behind her?¡± Hancock asked a few questions at one go. An made a cup of tea and exined everything to her. After learning that Machi was a member of the Genie Ryodan, who were fierce and ruthless, she released some killing Intent. ¡°It¡¯s better to kill her directly. Even if you let her go this time, she won¡¯t be grateful and will only hate you more and more and try to kill you again. Keeping her alive is like a curse.¡± An was a little surprised by Hancock andughed. ¡°What are youughing at?¡± Hancock was puzzled. ¡°Are you worried about me?¡± An looked at her. ¡°No.¡± Hancock blushed a little and turned her head away. An was very happy seeing this and smile: ¡°Hancock, do you remember? When I first summoned you into this world, you hate me so much and wanted to kill me.¡± ¡°I said that before. I didn¡¯t know what kind of person you are at that time.¡± ¡°What about now?¡± ¡°Stop asking; I don¡¯t want to answer you.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! I already released 40 chapters on Patreon for anyone interested in reading it ahead of anyone! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 144: Transaction Part 2 Chapter 144: Transaction Part 2 An shrugged and didn¡¯t ask anymore. After two hours, Machi woke up and panicked when she found herself bound tightly. After calming down, she remembered what happened before. ¡°You¡¯re awake.¡± She turned around and saw An sitting, looking at her. ¡°Let me go, bastard!¡± ¡°Your Chief isn¡¯t here with the money yet. How can I let you go.¡± Machi snorted coldly, and her muscle tensed, and the ropes were cut. After gaining her freedom, Machi rushed toward the door. In the blink of an eye, Ice surged in the room and froze Machipletely. An looked at her and said: ¡°Really? I didn¡¯t want to use this method to teat you. Why bother running away?¡± He ignored Machi and looked at the time. It had been six hours since Hisoka talked to Chrollo. If Chrollo was close, then it was enough for him to arrive at The Heavens Arena. After two more hours, Hisoka called him and learned that Chrollo hade in person with a Billion Jenny. Soon after, there was a knock on the door. An opened and saw Hisoka standing in front of the door, and behind him were Chrollo and Pakunoda. ¡°Come in.¡± An wasn¡¯t worried about them attacking him at all and let them inside. Chrollo looked at An calmly and said: ¡°It has been a long time.¡± ¡°it¡¯s just a few months.¡± An shrugged. ¡°You seem to have changed a lot.¡± ¡°What do you mean?¡± ¡°You be vicious.¡± ¡°Well, yes. You haven¡¯t changed much, the same for Miss Pakunoda.¡± ¡°Stop talking nonsense. Where is Machi?¡± Pakunoda was angry. ¡°Pay the money, and I will deliver her to you.¡± An smiled lightly. Hearing this, Pakunoda handed a golden card and said: ¡°The money is inside. The code is six zeros.¡± An nodded and put the card away, then carried Machi out. ¡°Why is her body so cold? What did you do to her?¡± Seeing Machi¡¯s eyes closed and her body cold made Pakunoda think that she died. ¡°Don¡¯t be nervous. She isn¡¯t dead,¡± An said indifferently. ¡°She was silly, so I punished her a little.¡± Pakunoda put her hand on Machi¡¯s chest and tentatively found her heartbeats which made her relieved. ¡°Okay, I returned your people back. You can leave.¡± An directly chased them out without giving them any face. Chrollo said solemnly: ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± Pakunoda red at An and picked Machi before following Chrollo out. Hisoka was thest to leave as he had something to say to An. ¡°Tell Gon that I have to leave before August 30th. If he can¡¯t win ten times before that, then I won¡¯t be able to fight with him.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry. He will definitively fight you before you go.¡± An said confidently. After An left, An checked the system and found that his reward arrived. [Ding! You sessfully ckmailed the Ryodan using Machi. Reward: Nen Ability: Holy Prayer of Light.] [Ability Description: The Holy Prayer of Light can speed natural recovery and relieve fatigue and restore the spirit. Using this Ability will consume too much Nen and can only be used once a day. If the limit is exceeded, then you will be forced into a Zetsu state for 30 days.] An was satisfied with the healing power of this new Ability as it can save his life or anyone close to him. Although it can only be used once a day, this Ability gave him an advantage in critical times. With his current strength, he doesn¡¯t dare to set off to the dark continent, but as long as he stayed here, only a few people would be able to hurt him. Only the old monsters were dangerous for him right now. Therefore, the greatest use of this Ability was not healing himself but relieving fatigue. After all, he was still human and would feel tired. Thinking about this, An tried activating this New Ability, and a golden light directly emerged. A being with a scepter and wings on his back stood in front of An. ¡°Angel?¡± An¡¯s eyes widened. ¡°I Greet Master.¡± An was taken aback; he didn¡¯t expect this angel to be self-aware and even talk to him. ¡°Do you have a name?¡± ¡°Master, please give me a name?¡± An thought for a bit and said: ¡°Well, since you have the ability to heal, then I will call you Raphael!¡± ¡°Thank you for giving me a name.¡± Raphael smiled. ¡°Raphael, help me relieve my fatigue,¡± An ordered immediately. ¡°I will do so now, Master.¡± As he said this, Raphael raised his hand, and a golden brilliance fell on An, making him feel refreshed, and all the fatigue in his body disappeared. ¡°What a powerful ability.¡± An couldn¡¯t help the smile on his face. ¡°Good job, Raphael.¡± An gave him a thumb up and praised him without hesitation. ¡°Thank you, Master! You have used Raphael¡¯s Ability for today. See you next time, Master!¡± With that, Raphael Disappeared. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! I already released 40 chapters on Patreon for anyone interested in reading it ahead of anyone! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 145: Allan’s Challenge Chapter 145: An¡¯s Challenge A few dayster, Gon and Killua finally mastered Gyo and could use it in battle. Although they weren¡¯t very skilled, it was enough for a normal battle. Everything else depends on their experience. Ten dayster, Gon finally won his tenth match, with a record of ten wins and three losses. Gon spent 130 days to win ten matches which were less than five months. Fortunately, the time didn¡¯t exceed five months, or else An would¡¯ve lost the bet. ¡°Unexpectedly, I underestimated the kid. He really progressed quickly.¡± Hisoka stood in the hallway to give An the money of the bet. They bet one hundred million Jenny each, and since An won, Hisoka came to finish the deal. ¡°Well, Since you lost the bet, you should pay, don¡¯t forget to put the money in my ount, Hisoka,¡± An said earnestly. Hisoka was somewhat depressed andined: ¡°An, this is the second time I bet against you and lost, which is really unpleasant.¡± An patted his shoulder and said: ¡°It¡¯s okay, keep working hard, and maybe one day you will win a bet against me.¡± ¡°Can I ask you not to be excessive in the match? Just show Gon your serious side and fight seriously but don¡¯t injure him gravely. He earned that much. After all, he worked really hard to fight you.¡± ¡°Is this a request?¡± Hisoka asked. An shrugged: ¡°Well, it¡¯s still within the favor you owe anyways.¡± ¡°I see.¡± Hisoka nodded and left. So, the day of the anticipated fight arrived. The battle is held on the 220th floor of The Heavens Arena on August 25th at 3 o¡¯clock. Tens of thousands of spectators were eager to see the match as Gon¡¯s performance in the past three months gained appreciation from many people. Today, his opponent was the Magician, Hisoka. Such a grand asion attracted the attention of arge audience. An and Hancock attended the game, and Of course, Killua is here as well. There was also Zushi and Wing here, along with many Floor masters. As the game started, Gon directly charged at Hisoka fiercely, and thetter retaliated. There was a lot of energy in that small body, and Hisoka, who intended to y around for a bit, turned serious as Gon continued to attack. Once, Twice, Thrice¡­ Gon was knocked down by Hisoka many times, but each time he would stand up again before the ten-second count ends. This perseverance made many regards An highly, and even Hisoka looked at Gon in a new light. Finally, Gon seized an opportunity and punched Hisoka in the face. This punch almost knocked Hisoka down, and as a reward, Hisoka punched back heavily. Even though Gon¡¯s body was strong, such a punch made him fall down and lose consciousness. Gon¡¯s defeat meant that he failed to get the Floor Master position, but for Hisoka, An, and Killua, this proved Gon¡¯s power. After Gon and Hisoka¡¯s match, another eye-catching match was about to begin on the second day. The participant in this match was Hisoka, who fought two days ago, and An. This match attracted even more audience than Gon¡¯s since An¡¯s record was ten wins without any loss. Because Hisoka is a Floor Master, An was the challenger, but only Gon and the others knew that it was actually Hisoka challenging An. ¡°Finally, we are about to fight.¡± On the stage, Hisoka said excitedly on the ring. ¡°Hisoka, you seem confident.¡± An flexed his muscle, and to be honest. He wasn¡¯t excited about this fight. After fighting with Netero and Zeno, those two monsters, An¡¯s power improved greatly, and it was difficult for most people to actually make him excited about a fight. ¡°Hisoka, I will fight against you, grab your position, and sit down after,¡± An said calmly. ¡°If you have the ability, thene,¡± Hisoka said with squinted eyes and no trace of the usual smile. As the match started, An attacked first and shot two icicles toward Hisoka. The white Icicle wasn¡¯t hard, but they seemed like water. Anything that touches those icicles will freeze instantly. The Icicles were fast, but Hisoka was on guard and jumped away and stuck to the ceiling using his Bungee Gum. The Icicles didn¡¯t stop and continued toward the audience, and the unlucky person was hit and froze instantly. An wasn¡¯t surprised because if that kind of attack was enough for Hisoka, he wouldn¡¯t be the Hisoka he knew. ¡°Try this next.¡± An stretched his hand forward like a bow, and an arrow condensed from thin air. Partisan! An aimed at Hisoka, who was still stuck to the ceiling. Hisoka directly released his Bungee Gum and fell down on the ring, and as soon as hended, a shadow approached him. Hisoka responded quickly and blocked An¡¯s attack. ¡°Oh? Good reaction.¡± An sneered, and Hisoka sensed danger. Just when he was about to move away, his legs were frozen, and he couldn¡¯t move. Taking advantage of this, An resolutely used Leaf Strong whirlwind andnding a heavy blow on Hisoka. Although Hisoka used Nen to protect his arms and block the kick, it still sent him down. As Hisoka stabilized himself, An shed using sh Steps and punched Hisoka¡¯s left cheek violently, knocking him down again. Two seconds passed from the first attack till Hisoka was punched. ¡°Clean Hit! 1 point to An.¡± Under the ring, the referee in charge of the score decisively gave 1 point to An. A clean hit can get one point! ¡°It hurts.¡± Hisoka spat a mouthful of blood. This punch was way stronger than Gon¡¯s punch from two days ago. Even though he felt pain on his face, it just made him even more excited. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! I already released 40 chapters on Patreon for anyone interested in reading it ahead of anyone! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 146: Score Chapter 146: Score ¡°What a freak!¡± An looked speechlessly at Hisoka, who was so excited after being hit. ¡°So, it¡¯s my turn to attack now!¡± Hisoka opened his palm and took out his ying cards, and threw them like shuriken. An didn¡¯t even move a step away, only swayed his body slightly and avoided them. An raised his eyes and saw the cards flying back at him. Using Gyo, An saw Hisoka¡¯s Nen wrapping around the cards and guiding in the air. Hisoka used Bungee Gum to do this, but it was a useless trick in front of An. An was using Observation Haki, so no matter where the cards came, he could dodge them. Ice Saber! An created a saber and sliced the ying cards apart. At this time, Hisoka spread his hands and sent dozen of ying cards toward An. Ice Wall! An created an Ice Wall that blocked the sixty or seventy cards. Hisoka¡¯s ying cards were sharp and enhanced with Nen, and they broke through the Ice Wall. Seeing the wall break, An took a step forward and then kicked. Rankyaku! Hisoka saw the air de flying toward him and looked serious. In the next instant, An saw him pull his hand quickly, and a spectator was pulled into the ring and acted as Hisoka¡¯s shield. The Spectator was split in two instantly. This made An frown. Apart from feeling sorry for the Spectator, he felt that he is truly unlucky. ¡°That¡¯s a really bad thing to do, Hisoka.¡± He didn¡¯t think that Hisoka would steep so low. ¡°I¡¯m just using my means efficiently.¡± An didn¡¯t say anything after hearing Hisoka¡¯s words. Indeed, if no one acted as his shield to block the Rankyaku, he wouldn¡¯t be in his current good state. Ordinary people can¡¯t stay alive after being hit by the air de. After this happened, amotion broke out. Some spectators who were closest to the ring started running away. However, most people didn¡¯t leave. The audience didn¡¯t want to waste such a rare fight. When something like that happened, An stopped attacking Hisoka using Rankyaku. Since Hisoka dared to pull someone to the ring as a meat shield, then he wouldn¡¯t mind grabbing another er. ¡°By the way, your attacking method is interesting. I could use some Ice, and that thing you shot is really useful.¡± An didn¡¯t answer Hisoka¡¯s ridicule. ¡®Forget it. I should hurry up and end the battle.¡¯ An thought to himself. At this moment, An rushed toward An, who sneered: ¡°Want to fight melee? Okay, I will y with you.¡± Boom! Boom! After exchanging three punches and two kicks, An smiled coldly. Armament-Type: Hardening! Using Observation Haki to predict Hisoka¡¯s movement and Armament Haki to increase his power, An¡¯s fist wrapped in ck, and with a bang, Hisoka was blown away. ¡°Critical Hit! Two points to An.¡± The referee said loudly. An¡¯s current score was three points. ¡°Hisoka, I changed my mind. I will just win with points.¡± An looked at the pale Hisoka raising from the ground with a mocking smile, returning the previous mockery back. Hisoka¡¯s face was gloomy. He covered his chest with one hand, as he could tell that at least one rib was broken from thest punch. This made him shocked since An wasn¡¯t an enhancer, and his power shouldn¡¯t be that strong. Otherwise, Hisoka would¡¯ve been safe after using Ken to defend. ¡°Did you use Ko?¡± Hisoka asked curiously. Kobines five Nen skills, Ten, Zetsu, Hatsu, Ren, and Gyo, in which all of the user¡¯s aura is concentrated into one particr body part. Gyo is utilized to focus aura on the part of the body, while Ten is used to prevent it from dispersing. Zetsu is used topletely stop the flow of Nen in all other parts of the body, increasing the output in the desired area. With Ren, the amount of aura is increased even further. The only disadvantage of this skill is theck of defense. Since a part is concentrated with Nen, no other part will be covered in Nen while using Ko. An didn¡¯t answer Hisoka. He smiled mysteriously instead. He wouldn¡¯t tell Hisoka that he used Armament Haki instead of Nen. Hisoka didn¡¯t ask again since An didn¡¯t want to tell. An hooked his finger at him and provocatively said: ¡°Come on, Hisoka, I want to get ten points.¡± ¡°Heh, Just what I want.¡± Hisoka was a fighting freak. Facing An¡¯s provocation, he didn¡¯t back down. Even though it might be a trap, he still went forward to fight An. Boom! ¡°Clean Hit! One point to An!¡± An hit Hisoka again and scored another point. ¡°Come again,e on!¡± Hisoka didn¡¯t pay attention to the pay in his body and rushed like crazy toward An. However, An¡¯s speed exceeded his expectation. But that aroused his fighting frenzy even more. Hisoka¡¯s Nen radiated around him as both fighters entered a high-speed movement. Their figure disappeared, and the crowd could only hear Bang Bang sound from time to time. Afterward, everyone saw Hisoka flying back and sliding on the ground. ¡°Critical Hit! Two points for An.¡± The referee loudly stated. An had six points right now, and only four remained. At this time, Hisoka stopped himself from going outside the ring. Even though you won¡¯t lose if you get out of the ring, for Hisoka, it meant he lost if he stepped out of the ring. After scoring six points, An intended to take the opportunity to score the remaining four quickly, but to his surprise, he saw several pink thread-like things sticking to his body. The other end of the threat was in Hisoka¡¯s Hands, who was freely moving them. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! I already released 40 chapters on Patreon for anyone interested in reading it ahead of anyone! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 147: Winner And Loser Chapter 147: Winner And Loser ¡°It seems like Hisoka intends to restrict my movement using Bungee Gum.¡± An saw through Hisoka¡¯s motive instantly. Hisoka pulled his hand hard to pull An away. An snorted coldly and cut the Bungee Gum sticking to his body using the Ice Saber. With the Bungee Gum cut, Hisoka couldn¡¯t move An. ¡°You saw through that?¡± Hisoka¡¯s face was gloomy, and he didn¡¯t expect An to notice his Bungee Gum so quickly. He was good at concealing Nen using [In], and no one ordinary could notice it even if they tried. But An noticed it and cut it off almost instantly. This may seem simple, but it showed that An was proficient in using Gyo during fights. ¡°It¡¯s useless, Hisoka. I already know your abilities, and they are useless in front of me.¡± An said with a sneer. ¡°Oh? Really?¡± Hisoka said amusedly as if he didn¡¯t believe An. ¡°You don¡¯t believe me? Well, I tell you in detail then. You¡¯re a transmuter; you can change your Nen into chewing gum that can stick to surfaces and targets. This chewing gum also has the properties of rubber and can reflect projectiles and so on. This is your main ability and the one you use often. Right?¡± Hisoka looked at An gloomily and said: ¡°So you investigated me before I noticed.¡± ¡°Wrong, I didn¡¯t do such a thing.¡± An denied. ¡°How do you know this then?¡± Hisoka was curious. ¡°That¡¯s a secret.¡± An sneered as he raised his hand and released cold air. Hisoka jumped up and stuck to the ceiling again. An looked at him and said: ¡°Heh, Hisoka do you think you¡¯re the only one who can fly?¡± An directly took a step and started rushing toward Hisoka using Geppo (Moonwalk). Hisoka didn¡¯t seem surprised. He seemed to know that An can step on air which was simr to flying. In the blink of an eye, An already used Armament Haki and punched Hisoka. The air howled from the power behind the dark fist, which made Hisoka abandon any thoughts of blocking it. He released his Bungee Gum and jumped from the ceiling back to the ring. As soon as he touched the ring, Hisoka looked up to be greeted by a huge Icicle falling down on him. Hisoka¡¯s pupil shrunk as he rolled awkwardly. The ring tiles broke apart by the Icicle. Hisoka raised his head again and saw An rushing down toward him. ¡°So Fast!¡± Hisoka was taken aback, and in the next moment, An¡¯s fierce attacks arrived. Wolf Fang Fist! This move was used by Yamcha from Dragon ball. This is the first time An used this style, as he wanted to try the power of this move. Hisoka felt like he was facing a fierce wolf. He was able to parry at first, but An¡¯s speed picked up, and, in the end, Hisoka received many hits. Boom! Boom! Boom! The muffled sound of each punch made the audience swallow hard. ¡°Wow! An Senshu (yer) is attacking Hisoka Senshu fiercely.¡± The femalementator outside eximed, watching this scene. Needless to say, anyone can tell that Hisoka was being hammered by An right now. The Referee didn¡¯t know how to count points anymore. Hisoka fell down after the fierce attack and didn¡¯t move. ¡°It seems that it¡¯s quite powerful.¡± An smiled. ¡°Start the count.¡± An nced at the Referee. The Referee directly started the count down, and when he reached five, Hisoka suddenly got up. Seeing this, the Referee stopped for a few seconds. An was surprised. As expected, Hisoka¡¯s ability to endure pain isparable to Gon¡¯s. It should be his instincts guiding him to stand up. ¡°This is so great! It¡¯s been a while since thest time I took a beating, sofortable.¡± Hisoka said with excitement,bined with his swelling face. He seemed really funny. An almost screamed at this. He got goosebumps all over his body as he didn¡¯t continue fighting this freaking Masochist. Hisoka smiled a wicked smile and directly utilized his Bungee Gum like a web to grab a few spectators and threw them at An like cannonballs. The spectators screamed as they flew toward An. An easily dodged and said: ¡°Boring!¡± ¡°Really?¡± Hisoka sneered and once again dispatched a few spectators toward An. An didn¡¯t avoid this time. Instead, he waved his hand and froze them. When Hisoka saw this, Hisoka didn¡¯t stop. The audience was just a chess piece to him, and he can use them as much as he wanted. In a few seconds, dozen of spectators were dragged out of the stands and thrown at An only to be frozen. Hisoka didn¡¯t care if the spectators died, but An wouldn¡¯t kill needlessly. He just froze them and left them alive. Although An didn¡¯t care about the audience, he couldn¡¯t just watch Hisoka¡¯s behavior. So he moved to stop him. An shed at high speed and appeared in front of Hisoka in a blink of an eye. Hisoka couldn¡¯t react, and in the next moment, An released his Conqueror¡¯s Haki directly at him. Hisoka felt his spirit and consciousness be sluggish. ¡°Hisoka, try this!¡± A spherical ball appeared in An¡¯s hand. Rasengan! The Rasengan directly hit Hisoka¡¯s abdomen and sent him flying away. A swirling wound appeared on his stomach. The scene was so quiet that if a pin dropped, everyone in the Arena could hear it. ¡°Uh¡­¡± Hisoka fell on his back at the edge of the ring, and blood flowed out of his mouth. His abdomen was severely injured by the Rasengan, and his internal organs were damaged, which should prevent him from continuing the fight.¡± ¡°Critical Hit! 2 points for An.¡± ¡°TKO! An Senshu umted 10 points and won the match.¡± The Referee¡¯s voice rang through the Arena. In fact, if you really count An¡¯s previous attacks, he should¡¯ve umted more than ten points already. ¡°Hisoka, you lost.¡± An walked toward Hisoka and looked at him. Yes, Hisoka lost, and very thoroughly at that. ¡°Youpletely defeated me,¡± Hisoka said. Although he was severely injured, he didn¡¯t resent An for this. Instead, he was sincerely convinced by the overwhelming power An showed. As a challenger, he failed, but he was still convinced of his defeat. An was a little surprised that Hisoka would actually be convinced by his loss. After all, he was an arrogant man who was confident in his strength. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Take the opportunity to kill Hisoka. Reward: Spring Spring Fruit] [2: Gain Hisoka as a friend and save his life. Reward: Rare Treasure Chest x1] An thought for a bit. Although the devil fruit was good, he didn¡¯t want to kill Hisoka. He didn¡¯t know why, but he thought that he and Hisoka were the same kind, so he chose the second one. ¡°Hisoka, for the sake of old times, I will save your life.¡± Originally, An wanted to use the Senzu bean to heal Hisoka, but he thought that it would be a waste since it was the only Senzu bean he had. However, Hisoka seemed on the verge of death already. ¡°Right, I can try that.¡± An had an idea: ¡®I can just use Raphael.¡¯ An directly activated the Holy Prayer of Light. ¡°Master, what¡¯s your order?¡± A white two-winged Angle appeared in front of An. ¡°Raphael, save this guy.¡± An pointed at Hisoka, who was lying on the ground. ¡°Yes, Master.¡± Raphael immediately flew in front of Hisoka and opened his hands, and ced them on Hisoak¡¯s abdomen. With a burst of light, Hisoka¡¯s wound started healing quickly. But at the same time, An frowned. He could clearly feel his Nen being consumed by Raphael. ¡°That¡¯s enough, Raphael.¡± Seeing Hisoka¡¯s expression improve, An decisively stopped Raphael. In just a short ten-second healing Hisoka, An consumed 30,000 Nen point. If he continued, he would be exhausted at the end. At the same time, An received his reward from the system. At this time, Hisoka, who was lying on the ground, got up. Although he was fully healed, he was brought back to life. ¡°An, you¡­¡± Hisoka looked at An. He really didn¡¯t expect An to save him and to even possess such a powerful healing ability as well. An stopped him and smiled: ¡°You don¡¯t need to say anymore, Hisoka, if you feel grateful, remember that you owe me.¡± After that, An stopped talking and left. ¡°It looks like Ipletely lost to him.¡± Hisoka looked at An¡¯s back with aplicated expression and smiled bitterly before leaving as well. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! I already released 40 chapters on Patreon for anyone interested in reading it ahead of anyone! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 148: Zeno’s Call Chapter 148: Zeno¡¯s Call After stepping out of the Arena, An couldn¡¯t wait for the reward he would receive from the system. [Ding! You opened a Rare Treasure Chest and obtained the Rare Mangeky¨­ Sharingan. ¡®What?! I got the Mangeky¨­ Sharingan?!¡¯ An was taken aback. [Note: The Mangeky¨­ Sharingan belongs to one of the three Bloodline Limit Doujutsu in Naruto, and Host Needs Chakra to use it.] ¡®No way?¡¯ An tried it but couldn¡¯t use it since he didn¡¯t have Chakra and his Mangeky¨­ Sharingan was now in a dormant state. An was speechless because this was the same as winning Ten Million Dors from a lottery, only for the bank to freeze his ount before he could use them. ¡®It¡¯s strange that I could use Chidori and Rasengan before, but I can¡¯t use the Mangeky¨­ Sharingan.¡¯ After some thought, Anes to a close conclusion as to why he couldn¡¯t use it. The Mangeky¨­ Sharingan was a bloodline Limit and wasn¡¯t like a normal Jutsu. ¡®If that¡¯s the case, then I will try forming chakra in my body.¡¯ An knew that Chakra was Physical and Spiritual energiesbined. However, he had no idea how to form it since this was Hunter X Hunter World, not Naruto. There is no such thing as the Chakra tree, and there is no Kaguya who was the ancestor of Chakra in this world. Furthermore, the energy used in the HXH world is Nen. Anyways, An wanted to try it. He didn¡¯t want to have the Mangeky¨­ Sharingan and be unable to use it. ¡°An!¡± At this moment, Killua came over. An temporarily set aside the matter of Mangeky¨­ Sharingan and looked at Killua. ¡°An, I didn¡¯t expect you to defeat Hisoka so easily. Let¡¯s go and tell Gon about this.¡± Killua said. An nodded and went to the Hospital with Killua. In the match between Gon and Hisoka, Gon broke a few ribs and a hand along with various minor injuries, which should heal after half an hour, ording to the doctor. But of course, Since he was Gon, a month would be more than enough. ¡°Gon, we have some good news.¡± Killua smiled. ¡°What¡¯s the good news? Did An win against Hisoka?¡± Gon guessed. ¡°Of course.¡± Killua nodded. ¡°I knew that An would win.¡± Gon smiled as he was always confident in An¡¯s strength. ¡°I have the recording of the match. Let¡¯s y it now.¡± Killua took the videotape and went toward the T.V. After watching the match, both had the same thought. An was too mysterious and strong. They didn¡¯t know how many hidden cards An had. Every time they figure out something, he would have something new. An looked at both of them andughed while feeling somewhat proud. Although he really wanted to tell both of them that he was a transmigrator and has a cheat that won¡¯t lose to their protagonist Aura, he couldn¡¯t reveal that to them. At this moment, An¡¯s phone rang. ¡°You continue talking; I will go answer the phone.¡± Seeing the ID of the caller, An was a little surprised and answered. ¡°Hello, I hope you¡¯re doing good these days, An?¡± On the other side of the phone, an old man started talking. An smiled at Zeno¡¯s greeting: ¡°I¡¯m doing great.¡± ¡°Where is Killua?¡± Zeno asked. ¡°Killua and Gon are in Heaven¡¯s Arena, both learning about Nen, and I have to say, Killua is quite good.¡± An briefly stated. ¡°Well, thank you for taking care of him,¡± Zeno said with gratitude. ¡°It¡¯s nothing, by the way. Did something happen?¡± An asked curiously. ¡°Haha, something did happen.¡± Zeno smiled before turning serious. ¡°I¡¯ve taken a mission for you. Are you interested?¡± An became interested after hearing this: ¡°What is the mission?¡± ¡°There is a rich man who wants to hire a first-ss expert to protect his daughter. His daughter has an ability that helped her predict the fate of others. Therefore, he wanted to find someone strong and reliable to protect her. Usually, I don¡¯t ept such requests, but I thought you would just pass the time and get quick money with no risk.¡± An pondered for a bit before asking: ¡°Master Zeno, this rich man you¡¯re talking about doesn¡¯t happen to be Light Nostrade, and his daughter is Neon Nostrade, right?¡± ¡°Oh? You actually know them.¡± Zeno was slightly surprised. ¡°I¡¯ve heard a little about them,¡± An said lightly. However, he was quite surprised as he didn¡¯t expect Zeno to introduce this kind of bodyguard business to him. ¡°So, what do you think?¡± Zeno asked tentatively. Before An replied, Zeno added: ¡°The other party gave quite a sum of money that ordinary people won¡¯t make in ten lifetimes.¡± An thought for a while then said: ¡°Well, if that¡¯s the case, then I will try it out. I n to leave this ce anyway.¡± Zeno nodded and said: ¡°Then, you can meet them in Hotel Beitacle on the twenty-ninth of August. The interview room is 2302. Although I introduced you, there may be a test of a sort before they ept you in.¡± ¡°Okay, I got it.¡± After hanging up, An smiled then returned to the hospital. ¡°An, who was it?¡± Gon curiously asked. ¡°It¡¯s Killua¡¯s Grandpa.¡± An nced at Killua, who said: ¡°What?! My grandpa?¡± Killua couldn¡¯t sit still anymore and said: ¡°What does my grandfather need from you?¡± An shrugged: ¡°He introduced me to a business opportunity.¡± ¡°What business? Who is your target?¡± Killua subconsciously asked. ¡°It¡¯s not an assassination business, and it¡¯s a bodyguard one,¡± An said while spreading his arms. In fact, he thinks that assassination is more interesting than being a bodyguard. ¡°Did you agree?¡± Killua asked. An nodded: ¡°Well, it¡¯s about time. Anyway, I¡¯ve already stayed here long enough. I need to go to other ces.¡± ¡°So¡­¡± ¡°In other words, An, we¡¯re going to part ways?¡± Gon asked a bit reluctantly. It¡¯s just a temporary separation.¡± Anforted. ¡°When will you leave?¡± Killua asked. ¡°My interview is on the twenty-ninth of August. So, I¡¯m leaving tomorrow or the day after.¡± An said. ¡°By the way, I might be working in Yorknew City, and there will be a ten days auction held from the first of September to the 10th of the same month. You can go take a look there. Maybe you can find some treasures. You earned about 300 million Jenny¡¯s here, so it should be okay for you to go there.¡± ¡°Is it popr?¡± ¡°It¡¯s an auction festival held every few years, and it should be very lively there.¡± An smiled deeply. He knew that the Spiders would be there to look auction items and fight against a few gangs. Of course, An still doesn¡¯t know how it will turn up there. The next month would be the liveliest month in Yorknew City. ¡°I n to go back to whale ind first, and then we can make ns.¡± ¡°Well, why don¡¯t you go see Mito? Do you want me to go with you?¡± ¡°No, An, since you have something to do, you should do your job. I will be fine.¡± An nodded and looked at Killua: ¡°Well, Killua, you can go back with Gon since you didn¡¯t visit his home before.¡± ¡°Is that okay?¡± Killua looked at Gon and asked. ¡°Of course, if you don¡¯t dislike it there, you¡¯re always wee, Killua.¡± Gon grinned. ¡°Okay, it¡¯s decided then. We will meet in Yorknew city then.¡± An patted their shoulder. Chapter 149: Switching to Chakra Mode Chapter 149: Switching to Chakra Mode ¡°Hancock, I¡¯m leaving this ce.¡± In a high-end Coffee Shop next to The Heavens Arena, An informed Hancock. Hancock¡¯s expression changed slightly: ¡°So, what are you going to do?¡± ¡°I will terminate the contract, and you can go back to your world.¡± ¡°Really?¡± ¡°Yes, After the contract is closed, you can return to Amazon Lily again.¡± Hancock stayed silent for a while before she nodded. She knew that she wasn¡¯t someone from this world, and she couldn¡¯t stay here for long. An was really reluctant to let Hancock go, but there is no permanent banquet in the world. There are always people you have to part with. ¡°We won¡¯t meet again?¡± Before leaving, Hancock asked. ¡°Who knows,¡± An said as he wasn¡¯t sure himself. When An first arrived in the Hunter x Hunter world, he chose the thousand days survival challenge. As long as he con survives till it ends, he has a feeling that he would be able to leave toward another world. A year already passed since he arrived here, and two more left.But he didn¡¯t know where the system will send him at that time. On the second day after terminating the contract with Hancock, An bid farewell to Gon and Killua and left The Heavens Arena. There was almost a week before the 29th of August, so he wasn¡¯t in a hurry. He found a secluded ce and started trying to form Chakra, which didn¡¯t belong to this world. If he can form it, he will have two types of energies in his body, the first is Nen, and the second is Chakra. However, unfortunately, An couldn¡¯t form Chakra. He could tell that if he wanted Chakra, then he would find a ce that contains it, which is Naruto¡¯s world. And here, he can¡¯t form it. The reason for this is simple, Chakra didn¡¯t belong to this world, and form it will have huge restrictions. Just like growing corps, some can only grow in the south but not the north and vice versa. Since he couldn¡¯t form it in this world, An didn¡¯t be obsessed with the idea as he had another way to obtain it, which was his Cheat ability. As long as he had the system, getting Chakra won¡¯t take long. Speaking of the system, An suddenly thought that he didn¡¯t study it before. He only knew that this was the God of Choice System, which let you make a choice and gain rewards after finishing the chosen option. After a while, in front of An¡¯s eyes, arge virtual screen appeared in front of him, which was the system¡¯s interface. There were three main sections, namely the homepage, the tasks section, and Locked Section. Clicking on the Homepage Section, new information appeared on the screen. [Personal Information] [Equipment] [Skills] [Inventory] [Points] |System Store] and so on. The functions were quite detailed, which looked like a game interface. An clicked on his profile, and detail about him appeared. Then he clicked on his equipment which led to a pop-out with many grids where he can equip many things, and the already equipped items were there as well. At this moment, there were many things like the Ice Ice Fruit, Yatsufusa, Shusui, and the storage ring were disyed. Next was the skill panel, which also had a grid for each skill. [Nen Ability: Grim¡¯s Hand] [Nen transmutation Ability: Ice] [Nen ability: Nen Stomach] |Heaven¡¯s eye] [Devour] [Holy prayer of Light] ¡­ Looking at those various skills, An sighed contently. After that, he took a look at the Inventory and found his devil fruits and skills cards. ¡°Well, What¡¯s this?¡± After researching for a bit, An was surprised to find that each item can be sold for points. The so-called points are simr to gold coins in games which can be used in the system¡¯s Store. An clicked on the Rubber Rubber fruit, and two options popped up. The first one was: use. The second one was: sell. Since An couldn¡¯t use another Devil Fruit currently, he chose to sell it. [Are you sure you want to sell Rubber Rubber fruit?] ¡®Yes¡¯ [Rubber Rubber fruit sessfully sold for 10,000 Points.] ¡°Ten thousand points?¡± An didn¡¯t know if that was much or not since he still didn¡¯t open the Store. After checking his points, he found ten thousand points lying there. With this, An clicked on the system¡¯s Store since he obtained some points. A New interface appeared in front of An with a dazzling array of goods and a variety of products, with each having a price under it. An waspletely fascinated. There were so many products on disy. Only a hundred products were on this page, but there were 9999 pages¡­ There were so manymodities that it was difficult to calcte. From the first page, An saw many familiar items, for example, the Rennigan from Naruto¡¯s world. An was surprised as he didn¡¯t think there was such a good thing. But as he saw the price under it, An felt like cold water sshed all over him. The Rennigan required half a million points to buy, and he only had 10,000 Points currently. ¡°I don¡¯t know if there is a chakra in here¡­.¡± An searched for a bit looking for Chakra. Finally, after spending two days and turning over about 5,000 Pages, An found Chakra on page 5,032. In addition, the price of Chakra was exactly 10,000 Points. Selecting the Chakra, An bought it without hesitation. The next moment, the item he bought appeared in the Inventory. He clicked on Chakra and used it sessfully. In his body, other than the Ice Ice Fruit, An currently had Chakra and Nen. Although An had Chakra, it didn¡¯t mean he was free to use it. The reason was simple, Nen and Chakra were two different energies, so the two were conflicted. Therefore, when using Nen, An can¡¯t use Chakra, and vice versa. If he wanted to use Chakra, he needed to switch to chakra mode. As for the Devil Fruit, it didn¡¯t affect this at all. With Chakra, An can now try the Mangeky¨­ Sharingan. The next day, An entered a forest and then switched from Nen mode to Chakra mode. All the Nen in his body was converted into Chakra, and at the same time, his eyes turned into Mangeky¨­ Sharingan. A pair of scarlet eyes appeared in ce of his normal ones. Suddenly, information about each ability entered his mind. His left eye¡¯s ability was a mental attack that can pull the target into an illusion world, and its name was Tsukuyomi. His right eye¡¯s ability was the ck mes, Amaterasu. ¡°Left eye has Tsukuyomi, and the right eye has Amaterasu. Is this Uchiha Itachi¡¯s Mangeky¨­ Sharingan?¡± Taking out a small mirror, An could clearly see the triangr dart-like pattern in his eyes. ¡°Sure enough, this is Itachi¡¯s Mangeky¨­ Sharingan.¡± After confirming to who the eyes belonged, An was very excited since the Mangeky¨­ Sharingan had a third power ability, which is Susanoo. Itachi¡¯s Susanoo was special since he had a curved de that resembles a dagger on his right hand. That de is the sword of Totsuka, which is an ethereal weapon with an enchanted de that can seal anyone it pierces into an illusion world for eternity. On his left hand, he had a shield that can change its nature depending on the attack it receives, and it¡¯s named Yota Mirror. If An¡¯s Mangeky¨­ Sharingan was the same as Itachi¡¯s, then Susanoo will be the same as well. Thinking about this, An immediately mobilized his Chakra to activate Susanoo, but unfortunately, he couldn¡¯t. The reason is simple, and he doesn¡¯t have enough Chakra. As Susanoo was one of the strongest abilities of a Mangeky¨­ Sharingan, it needed a certain amount of Chakra, but only currently had only had enough to keep the Mangeky¨­ Sharingan activated, but not use its power. Not to mention Susanoo, even Tsukuyomi and Amaterasu used more Chakra than he currently has. Fortunately, Chakra can grow through practice. An temporarily closed his Mangeky¨­ Sharingan and wanted to start training to increase his chakra reserve. ¡°As long as the number of chakra increases, it doesn¡¯t matter how long it takes.¡± An thought happily. However, before he began training, he decided to go to Yorknew city for the interview. The next morning, An took an aircraft toward Yorknew city. Chapter 150: Neon Part 1 Chapter 150: Neon Part 1 After a day, the aircraft finallynded at Yorknew City¡¯s airport. This is An¡¯s first time in Yorknew City. Looking at this lively and prosperous city, An had a good impression of it. Walking out of the airport, An first went to a hotel nearby and changed his face. Since his Nen ability works with his imagination, he changed to a middle-aged man with an ordinary appearance. He didn¡¯t have anything outstanding. He seemed quite average and ordinary. An was satisfied with his new look as he wanted that effect. As to why he changed his appearance, he didn¡¯t want any attention. Aftering out of the Hotel, An directly took a taxi and went toward Hotel Beitacle for his interview. After he reached his destination, An bypassed the security and the reception and went toward the 23rd floor. ording to the information he received from Zeno, the interview was on the 23rd floor, room 2302. An raised his head and knocked on the door twice, and after a while, a gloomy man opened the door. The men looked at the disguised An the same way An was looking at him. The man in front of him was the head bodyguard Dalzollene. ¡°Who are you, and what are you doing here?¡± Dalzollene asked while staring sharply at An. ¡°I¡¯m here for an interview.¡± An deliberately changed his voice. He changed his voice because it would seem unnatural for an old man to have his voice. ¡°Who introduced you?¡± Dalzollene asked in a deep voice. ¡°Zeno of the Zoldyck Family.¡± Hearing An says that name, Dalzollene was shocked. ¡°You¡¯re An?¡± An nodded softly. Dalzollene looked at An again and was confused. But since this person was introduced by the legendary assassin Zeno, he didn¡¯t say anything and opened the door for An. ¡°Let me introduce myself.¡± Dalzollene looked at An and said: ¡°My name is Dalzollene. I¡¯m the head bodyguard of the Nostrade Family. I¡¯m responsible for the security, and anyone who is here to work for the Nostrade Family needs to pass my interview.¡± An nodded and said: ¡°My name is An. I¡¯m a professional Hunter.¡± ¡°Professional Hunter? Do you have your license?¡± ¡°I do.¡± With that said, An took his hunter License, which made Dalzollene nod his head. Although he wasn¡¯t a professional hunter, he dealt with them before, and An¡¯s license was genuine. An put away his license and stared at Dalzollene, waiting for his answer. ¡°Although you are rmended by master Zeno, and you¡¯re a professional Hunter, you will have to be tested ording to the Nostrade Family¡¯s rules.¡± ¡°No problem,¡± An said readily. Dalzollene took out a list and handed it over to An before he said: ¡°If you can get rid of the people on this list, I will recognize your strength and hire you on behalf of the Nostrade Family.¡± ¡°I can do that.¡± Seeing such an easy-going answer, Dalzollene reminded him: ¡°If you can¡¯tplete this mission within 24 hours, then I¡¯m sorry, but I can¡¯t hire you.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, and I will finish it soon,¡± An said confidently. Walking out of the Hotel, An nced at the information in the paper before he tossed it away in a trash bin. ording to the mission he received, he needs to kill a man named ¡®Guere.¡¯ This ¡®Guere¡¯ was a gang leader that waspetitive with the Nostrade Family. And An¡¯s task was to help the Nostrade Family get rid of him. For An, this task was simple, and the first step was to find where this Guere was. An checked through the inte using his hunter license and found relevant information about Guere and the industry under his name. Guere¡¯s full name is Guere Dahl. He is the head of the Dahl family and owns two casinos, ten chain hotels and five gambling halls, and various small businesses. His total assets were 100 billion Jenny. At the same time, Guere was a well-known figure in the underground society, and his gang alwayspeted with the Nostrade Family. Both sides regarded themselves as deadly opponents and wanted each other dead. However, both of them had equal strength and couldn¡¯t get rid of each other. After getting the information about Guere, An shook his head. Dalzollene¡¯s trick wasn¡¯t hard to see. On the surface, he wanted to test An¡¯s strength, but in fact, he wanted to use someone else¡¯s sword to strike the enemies of the Nostrade Family, and even if he failed, Guere wouldn¡¯t be able to link him to the Nostrade Family. Although An was a little upset about being used like this, he decided toplete the mission first. An got Guere¡¯s current location with a little trick and drove toward the mansion he was currently in. This mansion was in the northern suburbs of Yorknew city with vastnd. It has wineries, swimming pools, and golf courses, amongst other facilities. ¡°Stop. Who are you?¡± When An approached the gate, a security guard immediately stopped him. An sneered, and before they could approach An, both fell to the ground unconscious. To deal with those small fries, all he needed was Conqueror¡¯s Haki. With a leap, An directly crossed the ten-meters high gate and entered the mansion. An walked straight toward the vi. Just as he was about to enter, the security guard in charge of patrolling the vi discovered an intruder. They were Guere¡¯s security guards and in charge of escorting any guest to him. There were many of them, but all An needed was once again a nce, and instantly all fell down. An easily entered the vi and saw several people in the hall. They were different from the bodyguards outside, and An could easily tell this from their aura. ¡°Who are you?¡± The man leading them stared at An coldly but didn¡¯t act rashly. The reason was simple since An could get here, it showed his ability. ¡°The one who came to take your boss¡¯ life,¡± An said indifferently. ¡°How arrogant! This is the Dahl family property. Who do you think you are?¡± The man snorted and rushed at An with the people he had. They were quite fast. Of course, they were fast to ordinary people. For An, they were quite slow. An didn¡¯t bother engaging them, and with a simple thought, cold air spread around him, and all of them were turned into ice sculptures. An shook his head and walked around them to enter a certain room. When he walked into the vi, he already spread his Observation Haki along with [En] to increase his perception. At this moment, this vi was shrouded in An¡¯s perception, and nothing can escape him. An stood in front of a door before he pushed it open. In the room, an old man in his fifties, along with a young woman in her twenties, was panicking because of the intruder. ¡°Found you.¡± An showed a chilling smile as the old man was his target, Guere. As for the young woman, she was obviously Guere¡¯s lover. ¡°Are a killer sent by the Nostrade Family?¡± Guere suppressed his fear and asked. ¡°You¡¯re only half right. I¡¯m here to take your life.¡± An sneered. ¡°Don¡¯t kill me, and I can give you money, a lot of money. How about a billion Jenny?¡± Seeing that An was unmoved, Guere pushed the shivering woman and said: ¡°Do you know this woman? She is a supermodel. I will also give her to you. Here you go, as long as you let me go.¡± An didn¡¯t even look at the woman. After Hancock, most women weren¡¯t attractive to him. Seeing An smile without speaking, Guere felt like he was facing the Shinigami. ¡°Before death, the so-called powerful person is nothing than this.¡± An sighed in disappointment. The next moment, a cold light shed in An¡¯s hand, and before Guere could see anything, he fell dead. Seeing that Guere was dead, the woman was so frightened that she started begging An: ¡°Please, don¡¯t kill me, I have nothing to do with Guere. He paid me 100 Million and wanted me to y with him. We are just business partners.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be silly, I don¡¯t hit woman, just go.¡± An waved his hand. ¡°Thank you!¡± Chapter 150: Neon Part 2 Chapter 150: Neon Part 2 Just as the woman passed by An, she suddenly fell down to the ground without a word. An shook his head and left the vi after burning the scene of the crime without leaving any clue behind. Back to room 2302, An saw Dalzollene again. Seeing An back so quickly, Dalzollene looked at An, slightly frightened, and said: ¡°Done?¡± ¡°See for yourself.¡± An dropped a bag casually. When Dalzollene opened the bag, his pupil shrunk slightly as he saw Guere¡¯s head. Taking a deep breath, Dalzollene looked at An and said: ¡°You unexpectedly finished the task. You¡¯re really amazing!¡± ¡°It was easy.¡± An didn¡¯t care. Dalzollene felt slightly guilty, but in the end, he said: ¡°On behalf of the Nostrade Family, I hire you as the Bodyguard of the Nostrade Family. Your duty is to protect the Boss¡¯ daughter, Miss Neon.¡± With that said, Dalzollene took out a contract and handed it to An: ¡°Please take a look, and if there is no problem, you can sign below.¡± An nced casually before signing his name. He didn¡¯t care about the contract. As long as he had power, nothing would happen to him, even if he broke the contract. Seeing An signing without hesitation, Dalzollene nodded in satisfaction. He thought that he could restrict An by the contract and said: ¡°from now on, you¡¯re a member of the Nostrade Family. Your job is to protect Miss Neon as she is the most important person to the boss. You mustn¡¯t let any harme to Miss Neon.¡± ¡°I can guarantee her safety when I¡¯m working, but I can¡¯t promise that outside of work.¡± An¡¯s words made Dalzollene a little dissatisfied as he said seriously: ¡°You have signed the contract just now. The contract mention that you have to stay by Miss Neon¡¯s Side all the time.¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°In other words, I have to eat and drink and do other necessities while Miss is around?¡± ¡°That¡¯s not necessary because you¡¯re not the only one who will be protecting Miss Neon.¡± Dalzollene rified. An nodded and didn¡¯t say anything. ¡°On the 1st of September, there will be a ten days auction here. You will pick Miss Neon at the airport. I will contact you via phone. This is Miss Neon¡¯s photo.¡± After taking the Phone number and Photo, An smiled lightly: ¡°Are you sure that it¡¯s alright for me to pick her up? Aren¡¯t you afraid that I will take her away?¡± ¡°You¡¯re someone rmended by Master Zeno, and I don¡¯t think you¡¯d do that,¡± Dalzollene said. An smiled: ¡°So Master Zeno is a guarantee of my credibility.¡± ¡°You can say that.¡± Dalzollene nodded. ¡°Since master Zeno guarantees my credibility, why did you suggest that Ie here and make me do that $hit Task? I¡¯m not an Assassin hired the Nostrade Family!¡± Feeling the killing intent and the pressureing from An, Dalzollene was secretly frightened as sweat covered his forehead and quickly exined: ¡°As I said before, the rules of Nostrade Family stated that everyone needed toplete a task when they are here for an interview. If you weren¡¯t good enough, we wouldn¡¯t have hired you.¡± An sneered: ¡°Guere Dahl is at the same level as your boss, Light Nostrade, and both are business rivals. The task that you had me do, if someone ordinary went there, wouldn¡¯t he be dead already? With so many bodyguards around Guere, even if you, the head of the bodyguards, went, you wouldn¡¯t have made it, right? Not to mention killing Guere. And you actually handed that mission to me, the person who came for an interview? Do you dare say that this wasn¡¯t taking advantage of me?¡± When An said this, Dalzollene¡¯s expression became ugly as he couldn¡¯t find words to refute An¡¯s ims. An continued: ¡°When you saw Guere¡¯s head, you seemed quite surprised. I think you¡¯re surprised that I can kill him so quickly. You just lost a major rival, Am I right?¡± Facing An¡¯s questioning, Dalzollene nodded with an ugly face: You¡¯re right, Guere¡¯s death indeed means that the Nostrade Family will have an easier time.¡± An snorted and looked at him coldly. ¡°Sorry, I just wanted to see how good the person Master Zeno rmended. This was my selfishness. If you¡¯re unhappy, please juste at me, and don¡¯t attack the Nostrade Family.¡± Dalzollene knew very well that if An could kill Guere, he could also kill Light Nostrade, his boss, as easily. However, he also knew that this matter doesn¡¯t have anything to do with his boss, and he was the one to be med for this. ¡°To be honest, I¡¯m really upset right now. But this time, let¡¯s forget it.¡± An saw that he had some spine and decided to let him go. Since taking Guere¡¯s head meant nothing to him, to begin with, he just felt a little ufortable being taken advantage of. ¡°You, are you really willing to let me go?¡± Dalzollene couldn¡¯t believe this because of the Killing Intent. ¡°Listen, I will forgive you this time. But if you dare use me next time, you will end up like Guere.¡± An said as if it was a fact. ¡°I see. There won¡¯t be another time.¡± Dalzollene said. An nodded, and the Killing Intent disappearedpletely. ¡°Then, I¡¯m leaving first, don¡¯t forget to contact me,¡± An said, then turned around and left. Watching An leave, Dalzollene sighed in relief. It was the first time in his life that he felt that kind of pressure. He realized that An was terrifying, but he also felt extremely lucky. Fortunately, An is now hired by the Nostrade Family and not an enemy. In the afternoon of the next day, An went to the airport to pick up Neon. Soon after, he saw a sweet and lovely girl dressed like a princess at the airport. An¡¯s eyes lit up as this Neon was a little cuter than he thought. Next to Neon, there were two female attendants and a man. This man was Shachmono Tocino, one of the bodyguards of the Nostrade Family. At the same time, he is also a professional hunter. When he saw Aning over, Tocino became vignt and stepped forward: ¡°Who are you?¡± ¡°I¡¯m An, and I¡¯m here to pick Miss Neon.¡± Tocino was surprised: ¡°Captain Dalzollene sends you to protect Miss Neon?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± An nodded. ¡°Well, it turns out you¡¯re a colleague. My name is Shachmono Tocino.¡± Tocino dropped his guard and introduced himself. An nodded. ¡°Miss Neon, hello, starting today, I will be your Bodyguard. I will protect your safety 24/7 until you leave.¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, Neon looked at An. Seeing his appearance, she retracted her eyes in disappointment since he had nothing to show off. She nodded her head and said: ¡°Sorry to bother you.¡± An naturally noticed Neon¡¯s disappointed look. He didn¡¯t care since he was still under disguise. If he showed her his real appearance, her eyes will brighten up and shine. However, he wasn¡¯t here to pick up the girl, so it doesn¡¯t matter what she thought about him. After that, An took Neon to Hotel Beitacle and stayed in the Hotel temporarily. An¡¯s room was next to Neon¡¯s, as he was responsible for her safety. Dalzollene arranged this. An didn¡¯t care much since he was here to protect her in the first ce. On the other hand, the news about Guere¡¯s death spread amongst the gangs and caused quite a sensation. Guere¡¯s reputation wasn¡¯t great in the mafia circle, and most people wouldn¡¯t pursue the matter. Furthermore, it¡¯s impossible to connect anything to him. Also, Guere and all of his bodyguards were killed, which wasn¡¯t something that many people could do. The prime suspect is the Nostrade Family since their rivalry is well known. Since such a great rival for the Nostrade Family was removed, many families were dissatisfied with them, especially the Dahl Family that suspects the Nostrade for Guere¡¯s death. As the security captain of the Nostrade Family, Dalzollene is responsible for dealing with those enemies, so he left Neon¡¯s Protectionpletely to An. After all, An was stronger than him, which relieved him greatly. That night, Neon was attacked in the Hotel by some people of the Dahl family who used their connections to find Neon andunched an Attack. Fortunately, An noticed the danger and killed the enemies. They just broke into Neon¡¯s room, but An killed all of them before they could try anything. Neon panicked after seeing An¡¯s strength for the first time. This ordinary-looking Bodyguard gave her a shock. She realized that under that ordinary look, great power was hidden. An didn¡¯t care much about Neon¡¯s attention, as he knew that this job was about protecting Neon without any personal feelings. Chapter 151: Yorknew City’s Auction Festival Part 1 Chapter 151: Yorknew City¡¯s Auction Festival Part 1 On the 1st of September, the auction festival started, which attracted countless tourists. The festival will stay for ten days, within which there are thousands of auctions all across the city. On average, there will be more than a thousand auctions a day. Therefore, Yorknew City will be quite lively. In addition to regr auctions, there will be auctions held by underground gangs and various organizations from across the world. ¡°Hey, take me out to y!¡± Early in the morning, Neon, the Daughter of Light Nostrade, came to An¡¯s room and started causing a ruckus. ¡°Miss, my job is to protect you, not be your tour guide.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t care. Dalzollene appointed you to protect me. So you should listen to me. Otherwise, you will lose your job.¡± Unexpectedly, the little girl tried to threaten him. Unfortunately for her, she was threatening the wrong person as An wasn¡¯t afraid of losing his job. Seeing An¡¯s indifference, Neon was very angry. ¡°Hmph, you don¡¯t want to take me? Then I will go out alone. If bad guys kidnap me, then let¡¯s see how my father fires you.¡± [Ding! Make A Choice] [1: Take Neon out, do your best as a bodyguard, and protect her. Reward: Silver Treasure Chest.] [2: Wait there to be fired. Reward: Bronze Treasure chest.] Both rewards were treasure chests, but anyone who yed games before knows that Silver was a level higher than bronze. For the sake of the Treasure Chest, An reluctantly said to Neon: ¡°Well, I will take you out to y, but I¡¯m only responsible for protecting you, so I won¡¯t be your guide.¡± Hearing this, Neon nodded proudly. An didn¡¯t expect this young Miss to be so casual about what happenedst night and actually wake up early as nothing happened. An sighed as he didn¡¯t know whether this girl was brave or justcked a brain. There were two attendants along with Neon apanying her. These two were only a few years older than Neon. They were under 20 and quite outstanding. One was called Alisha, and the other one is Alimei. They were simr in appearance, which meant they were twins. In An¡¯s eyes, those two were like Neon¡¯s big sisters. The twins were taking care of their wayward sister. It was that simple. ¡°Where are we going?¡± At the entrance of the Hotel, Neon crouched and asked. ¡°I already told you that I¡¯m only here to protect you, not to be your tour guide. Don¡¯t ask me where you want to go. You should decide on that yourself.¡± An said in a cold voice without any emotion. Neon didn¡¯t say anything when she saw An¡¯s cold face. The group of four started wandering around, shopping wherever they went with no apparent purpose. But this is the fun ofing to y. If they had a purpose, it wouldn¡¯t have been fun. Neon apparently found this kind of fun and took An all around. The streets of Yorknew city were full of people who are here to visit the auction. The Auction festival attracted a lot of tourists, and amongst the most popr locations are the major auctions. Unconsciously, An and his group entered a local auction. This auction was full of tourists and vendors with variousmodities. Everything here can¡¯t be obtained normally. The only way to get anything is through an auction. Each product has a 24 hours auction time, during which everyone can ce a bid. Of course, each bird should be higher than the previous and so on. When the 24 hours are over, the highest bidder will take the Item. Unlike ordinary girls, Neon was interested in different thingspared to what is provided here. She has a quirk in which would make anyone¡¯s scalp go numb. She loves to collect all kinds of human parts, from tissues to eyeballs to bones and mummies. She is what they call a human collector. Obviously, this ordinary auction market cannot satisfy Neon¡¯s quirks. However, she is a girl, and like every girl, she has a thing for shopping. Although the auction doesn¡¯t have what she wants, there are quite a few weird items. An, who is idle and bored, but suddenly an item grabbed his attention. ¡°Alisha, Alimei, I will leave for a bit.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Although both were puzzled, they still nodded. An went to a shop and saw hundreds of disyed items, one of those items was a painting that caught An¡¯s attention. On the surface, it was a portrait of a woman, but An noticed the Aura around it when he used Gyo. There were some possibilities for an item to have an Aura around them. The first possibility is the painter injected his Nen into the painting or unintentionally did so. There is another possibility that this was a product of Nen in itself. An took a look and noticed no one had made a bid on this Item. In fact, in addition to the Aura around the painting, An could feel that it might contain some secrets. An decisively bid for the painting. The lowerest price was 5,000 Jenny, but he directly bid 50,000 Jenny. If no one notices this painting, then it will be his. After taking a look at the address of the shop, An left. ¡°Where have you been?¡± Seeing Aning back, Alisha asked. ¡°I took an interest in an item.¡± An didn¡¯t exin too much. After looking around, he didn¡¯t see Neon. ¡°Where is your sister?¡± ¡°Miss and Alimie went to the store in front to buy some clothes. I was afraid that you woulde back and won¡¯t find us, so I stayed here waiting for you.¡± Alisha said. An nodded. He didn¡¯t want to get involved with them buying clothes, so he stayed outside. Seeing that Alisha was still outside waiting, An, who was bored, started a conversation: ¡°Miss Alisha, are you married?¡± ¡°Why, why did you ask so suddenly? Of course, I¡¯m not.¡± Alisha was slightly flustered from the sudden question. Obviously, it was the first time someone asked such a strange question. An didn¡¯t think she was that shy. After replying with an ¡®Oh,¡¯ he asked again: ¡°Do you have a target?¡± ¡°No.¡± Alisha shook her head lightly. An nodded as he knew that she was taking of Neon and didn¡¯t have the time considering that wayward Miss. ¡°What about you?¡± Seeing that An didn¡¯t speak after a while, Alisha asked. ¡°I¡¯m a golden bachelor (This means he is old and still single or a rich man who wants to be married).¡± An teased. ¡°Golden Bachelor?¡± Alisha said amusedly. Because of his ordinary-looking face, Alisha though he is nearly forty and aplete middle-aged uncle. He had already passed his golden age, so how could he be considered a golden Bachelor. Chapter 151: Yorknew City’s Auction Festival Part 2 Chapter 151: Yorknew City¡¯s Auction Festival Part 2 An was a little embarrassed since he forgot that he was under disguise. But if he reveals his real appearance, Alisha wouldn¡¯tugh. ¡°Hey, you two are talking andughing there. What did you get so familiar with already?¡± Neon, who came out of the store, saw her personal attendant and Anughing and immediately assumed her olddy role. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, miss,¡± Alisha said apologetically. An shrugged and said: ¡°We are discussing the Issue of like, you little kid won¡¯t understand.¡± ¡°Who¡¯s a kid? Thisdy is an adult.¡± Neon retorted violently. ¡°Are you an adult?¡± An didn¡¯t believe her. ¡°Humph, of course.¡± Neon said triumphantly. An looked at Neon up and down and couldn¡¯t help saying: ¡°Okay, forgive my eyesight since I couldn¡¯t really tell you¡¯re an adult.¡± ¡°What do you mean?¡± Neon wasn¡¯t fooled. ¡°Nothing.¡± An spread his hands. ¡°Humph, you obviously think that I look like a child. You think that my body is not well developed, don¡¯t you?¡± ¡°No, absolutely not.¡± An didn¡¯t want to quarrel with this waywarddy, so he nced at Alisha next to him. Alisha nodded and changed the subject: ¡°Sister, let¡¯s go for a stroll. When I was looking around, I seem to see a circus.¡± Hearing this, Neon instantly looked excited: ¡°A circus? What are we waiting for then? I didn¡¯t see a circus before.¡± An, on the side, couldn¡¯t help sigh. As soon as she heard about something exciting, she would turn into a child. And she still says she is an adult. An really couldn¡¯t believe it. ¡°What were you talking about with sister just now?¡± Alicia asked curiously. ¡°Just chatting casually.¡± An nced at Alimie and couldn¡¯t help notice the difference between the twin¡¯s character. Alisha seemed easily frightened and quiet, while Alimie seemed lively and open-minded. The lights on the street illuminated as night fell. An, who was with Neon the whole day, yawned boredly. Looking at Neon, who was full of energy, An admired her stamina. After having dinner at a high-ss restaurant, they went to hang out in the night market. ¡°Uncle An, you must be tired after spending a day with thedy today, right? Do you want to go back first?¡± Alisha asked. Although he felt strange being called uncle, An could only ept it since it was his current appearance. But Alisha is sure considerate and gentle. He was just a bodyguard, and she cares so much about him. An smiled and said: ¡°It¡¯s okay. This is my job, after all.¡± At this moment, a girl with short ck hair and sses passed by An. An felt something and instinctively looked at her. Feeling someone looking at her, the girl looked back, and their eyes met. ¡°So it turns out to be her.¡± An recognized this girl. She was Shizuku Murasaki, the Number eight of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. Seeing An staring at her, Shizuku walked toward An and said: ¡°Uncle, are you looking at me?¡± ¡°No?¡± An denied. ¡°Well, you have been staring at me since earlier.¡± Seeing Shizuku¡¯s determined eyes, An shrugged: ¡°Well, I admit, I was looking just now.¡± An could feel that if his answer made her feel dissatisfied, she would fight right there. Although An wasn¡¯t afraid, he doesn¡¯t want the trouble either. He thought for a while before saying: ¡°Because you look just someone I know.¡± ¡°Really?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°Then what¡¯s her name?¡± ¡°She is called¡­ Shizuku.¡± ¡°Shizuku?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°What a coincidence. I¡¯m also called Shizuku. Am I the person that you know? But I don¡¯t know you, uncle.¡± Faced with Shizuku¡¯s doubt, An smiled: ¡°Maybe it¡¯s just the same name.¡± ¡°Okay then, excuse me.¡± After saying this, Shizuku bowed and apologized before she turned and left.¡± ¡°Do you know that person?¡± Alicia came over and asked. ¡°I don¡¯t know, let¡¯s go.¡± An didn¡¯t want to say anything else. Since Shizuku was here, it can only mean that the others were here in Yorknew city, including Chrollo. Although he could guess that they are here to rob the auction, An didn¡¯t intend to stop them. His job is to protect Neon, and anything else has nothing to do with him. No matter how much trouble The Ryodan causes, he didn¡¯t want to be a busy body. Of course, if it is a conflict of interest, he will step in if necessary. At this moment, An received a message on his phone. It was from Dalzollene asking them to return. ¡°Miss, we should go back.¡± An said to Neon. ¡°It¡¯s only seven right now. I will go back at ten.¡± Neon was being willful. ¡°In that cause, sorry in advance.¡± An didn¡¯t talk nonsense with her and directly chopped her lightly on the back of her neck. ¡°Let¡¯s go back.¡± Taking a look at the stunned twins, An directly carried Neon back toward the hotel. In the hotel, An gave Neon to the twin to take care of her and opened the system to get his reward. [Ding! You opened a Silver Treasure Chest. Item¡¯s obtained: Ten Years of Life.] Add ten years of life to the person who eats it. An¡¯s eyes lit up as he couldn¡¯t think that he could obtain such a rare thing. A human¡¯s life span was only a few decades. Even in this world, a human¡¯s life span wouldn¡¯t exceed two hundred, and only a few reached over a hundred years old like Maha Zoldyck and Netero. An increase of ten years wasn¡¯t small. The next morning, An received a message from Dalzollene asking him for a meeting. Half an hourter, An came to a mansion. As soon as he entered, he saw a few familiar guys. They were the bodyguards hired by the Nostrade family. They were Baise, Basho, Ivienkov, Linssen, Melody, Squ¡­ Although it was the first time An saw them, he still recognized them at first sight. An¡¯s eyes finally fell on a young man, who he didn¡¯t see for quite some time, Kurapika. Chapter 152: Teams Chapter 152: Teams Kurapika seemed to feel An¡¯s gaze and raised his head to look at An. His eyes didn¡¯t change as he nced coldly then withdrew his gaze. The others did the same as they swept An with their gaze without paying much attention after that. After all, An¡¯s current look was too ordinary and average even for a middle-aged uncle. It really made them disregard him as nothing special. An didn¡¯t care as he found a ce to sit down in the lobby. Soon after, Dalzollene came out. ¡°They¡¯re just like you, the bodyguards recently hired by the Nostrade Family.¡± An nodded and said: ¡°You didn¡¯t call me over to introduce us, right? Because if you did, the Miss would really me me for what I did.¡± Dalzollene smiled awkwardly and said: ¡°There is really something important.¡± Everyone, including Kurapika, turned toward Dalzollene, who started speaking: ¡°At nine this evening, there will be an underground auction, several which our boss likes very much like the mummy of Princess Corco and the scarlet eyes of the kurta n. Therefore, I need you to go to the auction to bid on them since each will be in a different location.¡± ¡°Captain, since they are organized by underground forces, why separate the location of the auction?¡± Basho asked. Some of the others were thinking about that curiously as well. Only An was smiling as he knew the reason in advance. ¡°The gangs don¡¯t want to spend so much effort either, but they are fearful of any attempted theft. Separating each piece will assure that a huge loss is avoided even if someone attacked one of the locations.¡± ¡°Someone would dare go against all those gangs? It would be like offending every underground gang there is. Would such a person be afraid of death?¡± One of the bodyguards asked in disbelief. ¡°Hehehe, wouldn¡¯t dare? There are too many lunatics out there. Even if you didn¡¯t see one, it doesn¡¯t mean it doesn¡¯t exist.¡± Hearing An¡¯s sneer, Squ, who asked, seemed ufortable. Squ stood up awkwardly before walking straight toward An and said: ¡°What do you mean?¡± An¡¯s expression was indifferent as he didn¡¯t pay any attention to him. Squ suppressed his anger and said: ¡°What you said just now was to refute me, nothing else.¡± ¡°Indeed, in my eyes, you¡¯re just a frog at the bottom of a well.¡± An nced at him and sneered. ¡°Bastard.¡± Squ furiously punched An. An, who was sitting down on a sofa didn¡¯t avoid it. Boom! Even though Squ was the one to punch An, he was the one to cry in rm as he clutched his arm. ¡°What?!¡± Squ couldn¡¯t believe that his attack had no effect on An, but instead, he hurt himself. The other looked at An in shock. An received a punch with his face, but the other party was the one getting hurt as if he punched steel. ¡°Strong.¡± Kurapika¡¯s eyes shed with surprise. ¡°Do you still want to continue?¡± An looked at Squ with a yful expression as if he was looking at a clown. Squ clenched his arm, looking embarrassed but didn¡¯t want to back down. ¡°It¡¯s alright, Squ. Sit down.¡± At this moment, Dalzollene intervened. An ignored Squ and looked at Dalzollene, and said: ¡°Go on.¡± Dalzollene nodded and said: ¡°Because the auction is organized by underground gangs, the items are banned from normal auctions. Therefore, all the guests are from mafia families as well as some rich and powerful people closely rted to them. This time, the Nostrade family got nine ces, which means that three of each can go get the items our boss wants.¡± After a pause, Dalzollene started dividing the group: ¡°Basho, Squ, and Linssen, you are responsible for the scarlet eye. Melody, and Kurapika, you¡¯re going for the Solid-Gold Execution Sword. An, you go for the mummy.¡± Dalzollene looked at An as if asking if he was okay with it. An looked at him and said: ¡°My duty is to protect Miss Neon, which is out of scope for me to participate in the auction.¡± ¡°Okay, course I know, that¡¯s why you¡¯re bringing Miss Neon with you to the auction. In that way, you will protect Miss Neon.¡± Dalzollene said seriously. ¡°You just said that the auction is dangerous, so why make Miss Neon taking that risk? Just make someone else do it.¡± An said. Dalzollene put a hand on his forehead and sighed: ¡°We also don¡¯t want Miss to participate in that auction, but the boss promised her that he would let her participate. If we don¡¯t let her participate, the boss will have a huge headache over this. To make it easier to understand, Boss¡¯ current position is due to Miss Neon¡¯s Ability to predict the future, and if Miss Neon is angry because of this, the boss will be in trouble.¡± An shrugged and stopped asking: ¡°Well, I will take Miss Neon to attend the auction then.¡± ¡°Please make sure you protect her,¡± Dalzollene said. ¡°Of course,¡± An promised. Dalzollene nodded and looked at the other two and said: ¡°Baise, Ivienkov, you are to assist and follow An¡¯smands. When the auction starts, you will mix with the crowd and pay attention to the situation and report to An at any time.¡± ¡°If he is a handsome guy, I won¡¯t mind listening to him, but it¡¯s not possible,¡± Baise said. Baise was a beautiful woman and charming, and it¡¯s hard to imagine she is a bodyguard. ¡°Baise, this isn¡¯t a suggestion. Since you are a member of the Nostrade Family, then you will obey orders; An is stronger than any of you so, you will listen to his orders. Are we clear?¡± ¡°Damn it, okay.¡± Baise red at An ufortably. Although she wasn¡¯t convinced, the incident with Squ made her realize that An wasn¡¯t a simple person. An ignored the angry woman. As for the other person, Ivienkov, he seemed professional and obeyed orders without asking too much. Such a person is the most suitable for the bodyguard job. ¡°Okay, now that the allocation isplete, do you have any questions?¡± Dalzollene asked. ¡°I have,¡± Kurapika said. ¡°What is it?¡± Dalzollene asked. ¡°I want to change the group to be on the Scarlet eye auction,¡± Kurapika said coldly. Chapter 153: Command Chapter 153: Command Facing Kurapika¡¯s proposed change of group, Dalzollene asked: ¡°I need a reason.¡± ¡°There is no reason. Just let me change groups.¡± Kurapika said in his cold attitude but extremely determined tone. For a while, no one spoke, waiting for the decision, and it was apparent that Dalzollene was displeased with Kurapika¡¯s attitude. The others looked at Kurapika in confusion as they had no idea why he was determined to change groups. Only one person knew why and that person is An. He knew that Kurapika was from the Kurta n, and the scarlet eye is something from his n. A few years ago, the Kurta n was ughtered overnight, and all of their eyes were gouged out. Kurapika had two goals, the first is to find the scarlet eyes, and the other is to kill the killer of his family, the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. Therefore, whether Dalzollene agreed or not, Kurapika will go. ¡°Captain, I think you should agree. I think Kurapika has his reasons.¡± An suddenly said as he wanted to help Kurapika. Hearing this, Dalzollene was amazed as he didn¡¯t think that An would help Kurapika, so he finally nodded: ¡°Well, Kurapika and Melody would go for the scarlet eye, and Basho and the others go for the other item. Is there any problem?¡± Basho said that there isn¡¯t along with the other two. Kurapika said: ¡°Thank you.¡± ¡°You must be careful when you go to the auction tonight. Yesterday, a group of people ransacked an underground auction. The affected parties directly sent over a hundred people in pursuit, but all of them were killed. Moreover, all of the items that were stolen caused heavy losses, so tonight, that group will continue with their actions. We can¡¯t rule out the possibility that one of the auctions tonight will be a target. That¡¯s why the organizers of the auctions strengthened their defenses, but we can¡¯t rule out the possibility of another attack. All of you must be careful¡­.¡± Facing Dalzollene¡¯s reminder, all of them nodded. An narrowed his eyes. He thought about the group of lunatics Dalzollene mentioned, which should be the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. If they were really to attack the auction tonight, then without a doubt, An will encounter them. An didn¡¯t want to talk with them, but if they offend him, he will take action. ¡°Captain, um, you didn¡¯t mention me. What do I do?¡± Squ suddenly asked. ¡°Sorry, I forgot about you,¡± Dalzollene said honestly. Everyoneughed at Dalzollene¡¯s straightforward answer. On the other hand, Squ seemed embarrassed as he didn¡¯t expect himself to be forgotten like that. ¡°Well, you can help An and listen to his orders.¡± Dalzollene thought for a bit. ¡°Okay, then.¡± Squ looked at An and agreed. Dalzollene said: ¡°I still have something to do. I will go ahead and leave you to your jobs.¡± After Dalzollene left, Basho and his team, along with Kurapika and Melody, left. All those lefts were Ivienkov, Squ, An, and Baise. At this moment, Baise stood up and went toward An. She leaned down and said: ¡°There is still a while before the auction starts. Would you like to rx, acting captain?¡± With this kind of suggestive tone, Squ and Ivienkov could help to gulp. After all, Baise was indeed charming, and she was using that charm against An. Most people wouldn¡¯t have the ability to refuse her request. However, An was indifferent. ¡°You¡¯re not qualified,¡± An replied lightly. ¡°What did you say?¡± An¡¯s words made Baise flushed in anger. ¡°Your appearance is not enough to move my heart,¡± An said. ¡°Hehehe, Is that so?¡± Baise suppressed her anger and sneered. Without waiting for An to answer, she suddenly kissed An. ¡°Hehe, now you are captured by me. Anyone I kiss will be my servant and obey all of mymands.¡± ¡°Yes, then you can try to order me now.¡± An smiled contemptuously. ¡°I want you to kneel down.¡± Baise immediately said. Baise¡¯s Nen ability is instant Lover, an ability that maniptes anyone who she kisses for 180 minutes, making the target almost a ve to her. However, when she gave An an order to kneel, An was still sitting on the sofa and looking at her indifferently. Baise was surprised and asked: ¡°How is that possible? Why aren¡¯t you affected?¡± ¡°No, you have indeed used your ability on me, but your ability isn¡¯t enough to affect me,¡± An said lightly. ¡°What?¡± ¡°In other words, my willpower is enough to keep me unaffected by your control.¡± Hearing this, Baise¡¯s looked at him in awe. This is the first time she encountered something like this. The first time a man wasn¡¯t affected by her Instant Lover ability. ¡°Good, You¡¯re good,¡± Baise said as she looked at An. A man who has such strong willpower was definitively attractive to her. However, An didn¡¯t react to her and stood up. ¡°Get ready, and we¡¯re going back to the hotel before taking Miss Neon to the auction in the evening.¡± After this, An looked coldly at Squ and said: ¡°Squ, you¡¯re responsible for driving us and picking us up. You¡¯re a full-time driver.¡± ¡°That¡¯s it?¡± Squ asked as he felt that his job was too simple. ¡°Why, you don¡¯t like it?¡± An sneered, patted his shoulder, and said: ¡°If you don¡¯t want it, you can leave at any time, but once you do, you¡¯re fired.¡± Squ thought for a bit, then nodded. ¡°Okay, I will be the driver.¡± Getting a sry of a bodyguard and working as a driver made Squ feel aggrieved, but he had no choice in this matter. Chapter 154: Start Chapter 154: Start The group returned to the hotel, and An told Neon about the auction tonight, which made her like a child from excitement. As night fell, each auction location was filled with gangs from all over the world. They were wearing ck suits, leather shoes, and ck sunsses. All of them came from a major family or organization without exception. The gangs were ustomed to such a high-profile gathering since gangs were legal in the Hunter X Hunter World. The localws have no right to arrest them. And they have the qualification to hold guns and use them as well. Of course, because they were legal groups, the gangs had to pay very high taxes to the government. ording to statistics, every year, Mafia worldwide pays more than 10 trillion Jenny as taxes. The taxes were equivalent to an annual GDP (Gross Domestic Product) of an entire country, and for this reason, the gangs were considered legal. It is a kind of cooperation between the government and the gangs. At this moment, the three auction sites were filled to the brim. The Security was tight since anyone unrted to this event will be chased away, and no one can get through till the auction ends. Only those with the invitation cards can pass. Moreover, after passing the checkpoint, anyone who had a weapon can¡¯t pass until he passes his weapons to the Security. If anyone dared to attack the auction, almost all gangs had an agreement to retaliate together. Ny-five percent of these gangs are under the Ten Dons. The Ten Dons are the highest leaders of the Mafia in the world, and they control thousands of men and mafia families. And they are also the organizers of the underground auction. Attacking the auction is tantamount to offending the Ten Dons. It can be said as long as someone doesn¡¯t have brain damage or has absolute confidence in his strength, he wouldn¡¯t dare to attack the auctions. But do such people exist in the world? The answer is certainly. And it isn¡¯t just one-two, but many. To such people, be it the Mafia or the Tendons, they are nothing but ants. ¡°The scenery tonight is beautiful.¡± At the top of a building, a young man with a cross ne and blue gem earrings looked at the Mafia down inside the auction building with a smile. This person is Chrollo, the leader of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. Chrollo took out his cell phone and notified the others: ¡°The Mafia Families are all gathered here; when the auction starts, you can take everything and everyone. No need to hold back, have fun.¡± The Spiders, under Chrollo¡¯smand, started acting. On the other side, An has left the hotel with Neon and the others to participate in the auction. Squ was in charge of driving while An sat beside him. Neon sat in the back with Baise and Ivienkov. Tonight¡¯s mission was to help An protect Neon¡¯s safety. Although they are not professional bodyguards, they are capable people, and they are much better than ordinary bodyguards in terms of skills. With the invitation card of the Nostrade Family, the group passed sessfully and entered the auction. In addition to the numerous mafia heads who are here to participate in the auction, many securitypanies are deployed in the building. The Security were members of the Mafia here to protect the prominent figures gathering for the auction and make sure no problem urs here.After entering the auction building, An and the others went to the banquet hall on the 33rd floor, amodating up to 500 people. About nine in the evening, all guests entered the auction room. An and Neon sat in thest few seats near the door. The reason was simple: if someone attacks the auction, they could escape as soon as possible. Of course, An wasn¡¯t worried about himself but about Neon, so he needed to be cautious. Soon after, the Host appeared on the stage, and after a long speech, the auction officially started. Several staff members pushed the auctioned items backstage and entered the stage to show the items to the guests. The Host started introducing those items after clearing his throat. Suddenly, two figures walked out of the audience, one big and one small, as they made their way to the stage. Without waiting for the Host to speak, and the staff to react, the short man in a suit suddenlyunched an attack quickly. A cold light shed, and the Host and the staff on the stage fell one after the other with blood pouring around their necks. Chapter 155: Playing Chapter 155: ying This happens too quickly that no one expected it, except An. When the two walked in, An knew both of them, one was Feitan Portor, and the other was Franklin Bordeau from the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. An wasn¡¯t surprised that they are here. On the stage, after the host and the staff were killed, Feitan said: ¡°Do it!¡± ¡°Enemies are attacking. Protect the leaders.¡± At the same time, many security personnel hiding in the audience reacted and blocking in front of the leaders and prepared to shoot at the two. Although they were only two of them, they killed so many staff and the host too quickly, which means they aren¡¯t ordinary people. However, it was toote. Franklin sneered and said: ¡°Give it all you¡¯ve got before you die, guys.¡± When his voice fell, he activated his Nen ability: Double Machine Gun! Bang! Bang! Bang! Arge number of bullets shot out from Franklin¡¯s hands that contained amazing power, shooting indiscriminately at the audience below the stage. The Nen Bullets were stronger than normal ones and could prate almost anything. Almost everyone was turned into a living target below the stage. Blood flowed like rivers all over the floor. Nearly 500 persons died in under ten seconds, and almost no one survived. The scene was full of corpses with at least three holes each. ¡°Huh, it¡¯s really boring. Those guys are simply too vulnerable, and the so-called mafia families are nothing.¡± Franklin stopped his attack and looked at the scene he caused with disdain. He didn¡¯t feel anything even after killing all those people. ¡°Oh? Franklin, it seems there are still a few fishes who slipped through the.¡± Feitan suddenly noticed a person standing in thest row of the auditorium. At this time, this person was looking at Franklin and Feitan indifferently. An was standing in front of Neon, who hid behind him and was confused as she didn¡¯t know what¡¯s going on. Standing next to Neon were Baise and Ivienkov with furrowed brows. When the two saw the corpses on the ground, they couldn¡¯t help take a deep breath. They barely saw what happened right now, but when they recovered, all the people there were killed except the few of them. It was the first time they encountered such a horrible thing, and they were at a loss for a while. ¡°Unexpectedly, there are four still alive under my Double Machine Gun. It seems that I was careless.¡± ¡°Franklin, don¡¯t worry about it. Just now, when youunched your bullets, that person seemed to make a shield to block your attack, so he didn¡¯t die.¡± Feitan said. ¡°So that¡¯s how it is.¡± Franklin nodded and then looked at An and the others: ¡°So, They¡¯re like us, capable of using Nen?¡± ¡°Probably,¡± Feitan answered. ¡°Funny being able to find someone like that here.¡± Franklin grinned and sneered. ¡°Just now, you said you didn¡¯t have fun, and you can have your fun with them,¡± Feitan said. ¡°Of course, I will kill them all.¡± When their voice fell, Franklin once again using his Double Machine Gun and rained bullets at An and the others. ¡°No, run away.¡± Baise¡¯s expression changed along with Ivienkov. ¡°Calm down. I will deal with it.¡± Facing Franklin¡¯s attack, An was calm, as if he didn¡¯t take them seriously. He raised his right hand, and in an instant, a thick hard ice wall condensed in front of him. Bang! Bang! Bang! As the Nen bullets hit the wall, they made a muffled noise before dying down. After ten seconds of shooting, Franklin stopped to see a fist-sized dimple on the Ice wall. Although the bullets had a strong prative power, An¡¯s ice wall was harder than they thought. ¡°You can block my attack?¡± Franklin couldn¡¯t believe this. ¡°It doesn¡¯t look like he made an effort doing it. That guy is strong.¡± Feitan saw this and stared coldly at An. ¡°Too strong. He actually blocked everything.¡± Ivienkov saw An¡¯s ice wall and was surprised by An¡¯s strength. As a bodyguard, he realized that An¡¯s strength exceeded his imagination. ¡°An, is this your Nen ability?¡± Baise couldn¡¯t help asking An with eyes full of awe. An nodded without exining much, then said: ¡°You two can stay with the youngdy, and I will deal with the rest.¡± An¡¯s tone was calm but didn¡¯t leave any room for discussion. Baise and Ivienkov nodded obediently and guarded Neon behind them. If An didn¡¯t take action just now, they would¡¯ve joined the corpses on the floor already. So, An wasn¡¯t just their savior but their current protector as well. On the auction stage, Both Franklin and Feitan turned their attention toward An. They noticed that An was the most powerful of these people. An looked at them and said: ¡°I know you guys are eyeing this auction.¡± Franklin and Feitan looked at each other after hearing An¡¯s words. ¡°Who are you?¡± Franklin asked. ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter. What¡¯s important right now is giving me the Mummy of the princess. You can take the rest of the items.¡± An¡¯s words made Franklin and Feitan stunned. His tone made them a little ufortable. Feitan said with a cold expression: ¡°There is indeed a mummy from the items we took.¡± An said: ¡°Hand over the mummy, and for the sake of Chrollo¡¯s face, I can leave you two go even though you attacked me just now.¡± Franklin looked at Feitan and said: ¡°He just called the chief¡¯s name, right?¡± ¡°Well, it looks like he knows chief.¡± Feitan nodded. ¡°So, he knows we are from the Ryodan?¡± Franklin asked. ¡°It seems so,¡± Feitan said coldly. Chapter 156: Murder Chapter 156: Murder [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Who are you?¡± ¡°Why do you know who we are?¡± Feitan stared sharply at An, trying to see something in his expression. However, he remained expressionless and without any change. Franklin, on the side, said to Feitan: ¡°No matter who he is, since he is here today, then he must die. This is also a task assigned to us by Chief. No one gets out alive from here.¡± Feitan nodded and stopped asking. He could tell from An¡¯s expression that even if he asked, the other party wouldn¡¯t answer. ¡°It¡¯s a pity if you have some friends with our chief, we may have let you go, but you don¡¯t have that opportunity anymore,¡± Feitan said with a sneer. At the back of the auditorium, An looked at Feitan and Franklin indifferently. At the same time, the system¡¯s voice rang in his head. [Ding! You are being attacked by two members of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan. Please make a choice] [1: Take action, kill Feitan and Franklin. Reward: Swordsmanship Level 7.] [2: Runaway with Neon. Reward: Increase Nen by 3,000 points.] Without a second to think, An chose the first option. It didn¡¯t matter how powerful the Level 7 swordsmanship is; even if the system didn¡¯t give him any options, he would decide to kill both of them. Because they really angered him right now. A strong killing Intent appeared in An¡¯s eyes as he spoke to Feitan and Franklin up the stage in a cold tone: ¡°You two are going to die here today, and even if Chrollo came, he wouldn¡¯t be able to save you.¡± Hearing this, Feitan sneered in disdain: ¡°Huh, arrogant words, do you have the ability?¡± Franklin¡¯s voice echoed as well: ¡°I hope you have the strength to back up your words.¡± ¡°Bragging? Humph, if I have the strength to back my words, or not, you will know shortly.¡± An¡¯s face was indifferent as his killing Intent washed over the ce. At this moment, Neon, Baise, and Ivienkov felt the killing intent and trembled. Fortunately, it wasn¡¯t directed at them, or else they would¡¯ve fainted. Franklin and Feitan felt the killing intent and couldn¡¯t help the surprise: ¡°What a strong Killing Intent, this guy¡­.¡± At this time, Franklin said: ¡°Feitan, I will deal with this guy.¡± Feitan nodded and said: ¡°Okay if he kills you, I will get revenge for you.¡± Although both of them knew from the Killing Intent that An wasn¡¯t ordinary, both of them were too arrogant to gang upon him. ¡°What? I beat him down.¡± Franklin directly activated his Double Machine Gun and overcharged it with Nen shooting huge strong bullets at An like Gatling. The power behind the Nen bullets was at least twice as strong as the previous ones. Facing the Nen bullets, An waved his hand and condensed an ice wall like before, but since the bullets were stronger, the wall seemed about to break after a short while. An directly changed tactics and condensed his own Ice bullets, and shot them two the Nen bullets. After the collision, the Nen bullets werepletely blocked, which made Franklin shout and rush decisively. At the same time, An stopped his Ice Bullets and greeted him. Boom! The collision between the two made the entire hall tremble. In addition to powerful long-range attacks, Franklin meleebat was top-notch as well. Although he is an emitter, his power doesn¡¯t lose to an enhancer. In the Ryodan, wrist strength is ranked in the top three. A single punch can pack up tons of power and can easily break boulders and bend metal. However, when he fought An, both he and Feitan were surprised that An didn¡¯t lose in terms of strength. At this moment, An was covering his arms with Armament Haki making them ck obsidian in color. With both Haki and Nen covering his Fists, An¡¯s strength doubled as hended a punch and sent Franklin crushing all the way through the hall. Seeing this, Feitan, who was standing on the auction stage, jumped up, and his expression turned even more serious. An¡¯s power exceeded his expectations. Because even Uvogin, who is an enhancer, can¡¯t send Franklin flying with a punch as An did. Feitan arrived in the deep pit and asked: ¡°You want to switch out?¡± ¡°The game just started. I¡¯m just warming up.¡± Franklin jumped out angrily. He can¡¯t remember thest person who could punch him that hard. In his eyes, An was a powerful opponent he hasn¡¯t encountered in a long time. At this time, his eyes were burning for a good fight and killing Intent. Facing Franklin¡¯s fighting spirit, An¡¯s face remained cold. Apart from his killing intent, he wasn¡¯t that excited about the fight because, to him, Franklin was just a prey, not an opponent. Moreover, with the brief fight with Franklin, An already gauged his strength and didn¡¯t feel threatened even a bit. Facing Franklin, An said coldly: ¡°I will ept your head now, Franklin.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 157: Face of The Reaper Chapter 157: Face of The Reaper [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°One minute, within one minute, I will kill you, Franklin. So, use your full power, or you won¡¯t get a chanceter.¡± ¡°Humph, keep bragging.¡± An¡¯s tone had absolute confidence in his words which made Franklin quite angry. He was furious as he roared like a beast. The moment he was angered, his Nen exploded out of his body. Franklin released all of his Nen so he can kill An, who was arrogant and belittled him. An didn¡¯t move at the time, just looked at Franklin, amused. No matter how strong you are, you will die soon. That was the kind of words An¡¯s gaze said at Franklin. Baise, who was hiding in thest row of the auditorium, was greatly surprised by Franklin¡¯s power. Only now did they understand how terrifying the person who attacked the Auction was. Although they were capable, they understood that they weren¡¯t at the same level. At most, they were C rank while Franklin was an A rank elite. If An wasn¡¯t here, then all of them would¡¯ve died with bullet holes all over their bodies. An, who was facing Franklin, was also an A rank elite in their eyes. Franklin continued to exude Nen from his body amazingly. An looked at him and said: ¡°That¡¯s the way, give your full power, or you will have regretster when you die, Franklin.¡± Seeing the Nen around Franklin¡¯s body, An was slightly interested. At An¡¯s current level, he no longer felt any thrill from a fight with small fries. Only when someone uses his full strength can he feel satisfied after killing them. It wasn¡¯t that An was a psychopath or anything. It¡¯s just when someone like the members Ryodan, who kill without purpose, or goal are facing him. He would enjoy toying with them, making them struggle with everything they had, only to realize that in the end, everything they had done was in vain. Although An killed many, he either killed as a job, like Guere or because those people had done something to him. He never killed someone just for the joy of it, like the Ryodan is doing. At the moment, after getting used to all the Nen he released, Frankling pointed at An with both fingers and said: ¡°Double Machine Gun, strongest firepower.¡± The difference between this and the previous attacks is the bullet speed and power. An responded by waving his hand and forming five Ice Walls blocking in front of him. The bullets hit the Ice walls. If anyone heard the sound produced, they would think that it was a battlefield with hundreds of soldiers firing at each other. After some time, the first Ice wall shattered, then the second wall. ¡°Break for me.¡± Franklin¡¯s veins bulged on his forehead as he condensed all of his Nen on his finger whileunching even more bullets. As an emitter, the bullets he releases remain at one hundred percent power even after moving a great distance away from him. After a while, the third wall couldn¡¯t withstand the attacks and shattered. After breaking the third wall, Franklin didn¡¯t stop. He vowed to break all five-wall made by An and turn him into a sieve. With this obsession, Franklin continued to use his full power and finally broke the fourth wall, then the fifth. Franklin¡¯s obsession with breaking the Ice Walls seemed to increase his Nen¡¯s power, and he finally seeded. Franklin, who achieves his goal of breaking the Ice Wall, consumed at least seventy or eighty percent of his Nen, leaving him with twenty or thirty percent. At this moment, he was panting hard, looking ahead while his arms were still in the Double Machine Gun mode, but without firing any bullets because he was surprised to find that An unexpectedly disappeared. ¡°Where is he?¡± ¡°Has he been killed by the previous firepower?¡± Franklin looked around with confusion. ¡°Be careful, Franklin above you,¡± Feitan shouted a warning. ¡°What? Above?!¡± An Iceball like a meteorite was falling from above, intending to smash Franklin to death. When he saw this, Franklin raised his hands and fired as much as he can to save himself. Surprisingly, the Ice Ball couldn¡¯t withstand the bullets and shattered. Franklin heaved a sigh of relief as he was fortunate to respond on time. Otherwise, he would¡¯ve died under that Iceball. However, at this moment, he felt like death was approaching him quickly. Franklin seemed to hear birds sing in his ear, but unfortunately for him, they weren¡¯t birds but death itself. Suddenly, a face appeared in front of him, and he could¡¯ve sword it was the Face of a Grim Reaper. ¡°Ugh¡­¡± Something sharp pierced his chest, and he felt a rusty taste in his throat before he spat a mouthful of blood. He looked at An¡¯s face in front of him before his gaze shifted downward and finally saw An¡¯s right hand piercing through his chest. Dazzling blue electric light danced in An¡¯s hand as Franklin felt his body paralyzed, and his soul was quickly slipping away from his body. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 158: Killing Chapter 158: Killing [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The Chidori had a strong pration power, and even Ken can¡¯t block it. An did just that, and he took advantage of Chidori¡¯s characteristics to bypass Franklin¡¯s defense. Franklin looked at An¡¯s hand inserted in his chest and felt numb all over, and knew that he was about to die. Puff! When An pulled his hand from Franklin¡¯s Chest, blood gushed forward and stained Franklin¡¯s body red. Franklin took two steps back and fell on his knees. He supported his body with his left hand and covered his chest with his right hand but couldn¡¯t stop the blood from slipping through his fingers. Arge hole was apparent on his back, and blood flowed from the front of the back while hisplexion turned pale as he was losing consciousness. ¡°Your body is strong, and I think that I will keep it.¡± While talking, a sword appeared in An¡¯s hand. It wasn¡¯t Shusui but Yatsufusa. Being a cursed sword, anyone killed by it will be a puppet for the user tomand. Franklin was a top-notch Emitter, and he thought that it would be a shame to let him die like this. So, An decided to use Yatsufusa to turn him into a puppet. And since he killed Franklin now, he is officially an enemy of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan, so it¡¯s inevitable that he will fight others. Therefore, he will take advantage of the opportunity to turn Franklin into a puppet along with anyone from the Ryodan that can be useful. In the long run, those powerful puppets woulde in handy to deal with strong foes. Although with his current power, An didn¡¯t need so much to deal with the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan, he didn¡¯t have to deal with them himself when the timees. At this moment, An felt a strong Killing intent rushing at him. ¡°Humph, you finally want to join the fund.¡± An looked and saw Feitan rushing over at quickly. In fact, An always paid attention to Feitan when he was fighting Franklin and didn¡¯t let him slip from his perception at all. The Ryodan members were confident in their strength, and they usually rushed head-on with their enemies. The only exception was Feitan, who was more of an Assassin than a thief. In other words, if An had any ws in the battle with Franklin, or if Feitan realized that Franklin could be in danger, he would most likely take action. Seeing that Franklin¡¯s life was hanging by a thread, Feitan couldn¡¯t bear standing aside and took action. However, Feitan¡¯s speed wasn¡¯t faster than An¡¯s sword. An decided to kill Franklin here, and even Chrollo won¡¯t be able to stop him if he wanted. ¡°Die!¡± An didn¡¯t hesitate and pierced Franklin¡¯s throat with Yatsufusa. When Frankline to, he saw a sword piercing his throat. Just as An killed Franklin, a small figure rushed at An as fast as it could. Feitan was holding an umbre in his hand, and the back of the umbre was printed in a dark red skull pattern. At this moment, Feitan was using the umbre-like sharp sword as he aimed at An¡¯s heart. An already saw everything with his Observation Haki and didn¡¯t panic. Instead, he just moved slightly to the side and avoided Feitan¡¯s surprise attack. At the same time, An took out Yatsufusa from Franklin¡¯s neck and shed at Feitan without hesitation. Seeing this, Feitan turned his umbre and tried to block. The collision made a dull sound as Feitan was directly sent away by An¡¯s sh, while Franklin, who lost the support from the sword in his throat, fell down dead. An waved his sword and cleaned the blood on it before looking at Feitan indifferently. He didn¡¯t feel aplished by killing Franklin. Not even a pang of slight guilt like when he killed Guere¡¯s lover. It wasn¡¯t because he didn¡¯t have any humanity left in him, but because he felt that Franklin deserved death. In fact, he felt that the scum from Meteor City deserved nothing less. Unlike An, Feitan looked at Franklin¡¯s Corpse. His expression changed for the first time as he frowned. The current situation was beyond his expectation. He thought that with Franklin¡¯s power, An would die in the end, or even if he was defeated, he could escape. But he didn¡¯t expect Franklin to lose and die at An¡¯s hand while he couldn¡¯t even intervene and save him. At this moment, Feitan, who didn¡¯t have any emotions usually, felt grief for the first time from hispanion dying. ¡°Rest in peace, Franklin. I will avenge you.¡± Feitan said in a cold voice. His eyes were fixed on An, and his aura exploded out of his body in waves apanied by a strong Killing Intent. ¡°I thought that even if your partner died, you would be indifferent. It seems that I was wrong. I didn¡¯t think you will grief his death.¡± While talking, An waved Yatsufusa in his hand and continued: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, you will meet Franklin soon, and will even make you a puppet along with him.¡± ¡°I will make you pay for killing him.¡± As soon as he said this, Feitan disappeared. However, An knew where he was. Using his Observation Haki, he saw Feitan rushing at him at an extremely fast speed. The ten meters between them were covered in a blink of an eye. An wasn¡¯t surprised by Feitan¡¯s speed because he had known that he was fast and maybe the fastest in the Ryodan. The short figure appeared in front of An while his killing Intent filled the ce. Feitan waved his umbre at An¡¯s throat. ¡°You want to use a sword to sh my throat the same way I killed Franklin? I don¡¯t think you can do that.¡± An sneered. He already predicted the attack¡¯s trajectory and avoided it easily. Feitan¡¯s eyes didn¡¯t falter as he reacted to An¡¯s dodge and his umbre once again moved toward An. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 159: Swordsmanship Fight Chapter 159: Swordsmanship Fight [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Quick reaction!¡± Seeing Feitan react to his dodge and aim an attack quickly, Anmented before he sneered and waved Yatsufusa. Yatsufusa collided with Feitan¡¯s umbre producing a few sparks. Feitan¡¯s umbre was something conjured with Nen, so it can withstand a powerful attack from Yatsufusa and not break. You can say that Feitan¡¯s umbre was a very good weapon. In addition to that, inside the umbre was a rapier, which Feitan currently unsheathed and shed at An. Seeing an attacking from his ¡®blind¡¯ spot, An didn¡¯t panic. Instead, he turned around and easily blocked it. Then he waved his hand, forming a few icicles that mmed into Feitan. Feitan wasn¡¯t careless, as he retreated Sharply and blocked the Icicle with his sword. Ice storm! With a wave of his hand, An produced an extremely cold air current that turned into a storm. Feitan decided to dodge and didn¡¯t want to touch the storm. ¡°You¡¯re quick to flee, but didn¡¯t you say you¡¯d avenge Franklin?¡± Facing An¡¯s sneer, Feitan couldn¡¯t tolerate it and stopped dodging and stared at An. An also stopped his ice Ice fruit ability and looked at Feitan provocatively. ¡°I don¡¯t even need my Ice ability to deal with you. What are you best at, Swordsmanship? I will fight you in Swordsmanship.¡± Hearing this, Feitan said coldly: ¡°This is your choice.¡± An¡¯s ability to create Ice on a whim was tricky, so when he heard that An wouldn¡¯t use it and instead will fight using Swordsmanship, he sneered. Because in the Ryodan, in addition to speed, his Swordsmanship was one of the best. Except for Nobunaga, only a few people could actuallypete against him in Swordsmanship. Feitan was extremely confident in this battle because he didn¡¯t think that An stood a chance against him in Swordsmanship. ¡°Listen well, and this sword here is called Yatsufusa, which I will use to kill you and turn you into a puppet.¡± An said as he waved Yatsufusa. Although An knew it was better for him to fight with Shusui, he still decided to use Yatsufusa in the end, simply because he wanted Feitan to be a puppet. ¡°Feitan coldly said: ¡°Will turn me into a puppet? Hahaha, we will see in the end.¡± The next moment, Feitan disappeared as he rushed at An again. An didn¡¯t avoid but waved his Yatsufusa instead. Since it¡¯s a swordsmanship fight, the two can only fight head-on. For the two of them, the end won¡¯t be decided by simplynding a blow or admitting defeat, but by one of them dying. In the Auction Hall, two figures appeared from time to time in a burst of speed as shock waves and sparks from the swords¡¯ collision appeared along with them. The more Feitan fought, the more solemn he became. He really didn¡¯t expect An would be such a strong swordsman. He was surprised because currently, Fetain could tell that An¡¯s Swordsmanship wasn¡¯t inferior to his own. Feitan became surprised at first, but he became excited in the end. To meet such a strong opponent that equaled himself in the way of the sword made him want to fight more. This drove Feitan to fight even harder and faster. ¡°Fighting me with speed? Well, let¡¯s see how the fastest member of the Ryodan deals with speed. Don¡¯t disappoint me.¡± Soru! An¡¯s figure disappeared. Yes, it looked like hepletely disappeared. Feitan could see him moving extremely fast and wasn¡¯t surprised by it because when An was fighting Franklin, he noticed An¡¯s speed. ¡°Too slow, you¡¯re too slow. If you¡¯re this slow, then why are we still fighting?¡± Facing An¡¯s taunt, Feitan became furious. Even though he always appeared calm and quiet, he was short-tempered and hot-headed. He couldn¡¯t tolerate An¡¯s taunting him as if he was ying with him. ¡°Faster? Then I will show you speed.¡± Feitan decisively used his Nen, and his speed increased. ¡°Well, what about now? Am I too fast that you can keep up?¡± Feitan sneered at An, wanting to return the taunt. ¡°Barely qualified,¡± An said calmly. Hearing this, Feitan coldly said: ¡°You mean you¡¯re faster than me?¡± ¡°Of course.¡± An nodded. While they were talking, they already exchanged hundreds of moves. They were too fast that no ordinary person could see them. Only a master can see them, and after fighting for a while, An felt a little tired. He already knew everything about Feitan¡¯s moves and wanted to end the battle already. Using Observation Haki to predict Feitan¡¯s movement, An used Soru, and with a drawing posture (Iaido), he shed at Feitan. Feitan felt a sense of dread approaching him and instinctively stepped back. However, he was a little step slower, and An¡¯s sword shed him. Fortunately, he avoided most of the sh but a woundrger than ten centimeters had already appeared on his body. An¡¯s strike broke through his defense and severely wounded him. Feitan clutched his wound, and his eyes stared coldly and viciously at An. He didn¡¯t remember thest time that he was actually injured, and now he received such arge wound. This meant that he lost to An in Swordsmanship and speed. At the same time, he felt that this was uneptable. He was strong and wasn¡¯t injured for so long, and he had confidence in his strength. When this confidence was broken, he lost his mind to madness and anger. At this moment, Feitan stared at An, and a dark purple aura emerged around his body. An narrowed his eyes when he saw the unidentified Nen. Obviously, Feitan decided to use a big move. However, An didn¡¯t make a move to interrupt this power umtion. Instead, he looked at him indifferently and waited. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 160: Puppets Chapter 160: Puppets [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// An knew about Feitan¡¯s ability and had time to interrupt what¡¯s he¡¯s doing, but he didn¡¯t. On one hand, being strong made him won¡¯t look down on those who thought that they were strong and use that strength foolishly. Killing indiscriminatingly without a goal or purpose to feel strong was just psychopathic. On the other hand, he wanted to see how powerful Feitan¡¯s ultimate ability is. As the dark aura continued to gush out of Feitan, a weird costume suddenly appeared around him instead of what he normally wore. This costume was produced by Feitan¡¯s Nen and could defend against high temperatures. The fireproof suit enveloped his body, only leaving a small gap for his eyes. An could the power gushing out of Feitan, but his expression didn¡¯t change. He looked at Feitan as if telling him to hurry and do whatever he wanted to do so he can kill him. Feitan saw this and clenched his teeth and said: ¡°You will regret waiting for me.¡± As he said this, the Nen in his body skyrocketed again and condensed into a ball in front of him before he let it go, and it started to fly above his head. When this ball flew into the air, it suddenly expanded violently and turned into a huge fireball in an instant. From a distance, it looked like a sun emitting extreme heat. This huge fireball is called Raising Sun, and it can emit high temperatures, burning anything close to death. The special thing about this is the heavier Feitan was wounded, the stronger the fireball is and the higher the temperature. Previously, he was wounded by An¡¯s sh, and although it wasn¡¯t a serious injury, it wasn¡¯t light either. Therefore, the zing Sun was releasing a terrifying heat. The hall was like an oven. The air moisture disappeared quickly. An remembered that Feitan used this against one of the leaders of the Chimera Ants. As the heatwave swept by, the hundreds of corpses that Franklin killed previously burned to ashes. Feitan, who was under the Sun, was unaffected. This was because of his fireproof suit that can block the heat. Except for him, everything else can burn. ¡°Now, you can¡¯t escape, and you will burn by the scorching sun.¡± Feitan sneered as he thought that An would be burned to a crisp. However, in the next second, his sneer disappeared as he saw An calmly raise his hand. Freeze. With An as the center, a st of cold air swept around. The cold air collided with the heat and caused a strong evaporation effect splitting the scene into two. On one side was Feitan¡¯s purgatory, and on the other side was An¡¯s Ice. Seeing this, Feitan¡¯s face became extremely ugly with anger that he couldn¡¯t speak. He thought that the temperature would turn An to ashes, but he didn¡¯t expect that thetter would be immune to the high temperature and could even fight it off with his Ice. An sneered as he saw Feitan¡¯s face: ¡°Didn¡¯t you want me to burn?¡± ¡°It¡¯s a pity that the high temperature from your fireball can¡¯t melt my Ice.¡± When his voice fell, An raised his hand and aimed at the fireball in the air. Ice Age! In an instant, cold air coursed from An¡¯s hand, freezing the fireball in midair turning it into a huge ice ball. Then it fell with a bang. It burst open and shattered on the ground. Although the temperature of this miniature Sun was quite high, it¡¯s a pity that An had the Ice Ice fruit. An¡¯s Ice Ice fruit is a disaster-level fruit that, at the full potential it can freeze the entire earth. This little Sun of Feitan can only burn things within a few Kilometers at best. ¡°Okay, this hunting game is almost over, but I will let you fight your friend.¡± With that, An pulled out Yatsufusa and aimed at Franklin. In the next second, Franklin suddenly opened his eyes and got up. He stood nkly in front of An, with grey pupils. He was no longer living and was just a puppet. ¡°What the hell did you do to Franklin?¡± Seeing Franklin standing up, Feitan looked in surprise. At the same time, he felt that something was wrong. He was certain that Franklin was killed by An just now, but here he is, standing up and without the familiar aura around him. This was different from the Franklin that he knew. ¡°Could it be that sword? The puppet you talked about earlier is this?¡± Feitan thought suddenly. An said before that he would use his sword to turn Franklin into a puppet. ¡°Does that sword have an ability to kill someone and turn them into a puppet to be manipted?¡± Feitan asked in a deep voice. An nodded and smiled: ¡°Yes, this sword does have such an ability. You will try that effect now.¡± ¡°Franklin, go and kill yourpanion Feitan.¡± An held Yatsufusa in his hand and said. Hearing the order, Franklin directly attacks Feitan with his Double Machine Gun. Arge number of bullets rained on Feitan directly. Feitan instantly summoned his umbre and opened it to block the bullets while dodging when he can. Seeing Franklin and Feitan fighting, An smiled. Yatsufusa¡¯s maniption was very good. Although Franklin is just a puppet, his strength remained the same. Even his Nen was the same, and only someone as strong as he was before can defeat him. Right now, Feitan was forced to evade and search for an opportunity to strike back. He quickly unsheathed his sword and stabbed Franklin. However, the sword didn¡¯t have any effect on Franklin, and he finally understood that Franklin was already dead, so such a strong attack was of no use at all. He could only deal with Franklin by destroying his body or cutting off his head. Or else Franklin will continue fighting without stopping. Realizing this, Feitan changed his attack method and nned on cutting down Feitan¡¯s head. An noticed this and could onlymend him on his cleverness. This made An determined to turn Feitan into a puppet. Yatsufusa can manipte up to eight puppets, and right now, he had Franklin and nned on adding Feitan, and that would be more than enough for most of the situations. When Feitan was waiting for an opportunity to cut Franklin¡¯s head, An made his move. He shed and appeared behind Feitan, who was focused on Franklin. Feitan was worthy of being an elite as even though he didn¡¯t see An, he felt his presence behind him; however, it was toote. ¡°Go to hell.¡± A cold light shed in Feitan¡¯s eyes as Yatsufusa¡¯s de precisely cut into his heart. After stabbing him, An directly twisted his hand again,pletely shattering his heart and turning him into a lifeless corpse. From the moment he moved to the moment Feitan died, it only took two seconds, and Feitan couldn¡¯t even struggle before he died. Looking at Feitan¡¯s corpse, An said: ¡°Get up.¡± Feitan suddenly opened his eyes and stood in front of An. Like Franklin, Feitan¡¯s eyes were grey as he lost his humanity and turned into a puppet. He now nned to use Yatsufusa to build a puppet organization. Yatsufusa can hold eight people at the same time, and now he has two, and only six more remained. He didn¡¯t decide who the other six will be because even if he encounters someone strong, he won¡¯t just go kill them to turn them into puppets. Now that Feitan and Franklin are dead, An believed that the Ryodan would seek him out for revenge. If this developed to that point, An wouldn¡¯t mind killing them and turning them into his own puppet, and form a puppet Ryodan. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 161: The power of Level 7 Swordsmanship. Chapter 161: The power of Level 7 Swordsmanship. [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Suddenly, the system¡¯s notification rang in An¡¯s head. [Ding! You sessfully beheaded Franklin and Feitan. You obtained Swordsmanship Level 7.] Suddenly, the knowledge, skills, experience rted to Swordsmanship melted into An¡¯s brain and body. Feeling the information invading his brain like a warm current, An felt that his power made another leap to the next level. In terms of Swordsmanship, he was a master currently. The system ranked the Swordsmanship by levels, Level 1 was entry-level, Level 2 is a bronze swordsman, level 3 is a silver swordsman, level 4 is a golden swordsman, level 5 is a tinum swordsman, level 6 is a diamond swordsman, and level 7 is a great epic swordsman. Now, with his swordsmanship level reaching level 7, An was a great epic swordsman. With his current strength, he can send a flying sh that can cut a forest. ¡°Let¡¯s try it.¡± Suddenly, his aura changed as he took out Shusui. Although Yatsufusa was sharp, it¡¯s more inclined toward its ability to manipte its victims than actually being a sword. Shusui was more worthy of the power of a great swordsman and could demonstrate his full power using it. An held Shusui in his hand and waved it directly above his head. In an instant, a ray of light emerged out of his sword and turned cyan before slicing through the ceiling and continued from one ceiling to the other till it reached the top and broke free into the night¡¯s sky. The clouds parted ways as if making way to the mighty sh in fear till the cyan energy disappeared. Only a few people frowned at this spectacle as they could feel this scene was caused by something or someone, while others looked at the sky in awe. Those who felt something couldn¡¯t imagine what kind of person could perform such a feat. Even Netero, who was far away in the Hunter Association building, noticed the short-lived phenomenon in the cloud. His eyes showed extreme excitement as he said with a tone full of emotions: ¡°Such a strong sword strike that could reach the sky. Where did ite from, who did it? I want to see.¡± His eyes narrowed and turned into thin slits. He looked in the direction where the sword soared into the sky and said to himself: ¡°Um¡­ Isn¡¯t that Yorknew City¡¯s direction?¡± After determining the direction, Netero left his office. On the other side of the auction hall, An looked at the sky in shock before heughed. This kind of power made him feel quite confident in himself. He canpletely ignore the Ryodan right now. Even if all of theme together for revenge, An wouldn¡¯t take them seriously. Now he had a higher Vision. He was looking up toward a higher goal. After a while, An said: ¡°You two hide in the dark and follow me temporarily, don¡¯t show yourself. I will call you out if necessary.¡± After saying this, Franklin and Feitan obeyed and hid in the darkness. Although those two became puppets, their appearance hardly changed much. Without careful observation, it will be difficult for anyone to notice the difference. The reason he didn¡¯t allow them to follow him mainly because he was currently the bodyguard of the Nostrade Family. If he brought those two, others would notice this easily. Therefore, in order to avoid this unnecessary trouble, An decided to hide them temporarily and call them when it¡¯s necessary. At this moment, Baise, Ivienkov, and Neon, who were hiding, were rendered unconscious by An¡¯s Conqueror¡¯s Haki in the battle between him and Franklin. Therefore, the three of them had no idea what happened to those two. When An came up to them and woke them up, Baise and Ivienkov couldn¡¯t help asking about Franklin and Feitan¡¯s whereabout. An didn¡¯t tell them the truth, but he told them that he chased them away, and he also told them that the items were destroyed in the battle just now. At first, both of them were suspicious, but after looking at the aftereffect of the battle, they believed his words. ¡°Let¡¯s go. Since the auction is destroyed, we have to go back. Furthermore, I think that there is an uproar outside, and most likely, the other two auctions were attacked as well.¡± An said. ¡°What do you mean, is there an attack outside as well?¡± Baise asked. ¡°No one hase in for so long, which means that something happened outside. Maybe the security forces arepletely wiped out by the enemy.¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, Baise and Ivienkov couldn¡¯t help feeling fortunate that they followed An. Otherwise, they wouldn¡¯t be so lucky. Sure enough, as An said, when they walked out of the auction hall, they saw the members of the mafia were scattered everywhere. All of them dead. The scene was quite frightening. It seemed like every one of the security was killed, total annihtion. As for who did this, it can only be the Ryodan. As for their current whereabouts, it¡¯s unknown. But since this ce was attacked, then most likely, the other two auction halls were also attacked by them. The Ryodan, including Chrollo, amounted to 13 members. There are three auctions tonight, so An believes that the Ryodan separated into three groups to attack all auctions at one time. The proof for his guess is that even though he killed Feitan and Franklin, the others didn¡¯t show up till now. So it¡¯s most likely that they are scattered all around the city. Franklin and Feitan are responsible for stealing the goods, while there should be another one or two responsible for cleaning the guards outside. After that, they would meet somewhere in this city. An¡¯s guess was correct, the other two auctions were attacked as well, and the security in both ces attacked and suffered heavy losses. At this moment, a fierce battle broke out where Kurapika is, as a burly man stood in front of him with hair like a Hedgehog. Kurapika was facing the 11th member of the Ryodan, Uvogin¡­ Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 162: Devil’s Music Note Chapter 162: Devil¡¯s Music Note [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Going back ten minutes, inside the auction hall for the scarlet eye. Before the auction started, arge number of mafia gangs gathered around the building, securing it from any attack. In the building, Kurapika wore a suit and sunsses along with his partner Melody. With his status as a bodyguard for the Nostrade family and the invitation card, he easily entered the auction. ¡°Kurapika, do you think someone will attack the auction? Inside the venue, Melody asked Kurapika, who was sitting on the side. ¡°I don¡¯t know, but maybe they will,¡± Kurapika said coldly. ¡°Kurapika, I¡¯m curious about something, can I ask?¡± ¡°What is it?¡± Kurapika¡¯s tone was still cold. Melody hesitated for a bit before she asked: ¡°Kurapika, you seem to care greatly about the scarlet eye in this auction.¡± ¡°Why do you think so?¡± Kurapika¡¯s tone warmed up a bit, but his expression was still cold. ¡°In the morning, when the captain assigned us our auctions, your heartbeats increased quickly at the mention of the eye. Later you insisted on changing the auction toe here. From the sound of your heartbeat, I could tell that you¡¯re restless, and you were kind of angry and full of hatred. So I thought that there was a connection between you and the scarlet eye in the auction.¡± Hearing this, Kurapika stayed silent for a while before saying: ¡°You¡¯re amazing, Melody. You can actually know my mental state just from hearing my heartbeats. Well, I will tell you my true identity. I¡¯m thest survivor of the Kurta n, and those scarlet eyes are unique to my n.¡± Hearing this, Melody was taken aback: ¡°I didn¡¯t expect you to be from the Kurta n. I remember that that n was attacked a few years ago.¡± ¡°A few years ago, a group of people came to the residence of our n and killed every one of them before taking their eyes. In order to take revenge and take back the eyes of my n, I will do anything.¡± When he said this, Kurapika was almost expressionless, but his voice contained anger and hatred. ¡°So you¡¯re here to get back the scarlet eye that belonged to your n?¡± ¡°Year.¡± Kurapika nodded. Melody didn¡¯t ask any more questions as she could tell that Kurapika was determined about his revenge from his heartbeats. ¡°What about you, Melody? Are you a professional hunter?¡± Kurapika asked after some time. Melody nodded: ¡°Well, I¡¯m a music hunter.¡± Kurapika looked at her in surprise: ¡°Music hunter? So you know music?¡± ¡°Yes, I know how to y the flute best, and I understand rhythm and tunes. I can also write lyrics andpose music.¡± Melody replied with pride as she was confident in her ability. ¡°I didn¡¯t think you¡¯d be an artist.¡± Seeing the look of triumph on Melody¡¯s face, Kuapika smiled lightly. ¡°What do you mean? Are you saying that I¡¯m ugly?¡± Melody could tell what Kurapika was thinking about and raised her head angrily. Kurapika quickly shook his head: ¡°No, I didn¡¯t mean that.¡± ¡°Haha, it¡¯s okay. I know that I look ugly, and the music is beautiful, which really doesn¡¯t match my look. I don¡¯t me you.¡± Those words made Kurapika feel quite guilty as what he said seemed too direct and hurtful. He didn¡¯t want to mock melody and was just surprised that she was a proficient musician. Melody didn¡¯t seem to care as she said: ¡°Actually, I¡¯m looking for the Devil¡¯s music note. I heard that it might appear in the auction. In order to enter the auction, I applied for the job of a bodyguard.¡± ¡°The devil¡¯s Music note?¡± ¡°Well, to put it simply, it¡¯s a cursed music score, and its name is the Sonata of Darkness.¡± Melody exined. Kurapika frowned: ¡°Just hearing the name makes me feel ufortable.¡± ¡°Well, because that music score is cursed and wasn¡¯tposed by humans, it was created by the devil,¡± Melody said. Kurapika was surprised to hear that: ¡°Devil? Does such a monster exist in the world?¡± Melody paused for a bit before replying: ¡°I haven¡¯t seen him, but I think devils exist in our world. Because the Sonata of Darkness is real, and there is more than one copy of it. It is said that several copies exist, four for piano, violin, flute¡­ If a human ys this music, a terrible disaster will befall them. Even if you identally listen to it, you will get in trouble.¡± Kurapika couldn¡¯t believe it: ¡°That seems like nonsense. How can such a terrible thing exist.¡± Melody said seriously: ¡°It¡¯s not nonsense. What I say is the truth. My friend once yed the Sonata of Darkness. At that time, he yed it with a flute solo. There were seven people, including me, present and we listened to it. A terrible thing happened afterward. Those of us who were listening felt our bodies burning, and skin fester. My friend who yed the flute was severely mutated before dying. I look like this now because I listened to the Sonata of Darkness. I was disfigured from just listening to it.¡± Kurapika didn¡¯t know what to say. He couldn¡¯t believe it, but Melody revealed the burn marks on her body, and he couldn¡¯t say anything else. ¡°By the way, I used to look very beautiful.¡± Melody smiled. Kurapika nced at Melody in disbelief. The current Melody was quite ugly. That¡¯s why Kurapika was very skeptical about her being beautiful before. Melody didn¡¯t seem to care about this and said: ¡°Let me show you my photo before the ident.¡± Melody took a photo and showed Kurapika. He saw seven people in the photo, and one of them was a beautiful girl with long hair and a fairplexion. ¡°Could this be you?¡± Kurapika asked Melody. Melody nodded: ¡°That¡¯s me from before. Didn¡¯t I say I used to be beautiful?¡± ¡°Well, you were really beautiful.¡± Kurapika nodded sincerely. ¡°So, the other six are those friends who listened to the Sonata of Darkness?¡± Kurapika asked. ¡°Well, the one in the middle was the one who yed the score, except for her. The others were lucky enough to survive.¡± Melody said sadly. ¡°Then where are they now? Are they looking for the copies like you?¡± ¡°Well, yes, after what happened, the six of us realized that the Devil¡¯s music score would bring a huge disaster to humans. So we agreed to find all of the copies and destroy them.¡± Kurapika nodded and followed with some curiosity: Do you really think that this piece of music was created by a Devil and not by a human?¡± Melody shook her head and said: ¡°I heard the music, and I can tell you that no human can create that kind of music.¡± ¡°The devil always feels like an illusion,¡± Kurapika said. Melody thought for a bit before she said: ¡°Devil¡¯s might not exist in our world that is inhibited by humans, but it can be somewhere in the dark continent.¡± ¡°Dark Continent?¡± Kurapika felt Melody¡¯s words be more mysterious the more he listened. But Melody has no reason to lie to him, and he didn¡¯t think he was lying either. ¡°I have looked up the history books, and the dark continent seems to be a dark world unlike ours. There is all kind of alien creatures there, and there are no humans. ording to an ancient book, whenever humans set foot there, a huge disaster would be brought back with them.¡± ¡°Bring back a disaster?¡± ¡°Well, a disaster capable of destroying the human world. I suspect that sometimes, humans went there and brought back the Sonata of Darkness which is the symbol of disaster. Anyone who heard it would mutate and experience great pain.¡± Melody said seriously. ¡°So, do you think that the Sonata of Darkness will appear in the auction?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know, and I just heard from a friend that the Sonata of Darkness might appear here. I¡¯m not sure about that, but I n to find out.¡± Melody said. Kurapika nodded, then asked: ¡°That sheet of music is terrible; why do you still want to find it yourself?¡± ¡°Because it is so terrible that I want to destroy it myself,¡± Melody replied firmly. ¡°You¡¯re so great,¡± Kurapika said. ¡°Really?¡± ¡°Well,pared to me, your goal is for the safety of mankind, while I¡¯m just after revenge.¡± ¡°Well, everyone pursues their goals. Kurapika, the pain you went through is by far greater than mine. Therefore, I will support you. I hope you find the stolen eyes of your n.¡± Melody said in encouragement. Kurapika nodded. He wasn¡¯t talkative, but he felt that Melody could feel his pain. During the conversation between the two, time passed, and it was exactly nine, and the auction officially started. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 163 Chapter 163 This Chapter isn¡¯t avable due to the Author wanting to edit it. I couldn¡¯t even get the original text so I will wait for him to update it and trante itter. (Still Not Out Yet) Chapter 164: Chains Chapter 164: Chains [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// At the same time, outside, a pickup truck went out of control and mmed into the building. Without a doubt, the pickup truck belongs to the attackers. The security personal immediately fired their guns and rifles, turning the truck into a sieve. After a while, two people stepped forward to check the truck. Suddenly a cold light shed in front of them, and they couldn¡¯t see what it was. The next second, both of them fell down dead. ¡°Enemy attack!¡± ¡°We¡¯re under attack!¡± The guards at the scene became vignt as they saw a ronin samurai holding a sword and walking toward the guard like a Shinigami, ready to harvest their souls. This person is Nobunaga, a member of the Ryodan. Nobunaga shed instantly with extreme speed killing dozens of the guard alone. However, arge number of guards swarmed the ce. At the time Nobunaga was dealing with the guards, Kurapika was fighting against Uvogin. ¡°Leave the scarlet eyes,¡± Kurapika said angrily as he waved the chains out. ¡°If you have the ability,e and get it.¡± Uvogin grinned as he punched him. Kurapika and Uvogin continued their fight as silver chains and fists collided from time to time, causing sparks to flicker. ¡°Those chains are strong, not the ordinary kind.¡± Uvogin once again blocked Kurapika¡¯s chains and was startled. Since a few months ago, Kurapika started developing his own Nen ability after learning from An. The chain in his hand is a manifestation of Nen. The chain can crush rocks and break walls, which was enough to confront Uvogin¡¯s destructive strength. Bang! Bang! Bang! Uvogin was surprised, to say the least. A few months ago, he fought Kurapika and yed with him, but he couldn¡¯t imagine him getting so strong after just a few months. He was angry, and his fighting spirit was ignited. Bang! Bang! Bang! ¡°Big Bang Impact!¡± Suddenly, Uvogin rushed forward and aimed his fist at Kurapika. Kurapikacked experience. Even though he used his chain to defend in time, his hand broke from the destructive power of the punch as he flew away. ¡°Heh, you¡¯re only this strong? In that case, you won¡¯t be able to get your people¡¯s eyes back.¡± Seeing Kurapika knocked away, Uvogin taunted him and looked very proud of it. Kurapika got up and raised his head to re at Uvogin: ¡°How do you know that? Were you involved in that ident?¡± ¡°Ah, yes, a few years ago, I did participate in the massacre of the Kurta n.¡± Uvogin grinned. ¡°In other words, you are a spider?¡± Kurapika said coldly. ¡°Yes, I¡¯m a member of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan,¡± Uvogin admitted directly. After getting this confirmation, the Nen in Kurapika¡¯s body surged out as his body trembled, not from fear but from anger. When he raised his head, his originally brown eyes were now scarlet red. ¡°Oh, scarlet eyes? It seems like you¡¯re very angry.¡± Seeing Kurapika¡¯s eyes, Uvogin continued his provocation. ¡°Five years ago, I was there killing the people of the Kurta n, and their eyes would turn red from anger. Their power will be greatly enhanced when their eyes turn red. Come, let me see how strong you are when you¡¯re like that. I hope that it will be fun because I will get your eyes away after killing you as I did to your tribe.¡± ¡°Damn you!¡± Kurapika rushed forward as the chain in his hand slithered like a snake in the air. Boom! Boom! Boom! Uvogin wasn¡¯t afraid as he waved his fists against the chain. When Kurapika activates his Scarlet eyes, he will turn from a Conjurer to a specialist, which makes him as strong in all the other types of Nen as his original one, and this state is called Emperor time. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 165: 100% Chapter 165: 100% [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The chain that Kurapika conjured wasn¡¯t an ordinary weapon but also a restriction he ced on himself. When Kurapika wasn¡¯t fighting, the chains would hide under his sleeve and connect to the rings on his hand. Five chains for five fingers, and each one of them had a different ability. Amongst them, the chain connected to his thumb is called the Holy Chain, which can heal any injury, but in the process, the body¡¯s defense against Nen would be drastically reduced. Kurapika currently had two broken ribs from Uvogin¡¯s punch along with his hand. He raised his hand and unhurriedly wrapped the chain around his wound. Greenlight burst out of the chain, directly connecting and healing his injuries. Uvogin was greatly surprised by this since those who can heal injuries with Nen are rare, and it would require an Enhancer who can increase the body¡¯s regeneration. Kurapika¡¯s injuries were healed in two seconds, while Uvogin thought that Kurapika was an Enhancer. But previously, his abilities were closer to an emitter or a Conjurer than an Enhancer. While Uvogin was analyzing Kurapika, thetter mmed the chain on his middle finger. The chains can¡¯t be underestimated, and although he wasn¡¯t sure what type of Nen Kurapika was using, he had no doubt that the chains were covered in Nen and were quite powerful. Uvogin directly avoided the chain and jumped away. Boom! The chain hit the ground and created a huge pit. Uvogin wasn¡¯t someone who would stay on the defensive, and as soon as he avoided the chain, he rushed toward Kurapika. Kurapika still didn¡¯t recover his chain back, and yet Uvogin was in front of him with extreme speed and stood his fist at Kurapika. Seeing that there was no time to dodge, Kurapika quickly raised his arm and punched back. Boom! Kurapika was knocked up in the air, and without waiting, he sent the chain again at Uvogin. Uvogin was going to pursuit Kurapika in the air but seeing the chaining toward him, he moved sideways and escaped. Afternding, Kurapika quickly used the Holy Chain to heal his hand after Uvogin¡¯s punch. In a few seconds, his hand, which was almost destroyed, recovered. ¡°You healed again?¡± Seeing this, Uvogin frowned. At this moment, Kurapika spoke: ¡°Is this your full power?¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°That punch just now, it isn¡¯t your full power, is it?¡± Hearing this, Uvogin sneered. Kurapika¡¯s tone seemed to mock him. ¡°That punch is just about 50%, and the next one will be 80%.¡± Uvogin¡¯s aura burst out of his body like mes. Kurapika didn¡¯t show fear. Actually, his face didn¡¯t show any emotion at all. No matter how strong the spider is, Kurapika was confident that he could subdue him. The chain and fist once again collided. ¡°Again,e on, release your full power.¡± Kurapika provoked Uvogin. ¡°Here is full power!¡± Uvogin rushed aggressively while Kurapika matched him without fear. In his current state, he can exert 100% of power in each type of Nen. ¡°This time, I will tear you to pieces. No one can withstand my full power Big Bang Impact!¡± Uvogin raised his hand and mmed the ground. In an instant, an overwhelming force hit the ground, and the entire floor of the auction was destroyed, creating a giant hole in the building. Kurapika¡¯s figure seemed to disappear under the destructive might of the Big Bang Impact. ¡°Did he die? Heh, even if I don¡¯t hit you head-on, you can¡¯t escape my power.¡± Uvogin sneered, but in the next second, the smile on his face disappeared. He saw a figure appearing from the ceiling. ¡°Bastard! You hid there?¡± seeing Kurapika without as much as small injury from his full power punch, Uvogin became furious as he wanted to rush forward. However, to his surprise, he couldn¡¯t move. His body seemed to be bound by something invisible. ¡°What is this?¡± Uvogin used Gyo and saw the chain wrapped around his body, locking him. And at the other end of the chain was Kurapika¡¯s stretched hand. ¡°How is this possible? When did you bind me?¡± Uvogin was shocked. Kurapika said coldly: ¡°When you attacked me with your first Big Bang Impact, the chain was already wrapped around you, and by using [In] on the chain, you couldn¡¯t notice them.¡± ¡°Damn it!¡± Uvogin gritted his teeth as he intended to break the chains. However, he was shocked to find he can¡¯t use it. In addition to strong offense, Kurapika¡¯s chain can restrain the target, and once he¡¯s restrained, he would be in a state of Zetsu and can¡¯t use Nen. Right now, Uvogin can¡¯t use his Nen, and it was almost impossible for him to break from Nen enhanced chains using brute power alone. ¡°Captureplete.¡± Kurapika said nkly. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 166: Sleeping Beast Chapter 166: Sleeping Beast [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The Ryodan was a group of twelve, each one of them had a spider tattoo with a number representing the member. Kurapika still didn¡¯t know how many others attacked the auction aside from Uvogin. Suddenly, Kurapika remembered a man and a woman. ¡°There are other two who came with you in the Hunter Exam, the blond woman, Pakunoda, and the man named Chrollo. Where they yourpanions? You only need to answer with yes or no.¡± If Uvogin answers, Kurapika could confirm that they were indeed members of the Ryodan. However, Uvogin sneered and said: ¡°Kill me. There is no way I will answer your questions.¡± ¡°I won¡¯t kill you right away,¡± Kurapika said. ¡°You will regret that.¡± Uvogin sneered. Kurapika snorted coldly and punched Uvogin in the face heavily. ¡°Even if you won¡¯t answer me, I guess that Chrollo and Pakunoda are members of the Ryodan as well. Let me tell you. I will kill all of you, so you better hope that I won¡¯t find the both of them.¡± Hearing Kurapika¡¯s threat, Uvogin said: ¡°You want to get rid of the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan by yourself? You sure know how to dream.¡± Kurapika was angered by Uvogin¡¯s attitude and once again smashed his fist into thetter¡¯s face. He continued to punch continuously with Nen-enhanced fists. At this moment, a melodious flute sound came from outside. Hearing this, Kurapika calmed down. Kurapika looked back and saw Melody standing in the distance ying her flute, which soothed his anger. ¡°Thank you, Melody.¡± Kurapika calmed down. Without the flute music, Kurapika was sure that he would¡¯ve killed Uvogin. ¡°Kurapika, are you okay?¡± Melody stepped forward and asked. ¡°Well, I¡¯m much better after listening to your flute.¡± Kurapika smiled. ¡°That¡¯s good.¡± Melody breathed a sigh of relief and looked at Uvogin and asked: ¡°This is the one who attacked the auction? Is he one of the people who killed your n?¡± Kurapika nodded: ¡°This guy should have another person with him. Let¡¯s take him for interrogation first. Melody, can you go get the scarlet eye fist? It should still be in the auction now.¡± Melody nodded and went backstage. After getting the scarlet eyes, Kurapika said: ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go back.¡± When they got out of the building, they saw corpses filling the ce. ¡°It seems that there is another attack outside as well.¡± Kurapika frowned, then turned toward Uvogin and said: ¡°Your partner did this?¡± Uvogin didn¡¯t answer. ¡°How many came with you? How many auctions are you after? Are you the only one responsible for attacking the auctions? Answer me!¡± Uvogin stayed quiet. ¡°A$$hole, answer the damn question!¡± Kurapika clenched his fist and punched Uvogin again. Even Uvogin¡¯s body which was as hard as steel, couldn¡¯t defend against Kurapika¡¯s attacks. At this moment, he was greatly shocked because he was always confident about his body, but he felt great pain now. ¡°So, it¡¯s anger and hatred that makes him stronger?¡± Uvogin secretly thought. ¡°Kurapika, let¡¯s go back before interrogating him.¡± Melody suggested. Kurapika nodded and entered the car. On the other side, An took Neon and left the auction ce as well. Dalzollene called An to ask about Neon¡¯s safety. After giving a brief report, Dalzollene told An about the attacks on the other auctions. And Kurapika even managed to capture one of the attackers. When they reached the hotel, An asked Baise, Ivienkov, and Squ to look after Neon. ¡°Is Miss Neon okay?¡± Dalzollene asked immediately after they got there. ¡°I¡¯m the one protecting her. Of course, she is okay. Now that she is here, I asked Baise and the others to protect her.¡± Hearing this, Dalzollene nodded. After that, An followed Dalzollene to the basement. Inside a room in the basement, An saw Kurapika and Melody, as well as a beaten and tied-up Uvogin. Because An was disguised, Uvogin couldn¡¯t recognize him. But the current Uvogin had his left hand. He had no idea which helped him from the Ryodan to get a new hand. In any case, Uvogin was currently a trapped beast, and there is no way for him to escape. ¡°Kurapika, how did you catch him?¡± An asked curiously. In fact, he already guessed that he used the chains, but he still asked. Sure enough, Kurapika answered: ¡°I caught him with the chains.¡± ¡°Well, what do you n on doing with him?¡± ¡°I suggest that we hand him over to the ten Dons because he was responsible for the destruction of their auction.¡± ¡°No way.¡± Kurapika directly refused. ¡°I won¡¯t hand over that person to anyone.¡± ¡°Why?¡± Dalzollene asked in confusion. ¡°Because he is not only the person who attacked the auction, but also my enemy,¡± Kurapika said nkly. Hearing this, Dalzollene was a little surprised. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 167: Taking Actions Chapter 167: Taking Actions [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Excuse me, can you please leave me alone with him? I have something private to ask.¡± Kurapika asked all the others. They nodded and left the basement one after the other, and when it was only Kurapika and Uvogin, the former started questioning. An could guess what Kurapika was asking about. He wanted to know the details of the massacre of his n and where all their eyes were. He also wanted to know how many members does the Ryodan have and how many of the current members participated in the massacre. But regardless, An didn¡¯t want to intervene. Although he knew those things about the Ryodan, he didn¡¯t want trouble. After a bit, Basho was also back, but unfortunately, he was the only one to make it back. ¡°What happened?¡± Dalzollene asked. ¡°We were attacked when at the end of the auction, I¡¯m afraid that all the items were stolen. Unfortunately, the others didn¡¯t make it, and I¡¯m the only survivor.¡± Basho said with a solemn expression. ¡°What about the security and the other guests?¡± Dalzollene asked. ¡°Nine out of ten people died.¡± Basho took a deep breath then continued: ¡°The enemy was too strong. Although we both can use Nen, they weren¡¯t normal. Everyone was like a chicken ready to be killed.¡± ¡°Damn, who are those guys? They dare attack the auction organized by the ten Dons. Are they crazy?¡± Dalzollene said angrily.At this time, An spoke: ¡°Basho, did you see who the person who attacked you is?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Basho nodded before describing him: ¡°The man was wearing a ck suit and sunsses, and he was about 1.85 meters high, with blonde hair. He didn¡¯t seem like a local.¡± An pondered for a moment, as he knew three blondes in the Ryodan, there is Pakunoda, Phinks Magcub, and Shalnark. Pakunoda can be excluded since she is a female, while Shalnark can also be excluded as he had a baby face and he wasn¡¯t that tall, so the only one left is Phinks Magcub. ¡°The other one is a woman wearing sses and holding a weapon that seemed like a vacuum cleaner. She looked harmless, but she was exceptionally vicious.¡± Basho said. ¡°Wearing sses, vacuum cleaner¡­.¡± An directly knew who that was, and she was Shizuku. The Ryodan failed in raiding two of the three auctions since An dealt with Feitan and Franklin while Kurapika captured Uvogin. So, the Ryodan lost three of their members at the same time, and all three of them were vanguards. With that loss, the Ryodan would lose power considerably. At this time, in a building in Yorknew city, Chrollo sat down inside a gloomy room. ¡°Feitan, Franklin, and Uvogin are not here? They should be here already.¡± ¡°All of them can¡¯t be contacted temporarily, and they probably encountered some ident.¡± Phinks Magcub said. ¡°ident?¡± Chrollo frowned. ¡°Well, they seem to have failed, and there is no trace of them at the scene. Only Shizuku and Phinks Magcub came back.¡± ¡°Where is Nobunaga?¡± Chrollo asked as he didn¡¯t see him. ¡°Nobunaga acted with Uvogin. The former was responsible for the security, while Uvogin was to take the items and kill the people inside the building. After each deal with his responsibility, they would meet here, but since Uvogin hasn¡¯t shown up, Nobunaga went to look for him. Nobunaga just called and said that there was a fierce fight but no trace of Uvogin, and he was still outside trying to find his whereabouts.¡± Chrollo frowned, and after thinking for a while, he said: ¡°Uvogin, Franklin, and Feitan were responsible for taking the item. Maybe there were masters in the auction venue, which led to their failure. Magcub, is there a way to find who participated in the auction? If you can find out their personnel detail so we can find the ones responsible for the disappearance of those three.¡± Phinks Magcub nodded: ¡°Yes, leave it to me, but it will take some time because most of the participants were killed.¡± On the other side, the news of the attack on the auction reached the Ten Dons. Therefore, they immediately organized manpower and started investigating the mastermind behind the attacks, and posted a bounty on the ones who attacked the auction. Faced with the huge bounty, many started investigating the attacks. In the vi, Dalzollene got the news of the bounty and directly informed the others. ¡°Boss wants us to find the attackers as well, and we will get a high bonus and the appreciation of the Ten Dons. Kurapika already captured one of them, and if we hand him over, we can get the reward.¡± ¡°You¡¯re the captain. It¡¯s up to you, but I don¡¯t think Kurapika will hand over that person, and thetter won¡¯t tell you the whereabouts of hispanion.¡± ¡°How can you tell if we don¡¯t try.¡± At that moment, An followed Dalzollene into the basement. They entered to see Kurapika beating Uvogin with a punch after the other. ¡°Kurapika, calm down,¡± An said. Looking at the angry Kurapika, they knew that Uvogin didn¡¯t give any information. ¡°Take yourst chance and tell me how many you are? Where are the others.¡± Uvogin¡¯s only answer was: ¡°Kill me.¡± ¡°Well, I will kill you.¡± Kurapika said nkly. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 168: Worm Chapter 168: Worm [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Do you have anything to say before you die?¡± Kurapika asked coldly. ¡°Heh, you want revenge? You¡¯re just killing yourself; mypanions wille and kill you shortly.¡± Facing Uvogin¡¯s threat, Kurapika just raised his hand, and his chain extended before piercing Uvogin¡¯s heart ending his life. An nced at Uvogin and felt a little pity. If he used Yatsufusa, he could get stronger easily. ¡°I wonder how much Nen I will get using Predator from Uvogin¡¯s corpse?¡± He nced at Kurapika and could see that he wasn¡¯t happy even though he killed a Spider. ¡°Kurapika, what do you n to do with the body?¡± An asked. ¡°I can only bury it,¡± Kurapika said. ¡°Then, I have a suggestion.¡± An thought for a bit before he said. ¡°What do you suggest?¡± Kurapika looked at him. ¡°You want to find out who is this guy¡¯s partner, right?¡± An pointed at Uvogin and said. Kurapika nodded: ¡°Yes, I have a personal grievance with them.¡± ¡°Then, instead of burying him, it would be better to hand him over to the Ten Dons. They would inform the world that they already captured one of the attackers, which his partners would definitively see ande looking for the one who captured him.¡± Kurapika thought about it before looking at Dalzollene and said: ¡°Captain, I will trouble you to hand over this body to the auction organizers.¡± ¡°Well, leave it to me,¡± Dalzollene said. Handing over Uvogin¡¯s body on behalf of the Nostrade family can gain them some favors from the ten Dons, which made Dalzollene happy. ¡°I have contacted the Ten Dons through the boss, and I will get his body to them,¡± Dalzollene said. ¡°In that case, I will go with you,¡± An said. ¡°But, isn¡¯t your duty to protect Miss Neon? It would be better to go back to the hotel.¡± Dalzollene said. ¡°Miss Neon is fine as long as she stays in the hotel, and Baise is with her.¡± An then smiled: ¡°The point is that if you, the captain, were to be caught by this guy¡¯s partners while transporting his body, do you think you can escape alone?¡± Dalzollene felt embarrassed, and after thinking about it, he nodded: ¡°Ok then, please go with me. I will feel more at ease with you along.¡± Although he was the captain, Dalzollene knew that An was stronger than he is, and he agreed with his logic. ¡°In that case, I¡¯ll go too.¡± Kurapika also stepped up when An was about to go. Dalzollene looked at An for his confirmation, and An nodded: ¡°Kurapika caught him and is qualified to go with us.¡± ¡°Then, Melody, you and Basho will stay in the vi,¡± Dalzollene said. ¡°Captain, let me go as well,¡± Melody said after some hesitation. She could feel Kurapika¡¯s heartbeat and mental state were unstable, and the only thing she could do is calm him down with her flute. ¡°Let her follow, don¡¯t underestimate her, Captain,¡± An said. Since even An has spoken, Dalzollene naturally didn¡¯t argue. The group of four set off with Uvogin¡¯s body in the trunk of the car. An hourter, they reached their destination. ¡°The Dons areing. Let¡¯s wait.¡± Dalzollene said after making a call. After waiting for a few minutes, An noticed strange movement on the ground, and the presence was getting closer and closer. Dalzollene and Kurapika became alert, seeing An alert. An stared at the ground under his feet, and then something flushed out. ¡°Don¡¯t be nervous. I¡¯m warm, one of the Shadow Beasts.¡± The monster said. ¡°Shadow beast? The direct escort of the Dons? I didn¡¯t think there will be some heavyweights here.¡± Dalzollene said in shock. An looked at warm and remembered him to be one of the small fries that attacked Uvogin and can travel freely underground. ¡°You¡¯re the bodyguards of the Nostrade family?¡± Warm asked. They nodded ¡°You are the ones who contacted us and said you caught one of the attackers of the auction, right?¡± ¡°Yes,¡± Dalzollene said respectfully. ¡°So, where is he?¡± warm asked. ¡°In the trunk of the car.¡± Dalzollene opened the trunk. ¡°Is he dead?¡± Seeing Uvogin lying down motionlessly, warm frowned. ¡°Ues, he was killed during the fight.¡± Dalzollene didn¡¯t mention Kurapika killing him. ¡°Although he is dead, I can feel that he is very strong.¡± Warm stared at Uvogin¡¯s body and said, then he looked at Kurapika and said: ¡°Did you kill him? What¡¯s your name?¡± ¡°Kurapika.¡± ¡°Well, Kurapika, you need to provide details of the battle. We will follow up based on the information provided.¡± Warm asked. ¡°This person is a member of the Genie Ryodan, and his name is Uvogin,¡± Kurapika said. Warm was a little surprised: ¡°So, the spiders were after the attack? No wonder.¡± ¡°Warm, do you know how many of them there are?¡± Kurapika asked. ¡°I don¡¯t know; there may have dozens of people.¡± ¡°Actually, this is the first time I encountered a spider.¡± ¡°By the way, I heard that everyone from the Ryodan has a spider tattoo on their back. I want to check.¡± After confirming that Uvogin was a spider, Worm said: ¡°Thank you for your assistance. This is a great piece of information. We are now certain that the Ryodan was behind the attack.¡± After that, Warm took out a phone from somewhere and reported what he found to the Dons. The Dons immediately started tracing the whereabouts of the spiders and offered a bounty for them. Regardless of whether you live or die, if you kill a spider, you can get from 500 million to a billion. ¡°Okay, this corpse is no longer useful. I will trouble you to deal with it. I¡¯m now going to join the Shadow beasts to pursue the Ryodan. If there is a need, we will contact you.¡± After saying this, Warm burrowed into the ground and disappeared. ¡°Is the Shadow Beast gone?¡± Dalzollene asked as he looked at An. ¡°Well, he is gone,¡± An said as he felt Warm move away. ¡°With the Shadow beasts dispatched, the Gen¡¯ie Ryodan organization are so dead,¡± Dalzollene said. An shook his head: ¡°No, you think too little of them.¡± Kurapika agreed with An¡¯s words: ¡°Yes, although this Warm person looks good, he is not as strong as Uvogin.¡± Dalzollene was surprised: ¡°Is the Ryodan stronger than the Shadow Beasts? Thetter is a unit under the direct order of the Ten Dons, and each member is a famous killer.¡± Kurapika didn¡¯t reply, and An said: ¡°Anyway, it¡¯s the Shadow beast¡¯s problem. Let¡¯s just see what happens.¡± ¡°By the way, how will you deal with the body?¡± Dalzollene asked. ¡°Please help me bury the corpse,¡± Kurapika said tiredly. The side effect of his previous battle took ce, and he needed to rest. ¡°Leave it to me,¡± An said. ¡°Okay, I will trouble you,¡± Kurapika replied. Dalzollene and Kurapika moved away, and An using his Predator ability and started absorbing Uvogin¡¯s Nen. After ten minutes, An¡¯s Nen increased by 20,000 points. ¡°Now, I have about 100,000 Points in my normal state, and if I use all of my strength, I can reach 130,000 points.¡± An estimated. ¡°Well, I no longer have a use for you.¡± An raised his hand and froze Uvogin, and he shattered itpletely. After this, An returned to the Vi. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 169: Chrollo! Chapter 169: Chrollo! [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// In an abandoned building, Chrollo waited for the other members to return. His face was quite gloomy, and it was the first time the other members actually saw him looking like that. It¡¯s been three hours, and four members were missing. They were Franklin, Feitan, Uvogin, and Nobunaga. They were four fighters, and losing them would be quite a blow to the Ryodan. ¡°Wait till six in the morning, and if they don¡¯t return, you guys leave temporarily. At this time, Phinks Magcub said: ¡°Chief, someone posted a bounty on our heads.¡± Everyone directly looked at Phinks Magcub. ¡°Who posted the bounty?¡± Chrollo asked in a cold tone. ¡°It¡¯s the gang belonging to the ten Dons.¡± Phinks Magcub said: ¡°They announced that they killed a guy who attacked the auction and discovered that he was one of the Gen¡¯ie Ryodan. If they kill any member, they can get between 500 million and 1 billion.¡± ¡°Who was the guy they killed?¡± Chrollo frowned. ¡°It¡¯s¡­ Uvogin.¡± Phinks Magcub hesitated as he informed Chrollo. ¡°What?¡± Chrollo was surprised. Everyone there was shocked as well and couldn¡¯t believe this. ¡°Are you sure it¡¯s Uvogin?¡± Chrollo asked in a deep voice. ¡°Well, they released a picture of Uvogin¡¯s body. His body was in the trunk of a car with a pale face and no sign of life. ¡°Is the picture not tempered?¡± Chrollo asked with suppressed anger. Phinks Magcub shook his head: ¡°I think it¡¯s authentic.¡± ¡°That means that Uvogin is dead,¡± Chrollo said with a green face. ¡°Yes.¡± Phinks Magcub nodded. He didn¡¯t feel good about the death of hisrade. The same goes for the others. They all showed a sad expression when they confirmed Uvogin¡¯s death. At this moment, the spiders were at a loss and were sad. After a while, Chrollo said: ¡°Uvogin¡¯s is a strong individual, and it¡¯s not easy to kill him. It¡¯s impossible for the fellow of the Ten Dons to kill him, which means this was done by someone else.¡± ¡°I found that the ten dons hired a gang by the name of Shadow beasts, and they are supposed to be quite strong. Maybe they are the cause of this.¡± Phinks Magcub made a guess. ¡°Shadow beast?¡± Chrollo wasn¡¯t certain: ¡°I¡¯ve heard about them. In that case, Uvogin¡¯s death and the disappearance of the others make sense.¡± ¡°So, what should we do now?¡± Machi asked. ¡°Find the Shadow beast and ask for Franklin¡¯s whereabouts, then kill them to avenge Uvogin,¡± Chrollo said. ¡°Ok then, I will go.¡± ¡°Ok, I will head there.¡± Phinks was the first to stand up. ¡°I¡¯m going too.¡± The spiders who were there stood up one after the other. Phinks Magcub said: ¡°Chief, what about the ten dons? If we don¡¯t deal with them, the bounty will stay there.¡± Chrollo pondered for a while and said: ¡°Leave this to me. I will find someone to kill them.¡± ¡°Find someone?¡± The spiders were stunned. The Gen¡¯ie Ryodan would unexpectedly look for someone to deal with their trouble? ¡°Chief, let us do it,¡± Machi said. ¡°We have to deal with the Shadow beasts, and we are short on manpower right now. The ten Dons¡¯ current location is secretive and other than the shadow beasts, there may be others to protect them, so it is the fastest and safest way to hire a professional Assassin for the job.¡± ¡°Who is the one you will ask for?¡± Machi asked curiously. ¡°There are many professional Assassin in the world, but when ites to fame, then the Zoldycks are the best.¡± Phinks Magcub said. Chrollo nodded: ¡°Well, I happen to know an Assassin from the Zoldyck family. If I ask him to do it, I will get a 20% discount.¡± Even though it was a 20% discount, it will be a sky-high price. ¡°It¡¯s okay, we can make more money, but the Ten dons must die,¡± Pakunoda said. Although they were famous thieves, they won¡¯t let trouble makers off the hook. In addition to the trouble, Uvogin died, and some other members disappeared, so the ten dons must be dealt with. Chrollo took his cells phone and made a call. ¡°Hello, illumi?¡± Chrollo said. ¡°Chrollo? What a surprise, you actually called me?¡± A slightly surprised voice transmitted from the phone. ¡°Illumi, I have some business for you. I don¡¯t know if you will take it.¡± Chrollo asked. ¡°Of course, since you¡¯re an acquaintance, you take priority if there is money,¡± Illumi said ¡°Then, I want you to get rid of the ten Dons. Can you do it?¡± Chrollo asked.¡°Well, I can, but those old men are high up in the food chain, and it would be a little troublesome to get rid of them. The price will be high.¡± ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter, and I will pay. I hope you can finish them as soon as possible.¡± ¡°Well, I will give this mission priority and go right now to get rid of them,¡± Illumi answered. ¡°Well, sorry for the trouble then,¡± Chrollo said. After the call, Chrollo said: ¡°It¡¯s done. The ten Dons will soon be dead. Now, go out and find the Shadow Beasts and get rid of them to avenge Uvogin.¡± ¡°Chief, should I go too?¡± At this time, Hisoka spoke for the first time. ¡°Of course, don¡¯t forget that you¡¯re a member as well, Hisoka, and with ourbat power as low as they are now, you¡¯re needed.¡± Chrollo nced at Hisoka and walked out first. ¡°Hehe, So thebat power now is low? That¡¯s great, and I can find a chance to fight Chief secretly now.¡± Hisoka thought. He joined the Ryodan for two purposes. The first one to get some fun as he was bored, and the second one is to fight against Chrollo. However, there were at least two people always following him, so he didn¡¯t get a chance to do it. But with Uvogin¡¯s death and the disappearance of the others, he can get his chance soon. Of course, Hisoka won¡¯t reveal his secret too soon and won¡¯t rush into this. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 170: Gap in Strength Chapter 170: Gap in Strength [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Chief, how will we find the shadow Beasts?¡± Machi asked on the way. Chrollo replied: ¡°It¡¯s simple. The Shadow Beasts belong to the Ten Dons, so as long as we cause trouble in their territory, we will attract the Shadow beasts to us.¡± ¡°This is the quickest and most straightforward way.¡± Phinks Magcub said: ¡°Chief, let me deal with this. You don¡¯t need to take action. When the Shadow Beasts appear, I will deal with them.¡± ¡°Okay, you can deal with it.¡± Chrollo agreed. Chrollo knew Phinks Magcub¡¯s power very well. The mobs can¡¯t cause him trouble. Soon, Shalnark stopped the car at an intersection. ¡°This is one of the ces for the auction. Franklin and Feitan disappeared here.¡± Shalnark said. ¡°I¡¯ll go then.¡± Phinks Magcub opened the door and directly walked toward the building. At this time, dozens of Mafia members were outside the building and noticed a blond maning over. ¡°Hey, stop.¡± Someone shouted. Phinks Magcub didn¡¯t stop and walked straight toward them. ¡°Stop for me.¡± The Mafia took their pistols and pointed at Phinks Magcub, and asked: ¡°Who are you? If you don¡¯t stop, we will shoot.¡± Phinks Magcub sneered: ¡°aren¡¯t you guys looking for who attacked the auction? I¡¯m one of them.¡± ¡°What?¡± The Ten mobs present froze when they heard this. ¡°Quick, shoot him, kill him now, kill him. We can get a billion if we kill him.¡± All of them pulled the trigger one after another. However, Phinks Magcub was faster than their bullets. With a bone-cracking sound, the necks of all the mafia members there cracked as they went limp on the ground. ¡°What trash.¡± Phinks Magcub looked at them in disdain. The only remaining mafia member alive was trembling, but Phinks Magcub didn¡¯t attack him and said: ¡°Go inform your people that we are waiting for them here.¡± The man quickly ran away. Soon after, dozen of cars came outside the building and blocked the street. Arge number of suits wearing Mafia surrounded Phinks Magcub. ¡°Are you the one attacking the auction of the Ten Dons? Aren¡¯t you braveing here and offering your bounty to us? Tell me the whereabouts of your aplices, and we will let you die quickly.¡± As soon as he said this, a shadow appeared in front of him, and with a crack, the leader who was talking died. ¡°Shoot, shoot!¡± All gangsters present started shooting at Phinks Magcub, who didn¡¯t care and started a massacre. Everywhere he passed, a crack sounded, and a man died. In less than three minutes, 100 gang members died. ¡°Cheh, no matter how many of you are here, I can kill you easily. Is there no one better here?¡± Phinks Magcub deliberately left a few alive again. One of the mobs remaining alive dared to stand up and say: ¡°You wait here. The Ten Dons will clean you up.¡± ¡°Okay, I will spare your life. You go call someone, and I will wait here.¡± Phinks Magcub was arrogant and didn¡¯t put them in his eyes. The ten dons were informed immediately and soon contacted the Shadow beasts. Half an hourter, Phinks Magcub, who was waiting there, felt several aura¡¯s approaching. ¡°Oh? There are here?¡± Feeling them getting closer and closer, Phinks Magcub released his aura as well. A dozen figures appeared around Phinks Magcub, and each of them looked very weird, not resembling humans. ¡°Are you a member of the Gen¡¯ie Ryodan?¡± One of the Shadow Beasts asked. Phinks Magcub sneered and nced at them: ¡°Are you guys the Shadow beasts belonging to the Ten Dons? All of you look ugly.¡± ¡°You are the only one here, and you seem pretty arrogant.¡± ¡°I want to cut your tongue off.¡± ¡°I will pull your ears.¡± The Shadow beasts were irritated by Phinks Magcub¡¯s arrogance. Faced with the threats, Phinks Magcub wasn¡¯t moved at all. ¡°Before I kill you, I have a question. Some of my partners are missing, and one of them is dead. Was it you¡¯re doing?¡± The Shadow beasts didn¡¯t answer. ¡°If you don¡¯t answer, then it doesn¡¯t matter.¡± Phinks Magcub stretched his arm and continued: ¡°I will just kill you all.¡± ¡°Do you think you can kill all of us alone?¡± one of the Shadow beasts sneered as they decided to capture Phinks Magcub alive and interrogate him. ¡°Who said that I¡¯m alone here? Idiots.¡± Phinks Magcub¡¯s words made all the Shadow Beasts stunned, and their expression changed as they felt several auras around them. It was Chrollo and the others making their presence known. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s fight.¡± Chrollo appeared, and Phinks Magcub rushed up. The battle started quickly. Explosions lightened the dark sky, and in ten minutes, the Shadow beasts were dead. Phinks Magcub said: ¡°I thought they are powerful, but they¡¯re just some third rate.¡± The battle onlysted for ten minutes, and the result was unexpected to the Ryodan since they thought that the Shadow beasts were strong. Chrollo looked at thest member alive of the shadow beasts and asked: ¡°Some of ours disappeared. Did you do it?¡± ¡°No, No, we didn¡¯t catch any of you.¡± The Shadow beasts member replied feebly. Hearing this, Chrollo frowned and then asked another question: ¡°then the picture of the dead spider you posted, how did you get him?¡± ¡°That guy¡­ was killed by the bodyguard of the Nostrade Family.¡± The Shadow beast replied. ¡°Are you sure they were the bodyguards of the Nostrade Family?¡± ¡°Yes, they gave us the dead body.¡± ¡°That¡¯s all.¡± Chrollo nodded and shoved his hand into the Shadow beast¡¯s chest, killing him. After killing him, Chrollo said: ¡°Immediately investigate the details of the Nostrade family and find out the bodyguard¡¯s location.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 171: Message Chapter 171: Message [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// In a hotel room, Phinks Magcub quickly found all the information about the Nostrade family on the inte. ¡°Chief, the leader of the Nostrade Family, is called Light Nostrade and one of the cadres of the Ritz family. I think I should mention that the reason Light Nostrade was able to climb his way up is because of the Nen ability of his daughter.¡± Chrollo frowned: ¡°His daughter¡¯s ability? Can his daughter use Nen?¡± ¡°Thisdy is called Neon Nostrade and was born with a divination ability in the form of a poem. She can predict good and bad fortune that would happen to someone in a month.¡± Phinks Magcub exined. ¡°Oh?¡± Even the well-informed Chrollo didn¡¯t know about this ability which slightly surprised him. ¡°That¡¯s really interesting.¡± ¡°Because of this ability, many people would seek her out to look into their future. When there is something bad, as long as you obey the warnings, you can escape a catastrophe. Light Nostrade quickly climbed to his current position relying on this ability. However, this caused many people to target his daughter, and he hired a group of bodyguards to protect her from anything.¡± ¡°Can you find the information about those bodyguards?¡± Chrollo frowned. ¡°Yes, give me a moment.¡± After ten minutes, Phinks Magcub found every information he can about the bodyguards of the Nostrade family. ¡°The captain of the guards is called Dalzollene, and the bodyguards are called Basho, Melody, Baise, An¡­.¡± ¡°An?¡± Hearing this, Chrollo was startled and said: ¡°Phinks, is there a picture of the bodyguard named An? Show it to me.¡± ¡°Yea, each of them has a photo on the website.¡± Phinks Magcub opened the picture, and as Chrollo saw it, he breathed a sigh of relief and said: ¡°It seems like just a name.¡± Just now, when he heard the name An, he thought it was the An he knew. Fortunately, it was another person. If it was the An he knew, it would¡¯ve been tricky since he knew An¡¯s power and how quickly he can progress. He had no doubt that An can kill Uvogin. However, he didn¡¯t rule out the possibility of appearance changing ability. Speaking of which, there is a grudge between Uvogin and An. Uvogin¡¯s death might really be rted to An. Chrollo frowned and said: ¡°Phinks, let me see the pictures of all the bodyguards.¡± Since they could kill Uvogin, then they are not so simple. As he looked at the pictures, Chrollo¡¯s expression changed slightly: ¡°Wait, this person is¡­.¡± ¡°Chief, do you know him?¡± Phinks Magcub asked. ¡°Zoom in on the photo of Kurapika.¡± After seeing him, Chrollo said: ¡°I can¡¯t be wrong. It¡¯s really him.¡± ¡°Chief, you know this Kuapika?¡± Phinks Magcub was curious. Chrollo nodded and said: ¡°This Kurapika participated in the Hunter exam with me, Pakunoda, and Uvogin.¡± Pakunoda walked and took a look, then nodded and said: ¡°I¡¯ve seen him.¡± Chrollo said in a deep voice: ¡°You know, Pakunoda, he passed the exam like me in the end and got a license.¡± Phinks frowned and said: ¡°This means he is a professional Hunter? This can be tricky.¡± ¡°He isn¡¯t an ordinary one as well. This guy has a background linked to us.¡± Chrollo said. ¡°Who is he, Chief?¡± Everyone was curious now. ¡°He is a survivor of the kurta n.¡± When Chrollo said this, Phinks and the others were surprised. ¡°The kurta n, isn¡¯t that the red-eyed tribe we wiped out a few years ago?¡± ¡°Yes, Kurapika is a survivor of that n,¡± Chrollo said. ¡°It makes sense then that Uvogin died. That Kurapika guy is probably want to avenge his n.¡± Phinks Magcub made a guess, and Chrollo nodded and said: ¡°I think so as well.¡± ¡°What¡¯s the matter with the kurta n? Who are they?¡± Shizuku asked. Machi looked at Shizuku and said: ¡°Don¡¯t you know? Oh, you joined uster and didn¡¯t participate in that event.¡± ¡°The eyes of the Kurta n are hailed as one of the seven beauties of the world. A few years ago, the Chief led us, and we destroyed them and took their eyes. Thus, Kurapika is after us to avenge his n. In other words, he hates the Ryodan more than anything in the world.¡± Machi exined. ¡°Mm.¡± Shizuku nodded and then mattered: ¡°In that case, it shouldn¡¯t matter to me because I wasn¡¯t a member then.¡± ¡°Well, you are a member now, and that guy wants to get his revenge from all of the Ryodan, whether you participated in the massacre or not,¡± Machi said. ¡°So, what should we do now?¡± Asked Shizuku. Everyone looked at Chrollo, who said solemnly: ¡°Phinks, help us find the property of the Nostrade Family in Yorknew City and investigate them one by one. First, tell me the whereabouts of Neon Nostrade.¡± ¡°Chief, are you going to take her Divination?¡± Pakunoda asked. Chrollo nodded: ¡°We can¡¯t act recklessly in this matter. If I go after Kurapika now, I think an ident is bound to happen. So we will find Neon and use her fortune telling to make our n.¡± Half an hourter, Phinks said: ¡°Chief, I found the hotel that she is staying in.¡± Chrollo nodded and said: ¡°Well, you guys stay here. For the time being, I will go with Machi.¡± ¡°Be careful, Chief,¡± Pakunoda said. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I will be okay.¡± Chrollo smiled. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 172: Neon Chapter 172: Neon [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The news of the annihtion of the Shadow Beasts quickly spread amongst the Mafia and the underworld¡¯s organization. The Shadow beasts were the most powerful guards of the ten dons, and since they can¡¯t deal with the enemy, then the ordinary members were helpless against them as well. Therefore, the Mafia didn¡¯t dare move, but they still reported the matter to the ten dons. As for the old men, they wanted to save their faces that were lost by the Shadow Beasts and directly hired the world¡¯s top Assassins to deal with the Ryodan. This news reached Dalzollene, and he directly informed An, Kurapika, and the others. ¡°The Shadow Beasts were lured out and were destroyed.¡± ¡°That¡¯s expected.¡± An sneered: ¡°I said long ago, third rate Nen users like the Shadow Beasts has nothing on the Gen¡¯ie Ryodan.¡± ¡°Yea, but I didn¡¯t expect them to be so strong. Now that the Shadow beasts are destroyed, will they find us next? We are the ones who gave them the corpse of Uvogin, and if they discover that we did it, things will be troublesome.¡± Dalzollene frowned. ¡°I think they already know that Uvogin was killed by the Nostrade Family bodyguards, and they have our information as well,¡± An said lightly. Hearing this, Dalzollene¡¯s face changed: ¡°What should we do? If theye here, we will be in trouble, and maybe the Nostrade Family is done for. No, I have to report this to the boss as soon as possible.¡± At this moment, An remembered something and said: ¡°This is bad. Neon might be in danger. I will go right now.¡± When An left, Chrollo and Machi were already in the hotel where Neon was staying. Neon was quite angry at the moment since the auction was attacked and she didn¡¯t get any item she wanted. Squ and Ivienkov felt quite angry, but they repressed their feelings as it was their duty to be here. ¡°Miss, don¡¯t be angry. We will apany you to the mall tomorrow.¡± ¡°Besides, the auction festival willst till the tenth of this month, and young miss still has an opportunity to go to the auction again.¡± The two attendants, Alisha, and Alemie, said to calm Neon down. However, Squ and Ivienkov were driven out of the room. ¡°I don¡¯t want to see you two, just go out and stand guard.¡± The two were angry as they obeyed and left the room. In fact, they wanted to go outside for a while, and it was better than looking at this spoileddy making trouble all day. ¡°What¡¯s wrong, were you driven out by the youngdy?¡± Baise asked Squ and Ivienkov as she returned from the bathroom. ¡°That stubborn wayward brat is annoying, and all she knows is mess around with money,¡± Squined. ¡°If you¡¯re not happy, you can resign. No one is stopping you.¡± Baise smiled. ¡°Resign? No, even though protecting that brat is irritating, they pay us well, and I have a lot of dogs to feed, so I can¡¯t live without this job.¡± Squ helplessly said. ¡°Well, you two will just watch over her here. I¡¯m hungry, so I¡¯m out to have a meal, thene backter.¡± With that, Baise left. ¡°Remember to bring something for us, and we are hungry as well.¡± Squ and Ivienkov said. Baise made an Ok gesture before taking the elevator to the first floor. Although it was past midnight, the city was still lively, and the streets were full of people, and the shops were open. This is the city that never sleeps. On the other side, An was rushing toward the hotel, and suddenly, his cell phone rang. Taking a nce, he saw that Baise was the one calling him. ¡°Hello, what¡¯s the matter?¡± ¡°Thedy was taken away.¡± Baise was flustered. An frowned and said: ¡°What happened?¡± ¡°It was a man and a woman. They killed Squ and Ivienkov, then knocked out thedy and took her away. They left by car.¡± An directly asked: ¡°Where are you now?¡± ¡°At the convenience store opposite of the hotel.¡± Baise quickly said. ¡°Wait for me there, and I am close.¡± A few minutester, An was in front of the convenience store. ¡°Get in and tell me what happened.¡± An opened the door and let Baise in. ¡°Nothing happened to you?¡± An asked. ¡°I was hungry and came down to have a snack, which made me escape this. Otherwise, I would be dead like Squ and the others.¡± Baise blushed a little. An nodded and asked: ¡°Where are the Lady¡¯s caretakers?¡± ¡°They are fine, but they are quite frightened,¡± Baise said. ¡°So? What should we do now? Do we call the others and go rescue thedy?¡± Baise asked nervously. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Rescue Neon. Reward: Star tinum] [2: Call the other bodyguard and go together to rescue Neon. Reward: (T/N: The Author didn¡¯t write this one.)] [3: The risk is too great. Let nature take its course. Reward: Increase Nen by 2,000 points.] An didn¡¯t even hesitate a second and chose the first option. It was his job to rescue Neon, and the reward was just a bonus. An nced at Baise and asked: ¡°Do you know which way they went?¡± ¡°I remember the car¡¯s te number, and they were headed to the west street. If we chase after them now, we might be able to catch up.¡± Baise said. ¡°Okay, sit tight.¡± At this moment, An turned the car around and chased after the Ryodan quickly. His job was Neon¡¯s safety, and since they had taken her away, he is responsible for bringing her back unharmed. Therefore, An wanted to rescue Neon as he didn¡¯t want the me to fall on him and hinder any further jobs he might have in the future. Furthermore, Star tinum is a great motivator as well. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 173: Lovely Ghostwriter! Chapter 173: Lovely Ghostwriter! [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// In an abandoned building, Chrollo stared at the woman in front of him. Neon was horrified as the other members of the Ryodan stood behind Chrollo and shouted: ¡°What do you want to do?¡± ¡°Shut up.¡± Phinks red at her. ¡°If you yell again, I will pull your tongue out.¡± Neon closed her mouth obediently as she was scared of Phinks. She realized that if she dared to disobey, they would kill her. At the same time, she was guessing their identities. They the thieves or the Mafia? She couldn¡¯t find the answer. But judging from the way they dressed, they didn¡¯t look like the Mafia. ¡°Before answering your question, answer one of mine,¡± Chrollo said. ¡°What is it?¡± Neon realized that this person was their leader. Chrollo looked at Neon and said: ¡°I heard that you could predict the future. Is that true?¡± Neon hesitated and slowly nodded: ¡°I can. Many people ask me to look into their future. Did you take me for that?¡± Chrollo didn¡¯t answer and instead asked: ¡°Then have you used this ability on yourself?¡± ¡°No.¡± Neon shook her head: ¡°My ability can only look at other people¡¯s future, not my own.¡± ¡°Oh?¡± Seeing Chrollo in doubt, Neon quickly said: ¡°I¡¯m not lying, if I can predict my future, I wouldn¡¯t have been kidnapped, because I would¡¯ve been able to escape this by following the poem, but I didn¡¯t because I can¡¯t use it on myself.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Chrollo could tell that she wasn¡¯t lying. ¡°I would like to ask a favor from you, if you are willing, of course. If not, then I will let you go.¡± Chrollo said. ¡°Do you want me to help see your future?¡± Neon asked. ¡°Yes, you¡¯re very smart.¡± Chrollo smiled slightly. ¡°Yes, as long as you let me go, I will do it.¡± Neon readily agreed. ¡°How urate is your divination?¡± Chrollo asked. ¡°It should be 100% urate.¡± Neon said with confidence. As long as she had that ability, no one will hurt her, but they woulde and beg for help instead. ¡°Then, first tell me my fortune,¡± Chrollo said. Neon nodded, took out a paper and pen, and handed it to Chrollo. ¡°Then please write down your name, date of birth, blood type, and address. The more details, the better.¡± Chrollo took the pen and started filling in his information. Name: Chrollo Lucilfer. Nickname: Gen¡¯ie Ryodan¡¯s Leader ce of birth: Meteor City. Age: 26 Gender: Male Blood type: AB+ Height: 177 Cm Weight: 68kg Hobbies: Collecting treasure, looking at beautiful things, and reading books. After a while, Chrollo handed the paper to Neon, who took the paper and, after taking a look, held the pen and said: ¡°Then, I will start the Divination.¡± In an instant, Neon¡¯s Demeanor changed, and her right hand holding the pen started writing quickly. ¡°Oh?¡± Chrollo used Gyo and saw the demon appearing on Neon¡¯s hand. ¡°So, that¡¯s her ability. It¡¯s like a demon controlling her hand and writing the prophecy.¡± Chrollomented. Soon, Neon handed out the paper to Chrollo: ¡°Please take a look.¡± The poem said: The calendar is missing a part, and the forgotten month will be mourned. With the orchestra¡¯s songs, and the mourning clothes, the moon of November will pass steadily. The chrysanthemum will wither along with the leaves, lying down beside the blood-stained eyes. Even if only half of the partners are remaining, your superiority will still stand. Enjoy the time you have, or find new partners. You can go east to start again as people are waiting for you. Looking at those lines, Chrollo stayed silent as he contemted the meaning of those words. ¡°¡­ hey, why are you crying?¡± Neon suddenly noticed the tears on Chrollo¡¯s cheeks. Pakunoda and Machi found tears falling down from Chrollo¡¯s eyes, and they were stunned. ¡°What exactly is the poem talking about that made the Chief cry?¡± The Ryodan members were curious about this. After a while, Chrollo wiped away his tears and said: ¡°I¡¯m sorry. I couldn¡¯t help my tears when I understood the meaning of the poem.¡± ¡°Chief, are you okay?¡± ¡°I¡¯m fine, but¡­.¡± Chrollo stopped for a bit before continuing: ¡°some of you will have an ident, and this already happened. Maybe some of you will die next time.¡± Chief, this is only fortune-telling and not the reality.¡± Phinks said. As an atheist, Phinks never believe in those things. Chrollo said solemnly: ¡°I believe it because Uvogin is already dead, and Franklin and Feitan are missing. We can¡¯t contact Nobunaga as well, and that¡¯s four who had an ident.¡± Hearing this, the Spiders stayed silent, and the atmosphere became gloomy. ¡°Chief, I want to look at my fortune as well.¡± At this moment, Shizuku said. Chrollo nodded and looked at Neon and said: ¡°Can you help my friends with that?¡± ¡°Well, yes.¡± Neon nodded as she knew she couldn¡¯t refuse. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 174: Spiders’ Dilemma Chapter 174: Spiders¡¯ Dilemma [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Soon, Shizuku wrote down her information on a piece of paper. Name: Shizuku Murasaki Gender: Female ce of Birth: Meteor City Blood type: O+ Height: 160cm Weight: 45kg Nen Ability: Conjurer Number: 8 Hobbies: Reading books, Shopping, and collecting treasures After taking Shizuku¡¯s information, Neon once again started writing her poem. It said: The calendar is missing a part, and the forgotten month will be mourned. In order to not leave the frost moon alone, you and your partners will ssh the tombstone with blood. In a dark storage area, you¡¯re about to enter eternal sleep. Solitude is terrible, because nothing is more terrifying than being alone. After taking a look, Shizuku said: ¡°It looks like I might die as well.¡± Shizuku gave the paper to Chrollo, and he nodded after reading it. ¡°ording to what it said, there is no doubt that it¡¯s a prophecy about Death, and you¡¯re not alone in that. Because it said, you and your partners will ssh the tombstone with blood. The tombstone represents Death, which means, other than Shizuku, others will die as well. ording to the sentence ¡®Not to leave the Frost moon alone¡¯ should mean that one of us has died. The frost moon mentioned should be the moon of November, the 11th month, which is Uvogin¡¯s number.¡± Hearing Chrollo¡¯s analysis, the members present frowned. ¡°I¡¯ll see my future as well,¡± Pakunoda said. So, she started writing her information. Name: Pakunoda Age: 27 Gender: Female Blood type: O Height: 182cm Weight: 52 Nen Ability: Specialist. Hobby: Traveling Neon once again started writing and, in the end, the poem said: There is brightness in the dark, and you will make too many choices in a cramped room. As long as Death lingers around you, you will have to choose glory or betrayal. ¡°It seems that I will also die,¡± Pakunoda said after reading the poem. ¡°Based on the content inside, it seems that you will be faced with two choices, either betrayal or honor! The betrayal is undoubtedly referring to betraying the Ryodan and yourpanions. If you choose to betray, the god of Death may give you a way out to stay alive, but if you choose to honor, you will die. This should be the meaning of your fortune-telling.¡± Shalnark became curious as well and filled his paper next. Name: Shalnark Gender: Male Blood type: O Height: 180cm Weight: 72kg Nen Ability: Maniptor Hobbies: surfing the inte, being a hacker, and collecting information Neon once again started writing, and the result was: In the dark, Death will stare at you and torment you. To avoid Death¡¯s eyes, you must choose to escape the darkness. ¡°It seems that I won¡¯t be spared either.¡± Shalnark smiled wryly and said: ¡°The first sentence should mean that I will be targeted by someone who can kill me and then attacked by him, and the next one means that if I want to survive, I must flee.¡± Chrollo¡¯s face was gloomy. Through those poems, he can tell that Shizuku, Pakunoda, and Shalnark will face Death. With the disappearance of Nobunaga and the others whose lives and deaths are unknown, more than half of the Ryodan are facing Death. ¡°Phinks, Bonolenov, Kortopi, and Hisoka, pleasee and try.¡± ¡°No, I don¡¯t need it.¡± Phinks refused decisively. ¡°I don¡¯t need it either because I¡¯m an atheist,¡± Kortopi said. ¡°The same for me, I don¡¯t believe in divination, and even if there is a god of death, I will kill him,¡± Bonolenov said. ¡°Then, I will try,¡± Hisoka said as he yed with a card in his hand. Therefore, he started filling the paper with his information. Name: Hisoka Age: 27 Gender: Male Blood type: B Height: 187cm Weight: 91kg Nen ability: Transmuter Profession: Professional Hunter, Assassin Hobbies: ying cards, doing magic tricks, and looking for prey. Once again, Neon started writing his fortune, and as soon as Hisoka saw the poem, his expression was weird and excited. Chrollo looked at him curiously and asked: ¡°Hisoka, can you read your poem for everyone?¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Hisoka smiled and read his poem. The spider hiding in the darkness will be targeted by Death. The eight feet will another two. Get out of the dark and damp cave as soon as possible because you¡¯re one of the feet as well. ¡°What does this mean?¡± Phinks asked. ¡°It probably means that we will be targeted, and if we want to survive, then we need to leave quickly,¡± Hisoka said. Chrollo¡¯s expression was gloomier as he said: ¡°Hisoka¡¯s poem is the most informative so far. The spider mentioned is undoubtedly the Ryodan, and the eight feet are the current members present here, each one corresponding to one leg. The damp cave is probably referring to the current temporary hideout. Thest sentence means that if we want to escape this catastrophe, we need to leave or else at least two members will die here. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 175: Memory Bullet Chapter 175: Memory Bullet [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Inside the abandoned building, the atmosphere became gloomy as the poems of Neon told them that most of them are going to die. As the leader of the group, Chrollo had to make a decision as fast as he can. 1: Leave as soon as possible and avoid death and save strength. 2: Stay here and face death. ¡°Chief, what do we do?¡± Machi asked as her instinct was going high wire, and she suggested: ¡°I think it¡¯s better to leave this ce for now.¡± Chrollo thought for a bit and said: ¡°Machi is right. From the poems, we know that we are in danger and should leave quickly. Those who want to leave can do it now, and I won¡¯t block you and me you.¡± Hearing this, everyone looked around, but no one of them left. However, at this time, Hisoka said: ¡°In that case, I will leave first, because ording to the poem, If I don¡¯t leave this cave, I will die. Although I want to see who is this god of death, my instincts are telling me to leave.¡± Chrollo nodded: ¡°Okay, Hisoka; you can go.¡± ¡°I hope I will see you alive soon then.¡± Hisoka smiled and left. Watching Hisoka walking out, Phinks eximed: ¡°Chief, you will let him go?¡± ¡°Phinks, you can leave as well,¡± Chrollo said calmly. ¡°Chief, I won¡¯t leave, not till Nobunaga, Feitan, and Franklin are back, and we avenge Uvogin.¡± ¡°Yeah, Chief, if we leave like this, I will be unfair, and if we did leave, won¡¯t that make us afraid? That¡¯s not our style.¡± The remaining members were obviously as unwilling as Phinks, but no one knows if they were thinking like that at heart. Chrollo said seriously: ¡°The spider is a whole body, and in danger, something it cut off a part of itself to survive. Moreover, the purpose of divination is to allow us to avoid death. If we chose to stay here, then there won¡¯t be a purpose for taking the girl, right?¡± ¡°At least, before leaving, let us get the guy who killed Uvogin,¡± Phinks suggested. He was truly angered about Uvogin¡¯s death. Chrollo frowned and said: ¡°We don¡¯t know if Uvogin died by Kurapika¡¯s hands. If he did, then there is a 90% chance that that Kurapika is the person in the poem who will bring death to us. If we seek revenge, then ording to the poem, we will suffer some losses even if we managed to kill him, which won¡¯t be worth it.¡± Phinks didn¡¯t listen: ¡°Anyways, we should find Kurapika¡¯s location, and even if he is the god of death, we will deal with him.¡± ¡°ording to the information gathered by Shalnark, Kurapika is employed by the Nostrade Family. It should be difficult to find his location.¡± Machi said. Chrollo looked at Neon and asked: ¡°This girl is the daughter of Light Nostrade. She should know where Kurapika is.¡± ¡°Do you know Kurapika?¡± Machi looked at Neon. ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡± Neon scratched her head. ¡°Impossible, he is a bodyguard hired for you. You should know him.¡± Machi looked fiercely at Neon. Neon was frightened as she exined: ¡°Our family hired many bodyguards, and I can¡¯t remember all of them. I only know a few¡­.¡± Hearing this, Chrollo said: ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter if you don¡¯t know, but you should at least know where the bodyguards are staying, right?¡± ¡°I¡­¡± Neon hesitated before saying: ¡°I don¡¯t know as well. I only stay at the hotel.¡± Chrollo turned his head and said to Pakunoda: ¡°Forget it, Pakunoda, sue your ability to find out the memory of thest two days.¡± ¡°What are you looking for?¡± Pakunoda asked. ¡°Bodyguards, the ones beside her, and anything that should matter to us currently,¡± Chrollo said in a deep tone. ¡°Okay.¡± Pakunoda nodded. ¡°What are you doing?¡± Seeing Pakunoda walking toward her, Neon eximed in terror and said: ¡°I just told you your fortune, you want to kill me now?¡± Pakunoda smiled and said: ¡°Rx, I just want to get some information from you, and I won¡¯t hurt you.¡± ¡°I can tell you whatever you want.¡± Neon said. ¡°No, I just need to ask a question and touch you to know.¡± Saing this, Pakunoda put a hand on Neon¡¯s head and activated her Nen, and said: ¡°Psychometry!¡± By touching any part of a human or an object, Pakunoda could use her ability to see the recent memories of said human or object, and she can shoot out those memories using her Memory Bomb. The Memory bomb is a special Nen Bullet Pakunoda use with her gun to share memories. Soon, Pakunoda could see Neon¡¯s Memories, and her expression became serious. ¡°What¡¯s wrong, Pakunoda?¡± Seeing Pakunoda¡¯s expression, Phinks asked. ¡°I will let you know through the Memory Bomb.¡± After this, Pakunoda formed the bullets and shot everyone in the head to share the memories. In an instant, a lot of pictures and memories invaded every member¡¯s brain. In those memories, they could see Franklin and Feitan killing the guests in the auction, and taking the items. However, an ugly guy in a suit appeared and fought Franklin fiercely before the memories ended. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 176: The Meeting Chapter 176: The Meeting [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Chrollo and the others saw Neon¡¯s Memory of what happened in the auction. ¡°Chief, what do you think?¡± Shalnark asked. Chrollo said seriously: ¡°First, that ce is Feitan and Franklin¡¯s target. They sessfully infiltrated it and killed most of the guests there, and intended to take most of the items. As for the man in the suit that Franklin fought, he is obviously one of the guests in the auction and a bodyguard hired by the Nostrade Family, but this doesn¡¯t stop here¡­.¡± Chrollo looked gloomy as he continued: ¡°I can¡¯t be wrong about this. That guy in the suit is the An I knew. Although he changed his appearance, I can¡¯t change how he moves. He and Uvogin fought in the Hunter exam, and he has the ability to create Ice. Just now, as you saw in the Memory Bomb when he faced Franklin¡¯s bullets, he used an ice wall to defend against them.¡± Pakunoda also knew An and said: ¡°Chief, I think it¡¯s him. Although he changed his appearance, I can still recognize his body shape, which is indeed simr.¡± When Machi heard the word An, she also said: ¡°Could it me the man who froze me in The Heaven¡¯s arena?¡± ¡°That¡¯s him.¡± Chrollo nodded. Phinks, Shalnark, and the others didn¡¯t know An, but from Chrollo¡¯s words, they could tell that he is very strong. ¡°Is he strong, Chief?¡± Phinks asked. Chrollo nodded: ¡°Very strong, and the most important thing is besides Ice making, he has many other abilities. For example, he can fly by stepping on the air. He is fast and strong and can cover his fist and any part of his body with something ck that makes him as strong as Uvogin. Moreover, he is a really good Swordsman, maybe on par with Nobunaga, and has other talents.¡± Phinks couldn¡¯t believe this, but Chrollo didn¡¯t seem to be joking around and said: ¡°Then, I really want to see if that guy is that good.¡± As soon as he said this, He heard a slightly joking voice speaking: ¡°You want to see me, I¡¯m here, you know.¡± Phinks was surprised as well as the other members. Even Chrollo¡¯s usually calm face changed because he didn¡¯t sense anyone. A figure appeared from a dark corridor slowly. Suddenly, Phinks, Machi, and the others were on guard. However, without Chrollo¡¯s orders, no one took action. Chrollo stared at the man and said: ¡°Although you changed your voice and shape, you can¡¯t hide your presence. Is that you, An?¡± ¡°As expected of you, Chrollo, since you recognize me, I won¡¯t bore you with pretending.¡± In the next second, An changed back to his original appearance. ¡°So it¡¯s really you:¡± Chrollo frowned and asked: ¡°An, how did you find this ce?¡± ¡°A colleague of mine found out you took Neon, and I tracked your car,¡± An said. Chrollo couldn¡¯t believe An. After all, he made Kortopi dump several copies of the car and make the illusion of all the buildings around this ce. An seemed to guess Chrollo¡¯s doubt and said: ¡°Most of the buildings outside are illusions made by Nen, and the real thing was hidden inside, so I just passed the illusion and found your base.¡± ¡°So that¡¯s the case. It¡¯s no wonder you found us then.¡± Chrollo said with a dark voice and asked: ¡°Then, why are you here?¡± An shrugged: ¡°It¡¯s very simple. You should know that I¡¯m employed by the Nostrade family as that miss bodyguard, and it¡¯s my job to protect her. You kidnapped her, which troubles me greatly. So my purpose should be clear. As long as you give me that miss, I will leave.¡± Chrollo nced at Neon next to him and said: ¡°I can let her go. She already told us our fortune, but¡­.¡± ¡°Oh, but what?¡± An asked. ¡°You fought against my men in the auction before, right? You should know, Franklin and Feitan.¡± Chrollo asked. An nced at Neon and saw her frightened but not hurt. He nced at Pakunoda beside her and concluded that thetter used her Psychometry and shared everything with her Memory Bomb. If that¡¯s the case, there was no need to deny anything, so he nodded and admitted: ¡°Yes, I did fight them. They were good, so they are members of your group?¡± Hearing this, Chrollo¡¯s heart sunk. An was standing here while Franklin and Feitan didn¡¯t return. This shows the result of the battle. There is a possibility that both were captured, and in the worst case, both were dead. Chrollo couldn¡¯t help asking: ¡°Who won? Where are they now?¡± Chrollo wanted to know what happened. An said: ¡°We fought and the two of them left the city. In addition, they said they were living the Ryodan and asked me to help deliver the message to you and hope you will respect their choice.¡± ¡°You¡¯re lying.¡± Chrollo said coldly: ¡°Franklin and Feitan won¡¯t leave without a word. Tell me, An, where are they? Are they alive or dead?¡± An stayed silent for a bit, then shrugged: ¡°Well, they didn¡¯t leave. They are now under me.¡± ¡°Impossible.¡± Chrollo couldn¡¯t believe An¡¯s words at all. ¡°You don¡¯t believe me?¡± An sneered: ¡°Then how about I call them out, and you see for yourself.¡± After that, An shouted: ¡°Franklin, Feitan,e out. Your former Boss wants to see you.¡± As the voice fell, two figures slowly walked out behind him. One was big, and the other was small. ¡°What?¡± At this time, Chrollo couldn¡¯t maintain hisposure as he stared at Franklin and Feitan behind An with disbelief. The members present were surprised as well. ¡°Why would franklin and Feitan join this guy? That¡¯s impossible.¡± Everyone, including Chrollo, had the same thought and were full of doubt. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Also, I want to ask everyone here to please check out my new Novel Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction! Join our Discord: https://discord.gg/C2duJtRYkd Thanks for your constant support andments. Due to your positive reviews, This novel has 3.9/5 on Novel Update and I hope you can keep the reviewsing!! Chapter 177: Mangekyou Sharingan Chapter 177: Mangekyou Sharingan [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// It wasn¡¯t that surprising that Chrollo and the others were shocked. After all, Feitan and Franklin were members of the Ryodan, and seeing them standing against them was shocking. ¡°Chrollo, as well as you guys, open your eyes and look carefully. They aren¡¯t fakes. Since you know them for a long time, you should be able to tell.¡± An said. To be honest, An didn¡¯t bother to lie to Chrollo. Chrollo looked carefully and felt something weird when he looked at them. It was like Feitan and Franklin don¡¯t have emotions. Their eyes were gray and seemed lifeless. All of them noticed this and looked at each other. After taking a deep breath, Chrollo calmed down his emotion and looked at An. ¡°An, what the hell did you do to them? Tell me, why are they like this?¡± ¡°What happened, you ask?¡± An sneered at this question before looking at the Feitan and Franklin. ¡°They are already dead, right?¡± What Chrollo said surprised Machi and Phinks. ¡°Ah, yes, they are indeed dead.¡± An nodded. Since he dared to show his puppets, he wasn¡¯t afraid of Chrollo learning that they were dead. ¡°In other words, now Franklin and Feitan are your puppets, right?¡± Chrollo stared at An coldly. An shook his head as if correcting Chrollo: ¡°Pay attention to your words. They are my partners, not puppets.¡± Chrollo frowned: ¡°What do you mean?¡± ¡°The two of them are dead; however, they still have their consciousness and memory. Except for the fact that they are dead, they are the same as you know them. They can eat, sleep, and talk, like normal.¡± Saying this, An temporarily lifted his absolute control on Franklin and Feitan, granting them a certain degree of freedom, which in this case, he allowed them to speak. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I won¡¯t be able toe with you in the future,¡± Franklin said. Franklin and Feitan wanted to attack An as soon as they felt the control falter, but An stopped them: ¡°You can¡¯t attack me. After all, partners don¡¯t attack each other.¡± An sneered as he looked at the two of them. Franklin and Feitan looked at An coldly as their pride didn¡¯t allow them to be just puppets for An. The powerlessness they were feeling made them quite angry. ¡°You dare make them like this, and I¡¯m going to kill you.¡± Phinks clenched his fists and red at An. Phinks¡¯ killing intent filled the ce. ¡°Well, you have quite the killing intent. It seems like your rtionship with those two is quite good. In that case, I will consider adding you to be my partner as well. That way, you could be with them again.¡± Anughed. Hearing this, Phinks said coldly: ¡°You mean you can kill me?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. If you want to do something, I can¡¯t guarantee your survival because I don¡¯t show mercy.¡± An said confidently. Franklin and Feitan were killed by him, and Phinks power is as good as theirs, so it wasn¡¯t difficult to kill him. Just when Phinks was ready to attack, Chrollo said: ¡°Phinks, stop.¡± Phinks calmed down when he heard Chrollo¡¯s words and didn¡¯t do anything. Chrollo knew that An¡¯s current ability was greater, far greater than it was in the Hunter exam. Chrollo looked at An and said seriously: ¡°An, why are you disturbing the dead? Franklin and Feitan were killed by you, but why do you want them as your puppet. Just let them rest in peace.¡± Hearing this, An sneered: ¡°Chrollo, these wordsing from your mouth are really ironic, you know.¡± Chrollo was puzzled: ¡°What do you mean?¡± ¡°A few years ago, when you ughtered the Kurta n, in order to obtain their eyes, you deliberately angered them, took their eyes alive, and then eradicated thempletely. As far as bloodthirst is concerned, I¡¯m very kindpared to you. However, it¡¯s normal for you to have such a double standard. After all, Franklin and Feitan grew along with you in Meteor City, so you have quite the friendship with them. But we have to clear something right now, and you are not qualified to talk to me like that.¡± Chrollo was surprised by how much An knew. However, it was impossible for him to leave Feitan and Franklin be An¡¯s puppets. As the Leader of the Ryodan, he will not watch as hispanions turn into puppets even after death. ¡°What do you want for you to release them?¡± Chrollo asked nkly. This was hisst negotiation. ¡°It can¡¯t be done.¡± An shook his head. Both Franklin and Feitan were first-rate masters, and they can be quite helpful. ¡°If you don¡¯t lift the control off them, I will kill your employer, Neon Nostrade.¡± Chrollo nced at Neon. An sneered: ¡°Are you really trying to threaten me?¡± ¡°You can think of it like that,¡± Chrollo said seriously. ¡°It¡¯s really funny. The leader of the Genie Ryodan is actually taking me hostage and threatening me. Aren¡¯t you afraid of beingughed at?¡± An couldn¡¯t helpughing. Chrollo coldly said: ¡°I¡¯m not joking. I never cared about what others thought of me. Now, can you release Feitan and Franklin and let them rest in peace?¡± ¡°No way.¡± An refused instantly. At this moment, Chrollo could no longer suppress his killing intent, but the person he wanted to kill wasn¡¯t Neon but An. The killing Intent was directed at An. Seeing that Chrollo wanted to kill him, An¡¯s eyes turned into scarlet red eyes in an instant. When Chrollo met the Mangekyo Sharingan, he entered in a trance. It was like he lost consciousness for an instant, and suddenly he found himself in a blood-red space. The ce was filled with a sense of death while the earth and sky were both blood red. There is no vitality in this ce, while he was tied to a huge stone pir: ¡°Where is this ce?¡± Chrollo looked around in awe. ¡°This is the World of Tsukuyomi.¡± A cold voice said from nowhere. Chrollo frowned as he looked at An¡¯s figure, appearing out of nowhere. ¡°What did you do?¡± ¡°Also, is wrong with your eyes?¡± Chrollo looked at An¡¯s scarlet eyes and asked. ¡°These eyes are called the Mangekyo Sharingan. Each eye had a powerful technique or a D¨­jutsu, and you are currently under one of them, the Tsukuyomi. I dragged you into the world created by my Sharingan.¡± ¡°Mangekyo Sharingan?¡± Chrollo seemed confused. He only knew of the scarlet eyes of the kurta n but never heard about the Mangekyo Sharingan and what is this so-called D¨­jutsu. Although he didn¡¯t quite understand everything, he knew that he was under one of the Techniques An talked about. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 178: The World Of Tsukuyomi! Part 1 Chapter 178: The World Of Tsukuyomi! Part 1 [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Chrollo, no matter how much time passes in the world, it would be a second outside. Your underlings won¡¯t find anything strange because when they react, this technique would be over.¡± Chrollo, who was tied to a pir, was surprised. From An¡¯s description, he concluded that technique was a strong hypnotic illusion. ¡°In other words, I¡¯m hypnotized, and now I¡¯m in your spiritual world?¡± Chrollo asked. ¡°Correct.¡± An smiled: ¡°For the next 72 hours, I will use the sword in my hand to stab you without interruption. In other words, you will suffer for 72 hours of torture. It depends on your willpower to keep going for that long.¡± Hearing this, Chrollo frowned: ¡°What if I can¡¯t keep going?¡± ¡°You won¡¯t die, but your spirit won¡¯t be able to bear the torment and be on the verge of copse.¡± ¡°In other words, this is a mental attack, right?¡± ¡°Yes, Chrollo. You¡¯re very smart; I hope your spirit is strong. Otherwise, you will be miserable.¡± When An finished talking, his sword directly shed Chrollo. A deep wound appeared on Chrollo¡¯s body, and blood gushed out. Chrollo frowned due to the pain. The pain was very real, as if his real body was cut. However, Chrollo knew that this pain was due to the strength of An¡¯s illusion. The second sh came, and Chrollo took a breath as the pain intensified. The third sh, the fourth, the fifth¡­ Chrollo felt that the 72 hours were too long. He couldn¡¯t remember how many times he was shed open. At first, he was able to keep himself awake, butter the pain swallowed his consciousness. As far as the people outside the illusion know, Chrollo was just standing and ring at An with Killing intent, and the next second, he was on his knees. He seemed very weak and on the verge of losing consciousness. Pakunoda, Machi, Shizuku, Kortopi, Shalnark, Bonolenov, and Phinks didn¡¯t understand what happened. ¡°That¡¯s really embarrassing, Chrollo,¡± An said with disappointment apparent in his voice. An sighed as he looked at Chrollo. He thought that Chrollo could preserve for 72 hours since Kakashi did preserve when Itachi used it on him, even if he was unconscious afterward. Well, Tsukuyomi was the strongest Sharingan Illusion, so even if Chrollo was stronger than ordinary people, he wouldn¡¯t be able to withstand such a technique. ¡°You, what did you do to Chief?¡± Machi red at An. The other members looked at An with Hostility. Although they didn¡¯t know what happened to cause Chrollo¡¯s sudden weakness, from An¡¯s words, it seemed like he was the reason for it. ¡°What¡¯s wrong with that guy¡¯s eyes?¡± Phinks stared at An¡¯s eyes and was puzzled. ¡°Phinks, don¡¯t look into his eyes,¡± Shalnark said seriously. ¡°It seems like Chief looked into in his eyes and then became like that.¡± Shalnark¡¯s words surprised phinks and the others. Just looking at An¡¯s eyes caused their leader to be in such a state? ¡°Shalnark, you¡¯re really smart.¡± An nced at him with admiration: ¡°Are you interested in joining me?¡± ¡°Impossible.¡± ¡°That¡¯s a shame.¡± An shrugged. ¡°You haven¡¯t answered yet. What did you do to Chief?¡± Shalnark frowned. ¡°You can see for yourself. Oh, I didn¡¯t do anything, since all of you were here, did you see me move from my ce at all? Also, you should send him to a head specialist soon, and I¡¯m sure he will be hospitalized for some time as is.¡± All of them red at An. They didn¡¯t see An make any move. That was a fact, so they had no evidence that directly indicates that An caused the current state of Chrollo. They knew that An was the cause, but they didn¡¯t have any way to prove that he did it. Of course, they weren¡¯t detectives looking for proof. All they were worried about was his weird ability. Assuming that An did the same to one of them, they would be in a worse state than their leader because they knew that they weren¡¯tparable to him. Their only advantage right now is their number. If they attack together, they might be able to subdue An. However, they didn¡¯t attack for two reasons. First, they didn¡¯t know the extent of An¡¯s power, and second, their Chief¡¯s current situation. It was the first time they saw Chrollo in his current state. They were currently in a bad situation. They were struggling as they didn¡¯t know what to do right now. Chrollo was the leader who gave them orders, and with him now unable to do so, and they couldn¡¯t make a decision. At this moment, Machi said: ¡°Let take Chief and go. I¡¯m afraid if we don¡¯t get him to the hospital soon, the situation will be worse.¡± Most of the members didn¡¯t object to Machi¡¯s proposal, but they didn¡¯t agree either. Seeing how difficult it was for them to make a decision, An said: ¡°I advise you that you don¡¯t think about doing anything to me, or you will suffer. Now, it¡¯s best to follow Machi¡¯s advice and take your leader and leave.¡± Hearing this, the member of the Ryodan looked at each other. Although they didn¡¯t want to admit it, An¡¯s power was unknown to them, but he was able to handle someone as strong as their leader. Otherwise, Chrollo wouldn¡¯t have been in his current state. Shalnark, who was the smart guy in the Ryodan, said: ¡°Well, let¡¯s take Chief and leave. For now, all of us will leave.¡± ¡°Damn it, and what about him then?¡± Phinks red at An. He couldn¡¯t bear the thought of surrendering to An like that and escape. ¡°I understand how you feel, Phinks, but there is no other choice. Our current situation isn¡¯t good, and we can no longer cause trouble for now.¡± Shalnark said. Phinks could only snort. Although he was unhappy, he said nothing else. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 178: The World Of Tsukuyomi! Part 2 Chapter 178: The World Of Tsukuyomi! Part 2 [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// When they were about to leave, Machi looked at An and asked: ¡°Can you tell me what did you do to Chief?¡± ¡°Tsukuyomi,¡± An said casually. ¡°Tsukuyomi?¡± ¡°Yes, Chrollo¡¯s spirit was greatly damaged. That is the reason for his current state.¡± An exined. ¡°So, what will happen to him?¡± Machi asked. An shook his head: ¡°I don¡¯t know, if he can regain his consciousness, there wouldn¡¯t be any problem. He would just need ten to fifteen days of rest, and he will be fine. But if he doesn¡¯t wake up, he may stay in aa for the rest of his life. Because of his damaged spirit, thea is actually a self-protection mechanism from his body.¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, Machi was worried. They quickly left the temporary base with the unconscious Chrollo. Right now, only Neon and An were left inside the building. Fortunately, Chrollo didn¡¯t do anything to Neon. ¡°Hey, wake up.¡± An poked Neon¡¯s head to wake her up. Neon opened her eyes quickly and was confused when she saw An. ¡°Who are you?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t you recognize me?¡± An asked her. ¡°Should I know you?¡± Neon asked innocently. ¡°Of course, I¡¯m your bodyguard after all,¡± An said. ¡°My bodyguard, are you¡­.¡± Neon stared at An carefully before she said: ¡°Are you, An?¡± An nodded: ¡°That¡¯s me.¡± ¡°Eh, Eh¡­ Eeeeh?¡± Neon was extremely surprised: ¡°Why do you look so young and handsome?¡± ¡°This is how I normally look, as I just changed my appearance with a disguise technique,¡± An exined. Neon nodded, then asked: ¡°Right, where are those people? Where did they go?¡± An knew that she was asking about the Ryodan and said: ¡°I drove them away.¡± ¡°Mm.¡± Neon didn¡¯t doubt his words. ¡°Then, let¡¯s go back now,¡± An said. ¡°Can you carry me back?¡± Neon said while blushing slightly. ¡°Why?¡± An asked puzzledly. ¡°Because I¡¯m sleepy, I don¡¯t have any strength left to walk anymore.¡± Neon said. ¡°You don¡¯t have any energy?¡± ¡°Well, those guys made me tell their fortune one after the other, so I feel really sleepy right now, and I have no strength left.¡± Neon exined. An hesitated for a moment before he nodded and said: ¡°Well, don¡¯t say that I took advantage of youter.¡± ¡°I won¡¯t. You saved me after all. And thank you, even if it iste.¡± Neon blushed and leaned her head on An¡¯s back. And just like that, An and Neon returned to the hotel. An didn¡¯t want the others to see him as he was, especially Kurapika. So when he returned, he used the disguise technique again. After that, An returned to the vi and told Dalzollene about the situation as thetter was the captain. Dalzollene¡¯s heart finally calmed down as he heard that Neon was safe and said: ¡°Thanks, An. If it wasn¡¯t for you, we wouldn¡¯t have found Miss Neon right now.¡± An waved his hand as if it was nothing because it was his job in the first ce. ¡°By the way, An, how did you rescue Miss Neon from the Gen¡¯ei Ryodan?¡± Dalzollene asked curiously. ¡°It¡¯s very simple. I fought their leader, I won, so they let Neon go.¡± An said in a rxed tone. ¡°Although I don¡¯t know how strong their leader is, I know that he was stronger than any of us can imagine since even the Shadow beasts weren¡¯t a match for them. You¡¯re incredibly strong.¡± ¡°so my Bodyguard job should be over now, right? If your evaluation of my job is good, then please send the rest of the money to my card.¡± An said. ¡°No problem, I will report to the boss immediately,¡± Dalzollene said. At this moment, Kurapika came over and said: ¡°An, can I ask you something.¡± ¡°Ask away.¡± An knew what Kurapika wanted to ask. ¡°Have you seen the Ryodan¡¯s members?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± An nodded. ¡°Where are they now?¡± Kurapika asked impatiently. ¡°They should have already left Yorknew city,¡± An replied. Hearing this, Kurapika couldn¡¯t believe this: ¡°Why did they leave? How do you know?¡± ¡°Their leader is injured,¡± An replied. ¡°Injured? Did you fight against the leader of the Ryodan?¡± Kurapika asked in surprise. ¡°Um.¡± An nodded. ¡°Can you tell me what their leader looks like?¡± Kurapika asked. ¡°Very young.¡± An only said this. ¡°What about the other members?¡± ¡°Sorry, I don¡¯t remember them very well. Although I know they are your enemies, I can¡¯t help you much.¡± Hearing this, Kurapika nodded and didn¡¯t ask anymore. A dayter, An received 300 million Jenny for protecting Neon, and with this, his contract came to an end. Before leaving, An went to say goodbye to Neon specifically. Neon didn¡¯t want him to go, but she knew that she couldn¡¯t do anything about it. After leaving the Nostrade Family, An used his money to y for a few days in Yorknew city and bought an apartment worth 200 million Jenny. After that, An contacted Zeno. Zeno once again gave An a contract. The contract was very simple, and all An had to do was kill a certain someone who had a bounty on his head. An was bored, so he took the job, and after a week in Yorknew city, he set off. The name of this criminal is Martin. He is suspected of killing 42 important people, and is ssified as a dangerous criminal, and is wanted by many countries. As long as anyone can kill him, they can get 500 million Jenny. However, it wasn¡¯t easy to find him, and it wasn¡¯t easy to kill him, even if you manage to find him. Since he had a first-degree bounty on his head, it means that he is strong. After half a month of investigation, An finally found Martin¡¯s whereabout and directly took an airship to his location. After two days, An arrived at a small country, and ording to his investigation, Martin was hiding here. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 179: Holy Light Church Part 1 Chapter 179: Holy Light Church Part 1 [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// HXH: G.O.C.S Chapter 179: Holy Light Church The Kingdom¡¯s name was the Lofi Kingdom. It was located on a small ind with about 5,000 Square meters with a poption of about 100,000 citizens or less. When An came to this country, he felt that it was different from usual. It was peaceful, and the residents always seemed happy with a smile on their faces. Along the way, An discovered many churches, and ording to his information, the criminal, Martin, was hiding in one of the churches. An didn¡¯t know which one Martin was hiding in, but he wasn¡¯t in a hurry. Because before he finds Martin, he had to get the information from its provider here. An bought the information online and had to meet the provider face to face to get the information. An arrived at a coffee shop and waited. Soon, a woman sat across from him. The woman was wearing a red coat and a mesh underneath it. You can tell that this woman was very young. She seemed in her early twenties. She wasn¡¯t wearing any makeup, but her face still was very white. She had sunsses on, which prevented seeing her eyes, but she is most likely good-looking. ¡°Are you Elena?¡± An asked. The woman named Elena nodded: ¡°Yes, you¡¯re An, right?¡± An nodded. They were meeting for the first time face to face. They previously talked online, and he bought the information from her. ¡°You¡¯re younger than I thought.¡± Elena looked at An. An smiled and replied: ¡°I didn¡¯t expect the woman selling information to be a woman and a pretty one at that.¡± Elena wasn¡¯t happy by the praise and said: ¡°Are you a superficial man just like everyone else?¡± An shrugged: ¡°Every man has a superficial side to him. Everyone likes beautiful things, and I¡¯m not an exception. However, I can assure you that I have no intention toward you. That¡¯s the difference between other men and me.¡± Elena didn¡¯t believe An one bit, but she didn¡¯t refute him. ¡°Let¡¯s talk business. Are you really a professional Hunter?¡± An handed out his license to Elena and said: ¡°That¡¯s my license. You can take a look.¡± Elena picked it and confirmed its authenticity, then returned it and nodded: ¡°I¡¯m sorry because Mr. An looks too young, I had to confirm. It¡¯s my first time seeing such a young hunter, so I was a little surprised.¡± ¡°It¡¯s okay.¡± An didn¡¯t mind at all as he smiled and asked: ¡°Is there anything else?¡± Elena thought for a while and asked: ¡°Why do you take such a dangerous job like a bounty hunter? As a professional Hunter, you can find safer jobs easily.¡± ¡°First of all, The Hunter¡¯s License is just a pass for me. And secondly, there are many types of hunters around the world, music, food, relic, etc. Being a bounty hunter is just one of them.¡± Elena nodded. She knew all this, but she was just curious about why An chose his path. Of course, An saw her doubt, smiled, and said: ¡°I probably chose this path because of money and interest.¡± ¡°Money? Interest?¡± Elena looked at An, confused. Anughed: ¡°There are many dangerous people with high bounty. The money obtained from hunting them is much more than any other job. So, half of the reason is money, as this profession earns a lot. I think most bounty hunter thinks about it that way as well.¡± Elena nodded and then asked: ¡°Then, Mr. An, your interest is it the interest you gain from money?¡± If he answered yes, then Elena would think he is too cheesy. However, An denied that and replied: ¡°Doing business isn¡¯t all about money. It¡¯s about the thrill and unknown you can face hunting dangerous criminals. I like that kind of challenge.¡± Elena whispered: ¡°because of the danger?¡± She felt that he was crazy. If he was doing business because of the money, she could understand. But doing it for the thrill and danger that apanied the job was a bit crazy. ¡°I¡¯m bored. I want to find some powerful people to fight against. Those who had a bounty on their head, depending on how much the bounty is, could be strong. I just want to fight someone strong. That¡¯s my interest.¡± To make Elena understand, An added a sentence that sounded crazier than before. Elena couldn¡¯t help asking: ¡°Those guys are quite dangerous, and their hands were stained by countless human lives they¡¯ve taken, fighting against them, aren¡¯t you afraid of death?¡± ¡°I¡¯m afraid of that.¡± An smiled. ¡°Then why?¡± Elena asked. ¡°Because I¡¯m strong. If there is a guy who can put me in such a dangerous situation, I want to see him, but unfortunately, there are only a few of them in this world.¡± Elena saw the confidence radiating from An and only said: ¡°Mr. An is a weird guy.¡± After drinking a cup of coffee, An asked Elena: ¡°Are you sure that my target, Martin, is in this country?¡± ¡°Yes, I am,¡± Elena replied confidently. ¡°Why are you so sure?¡± An asked curiously. ¡°Because Martin is from this kingdom, he has nowhere to escape after many countries are after him, so he recently came back here.¡± ¡°Why do you know this?¡± ¡°Because I¡¯m an information gathering expert. My job is to collect information and sell them.¡± ¡°I see.¡± An nodded. An admired Elena¡¯s information gathering skills, and if Martin is here, she is really good at her job. An doubted that someone as good as her would be simple. Maybe she is a professional hunter. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 179: Holy Light Church Part 2 Chapter 179: Holy Light Church Part 2 [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// An asked: ¡°Elena, Martin is a dangerous criminal, with a bounty of 500 million Jenny on his head. I think that many people wanted to catch him, and they should be looking at his location, right?¡± ¡°What do you want to ask?¡± Elena didn¡¯t hesitate and asked. An said: ¡°I will be straightforward; did you give this information to anyone else?¡± ¡°I did.¡± Elena¡¯s answer was within An¡¯s expectations. He smiled and said: ¡°Then, there must be a lot of people asking to meet you here?¡± ¡°That¡¯s not the case.¡± Elena scratched her head: ¡°Although there are many people who bought this information, they asked to meet offline to talk in person, but I rejected all of them. So, so far, I only promised to meet you.¡± An was a little surprised but a little puzzled: ¡°Why did you meet only me?¡± ¡°There is no special reason, just because the information you registered was clean. You also have a hunter¡¯s license, that all.¡± ¡°I see.¡± An nodded, as he didn¡¯t doubt that Elena was lying. ¡°Then, since you promised to meet with me, you must give me Martin¡¯s whereabout, right?¡± An asked. ¡°Yes.¡± Elena didn¡¯t deny it. ¡°Then, do you know where Martin is currently hiding?¡± ¡°I do.¡± An nodded seriously: ¡°Tell me his location, and you can give me a price.¡± Elena thought for a bit and said: ¡°Instead of telling you, I better take you there directly.¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°I don¡¯t really care, but aren¡¯t you afraid that he would see you? If he kills me, you won¡¯t be able to escape.¡± ¡°So, you have to pay me to double,¡± Elena said. Elena seemed to be greedy. She wasn¡¯t satisfied with only selling the information and earn her due, but she wanted to take a risk and earn more. Seeing An thinking about it, Elena asked again: ¡°what do you think? You want me to take you there?¡± ¡°How much do you want?¡± An asked. ¡°If I tell you his location, then you give me 50 million Jenny, but if I take you there, you give me 100 million Jenny. Since there is a risk, the reward should be greater. Also, you have to pay half now and the other half after finding Martin.¡± ¡°Ok.¡± Paying 100 million to Find Martin wasn¡¯t a bother to An because Martin¡¯s bounty was 500 million Jenny. But, of course, this is all if Martin is there. ¡°If you dare lie about this, I promise you that your end won¡¯t be peaceful.¡± Elena didn¡¯t worry about An¡¯s threat and chuckled: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m a very honest woman. As long as I get the money, I will always deliver the information.¡± ¡°Then let¡¯s go, take me there now.¡± An got up as he spoke. Elena nodded and said: ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± After leaving the caf¨¦, both of them went into a tourists car. ¡°Where are we going?¡± An asked. ¡°The capital of the Kingdom.¡± ¡°Martin is there?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Elena continued: ¡°We are going to the capital as tourists, so we don¡¯t attract attention. There are many tourists from all over the world in this country. So we can rx for now. We have to keep a low profile, so we don¡¯t get arrested. An nodded. Unexpectedly, Elena knew a lot of things about safety. An wasn¡¯t afraid of being checked by soldiers. Since he had the hunter¡¯s license, he can go to over 95% of countries, and even restricted areas aren¡¯t off-limit. Along the way, Elena exined a lot of things about the country to An. Although the Kingdom was small, there are over 3,000 churches here. More than 95% of the people were religious, and many of them are nobles. They all go to the church once a week to get baptized by the holy light. The baptism of the holy light is simple, the head of the church would read the scriptures to the believers. ¡°Today happens to be the day of the baptism. So I will be very lively. Especially the cathedral in the capital.¡± An said after hearing this: ¡°Take me to where Martin is, and then you can go wherever you want.¡± ¡°Martin is in the cathedral in the capital. We can join the find while you find your target. Two birds with one stone.¡± Elena¡¯s words surprised An: ¡°So Martin is hiding in the church, is he a believer?¡± ¡°He isn¡¯t but a holy light bearer of the church,¡± Elena said. ¡°A holy light bearer?¡± ¡°95% of the people in the Kingdom are believers, which means almost everyone supports the church. The staff of the church is called the bearers of the holy light.¡± An was a little surprised: ¡°Unexpectedly, a dangerous criminal is a member of the church. His identity is really interesting. It seems that those believers are kept in the dark.¡± Elena nodded: ¡°Yes if the believers knew that a wanted criminal is a bearer of the holy light, their faith will take a huge impact. Maybe the credibility of the church will be affected as well. But, by then, it would be a question whether the church will remain or not.¡± ¡°Do other members of the church know about Martin being a wanted criminal?¡± An asked curiously. Elena shook her head: ¡°I don¡¯t know, because most staff are originally from this Kingdom. But I don¡¯t think so because many believe in the church, and if they were doing something shady, there wouldn¡¯t be so many believers. Martin¡¯s case should be unique. After all, when the base isrge, there would be one or two special cases like that.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 180: Holy Light’s Bearers Chapter 180: Holy Light¡¯s Bearers [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// A few hourster, An and Elena arrived at the Capital. Although the kingdom was small, the buildings weren¡¯t old, and their style was modern. And since today was the day of the baptism, the city was quite lively. In addition to tourists, the citizens filled the streets toward the cathedral of the church for the baptism. As tourists, An and Elena followed the crowd toward the church that was quite big and decorated magnificently. Inside the church, there was a huge hall like a colosseum that can hold tens of thousands of people inside. In its center, there was a statue of a saint which was the symbol of the church. Tens of thousands of citizens came here to receive the baptism, and only a small part of the crowd were tourists. ¡°Are you sure Martin will appear in this church?¡± An asked Elena, who nodded: ¡°He is a core member of the church and one of the seven famous Holy Light Bearers here. He will attend the baptism of light together with the other six.¡± With Elena¡¯s assurance, An stopped asking and waited for his prey to appear. At this time, Elena asked An curiously: ¡°Mr. An, how are you going to do this?¡± An smiled: ¡°Of course, I will do it directly.¡± Hearing this, Elena was taken aback: ¡°Does Mr. An nning to attack Martin in this crowd?¡± ¡°Why, I can¡¯t?¡± Seeing Elena¡¯s reaction, An said without concern. Elena said with a serious face: ¡°Martin is a member of the church, and there are many supporters here. You can even say that this entire ce is on Martin¡¯s side, and this will hinder you, Mr. An.¡± Unexpectedly, Elena was thinking about An, but thetter he didn¡¯t appreciate. He insisted on doing it his way: ¡°I will get rid of him soon, don¡¯t worry.¡± ¡°Martin¡¯s Bounty is as high as 500 million Jenny. He is an extremely dangerous guy. Mr. An, even if you are a professional Hunter, if you want to catch him on his turf, it will be very difficult.¡± ¡°Then you can wait for the time toe and see for yourself.¡± An put his hands in his pockets and looked up. He didn¡¯t underestimate Martin. On the contrary, he was quite vignt with the guy since, with that kind of Bounty, it means he was strong. Against someone he doesn¡¯t know anything about, how could An look down on him. Seeing An¡¯s confidence, Elena knew that An¡¯s decision wouldn¡¯t change, but she still expressed herself: ¡°Mr. An, I think it¡¯s better to wait till the end to make your move.¡± ¡°It¡¯s okay. If I can wait that long, I will attack him at the end of the event, but if I can¡¯t wait, I will do it directly.¡± Elena suddenly thought of something and asked: ¡°If you really caught Martin, what will you do if the people of the church, along with the believers,e to attack you?¡± ¡°Of course¡­ I will hit back.¡± Anughed. Since he dared toe here to catch someone, he wasn¡¯t afraid of being surrounded. At this time, something rang, and a dazzling light appeared on the tform. The sun rays lightened the entire church with a golden light. Some people couldn¡¯t stand the strong rays of light and closed their eyes. When the light disappeared, they opened their eyes again, and surprisingly, for them, seven figures appeared on the stage. Those seven were the holy light¡¯s bearers of the church. Each one of them was wearing a golden cloak and arge hat. The crowd roared and waved their hands at the seven people with admiration filling their eyes. ¡°Are those the Holy light¡¯s bearers of the church?¡± An looked at the seven and asked Elena. Elena nodded and replied: ¡°Yes, they are.¡± Getting his answer, An looked at them sharply. However, he frowned because none of their appearances match that of Martin¡¯s. ¡°Which one is Martin?¡± An wondered. ¡°The third one from the left is Martin,¡± Elena replied. ¡°His appearance is different from the Bounty. Did he put a disguise?¡± An asked curiously. ¡°To be precise, the bounty picture is the disguise. The one standing there is what Martin really looks like. This is why no one in the country could tell that he was a criminal.¡± Elena exined. An nodded and looked at his target, then smiled coldly: ¡°Okay, now, I¡¯m going to do it.¡± ¡°What? Do you really have to do it now? Can¡¯t you wait?¡± ¡°There is no need to waste time, and I can get rid of him quickly.¡± After seeing his prey, An couldn¡¯t wait. ¡°Well, if you fail, don¡¯t give me away.¡± Seeing that An decided to act, Elena said nothing else. An sneered and looked at the tform and said: ¡°My target can¡¯t escape. Elena, just stand there and watch. You will see how I treat the Holy Light Bearer Politely.¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 181: Escape Chapter 181: Escape [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Suddenly, An jumped out of the crowd and rushed from below the stage very quickly toward the center. ¡°So Fast!¡± Elena looked at An in surprise. On the tform, the seven Holy light¡¯s bearers also noticed An, and their expression changed. Obviously, An didn¡¯t have any good intentions. However, with An¡¯s speed, they couldn¡¯t react fast enough as thetter already arrived on the tform. ¡°Who are you?¡± One of the Bearers of light stared at An vigntly and asked. An didn¡¯t answer as his eyes scanned the seven bearers, and finally, his eyes were fixed on the third one from the left. He was staring at his target, the criminal Martin, with a bounty of 500 million Jenny on his head. When An¡¯s gaze met Martin¡¯s, thetter felt a chill on his back. They just stared at each other for a bit, while the others felt that An was very dangerous. From An¡¯s eyes, Martin could feel the hostility. Martin instantly realized that An was after him. With this conclusion, Martin withdrew his gaze from An and started looking around evasively. His face was pale, and you can see some panic starting to appear on his face. ¡®I need to escape!¡¯ This thought popped in Martin¡¯s head, but An seemed to see through him in an instant. Without any words, An stretched his hand to grab him. Martin reacted quickly and pushed one of the bearers beside him toward An and jumped off the tform, and started running away. An snorted but didn¡¯t expect this kind of disgrace from Martin. He actually used one of his coworkers as a shield. The substitute was frozen instantly and turned into an Ice Sculpture. Witnessing such a weird thing shocked the crowd greatly. An looked at Martin¡¯s figure that was already pushing the people below and trying to escape. At this time, the other holy light¡¯s bearers reacted. ¡°Who are you?¡± Seeing his friend frozen, one of them shouted and decided to take action. An nced at them and saw that those five were releasing their aura. An was slightly surprised by this since he didn¡¯t expect them to know how to use Nen. Even their aura was quite strong, actually. ¡°Although I would like to see your abilities, I apologize. I¡¯m somewhat in a hurry now.¡± Without giving them a chance to attack, An stretched his hand and shot ice at them. As soon as the ice touched them, the five of them were frozen solid like their friend, and even when they tried to use Nen to defend, it was no use at all. All of this happened in mere seconds, but Martin still managed to disappear from An¡¯s sight. An jumped from the now frozen tform and started going toward the same direction Martin run away from. After leaving the church, An called Feitan and Franklin. He previously made them wait for his orders. Since they looked suspicious, he didn¡¯t bring them along. With Yatsufusa in hand, both of them followed will follow every order An gave. An directly ordered them to go and search for Martin, and both Franklin and Feitan nodded and left. In order to find Martin, An used his own technique as well, The Heaven¡¯s eye, to search in every direction surrounding the church. The Heaven¡¯s eye can see five times better than normal, with a 360-degree field of view. It can also give real-time feedback to the user, which is great for searching for enemies. With every Kilometer The Heaven¡¯s eye traveled, it consumed 1,000 Nen points, so ten Kilometers means 10,000 Nen points. The Heaven¡¯s eye started searching everywhere. At this time, Elena arrived, and An couldn¡¯t help asking: ¡°How is the situation in the church?¡± ¡°It¡¯s a mess,¡± Elena said in worry. ¡°You froze the light-bearers, and the church and its believers won¡¯t let you go easily.¡± An smiled indifferently without taking them seriously. Suddenly, he received feedback from The Heaven¡¯s eye. Martin was currently in a dark alley, hiding. ¡°I found him. Wait for me here.¡± Before Elena could answer, An already disappeared. He used sh Steps to speed up toward his prey¡¯s location. Martin was trying to think of a way out currently in a dark alley, but suddenly, someone appeared at the entrance of the alley. At the same time, An ordered Feitan and Franklin to block any escape route, so Martin can¡¯t escape. Of course, Martin didn¡¯t know this, as he only saw An. Martin looked at An in surprise, and he couldn¡¯t figure out how An found this ce and became curious about An¡¯s identity. ¡°Who the hell are you?¡± Martin grumbled. ¡°My name is An, and I¡¯m a professional Bounty Hunter.¡± Hearing this, Martin suddenly said: ¡°So it¡¯s a bounty hunter. No wonder you¡¯re looking for me.¡± ¡°Martin Char, bounty: 500 million Jenny, a first-degree murderer. Well, you hid pretty well since you are also a holy light¡¯s bearer in this kingdom with so many supporters. I don¡¯t know what the believers would say if they knew that you¡¯re a criminal.¡± Martin heard An¡¯s sarcasm and snorted: ¡°Stop talking nonsense. What do you want?¡± ¡°Of course, I¡¯m here for your head. After all, it has a 500 million Jenny price on it.¡± An smiled lightly while looking confidently at Martin. Martin replied in a deep voice: ¡°There are over a hundred people who came after me, but they failed, do you know why?¡± An shrugged: ¡°They were probably weak and couldn¡¯t match your skills.¡± ¡°Yes! They thought they could kill me, but I kill everyst one of them. So far, I called a dozen of those so-called bounty hunters. And like those stupid guys, you will die by my hands.¡± An sneered: ¡°Unfortunately for you, you fell in my hands today. However, I will give you a chance to make a move. Let me see how strong someone with 500 million Jenny on his head can be. If you don¡¯t use all of your strength, you will regret it. After all, it¡¯s the only attack you will get. I won¡¯t even defend myself.¡± Hearing An¡¯s arrogant remark, Martin felt very ufortable. After all, he was a high-end criminal, with millions on his head. An¡¯s provocation made him gloomy. ¡°I will let you witness my power!¡± Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 182: Janus Chapter 182: Janus [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Martin¡¯s aura exploded out of his body and rose steadily. An stood still while looking at Martin with interest. ¡®Well, he is worthy of his bounty. At least his aura is higher than average.¡¯ Although the amount of Nen doesn¡¯t always decide the oue of a battle, the more Nen one possesses, the stronger he is generally. With the amount he was releasing, An could tell that Martin¡¯s power is already close to Feitan¡¯s and the other members of the Ryodan. This made An looks forward to the fight. With An¡¯s current strength, someone with Martin¡¯s Nen isn¡¯t eye-catching, but it should be a fun fight. The most important thing in Nen is the Ability of the user. That¡¯s what An wanted to see. Since each person would develop a different ability, he wanted to see Martin¡¯s Nen ability. It wasn¡¯t easy to develop a Nen ability since you need to master the basics and advanced application of Nen beforehand. And after that, the person needs to see which type of Nen they possess before they start developing their Nen Ability. The mindset of a person can reflect on the Nen type that person possesses. With Martin¡¯s cunning and despicable personality, he is either a Maniptor, a transmuter, or a specialist. Of course, this wasn¡¯t a general rule, but more of an easy way to guess your opponent¡¯s Nen type. While An was observing Martin, thetter was doing the same. Seeing An so confident that he didn¡¯t even use his Nen, Martin felt that his opponent is underestimating him, but at the same time, he wasughing coldly. An¡¯s arrogance was really stupid, in his opinion, and the behavior will cost him dearly. Martin seemed to distort, and a ck hole spread strangely from his position. The ck hole formed a crack about ten meters big. An stared at the ck hole without blinking. This was Martin¡¯s Nen ability. From sight alone, An couldn¡¯t see anything inside the ck hole, which is why he released his Observation Haki. Sure enough, he felt a strong Nen inside the ckhole. ¡°Well, is there somethinging out of there?¡± An narrowed his eyes slightly. An started feeling the Nen gushing out of the ck hole, and at this time, Martin said: ¡°Come out, Janus!¡± It seemed like Martin was summoning someone or something from the ck hole. A ck mist suddenly emerged from the ck hole before it formed a creature An never saw before. ¡°Huh? Nen beast?¡± An¡¯s eyes were looking at the strange creature curiously. The Nen beast transformed from the ck mist into a humanoid appearance that stood on two feet. It didn¡¯t look human, as its body was covered in green scales that appeared like a defensive ability. In addition to that, the beast¡¯s hands and feet were like sharp ws. An could feel the strong Nen it released, and from what Martin said, this beast is called Janus. Martin looked at An maliciously and said: ¡°You¡¯re done for now. Janus has been hungry for a while, and his favorite food is human¡¯s flesh. Especially the flesh of those who are strong.¡± An didn¡¯t do anything. Instead, he decided to wait and see. From Martin¡¯s words, this beast can eat people, which was kind of rare for a Nen beast. However, this reminded An of Shizuku¡¯s vacuum cleaner, which can eat almost anything. However, the Vacuum cleaner needed a wielder to operate, while this beast could act individually. ¡°You will regret being here right away.¡± Seeing that An wasn¡¯t afraid, Martin snorted and then gave Janus an order: ¡°Janus 140th, kill that guy and eat him.¡± Janus received his order, and his beast-like eyes focused on An. Suddenly, he disappeared from his ce. ¡°Oh? That¡¯s fast!¡± An could see Janus rushing toward him quickly. To normal people, Janus may seem to disappear, but to An, he could clearly see him. Along with Observation Haki, An could predict the trajectory of Janus¡¯s attack fully. However, even though he knew where the attack is heading, An didn¡¯t make a move or prepare for confrontation. He just stood there, did nothing, and waiting for Janus with an expressionless face. Martin could only think that this kid was looking for death. He could almost foresee the scene where An is being torn to shreds by Janus. It was a scene he was looking forward to seeing. But in the next second, Martin¡¯s smile froze. He saw a huge phantom shining from An¡¯s body and easily blocking Janus¡¯s ws. ¡°What?! What is that?!¡± Martin¡¯s eyes widened. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 183: Star Platinum Chapter 183: Star tinum [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// A humanoid figure appeared before An and easily blocked Janus¡¯s ws with one hand and sent the beast away with a punch. Janus flew away through several walls before crashing down with a boom. Martin¡¯s face turned ugly as if he had eaten crap. ¡°It actually knocked Janus away with a punch! What the hell is that thing?¡± He stared at the humanoid figure in front of An¡¯s body and couldn¡¯t help asking: ¡°What the hell is that, is it also a beast?¡± An sneered: ¡°Don¡¯tpare your beast to my stand!¡± The only thing that was left is for An to do a pose, and it would look the same¡­ Ahem! Anyways, as most people know, Star tinum is a stand from Jojo¡¯s bizarre adventure. It belongs to Jotaro Kujo. An had this ability after he rescued Neon from Chrollo in Yorknew City. This is the first time he actually used it. Star tinum is quite strong, and it can move at the speed of light or even exceed it. It has unmatched precision and can be called the strongest stand in History. In general, it has three abilities. The first one is super speed. Simply put, it is so fast that I can surpass the speed of sound, the speed of light, and time itself. The second ability is overwhelming strength, which is embodied in the power to destroy even the hardest diamonds. And the third ability is derived from the first one, which is literally stopping time. He can stop time for 5 seconds, which is an ability beyond any Nen beast in this world. Therefore, he already believed that with Star tinum, he didn¡¯t need to care about any attack, and it will block every attack and defeat any enemy he faces. A ck shadow suddenly emerged in front of An and attacked. Janus was indeed fast, but in front of Star tinum, his speed was negligible. Therefore, once again, Janus¡¯s attack was blocked, and the Nen beast was sent flying. ¡°You see, in terms of speed, Janus is as fast as a snailpared to Star tinum.¡± Facing An¡¯s sneer, Martin became angry. ¡°Bastard! What Star tinum, don¡¯t underestimate my Janus.¡± Martin was getting angry when he witnessed Janus getting beaten. ¡°Oh? Your Nen increased.¡± An was a little surprised. Generally, the Nen beast won¡¯t be affected by the summoner¡¯s mood. An suddenly had an idea. There are three types of Nen that can conjure a Nen beast, and they were Emission, Conjuration, Maniption. The created Nen beast will have an ability corresponding to the Nen it was created from. Judging from Janus¡¯s performance, it should be an Emission-type Nen beast. In this way, it was understandable that Janus possessed so much Nen and was influenced by Martin¡¯s anger. But there should be more, as An believed that Janus should be created using two types of Nen. The second type should be Maniption, and that¡¯s because Janus obeyed every order Martin gave, which is the characteristic of Maniption. As Janus¡¯s anger rose, strong energy emerged from it. ¡°Enhancement?¡± Now An was surprised. This Janus seemed to have enhancement as well and can actually strengthen his body and increase his strength. The scales on its body were growing and covering every inch of his body. Its sharp ws grew three times as Janus seemed to be evolving, but in reality, it was just enhancement. So, is Janus a hybrid between Maniption, Emission, and enhancement? ¡°Kill him, Janus.¡± Martin looked at his masterpiece and ordered. Once again, Janus disappeared, but this time, he was two or three times faster than before. An remained calm because Star tinum was here, and An had 100% confidence in its power. When Janus¡¯s ws were about to touch An¡¯s body, Star tinum moved and clenched Janus¡¯s arm before punching his head with his free hand. Janus was hit hard, and for the third time, he was sent flying away. But this time, it stopped its body quickly as if the punch didn¡¯t hurt it and rushed again. An said inly: ¡°Use your true power, Star tinum.¡± Receiving An¡¯s order, Star tinum responded directly. As soon as Janus was close by, Star tinum revealed his true strength. Janus¡¯s scales could very well block bullets, but under Star tinum punch, the scales broke and shattered. ¡°What?¡± Martin couldn¡¯t ept this. He didn¡¯t expect the Nen beast he was so proud of would lose so easily. But he quickly sneered: ¡°Do you expect that with Janus killed, it will be the end of the battle?¡± ¡°Oh? Do you have something else?¡± An looked at Martin expectantly. Suddenly, Martin stepped into the ck hole. Before he wentpletely, he looked at An and said: ¡°To be able to defeat Janus, I have to admit, you¡¯re very strong. So, in order to kill you, I will make a little sacrifice. Keep your eyes open and look at the power I will gain.¡± ¡°Oh, so you will sacrifice your life in order to gain strength and kill me? So, you¡¯re that desperate, huh.¡± An watched Martin disappearpletely into the ck hole, and after a while, An could feel an astonishing power emerging from the ck hole. A figure came out, and it didn¡¯t look like a human being. ¡°Did that guy sacrifice himself to turn into a Nen beast? In exchange for power?¡± An thought. ¡°See, this is the power I gained after being desperate. This power is so strong that I think I can kill you with a wave of my hand.¡± Martin said. ¡°Star tinum, take him out.¡± An directly ordered Star tinum, who directly rushed toward Martin. Facing the current threat, Martin wasn¡¯t afraid, but instead, he faced Star tinum head-on. The two of them were fast, and as the fight continued, the buildings were destroyed around them. Suddenly, ck wings emerged from Martin¡¯s back as he flew into the sky and shot his feathers as arrows toward An. Star tinum directly appeared in front of An and defended him. After blocking the feathers¡¯ attack, Star tinum jumped from the ground directly toward Martin and threw punches. Ora Ora Ora Ora Ora Ora¡­ A rain of fists sted Martin like meteors. Each punch moved faster than the speed of sound with enough power to crush diamonds. Martin couldn¡¯t withstand such attacks. With a bang, Martin¡¯s body fell from the sky. Star tinum didn¡¯t give him a chance to breathe and swooped down to finish him off. A crater appeared on the ground as Martin fell, with his whole body damaged and almost impossible to repair. Seeing Martin was dying, An shook his head as he already expected this. Martin¡¯s power, even after the sacrifice, was nothing in front of Star tinum, and with this, An caught the criminal. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 184: Reward Chapter 184: Reward [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Great, Mr. An. I didn¡¯t think you will sessfully catch him. You really deserve your license.¡± Seeing Martin in the crater, Elena, who rushed over, looked at this scene in surprise. She didn¡¯t believe that An would be able to catch Martin at first since Martin¡¯s bounty was high. Even though one can¡¯t judge someone¡¯s strength using his bounty, Martin¡¯s bounty was too high for him to be not dangerous. However, here heys in front of her, dying in a crater. As for An, he didn¡¯t suffer any injury, no scratch that, there wasn¡¯t a spec of dust on his body. ¡°If it wasn¡¯t for the information you provided, I wouldn¡¯t found him, let alone catch him, Elena. After all, this guy is quite cunning.¡± Anughed. ¡°That¡¯s true.¡± Elena thought about her contribution and then looked at Martin and asked: ¡°Is he dead?¡± An shook his head: ¡°No, there is still some life in him.¡± Martin didn¡¯t look that humane anymore since he sacrificed God knows what, probably his life, to gain strength to face An. An didn¡¯t kill him simply because when the bounty holder dies, the bounty will be reduced by 20 to 50%. That¡¯s he made sure that Star tinum won¡¯t kill him. Elena nodded and said: ¡°Martin is worth 500 million Jenny, don¡¯t forget my share when you get the money.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m someone who keeps his promises.¡± An said. Elena nodded. She trusted An as a person. Otherwise, she wouldn¡¯t have met him offline. ¡°Then let¡¯s got out of here, Mr. An. You caused a huge disturbance in the kingdom, and Martin is still someone from the Church, so the soldiers and the Church wille after you soon. If we don¡¯t leave now, it would be hard for us to leave.¡± An nodded. Although he wasn¡¯t afraid, it would be troublesome to deal with all those people. When An carried Martin and nned to leave with Elena, a lot of people surrounded them. Those people seemed very hostile. ¡°Oh, it seems that there are a lot of people here.¡± An nced at the man dressed in armor and held a spear with curiosity. ¡°They are members of the church and soldiers of the kingdom.¡± Elena frowned slightly. The battle between Martin and Star tinum drew too much attention and destroyed quite a few buildings which let those soldiers and the church members here. In the eyes of those people, An was suspicious. And when they saw Martin, extremely weak and barely alive, they felt that An was a murderer. At first, they didn¡¯t recognize Martin, but the church member quickly recognized him and shouted: ¡°Isn¡¯t that Master Martin?¡± ¡°Damn it! How dare you do that to Master Martin.¡± ¡°It seems that he was the one who attacked the Church previously. We can¡¯t let him go.¡± The members of the Church looked angrily at An. Seeing the current situation, Elena quickly exined: ¡°You guys, listen here. Martin is a criminal with a bounty over his head. You¡¯re all being deceived by him.¡± However, when someone believed in something, they won¡¯t listen to anyone who they didn¡¯t know, especially when they are in a situation like the current Elena and An. Seeing those people being unreasonable, Elena looked at Ana and asked: ¡°Mr. An, what should we do?¡± An smiled lightly: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, you will be fine with me here.¡± At this time, the system¡¯s voice echoed in An¡¯s mind. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Protect Elena without killing anyone here and break through the siege safely. Reward: Paramecia fruit: Flower Flower fruit.] [2: Disregard Elena and leave her alone. Reward: A Meito.] [3: Remove all obstacles in your way. Reward: Paramecia Fruit: Mochi Mochi fruit.] (Katakuri¡¯s fruit) An thought for a bit, then chose the first option. Although the reward for the third option was better, An wasn¡¯t an egoist. Those people were innocent, and he won¡¯t just kill them all for a devil fruit that he can¡¯t even use. Nico Robin¡¯s fruit was good anyways. After making his choice, An released his Conqueror¡¯s Haki. Except for Elena, all the people surrounding them fainted and fell. ¡°Eeh, what happened?¡± Seeing the exaggerated scene, Elena was stunned. ¡°Mr. An, what did you do to them?¡± Although Elena didn¡¯t see An move, she felt that it was An who did this just now. An waved his hand indifferently: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I just knocked them out temporarily. Nothing bad will happen to them.¡± While he was speaking, An received his reward from the system. After that, An and Elena took an airship and left the kingdom. A dayter, they arrived at a city called Kerry, in the Republic of Padokea. ¡°Here, this is the ce.¡± An and Elena arrived at a suburban hut in the city. After opening the door, another one appeared that required a password. After entering the password, An and Elena entered the passage. At the end of the passage, another door appeared, and above it, there were three words, ck Market Exchange. Yes, this ce was the ck market. This is a secret location that most people won¡¯t know about it or even if they knew, they won¡¯t find it. After entering, An handed Martin over to the staff and received his reward. Unfortunately, because Martin suffered severe injuries, he didn¡¯t stay alive till they got here and died on the way, so An only received 350 million Jenny. It was a pity, but An didn¡¯t mind. ¡°The next time, I should be more careful.¡± An thought. After getting out, An directly transferred 100 million Jenny into Elena¡¯s ount, which is the reward she deserved. An wasn¡¯t stingy to reduce the reward for Elena because his own reward was reduced. He wanted to build trust between them since he can cooperate with her in the future. ¡°Then, Mr. An, see you again if there is a chance,¡± Elena said and took her to leave. An nodded said nothing. However, at this moment, the system¡¯s voice echoed in his head. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Invite Elena to join you, and make her agree. Reward: Hitsugaya Toshiro¡¯s Zanpakuto, Daiguren Hyorinmaru.] [2: Let Elena go. No reward] There is actually such a thing? I can really get Daiguren Hyorinmaru?! Without any hesitation, An picked the first option. After all, a Zanpakuto was better than an ordinary sword or even a Meito. Furthermore, Daiguren Hyorinmaru is an ice attributed Sword, which fits An greatly. An directly asked Elena: ¡°Wait, Elena, are you interested in joining my organization?¡± ¡­ ¡®Damn, that came out wrong!¡¯ Elena was stunned for a moment before she asked in confusion: ¡°What organization? An, aren¡¯t you a professional hunter and belong to the hunter association? Do you want me to join the association as well? I¡¯m fine with that, but isn¡¯t joining require me to pass the exam and obtain a license?¡± An smiled: ¡°Sorry, I didn¡¯t mean that. I meant I wanted you to be mypanion so that we can cooperate better in the future.¡± ¡°So that¡¯s what you¡¯re asking.¡± Seeing Elena nodding, An tentatively asked: ¡°So, do you agree?¡± Elena didn¡¯t answer immediately and instead asked back: ¡°What is your reason for inviting me?¡± ¡°You¡¯re an expert in intelligence gathering, and I need someone like you. Is this good enough reason?¡± ¡°You, you need me?¡± Elena blushed, as she didn¡¯t expect An to be so straightforward about this. She thought for a bit, then nodded and said: ¡°If you want me to be yourpanion, I can promise, but you have to do something for me first.¡± An directly asked: ¡°No problem, what do you want me to do?¡± ¡°Help me kill a guy.¡± ¡°Who?¡± ¡°His name is Helphes, a noble that I hope you can get rid of.¡± Seeing Elena¡¯s seriousness, An nodded: ¡°No problem, it will be done.¡± Although An didn¡¯t know why Elena wanted to kill this person, he needed to do so. After all, if she agrees to be hispanion, he can get Daiguren Hyorinmaru which is his goal. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 185: New Target Chapter 185: New Target [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ording to the information Elena provided, An learned that the noble¡¯s name is Helphes. He wasn¡¯t an ordinary noble, as he owned an organization called Reverse Crusader. As the leader of the Reverse Crusaders, Helphes is quite a prominent figure. Furthermore, Helphes is a strong person and should not be underestimated. Knowing this, An became excited. An wasn¡¯t just after status and money, but also powerful opponents, and those are hard toe by. The stronger the enemy, the more interest An has, and if the target is too weak, he won¡¯t waste his energy. Seeing An¡¯s confidence, Elena couldn¡¯t help saying: ¡°Mr. An, I don¡¯t mean to underestimate you, but I still want to remind you that you still can back down. Even if you don¡¯t do this favor, we can still be friends if we can¡¯t bepanions. So, if you think that it¡¯s too dangerous, you might as well give up right now.¡± An smiled and patted Elena¡¯s shoulder: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Elena, since I have promised you, I won¡¯t go back on my promise. (T/N: That¡¯s my Nindo.) Moreover, I take this matter as a mission to perform and the reward of getting apanion.¡± Hearing this, Elena blushed inexplicably and lowered her head: ¡°Helphes is very strong, and the Reverse Crusaders under him is veryrge. You¡¯re only one person, Mr. An. It¡¯s too dangerous.¡± An smiled and looked at Elena seriously: ¡°Elena if I can¡¯t do this for you, I won¡¯t be able to get you to join me. Don¡¯t worry about me, and I will take Helphes¡¯ head off for you.¡± ¡°Mr. An¡­¡± Elena¡¯s heart throbbed. Although he knew the basic information of Helphes, it won¡¯t be easy to kill him. The most troublesome thing is to actually find him. If he can¡¯t find Helphes, knowing more about him is useless. Fortunately, Elena provided some clues. Helphes and his Reverse Crusaders are located in a desert in The Azian Continent. Hekphes and his organization is thergest force in the desert, and even armies of the surrounding kingdoms are no match for them. He controlled two-thirds of the desert, and if he wanted, he would be able to overthrow the kingdoms and make a new one. With this information, An directly took the next flight there and departed. Even with an airship, it would take at least two days since they are flying from one continent to another. Since Elena seemed worried about An, she followed along. Although she didn¡¯t agree to join An, she gradually regarded An as herpanion. An didn¡¯t object to this since he knew that he had the strength to protect Elena. ¡°Elena, what did this Helphes do to you?¡± On the airship, An was bored, so he asked Elena curiously. Elena knew that sooner orter, An would ask that question and didn¡¯t hide anything. ¡°He abducted my sister, so I want to kill him.¡± When Elena said this, An could see her clenching her fist and could tell that she didn¡¯t lie. This aroused An¡¯s curiosity even further: ¡°How was your sister kidnapped by Helphes?¡± Elena took a deep breath and said: ¡°This happened five years ago when my sister Alice and I were living in a peaceful vige until a group of people invaded the vige and robbed and injured many vigers. Those people were the Reverse Crusade, and after some time, the leader of the crusade appeared and took a fancy to my sister. He asked her to join the Reverse Crusade. If my sister refuses, Helphes will kill the vigers. As ast resort, my sister sacrificed herself and joined his organization.¡± An couldn¡¯t help asking: ¡°Is your sister that beautiful?¡± ¡°We are twins. We look the same. Do you think I¡¯m beautiful?¡± Elena asked. An was a little surprised at this as he didn¡¯t think Elena had a twin. ¡°Why aren¡¯t you speaking? Am I ugly?¡± Seeing An silent, Elena asked directly. An calmly said: ¡°No, you¡¯re very beautiful. You can be ranked at the top three of the most beautiful women I¡¯ve seen so far.¡± Elena nodded in satisfaction and said: ¡°My sister looks almost the same as me, so she is really beautiful as well.¡± An said: ¡°Since you sisters are so beautiful, why did Helphes took your sister, but no you?¡± Elena sighed and exined: ¡°It¡¯s simple. Helphes didn¡¯t like my sister¡¯s look, but her ability.¡± ¡°Ability?¡± An was slightly surprised. ¡°Does your sister know Nen?¡± ¡°No.¡± Elena shook her head and exined: ¡°My sister is born with an ability to heal injuries. At the time Helphes arrived, she was healing the vigers, and he saw that.¡± After hearing Elena¡¯s exnation, An nodded while feeling slightly surprised. He never thought that Elena had such a past. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Elena. I will kill Helphes and his army and rescue your sister.¡± An patted Elena¡¯s shoulder reassuredly. ¡°Thank you, Mr. An.¡± It was the first time that Elena met someone like An, and his words deeply moved her. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 186: Desert Kingdom Chapter 186: Desert Kingdom [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Two dayster, An and Elena arrived at The Azian Continent safely. An hired someone to get them to the desert kingdom. When the driver heard their destination, hisplexion changed, and he became reluctant. Fortunately, An gave him double the normal price, so he agreed. From the driver¡¯s words, An learned that only a few people would go to the desert kingdom nowadays. An and Elena concluded that it was mostly due to the Reverse Crusaders and the kingdom¡¯s army¡¯s constant wars. After a day, they arrived at the gate of the kingdom, which is also called a checkpoint with a few soldiers. ¡°What is your purpose ofing here?¡± An old man carrying a gun asked. ¡°Tourism,¡± An replied. ¡°Tourism?¡± As if he heard a big joke, the old manughed loudly. The soldiers behind the old man were alsoughing. ¡°What are youughing at?¡± Elena frowned and said unhappily.The old man stoppedughing and exined: ¡°Sorry, I¡¯m notughing at you, but our country is in a mess currently, and if you want to take a tour and visit ces here, we can¡¯t guarantee your safety. You must¡¯ve heard on the way here, but rebels started creating a mess, and the army had to intervene and eliminate them, so it isn¡¯t a good time for tourists toe here.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry about us; we aren¡¯t afraid of them.¡± An smiled lightly. ¡°Yeah, uncle, you can let us in, and you won¡¯t need to worry about anything else.¡± Seeing both of them set on entering the kingdom, the old man was taken aback and said helplessly: ¡°It seems like you¡¯re really not afraid, hahaha.¡± The old man gave the two of them a tourism visa each. ording to the visa, they can stay in the country for 15 days, and if they don¡¯t leave by then, the army would take a move and force them to leave.¡± ¡°Fifteen days is enough,¡± An said to Elena with confidence. After sessfully entering the kingdom, it was like entering another world, as everything was yellow. The entire ce was filled with sand. Looking around, Elena finally suggested: ¡°Mr. An, let¡¯s rent a camel.¡± An nodded and followed Elena to a nearby town.¡± There were many animals kept in farms, including horses, but the most suitable for traveling in the desert would be camels. However, the price of camels here is much higher than normal. Renting a camel would cost 500,000 Jenny per day, and they need to deposit 10 million as assurance.¡± ¡°It¡¯s so expensive because we are tourists.¡± Elena was dissatisfied. An didn¡¯t care and rented two camels for half a month. The price amounted to 35 million Jenny. Just renting two camels cost An 35 million, and that made Elena sad. ¡°Mr. An, actually, renting one camel is enough. There is no need for two.¡± An smiled: ¡°Although one is enough for the two of us to ride, but you¡¯re a woman, and I¡¯m a man, it isn¡¯t appropriate for us to ride the same camel.¡± An¡¯s behavior touched Elena. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go to the town and buy some water and food and then leave,¡± An suggested. Elena nodded and then led moved toward the town. The prices were too high that even a bucket of water costs over 100,000 Jenny, and beef is around 10,000 Jenny. The price of water is ten times higher than meet. However, both An and Elena understood that since it is a desert, water is more precious than anything. Even then, Elena wasn¡¯t satisfied. She felt that they were taking advantage of them. An didn¡¯t care and used his money to get water and food. For him, money was disposable and can be earned back anytime, so he didn¡¯t care. Elena also bought a map toward the capital of the kingdom. With a map, they weren¡¯t afraid of getting lost in the desert. Their current destination was the headquarters of the Reverse Crusade, where Helphes should be. After purchasing everything, An and Elena rod on their camels and prepared to set off. However, before they left, suddenly, arge group of people riding motorcycles arrived with green-dyed hair and many other colors and tattoos. They were some of the local gangs that robbed the town constantly. The merchants started closing their doors hurriedly and took shelter, but unfortunately, some of them weren¡¯t fast enough and were robbed clean. If anything resists, they would be shot to death. After looting, they noticed An and Elena. Because they knew the prices of renting camels, they knew that An and Elena were well off. As a result, they looked at them like a kid looks at candy. ¡°Go get both of them, and they must have a lot of money on them.¡± The leader ordered. His subordinates instantly surrounded Ana and Elena. Elena whispered to An: ¡°Mr. An, they are from the Reverse Crusader.¡± An nodded. He also noticed this because those people had a tattoo of a reversed cross, so their identities were clear at a nce. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 187: Evil Eye Chapter 187: Evil Eye [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Mr. An, what should we do now?¡± Seeing those people surrounding them, Elena asked. ¡°Hehe, what else can we do? We met the target we are looking for so soon, so of course, we will ask the whereabouts of their leader.¡± Looking at the soldiers of the Reverse Crusader, An gave them a chilling smile. Elena suddenly felt that An was more terrifying than the people from the Reverse Crusader. ¡°Grab them both.¡± The leader gave his orders and the ¡®soldiers¡¯ rushed toward Elena and An. Rankyaku! An kicked out using Rankyaku and directly cleaved the soldiers rushing toward him. No one was spared. The only one who remained alive was the leader who gave orders previously. He is a captain under the Reverse Crusader¡¯s banner and was ordered to plunder the resources from this town. However, they were out of luck since they encountered An this time. ¡°Damn it!¡± Seeing all his men die with one attack from An, the captain directly took his pistol and pointed at An, then shot. Bang! The bullet flew and hit An directly. The captain was taken aback by surprise as he actuallynded the shot. Elena was also surprised as she didn¡¯t expect that An would get shot. ¡°Mr. An, are you okay?¡± After asking this, Elena was surprised to find that An was actually intact. The captain noticed this as well and shot again. Bang! Bang! He pulled the trigger again, and although the bullets hit An, the hole they made quickly healed or more like reform with ice and disappeared. ¡°This is¡­ Ice?¡± Elena looked with wide eyes. The captain had the same reaction as Elena. In this world, there are actually monsters who aren¡¯t afraid of bullets?!! ¡°Haha, don¡¯t be surprised. This is my ability.¡± An nced at Elena and spoke. Elena nodded, but she was still surprised.She knew that An was strong, but she discovered that he still had many secrets. ¡°You monster!!¡± The captain screamed in horror and started running away. An sneered, and the running captain fell down. ¡°No, don¡¯t kill me.¡± Feeling that his life is about to end, the captain begged for mercy. ¡°Elena, this person is a bit useful. You can interrogate him.¡± An said. Elena nodded and went toward the captain, asking: ¡°Where did youe from?¡± ¡°We are from York town.¡± The captain replied truthfully. ¡°Yorktown? How many people do you have there?¡± ¡°About three hundred soldiers.¡± ¡°Where is Helphes?¡± ¡°He is no longer in Yorktown.¡± ¡°Where is he?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know. I¡¯m too low ranked to knew where master Helphes is.¡± ¡°Who is the leader of Yorktown?¡± ¡°It¡¯s the Lord Evil eye.¡± ¡°Evil eye?¡± ¡°Yes, Lord Evil eye is one of the cadres of the Reverse Crusader, and Master Helphes¡¯ right-hand man, he should know where Master Helphes is.¡± ¡°Ok, you can die.¡± After finishing her interrogation, Elena took a pistol a shot the captain. An nced at Elena in surprise as he didn¡¯t think she would act so quickly. ¡°Mr. An, let¡¯s go to Yorktown and find this Evil Eye first,¡± Elena suggested. An nodded: ¡°Ok, let go.¡± Since this is the first time for both of them toe to this country, they had to use a map to get to Yorktown. They rode on their camels and proceeded slowly toward Yorktown. ¡°Mr. An, it¡¯s getting dark. I guess we won¡¯t make it today. Let me find a ce to spend the night.¡± An nodded. Although he doesn¡¯t mind rushing at night, Elena couldn¡¯t. It was logical to find a ce to rest, but it wasn¡¯t easy finding somewhere suitable to rest in the desert. Fortunately, they were lucky enough to find a small oasis. It¡¯s wasn¡¯t right to call it an oasis, but it is more like a grasnd less than a kilometer long. After sleeping for the night, Elena and An continued their journey in the morning. After nearly half a day, the two finally came close to Yorktown. ¡°Mr. An, Yorktown is right ahead.¡± An nodded and asked: ¡°This is the territory of the Reverse Crusader. Are you afraid?¡± ¡°I¡¯m not afraid with Mr. An here.¡± An was quite shocked as he didn¡¯t expect Elena to say that. He smiled and said: ¡°Let¡¯s go!¡± ¡°Mr. An, what are you going to do?¡± Elena asked. An thought for a bit and said: ¡°Although our target is only Helphes, his organization is also quite evil, so I will eradicate them on the way. After all, I¡¯m a professional hunter. I have to asionally do something to punish evil to be worthy of my identity.¡± Hearing this, Elena¡¯s expression was strange: ¡°Mr. An, I sometimes don¡¯t understand you, but I support you on this matter. I think the people of this kingdom are oppressed by the Reverse Crusaders. But please be careful and don¡¯t underestimate them.¡± ¡°Well, don¡¯t worry.¡± An also understood Elena¡¯s concern. He was quite confident in his strength, but Elena didn¡¯t know his full power yet. Soon, the two of them rode their camels to the gate of Yorktown. The said gate was just two huge stone pirs with no door. It was probably due to the wars that the gate got destroyed. The Reverse Crusader¡¯s soldiers were stationed by the gate and quickly discovered Elena and An, and dozens of soldiers stopped them. ¡°Hey, some guys aren¡¯t afraid of death and came here. They probably don¡¯t know that Yorktown is now the territory of the Reverse Crusader.¡± The soldiers looked at Ana and Elena before continuing: ¡°The woman is not bad. She looks beautiful. Let¡¯s take her and offer her to Lord Evil Eye.¡± ¡°As for that man, just kill him.¡± An snorted and released his ice, freezing them one after the other. Seeing this scene, Elena sighed in amazement. Let¡¯s go. After killing the soldiers quickly, An walked into the town with Elena. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 188: Freeze Chapter 188: Freeze [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The town was devastated by the artilleries, and most of the buildings were severely damaged. This was once a rich town, but after the Reverse Crusader took the town, it became hell. Most of the soldiers who were defending this town got annihted by the Reverse Crusader, and the rest fled. An and Elena rode their camels toward the center of the town slowly. Along the way, An killed many members of the Reverse Crusader stationed here. The soldiers would always notice An and Elena and approached them before they get killed or interrogated then killed. Every obstacle in the way was cleared by An, and Elena witnessed how strong An was. She even thought that he was the strongest in the world currently. ¡°No matter how many peoplee, you can¡¯t stop this man.¡± Elena thought. At this time, a soldierunched a rocket at An. An lifted his hand indifferently, and cold air spread, generating an Ice wall. The rocket hit the wall and exploded, but amazingly, the Ice wall remained intact. ¡°What?!¡± ¡°He actually blocked a rocket.¡± On the streets, the soldiers whounched the rocket were inside an armored car. ¡°I¡¯m here.¡± An raised his hand toward the armored vehicle and said: ¡°Freeze!¡¯ In the next moment, the vehicle started freezing until it was encased in Ice. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± An looked at the dumbfounded Elena and said lightly. ¡°You¡¯re really amazing, Mr. An.¡± Elena sighed. ¡°It¡¯s nothing, just some small fries. There is no danger.¡± After arriving at the center of the town, a group of people appeared in front of An and Elena. They were the soldiers of the Reverse Crusader. In front of the soldiers stood two burly men about three meters tall. Both held a long axe in their hand and looked quite fierce. From their look, they should have killed many people already. The road was blocked, and Elena and An were surrounded. ¡°Where is your boss, Evil eye?¡± An ignored them and asked. ¡°Hehehe, this kid actually wants to find Lord Evil Eye. He certainly wants to die.¡± ¡°Sir, let¡¯s deal with them.¡± An was toozy to ask again and said: ¡°Let me send you to hell, a bunch of scumbags.¡± An drew Shusui from its sheath and said: ¡°ck storm!¡± With a light wave, a ck energy attack spread all over the ce and beheaded the soldiers and cut the buildings in half. Even the leaders of the soldiers died. They actually realized that An was a monster as soon as he waved his sword, but it was toote. The sword energy passed through several buildings and cut into a pce-like building, and instantly destroyed it. ¡°Damn it, you ruined my pce and killed all my men. I will kill you!¡± A thin figure stood in the distance and stared fiercely at An. Although he was short, his body exuded a strong aura. ¡°Oh? You can actually use Nen?¡± ¡°He is Evil Eye!¡± Elena said. Suddenly, Evil Eye saw Elena and recognized her: ¡°I remember you! You¡¯re Elena, the sister of Madam Alice, right?¡± Hearing Alice¡¯s name, Elena became excited and asked: ¡°Where is my sister?¡± ¡°Madam Alice is, of course, with Master Helphes, she is the angel of our crusader, and except for Master Helphes, no one is above her rank.¡± Elena gritted her teeth and said: ¡°Tell me, where is Helphes? I will kill him personally and rescue my sister.¡± ¡°Hehe, you won¡¯t have a chance to see Master Helphes because today, both of you will die here.¡± Evil Eye sneered, but he froze soon after as An appeared in front of him. ¡°When did he?!¡± Before he could activate his ability, Evil Eye saw An¡¯s Mangekyo Sharingan. To his horror, he appeared in a gray space while kneeling by the edge of a swimming pool. ¡°This is the world of Tsukuyomi.¡± ¡°Where is this? Why did it appear here? That guy¡¯s eyes¡­.¡± Evil Eye tried to move but found out that he was bound by a rope. ¡°You will experience drowning in this pool for 48 hours.¡± An¡¯s voice was like a death sentence. Evil Eye roared: ¡°What do you want to do? Let me go.¡± ¡°Just keep struggling as you experience death by suffocation.¡± After that, An kicked fierce Eye on the back into the swimming pool. Evil Eye fell directly and struggled desperately to get out, but his body continued to sink down. In the real world, Evil Eye went limp on the ground as he started vomiting and turned pale. He drowned for 48 hours in Tsukuyomi, but it just happened in a mere second in the real world. ¡°What happened to Evil Eye?¡± ¡°Mr. An, what did you do to him?¡± Elena looked at An, confused. An sneered: ¡°I just made him experience death by drowning for two days.¡± Elena didn¡¯t understand this, but she didn¡¯t continue asking. An raised Evil Eye and asked him: ¡°Okay, where is Helphes? If you don¡¯t answer, I will let you down some more.¡± Evil Eye was so sacred that he quickly said: ¡°He is in Bol city.¡± ¡°Bol City? Well, thanks.¡± After obtaining Helphes¡¯ whereabout, An let Evil Eye go. ¡°Bastard, you are useless now, so go to hell.¡± Elena took her pistol and shot Evil Eye between the eyes. ¡°I knew you wouldn¡¯t let him go.¡± An wasn¡¯t surprised by Elena killing Evil Eye. ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter for scum like him should be killed.¡± ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go to Bol City next and see how far it is.¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, Elena took out the map¡­ Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 189: Puppets Chapter 189: Puppets [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// After two days of traveling, An and Ellen arrived at Bol city. Bol City¡¯s buildings were high and looked magnificent, unlike the barren cities they traveled through. ¡°Mr. An, Helphes should be inside. I will rely on your one again when we meet him,¡± Elena said. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, and I will deal with him,¡± An promised. Elena nodded. She didn¡¯t doubt An¡¯s power anymore. The two walked inside casually, but soon the Reverse Crusader discovered them. ¡°You guys are the ones who destroyed the branch in Yorktown, right?¡± A cadre from the Reverse Crusader red at An. An didn¡¯t confirm but said coldly: ¡°Call your leader here.¡± ¡°Who do you think you are to see our leader?¡± The cadre said arrogantly. Usually, for those evil and arrogant small fries, An would¡¯ve taken action without talking B.S. Well, this isn¡¯t any different from the usual since An directly covered his fist with Armament Haki and used Soru to sh beside him and killed him with a simple punch. ¡°What? Evil Wolf was killed with a single punch?!¡± The soldiers¡¯ eyes widened in shock at An¡¯s disy of power. When the other cadres saw this, their expressions became ugly. ¡°Everyone, attack together!¡± Several cadres teamed up and surrounded An and released their aura. ¡°I will control him first; you find an opportunity to attack him.¡± One of the cadres took the lead, and as he did, a few vines appeared on his hand. Those vines directly moved toward An, trying to restrain his hands and feet. ¡°A good Nen ability, but it¡¯s too weak.¡± Although the vines bound An, when he released his aura, the vines shattered instantly. ¡°What?! That¡¯s too strong!¡± The cadres looked at An with surprise as they realized that An was in apletely different realmpared to them. ¡°Don¡¯t just stand still, fight.¡± A cadre gritted his teeth and shouted before forming a huge fireball in his hand. An saw this and sneered before he waved his hand to form a ball of Ice that was three times bigger than the fireball, which he crushed and froze the cadre who made it. An didn¡¯t stop but released another attack, and this time, it was to take down everyone. ¡°Frozen storm!¡± The wind roared as a huge storm appeared out of nowhere and froze all the soldiers and cadres of the Reverse Crusader. With An at the center, almost the entire city became an Ice city. At this moment, An saw a man in a ck coat riding a monster in the sky. He stared at An angrily and said: ¡°Who are you?¡± The one who will take your life.¡± An sneered. ¡°What arrogance.¡± Helphes snorted coldly and patted the monster¡¯s head. The monster opened its mouth and released an energy st at An. ¡°Ice wall.¡± The energy st hit the wall and dispersed with a bang sound. ¡°What?! You actually blocked it!!¡± Seeing the energy attack was blocked, Helphes directly yelled, and his hand changed into a crimson w. ¡°Blood w de!¡± Helphes rushed toward and An, who once again made an Ice wall. ¡°Ice wall!¡± The hard Ice wall shattered due to the crimson ws attack. ¡°Oh?¡± An didn¡¯t panic. Instead, he covered his fist in Armament Haki and punched. Helphes attacked using his weird ws. Both attacks collided, releasing arge shockwave before Helphes flew away. ¡°Damn it!¡± Helphes released all of his aura, and his body started changing. Helphes had only 50% human genes, and the other half belongs to a monster or a werewolf. After releasing his aura, he became faster and stronger since he transformed into a humanoid monster. In the next moment, An and Helphes disappeared, and only the collision between their attacks could be seen from time to time. ¡°Nice power, but it is not enough to kill me.¡± After ying for two minutes, An got annoyed and became serious. sh step! An figures disappeared, and suddenly he was behind Helphes with Yatsufusa piercing thetter¡¯s chest. Since he was killed with Yatsufusa, he became An¡¯s puppet. ¡°Where is Alice?¡± ¡°She¡¯s in the pce.¡± ¡°Elena, your sister, is in the pce. Go find her, be careful.¡± ¡°Okay, thank you, Mr. An.¡± Elena nced at An gratefully and then entered the pce. Seeing Elena going to find her sister, An looked at Helphes and ordered him to disband the Reverse Crusader. Since Helphes was a puppet, he naturally obeyed An¡¯s orders. After disbanding the Reverse Crusader, An told Helphes to go and hide for now. An turned Helphes into a puppet because he was somewhat strong. Right now, he only had Feitan and Franklin as puppets, so adding Helphes makes them three. If there is trouble, An could summon them to do his bidding anytime. But since he didn¡¯t need them now, he ordered them to hide. Since they are puppets, they didn¡¯t need to drink or eat. Although it¡¯s not good to mess with the dead, those three were demons when they were alive and killed countless people, so An didn¡¯t feel guilty after turning them into puppets. Two dayster, An and Elena left. Elena found her sister sessfully, so she said: ¡°Mr. An, as promised, I will be yourpanion in the future.¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± An nodded, then said: ¡°Elena, although you¡¯re mypanion, you don¡¯t have to go with me and do your thing. I will do the same, and if I needed something, I would call you, and you do the same. You can apany your sister.¡± ¡°Thank you, Mr. An.¡± Elena was extremely grateful as she took her sister and left. After finishing this job, An didn¡¯t continue taking missions. He was a little tired from being a bounty hunter. A few dayster, An came to The Heaven¡¯s arena and intended to rx for a bit and abuse the new rookies in the sky arena. Since thest time he took Hisoka¡¯s position as a floor master, An didn¡¯t need to participate in many matches anymore. An¡¯s return attracted many fighters in The Heaven¡¯s Arena. After all, An defeated Hisoka, and this alone can make 95% of the fighters jealous. Hello everyone, I want to assure many who thought I will drop this novel that I won¡¯t! Please support me on Patreon, and if you can¡¯t, a simplement and a review will suffice, and I will be grateful! Chapter 190: Floor Master’s Battle Chapter 190: Floor Master¡¯s Battle [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Each floor between 220th to the 250th in The Heaven¡¯s Arena is owned by a floor master, which means including An, there are a total of 30 floor masters. And when An returned to The Heaven¡¯s Arena, he wanted to fight. So, he directly issued a letter of challenge to the other 29 floor masters through the official website. However, since most of the floor masters weren¡¯t in The Heaven¡¯s Arena, An received three responses to his challenge. The floor masters who epted his challenge were the 227th floor¡¯s master, the 235th floor¡¯s master, and the 242nd floor¡¯s master. Originally, the floor masters can decline the challenge since An challenged all of them, but the few who epted wanted to teach An a lesson since they thought he was too arrogant. The arrogance of challenging all of the floor masters was indeed too much for them. A few dayster, the day of the battle arrived. This time, An challenged three well-known floor masters, which attracted quite the attention from everywhere. It can be said that this battle was like a grand event in The Heaven¡¯s Arena. However, An, who was already in the Arena, felt a little disappointed that only three epted his challenge. He thought that at least ten floor masters would ept the challenge, and that is the bare minimum for him to enjoy the fight. An didn¡¯t really care about the floor masters, actually, and just by looking at the Aura they were releasing, he could gauge their basic strength. They weren¡¯t weak, to say, but they weren¡¯t strong either. For him, they were just small characters that can¡¯t make him go all out. An didn¡¯t n to finish the fight quickly, as he directly looked at the floor masters and said: ¡°The three of you cane at me together. I will give each of you a free attack, but note that it is only one, so grab that opportunity and use your most powerful skill.¡± With An¡¯s current power, he was pursuing excitement in battle since only a few can make him go all out in the world currently. He didn¡¯t want to seem too arrogant, so he will defend against their attacks, or so he thought. But telling the floor masters to attack together and giving them a free attack was already too arrogant. The floor masters were really angry since An was looking down on them. ¡°Bastard, don¡¯t look down on us. Although you defeated Hisoka, it doesn¡¯t mean that you can defeat the three of us together.¡± One of the floor masters shouted angrily. ¡°Well then, I will look forward to your performance.¡± An smiled calmly. Another Floor master said: ¡°An, you said you would let each of us attack once, right, but we don¡¯t want to take advantage of you, so the three of us will attack one after the other and not together.¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter. You do whatever you want.¡± ¡°Then I will go first.¡± The floor master of the 227th floor decided to attack first. ¡°I¡¯m Yan, and I wonder if you heard my name before.¡± The 227th floor¡¯s master said. An nodded. Although he didn¡¯t know of any Yan¡¯s, he nodded to show his respect. ¡°I will attack you, so be prepared.¡± Yan stared at An while he took out his weapon from his back. His weapon was very long and was wrapped in ck cloth. Yan took the cloth covering the weapon to reveal a spear that shone with dazzling light. An narrowed his eyes slightly as he looked at the spear and said: ¡°A good weapon.¡± The spear was silver in color and seemed pretty sharp. In The Heaven¡¯s Arena, contestants are allowed to use weapons after reaching the 200th floor. ¡°Let¡¯s go, let me see how strong your weapon is.¡± Said An as he hooked his finger at Yan. An¡¯s gesture was quite provocative to Yan, who immediately said: ¡°I will use my best ability to defeat you.¡± As Yan said this, his Nen covered the spear like a red coat. He pointed the spear toward An and shouted: ¡°Crimson Spear!!¡± Yan threw the spear toward An with all of his power. An still remained indifferent as the spear approached him. He unhurriedly waved his hand and created an Ice wall. In the next second, the spear collided fiercely against the Ice Wall. The ming Aura covering the mes hit the Ice wall and started evaporating it, and finally, the spear managed to make a hole into the ice wall. ¡°Oh?¡± An was slightly surprised. In the next second, the spear sted into An¡¯s body. The spear managed to pierce An¡¯s body, creating a fist-sized hole. Seeing this, Yan was stunned as he didn¡¯t expect that his attack would kill An. After a while, he smiled in joy as he was the winner. The audience roared and started cheering. Standing behind Yan, the other Floor Masters didn¡¯t even manage to make a move, and the match already ended. They looked at An in disdain. ¡°You aren¡¯t even that strong, and you want to actually fight all of us together.¡± The other floor master suddenly looked serious: ¡°You recovered?¡± ¡°What?¡± The first one heard this and looked at An quickly only to see the hole disappearing from An¡¯s body and said in disbelief: ¡°What?! How can you recover from a hole in your body?!¡± ¡°What are you two talking about?¡± Yan wasn¡¯t looking at An as he was waving at the audience. Hearing the conversation behind him, he couldn¡¯t help turn around and look at An. His smile froze as he saw that An was intact. ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡± Yan¡¯s eyes widened as he shouted. He stared at An¡¯s body and eximed: ¡°That¡¯s impossible. My spear clearly pierced your body. How did you recover?¡± Yan couldn¡¯t figure this out at all. An looked at him: ¡°Are you surprised?¡± An looked at Yan¡¯s sullen face and smiled. Yan thought that An had a Nen ability that could heal him. Otherwise, he would be dead. Yan once again held the spear and threw it at An. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: G.O.S.S: Complete (Chapter 709) [Tier Trainee]. T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 287! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 191: Fear Chapter 191: Fear [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Looking at the Spear, An raised his hand and said: ¡°Ice Time.¡± Cold air emerged out of An¡¯s hand, and once it touched the spear, the aura around it was extinguished, and the spear was frozen. Yan¡¯s eyes widened, and before he could react, he followed the spear¡¯s example and was frozen solid. With a simple wave, An already defeated Yan, and looked at the two-floor masters, and said: ¡°You cane together.¡± The 235th Floor¡¯s master and the 242nd Floor¡¯s master looked at each other. The first one is called Shinji, and the second one is called Takeo, both of them were floor masters and had their own self-esteem, so they didn¡¯t want to face An together. ¡°I will go next.¡± Shinji was the second one facing An. Shinji¡¯s face was serious. He had a basic understanding of An¡¯s power after thest fight. First, An can make Ice and freeze the target, which means he is a transmuter, and secondly, he can heal his injuries. The Ice ability is a strong ability, and it was the first time Shinji encountered something like that. Although Shinji had a headache due to An¡¯s ability, he was already facing An and didn¡¯t forfeit. Shinji was ready for the fight, and he looked at An said: ¡°You said that you would let each of us attack once, right?¡± An nodded: ¡°I did say that, and I will abide by what I said. But if you don¡¯t manage to defeat me with that attack, you will end up like Yan.¡± ¡°Well then, you said it yourself.¡± With An¡¯s assurance, Shinji was relieved. He knew that in terms of power, he was no match to An. An was stronger by far, and this move was his only chance of winning. Therefore, Shinji wanted to take advantage of this free attack and deal with An directly. An stared at Shinji, and suddenly, the scene in front of him changed as Shinji¡¯s figure blurred from An¡¯s vision. An nced around and found that his surrounding had changed. Everything was constantly changing as if it was an illusion. ¡°Is this Shinji¡¯s Nen ability? Interesting.¡± A smile appeared on An¡¯s mouth. At this time, An found himself standing on a cliff. He nced at the bottom of the cliff and couldn¡¯t see the end of it. If he takes one step forward, he will fall down into a bottomless abyss. The wind blew into his face, and his clothes fluttered freely. There was no other foothold except for the one under his feet. When standing in such a ce, ordinary people¡¯s mentality would crumble with time, and finally, they would either jump down or go crazy. This is Shinji¡¯s ability, Illusory Abyss. He can create this world using his Nen and confuse his opponent, thereby causing his opponent¡¯s mind to crumble and experience great fear. Shinji¡¯s ability attack the person mentally without any need to touch ore in contact with that person. Suddenly, Shinji saw An taking a step forward and sneered. An took a step forward which means he fell directly into the Abyss. Shinji was happy. Since An took a step forward, it means that he was mentally unstable and close to going insane. However, Shinji noticed that there was no fear in An¡¯s face. ¡°Could it be he took the initiative to move forward, and he isn¡¯t feeling any fear?¡± Shinji was shocked. An faced the bottomless Abyss without any fear. The Illusory Abyss had no effect on An. ¡°His mentality is too strong.¡± Shinji sighed. This is the first time he has encountered something like this. ¡°Actually, your Nen Ability is very good, but unfortunately, you used it wrong.¡± An chuckled lightly. Shinji said solemnly: ¡°I lost, I admit defeat.¡± An shook his head and said: ¡°It¡¯s not good to admit defeat. I said before that if you can¡¯t deal with me in one move, you will end up like Yan.¡± After saying this, An raised his head, and Shinji¡¯s entire body started freezing. Finally, only the 242nd Floor¡¯s Master was left on the ring, and his name was Takeo. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: G.O.S.S: Complete (Chapter 709) [Tier Trainee]. T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 287! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 192: Boots Chapter 192: Boots [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Takeo watched Yan and Shinji defeated by An, and his expression became ugly. Because if he loses, it means that they were utterly defeated. On the ring, losing wasmon, but losing in a three vs. one match is a great humiliation, especially to the floor masters. It would mean that they aren¡¯t qualified for their positions as floor masters, and countless challengers would appear to take their throne. Takeo clenched his fist unconsciously as his pride didn¡¯t allow him to admit defeat to An. He didn¡¯t want to be a loser. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Takeo is full of fighting spirit. Defeat him without breaking him. Reward: Divine Fists Gloves.] [2: Overwhelm Takeo and break his fighting spirit. Reward: Boots of the Fast Walker.] Facing the long-lost system¡¯s option, An chose the second option. He won¡¯t just defeat Takeo, but his fighting spirit as well. He will shatter his confidence andpletely crush him. ¡®Huh, when did I be such a sadist?¡¯ An thought ¡®The system changed me. Well, I need to get the boots, so I have to do it.¡¯ An sighed. At this time, Takeo started exerting his power and rushed up and mmed his palm on the ground. Takeo is an enhancer, and his Nen ability is called Wrath of the Earth. He can enhance his palms using his Nen and send a strong impact through the ground, creating a spike. Sharp spikes prated the ring andunched a surprise attack at An. Three spikes appeared under An¡¯s feet and hit him directly. The spikes prated An¡¯s body, making the audience look in disbelief and Takeough proudly: ¡°Haha, my wrath of the earth is invincible.¡± ¡°Oh really? That not exactly true.¡± The smile on Takao¡¯s face suddenly vanished as his face stiffened. He looked at the spikes that prated An¡¯s body, and to his shock, they turned into Ice and crumbled down while An stood there uninjured. ¡°How I this possible? My attack hit him.¡± Takao eximed in surprise, and he quickly calmed down. He remembered that Yan also pierced his with his spear, but An emerged intact after that. ¡°Is he immortal?¡± Takao couldn¡¯t help thinking such an absurd idea facing his current predicament. ¡°No, that¡¯s impossible, even if the most powerful Nen user can¡¯t have an immortal body.¡± Takao quickly denied that idea. If An is immortal, then he is no longer human, but he is human. Although he denied that An is immortal, he couldn¡¯t deny that An has a strange ability that made him immune to damage. ¡°Damn it, what should I do?¡± Takao was in trouble; he didn¡¯t know if he should attack or defend. Because he believed that even if his attack hit An, he won¡¯t harm him. ¡°Wait, even if he is immune to damage, he will consume his power as long as he used that ability, or if the damage reaches a certain level, he won¡¯t stay immune.¡± Thinking about this, Takao decisively decided to attack with his full power. He used Ny percent of his Nen to enhance both of his palms, intending to give An a heavy blow. An looked at Takao with interest and didn¡¯t interrupt him. There is no doubt that Takao will use all of his power in the next attack. ¡°The Fury of the Giant!¡± Takao mmed his palms on the ground, and a strong impact shook the ring violently. Immediately after, the ring split into four or five parts, and a giantposed of gravel and mud formed. The giant fist hurled toward An with one punch after the other. Takao believed that even if An is immune to damage, it¡¯s impossible for him to remain unscathed after the bombardment from the giant. However, at this moment, Takao felt the temperature around him drops. ¡°What going on? Why is it so cold?¡± Suddenly, his eyes widened as the giant was suddenly frozen solid. The cold air froze the entire Arena and froze Takao along with it. Takao used all of his power and broke the Ice, freeing himself. Takao was exhausted, but the coldness in the air didn¡¯t disappear, and it made it hard for Takao to breathe. His whole body was shaking uncontrobly. ¡°It¡¯s so cold¡­.¡± Takao curled up on the ground as frost gradually appeared around his body, and in a moment, he was frozen. [Ding! You sessfully overwhelmed Takao and shattered his fighting spirit. As a result, you got Boot of the Fast Walker.] A pair of shoes appeared in An¡¯s hand as soon as the notification urred. The boot of the Fast walker can increase his speed by 30%. ¡°I like this reward.¡± Although An was already quite fast, more speed wouldn¡¯t hurt. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: G.O.S.S: Complete (Chapter 709) [Tier Trainee]. T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 290! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 193: Back to Whale Island Chapter 193: Back to Whale Ind [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// An defeated the 227th floor¡¯s master, Yan, the 235th floor¡¯s master, Shinji, and the 242nd Floor master, Takao, in a three-on-one match. This was an impressive record that made him famous in The Heaven¡¯s Arena. However, on the second day after the fight, An left The Heaven¡¯s Arena. He decided to contact Gon. An hasn¡¯t contacted Gon for a long time since their separation, and he was curious about where Gon is currently. However, after calling a few times, no one answered. An had no other way than to call Killua, who should be with Gon. However, Killua didn¡¯t answer either. He didn¡¯t call either Kurapika or Leorio since both of them shouldn¡¯t be with Gon. An gave up and decided to go to whale ind instead. It has been a long time since An left. After traveling on the ship for a day, An arrived at the whale ind. The port was as lively as before, with many peopleing and going. An didn¡¯t linger here for long as he directly moved toward the town. His destination was naturally Gon¡¯s home. When he arrived, he didn¡¯t see anyone and couldn¡¯t help going to Mito¡¯s shop. There were only two or three guests in the pub and Mito as the bartender. Seeing An at the door, Mito was stunned for a moment and then asked in disbelief: Is that you¡­ An?¡± An smiled slightly: ¡°Yup, it has been a long time since I saw you.¡± ¡°I thought that you weren¡¯ting back.¡± Mito sighed. Mito looked intently at An to see how much he changed. She found that An has indeed changed. He was taller, and his figure seemed stronger. An seemed to have grown a lot and looked like a mature man. ¡°Although I don¡¯t know what you experienced outside, you seem more energetic than before,¡± Mito said. An smiled: ¡°You two, you are more beautiful than before.¡± Mito blushed and lowered her head and asked: ¡°By the way, why did youe here?¡± ¡°Well, I couldn¡¯t reach Gon on the phone, so Ie here to take a look.¡± ¡°Well, it turns out you wanted to find gone, huh.¡± Mito seemed disappointed but quickly hid her feelings. ¡°Gones back with his friend Killua, but it seems that he found something his father left him and then left again saying he was going to find Ging.¡± ¡°So that¡¯s what happened.¡± An nodded and could tell that Gon and Killua weren¡¯t in trouble for the time being. ¡°How long do you n on staying here this time?¡± Mito asked. An thought for a bit and said: ¡°I¡¯m not sure. I will stay for ten days or half a month before making a n.¡± ¡°Ok then, I will go clean Gon¡¯s room so you can stay in there.¡± ¡°Ok.¡± An nodded at Mito¡¯s thoughtfulness, then took a golden card and handed it to her and said: ¡°There are 100 million Jenny in that card, take it.¡± ¡°Why are you giving it to me?¡± Mito heard such arge number was on the card and was startled and didn¡¯t take it. ¡°It¡¯s just a thank you for your care.¡± Anughed. He didn¡¯t forget the kindness Mito showed him when she took him in before. Now that he had money, he naturally will return the favor even if it¡¯s not actually much. Mito hesitated for a bit before finally epting the gold card. During the days An stayed on whale ind, he got together with Mito. Mito felt that An was the right person for her, and so she was honest with her feelings and told An. An epted her feelings since he had a very good impression of Mito, and they got together naturally. An tried contacting Killua and Gon on the phone dozens of times a day, and finally, Killua answered. ¡°hey, Killua?¡± An asked. ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s me. Are you An?¡± Killua¡¯s tired voice sounded from the other end. ¡°Yup, I¡¯ve been trying to contact you guys for some time now.¡± An jokingly scolded with a smile. ¡°Excuse me, I was ying a game called Greed Ind with Gon, so there was no signal there,¡± Killua exined. ¡°Greed Ind?¡± An remembered the game which was made by Gon¡¯s father, Ging Freecss, with some other people. Although the game was made with Nen¡¯s ability, the ind actually existed, but ordinary people can¡¯t find it. ¡°Then, did you guys clear it?¡± An asked. ¡°Well, after a lot of hard work, I cleared the game along with Gon and someone else,¡± Killua said lightly. ¡°That¡¯s great.¡± An smiled then asked: ¡°Where are you guys now?¡± ¡°After finishing the game, we got a card that allowed us to travel to someone¡¯s location, and when we used it, we arrived at a ce called NGL, a country part of the Mitene union.¡± ¡°You guys are in NGL?¡± Hearing their location, An knew that this country is where the Chimera Ants appeared. In other words, it¡¯s very likely that Gon and Killua will encounter Chimera Ants there. The Chimera ants are creatures from the Dark Continent, and there were quite dangerous. Even if Gon and Killua mastered their Nen abilities, they can¡¯t defeat them. In other words, their current situation was quite dangerous. An said seriously: ¡°Wait for me there, don¡¯t go deep into that ce, and wait for me, I will set out now.¡± Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: G.O.S.S: Complete (Chapter 709) [Tier Trainee]. T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 290! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 194: Chimera Ants Chapter 194: Chimera Ants [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The Republic of East Gorteau, also known as Neo-Green Life (NGL) Autonomous Region. It was bordered by the Republic of Rokario and is a part of the Mitene Union. It is a closed country without any rtions to the outside world. This country takes the protection of nature as its purpose and abandoned scientific researches and the like. More than 90% of the residentse from the group of Neo-Green Life, so the country is Named NGL. Because it¡¯s a closed country, foreigners are generally prohibited from entering the country, even as tourists. As a result, only a few people are eligible to enter the country, for example, Professional Hunters. After a long journey of several days, An arrived at the embassy in the borders. An had a Hunter License, so he was qualified to enter the country. But even though he was qualified, he can¡¯t enter without the inspection procedure because it¡¯s stated that any foreigner entering the country isn¡¯t allowed to bring weapons along with or any equipment, including phones, lighters, and other personal items. In the end, except for his clothes and cash, all of An¡¯s belongings were left in the embassy. Although An felt a little ufortable with this, he didn¡¯t say anything. After all, he was on someone else¡¯s turf, so he should abide by some rules. After passing the checkpoint, An officially entered NGL. In front of him, a vast in appeared with towering hillsides and dense forest. The air was quite fresh since nature was protected well in this country. Because he didn¡¯t have his cell phone, An could only search for Gon and Killua slowly. After walking for a while, An saw a farm nearby. They were renting horses on that farm. Since NGL is a closed country, their main means of transportation were horses. The farm owner said that renting a horse for a day costs 15,000 Jenny, and if the horse is damaged or died during the rental period, thepensation is 5 million Jenny. An didn¡¯t have much cash on him, but he has more than enough money to rent a horse. ¡°Mr. John, have you seen two little kids here? One is wearing all green and has an urchin¡¯s hairstyle, while the other has silver hair. Both are about twelve to thirteen years old.¡± Hearing this, the owner, Mr. John, nodded: ¡°Yes, since there are only a few people in this country, I remember every customer. They are called Gon and Killua, right?¡± ¡°Yes, those two.¡± The owner said: ¡°Gon and Killua rented a horse previously, and there is another person with them named Kite. After they rented the horses, they set off along the coastline while saying they would survey the biological lifeforms there. You can look in the viges along the coastline. You will find them.¡± ¡°How long since they left?¡± An asked. ¡°About a day.¡± ¡°Thank you.¡± Knowing the direction where Gon and Killua left, An immediately rode his horse and set off. An naturally knew Kite, who is Ging Freecss¡¯s student and a professional Hunter. Originally, Killua, Gon, and Kite were investigating the Chimera Ant. But, unfortunately, they were attacked by Neferpitou. In order to save Gon and Killua, Kite stayed behind to fight with the Catwoman. However, in the end, he lost and was killed. ¡°I must find them quickly. Otherwise, I will be toote.¡± An sped up and activated his Heaven¡¯s Eye ability to search for Gon and Killua. In a vige ten of kilometers away from An, the three Hunters discovered that a farmer disappeared strangely. When An arrived in the vige, Killua, Kite, and Gon already set off to the next one. However, An noticed the clue left behind by Killua for him. Through the clue, An learned that they were going to the next vige and nned to go deeper into the NGL. An didn¡¯t stop and directly set off toward the next vige. As for the disappearing Vigers, An could only think of the Chimera Ants hunting them for the Queen to enjoy. ¡°It means that the Ant King Meruem wasn¡¯t born yet.¡± An guessed. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: G.O.S.S: Complete (Chapter 709) [Tier Trainee]. T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 290! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 195: Storm Greatsword! Chapter 195: Storm Greatsword! [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Just as when An set off toward the next vige, he saw something in the sky pping its wings and blocking the sun. An nced and saw hundreds of them, they were simr in size to humans, but their appearance was different as they have weird shapes. An took a close look and found they were Chimera Ants. At this time, the Chimera Ants captured dozens of vigers and nned on returning to the Nest. When An saw this, he nned on killing them. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Eliminate those Chimera Ants. Reward: The Vampire Scythe.] [2: Follow the Chimera Ants to their Nest. Reward: The Great Sword of Storm.] Seeing this, An thought for a while before deciding to follow the Chimera Ants to their Nest. Since An can use Zetsu while also using his Rokushiki techniques, he can use Moon Walk to follow behind them quietly. After two hours, when it was getting dark, the Chimera Antsnded on a mountain peak. An saw a huge cave in the mountain. The chimera ants grabbed the vigers and directly entered the cave. After some time, the system gave An his reward. [Ding! You sessfully found the Nest of the Chimera Ants. You got The Great Sword of Storm.] An noticed four soldiers in front of the cave acting as guards. When An appeared in front of them, they became vignt. Those ants were low ranked, or known as cannon fodders, with a very low IQ. They can¡¯t even speak, but they were aggressive toward humans. ¡°Well, I will try the new sword¡¯s power.¡± Seeing the four Ants rushing toward him, An took out the Great Sword of Storm and waved it casually. Boom! Suddenly, violent wind swept out from it, forming a storm and imprisoning the ants inside. ¡°It¡¯s quite powerful.¡± An smiled in satisfaction. ¡°Those Chimera Ants are the lowest-ranked ones here, and their power is just a little stronger than ordinary humans. This sword can kill them in a second, but I don¡¯t know about stronger ones. An knew that among the Chimera ants, other than the lowest soldiers, there are divisionmanders. The higher their level, the stronger they are. However, there are some exceptions. There are a few smart ones or ones with special abilities in the higher ranks, but they don¡¯t have muchbat power. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Leave the Nest and avoid any more conflict. Reward: Mobility Boots.] [2: Destroy the Nest of the Chimera Ants. Reward: Jungle Dagger.] Since he has already arrived at their Nest, he nned on wiping them up in one fell swoop. It was natural to choose the second option. Furthermore, An already had the Fast Walker boot, and he didn¡¯t need another boot with simr attributes. ¡°Then, let¡¯s begin.¡± Taking a deep breath, An walked into the Nest of the Chimera Ants with the storm sword in his hand. The inside of the Nest was very spacious, with three main corridors. An stood in front of the three passages and used his Observation Haki and noticed that many Chimera Ants gathered in the middle passage. There are some Chimera Ants in the right and left passages but only in small numbers. An thrust his giant sword on the ground and raised both his hands. Ice Age! The cold air spread from his hands and sealed both channels, and he continued forward to freeze the Chimera ants inside. After freezing both rights and left passages, An picked his sword and walked in the passage in the middle. If An really wanted, he could¡¯ve used Ice Age to cover all the Nests in Ice directly, which will make it impossible for the Chimera Ants inside to Escape. However, considering that there are vigers inside as well, he didn¡¯t want to kill them along with the Ants. Although An wasn¡¯t a good person, he won¡¯t kill the innocents without a valid reason. He still could feel that there are some people alive inside the Nest with his Observation Haki. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: G.O.S.S: Complete (Chapter 709) [Tier Trainee]. T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 290! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 196: Rescue Chapter 196: Rescue [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// An went deep into the passage, and from time to time, two or three Chimera Ants would appear only to die under An¡¯s sword. After that, An reached halfway through the passage, which seemed like a great hall. There were two holes at the end of the hall, and each one leads to a different ce. Using [En] and Observation Haki, he could feel living humans in the small hole on the left, while on the right, there were many Chimera Ants. An walked into the left passage where there are humans and frowned as he saw a horrible scene. Human skulls and bones were scattered on the floor. How many did the Chimera Ants kill in the past few months? The remaining people were detained in a giant-shaped iron cage. An looked at them briefly and could tell that there were dozens of them here. They were the group of vigers that were captured recently. After seeing An, the vigers¡¯ eyes brightened as they hoped that rescue was here, but soon, they be depressed again. They already know how strong the Chimera Ants were, and a single person couldn¡¯t save them. The Chimera Ants that were taking care of the livestock saw An and were taken aback. Obviously, they didn¡¯t expect a human to appear here. ¡°Die, you bastard!¡± Before they could react, An shouted in anger. ¡°Ora Ora Ora Ora Ora Ora!!¡± An used Star tinum, who punched the Chimera Ants. Under Star tinum¡¯s attack, the Chimera Ants were beaten down and smashed into the ground. An was venting his anger after witnessing all the skulls on the ground. The vigers saw the Chimera Ants being destroyed and couldn¡¯t help staring at him. They realized that An wasn¡¯t an ordinary person. ¡°Please help me!¡± ¡°Save me!¡± The young and old vigers begged, looking really pitiful. They put their hands on the cage bars hoping that An will save them and take them out. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, and I will get you out of here.¡± An directly waved his sword and controlled his strength to split the cages open, releasing the vigers inside. The freed vigers directly gathered around An and thanked him. ¡°Follow behind me, don¡¯t run around,¡± An said. The vigers considered An their savior and naturally followed his orders obediently. An led them to the small hole and came out to the spacious fan-shaped hall. There was arge group of ants when they came out, probably because the vigers made loud sounds while moving. The vigers panicked seeing the ants, while the ants moved quickly to kill them. An snorted and directly waved his Sword of the Storm. Boom! A strong current of wind-generated inside therge hall, lifting the ants before slicing them up. Once he solved them, An looked at another ce as he could feel the Chimera Ants there. ¡°Ice age!¡± Ice shot out of An¡¯s palm and directly sealed therge hole on the right, and froze the Chimera ants inside. There was no sunlight in the cave, so the Ice will only melt after a few days. By then, most low-level ants would die. [Ding! You sessfully destroyed the Chimera Ants Nest. You got Jungle Dagger.] After getting the reward, An nned on leaving after getting the vigers out, but when he was about to leave, the vigers knelt down and begged for An to take them back to their viges. Considering that this ce was filled with Chimera Ants, the vigers would probably die if he leaves them. So, An had to escort them back to their viges, making reaching Gon, Killua, and Kite harder. ¡°I hope they are okay.¡± An thought to himself. As long as the King¡¯s guards of the Chimera Ants aren¡¯t born yet, they won¡¯t be in any danger with Kite¡¯s power. An didn¡¯t know when the King¡¯s Guards will be born, which is the problem. However, he knew that if the King¡¯s guards made a move, he could feel their aura and rush over if he was close, which is why he activated his Observation Haki to the max. He also released his aurapletely to attack the guards before attacking Gon, Killua, and Kite. An¡¯s Observation Haki can cover 1 kilometer around him, and within it, he could feel anything inside. If he adds [En], An would perceive anything in 1,500 meters around him. However, that won¡¯t just consume Nen, but his stamina, so An only activated his Haki. Even so, with An¡¯s Stamina, he won¡¯t be able to maintain the Observation Haki for long. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: G.O.S.S: Complete (Chapter 709) [Tier Trainee]. T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 292! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 197: Numbers Chapter 197: Numbers [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// It was not until the next morning that An reached a vige to settle the vigers he rescued. An took a short rest and recovered some energy before setting off again. He was sure that Gon, Killua, and Kite were in the NGL right now. As he moved deeper into the NGL, An encountered a few low-leveled Ants who rushed at him instantly. An didn¡¯t pay them any attention as he just waved his hand and froze them one by one. As he continued forward, more and more Antse toward him, and of course, he just froze them. But he was annoyed since they were too many of them. ¡°The numbers of the Chimera Ants actually multiplied so quickly.¡± An frowned. In just half a day, he killed more than a hundred Chimera Ants. Adding the ones he killed in the nest, they were more than 200 hundred of them. He guessed that the Chimera Ants already developed quite well right now and spread all over the NGL. The viges in the NGL probably became the Chimera Ants targets. He already passed through five viges, and all of them were either captured or eaten. Finally, when he arrived at the sixth vige, An saw a group of Chimera Ants attacking and killing many people. ¡°Look for all the vigers hiding here, don¡¯t let any one of them escape.¡± A captain ranked Chimera Ants was flying in mid-air andmanding the soldiers below while patrolling the sky, making sure no one escaped. Suddenly, the captain noticed An walking out of the wood. He looked at him with eyes full of greed and smiled: ¡°I will capture that person myself.¡± He quickly pped his wings and rushed down toward An. His sharp eagle ws pointing toward An fiercely. An noticed him and sneered. Partisan! After being hit by An¡¯s Partisan, the Chimera Ant didn¡¯t die, but it fell down and was injured, which surprised An. This Chimera Ant seemed to be the leader of the soldiers in the vige and even given them orders. An walked over and froze the feet of the Chimera Ant, and then he tore off his wings so he can¡¯t escape. After doing this, An entered the vige and ughtered all the Chimera Ants inside, and rescued the vigers who were still there. ¡°You can leave from the direction I came from, and you can safely reach a protected area.¡± An gave the vigers some instruction on the direction they should take. Since he wiped out all of the Chimera Ants on the way, there shouldn¡¯t be any danger for a while there. An could only help them this much since he couldn¡¯t go back with them to escort them. After seeing the vigers leave, An walked to the injured Captain Chimera Ant. The Chimera Ant was currently looking at An in fear. I never imagined that a small weak human could be this terrifying. ¡°No, don¡¯t kill me.¡± The captain begged for mercy. An sneered: ¡°You don¡¯t want to die? Answer my questions honestly then.¡± ¡°What question? Ask, and I will tell you everything I know.¡± The captain said. An thought for a bit and said: ¡°How many of you are there? No, how many Chimera Ants are there?¡± Hearing this, the captain shook his head and said: ¡°This¡­ I¡¯m not sure because I¡¯m only a captain, but as far as I know, there 707 captains like me generally order 30 soldiers, and the more advanced ranks, like Squadron Leaders, can order nearly 300 soldiers.¡± An nodded that many of them were really beyond his imagination. ¡°How manymanders are there?¡± An asked. ¡°I don¡¯t know, but as far as the ones Ie into contact with, there are at least 20 of them, but there is definitively more. Our numbers change every day.¡± An frowned as he heard this. So the source of everything should be the Queen. ¡°Then thest question, do you know where the queen is?¡± Facing An¡¯s question, the captain shook his head: ¡°I don¡¯t know about this because we don¡¯t have just one nest, but many nests scattered all over the ce. Amongst them is the Queen¡¯s nest.¡± ¡°Really?¡± An snorted coldly: ¡°You can go die then.¡± An used his Armament Haki to cover his fist and directly punched the Chimera Ant into smithereens. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: G.O.S.S: Complete (Chapter 709) [Tier Trainee]. T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 294! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 198: Appearance Chapter 198: Appearance [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Now, An has two goals, and the first is to find Gon and Killua and join them. The second one is to find the Queen and Kill her directly. This way, he can cut off the growth of the Chimera Ants directly and would only need to eliminate the remaining ants. But the problem is the NGL was too big, and it was by no mean an easy task to find the Queen¡¯s Nest. So, for now, he can only capture high-ranked ants and ask them. An knew that there is a strict hierarchy within the ants¡¯ ranks, so the higher their rank, the more knowledge they had. The Queen was the highest authority the ants currently had. After her, there are the guards, which he hoped were not born yet, and under them were the squadron leaders. There is also the problem of the king who can control the entire ant colony. In the NGL, Other than An, Gon and Killua killed many Ants under the leadership of Kite. A few Kilometers away from Gon¡¯s current location, a cave suddenly exploded. An walked out of the cave after wiping out all of the ants, but he didn¡¯t find any high-ranking ones. Of course, he didn¡¯t rule out the possibility that he actually wiped them out as well. Due to the continuous extermination, some powerful ants became aware of the intruders. In order to eliminate them, the ant¡¯s squadron leader united and formed dozen search teams to scan the entire NGL. Soon, An¡¯s trails were discovered by the ants. They immediately reported An¡¯s location to a nearby squadron leader. An, of course, could sense the ants around him easily, but he didn¡¯t deal with them in the hope of attracting someone of a high rank. Soon, the Chimera ants appeared around An and surrounded him. An looked around and could see about one hundred ants. They looked the same as the previous ones, but they felt stronger. ¡°Is this the harvest season?¡± An sneered. An sensed the strongest amongst the ants, and he could tell that he was a squadron leader from his aura. ¡°I will deal with youter.¡± Before he dealt with the leader, he will get rid of the small fries first. ¡°Ice Spikes!¡± Within fifty meters, a burst of Ice spikes emerged one after the other from the ground and stabbed in every direction. Before the ants could react, they were stabbed and pierced by the Ice spikes. One move dealt with the hundred low-level ants. An¡¯s eyes directly moved toward the Squadron leader, who was responsible for giving orders a few hundred meters away. The Squadron leader saw his soldiers wiped out and stayed still in shock. ¡°That guy is terrifying.¡± The Squadron leader felt An¡¯s gaze on him and shivered. He directly turned around and wanted to escape. ¡°You want to escape?¡± Although An rushed over as fast as he could, the squadron leader dove into the ground too fast and disappeared. Although An could find him anytime, he wanted and sealed his path by freezing the ground, and he didn¡¯t do so for now. The squadron leader who escaped returned to the nest, and another squadron leader saw him alone and directly asked: ¡°Zach, why are you alone? Did you get rid of the intruders?¡± The Squadron leader named Zach replied: ¡°Parker, it¡¯s horrifying. I have never seen such a terrifying human before.¡± ¡°What happened?¡± Zach directly exined the situation to parker and directly suggested: ¡°Parker, let¡¯s pack quickly and leave. Otherwise, when that humanes here, we will die instantly.¡± Hearing Zach¡¯s words, Parker looked confident and said: ¡°I¡¯m not afraid, let¡¯s see how strong that human is.¡± Zack shouted angrily: ¡°Parker, you stupid, arrogant fellow, I already told you that this human is dangerous. I only came back here to inform you because we are twins. Let¡¯s run away, and we really can¡¯t defeat him.¡± Parker still insisted that he will stay here: ¡°Zach if you are afraid, you can leave. I will stay and meet this person. It will be quite the catch to turn him into our soldier by offering him to the Queen.¡± Zach said: ¡°If this is the case, then you should be careful. It¡¯s best to find more soldiers to protect yourself. By the way, that human can create Ice out of nowhere.¡± ¡°I see, you coward, just wait for my good news.¡± Parker believed that he could win no matter what human appeared here. Upon seeing this, Zach turned around to leave and said: ¡°Parker, you will regret not escaping now, mark my words.¡± Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: G.O.S.S: Complete (Chapter 709) [Tier Trainee]. T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 294! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 199: Ponzu Chapter 199: Ponzu [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// An hourter, An followed the squadron leader¡¯s aura and arrived in front of a cave. The cave was definitively a Chimera Ant¡¯s nest. It may be the hiding ce of that Squadron Leader. However, using his Observation Haki and [En], An couldn¡¯t find the Squadron leader that escaped inside. Instead, he found many Chimera Ants, and one, in particr, was stronger than the rest. An decisively made his way in, and as soon as he went in, he met a group of Ants. These ants seemed to be waiting for An¡¯s arrival, and as soon as he went in, they sealed the exit with a rock. ¡°Hey, are you the human that made Zac so frightened that he fled? It seems like you are indeed capable, but you out of luck since you met me now.¡± The Squadron Leader said in a confident voice and looked at An with eyes full of greed. This Ant was the one who refused Zac¡¯s suggestion of escaping before Parker. Seeing the Ant speaking to him, An sneered and asked: ¡°You should be a high-ranked Chimera Ant. Are you a Squadron Leader?¡± ¡°Oh? Do you actually know my rank? It seems like you¡¯ve done your share of information gathering here.¡± Parker was slightly surprised. ¡°Since you are a Squadron Leader, you should know where the Queen is currently, right?¡± An asked. ¡°What?¡± Parker froze: ¡°Are you looking for the Queen?¡± An nodded: ¡°Well, that¡¯s right, tell me where she is, and I won¡¯t mangle your body after killing you.¡± Hearing this, Parkerughed: ¡°What a joke, a mere human thinks he can defeat me. What qualification do you have to even nce at the Queen?¡± ¡°My strength!¡± An directly waved the Sword Of Storm in his hand. Boom! The violent wind swept inside the cave and sliced the Chimera Ants inside. ¡°What?!¡± Seeing An wiping all of his subordinates in one strike, Parker¡¯s eyes widened. At the same time, An disappeared and reappeared in front of Parker¡¯s face. Parker was tall, shaped like a brown bear, and looked really fierce, but in front of An, he was just an Ant, pun intended. He started regretting staying here and not leaving with Zac, but there is no medicine for regret. Since An appeared in front of him, he had no chance of survival. ¡°So, tell me, where is the Queen, and I will leave you with an intact body,¡± An asked indifferently. Parker didn¡¯t say anything but rushed at An instead. Seeing Parker nning on dying with mentioning the Queen¡¯s whereabouts, An snorted and waved his greatsword, splitting Parker in two. An walked out of the cave and touched his stomach, which growled in protest since h hadn¡¯t eaten anything in a while now. ¡°I¡¯m hungry.¡± There is nothing to eat around here since all of the animals were eaten by the Chimera Ants. An finally returned to the cave and roasted Parker. Although it was a Chimera Ant, its meat was quite good, and it tasted like chicken. After filling his stomach, An went to the next vige. After entering, he didn¡¯t see a living soul there, which means that this ce was also attacked by the Chimera Ants. An expected this. Since this ce was in the middle of the NGL, and Chimera Ants were all around, it would be weird if the vige wasn¡¯t attacked. Suddenly, An could feel the presence of the Chimera Ants and a lot of them. In addition to this, he felt the aura of a human. When An rushed over, he found traces of battle. However, nothing was there anymore. As he moved forward, the earth¡¯s surface vibrated, and a huge worm-like creature prated the ground while opening its mouth to eat An. An waved his sword and cut it into four and thought: ¡°It seems that the Chimera Ants are stronger the closer I¡¯m to the center of the NGL.¡± Suddenly, An saw a group of wasps flying by. ¡°Huh? Isn¡¯t this?¡± An suddenly thought of a girl who had wasps like those, Ponzu. ¡°Could she be nearby?¡± An knew that Ponzu was an expert in Beekeeping and can control wasps. Right now, An noticed that the wasps seemed to be sending a distress signal, and they pointed toward a certain direction. ¡°Let¡¯s go, lead the way.¡± An remembered in the original show that Ponzu seemed to have been killed by the Chimera Ants when she came to the NGL to do a biological survey. At the moment, those wasps are sending distress signals under Ponzu¡¯s orders, which means that she is in danger. A few Kilometers away on a hillside, a team of men and horses were fighting fiercely with a group of Chimera Ants. Those people had good skills, but they didn¡¯t have any weapons and couldn¡¯t fight efficiently against the Chimera Ants. One of the teenagers screamed angrily as he saw some people die under the Chimera Ants¡¯ attacks. His aura burst out, and he opened his hand and maintaining an archery posture while aiming at the Chimera Ant. ¡°Red Arrow!¡± The boy condensed a red bow and arrow using his Nen and shot at the Chimera Ant. The red arrow urately hit the Chimera ant then burst into mes, Burning the Chimera Ant directly. After killing one Ant, The boy, who is, in fact, Pokkle, continued tounch an arrow after the other at the ants. But there were many Chimera Ants, and alone, he can¡¯t kill them. Seeing hispanions die one after the other, Pokkle didn¡¯t stop shooting the ants. ¡°Runaway, I will stay behind and hold them.¡± The young man shouted. Upon hearing this, hispanions had no choice but to disperse and flee. In the forest, a young girl was running for her life while three ants were chasing after her. Suddenly, the girl stumbled on the ground and her leg entangled in a tree root. The girl¡¯s expression turned desperate as the three Chimera Ants caught up. She closed her eyes, waiting for death, but nothing happened. The girl suddenly heard a voice and opened her eyes in doubt, only to see three chopped Chimera Ants. Naturally, it was An who saved her. ¡°Are you An?¡± Ponzu was surprised. ¡°Well, long time no see, Ponzu.¡± An smiled at the girl. An helped Ponzu before in the hunter exam, and if it wasn¡¯t for the stupidly strong people there, she would be a hunter already. ¡°An, how did you know that I¡¯m here?¡± Ponzu asked in surprise. ¡°Your wasps brought me here,¡± An said. ¡°So that¡¯s what happened.¡± Ponzu breathed a sigh of relief and rejoiced that she avoided this disaster. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: G.O.S.S: Complete (Chapter 709) [Tier Trainee]. T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 297! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 200: Select Rescue Chapter 200: Select Rescue [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// An stretched his hand and pullet Ponzu up, then activated his Holy Light of Pray to heal her. ¡°Mr. An, what¡¯s your order?¡± Raphael, the Angel, appeared in front of An and asked. ¡°Raphael, my friend, is injured,¡± An said. ¡°Understood, I will treat her right away.¡± Raphael stretched his hand toward Ponzu, and light enveloped thetter instantly. After a while, Ponzu¡¯s injuries were healed. ¡°How do you feel? Are you alright?¡± After healing Ponzu, An asked her in concern. Ponzu moved a little bit, and her expression turned into surprise as she said: ¡°I really recovered. An, your ability is really amazing.¡± ¡°Haha, it¡¯s not that great.¡± An smiled before remembering something and asked: ¡°By the way, Ponzu, are you here for the Biological investigation? There should be other people, right? Are you the only one who survived?¡± Hearing this, Ponzu¡¯s face changed as she said: ¡°An, please hurry up and save Pokkle.¡± ¡°Pokkle?¡± Well, I came here along with Pokkle and a group of people to conduct a survey, and we found traces of the Chimera Ants. We nned on capturing one and carrying it out for research, but we attracted arge number of them. We were surrounded, and we couldn¡¯t do anything because we don¡¯t have any weapons. Only Pokkle, who learned to use Nen, can fight them, but he is alone and won¡¯t be able to survive. He stayed behind to let all of us escape.¡± ¡°So, that¡¯s what happened.¡± An nodded. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Rescue Pokkle. Reward: Staff of Thunder.] [2: Bring Ponzu and leave. Reward: The Code of Saints.] Without even thinking about it, An decisively chose the first option. After all, he was acquainted with Pokkle, and although they weren¡¯t friends, they participated in the exam together, and it would be too heartless to ignore his current situation. ¡°Let¡¯s go, take me over,¡± An said. ¡°Follow me.¡± Ponzu nodded and was grateful for An¡¯s help. She knew that the only person who can help now is An. Moreover, she believed that he could defeat the Chimera Ants easily. On the way, An used Observation Haki to look around. Soon, An could feel everything that is happening within a Kilometer radius. Under Ponzu¡¯s guidance, An arrived on the hillside, where the group got attacked by the Ants. There seemed to be a mess on the hillside, Chimera ants corpses along with a few human corpses scattered on the ground. ¡°How could this¡­.¡± Ponzu was shocked. ¡°It seems we are slightlyte.¡± An said: ¡°However, Pokkle shouldn¡¯t be dead yet.¡± Hearing An, Ponzu raised her head and said: ¡°You mean that Pokkle was taken away by them?¡± ¡°Well, they are probably heading toward their nest,¡± An said. ¡°Now what?¡± Ponzu asked. She knew that the Chimera Ants were very dangerous, and their nest should be filled with them. She wouldn¡¯t dare ask An to rescue Pokkle from there. An thought for a bit before saying: ¡°Ponzu, you should leave the NGL. First, I will find my way into their nest and rescue Pokkle. As long as he is alive, I will bring him back.¡± Ponzu was silent for a bit before finally saying: ¡°No, An, I will go with you.¡± ¡°Why?¡± An was puzzled. Ponzu said: ¡°Pokkle could¡¯ve escaped alone, but for my sake and the sake of our group, he didn¡¯t hesitate to stay behind, now that he is in danger, I can¡¯t just leave like this. Although I¡¯m weak, I can also help. My Wasps can help me gather information and maybe find the Chimera Ants nest.¡± An looked at Ponzu thoughtfully before nodding: ¡°Well, you can use your wasps to gather information first, and we will search along the forest.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Ponzu nodded and soon released her Wasps to go around. An and Ponzu continued moving forward inside the NGL. Worried that Ponzu might get attacked, An took a weapon from the system¡¯s inventory and gave it to her. ¡°This dagger has a strong attack and can heavily damage the Chimera Ants, take it.¡± Ponzu looked at the Dagger and nodded without saying anything, but deep down, she was very grateful for An¡¯s kindness. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: G.O.S.S: Complete (Chapter 709) [Tier Trainee]. T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 297! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 201: Pokkle Chapter 201: Pokkle [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// An hourter, An and Ponzu reached a vige in the NGL. ¡°There is no one here, were they all killed by the Ants?¡± Ponzu wondered aloud. An shook his head: ¡°No, they took them, not killed them.¡± ¡°Why are they kidnapping them?¡± Ponzu asked. ¡°Because Chimera Ants are produced by the Queen, who need a lot of food every day toy eggs. Therefore, the Chimera Ants will attack viges and take them away to be livestock.¡± Ponzu was horrified: ¡°Where did those monsterse from? Why did they suddenly appear in here?!¡± An mused: ¡°As far as I know, those ants came from the dark continent, and there are two possible reasons as to why they came here. The first is that someone deliberately brought them here to achieve some goals. The second possibility is that the Chimera Ants have encountered the threat of extinction in the dark continent and came here as ast resort. As for why they came here, it¡¯s the same as before, either someone deliberately put them here, or they chose this ce since it¡¯s not developed by humans, as there is no means ofmunication and it¡¯s almost a locked-out ce, which will give them time to develop.¡± ¡°Where is the Dark continent?¡± Ponzu asked curiously. ¡°It¡¯s somewhere not suitable for humans to live there,¡± An replied vaguely. ¡°Have you been there before?¡± Ponzu asked again. An shook his head: ¡°No, there wasn¡¯t a chance.¡± ¡°So, what possibility do you believe in? Did theye here by themselves, or did someone bring them here?¡± Ponzu asked¡­ ¡°Well, I don¡¯t know, but either way, the Chimera Ants pose great danger to all humans, and if they aren¡¯t dealt with, they can destroy us entirely.¡± Ponzu seemed surprised by this: ¡°Do you mean this is a war between races?¡± An smiled and said: ¡°It¡¯s not a way yet, but no matter how powerful the Chimera Ants get, they can¡¯t eradicate humans. They are dangerous because they don¡¯t have a natural predator. If they go to areas where humans are developed with high tech, they wouldn¡¯t have gone so far.¡± Ponzu nodded. At this time, a wasp who was searching for the Chimera Ant¡¯s nest flew back. ¡°Ah, there is only one left. The others were killed.¡± Ponzu said with eyes full of tears. She raised each wasp with great effort, and by the time she couldmunicate with them. Losing one was equivalent to losing a friend, and now, only one of them is left. ¡°Did that wasp bring any information?¡± An asked withoutforting her. Ponzu nodded: ¡°Well, it told me that there is a cave a few Kilometers away, and Chimera Ants were moving inside, but they aren¡¯t sure if Pokkle is there.¡± ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go and take a look then.¡± Ten minutester, An and Ponzu reached the cave. An instantly used his Observation Haki to search the cave and discovered many Chimera Ants in there. ¡°Let¡¯s go in,¡± An said. Ponzu nodded and followed while holding the Jungle Dagger tightly in her hand. After the two entered the cave, the Chimera Ants quickly detected them. Several strange-looking Ants rushed toward them brainlessly. They were the lowest-ranked ants. An killed them directly, but he left one for Ponzu to kill. Seeing this, Ponzu shed her dagger down toward the Ant, and to her surprise, the Ant was shopped down cleanly. ¡°So sharp!¡± Killing a Chimera Ant with a single sh was something she didn¡¯t imagine. ¡°Haha, I said before, this dagger has a special effect on creatures like the Chimera ants. Even ordinary people can kill the Chimera Ants with that dagger, not to mention someone much better than normal people.¡± Ponzu was no longer afraid of the Chimera Ants and was quite confident now. The two marched forward all the way inside the cave while beheading as many Chimera Ants as they encountered. Finally, they reached the innermost chamber and saw arge pile of bones on the ground, and those bones belonged to humans. Those Chimera Ants made meatballs out of the captured humans and then transported them to their Queen. At the same time, many people were still in the iron cages witnessing the ughter without being able to do anything. ¡°This is so terrible!¡± Ponzu saw this for the first time in her life and was frightened and almost vomited. When the ants noticed An and Ponzu, they rushed toward them, but An just waved his storm de, beheading them directly. Seeing the Chimera Ants beheaded with a single strike, the imprisoned people were shocked. An shed his sword at the cages and freed all the captures. At the same time, the system announced thepletion of his rescue. [Ding! You sessfully rescued Pokkle and received the Stall of Thunder.¡± At this time, Pokkle couldn¡¯t believe what was happening and said: ¡°Are you¡­ An?¡± An nodded: ¡°It¡¯s been a while, Pokkle.¡± Pokkle was quite surprised: ¡°I haven¡¯t seen you since we were in the Hunter Association. By the way, why are you in the NGL?¡± ¡°I¡¯m here to find Gon and Killua,¡± An exined. ¡°What? They are here as well?¡± Pokkle was quite shocked and surprised. An nodded and said: ¡°Let¡¯s talk in another ce. Let¡¯s leave this ce first.¡± Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: G.O.S.S: Complete (Chapter 709) [Tier Trainee]. T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 297! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 202: Leave! Chapter 202: Leave! [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// After walking out of the nest, An counted the people here, and there were 23 people, excluding Ponzu and Pokkle. Arranging for their escort would be a headache for An because there were many Chimera Ants around. If he let them go alone, they might turn to Chimera Ants food. After thinking for a bit, An said: ¡°Ponzu, you should leave the NGL with Pokkle and those vigers. It¡¯s best to leave as soon as possible.¡± Ponzu shook her head and said: ¡°No, I decided to stay.¡± ¡°Why?¡± An was puzzled. ¡°Because you saved my life, and I can¡¯t just leave after saying thank you like it is a small thing.¡± An was dumbfounded as he didn¡¯t expect such an answer. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Agree with Ponzu and let her stay. Reward: Shield of courage.} [2: Make Ponzu leave. Reward: Gem of power.] The Shield of Courage is an item that can increase the power of the user¡¯s teammates, while the Gem of Power can enhance any item. After thinking about it, An picked the first option. It wasn¡¯t about the reward entirely, but because Ponzu seemed like a good girl. Since she wanted to stay here, this can be an opportunity for her to develop further and improve their rtionship. On the side, Pokkle couldn¡¯t help asking: ¡°Ponzu, are you really staying?¡± ¡°Um.¡± Ponzu nodded and said: ¡°Pokkle, please take the vigers out of the NGL.¡± Seeing that Ponzu insisted on staying, Pokkle didn¡¯t persuade her, but he still hesitated for a bit and said: ¡°By the way, if I encounter Chimera ants on the way, I won¡¯t be able to defend the vigers, I might not be able to defend myself even.¡± An naturally understood that Pokkle alone wouldn¡¯t survive on his way out, so he said: ¡°In that case, I will find two people to escort you.¡± ¡°Who?¡± Pokkle asked in doubt. Apart from An, he didn¡¯t see anyone strong enough to escort them. An took out Yatsufusa and summoned Feitan and Franklin. Since they were puppets, they wouldn¡¯t disobey his orders, so he could entrust the vigers and Pokkle to them without worry. ¡°Help me escort the vigers and Pokkle out of the NGL.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Feitan and Franklin obeyed unconditionally. He still has another puppet in store, which is Helphes, and the three of them weren¡¯t weaker than Hisoka. As long as they don¡¯t encounter the king¡¯s guards, they can deal with everyone else. Pokkle looked at Feitan and Franklin in doubt. An directly said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, both of them are as strong as Hisoka. They can protect you till you leave.¡± Hearing this, Pokkle¡¯s face changed as he couldn¡¯t believe that they were that strong. After all, Pokkle lost to Hisoka, who seemed really dangerous and mighty powerful, and now there are two people who are as strong as that monster protecting him. After oveing his shock, Pokkle thanked An for his help. ¡°When I go back, I will call Chairman Netero and ask him toe over,¡± Pokkle said. He knew how dangerous the current situation was, and if it¡¯s not solved soon, there would be great danger. After Pokkle and the 23 vigers left, An said to Ponzu: ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go search for Gon and Killua.¡± Ponzu nodded. ¡°Do you regret staying here with me?¡± An couldn¡¯t help asking as he saw Ponzu lowering her head and staying silent. Ponzu gently shook her head and said: ¡°No, I don¡¯t regret staying here.¡± ¡°Then why are you staying silent?¡± An asked. ¡°Ponzu hesitated for a bit. Then she said: ¡°Do you think I will drag you down? After all, I¡¯m weak, and I still insisted on staying with you.¡± Hearing this, An smiled: ¡°So, you were worried about this? Don¡¯t worry, and I¡¯m strong enough to protect you. You¡¯re not a burden.¡± Hearing this, Ponzu sighed in relief: ¡°That¡¯s great then. I hope I can help you.¡± Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 300! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 203: Items Chapter 203: Items [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// On the way to Gon and Killua, An noticed that Ponzu didn¡¯t have any way to protect herself, so he gave her The Staff of Thunder and the Shield of Courage. ¡°Ponzu, take these two,¡± An said. ¡°What are those?¡± Ponzu asked curiously. ¡°This is the Staff of Thunder, and this is the Shield of courage. Use them to protect yourself.¡± An exined. ¡°But you already gave me the Jungle¡¯s dagger,¡± Ponzu replied. An smiled: ¡°Compared to the Jungle¡¯s Dagger, these two items are more suitable for you.¡± ¡°Really?¡± Ponzu stared at them with wide, curious eyes and asked: ¡°How do I use them?¡± ¡°The staff of thunder can release lightning-like energy to strike at enemies from a distance. So it can take away the hassle of getting close to those Chimera Ants.¡± An exined. Ponzu eximed: ¡°So Strong!! What about the Shield?¡± ¡°The Shield of Courage can defend against attacks and enhance your teammate¡¯s attacks,¡± An exined. ¡°In other words, I can use the shield to increase An¡¯s attack power, right?¡± An nodded. At this time, An saw a Chimera Ant close by and said: ¡°Here, I will demonstrate their effect.¡± So An picked the staff of thunder and pointed at the Chimera ant in the distance. ¡°Go!¡± With An¡¯s voice, an energy beam was released out of the staff of thunder and instantly killed the Chimera ant. ¡°That¡¯s amazing!¡± Ponzu eximed in surprise. ¡°The range of attack of the staff of thunder is about 50 meters, within this range, you can hit any creature, but remember, the farther the target is, the weaker the attack gets and vice versa. Also, you can charge the attack before releasing it. The longer the charge is, the stronger the attack gets.¡± ¡°What about the shield of courage?¡± ¡°It¡¯s very simple. For defense, you just lift it up, and if you want to buff your teammates, think about releasing the energy inside it.¡± ¡°Understood!¡± After receiving the items, Ponzu returned the jungle¡¯s dagger to An. At this moment, An felt a few auras approaching them, and soon three Chimera Ants stood in front of them. The ants didn¡¯t rush in but were vigntly observing from a distance. ¡°That man looks very strong.¡± ¡°That woman isn¡¯t strong, and she¡¯s just a normal person.¡± ¡°In that case, we only need to kill that man.¡± The three Ants instinctively felt danger from An and decided to go against him together while ignoring Ponzu. An could tell that those three were Squadron leaders from their aura, but he wasn¡¯t going to face them. Instead, he looked at Ponzu and said: ¡°Ponzu, take care of them.¡± ¡°Ok.¡± Ponzu was a little nervous, but she didn¡¯t hesitate. The three Ants slowly approached Ponzu and An, moving slowly, step by step in caution. An stood behind Ponzu while watching the Ants, ready to protect Ponzu if she was in extreme danger. ¡°You want to woman to deal with us?¡± ¡°Humph, you¡¯re underestimating us.¡± ¡°A mere human dares to look down on us.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s kill the woman first, then deal with him.¡± The Ants saw that An wasn¡¯t going to make a move, so they decided to kill Ponzu first before joining hands and killing him. ¡°Go ahead, Ponzu.¡± Seeing the Ants were within ten meters, An reminded her. ¡°Yes.¡± Ponzu nodded, raised the stuff of thunder and pointed at one of the ants, then shouted: ¡°Release!¡± In the next second, a burst of energy rushed out, sting toward the Ant, who couldn¡¯t react in time. Boom! The energy exploded directly, killing the Ant. The other two were stunned as they didn¡¯t expect this girl to have such a strong attack. ¡°Release!¡± Ponzu, without hesitating, once again attacked using the Staff of Thunder, killing the second Ant. Thest and finally reacted and rushed toward Ponzu quickly, which made thetter raise the Shield of courage, and with a bang, she blocked the Ant¡¯s attack. ¡°Damn it!¡± The Ant didn¡¯t retreat but instead kept attacking, and mysteriously, every hit was directed toward the Shield. (T/L: He could¡¯ve attacked anywhere else, but he ¡®mysteriously¡¯ attacked the Shield!) ¡°Charge release!¡± Ponzu held the Staff of Thunder that was being charged and aimed at the Ant before releasing an energy attack from a close distance. The Chimera Ant couldn¡¯t react and directly exploded. After finally dealing with the three Ants, Ponzu sat down exhausted. Although she killed the three ants, she consumed too much energy. ¡°Good job, Ponzu!¡± Ponzu blushed slightly at An¡¯s praise and said: ¡°It¡¯s all thanks to the items you gave me. Otherwise, it would¡¯ve been impossible for me to kill them by myself.¡± Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 300! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 204: Aura Chapter 204: Aura [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// As night fell, An and Ponzu ate dinner and then went to a deserted vige for rest. Every single viger from this vige was either killed or captured by the ants. ¡°Aren¡¯t you going to rest?¡± Ponzu looked at An sitting beside the door and asked. ¡°This ce is full of Chimera Ants that can appear at any time, so I will sit here to guard. If you¡¯re sleepy, go ahead and sleep.¡± ¡°Alright.¡± Ponzu didn¡¯t have much energy to stay awake anyway. After some time, An stood up suddenly, which startled Ponzu. ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± Ponzu got up quickly and asked. ¡°We are surrounded. There are more than a hundred Ants outside the vige. It seems like they knew we are here beforehand and gathered their troops to attack.¡± Hearing this, Ponzu¡¯s expression changed slightly: ¡°What should we do now?¡± ¡°Of course, we¡¯re going to wipe them out,¡± An said confidently. Ponzu couldn¡¯t help feeling a little worried: ¡°Can we deal with so many of them with us alone?¡± An smiled; it seemed like Ponzu didn¡¯t know how strong he was yet. An didn¡¯t exin and just said: ¡°You don¡¯t need to go this time. Stay here, and I will deal with them.¡± ¡°How can I do that? What if you were injured?¡± Seeing Ponzu worried about him, An smiled and patted her head before saying: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m very strong.¡± Ponzu nodded: ¡°Ok, be careful.¡± An walked out and disappeared into the woods. After a short while, screams filled the woods, and theysted for two minutes. Two minutester, An walked out with a rxed look. He killed a total of 123 Ants, including the squadron leaders. The Squadron leaders were following them for a while now, but An didn¡¯t do anything and waited for them to act. They gathered their troops and surrounded the vige at night, preparing to ambush them while they least expected, but they underestimated An too much. Even if another 10,000 of them appeared, he could deal with them without even consuming much energy. It will just cause an annoyance at his current level. Other than the Ant king and his guards, An didn¡¯t think other Ants could actually give him a fight. But it seems like the guards weren¡¯t born yet. An seemed to raise a g because as soon as he thought of this, a terrifying aura appeared from a distance. ¡°Huh? This Aura¡­.¡± An¡¯s face changed slightly as he spread his Observation Haki. Although he couldn¡¯t tell how far that Aura was, he was sure that it was only a few kilometers away. This was the most terrifying Aura An felt sinceing to this world. This Aura can bepared to Zeno Zoldyck and even Netero, but since Netero and Zeno didn¡¯t go all out against An, the Aura he was feeling was stronger than what those monsters showed before. An was sure that the source of this Aura was one of the King¡¯s guards. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Look for the source of the Aura and meet him. Reward: Huiyue!] [2: Retreat. Reward: Meito.] Needless to say, An picked the first option. After all, he came here to save Gon and Killua and fight the ants. After An returned to the vige, Ponzu saw An¡¯s serious face and asked: ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± ¡°A monster appeared,¡± An said and took a sip of water. ¡°Monster? Aren¡¯t the Chimera Ants monster? Didn¡¯t you deal with them? Are there more?¡± ¡°Well, a very powerful monster appeared, and even if Chairman Netero came here, I¡¯m afraid he had to face it seriously.¡± ¡°What should we do then?¡± Ponzu couldn¡¯t help asking nervously. If someone like Chairman Netero couldn¡¯t handle a monster, then no one can. An said: ¡°I¡¯m worried that this monster will look for Gon and Killua, so I¡¯m going to look for it.¡± ¡°Are you confident in facing that monster?¡± Ponzu asked. ¡°Of course.¡± Anughed without exining much. Without mentioning his own power that reached the peak of this world, he had a bunch of skills that could defeat the King¡¯s Guards. For example, his Ice Ice Fruit, Star tinum, Mangekyo Sharingan, Eight Gates, his swordsmanship skills¡­ Each one of them was strong on its own, and using them together would be overkill. With those cards up his sleeve, An wasn¡¯t afraid even if the Ant¡¯s King came. ¡°You should stay here; I¡¯m going toward that monster. Wait for me.¡± He didn¡¯t want to take Ponzu along as he didn¡¯t want to look after her when someone as strong as the King¡¯s Guards attacked him. ¡°An, be careful. I will wait for you till youe back.¡± Ponzu opened her hands and hugged An for a while before reluctantly letting go. She felt secure with An around, and she needed that sense of security. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I will be back.¡± After saying this, An shed quickly toward the Monstrous Aura. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 300! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 205: The Cat Woman Neferpitou Chapter 205: The Cat Woman Neferpitou [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// In the darkness, a shadow was quickly passing through the forest. At the same time, Gon, Killua, and Kite were resting in their camp to recover their spent energy. Suddenly, Kite, who was in charge of guard duty, suddenly felt a terrifying aura, and cold sweat covered his back. It was the most terrifying Aura he felt in his life. ¡°What¡¯s wrong, Kite?¡± Gon and Killua saw Kite¡¯s change and asked quickly. Both thought that Kite was exhausted after wiping out the Chimera Ants. Killua asked: ¡°Kite, go and rest. I will guard tonight.¡± Kite didn¡¯t respond and looked somewhere without saying anything, and his expression turned even more serious. ¡°Gon, Killua, you guys leave quickly. Remember, don¡¯t look back and run away quickly. You need to escape as far as possible and absolutely don¡¯t get back here.¡± ¡°Runaway?¡± Both Gon and Killua looked confused. Kite took a deep breath and said: ¡°A monster is currently heading toward our location. You need to run now, and I will block it.¡± ¡°What?!¡± ¡°No way!!¡± Although they couldn¡¯t believe it, they had toply when they saw how serious Kite was. ¡°Let¡¯s go, Gon, let¡¯s listen to Kite.¡± Killua quickly made his choice. Kite was stronger than both of them, and since even Kite said it was a monster, they wouldn¡¯t be able to do anything. ¡°Kite, let¡¯s run away together.¡± Gon said. Kite shook his head and said: ¡°No, that Monster has already made me its target. I can¡¯t go with you two, so leave quickly.¡± ¡°But¡­¡± Gon still wanted to persuade Kite, but at this moment, Kite shouted: ¡°Damn it, it¡¯s already here, run away quickly. I will stop it for a while.¡± Just when Kite¡¯s finished his swords, the Monster in the distance rushed toward them. It was extremely fast, and none of them could react. In a blink of an eye, it was already in front of Kite, Gon, and Killua. When Gon and Killua reacted, they saw Kite standing in front of them, and his left hand was missing. ¡°Kite¡­ are you okay?¡± Gon asked in concern. Kite replied: ¡°I¡¯m Okay. You guys quickly run away.¡± ¡°How could you be okay? You lost your left hand to protect us.¡± Gon said angrily. Killua felt ufortable, but he was more logical than Gon. He understood that the Monster that cut off Kite¡¯s hand was too strong that even the three of them together wouldn¡¯t pose a threat to it. Compared to Killua, Gon was already blinded by anger. ¡°Damn it, how could you cut his hand off¡­.¡± Gon stared at the Monster angrily. The Monster¡¯s appearance was different from that of a human. It looked more like a cat. From the appearance alone, it can be said that this Monster looked somewhat cute instead of scary. She is the Catwoman, Neferpitou, one of the King¡¯s guards and the strongest of them. Although her appearance may seem cute, she was indeed a monster. At this point, the overwhelming dark Aura was surrounding Pitou as her red ruby eyes looked at the Nen emitted from Gon¡¯s body and said: ¡°Meow! Sure enough, you three are rare. I can¡¯t let you go.¡± ¡°Rare?¡± Killua frowned. ¡°She is probably referring to those with Nen ability is rare,¡± Kite said seriously. ¡°Does the Chimera Ants know Nen?¡± Killua wondered. ¡°Maybe they killed someone with Nen ability, and when they ate him, they could tell it wasn¡¯t an ordinary human.¡± ¡°Your kind are very rare. The three of you should be strong, right? You can stay and y with me. My name is Neferpitou, one of the Ant King¡¯s guards. Because I¡¯m just born, I really want to test my strength.¡± ¡°Nerferpitou?¡± ¡°One of the Ant King¡¯s Guards?¡± Both Kite and Killua processed this information and felt a terrifying premonition. ¡°It¡¯s just one of the guards, so to say, there is more than one?¡± ¡°Meow, that¡¯s right,¡± Nerferpitou answered Killua¡¯s question. At this time, Gon already charged ahead with a charged fist. ¡°Take this.¡± Seeing the dazzling energy covering Gon¡¯s fist, Nerferpitou didn¡¯t avoid it, but her eyes lit up: ¡°Meow! Can you condense your force into your fist? Meow, okay, let¡¯s see how strong it is.¡± Nerferpitou put her arms in front of her to block Gon¡¯s Jajanken. In the next second, a bang resounded as Gon¡¯s fist hit Pitou¡¯s arm. The force of the fist knocked Pitou a few meters away, and that¡¯s it. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 301! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 206: Killua vs. Pitou Chapter 206: Killua vs. Pitou [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Seeing the Catwoman being blown away by Gon, Kite immediately shouted: ¡°Hurry up, Take Gon and run.¡± ¡°I got it.¡± Killua nodded. He knew that Gon¡¯s punch wouldn¡¯t damage the Catwoman. He directly shouted: ¡°Gon, let¡¯s leave quickly.¡± Gon realized that his attack didn¡¯t have any effect on Pitou, but he still worried about Kite yelled: ¡°Kite, let¡¯s leave together.¡± He knew that if Kite stayed back, he would die, and Gon didn¡¯t want that to happen. Although Kite was very helpless about Gon¡¯s impulsiveness, he knew that thetter was just being his kind self. At this moment, a terrifying Aura enveloped Gon and Killua. Kite was taken aback: ¡°It seems that Gon¡¯s Nen ispletely useless against that monster.¡± The aura seemed to turn into two dark ws grabbing Gon and Killua, respectively. Although Kite wanted to save them, he was powerless in front of the Monster. If he did anything, that woman would kill them. At this time, Gon and Killua couldn¡¯t move. ¡°This killing intent is too strong.¡± Killua¡¯s forehead oozed with cold sweat. Pitou¡¯s killing intent dwarfed Illumi¡¯s by far. ¡°Meow! If you try to run away, I will kill you immediately.¡± Pitou opened her ruby red eyes and stared at Gon and Killua like a god of death. At this moment, they knew that Pitou wasn¡¯t someone they could contend with. ¡°Meow! That power you used was good, but it wasn¡¯t enough to break my defense. In other words, I¡¯m stronger than you. So now, it¡¯s my turn, be ready.¡± Pitou moved and was in front of Gon in an instant. Although Gon was prepared, he couldn¡¯t react to Pitou¡¯s speed. Under the watch of Killua and Kite, Gon¡¯s body flew like a cannonball due to Pitou¡¯s kick. Gon flew back and broke several big trees along the way before he finally stopped. ¡°Gon!¡± Killua shouted. ¡°Bastard! How could you hurt Gon.¡± Killua was really angry at this time. He can no longer calm down. Kite was very nervous when he saw Killua couldn¡¯t keep his calm, and at the same time, he was even more worried about Gon. Even if Gon used Ken to defend against that kick, he wouldn¡¯t be able to defend. Killua rushed at Pitou using Rhythm Echo, which creates several afterimages to confuse the opponent while making his nails sharp. Killua suddenly waved his hand at Neferpitou without hesitation, trying to kill her. However, Pitou easily avoided his attempt. It was like a ten-year-old kid fighting an adult, and there was no chance of winning at all. ¡°Meow! Your speed is good, and your skills are splendid as well, but you don¡¯t have enough power to hurt me.¡± While avoiding Killua¡¯s attacks, Pitou evaluated the former¡¯s power. ¡°Humph! Try this then.¡± Killua was a Transmuter that could transform his Nen to Electricity, and right now, he activated that ability. ¡°Lightning Palm!¡± Killua charged his hands with electric current and then waved them at Pitou. The destructive power of this skill wasn¡¯t great, but it can paralyze the target for a few seconds if hit. Sure enough, Pitou was hit by the lightning palm and couldn¡¯t move. Killua didn¡¯t let this opportunity slide and attacked. ¡°Thunderbolt.¡± Killua leaped into the air above Pitou and projected a bolt of lightning from his fingers. Killua¡¯s attack hit Pitou directly, and her curly hair stood due to the electric shock. ¡°Did I make it?¡± (T/L: g!! g!!) Killua was breathing hard as he retreated back, creating some distance between himself and Pitou. Two secondster, Pitou said: ¡°Meow! A good attack, but it couldn¡¯t cause any damage to my body.¡± ¡°What kind of monster is this?!¡± Killua¡¯s heart turned cold as he muttered. This Monster was too strong, and even his strongest attack couldn¡¯t cause any damage. ¡°Then, it¡¯s my turn to attack you, then, be ready.¡± In the next second, Pitou disappeared and rushed toward Killua quickly that Kite could hardly follow her. ¡°Avoid quickly, Killua.¡± As soon as Kite shouted, Pitou was already in front of Killua. Killua was prepared, but he still couldn¡¯t keep up with Pitou¡¯s speed and could only cross his arms, waiting for her attack tond. Boom! Just like Gon, Pitou Kicked Killua, and just like Gon, Killua wasunched back like a cannonball. Kite was anxious, he was worrying about Gon and Killua, but at this time, Pitou said: ¡°Now, it¡¯s your turn.¡± After kicking Killua, Pitou directly stood in front of Kite as if looking at prey. Kite knew that with Gon and Killua¡¯s vitality, they wouldn¡¯t die easily, so he temporarily stopped worrying and decided to try dealing with this Monster in front of him. If he didn¡¯t use 100% of his power, he would be definitively killed, so he could only try his best. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 301! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 207: Number 3, Magic Wand Chapter 207: Number 3, Magic Wand [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Meow! I can tell that you¡¯re stronger than those two.¡± Feeling the Nen emanating from Kite¡¯s body, Pitou could tell that thetter was Stronger than Gon and Killua. Cats are curious by nature, so when they find prey they fancy, they won¡¯t kill it directly, but instead, they would y with it till they get bored. Pitou had the characteristics of cats, and in her eyes, Kite was a worthy prey to have fun with. Facing Pitou¡¯s yfulness, Kite didn¡¯t ck off. ¡°Come out.¡± Kite activated his Nen ability. Bang! Kite¡¯s Nen ability is called Crazy Slots and allows him to conjure some weapons with a clown affixed to them. A roulette appears on the clown¡¯s tongue with numbers 1 to 9, each corresponding to a specific weapon. Whatever number randomly appears, the weapon that corresponds to that number is conjured, which means that Kite cannot choose what weapon to summon. ¡°What a terrifying enemy, Kite. You¡¯re in a really dangerous situation.¡± Kite said coldly: ¡°Stop talking nonsense and give me a weapon.¡± ¡°Okay, okay, I will give you a good number this time.¡± In the next second, a roulette appeared and began spinning frantically. Then when it stopped, the number 3 appeared. ¡°Transform into the weapon Number 3.¡± In the next second, the clown transformed into a magic wand. ¡°Tsk, it¡¯s actually number 3.¡± Kite wasn¡¯t satisfied with his weapon but could do nothing about it. He will use his strongest attack with the wand. Pitou looked curiously at the magic want in Kite¡¯s hand: ¡°Meow! What does that wand do? Come on, use it and let me see.¡± ¡°As you wish.¡± Kite snorted coldly and rushed toward her. ¡°Here I go.¡± Pitou tried into position but discovered that she couldn¡¯t move. Boom! Kite directly hit Pitou and sent her back a few meters. ¡°Meow! What happened just now? I couldn¡¯t move. Is it the wand¡¯s ability?¡± After asking this, Pitou adjusted her posture and looked at Kite curiously. Kite looked at Pitou and rushed forward again. ¡°I will go again. Take a look.¡± Seeing Kite approaching, Pitou readied her ws to attack, but once again, she couldn¡¯t move. Pitou felt that her hands and feet were bound by something invisible. Boom! Once again, Kite hit Pitou, and thetter flew back and broke two trees. However, even though Kite used all of his strength in that attack, Pitou wasn¡¯t harmed at all. At this time, Pitou aimed her ws at Kite. Those ws cut Kite¡¯s hand easily before, and if he was hit again, he would die. Facing Pitou¡¯s attack, Kite used the wand in his hand to block her ws. However, even though he blocked her, he was still sent back a few steps. Pitou took advantage of this and rushed again, attacking Kite frantically. In front of such a fierce attack, Kite could only stand still and defend. But Pitou¡¯s attacks were getting stronger and stronger, and Kite could hardly resist anymore. ¡°Stop!¡± Suddenly, the magic wand in Kite¡¯s and released a huge amount of Nen and imprisoned Pitou. Pitou¡¯s attacks stopped as Kite¡¯s wand affected her again. This wand had the ability in which it can stop the target and imprison them for some time, and Kite could use this ability to attack and defend. After using this ability, Kite instantly distanced himself away from Pitou and took a fighting stance. The effective range of this ability is only 3 meters, so if he was more than three meters away, it wouldn¡¯t work. Moreover, this ability consumed a lot of Nen and had a cooldown time, which is 30 seconds. And since Pitou was too strong, he could only stop her for a second, and she would be free again. Pitou suddenly released a huge amount of Nen as she got serious. Kite, who was nning to take this opportunity to attack her, was shocked by the sudden burst of Nen. In a second, Pitou was in front of Kite, who could do nothing.. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 303! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 208: Silent Waltz Chapter 208: Silent Waltz [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Meow! Won¡¯t he die like this?¡± After knocking Kite in the air, Pitou didn¡¯t take advantage of the situation. She squatted down like a cat and watched Kite in the air while muttering to herself. However, at this moment, terrifying energy came from the woods chopping down trees in the way. Upon seeing this, Pitou stood up on all four and jumped in the air to avoid the sh. In the depth of the woods, a figure walked out slowly. Looking closely, it was Kite, who was knocked in the air before. There was arge scar on his left shoulder, and he was no longer bleeding anymore. Fortunately, the wound he sustained was deep, and although it would affect him in battle, it wasn¡¯t hard to fight like this. ¡°I don¡¯t know how Gon and Killua are doing, so I must deal with this monster quickly.¡± Pitou fell back down while looking at Kite seriously. At this time, Kite was holding a scythe in his hand. It was the Number 2: Scythe. This scythe is extremely sharp and could possibly cut anything. Even a monster like Neferpitou can be cut if hit directly. ¡°Silent Waltz!¡± Kite waved the scythe in his hand, sending a terrible sh toward Neferpitou. Seeing the attacking toward her, Pitou didn¡¯t dodge this time but decided to face it head-on. Boom! A huge explosion erupted as the attack collided with Pitou¡¯s ws. The trees all around them were cut down. Kite saw Pitou squatting on the ground, but there was no apparent injury on her body. ¡°She actually blocked it?¡± Kite was a little surprised, and he didn¡¯t expect that Pitou¡¯s body was so strong that it could block his strongest attack. ¡°This is really painful. Look at this.¡± Pitou said and pointed at a scar due to thest attack. Kite snorted and rushed forward with his scythe in hand and engaged in closebat against Pitou. Even without performing the Silent Waltz, the scythe was extremely sharp and quite powerful at close range. On the other side, An was getting closer and closer to Kite and Pitou. He stopped on a hillside and then started searching: ¡°There are four presences, one is Pitou without a doubt, the other strong one is Kite, the two weak ones should be Gon and Killua, and they seem injured.¡± It took two minutes for An to find Gon and Killua, both of them were unconscious and seriously injured. An lifted both of them to the edge of the bush and then used the Pray of the Holy Light to heal them. After a while, they both regained consciousness. ¡°An?¡± ¡°You finally arrived, An.¡± Gon and Killua were pleasantly surprised as they saw An. ¡°Are you okay?¡± An asked. ¡°Well, I¡¯m okay.¡± Gon clenched his fist as he said. ¡°No problem, I won¡¯t die.¡± Killua smiled. ¡°You guys stay here,¡± An ordered. Since he was going to fight Pitou, he couldn¡¯t heal both of thempletely. That Catwoman was strong. If he fought her while he was exhausted, it would be bad. Of course, he had trump cards and wasn¡¯t worried much, but just in case, he needed to be in a perfect state. ¡°Where is Kite?¡± Gon asked. He was the first one to be hit by Pitou, so he didn¡¯t know what had happened. ¡°I¡¯m afraid that he is fighting that Monster,¡± Killua replied. He was also beaten by Pitou, so he didn¡¯t know Kite¡¯s current situation, so he concluded that he must be fighting Pitou right now. ¡°Kite¡¯s hand was cut off in order to protect us. With his injury, he won¡¯t be able to fight for long.¡± Gon said worriedly. ¡°Yeah, although he is strong, that monster is much stronger than him, and it was just testing us before. If it really wanted to kill, Kite won¡¯t be able to resist.¡± Killua said seriously. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, and I will help Kite,¡± An said. ¡°Then, you should quickly go. We will wait for you here.¡± Killua urged. He knew that An was strong. He saw him fight many times and was confident in thetter¡¯s strength. ¡°An, please save Kite, and you must kill that Monster. It is too dangerous.¡± Gon said seriously. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m heading off.¡± An used sh steps and rushed toward Pitou and Kite. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 303! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice dayv Chapter 209: Senzu Bean’s Efficacy Chapter 209: Senzu Bean¡¯s Efficacy [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Boom! In the NGL Forest, an explosion after the other erupted as trees fell left and right. Two figures were separated by ten meters. One was a cat woman standing on all four, while the other person was a man half kneeling on the ground. After a fierce battle, Kite was full of wounds, which affected hisbat effectiveness greatly. On the other hand, Pitou only suffered some skin scratches and nothing else. The difference between their strength was too great, and even if his arm wasn¡¯t cut off at the start, he wouldn¡¯t be able to win this fight. ¡°Is this the end?¡± Kite held his scythe and muttered. Seeing Pitou rushing over toward him, he could only try his best to survive. He tried to block Pitou¡¯s attack with the scythe, but he was sent flying, breaking several trees on the way. Pitou jumped and arrived in front of Kite and said: ¡°Meow! This is thest attack.¡± Seeing Pitou waving her w at him, Kite couldn¡¯t even lift a finger and waited for death. However, just as the ws were about to end his life, Pitou¡¯s face changed, and the attack that was originally aimed at Kite changed direction. At the same time, a figure suddenly appeared and punched Pitou. Boom! Pitou¡¯s ws collided with the fist, and an explosion erupted from the shockwave, blowing several trees away. In the next second, Pitou flew away, but she adjusted her posture in the air andnded on all four. ¡°Meow! Who are you?¡± Pitou looked in Kite¡¯s direction and saw a man standing in front of him, with ck hair and ck eyes, looking coldly at her and releasing an astonishing aura. ¡°It looks like a very strong guy came to take a look.¡± Pitou stared at the man, not in fear but excitement. At the same time, Kite stared at the man and asked: ¡°Who are¡­ You?¡± Kite was extremely surprised by this man who saved him at thest second. ¡°I¡¯m An, Gon and Killua¡¯s friend.¡± Kite smiled bitterly and asked: ¡°You¡¯re here to find Gon and Killua? The two of them were hit by that monster, and I don¡¯t know how they are currently. I¡¯m sorry, but I wasn¡¯t strong enough to protect them.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, the two of them are okay. I have taken them to a safe ce to recover.¡± Knowing that Gon and Killua weren¡¯t in danger made Kite rx. ¡°How are you? Can you stand up?¡± An nced at him. ¡°I think so.¡± Kite stood up with great difficulty. Seeing this, An took a Senzu bean and threw it at Kite. ¡°What¡¯s this?¡± Looking at the green been in his hand, Kite asked in confusion. ¡°That¡¯s called a Senzu bean, and it can heal anyone who isn¡¯t dead yet. Since you¡¯re seriously injured, you can take it and heal your injuries.¡± ¡°Is it so amazing?¡± Although Kite doubted whether this Senzu Bean could really save him, he still ate it. In the next second, Kite felt his injuries healing, and his power quickly recovered. Within three seconds, Kite¡¯s injuries were fully healed. Even his arm that was cut off grew back like. He looked as if nothing had happened to him at all. Kite was extremely surprised, and he felt as if he was reborn. ¡°This is amazing, and I never knew that such an amazing treasure existed,¡± Kite eximed. ¡°That Senzu bean isn¡¯t produced in this world,¡± An said. ¡°Not from this world?¡± Although Kite had the same doubt, he didn¡¯t ask and instead thanked An: ¡°An, thank you very much, I owe you my life.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. The Senzu bean is there for someone who needs it. You¡¯re worthy of the hunter¡¯s name, and I just can¡¯t let you die in good conscious, so there is no need for thanks.¡± Although An said that there is no need for thanks, Kite still remembered this kindness in his heart and will try his best to return it tenfold. However, they couldn¡¯t rx right now because Pitou was still staring at them. At this time, Pitou was curiously staring at Kite, who was like new. ¡°Be careful. That monster is very strong.¡± Kite raised his scythe and said seriously. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Take Kite and leave. Reward: Nen increase by 5,000.] [2: Face Neferpitou and defeat her alone. Reward: Shinra Tensei.] [3: Join hand with Kite and defeat Neferpitou. Reward: Senzu Bean x1] Without any hesitation, An picked the second choice. He looked at Kite and said: ¡°Kite, you can go back and take care of Gon and Killua. I will take care of her.¡± ¡°What?¡± Kite was taken aback and asked: ¡°Are you serious?¡± An nodded: ¡°Of course, I will be enough to deal with her.¡± Kite didn¡¯t seem to agree: ¡°An, although you are very strong, you¡¯re probably not strong enough to take this monster alone. But if we join hand, we can deal with it.¡± An smiled: ¡°Indeed, if we talk about Nen alone, then both of us can¡¯tpare with her, but you should remember that Nen isn¡¯t everything in a fight. I¡¯m confident that I can defeat her, so don¡¯t worry.¡± Seeing An so confident, Kite didn¡¯t say much else about this. ¡°Okay, take care. I¡¯m going to find Gon and Killua.¡± Kite said. ¡°Go ahead.¡± An nodded. ¡°Meow! Do you want to leave? It¡¯s not that easy.¡± Seeing Kite was about to leave, Pitou immediately attacked him. At this moment, An also moved, and his aura skyrocketed. The monstrous aura made both Kite and Pitou stop in their track. After the initial shock, Pitou directly retreated and created some distance between herself and An while Kite looked at An in surprise and shock. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 305! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 210: Hand To Hand Combat Chapter 210: Hand To Hand Combat [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Although Haoshoku Haki can¡¯t cause damage to Pitou, it can make her re-evaluate An¡¯s threat level. ¡°This guy is very strong.¡± Seeing Pitou not moving anymore, An turned to Kite and said: ¡°Go on, find Gon and Killua. I believe she won¡¯t try to stop you again.¡± Kite nodded and looked at An deeply before rushing away quickly. He wasn¡¯t worried anymore because that aura An exuded caught the monster¡¯s attention, and other than An, nothing existed for her right now. Therefore, he can leave without worrying about Pitou attacking him. Kite was also deeply shocked by An¡¯s aura, as he had never felt such an amazing Aura before. Pitou was looking at An without paying attention to Kite. In her eyes, An was a dangerous existence that could threaten her. If An weren¡¯t killed here, he would be an existence that can threaten all Chimera Ants and even the Ant King. Therefore, Pitou decided to kill An and eliminate the threat this dangerous human posed to her race and king. An looked at Pitou without any worry, and he seemed rxed even. ¡°Meow!¡± Finally, Pitou took the initiative to attack An, and at the same time, Anunched his counterattack. Under the night¡¯s sky, An and Pitou collided, creating massive shockwaves that destroyed their surroundings. ¡°Soru!¡± An suddenly appeared in front of Pitou. ¡°Armament: Hardening!¡± With a jet-ck fist, An mmed Pitou. ¡°Boom!¡± Although Pitou defended herself well, she was still sent flying. ¡°You¡¯re very strong, Meow!¡± Pitou felt the mighty power An had, and thetter¡¯s threat level increased even more. Pitou jumped and rushed toward An quickly, waving her ws repeatedly. With her racial talent, she had an advantage in closebat. However, even though An was a human, he wasn¡¯t behind her in power. An only used Soru, Armament Haki, and Observation Haki till now. He didn¡¯t use neither the other Rokushiki techniques nor the Ice Ice fruit.¡± The Armament Haki can already be content with Pitou¡¯s power, while Observation Haki can track her movement and predict her attacks. Then he would use Soru to dodge and attack ordingly. Pitou was extremely strong indeed because, while An was using all those techniques, she was only relying on herself. ¡°This human is too strong.¡± After a fierce battle, Pitou was getting annoyed as she didn¡¯t gain the advantage even once when fighting An. The battle between An and Pitou made all living creatures in a radius of ten kilometers shiver in fright. An knew that relying only on those three techniques, and he wouldn¡¯t be able to win against Pitou. After all, she was the strongest of the King¡¯s Guards and the first one to be born. She had speed, power, and a superior battle instinct. So, it was almost impossible for him to win without using any other power. ¡°If this goes on, neither of us will win,¡± An said. ¡°Yes, Meow! You¡¯re really strong.¡± Pitou stared at An with piercing eyes. ¡°Then, I will get a little more serious, be ready.¡± Anughed. ¡°You still didn¡¯t use your full power?¡± Seeing An¡¯s confident face, Pitou was a little afraid now. ¡°Ice time!¡± (T/N: Add a Cool pose!) Suddenly, icy cold air spread from An¡¯s palm and covered the surrounding area. In an instant, Pitou was frozen and turned into Ice Sculpture. In addition to Pitou, 500 meters froze, with An being at the center. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 305! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 211: Ice Meteor Chapter 211: Ice Meteor [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Although An sessfully froze Pitou in seconds, he knew that such a monster like her wouldn¡¯t be so easily defeated. Sure enough, after two seconds, the frozen Pitou broke free with a bang, and the Ice surrounding her shattered. She instantly jumped away to create some distance from An and looked at him warily. An knew that she felt a great threat from the cautious look in her eyes. ¡°Ice Age!¡± An raised his hands, and the surrounding started freezing, and the temperature dropped sharply. An was an Ice person, so he wasn¡¯t afraid of cold. Furthermore, fighting in such an environment is advantageous for him. But Pitou wasn¡¯t the same, and such a harsh environment would cause her great disadvantage. Although she was a monster with a strong body, the cold would slow her reflexes and create advantages for An. An looked around and said: ¡°This will be your burial ce.¡± ¡°Meow! Try if you can.¡± After saying this, Pitou bent down, and her ws touched the ground before jumping quickly, shattering the Ice under her feet. An didn¡¯t panic while facing the aggressive attack from Pitou, instead of a hard thick wall of Ice instantly condensed in front of him, blocking Pitou. Boom! Pitou waved her ws at the wall and tore it down, and continued forward toward An. An waited for a bit, and at the critical moment when he was about to get hit, he used Moon Walk and stepped into the air, dodging Pitou¡¯s attack. Pitou posted for a second before once again starting her attacks. She was extremely fast, but in front of someone like An, who had Observation Haki, her speed was nothing. She could only rely on her physical strength to try and gain an advantage against An, but thetter already knew this and wasn¡¯t worried. His own body was strong, maybe even stronger than Pitou, and while she had stronger Nen, An¡¯s control and precision were far superior. An had many techniques, but he didn¡¯t n on using them. Instead, he decided to deal with Pitou using only the Ice Ice Fruit. After dodging for a while, An suddenly disappeared from Pitou¡¯s eyes. She stood in ce and suddenly looked at the sky. Currently, An was standing a hundred meters in the air above Pitou using Moon Walk. Even though Pitou had great eyesight, she couldn¡¯t see An clearly from such a distance, not to mention attacking him. She wouldn¡¯t be able to reach him at all, even if she tried. An was superior in the air since Pitou couldn¡¯t reach him there. Pitou was helpless and could only stay on guard. After a few seconds, an extremely cold wind came from above. Pitou could see a giant Iceball, close to 80 meters in size, like a meteoriteing down from the sky. ¡°Meow!¡± Pitou frowned, and cold sweat covered her back. Even seeing the Size of the Iceball alone can give anyone a shock. She looked at Iceball seriously and knew she couldn¡¯t escape. She grinned and let out a roar, and then she opened her ws. The muscle on her body started swelling and then up to face it head-on. The huge Ice Ball directly blocked Pitou¡¯s escape route, and with a blink of an eye, the Ice Ball fell on the ground. Cracks filled the ground, and a huge pit covered in Ice reced the frozen forest. ¡°Did she die?¡± In the air, An stared at the pit below and wondered. He was sure that even if she didn¡¯t die from this, she should be seriously injured. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 305! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 212: Injured Chapter 212: Injured [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// After using Observation Haki, An quickly found Pitou inside the pit. She was tattered, her hair was disheveled, but she wasn¡¯t dead. An wasn¡¯t surprised because he knew very well how tough Pitou was. However, the Ice Meteor has caused injuries without a doubt. An noticed this by the aura he perceived using Observation Haki. Pitou¡¯s presence was weak. Of course, An consumed too much Stamina creating that Meteor, but he still can fight without any disadvantage, which means that he has the upper hand now. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s y for a bit.¡± An went down and stood in front of Pitou with his finger hooked provocatively. An was already a threat in Pitou¡¯s eyes, but seeing his provocation, she rushed forward and attacked with her ws. An didn¡¯t dodge but used Armament Haki to engage in closebat with Pitou instead. Since Pitou relied on agility in the fight, An decided to use Wolf Fang Fist to fight like a beast, the same way as Pitou. Obviously, the Wolf Fang Fist was superior to Pitou¡¯s style, and once he started using it, Pitou was on the losing side. Boom! Pitou was sent back and smashed into a tree. She was very angry and rushed back toward An aggressively, who was grinning. sh Steps! When Pitou Almost hit him, An used sh step and disappeared. ¡°Meow!¡± Pitou¡¯s eyes quickly looked around, and as soon as she caught An¡¯s figure, she chased after him. While pulling away from Pitou, An raised his right hand, and spherical energy started forming inside his palm. While Pitou was rushing forward, An turned around and avoided her attack, and then he pressed his palm toward Pitou¡¯s Stomach. ¡°Rasengan!¡± That¡¯s the energy ball in An¡¯s hand, the attack that he didn¡¯t use since his fight with Hisoka in Heaven¡¯s Arena. Pitou was caught off guard, and her body was repelled back at high speed while rotating before she hit a few trees and stopped. An knew that even a monster like Pitou wouldn¡¯t remain intact with a Rasengan to the Stomach. Sure enough, when Pitou fell down, there was a part of her abdomen that was missing, and blood flowed out like rivers. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s end this.¡± An didn¡¯t n to drag this anymore, and instead, he took advantage of the situation without giving Pitou any chance to heal her injuries. He dashed forward and appeared in front of Pitou in a blink of an eye. Pitou was already prepared and directly jumped forward,unching another attack on An. An already predicted this with his Observation Haki and evaded her attack. ¡°Try this!¡± An raised his hand, and an electric light flickered on his palm with the sound of chirping birds. ¡°Chidori!¡± As the Chidori took shape, An attacked Pitou without hesitation. Compared to the Rasengan, Chidori was more of a defense breaker since it has a superior pration power. The Chidori pierced Pitou¡¯s body, and the electric current paralyzed her body. An directly kicked Pitou¡¯s body away. As she fell to the ground, purple blood surged out of her wounds. ¡°It¡¯s over!¡± An stood in front of Pitou and said coldly. ¡°You¡¯re really good, Meow!¡± Pitou looked at An weakly, and she understood now that An was far stronger than her. ¡°Meow! If I let you go, your existence will threaten the Ant King. So I will never let you harm the Ant king.¡± After saying this, an extremely dark Aura covered Pitou¡¯s body. Feeling the terrifying aura, An instinctively distanced himself from Pitou. At the same time, Pitou stood up and opened her hands as if she was a string puppet. Behind her, a weird demon that looked like a doll appeared. An recognized this instantly. It was Pitou¡¯s Nen Ability: Terpsichora. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 305! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 213: Killing Pitou Chapter 213: Killing Pitou [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The Terpsichora can make Pitou exert strength speed beyond her body¡¯s limit, which is why An directly distanced himself away from her and created an Ice wall. Of course, the Ice wall can¡¯t stop Pitou. An only intended to slow her down. When Pitou broke the Ice wall, An had already moved fifty meters above ground with Moonwalk. However, An¡¯s pupil shrank before he could sigh from relief. ¡°What?!¡± An looked down and saw Pitou rushing toward with great speed. Boom! An couldn¡¯t use Armament Haki on time and was knocked away by Pitou and fell down like a Cannonball. Boom! Annded and created arge pit on the ground before he stood up with tattered clothes. An¡¯s hand broke from the previous attack, but he repaired it by turning it back into Ice. Since he has a Logia fruit, he is passively immune to most physical attacks, and even if a body part broke, he could quickly recover. Pitou saw An¡¯s arm recovering and directly attacked Again. An, who already experienced Pitou¡¯s speed, knew that even with Soru and sh steps, he isn¡¯t as fast. Even if he used Observation Haki, he wouldn¡¯t be able to react to her speed on time. It can be said that he is currently suppressed by Pitou, and if he wanted to kill her, it would be impossible with just the Rokushiki, sh Steps, and Haki. ¡°Ice Storm!¡± A huge storm engulfed Pitou and the forest like a giant beast, freezing her in ce. An knew that Pitou wouldn¡¯t stay frozen for long, so he prepared his next attack waiting for Pitou to emerge. Crack! As soon as a crack appeared on the Ice, Pitou emerged out, but a huge Dragon was waiting for her. The Dragon opened its jaw and swallowed Pitou in one bite. The Dragon moved quickly and mmed his body on a distant Mountain, with Pitou inside of it. A loud explosion broke out from the collision, and a huge hole appeared in the mountain. However, when using Terpsichora, Pitou could ignore all injuries since a puppet is manipting her body. Even if she is in pain or fatigued, she could fight, even after death. As long as the body exists, even if she dies, the strong loyalty to the Ant king would keep her fighting. An knew that he had to destroy her body if he wanted to end the fight. Thinking about this, An sighed and took out a blue card from the Inventory. This card was S ranked level Ninjutsu that An previously obtained, ¡°¡­ Kirin,¡± which can be used once without any condition. Kirin is formed by natural lightning, and its power was devastating. An believed that Pitou wouldn¡¯t be able to withstand an attack like that. Suddenly, thunder clouds formed in the sky, and lightning danced inside. An pointed his finger at Pitou and said: ¡°Strike!¡± The already condensed Dragon of lightning sted toward Pitou in one-thousandth of a second. Even if Pitou has extreme speed, in front of the current speed of the lightning, she was hopeless. Boom! Pitou was obliterated along with the mountain. An stood in the air while panting from exhaustion. Although he didn¡¯t use many techniques, the few he used consumed too much of his Stamina. He directly used Observation Haki to make sure that Pitou died and finally breathed a sigh of relief when he couldn¡¯t sense her anymore. Pitou was killed by Kirin, and he further confirmed this by the puddle of purple blood on the ground. ¡°Was her entire body destroyed by the Kirin?¡± Seeing the pool of blood, An couldn¡¯t help sighing. Although he didn¡¯t have any grudge against Pitou, she was an enemy of the entire human race, and as a Human, he felt an obligation to get rid of the danger she posed. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 310! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 214: Reward Chapter 214: Reward [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// [Ding! You sessfully killed Pitou and received the Reward Shinra Tensei!] After killing Pitou, the System¡¯s voice echoed in An¡¯s head. Shinra Tensei was different from a Shockwave Attack. This technique can repel all attacks, and it can be used to attack as well. It is a powerful attack thatbines powerful defense and offense. If fully charged, it could destroy a town easily. But it has its shorings, and the most obvious is the inability to continuously use it as it needs a period of time to be used again. If it is to flick something small, like a stone around, then the cooldown is negligible. If it is to knock an ordinary person up, it takes one second, and so on. The other shoring is when encountering something that can¡¯t be repelled. When that happens, he will be the one sent away instead. In other words, he needs to judge whether he can repel his target or not before he uses this technique, but An was greatly satisfied nheless. Now that he killed Pitou, he can be considered to have broken the Ant King¡¯s right arm and made the Chimera Ants suffer great losses. An had no obligation to report to the Hunter Association about what he did. So he will let them handle the rest for now. Fighting Pitou consumed too much of An¡¯s stamina, and he had to use the only remaining Senzu Bean to recover. An returned to the NGL¡¯s Embassy to leave the NGL and returned to the outside world after receiving the items he left there. Outside, Kite, Gon, and Killua were sitting under a tree with their eyes closed. When An came out, the three of them opened their eyes and greeted him. ¡°An!¡± Gon eximed excitedly. Killua was also happy seeing An while Kite breathed a sigh of relief and said: ¡°It¡¯s great that you¡¯re okay.¡± An smiled: ¡°Are you all okay?¡± ¡°Well, we recovered fine.¡± Gon and Killua replied. The two of them were severely injured by Pitou previously, and Although An saved them, they weren¡¯t fully recovered. Now that they rested for a few hours, they are almostpletely fine. It was apparent how superior their natural healing factor was. Even An was slightly surprised. ¡°By the way, An, where is that monster?¡± After talking for a bit, Kite asked seriously. An knew that Kite was wary of Pitou and couldn¡¯t help asking. Seeing his serious look, he could tell that this guy probably will have a phobia of cats in the future. ¡°If that monster can¡¯t be dealt with, it maye out from the NGL, and all humans would suffer. That¡¯s why we must deal with it. I have notified the hunter Association and passed the news about the Chimera Ants to Chairman Netero. I believe that President Netero will send someone here in a few days.¡± Hearing this, An shrugged and said: ¡°I already dealt with that cat.¡± ¡°W-w-what?!¡± Kite¡¯s eyes widened hearing An¡¯s reply as he couldn¡¯t believe this. Killua and Gon weren¡¯t surprised because they had witnessed An¡¯s strength already and knew that he was very strong. Gon said: ¡°Kite, An is very strong. It¡¯s not strange that he can beat that monster.¡± ¡°Yes, although that monster is quite strong, An is more of a monsterpared to it,¡± Killua said. Hearing this, Kite took a deep breath and asked: ¡°How did you defeat it? Did you really kill it?¡± An nodded and smiled: ¡°Well, there isn¡¯t even a corpse left as it waspletely obliterated, so don¡¯t worry about it running away and harming humans.¡± Kite stayed silent for a while; he said in relief: ¡°That¡¯s great.¡± An patted Gon and Killua and said: ¡°Okay since this matter is solved and there is nothing else to do here, let¡¯s leave.¡± Gon and Killua nodded without saying anything. ¡°You leave first, and I want to stay and wait for Chairman Netero.¡± Hearing Kite¡¯s Words, An asked: ¡°Do you still want to go in?¡± Kite nodded: ¡°I¡¯m a hunter investigating Biology. I¡¯m interested in those Ants inside the NGL.¡± Hearing this, An patted Kite¡¯s shoulder and said: ¡°Well, you can stay and wait, Netero and the others.¡± ¡°Kite, remember, if you need help, contact us.¡± Gon said. ¡°Well, I know, but I don¡¯t think I should bother you anymore because Chairman Netero might personally lead this time, and Chairman Netero is more of a monster than the Ants,¡± Kite said with confidence obviously very confident in Netero¡¯s strength. An smiled: ¡°It¡¯s undeniable that old man Netero is really good.¡± ¡°Oh?¡± Kite looked puzzled at An: ¡°You also know Chairman Netero?¡± ¡°Well, I fought against him before,¡± An said. ¡°What, you fought against Chairman Netero?¡± Kite asked in surprise. ¡°Just for fun,¡± An said. ¡°Chairman Netero is indeed a martial artist who looks for a strong foe and enjoys a good fight, but only a few can interest him, and only fewer can fight him.¡± Kite¡¯s implied that An is very strong. ¡°Since you can defeat a monster like that cat, it means that your fight with Chairman Netero was quite the battle,¡± Kite said. An smiled before he remembered something and said: ¡°By the way, even though I dealt with Neferpitou, don¡¯t take them lightly as there are even stronger monsters there.¡± ¡°Neferpitou?¡± Kite thought for a bit, then asked: ¡°Isn¡¯t that the cat monster¡¯s name?¡± ¡°Um.¡± An nodded. Kite then asked: ¡°You said that there are stronger monsters. What do you mean?¡± ¡°At least two monsters on the same level as Neferpitou will be born amongst the Ants, and their king will be born soon. The king is even stronger than Neferpitou and will rule all of them, but I can only estimate that he will appear in half a month to a month.¡± Kite¡¯s face was gloomy as he asked: ¡°Are you sure?¡± An nodded: ¡°Yes, but I can¡¯t say exactly when it will happen, but be careful of everything.¡± ¡°I see. Thank you for your help and advice.¡± Kite said. An took Gon and Killua and left after bidding farewell to Kite. The next day, Netero brought ten Hunter with him to the NGL and met with Kite. Kite exined the Chimera Ant ident to Netero in detail and how An helped him and solved the cat monster and relied upon An¡¯s warning about the Ant king. To Kite¡¯s surprise, when Netero heard about the king, he seemed excited instead of fearful. Netero directly told Kite that he wanted to fight the Ant King and wouldn¡¯t deal with the Ants for the time being. To prepare for the fight, Netero took ten days to prepare and adjust his physical condition to the best state possible. On the other hand, the death of Pitou in the hands of An spread like wildfire in the Chimera Ants colony. In the end, they could only reorganize themselves and try their best to make the queen produce even stronger Ants to fight against humans. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 310! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 215: Training Chapter 215: Training [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// (T/N: The author actually forgot about Ponzu!) An returned to the Metropolis without paying attention to the Chimera Ants in the NGL. Gon and Killua realized how weak they werepared to a monster like Pitou. Therefore, the two of them took the initiative to ask An to train them. An agreed without much consideration, which delighted Gon and Killua. Originally, An nned to give Gon and Killua a devil fruit each because he already has three devil fruits on him right now. The Rubber Rubber fruit, Fleur Fleur fruit, and The Zoan three-headed Dog fruit. As long as they eat those fruits, Gon and Killua will be stronger. However, considering Gon and Killua¡¯s Nen Abilities, An decided not to give them Devil fruits. He decided to help them develop their own Nen abilities further. For example, Gon¡¯s Nen ability is Jajanken, so An suggested that Gon should increase the Jajanken further. The Jajanken is divided into three parts, The Stone, which belongs to the Enhancement, the Scissor, which is Transmutation. And finally, Paper, which belongs to Emission. Each of those three has its own characteristics and strength. The Paper is a projectile attack, but it can be easily avoided. The projectile speed and range, along with the power, need improvement. Otherwise, if Gon encounters a flexible enemy, he won¡¯t be able tond a hit. Therefore, An suggested to Gon that he should increase the Papers¡¯ speed and power. Gon naturally took this suggestion seriously. However, it wasn¡¯t simple for Gon, who is an Enhancer, to strengthen an attack that uses Emission. The Paper is condensed by Nen, and when it gets away from his body, it will weaken gradually. Therefore, Gon can¡¯t exert 100% of the Paper¡¯s power. At most, he can exert 80% of that power, and this is pushing it. Under normal circumstances, Gon, who is an Enhancer, can only exert 50 to 60% of the Paper attack. So, the first thing Gon needs to ovee is mastering the Emission type of Nen, which isn¡¯t an easy task since it requires hard work and great talent. Next is his Scissor, which can be used as a weapon to defend or attack. It has a sharp edge that can effectively cut his enemies. The same way as Paper, because Gon is an Enhancer, he can¡¯t use 100% of the Scissor attack. Therefore, Gon has to improve his mastery over the Transmutation type of Nen. When he masters the Transmutation, he can even cut steal easily. Finally, the Stone, which is an Enhancement type Attack, so Gon can exert its full power easily. However, even his most powerful attack couldn¡¯t even scratch Pitou, which shows that it is stillcking. The main reason is because of the gap in strength between the two, and this gap can¡¯t be closed for the current Gon. Therefore, An just asked Gon to try raising the Stone¡¯s power. He set a minimum standard for Gon¡¯s stone power which is creating a deep hole with more than twelve meters radius. If Gon can do this, then even if he was facing someone stronger than him, he can kill him with one well-ced punch. An will give Gon a year, and after a year, he will check how much he improved. As for Killua, An had nothing to teach him becausepared to Gon, Killua has been trained by his family since he was a child and his fighting power is already very high. So, if Killua wanted to improve, he could only improve his Nen ability. Killua is a transmuter, and he developed an ability to turn his Nen into an Electric current. An believed that even without his guidance, Killua could be stronger with his aptitude. Both Gon and Killua were extremely talented. What theyck are time and experience. If they were given time, they would be extremely strong. Gon returned to Whale Ind to train, and Killua returned to the Zoldyck Family as well. They decided to meet in Heaven¡¯s Arena after a year. Therefore, after parting with Gon and Killua, An went to Heaven¡¯s Arena to have some fun. He believed that he could definitively meet some interesting people and train further. As for training¡­ He is already at the peak of the world, and there is no need for systematic training anymore. Even if he faces the Ant King right now, he is confident that he can kill him. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 311! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 216: Extermination Team Chapter 216: Extermination Team [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// An missed The Heaven¡¯s Arena very much, but at his current level, no one could pose a threat to him. As the most famous battle ce, countless martial artists visited it, so it¡¯s okay to spend some time here. After several games, An won easily every time and no one could stop him. Even floor masters couldn¡¯t stand in An¡¯s win streak. Just as An was getting bored, he received a call from Kite, which surprised him since Gon left Kite and he didn¡¯t expect thetter to take the initiative to contact him. But thinking about it, An could guess that this call had something to do with the Chimera Ants. ¡®He is probably asking for help.¡¯ An thought. As he picked the phone, Kite exined that Chairman Netero organized an Extermination team on the Chimera Ants, and all members of the Extermination team were professional Hunters, and Kite was one of them. As for Chairman Netero, his target is the Chimera Ant¡¯s King. When Netero heard that the Chimera Ant¡¯s King was very strong, he decided to have a one-on-one battle against him. In order to provide an opportunity for Netero to fight the King, the other Extermination team members had to contain the King¡¯s Guards and the other Chimera Ants. However, there is a shortage of manpower as most of the hunters didn¡¯t obey the summon of the association and not many hunters answered the call of the association. That¡¯s why Kite thought of asking An for help. An didn¡¯t immediately agree since it wasn¡¯t a profitable job for him. ¡°If you are willing to join the Extermination team, then you will be a star hunter after the mission is finished.¡± ¡°Star Hunter?¡± An raised his brow slightly. ¡°A Star Hunter has a higher benefit than ordinary hunters in the association and his status is higher. In short, bing a star Hunter is every ordinary hunter¡¯s dream in the association.¡± Hearing Kite¡¯s words, An still didn¡¯t agree directly, but suddenly, he heard the system¡¯s notification echo in his head. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: ept Kite¡¯s request and join the hunter¡¯s Extermination team. Reward: Twelve Paiyun Palm style!¡± An¡¯s eyes shone as he read the name of the reward. Paiyun Palm was a set of good martial arts used by Bu Jingun. This move was erratic, elusive, and powerful. Paiyun m also uses a unique set of movement skills called Cloud Trace Phantom. Although An possesses a decent number of skills, he didn¡¯t have a set of martial arts. The reward of the Paiyun Palm style isposed of twelve moves. After thinking for a bit, An epted Kite¡¯s request and decided to join the hunter¡¯s Extermination team and go to the NGL. Two dayster, An arrived at the border of the NGL, and after going through the formalities, he officially entered the NGL. This was An¡¯s second time here, but he didn¡¯t feel any special feelings. If he had something to say, it would be that this ce is very beautiful. Soon after entering the NGL, An saw Kite, with another two people. One of them was a burly man carrying a big pipe. The other was wearing sses and looked gentle. ¡°Those two are Knov, and Morel Machernasey from the Hunter Association. We are the members of the extermination team.¡± An nodded, even without Kite¡¯s introduction, he knew Knov and Morel. ¡°By the way, where¡¯s Chairman Netero?¡± An asked. ¡°Chairman is getting ready before the birth of the Ant King.¡± Kite exined. To be Honest, Netero was strong, but An knew that he wasn¡¯t the Ant King¡¯s opponent. Of course, defeating and killing the Ant King is a different matter. Netero should¡¯ve already ced Poor Man¡¯s Rose in his heart. Once he can¡¯t defeat the ant king, Netero will stop his own heart and die together with the Ant King. Poor Man¡¯s Rose had super radiation that even the Ant King can¡¯t bear. ¡°An, how are Gon and Killua?¡± Kite couldn¡¯t help asking. An simply told Kite that both of them are going through some special training without revealing much. At this moment, Morel said: ¡°An, I heard that you killed a monster-level Chimera Ant earlier?¡± Faced with the gazes from Morel and Knov, An nced at Kite, who should¡¯ve been the one who told them before he shrugged and said: ¡°I did, but¡­¡± ¡°I heard that Kite said that the monster you killed is one of the King¡¯s guards, right?¡± Morel asked again. ¡°Well, as far as I know, it was.¡± An nodded. ¡°Well, please forgive me, but can you tell us the specifications of this matter.¡± Knov asked in a suspicious tone. ¡°What do you mean?¡± An asked. ¡°Why do you know that there is three King¡¯s guard? The Chimera Ants are numbered in the tens of thousands, right? How can you tell how many monsters there are? Isn¡¯t it something only they should know? Also, you said there is a king that will be born in the Chimera Ants, and this King is the most powerful, stronger than even the three guards. I want to ask as a human, why do you know so much about the Chimera Ants?¡± Faced with Knov¡¯s questions, An shrugged and said: ¡°Sorry, I can¡¯t exin, and I¡¯m toozy to exin even if I can.¡± Knov didn¡¯t expect such an answer from An, in the end, he snorted in displeasure at An¡¯s attitude. ¡°An, there are eight members of the Extermination Team, including both of us. Each two forms a team. Morel and Knov are a team, and you¡¯re teamed with Gel.¡± ¡°Gel?¡± An asked a little confused, as he didn¡¯t hear this name before. ¡°She¡¯s a member of twelve Zodiacs, a Poison hunter that the Chairman invited to join the extermination Team.¡± Kite exined. ¡°Oh, it turns out she is one of the twelve Zodiacs, where is she?¡± An asked. ¡°She is currently, in a vige ahead, about fifty kilometers away. I believe with your speed, you will be there in less than an hour.¡± ¡°Ok, I will head there first.¡± ¡°An, our mission is to eliminate all Chimera Ants, except the Ant King as the chairman wanted to fight him alone, I hope you won¡¯t interfere.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t interfere. Moreover, the Ant king is very strong, to be honest, even if chairman Netero was in his prime, it will be difficult for him to beat the king.¡± ¡°What do you mean?¡± ¡°I have already said everything I want to say, I will go ahead now.¡± After saying, this, An used sh Steps and moved toward the vige 50 Kilometers away to meat Gel. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 312! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 217: Gel from the twelve Zodiacs Chapter 217: Gel from the twelve Zodiacs [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Half an hourter, An arrived at the vige fifty Kilometers away. The vige wasn¡¯t attacked by the Chimera Ants, because it was in the outskirt of the NGL. From this; we can conclude that the scope of the Chimera Ants in the NGL was very limited. After entering the vige, An stopped in front of a few viges and said: ¡°I¡¯m here to find Gel.¡± An directly said. ¡°Oh, it turns out that you¡¯re here for Miss Gel, but she isn¡¯t here right now.¡± ¡°Where did she go?¡± An asked. ¡°She went east. She said she wanted to take a look at the NGl.¡± The viger replied. An nodded: ¡°Okay, thank you.¡± ¡°I heard that Ants that can eat people appeared in the NGL, is that true?¡± The viger was obviously referring to the Chimera Ants. Although he wasn¡¯t sure, he heard such a rumor quite a bit recently.¡± An didn¡¯t want to cause mass panic, but he still didn¡¯t hide this fact: ¡°Yes, they are called Chimera Ants, and they already attacked many viges.¡± Hearing this, the vigers became nervous, but An reassured them: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, the Chimera Ants are still deep inside the NGL, and won¡¯te out for the time being. You can leave the country now and go as far as possible. This matter isn¡¯t resolved yet, so don¡¯te back until it¡¯s over, do you understand?¡± ¡°We understand.¡± The vigers started packing up and preparing to leave. After bidding farewell to the vigers, An moved toward the NGL. After two hours, An didn¡¯t encounter any Chimera Ant along the way. That simply meant that the Chimera Ants were eliminated. An used his Observation Haki and En before he traveled ten more kilometers, and suddenly he felt a strong aura deep inside a cave. This aura didn¡¯t belong to Chimera Ants, but to a human instead. Just after walking two meters into the cave, he saw a fierce snakehead attacking him. An raised his hand and easily blocked it, before grabbing the snakehead and pulling it forward. At the end of the snakehead, was a ck-haired woman, who was dragged out by An¡¯s pull. When the ck-haired woman was dragged out, another snakehead rushed at An. An grabbed the other snake¡¯s head before he noticed that those snake hands were the woman¡¯s left and right hands and most likely created by Nen. An said indifferently: ¡°You¡¯re Miss Gel, right? Don¡¯t be impulsive, I¡¯m an ally.¡± With that said, An released the snakeheads in his hands. Sure enough, the snakehead changed back into normal hands. The ck-haired woman stopped her attacks when she heard An¡¯s words and looked at An carefully. ¡°Kite asked me to meet you,¡± An said. ¡°So, you¡¯re An.¡± Gel blinked as she continued: ¡°Kite said you¡¯ve been in the NGL before and wiped out a lot of Chimera Ant as well, is that true?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right.¡± An nodded. ¡°No wonder I didn¡¯t see any of those Ants after a came in.¡± Gel said. ¡°I think the Chimera Ants are staying in the depth of the NGL right now,¡± An said. ¡°Do you know where they hide?¡± Gel asked. An nodded: ¡°Well, they build a lot of nests deep inside the NGL.¡± ¡°Then let¡¯s go over, I haven¡¯t seen what they are like yet.¡± Gel said. An nodded and walked out of the cave with Gel and said: ¡°Speaking of which, Miss Gel, what did you do in the cave just now?¡± Hearing this, Gel subconsciously replied: ¡°I¡¯m looking for¡­¡± Before she stopped. Gel quickly shook her head and said: ¡°Forget it, don¡¯t ask. It¡¯s a personal matter.¡± ¡°Okay then, I won¡¯t ask.¡± An didn¡¯t press on the matter. But looking at Gel, An guessed what she was looking for. She probably wanted to go to the bathroom, but there isn¡¯t any in the NGL, so she found the cave. She also attacked him as soon as he entered, which is just proven his guess, but An didn¡¯t embarrass her and just smiled and led the way¡­ Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 314! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 218: Alligator Chapter 218: Alligator [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The NGL was a big ce, and reaching its depth would take some time. When they reached their destination, it was already dark. ¡°Let¡¯s find somece to rest, Miss Gel.¡± An nced at the sky and suggested. Gel Nodded in response and said: ¡°Okay, I¡¯m a little bit tired after walking for so long.¡± ¡°Then let¡¯s find a gave and then eat something,¡± An said. Soon, a few Kilometers away, An found a cave but didn¡¯t enter it immediately. ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± Gel Asked. ¡°There is someone there,¡± An whispered. ¡°Humans?¡± An shook his head: ¡°No, it¡¯s a monster.¡± Gel was surprised: ¡°You mean Chimera Ants? Is this a nest of Chimera Ants?¡± An nodded: ¡°There is more than one ant inside. I think this is where they hide. Like I said before, there are many nests in the NGL.¡± ¡°I see, but how did you know that there are Ants inside?¡± Gel asked curiously. ¡°Just from their presence.¡± ¡°Is that so? You used [En].¡± Anughed and didn¡¯t refute her words. He used Observation Haki instead of |En]. ¡°What should we do now?¡± Gel asked. An smiled and said: ¡°We are here on behalf of the Hunter¡¯s Association, so our task is to eliminate those. We¡¯re heading inside.¡± Gel Nodded and nced at An with Admiration: ¡°There is only a few Professional Hunter who is as responsible as you are.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s go, let¡¯s go!¡± An raised his head and jumped into the cave first. Gel quickly followed suit and easily entered the cave. As soon as they got in, they found several Chimera Ants. ¡°Take this!¡± Gel immediatelyunched her snake hands and solved the Ants in the blink of an eye. ¡°Miss Gel is strong indeed.¡± Anughed. ¡°I¡¯m a member of the Twelve Zodiacs after all. Although I¡¯m not a full-time fighter, I can deal with those easily.¡± Gel said. An agreed with her without saying anything. At this time, an angry voice roared: ¡°Despicable Humans, you dare break into my territory!!¡± An looked at the Angry Chimera Ant and judging from its aura, this is a Squadron Leader level. The division leader himself was a little surprised by seeing humans here because a human would¡¯ve been eaten before reaching this ce. But in the next second, his face was filled with greed as he said: ¡°I¡¯m very hungry, so let me fill my stomach with both of you. Humans are my favorite food.¡± Hearing this, Gel snorted coldly: ¡°It¡¯s really ugly, let me deal with it quickly.¡± When she said this, Gel¡¯s hands turned into snakes and attacked the Squadron Leader. Themander is called Alligator because he had an alligator¡¯s head and was two meters tall. The snakes bit Alligator quickly, but Gel¡¯s expression changed slightly: ¡°What?¡± She saw that the Snake¡¯s fangs couldn¡¯t pierce through the Alligator¡¯s armor. ¡°His skin is too thick.¡± Gel said ¡°Hmph, I¡¯m invulnerable amongst the Squadron Leaders. A human can¡¯t break through my armor.¡± Alligator said proudly. Gel snorted coldly and said: ¡°Although I can¡¯t break through your armor, I can do another kind of attack right?¡± ¡°What are you talking about?¡± Alligator felt something wrong and in the next second, his face changed. ¡°What¡¯s wrong with me? What¡¯s going on?¡± Alligator was surprised to find the part that was bitten previously was paralyzed. ¡°I¡¯m a poison Hunter, all of my attacks are highly toxic. You were bitten by my snakes previously, so the poison prated your skin and mixed with your blood already. You will feel your body slowly turning numb until your bloodpletely Coagte.¡± ¡°What?¡± Alligator widened his eyes when he heard Gel¡¯s words and became angry. ¡°What are you talking about? I¡¯m a squadron leader, how can mere poison affect me.¡± A powerful aura radiated from the Alligator and used the air pressure to contain the poison. ¡°I¡¯m free again, and I don¡¯t feel numb anymore. Although this made me use some of my power, I still have enough to kill you two.¡± ¡°Damn it, he can still do that, is he a monster?¡± Gel¡¯s expression turned serious. She had to admit, the Chimera Ant in front of her was strong. The Poison she used can take down ten elephants. At this moment, An said: ¡°Miss Gel, let me deal with this small character.¡± ¡°Are you sure?¡± Gel asked. ¡°Um.¡± An nodded. ¡°How dare you say that I¡¯m a small character?! Damn it, I will make you regret your words.¡± An dodged the Alligator¡¯s attack then used Paiyun Palm. The first attack flows like water and renders the enemy defenseless. The Alligator was beaten to the ground, however, his armor was indeed very strong, as An couldn¡¯t kill him in a second. However, the several palms he threw already crushed the viscera of the Alligator. ¡°Armament: hardening!¡± On the final blow, An directly used Haki and punched the Alligator¡¯s head. Seeing An killing the Alligator in seconds, Gel looked at him with surprise and the admiration couldn¡¯t be concealed from her face. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 314! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 219: Shinra Tensei Chapter 219: Shinra Tensei [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// After resting for one night inside the cave, An and Gel continued to Attack other nests. At the same time, Kite, Morel, and the other members of the extermination team acted in a group of two each in a different direction. This n was simple but effective. The Chimera Ants were trapped and couldn¡¯t escape from any direction, destroying many nests and Chimera Ants. In less than two days, more than 4,000 Chimera Ants were killed and 130 nests were destroyed. The hunter¡¯s extermination Team was unstoppable as they defeated the Chimera Ants. After many Chimera Ants died, the Squadron leaders decided to take action and formed a group to fight back. Except for An and Gel, the other hunters were facing a crisis. However, fortunately, they are first-rate Nen users with richbat experience. Even so, it was a hard fight, because there are many Chimera Ants beside the Squadron leaders, which are there just to exhaust the hunters and make it easier for the Leaders. Therefore, if Kite and the others don¡¯t do their best, they will die. As for Ana and Gel, they were didn¡¯t face any problem at All. With An¡¯s overwhelming strength, no Ant can stop him from moving forward. ¡°An, I didn¡¯t expect you to be so strong at such a young age.¡± After seeing An fighting the Ants several times, Gel admired him. ¡°Haha, I¡¯m not that great,¡± An replied modestly. The strong can always attract the admiration of others. Although Gel was one of the Twelve Zodiacs, she wasn¡¯t as strong as An. Especially after seeing those Squadron leaders, she realized that if she wasn¡¯t with An, her situation would¡¯ve been very different. At this moment, Gel¡¯s expression changed as she saw an arrow moving quickly toward her. An reached out quickly and grabbed the arrow. However, it wasn¡¯t an Arrow, but a rather hard feather. ¡°Where is it?¡± Gel immediately became vignt but didn¡¯t sense anyone close. ¡°Above.¡± An sneered coldly. In the next second, arge number of feather-like arrows shot down from the air toward Gel and An. An snorted coldly and waved his hand, creating an Ice Wall blocking the feathers. It was the first time that Gel saw An use the power of the Ice Ice fruit and was surprised: ¡°This is¡­ Ice?¡± ¡°Yes, this is also one of my abilities.¡± An said: ¡°I can create Ice at will.¡± ¡°Amazing!¡± Gel said in admiration. She found that An was bing more and more mysterious and she didn¡¯t know how much she still didn¡¯t know. Thirty meters above them, something ck was floating in the air, looking down on them. It looked like a crow and had a pair ofrge ck wings growing from behind it. The feather projectiles are released by their wings. ¡°Who is it?¡± Gel asked ¡°A Chimera Ant,¡± An said. ¡°There are flying ants, how do we deal with them if they fly away?¡± Gel said with fear. If it wasn¡¯t for An just now, she would¡¯ve been hit by the feathers. ¡°Thanks,¡± Gel whispered. ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it.¡± An smiled. ¡°Abominable Humans.¡± This crow was the fifth-ranked Squadron leader. It can shoot arrows from the feather on its body which can be hard to deal with An could tell that this guy was at least stronger than most of the Squadron Leaders he encountered so far. ¡°Humans, don¡¯t be proud.¡± The dark Crow snorted coldly as it pped its wings and arge number of feathers rained down on An and Gel. In this situation, even Gel wouldn¡¯t be able to do anything. However, An looked at the feathers with a calm face and said: ¡°Shinra Tensei!¡± An raised his right hand and aimed at the arrows. The powerful repulsive force made all the feathers fall far away in an instant. ¡°What?¡± The Dark crow looked dumbfounded. ¡°What the matter? My arrows can be deflected? What kind of power does this guy use?¡± The dark crow asked a barrage of questions. ¡°Why do you only hide in the air and shoot arrows like a coward?¡± Being provoked by An, the dark crow became angry, as he shot straight down toward An. ¡°Come here.¡± An snorted coldly as he raised his palm at the iing dark crow and said: ¡°Shinra Tensei.¡± In the next second, a powerful repulsive force directly collided with the crow sending him crashing through the forest, no one knew if he lived. An sensed the crow¡¯s presence with his Haki before taking Gel away. ¡°Did you kill it?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± An nodded. Just now, he used Shinra Tensei with 50% power, that power shattered the crow¡¯s skull, killing him directly. ¡°Where are we going now?¡± Gel asked. ¡°The next Nest,¡± An said. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 316! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 220: Shaiapouf Chapter 220: Shaiapouf [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// When An took Gel to the next Nest, Kite and the others solved their problems one after the other and approached their next nest as well. As for the ants, they realized that their situation is getting dangerous. The humans were more powerful than expected. In order to keep their base from being attacked by humans, the remaining squadron leaders gathered all Ants that were scattered everywhere and prepared to go all out against the humans. And the ones leading the attack were the twelve Squadron Leaders. They also had thirty-six captain ants, which weren¡¯t weak. The number of ants gathered was 1,200. A slender blond man stood in front of the squadron leaders with eyes filled with arrogance. The slender blond man was one of the king¡¯s guards, Shaiapouf, known as Pouf. Next to Pouf stood a muscr man with red skin, his name is Menthuthuyoupi, one of the king¡¯s guards, known as Youpi. Those two were now the strongest Ants besides the king. ¡°Have all Chimera Ants gathered?¡± Pouf asked. ¡°Yes, all Ants are here, and you can deploy them whenever you want.¡± The Squadron Leader that looked like a penguin replied. He is called Peggy. Although he wasn¡¯t as good as the other leaders in terms of strength, his mind worked the best amongst them. ¡°So, how many people are we facing on the human side?¡± Pouf asked again. ¡°As far as we can see, there are ten people,¡± Peggy replied truthfully. Pouf raised his brow and said indifferently: ¡°Are you sure that there are only ten people?¡± ¡°Uh¡­ This¡­ Maybe there are more.¡± Feeling the trace of anger in Pouf¡¯s words, Peggy hesitated slightly before he replied. Pouf snorted coldly and said: ¡°Trash! You don¡¯t even know the exact number of our enemy, you¡¯re useless.¡± A cold aura spread out from Pouf and filled the cave making all Ants there afraid. This fear came from their hearts and blood as lower-ranked soldiers. Therefore, facing Pouf¡¯s anger, the ants could only bear it without resisting. ¡°So, those humans use strange abilities, right?¡± Pouf suppressed his anger and asked. ¡°Yes, the ability they use is called Nen. ording to our information, those humans who are attacking us are all Nen users. They use their life force to increase their power or defense, which is very difficult to deal with.¡± Peggy replied. ¡°Nen, and Lifeforce?¡± Pouf whispered in a low voice and then thought of something: ¡°You should be referring to this right?¡± As he said this, pouf released his Nen directly. His whole body was wrapped up in a soft membrane as energy covered his body. This energy caused the Squadron Leaders to kneel and bow their heads. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s the same energy those humans are using, but Master Pouf¡¯s aura is stronger.¡± Peggy wiped the cold sweat on his forehead and replied. ¡°So, we can determine that the humans are powerful because they have mastered using life Force, or Nen, right?¡± Pouf guessed. ¡°I think that should be the case because, in addition to enhancing strength, Lifeforce can be used to form strange skills as well,¡± Peggy said. ¡°Well, since humans can use Nen, we, who are far superior to them, should also be able to use it.¡± Pouf narrowed his eyes. ¡°So, what should we do?¡± Another Squadron Leader who looked like a leopard asked. His name is Cheeto. ¡°Very simple, just master Nen and then attack the humans.¡± Pouf said. ¡°Then, how do we control our Life Force?¡± The Squadron leader found a way to improve and directly started training Nen. The Squadron leader¡¯s aura soared inside the nest, while Pouf and Youpi looked at them and released their own Nen. In an instant, both king¡¯s guards¡¯ aura surpassed the squadron leaders. ¡°After releasing your Life Force, try manipting it, focusing it into certain parts, like the hands, feet, or eyes¡­¡± Pouf quickly taught the Squadron Leaders how to manipte their Nen. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 316! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 221: Awakening Chapter 221: Awakening [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Pouf called the process awakening. The twelve Squadron leaders who awakened were Leol, the Lion, Peggy, the Penguin, Colt, the birdman, Meleoron, the chameleon, Octopus¡­, Turtle¡­ and so on. ¡°It¡¯s great, I feel a steady flow of power in my body.¡± With Pouf¡¯s guidance, the Squadron Leaders mastered Nen one after the other. They marveled at the constant surge of energy in their bodies. Each showed surprise, excitement, and arrogance for gaining power. Amongst them, there are a few leaders who thought that they are as strong as the King¡¯s guards. However, this na?ve idea was quickly shattered. When Pouf and Youpi released their aura, they realized that they were far behind. The difference in Aura was wide apart. ¡°Nen is actually the potential of the body, and you just mastered manipting that energy in your body. If you want to further improve, you can develop Nen Abilities.¡± Pouf exined. ¡°Master Pouf, even though we awakened, those humans can¡¯t be underestimated. I hope Master Pouf can take action and help us with this.¡± Peggy said. The other Leader looked expectantly at Pouf. ¡°Although I really want to take action, my duty doesn¡¯t allow me to leave the Ant King for even a moment.¡± Pouf said in an embarrassed tone, but it was apparent that he looked down on the humans. ¡°Yes, before the birth of our king, as direct guards, we need to guard the Ants King all the way till his birth,¡± Youpi added. Seeing the Two King¡¯s Guards unwilling to take action, the Squadron leaders were a little angry. After all, in terms of power, the two of them were in their own leader. At this time, the turtle man stood up and said: ¡°Last time, even for Neferpitou was killed. Just relying on our meager strength, I¡¯m afraid that we can¡¯t do anything to those humans¡­¡± Before the turtle man could finish his words, Pouf appeared in front of him and with a punch, sent him flying away. The other squadron leader was shocked and couldn¡¯t react at all. ¡°Listen well, if any of you have the same opinion as that turtle, I will kill you all.¡± Pouf warned them. The Squadron leader didn¡¯t refute his words and didn¡¯t dare disobey. ¡°As one of the King¡¯s guards, Pitou was killed by a human, which means that she is weak and can only me herself.¡± Pouf said. The Squadron leader could only ept their words because there is nothing they can do. ¡°Okay, we¡¯re going back. The king should be born tomorrow at thetest. If you can¡¯t deal with the humans by then, you can¡¯t run away if the king mes you.¡± After saying this, Pouf and Youpi left. After they left, the remaining Squadron Leaders were relieved, but soon they turned serious. ¡°What should we do now?¡± ¡°What else can we do, of course, kill those humans.¡± ¡°But those humans are so strong, can we really deal with them?¡± ¡°There is no other way, if we don¡¯t go, the King¡¯s Guards will execute us.¡± ¡°It seems like we can only fight.¡± The Squadron leader seemed depressed because they realized that both ways may lead to death. However, what made them afraid of the humans was Pitou¡¯s death ten days ago. Although they didn¡¯t participate in the fight that night, the battle between Pitou and the humans was very fierce. They thought that Pitou would surely kill the humans, but in the end, she was killed instead. Since then, they have greatly reduced the range of their activity and didn¡¯t dare appear in the territory of the humans. However, ten dayster, which is today, the humans formed a team to exterminate them. Being forced to this point, apart from feeling, they could only fight to the death. As for running away, it was impossible, because if they run away, it would mean that admitted defeat in front of the humans, and they would be deserters and the King¡¯s Guards would kill them. So, they could only choose to fight humans. ¡°We have an absolute advantage in terms of numbers, and we can defeat them with quantity.¡± Said Penguin. ¡°Quantity? This method was used before, but it didn¡¯t work, the soldier ants are weak, they are no different from cannon fodders. They will be wiped out easily. They can only be used to wear the enemies¡¯ strength because only Squadron Leader can deal with those humans.¡± Colt said. ¡°Since there is no good way, we can only adapt to the circumstances.¡± Said Meleoron. At the same time, on a hillside, two kilometers away from the main nest of the Ants. ¡°Do you see that? That towering peak in the distance is the main nest of the ants.¡± An said while standing on top of a mountain. ¡°Well, although it¡¯s far away, I can feel the ominous feeling from that ce.¡± Gel said solemnly. ¡°It looks like they are all gathered there, waiting for a showdown with me,¡± An said. ¡°What now?¡± Gel asked. ¡°Before Kite and the others arrive, let me give them a heavy blow first.¡± Hearing this, Gel looked puzzled: ¡°What are you going to do?¡± ¡°I want to destroy that mountain.¡± Anughed. ¡°Destroy the mountain?¡± Gel couldn¡¯t believe this. ¡°Can you even do that?¡± ¡°Of course, don¡¯t underestimate me,¡± An said. Seeing An¡¯s confidence, Gel didn¡¯t ask anymore and waited to see what he will do. An took the Meito, Shusui, from the Inventory, then held it with both hands and approached the nest. The entire nest was 1,500 meters tall, it¡¯s naturally impossible to destroy it, but An could split it apart. With his level 7 swordsmanship, he only needed a full blow to do just that. An swung Shusui, and a blue arc of energy rushed toward the mountain. In the next second, the cave in which the squadron leaders resided, started shaking and copsing. ¡°What¡¯s happening?¡± ¡°We¡¯re being attacked?¡± ¡°Everyone, hurry up and leave.¡± The powerful energy sh made the entire mountain shake violently and caused the Squadron Leader to flee. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 320! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 222: New Reward Chapter 222: New Reward [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Heuu¡­ You actually split the mountain apart?!¡± Gel was shocked when she saw An sh the Nest. The destruction caused by a single sh made the entire Mountain copse. Above, in the air, An held Shusui like some demon god out to destroy the world. He once again unleashed another sh. The already split mountain was once again hit, and boulders started flying in the air. The Chimera Ant¡¯s soldiers were wiped out due to this devastating blow. The Squadron leaders who originally nned on fighting the humans to death were caught off-guard They were lucky enough to escape the nest in one piece. The first idea that came to their mind was to run away as far as possible. However, they still had one question they couldn¡¯t answer, who attacked the Nest? What method was used to cause such destruction? Then, they looked at the sky. They saw a man holding a ck sword floating leisurely in the air. Seeing An and feeling the immense presence he carried, caused them to feel astonished. ¡°Such power?!¡± ¡°Is he the one who destroyed the nest?¡± ¡°His aura is more oppressive than Master Pouf and Youpi, is he the human who killed Master Pitou?¡± Countless questions emerged in the minds of the squadron leader as it was the first time, they saw such a powerful aura released from a human. His presence was not weaker than the King¡¯s Guards, maybe even stronger. Just looking at him from a distance made them think he is invincible. At this time, An also noticed the squadron leader on the ground who escaped from the Nest. However, he didn¡¯t do anything. Because he didn¡¯t bother wasting his energy on eliminating those guys. Moreover, he believed the attack just now should alert Kite and the others, who should be here soon. At that time, the squadron leaders would be dealt with. The ones who can make An a little bit interested in fighting them were Pouf and Youpi. Of course, there is also the Ant King. An wasn¡¯t interested in the rest of the Chimera Ants. Those squadron leaders released that An didn¡¯t bother with them. No, it should be he didn¡¯t put them in his eyes. This made them very upset, but due to An¡¯s disy of power, they were afraid to make a move and wanted to leave this ce quickly. After all, their lives were more important than their pride. So, they directly started running away, but unfortunately, they run into Kite and the others. Therefore, the two sides engaged in a racial fight. While they were fighting, An returned to Gel¡¯s side. ¡°An, you are really strong. You destroyed the main nest and all of the ants gathered there were wiped out. Isn¡¯t it better to take advantage of the situation and destroy them?¡± Regarding Gel¡¯s suggestion, An waved his hand and smiled: ¡°Although some of them slipped out, I believe Kite and the others will deal with them, so we don¡¯t have to make a move.¡± ¡°Okay, what shall we do now?¡± Gel asked. ¡°Wait here for them toe and then go find where the Ant King is going to be born,¡± An said. ¡°Where will he be born?¡± Gel asked. An shrugged: ¡°I don¡¯t know, but I¡¯m sure it¡¯s not here. If it was, I would¡¯ve found out.¡± Gel nodded and didn¡¯t ask anymore. She now knows An¡¯s strength, so everything is under his control. An said what to do, and she will do as he said. ¡°By the way, An, do you have a teacher?¡± Gel asked. ¡°No.¡± An shook his head as he didn¡¯t have a teacher. ¡°You don¡¯t have a teacher, so howe you¡¯re so strong?¡± Gel asked curiously. ¡°Maybe I¡¯m talented.¡± An smiled, he is not na?ve enough to tell about his system. ¡°Let me ask something else.¡± Gel thought for a while. ¡°What is it?¡± An asked. ¡°Are you single?¡± Gel asked a question that An didn¡¯t expect. An nodded: Yes.¡± ¡°How old are you?¡± Gel asked again. ¡°About twenty,¡± An replied. ¡°Oh, do you want a girlfriend?¡± ¡°You want to introduce me to someone?¡± ¡°How about I introduce myself?¡± Gelughed. ¡°Introduce yourself?¡± An pretended to be surprised. ¡°Are you really stupid or are you pretending to be confused? I¡¯ve already said it, it¡¯s so obvious, so what¡¯s your reply?¡± Gel asked anxiously. An smiled: ¡°Well before replying, I want to ask, what does Miss Gel like about me.¡± ¡°I have taken fancy to all aspects.¡± Gel said straightforwardly. ¡°All aspects?¡± ¡°Well, you¡¯re young, handsome, and most importantly, really strong.¡± Gel said. ¡°I think only thest point attracts you,¡± An said speechlessly. ¡°You can say that I admire strong people, so I hope to find someone strong that can protect me.¡± Gel expressed her inner thoughts about the criteria for choosing a spouse. ¡°So, I meet your criteria then?¡± Anughed. ¡°Well, that¡¯s how it is.¡± Gel nodded and waited for An to agree. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Be Gel¡¯s Boyfriend. Reward: Slow Slow fruit.] [2: Reject Gel and insist on staying single. Reward: Five thousand Nen points.] Compared to the Nen points, the Slow fruit was better. Moreover, An thought that it was about time to stop being single, so he picked the first option. ¡°Okay, I will be your boyfriend.¡± Hearing An¡¯s answer, Gel was very happy and said: ¡°Then, we will be lovers from now on, so take responsibility and protect me.¡± ¡°Of course.¡± An smiled. At the same time, An received his reward from the system. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 320! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 223: Convergence Chapter 223: Convergence [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// An took out the slow fruit and said: ¡°This is for you.¡± ¡°What¡¯s this? A Fruit?¡± Gel looked curiously. An smiled slightly: ¡°This is not an ordinary fruit; it¡¯s called a devil fruit. As the name suggests, there is a devil inside it. As long as you eat it, you can have the same power as that devil.¡± ¡°It has the power of a devil?¡± Gel was surprised and hesitated. She believed in An, but she didn¡¯t hear about something so magical in the world.¡± ¡°Is this a product of Nen?¡± ¡°No.¡± ¡°Where did you get it?¡± ¡°I can¡¯t answer that.¡± Hearing this, Gel wasn¡¯t interested in asking more, but she said: ¡°Devil fruits should be rare, right? Why are you giving me such a precious thing?¡± ¡°Because you¡¯re already my girlfriend, this is to show my feelings.¡± An smiled. ¡°Okay, thank you.¡± Gel took the fruit before eating it. ¡°It¡¯s so bad.¡± Gel looked disgusted. After swallowing all of the fruit, Gel said with disgust: ¡°It¡¯s so unptable.¡± An smiled and said: ¡°Actually, you only had to take a bite, and throw the rest.¡± ¡°What?¡± Get felt like she was teased by An and couldn¡¯t help hammering his chest with her small fists. ¡°Well, do you feel any change?¡± An asked. Gel waited for a bit and said: ¡°No.¡± ¡°Try it,¡± An said. ¡°How do I try it?¡± Gel asked curiously. An smiled slightly: ¡°You only need to ce your fingers like this and the slow light will emerge from your finger. When a target is hit, he will move slowly within the next 30 seconds.¡± Hearing this and seeing the hand gesture, Gel raised her index finger and said: ¡°Like this?¡± As soon as she made the gesture, a purple light hit An. An felt strange energy restricting his body. ¡°Stupid¡­ You¡­ Didn¡¯t¡­ Have¡­ To¡­ Try¡­ It¡­ On¡­Me.¡± An was speechless. He was hit with the slow light and he couldn¡¯t even speak normally. ¡°Ah, sorry.¡± Gel apologized. After thirty seconds, An turned to normal, since it could only take effect for thirty seconds. ¡°What do you think? Is this ability good?¡± An asked. ¡°Well, as long as you are hit by the light, you will slow down, it¡¯s indeed a powerful ability.¡± Gel looked happy. ¡°Thank you, this is such a good gift.¡± ¡°As long as you like it,¡± An said. ¡°By the way, An, have you eaten a devil fruit too?¡± Gel asked. ¡°Well, I ate one, but the one I ate belongs to another system, it¡¯s called the Ice Ice fruit, which gave me the ability to use Ice at will.¡± An stretched his hand and made some Ice on his palm. ¡°It turns out that you have the power to make Ice after eating a Devil Fruit. I thought it¡¯s a Nen ability.¡± Gel said. Two hourster, Kite arrived at An¡¯s side. Beside Kite, there is another person. Seeing him, An was a little surprised: ¡°Mr. Satotz, you¡¯re the hunter that came with Kite?¡± ¡°Long time no see, An.¡± Satotz looked at An for a while then said: ¡°I haven¡¯t seen you for a while, and you became much stronger, I can¡¯t see through you at all.¡± ¡°Haha.¡± An smiled and asked: ¡°Mr. Satotz, howe you¡¯re here?¡± Satotz shrugged and said helplessly: ¡°I didn¡¯t want toe here, but because the Chairman invited me, I had toe and help.¡± ¡°I see.¡± An nodded. ¡°How are the others?¡± An asked. ¡°They should be here soon because there is a lot of movement from your side just now, the vibration can be felt in a radius of ten Kilometers, So, what did you do?¡± Kite said seriously. ¡°It¡¯s nothing, I just destroyed the main Nest of the Ants,¡± An said with a rxed expression. ¡°You mean, you destroyed their base?¡± Kite couldn¡¯t believe it. ¡°That¡¯s right, the vibration you felt is the copse of the nest,¡± An said. Hearing this, Kite and Satotz couldn¡¯t help revaluate An¡¯s strength. ¡°By the way, does that Ant king still have other guards?¡± Kite asked. ¡°It¡¯s a pity, there are not here.¡± An shook his head. ¡°Not here?¡± Kite asked. ¡°They should have another hiding ce. The ce I destroyed is just the main nest on the surface.¡± An guessed. Soon after, other members of the Extermination team arrived one after the other toward An¡¯s side. An was surprised as he found Menchi and Buhara. After everyone had a brief conversation, Morel stood up and said: ¡°Now that the Chimera Ants in the NGL have been wiped out, the king and his two guards, as well as the Queen, are all that remained. Our next target is the guards, after dealing with him, it will be the Ant king¡¯s turn.¡± ¡°Then, we can look for them quickly. With our ability, we should be able to find them soon.¡± An said. Ever since the group of ten started their search. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 320! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 224: Underground Chapter 224: Underground [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// On the other side, inside an underground cave. Pouf and Youpi looked expectantly at the Chimera Ant in front of them. This is the Queen, and at this moment, the King was inside the Queen¡¯s belly. ¡°You two, listen up. The name of the King is Meruem, he will be born in three hours. You must protect this ce so he can be born without any trouble.¡± ¡°Yes, we swear we¡¯ll protect this ce.¡± Pouf and Youpi knelt on one knee as they swore. At the same time, on the ground, 100 meters away from the cave, An and the other members of the Extermination team were trying their best to locate the ce where the king¡¯s guards were hiding. ¡°Strange, have they left the NGL?¡± After searching for a long time, Neither Kite nor Morel found any trace of the Ants. An thought for a bit before he said: ¡°It¡¯s possible, but I think they shouldn¡¯t have left yet.¡± ¡°Why do you say that?¡± Kite asked. ¡°Because the Ant¡¯s King is probably not born yet, so they probably didn¡¯t leave yet.¡± An guessed. ¡°How can you be sure that the Ant King hasn¡¯t been born yet? What if he is already born?¡± ¡°From what I know about the Ant King, if he was born, I should¡¯ve felt his presence,¡± An said seriously. Hearing this, Kite nodded. Based on his knowledge about An¡¯s strength, An wasn¡¯t just talking. Moreover, if the Ant king is stronger than Pitou, then his aura would be extremely powerful and can¡¯t be hidden, so if the Ant King was born, all of them would feel his aura. ¡°But, if they are still in this ce, why can¡¯t we find them? We almost looked over the entire NGL. Did they run away?¡± Morel¡¯s apprentice said. ¡°Runaway?¡± An thought of something and his eyes lit up: ¡°Maybe they aren¡¯t on the ground, but underground.¡± ¡°Underground?¡± Everyone looked surprised. ¡°Do you think they are hiding underground?¡± Morel asked. ¡°Well, at present, this is the only possibility, otherwise, we might not be able to find them.¡± ¡°What do we do now?¡± Menchi asked. ¡°I think we can just look separately,¡± Knov suggested. ¡°No.¡± An shook his head. ¡°Why?¡± Know asked. ¡°Let¡¯s not talk about the Ant King, the guards alone are very strong, if you fight alone, none of you will be able to defeat them. In other words, if we separate, and they found one of us, we will be defeated one by one.¡± Hearing this, Knov said: ¡°We are experienced professional Hunters, even if we can¡¯t beat them, we can always escape.¡± ¡°Escape?¡± An sneered: ¡°I¡¯m afraid that when you see one, you won¡¯t even have a choice to escape. No, you might not even have the courage to fight at all.¡± Hearing this, Knov angrily said: ¡°What do you mean? Do I look like a coward to you?¡± ¡°Yes, you are, what can you do?¡± An sneered. ¡°Bastard!¡± Knov couldn¡¯t bear it and kicked An, but thetter easily blocked it. Suddenly, An appeared behind Knov and before he could react, he was sent flying. Morel and the other who was rtively close to Knov immediately attacked An, the three of them rushed forward, but couldn¡¯t touch An. The three of them were sent flying almost at the same time and fell to the ground. ¡°You can see this, you guys aren¡¯t that strong. Although the King¡¯s Guards can¡¯t kill you instantly, they won¡¯t have any problem in beating you. And if you talk about the Ant king, you four will be dead before you know it, because based on speed, the Ant King is faster than me. Do you see how strong your enemy is?¡± Morel and Knov looked ugly, but they couldn¡¯t find any word to refute. They couldn¡¯t believe that An could defeat them so easily. The power gap was something they didn¡¯t expect. At the scene, only the kite who previously saw An¡¯s power, and Gel weren¡¯t surprised. Because the two of them were clear about An¡¯s power. Gel looked at An and said: ¡°An, forget it, don¡¯t be so mean.¡± As An¡¯s girlfriend, Gel was on An¡¯s side. An nodded and looked at Kite, Satotz, Menchi and said: ¡°What about you guys?¡± ¡°We will do what you say,¡± Kite said. Satotz didn¡¯tment. Menchi and Buhara didn¡¯t object. ¡°So, now we start to search for any underground cave and the likes. The Ant King and his guards are likely hiding underground. In addition, while searching, remember to constantly use [En] and keep your distance to about forty to fifty meters.¡± Kite and the others nodded their head in agreement and each started using [En]. Amongst them, Kite¡¯s [En] reach forty-five meters, and Satotz reached twenty meters. Menchi and Buhara were about twelve meters. As for Knov and Morel, after being defeated by An, they were finally convinced by his power and obediently started to search the ground below. An left Gel by his side as the two started searching. An didn¡¯t use [En], instead used Observation Haki and made sure that nothing that can move within a thousand meters can escape his perception. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 320! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 225: Appearance Chapter 225: Appearance [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Inside the NGL, Kite and the other in the Extermination team followed An¡¯s instruction and carefully searched below them for any Ants. Everyone kept a distance of forty to fifty meters to cover arger area. If one of them had an ident, the others can provide support quickly. ¡­ At the same time, in a cave 100 meters below the ground. ¡°It¡¯s time, My King is finally getting born.¡± The Queen looked at her bulging belly in excitement despite the pain she was feeling. It was painful but she was still happy. On the other side, Pouf and Youpi were also waiting excitedly for their king. They firmly believe that as long as the king is born, humans won¡¯t have any chance to survive. It¡¯s because of this that they didn¡¯t mind the subordinates that were sacrificed. They can ignore soldiers¡¯ death because as long as the king is here, the Chimera Ants won¡¯t go extinct. At this moment, Pouf and Youpi were suddenly surprised. ¡°This is¡­ The aura of humans?¡± You wondered. He raised his head and looked at the top of the cave. Pouf nodded: ¡°That¡¯s right, that¡¯s the aura of humans, right above us on the surface.¡± Both of them felt the aura 100 meters above at the same time. ¡°It seems like our remaining forces were wiped out by them.¡± Youpi said seriously. ¡°Even those Squadron leaders were wiped out?¡± ¡°Who knows, maybe they escaped.¡± Pouf sneered. He didn¡¯t trust the Squadron Leaders anyway. Pouf said: ¡°Now, we¡¯re the only two capable of protecting the king and the Queen, Youpi.¡± ¡°We are more than enough.¡± Youpi grinned: ¡°We must let those humans know that they can¡¯tpare to our powers.¡± ¡°Youpi, you¡¯re stronger than me, so go up and deal with them first. I will wait here for the king to be born.¡± Pouf said. Although those humans won¡¯t find the cave underground, it¡¯s a matter of time before they do. As the king¡¯s guards, their duty was to protect the king and eliminate all threats. Furthermore, being forced into their current circumstances by the human, made them unable to bear with the humiliation anymore. ¡°I will go kill them,¡± Youpi said with a gloomy face. Pouf remembered something and said: ¡°Youpi, remember to bring their bodies back here so the king can eat them, we mustn¡¯t waste nutrition.¡± Youpi nodded: ¡°Well, I will deal with them and bring them back for the king to enjoy.¡± ¡°Everything depends on you. Also, even though your opponents are humans, don¡¯t underestimate them. You must take them seriously.¡± Pouf reminded. ¡°I know, just wait for my good news.¡± After saying this, a pair of wings surged from Youpi¡¯s back. Youpi directly flew high toward the surface as fast as he can. At this time, Kite was seriously searching for any trace of Ants, while An and Gel were on the side. An stared at the cliff in front of him and focused his Observation Haki to take a look. ¡°This is it, they are here,¡± An said. ¡°You mean, they are hiding there?¡± Gel was shocked. An nodded: ¡°I already felt their presence, they¡¯re below.¡± ¡°What do we do now?¡± Gel asked. An thought for a while and said: ¡°You go tell the others; I will make theme out.¡±¡°Ok.¡± Gel nodded and left. An took out Shusui and shed downward. A mighty Energy sh rushed straight into the abyss. Youpi who was rushing up, encountered the flying sh on the way, was directly shed by it as he was unprepared. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 320! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 226: Fight Chapter 226: Fight [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// An stared sharply at the abyss in front of him. He just saw a bright light from below. ¡°Did I hit him?¡± An narrowed his eyes, trying to lock into his target. Youpi who was hit by the energy sh fell and couldn¡¯t resist its might quickly. But Youpi¡¯s physical strength was immense so, in the end, he stopped the sh, but despite this, he still receive some injuries. Although the injuries were not severe, the mere thought that a human injured him made him furious. ¡°Bastard!¡± With an angry shout, Youpi¡¯s Aura rose sharply as he spread his wings. At the same time, An felt the strong Auraing from below and said: ¡°Here hees.¡± In the next second, a figure rushed up from the abyss and appeared in front of An. An recognized him at a nce. ¡°Human, was it you who attacked me just now?¡± Seeing An, Youpi asked immediately. ¡°Yes, it was me,¡± An admitted directly. ¡°I¡¯m going to kill you!¡± Youpi gritted his teeth as he looked at An. ¡°Come.¡± An hooked his finger in provocation. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Single-handedly kills Youpi. Reward: Rumble Rumble fruit.] [2: Retreat temporarily and seek support. Reward: Fire release: Fire Dragon me Bullet.] Naturally, An¡¯s choice was the first option. An wouldn¡¯t retreat facing danger. As for finding support, An didn¡¯t need them or want to rely on anyone. He is very confident in his strength and even if the Ant king was his opponent he would face him alone, not to mention Youpi. An looked at Youpi and said: ¡°Come on, show me what you got.¡± ¡°Damn human, I will kill you.¡± Youpi fluttered his wings and he swooped down from the air with an angry face, preparing to punch An. ¡°Armament: Hardening!¡± An¡¯s fist turned ck and threw a punch back. The shockwave from the collision was astonishing. ¡°What?!¡± Youpi¡¯s eyes widened he didn¡¯t expect An¡¯s power to be his equal. ¡°Impossible.¡± Youpi punched again, and this time he used almost all of his strength. ¡°Bring it on.¡± An didn¡¯t evade at all, his ck fist directly collided with Youpi¡¯s fist. Sparks flew from the collision between their fists. ¡°He blocked it again.¡± Youpi¡¯s eyes widened as he couldn¡¯t believe what happened. ¡°Impossible, how could a mere human being have such power to even match my strength¡­¡± ¡°That¡¯s reality.¡± An sneered: ¡°The humans you look down upon are far more powerful than you think.¡± ¡°Damn it.¡± Youpi couldn¡¯t ept that he can¡¯t match a human¡¯s strength. His aura erupted around him as heunched a fierce attack. An sneered and met his attack without fear. The top-level Armament Haki covered his body, making it seem like steel. No, it was harder than steel. ¡­ At the foot of the mountain, the other members of the extermination team felt two very powerful Aura and couldn¡¯t help ask. ¡°What is this Aura? And there are two of them, who has such strength?¡± Knov asked incredulously. Knov didn¡¯t feel such a strong power before and it was beyond his imagination: ¡°I¡¯m afraid that even Chairman Netero doesn¡¯t have such a strong Aura, right?¡± The power they felt was so strong that it shook his very soul, making him have no courage to face such a foe. Morel calmed down, but cold sweat appeared on his forehead, as he solemnly looked at the top of the mountain and said: ¡°If I guessed correctly, one of those two is a Chimera Ant, and the other is familiar, and it belongs to¡­¡± ¡°An.¡± Kite next to him replied, with his eyes looking at the mountain in the distance. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 321! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 227: Nen Chapter 227: Nen [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°What?¡± ¡°You said that one of the two Aura¡¯s belongs to An?¡± ¡°How is that possible? How could he be so strong?¡± Hearing Kite¡¯s words, Knov who had always been doubting An asked in disbelief. Not only him, even Buhara and Menchi were surprised. The reason was simple, they never felt such an amazing Aura before. From their perspective, it¡¯s impossible for an average person to have such a strong Aura. Even if there is one, it should be an old monster, such as Chairman Netero. An is only in his early twenties at best, he is too young to have such a strong Nen, even if he started training when he was very young. ¡°Kite, are you sure that the other Aura belongs to An and not a Chimera Ant? Is it possible that it is the Ant King?¡± Morel asked. Kite shook his head: ¡°I¡¯m very sure, as I felt An¡¯s aura before. I can guarantee that one of them is really An. If you don¡¯t believe me, you can try to feel his Aura. You would be able to feel thatpared to An¡¯s aura, the other one is filled with malice. Have you ever felt that kind of aura from a human before? That one is sure from a Chimera Ant, while the other aura is free of malice, but it¡¯s very sharp. That aura belongs to An, in other words, An is fighting a monster, and it¡¯s probably one of the King¡¯s Guards.¡± Seeing Kite so sure, Knov and Morel had to believe his words. ¡°What do we do now?¡± Knov asked as he pushed his sses. Kite said in a deep voice: ¡°Of course, we go up and take a look. We have to help if we can, but we may not be able to do anything, since we are facing someone too strong.¡± ¡°Go up?¡± Knov hesitated. The others looked gloomy. After all, from the Aura they felt, the Ant was too strong. There is no doubt that it was a terrifying monster. At this moment, Gel appeared: ¡°An has found the hiding ce of the ants, and he is now fighting against one of the guards. Let¡¯s go and help.¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Kite nodded and rushed toward the mountain. An saved his life before, so he didn¡¯t hesitate at all as he rushed forward to help An. Even if he might lose his life, he won¡¯t regret it. Satotz also followed. Although he wasn¡¯t very familiar with An, he is a professional Hunter, this time he was ordered toe and fight against the Ants, so he will not be a coward and flee. In addition to those two, Menchi intended to help. She is a very brave girl and is quite curious by nature. She wanted to know what kind of ants were the king and his guards. ¡°Menchi, do you want to go?¡± Menchi¡¯s partner, Buhara asked. ¡°What¡¯s the matter, Buhara, are you scared?¡± Menchi asked Buhara as she saw him shivering. Buhara nodded: ¡°This is the first time I felt such a terrifying aura. There are monsters over there, and I don¡¯t want to go up.¡± Menchi smiled and said: ¡°Well, Buhara, you stay here and wait for me then, I want to go up and take a look.¡± Don¡¯t Menchi, what if you get hurt?¡± Buhara was worried. Although Menchi was his partner, he always regarded her as his sister, so he didn¡¯t want her to be in danger. It¡¯s selfish, but you can see that he cares. However, Menchi smiled and said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Buhara, I will be fine.¡± Menchi directly started moving to the mountain. Morel took up his big pipe and said: ¡°Okay, I will go look as well.¡± ¡°Then, let me go with you, teacher.¡± Morel¡¯s apprentice, knuckles along Shoot were ready to follow Morel. ¡°Knov, what about you?¡± Morel turned around and asked. ¡°Morel, you can go, I won¡¯t go.¡± Knov hesitated then replied. As Knov¡¯s partner, Morel could tell that Knov was scared at a nce. ¡°This is the first time I¡¯ve seen you so scared, Knov, you really let me down.¡± After saying this, Morel ignored Knov and took Knuckles and Shoot to support An. Gel followed after them. An was her favorite, and she couldn¡¯t leave him. So after everyone left, only Buhara and Knov remained there. The two of them remained here because of fear, but there is a difference. Buhara felt fear from Youpi¡¯s Aura that was filled with Malice, but Knov was experienced and that shouldn¡¯t affect him, instead, he was afraid of death. He was afraid of being killed. Hello everyone, I wanted to thank you for your constant support. Novel Status: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 323! DB: CxD: Chapter 64 Part 2!! We appreciate everyone¡¯s support, whether on Patreon or by leaving ament and making a review of our Novels. Have a nice day Chapter 228: Monster Chapter 228: Monster [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// On the top of the mountain, the battle continued as Youpi and An exchanged punches. Their battlefield was already in ruins as the ground and the trees were destroyed. Youpi was getting more and more afraid the more he fought. He didn¡¯t expect a human could have so much power that he canpete with him. On the other side, Kite and the others finally arrived. From the distance, they saw An fighting against a crimson humanoid monster. ¡°Is that the King¡¯s Guard? He looks weird.¡± Morel sighed when he saw Youpi. ¡°This is¡­ Amazing!¡± Knuckled and Shoot were shocked by the disy of power. Menchi stared at the fight with wide eyes before she said: ¡°Such a strong monster and its aura is so great as well, but can I really use it to make a delicacy?¡± Morel and the others were speechless after hearing this, Menchi was really too bold. ¡°Kite, are you sure that the monster An is currently fighting is a king¡¯s guard?¡± Satotz asked. ¡°Well, it should be. The aura and presence are simr to the one I encountered previously, only this one¡¯s aura is more ferocious.¡± Kitepared Pitou¡¯s aura with Youpi¡¯s. Pitou¡¯s aura was vicious, but not violent. An¡¯s aura felt as sharp as a sword. ¡°What do you think? Should we go there and help?¡± Satotz asked. Kite¡¯s face was serious as he said: ¡°Wait, it¡¯s not time yet.¡± Hearing this, everyone continued to watch silently. The battle between An and Youpi reached a level that ordinary hunters can¡¯t participate. The fists collided again and this time, Youpi jumped to a distance and asked: ¡°Human, did you kill Neferpitou?¡± After fighting for a while, Youpi realized that An was strong, and recalling that Pitou died against a human, he should be the one who killed her. ¡°Well, it¡¯s me indeed,¡± An admitted without hesitation. Youpi gritted his teeth, since this guy could kill Pitou then he is able to kill him as well. In other words, An¡¯s existence is a threat to the Ant king. ¡°If I don¡¯t get rid of him here, then the king will be in danger.¡± Youpi thought about the safety of his king at this time. ¡°Damn it, I must kill you,¡± Youpi said angrily. An sneered: ¡°As if you could do anything.¡± ¡°Small human, don¡¯t be arrogant. Witness how powerful I¡¯m.¡± In the next second, Youpi released more Nen and his aura skyrocketed. The others witnessed this and felt a strong sense of crisis. ¡°An, do you want help?¡± Kite asked. An shook his head and rejected Kite¡¯s kindness: ¡°You don¡¯t need to take action, I will deal with him myself.¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, Morel said: ¡°Although you¡¯re very strong, that monster obviously hasn¡¯t used its full power. You can¡¯t deal with it alone. Let us help, if we join hands, we can defeat him.¡± An snorted: ¡°Oh, I already said no, so watch from a distance.¡± ¡°Why are you so stubborn.¡± Morel was angry. ¡°Morel, don¡¯t think about it and let n deal with it,¡± Kite said. ¡°I believe that he can defeat that monster.¡± ¡°I do as well.¡± Gel said. Morel sighed and said: ¡°Well, since even you said that, then forget it. I want to see how can An deal with that monster alone. If he can¡¯t do anything, then we can only ask for Chairman Netero¡¯s help.¡± While they were talking, Youpi¡¯s body started changing. Hello everyone, we have finally released our new novel, Reincarnated With The Book Of Knowledge.Simr to God of Soul System the story takes ce in the One Piece world, but the MC, Rhodes, joins the Revolutionary Army. We¡¯re always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why we chose this novel.It¡¯s interesting and really fun to read, the system is really awesome, and there are a lot of fights!It took us a lot of time and effort to search and find a good novel, one that is interesting, and can be enjoyed by everyone. Releasing this novel means that the Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction will be dropped. Unfortunately this one turned out to be really boring, started good but then got really repetitive, thus for those, who wanted us to continue we¡¯re really sorry for any inconvenience, but I really couldn¡¯t keep working on something I wasn¡¯t enjoying. Currently, we have published chapter 35 on Patreon, so if you wishes to support us, please join us there so you can read ahead of the free releases. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 324! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 35! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 229: Six Arm Form Chapter 229: Six Arm Form [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Youpi was the only King¡¯s Guard that wasn¡¯t rted to humans. He is a mixture between a Chimera Ant and a magical beast. It¡¯s quite apparent since he possesses the most obvious characteristic of a Magical Beast, which is a strong body. Youpi¡¯s appearance changed as four arms emerged from his shoulders. Moreover, each arm was 1.5 meters long and had sharp ws. This is the six-armed form of Youpi. Seeing this, Kite, Morel, and everyone else was shocked. ¡°What a monster!¡± ¡°He grew arms!!¡± They could feel that the Aura from Youpi¡¯s body be more violent which meant that this monster got stronger. On the other hand, An who was facing Youpi seemed quite calm. He wasn¡¯t surprised by the additional arms because he already knew about this. He knew that Youpi can change his body due to the property he got from the Magical beast. Judging from his aura, it has already increased a lot. The most important thing is that with six arms, he got four additional fists to use. ¡°I¡¯m the king¡¯s shield, it¡¯s my duty to protect the king. I will never allow anyone to threaten the king¡¯s safety and any threat will be eliminated.¡± ¡°Come then.¡± An hooked his finger at Youpi. Youpi regarded An as a thorn in the King¡¯s way, so he wanted to eliminate him no matter the cost. With six arms, Youpi started punching An with extreme speed. An wasn¡¯t afraid of the attack at all. Instead, he started dodging right and left without much effort. While dodging, An covered his fists in Haki and fought back. Bang! Bang! Bang! As if he was beating war drums, An¡¯s fist made a loud noise when it collided with Youpi. ¡°How is this possible? This guy can still dodge and fight back even when I¡¯m in my six-arms form.¡± Youpi was in dilemma, as he couldn¡¯t fathom how An managed to dodge his attacks. ¡°Could it be that he can see through all my attacks?¡± suddenly this idea popped inside his head. ¡°Even if he really can see through my attacks, it wouldn¡¯t matter if he wasn¡¯t strong enough, but he seems rxed while fighting me in my six-arms form. Where is the limit of this guy?¡± For An, a human being, to be so strong, was quite a shocker to Youpi. ¡°This isn¡¯t as simple as seeing through my attacks, he is seeing the future.¡± Perhaps seeing through Youpi¡¯s doubt, An said: ¡°The Future?¡± Youpi didn¡¯t understand what¡¯s happening at all. What An said almost proved that he can see the future. An could see anything he would do in the next second beforehand. Therefore, no matter how fiercely Youpi attacked, he wouldn¡¯t be able to hit An, because thetter saw through him a second earlier. If Youpi was a monster amongst Chimera Ants, then An is a monster amongst humans. ¡°Wow!¡± ¡°Amazing!¡± Seeing An dodging and fighting back against the fierce six-armed monster, Kite and the others were in awe. Using the top-level Observation Haki, An could predict Youpi¡¯s attacks and also counterattack at the same time. Bang! Bang! Bang! Bang! A series of punches rained upon Youpi as he couldn¡¯t resist at all. An used Wolf Fang Fist while punching Youpi, which is a fast and fierce punching style used by Yamcha from Dragon Ball. It was like a pack of wolves were fiercely beating Youpi who couldn¡¯t resist at all. Those blows caused Youpi to fly in the air, which made all the witnesses stunned. ¡°That¡¯s¡­ Too strong, he knocked that monster in the air.¡± ¡°That monster isn¡¯t An¡¯s opponent at all.¡± ¡°This is great.¡± An¡¯s power was beyond their imagination. After sending Youpi in the air, An didn¡¯t take advantage of the situation but stood in ce instead. Using Physical strength to fight against a monster like Youpi consumes a lot of power. After all, An is a human being, while Youpi is a Magical Beast. ¡°It seems that I will have to use other abilities to kill this guy.¡± An thought. Even though he sent Youpi flying, he knew that he couldn¡¯t kill him with just this. Because that monster is a hybrid, whether it was stamina, endurance, or resilience, he was far superior to a human. Therefore, he needed other means to kill him. Besides, if he drags this fight for too long, it will be hard for him to fight against the King along with the other two, he won¡¯t survive that fight. Therefore, he needed to kill Youpi before the king is born. An directly took Shusui out. An didn¡¯t use his Ice Ice Fruit, because it can only restrict Youpi¡¯s movement, but not kill him. Therefore, An will use Shusui. Hello everyone, we have finally released our new novel, Reincarnated With The Book Of Knowledge.Simr to God of Soul System the story takes ce in the One Piece world, but the MC, Rhodes, joins the Revolutionary Army. We¡¯re always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why we chose this novel.It¡¯s interesting and really fun to read, the system is really awesome, and there are a lot of fights!It took us a lot of time and effort to search and find a good novel, one that is interesting, and can be enjoyed by everyone. Releasing this novel means that the Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction will be dropped. Unfortunately this one turned out to be really boring, started good but then got really repetitive, thus for those, who wanted us to continue we¡¯re really sorry for any inconvenience, but I really couldn¡¯t keep working on something I wasn¡¯t enjoying. Currently, we have published chapter 35 on Patreon, so if you wishes to support us, please join us there so you can read ahead of the free releases. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 325! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 41! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 230: Slash Chapter 230: sh [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// With Shusui in his hand, An¡¯s aura became as sharp as a sword. ¡°This guy¡­¡± Youpi raised his face gloomily as he could feel the pressure from An. Kite, Morel, and the others were surprised as well. ¡°What¡¯s wrong with that guy? Does he know swordsmanship?¡± ¡°It seems like he is a master from the pressure he is releasing.¡± The Extermination team became numb to the shocks that An brought and could only sigh. They had no way to know that guy¡¯s limit. But one thing is for sure, he is stronger than any of them thought he could be. ¡°Youpi, I will kill you quickly with this sword, be prepared.¡± An raised Shusui in his hand as he gave Youpi a warning with a cold expression. Youpi gave a cold snort to An¡¯s warning. As a King¡¯s guard, Youpi will never let himself be defeated by a human. ¡°You¡¯re a mere Human, don¡¯t get arrogant.¡± Suddenly, Youpi rushed at An. An snorted and waved Shusui. A huge deep blue flying sh rushed straight toward Youpi. An used 80% of his power in this sh. Youpi¡¯s eyes widened as he felt the terrifying force behind the sh. If he doesn¡¯t avoid it, even with his superior physic, he wouldn¡¯t survive. It was toote to avoid though, as the flying sh swallowed Youpi. He could only ce his six arms in front of him to resist this sh. Boom! Boom! Boom! The Incredibly powerful sh pushed Youpi back without stopping. Youpi roared as he tried to send the flying sh into the sky and he seeded. The huge sh bounced straight toward the sky splitting the clouds on its way. The sky became clear without any clouds all of a sudden. ¡°So¡­ Strong!¡± Morel looked at the clear sky in awe. Such strength isn¡¯t something any of them could reach. Just as Youpi redirected the sh, and before he could take a breath, he saw someone rushing at him. An didn¡¯t let this opportunity go, as he lifted Shusui in his hand and once again, shed. ¡°What?!¡± Youpi sensed imminent death at this moment, but it was toote to getaway. He once again ced his arms in front of him to block An¡¯s sword. But this time, the light passed through his hands, cutting them directly. Purple blood dripped down on the ground as Youpi lost his arms. After the sessful attack, An moved away from his opponent without taking advantage of him. Although he failed to kill Youpi, he took his hands and caused a serious injury. Youpi scrunched his face due to the pain as he looked at the sky and roared in anger. ¡°Damn you human, how dare you cut my arms off¡­¡± ncing at An, Youpi is going berserk right now. His aura erupted like a volcano as he turned into an irrational beast. ¡°Come.¡± An was afraid and shook his shoulder lightly while holding Shusui. Youpi¡¯s wound stopped bleeding quickly due to his Magical Beast¡¯s blood. Immediately after his bleeding stopped, his body once again changed. Anyone looking at this would get cold feet. Large eyeballs appeared all over his body, granting him 360 degrees vision without a blind spot. This is Youpi¡¯s second change Hello everyone, we have finally released our new novel, Reincarnated With The Book Of Knowledge.Simr to God of Soul System the story takes ce in the One Piece world, but the MC, Rhodes, joins the Revolutionary Army. We¡¯re always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why we chose this novel.It¡¯s interesting and really fun to read, the system is really awesome, and there are a lot of fights!It took us a lot of time and effort to search and find a good novel, one that is interesting, and can be enjoyed by everyone. Releasing this novel means that the Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction will be dropped. Unfortunately this one turned out to be really boring, started good but then got really repetitive, thus for those, who wanted us to continue we¡¯re really sorry for any inconvenience, but I really couldn¡¯t keep working on something I wasn¡¯t enjoying. Currently, we have published chapter 35 on Patreon, so if you wishes to support us, please join us there so you can read ahead of the free releases. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 326! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 41! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 231: Rumble Rumble Fruit Chapter 231: Rumble Rumble Fruit [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The transformation of Youpi was simply terrifying in the eyes of the extermination team except for An. In Morel¡¯s opinion, Youpi was many times stronger than he was, or anyone here. Even An who was fighting didn¡¯t seem to be as strong as Youpi. But that¡¯s only whenparing the Nen they had, and even though An¡¯s Nen was half of Youpi¡¯s, he wasn¡¯t afraid at all, because having more Nen doesn¡¯t mean being stronger. What¡¯s more, An is a swordsman with great skills. ¡°One sword Style, Tiger sh!¡± An waved his sword, and an angry tiger roared. A tiger formed from the sword¡¯s energy, fiercely pouncing on Youpi. ¡°Haaa!¡± Youpi shouted angrily and held the tiger with both hands, then smashed it apart! ¡°Ok, try this then.¡± ¡°One sword Style, Wolves Pack!¡± An once again waved his sword, transforming the energy sh into a pack of wolves that surrounded Youpi. Youpi¡¯s second form was indeed stronger than the first, as normal attacks no longer had any effect on him. It¡¯s difficult to break through his defense using flying shes now. ¡°In that case, I can only fight in melee.¡± An thought as he instantly appeared in front of Youpi. Although he was extremely fast, Youpi could still keep up. Facing Shusui¡¯s strike, Youpi transformed his arm into a double-edged sword and stuck back. However, An¡¯s swordsmanship was far superior to Youpi, no it should be said that Youpi didn¡¯t have any swordsmanship to speak of. So, in terms of swordsmanship, An can crush Youpi easily. Therefore, after a dozen rounds, An broke through Youpi¡¯s defense and shed. Youpi let out a painful howl as a long wound appeared on thetter¡¯s body. In just a few seconds, An released a torrent of shes chopping Youpi into hundred pieces. In a battle, a moment of negligence can result in defeat and An sessfully grasped that opportunity. However, An didn¡¯t stop, because he knew that Youpi can still recover from that. If he doesn¡¯tpletely wipe out his body, even if he was chopped into pieces, he can still recover. An directly used his Ice Ice fruit and froze each piece of Youpi. With each piece frozen, even if Youpi can normally recover from his current condition, he won¡¯t be able to do anything now. In other words, he is dead, and even the Ant King won¡¯t be able to save him. [Ding! You sessfully defeated Youpi, and you received your reward: Rumble Rumble fruit.] In the next second, An received the Rumble Rumble fruit. It is a fruit as strong as the Ice Ice fruit, which can be said to be a fruit a cut above the rest. The one who eats it will be able to produce Lightning and electric current and be immune to physical attacks like any logia. At the same time, the user can move at lightning speed, and increase the range of Observation Haki using an electromaic field. The user can even have a glimpse of other people¡¯s thoughts. And even after being defeated or killed, anyone with the Rumble Rumble fruit can use the fruit¡¯s ability to shock their hearts toe back to life. The power generated by the fruit can even be used to power a spacecraft and robots and various machinery which is equivalent to an inexhaustible power source. Considering the power of the Rumble Rumble fruit, An ate it without hesitation. Although he had the Ice Ice Fruit, it didn¡¯t prevent him from eating another one. Although most people can only take one devil fruit, An was confident that he can take another. After eating it, An felt his stomach Rumble and his body seemed to be torn apart as he felt unbearable pain. In the distance, Kite and the other saw An ying Youpi and were still surprised, but An suddenly fell to the ground in pain. If an ordinary person ate a second devil fruit, his body will have a repulsive effect and at worst his body will explode. Right now, An¡¯s body was repelling the Rumble Rumble fruit, or more like the Ice Ice fruit is trying to purge the Rumble Rumble fruit from An¡¯s body. If An can persist past this, he will be able to use both fruits at the same time. But this requires quite a strong body and unhuman willpower. Hello everyone, we have finally released our new novel, Reincarnated With The Book Of Knowledge.Simr to God of Soul System the story takes ce in the One Piece world, but the MC, Rhodes, joins the Revolutionary Army. We¡¯re always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why we chose this novel.It¡¯s interesting and really fun to read, the system is really awesome, and there are a lot of fights!It took us a lot of time and effort to search and find a good novel, one that is interesting, and can be enjoyed by everyone. Releasing this novel means that the Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction will be dropped. Unfortunately this one turned out to be really boring, started good but then got really repetitive, thus for those, who wanted us to continue we¡¯re really sorry for any inconvenience, but I really couldn¡¯t keep working on something I wasn¡¯t enjoying. Currently, we have published chapter 35 on Patreon, so if you wishes to support us, please join us there so you can read ahead of the free releases. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 327! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 41! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 232: Ant King Chapter 232: Ant King [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°What do we do? He looks in pain.¡± Seeing An falling to the ground in pain, Gel was anxious while the others were worried as well. An alone could kill a monster like Youpi, and his contribution in this event was the greatest When he is being tortured like this, like hisrades, they felt ufortable seeing him like this. If they can, they would rather take the pain themselves. However, An wasn¡¯t injured as they thought, but it was just the result of his recklessness. ¡°No, he passed out,¡± Menchi shouted. ¡°He will be fine, right?¡± Knuckles said. Kite looked at An and said: ¡°It should only be temporary.¡± ¡°What do we do now?¡± Menchi asked. ¡°Let¡¯s take An out of here first,¡± Kite said. ¡°What about the Ant King? Although a monster is dealt with, the Ant King is still out there.¡± Morel asked a crucial question. For a moment, everyone fell silent. Kite pondered for a while and said: ¡°Ignore the Ant king, for now, let¡¯s take An back and talk.¡± ¡°But what about the Ant King? If we leave it alone, there will be problems.¡± Knuckles and Shoot said in concern. Kite said seriously: ¡°We all saw An fighting that monster just now. With our strength, is it possible to fight such a monster? No, we won¡¯t stand a chance. Furthermore, the Ant King is stronger than that monster and we are even less likely to be his opponents. The only person who can fight against the King is An who is currently unconscious, if the Ant King finds out about this, do you think we will survive? All we can do is rely on An, as for Chairman Netero, he is still getting ready for the fight and can¡¯t help. So we can only take An away and wait for him to wake up.¡± Hearing this, and after weighing the pros and cons, Morel and the others agreed to Kite¡¯s proposal. Morel then said: ¡°Let¡¯s use Knov¡¯s four-dimensional Mansion to get out of here.¡± Right now, Kite picked An and left the mountain along with the others. When they reached the foot of the mountain, they rejoined Knov and Buhara. After Morel briefly exined the situation to Knov, thetter opened the four-dimensional Mansion and arranged a way out of the NGL. As a result, the extermination team left the NGL one after the other and returned to the outside world. At this time, Pouf, thest remaining King¡¯s Guard came to the top of the mountain where An and Youpi fought and saw Youpi¡¯s remain and roared to the sky. ¡°My King, you must avenge Pitou and Youpi.¡± Pouf returned to the gave waiting for the birth of his king while grieving losing hispanions. After a few hours, the King finally emerges from the Queen¡¯s belly. ¡°My king, you¡¯re finallying out.¡± Pouf knelt on the ground to salute the Ant King. The king indifferently looked at Pouf who was kneeling and said in a deep voice: ¡°I¡¯m Hungry, do you have something to eat?¡± ¡°Yes, we prepared a lot of food for my King.¡± With that said, Pouf took out a bunch of meatballs. These meatballs were made of human flesh and blood which is the favorite food of the Chimera Ants. However, as soon as the king took a bite, he spat it out. Pouf quickly asked: ¡°What¡¯s wrong, my king? Are they not to your liking?¡± The Ant King replied coldly: ¡°Although the taste is eptable, it¡¯s not fresh.¡± ¡°This subordinate understands. However, your majesty, there is currently no fresh food. All humans escaped or were killed by us.¡± Pouf exined. ¡°Then, leave this ce and go where there are humans.¡± The Ant King¡¯s voice was cold as he said with an unquestionable tone. Pouf immediately replied: ¡°My king, your subordinate will take you out to where the humans live.¡± ¡°Let go then.¡± The Ant King said. ¡°By the way, your majesty, what about the Queen?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry about her, she is useless now, let her fend for herself.¡± ¡°This¡­¡± Although Pouf felt that the king was a bit cruel, he couldn¡¯t refute his words. At this moment, Pouf could only say goodbye to the Queen and bring the king out. They moved toward the closest human settlement in the area. Although the Extermination Team left, their traces remained. ¡°It seems some powerful guys havee here.¡± The Ant King said seriously. ¡°Yes, we originally upied this entire ce and used the viges as food. However, one day, a group of powerful humans came and wiped out arge number of us and even destroyed our base. In the end, only your majesty and your loyal guard were left. The others were all killed.¡± Pouf said with grief. The Ant King stayed silent after hearing this. Hello everyone, we have finally released our new novel, Reincarnated With The Book Of Knowledge.Simr to God of Soul System the story takes ce in the One Piece world, but the MC, Rhodes, joins the Revolutionary Army. We¡¯re always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why we chose this novel.It¡¯s interesting and really fun to read, the system is really awesome, and there are a lot of fights!It took us a lot of time and effort to search and find a good novel, one that is interesting, and can be enjoyed by everyone. Releasing this novel means that the Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction will be dropped. Unfortunately this one turned out to be really boring, started good but then got really repetitive, thus for those, who wanted us to continue we¡¯re really sorry for any inconvenience, but I really couldn¡¯t keep working on something I wasn¡¯t enjoying. Currently, we have published chapter 35 on Patreon, so if you wishes to support us, please join us there so you can read ahead of the free releases. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 330! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 45! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 233: Boundary Chapter 233: Boundary [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// A dayter, Pouf was flying away from the NGL along with his king. They crossed the borders and came to a close human settlement. Rosario was a small country bordering the NGL with a poption of 5 million. Pouf said: ¡°My King, the area ahead is full of humans, should we go down?¡± The Ant King thought for a bit then said: ¡°Let¡¯s just go to the leader of this ce directly, I will create a base here, and the first thing we should do is destroy theirmander.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Pouf replied. After half an hour, they arrived at the capital andnced outside the pce. ¡°Who are you?¡± The guards patrolling the pce soon discovered the strange creatures. From outside, Pouf looked almost human except for his wings. But the King was different, he looked nothing like a human. ¡°Stop for me, if you don¡¯t, we will shoot.¡± Facing the guard¡¯s warning, Pouf and the Ant King continued forward as if they heard nothing. ¡°Fire!¡± The captain gave orders and the other guards immediately pulled the trigger. One after the other, theyunched a fierce attack on Pouf and the Ant King. Ordinary people would¡¯ve turned into sieves with the number of bullets shot, but Pouf and the Ant King didn¡¯t mind the bullets since they did nothing. ¡°Is this the power of the human¡¯s technology? It¡¯s not that good.¡± ¡°That¡¯s because you¡¯re strong, my king, if others were hit, they would¡¯ve died.¡± Pouf ttered. In an instant, the guards died under the King¡¯s hand. ¡°My King, they are all fresh meat.¡± ¡°No, I feel that there is a stronger life energy in the pce, that¡¯s what I need.¡± After saying this, the Ant king walked into the pce. Pouf could guess that the people with a stronger life force that the King was talking about were the Nen users. On the way to the pce, the guards were eliminated one after the other by the king. They couldn¡¯t even hinder him for a second. When they reached their destination, a strong man appeared in front of them. ¡°You daree here and cause a ruckus, you¡¯re looking for death!¡± ¡°My king, this guy¡¯s life energy is strong.¡± ¡°I can see that.¡± The Ant King said. The man was the strongest bodyguard in the pce. ¡°Bring it on!¡± The man shouted as he punched the Ant King. However, his fist was easily blocked by the Ant King. ¡°Too weak.¡± The King swept his tail and cut off the man¡¯s hand before he ate it. After eating the hand, his strength increased. It was the King¡¯s innate ability. He gets stronger when eating life energy. After the Ant King finished his meal, he killed the leader of the country. On the other hand, Pouf was busy preparing food for his King which consisted of 50 people each day. Ten days passed after that. The Ant King was getting stronger day by day due to his ability. ¡°Pouf, beside you, what happened to the other guards?¡± The Ant King suddenly asked. ¡°My king, the queen made a total of three guards, besides me, there are another two called Neferpitou, and Menthuthuyoupi However, the humans killed them before my king was born.¡± ¡°How strong were they?¡± ¡°Stronger than me, my specialty isn¡¯t fighting, but supporting.¡± ¡°Two guards stronger than you were killed by the humans?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°Are the humans so strong?¡± These days, the Ant King saw many humans, but there is no one of them that was strong. Faced with the King¡¯s doubt, Pouf exined: ¡°Amongst the humans, there is a special kind called Nen users. They have strong life energy and various abilities. The guy who killed Neferpitou and Menthuthuyoupi was very strong and most likely, the same person killed both.¡± Hearing this, the King started thinking, and after a while, he said: ¡°I really want to fight against that human. I want to see how strong this human is.¡± ¡°My King, I guess he wille here when he knows we are here.¡± ¡°Why are you so sure?¡± The Ant King asked. ¡°Because humans are repulsive to the Chimera Ants, they don¡¯t want other creatures to appear on theirnd, so they want to destroy us.¡± Pouf said. ¡°So that¡¯s the case, the same with us as we want to wipe them out when we see them.¡± ¡°So, my king, do I let the outside world know we are here?¡± Pouf asked. ¡°No, they will find us sooner orter anyway. When theye, I will eat them all.¡± Said the Ant King. The Ant King suddenly remembered something and asked: ¡°Beside the guards, are there other Chimera Ants?¡± ¡°Basically, when we were in the NGL, the humans wiped the others out. Most of the rest should¡¯ve escaped.¡± Pouf guessed. ¡°We don¡¯t have enough manpower now. If we can, we will find those who escaped.¡± Said the Ant King. ¡°My King, since they ran away in the first ce, it means they aren¡¯t trustful and fear death. Do we need to find those guys?¡± Pouf asked. ¡°After all, we are short of manpower now, and the Queen is useless, we can only find those former subordinates.¡± Said the Ant King. ¡°Well, then, I will go look for them, my King, if they won¡¯te back and defy your orders, I will kill them.¡± Pouf said. ¡°Well, go then. I will be waiting for your good news here.¡± The Ant King said. Hello everyone, we have finally released our new novel, Reincarnated With The Book Of Knowledge.Simr to God of Soul System the story takes ce in the One Piece world, but the MC, Rhodes, joins the Revolutionary Army. We¡¯re always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why we chose this novel.It¡¯s interesting and really fun to read, the system is really awesome, and there are a lot of fights!It took us a lot of time and effort to search and find a good novel, one that is interesting, and can be enjoyed by everyone. Releasing this novel means that the Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction will be dropped. Unfortunately this one turned out to be really boring, started good but then got really repetitive, thus for those, who wanted us to continue we¡¯re really sorry for any inconvenience, but I really couldn¡¯t keep working on something I wasn¡¯t enjoying. Currently, we have published chapter 35 on Patreon, so if you wishes to support us, please join us there so you can read ahead of the free releases. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 330! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 45! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 234: The Power of The Rumble Rumble Fruit Chapter 234: The Power of The Rumble Rumble Fruit [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// In the headquarters of the Hunter Association, after half a month in aa, An finally woke up. ¡°Where am I?¡± Looking at the unfamiliar room he was in, An scratched his head in confusion. ¡°You¡¯re in the headquarters of the Hunter Association.¡± Kite who was beside An¡¯s bed said. ¡°Why am I here?¡± An asked. ¡°Did you forget?¡± Kite said. An thought for a while before recalling that he ate the Rumble Rumble fruit and felt pain all over his body before everything went ck. ¡°How long was I unconscious?¡± An asked. ¡°Half a month.¡± Kite replied. ¡°So long?¡± An was taken aback. He didn¡¯t think it would take so much time. ¡°How are you feeling right now?¡± Kite inquired. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m totally fine.¡± Anughed. He didn¡¯t lie as he felt that his body wasn¡¯t abnormal. Not only that, but he felt the power of the Rumble Rumble Fruit as well. ¡°It seems that after half a month, my body finally merged with the Rumble fruit. Now, I should be able to use both fruits.¡± An guessed. ¡°By the way, what¡¯s the current situation of the Chimera Ants?¡± An asked. ¡°Since you cked out, we retreated from the NGL, and it¡¯s been half a month since we were there.¡± Kite exined. ¡°Is that so.¡± An frowned. ¡°However, although we didn¡¯t go back, The Vice Chairman, Pariston, sent an investigation team to the NGL a week ago,¡± Kite said. ¡°How¡¯s the situation?¡± An asked curiously. ¡°ording to the investigation team, there are no traces of the Chimera Ants in the NGL,¡± Kite said. ¡°What about the Ant King?¡± An frowned. ¡°The King probably left the NGL and went somewhere else,¡± Kite said gloomily. Hearing this, An started thinking before he asked: ¡°Where do you think the Ant King will go?¡± ¡°I think he will go to a ce with a few people,¡± Kite said. ¡°That¡¯s not totally true,¡± An said. ¡°What do you mean?¡± Kite was puzzled. An exined: ¡°The King will probably go to a ce where there are many humans because Chimera Ants like to eat humans the most, which means the king will be in a ce where there are many humans. Furthermore, the Ant King was just born, and all of his subordinates are wiped out, so he won¡¯t go somewhere where there are many people or he would risk being discovered by us.¡± Hearing this, Kite said: ¡°In other words, the king will go somewhere with a few humans and rtively closed on itself, right?¡± An nodded: ¡°Well, it should be.¡± ¡°If we follow this clue, we should be able to find his whereabouts right now,¡± Kite said. ¡°Then hurry up and organize a team to investigate, if we don¡¯t find the Ant King quickly, he will get stronger and it will be troublesome,¡± An said. He knew about the King¡¯s ability to grow stronger the more he ate. If they don¡¯t find him quickly, even An won¡¯t be able to deal with him. As for Chairman Netero, An who¡¯ve seen the original story knew that Netero wasn¡¯t the Ant King¡¯s opponent. If Netero uses the Poor Man¡¯s Rose and brings the Ant King with him, it would be impossible to kill him at that time. ¡°By the way, what about the Chairman?¡± An asked. ¡°He has been in seclusion somewhere; he is also waiting for the news about the Ant King,¡± Kite said. ¡°Well, I¡¯ll talk to him when I have time,¡± An said. ¡°Okay, you stay here, for the time being, I will organize a new investigation team as soon as possible and try to find the Ant King¡¯s whereabout within ten days,¡± Kite said. ¡°No, ten days is too long, we should find him in five days at most, the sooner the better,¡± An said ¡°Ok, I understand.¡± After finishing their conversation, kite left. An sighed and walked out of the room. An arrived at a forest beside the Hunter Association¡¯s building as he wanted to try the power of the Rumble Rumble fruit. An raised his hand and pointed at a tree in the distance. ¡°Lightning!¡± In the next second, a lightning bolt struck the tree down from the sky splitting it in half. ¡°Too strong, worthy of one of the strongest Logia Fruits.¡± An once again raised his hand and pointed at the sky. ¡°100 million Volt Vari!¡± A thundercloud appeared in the sky and in the next second, a huge lightning bolt struck down smashing the ground and messing the forest up. The loud thunder reverberated all the way to the Hunter Association a few kilometers away. ¡°Let¡¯s try the Ice Fruit now.¡± An put his hand on the ground and in an instant, the ground froze and the temperature dropped below zero. With two of the strongest Logia fruit, An¡¯s power reached a new height. After testing his power, An said: ¡°With this power, there shouldn¡¯t be any problem when I face the Ant King. After all, no matter how powerful his body is, it can¡¯t defend against lightning. As for speed, the speed of lightning should be faster than the Ant King.¡± Unless the Ant King is as fast as light, he can¡¯t be faster than An. Of course, An wasn¡¯t proficient with his new power, so it will take a while topletely adapt. On the other side, Pouf left the King¡¯s side by his order to look for the scattered Chimera Ants. He used his power to disperse into hundreds of copies and scattered in all directions. The effort paid off as it found one of the Squadron Leaders enjoying his life in a vige. The one he found is Cheetu, the leopard who refused Pouf¡¯s proposal to go and assist the Ant King. ¡°Give up, I finally escaped the NGL, how could I go back there? If I go, I will be killed by those humans, you don¡¯t know how terrible they are.¡± Cheetu said. ¡°Then, you¡¯re not afraid of the Ant King¡¯s punishment?¡± Pouf asked. ¡°I¡¯m not afraid, the Ant King is not here, moreover, even if he was, I¡¯m not afraid of him,¡± Cheetu replied. ¡°If you don¡¯t go back, I will kill you here.¡± Pouf threatened. ¡°You don¡¯t have the ability, you¡¯re only a clone, it¡¯s impossible to kill me with a clone,¡± Cheetu said arrogantly without fear. ¡°You are underestimating me.¡± Pouf snorted coldly. ¡°I¡¯m toozy to fight you, you can go If you have the ability, then catch me. If you catch me, I will go back and help the Ant King.¡± Seeing that Pouf was going to attack, Cheetu said. ¡°Well, Keep your words then.¡± Pouf said. ¡°Come then, try and catch me.¡± Cheetu was confident in his speed. He didn¡¯t believe that Pouf will be able to catch him. However, this time, he made a mistake, as Pouf was actually faster than him. After running for a day and night, Cheetu finally lost and Pouf caught him. ¡°Damn it, that guy is persistent,¡± Cheetu said in disbelief. ¡°Humph, for the sake of the Ant King, I don¡¯t have a problem in lying my life, let alone outperform you.¡± Pouf said. In fact, Pouf tried his best, he ran after Cheetu with all of his power to catch him. ¡°ording to our agreement, you have to go back with me and help the Ant King.¡± Pouf said. ¡°Ok, ok, I¡¯ll go back with you. I¡¯m really unlucky.¡± Cheetu sighed. ¡°Humph, don¡¯t spout nonsense, let¡¯s go.¡± Pouf wanted to return to the Ant King as soon as possible. Cheetu said: ¡°After I go back, the Ant King won¡¯t kill me? After all, I¡¯m a deserter.¡± ¡°No, the Ant King is short on manpower right now, so he won¡¯t kill you.¡± Pouf said. ¡°Ok then.¡± Cheetu sighed in relief. ¡°By the way, other than me, who else is there?¡± Cheetu asked. ¡°I¡¯m looking for the others now.¡± Pouf said. Hello everyone, we have finally released our new novel, Reincarnated With The Book Of Knowledge.Simr to God of Soul System the story takes ce in the One Piece world, but the MC, Rhodes, joins the Revolutionary Army. We¡¯re always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why we chose this novel.It¡¯s interesting and really fun to read, the system is really awesome, and there are a lot of fights!It took us a lot of time and effort to search and find a good novel, one that is interesting, and can be enjoyed by everyone. Releasing this novel means that the Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction will be dropped. Unfortunately this one turned out to be really boring, started good but then got really repetitive, thus for those, who wanted us to continue we¡¯re really sorry for any inconvenience, but I really couldn¡¯t keep working on something I wasn¡¯t enjoying. Currently, we have published chapter 35 on Patreon, so if you wishes to support us, please join us there so you can read ahead of the free releases. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 330! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 45! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 235: Small Bear Chapter 235: Small Bear [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Somewhere in the south, in a country well known for the many tourists it has, a small number of people came here through smuggling or other illegal means. ¡°Is that a Ko?¡± ¡°So cute, that Ko is so cute!!¡± In a part, a Ko was standing on its feet, and dressed like a gentleman, wearing a suit with a tie and a hat. Many tourists gather around as they took pictures of the Ko with their phones. The Ko who was being watched by the tourists didn¡¯t seem disgusted by the humans. Suddenly, the Ko¡¯s stomach made a sound and he said: ¡°I¡¯m hungry.¡± The onlookers suddenly let a ¡°huh¡± as they looked at the Ko in surprise. ¡°Wow, it actually spoke.¡± ¡°I heard it as well, he said he was hungry.¡± ¡°It¡¯s so interesting, it can even speak ournguage, is this really a Ko? Isn¡¯t he a human dressing like one?¡± The tourists were surprised by the talking Ko. ¡°To be precise, I¡¯m not a Ko, because I have human genes as well.¡± The Ko exined. All tourists who heard this were amazed. ¡°Could it be that Some Lab experimented on the Ko? Did theybine the human gene with the Ko which resulted in this?¡± One of the tourists said. ¡°That¡¯s an interesting spection, but I wasn¡¯t made by a scientist, but I¡¯m a creature who lives in this world like you, just a different race,¡± Ko replied. ¡°Where did youe from?¡± A Male tourist asked curiously. The Ko stayed silent as he gave his answer a thought. But he didn¡¯t reply in the end, he is a Chimera Ant, from the NGL. Since the nest was destroyed, it left the NGL. Then after some time, he came to this ce. ¡°Do you have a name?¡± A female tourist asked. ¡°A Name¡­¡± The Ko thought for a while then replied: ¡°Everyone calls me Small Bear.¡± ¡°Small bear, a simple and straightforward name.¡± The tourists quickly epted the name. A Female tourist asked: ¡°Small bear, are you hungry?¡± ¡°Yes, I¡¯m hungry.¡± Small Bear nodded, since leaving the NGL, he didn¡¯t eat anything. The main diet of the Chimera Ants were the humans, and since they ate too many humans in the NGL, The Hunter Association found about it and their base was destroyed in the end. After escaping from the NGL, Small Bear didn¡¯t target the humans. Small Bear wasn¡¯t like the other Ants, his IQ was as high as a human, so it knew that there must be other food for it. So, he tried to integrate into this ce and abandoned his identity as a Chimera Ant. ¡°Small bear, here is some bread, you can eat it.¡± ¡°Thank you, beautifuldy.¡± Took the bread from the female and ate it with relish. When the tourists saw this, they found it interesting and started giving Small Bear more food. For example, they gave him milk, fruits, sweets, and even sausages. Small Bear harvesting a lot of food, although it was the first time he ate them, and they weren¡¯t suitable for his taste, he didn¡¯t refuse the Tourists kindness. At the start, the food wasn¡¯t to his liking, but after some time, he adapted. ¡°Snacks are really delicious, for example, the bread with mild is very good. There are also the choctes, which are sweet and delicious.¡± Small Bear sighed. ¡°Small Bear, I finally found you.¡± After leaving the park, Small Bear encountered someone unexpected, it was Pouf. ¡°Master Pouf, what can I do for you?¡± Small Bear was surprised, but he still asked calmly. ¡°Small Bear, the Ant King is born, now the King needs manpower, so youe back with me to assist the king,¡± Pouf said directly. He didn¡¯t want to waste his king¡¯s time after all. Hello everyone, we have finally released our new novel, Reincarnated With The Book Of Knowledge.Simr to God of Soul System the story takes ce in the One Piece world, but the MC, Rhodes, joins the Revolutionary Army. We¡¯re always hoping to provide the best read to everyone, and that¡¯s why we chose this novel.It¡¯s interesting and really fun to read, the system is really awesome, and there are a lot of fights!It took us a lot of time and effort to search and find a good novel, one that is interesting, and can be enjoyed by everyone. Releasing this novel means that the Dragon Ball: Creation x Destruction will be dropped. Unfortunately this one turned out to be really boring, started good but then got really repetitive, thus for those, who wanted us to continue we¡¯re really sorry for any inconvenience, but I really couldn¡¯t keep working on something I wasn¡¯t enjoying. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 330! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 50! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 236: Uninvited Guests Chapter 236: Uninvited Guests [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Hearing this, Small Bear said seriously: ¡°Master Pouf, please allow me to refuse your request. I don¡¯t want to go back and assist the Ant King.¡± ¡°What are you talking about?¡± Pouf could hardly believe what he was hearing. ¡°Amongst the Squadron Leaders, I know you are very loyal, now you actually rejected me. This is the King¡¯s order, aren¡¯t you afraid of the King¡¯s punishment?¡± ¡°If the Ant King is going to kill me, I will not run away.¡± Small Bear said. ¡°Aren¡¯t you afraid of death?¡± Pouf asked. ¡°I¡¯m afraid of death.¡± Small Bear continued: ¡°But I feel free right now, I don¡¯t want to go back and kill many people, those days are in the past.¡± Pouf said angrily: ¡°Are you serious?¡± ¡°Yes, I have decided to let go of my identity as a Chimera Ant.¡± Small Bear said indifferently. ¡°You want to abandon your identity?¡± Pouf¡¯s eyes widened. ¡°Master Pouf, I decided to live peacefully in this world.¡± Small Bear said seriously. ¡°That¡¯s why I need to abandon my identity as a Chimera Ant and join a human family.¡± ¡°You traitor!¡± Pouf gritted his teeth angrily. He didn¡¯t expect that one of the most loyal subordinates would actually abandon their race. ¡°Whatever you say, I have decided to integrate with the human society, and I will never kill people again, let alone feed on humans.¡± Small Bear said firmly. ¡°Bastard! You traitor!!¡± Pouf wanted to kill Small Bear, but he split many times and this clone wasn¡¯t strong enough to kill him. He could only let Small Bear go temporarily as he shouted: ¡°Wait until the King rule the world and you will feel stupid for today¡¯s choice.¡± Small Bear stared at Pouf moving away and sighed. Although hepletely offended the Ant King and Pouf, he didn¡¯t regret it. Because aftering to the Human World, he realized that he longed for such a peaceful life. This may be rted to the human gene he had or the memories of being human. ¡­ In an elegant restaurant, three uninvited guests were eating. The leader of this small group was a guy that looked like a lion. He is one of the Squadron leaders of the Chimera Ants, his name is Leol. After escaping from the NGL, he came here and changed his name to Leo. The other two with him were his loyal subordinates, they were the armymanders amongst the Chimera Ants. After leaving the NGL, the three of them came here, but they didn¡¯t cause trouble since they didn¡¯t want the attention. So, for the time being, they constrained their animosity toward the humans and integrated into their society. Their original food source was the humans, but not, they were trying the food made by the humans. When they tasted the food made by the humans, they couldn¡¯t help feeling that it was really delicious. Especially the grilled meat, they quite liked it. They liked it even more than humans. The whole restaurant was dumbfounded by the amount the three of them ate. ¡°Master Leo, I¡¯m so full,¡± Hina said with a hup. ¡°Well, the food made by the humans is indeed very good, I¡¯m very satisfied,¡± Leol said. ¡°Master Leo, let¡¯s go, these humans seem very surprised that we ate so much. Being watched is unpleasant.¡± The Third Ant, the dragonfly man, said. ¡°Well, let¡¯s go somewhere else,¡± Leo said. If they were in the NGL, they would¡¯ve killed these humans a long time ago, but because it was the territory of the humans, they didn¡¯t dare do anything. However, when the three of them were about to walk out, the manager stopped them: ¡°Wait, the three of you, you¡¯ve eaten so much and haven¡¯t paid yet.¡± ¡°Pay?¡± Leo had a big question mark above his head. Hello Everyone, Chapter 237 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 330! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 51! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 237: Command Chapter 237: Command [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Master Leo, I heard that you need to pay to eat in the human¡¯s society, otherwise, you will be regarded as stealing food and will be arrested.¡± ¡°I see.¡± Leol nodded as if he realized something. ¡°Then, Master Leo, are we going to pay them?¡± Hina asked. ¡°Idiot, where will we find the money. Besides, do we need to pay humans for a meal?¡± Leol said angrily. The restaurant manager¡¯s face became gloomy: ¡°Your meal amount to a total of 1.03 million Jenny, you literally wiped the restaurant clean. So are you going to pay with cash or credit card?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t have any money, so let us go or I will kill you.¡± Leol threatened. However, the restaurant manager didn¡¯t fear Leol and coldly snorted: ¡°You want to dine and dash, it won¡¯t be easy, guards, catch the three of them!¡± Several security guards rushed forward to catch the three of them. ¡°You¡¯re looking to die!¡± Leol angrily roared as he raised his ws and knocked out all the guards in one move. The manager was shocked by this. ¡°You want to escape? It¡¯s not that easy.¡± Leol sneered and grabbed the manager, then he threw him ten meters up only to fall to his death. ¡°Let¡¯s go, I don¡¯t think that there are other fools who will block our way.¡± After resolving the trouble, Leol waved his hand and left with Hina and the Dragonfly Ant. ¡°Master Leo, this is the territory of the humans, let¡¯s leave quickly, otherwise, we will be hunted by them.¡± As they went out of the restaurant, the Dragonfly Ant suggested. Leol nodded: ¡°That makes sense, let¡¯s go then.¡± At this moment, someone blocked the way of the three. ¡°You are, Master Pouf?¡± Seeing the one blocking their way, Leol was surprised. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s me,¡± Pouf confirmed. ¡°Why did you be so small?¡± Leol asked. Pouf was less than ten centimeters in size. ¡°This is just one of my clones.¡± Pouf said. This is one of Pouf¡¯s abilities, he can split his body into countless smaller parts. Each one can move freely, but the overall strength is too weak. ¡°So, Master Pouf, what can I do for you?¡± Leol said respectfully since the other party was higher ranked than him. ¡°The Ant King was born, and now we are short on manpower, so I need you to go back and assist our king.¡± Pouf said straight to the point. Leol didn¡¯t immediately agree when he heard this. Pouf noticed this and said: ¡°Don¡¯t think about it, you can¡¯t live in the territory of the humans just because of your appearance. Before long, you will be discovered by them and they will hunt you down. The Ant King is very strong, and he will surely lead us to the rule the world.¡± Leol pondered for a while before he nodded: ¡°Okay, I will go back with you, but I have one condition.¡± ¡°What condition?¡± Pouf asked with a frown. The other party dared toy terms for his return, if it wasn¡¯t for theck of manpower, he wouldn¡¯t bother talking things out with him. ¡°It¡¯s very simple, we want to be free, and not listen to anyone¡¯smand except for the Ant King¡¯s,¡± Leol said. Pouf thought for a while then nodded: ¡°Okay, as long as you obey the king, there is no problem at all.¡± Pouf directly led Leol and his subordinates to the Ant King. Pouf¡¯s clones convinced several Squadron leaders and captains to return and serve the Ant King. In less than ten days, Pouf found four Squadron Leaders and six captains. Although the King looked at the other Ants in disdain, he didn¡¯t punish them for running away, because there are only a few of them right now. Therefore, the King gave Pouf another order, which is to find the Queen they abandoned before in the NGL and bring her back to produce more Chimera Ants. The King gave the four Squadron leaders and six captains orders to bring all the people of this ce to him. On the other side, Kite sent an investigation team to find the Ant King. Hello Everyone, Chapter 238 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 330! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 53! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 238: Promotion Chapter 238: Promotion [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Two dayster, An was invited by Beans, the Personal Secretary of Netero, to the Hunter Association and met Netero there. This is the second time An was invited by Netero, the first time was when he took his hunter license and became a professional Hunter. That was the time when An fought against Netero. After entering Netero¡¯s office, Beans said: ¡°Mr. An, the chairman is having a meeting with the Twelve Zodiacs, please wait here for a while.¡± An nodded and sat casually, with his legs crossed. With his current power, only a few people can match him, even in the Hunter association He is willingly waiting because he respected Netero, nothing else. ¡°Mr. An, do you want a drink? Coffee, juice?¡± Beans asked. ¡°Juice,¡± An said ¡°Ok, please wait a moment.¡± Beans went to pour a cup of juice to An while thetter stood up and went beside Netero¡¯s desk as he was curious about what kind of work the chairman had. An opened the desk drawer and flipped through it, and a picture caught his eyes. It was a picture of a middle-aged man with a woman. It looked very ordinary. But he felt something familiar in the photo. The man in the picture was Netero himself, and An could guess that the woman was either Netero¡¯s wife or close friend. In short, it was someone who has a close rtionship with Netero. As a transmigrator, An naturally knew that Netero had an illegitimate child who isn¡¯t known in public. An boldly guessed that Netero¡¯s child, Beyond Netero, is also the child of that woman. After a while, An put the picture back and returned to the sofa. At this time, Beans returned and said: ¡°Mr. An, here is your juice.¡± ¡°Thanks.¡± An waited another ten minutes and finally, Netero finished his meeting with the Twelve Zodiacs. ¡°An, Sorry for making you wait for so long.¡± Netero apologized. ¡°If you were a little bitter, I would¡¯ve left,¡± An said. Netero smiled: ¡°Do you know why I invited you?¡± An shrugged: ¡°Isn¡¯t this about killing the Chimera Ants.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Netero nodded. ¡°Except, the few fishes that slipped through the, such as the Ant King, all the Chimera Ants were wiped out,¡± An said. ¡°Yes, thank you, I invited you here today to thank you in person as the Chairman of the Hunter Association,¡± Netero exined. ording to the report submitted by Kite, Morel, and the others, Netero learned that An performed the best out of the extermination team and almost wiped all the Chimera Ants. ¡°Oh? Thank me? It¡¯s not a verbal thanks, is it? Are there any prizes?¡± An asked with interest. Netero smiled: ¡°Of course there are prises.¡± ¡°Oh, what is it?¡± An asked. Netero said: ¡°You contributed the most in the extermination team and for that, I decided that you will be promoted to a second-star extermination hunter.¡± ¡°Extermination Hunter?¡± An froze for a moment as he didn¡¯t expect this kind of reward. Netero took a medal with the insignia of the Hunter association along with two shiny stars in it. The two stars represent the honor of being a two-star hunter. An directly wore the medal without any hesitation. He jumped from an ordinary hunter to a two-star hunter in one mission. The top in the hunter association was triple stars hunter and only three were known. Although a two stars hunter isn¡¯t as good as a triple one, it is already great to receive such a reward in one mission. ¡°At your age, you are the youngest two-star hunter since the founding of the association,¡± Netero said. ¡°The youngest two-star hunter?¡± An smiled. ¡°With your potential, there is a chance that you will be a triple star hunter in the future.¡± Netero looked at An with appreciation. ¡°So, if I kill the Ant King, and destroy the Chimera Ants, can I be a triple star hunter?¡± An asked. ¡°Well, in theory, yes, but in reality, it¡¯s very difficult to achieve,¡± Netero said. ¡°Anyway, there is a chance, right?¡± An asked. Netero nodded: ¡°Well if you can kill the Ant King, of course, your contribution will be great and will make you eligible to be a triple star hunter.¡± ¡°That¡¯s fine then, I will give you a hand and deal with the Ant King then,¡± An promised. Netero facepalmed and said: ¡°I will deal with the Ant King myself, that¡¯s why I¡¯ve been preparing for more than a month now.¡± Hello Everyone, Chapter 239 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 332! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 239: Netero Chapter 239: Netero [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// An had naturally heard about Netero¡¯s challenge to the Ant King, however, when Netero said it himself, An couldn¡¯t help wiping his forehead with a smile. ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± Seeing An smile, Netero asked in confusion. ¡°Chairman, do you really want to challenge the Ant King alone?¡± An asked. Netero didn¡¯t deny it and nodded: ¡°This old man did have such a thought. For that, I¡¯ve been preparing myself for the past month. Even though I didn¡¯t regain 100% of my power, I¡¯m about 80% now.¡± An said: ¡°In other words, Chairman is confident in his own power, right?¡± ¡°Um¡­ It shouldn¡¯t be a problem to defeat the Ant King.¡± Netero said. After a moment of silence, An said: ¡°Chairman, there is something I don¡¯t know if I should say or not.¡± ¡°Speak, don¡¯t hold back,¡± Netero said. ¡°Actually, I think you can¡¯t defeat the Ant King by yourself, chairman,¡± An said. Hearing this, Netero stayed silent for a bit then said: ¡°Interesting, maybe you¡¯re right.¡± ¡°Well, chairman, can I trouble you to release your Nen and show me?¡± An said seriously. ¡°Okay, I will show you.¡± With that, Netero released his Nen. At the start, it was slowly gushing out, but in the end, his Nen seemed to turn solid. An could feel the amazing life energy emanating from Netero¡¯s body, just like a towering tree that withstood all Natural disasters. ¡°How is it?¡± Netero asked. ¡°Chairman, you¡¯re Nen is quite strong and it seems tempered thousands of times, but¡­¡± When An said ¡®but¡¯, Netero immediately asked: ¡°But what?¡± ¡°Compared to the Ant King, Chairman¡¯s Nen is way weaker,¡± An said his thoughts. Hearing this, Netero thought for a bit then looked at An and asked: ¡°Have you met the Ant King?¡± ¡°Never seen him.¡± ¡°Then why are you so sure that the Ant King is stronger than me?¡± Netero was confused. ¡°It¡¯s probably my instinct.¡± An could only say this. ¡°Instinct?¡± Netero was taken aback for a moment, as he didn¡¯t think An would say that. Obviously, Netero didn¡¯t believe this but seeing An not saying anything else, he didn¡¯t ask further. After a bit, Netero said: ¡°Even if I can¡¯t beat the Ant King, I still have the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva, you¡¯ve seen it before.¡± An said: ¡°the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva is strong, but it won¡¯t work against the Ant King.¡± As a transmigrator, An has seen Netero¡¯s fight against the Ant King. The defense of the Ant King¡¯s body was too strong for Netero to prate. Even Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva can¡¯t cause much damage to the Ant King. That¡¯s why he was sure that Netero won¡¯t be able to defeat the Ant King. Netero said: ¡°This old man is quite confident in his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva, if even the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva can¡¯t beat the Ant King, then the entire human race will be threatened.¡± ¡°So, suppose if chairman can¡¯t defeat the Ant King and was defeated by him, what will you do?¡± An pointed at the core of the problem. Netero stayed silent for a moment and sighed: ¡°We can only die together then.¡± ¡°Die together?¡± ¡°Well, we will use the power technology,¡± Netero exined. ¡°Technology? Do you mean poor man¡¯s rose?¡± An asked. ¡°Oh? You actually know about it?¡± Netero nced at An in surprise. An gave him more mysteries the longer they spoke. An smiled slightly: ¡°I know a little about the Poor Man¡¯s rose, it is said to be a very powerful weapon and its effective range is tens of kilometers with strong radiations, once someone is affected, they can¡¯t live for long.¡± Hearing this, Netero was surprised: ¡°You actually know so much about it.¡± ¡°So, Chairman, do you n on bringing the Poor man¡¯s rose to fight the Ant King?¡± An asked. ¡°Well, if I can¡¯t defeat him, I can only use it, or else, the entire human race will be in danger,¡± Netero said with a righteous expression. ¡°The Chairman is indeed noble.¡± An admired. ¡°Do you think the Poor Man¡¯s rose can kill the Ant King?¡± Netero suddenly asked. ¡°Well, of course, no matter how strong the Ant King is, it¡¯s impossible for him to be immune to the toxicity of the bomb. Once he is affected, his fate will be death by the radiations.¡± Netero nodded seriously: ¡°Well, the Poor Man¡¯s rose is very scary, if it wasn¡¯t necessary, I would prefer not to use it. But after listening to you, it seems necessary.¡± Hello Everyone, Chapter 240 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 332! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 240: The Battle Of The Strong Chapter 240: The Battle Of The Strong [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Seeing Netero was taking the risk in bringing the Poor Man¡¯s Rose, An said: ¡°Chairman, I suggest that don¡¯t bring the Poor man¡¯s rose.¡± ¡°Why?¡± Netero was puzzled. ¡°Because you will surely die using it,¡± An said with a serious face. Netero stroked his goatee andughed: ¡°Hehe since I decided to single-handedly challenge the Ant King, I was prepared to die. It¡¯s my life long which to fight against someone that strong. If I really can¡¯t beat him, I can only rely on the Poor Man¡¯s rose.¡± ¡°Chairman, I have a suggestion,¡± An said. ¡°Please speak,¡± Netero said. ¡°At that time, If Kite and the Other find the Ant King¡¯s position, allow me to walk with you,¡± An said. Netero hesitated for a bit. After all, He decided to face the Ant king alone. Seeing Netero¡¯s expression, An said: ¡°In case that Chairman can¡¯t defeat the Ant King, then I will face him. Chairman doesn¡¯t need to use the Poor Man¡¯s rose and die with the Ant King, I will deal with him myself if that happens.¡± Hearing this, Netero looked at An for a bit then said: ¡°I know you¡¯re strong An, but do you think you¡¯re strong than me? If even I can¡¯t defeat the Ant King, I¡¯m afraid you won¡¯t be able to do it as well.¡± An shrugged and smiled: ¡°I think that currently, I¡¯m stronger than the current Chairman.¡± ¡°Oh? Really?¡± Seeing An¡¯s confidence, Netero couldn¡¯t ignore An¡¯s words. ¡°Since you think you surpassed me, how about we have a spar? Let¡¯s see who is stronger.¡± Hearing Netero¡¯s suggestion, An was about to respond, but the system interrupted him. [Ding! Make A Choice] [1: Refuse Netero¡¯s challenge. Reward: Three Thousand Nen.] [2: ept Netero¡¯s challenge and defeat him. Reward: Meito, one of the 12 supreme grade swords, Yoru.] The ck de Yoru? An¡¯s eyes lit up, he instantly picked the second option and immediately agreed to Netero¡¯s challenge. This is one of the 12 supreme swords we¡¯re talking about, and it is a sword wielded by the strongest swordsman in One Piece. It¡¯s in a different leaguepared to Shusui. If he get this sword and with his swordsmanship, he wouldn¡¯t be weaker than Mihawk Himself. And if he use that sword to deal with the Ant King, no matter how strong thetter¡¯s body was, it can¡¯t ignore the damage from Yoru. An stopped his train of thoughts and said to Netero: ¡°Chairman, let¡¯s go, I will definitively defeat you.¡± Neteroughed: ¡°It¡¯s really scary to be a confident youth.¡± The two walked to the forest away from the Association building. ¡°What a good ce to fight,¡± An said. ¡°Well, this is where I practice usually,¡± Netero said. ¡°Then, this ce may be destroyedter,¡± An said. ¡°Let go.¡± ¡°Then I will use the most basic skills to spar with the Chairman.¡± ¡°Although I¡¯m old, my body is still strong you know,¡± Netero said. ¡°I¡¯m going first, be careful, Chairman.¡± Soon, An seemed to teleport and arrive before Netero with a punch. An didn¡¯t use Armament Haki in his punch but instead used Tekkai from the six techniques of the Marine. Although it wasn¡¯t strong as Armament Haki, it can¡¯t be underestimated. Netero used his Nen to improve his body¡¯s offense and defense and fought with An. Bang! Bang! Bang! In the forest, two figures continued to collide against each other. ¡°sh Steps.¡± An appeared behind Netero quickly and kicked, but Netero reacted in time and turned around blocking An¡¯s attack. ¡°Shigan!¡± An immediately used another one of the Rokushiki to harden his index finger and stabbed at Netero. Thetter couldn¡¯t avoid the attack and could only defend using his palm. ¡°Rankyaku.¡± An pulled some distance between them and kicked out. A crescent-shaped sh flew toward Netero, who gave a low grunt and punched the sh and shattered it. An then went back to closebat once again. Netero became frightened the longer they fought. An actually matched him in terms of physical strength. No, he felt that An was better than him, whether it¡¯s speed or reflex, he was faster. Fortunately, his body had gone through many years of practice, and even with age, he could still have a strong body. As a result, Netero had to admit that An was stronger than him in terms of Physical skills. ¡°An, next, you try this old man¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva,¡± Netero said. Hello Everyone, Chapter 241 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 332! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 241: Speed Chapter 241: Speed [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Netero slowly put his hands together and a huge Buddha appeared behind him. The Buddha seemed majestic exuding golden light. This is the second time An saw Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva, andpared to before, this time it was more solid and impressive. ¡°Come on, Chairman.¡± Facing Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva, An wasn¡¯t afraid. Seeing An¡¯s fighting spirit, Netero smiled. In the next second, he made a move. His palms that were together separated and he gently pushed one hand forward. However, An saw a fierce huge golden palm sting toward him. ¡°Armament: Hardening!¡± An clenched his fists which suddenly turned ck. It wasn¡¯t that he didn¡¯t want to avoid the palm from the golden buddha, but he couldn¡¯t. He was shocked to find that his speed was slower than the palm heading his way. Therefore, An¡¯s only choice was to face it head-on. An punched the golden palm with his ck fists and the moment they touched, a huge shockwave was generated. The Trees in their surrounding was uprooted and flew in the air from the shockwave and the ground under An cracked. But An still stood firmly without moving back. Netero looked at this in surprise, as he didn¡¯t expect An to block his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva with his fists. Although he didn¡¯t use all of his power in that palm attack, An still managed to block it, which made him the second person in the world to do so. As for the first person, he is an Assassin named Maha Zoldyck. However, it¡¯s been many years since their fight, Netero thought that few people in this world could take his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva head-on, but today, he encountered someone who can match it, and furthermore, this person is very young. At this moment, Netero saw infinite potential in An¡¯s future. ¡°Interesting.¡± Neterounched another attack. The 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva behind him released two palms. Two huge Golden Palms moved toward An to squash him. An covered his entire body with Armament Haki and released his Observation Haki for better observation. ¡°Soru!¡± An disappeared from his ce as he rushed toward Netero quickly. At the same time, The Golden Palms¡¯ momentumes from his left and right. Bang! Before he reached Netero¡¯s body, An was caught between the golden palms. The Palms were like two big mountains sping An. An felt himself being squashed under between the Golden Palms and at this time he said: ¡°Shinra Tensei!¡± A powerful repulsive force erupted from An and immediately pushed the palms away. An¡¯s figure shed as he used sh Steps to move away from Netero. Netero was surprised because An was able to repel the palms of the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva. ¡°Next, I¡¯m going to get a little bit serious.¡± As soon as Netero finished his words, he waved his hand and the Buddha behind him moved. ¡°100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva ny-ninth hand.¡± Suddenly, hundreds of palms flew toward An. An had no time to react, and the ce where he stood was hit hard as if it was bombarded by artillery. Dust flew around, the ground was destroyed, and the trees flew in the air from the shockwaves. The Dust dissipated and a huge crater appeared on the ground. An who was in the middle of the pit seemed quite tattered. Although he used Armament Haki to defend himself, he still suffered some injuries. As for the elementalization ability of his devil fruits, Netero¡¯s attacks negated them as they weren¡¯t just physical attacks. This is a rare asion where An got injured. Fortunately, the Armament Haki protected him very well and he wasn¡¯t severely injured. Netero was quite shocked that An was still able to stand and without many injuries as well. ¡°Since Chairman turned serious, then I will also show my abilities.¡± ¡°Oh?¡± Hearing this, Netero felt surprised. ¡®An hasn¡¯t used all of his power just now? He still has more tricks?¡¯ Out of curiosity, Neterounched another attack. Many palms once again moved toward An together. ¡°Here I go.¡± An electric arc moved on An¡¯s body, which belonged to his Rumble Rumble fruit. An knew that Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva was very fast and had a wide range. If he only relied on his physical skills, he won¡¯t be able to avoid them. If he wasn¡¯t as fast as the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva, he would just be beaten without any chance to avoid or attack. Therefore, there are two steps to fight Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva The first step is to predict the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva¡¯s attacks and dodge them in advance. The second step is to surpass the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva¡¯s speed. For other people, they might not be able to predict the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva¡¯s attacks, but An had advanced Observation Haki, so he can do it. Next, he had to move faster than the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva. An also has the ability to do this using his Rumble Rumble Speed to move at the lightning. With that kind of speed, An was confident that he wouldn¡¯t lose. After turning his body into lightning, An¡¯s speed improved. At the same time, with his Observation Haki, he grasped the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva¡¯s attacks trajectory and avoided them. Electric light flickered between the palms as every time one of the palms get close to hitting An, he would avoid them. An¡¯s speed surpassed the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva¡¯s speed and with the Observation Haki, he managed to avoid every attack with no effort. Hello Everyone, Chapter 243 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 332! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 242: Lightning Chapter 242: Lightning [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// In the forest, An moved as fast as Lightning as he avoided the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva¡¯s attacks. It wasn¡¯t an exaggeration as he really reached the speed of lightning. Netero couldn¡¯t help the shock as he watched An evade all of his attacks. In Netero¡¯s eyes, An seemed to turn into a ball of lightning, glowing with dazzling blue light. No matter how fierce Netero attacked, An could evade his attacks with thebination of speed and Observation Haki. ¡°My turn.¡± An waved his hand and a bolt of lightning struck Netero! Boom! Netero directly used the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva to block the lightning. The blue lightning and the golden palms exploded. ¡°Twenty million volts, Thunder Dragon!¡± Following An¡¯s right hand, a dragon Shaped Lightning rushed toward Netero. Facing the Thunder Dragon, Netero didn¡¯t dare stay still. He immediately folded his arms together, making the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva behind him do the same. In the next second, the thunder dragon seemed to crush into a golden barrier. ¡°Interesting!¡± An¡¯s mouth raised in a slight smile as he lifted his hand, generating a lightning pir toward Netero. Boom! The dazzling lighting and the golden light collided and exploded. This continued for a while, and half an hourter, Netero took the initiative to stop the fight as his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva disappeared. ¡°Haha, this old man lost.¡± An didn¡¯t expect Netero to concede defeat and was a little surprised. Even though he transformed into Lightning, his speed could match Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva, and even surpass it, but he couldn¡¯t beat Netero, because his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva was almost wless. Even with his speed, he couldn¡¯t break through Netero¡¯s defense in a short time. What¡¯s more, Netero still has his strongest move, the Zero hand which he hadn¡¯t used. This shows that Netero still had some reservations in this battle and didn¡¯t give his all in this fight. Netero didn¡¯t seem to want to use the Zero Hand attack from the start. After all, it was just a spar, it wasn¡¯t necessary to go all-in as if it was a life and death battle. But, he won since Netero admitted defeat. It was naturally the best result for An. [Ding! You have defeated Netero. You obtained the supreme sword Yoru!] An smiled with joy, his power rose to the next level with this sword. At this moment, Netero came over and curiously asked: ¡°An, are you a transmuter?¡± An nodded: ¡°Yes, I¡¯m indeed a transmuter.¡± Netero asked immediately: ¡°So, the lightning-like speed and power you just used, you developed it yourself.¡± An shook his head: ¡°That¡¯s not a Nen Ability, no, to be precise, it¡¯s Nen at all.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not the power Nen?¡± Netero was puzzled: ¡°So, what kind of power is that?¡± ¡°It¡¯s the power of the devil,¡± An said. ¡°Devil¡¯s power?¡± Netero frowned. ¡°I can¡¯t say much about the specifics, you can think of it as a supernatural power of a sort.¡± An shrugged. He didn¡¯t want to tell the story of the Devil fruit. ¡°In other words, even if you don¡¯t use Nen, you can still use the power of Lightning?¡± Netero asked. ¡°That¡¯s right.¡± An nodded. ¡°That¡¯s really amazing,¡± Netero said with admiration. ¡°I know that in addition to that power, you also have the ability of Ice. But in the battle just now, you used only Lightning, it seems that you are still hiding your strength.¡± Hearing this, An smiled: ¡°After all, this is just a spar, you will have a chance to see my full power, Chairman.¡± ¡°Do you mean the Ant King?¡± Netero asked. An replied: ¡°Chairman, do you agree with my suggestion?¡± ¡°Of course.¡± Netero smiled. After their spar, Netero was convinced by An¡¯s power and recognized him from the bottom of his heart. ¡°Then Chairman, when you¡¯re going to challenge the Ant King, remember to take me with you,¡± An said. ¡°Well, don¡¯t worry, you¡¯re so powerful, what can I do without you.¡± Neteroughed. ¡°Chairman, the Ant King is so powerful that even I can¡¯t guarantee that I can kill him. Therefore, I was fighting with all of my power at that time.¡± Netero nodded: ¡°When the timees, I will go first, if I can¡¯t beat him, then you will take the stage. If even you can¡¯t defeat him, then I won¡¯t have any choice but to use the Poor man¡¯s rose to kill him.¡± Hearing this, An smiled and said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Chairman, you¡¯re won¡¯t die with the Ant King. Because the Hunter Association still needs you to manage it. If you die, the Association will be in trouble.¡± Netero smiled: ¡°Hahaha, Thanks for your concern. However, this old Man already decided that if I can¡¯t beat the Ant King, and I don¡¯t die, then I will resign from my position as the Chairman.¡± An was surprised: ¡°Are you serious?¡± Netero nodded slightly: ¡°Well, I¡¯ve been the Chairman of the Hunter Association for decades, I want to hand over the association for the younger generation.¡± ¡°Well, no matter what decision you make, I won¡¯t object.¡± As a member of the Hunter Association, An naturally didn¡¯t want Netero to resign as its chairman, but since Netero want to continue in that position, he couldn¡¯t object. ¡°An, I look forward to your performance, you¡¯re qualified topete for the Chairman post.¡± Hearing Netero¡¯s words, An scratched his head and said: ¡°Chairman, how am I qualified? In terms of qualification, I¡¯m just a neer.¡± Netero smiled: ¡°Hehehe, although you don¡¯t have enough in terms of qualification, you are strong enough. You¡¯re now a two-star hunter, and you already qualified topete with the other senior hunter for the Chairman position.¡± ¡°That being said, I have little interest in that position.¡± An shrugged. ¡°Hehe, You¡¯re like Ging, you don¡¯t care about the position of Chairman,¡± Netero said. ¡°Ging? You mean Ging Freecss?¡± An asked. Netero nodded: ¡°That¡¯s him, do you know him?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know him, but I know that he is Gon¡¯s father,¡± An said. ¡°Gon, the little child with the hedgehog head?¡± Netero asked. ¡°Um.¡± An nodded. ¡°Ging mentioned his son to me, saying that Gon will catch up with him one day, or even surpass him,¡± Netero said. ¡°I believe that as well.¡± An smiled slightly. Hello Everyone, Chapter 243 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 332! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 243: Return to Whale Island Chapter 243: Return to Whale Ind [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// After finishing his fight with Netero, An temporarily left the Hunter Association back to Whal ind. His purpose was to see how far did Gon had advanced since hest saw him a month ago. In the forest of Whale Ind, An found Gon. His Nen became much stronger than before. ¡°It seems like you are stronger than before, Gon.¡± Anughed. ¡°Since I left, I spent almost 15 hours training every day. Except for sleeping and meals, I spend the rest training.¡± Gon replied. ¡°As long as you keep that, you will be very strong.¡± An encouraged. Gon nodded then said: ¡°An, can you please spar with me, I want to see how much I improved.¡± Suddenly, the systems gave An two choices. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: ept Gon¡¯s request and win. Reward: Three Months of training experience.] [2: Reject Gon¡¯s request. Reward: One thousand Nen point.] An picked the first choice and said: ¡°Well, let go.¡± Gon was happily haring this. ¡°Gon, go all out, I won¡¯t go easy on you.¡± ¡°I¡¯m happy to hear that.¡± Gon clenched his fist and released his Nen which was quite strong and made him look amazing. Gon was an enhancer and he was best at strengthening his body. Boom! With an explosion, Gon rushed toward An and punched. Although Gon¡¯s attacks were simple, they allowed him to perform to the best of his abilities. An didn¡¯t dodge but let the punchnd. He didn¡¯t block Gon¡¯s fist using Nen, but he used his physical strength instead. When the punchnded on An, he could feel that Gon was indeed stronger than before. Even though Gon improved quite a bit, he was still far from reaching An¡¯s current power. An shed as if he teleported and arrived behind Gon, and with a chop to the back of Gon¡¯s neck, Gon fell unconscious. Gon used Ken to defend but it wasn¡¯t enough. [Ding! You knocked Gon out, you received three months of training experience.] In a moment, An felt his power increase a little bit. ¡®I have to say, Gon is really an experience package.¡¯ An thought, but he didn¡¯t consider Gon to be a tool. An picked Gon and went back to Mito¡¯s ce. Seeing An, Mito was surprised and delighted. After not seeing him for a while, she found that An grew taller again, and was no longer the boy he once was. His body exuded a faint aura of a powerhouse as well. The next day, while eating breakfast, Gon said: ¡°It seems like I¡¯m still far behind if you can easily knock me out like that.¡± Seeing Gon so down, Anforted him: ¡°Come one, you don¡¯t get strong overnight, training needs time.¡± ¡°I decided! I will train with defeating you as a goal.¡± Gon said firmly. Hearing this, An smiled: ¡°Yes, you can challenge me anytime. I will not hold back and knock you down each time you do.¡± ¡°I¡¯m serious, you just wait.¡± Gon said. Gon was someone to joke around and from that day onward, he regarded An as his target. He still held to his goal of finding his father, the difference is that he wants to be a better hunter than his father, while he wants to defeat An. But in general, whether it was An or Ging, both held an important ce in Gon¡¯s heart. Two dayster, An was about to leave Whale Ind. Before leaving, An went to Gon in the forest and said: ¡°Gon, training alone can¡¯t make you improve quickly, I suggest you go wander the world for experience.¡± Gon thought for a bit and found it reasonable. ¡°If that¡¯s the case, I will go outside, but where should I go?¡± An thought for a bit and said: ¡°You can go to Killua, didn¡¯t Killua go back to the Zoldyck family to trainst time? I think he will also want to go out, so you can train together.¡± Hearing An¡¯s suggestion, Gon said: ¡°You¡¯re right, then I¡¯m going to find Killua.¡± Suddenly, Gon thought of something: ¡°By the way, An, do you want to go find Killua together?¡± ¡°I¡­¡± Seeing An hesitating, Gon said: ¡°An, you just have to take me there and nothing else.¡± ¡°So you don¡¯t Chapter 244: Opening all Doors of the testing gate Chapter 244: Opening all Doors of the testing gate [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! https://twitter/The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// A dayter, An and Gon came to the Dentora region of the Republic of Padokea, where Kukuroo Mountain is. An and Gon took the sightseeing wagon toward Kukuroo mountain, which is a great tourist spot. After getting off the bus, Ana and Gon came to the Door of Trial of the Zoldyck Family. The testing gate is divided into sevenyers. The first gate is around four tons, the second is eight, the third is sixteen, the fourth is thirty-two, the fifth is sixty-four, the sixth is one hundred and twenty-eight, and thest one, the seventh gate, is two hundred and fifty-six tons. Only through opening the gate of trial can you enter the Zoldyck Family. The scary thing about the gate is the guard dog, Mike. It¡¯s a dog that was more than ten meters in height. ¡°You two there, what are you doing, leave quickly.¡± A bald man walked out of the security house, beside the testing gate and yelled at Gon and An. ¡°Uncle guard, Long time no see.¡± Gon grinned. ¡°What?! Oh, it turned out to be you two.¡± The guard recognized Gon and An and was surprised. ¡°Good to see you well, sir.¡± An smiled faintly. An could tell that the guard looked stronger thanst time. ¡°Presumably, you are here to find Master Killua again!¡± The guard asked. An nodded: ¡°Well, we are indeed here to find Killua.¡± ¡°Uncle, Killua is home, right?¡± Gon asked. ¡°Well, yes, thest time Killua came back, he entered through the testing gate.¡± The guard replied. After confirming that Killua was home, An said: ¡°An, let¡¯s go in.¡± ¡°Um.¡± An nodded. ¡°Are you going to push the testing gate?¡± the guard asked. ¡°Of course.¡± An smiled ¡°I remember you opened the fourth gatest time. how many you¡¯re nning to challenge this time?¡± The guard asked curiously. [Ding! Make A Choice] [1: Push open the third testing gate. Reward: Double Rashomon.] [2: Open the seventh Testing Gate. Reward: Nail Punch!] (T/N: Anime: Toriko.) [3: Destroy the testing Gate. Reward: Quintuple Rash¨­mon.] An picked the second option and open all seven Gates. ¡°Uncle, have you ever seen someone who could push through all testing gates?¡± An asked. ¡°I have seen Master Silva and Master Zeno do that before.¡± The guard said. An nodded and smiled: ¡°Then, I will open all of them this time.¡± ¡°What?! Open all the testing gates? Are you serious?¡± The guard was surprised. ¡°Well, I will give it a try,¡± An said. ¡°An let me push it first, I want to see the result of my training.¡± Gon said suddenly. ¡°Well, you can go first.¡± An agreed as he was a little curious about Gon¡¯s power as well. Gon put his hands on the Testing gate ready to push and said: ¡°Last time I opened the third gate using all of my power, this time, I want to open five.¡± Gon released his Nen and strengthened his body to its peak before pushing the gates. The first gate opened, then the second, the third, the fourth, and finally, the fifth gate opened. After reaching his goal, Gon finally stopped and sat on the ground, breathing heavily. Gon managed to open the fifth testing gate, but he consumed too much of his Nen by doing so. ¡°You have improved a lot sincest time,¡± An said. The guard looked at Gon in surprise as he couldn¡¯t imagine someone so young to be able to do this, except for Master Killua himself. ¡°As expected of Master Killua¡¯s friend, he isn¡¯t an ordinary person.¡± The guard whispered. ¡°I will go next then.¡± An walked to the testing gate which was closing slowly after Gon opened the fifth gate. An pushed the first, second, and third gates easily. At the fourth gate, An got serious. When he reached the fifth gate, he started using Nen and opened it before taking advantage of the momentum to push the sixth gate open. Only the seventh gate was left, which was two hundred and fifty-sex tons. An was using his full power and thest gate started rumbling and was finally pushed open. Both Gon and the guard looked in shock with wide-open eyes. ¡°You¡­ Actually managed to open all the testing gates.¡± The guard looked at An as if he was a monster with eyes full of shock. Even Gon felt a little disbelief at An¡¯s power. He suddenly realized something and thought: ¡®Is surpassing An something that can be done?¡¯ Chapter 245 Chapter 245: Guest [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// [Ding! You sessfully opened all the testing gates, and received The Nail punch.] An learned how to use the Nail punch without anyone teaching him. An turned to Gon and said: ¡°Come on, Gon, let¡¯s go find Killua.¡± ¡°Goodbye, uncle guard.¡± After An and Gon walked through the testing gate, the guard returned to his small cottage and picked up amunication device to report An¡¯s arrival. The butlers of the Zoldyck frowned after learning about Gon and An¡¯s arrival. Generally speaking, the Zoldyck family was never happy weing outsiders into the mansion. For uninvited guests, the Zoldyck family would treat them as invaders even. There is only one end to the invader, which is elimination. However, this time, the situation was different. Because the people that came now were An and Gon. This wasn¡¯t the first time they are here and they had a special identity. The Butlers knew that they were friends with An, so it was impossible to treat them as invaders. The head butler, Gotoh, had to report this to the patriarch of the Zoldyck family, Silva, who is Killua¡¯s father. Silva gave special treatment and ordered Gotoh and the butlers to treat them as guests. On the other side, An and Gon were moving toward the mansion. Suddenly, a huge ck shadow rushed out of the woods and blocked their path. The huge shadow was none other than Mike, the guard dog of the Zoldyck family. As a guard dog of the Zoldyck family, Mike was trained to eat all intruders they don¡¯t know, but surprisingly, it didn¡¯t attack Gon or An, because it recognized them. An smiled and raised his hand: ¡°It¡¯s been a long-time Mike. can I trouble you to let us through? We¡¯re going to meet your master.¡± As if understanding An¡¯s words, Mike stepped aside to clear the path for them. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± An naturally didn¡¯t do anything, since Mike let them through willingly. After half an hour, An and Gon stopped as they were surprised. In front of the mansion, a group of butlers and maids were lined up in two rows and they weed them. ¡°Mr. An, Mr. Gon, it¡¯s been a long time,¡± Gotoh said. An smiled as he saw this: ¡°Hehe, are you blocking our way, or weing us?¡± ¡°The Patriarch said you two are friends with Master Killua, so you are wee here.¡± Gotoh pushed his sses and said. An nodded: ¡°Thanks for the wee then.¡± If Gotoh and the rest dared to stop them, An would¡¯ve fought. After all, with his current power, there is nothing here to be afraid of. ¡°Pleasee with me, both of you,¡± Gotoh said. Moving through the courtyard, Gon and An reached the vi with Gotoh¡¯s help. ¡°Master Killua is still training in seclusion, you two can rest here,¡± Gotoh said before making his subordinate bring snacks to An and Gon. ¡°Ok.¡± An stretched and sat down on the sofafortably. Gon was more cautious, although it was the second time he came here, he still felt a little ufortable. ¡°Gon rx,¡± An said. ¡°Do you think Killua wille to see us?¡± Gon asked. An thought for a bit then answered: ¡°He will, after all, we ran from Whale Ind to his house, so he wille to see us.¡± ¡°But uncle Gotoh said that Killua is still in seclusion, I think he wouldn¡¯te out quickly.¡± An smiled: ¡°Then, we will wait until hees out.¡± Gon was surprised: ¡°How long will it take?¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°I don¡¯t know, maybe two or three days, or maybe ten or half a month since no one can tell.¡± While the two were chatting, An suddenly felt someone looking at him. He turned his head and saw a young man in a ck suit, with ck hair and ck eyesing in. it was Killua¡¯s eldest brother, Illumi. Hello Everyone, Chapter 246 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 340! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 246 Chapter 246: Illumi [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Behind Illumi was a fat man wearing a white shirt and holding a potato chip in his hand. It was Killua¡¯s brother Milluki. An smiled faintly: ¡°Unexpectedly, you¡¯re also here, Illumi.¡± Seeing An ignoring him, Milluki said: ¡°Hey, why are you here again? Last time you came uninvited, and even though Father treated you as a guest this time, don¡¯t be too proud of yourself. You¡¯re inside the Zoldyck Family, and you can¡¯t get in and out casually.¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°Don¡¯t say that. As the saying goes, once you do it once, you can do it again. By the way, you¡¯re Killua¡¯s second Brother, right? I heard are good atputer science and games. But sometimes your brain will go offline =.¡± Milluki was looking in triumph when he heard the first bit, but the offlinement angered him: ¡°What do you mean offline? Believe it or not, I will bomb you.¡± An smiled: ¡°I believe you of course. You guys are professional Assassins, no one would doubt your level of professionalism, It¡¯s just that¡­¡± ¡°It¡¯s just that?¡± Milluki asked. An looked at him sharply and said: ¡°Do you think that a mere bomb can kill me? After all, I fought against your grandfather.¡± Milluki remembered what happened when An visitedst time. He witnessed the duel between the two. And Zeno voluntarily surrendered. Although he guessed that the two of them were evenly matched, Zeno still surrendered. Milluki admired his grandfather, and to be able to fight equally with him, An was a monster and he couldn¡¯t afford to offend him. ¡°I was just joking, after all, you¡¯re Grandpa and Father¡¯s guest, I can¡¯t attack you.¡± Seeing Milluki like that, An stepped down and didn¡¯t care about him. At this moment, Illumi looked at An coldly: ¡°I heard from Gotoh that you and Gon are here for Killua?¡± An sneered: ¡°I didn¡¯te for you anyways.¡± To be honest, An didn¡¯t like Illumi from the start Compared to Hisoka¡¯s mood swings, this guy was more dangerous. The danger here isn¡¯t referring to Illumi¡¯s strength but character and psychology. Especially since he is a super Brocon through and through. In addition to taking killing orders, he just wants to control his brother in any way. Therefore, An didn¡¯t like him. Illumi said nkly: ¡°Why are you looking for Killua? Do you want to take him away again?¡± ¡°What about it?¡± An stared at Illumi without any fear. ¡°I don¡¯t agree with you taking Killua away¡­¡± Illumi said. An smiled: ¡°Illumi, you¡¯re just Illumi¡¯s big brother, not his father, whether Killua wants to go with us or not, has nothing to do with you.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t forget where you are, you are in the Zoldyck family mansion, do you think you can take Killua away from me?¡± An sneered: ¡°Hehe, what are you going to do, after all, I¡¯m a guest here.¡± ¡°I will not do anything to you,¡± Illumi said. ¡°Is that so? Didn¡¯t you say that this is your home or something?¡± An sneered and dared Illumi to attack or do anything to him. Illumi understood that An was provoking him and didn¡¯t take the bait. Seeing Illumi so calm, An said: ¡°Ah right, don¡¯t you owe me a favor.¡± Illumi remembered what happened in the Hunter Exam as he still owed An a favor and nodded. ¡°So today you will pay back that favor,¡± An said. ¡°How do you want me to pay you back? Do you want someone dead?¡± Illumi asked. An shook his head: ¡°No, no, I don¡¯t need you to kill anyone.¡± ¡°Then how do you want me to repay that favor?¡± Illumi frowned. An smiled: ¡°It¡¯s very simple. We are here to find Killua, whether he wants to leave with us or not depends on his choice, you can¡¯t interfere with this.¡± Hearing this, Illumi pondered for a while before he said: ¡°I can promise that, but I have one condition.¡± Chapter 247 Chapter 247: Duel [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°What condition?¡± An asked with interest. ¡°I heard that you fought with grandfather before. If you can defeat me, I promise not to interfere with Killua¡¯s choice.¡± [Ding! Make A Choice] [1: ept Illumi¡¯s condition and defeat him with absolute strength. Reward: Hiei¡¯s ck Dragon Wave (You Yu Hakusho)] [2: ept Illumi¡¯s condition and kill him. Reward: ck Spirit Pill.] Although he didn¡¯t like Illumi, An didn¡¯t want to kill him as he is Killua¡¯s big brother. So he had to pick the first choice. He looked at Illumi and sneered: ¡°Good, I will defeat you then.¡± Illumi said expressionlessly: ¡°I admit, you should be a lot stronger than me, so if it¡¯s a fair duel, I may not be your opponent.¡± ¡°Oh? You¡¯re aware of that.¡± An looked at him and smiled: ¡°Then what should we do?¡± Illumi thought for a bit and said: ¡°You can only defend or dodge for the three minutes, if I fail to defeat you in that time, you can attack. Do you ept those rules?¡± An nodded: ¡°Okay, within three minutes, I won¡¯t attack.¡± ¡°Are you that confident?¡± Illumi was surprised. ¡°Yes, wait, you will find out when we fight,¡± An said confidently. ¡°Then, I want to see how strong you are.¡± Illumi was trained since he was young to be a professional Assassin, therefore, he was confident in his strength. ¡°Come on.¡± An hooked his finger in provocation. Illumi didn¡¯t talk nonsense as his figure shed and rushed forward. Facing Illumia¡¯s attack, An abided by the additional rules and only defended and evade the former¡¯s attacks. Those rules benefitted Illumi greatly as he didn¡¯t have to think about defense at all. With those rules, he was confident that he can defeat An within three minutes. An astonishing disy unfolded in the lobby as Illumi disyed various assassination techniques. However, Illumi soon discovered that no matter how he attacked, An could dodge easily. It was as if he could see through his attacks and predict them in advance. As a first-ss assassin, Illumi realized that An¡¯s instincts were very advanced if he could predict his moves. An was using his Observation Haki to predict all of Illumi¡¯s attacks. In the hall, Gon, Milluki, and the housekeeper were watching the battle in surprise. They all thought that Illumi will be able to defeat An within three minutes, but no matter how he attacked, he couldn¡¯tnd a hit on An. An didn¡¯t even need to defend as he dodged all of Illumi¡¯s attacks which proved the difference in their strength. ¡°What¡¯s the matter Illumi, is this all you got?¡± An dodged Illumi¡¯s attack and mocked him. Illumi¡¯s face in a rare urrence seemed angry. Illumi suddenly sent out a few needles which moved toward An like bullets. However, with Observation Haki, An dodged easily. But the needles weren¡¯t ordinary as they were attacked with Nen and controlled by Illumi. Once a needlends, the target would fall under Illumi¡¯s control. Maniption Nen is weird, unpredictable, andes with rules and conditions customized by the user. Therefore, even An didn¡¯t dare look down on Illumi¡¯s Nen ability. At this moment, An sneered: ¡°Illumi, the three minutes are up.¡± In the next second, just when Illumi realized the danger, An¡¯s fist erged in front of Illumi¡¯s eyes. ¡°Nail Fist!¡± An¡¯s fist mmed on Illumi¡¯s body, who countered using Ken to defend his body. Even so, Illumi¡¯s ribs cracked from the force, and under the Nail fist, they broke. In the next second, An punched again and this time, Illumi was sent flying like a broken kite. Hello Everyone, Chapter 248 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 340! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 248 Chapter 248: Tsukuyomi World! [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The hall was silent. Milluki, Gotoh, and the other housekeepers were shocked. ¡°Master Illumi¡­¡± Gotoh was full of cold sweat as he watched Illumi sent flying. ¡°This is the first time I¡¯ve seen Big Brother struggling this much. This An is really strong.¡± Milluki said absentmindedly. The rule of the fight was totally in Illumi¡¯s favor, but An still defeated him. No, it¡¯s not just defeat, Anpletely destroyed Illumi without thetter being able to touch him at all. The power gap was just too wide. An moved toward the downed Illumi and said: ¡°Illumi, is this enough?¡± It took Illumi a while to get up from the ground, but he didn¡¯t answer. An frowned and asked: ¡°Why do you still want to fight?¡± ¡°An, although you have defeated me, I¡¯m not convinced by your power. Therefore, the duel isn¡¯t over yet.¡± Illumi wiped the blood from the corner of his mouth. An¡¯s eyes turned cold and said: ¡°Do you want me to kill you? You should be very clear about the gap of strength between us. So I advise you to give up wisely, otherwise, I won¡¯t be merciful again.¡± ¡°You won¡¯t kill me,¡± Illumi said with confidence. ¡°Oh?¡± An sneered: ¡°Why is that?¡± ¡°The reason is very simple, I¡¯m Killua¡¯s big brother, and you agreed to be Killua¡¯s friend, so you won¡¯t kill me. This is my intuition.¡± ¡°You¡¯re sure?¡± An smiled coldly. Seeing An¡¯s smile, Illumi shuddered. However, if he gave up like this, he would no longer be able to interfere with Killua¡¯s freedom, let alone control him. This isn¡¯t the result Illumi wanted. An seemed to read Illumi¡¯s mind and said: ¡°Illumi, you¡¯re a maniptor-type Nen user, right?¡± ¡°So what?¡± Illumi looked at An, not knowing he was getting at. ¡°You think that by using your needles, you can control Killua like before, right?¡± ¡°What about it?¡± ¡°Hehe, then today, I will let you feel how being controlled by others feels like.¡± An sneered. ¡°You want to control me?¡± Illumi seemed as if he heard something funny. ¡°Yes, you want to control Killua, then I will let you feel what it is like to be controlled by others.¡± ¡°Can you do it, though?¡± Illumi said in doubt as he was confident in his power. ¡°You will see.¡± In the next second, An¡¯s dark eyes suddenly turned into a pair of Mangekyou Sharingan. When Illumi nced at those eyes, he could tell that they were very scary. And suddenly, Illumi found himself in Tsukuyomi. In this world, anything is controlled by the creator, including time. ¡°Where is this?¡± Looking at the blood-red surrounding, Illumi was surprised as he asked. In this ce, he couldn¡¯t feel any aura, nor does he see anyone or anything. He was also surprised to find himself tied to a cross with his hands nailed there. ¡°Illumi, wee to Tsukuyomi.¡± An appeared in front of Illumi looking at him with a smile on his face. ¡°Tsukuyomi¡¯s world?¡± ¡°Yes, this is my Illusion world. The scene you are currently looking at is a space I created.¡± ¡°So this is an illusion? So, I can get rid of it using some pain.¡± Illumi tried to struggle, but unfortunately, he couldn¡¯t move. No way, he had tried to bite his tongue, stimte his pain nerves and remove the illusion in front of him. However, even if he bit his tongue, and felt pain, it still had no effect. He found out that even with pain, he still couldn¡¯t get rid of the illusion. ¡°How is this possible¡­ What¡¯s going on? Isn¡¯t this an illusion?¡± Illumi stared at An and didn¡¯t know how An could do this. ¡°It¡¯s useless, this isn¡¯t an ordinary illusion.¡± ¡°Even if you realize you¡¯re inside it, it¡¯s impossible to get out of my Tsukuyomi.¡± Illumi looked at An¡¯s Mangekyou Sharingan and felt fear. ¡°What do you want?¡± Illumi asked after calming down. An snorted: ¡°as you said before, I won¡¯t kill you, but I will make you suffer. If you give up now and promise not to make any strange moves in the future, I can let you go.¡± Illumi looked at him coldly: ¡°You do whatever you want, but I won¡¯t admit defeat.¡± Seeing that Illumi wasn¡¯t going to change his mind, An stopped talking. A katana appeared in An¡¯s hand from nowhere and thetter started the torture. Hello Everyone, Chapter 249 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 340! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 249 Chapter 249: Power Gap! [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Listen well, in the Tsukuyomi world, I¡¯m the only master. I can control everything, including time and space.¡± An carried the Katana and moved toward the crucified Illumi, then stabbed. Illumi felt the stab and blood filled the wound instantly. He lowered his head with a pale face. He wanted to use Nen to defend, but it was useless. He could feel the sharpness and coldness of the de. This was real. He started wondering if this was really an illusion or reality. ¡®Was I stabbed by a sword or is this just my imagination.¡¯ Doubt filled Illumi¡¯s head. Seeing Illumi¡¯s face, An stabbed again and again. After a while, Illumi¡¯s body was filled with Injuries. These wounds weren¡¯t deep and didn¡¯t hurt any necessary organ, but it was still painful. However, even when he was being tortured, Illumi didn¡¯t let out a sound as he only frowned. ¡°Oh? You¡¯re really an assassin from the Zoldyck family. You¡¯re well trained and your body can endure a lot of pain that can render ordinary people a mess. I admire that, but¡­¡± An sneered: ¡°I¡¯m the one doing the torture here, so it¡¯s different. You will be stabbed for three consecutive days, which means more than 30,000 Stabs. So no matter how strong is your mind, you will suffer in the end.¡± Illumi experienced three days in Tsukuyomi and his body was stabbed 32,453 times in total. Tsukuyomi is the ultimate illusion and an unsolvable one, because no matter how long the illusion stands, only a second will pass in reality. This means that Illumi experienced 3 days of torture in a matter of a second. So everyone watching outside couldn¡¯t tell that Illumi stayed 3 days under torture. As soon as the second passed, Illumi who was standing in front of An fell to the ground. ¡°What happened, Master Illumi?¡± Gotoh stepped forward and helped Illumi up. He saw Illumi¡¯s face pale as if he experienced great pain. ¡°An, what did you do to Illumi?¡± Seeing Illumi so weak, Milluki asked An. An shrugged and said: ¡°Nothing, I just let him feel what being controlled by others is and made him feel the pain from thousands of stabs.¡± ¡°Thousands of stabs?¡± Milluki couldn¡¯t understand what An¡¯s words meant, but he could guess that in a short second, An did something which led to Illumi¡¯s weakness. ¡°Gotoh, take big brother to the infirmary first,¡± Milluki said. ¡°Yes, Master Milluki.¡± Gotoh nodded and took the frail Illumi then left. An didn¡¯t stop them. Illumi experienced Tsukuyomi which could destroy the strongest of minds. It would take him ten to fifteen months to recover. During this time, Killua will definitivelye out. At this time, Illumi wanted to stop Killua from leaving, but he couldn¡¯t do anything now. ¡°Ding! You defeated Illumi. Reward: Hiei¡¯s ck Dragon Wave.¡± An was overjoyed, the reward this time was really good. As far as he knows, the ck Dragon Wave is Hiei¡¯s strongest move in You Yu Hakusho, which let him summon a ck dragon to attack. With this, An had an ultimate move. On the other side, the news of Illumi¡¯s defeat by An quickly spread and finally reached the patriarch of the Zoldyck family, Silva. ¡°Silva, what are you going to do? That An dared to Hurt Illumi, that¡¯s too much.¡± Besides Silva, a woman dressed as a noblewoman gritted her teeth and said. Silva red at her and said coldly: ¡°Kikyo, Shut up!¡± ¡°What? Am I wrong?¡± Kikyo said puzzledly, but her eyes didn¡¯t meet Silva¡¯s as she was scared. Silva stayed silent for a while and said: ¡°An is Killua¡¯s friend, and Illumi has a certain obsession with Killua. This time, When An and Gon came over, Illumi was first to object about Killua leaving. Just now, Gotoh exined to me that An wasn¡¯t the one to initiate the duel and even added a condition which states: An can¡¯t attack in three minutes and can only dodge or defend Illumi¡¯s attacks. Under such a favorable condition, Illumi couldn¡¯t even touch An in all three minutes. With such weakness, it wasn¡¯t a wonder that Illumi would lose. Moreover, Gotoh said that An had a chance to kill Illumi, but he didn¡¯t because An regards Killua as a friend, and since Illumi is Killua¡¯s big brother, he tolerated him for Killua¡¯s sake. If Illumi didn¡¯t go too far, I don¡¯t think would do anything to him either.¡± Hearing Silva¡¯s words, Kikyo froze and said: ¡°You¡­ what do you mean by those words? Illumi is your son. You¡¯re taking an outsider¡¯s side now, if Illumi knows about this, he will be very sad. As Illumi¡¯s mother, I won¡¯t say that you should kill An, but at least teach him a lesson for what he did to Illumi., right?¡± Hearing this, Silva snorted: ¡°even if it was me, I¡¯m not sure that I can beat him. Moreover, once I take action, it will cause An to be more dissatisfied with the Zoldyck family. Although we aren¡¯t afraid of anyone, we don¡¯t need to make an enemy with someone as strong as An. Do you understand?¡± ¡°I¡­¡± Kikyo said nothing, it was the first time that she heard Silva gives such a high evaluation of someone. ¡°Anyways, forget about what happened, and don¡¯t think about revenge,¡± Silva said seriously. ¡°Got it.¡± Kikyo nodded reluctantly. But in her heart, she couldn¡¯t forgive An so easily. After all, Although she didn¡¯t like Illumi that much, he was her son and said son was beaten by an outsider inside her own house. It was naturally impossible for her to leave this matter be. Hello Everyone, Chapter 251 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 340! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 250 Chapter 250: Kalluto¡¯s Request [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// As night fell, An and Gon were enjoying dinner in the lobby of the Zoldyck Mansion. The dinner included pasta, grilled meat, sd, and red wine. The Zoldyck were very hospitable to Gon and An. Milluki was eating with them, along with Killua¡¯s mother, Kikyo, Killua¡¯s brother Kalluto, and Silva, Killua¡¯s father. As for Zeno, he didn¡¯t show up at all. The dinner went harmoniously and the atmosphere wasn¡¯t as serious as An imagined. As for Illumi¡¯s injury, Silva didn¡¯t me An and said that Illumi was the one who proposed the duel and made the rules in his favor but still lost. An was quite impressed by Silva¡¯s mindset. Bringing the head of the family wasn¡¯t for ordinary people after all. In contrast, Kikyo was a little dissatisfied with An¡¯s attitude, she verbally addressed An several times at the table, but An casually responded to her or even ignored her. After the dinner, under Gotoh¡¯s arrangement, a dark-skinned housekeeper came to An and Gon. ¡°Mr. An, Mr. Gon, I¡¯m a trainee butler from the Zoldyck family. My name is Canary, please follow me.¡± An and Gon followed Canary to the second floor. ¡°This vige is dedicated to guests, there are four rooms here. Please choose one to stay in.¡± Canary said. An chose the room with the mountain view, and Gon picked the one beside his. Since Killua still didn¡¯te out of seclusion, An and Gon temporarily lived in the Zoldyck family mansion. After staying for a few days, An wandered around the mansion, because he couldn¡¯t wait for Killua toe out and nned to find somewhere to train. After hearing An¡¯s n, Silva gave An a good ce to train. ¡°There is a mountain range filled with monsters, strong ones. It¡¯s a good ce to train.¡± ¡°Strong monster? Sounds good.¡± An decided to go. Before leaving, An found Gon and incited him to tag along, but Gon decline, even though he wanted to go very much, he decided to wait for Killua toe out. The next morning, An decided to head toward the Thousand Mountain range. However, when he walked out of the testing gate, he saw a boy in a purple kimono waiting. It was Kalluto, Killua¡¯s younger brother. ¡°Why are you here?¡± An was curious. ¡°I heard that you¡¯re going to train in the Thousand mountain range,¡± Kalluto said. ¡°Yeah.¡± An nodded. ¡°I want to go with you.¡± Kalluto directly said. An was slightly surprised: ¡°Why do you want to go with me?¡± ¡°Dad said that you¡¯re very strong, and he wanted me to train with you,¡± Kalluto exined. ¡°I see.¡± An nodded, but he didn¡¯t think that Silva will say that. Seeing An thinking, Kalluto said: ¡°I have been to that mountain range before, and I know the way.¡± Hearing this, An didn¡¯t answer. To be honest, he didn¡¯t want to take Kalluto with him. Seeing this, Kalluto became slightly worried and said: ¡°If you take me with you, I will call you teacher.¡± [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Agree to Kalluto¡¯s request and take him to train together. Reward: Conjuration Nen Beast: Flying Dragon.] [2: Refuse Kalluto¡¯s request. Reward: 1,000 Nen.] An thought for a bit and picked the first option. He looked at Kalluto and said: ¡°I have two questions; you have to answer truthfully.¡± ¡°Well, you can ask.¡± ¡°The first question: Have you joined the Gen¡¯ei Ryudan?¡± Kalluto shook his head: ¡°I¡¯ve heard about the organization, but I haven¡¯t joined, why do you ask?¡± ¡°It¡¯s nothing, just a hunch that you may have joined or may join them in the future.¡± Kalluto sneered: ¡°They are a bunch of thieves, I won¡¯t join that kind of organization.¡± An smiled and then said: ¡°The second question: Are you a man or a woman?¡± Hearing this, Kalluto was stunned for a moment, then he looked at An with puzzlement and said: ¡°What kind of strange question is that?¡± ¡°Answer me!¡± An said. Kalluto¡¯s expression changed as he didn¡¯t want to answer. But after a while, he reluctantly said: ¡°My identity is a male, but I¡¯m a female.¡± ¡°So you¡¯re a woman disguised as a man?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, no one except for my family knows this.¡± An nodded without saying anything else. ¡°Now that I answered your questions, are you going to take me with you?¡± Kalluto looked at him expectantly. An nodded: ¡°Yes.¡± As An answered, he received his reward from the system. In the next second, he activated his new ability, Flying Dragon. Hello Everyone, Chapter 251 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 340! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 251 Chapter 251: Mountain Range [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// An¡¯s new ability was both conjuration, maniption, and Emission. He can change his Nen to look like a dragon and manipte it. A golden dragon materialized in front of An as his Nen surged out of his body. The best thing about the dragon was its ability to fly. The Dragon¡¯s body was fifteen meters long with a two-meter long head, so I could carry two people easily. ¡°This ability is simr to Grand Father¡¯s Dragon Head,¡± Kalluto said. An smiled faintly as he thought of Zeno¡¯s ability. The difference between the two is that the Flying Dragon is a Nen Beast, while Zeno was just using maniption of Nen. Of course, Zeno could create a Nen beast, but the Dragon Head wasn¡¯t a Nen Beast. ¡°Go to the thousand mountain range!¡± An gave his orders, and the Dragon flew. Under Kalluto¡¯s guidance, they reached the Mountain range in thirty minutes. Compared to Kukuroo mountain which is 4,000 meters above sea level, the mountain range was way bigger. ¡°This ce is the Bins Mountain in the thousand mountain range, it¡¯s about 2,800 meters above sea level. The beasts here are Sabertooth tigers and ck panthers.¡± Kalluto exined.An nodded and dismissed his Nen beast then walked up the mountain. ¡°How are we going to train here?¡± ¡°I just agreed to let you follow me, but I didn¡¯t say I will train you.¡± Hearing this, Kalluto became a little annoyed and said: ¡°You are obviously tricking me.¡± ¡°So what? You said that as long as I brought you here, you will call me teacher. But looking at your attitude, it¡¯s clear that you don¡¯t think of me as a teacher.¡± ¡°Teacher An, please help me train.¡± [Ding! Make A Choice] [1: ept Kalluto¡¯s request and help her train. Reward: Armament Haki: Internal Destruction.] [2: Reject Kalluto¡¯s request. Reward: 3,000 Nen] An¡¯s eyes lit up, although he knew Armament Haki, he still didn¡¯t know how to use emission. And as far as he knows, Emission allowed him to hit the target without directly touching them which is simr to sending a shockwave. All in all, if he masters it, he will be stronger An looked at Kalluto and said: ¡°Well, I will train you.¡± ¡°Thank you, teacher.¡± Kalluto didn¡¯t hide her joy, after all, An¡¯s power was obvious. ¡°Let¡¯s start training, teacher.¡± Kalluto couldn¡¯t wait. An nodded and then made a hand sign: ¡°Shadow Clone!¡± ¡°Clone?¡± Seeing An¡¯s shadow clone, Kalluto¡¯s eyes opened. Kalluto thought that the clone was created by Nen, but it was actually a shadow clone created by chakra. ¡°Kalluto, from now on, I will train you with my clone.¡± Hearing this, Kalluto was a little disappointed and said: ¡°Are you just using a clone to fool me?¡± An said: ¡°Hm, don¡¯t underestimate my Clone, it has half of my power.¡± ¡°I will work hard,¡± Kalluto said and lowered her head. ¡°Then I will go ahead, you can stay here and slowly train.¡± After that, An left the current mountain and headed toward the next one, while Kalluto stayed with the clone. After agreeing to Kalluto¡¯s request, An directly received the reward from the system. Although he was only training her using a clone, it was still training her, as the system didn¡¯t specifically say he can¡¯t use one. With this, An can focus on his own training while his clone train Kalluto. The next mountain was 5,200 Meters above sea level and was the highest mountain in the mountain range. This was also the most dangerous mountain here. An decided to master Internal Destruction of the Armament Haki here and the beast on the mountain were his test subjects. A giant beast appeared in front of An suddenly, but An raised his hand without panicking and sted it with a shockwave. Suddenly, the beast was knocked out, and his eyes rolled back, dying in one blow. ¡°It¡¯s unexpectedly strong.¡± Unlike normal Haki, internal Destruction is far stronger and more effective. Moreover, he felt that the longer he trained the stronger it will grow. It can also be used in other ways. Hello Everyone, Chapter 253 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 345! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 252 Chapter 252: Going to Heaven¡¯s Arena [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Half a monthter, A booming sound was heard on top of a mountain in the mountain range. In the next second, the top of the mountain copsed and rubble flew in all directions. Amidst the rubble, one person walked out. An finished his training after half a month. He raised his Armament Haki to a new level. The entire mountain was bombarded by An, his power was already at a level that matched Garp. ¡°I don¡¯t know what happened to Kalluto.¡± An made a seal and removed the Shadow Clone. Suddenly, the Shadow clone¡¯s memories returned to him and he knew where Kalluto was current at. ¡°Nen Beast: Flying Dragon.¡± A huge Golden Dragon Materialized in front of An as he jumped atop of it. The dragon soared into the sky toward Kalluto. Seeing An appear, kalluto was puzzled: ¡°are you Teacher, or his clone?¡± ¡°I have removed the clone just now, so of course, I¡¯m your teacher.¡± Hearing this, Kalluto realized something: ¡°Is the training going to end?¡± ¡°Well, almost,¡± An said. ¡°That¡¯s it¡­¡± Kalluto was reluctant and didn¡¯t want her training to end here. But she could do nothing if An wanted to go back. From the Clone¡¯s memories, An learned that Kalluto Trained in Nen in the past half a month. Although she was only ten years old, she has been in contract with Nen since young. Kalluto mastered the basics of Nen, and her Nen grew stronger as she mastered some advanced techniques. ¡°Let¡¯s go back,¡± An said. After being away for half a month, he estimated that Killua should be out of seclusion. ¡°Teacher, thank you for training me in the past half a month.¡± Kalluto was satisfied with An¡¯s teaching and respected him. She knew thatpared to half a month ago, she was significantly stronger and all of it was thanks to An¡¯s training. If An didn¡¯t teach her, she wouldn¡¯t improve as much in just half a month. After returning to the Zoldyck family, Kalluto and An went directly to see Silva. Afterward, An asked about Killua and Gon. ording to Silva, Killua already left with Gon in the past two days. ¡°Gon and Killua seemed to go to the Heaven¡¯s Arena, if you want to see them, you can go there.¡± That night, Silva hosted a banquet to thank An for training Kalluto. The next morning, An walked out of the testing gate, preparing to leave. However, at the door, An saw Kalluto waiting there. ¡°Do you want to go with me?¡± An frowned and asked. ¡°Teacher is really smart.¡± Kallutoughed. An nced at her: ¡°The training is over, why are you still calling me teacher.¡± ¡°There is a saying: a teacher for a day, a father for life. Teacher, you will always be my teacher.¡± Kalluto said sincerely. An said coldly: ¡°I won¡¯t buy that nonsense.¡± Upon seeing this, Kalluto kneeled down and begged An.¡± ¡°Please, Teacher, take me out with you to train.¡± Kalluto looked at An with expectation. An was about to refuse, but he heard the system once again. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: ept Kalluto¡¯s request and take her out with you to train. Reward: Specialist ability: Scarecrow.] [2: Reject Kalluto¡¯s request. Reward: 3,000 Nen] For the sake of the reward, An had to agree to take Kalluto with him. ¡°Listen, although I will agree to take you with me, you must obey everything I say, otherwise, you will go back.¡± ¡°Yes, I will listen to Teacher¡¯s words, and never disobey any order.¡± An nodded. At least she was sincere and humble. He didn¡¯t think that Kalluto would dare to disobey him after knowing how strong he was. ¡°By the way, teacher, where are we going now?¡± On the way, Kalluto asked. ¡°To the Heaven¡¯s Arena,¡± An said. ¡°Your brother, Killua, and Gon, went there, so let¡¯s go see them.¡± Kalluto raised her head and said: ¡°Heaven¡¯s Arena? I heard that it is a world-famous paradise for fighters.¡± A dayter, An and Kalluto arrived at The Heaven¡¯s Arena, on top of the Flying Dragon. ¡°Teacher, have you been to The Heaven¡¯s Arena before?¡± Looking at the line of people waiting to register in the lobby, Kalluto turned her head and asked. ¡°Well, of course, I have been here before,¡± An said. ¡°It looks like a lot of people are here, and some of them are amazing,¡± Kalluto said. ¡°You go register first, after that, you start from the first floor. This is your first stop for training.¡± An said. ¡°I understand.¡± Kalluto nodded. After an hour of queuing, Kalluto sessfully registered and became a fighter in The Heaven¡¯s Arena. Hello Everyone, Chapter 253 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Allied Force) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 345! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 253 Chapter 253: Game [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The Heaven¡¯s Arena has 251 floors, and was 991 meters high, making it the fourth tallest building in the world. The weak had no chance of survival in this ce. The rules stated that if someone registered for the first time, he or she needs to start from the first level. Outside the first floor¡¯s arena, An patted Kalluto on the shoulders and said: ¡°Listen well, Kalluto, since you want to follow me to train, then you have to meet my standards, okay?¡± ¡°I see, please tell me, Teacher.¡± Kalluto was curious about the standards An talked about. ¡°Remember, from now on, I want you to reach the 200th floor without using Nen, only physical strength. Can you do that?¡± ¡°I will abide by this rule and reach the 200th floor without using Nen.¡± Hearing Kalluto¡¯s assurance, An nodded: ¡°Then, I will go to the 200th floor and wait for you there first, I hope you don¡¯t let me down.¡± After saying this, An took the elevator toward the 200th floor. Kalluto entered the arena where 16 fighting rings were present for contestants. ording to the rules; all contestants will first test themselves on the first floor then the referee will decide which floor they should ascend. Kalluto¡¯s first match was against Hercules. He won several national championships in a row and was known as the Seven Champion. Like Kalluto, this is Hercules¡¯ first time here. Around the arena, the Seven Champion¡¯s fans were cheering while looking at Kalluto in sympathy. After all, a little kid is going to fight Hercules, even if the kid was strong, he can¡¯t win. Because Kalluto was restricted and can¡¯t use Nen under the 200th floor, he could only fight with physical strength and skills. Although he had received professional Assassination Training as a child from the Zoldyck family, Kalluto was only ten currently. When An restricted the usage of Nen, it was impossible for her to kill Hercules in one shot. ¡°Interesting, I didn¡¯t expect to encounter such a strong foe in the first game. The Heaven¡¯s arena is really something.¡± Kalluto and Hercules started fighting. After a fierce fight, Kalluto finally wounded his opponent using an assassination technique and won the fight. ¡°You¡¯re good; you can advance directly to the 50th floor.¡± The referee held the promotion ticket which allowed Kalluto¡¯s entry to the 50th floor. After that, Kalluto participated in the second game and sessfully advanced again. ording to the rules, each advancement before the 200th floor was an increment of 10. So each time, Kalluto would jump 10 or more floors after one fight. With Kalluto¡¯s power, reaching the 200th floor without using Nen won¡¯t be too hard, it will just take time. It may take a week or a month, but in the end, Kalluto can reach the 200th floor. All in all, this is a kind of training for Kalluto anyways. At this time, An quickly found Gon and Killua. After the two went through their training, they improved greatly. With their current power, they had the qualification to attack and win against floor masters. They already fought 7 matches without losing a single one. ording to the rules, they needed another three games to win and they can challenge a floor master. During this time, An took his time and fought a few matches. Since he was already a floor master and was famous, the matches he participated in were all high leveled. It¡¯s a pity for his opponents since if they weren¡¯t fighting him, they had a chance to actually be floor masters themselves. On the other hand, Kalluto managed to reach the 200th floor after a month. When Kalluto reached the 200th floor, An directly appeared in front of him. ¡°Teacher, long time no see,¡± Kalluto said full of joy. An nodded. ¡°Teacher, I obeyed your rule and fought without using Nen till I reach the 200th floor.¡± ¡°Mm, I know.¡± An nodded without doubting Kalluto even a little. ¡°Teacher, what should I do now?¡± Kalluto asked. ¡°After reaching the 200th floor, you should be stronger now. Release your Nen and let me see how strong you¡¯ve be.¡± ¡°Yes, teacher.¡± Kalluto directly released her Nen which exploded out of her body. An nodded: ¡°Yes, you have passed the first phase of training. Now, I will teach you the advanced Nen Applications, first is Gyo.¡± Hello Everyone, Chapter 255 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 350! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 254 Chapter 254: Challenge [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// In the room, An exined to Kalluto: ¡°Gyo is an advance application of Nen, it works by concentrating Nen on a certain part of the body, for example the eyes, which allows you to see Nen even if it was hidden by [In}.¡± Hearing this Kalluto asked curiously: ¡°[In], What does it do?¡± ¡°[In] is Zetsu¡¯s advanced Nen Application, which can hide Nen even when it leaves the body.¡± ¡°Hide it outside the body?¡± ¡°To put it simply, it hides your Nen from others. And to see an opponents Nen, you need Gyo.¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t expect that there is still so much I don¡¯t know about Nen.¡± Kalluto said. ¡°I will demonstrate it now.¡± An said. ¡°Ok.¡± Kalluto nodded. An activated [In] and said: ¡°Keep you eyes open, can you see my Nen?¡± An asked. Kalluto looked closely but didn¡¯t see anything and shook her head: ¡°I don¡¯t see anything.¡± ¡°Then, try attacking me with your Nen.¡± An said. ¡°Attacking teacher? Is it really ok to do that?¡± Kalluto felt that it was rude to attack her teacher and couldn¡¯t agree. An smiled faintly: ¡°It¡¯s okay, do you think that you can hurt me?¡± ¡°Okay, here Ie.¡± Kalluto didn¡¯t hesitate again and sent a palm strike toward An. The next second, Kalluto felt that she hit a piece of armor and her strike didn¡¯t reach An. ¡°This is¡­¡± Although she couldn¡¯t see An¡¯s Nen, Kalluto could feel it around An¡¯s body with her palm. An smiled faintly: ¡°Yes, this is [In]. I hid my Nen so you can¡¯t see it, but it is still wrapping around my body.¡± ¡°Awesome!¡± Kalluto eximed. ¡°Remember, in a Nen battle, all masters would use [In], therefore, it¡¯s necessary to learn Gyo.¡± ¡°I see.¡± Kalluto nodded. ¡°Listen well, I will give you week. If you can¡¯t learn Gyo by that time, then I will send you back to your family.¡± ¡°I will definitively learn it in a week.¡± Kalluto quickly promised as she didn¡¯t want to go back just like that. At this time, Gon and Killua won ten consecutive matches and were ready to fight a floor master. Each floor from the 221st to the 250th is owned by a floor master, which means there are 30 floor master and An is one of them. If Gon and Killua wanted to be Floor masters themselves, they must challenge two floor masters. Only by defeating a floor master can they take his ce. Under An¡¯s suggestion, Gon and Killua decided to challenge 29 of the floor masters, only leaving An. Of course, it¡¯s impossible for all of the Floor masters to be present in the Heaven¡¯s Arena. Quite a few of them were busy and had no time to ept the challenge. Currently, there are 12 floor masters, including An, which leaves 11 floor masters, but only five were willing to ept the challenge. However, Gon and Killua needed only one floor master, so each will fight one and the other three won¡¯t take part in the matches. However, these Floor Masters refused to just leave Gon and Killua go just like that. They believed that since Gon and Killua dared to challenge them, they should be prepared to fight. No matter what other said, the floor masters didn¡¯t want to back down, which troubled Gon and Killua. At this time, An just happened to be fre and said that he will take them on himself. The floor masters heard of An¡¯s name and new that he is a floor master like them and he was strong. But they thought that no matter how good he is, he won¡¯t be able to fight three of them at the same time. On the day of the matches, the building was bustling as peoplee from everywhere to see the fights. On the ring, An was already in ce. Opposite to him stood four differently dressed men, they were the 221st, 230th, 236th, and 241st floors masters. An was calmed even when facing them without feeling any pressure. At this moment, the system¡¯s sound echoed in An¡¯s head. [Ding! Make A Choice] [1: Defeat the three Floor Master. Reward: Enhancement type Nen ability: Big Bang Impact.] [2: Kill the three floor masters. Reward: Specialist Type Nen ability: Dposition.] ¡®Big Bang Impact? Isn¡¯t that Uvogin¡¯s ability?¡¯ An was slightly surprised. Although Uvogin¡¯s ability was strong, with An¡¯s current power, it¡¯s not helpful. Therefore, he chose the second option as he preferred that reward. He is very interested in the specialist¡¯s ability. Hello Everyone, Chapter 255 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 350! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 54! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 255 Chapter 255: Rule [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The rules of The Heaven¡¯s Arena prevented more than a one-on-one fight. However, this wasn¡¯t an ordinary match, but a Floor Masters¡¯ battle. Therefore, the rules can be changed. ¡°How do you want to fight?¡± The 221st Floor master stared sharply at An and asked. ¡°Because we have the number advantage, people will mock us if we win due to it, and we don¡¯t want to bully you, so you can choose the rules.¡± The 230th-floor master said. The other floor masters had no problem with this. After all, they were quite confident in defeating An with their numbers. No matter how An fights, it is impossible to win against them all. Therefore, they let An decide the rules. As long as he didn¡¯t choose something excessive, they will agree. Of course, this seemingly magnanimous behavior was due to their confidence in winning the match. In their eyes, An won¡¯t win no matter what kind of rule he made. An looked at the four of them and smiled: ¡°Since I¡¯m allowed to make the rules, then in this game, there is no restriction, nothing matters, it will be a life and deathmatch, what do you think?¡± Upon hearing this, the four of them sneered. ¡°Everything goes as long as you win, and a life and death match at that? Interesting.¡± ¡°In other words, you want to fight to the death with the four of us, until you fall or we do?¡± An nodded: ¡°In this game, only one side will walk off the ring, the loser will end up in the morgue. Will you ept those rules?¡± ¡°Haha, interesting, I have to say, you¡¯re crazy.¡± The four were surprised by An. A deathmatch was to their advantage in the end, so they didn¡¯t object. They didn¡¯t think that An had the power to actually kill the four of them. An stared sharply at the four and said calmly: ¡°A piece of advice, you four can have a shot first before I kill you one by one. It¡¯s best if you show your best skills right from the start. Otherwise, you will regret not doing so.¡± Hearing An¡¯s advice, the four Floor Masters became gloomy. ¡°What an arrogant guy.¡± ¡°You¡¯re alone, and you think you can beat the four of us.¡± An sneered: ¡°Try it and you will know.¡± The fight was about to start. The floor masters surrounded An and started their attacks. An didn¡¯t want to end the match quickly, so he held back and fought them. Bang! Bang! Bang! All of a sudden, the five figures on the ring flew back and forth with their auras colliding. In terms of physical ability, those four were as strong as Kastro. However, even fighting four to one, An was still rxed. The four Floor Masters quickly realized that An was strong and exceeded their estimations. They decided to go all out to ensure that An is the one who will lose in the end. Faced with the full power of the floor masters, An got a little serious. Of course, he was only a little serious with physical skills, he still didn¡¯t use the stronger abilities and skills. The floor masters decided to use Nen. The floor master of the 221st floor used his ability first. He was an enhancer and the most powerful of the four masters. His fighting style is simple, using his hands as a weapon and he was good at closebat. His Nen ability can greatly increase his power in a short time, which he called explosive mode. He canst 3 minutes in this mode and his power increases 3 times. An wasn¡¯t surprised by this at all, instead, he expected it. After all, he faced many enhancers before and knew that their style may seem different but in the end, it was straightforward with a lot of destruction involved. Right now, this explosive mode of the 221st Floor¡¯s master was dangerous for anyone else, but unfortunately, he was facing An. Therefore, even with triple power, it wasn¡¯t enough to defeat An. Once the three minutes passed, the power boost ended. As soon as it did, An killed him with his lightning mode and then turned back. Seeing this, the floor masters became serious. An¡¯s speed was so fast, they could react at all. Hello Everyone, Chapter 256 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 350! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 66! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 256 Chapter 256: Promotion [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Bastard!¡± Seeing the Floor master die from a single move in An¡¯s hands, the 230th Floor¡¯s master rushed angrily and activated his Nen ability. Suddenly a big sword appeared in his hand and it burst into mes instantly. The Nen used to conjure the sword had a fire property added to it, making the de lit on fire. An didn¡¯t move and decisively activated his Ice Fruit power countering the me and freezing the de instantly. ¡°What?¡± Seeing this, the 230th floor¡¯s master cried in shock. An didn¡¯t let this chance go and attacked. Ice Age! Immediately, the entire arena froze and the three-floor masters turned into ice sculptures. An broke the sculptures directly without waiting. [Ding! You killed four Floor Masters andpleted the task. You received a reward: Specialist Nen ability: Dpose.] Through dposition, the attribute or abilities of the target can be obtained. An was extremely satisfied with this ability. However, this Ability had its limits as well, as not all things can be dposed. Moreover, even if he sessfully dposed something, the power he will receive will be limited. On the other side, Killua and Gon¡¯s matches were raging like fire. After An finished his game, he watched the two of them at the same time on TV. The two of thempeted at the same time, Gon¡¯s opponent was the 229th-floor master, he was also an enhancer like Gon. Gon¡¯s ability, the Jajanken, has improved very much in thest training he went through on Whale ind. After a fierce fight, Gon finally defeated his opponent and became the floor Master of the 229th floor. Killua¡¯s opponent was the 238th-floor master, who was an emitter. At this time, Killua mastered his transmutation ability and can change his Nen into electric current easily and with it, he developed a series of moves, such as lightning palm, thunderbolt, and whirlwind. Killua defeated his opponent without any surprise there and reced him as the 238th-floor master. Since An killed four Floor Masters, he was made the 250th-floor master while he was the floor master of the 249th floor before. The floor master of the 250th floor was angry at being reced and challenged An to take back his ce. An was naturally not afraid of him, and after three days, the match between the two started. This floor master is called Abyss, he waspletely covered in ck and only his eyes could be seen. Both Gon and Killua were at the stands watching the match. In addition to them, several floor masters also came to watch the fight. After all, this was a match between two of the strongest in The Heaven¡¯s Arena. The audience exceeded 10,000 on-site and of site, more than 100,000 viewers off-site. The battle was highly anticipated. Abyss just wanted to defeat An and regain his ce on the 250th floor. As for An, he won¡¯t just let go of his status, but he also wanted to see how strong Abyss was. Above the ring, Abyss activated his Nen. Immediately, arge amount of ck mist gashed out of his body. In the blink of an eye, the ck mist covered the entire arena and enveloped An as well. For a while, the audience could see nothing of the battle on the stage. On the ring, An who was shrouded in ck mist was also unable to see anything with his eyes. As for Abyss, he took advantage of this and waited for an opportunity tounch a surprise attack at An. An didn¡¯t move at all, although he can¡¯t see with his eyes, it didn¡¯t mean he can¡¯t see where Abyss was. However, An wasn¡¯t in a hurry, he quietly used his Observation Haki. In an instant, he locked into Abyss. ¡°El Thor!¡± An opened his hand and a bolt of lightning mmed into the abyss¡¯s body. Abyss screamed as the ck mist disappeared. The power of the Rumble fruit already bombarded him without giving him a chance to attack. Hello Everyone, Chapter 257 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 350! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 69! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 257 Chapter 257: Netero¡¯s Phone Call [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Two dayster, Kalluto found An and said: ¡°Teacher, I have learned Gyo as you asked.¡± An smiled and said: ¡°So, now I will give you a second training goal.¡± ¡°What is the new goal?¡± ¡°In a month, win at least three games on the 200th floor.¡± ¡°I see, I will go arrange for a match now.¡± ¡°I will apany you.¡± Apanied by An, Kalluto arrived at the registration desk and arranged a match. After registering for the game, An took Kalluto and went to Killua¡¯s floor, the 238th floor. Killua, who became the floor master, had arge luxurious guest room and arge training room. Seeing An walking with Kalluto, Killua was surprised: ¡°Kalluto? Why are you here?¡± ¡°I brought him here. No, to be precise, he asked me to bring him here.¡± An exined. Killua nodded: ¡°So, you are training with An now?¡± ¡°Well, yes, please give me some advice in the future, brother,¡± Kalluto said. ¡°I really got goosebumps when I heard you call me brother.¡± Killua shrugged. In the Zoldyck Family, the sibling wasn¡¯t that intimate with each other. If you want to talk about who¡¯s his closest sibling, Killua would say it was Alluka. Next woulde to Milluki, and then Kalluto, with Illumiingst. ¡°Brother, let¡¯s fight,¡± Kalluto said suddenly. ¡°Fight me? Why?¡± Killua was puzzled. ¡°I want to see the power gap between us,¡± Kalluto exined. Hearing this, Killua looked at An and asked: ¡°There shouldn¡¯t be a problem, right?¡± ¡°Yes, You two canpete however you want, I have no objection.¡± With An¡¯s consent, Killua looked at Kalluto and said: ¡°Well, let¡¯s go.¡± ¡°I will do my best,¡± Kalluto said seriously. The two arrived in the center of the training area, with An being the referee of this match. After a fierce fight, the result was within An¡¯s expectation, as Kalluto unsurprisingly lost to Killua. ¡°Brother, you are much stronger than before.¡± Although Kalluto lost, she felt that the battle gave her a good experience. ¡°I have gone through a very hard training course to achieve my current power. Although you lost, Kalluto, sooner orter you will be like me and even stronger.¡± Killua said. ¡°Well, I will train hard and catch up with you as soon as possible,¡± Kalluto promised. The next day, while Kalluto was participating in the match, An received a phone call. The person who called him was Netero, who only said one sentence. The location of the Ant King has been found. After Kalluto¡¯s game was over, An talked with her: ¡°I have something that I need to do, during this time, you should stay in the Heaven¡¯s Arena and train hard.¡± Although Kalluto didn¡¯t want An to leave, she had to listen to his words and stay here. After that, An found Killua and Gon again. ¡°Listen you two, I¡¯m going to do something big this time, do you want toe with me?¡± Upon hearing this, the two of them asked in unison: ¡°What¡¯s this big thing?¡± ¡°The location of the Ant King has been found, I¡¯m going to ask chairman Netero to fight with the Ant King, what do you think? Is it a big deal?¡± ¡°Asking to fight the Ant King? That¡¯s a super big deal!¡± ¡°Can you really take us there?¡± Gon asked. ¡°Of course, your power has improved greatly and it¡¯s time for some realbat training. Your task will be killing the king¡¯s subordinates.¡± ¡°Will you fight the Ant King yourself?¡± Killua asked. ¡°The Chairman and I will take responsibility for that,¡± An said. ¡°Then let go.¡± Gon couldn¡¯t wait. ¡°Well¡­¡± An nodded and activated his Flying Dragon. In the next second, the golden Dragon appeared in front of them. ¡°That¡¯s just like Grandpa¡¯s dragon, it can fly right?¡± Killua asked. An nodded: ¡°Well, let¡¯s hurry to the hunter association.¡± After more than half a day of flying with Gon and Killua on the flying dragon, An finally reached the headquarter of the hunter association. Let by Mr. Bean, Netero¡¯s secretary, all of them went to Netero¡¯s office. Netero was reviewing some documents and seeing An bringing Gon and Killua, he was a little surprised: ¡°Oh? You two are here as well? This old man remembers you, you¡¯re Killua, and you¡¯re Gon, right?¡± It¡¯s not the first time Gon and Killua saw Netero, so they weren¡¯t surprised. ¡°Hello, Grandpa chairman.¡± Gon took the initiative to greet Netero. Killua had his attitude and wasn¡¯t respectful at all as he spoke: ¡°Hi, old man, it¡¯s been a long time.¡± ¡°Haha, funny little kids.¡± Netero was amused by the names those two gave him ¡°Chairman, I will bring those two with me. You won¡¯t get angry, will you?¡± An asked. ¡°Hehe, this old man isn¡¯t that stingy.¡± Netero grinned. ¡°Grandpa Chairman, we are here to help.¡± Gon said. ¡°Yes, old man, when we were in the NGL, we followed Kite to fight the Chimera Ants, we have some experience in that area. Although we went back because we weren¡¯t strong enough, we trained a lot and became a lot stronger now, so we can help.¡± Killua said. An also said: ¡°chairman, the two of them are indeed stronger now. If you don¡¯t believe me, you can check their current strength.¡± Hearing this, Netero¡¯s eyes squinted and carefully looked at Gon and Killua. Hello Everyone, Chapter 259 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 350! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 69! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 258 Chapter 258: Departure [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Netero looked at Gon and Killua intently and said: ¡°If you want to follow An, this old man needs to test your power¡± Hearing this Gon and Killua nodded at the same time and said: ¡°No problem.¡± ¡°Now, release your Nen and let me see how far have you got in your training,¡± Netero ordered. Gon and Killua looked at each other and then released their Nen in a horse stance. Immediately, their Nen burst out of their body like mes. Netero smiled slightly and said: ¡°Yes, it seems like you two have indeed be stronger. From your Nen, I can feel your vitality. The vitality symbolizes youth, something this old mancks.¡± ¡°Yes, after all, you¡¯re over a hundred years old already,¡± Killuamented. ¡°Chairman, now that you¡¯ve seen our power, can we follow along?¡± Gon asked with expectation. ¡°Since you want to tag along, then you cane.¡± Netero agreed. Seeing Netero agreeing, An said: ¡°Chairman, it shouldn¡¯t be toote, so let¡¯s go now.¡± Netero nodded and said: ¡°Well, The airship should be prepared outside, let¡¯s take it and go.¡± ¡°Good.¡± An agreed. Originally, he intended to conjure the flying dragon directly, but since there is an airship, that¡¯s better. On the airship, An said: ¡°Chairman, where is the Ant King right now?¡± Netero replied: ¡°ording to reports from Kite and Morel, the Ant King is in a ce called Republic of East Gorteau.¡± ¡°Republic of East Gorteau?¡± Netero said: ¡°It¡¯s a small country, its leader is named Ming Jol-it. ording to our investigations, Gorteau¡¯s army waspletely wiped out, even itsmander, Ming Jol-it, is dead. The Ant King is in charge of that ce right now.¡± Hearing this, An frowned slightly: ¡°It seems that the Chimera Ants that were almost eliminated by me in the NGL were revived again under the leadership of the Ant King. I don¡¯t know how many they have right now or how far they multiplied.¡± ¡°This time, we must eliminate them,¡± Netero said. After more than ten hours of flying, An and his team arrived at their destination. An, Netero, Gon, and Killua, descended from the airship. ¡°Where are we?¡± Killua asked after looking around. ¡°This is the forest at the border of the republic of east Gorteau,¡± Netero replied. ¡°Where are Kite and the others right now?¡± Gon asked. Netero took out a map and handed it to An and said: ¡°This is Gorteau¡¯s map, Kite and the others are currently hiding here.¡± Netero pointed at a town on the map. ¡°In that case, we should rush over and join them,¡± Killua said. An looked at the map and said: ¡°There are two routes from here to that town, one is from the mountain, and the other is following this river. If we take the mountain¡¯s road, we must pass through various towns on the way. The entire trip is about 350 Kilometers, if we walk, we¡¯ll need two days to get there. If we speed up, we can cover the distance in a day, and going at full speed, it will take half a day.¡± Netero said: ¡°Let¡¯s take the mountain road, let speed up a little and try to get there by tomorrow night.¡± ¡°Then again, why don¡¯t we just go there with the airship?¡± Gon asked in confusion. ¡°Kite reported that the Chimera Ants controlled most of the country, if we use the airship, we will be spotted easily. Therefore, we need to take this path ourselves as to not draw the enemy¡¯s attention to us.¡± Gon nodded and stopped asking. An said: ¡°Then, let¡¯s set off now, I will take the lead.¡± The group of four started moving toward their destination. ¡°When passing through any urban areas, if there are Chimera Ant¡¯s Nest, we destroy them as quickly as possible,¡± An said. Netero replied: ¡°For me to fight the ant king, I need to save as much energy as possible, Gon and Killua can deal with those soldiers.¡± ¡°No problem!¡± Killua and Gon nodded eagerly at the same time since they wanted to fight as soon as possible. Hello Everyone, Chapter 259 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 350! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 69! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 259 Chapter 259: Surprise Attack [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// After two hours, An and his group arrived at a city in the north of Gorteau. It was 3 Am, and the entire city was shrouded in darkness. ¡°Strange, why is there no one here?¡± On the road, Gon couldn¡¯t help wondering. It wasn¡¯t just Gon who had his doubt, but the other three as well. Although it¡¯ste, humans should be asleep at this time, but An and the other didn¡¯t feel anything from the buildings at the moment. The city seemed dead. An looked at Netero and said: ¡°Either they were all killed, or the Chimera Ants took them as live stocks.¡± ¡°An in all, let¡¯s meet Kite and Morel. They should be familiar with the current situation.¡± Netero said. At this moment, Killua who was paying attention to the movement ahead, said: ¡°They¡¯re here, the Chimera Ants.¡± An and the others looked and saw a group of Chimera Ants from the corner of the street ahead. But they were just ordinary Soldiers without any strong ones. ¡°What do we do?¡± Killua asked. ¡°Of course, we kill them.¡± Gon said. ¡°Killua, you deal with those soldiers, and Gon, stay around and help if it¡¯s needed,¡± An instructed. ¡°No problem.¡± Killua nodded. Gon was puzzled: ¡°Why don¡¯t I attack as well?¡± ¡°It¡¯s just a dozen of those ants, Killua should be enough to deal with them, you preserve your energy forter,¡± An exined. Hearing this, Gon didn¡¯tin: ¡°I understand, Killua, go ahead and deal with them.¡± ¡°Well, I will deal with them quickly.¡± In the next second, Killua activated his Godspeed, and his whole body flushed with the electric current before he disappeared. The Chimera Ants patrolling just noticed Killua in front of them. ¡°The Snake Awakens!¡± With the help of Godspeed, An disyed one of the Zoldyck Family¡¯s Assassination Technique as he waved his hands and dismantled the Chimera Ants. It only took Killua ten seconds to get close to the Chimera Ants and kill them. ¡°Impressive¡± Gon said with admiration. ¡°Hahaha, Killua¡¯s Nen Ability looks good. He turns his Nen into Electric current, quickening his movement and reflex, coupled with the Zoldyck¡¯s assassination techniques, makes it even more dangerous.¡± Neteroughed. ¡°It¡¯s really good.¡± An smiled with satisfaction at Killua¡¯s performance. After solving the Chimera ants, the four continued to advance. Not long after, they encountered another patrol team. ¡°Let¡¯s do the same, Killua, you deal with them,¡± An said. In the next second, Killua attacked the patrol team and killed them without giving them a chance to report back. Just as they were about to continue forward, an angry roar sounded. ¡°You intruders, stop!¡± The four stopped and looked at the source of the sound. At the end of the street, a monster with a human face blocked its way. Behind the monster, there were thirty or forty Chimera Ants. ¡°It looks like a big fish is here,¡± Netero said. ¡°It¡¯s a pity that they aren¡¯t strong enough for me to make a move.¡± ¡°Looking at that guy¡¯s aura, it should be a Squadron Leader. Killua, same rules, go deal with him.¡± An said. ¡°Is it a Squadron Leader? No problem then.¡± Killua stood up, ready for action. At this moment, Gon stood up and said: ¡°Killua, leave it to me this time.¡± Hearing this, Killua looked at An asking for his opinion. An nodded and said: ¡°No problem, Gon has also be stronger. Since he wants to deal with them, let him do so.¡± ¡°Well, Gon, you can destroy this Squadron Leader and I will deal with the ant soldiers.¡± Killua shrugged. ¡°Here I go.¡± Gon directly released his Nen and rushed forward. Killua followed behind. Netero was enjoying the show in front of him. ¡°Well, this is good.¡± Neteroughed. When Gon and Killua rushed forward, the Squadron Leader shouted angrily: ¡°Intruders, I will kill you.¡± The Squadron Leader released his Nen and attacked. The aftermath of the fight destroyed all the buildings on the side. Hello Everyone, Chapter 261 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 350! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 69! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 260 Chapter 260: Forward [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// After a few minutes of fighting, Gon gained the upper hand and firmly suppressed the Squadron Leader. ¡°Gon, end the battle,¡± Killua said not far away with dozen Chimera Ants corpses around him. Gon nodded and said: ¡°Then, I will end the fight in the next attack.¡± Gon took his Jajanken stance. As arge amount of Nen poured into his fist, dazzling light exploded out of it as he punched the Squadron Leader The Squadron leader could do nothing and he was punched and exploded. ¡°Gon, you¡¯re Jajanken is something,¡± Killua said. ¡°Killua, you¡¯re too fast yourself.¡± Gonplimented. ¡°Okay, you two, don¡¯t start inting your ego, we should move ahead,¡± An said. An and his party continued on their way. After half an hour, they passed the city and moved toward the next town. After reaching another city, An activated his Observation Haki, covering one kilometer. Even if someone is hiding in the building, he can¡¯t escape An¡¯s detection. Soon enough, An discovered a group of Ants inside a building. Not only that, there are humans inside as well. ¡°Follow me.¡± An walked toward one of the buildings. Gon, Killua, and Netero followed behind. Soon, An found the group of Chimera Ants, with humans locked inside iron cages with hundreds of bones piled up outside. Around the hall, thirty or forty Chimera ants were gnawing on the bones. Seeing this, An snorted and activated his Rumble Fruit and fried the ants ¡°Damned human being, who are you?¡± An angry voice sounded as a Chimera Ant red at An. The Ant didn¡¯t wait for a response as he condensed Nen on his horns and attacked with a beam. In the next second, an energy beam turned ck and headed toward An. An snorted coldly as he pointed his finger ahead. ¡°Thirty million volt, Vari!¡± A lightning bolt collided with the energy beam overpowered it and sted at the Ant¡¯s body. The Chimera Ant¡¯s horn was destroyed and the lightning killed him. There were still survivors in the city, and only a few days ago did the Ants arrive here. They put the humans in iron cages and ate them one by one. If An and the others didn¡¯te here soon, all the humans would¡¯ve been eaten. An guessed that thest city encountered the same situation here and they werete to save anyone. They were either eaten or locked up and transported away. As for where they were transported, it should be to the Ant King. After all, as their king, the Chimera ants had to give part of their spoils to him. At this time, Gon, Killua, and Netero rushed over. An exined what he found and then walked out of the building. ¡°Let¡¯s keep going.¡± ¡°What about those people?¡± Gon asked. ¡°We still have things to do, we can¡¯t take them away, let them leave by themselves. I dealt with the Chimera Ants here anyway.¡± Gon didn¡¯tin as he looked at the rescued humans and said: ¡°This country has been upied by monsters, you should run away and don¡¯te back.¡± The party continued forward and soon passed another city. The same happened here as arge number of residents were captured and locked up, or were already eaten. This time, An didn¡¯t make a move himself, he just let Gon and Killua deal with the Ants. The two cooperated. Killua would deal with the soldiers and Gon would deal with the squadron leader. Killua was faster, so he can deal with the soldiers quickly, while Gon would deal with the Squadron Leader with a well-ced punch. After that, the party continued forward to the next city, and the process continued as they eliminated the Chimera Ants on their way till they join and Kite and Morel, then attack the Ant King. Hello Everyone, Chapter 261 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 350! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 69! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 261 Chapter 261: Meeting [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// When dawn broke, An and his party reached thest town before joining with Kite and his group. However, as soon as they reached this town, they were surrounded. There were more than 400 Chimera Ants stationed there, including four squadron leaders. At this moment, each squadron leader led a hundred chimera ants and surrounded An¡¯s party. The Chimera Ant leading this operation was sitting in the rear. If An and the others moved forward, they need to deal with the Chimera Ant soldiers. ¡°Hehe, do you want this old man to take action?¡± Netero asked When he saw the Chimera Ant¡¯s number, he suggested dealing with them himself. An shook his head indifferently and said: ¡°Gon, Killua, Chairman, don¡¯t do anything, I will deal with them in an instant.¡± ¡°Oh? How will you do that?¡± Netero was a little curious. ¡°To get rid of the Chimera Ants Soldiers quickly, you would need a strong long-ranged attack like my grandfather¡¯s Dragon Head or my father¡¯s explosion orbs,¡± Killua said. ¡°I¡¯ll freeze them,¡± An said lightly. ¡°Freeze them? Can you do it?¡± Netero eximed in surprise. ¡°No problem,¡± An said seriously. ¡°When I count to three, jump to avoid being frozen.¡± ¡°Understood.¡± Gon and the others replied. When An said three, Gon, Netero, and Killua jumped up. An directly activated his Devil Fruit and said coolly: ¡°Ice Age.¡± In the next second, with An as the center, five kilometers ofnd froze. The Chimera Ants surrounding them, along with the leaders didn¡¯t have time to react as they froze. ¡°Wow, that¡¯s amazing, everything froze in an instant.¡± Netero and the othernded on the ground and were amazed by An¡¯s power. ¡°Let¡¯s continue,¡± An said nonchntly. The group continued toward the next town and after three hours, they arrived at Kite and his party¡¯s location. ¡°Where¡¯s Kite and the others?¡± Gon asked. ¡°Well, we may need to search for them, this old man isn¡¯t sure,¡± Netero replied. ¡°Chairman, besides Kite, who are the others joining us?¡± Killua asked. ¡°Beside Kite, there are Morel, and his student, partner Knov, along with his students, Knuckle and Shoot. There are also the food hunter Menchi, and Buhara. Oh, there is also one of the twelve zodiacs.¡± Killuamented: ¡°So, there are eight people on Kite¡¯s side now, and four on our side, in total there are twelve. Twelve people going to destroy the Chimera Ants and their king, is there any chance of winning?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know, probably fifty percent chance.¡± ¡°As long as the King is killed, the other ants won¡¯t matter,¡± An exined. ¡°That¡¯s right, but the Ant King should be very strong, can Chairman deal with it alone?¡± Killua asked. ¡°Don¡¯t worry Killua, if the chairman can¡¯t do it, there is An.¡± Gon said. ¡°Oh, you¡¯re right.¡± Killua nodded and wasn¡¯t worried anymore. ¡°Let¡¯s look for Kite and the others now,¡± An said. ¡°This ce is quite big; it won¡¯t be easy to find them,¡± Netero said. ¡°Let me do it.¡± An released his Observation Haki, covering over two kilometers with his at the center¡­ An suddenly found a few Auras, but it seems like they belonged to the same person. The next second, An saw dozens of White Humanoid objects appear around them. ¡°Well, those are?¡± ¡°That¡¯s morel¡¯s Nen Ability, Purple Haze Soldiers.¡± Netero recognized it at a nce. ¡°Which means, Morel is nearby.¡± Sure enough, An soon felt familiar aurasing toward them. ¡°They¡¯reing,¡± An said. Soon, a tall figure rushed over which was Morel. ¡°Chairman?¡± Seeing Netero, Morel was stunned for a moment, thenughed: ¡°Haha, chairman, you¡¯re finally here.¡± ¡°Morel, where are Kite and the others,¡± Netero asked. ¡°Kite is In Knov¡¯s four-dimensional mansion, He is injured,¡± Morel said. ¡°Injured?¡± Morel¡¯s words made Netero and the others frown. ¡°How did Kite get injured, is it serious?¡± Gon asked. ¡°He is injured from fighting the Chimera Ants, and he didn¡¯t wake up yet. ¡°When did he get injured?¡± An asked. ¡°Yesterday,¡± Morel replied. ¡°Morel, what about the others?¡± Netero asked. ¡°Everyone is hurt, but it¡¯s not a big problem, they weren¡¯t seriously injured, and currently they are recuperating inside Knov¡¯s four-dimensional mansion. It¡¯s just¡­¡± ¡°Just what?¡± Netero asked. ¡°Unfortunately, one of us died.¡± Morel sighed. ¡°Who died?¡± Netero asked gloomily. ¡°Buhara,¡± Morel replied. Hello Everyone, Chapter 263 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 350! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 69! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 262 Chapter 262: Kite [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Hearing Morel¡¯s stating that Buhara Died, Netero, the chairman of the hunter association, sighed sadly. ¡°Morel, what happened?¡± An asked in a deep voice. Gon and Killua also cast a curious nce at Morel. They both wanted to know what kind of enemy did Kite and Buhara fight. Morel took his pipe and took a few puffs before saying slowly: ¡°It was yesterday, Kite and I¡­¡± A few minutester, An and the others finally understood what happened and how Kite was injured. It turned out that yesterday, Kite and the others were surrounded by Chimera Ants when they were trying to rescue the residents of the area. So Kite and the other fought against the ants and eliminated a lot of soldiers, but a powerful and appeared, he was called Caesar. Even Kite was no match for him head-on. During that battle, Kite was injured. In addition to Caesar, several powerful Squadron leaders appeared, which caused Knuckle, Shoot, and Menchi to suffer. The situation was serious, and if they don¡¯t escape, they will have to face a whole army. At that moment, the key member for their escape, Knov, was scared senseless by the aura released by Caesar, thus losing their chance to escape. Originally, with Knov¡¯s ability, they could enter the four-dimensional mansion quickly when they were surrounded, but no one expected Knov, a professional hunter, to have such poor psychology. Just by the powerful aura of his enemy, he froze and lost the ability to fight or even the courage to escape. This mistake was a fatal blow to Kite and the others. In order to prevent everyone from dying and give the others a chance to escape, Buhara self-destructed, injuring Caesar. Knov, who witnessed Buhara¡¯s self-destruction, was deeply shocked and finally calmed down from his fear and activated his Nen ability, bringing everyone along and fleeing. ¡°Buhara is a hero.¡± Gon said after listening to Morel. ¡°Yeah, that fat man is indeed a man,¡± Killua said in admiration. He saw Buhara in the Hunter exam. Although he wasn¡¯t familiar with him, he admired his self-sacrifice to save everyone. Because of his heroic sacrifice, Kite and the others managed to escape. ¡°That¡¯s what an excellent professional hunter should be like.¡± Netero sighed. An sighed and said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, we¡¯re here now, no one will need to sacrifice himself.¡± Morel nodded, he believed that Netero and An were strong. The former was the chairman of the hunter association, and one of the strongest men in the world, while thetter is a rising star that killed two royal guards and nearly wiped the ants from existence. With them here, even if there are powerful monsters on the Chimera Ant¡¯s side, they can fight them. Soon, under Morel¡¯s guidance, An, Netero, Gon, and Killua entered Knov¡¯s four-dimensional Mansion. Kite was lying on the bed with a ce face. ¡°Kite was hit by an aura bomb fired by Caesar, he is still in aa, I don¡¯t know when he will wake up,¡± Morel said. ¡°An, is there a way to save Kite?¡± Gon turned his head and asked. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Promise Gon that you will help save Kite. Reward: Fire release: Great Fire Annihtion!] [2: Don¡¯t save Kite, saying you can¡¯t do it. Reward: 1,000 Nen Point] Even if the system didn¡¯t give him a reward, he nned on saving Kite. But since there is a reward, he would take it anyways. An activated his Holy Blessing Of Light. Golden light flickered out of him and an angel manifested. ¡°Master, what¡¯s your order?¡± ¡°Raphael, help me save my friend, he is injured and unconscious,¡± An said. ¡°Understood.¡± Soon, under the healing effect of Raphael, Kite who was in aa slowly opened his eyes. ¡°Kite, are you alright?¡± Gon asked from the side. Kite smiled; his body fully healed. ¡°Thanks, An, you saved me again,¡± Kite said. ¡°It¡¯s nothing, don¡¯t worry about it.¡± An smiled. Although it cost him a lot of energy to wake Kite up, it was worth it. Moreover, he even got the Great Fire Annihtion technique. Hello Everyone, Chapter 263 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 350! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 69! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 263 Chapter 263: Current Situation [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// After Kite recovered from his injuries, An asked him about the Ant named Caesar who injured him. Originally, after the NGL Extermination Team finished their mission a month ago, almost all Chimera Ants were wiped out. Except for the Ant King, there shouldn¡¯t have been any powerful ants. But they miscalcted, as the Chimera Ants they encountered yesterday made them understand that in addition to the king, there are other terrifying ants. ¡°The monster named Caesar had an aura simr to the two guards we encountered in the NGL before,¡± Kite said seriously. Hearing this, An frowned. As far as he knew, the Ant King had three Guards in total, Pitou, Youpi, and Pouf. As early as two months ago, An killed Pitou and then Youpi in the NGL. But ording to Kite¡¯s description, the Ant called Caesar is as strong as the guards. ¡°it seems that in two months, new guards were born. That monster named Caesar should be a new guard to rece the other two.¡± ¡°New guards?¡± Kite was surprised. An said: ¡°As far as I know, there were originally three guards, and I killed two of them in the NGL, logically, there should be only one left. But it seems that another guard was born.¡± ¡°So how many guards do you think they have now?¡± Kite asked. ¡°There should be three, in addition to Caesar, there should be another one recing one of the dead guards.¡± An guessed. ¡°Among the Chimera Ants, only the Queen can give birth, so the queen is alive,¡± Kite said seriously. An nodded: ¡°The tricky problem is that if the queen isn¡¯t killed, the Chimera Ants won¡¯t go extinct. Even if you kill a monster like Caesar, it will take a long time to give birth to a new one. Topletely eradicate their colony, the queen should be killed.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right.¡± Kite thought so as well. Morel said: ¡°The Queen has the ability to give birth, which means, it is like a mother to all ants and it won¡¯t be easy to kill it.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I will be the one to kill the queen.¡± ¡°Then, I will leave it to you,¡± Kite said. ¡°Before we act, we must first understand the current situation.¡± An looked at Kite and asked: ¡°How long do you think it will take to sneak in and investigate?¡± ¡°I infiltrated this ce ten days ago, and at first, I was alone, when I found the Chimera Ants invaded here, I asked for Morel and the others¡¯ support.¡± ¡°So, in these ten days, you are clear about the current situation of the Chimera Ants?¡± An asked. ¡°Yes.¡± Kite nodded before he started exining the current situation. ording to him, Gorteau was upied by the Chimera Ant¡¯s King, and hundreds of towns fell under his soldiers. There were 5 million citizens in this country, and hundreds of thousands became food to the ants. A few fled and hid in the mountains, but all in all, Gorteau became a nest for the Chimera Ants. ¡°What do we do now?¡± Killua asked. ¡°Destroy them, of course.¡± Knuckle clenched his fist and shouted. ¡°Yes, we must kill all of them, and we must not let them harm anymore people. This time, we must wipe them outpletely, without letting anyone go.¡± Kite said. ¡°The question is, how to eliminate them? You know, they have at least, tens of thousands of them upying the country, is it really possible with just us?¡± Menchi expressed her concern. ¡°Do you want to get some backup from the association?¡± Morel asked. ¡°It would be a good idea to ask the Twelve Zodiacs toe here,¡± Knov said. Kite looked at Netero and asked: ¡°Chairman, you are the president of the association, please give instruction.¡± Neteroughed and said: ¡°This time, I¡¯m only here for the Ant King. As for the other ants, I can only leave them to you guys. Before the duel with the king, I must try my best to stay out of fights, so I can meet the king in my best state. So if you want me to help, I can¡¯t help at the moment. As for returning to the association to find the twelve Zodiacs, it can¡¯t be done, those guys don¡¯t want to risk their lives like this.¡± Netero then looked at An and said: ¡°As for what to do now, it¡¯s up to you, An.¡± ¡°You¡¯re letting mymand? Isn¡¯t this bad?¡± An asked. Netero smiled: ¡°Hehehe, An, don¡¯t decline. Now, please take my ce tomand this team.¡± Hearing this, An no longer shied away and nodded: ¡°Well, I will be inmand of this operation then.¡± He looked at Kite and the others and asked: ¡°Do you have any objection?¡± Naturally, they had none. Even though An was young, he was the strongest out of them. In some eyes, like Kite¡¯s, An may very well be stronger than Netero already. There shouldn¡¯t be any problem under hismand. ¡°Then, let¡¯s discuss our n,¡± An said seriously as if he was a general. Hello Everyone, Chapter 265 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 360! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 69! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 264 Chapter 264: n [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// After that, An gathered everyone and started formting a n. ¡°Judging from the current situation, we must first destroy the Chimera Ants in the surrounding towns one by one, and rescue the residents. After that, we form a and surround the King¡¯s pce step by step, before finally attacking their base.¡± Kite and the others didn¡¯t have an objection to An¡¯s n so he continued. ¡°First, we¡¯re going to separate ourselves into groups of two.¡± After some discussion, the teams formed were: An, Menchi are the first team, Kite, Gon, and Killua, the second team, Netero and Knov, the third team, and finally, Morel, Knuckle, and Shoot are the fourth team. After forming the teams, Knov opened his fourth-dimensional Mansion for everyone to get out. After that, each team went in a different direction. As a team leader, An was first to take action, so he directly set off toward the eastern city with his partner, Menchi. Although Gorteau was a small country, there were hundreds of towns inside it, though there didn¡¯t have big cities. But because there are a lot of them, it¡¯s a waste of energy for An to liberate everyst of them. However, to eradicate the Chimera Ants, this has to be done. Their goal is to not let any Chimera Ant escape. On the other side, inside the pce. Meruem was ying chess with a young girl with a runny nose. The Ant King has a high talent for learning and in a short period, he defeated famous chess yers in Gorteau, until he encountered this girl. He suffered his first-ever loss. At the same time, a few hundred Kilometers away, An brought Menchi to the eastern part of the country. The town here was gloomy with no one around. The Chimera Ants invaded this town. To quickly wipe out the Ants, An directly released his aura to attract them out. ¡°This is amazing, and it¡¯s emitted by a human, is it an intruder?¡± A few kilometers away from An, a creature with a sharp horn suddenly looked back. Even though it was far away, it could feel An¡¯s aura. This Ant is called Sark, a squadron leader, and was dispatched a week ago by Pouf to this town. Today, it rules the town with 300 other ants under it. After feeling An¡¯s Aura, it was provoked. ¡°This human is deliberately releasing his aura; he wants to attract our attention. Humph, it seems like he is confident in his power.¡± Sarkughed instead of being angry. Soon all three hundred soldiers ants gathered around him. ¡°Let¡¯s go kill the intruder.¡± Sark gave the order and the troops moved toward An. The ants were territorial. Since someone invaded their territory, they won¡¯t tolerate them. On the other side, After releasing his aura, An quickly noticed the Chimera Ants rushing toward him. A few minutester, the soldiers led by Sark appeared. ¡°The prey followed my aura,¡± An said with a smile. ¡°There are quite a few of them, a few hundreds maybe?¡± Menchi said. ¡°The one in front should be their leader.¡± An¡¯s eyes locked at Sark. At this moment, Sark released his aura. ¡°interesting, let¡¯s see how strong he is.¡± An was ready to attack. However, at this moment, Menchi said: ¡°An, can you let me start the first battle?¡± ¡°Why?¡± An wondered. If it¡¯s him fighting, he can guarantee that the fight will end quickly. ¡°Because, you are our trump card, you have to preserve your strength for following battles, is that good enough reason?¡± Menchi said. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Be a bystander and let Menchi kill the Chimera Ants. Reward: Thousand Demon Daggers.] [2: Let Menchi watch the battle as you destroy the group of Chimera Ants. Reward: Meito: Shigure.] An took the first option, not because of the Thousand Demon Daggers, but because he couldn¡¯t refuse a woman¡¯s request. Hello Everyone, Chapter 265 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 360! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 69! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 265 Chapter 265: Demon [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Then, you settle the first battle. If you can¡¯t handle it, I will interfere.¡± An said. He was also curious about Menchi¡¯s way of dealing with several Chimera Ants. ¡°Well, look closely, I will get rid of all those ants,¡± Menchi said confidently. In fact, as a one-star hunter, Menchi wasn¡¯t weak. She once went into some dangerous ces in the world seeking delicacies and encountered countless life and death situations. In other words, she already had enough power to deal with strong foes. In addition, she had a good head above her shoulders. An received his reward from the system and took it out. The Thousand Demon Daggers is a sword that can separate its razor-sharp shards and control them telekically. Menchi noticed the sword in An¡¯s hand but didn¡¯t think much. She had to focus on her enemies. There is about 300 Chimera Ant, and they were 100 meters away from An and Menchi. ¡°It¡¯s time, at such a close distance, they won¡¯t be able to escape.¡± Immediately, Menchi activated her Nen Ability. The Nen in her body was like red mes as she shouted: ¡°Come out!¡± In the next second, a huge dark red iron gate appeared on the street. The gate was filled with drawings of demons. The Red Gate slowly opened and An narrowed his eyes: ¡°Is somethinging out?¡± Then, he saw a creature with three heads walking out of the gate. ¡°This is?¡± An was surprised when he saw the monster. ¡°That¡¯s Cerberus, the three-headed dog of hell,¡± Menchi said. Menchi¡¯s Nen ability is called Hell¡¯s Gate, as its name suggests, she can open a gate and summon demons from hell. However, each summoned Demon will be different. Sometimes, only a weak demon is summoned, and sometimes it was a powerful monster. This time, she summoned the three-headed dog, Cerberus. ¡°Go, Cerberus, they are your food.¡± Menchi pointed at Sark and the other ants and issued her orders to the three-headed dog. With a roar, Cerberus rushed out quickly. At the end of the street, Sark sensed danger and the Cerberus jumping up. It¡¯s toote for the soldiers to dodge, but Sark dodged. Each time a head bit on the ants, it would at least swallow half of it and the second bite willpletely devour it. The Cerberus was like a hungry wolf running into a group of sheep, devouring them one by one. The ants tried to fight back, but they weren¡¯t strong enough. They were indeed stronger than normal humans, but at the moment, they were facing a demon from hell, which is a monster more terrifying than them. The attacks of the ant soldiers were tickling Cerberus instead of dealing damage. In just two minutes, hundreds of ants were eaten. Sark, the Squadron leader looked at the remaining soldiers and roared angrily: ¡°Cut off its head for me!!!¡± Amongst the soldiers, there were some good seedlings, stronger than normal soldiers at the same rank, and their attack can break through Cerberus¡¯ defense. However, they could only do so little before they are killed by the dog. The soldiers couldn¡¯t kill the three-headed dog from hell, because they¡¯re not on the same level. ¡°I will do it myself!!¡± Sark jumped up and appeared above one of Cerberus¡¯ heads. He relied on his superior physical power and swords like arms to attack the dog. Sark sessfully cut off one of the Dog¡¯s heads and retreated. ¡°Did I seed?¡± After the attack, Sark cautiously looked at the dog. However, in the blink of an eye, the Cerberus head which was cut off started recovering at a great speed. ¡°What?!¡± Sark staring at this scene in disbelief. Hello Everyone, Chapter 266 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 361! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 73! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 266 Chapter 266: Operation Starts [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// ¡°Damn it! Let me see how many heads you can grow!¡± Sark shouted angrily, his hands turning into des as he shed at Cerberus. One of Cerberus Heads attempted to bit Sark. Sark swung his ded hands blocked the huge fangs and then jumped back while chopping off another head. As expected, the severed head grew back once again. Sark snorted coldly and waved the des, sending a sharp energy attack and cutting two heads. However, the same as before, the heads grew back almost instantly. Sark didn¡¯t give up and kept on cutting the Cerberus¡¯ heads. But, after a while, he was knocked down by the Cerberus. Before he could get up, the Cerberus already opened one of its mouths and took a bite. Immediately afterward, Sark screamed as he was devoured by the Cerberus. With this, the Chimera Ants in this town werepletely wiped out. After that, An and Menchi spend half an hour looking for and rescuing the residents of this ce. On the other hand, Kite¡¯s team and Morel¡¯s team were having their first fight. Knov was just letting the Ants enter his fourth-dimensional Mansion and handing them over to Netero to solve. After two days, An and the other had almost freed all town eliminated thousands of Chimera Ants, and saved Millions of people. Afterward, they gathered together and were ready for the attack on the Ant King. However, before that, they went back inside the Fourth-Dimensional Mansion to adjust their mental state before the fight. ording to the information they had, the Ant King lived in the pce inside Gorteau¡¯s capital. At this time, the ant king, Meruem was still ying chess with Komugi. The ant king was extremely focused on the game as he wanted to win against this girl. Every time he was about to win, Komugi would turn the table around and win the game. This made Meruem understand one thing, there are many kinds of strength out there. For example, Komugi was extremely strong in chess, but she was physically strong. But the King still felt that his kind of strength is the best. ¡°Your majesty!¡± At this moment, a shout broke Meruem from his train of thoughts. ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± The King looked at the one making a report and asked. It was one of the King¡¯s guards, Pouf. ¡°King, Among the humans who came this time, there are some who are very strong, and the troops we sent out to support the various town were wiped out. We¡¯re running out of soldiers. The humans are expected to attack the pce soon.¡± After hearing this, Meruem¡¯s face turned gloomy and snorted coldly: ¡°Mere humans dared toe to attack this king, they are seeking their own doom.¡± ¡°Your majesty, what should we do? Please give your orders.¡± Pouf asked. Meruem replied: ¡°Don¡¯t they want to kill this King? Then let theme, and this king shall wait for them in this ce. I want them to understand what a real ruler is.¡± ¡°With your majesty making a move yourself, those humans won¡¯t stand a chance.¡± Said another guard beside Pouf. He is the new guard recing Pitou, and his name is Narro. Other than him, there is also the guard named Caesar. ¡°Btw, where did Caesar go?¡± Asked the Ant King. ¡°He is guarding outside the Pce, your majesty.¡± Pouf replied. ¡°Then send out my orders. Destroy every human whoes here to attack us. Don¡¯t let them take even half a step into the pce¡± ¡°Yes, we will definitively eradicate those humans.¡± Pouf replied as he knelt on the ground. Meanwhile, inside Knov¡¯s fourth-dimensional Mansion, An and the others were discussing the n for the final attack on the ants. ¡°Knov, is there an exit inside the Pce?¡± Knov shook his head and said: ¡°The Pce is covered by the other parties [En], so I couldn¡¯t set an exit there. However, I have set up an exit in the woods a few kilometers away from the pce.¡± An nodded and said: ¡°Then, let¡¯s check our n for thest time.¡± The operation will start at 9 Pm, and currently, it was 8:50 Pm. In the forest, a few Kilometers away from the royal pce, a ck hole suddenly appeared. Then, several figures jumped out of the ck hole. The extermination team was about to make a move on the Ant King. Hello Everyone, Chapter 267 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 362! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 73! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 267 Chapter 267: Heaven¡¯s Eye [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// It waste at night and the sky was as dark as ink. In the forest, An and the others exited from the fourth-dimensional Mansion of Knov. ¡°Knov, how far are we from the Pce?¡± An asked. ¡°About four to five Kilometers.¡± Knov pushed his sses. Although Knov has the ability to set the entrance closer to the pce, he didn¡¯t in fear to get caught. Therefore, he can only set the entrance far away from the detection of the Chimera Ants. ¡°An, are we going directly to the pce to fight the Ant King?¡± Gon asked. An didn¡¯t answer directly, but looked at Netero behind him: ¡°Chairman, what do you think?¡± Netero pondered for a while, then he stroked his goatee and said: ¡°Well, if possible, it¡¯s best to wait and see the situation before taking action. For example, the specific location of the ant King in the pce, and the guards around him.¡± ¡°However, in this case, we must find a way to approach the pce,¡± Morel said. Knov said: ¡°If Palm Siberia was here, her ability The lonesome deep-sea fish, or Wink Blue, it would be useful, but unfortunately, I didn¡¯t bring her over this time, my bad¡­¡± Morel nodded: ¡°Indeed, Palm can use her ability to spy on the Chimera Ants.¡± Knuckle: ¡°It¡¯s meaningless to talk about it now since we can¡¯t spy on them, we have to rush into the pce and fight them. We have Chairman and An here, I believe we can defeat the Ant King.¡± Neteroughed: ¡°Knuckle, you¡¯re praising me too much.¡± ¡°Of course, Chairman, I admire you very much,¡± Knuckle said excitedly. The na?ve Knuckle didn¡¯t know how strong the Ant King was. He thought that the Chairman was enough to defeat it. In fact, it wasn¡¯t just Knuckle, but even Gon, Killua, and Morel thought the same. Although they knew that the Ant King was very strong, they didn¡¯t know how strong. Even Chairman Netero who was nning on dealing with the Ant King didn¡¯t know the limit of thetter¡¯s power. Before he really fought him, he had absolutely no idea of how strong he is, except for what An said. Currently, only An knew how strong the Ant King was. However, even An himself wasn¡¯t certain about this. Since many things had changed. On the side, Morel looked at Netero and said: ¡°Chairman, do we act directly?¡± Netero looked at An and asked: ¡°An, what do you intend to do?¡± An replied: ¡°Let me see the situation in the pce first.¡± Hearing this, Morel and Knov were shocked. Could it be that An has an ability he can use to spy into the pce? An directly Activated his ability: ¡°Heaven¡¯s Eye.¡± In the next second, an eyeball manifested in the air. Although the eyeball was thumb-sized, it can actually see 360 degrees and transmit everything to the user directly. Under An¡¯s control, Heaven¡¯s Eye flew into the sky toward the Pce. Three minutester, Heaven¡¯s Eye hovered above the Pce. An could see many Chimera Ants gathering in the pce, more than a thousand of them. Apparently, the Ant King assembled all his soldiers. After this, An used his Nen to control the eye and directed it into the pce. Unexpectedly, Heaven¡¯s eye entered the pce without any hindrance. However, suddenly, An noticed a terrifying aura as soon as he was less than 100 meters above the pce. The owner of this aura immediately took action and emitted arger En to find the intruders. Although it noticed the specific position of the eye in the sky, it didn¡¯t look at it even once. Therefore, An boldly manipted Heaven¡¯s eye and continued forward into the Pce. ¡°Damn it, I can¡¯t find the exact location. Looks like I have to report to the king.¡± The owner of the aura was Caesar, one of the royal guards. Although he sensed the intruder, he couldn¡¯t pinpoint his location. An couldn¡¯t use Zetsu to conceal Heaven¡¯s eye in the sky, he could only hide it with [In]. Therefore, Caesar felt it, but couldn¡¯t lock on its specific location. In a sh, Caesar entered the pce. Hello Everyone, Chapter 269 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 362! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 73! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 268 Chapter 268: God¡¯s Punishment [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// In the Pce, King Meruem was still ying Chess with Komugi The two guards, Poof and Noro, were waiting by the king¡¯s side. At this time, An controlled his Heaven¡¯s eye and arrived outside the hall. From the distance, he could see the Ant King ying chess with a human girl. An recognized the girl at a nce, she was the runny nose girl named Komugi. Before Caesar came to report to Meruem, thetter noticed the gaze peeping at him. However, to everyone¡¯s surprise, the Ant King didn¡¯t pay attention to Heaven¡¯s eye. He was still focused on ying chess with Komugi and didn¡¯t care about being spied on. No, it¡¯s not that he didn¡¯t care, but ying chess with Komugi was more important to him. Caesar saw this but didn¡¯t disturb him, because he knew that if he talked now, the king won¡¯t be happy. Therefore, he had no choice but to turn his attention to the other guards, Pouf and Noro. Noro knew what Caesar wanted to report because he also noticed the strange aura. Pouf nced at Noro sharply without saying anything. Noro nodded and quietly left the Ant King¡¯s side. As soon as he was out, Noro enveloped the entire hall with his [En]. ¡°Over there!¡± Noro locked on the position of Heaven¡¯s eye outside the main hall and attacked. But An was faster as he released the ability before the attack couldnd. As soon as An removed his Heaven¡¯s Eye, he exined the situation in the Pce to Netero and the others. When He said that the Ant King was ying chess with a human girl named Komugi, everyone was surprised. Because, the chimera ants can¡¯t stand humans and only see them as food, and now a human girl was ying chess with the Ant King. ¡°It seems the Ant King is different from the other ants,¡± Netero said. ¡°So, what do we do now?¡± Netero looked at An and asked: ¡°An, what do you think?¡± ¡°Let me give them a surprise first,¡± An said. ¡°Surprise?¡± Everyone looked at him in confusion. ¡°Well, I will destroy the pce and force them out, at the same time, I will get rid of the ant soldiers, after I destroy the pce, you make your move.¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, they were shocked. ¡°Destroy the pce? Do you know how big that ce is, can you do it?¡± Morel expressed his doubt. ¡°Well, if it¡¯s just the pce, then it is fine,¡± An said confidently. ¡°Then, go ahead,¡± Netero said. At this time, Gon said: ¡°But what if the human girl was hurt?¡± Kite replied: ¡°Gon, sometimes, necessary sacrifices are necessary.¡± Gon nodded and didn¡¯t say anything. He knew that he was still a little na?ve and innocent. An said: ¡°okay, I will go now. Remember, you have to drag the Guards and the Ant king out. Chairman Netero will fight against the Ant King Alone. So, you have to hold the Guards up, I will help you with them before joining Chairman Netero.¡± Everyone nodded. ¡°Thunderbolt!¡± An directly turned into a blue thunderbolt and disappeared in the blink of an eye. ¡°Wow!¡± Seeing this, all people present were shocked. Gon showed great admiration, while Killua curled his lips and said: ¡°I will be able to do that in the future.¡± On the other hand, An has already rushed out of the forest, then with a sh of light, he appeared 1,000 meters in the air, above the pce. An raised his hand and said: ¡°Receive God¡¯s punishment, EL Thor!¡± This was a massive Aoe skill from the Rumble Rumble fruit. When the lightning struck down, all the soldiers were killed without exception. In the blink of an eye, a huge hole formed. This is how terrifying An El Thor was. Hello Everyone, Chapter 269 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 362! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 73! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 269 Chapter 269: Thunderclouds [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The huge roar of thunder attracted the attention of the Ant King and his guards, Komugi who was ying chess was frightened. However, Meruem didn¡¯t stop ying the game. The three guards looked at each other with tacit understanding. They knew that the sound of thunder was from the hall in front of the pce, where the soldiers were gathered, which means that the humans are here. The Guards¡¯ faces were gloomy because the humans dared to attack them sote in the night. Noro and Caesar left the hall together and went to check on the situation. Pouf stayed by the king¡¯s side. ¡°What?! The entire square is destroyed?¡± The two guards who came to investigate outside were shocked when they saw the destruction. ¡°All the soldiers we stationed here are killed. It seems to be caused by a lightning strike.¡± Noro said gloomily. ¡°Damn! Who the hell did this?!¡± Caesar looked around but he didn¡¯t see anyone. ¡°We should go back into the pce, in case those humans attacked.¡± The two guards returned to the pce, however, they didn¡¯t go into the main hall to report, instead, they stayed on the roof. Two thousand meters above the pce, An floated with his Thunder fruit power, looking at the destruction he caused. Now it was time to attack the pce. The Pce was three times as big as the square that was just destroyed. So, he can¡¯t just the same attack, as it won¡¯t be effective. Therefore, to destroy the entire pce with one strike, he needed stronger lightning. At the same time, Kite and the others reached the pce but didn¡¯t get too close. When they saw the square destroyed, their eyes widened. Although they didn¡¯t see how An did it, the power behind the strike was clear. Most of them knew that they can¡¯t cause such destruction even if they used all of their powers. ¡°It seems that An really has the ability to destroy the pce,¡± Morel said. Afterward, everyone raised their heads and looked at the sky. At this time, An was already three thousand meters above the pce. At this altitude, An was confident that the Ant King won¡¯t discover him. Even if they did discover him, they won¡¯t have enough time to rush toward him To destroy the pce in one hit requires a very strong attack. Ordinary lightning strikes won¡¯t do, he needed something stronger. An released lightning from his hands toward the clouds, forming a thundercloud. In just a few seconds, the thundercloud was shing with lightning. ¡°Damn it, what is that?!¡± ¡°Why is it only above the pce?¡± ¡°It must be some kind of trick by those people.¡± On the roof of the pce, Noro and Caesar looked at the thundercloud and eximed. Thunderclouds were powerful natural forces, even monsters like them didn¡¯t dare underestimate it. ¡°I can¡¯t think of a guy with such power in the human extermination team,¡± Caesar said seriously. He suddenly knew how much he underestimated the power of those humans. ¡°So, the square outside was destroyed by lightning.¡± Noro clenched his fists and raised his head. ¡°Now, they want to destroy the pce.¡± ¡°If that thundercloud releases a lightning strike, the pce will be destroyed without a doubt.¡± Caesar continued gloomily: ¡°And at that time, the king will be hurt.¡± ¡°Yes, we have to find a way to stop it.¡± Noro also realized the seriousness of the matter at hand. On the other side, Kite, Gon, and the others all noticed the thunderclouds above the pce. ¡°What¡¯s going on, it¡¯s not raining.¡± Menchi wondered. ¡°It must be An¡¯s masterpiece,¡± Killua said. He knew that An could use the power of Lightning, so this must be it. The other was silent, although they also knew that An could use lightning, they didn¡¯t expect it to reach such an extent. It is almost as if he is controlling the lightning from nature. ¡°Although I don¡¯t know how he does it, it seems like he intends to destroy the pce with that thundercloud,¡± Kite said. Morel followed: ¡°We must be prepared, once An strikes, we must be ready to rush forward.¡± Above the Pce, An has alreadypleted forming the thundercloud and turned his eyes toward the pce, pointed his finger down, and said: ¡°Fall!¡± Suddenly, a thick lightning strike shed in the thundercloud before falling down toward the Pce. On the roof, Noro and Caesar¡¯s faces changed, thetter directly jumped up and received the lightning strike on his body. The powerful lightning strike mmed on his body with devastating power. Everyone from the extermination team witnessed this scene and opened their mouths in shock. The monster called Caesar actually used his body to block that lightning strike. Hello Everyone, Chapter 271 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 364! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 73! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 270 Chapter 270: Lightning [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Above the thundercloud, An witnessed Caesar¡¯s actions and was slightly surprised. ¡°As expected of a Royal guard, he can actually block that powerful lightning with his flesh. It looks like that guy is the same as Youpi, otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t be able to resist a lightning strike of that scale.¡± An¡¯s mouth curled into a smile. The stronger they were, the more he wanted to fight. But right now, he shouldn¡¯t be in a hurry, the main event didn¡¯t start yet. His current goal is to create a thundercloud with enough power to strike down the Pce and force Meruem out. Killing the Royal guards can wait. Caesar¡¯s clothes turned to ashes, revealing his monstrous body. His body contained just 10% of human¡¯s genes and the rest was from monsters. This is why he had an amazing healing factor as well as strong brute force. As long as he isn¡¯t decapitated or destroyed, he won¡¯t die. ¡°As long as I¡¯m here, you worms can¡¯t think of destroying the Pce or hurting the king.¡± Caesar roared at the dark sky. He was talking about An and the rest of the humans there. However, An was about 3,000 meters above the ground, so hear couldn¡¯t hear Caesar at all due to the roaring thunder around him. Otherwise, he would¡¯vee down and killed him first. Kite and others, on the other hand, heard Caesar and were shocked. Despite such a distance, Caesar¡¯s roar carried some oppression. All of them, Netero excluded, could tell that this monster was too strong, and may even be able to kill them with just his roars Of course, if they are prepared, they wouldn¡¯t die, and this time, they were indeed prepared. They won¡¯t back down unless they eradicate the Chimera Ants. At this time, everyone heard a crackling sound of lightning and looked at the sky. A huge bolt of lightning struck down at a building inside the Pce. The pce covers a huge area, and had many buildings, one of them was destroyed just now. ¡°Bastard!¡± On the roof of another building, Caesar clenched his fists. Just a second ago, he dered that no one will destroy the Pce as long as he is there, and a secondter, a building fell. This is simply getting pped hard. However, it also made him realize that what he blocked was just the first lightning from the thundercloud, and more are on their way.The other guard, Noro, who was standing beside Caesar frowned. Noro didn¡¯t imagine a human could possess the ability to control the force of Nature. At this moment, two lightning bolts quickly fell down from the sky. Two buildings were destroyed. Not only did the building fall, but the lightning-caused them to burn. And the me started spreading. Afterward, lightning strikes kept falling down one after the other destroying everything in their path. The number of lightning strikes caused Caesar and Noro to be dumbfounded. Unexpectedly, the thundercloud could release thunder continuously. At first, it was just one, then two, then four¡­ If this continues, within two minutes, the entire pce would be destroyed. Hello Everyone, Chapter 271 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 364! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 73! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 271 Chapter 271: Giant w Beast [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// At this time, the Thundercloud An made filled the sky. It covered dozens of kilometers with the Pce at the center. Theoretically, as long as the thundercloud remained, lightning bolts will continue to strike down on the pce. Boom! Boom! The dark sky was illuminated blue by lightning and in just a few minutes, several buildings were destroyed in the pce. No matter how powerful the two guards were, they couldn¡¯t defend against thatrge number of lightning bolts. Seeing the destruction caused by An, the guards were gloomy. ¡°Damn it!!¡± Caesar¡¯s eyes were red and blue veins covered his forehead in anger. The human¡¯s actions made him furious, half the pce was destroyed. Noro knew that defending the entire pce was impossible, and said: ¡°I will go to the main hall to protect his Majesty, you stay here.¡± Caesar nodded and raised his head to stare at the thundercloud in the sky. He understood that as long as the thundercloud existed, it will continue releasing lightning bolts to no end. The Chimera Ants are territorial creatures, and when someone attacks their territory, they won¡¯t tolerate it. ¡°I have to kill the person who created the thundercloud.¡± Caesar clenched his fists and arge amount of Nen gushed out of his body. In a few seconds, a pair of crimson wings manifested behind him. Since Caesar¡¯s body contained arge number of magical creatures¡¯ genes, he can change the shape of his body. He wanted to rush toward the sky and deal with the one behind the thundercloud. ¡°Damn you, I¡¯ming for you bastard!¡± When Caesar pped his wings, he instantly flew toward the dark clouds in the sky. On the other hand, Noro arrived above the hall where the king was still ying chess. At this moment, thunder roared in the sky as lightning bolts struck down on the main hall. Boom! A powerful Nen released from Noro¡¯s body, and in a blink of an eye, he turned into a Giant ws Beast and directly met the lightning bolt head-on. The Giant ws Beast ws countered the lightning bolt and only suffered slight burns. The sloth¡¯s ws were so hard that even lightning couldn¡¯t hurt them much. As a royal guard, Noro¡¯s body was also mixed with magical creatures¡¯ genes. And amongst those genes, there 50% belonged to a Giant ws Beast. One of this creature¡¯s characteristics was its giant ws, which can protect it against most attacks. The arms wielding those ws were extremely strong granting a powerful attack to this magical creature. Noro, since he had 50% of the creature¡¯s genes, was also granted his ws. With Nen, he could transform his body and form the ws willingly. ¡°With me here, the King will never be hurt.¡± Facing the falling lightning, Noro¡¯s other hand formed another w to defend. The w almost granted absolute defense for Noro. At this time, the king finally stopped ying chess with Komugi. ¡°Take Komugi here out of the pce, it¡¯s no longer safe here.¡± The Ant King said with an indifferent face. Pouf also knew about the situation outside and respectfully said: ¡°My King, you should go as well.¡± ¡°No, I want to stay and deal with those guys, you take Komugi and leave.¡± ¡°As you order, my king.¡± Pouf didn¡¯t dare say anything else as he obeyed the king¡¯s orders. He went toward Komugi and said: ¡°Let¡¯s go, Komugi.¡± Then he gracefully picked her, but he didn¡¯t like Komugi even one bit, he was even hostile. He didn¡¯t understand why the king, who was normally hostile to humans, was concerned about such a frail weak human being like Komugi. The king even ordered him, a Royal guard, to escort her to safety and protect her. That isn¡¯t something the king he knew would do. Hello Everyone, Chapter 275 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 369! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 73! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 272 Chapter 272: Smoke [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The Ant King is supreme and shouldn¡¯t care about a human being, or so thought Pouf. But he had to admit, that the Ant King had a special ce for Komugi in his heart. ¡°His majesty asked me to protect her and not let her leave, is it because he wants to defeat her in Chess?¡± Pouf guessed, but he didn¡¯t ask. He just obeyed the order and took Komugi away. Before leaving, Komgi turned to Meruem and asked: ¡°King-sama, can we still y together in the future?¡± The King didn¡¯t answer, but he looked at Komugi with tenderness. ¡®Komugi, wait for me¡­¡¯ Meruem thought, but he said seriously: ¡°We¡¯ll y again when I¡¯m done, Komugi.¡± During the games with Komugi, the king¡¯s character changed a lot. The Ant King held Komugi dearly in his heart. Although she wasn¡¯t strong physically, the power she had in chess was something even he, the Chimera Ant King, recognized. ¡°I will wait for you, King-sama, you must stay safe,¡± Komugi said. In fact, although Komugi couldn¡¯t see due to her blindness, she can still hear everything clearly. She could hear the thundering from outside, and it wasn¡¯t ordinary. The pce was under attack and many buildings were destroyed. However, she couldn¡¯t do anything about it, and could only look forward to ying Chess with Meruem again. After that, Pouf took Komugi and left with her. Watching Komugi leave, Meruem¡¯s face turned gloomy and his aura exploded from his body. If those humans didn¡¯t wreak havoc, then he could be still ying chess with Komugi, but they had to interfere and stop the game. His only thoughts currently were to ughter the humans. Pouf flew in the sky with Komugi quickly, as he was eager to return to the king¡¯s side. This made him unaware that Morel noticed him along with the others outside the pce. When Pouf flew over the destroyed square, he suddenly stopped as the entire ce was covered in smoke, which seemed strange. ¡°This is¡­¡± Pouf frowned. The smoke wasn¡¯t a product of mes, and it just appeared there. When Pouf wanted to pass through, he found that the smoke was like a wall, blocking his way. Pouf immediately realized that this was not normal smoke, but a Nen ability. It was here to prevent the Chimera Ants from leaving the Pce. ¡®The humans now know I¡¯m here then?¡¯ Pouf thought, but he didn¡¯t hesitate and turned around and flew to another part of the square. As the most intelligent of the royal guards, Pouf knew that it wasn¡¯t time to engage in battle with the humans. Although they were annoying, they weren¡¯t ordinary people, but a capable team of strong Nen users. It would take time to deal with them, but he had no such time to waste here. The most urgent task is carrying the King¡¯s order, to take Komugi to safety. The smoke covered arge area, which means that the humans prepared for this for a while now. Pouf wanted to find another way out, but as soon as he moved, he noticed that the white smoke formed a cage and trapped him from going all directions but above. Seeing this, Pouf snorted coldly. Pouf calmed down and looked at the sky. But he suddenly found that the smoke started covering him from above as well, which blocked every path he had. Hello Everyone, Chapter 275 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 369! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 73! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 273 Chapter 273: Morel [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// The square waspletely enveloped in smoke, forming a huge cage. In desperation, Pouf could only rely on his wings to temporarily stay in midair. ¡°Is everything alright, Pouf-san?¡± Komugi felt that Pouf stopped moving and asked. Pouf didn¡¯t answer, since the king wasn¡¯t here, he was toozy to answer Komugi. If it wasn¡¯t for the King¡¯s orders, he would¡¯ve dropped her right now. Although Komugi can¡¯t see, she can feel the indifference from Pouf. So she wisely didn¡¯t ask again. She understood that Pouf wasn¡¯t the same as the ant king, he doesn¡¯t like her, but that was not a problem, since she hates herself as well. In order to get out of the cage as soon as possible, Pouf released his Nen. Although he didn¡¯t have anyone to train him in Nen, he still learned the [En]. He was second only to the Ant king when ites to Nen usage. Just when Pouf released his Nen, he felt a dangerous Aura approaching him. It was undoubtedly a human. With a move from his wings, Pouf dodged the sneak attack. Pouf could tell that there is someone in the smoke, even without seeing him. ¡°Don¡¯t hide, I can feel your location with Nen, a sneak attack is useless against me.¡± Hearing Pouf¡¯s sentence, Morel carrying his pipe came out from the smoke. Pouf¡¯s eyes were fixed on Morel, he knew that the one who attacked him just know wasn¡¯t this guy, but he didn¡¯t say anything. He knew that there are other humans hidden in the smoke, waiting for an opportunity to attack. But Pouf wasn¡¯t worried, since he was confident that they can¡¯t sneak upon him. ¡°Human, did you make the smoke?¡± Pouf stared at Morel and Asked. ¡°That¡¯s right, what you see is made by this big pipe,¡± Morel admitted. This was his Nen Ability, Smoky Jail, as the name implies, it creates a jail made of smoke. Morel could control the smoke to form various shapes as he did currently by forming a cage to trap Pouf. Pouf stared at Morel and said: ¡°Human, do you know how serious the consequences are going to be for trapping me here?¡± ¡°The most you could do is kill me.¡± Morel smiled lightly. Obviously, Morel was already prepared to die bying here. Therefore, he didn¡¯t feel any fear. ¡°Human, if you remove the smoke and let me go, I will spare your life.¡± Pouf said. In the end, he added: ¡°Of course, this includes yourpanions, but the guy who attacked me, and didn¡¯t daree out will die.¡± ¡°Hehe, in that case, I can¡¯t let you leave.¡± Morel smiled before bing serious. Pouf knew there was another person in the smoke, and Morel knew he was talking about Knuckle. Knuckle was currently using Zetsu while hiding in the smoke, so he could hide from Pouf and wait for an opportunity to attack. As for Morel, his task is to use the smoke to trap Pouf and hold him back as much as possible. ¡°Do you think you can trap me here?¡± Seeing that Morel didn¡¯t n to remove the smoke, Pouf¡¯s killing intent exploded out of his body. If it wasn¡¯t for Morel¡¯s strong mentality, he would¡¯ve been defeated just from the Killing Intent. Pouf coldly snorted: ¡°I think you need a considerable degree of Nen to maintain this smoke.¡± Morel was silent because what Pouf said was true, every minute he had to consume about 1 percent of his Nen. He could maintain the cage for half an hour while fighting, or else he would be too tired. Thirty-minute is his limit, and that period of time wasn¡¯t that long, except for Pouf who wanted to execute his King¡¯s order as fast as possible. Therefore, he couldn¡¯t just wait for that and in the end, he attacked morel. Morel was ready to fight and directly defended using his pipe. Hello Everyone, Chapter 275 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 369! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 73! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 274 Chapter 274: Pouf¡¯s Power! [[[This is our official Twitter ount please follow us and we will follow you back! /The1TSO]]]]] //////////////// Pouf moved quickly with his butterfly wings as he attacked Morel. After ten moves, Morel was hit and knocked back. ¡°He¡¯s strong!¡± Morel frowned. As a senior Hunter, Morel was confident in his skills even though he wasn¡¯t good at fighting. But Pouf was stronger and faster than him. Morel realized that he won¡¯t be able to stop Pouf alone. At this moment, Pouf already appeared in front of him again, and Boom! Morel has knocked back again and mmed against the smoke. Before he could calm down, Pouf rushed forward again. When Morel saw this, he just rolled over, in an embarrassing way to avoid Pouf¡¯s kick. ¡°Heuh, that¡¯s dangerous.¡± Morel breathed a sigh of relief as he avoided the kick, but Pouf once again appeared in front of him. Without any way to avoid it, Morel could only wave his pipe and smash it at Pouf. Pouf sneered and directly kicked Morel and sent the pipe flying. Morel¡¯s face changed as he didn¡¯t expect Pouf¡¯s power to be so great. Before he could react, he was pped in the face and his body flew toward the smoke. Morel spat a mouthful of blood. ¡°He¡¯s strong, even if with Ken, I wasn¡¯t able topletely defend. This guy is a monster.¡± Morel was serious now. ¡°Sure enough, with my power, I can only trap him here, it¡¯s impossible to fight him.¡± Pouf couldn¡¯t fully exert his power while holding Komugi, but even then, he can still fight Morel. After all, no matter how much Pouf appeared weak, he was still one of the King¡¯s guards. Morel had almost no strength to fight back and could only rely on the smoke to escape. In this kind of terrain, he could dodge Pouf as much as he wanted. ¡°Humph, besides trapping me here, do you have anything else? I¡¯m disappointed.¡± Pouf sneered. ¡°Smoke fist.¡± Morel blew his pipe and a huge fist formed behind Pouf. Boom! The fist hit Pouf from behind, however, it was too weak to cause any damage to Pouf. ¡°Smoke Spear!¡± In order to increase the power of the smoke, Morel used it to condense a long spear and stabbed at Pouf. Pouf easily dodged and attacked Morel again. ¡°Purple Haze Soldiers.¡± Facing Pouf¡¯s attack, Morel dodged by making a few smoke clones and retreated before making a small cage and locking Pouf inside. Pouf was helpless for a while since the smoke was indestructible. Seeing Morel locked up, Morel breathed a sigh of relief and sat down on the ground. Using the smoke caused him to consume too much energy The trapped Pouf wasn¡¯t angry, he had a calm expression on his face. Morel saw him pping his wings rapidly, and a powder-like substance spread out. Once that powder is inhaled, it can hypnotize his opponent. This is one of his Nen Abilities, Spiritual Message. Although Morel didn¡¯t know about the hypnotic effect, he was well aware of the danger. At least, he knew that he need to make sure not to inhale the powder. He didn¡¯t know if it was poison or something else, but he knew it was dangerous. All in all, he was vignt and didn¡¯t inhale the powder. In fact, the scales didn¡¯t just have a hypnotic effect, Once theye in contact with someone¡¯s aura flow, they make it more distinct, allowing Pouf to analyze the blend of 30 emotional patterns and, through them, formte conjectures about the opponent¡¯s psychological state, personality, and thoughts, so he can formte strategies ordingly. With the scales, Pouf could sense Morel¡¯s emotions, which were alertness, awareness, and confidence. Alertness meant he was alert against the scales and the danger it posed. Awareness meant that he was aware that he can die at any moment here and was ready for it. Confidence meant that he was confident about the smoke he created. The ratio was two, three, and five. With alertness as the lowest 20%, and awareness at 30%. This was because Morel thought that Pouf is trapped inside the cage and so he dropped his guard. Hello Everyone, Chapter 275 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 369! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 73! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 275 Chapter 275: Scale Powder ¡°Human, let me tell you my name. I¡¯m Shiaipouf, one of the royal guards of his majesty, the king.¡± While Pouf was inside the cage and unable to get out temporarily, he decided to introduce himself to Morel. Morel didn¡¯t reply as he sat down on the ground with his pipe, his eyes fixed on Pouf. Through the scale powder, Pouf found out that Morel¡¯s Nen had new fluctuations. ¡°Alertness was 20% before, but now, it was 40%. In other words, he is more cautious and doesn¡¯t want to reveal anything about himself, not even his name.¡± Thinking about this, Pouf said: ¡°Human, do you think I¡¯m introducing myself to deliberately make you speak and inhale the scale powder? If you think so, it¡¯s a misunderstanding on your part. It doesn¡¯t matter to me if you tell me or not, I¡¯m not interested anyway.¡± However, Morel¡¯s thinking was right, Pouf was trying to make Morel speak and inhale the Scale powder and hypnotize him. But Morel was too cautious and didn¡¯t want to open his mouth at all, he also used smoke to wrap his entire body, forming a protective suit with only his eyes exposed. With the protective suit, Morel didn¡¯t increase his defense but prevented the scale powder from getting to him. In order to make Morel breathe in the scale powder, Pouf spoke again. ¡°Human, aren¡¯t you curious about this human girl beside me?¡± Morel nced at Komugi on the ground and said nothing. Because An already told them about Komugi. Not only that, but Morel also learned from An that Komugi had a special ce in the Ant King¡¯s heart. He also told them not to hurt her if unnecessary. Therefore, Morel¡¯s emotions didn¡¯t even flicker at Pouf¡¯s words. Through the powder, Pouf could tell that Morel wasn¡¯t even slightly curious about Komugi. In other words, Komugi didn¡¯t qualify as a bargaining chip. Originally, Pouf wanted to threaten Morel with Komugi¡¯s safety and make him release the smoke cage. But unfortunately, Morel didn¡¯t care about the girl. Therefore, even if Pouf threatened him to lift the smoke or she dies, he would let her die without a second thought. And Pouf also knew he can¡¯t really kill Komugi. Not only did not kill her, but he had to protect her. This is Pouf¡¯s current mission. Therefore, Pouf could only think of other ways to get out of the smoke. ¡°Human, do you think that mere smoke can stop me?¡± The next moment, Pouf released his Nen. A ck aura surrounded Pouf forming a ck shell. Morel was extremely alert at this development as he didn¡¯t know what the shell is. Meanwhile at the Pce. Boom! Boom! It has been three minutes since An made the Thunderclouds, and currently, the entire pce was destroyed. Every single building was in ruins and finally, the thunderclouds disappeared since itpleted its mission. The Ant King and Noro left the pce before it copsed. ¡°King, I¡¯m sorry, I failed to protect the pce.¡± Noro knelt on one knee in front of Meruem. The Ant King looked expressionlessly and said: ¡°I know that you¡¯ve done your best.¡± ¡°King, what should I do know? Please give an order.¡± Noro asked. The king didn¡¯t say a thing as he looked at the sky. Although it was dark, the king could see a figure thousand meters above them. The figure¡¯s body was flickering with blue electric energy. An also noticed the king and both stared at each other from a distance. ¡°I found him, the guy who destroyed my pce.¡± The Ant King said. Noro also noticed An in the sky and said: ¡°King, Caesar already went up to take care of that guy.¡± ¡°If I had the ability to fly, I would¡¯ve gone there myself to kill him.¡± Said the Ant King. Unfortunately, the king can¡¯t fly, even if he is the strongest of the ants, he can¡¯t fly. Therefore, the ant king couldn¡¯t attack An who was far up in the sky. ¡°To be able to create a thundercloud and cause such chaos, that person isn¡¯t ordinary.¡± The king said seriously. Somehow, the king felt worried. The kind of worry that stems from facing the unknown. ¡°There is no need for worry, My King, Caesar will take care of him,¡± Noro assured with great confidence in hispanion. At this time, An noticed a ck shadow rushing toward him quickly, and that shadow was none other than Caesar. Hello Everyone, Chapter 276 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 369! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 73! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 276 Chapter 276: Choice ¡°Oh? You¡¯re worthy of being a royal guard, to actually fly to this height.¡± Caesar fluttered his wings and rushed forward with red fists pointing at An. ¡°Damn you human, you¡¯re done!¡± Caesar roared angrily. His fist seemed to pierce the air barrier as It moved toward An, while thetter didn¡¯t know if he would be immune if he turned into an element. Of course, An wasn¡¯t worried that Caesar could actually hit him, because he was much faster than thetter. It wasn¡¯t difficult to dodge, and even if he didn¡¯t, he can take the hit easily. An suddenly heard the notification of his system. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Retreat from the fight and don¡¯t engage with Caesar for now. Reward: Three thousand Nen points.] [2: Fight and kill Caesar. Reward: Senzu Bean.] The second reward was without a doubt better, and with An¡¯s current power, he didn¡¯t need to retreat or escape from Caesar. Therefore, An picked the first option, and with a sh, he turned into lightning and easily avoided Caesar, and appeared a few meters behind him. ¡°Idiot, I¡¯m here.¡± An taunted. Seeing his attack fail, Caesar was furious as he turned around and rushed at An again. His wings fluttered increasing his speed as he attacked again. ¡°Bastard!¡± Caesar roared as he got faster and faster, however, An was a lightning man, so almost no one here can actually contend with speed against him. Caesar waspletely outmatched as An dodged all of his attempts. ¡°You¡¯re too slow, can¡¯t you move faster?¡± An taunted again, deliberately making Caesar angry. ¡°Damn you.¡± Although Caesar was angry, he clearly realized that whether it was speed, reflex, or attack speed, An was better. He understood at that moment that even though An was a human, he was strong enough to fight him. So even though he was angry, he didn¡¯t attack mindlessly. Suddenly his body started changing and the two wings on his back became four which doubled his speed. Caesar waved his wings and suddenly rushed at An, which took thetter by surprise as he never thought this guy¡¯s speed can actually be doubled so easily. With his current speed, Caesar finally could fight with An head-on. An was finally interested in the fight now. He was no longer simply dodging attacks, but fighting back as well. Sonic booms exploded in the sky due to their fight. Caesar¡¯s method was simple, he just use his fists as weapons. He didn¡¯t have any fancy moves orplicated techniques. Simple but effective, which made him fight with all of his power. His fists were strong enough to shatter boulders and crack the ground, which is the power derived from his strong genes. This made Caesar think that as long as he hit An, thetter would die or at least be seriously injured. The echo of their fight reached the ground as if two gods were battling in the sky. Caesar underestimated An¡¯s power and thought that thetter just had lightning speed. An was stronger than Caesar could imagine which made thetter very shocked and frightened. He never thought that the humans he looked down on so much could get so strong. In this fight, An only used his Lightning powers to fight, without using any other power. He used neither Haki nor any other powers. The abilities he has shown till now were just the tip of the iceberg, and if Caesar knew, he would go crazy. Hello Everyone, Chapter 277 is free on Patreon!Enjoy <> Here Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 371! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 76! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 277 Chapter 277: Power of Wrath! Boom! After exchanging strikes hundreds of times, Caesar finally was kicked by An. The kick was strong enough to send Caesar a hundred meters back before he spat a mouthful of blood. Caesar¡¯s eyes opened in disbelief. A mere human could make him bleed. ¡°AAAAAAAAAAAH!¡± Nen exploded out of Caesar¡¯s body as the shame turned into fury and wrath. The Nen released was crimson red with a vicious feel to it. It seems that Caesar turnedpletely into a monster. He was faster than before. His power almost doubled. Caesar turned into a crimson light before he instantly appeared in front of An. Caesar punched, An didn¡¯t shy away and met him with a punch of his own. However, this time, An was pushed back, but without any injuries. An could tell that Caesar was stronger, far stronger than before, and all of this was due to his wrath and fury. With anger, his Nen became stronger along with his body. This was Caesar¡¯s unique ability as a royal guard, the power of wrath. At this moment, Caesar once again attacked. An snorted coldly: ¡°You¡¯re overestimating yourself. Thunder Explosion.¡± Blue electric current circled An¡¯s fist as it met with Caesar¡¯s. The electric current directly passed through An¡¯s palm into Caesar¡¯s body, covering him in electric sparks. He hovered in the air with an open mouth as he was temporarily paralyzed. His right fist was dripping with blood. ¡°Damn human, you dare hurt me again!!¡± Caesar was furious, disregarding his injured hand, he angrily rushed toward An. An dodged his attacks one after the other before saying coldly: ¡°You¡¯re indeed fast, but unfortunately, you¡¯re far behind me.¡± An counter attacked. ¡°50,000,000 Volt!¡± An¡¯s wrist transformed into lightning and a bolt broke out and mmed into the angry ant. Although Caesar was vignt, he wasn¡¯t fast enough to dodge the thunderbolt. With a bang, Caesar¡¯s body was covered in lightning. The high voltage made Caesar grimace in pain. After a few seconds, the numbness subsided. Caesar wasn¡¯t seriously injured, but his reaction speed decreased by arge margin. ¡°Is this the influence of the lightning?¡± Caesar frowned. ¡°What¡¯s wrong, are you afraid?¡± An appeared ten meters away from Caesar. At such a close distance, Caesar was confident in rushing in front of his opponent andunching a quick attack. As soon as he finished thinking, he moved instantly and decisively. An was prepared as he appeared close to Caesar deliberately. Caesar¡¯s fist quickly moved toward An, who already punched at the former with hands full of lightning. Boom! Boom! Caesar¡¯s red Nen and An¡¯s blue lightning formed a sphere and lightened the dark sky. It was a confrontation between two races, a battle of supremacy. The next second, Caesar¡¯s body flew out of the sphere. He couldn¡¯t stop himself from moving back hundreds of meters. After finally stopping using his four wings, his face appeared quite pale. His nose, ears, and mouth overflowed with purple blood. Because of this injury, his body seemed to be unstable. ¡°Damn it, why is this guy so strong?!¡± Caesar was a royal guard of the ant king. He didn¡¯t believe that a mere human could confront him using power. But after he used everything, he was indeed pushed away and suffered quite the injuries as well. In other words, An was capable of killing him. Of course, if it was just pure physical power, An wouldn¡¯t be his match, after all, he is limited to the power of the human body. However, after using the Rumble Rumble fruit, An¡¯s strength surpassed Caesar¡¯s. At this moment, Caesar¡¯s body once again changed, his wings fused together and turned into huge dark red wings. His arms multiplied and four new ones appeared, which counts as six arms now. This is Caesar¡¯s new form, the six-armed, two-winged devil. His speed increased along with his power. ¡°This is my final form, you¡¯re dead, human.¡± Caesar¡¯s face was hideous, and his body released a very terrifying aura. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 375! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 80! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 278 Chapter 278: Completely Crushed With a p of his wings, Caesar rushed toward An with extreme speed, and three hands punched directly, causing gusts of wind to reach An before the fists. An felt Caesar¡¯s change and became serious. With the speed of the Rumble Rumble Fruit and Observation Haki, Anpletely predicted Caesar¡¯s moves and dodged them. Caesar¡¯s attack continued, but no matter what he did, he couldn¡¯t touch An. Even when his speed and power increased exponentially, he still couldn¡¯t match lightning speed. An¡¯s speed seemed faster than lightning due to the fact he predicted Caesar¡¯s attacks, which prevented thetter froming close tonding a hit. ¡°Damn it, Damn it, AAAAAAAH!!¡± Caesar¡¯s wings vibrated as he elerated toward An, as he couldn¡¯t think straight and wanted to Kill An at all cost. An didn¡¯t dodge this time, no, It would be better to say that he was toozy to do so. Looking at Caesar rushing toward him, he raised his right hand emotionlessly. Lightning flickered in his wrist as it mmed toward Caesar who didn¡¯t expect this at all. The lightning scorched Caesar¡¯s body ck. Obviously, this attack dealt considerable damage to the royal guard. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s get rid of this guy quickly.¡± An looked at the injured Caesar in the distance as thought. With a sh, he appeared in front of Caesar, and with an open palm, he struck. ¡°Lightning Palm!¡± Such a close-up high voltage strike caused serious injury to Caesar who spat purple blood. Each time he was struck by lightning, his reflex and speed were reduced. ¡°60,000,000 Volt, Vari!¡± Boom! Caesar¡¯s body waspletely paralyzed for a short time, he wasn¡¯t able to move a muscle. He started falling down, however, An didn¡¯t stop attacking. He wanted to take care of Caesar here since once thetter return to the ground, the king will be waiting and it will be troublesome to get rid of Caesar. ¡°60,000,000 Volt, Laser!¡± Laser formed in An¡¯s hand as he shot it toward Caesar, instantly severing his hands. However, even so, Caesar was still alive. His body was that powerful and his defenses were that strong. It wasn¡¯t easy to kill him. An didn¡¯t stop attacking as lightning attacks continued forming and hitting Caesar¡¯s body. The shes of lights seemed like shooting stars from down below. Noro could see Caesar being beaten and crushed without any power to fight back. When the Ant King saw this, he clenched his fists. The power An showed made him want to fight and his blood boiled with battle intent. ¡°I didn¡¯t imagine that amongst the humans, there is someone that strong.¡± Meruem sighed, amazed by the disy of power the human showed. Noro, standing beside his king, looked at this scene gloomily. ¡°King, let me do it,¡± Noro said. Hearing this, The Ant King nced at Noro and said: ¡°To be honest, you¡¯re not his opponent.¡± ¡°No, King, I will definitively kill that guy,¡± Noro assured. The King Said coldly: ¡°I¡¯m afraid that I can¡¯t believe you. You as strong as Caesar, and now, you could see what happened to Caesar.¡± Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 375! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 80! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 279 Chapter 279: Escape Soon, Noro noticed that there was a huge cloud of smoke on the other side of the Pce. The smoke enveloped the entire destroyed square. He noticed it for a while now, but he didn¡¯t leave the King¡¯s side. But right now, he smelt something strange but familiar. ¡°Is Pouf trapped in the smoke?¡± Noro frowned. When he tried to get close to the cloud of smoke to see what was inside, he found that the smoke was substantial, not just gas. ¡°Really, the humans have some troublesome abilities.¡± Noro frowned, as this cloud of smoke was obviously not simple. Since he can¡¯t get in normally, he will just breakthrough. Taking a deep breath, Noro raised his hand which changed into a giant w as he tore a hole inside. But soon, the smoke closed the torn opening. Meanwhile, inside the cage, Pouf split his body into thousands of thousands of clones. Each clone was the size of a cell. He slowly but surely moved out of the smoke cage Morel set. After sessfully escaping the cage, Pouf formed his body once again. As for Komugi, she was still inside the smoke cage. Although his orders were to take Komugi to safety, at the moment, Pouf was more concerned about the king¡¯s safety. Moreover, He believed that the humans won¡¯t endanger Komugi since she was a human as well. Thinking about this, Pouf decided to return to the Ant King¡¯s side. Seeing the pce destroyed and the king not there, the only thought Pouf had was to find his king. The usually calm Pouf was in a state of self-me as he felt that he failed his duty as the king¡¯s guard. The only thought he had right now was to find the king as soon as possible and protect him. Absolutely nothing can happen to the king, no matter what or who he had to face, he won¡¯t let anything happen. Just as Pouf was going to find the king, he saw Noro trying to destroy the smoke cage below. He quickly moved to his side and asked eagerly: ¡°Why are you here, Noro, where is the King?¡± Seeing Pouf, Noro breathed a sigh of relief and said: ¡°I thought you were trapped inside and came to save you.¡± Pouf replied: ¡°I was indeed trapped inside, but I got out.¡± ¡°I see.¡± Noro nodded. ¡°You didn¡¯t answer me, where is the king?¡± Asked Pouf again. ¡°The king is preparing to fight,¡± Noro replied. ¡°What did you say?¡± Pouf frowned. Noro said again: ¡°The king preparing to deal with the humans who destroyed the pce by himself. He wants to fight him one on one.¡± ¡°A one-on-one duel?¡± Pouf was surprised: ¡°How could a human face the King alone?¡± Noro shrugged and said: ¡°That¡¯s the truth, King wanted to fight him.¡± ¡°What?¡± Pouf was even more surprised. The supreme king was provoked by a mere human, this was absurd. ¡°I wanted to stay by the king¡¯s side, but the king asked me to deal with the other intruders and didn¡¯t let me stay there.¡± Noro sighed. Obviously, he wanted to stay by his king¡¯s side. ¡°What about Caesar?¡± Pouf asked. Noro was about to answer, but suddenly a loud bang stopped him. Afterward, Pouf and Noro saw a figure falling to the ground into a huge pit. ¡°Who was that who fell down from the sky?¡± Pouf asked. He had a very bad feeling about this. ¡°It¡¯s Caesar,¡± Noro said with a gloomy face. ¡°What?¡± Pouf was a little surprised. Pouf was trapped in the smoke cage and didn¡¯t see what happened outside, including Caesar going after An and the fight afterward. Caesar waspletely crushed by An and the sorry sight in front of him was the result of that. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 375! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 82! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 280 Chapter 280: Team Up Above the sky, another sh of lightning struck down into the pit Caesar was inside. ¡°Damn, that guy wants to kill Caesar!¡± Noro clenched his fists angrily. ¡°What are you still doing, go up and help.¡± Pouf said urgently. ¡°No, I can¡¯t go over there,¡± Noro replied. ¡°Why?¡± Pouf couldn¡¯t believe his ears and asked: ¡°Are you afraid?¡± Noro shook his head and said: ¡°That guy who defeated Caesar, is also the one who destroyed the pce.¡± Pouf immediately understood and said seriously: ¡°That is to say, that guy is the king¡¯s target, right?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, the king said he will take care of that guy, and our task is taking care of the other humans,¡± Noro exined. Hearing this, Pouf stayed silent for a while before saying: ¡°Okay then, let¡¯s take care of those guys as soon as possible and get back to the King¡¯s side.¡± As a result, Pouf and Noro started the humans there. Their targets were everyone except An. At this moment, the first guy Pouf wanted to kill was Morel. Right now, Morel was still staring at the shell left by Pouf inside the cage. After a while, he finally realized that something was wrong. Because he didn¡¯t feel any aura from Pouf¡¯s body inside the cage. Along with Pouf¡¯s shell, there was Komugi who is currently unconscious. Morel didn¡¯t know how Pouf escaped, but he could only regroup with the others. He also knew that it was basically impossible to trap Pouf again. Morel directly contacted Knov with his phone, and thetter opened his four-dimensional mansion to take him in. Following that, Morel lifted the smoke and was about to leave with Knuckle and Shoot. Seeing the Smoke lifting, Pouf and Noro moved quickly to attack Morel. Before, they couldn¡¯t attack because the smoke prevented them from entering, but now, the smoke is gone and they can attack. The three of them immediately discovered Pouf and Noro rushing toward them. ¡°Master, here theye,¡± Knuckle said. When morel saw this, he immediately took his pipe and nned on making the smoke once again. However, Pouf and Noro were too fast. Almost a second and they already were in front of the three. When Morel saw this, he could only wave his pipe in a hurry. Pouf sneered and easily moved sideways before kicking morel and snatching his pipe. ¡°This is bad.¡± Morel couldn¡¯t make the smoke without his pipe, which means he was deprived of his Nen ability. ¡°Master!!¡± Knuckle and Shoot were furious when they saw their master kicked and his weapon snatched away. However, before they could move and support him, Noro was already in front of them with his giant w hands and tried to grab both of them. Both immediately moved back. ¡°I will deal with both of you.¡± Noro said with murderous eyes. Knuckle and Shoot¡¯s expression turned gloomy. The Nen disyed by the guards was too powerful, both of thembined couldn¡¯t hope to match this monster. The two of them knew if they don¡¯t fight together, all of them will perish here. ¡°Master, hold on, we will help you soon.¡± Knuckle and Shoot who were blocked by Noro instantly released their Nen in order to support Morel as soon as possible. Shoot was in charge of the support and Knuckle was the head-on attacker. The two cooperated with each other to deal with Noro. Morel on the other side got up and saw Pouf in front of him. ¡°Humph, without your pipe, you can¡¯t create smoke and trap me.¡± Pouf sneered. ¡°Damn! Give that back.¡± Morel tried to snatch the pipe back, but he couldn¡¯t match Pouf. Pouf once again kicked Morel. Although he wasn¡¯t built for offense, Pouf was still strong as one of the King¡¯s guards. Morel used Ken to defend against the Kick, he was still sent flying and spat out a mouthful of blood. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 375! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 82! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 281 Chapter 281: Injuring Pouf ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t kill you quickly,¡± Pouf said with a smug face. He was ready to torture Morel and kill him slowly. However, at this moment, a figure quickly rushed from behind. As fast as a bolt of lightning, no one could decern the identity of this figure. Pouf¡¯s face changed as he sensed the threat behind him. This figure belonged to non-other than Killua. Killua was in his God Speed state, and Pouf couldn¡¯t respond to that kind of speed. ¡°Lightning Palm!¡± The blue current passed from Killua¡¯s palms into Pouf¡¯s body. This technique is essentially changing Nen to an Electric current and focusing that current into the palm, stunning whoever was hit directly. Pouf was strong which is why he was only paralyzed for 0.5 seconds. But that was enough for the second figure to approach Pouf. The second person was Gon, and Pouf could only stare at the former¡¯s glowing fisting closer. ¡°Damn it! I can¡¯t move my body!¡± Pouf for the first time looked horrified. He could feel Gon¡¯s fist containing an astounding amount of Energy. Receiving that hit would be disastrous. In the next second, Gon¡¯s fist mmed into Pouf. Since Gon was an Enhancer, his physical body was strong, and his Nen enhanced that greatly, adding to that the effect of his Jajanken, it would be quite the punch. The only disadvantage of the Jajanken is the charging time and theck of defense when it¡¯s deployed. And since Killua sessfully paralyzed Pouf temporarily, Gon got the opportunity to attack without risk. Pouf was sent flying in an instant. ¡°Great!¡± Killua said in delight. The cooperation between him and Gon went perfectly. When Pouf was focusing on Morel, he was hiding not far away and observing the battlefield. He immediately seized the opportunity tounch a quick attack when Pouf wasn¡¯t paying attention and paralyzed him, creating a chance for Gon to attack. The entire surprise attack took a few seconds. Pouf flew tens of meters away before he stopped. At the same time, Gon¡¯s Nen seemed to diminish by half at least. He was kneeling on the floor with a tired expression. Killua saw this and stepped beside him and asked: ¡°Gon, are you okay?¡± Gon said weakly: ¡°That punch I threw took almost 90% of my Nen. I¡¯m very tired and I may need a while to recover¡­ Sorry to trouble you, Killua.¡± ¡°It¡¯s okay, Gon, you¡¯ve done a great job.¡± Killua said: ¡°Leave the rest to me.¡± Pouf took a while to get up from the ground. He spat out a mouthful of blood and his entire face was pale. The Nen in his body decreased a lot from where it was before. ¡°Damn that Kid, he actually has such a terrifying attack.¡± Pouf¡¯s face was pale. It was the first time he suffered such a severe injury. A feeling of shame overwhelmed him, he was ashamed and angry at being injured by a mere human. ¡°Damn it! I will kill that kid!¡± Pouf raised his head and looked at Gon. His killing intent flowed like crazy, but Gon didn¡¯t even flinch at that. Killua said to Morel: ¡°Morel-san, you protect Gon, and I will deal with this guy.¡± ¡°Okay, no problem.¡± Morel pulled back his pipe and then made a smoke ring to protect himself and Gon. Morel can guarantee that Pouf won¡¯t be able to get in for a while. During that time, Gon can rest and leave Pouf to Killua. Pouf snorted coldly when he saw the smoke ring appearing to protect Gon. He didn¡¯t lose his mind in anger but was extremely calm instead. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 375! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 83! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 282 Chapter 282: Noro After getting hit by Gon, Pouf knew that his injuries would affect his performance, so he didn¡¯t rush to attack and chose other offensive methods. Pouf spread his butterfly wings and quickly flew up 100 meters in the air. ¡°What is that guy doing?¡± Killua frowned. Pouf flew in the night sky and activated his scale powder and released arge amount of it. The scale powder can¡¯t be seen by the naked eye, and if a human breathes it in, he will be hypnotized. But its main effect is showing someone¡¯s aura flow, allowing Pouf to analyze the blend of 30 emotional patterns and through them, formte a conjecture about the opponent¡¯s psychological state, personality, and thoughts. At this time, Pouf could read Killua¡¯s emotions, which currently stood 50% vignce and 50% confidence. Killua was confident in his ability. Through this, Pouf knew that Killua wasn¡¯t a simple guy. Coupled with the previous attack, Pouf guessed that Killua could turn his Nen into an electric current and attack with it as well as enhance his speed Inside the smoke ring, Morel warned Killua: ¡°Killua, don¡¯t inhale the scale powder.¡± Killua nodded in understanding, but there was too much of that powder and Killua identally inhaled some. Soon, he started feeling dizzy. Killua knew that he was poisoned. ¡°Oops, this powder has some hypnotic effect.¡± Killua¡¯s expression changed as he quickly moved away from the area covered in the scale powder. Midair, Pouf noticed that Killua inhaled some scale powder and the hypnotism started taking effect and directlyunched an attack. Seeing Pouf rushing toward him, Killua could only activate his godspeed and move away. Pouf chased after him, vowing to kill him. Killua didn¡¯t choose to have a head-on fight with Pouf. He was a Zoldyck, a family of assassins, and with his childhood training, his body can adapt to any kind of poison. As long as he can manage for a few minutes, his body will adapt to the Scale Powder. Therefore, he could only escape till it happens. On another battlefield, Knuckle and Shoot teamed up against Noro. Noro was a royal guard, which means he is very strong. And unlike Pouf who prefers not to engage inbat, Noro was mainly abat Chimera Ant. His giant ws held great offense and defense along with his physical strength. As long as hends a hit with those ws, his opponent will die or at least be severely injured. His Nen was multiple times stronger than both Knuckle and Shootbined. In a head-on fight, Knuckle and Shoot can¡¯t stand a chance against Noro. Therefore, they could only start fighting Noro while putting a safe distance between them. ¡°Damn it, that giant is very troublesome.¡± Knuckle frowned. Shoot said in a deep voice: ¡°I will find a way to create an opportunity and you use you¡¯re Hakoware on him.¡± ¡°Ok, I understand.¡± Knuckle nodded. Knuckle¡¯s Nen ability was unique, he summons a mascot called Amortizing Power Redirector and attaches it to his opponent. With each blow from Knuckle, he would lend his aura to whoever has Amortizing Power Redirector, and each time his opponent hits knuckle that aura is sent back. Every 10 seconds, the aura will increase 10% as interest. The attacks from both knuckle and his opponent won¡¯t cause any damage only lending or returning Nen. When the opponent¡¯s Nen is below what Knuckle¡¯s lent, it will cause Bankruptcy. Bankruptcy would cause the Amortizing Power Redirector to change into an Individual Ren Suppressor, causing the opponent to be in a continuous state of Zetsu for 30 days. And can only be removed by an exorcist or when Knuckle is rendered unconscious. Once Noro can¡¯t use Nen, Knuckle was confident that he can deal with his head on. However, the current situation was very far from being able to evennd a hit on Noro. Noro¡¯s ws could only attack at a distance of five meters and even if he expanded them to the maximum length, it would only reach ten meters. So, Knuckle and Shoot can¡¯t be hit if they kept their distance, but they can¡¯t attack him as well. So unless they close the distance, neither Noro nor Knuckle and Shoot could attack. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 379! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 85! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 283 Chapter 283: Potcin To attach his Amortizing Power Redirector on Noro, Knuckle needed tond a hit, but unfortunately, it wasn¡¯t that easy, since Noro was a Royal guard, a monster amidst monsters. With his own power, it would be almost impossible, that¡¯s why he needed his partner¡¯s help. His partner was Shoot, a fellow disciple under Morel¡¯s teaching. The two were partners for years and had great teamwork. Even if they were facing a monster, if they set their mindset right, they could fight Noro. Shoot was a maniptor, and he uses a technique called Disembodied hands, which is represented by three hands that Shoot can control freely. Shoot¡¯s main Nen ability is Hotel Rafflesia, which allows him to shrink any body part touched with his Disembodied hands and seal it into a birdcage. Even though somebody¡¯s parts can be sealed, there is no actual damage to the target when he is missing one. For example, if he hit his target¡¯s eyes, he can seal his eyes and seal them, rendering his opponent blind, but it isn¡¯t permanent, because as soon as the Hotel Rafflesia is released, the eyes would return to their owner. For now, Knuckle could only rely on Noro to give him an advantage tond a strike. Shoot and Knuckle kept retreating while Noro followed after them trying to kill them. ¡°We don¡¯t have an advantage in an open space, we need to lead him to the forest,¡± Knuckle said. ¡°Yeah.¡± Shoot agreed. Directly, both of them headed to the forest near the pce. After entering the forest, Knuckle and Shoot started gueri warfare against Noro. Although Noro was strong, he was helpless in this situation. Many trees were destroyed by Noro, but to no avail, as he couldn¡¯t hit his targets. ¡­ Finally, after some time, One of Shoot¡¯s hands finallynded on Noro¡¯s right eye. Suddenly, the eye disappeared from Noro¡¯s head and appeared in the cage due to Hotel Rafflesia. Since Noro lost an eye, he had a blind spot due to the missing chunk in vision, which made it easier for Knuckle tond a hit. The punch was strong, but what puzzled Noro, is the fact that he didn¡¯t feel any pain, instead, he felt like he was given Nen instead. ¡°Huh?¡± While wondering what¡¯s going on, Noro¡¯s single eye noticed something strange flying next to him. It was a fat doll. ¡°What¡¯s this?¡± Noro frowned and noticed the number 500 appearing on the Doll¡¯s forehead. ¡°It¡¯s time, counting added Interest.¡± The doll beside Noro smiled as it said. Noro noticed that the number disyed on the forehead of the doll increased from 500 to 550. ¡°Good, Potclean started calcting the Interest.¡± Not far away, Knuckle said in joy. Since the Amortizing Power Redirector was attached, it was only a matter of time before Noro would enter bankruptcy. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 379! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 85! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 284 Chapter 284: Hotel Rafflesia The fat Doll floating beside Noro was called Potclean, a type of Nen manifestation that calctes the Nen interest to whomever it was attached to. When Knuckle is 50 meters away from Noro, Potclean would add 10% interest every 10 seconds. And when the distance between them is more than 50 meters, Potclean won¡¯t calcte and temporarily stop the interest. Additionally, Potclean won¡¯t just calcte the interest from the base value, but instead, the interest will be calcted by thest disyed value. When the Aura bnce is turned toward Knuckle, then Noro would go into bankruptcy and Potclean will be Toritaten, a debt collector that follows the debtor for 30 days, forcing him into a state of Zetsu. Before the debt is paid back to Knuckle, Noro¡¯s attack won¡¯t cause any damage, instead, they would give Knuckle Nen. Once the debt is paid, Potclean would disappear. ¡°Damn thing, get out of here.¡± Noro who was originally angry at the loss of his eye, was even more upset when he saw the fat doll floating beside his head. He tried hitting it but it didn¡¯t work. Potclean won¡¯t be lifted unless Knuckle is unconscious or a strong exorcist lift lifted it and even then, it would take too much out of him. ¡°It¡¯s useless, no matter how much you attack, it won¡¯t go away.¡± Not far away, Knuckle exined. Noro snorted and immediately, his target changed as he moved straight toward Knuckle. Since he can¡¯t get rid of the doll, he believed that as long as the one who used it is dead, it would disappear. Knuckle ran away instead of facing Noro. Knuckle knew that Noro is strong, and if he was hit this early since Potclean was attached to him, the debt will be paid with just one hit. Therefore, Knuckle ran away desperately. A Lot of trees were destroyed around them. Knuckle was scurrying around the woods without a single thought to retaliate. Noro behind him was doing his best tond a hit, but Knuckle was just faster and more flexible. And although Knuckle was strong in closebat, facing a monster like Noro was disadvantageous. Since Noro was hit by Amortizing Power Redirector, there was no need for a frontal confrontation. Knuckle was confident that he can escape, which made it difficult for Noro tond a hit. In the next second, Noro changed his form from giant ws to normal-sized ws. Although the destructive power is reduced in this form, he was faster and more agile. In a sh, Noro appeared in front of Knuckle. ¡°Fast!¡± Knuckle was taken aback. Unexpectedly, his opponent¡¯s speed increased so much as he reduced the size of his ws. ¡°I can¡¯t escape.¡± Knuckle showed a terrified expression. Knuckle felt a huge forceing toward him, and suddenly he flew back and hit several trees before he stopped. Afterward, Potclean disappeared from behind Noro. This meant that Noro paid all the Nen back. Although he didn¡¯t take damage, Potclean disappeared and if he was to be hit again, he might die. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 379! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 85! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 285: Kite’s Support Chapter 285: Kite¡¯s Support Noro took advantage of the situation and stuck Knuckle, sending him flying again. Knuckle spat blood as he hit the ground. Although he used Ken for defense, Noro¡¯s power was just too much for him. Noro wanted to quickly attack once again and end Knuckles. While Noro¡¯s w was heading toward Knuckle to finish him off, Shoot arrived at thest moment and saved him. Shoot controlled his three hands and attacked Noro, who evaded two of them, but thest one managed to hit his left w. Noro¡¯s ws were hit best attack and defense, and since Shoot managed to hit one of them, he can seal them in his Hotel Rafflesia. Losing a w was like losing a weapon to Noro, and it would definitively affect hisbat power. This irritated him greatly, and coupled with his right eye, he was sending killing intent in waves at Shoot. He ignored the critically injured Knuckle and headed toward Shoot, attacking with his right w. Shoot tried his best to move away and dodge Noro¡¯s attacks. While dodging, he was also looking for opportunities to attack. Although Noro¡¯s left w and right eye were missing, he wasn¡¯t weak and shouldn¡¯t be underestimated. Especially now that he is enraged. Shoot was doing his best, dodging and attacking at the same time. Noro dodged the hands, but at thest second, one of them touched his left eye. Suddenly everything turned ck as both eyes were sealed inside Shoot¡¯s Hotel Rafflesia. But while sealing that eye, Shoot was hit and was sent flying, and spat arge mouthful of blood. Noro didn¡¯t take advantage of the situation this time, because unlike before, he couldn¡¯t see anymore. To some extent, he was blind. If he can¡¯t deal with the Hotel Rafflesia ability, then he will remain blind forever, and the easiest way to get rid of this ability is killing Shoot. However, since he is currently blind, he won¡¯t be able to find Shoot and could only detect Nen. Not far away, Both Shoot and Knuckle were lying on the ground, seriously injured and their mobility was greatly reduced. Noro approached them, and both tried to stand up and continue fighting, but it was very difficult to even stand up now. If they don¡¯t get treated quickly, they might even die because of blood loss from the w¡¯s wounds. ¡°You guys will die now!¡± Noro relied on Nen detection, the circle known as EN to find Knuckle and Shoot, andunched his attack. At this moment, a strong sh hit Noro. ¡°Who¡¯s there?¡± Both Knuckle and Shoot were taken aback. Then, they saw a figure slowlying over with a huge scythe This person was Kite, and that sh came from Kite¡¯s scythe. Seeing Kite, Both Knuckle and Shoot sighed in relief. ¡°Sorry, I¡¯mte,¡± Kite said. ¡°No, you came just in time.¡± Shoot replied. ¡°Yeah, if you didn¡¯te, we might¡¯ve died just now,¡± Knuckle said. Shoot then said: ¡°That monster¡¯s eyes and one of his ws are sealed in Hotel Rafflesia, so He¡¯s fighting power is greatly reduced. You should be able to defeat him.¡± ¡°It¡¯s up to you now, Kite,¡± Knuckle said. ¡°Well, leave it to me.¡± Kite didn¡¯t say anything else and just nodded. Although Noro temporarily lost his eyes, he was still a strong opponent. Immediately after, Kite and Noro started their fight. The two shed head-on before jumping back, pushing down the surrounding trees from the collision. Kite held his scythe, not afraid of Noro¡¯s w. Normally, Kite wouldn¡¯t be strong enough to fight Noro. But now, Knuckle and Shoot weakened him enough, while Kite was still in optimum condition. ¡°Silent Waltz!¡± After a fierce battle for a few minutes, Kite used his best attack. An astonishing sh split Noro in two, killing him. Although he sessfully killed Noro, Kite was temporarily unable to go and assist Killua as he used almost all of his power in this fight. On the other side of the battlefield, Killua was in his Godspeed Mode, battling against Pouf. Killua was fast enough to fight Pouf, but he wasn¡¯t strong enough to kill him. Pouf was slightly slower than Killua, and his attacks weren¡¯t enough to kill thetter, his only advantages were his physical body and Nen. So, even after a while, Pouf wasn¡¯t able to kill Killua. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 381! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 91! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 286: Ant King Chapter 286: Ant King Inside a deep pit near the Pce, a ck charred body rested. The owner of this body was Caesar, the royal guard of the ant king. In the previous fight, he was killed by An using the Rumble fruit. As for An, he already rejoined Netero. Netero was amazed that not only did An destroy the pce, but he also killed one of the guards in such a short time. Because even for him, he would take some time and effort to do it. However, An easily killed a royal guard without taking any damage while doing so. This made Netero feel fortunate, fortunate that An was here with them, or the consequences would¡¯ve been unpredictable. The two took the initiative to move toward the Ant King, and thetter was already eying them. No, to be precise, the Ant King was only looking at An. As for Netero, although he seemed strong, only An gave the king an urge to fight. ¡°You destroyed our Pce and Killed our guard. You¡¯re strong and courageous, we really want to fight you.¡± The ant king looked directly at An and said seriously. An shrugged and said: ¡°Okay, but I¡¯m slightly tired now, if you want to fight me, you might as well let me rest for a bit so I can fight with all of my power. In that case, you can have more fun.¡± ¡°Yes, I will let you rest for half an hour,¡± Meruem said. ¡°Then, during that time, let the person beside me y with you. He has the highest status in our organization. His name is Isaac Netero, and he is recognized by all humans to be one of the strongest, if not the strongest alive.¡± An pointed at Netero as he introduced him. The Ant King looked at Netero and said: ¡°No, he isn¡¯t strong enough, he isn¡¯t our opponent.¡± He could see the difference at a nce? As expected of the ant king. An looked at Netero, who was looking at the Ant King. ¡°Oh, he is arrogant alright.¡± Netero smiled while holding his goatee, not angry because the Ant King looked down on him. After taking a closer look at the Ant King, Netero knew that this Chimera Ant is the strongest opponent he may have ever faced in his life. In other words, the ant king wasn¡¯t being arrogant, but simply stating the truth. However, if it was fifty years ago, he may have a chance at fighting the current king, but not now. Netero smiled. In his old age, his strength grew weaker, he wasn¡¯t as strong as before. And his mentality changed as well. Originally, he was full of fighting spirit for this battle, he had great confidence that he could defeat the Ant King. But now, he knew that the Ant King¡¯s power exceeded his expectations. His self-confidence wasn¡¯t there anymore. He just wanted to test himself against such a strong foe right now. ¡°Alright, I will y with you.¡± Seeing the look in Netero¡¯s eyes and the Nen he radiated, Meruem finally agreed to fight Netero. ¡°Let¡¯s fight somewhere else.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± The Ant King agreed. ¡°Then let me lead the way.¡± Afterward, An manifested a Dragon. The three of them flew toward the mountain more than ten kilometers away. Below, Pouf who was fighting Killua saw this and shouted: ¡°King!¡± But his voice wasn¡¯t strong enough to reach thousands of meters. Meruem didn¡¯t notice Pouf. Pouf watched the King go away and finally decided to leave Killua and head to his king¡¯s side. Seeing this, Killua caught up with Pouf and prevented him from leaving. On the other side, after a few minutes of flying, An and the othersnded in a valley dozens of Kilometers away. The valley wasrge and suitable forbat. ¡°Here is fine.¡± The Ant King said. Netero also had the same thought, as the ce seemed suitable, and said: ¡°Ant King, this will be your burial ce.¡± The Ant King responded coldly: ¡°I will return that sentence to you, human.¡± The match was about to start, and An found a rock some distance away and sat down to recover and watch the fight. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 381! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 91! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 287 Chapter 287: 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva Facing the Ant King, Netero didn¡¯t dare take it easy from the start and directly used his Nen Ability, the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva. The 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva is Netero¡¯s Nen ability that he trained deep in the mountains in his early years. When he activates it, a huge Bodhisattva appears behind him that will send punches and palm strikes at his opponent. It wasn¡¯t just palm strikes or punches, but there are various hand shapes and every single one of them can do a lot of damage. Most people in the world won¡¯t survive seeing the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva, but the Ant King wasn¡¯t just anyone. He was a monster amongst monsters, and even if he was hit by one of the attacks from the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva, he won¡¯t suffer much damage. A sideway palm strike swept the Ant King, who stood his ground, but the floor under him cracked and fell forming a pit. Without the ground to support himself, the Ant King wasunched far away and hit a mountain. The mountain crumbled, but the Ant King flew out without much damage. ¡°That didn¡¯t break his defense?¡± Upon seeing this, Netero attacked with two hands, as he wanted to squash the Ant King. The Ant King felt a strong pressure from the golden palms as if two mountains were dropped at him from each side. After a few seconds, Netero released his attack, and the Ant King was still unharmed. He looked at Netero calmly as if saying: ¡®Is that all?¡¯ Netero smiled, he controlled the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva to attack, one form after the other, and the Ant King tossed around before finally, he pped toward the ground. Before the Ant King could stand up, two giant golden palms swept at him. The earth trembled as Netero reshaped it. ¡°Did it kill him?¡± Netero narrowed his eyes. In the next second, The Ant King jumped out of the ground and stood still, without any injury. ¡°What an amazing defense.¡± Netero uttered with great emotion, he sincerely admired the Ant King¡¯s physic. If it was a human being that was hit, he would¡¯ve died without a doubt. Only a monster like the Ant King could survive without a scratch. ¡°In this case, I can only continue attacking him.¡± Netero waved his arm and the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva behind him lifted its arms andunched them toward Mereum. Four hands attacked simultaneously from four directions and hit the Ant King. Finally, the ant king wasunched into the sky and only stopped after reaching a thousand meters high. His cold expression slightly changed, not because he was injured, but as a kind of apliment to Netero¡¯s power. The Ant King finally got slightly serious. His face didn¡¯t hold his cold expression, instead, he waspletely concentrated. After falling back down, he immediatelyunched an attack at Netero. Netero saw the Ant King rushing at him and put his hands together. In the next second, the ant king back knocked back by the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva. Although he wasn¡¯t injured, the Ant King discovered something interesting. It seems that the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva was faster than him. This made him curious as to how Netero mastered such a tricky ability. Finally, the Ant King realized that it would take several years, even decades to reach such power. During his contemtion, the ant king was once again sent flying by Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 382! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 94! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 288 Chapter 288: Netero¡¯s Killing Intent ¡°This guy¡­¡± Watching the Ant King slowly walking yet again out of a fallen mountain, without a scratch, Netero was greatly surprised, as he didn¡¯t think that even after so many attacks, the Ant King won¡¯t receive a single injury. He never encountered an opponent with such strong physic before in his life. The 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva attack didn¡¯t cause any damage at all. Therefore, Netero knew stronger moves are needed. The Ant King didn¡¯t attack, he looked directly at Netero and after a moment, he said: ¡°Your name is Netero, right? We shall remember you.¡± Netero sneered coldly: ¡°It seems to be my honor to be remembered by a monster like you.¡± The Ant King seemed to be angry because Netero called him a monster, and said indifferently: ¡°I don¡¯t know if you are the strongest of the humans, but from your performance, we admire your power.¡± The Ant King paused, and said: ¡°But you¡¯re still not our opponent, so step back, if you give up now, I won¡¯t attack you.¡± ¡°You mean, you want to let me go?¡± Netero asked while scratching the back of his head as if confused. The ant king replied in a deep voice: ¡°I originally thought that you humans were just weak creatures not distinguishable from domestic animals, not worth the effort, but that concept has changed. I know that in this world, there are a few humans that have value to keep alive. You belong to the few rare humans, and I find it a pity to kill you. If you swear allegiance to me now, after I rule the world, you can still retain your current identity, but work under me.¡± Netero¡¯s face darkened. He looked directly at the Ant King and his killing intent was unleashed. ¡°Boy, you seem to think too highly of yourself, and you are delusional if you think you can rule us. You¡¯re no more than a brat.¡± Netero waspletely irritated by the Ant King¡¯s lofty attitude. He hasn¡¯t been angry for a long time now, and his body released everyst bit of killing intent. As a human, an old man to bout, experiencing over a hundred years of existence, to be mocked and looked down upon by the ant king, who was only a few months old, was infuriating. However, the Ant King, relying on his superior race, dared act like he was the experienced one and like he was praising a child. This caused Netero to be extremely angry. Feeling Netero¡¯s killing intent, the King¡¯s expression darkened as he looked Netero straight in the eye and said: ¡°We understand, since you choose to fight to the death, I will grant you your death.¡± ¡°Killing me huh, it won¡¯t be easy.¡± In the next moment, Netero¡¯s Nen exploded out of his body, and the aura contained thick killing intent. Before fighting Meruem, Netero trimmed his beard and eyebrows and wore a short and a t-shirt with a heart picture on it. His appearance made it look like he was a helpless old man, but the muscle he had were full of energy and vitality, that any hundred something old man wouldck. Netero folded his hands together and activated his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva again. The Golden statue of Bodhisattva appeared behind him and golden hands rained on the ant king. The Ant King didn¡¯t sit still this time, he also used his Nen and rushed at Netero with Killing intent. Because he felt Netero¡¯s killing intent this time, he didn¡¯t dare to take Netero¡¯s attack anymore. Boom! The King was hit and flew away, before he couldnd, another hand struck him and pped him away in another direction. Although the king was strong and had great defense, his speed wasn¡¯t up to the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva¡¯s, so he wasn¡¯t able to approach Netero. In this way, the Ant King suffered multiple and intense attacks from the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva in the air. 10, 20, 50 strikes. In just ten seconds, the king was pped from one ce to another. However, the Ant King didn¡¯t stop trying to attack Netero and kept adjusting his posture whenever he was knocked in the air, trying to find an opportunity to attack. He believed that Netero wasn¡¯t as strong as him, and he wanted to use that to his advantage, he kept attacking Netero even though he couldn¡¯t reach him, and in a war of attrition, Netero won¡¯t be able tost long. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 383! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 94! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 289: Ninety-Nine Hand Chapter 289: Ny-Nine Hand Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva beats the king in terms of speed, therefore, even if the king was stronger, he can¡¯t defeat what he can¡¯t touch. But it was the same for Netero because speed alone won¡¯t help him defeat the ant, King. While the Ant King was being pped from one side to the other, he didn¡¯t suffer any serious damage. His body was just that strong. By getting hit by the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva, the ant king adapted to the way it attacks and the trajectory each attack takes. He knew that Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva was a superb technique, but no matter how strong the move is, it can¡¯t be perfect. What he had to do was find the w in the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva and attack. However, it wasn¡¯t such a simple matter. The 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva was created by Netero after decades of training, and although its form is limited, it has quite thebinations. In other words, The palms can bebined creating a new one with a different attack pattern. Thebination can be changed almost infinitely. However, the ant king was confident that he can find a w. Everyone has their own aura, habits, preferences, and dislikes, and finally a unique personal style. It¡¯s impossible to find out the method that Netero preferred from the numerousbinations of the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva¡¯s attacks. But as long as he observes carefully, he will find a w. The Ant King smiled for the first time since he was born, but in Netero¡¯s eyes, it was a hideous smile. Although Netero didn¡¯t understand the reason for that smile, he smiled as well. He felt joy from this fight, he hadn¡¯t felt such joy in a long time. Not because they are evenly matched, but because his enemy was stronger. This joy was stemming from the fact that he is a fighting maniac. Netero kept attacking, while the ant king received those attacks. However, those seemingly violent attacks couldn¡¯t break through the ant king¡¯s defense. The only apparent thing on the king¡¯s body was a few scratches, which is far from being considered a serious injury. The Ant King adapted to the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva¡¯s attacks and was now able to regain his posture quickly when facing the palm attacks. If Netero chooses the wrong attack, it was very likely for the Ant King to find that w and attack him directly. Once the Ant King gets close, Netero won¡¯t be able to deal with him using his body, and he would be torn apart. Therefore, Netero was cautious as to not reveal any w. The Golden palms kept banging on the Ant King which thetter couldn¡¯t avoid. He only received the attacks and endured each blow. ¡°Okay, try this out.¡± Netero¡¯s Nen became stronger, as he used a new move. After sping his hands together and resting his right ankle on his left calf, Netero joins his thumbs and index fingers together, making a sign with his hands that looks like the number ny-nine. The bodhisattva unleashes a barrage of palm strikes with all its arms, Faced with this attack, the Ant King had no time or space to dodge at all. He could only watch as the giant golden palms hit his body one after the other The power of the Ny-Nine move was astonishing. The ground was filled with holes as the bodhisattva kept hitting without stopping. In the process of this attack, Netero was extremely calm as he remembered who he once was. Where he started¡­ Why he started¡­ For a long time, as long as his opponent bowed his head and stretched his hand admitting defeat, Netero would just shake his hand back. But this isn¡¯t what Netero wanted, he wanted a stronger foe, he wanted to fight to his heart¡¯s content, and this is what he got now. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 385! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 97! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 290: Zero Hand Chapter 290: Zero Hand Netero was once recognized as the Strongest Nen user in the world, and the Ant king is the strongest of the Chimera Ants. The battle between the two can be considered a battle between the human race and the chimera ant race. The 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva¡¯s attacks were faster than sound. The Ny-Nine hand didn¡¯t seem to have an end, as it kept bombarding the ant king one palm after the other. Facing such a move, the Ant King had no power to counterattack. In just a few seconds, He was hit hundreds of times. The ground was being reshaped and rocks flew across the distance as if they were being bombarded by cannons. After a while, Netero stopped his attack. In a huge pit, the ant king stood. Although he went through hundreds of attacks, he doesn¡¯t seem to have suffered at all. ¡°What an amazingly strong body.¡± Netero was amazed by the powerful body of the ant king. The ant king moved. He disappeared from his ce as he rushed toward Netero. The distance between the two didn¡¯t seem to exist as he was in one ce and in the next instant he was elsewhere. The moment Netero saw the Ant King disappear, he directly attacked with his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva. However, the ant king dodged past the golden palm and moved straight to him. Netero¡¯s foot was cut off by the ant king, using his hand like a knife. Blood sshed out and Netero¡¯s face was gloomy. He was astonished actually. He didn¡¯t expect the ant King to be that fast. Netero pped his thigh where his leg was severed and stopped the bleeding. On the cliff, An who saw this knew that the fight was about to end. The ant king felt Netero¡¯s Nen not weaken even though his leg was cut off. On the contrary, it was getting stronger. Seeing this, Meruem said coldly: ¡°Are you going to use yourst move? That means that you¡¯re exhausted.¡± Netero said coldly: ¡°Ant King, you¡¯re indeed strong, the next move is my strongest, if you can block it, then I lose.¡± ¡°I will definitively stop it.¡± The ant king said confidently. Netero raised his hands as if to pray. Netero¡¯s movement seemed slow, but it was extremely fast. The ant King moved at this moment and closed into Netero before severing one of his hands. Netero who lost one foot and one arm seemed to lose his vitality. In the eyes of the Ant King, Netero can¡¯t continue fighting. ¡°This battle, you lost.¡± The Ant king said. He didn¡¯t kill Netero since thetter gave him a good fighting experience, but that only if Netero admit defeat and surrendered. But that¡¯s obviously not happening. Ignoring the pain, Netero looked at the Ant King calmly and said gloomily: ¡°Thest move can be used, even if I don¡¯t have any limb left, I can pray to activate it, Ant King.¡± Netero was serious He wasn¡¯t trying to act strong, and this made the Ant King frown. But what surprised him, even more, was Netero¡¯s aura getting stronger again. ¡°I will tell you, Ant King, the prayer isn¡¯t done with hands or feet, but with the heart.¡± This is Netero¡¯sst resort, meant to be used only when he cannot utilize any other of Guanyin¡¯s abilities. Netero first prays with all his heart, raising only one hand. No words can describe this move. The Ant King was stunned. The bodhisattva then appeared behind Ant king and tenderly sps him with its palms. This is the Zero Hand. Without having time to react, the Ant King was already within the bodhisattva¡¯s palms. The bodhisattva looked at the ant king lovingly and then caressed him gently. The ant king didn¡¯t resist. It was like returning to his mother, as he felt warm. However, the ant king suddenly woke up from his dream-like state, as the pair of palms held him firmly and killing intent drowned on him like an ocean. Even if he struggled with all his might, he won¡¯t be able to escape this move. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 385! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 97! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 291 Chapter 291: Lost A secondter, numerous particles of light emerged from the open mouth of the Bodhisattva, and finally, itunched an attack with all the energy Netero had left. The energy bomb was fired from the mouth of the bodhisattva forming a huge beam of light that sted the Ant King. This was definitively the strongest move a human could have, the ultimate power a human could attain. The Zero hand exhausted all of Netero¡¯s vitality. Netero raised his middle finger at the ant king and said: ¡°Go to death, Ant King.¡± A huge cloud of dust and smoke rose into the sky covering the entire valley as it rose into the sky. For the first time, the ant king felt the true power of the humans. When the light beam disappeared, the valley waspletely silent, as the dust started settling down. ¡°Did I kill him?¡± Netero slumped weakly on the ground, his eyes looking at the smoke and dust in front of him. But after his sentence, a figure slowly walked out, and it was the Ant King. His whole body was covered in scars, and it was obvious that he received damage from thest move. But it was just that, he was damaged, not killed. ¡°Even Zero Hand can¡¯t kill you, what a monster.¡± At this moment, Netero smiled warily. Even after exhausting his vitality, he failed to seriously hurt his enemy. This was indeed an eye-opener for him. The ant king looked at Netero from a distance and his mind wasn¡¯t as calm as he looked. He felt the astonishing vitality a moment ago, and now, it seemed that nothing was left of it. Netero seemed to age quickly. He looked old, too old, like a withered flower. It indicates that his life hase to an end. ¡°It was you who lost.¡± The Ant King said, but he didn¡¯t attack Netero again. Netero tried his best to speak: ¡°It¡¯s indeed this old man who lost.¡± The King then seriously said: ¡°Although you lost, you have impressed us, I enjoyed the battle.¡± ¡°Haha, you can do it now,¡± Netero said. The ant king replied coldly: ¡°I don¡¯t need to do anything; you will die soon. You exhausted all of your life energy and you will die.¡± At this time, the ant king sat cross-legged and said: ¡°I want to see what a human being will look like as he finally dies due to his life force extinguishing.¡± ¡°Hahaha.¡± Netero smiled. He was indeed dying. He used the Zero hand with everyst bit of energy he had, however, he didn¡¯t expect the ant king to be curious about his death. It really didn¡¯t know what kind of creature a human being was. ¡°In my body, a weapon sufficient to kill you was installed. Poor man¡¯s rose, a bomb that once my heart stops beating, will go off. This will definitely kill you.¡± Hearing this, the ant king thought about Netero¡¯s words. ¡°Why tell me this?¡± the ant king asked. Then he suddenly said: ¡°Are you telling me to escape?¡± Netero replied: ¡°I know that you won¡¯t run away, because you don¡¯t believe that a dying human can have any means to kill you.¡± Yes, the ant king won¡¯t escape. ¡°I even resisted your strongest attack, what can a mere human weapon do?¡± Netero replied: ¡°Then you can wait and die.¡± He knew that the Ant king was arrogant, and wouldn¡¯t believe him, that¡¯s why he said it. Netero closed his eyes, before slowly raising his skinning right hand and moving his finger toward his heart. The Ant King didn¡¯t stop him, because he wanted to see what will happen when the weapon would go off. However, just as Netero was about to kill himself, a hand-blocked his finger. The Ant King¡¯s pupil shrank slightly. An stood beside Netero as he stopped that finger from prating thetter¡¯s chest. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 389! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 98! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 292 Chapter 292: An Stepping In ¡°Sorry Chairman, I¡¯mte.¡± Hearing An¡¯s voice, Netero opened his eyes. ¡°Are you going to fight?¡± Netero asked. An nodded, and looked directly at the Ant King before saying to Netero: ¡°Hey, didn¡¯t you say before that I got to fight if you couldn¡¯t win?¡± Hearing this, Netero exined: ¡°To be honest, I thought you left after seeing my fight.¡± ¡°What do you mean?¡± An was confused. ¡°After watching my fight and how badly I lost, I thought you would leave and save yourself,¡± Netero said. ¡°So, In your eyes, I¡¯m not as good as the ant king, chairman?¡± An smiled. But he didn¡¯t me Netero for underestimating him, the ant king¡¯s power was quite amazing. Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva didn¡¯t cause much damage except for the 99th hand and the Zero hand, which were also almost as ineffective. Netero replied: ¡°You¡¯re very strong, but the Ant King is stronger. Even my Zero Hand couldn¡¯t cause him much damage.¡± Netero sighed. An shrugged and said: ¡°So, you nned tomit suicide and take the ant king with you?¡± ¡°Hehehe, After all, this old man is already on hisst breath, if there is nothing else we could do, I can only sacrifice my life for the greater good,¡± Netero said with a helpless tone. ¡°Chairman, the dedication and self-sacrifice for the future of mankind is really admirable,¡± An said with a Thumb up. ¡°If it were you, what would you choose?¡± Netero asked. ¡°Oh, I¡¯m not as great as the chairman, I don¡¯t want to sacrifice my life to die with the enemy.¡± An scratched the back of his head and said honestly. Netero was willing to die to ensure that mankind doesn¡¯t go extinct due to the ants, which An greatly admired. ¡°Then why did youe here instead of running away? Could it be you¡¯re still confident in defeating the king after seeing my fight?¡± Netero asked. ¡°Well, yes, I already knew how strong the king was, however, he isn¡¯t an invincible existence,¡± An replied. ¡°Huh?¡± After hearing this, Netero said: ¡°It seems that you still didn¡¯t go all out against me before, I¡¯m really curious about your power now.¡± ¡°Well, I have a few hidden cards, enough to defeat him,¡± An said sincerely. Netero nodded: ¡°In that case I¡¯m relieved, then I¡¯ll leave it to you. I¡¯m an old man, even if I don¡¯t kill myself, I will soon die, but I hope tost long enough to see defeat the ant king.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, you will have a chance to witness everything. Besides, I won¡¯t let you die like this, Chairman.¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, Netero was puzzled, as he asked: ¡°What do you mean? Can you save a dying old man like me?¡± ¡°Well, before I go fight with the king, you can eat this first,¡± An said. ¡°What¡¯s this?¡± Seeing the bean An gave him, Netero was puzzled. ¡°That¡¯s a Senzu Bean,¡± An replied. ¡°Eat it, I believe you will be surprised.¡± This was the only Senzu Bean An had, and originally, he nned to preserve it for the fight with the king if needed. But, since Netero was about to die, An decided to give it to him, since he needs it. Netero was the Hunter Association¡¯s pir and the one who kept it standing. The impact would be big if he dies. Moreover, An admired Netero from the bottom of his head, and he didn¡¯t want him to die. Netero has never heard about something called a Senzu bean before and didn¡¯t know about its effect, but he believed in An. After a few seconds after eating the Senzu Bean, Netero¡¯s dried-up body and old face started regaining brilliance. His originally skinny body started getting more muscr and his vitality seemed to return again. He almost returned to his state before the fight started. Not far away, the ant king witnessed the recovery and widened his eyes in amazement. It was incredible. A dying old man recovered instantly by just eating a thumb-sized bean. The ant king could feel the vitality in Netero¡¯s body recovering quickly, but Netero was the one shocked most as it was happening in his body. ¡°What a magical bean, it restored my life and vitality. I was just dying and now I¡¯m as good as new.¡± An just smiled. ¡°An, thank you, you saved my life. I will remember this huge favor.¡± Netero said. ¡°It¡¯s okay chairman, now, leave the rest to me.¡± ¡°Do you want me to help? I have fully recovered, if we fight together, we should be able to kill him.¡± Netero said. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Chairman, let me do it alone,¡± An said. ¡°Well, ok.¡± Netero didn¡¯t insist and left the battlefield to observe from a distance. Netero fully recovered, and even if An couldn¡¯t defeat the ant king, Netero would fight again and if needed, he would use the Poor Man¡¯s rose. In short, the Ant King won¡¯t leave this valley alive. This is for the survival of the human race. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 389! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 98! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 293 Chapter 293: Pain In the big Valley, An and the Ant King faced each with tens of meters between them. They looked at each other without making a move. Suddenly, An heard his system giving him a choice. [Ding! Make a choice] [1: Before starting the fight with the ant king, turn around and run. Reward: Golden Treasure Chest.] [2: Without much nonsense, fight with the Ant King and kill him. Reward: God-level Treasure chest] Without hesitation, An picked the second option. Since he was here to fight, he won¡¯t escape no matter what. In this battle, either the king dies, or he dies, both of them can¡¯t exist at the same time after this. He already had this mentality before he came here, so he was prepared to use all his power in this fight. Although the ant king is strong, An had many trump cards and abilities, he can kill the ant king. ¡°Come on, Meruem,¡± An said. ¡°Unexpectedly, you know my name.¡± The ant king said. ¡°Hehe, of course, I know. Now then, Meruem, do you best.¡± An said provocatively. ¡°I will grant you that wish then.¡± The ant king said indifferently. In the next second, the king disappeared and rushed toward An. An could see the king, but if he used soru, he won¡¯t be fast enough, so instead, he used sh step. However, he didn¡¯t use it to run away or hide, but he was heading toward the ant king. In the next instant, the king¡¯s attack was blocked by An. From a distance, one could only see two blurs colliding, one being purple while the other is blue. With them at the center, a bright pir of light flew toward the sky. Taking a closer look, An¡¯s hand was covered in ck while he pushed against the ant king¡¯s palm. This is the Armament Haki¡¯s when it reaches a high level. It improved An¡¯s power greatly. An observed the battle between the ant king and Netero and knew how strong the former was. If he use his Nen to fight the ant king, An was sure that he would die. Even Netero¡¯s overpowered Nen was defeated by the ant king, what can his Nen do against this monster. So even if he use Nen to attack or defend, it would mean nothing to the ant king. That¡¯s why An wasn¡¯t using Nen against the ant king. He could only fight with other abilities. ¡°You¡¯re quite strong if you can block my attack.¡± Said the ant king. He wasn¡¯t surprised because he knew that An was powerful. ¡°Same to you,¡± An replied. The ant king was amazingly strong, and he could only resist using Armament Haki. ¡°Then let me see how many attacks can you stop.¡± When his voice fell, the ant kingunched another attack. An wasn¡¯t afraid at all and used observation and armament Haki to fight with him. While using Armament Haki can strengthen An¡¯s attack and defense, observation Haki read his opponent and even predict the future. Observation Haki along with sh steps can help An keep up with the ant king. Boom! Boom! Boom! Suddenly, explosions filled the valley. Netero witnessed the battle with surprise: ¡°An is really fierce in a close battle. His offense, defense, and speed seem to match the king¡¯s, maybe he can really kill him.¡± IN the valley, the battle continued. An and the ant king kept colliding and exchanging attacks. The ant king didn¡¯t show his real power from the star, but when he found that An canpete with him, he realized that An was strong than he expected. ¡°You really didn¡¯t disappoint me.¡± The Ant King said. An responded with an attack. ¡°Shinra Tensei.¡± The ant king was pushed back immediately by the mysterious power in An¡¯s hand. ¡°This is¡­¡± The ant king frowned. He didn¡¯t expect An to have such power. As strong as he is, he couldn¡¯t resist that power. ¡°Bansh¨­ Ten¡¯in!¡± An raised his hand at the Ant King, and instantly, the ant king was pulled by a strong gravitational force. ¡°Armament: Hardening!¡± While being such toward An, thetter covered his fist in Haki and punched. The ant king flew far away and destroyed a hill on his way. The entire attack didn¡¯t even take two seconds, a strategy An thought off on the fly. And the ant king suffered more damage from that attack than he did after fighting Netero. After receiving that punch, the ant king actually felt pain. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 389! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 98! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 294 Chapter 294: Shinra Tensei When used together, Shinra Tensei¡¯s repulsive force and Bansho Ten¡¯in¡¯s attractive force took the ant king by surprise. The Ant King looked at An carefully as he didn¡¯t know what thetter did. The ant king didn¡¯t understand how the gravitational force was used. It was a tricky ability and he couldn¡¯t ignore it. ¡°Ant King, you have be so cautious just after taking a punch from me?¡± An taunted the ant king. ¡°Human, don¡¯t get arrogant so quickly.¡± The ant king was sessfully angered. As soon as he finished speaking, he disappeared and rushed at An with all his power. An didn¡¯t move, he just stood in the same ce and raised his hand toward the ant king. ¡°Using that trick again?¡± The ant king saw An¡¯s hand and knew he would use the gravity trick again. ¡°That power is strong, and even I can¡¯tpletely resist it, but I will still try.¡± The ant king pulled his arms in front of him to block, as he wanted to test that attack again. ¡°Shinra Tensei!¡± In the next second, the repulsive forceunched the Ant King away. But since he blocked this time, he didn¡¯t suffer much. Afternding, the ant king immediately moved again. He thought that An would be using the other trick to pull him back. But the ant king was already moving and An couldn¡¯t use Bansho Ten¡¯in on him. ¡°You actually found a way to deal with it so quickly. You¡¯re really something else.¡± Although the ant king was his enemy, An still admired his talent. The Ant king moved quickly as he attacked An from different angles. He thought that An could only use Shinra Tensei from the front. An saw this, and strangely, for the ant king, he didn¡¯t evade or move away from the attack. It was as if he didn¡¯t pay attention to the ant king¡¯s attacks at all. ¡°What¡ª¡± The Ant King appeared suddenly behind An. ¡°Take this.¡± The ant king aimed his hand at An¡¯s neck, in an attempt to decapitate him. However, with An as the center, the repulsive force once again appeared and pushed the ant king with great force. Boom! The ant king flew far away and destroyed many hills on his way as An used more power in thest Shinra Tensei. A huge crater appeared around An, as the ground was destroyed. The ant king stood up far away. ¡°How is it? Are you surprised?¡± An smiled. ¡°It¡¯s really a great power.¡± The King patted the dust on his body and smiled slightly, no, he grinned. This is the first time he actually gave any indication of a smile since he was born. But his smile seemed terrible. He looked like a monster opening his mouth to swallow his prey in delight. After getting sent flying by thest Shinra Tensei, the ant king was provoked. A strong aura exploded from his body as the ant king was getting serious. An was aware of this, and from now on the battle will start. ¡°I won¡¯t get caught by that trick again.¡± The ant king said. Hearing this, An smiled: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t use it again.¡± The ant king didn¡¯t reply, but he didn¡¯t believe An. If An didn¡¯t use the gravitational power, it would be beneficial to the ant king, but if An deceived him, he will be once again thrown again. Therefore, the ant king won¡¯t believe An¡¯s words. He didn¡¯t believe that An would force himself to a disadvantage by not using that power. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 389! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 98! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 295: The Ant King is Injured Chapter 295: The Ant King is Injured But, the ant king guessed wrong this time. An didn¡¯t intend to use Shinra Tensei anymore. Not only that, he didn¡¯t n on using Bansho Ten¡¯in as well. Because An knew that thebination of Shinra Tensei and Bansho Ten¡¯in can¡¯t be used on the Ant King anymore. The king would be greatly alert to those two techniques and he won¡¯t be hit by them. The same trick doesn¡¯t work twice for him. Furthermore, Shinra Tensei and Bansho Ten¡¯in weren¡¯t invincible techniques, they had a cooldown of five seconds. So, they can¡¯t be used continuously. However, it wasn¡¯t like he won¡¯t use them no matter what, when they have a use, he will use them. It¡¯s also clear that Shinra Tensei and Bansho Ten¡¯in can¡¯t cause much damage to the ant king. At this moment, the Ant King moved. He punched from a distance, causing his Nen to travel toward An at a great speed, destroying the ground on its trail. An jumped up, and as soon as he did, the ant king attack him. An wasn¡¯t afraid, and with Haki, he predicted and blocked the ant king¡¯s attacks. The ant king¡¯s expression changed slightly as he was surprised by An¡¯s reaction speed. ¡°Could it be, he saw through my attack?¡± While fighting, the ant king realized this, but he didn¡¯t stop attacking. Regardless of whether An predicted his attacks or not, the ant king believed that as long as he continue attacking, An won¡¯t be able to follow him. As long as An reveals a little w, the Ant King was confident in killing him. An knew what the ant king was thinking, and indeed, he wasn¡¯t as good in terms of endurance and physical strength as this monster. Being able to fight head to head with the ant king depended entirely on his Haki. Over time, he won¡¯t be able to withstand the Ant King¡¯s attacks. An knew this very well. Therefore, he will not fight a war of attrition with the ant king ande to a quick decision. Boom! Boom! Boom! The ant king¡¯s attacks were simple,cked style, and used brute force. Although his moves were crude, they were also the most direct and effective. Once hit, the consequences would be dire. If it weren¡¯t for the Haki, An wouldn¡¯t dare fight the ant king in closebat. Boom! A powerful momentum erupted from An as he used Conqueror Haki. The ant king was shocked for a split second and An used it to his advantage. ¡°Ice Time!¡± When the ant King came back to his senses, he was already covered in ice. It happened so fast that the ant king couldn¡¯t react. He became an Ice Scripture while maintaining his attacking posture. Even when frozen, his aura still radiated strongly. An dared not take this lightly, he knew very well that the ant king won¡¯t be trapped for more than a few seconds. An quickly gathered his power and used the highest form of Armament Haki, the Ryou, and clenched his fist. The Ryou form of Haki is an advanced form of hardening that can cause damage directly to the enemy¡¯s internals. No matter how strong the body is, it can¡¯t defend against this attack. The frozen ant king took An¡¯s punch firmly. The power behind the punch broke the ice and sent the Ant King flying away before he hit a mountain and stopped. An didn¡¯t take advantage of the situation to chase after the ant king, because he wanted to see how much damage hisst attack managed to do. The dust slowly dissipated as the ant king slowly stood up with a pale face. His mouth dripped with purple blood. ¡°The Ryou is really strong.¡± An was overjoyed. The ant king wiped the blood from his mouth and stared at An with cold eyes: ¡°You actually made me bleed and feel pain. I have to admit you¡¯re strong, strong enough to hurt me, I will remember you.¡± An could feel it, it seems that the ant king was going all out now. This also shows that the ant king can¡¯t be careless anymore. This shows An¡¯s power, which threatened the Ant King. The battle was about to get more intense. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 395! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 97! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 296: Angry Ant King Chapter 296: Angry Ant King The ant king rushed toward An and in a blink of an eye, he crossed tens of meters. sh Step! An directly dodged. He knew that the moment the Ant King got serious, his power will grow exponentially. Physical strength is limited, and armament Haki can¡¯t defend for long, An won¡¯t be able to match the ant king for long as it is. ¡°Rankyaku!¡± An kicked while moving back. An azure blue sh shed out and rushed toward the ant king who wasn¡¯t expecting An to have this kind of skill. He was hit by the Rankyaku but he wasn¡¯t hurt even a bit. That attack can¡¯t break his defense. This was also within An¡¯s expectation, as the next attack was his true aim. ¡°Fire Release: Great Fire Annihtion!¡± An formed hand seals quickly before spitting arge mouthful of mes that turned into a huge wave and swept toward the ant king. The ant king was directly swallowed by the mes. The mes turned one-third of the valley into a sea of mes. An thought that even if the ant king was strong, it won¡¯t be safe from this attack. An¡¯s strategy was using different skills to overwhelm the ant king. He won¡¯t use a technique more than three times. As for arge me-like the great fire annihtion, An will only use it once. The reason was simple, if he was hit once, the ant king will be wary of that skill and the chance of him getting caught in it once more was close to zero. The mes gradually dissipated and a figure appeared in An¡¯s sight. He saw the ant king¡¯s arms scorched ck, and many burn marks appeared on his body. The ant king blocked the mes with his arms, but he couldn¡¯tpletely defend himself as he was swallowed by the mes. The mes were different from other attacks, as it was enough to injure the ant king. If someone else was in the ant king¡¯s ce, he would¡¯ve been burnt to crisps. The king stared at An with eyes full of killing intent. He didn¡¯t expect that An would be able to force him into such a state. He, the Chimera Ant King, had sustained such injuries by a mere human. ¡°Bastard!¡± The ant king¡¯s anger reached its peak. He rushed at An violently, but surprisingly, An didn¡¯t dodge. He stared at the ant king and raised his arm, his muscle erged as he punched. Nail punch! An used the Nail punch to counter the Ant King¡¯s attack. Boom! A shockwave broke out, creating violent winds that passed through the entire valley. After the collision, both sides separated briefly. ¡°How is this possible? Why does he still have so much power? Is this guy really human?¡± The ant king looked at An in the distance as he wandered. Because An¡¯s power exceeded all his expectations. What¡¯s more frightening was An¡¯s calmness, he seemed at ease. This meant he wasn¡¯t going all out yet. He still had other cards up his sleeve. The ant king frowned; his enemy was a tricky one. While the ant king was contemting, An suddenlyunched an attack. ¡°What?¡± The ant king was surprised that An would initiate an attack. The biggest surprise was the method he used to attack. ¡°Ice spears!¡± An activated the power of his Ice fruit and two huge ice spears condensed in front of him. Before long, the spears were thrown like arrows at the ant king. The ant king snorted before flicking his tail and destroying the spears. However, An¡¯s attack didn¡¯t end there. ¡°Ice Time capsule.¡± The special thing about this attack was that anything hit by it will be frozen solid. The Ant king underestimated this attack and he was frozen instantly. Crack! Crack! Without waiting for An to attack, the king broke out of the ice. ¡°You think this will freeze me; you really underestimate me.¡± The ant king said coldly. An wasn¡¯t surprised as he said: ¡°How about you try this.¡± An raised his hands. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 395! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 97! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 297: Ice Age Chapter 297: Ice Age The cold air swept over at the ant king and a tornado was formed in an instant. The ant king was at the center of the tornado and after a few seconds, the ant king was frozen in a diamond-shaped ice cube. Looking at the Ant king, An smiled slightly and said: ¡°Now, how many seconds do you need to get out?¡± One second, two seconds, three seconds. Suddenly the ice cracked and the ant king broke free. The ant king was breathing heavily as the coldness affected his body. ¡°It was mes, now it¡¯s ice, what¡¯s with this guy? Why can he use the ability of nature.¡± The king stared at An in the distance in surprise and confusion. How did a human obtain those powers? Those powers have surpassed anything a human can do. ¡°Very well, if this is the case, I will use everything I have.¡± The ant king gave a low growl as his Nen burst out and dispelled the coldness in his body. ¡°What a terrifying aura.¡± After feeling The Nen emanating from the ant king, An¡¯s face became serious. And on the cliff a few hundred meters away, Netero¡¯s face was gloomy. ¡°The ant king¡¯s aura is terrifying, but then again, if An can push him to this point, then he must have what it takes to cope with him.¡± The Nen around the ant king¡¯s body was like a red coat covering him. ¡°This is¡­¡± An frowned. There is no doubt, that this is the ant king¡¯s ability. ¡°It seems that his ability is to increase his external defense. Well, let¡¯s try it.¡± An lifted his hand, and a few ice spears appeared. ¡°Bansho Ten¡¯in!¡± In an instant, An¡¯s hand wanted to pull the ant king toward him, but the already vignt Ant king moved the moment An raised his hand. Partisan! An fired the ice spears. The Ant king could easily avoid them, but he didn¡¯t. Crack! The ice spears shattered as soon as they hit the ant king¡¯s body. With a wave, Anunched a few other ice spears at the ant king, who snorted and didn¡¯t move. Crack! All the spears chattered once again. n expected this and decided since small attacks can¡¯t hurt him, then what about a big one. With a wave of his hand, a huge, hundred meters ball of ice was formed above the valley. Under An¡¯s control, the ice ball mmed down toward the Ant King. The ant King¡¯splexion changed. The Size of the ice ball surprised him greatly. How can this be done by a human? But it wasn¡¯t the time to think about it, he can¡¯t avoid it anymore. It was too big and he had no time to avoid it. Boom! The Giant ball of ice hit the ant king directly. The whole valley shook as a huge icy pit was formed. An knew that with the defense of the Ant King, there won¡¯t be much damage caused by the Iceball, it can only temporarily seal him. And soon enough, the ant king will break out, so An¡¯s purpose all along was to temporarily suppress the ant king. ¡°Ice Age!¡± After smashing the ant king, An used his Ice Fruit again and froze the entire Valley. The entire valley was frozen in a few seconds. Netero, who was watching not too far away escaped away as soon as he saw the Ice moving quickly all over the ce. The temperature suddenly dropped below zero. An knew that the Ant king won¡¯t die so easily. He didn¡¯t continue his attacks as he moved away from the valley. He wanted to regain some of his strength before the Ant king broke through the ice again. He must recover as much as possible for the soon-to-be next wave of attacks. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 395! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 100! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 298: Thunder Dragon Chapter 298: Thunder Dragon In the Dark Sky, An recovered his energy as he waited. The battle with the Ant King was exhausting. The Last two moves he used were just to give himself some time to recover. It should take the Ant King less than three minutes to emerge out of the Ice. At the same time, the frozen ant king was unable to move, but his consciousness remained. The ant king concentrated all the strength in his body and burst out with one move. His Nen erupted as all the obstacles in front of him were destroyed. The Huge Ice Ball couldn¡¯t withstand the pressure and shattered. Even the Ice a few tens of meters away shattered as well. Boom! Finally, the Ant King broke out of the Ice. Even though he broke through the Ice, The Ant King couldn¡¯t get rid of the coldness in his bodypletely. With another eruption, his Nen covered him and the coldness finally subsided. As he recovered, the ant king tried to find An. Looking up, the ant king found him in the sky. Although he can rush into the sky with his Nen, he couldn¡¯t stay up there for long. So, he dispelled the thought of fighting An in the air. An had supremacy in airbat, while the ant king was good at fighting on the ground. During this time, the ant king actually sat on the ground without paying attention to An and looked calm. The ant king was recovering his energy as well. It wasn¡¯t just An who needed to recover his energy, but the ant king as well felt that need right now. Moreover, he actually suffered some injuries. As the King of the Chimera Ant, he was more resilient and recovered fast. An recovered 70% to 80% of his stamina, and stared at the ant king, ready to start fighting again. This time, An decided to use the Ramble Fruit to fight with the ant king. A blue arc jumped on An¡¯s finger turning into a lightning bolt striking downward at the ant king. The ant king knew that An had the power to use Lightning from when he destroyed the pce. Therefore, the ant king was prepared and quickly jumped away from the lightning strike. Before the ant king could make a move, several other lightning bolts stuck down. Each bolt was one meter thick and can easily leave a hole on the ground. It didn¡¯t even take a second to reach the ground from 1,000 meters above. The ant king reacted immediately. (T/N: The author seems confused about the speed of lightning here, while the sound is fast, lightning moves 120km/s, he made it seem that Meruem heard thunder before he moved, which is impossible in this case.) Only moving extremely fast allowed him to avoid lightning. However, as he dodged, a blue light rushed toward him. The speed at which the blue light moved was dazzling. Secondster, the ant king discovered that An was that light. His body was covered in lighting as he attacked. Thunder Palm! An¡¯s palms were shining with high electric current as he hit the ant king violently. The ant king was knocked back as the electric current sent shock across his body. The electric current can easily break the ant king¡¯s defense and paralyze his body for a bit. An took advantage of this and raised his hands then shouted: ¡°100-million-volt, Thunder Dragon!¡± A blue Dragon made of lightning was condensed as it swooped the Ant King. The Ant king wanted to avoid but his body was still paralyzed by An¡¯s thunder palm. Therefore, he couldn¡¯t escape from this dragon. Boom! The Thunder Dragon which contained 100 million volts swallowed the Ant King. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 395! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 100! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 299: The Suppressed Ant King Chapter 299: The Suppressed Ant King The ant king was subjected to electric torture at this moment. His body was numb and arge number of cells on his body were destroyed. An couldn¡¯t help squinting as he looked at the ant king. Obviously, 100 million volts caused some damage to the ant king. He could feel that the ant king¡¯s aura weakened. An¡¯s mouth raised into a slight smile as he guessed that even the ant king can¡¯tpletely defend against the ramble fruit¡¯s power. The power of lightning was indeed strong. The 100 million volts just now weren¡¯t An¡¯s most powerful attack, he just regarded it as one of his stronger moves. He can¡¯t still use more power with thunder fruit, for example, 200 million volts. Just when he was about to use a stronger attack, the ant king suddenly released a huge amount of Nen. ¡°Ah?¡± Feeling this, An was surprised that the ant king could release such arge amount of Nen even with his injuries. What a monster. This also strengthened An¡¯s idea of killing the ant king. If he doesn¡¯t kill him now, then with his racial talent, he will be stronger and stronger with time. At that time, no one would be able to face him. Therefore, before the ant king really grows, it¡¯s best to kill him now. With this in mind, An¡¯s killing intent grew toward the ant king. The ant king felt this and fixed his eyes on An. He also wanted to kill An. However, he can¡¯t move. He wanted to recover from thest attack as soon as possible. An saw the ant king was using his Nen to speed up his recovery. Immediately, An made a move, to prevent the ant king from recovering. Boom! A bolt of lightning struck the ant king in the distance. The ant king quickly dodged awkwardly. Because of his injuries, his mobility was limited. An didn¡¯t give him any chance, he quickly attacked. ¡°Light!¡± This was An using the speed of lightning to move which was faster than any speed the ant king hoped to reach. The ant king could not believe that someone surpassed him in speed. Boom! Boom! Boom! Every attack An sent was apanied by an electric current. Although it wasn¡¯t as strong as the thunder dragon, each attack continued to umte on the ant king¡¯s body. The wounds the ant king suffered continued to increase little by little, and eventually, they became serious injuries. No matter how strong the ant king¡¯s body was, it can¡¯t withstand that amount of damage. Puff! The ant king spat a mouthful of purple blood. His face became gloomy as he never imagined a human would actually make him spit blood. The ant king became enraged. As the king of the chimera ants, it won¡¯t be defeated by a human. Nen exploded from his body and covered himpletely. The main purpose of this cover was to defend. When the electric current hit the Nen cover, it will greatly reduce the power or even cancel it. Unless the current was stronger than the Nen covering him, the ant king won¡¯t receive damage. An noticed this and increased the power behind his attacks. ¡°30 million volts, Vari!¡± An raised his right hand andunched a lightning bolt again. The ant king couldn¡¯t dodge on time and was hit directly. However, the attack was offset by the Nen covering the ant king¡¯s body. An raised his hand again andunched a more powerful attack. ¡°50 Million Volts, Kirin!¡± This move was enough, although the attack was stopped by the ant king¡¯s Nen, the Nen covering his body was also destroyed. Since his protection was destroyed, the ant king could only move quickly and avoid it again. An sneered, no matter how fast the ant king moves, he can¡¯t be faster than lightning. ¡°50 Million Volts, Roc!¡± A giant bird made of lightning spread its wing and rushed toward the ant king extremely fast. The ant king couldn¡¯t dodge at all and was instantly hit by the thunderbird. Boom! Although this attack wasn¡¯t as strong as the thunder dragon, it still made the already worn-out body of the ant king feel like he was pierced by thousands of needles. The strong electric current was causing his cells to die and severely injuring him. Seeing this, An took advantage of the situation andunched another attack, not giving the ant king any chance to recover. ¡°60 million volts, Thunder tiger!¡± The lightning once again condensed into a new shape, and a fierce tiger emerged and pounced on the ant king, throwing him to the ground and shocking him once again. In a short two minutes, the ant king suffered many attacks and his body was greatly damaged. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 395! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 102! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 300: Vitality of the Ant King! Chapter 300: Vitality of the Ant King! Even after being attacked by waves after waves of lightning strikes, the ant king¡¯s body was still holding on. He was powerful beyond imagination. ¡°This guy¡­¡± An frowned. He originally thought that after so many attacks, the ant king would be hit hard after so many attacks. But he seemed to underestimate the ant king. His vitality was simply out of this world. If someone else was facing this monster, he would¡¯ve copsed in despair long ago. But An was still firmly standing as his goal didn¡¯t change. At this moment, the ant king was still standing, his body suffered many attacks and many parts were scorched. Even so, his aura was still strong. An realized one thing. It was difficult to kill the ant king just with the rumble fruit. Although the rumble fruit could cause great destruction, the ant king was strong and recovered fast. The rumble fruit won¡¯t have enough lethality to end the ant king. As for other abilities, An had a lot of them, but one that can actually threaten the ant king was rare. Even though the Ice fruit was on par with the lightning fruit, it can¡¯t kill the ant king. The Ice fruit was more of support right now. To kill the ant king, other abilities need to be used. At this moment, An saw the ant king rush over at him. His aura was still powerful. This was quite surprising. Obviously, he was injured, but he still could have such amazing Nen power. What a monster. An¡¯s figure shed as he used the power of the rumble fruit to fight with the ant king. Even though he wasn¡¯t moving as fast as he could, An was surprised that the ant king could match his current speed. Suddenly, the ant king¡¯s Nen erupted once again and it was stronger than before. He released an attack that rushed at An at the speed of sound. An was surprised by the sudden explosion of power and was hit by the ant king¡¯s attack. As a fist passed through An¡¯s body, the ant king frowned. He felt that he didn¡¯t hit An. Looking at An¡¯s pierced body, he seemed to have recovered quickly and wasn¡¯t hurt in any way. The ant king instantly understood that this might be rted to An¡¯s ability. An was immune to physical attacks. Unless the ant king used Nen to attack, the ant king won¡¯t be able to touch An. ¡°Thundersh!¡± An raised his hand and a dazzling blue current turned into light. The unprepared ant king couldn¡¯t cover his eyes quickly and was blinded for a short moment. ¡°Thor¡¯s Spear!¡± A spear made of lightning condensed quickly and sted the ant king violently. Because of the light, the ant king wasn¡¯t able to take action on time and his body was hit by the spear. The spear of lightning pierced his body and severely injured him. Taking advantage of the damage caused to the ant king, An quickly activated his Ice fruit. In a short instant, the ant king was sealed in the Ice. Blue lightning gushed out of An, forming a thundercloud in the sky. An nned to strike the ant king as soon as he manage to break through the Ice. After a while, the ant king finally emerged from the ice, his body had a new wound caused by the lightning spear. Before the ant king could catch his breath, he suddenly heard a loud bang. Looking up, he saw a thundercloud appears above his head, and inside, a strong power resided. He could tell that the thundercloud was umting power, waiting to strike. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 395! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 102! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 301: Scarlet Eyes Chapter 301: Scarlet Eyes At this moment, a huge lightning bolt struck from the sky. The Ant King had no time to evade and he was swallowed by lightning. The already damaged body of the ant king became even more damaged as he spat a mouthful of purple blood. This was the second time he was forced to spit blood. The lightning strike was very painful, but the ant king¡¯s willpower was amazing, even with that much pain he gritted his teeth and endured without a scream. He wanted to kill An desperately. However, right now, the ant king couldn¡¯t sense or see An at all. His mind was a mess, and if he calmed down for a bit, he would be able to find An, but with his current injuries and anger, he can no longer calm down. At this time, An was inside the thunder cloud, feeding it and making it bigger. Wouch! As soon as the first lightning bolt fell from the sky, the thunder cloud started raining lightning toward the ant king without stopping. The valley became a mess as everything was destroyed withrge pits covering the ground. ¡°Did he die?¡± An narrowed his eyes slightly. Thest attack consumed a lot of his energy. The continuous lightning strikes were several times stronger than Netero¡¯s 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva. Even the Ant king won¡¯t be safe from this attack. What¡¯s more, the ant king is already injured. Even if he doesn¡¯t die, the battle will end soon. ¡°There?¡± An saw the ant king, who although standing, was scorched all over. Moreover, his aura was much weaker than before. He was obviously greatly weakened. An believed that the ant king won¡¯t survive another powerful attack. However, considering the power he already consumed, An won¡¯t be able to use an attack of that scale anymore. An¡¯s Stamina was limited, and it was impossible for him to use powerful attacks one after another using his devil fruits. Since he couldn¡¯t use them, An decided to use other abilities to deal with the ant king. There are still abilities that An didn¡¯t use which were powerful enough to kill the ant king. For example, he had star tinum, his swordsmanship, etc. However, An didn¡¯t intend to use any of those, he wanted to use the Sharingan. The ant king never thought he would ever be forced into such a state by a mere human. Although he didn¡¯t want to admit it, the ant king knew that he can¡¯t win against An. At this moment, the ant king saw An slowly walking toward him. The ant king wanted to kill this human, but due to his injuries, he had no chance to do it. An moved slowly as he stared at the ant king with his currently dark eyes. The ant king didn¡¯t want to be outdone so he stared back at An. However, in the next second, the ant king saw An¡¯s eyes transform. ¡°What¡¯s wrong with his eyes?¡± The ant king frowned. Relying on his instinct, he knew that those eyes were dangerous. The Sharingan An possessed belonged to Uchiha Itachi. With Tsukuyomi and Amaterasu, as well as Susanoo, those Sharingan eyes were almost invincible. At this moment, the ant king who was staring at An¡¯s eyes was caught by Tsukuyomi. He suddenly found himself in a weird ce. The sky was red and everything else was in ck and white. ¡°Where is this¡­¡± The ant king frowned. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 398! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 106! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 302: Spiritual Attack Chapter 302: Spiritual Attack Inside this space, time moved extremely slowly. The Ant King frowned. His instincts made him feel that this world wasn¡¯t real. This world didn¡¯t have any aura of life, as if it is a dead space. As for how he appeared here, the Ant King already guessed that. ¡°Is it those eyes? Was I hypnotized?¡± The Ant King thought. When he saw the pair of scarlet eyes, he could feel something bad about them. ¡°Meruem, wee to my Tsukuyomi¡¯s world.¡± A voice suddenly rang in the space. The Ant king concentrated in front of him and saw An. ¡°Ant King, I created this world, everything here is under mymand,¡± An said. Apparently, the ant king didn¡¯t believe him. ¡°You don¡¯t believe me? Well, let me prove it.¡± The next second, the ant king found himself tied to a pir with his body locked in chains. Even with his strength, he couldn¡¯t break free. This made him panic slightly since he didn¡¯t seem to have his great power here. In the Tsukuyomi world, everything is under the control of the caster, and the victim would be put in great mental suffering. Now, the ant king was in An¡¯s hands, and at his disposal. Unless the mental power of the ant king is strong enough to break the Tsukuyomi, he will suffer. A shining sword appeared in An¡¯s hand, he walked toward the ant king and said: ¡°Meruem, in the next 72 hours, you will be shed by my sword without retaliating, I wonder if you can hold on when I¡¯m finished.¡± A chilling smile appeared on An¡¯s face while the ant king was getting scared. He felt himself facing great evil. An directly inserted the sword into the ant king¡¯s body. The Shining de went through the ant king¡¯s body and purple blood flowed out. The Ant King couldn¡¯t believe that a mere ordinary sword was able to pierce his body. He was most proud of his body¡¯s defense, and now, his body was actually pierced by a sword. The ant king finally understood that he is inside an illusion created by An. That¡¯s the only reason an ordinary sword could prate his defense. However, despite figuring this out, the feeling he got was real, he felt himself being stabbed. 72 hours in the Tsukuyomi world was just a second outside. By the time the illusion came to an end, the ant king was on his knees. The spiritual attack was effective. Coupled with his damaged body, the ant king was experiencing mental and physical pain. ¡°Let me end this right now with the strongest sword.¡± An walked in front of the Ant king. The Ant king raised his head and looked at An and the ck sword in his hand. This is the reward An obtained before, the Saijo O Wazamono series sword, the strongest sword in existence, Yoru! An looked at him and said: ¡°Meruem, I will use the strongest sword in the world to kill you, you should feel honored.¡± The Ant King didn¡¯t say anything, he kept his eyes on the sword in An¡¯s hand. He felt a terrifying aura from the sword, and for the first time in his short life, the ant king felt death. An noticed the look on the ant king¡¯s face and smiled slightly. So, Yoru can kill the Ant King after all. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 398! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 106! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 303: Self Destruct Chapter 303: Self Destruct As An¡¯s voice fell, he gripped the handle of Yoru tightly before violently swinging it Boom! An Azure flying sh moved straight toward the Ant King. The power behind the sh can¡¯t be described. Facing the powerful sh, the heavily injured Ant King couldn¡¯t dodge in time. The Ant King could only stand in front of the sh with his hand in front of him, trying to block the sh. A huge explosion urred as soon as the flying sh hit the ant king. Violent shockwaves smashed the boulders in the valley one after the other before subsiding. A huge pit appeared on the ground and inside it, the ant king was lying. A huge wound appeared on his body and purple blood dripped out on the ground. Seeing the Ant King¡¯s current state, An said: ¡°You¡¯re really a monster, you¡¯re still alive after that.¡± The ant king stared at An gloomily without speaking. The Ant King felt his life wasing to an end. He was surprised when the wound caused by this sh wouldn¡¯t heal. No, it¡¯s not that he can¡¯t heal it, but the healing rate was too slow. The bleeding was too fast for him to heal. If this continued for ten minutes, he would lose his life. The Ant King was aware he can¡¯t survive today, so, he raised his head and stared at An. A ck aura appeared around the ant king as he roared: ¡°You¡¯re just a mere human, don¡¯t be so proud, even if die today, I will kill you.¡± Hearing this, An¡¯s expression changed as he thought: ¡°This guy wants to blow himself up?¡± An quickly realized that the Ant king was released a death-like aura. He immediately realized that the ant king waspressing all of his remaining power to blow himself and die with An. As the King of the Chimera Ants, he couldn¡¯t tolerate a loss even if it costs him his life. So dying together with his enemy can be considered okay. Seeing the crazy look on the Ant King¡¯s face, An frowned. Although the ant king was on hisst breath, if he blows up, the energy released will be terrifying. An couldn¡¯t guarantee his survival from the explosion, so he couldn¡¯t afford to gamble. An¡¯s first thought was to run. As soon as An run at his fastest speed, the ant king blew himself up. Boom! The Energy in the Ant King¡¯s body erupted in an instant. A huge mushroom cloud appeared over the valley. The Ant King Blew himself up. The explosion wasparable to a nuclear bomb. Outside the valley, Netero stared solemnly at the mushroom cloud and thought: ¡°That¡¯s really a terrifying explosion. Netero was watching the battle between An and the Ant King, but because of the intensity and danger, he had to temporarily retreat and couldn¡¯t see everything that happened. Therefore, he didn¡¯t know who caused that explosion. ¡®Was it An or the Ant King?¡¯ Netero thought. Netero didn¡¯t dare approach the explosion, just the shockwave generated by it was enough to destroy mountains. Even several Kilometers away, he could feel the terrifying energy released in that explosion. At the Pce, Kite, Gon, and Morel also heard the explosion. They all looked toward the valley dozens of Kilometers away and saw the huge Mushroom in the sky. It should¡¯ve been dark outside, but because of the explosions, the night sky was bright. ¡°What happened over there?¡± Morel frowned. ¡°Let¡¯s go take a look,¡± Kite said. Afterward, Kite, Gon, Killua, and the others grouped up and went toward the valley. Pouf who was previously fighting them also noticed the explosion from the valley. ¡°King!!¡± Pouf shouted and flew toward the valley as fast as possible. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 398! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 108! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 304: Blown Chapter 304: Blown After the explosion, the entire valley was devastated. The mountains and forest around were burnt down, making it appear like a sea of mes. The dark sky was illuminated by the fire painting a sunset-like picture. After half an hour, Kite, Gon, Killua, and Morel arrived outside the Valley. On a big rock, everyone saw Netero. Netero was sitting on the rock watching the fire burn. Although he wanted to go in and look at the situation, the fire was too strong, so he could only wait temporarily. ¡°Chairman!¡± Morel shouted from below. ¡°Oh, it¡¯s you guys.¡± Netero jumped down from the boulder and nced at everyone before nodding in relief. Although Killua, Shoot, and Morel were injured, these injuries weren¡¯t threatening. After a few seconds, Kite finally asked on behalf of everyone: ¡°Chairman, what happened here? Why did the valley explode? Weren¡¯t you fighting the ant king?¡± Gon then added: ¡°What happened to An? Where is he?¡± Seeing everyone eager to know what happened here, Netero briefly recounted the story. Now, everyone understood that this explosion was caused by An and the ant king¡¯s battle. Netero was forced to retreat after he lost to the ant king and couldn¡¯t withstand the aftermath of their fight. He also mentioned that he didn¡¯t know who caused this explosion. As for whether An and the Ant king were alive or dead, it was unknown for now. ¡°I¡¯m going in.¡± Gon stood up as he said. Having been waiting outside for a long time, he was really worried about An. Killua put a hand on Gon¡¯s shoulder and shook his head: ¡°Don¡¯t, Gon, the fire is too much for anyone to enter for now.¡± ¡°Yes, Gon, let¡¯s wait for a bit till the fire stops.¡± Kite also advised. ¡°But we don¡¯t know whether An is alive or dead, what if he is still alive but too injured and would die if we don¡¯t help him?¡± Gon said with worry and anxiety. Everyone was actually worried, but the fire was really too fierce, even from a distance, they felt the heat. Gon finally gave up his n to rush into the fire since he understood that he won¡¯t be able to step out after going in. ¡°Don¡¯t worry Gon, An should be fine,¡± Kite said. Kite wasn¡¯t really trying tofort Gon since he actually believed his own words. Gon nodded and could only wait for the fire to die out before he enters the valley. Suddenly, a chill passed through the valley. The raging me died out and the entire valley was frozen. Within ten seconds, the ming hell turned into a frozen hell. Seeing this, Kite, Gon, and the others opened their eyes widely in surprise. Netero said: ¡°The mes were extinguished and this ice should be An¡¯s ability, it seems like he is fine.¡± Not long after, a figure flew out of the valley. ¡°An, are you okay?¡± Gon was the first to rush up in concern. ¡°Well, yeah, I¡¯m alright.¡± An smiled. He nced around and saw everyone, he nodded at them and said hello. ¡°An, what happened to the ant king?¡± Netero asked loudly. ¡°What does Chairman think?¡± An¡¯s meaning was obvious. Netero said: ¡°Well since you are the only oneing out, it means that you already killed him.¡± An nodded: ¡°Well, yes he is indeed dead.¡± ¡°How did he die?¡± Kite asked. ¡°Blown,¡± An replied. Blown?? Everyone, there was shocked. An exined: ¡°I fought with him and seriously injured him, so, in desperation, he wanted to take me down with him and blew himself up.¡± Thinking about the power behind the explosion, An felt lucky, since he, fortunately, ran fast or else¡­ What a tragic way to die, for a powerful enemy like the ant king to blow himself up, it was really tragic. But they were more shocked that An actually won against the ant king, who even Netero could beat. This shows that An¡¯s power has already surpassed Chairman Netero. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 399! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 108! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 305: Achievement Chapter 305: Achievement Since An dealt with the ant king, the others were relieved. In particr, Netero praised An more than anyone and gave him a thumb up. He even promised An that he would give him the Triple-Star Hunter¡¯s title after returning to the Hunter association¡¯s headquarters. When the others heard this, they cast an envious look at An, well everyone beside Gon and Killua. Because the two of them don¡¯t understand the meaning and weight behind that title. Triple-Star Hunter is a symbol of the highest status that a hunter can get. Only hunters with great contributions can get this reward. An killed the Ant king by himself and avoided a great crisis for mankind. Besides that, An already killed three royal guards when the extermination team was formed. He even used a Senzu Been to make Netero recover. The sum of those credits was more than enough. Of course, just killing the ant king already qualified An for that title. After all, Netero fought against the Ant King, and even though thetter was a few months old, he was strong enough to defeat his strongest move. If they gave him some time to grow, it was hard to imagine the extent of strength he would reach. Therefore, killing the ant king alone was enough for the Triple-Star Hunter¡¯s title. As the highest person of the hunter association, Netero was a Triple-Star Hunter himself. Amongst the whole Association, only a few had this title, and right now, An was one of them. This meant that An¡¯s future status was equal to Netero¡¯s. Kite and Morel were hunters way before An, but even till now, they were still one-star hunters. An was already a Double-Star Hunter and soon he will be a Triple-Star Hunter. Such a fast upgrade made them feel envious and embarrassed. An was not too surprised or happy. He smiled and said: ¡°Now, Now, this isn¡¯tpletely over yet. Although the Ant King is dead, what happened to the royal guards? If we don¡¯t take care of them, it will bring troubleter. Kite seriously said: ¡°You killed one previously, I joined hands with Knuckle and Shoot to kill another one, and the remaining one was a bit special, so Morel, Gon, Killua, and Menshi couldn¡¯t deal with him and he escaped. ¡°Shaiapouf, right?¡± An asked. Killua nodded and replied: ¡°Yes, unfortunately, he escaped and it isn¡¯t easy to find him.¡± Previously, Killua relied on his God Speed to match Shaiapouf¡¯s speed. Just now, when the explosion urred, Shaiapouf saw that Killua was distracted and escaped without a trace. Now, they didn¡¯t know Shaiapouf¡¯s location. An pondered for a bit: ¡°Shaiapouf is a royal guard. After he escaped, he probably went to find the Ant King. Let¡¯s wait for a bit here, he will definitivelye. He probably will panic ande to ask about the king¡¯s whereabouts.¡± Gon said: ¡°When hees to ask, we will kill him, right?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± An nodded. Everyone sat on the ground waiting for Shaiapouf while resting. The most injured among them were Knuckle and Shoot, thenes Morel, Kite, Gon, and Menshi. Killua didn¡¯t suffer any harm, because he relied on his God Speed and could dodge most attacks. However, in such battles, Stamina will be greatly consumed and everyone needed some time to recover. To use God Speed, Killua needed to covert Nen into an Electric current, as well as charge himself with electricity beforehand. Only after a full rest would Killua be able to use God Speed again, or he needed to be charged. An knew about this so he directly activated his fruit ability and charged Killua with an electric current. After being charged, Killua thanked An for his help. An waved his hand and said: ¡°It¡¯s just a small matter.¡± Killua once again entered God Speed and said: ¡°Then, I will go into the valley and look for Shaiapouf.¡± ¡°If you find him, lead him here and I will deal with him,¡± An said. ¡°Okay, I¡¯m going.¡± In the next second, Killua disappeared. After Killua entered the valley, Netero came to An and asked: ¡°An, how is your situation?¡± ¡°It¡¯s okay, I¡¯m good,¡± An replied. In his battle with the Ant King, An didn¡¯t suffer any substantial damage, only his Stamina was greatly consumed. Seeing An¡¯s fatigue, Netero said: ¡°You look tired, so go take a rest. If Killua finds Shaiapouf, this old man will deal with it. After taking that Senzu Been, I¡¯m the one who is most rested and brimming with energy.¡± An nodded as he was confident that even though old, Netero could deal with Shaiapouf with no problem. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 399! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 108! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 306: Shaiapouf’s Resentment Chapter 306: Shaiapouf¡¯s Resentment A few minutester, a figure shed with blue light out of the valley. After Killua came out, a ck figure chased after him. An¡¯s eyes were sharp, he noticed Shaiapouf chasing after Killua. ¡°Chairman, Killua brought Shaiapouf here.¡± An reminded Netero, who turned his head to the side. Netero nodded as he noticed Shaiapouf flying over as well. He immediately became vignt, after all, the royal guards were quite strong as well. Killua quickly rushed toward everyone and finally arrived at An¡¯s side. After seeing who was there, Shaiapouf realized that Killua was leading him here. But Shaiapouf didn¡¯t leave, instead, he rushed forward. Because he needed to know the situation of the Ant King and his whereabouts. There are only two people who knew about the situation with the ant king, the first was Netero, and the second was An. Although Shaiapouf had a bad feeling that the king met an ident, he didn¡¯t believe that the king would be defeated. Shaiapouf stopped ten meters away from An and the others. He stared at An and asked: ¡°Where is the king?¡± An shrugged and asked back: ¡°What do you think?¡± Shaiapouf suppressed his anger and asked again: ¡°I will ask one more time, where is the king? Answer me.¡± An sneered and didn¡¯t want to y anymore, so he replied: ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I defeated the ant king, and he is dead.¡± ¡°What did you say?¡± Hearing that the ant king was killed, Shaiapouf¡¯s eyes widened with shock and disbelief. After a while, Shaiapouf couldn¡¯t believe this. ¡°No, It¡¯s impossible, how can you kill the king, you¡¯re lying.¡± Shaiapouf seemed a little crazy. ¡°It¡¯s the truth, the king of the Chimera Ants was killed by me,¡± An said coldly. ¡°My King!¡± Shaiapouf shouted loudly toward the sky. Suddenly, a monstrous killing intent spread in all directions. Shaiapouf¡¯s eyes were full of anger and killing intent. Both Gon and Killua were frightened by the killing intent and their hearts trembled. Kite, Morel, and the others had serious expressions, ready to fight at any second. Only Netero and An were not that affected by the killing intent. An wasn¡¯t afraid even a little even though Shaiapouf¡¯s killing intent was aimed at him. Shaiapouf was nothingpared to the ant king after all. He just turned his head and nced at Netero before saying: ¡°I will leave him to you, Chairman.¡± Netero nodded: ¡°Leave it to this old man.¡± In the next second, Netero raised his hands in a praying gesture. (T/N: It seems that the Senzu been restored his leg and hands, which wasn¡¯t mentioned before.) A golden light bloomed behind Netero as his 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva appeared. Gon, Killua, and everyone else there widened their eyes. It was the first time they saw Netero using the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva. Even Kite and Morel were shocked by the 100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva¡¯s appearance. Netero waved his palm and said: ¡°Ninty Ninth hand!¡± Countless giant hands fell on Shaiapouf one after the other¡­ The speed of those attacks was close to the speed of sound, even the Ant King couldn¡¯t dodge this move, so Shaiapouf could only receive a beating. Under this Ninty ninth hand, Shaiapouf vomited blood and was seriously injured. Currently, there is not even a single part of his body that was intact, he was severely injured and the bones on his body werepletely shattered. He couldn¡¯t even fly. However, he could still stand up which was somewhat weird. Netero couldn¡¯t help sigh at this: ¡°As expected of a royal guard, he is also a monster. After attacking him with the ny-ninth hand, he still managed to survive.¡± An said: ¡°Chairman, you can use the Zero hand to finish him off.¡± ¡°Oh, okay.¡± Just when Netero was about to use the Zero hand, Shaiapouf suddenly released ck purple air. ¡°Hmm, is that a contract?¡± Seeing the strange ck aura around Shaiapouf¡¯s body, Netero¡¯s expression changed. A contract is a kind of Nen usage, Nen reacts to the goal of an individual, and by cing some limitations, and vowing to abide by them, a Nen user could gain immense power. At this moment, Shaiapouf was staring at An, which means that he is after him and his vow had something to due with An. Netero realized this and said to An: ¡°An, get out of here, this is troublesome.¡± An noticed this as well, but he didn¡¯t flee, instead, he said: ¡°Chairman, let me handle this.¡± Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 399! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 108! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 307: Amaterasu! Chapter 307: Amaterasu! ¡°An, what are you going to do? The Contract he made is directed at you.¡± Netero said. The contract Pouf made was very strong, even Netero was helpless feeling it. An replied seriously: ¡°I will kill him before he could do anything.¡± ¡°Such a Nen of death would be difficult to deal with,¡± Netero said. An reassured: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I have my ways. Just watch, Chairman.¡± Netero didn¡¯t know what method An nned to use, but since he killed the ant king, maybe he had a way to deal with this. In the next second, Netero noticed An¡¯s eyes turn scarlet with a special pattern in the middle. ¡°What kind of eyes are there? Why does it feel evil?¡± Netero frowned when he saw An¡¯s Mangekyou Sharingan. An looked at Pouf with his Mangekyou and said: ¡°Amaterasu!¡± A ck me suddenly appeared on Pouf¡¯s body. ¡°A ck me?¡± Netero, Kite, and everyone else was surprised by this. The ck me of Amaterasu was extremely hot and could destroy anything. It¡¯s a me that will burn for seven days and seven nights. In theory, Amaterasu can burn everything, not just people. Pouf tried to use his ability to split his body and get rid of the ck mes, but when it split, the ck me was still stuck in each copy. A few minutester, Pouf was finally burned to ashes by the ck mes of Amaterasu. ¡°Huh, it is done.¡± Seeing Pouf burned to ashes by Amaterasu, An sighed in relief. Everyone there couldn¡¯t believe what they saw, it took them a while to ept this. ¡°An, what kind of me was that? It was powerful enough to wipe the Malice and Death energy from Pouf!¡± ¡°That¡¯s a special power in my Mangekyou Sharingan eyes, it¡¯s called Amaterasu, which is a ck me that can burn down everything, including [On], or Malice.¡± Hearing this, Netero sighed: ¡°You¡¯re really too strong that I feel scared. Fortunately, you¡¯re on our side.¡± An stretched outzily and said: ¡°Chairman, the matter is resolved, let¡¯s go back.¡± Afterward, the group left this ce and returned to the Hunter Association. After returning, An rested for two days to recover all the energy he spent. It took the other longer to recover, well except for Killua who was like a battery, all he needed was electricity and he would be like new. A few days after their recovery, Netero summoned An, Kite, along with everyone else that participated in thest battle and awarded them. Gon and Killua were now single-star hunters, and Morel became a double-star hunter, along with Kite, and Menchi. Knuckle and Shoot received the single-star hunter title as well. An was now a triple star hunter, his status was equal to the twelve zodiacs, and even the vice-chairman, Pariston had to give him face now. Of course, when An was about to get his triple star title, there was a vote in the twelve zodiacs, and half of them were against An bing a triple star hunter. Though, since Netero hold the most authority, he overruled their objection and gave An that title. After bing a triple star hunter, An received a vi from the association that can be valued at one billion Jenny. An was satisfied with the vi and remembered that when he started here, it was difficult for him to even dream about getting such a high status. He worked hard and gained his power through the system, at first it wasn¡¯t much, but as he progressed, he became stronger and stronger, and finally, he stood at the top of the world. After the Chimera Ant incident, An and Gon returned to their peaceful lives for a while. Two dayster, in his house, An called out the system. Before killing the ant king, An received the system¡¯s reward, the God Level Treasure Chest. This should be the highest treasure chest in the system. Right now, An was about to open this chest and see what was hidden inside. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 405! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 108! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 308: The Law of Space Chapter 308: The Law of Space [Do you want to open the God Level Treasure Chest?] ¡°Yes!¡± An instantly responded. [Ding! Congrattions Host for opening the God-Level Treasure Chest and getting: Dimensional Exchange System!] Dimensional Exchange System? An was stunned. He already has a system, but he got another one? However, when he inquired, it seems that the two systems did not conflict. In simple terms, this dimensional exchange system is equivalent to a dimensional store, he could sell things and buy things from it. An can use his items or abilities to buy things in the store. The points were the virtual currency of the system. In this dimensional store, there were all kinds of products from all the worlds. For example, there are Sharingan¡¯s, Stands, Rokushiki, Haki, Devil Fruits, Zanpakuto, etc¡­ But An had many of those abilities. So, those things didn¡¯t attract him much. When he continued to check what was inside the store, he was stunned. ¡°This is? Even the power of thews are sold here?¡± There is something called the Space Law for sale inside the store. ording to the description the spacew had four basic abilities: Teleportation, Banishment, Sealing, and Severing. Moreover, after mastering the power of thisw, new abilities will develop as you go on. In a sense, this power was equivalent to being a god. An naturally wanted this spacew very much, after all, with his current abilities, he was nowhere near the power of a god. And if he masters the power of the spacew, he would enter a new realm of power. However, the price of thisw was 20 million points. Therefore, An must obtain those 20 million points first, and even if he sells all the items he didn¡¯t need, he would get at most 4 million points, which was far from enough. An didn¡¯t want to give up. After he sold the sword, Yatsufusa, for 1 million points. Now, he had 5 million points, and 15 million were left. An proceeded to sell his Observation and Armament Haki, which got him 1.5 million points. An sold Yoru for another million, and now he had 7.5 million points. An gritted his teeth and sold the Rasengan, Chidori, Bunsho Ten¡¯in, and Shinra Tensei one after the other. Those abilities added up to 3.5 million points and now he had 11 million points. An then checked all the items and abilities he currently still had and found that if he sold them, he would get 10 million points. An had to reluctantly sell them. He enjoyed using most of those abilities, and he found it a pity to actually sell them. But he thought that as long as he obtains thew of space, it will be worth it. An¡¯s ice fruit and rumble fruit were sold at 4 million points. An could only bear the pain. Next was Star tinum, which was sold at 3 million points. The Mangekyou Sharingan, which was thest ability An had, was sold for 3 million points. After selling those abilities and items, An finally gathered 21 million points. At this time, Apart from the original Nen ability he had, An didn¡¯t have any extra ability or item. An abandoned all of his abilities and items for the spacew which was a major choice in his life. An directly used 20 million points and finally obtained the spacew. The spacew should be stronger than all the abilities and items An had previously. ¡°With this power, even if it¡¯s a god, I will be fearless.¡± An clenched his fists and looked at the sky. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 405! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 108! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 309: Choice For the New Chairman Chapter 309: Choice For the New Chairman After getting the Space Law, An entered seclusion. Although he had this power now, he wasn¡¯t able to control it, so it took practice. Ten dayster, An finally ended his seclusion. Although he wasn¡¯t proficient yet, he can use the spacew at its basic level. For example, he can teleport. The teleport using thew of space was a genuine teleport. It¡¯s not a fast movement, but actually going from point A to Point B instantly. At this moment, he received a notice from Netero inviting him to the association. Now, as a triple star hunter, An was eligible to attend the important discussions held in the association. After receiving the notice, An decided to use the spacew to teleport to the association. An¡¯s house was located in the center of the city, and about a few hundred Kilometers away from the association. It takes two hours by car and one hour by aircraft to reach there. Using thew of space, An could use short-distance teleportation. His current limit was teleporting a kilometer at a time, so after a few jumps, An was already at the association. It took only a hundred seconds, which was 1 minute and forty seconds to travel a few hundred Kilometers. In Netero¡¯s office, thetter looked at An before saying: ¡°Well, I haven¡¯t seen you for a while and you seem to have changed.¡± An was startled, Netero¡¯s eyes were sure sharp. He smiled and asked: ¡°What change did the chairman notice?¡± Netero replied: ¡°I don¡¯t know exactly, but I feel like you are more powerful, or mysterious, I can¡¯t even see through you anymore.¡± An smiled: ¡°Thanks for the praise, Chairman, I just gained a new ability. However, for this reason, I also abandoned all of my previous powers. It can be said that now, I entered a brand-new realm. I will let you see what I mean sometimeter, chairman.¡± ¡°Haha, I look forward to it,¡± Netero said. After exchanging a few words, An finally asked: ¡°Chairman, what is it that required my presence this time?¡± Netero said: ¡°This old man is going to retire. I wanted to ask your opinion.¡± An wasn¡¯t surprised by this decision. ¡°Well, if you want to retire, of course, there shouldn¡¯t be a problem, chairman.¡± ¡°So, who do you think should be elected as the new chairman?¡± Netero asked. An thought for a while before he replied: ¡°I¡¯m not familiar with my colleagues in the association, but if you ask me to rmend someone, it should be one from the twelve zodiacs.¡± Netero nodded: ¡°This old think so as well. Those who take the chairman¡¯s position must have knowledge about the association. They also need to be strong enough. The Twelve Zodiacs are indeed the most suitable candidates.¡± ¡°So which one of the twelve does Chairman think is most suitable?¡± An asked. ¡°Well, I have two candidates in mind,¡± Netero replied. ¡°Oh? Can you tell me who they are?¡± An asked curiously. Netero replied: ¡°The first one is Pariston, in addition to being one of the twelve zodiacs, he is also the vice-chairman, and knows almost everything in the association. The second one is Cheadle Yorkshire. She is strong and recognized in the association, her reputation is high amongst her peers. She is also one of the few triple star hunters. I have no doubt that she has the qualification to be the next chairman. An nodded at the candidates that Netero chose and said: ¡°Pariston and Miss Cheadle Yorkshire are indeed the best candidates, they have the ability to be in that position, but¡­¡± ¡°But what?¡± Netero asked. ¡°I think there is someone else that can be the Chairman,¡± An said. ¡°You mean that Ging, Ging Freecss guy?¡± Netero asked. ¡°Yes, it¡¯s Gon¡¯s father. Although I haven¡¯t met him yet, they say that he is a great hunter.¡± An said. Netero said: ¡°It¡¯s undeniable that this guy is indeed a very good hunter. No, I should say he is a genius. At a young age, he is a very powerful Nen user, he also made a lot of contributions to the association and qualifies for the position, but¡­¡± ¡°But what?¡± ¡°But that guy won¡¯t be the chairman.¡± ¡°In other words, Ging himself doesn¡¯t want to be the chairman, he doesn¡¯t like to be restrained?¡± ¡°Restrained? Haha, this word is used well. That¡¯s right, Ging is a person who years for freedom and adventure. He has no interest in bing the Chairman and managing the association. Therefore, it¡¯s impossible for him to be the chairman.¡± ¡°Haha, in that case, you can only choose from Pariston and Miss Cheadle Yorkshire,¡± An said. ¡°Well, ¡°Election?¡± Netero replied: ¡°I will let the members of the association vote for the twelve zodiacs. All twelve of them will be candidates for the position, and whoever gets more votes will be the chairman, what do you think?¡± ¡°Well, that¡¯s a good idea, I think it will work.¡± An nodded. He was also interested in electing the new Chairman. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 405! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 108! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 310: The Twelve Zodiacs Gathers Chapter 310: The Twelve Zodiacs Gathers A weekter, Netero called the Twelve Zodiacs to hold a meeting. In a meeting room inside the Association¡¯s headquarters, the twelve zodiacs along with Netero sat down. The twelve Zodiacs are usually busy, so, gathering the twelve at the same time is rare. It¡¯s not easy to invite them all at the same time. But they didn¡¯t refuse this gathering after Netero invited them, which shows Netero¡¯s weight in their hearts. Pariston Hill ¨C The Rat! Mizaistom Nana ¨C The Ox! Kanzai ¨C The Tiger! Pyon ¨C The Rabbit! Botobai Gigante ¨C The Dragon! Gel ¨C The Snake! Sho Kobayakawa ¨C The Horse! Ginta ¨C The Sheep! Saiyu ¨C The Monkey! Cluck ¨C The Chicken! Cheadle Yorkshire ¨C The Dog! Ging Freecss ¨C The Boar! In addition to them, An was also invited to this meeting. Right now, he was sitting next to Netero. Originally, An didn¡¯t want to join the fun, but Netero said all the twelve Zodiacs areing, so he wanted to see them. The members of the twelve zodiacs weren¡¯t unfamiliar with An, after all, An was well known now. Besides, he is a triple-star hunter and deserved to be here with them. But there are several people who met An for the first time here, one of them was Ging Freecss. Ging at this moment looked at An a few times before he said: ¡°I didn¡¯t expect you to be so young. You really are good.¡± ¡°You¡¯re also younger than I thought. I thought you¡¯d be an old man already.¡± An said casually. ¡°I heard that you saved Kite when he was fighting the Chimera Ants, Thank you.¡± Ging thanked An. ¡°You only care about Kite, your disciple? What about Gon, your son? Have you met him? He really wanted to meet you.¡± An¡¯s words caught the attention of all the others there. Their eyes turned to Ging as they waited for the show. Ging scratched his head and said: ¡°I really haven¡¯t met Gon yet, but I heard that he is fine from Kite, you also took care of him, thank you.¡± An replied: ¡°I don¡¯t need any useless thank you, since you¡¯re Gon¡¯s father, you should meet him.¡± Ging nodded: ¡°Besidesing to this meeting, I wanted to look for Gon, that¡¯s why I¡¯m here.¡± ¡°Fine then,¡± An said. If Ging refused to meet Gon, An would be greatly disappointed in him. But the protagonist of this meeting was Netero, so he shouldn¡¯t show off. Netero went straight toward the main topic: ¡°Everyone, I n to retire.¡± The Twelve Zodiacs already expected this and weren¡¯t surprised. After all, Netero was the chairman of the association for decades and he was already quite old. ¡°Chairman, are you really nning to retire?¡± Asked Cheadle. ¡°Well, I already decided,¡± Netero said. He already told An before, and this time, he was only informing them. ¡°Chairman, who are you going to appoint as the next Chairman?¡± asked Mizaistom Nana. ¡°The candidate for this position has to be selected from you twelve, this is why I asked you toe,¡± Netero exined. ¡°Chairman, you¡¯re thinking too highly of us.¡± The Twelve Zodiacs looked at each other and fell into deep thoughts. After all, the position of the Chairman was not really simple. The responsibility and workload are too great and even as senior hunters, they aren¡¯t fully confident to take this position. Netero said: ¡°The next chairman will be decided by an Election. This particr election will be redone if the voting rate is less than 95%. The election will be repeated if the candidate with the most votes has not achieved the majority of votes in the first election. It is mandatory that all Hunters write their names, or else all nameless votes will be null and void. The member with the highest number of votes, in the end, will take the position of Chairman of the association.¡± The Twelve Zodiacs felt the pressure but none of them refused. The atmosphere inside the room became gloomy, as some members disliked each other. Pariston knew that ording to normal procedure, the vice-chairman should be the one to take over the chairman¡¯s position, but in this case, the other zodiacs won¡¯t agree. Because each of them doubted Pariston more or less. It¡¯s because of this that Netero proposed the election. In this way, it would be fair. At this time, the vice-chairman suddenly said: ¡°Chairman, why don¡¯t you add another candidate.¡± ¡°Hm? Who do you want to add?¡± Netero asked. ¡°It¡¯s the one next to you,¡± Pariston said as he looked at An. An felt as if he was targeted for no apparent reason. Netero turned his head and asked: ¡°An, what do you think?¡± An didn¡¯t expect Pariston to want him to join the election, but he immediately shook his head: ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I have no interest in being the chairman of the hunter association. I appreciate your kindness, Vice Chairman Pariston.¡± Pariston said: ¡°Well, that¡¯s a pity, otherwise, you might be the youngest new chairman in the history of the association.¡± An shrugged. After all, he is freer now and can do whatever he wanted. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 405! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 108! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 311: Gon Meets Ging Chapter 311: Gon Meets Ging After the meeting, An went to Ging and said: ¡°Ging, I don¡¯t want you to slip away, so I will take you to Gon.¡± Ging smiled awkwardly. Originally, he really wanted to slip away after the meeting, but An didn¡¯t allow that. Without any other choice, Ging followed An to meet Gon. Ging also wanted to meet Gon, however, he felt guilty about leaving Gon to Mito instead of looking after him himself, so he couldn¡¯t bring himself to face his child. He felt that he was unqualified to be Gon¡¯s father. An knew about this andforted Ging: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Gon won¡¯t me you.¡± ¡°Really?¡± ¡°Yes, I know Gon very well, better than you do.¡± ¡°It seems so.¡± Ging gave a wry smile without denying this. After a phone call, An found out that Gon was training with Kite and Killua. Since the end of the battle with the Chimera Ants, they realized how weak they were and started training. Inside a vi a few dozens of Kilometers away from the association, Gon and Killua were fighting against Kite. Even Kite felt the pressure from fighting those two together now and he was quite surprised by the rate of their progress. However, without relying on Nen¡¯s abilities, they weren¡¯t Kite¡¯s match. After all, Kite was older and had much experience inbat. So, in terms of the basics, Kite was stronger than both of thembined. Kite also got to know them better from the fights. Gon was stronger than Killua since he was an enhancer, but Killua had better techniques. Killua was also deceptive. ¡°Kite, you¡¯re really strong.¡± Gon admired. ¡°This is really good. it looks like you can help us be stronger.¡± Killua said. ¡°You two are strong as well and really talented. You are still young and have a bright future, but for now, you guys still can¡¯t win against me.¡± After saying this, Kite directly kicked Gon and Killua. Both kids were thrown away and fell onto each other. ¡°Damn it, Gon, let me handle him for a bit.¡± Killua was dissatisfied, so he made Gon stay back and decided to use all of his power. Kite was quite interested now that Killua refused to admit defeat. Killua released his Nen and turned it into an electric current. With Killua¡¯s God Speed activated, he became even faster than Kite. However, with Kite¡¯s experience, he can deal with Killua even with the additional speed. After that, Kite pointed out the shorings of Killua¡¯s ability, which was theck of attacking power. Although the speed was good, the power was not enough. When facing a stronger opponent, as an enhancer, it will be difficult to cause them any harm. Therefore, Kite advised Killua to increase his attacking power while maintaining his speed. After Killua ended his spar, it was Gon¡¯s turn. But at this moment, two guests came from outside. They were obviously An and Ging. The scene of Gon meeting Ging was slightly awkward. Neither of them took the initiative to speak up. Ging scratched the back of his head not knowing what to say. An sighed. Kite said: ¡°Teacher, you¡¯re finally willing to see Gon.¡± Hearing Kite¡¯s words, Killua said: ¡°So, you¡¯re Gon¡¯s father, you look like him.¡± Gon said: ¡°Killua, this is actually my first-time seeing Ging.¡± ¡°Shouldn¡¯t you call him father or dad? Killua asked as he heard Gon call his father by name. ¡°No, for now, I should call him by name, right?¡± Gon looked at Ging. Ging replied: ¡°Well, you can call me Ging, you don¡¯t need to call me dad.¡± ¡°Really weird father and son,¡± Killua said speechlessly. It wasn¡¯t that Gon didn¡¯t want to call him father, but in a sense, they were strangers, since Gon knew nothing about Ging other than their blood rtions. As for Ging, he was even more rxed when Gon called him by his name instead of his father. An said: ¡°You two can talk first, let go.¡± After that, An took Kite and Killua and left temporarily, allowing Gon and Ging to talk. After they left, Gon said: ¡°Ging, I have a lot to tell you, let¡¯s find a ce to sit and talk.¡± Ging nodded: ¡°I know a nice ce, I will take you there.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Gon was looking forward to it. ¡°That ce is called the world tree, we will talk there.¡± ¡°World tree?¡± Gon wondered. Ging: ¡°It¡¯s thergest tree in the world, as long as you climb to the top, you can see beautiful scenery.¡± Upon hearing this, Gon said: ¡°Then let¡¯s hurry and go.¡± Ging said: ¡°The ce is quite far away, so I asked my partner to take us there.¡± ¡°Ging¡¯s partner?¡± ¡°Strictly speaking, it¡¯s a bird, a very big bird.¡± Under Ging¡¯s call, a huge bird appeared in the sky and thennded on thewn near the vi. ¡°Wow, that¡¯s really a big bird.¡± Gon was stunned. ¡°It¡¯s a partner I brought from somewhere, and it helped me travel all over the world.¡± After that, Ging took Gon and jumped on the back of the giant bird, and flew to the World Tree. Novels Status on Patreon: T.S.H: Complete Chapter 638 (Tier Survivor) HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 399! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 109! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 312: World Tree Chapter 312: World Tree The world tree reached a height of 1,784 meters, which was several hundred meters taller than the tallest building in the world. Thousands of people challenged the tree to reach the highest peak without using any tools. However, ordinary people won¡¯t be able to reach the peak, as ny percent of them would give up halfway from exhaustion. The other five percent died in idents, and only thest five percent would enjoy the scenery at its peak. On top of the giant bird, Gon and Ging reached the top of the world tree. At the top, both started having a conversation all day and didn¡¯t leave until the next day. Gon learned a great deal of information from Ging. In particr, Gon learned about the current ¡®world¡¯ that humans live in. The world was vast, very vast, and the currentnd humans govern was just a very small part of it. There were other continents besides the one inhabited by humans. Those continents were very dangerous. Humans won¡¯t be able to survive there. Gon also learned from Ging that the Chimera Ant came from the other continents, one called Dark Continent. After gaining a new understanding of the world, Gon was eager and curious about the dark continent. As a hunter, he wanted to go on an adventure there. However, Ging told him that its best to not go until he is twenty, because the ce was dangerous and even strong hunters died there. If you aren¡¯t strong enough, you can¡¯t go there. Even Ging wasn¡¯t sure he coulde back from the dark continent if he went there. Gon promised Ging that he would not go until he was twenty years old. He still has eight years to get stronger. When Ging saw Gon¡¯s determination, he smiled in relief. After that, Ging gave Gon some money and left him his contact information, before he temporarily returned to the hunter¡¯s association. Gong, on the other hand, returned to Kite¡¯s vi. In order to be stronger, Gon and Killua trained together with Kite. As for An, he lived leisurely. For him who learned the Law of Space, he was no longer busy training. On the other hand, Netero formally submitted his Resignment letter to the twelve Zodiacs and the V5. The V5 is another name for the five Major Powers. The Hunter association is supported by the V5. This is the reason that the hunter license had so much privilege around the world. Netero¡¯s resignation needs to be epted by the V5 before he steps down, and if they don¡¯t agree, Netero could only continue being the Chairman. Fortunately, the V5 Executives finally agreed to let Netero resign. When Netero announced his retirement, it caused a lot of discussion around the world. In the decades that Netero held his position, he deeply influenced many people, especially the hunters. A few dayster, Netero sent an official email to all members of the association to inform them about the election of the new chairman. After the hunters heard about the election, they rushed back from all over the world. An, Kite, Gon, and Killua also received the email and went to the association. When they reached the association, An and the others met Leorio and Kurapika, who they didn¡¯t see for a long time. Gon was the most excited and happy about this reunion. He went and told them about the fight with the Chimera Ants which made them understand the danger humanity faced. Besides them, Even Hisoka came to the association. Although Gon and the others were surprised that Hisoka was here, they didn¡¯t say much, after all, Hisoka was a Hunter. Hisoka was pleasantly surprised by Gon and Killua¡¯s growth. However, because An was there, he didn¡¯t dare look at them in any way. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 406! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 109! Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel, and have a nice day. Chapter 313: Chairman’s Election Chapter 313: Chairman¡¯s Election Two dayster, the Chairman¡¯s election started. There were around 635 hunters in the association currently. ording to the statistics, a total of 606 hunters came to vote for the new chairman. On the day of the election, the association was very lively. In addition to them, some members of the V5 came to supervise the election to ensure fairness. Since the founding of the association, there were only twelve chairmen, and the twelfth was Netero. Since Netero was retiring, it was time to elect the 13th chairman. Netero stood on the edge of the stage looking at the audience who were hunters who came to vote. As a Triple-star hunter, An was in the first row. Gon, Killua, Kurapika, and Leorio were in the second row. Other familiar faces were present, like Kite, Morel, Knov, and others. Hisoka was sitting on the row beforest. Next to him was a very vacant space. No hunter was willing to sit next to him. They all felt that Hisoka was too dangerous and didn¡¯t dare sit there. If any hunter had a bit of knowledge, they would know of Hisoka, and even the twelve Zodiacs didn¡¯t dare provoke him. Everyone was curious and surprised that such a dangerous person came to vote for the new chairman. ¡°Everyone, quiet down.¡± Netero¡¯s voice stopped all discussions in the hall. ¡°Let¡¯s start the Election now. Before we start voting, I will ask the twelve candidates toe out and give a speech.¡± The first person that came out was Pariston. After introducing himself, he went on and said: ¡°I have served as the Vice-Chairman for three years now and I learned a lot from Chairman Netero. Working with him made me understand the requirement for this position. First of all, it requires strength. As a professional hunter, you need to be strong, but as chairman of the entire hunter association, this position needs strength above all others. The second thing needed was the experience of being a professional hunter and managing the affair of the association. The third requirement is temperament. This is referring to the capacity to forgive and withstand oppression from others. People with limited resources can¡¯t hold the Chairman Position. If I have the chance to be the next Chairman, I will definitively work to manage the association better and ensure further development.¡± After Pariston finished his speech, the next to speak was Mizaistom Nana, who didn¡¯t give a normal speech but instead exined that he didn¡¯t want to be the next Chairman and wanted whoever was going to vote for him to give that vote to Ging Freecss. After that, the zodiacs each gave a different kind of speech. After the twelve finished their speeches, only four expressed their intention to be the next chairman. Ging also expressed that he had no interest in bing the new chairman, and hoped that no one would vote for him. In addition to Ging, the other three were Botobai Gigante, the dragon, Pariston, the rat, and Cheadle the dog. Netero returned to the stage and said: ¡°Then, let¡¯s start the votes now, each person can vote for one candidate, and the one with the highest votes will be the new chairman.¡± After saying this, the voting process started. The Twelve Zodiacs stood on the stage with a box in front of them. Hunters who voted only needed to write their names on a piece of paper and then drop it in the box. ¡°An, who do you want to vote for?¡± Kite walked toward An and asked. ¡°Well, I n to vote for Botobai Gigante,¡± An said. ¡°Mr. Botobai Gigante is indeed a good candidate, but I decided to vote for Ging since he is my teacher,¡± Kite said. Gon heard that kite was nning to give his vote to Ging and said: ¡°Ging said he doesn¡¯t want to be the chairman, so Kite, you should give your vote to someone else.¡± ¡°Then Gon, who are you going to vote for?¡± Kite asked. ¡°I don¡¯t know much about the Zodiacs, but judging from their speech, I decided to vote for Pariston.¡± After hearing this, Kite said: ¡°Gon, do you know that Pariston and your father had a very rocky rtionship? They think differently, and although they are not enemies, they think too differently. They are kind of rivals.¡± ¡°It turns out that Pariston is Ging¡¯s rival. Mm, I will give my vote to someone else then, I have to think about it.¡± Gon said. ¡°Killua, how about you?¡± Seeing Gon struggling, An asked Killua. ¡°Whatever, I don¡¯t care who will be the next chairman anyway,¡± Killua replied. ¡°Then, you have to choose someone to support,¡± An said. ¡°Then just like you, I will give my vote to Mr. Botobai Gigante.¡± Killua decided. An nodded and then asked: ¡°What about you, Leorio, Kurapika? Who are you voting for?¡± Kurapika replied: ¡°I decided to vote for Miss Cheadle.¡± After that, each one voted for someone they wanted to support. When An went to vote, he happened to meet Hisoka and asked: ¡°Who did you vote for?¡± Hisoka nced at Gon and said: ¡°I voted for Gon¡¯s father.¡± After that, everyone returned to their seats. The staff started counting the votes and Netero finallye to announce the result of the Election. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 407! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 113! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 314: New Chairman Chapter 314: New Chairman ¡°Everyone, the votes have been counted, and there are 600 valid votes and only 6 didn¡¯t vote.¡± Following that, Netero announced the votes of the twelve candidates. In thest ce is Pyon with 19 votes. The eleventh ce was Gel, with 20 votes. In tenth ce was Sho Kobayakawa, with 23 votes. The ninth ce is Ginta, with 24 votes. The Eighth ce is Saiyu, with 27 votes. The Seventh ce is Kanzai, with 30 votes. The Sixth ce is Cluck, with 37 votes. In fifth ce was Mizaistom Nana with 41 votes. In fourth ce was Cheadle, with 60 votes. Netero stopped in the fourth ce without announcing thest three. The remaining three were Ging, Pariston, and Botobai Gigante. The three of them had most of the votes and one of them will be the next Chairman. An and the others started guessing who will get third ce and so on. ¡°Gon, do you think your father will get the first ce?¡± Asked Killua. Gon shook his head and said: ¡°I don¡¯t think so.¡± ¡°You felt so?¡± An asked. ¡°Yeah.¡± Gon nodded. Leorio said: ¡°I think Ging should be second ce.¡± Kurapika had a different view as he said: ¡°I think Ging is either in the first or third ce.¡± Hearing this, Leorio said: ¡°Do you want to be?¡± ¡°Okay, what do we bet on?¡± Kurapika asked. ¡°How about a hundred thousand Jenny?¡± Leorio said. ¡°No problem,¡± Kurapika replied. ¡°Then I will bet that he will get the second ce,¡± Leorio said. Kurapika thought for a bit and said: ¡°Then I bet that he got the first ce.¡± At this time An said: ¡°Why don¡¯t you let me in too.¡± Kurapika and Leorio nodded at the same time and said: ¡°No problem, so what ce do you think Ging will get?¡± An said: ¡°I will bet he got third ce.¡± ¡°What?¡± Both Leorio and Kurapika felt something weird. From the way everyone voted, Ging should be first or second ce. Of course, Pariston and Botobai Gigante were also popr. After a while, Netero announced the number of votes for the third ce, which was, sure enough, Ging with 90 votes. An guessed right and won the bet. Leorio and Kurapika each gave An a hundred thousand Jenny. An put them away happily Killua said: ¡°I knew that I should¡¯ve bet on Ging getting third ce.¡± Leorio murmured: ¡°You¡¯re only saying that now.¡± An smiled: ¡°The first and second ce is not announced yet, so let¡¯s bet on who is first and second, and this time will also use a Hundred Thousand Jenny.¡± ¡°Then I will bet that the new chairman will be Pariston,¡± Leorio said confidently. An then said: ¡°Then I will be on Botobai Gigante.¡± Leorio smiled: ¡°This time I will win, you won¡¯t be so lucky each time.¡± An smiled back: ¡°Then let¡¯s wait and see.¡± Following that, everyone else also gave their bets. Kurapika said: ¡°I will also bet on Mr. Botobai Gigante.¡± ¡°Me too.¡± Killua continued. ¡°Then, will y as well, I will also bet on Mr. Botobai Gigante.¡± Gon said. Hearing this, Leorio was speechless: ¡°You guys are that confident that Botobai Gigante will get the first ce?¡± At this moment, Leorio was a bit shaken, but he ced his bet first, so he can¡¯t change it now. If he wins the bet, he would get four hundred thousand Jenny, but if he lost, he will have to give that amount all at once. Finally, Netero announced the first and second ces, which were 114 votes for Pariston, and 115 for Botobai Gigante. Therefore, in this election, Botobai Gigante won and became the chairman. Botobai Gigante was one of the closest people to Netero and he had both strength and reputation. So, no one was dissatisfied with him. Lorio sighed. Killua rubbed it in: ¡°Leorio, you lost.¡± Leorio was helpless, so he could only give out the four hundred thousand Jenny to the four of them. He could only ept this loss. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 408! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 113! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 315: Departure Chapter 315: Departure After the Election, Botobai Gigante became the thirteenth Chairman of the hunter association. The Vice-Chairman was still Pariston, and the former Chairman, Netero, officially retired. At the Session ceremony, Botobai Gigante dered that he will manage the association to the best of his ability and won¡¯t disappoint everyone¡¯s expectations. The next day, most hunters were leaving, and at this time, Gon saw Ging again. This is their second meeting and it wasn¡¯t as awkward as the first one. After Ging and Gon chatted casually, Gin asked Gon about his next n. Gon said that he will go train for the time being. Ging nodded and expressed his support. After that, Gon asked about Ging¡¯s n, Ging exined that he will visit new ces on the dark continent. Since he was talking about the dark continent, Ging exined that Gon needed four things to prepare before he can go there. The first is the license, which was a special license issued by the V5. Because, the Dark Continent isn¡¯t a ce can go as they please, they needed permission first. Following that were the means, qualifications, and contracts which Ging didn¡¯t exin. Because the license wasn¡¯t something easily obtained. The conversation between Ging and Gon was head by An, who was interested and said to Ging: ¡°When are you going to the Dark Continent? Remember to contact me before you go, I wille with you.¡± Hearing this, Ging said: ¡°No problem, you even eliminated the ant king, which shows your power.¡± After that, Ging left. An, Gon, and the others were going to part ways, before that, they each talked about their next destination and ns. Kite said that he would continue his previous work and look for new biological creatures and prevent other Chimera Ants-like creatures from emerging. After hearing this, Gon wanted to go along with Kite to train. Kite agreed to this and decided to take Gon along. Gonter asked Killua if wanted to join him, but Killua refused, saying: ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Gon, I have to go back home, I can¡¯t apany you to train for a while.¡± Gon didn¡¯t force this as Killua¡¯s family was special. Killua then added: ¡°I will look for you and Kite when I¡¯m done.¡± Gon nodded then asked Leorio and Kurapika about what they will do next. Leorio exined: ¡°I have obtained a medical certificate and I¡¯m a doctor now, I¡¯m ready to help people and make a lot of money.¡± Kurapika on the other hand said: ¡°I will continue to trace my tribe¡¯s eyes and look for Chrollo¡¯s whereabouts.¡± An then said: ¡°If you want to find Chrollo or the Spiders, you can go to Meteor City, that is their hometown.¡± ¡°Meteor city, I will go there then,¡± Kurapika said. ¡°An, where are you going?¡± Gon asked. An thought for a while before he said: ¡°I¡¯m going back to The Heaven¡¯s Arena, because Killua¡¯s brother, Kalluto is waiting for me there, I¡¯m going to see him.¡± An took Kalluto to The Heaven¡¯s Arena to train, and it has been a while so he didn¡¯t know what¡¯s Kalluto¡¯s situation now. After that, Everyone went their separate ways. The Heaven¡¯s Arena was hundreds of Kilometers away from the hunter association, but An didn¡¯t have to take any means of transportation, as he just casually teleported there in less than five minutes. After arriving at The Heaven¡¯s Arena, An directly went to look for Kalluto, but he didn¡¯t find him there. An directly contacted Zeno to see if Kalluto returned home, but he replied that Kalluto didn¡¯t return and he couldn¡¯t even contact him. This made An anxious since he was the one who took Kalluto away. He felt responsible for this, so he tried to search for Kalluto till one day, An was finally able to reach Kalluto¡¯s phone. Kalluto exined that he joined an organization and was training in that organization, so An didn¡¯t need to worry. Kalluto didn¡¯t specify which organization he joined, but An guessed it was the Phantom Brigade. It must be that Chrollo attracted Kalluto¡¯s attention and made him curious about the Phantom brigade. Since Kalluto said there is nothing to worry about, An didn¡¯t intervene. As long as the Phantom Brigade didn¡¯t provoke him, An wouldn¡¯t care about them. After leaving The Heaven¡¯s Arena, An decided to go to some restricted areas around the world. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 409! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 113! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 316: Gourmet Hunter Chapter 316: Gourmet Hunter Time flew by and a year passed. On a small ind somewhere, a red-haired pig was being roasted on fire. In front of the fire, a young man was staring at it waiting patiently to try this delicacy. This young man was of course An, and next to him was a young woman. This woman was short, wore a ck transparent short sleeves top, and had a starfish-like hairstyle. She of course wasn¡¯t an ordinary woman, but a single-star gourmet hunter, Menchi. One year ago, An and Gon went each their separate way, and two months ago while An was adventuring around, he met Menchi, who was looking for some exquisite food. Menchi¡¯s former partner was Buhara, but he died facing the Chimera Ants. After that ident, Menchi didn¡¯t look for a new partner and instead started journeying by herself. After meeting An, Menchi felt that it was fate and invited him to join her in looking for delicacies. An agreed to be Menchi¡¯s temporary partner. Menchi also felt safer with An around, since he was quite strong. There is always danger around rare ingredients and exquisite animals, so bringing An along with guaranteed safety. As for An, he was bored traveling alone, so he decided to join Menchi in her adventure to find food. In fact, whether it was An or Menchi, adventuring alone would get boring and make them feel lonely sometimes, so they can share the joy of traveling when they are together. In the past two months, An gained a new understanding of food. For example, the red-haired pig that was being roasted was caught by him. In the eyes of a gourmet hunter, this pig was a level one capture target, which meant that even ten strong men couldn¡¯t capture it. To capture it, you need ten hunters with powerful skills. The habitat of the Red-haired pigs was generally the jungles, cliffs, canyons, and other ces. The meat was soft and juicy, it only needed to be grilled on the fire without adding anything. It¡¯s a premium ingredient that can only be found in a five-star restaurant. ¡°Hey, Menchi, it has been roasting for more than an hour, can I eat now? I¡¯m hungry already.¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, Menchi raised her head and said: ¡°Not yet, the red-haired pig¡¯s body is huge, it needs two hours to roast at least, you should bear it for now.¡± ¡°Okay, I will wait.¡± In order to eat delicious meat, An could only hold back and wait. During the two months with Menchi, An was spoilt too much and ordinary food can¡¯t entice him anymore. Only high-quality delicacy and satisfy him now. The fragrant smell of the meat attracted many small animals. After some time, An finally tore off arge piece from the Pig¡¯s leg and ate it. Menchi said: ¡°The Red-haired pig is a high-quality ingredient, 100 grams of it can be sold for 80,000 Jenny. This Pig weighs at least 300 Kilograms, so it¡¯s not affordable for most people and priceless in the market. We are lucky to find it on such an ind.¡± ¡°Unexpectedly, the price of this pig is so high. It seems that I won¡¯t have to worry about food following you.¡± An said. ¡°That¡¯s for sure, as long as you follow me, you can eat delicacies 10 times better than this¡­¡± Menchi boasted. ¡°Being a gourmet hunter is really good. I think I will convert into one as well.¡± An said. Hearing this, Menchi said: ¡°If you want to eat delicious things by bing a gourmet hunter, then it¡¯s impossible to be an excellent one.¡± An was puzzled: ¡°What do you mean? Does it need other conditions?¡± ¡°Of course, if you want to be Gourmet Hunter, you must have enough knowledge of the ingredients and have decent cooking techniques. If you just want to eat, that¡¯s not Gourmet hunter.¡± ¡°I understand. Although I don¡¯t know most of the ingredients, I will study hard to be an excellent gourmet hunter.¡± Seeing that An was enlightened, Menchi patted his shoulder and said: ¡°Just follow me, you will be a great gourmet hunter just doing that.¡± An nodded. Menchi was a single-star gourmet hunter and is an expert. He would learn a lot about food by just following her. Half an hourter, the red-Haired pig was eaten by An and Menchi. Menchi said: ¡°In fact, High-end ingredients are not only delicious, but they also have some effects that ordinary ingredients don¡¯t. For Example, some high-grade ingredients can enhance physical power, some of them can even prolong life.¡± An was surprised: ¡°Is it that magical?¡± ¡°It¡¯s true, but those kinds of ingredients are very rare. You can¡¯t find them easily and most of them are in highly dangerous areas.¡± An curiously asked: ¡°What do you mean? There are some areas with those kinds of ingredients?¡± Menchi nodded: ¡°Yes, I know some ces that have those ingredients.¡± ¡°Where?¡± An asked curiously. Menchi didn¡¯t answer directly, but instead asked: ¡°An, have you been to some ces outside of the world¡¯s map?¡± An frowned and said: ¡°Outside the map? Do you mean the dark continent?¡± Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 410! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 114! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 317: Outside World Chapter 317: Outside World Hearing An mentioning the Dark Continent, Menchi was surprised: ¡°Do you know that ce?¡± ¡°Well, it is said that there are all kinds of creatures there and the Chimera Ants originated from that ce,¡± An said. Menchi nodded and said: ¡°Yeah, the dark continent is a mysterious ce, there is barely any information about it, and each time a human sets foot on it, they will bring back a disaster.¡± That¡¯s why the V5 signed a treaty prohibiting any humans from going there without their permission. ¡°I heard that Chairman Netero has been there before,¡± An said. ¡°Yes, Chairman Netero has indeed been there, and he is one of the few people who returned sessfully,¡± Menchi replied. An asked confusedly: ¡°Then when you were talking is not the dark continent? What do you mean the outside world?¡± Menchi replied: ¡°I wasn¡¯t talking about the dark continent.¡± An couldn¡¯t help his curiosity: ¡°Then what are talking about? Are there other ces outside the world?¡± Menchi said seriously: ¡°Actually, based on my personal experience, I learned that there are other continents besides the dark continent.¡± An nodded and listened intently. ¡°It¡¯s different from the dark continent, Humans live there.¡± ¡°How do I get there?¡± An asked. If there are other continents with humans in this world, it will be a huge discovery. ¡°Do you know the Bilgai Desert?¡± Menchi asked. An thought for a bit then nodded: ¡°Well, I¡¯ve heard about it. It is said to be one of the three biggest and harshest ces in the world. A very dangerous ce.¡± Menchi exined: ¡°The Bilgai Desert is located in the Republic of Rokario. Only licensed hunters can enter that area.¡± Hearing this, Anplimented: ¡°Menchi, you really know a lot about this, are you going there in the future? However, what I want to know is, what does that desert have to do with the continent where other humans live?¡± Menchi thought for a while before she said: ¡°As far as I know, the Bilgai Desert seems to have a passage to the outside world.¡± An seemed really excited: ¡°Where is that passage? How did you know about it?¡± ¡°I went to the Bilgai Desert once, and when I was looking for food, I saved a person in that desert.¡± Hearing this, An pondered: ¡°It seems like this person wasn¡¯t an ordinary person. Could it be a human from the outside world?¡± Menchi said: ¡°Thenguage he spoke was different from our own, but the pronunciation was simr. As a gourmet hunter, I¡¯m familiar with manynguages, so I quicklye to understand what he¡¯s saying. What surprised me was this person was a gourmet. Because of some ident, this person came to our world by chance. In fact, he didn¡¯t know that he came to a different continent or world at all. But whilemunicating with him, I learned that he didn¡¯te from our world. ording to him, he came from the outside world. Therefore, I learned that our current world isn¡¯t the only ce with humans.¡± ¡°What¡¯s that person¡¯s name?¡± An asked curiously. ¡°He is called Komatsu,¡± Menchi said. ¡°Komatsu?¡± (T/N: Toriko¡¯s cook, or whatever, didn¡¯t actually watch Toriko.) An frowned. The name is familiar, but he couldn¡¯t remember where he heard it. The name was quite ordinary, so it wouldn¡¯t be strange that he heard it from somewhere. Immediately afterward, An asked: ¡°Where is that Komatsu now? Has he gone back?¡± Menchi nodded: Well, Komatsu already left. When he left, he invited me to go with him. But I refused because, at that time, I still fear the outside world. This fear originated from the Dark Continent. I started wondering whether Komatsu was from the Dark Continent or not, but after reading some ancient books, I discovered that there are many unknown areas in the world besides the dark continent. It was unknown whether these areas were inhabited by humans or not, but from what I have experienced, it seems that some of them have humans. So, I believed what Komatsu said and knew that there are other humans on other continents.¡± After hearing this, An was lost in thought. After a long time, he raised his head and looked at Menchi: ¡°You told me about this, do you want me to apany you there?¡± ¡°Yeah, but to be precise, I want to leave this continent and see the outside world, not necessarily go to the continent where Komatsu is located, because I think there are many unknown ces in the world,¡± Menchi exined. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 411! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 114! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 318: Inviting Netero Chapter 318: Inviting Netero Before setting off to Bilgai Desert, An thought of a person, so he suggested to Menchi: ¡°Going to the outside world is a very risky thing, we don¡¯t anything about those ces. If we get someone who traveled to the outside world before, it should be safer. Hearing this, Menchi thought of someone. The person she thought about is obviously the same one An thought about. Because only a handful of people actually went outside the world and returned. Isaac Netero, the former Chairman of the hunter association, was someone who traveled to the Dark Continent and returned back safely. He is one of the few that knows the outside world. Menchi looked at An and said: ¡°Are you going to look for Chairman Netero to go with us?¡± An smiled and nodded: ¡°Chairman Netero is retired now, and he has all the time to adventure. Since he doesn¡¯t have anything to do, I think he is currently very bored. So, we might as well invite him to go with us. Furthermore, Chairman Netero is someone who returned safely from the Dark Continent. He should know about the other ces better than we do. I also think the chairman Netero wants to see the outside world again, so let¡¯s take this opportunity to invite him. He should agree.¡± Menchi thought for a while and agreed with An. If it was someone else, she wouldn¡¯t agree, but it is Netero, he would be of great help. ¡°Okay.¡± This meant that it is up to you to convince him. ¡°Rest assured, Chairman Netero will agree.¡± If it was someone else, An wouldn¡¯t dare guarantee this, but Netero will definitively agree. Netero owed him his life since he saved him using the Senzu Bean. Furthermore, Netero appreciated and admired An¡¯s strength. An contacted Netero and the call was quickly connected. Netero was curious and surprised by An¡¯s call. Because he knew that An wouldn¡¯t just call to ask about his situation, and there must be something important for the call. Through the conversation, An learned that Netero is living a secluded life alone deep in a mountain. Although life was in, it wasfortable enough. After talking about the situation briefly, An invited Netero. Hearing that Ana and Menchi were going to the outside world, Netero said strangely: ¡°Going to the Dark Continent is forbidden by the V5, even if you are a professional hunter, you can¡¯t go without their permission. Furthermore, even if you want to go, I¡¯m afraid you won¡¯t know the route toward the dark continent.¡± Facing Netero¡¯s doubt, An smiled and said: ¡°Chairman, you have misunderstood, we aren¡¯t going to the dark continent, but to other continents in the outside world.¡± ¡°What, other continents?¡± Hearing this, Netero was silent for a moment before he said: ¡°It looks like you know a lot, you actually know about the other continents besides the dark continent.¡± Hearing Netero¡¯s answer, An was overjoyed. This meant that Netero knew about the other continents. Netero thought for a few seconds before he said: ¡°Well, I will meet with you first, then we will talk in detail.¡± This way, An told Netero his current location and waited for him toe over. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 412! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 119! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 319: Netero’s Amazing Appetite Chapter 319: Netero¡¯s Amazing Appetite Three dayster, on the same small ind, Menchi and An were roasting a beast on the fire. ¡°It¡¯s been three days, will Chairman Netero reallye? Did he stand us up? That old man!¡± While cutting off a piece of the Beast¡¯s leg, Menchiined. An on the side was much calmer. ¡°This ce is very far and remote, even if he took an aircraft, it would take him two days and a half at least. If he ising by boat, it will take several days. Just wait patiently and have some trust in chairman Netero.¡± Menchi said: ¡°I don¡¯t have your patience, I will just wait another day, if he doesn¡¯te, I will ignore that smelly old man.¡± ¡°Okay, no problem.¡± An was confident that Netero wille soon, so he agreed with Menchi to appease her. At an altitude of several Kilometers, a huge bird was flying in the clouds. On the back of the giant bird, two old men stood. The first old man sat cross-legged on the head of the bird, looking down to the ground under the clouds. The old man wore a blue and white Kimono, he had a thick beard like a goat and a ponytail. His earlobes were long and he seemed like a peaceful buddha. The other old man stood on the back o the giant bird with his hand behind his back. Although his hair and beard were white, his eyes were sharp. He was wearing a shirt that had the words one kill in a day, Never Retire. ¡°Well, Chairman, the ind you¡¯re talking about should be the one below.¡± Zeno reminded. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go down,¡± Netero said. When the giant bird started descending, An and Menchi noticed it. An had sharp eyes and directly noticed the two people on top of the bird, one was Isaac Netero, and the other was Zeno Zoldyck. As the giant birdnded, both old men jumped off. An and Menchi greeted them and thetter said: ¡°Old man, you¡¯re too slow.¡± Netero scratched his head and smiled: ¡°Sorry, Sorry!¡± He knew Menchi¡¯s temperament and that his tardiness will cause Menchi¡¯s dissatisfaction. So he could onlyugh it off. At this moment, An said: ¡°Chairman, Mr. Zeno, it¡¯s been a long time since west met.¡± Netero nced at An up and down before he said: ¡°I haven¡¯s seen you in a year and it seems like you¡¯re still as energetic as before.¡± Zeno asked: ¡°I heard that you¡¯re a gourmet hunter now?¡± An nodded and said: ¡°The pursuit of food is also a type of training.¡± Zeno touched his beard and said: ¡°Well, it¡¯s good to be a gourmet hunter, but if youe to learn to be an assassin, it would be better.¡± After chatting for a while, An turned to Netero and asked: ¡°By the way, Chairman, why did youe with Mr. Zeno? Is he going with us?¡± Hearing this, Zeno shook his head: ¡°I¡¯m an assassin, I can¡¯t just go as I want I still have my family¡¯s business and can¡¯t travel far away Besides, this old man is not interested in the outside world¡± Netero exined: ¡°I just asked Zeno to bring me over because it¡¯s more convenient than taking an aircraft¡± ¡°I see¡± An nced at the giant bird behind Zeno, it didn¡¯t seem smaller than the guard dog of the zoldyck At this time, Netero¡¯s nose twitched as he sniffed: ¡°It smells so good What are you guys cooking?¡± ¡°Red-haired pig¡± An said Zeno said: ¡°That¡¯s a beast with a very harsh temperament, you actually eat it?¡± An replied: ¡°Although it¡¯s fierce, it is also very delicious. It¡¯s a very high-end ingredient.¡± Zeno sniffed and said: ¡°Well, it¡¯s really fragrant.¡± Netero asked: ¡°Do you mind sharing some food with us two old men?¡± ¡°Enjoy yourselves.¡± An smiled lightly. After eating so much of the red-haired pig, An and Menchi don¡¯t find its meat attractive anymore. But Netero was different, it was his first time eating this type of meat which directly hit the spot for him. In less than ten minutes, most of the red-haired pig was eaten, leaving only its skeleton. Zeno only ate a little bit. Netero said: ¡°This meat is really delicious.¡± Netero ate faster than An and Menchi together even thetter was surprised: ¡°Chairman, you eat too fast, and you have such a big appetite, you really opened my eyes.¡± Neteroughed and said: ¡°When I was young, I could eat more than this, my best record was eating ten wild boars.¡± An and Menchi really admired Netero¡¯s amazing appetite. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 413! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 119! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 320: Mobius Lake Chapter 320: Mobius Lake At an altitude of several Kilometers, a giant bird flew in the clouds. On top of the giant bird sat Netero, Zeno, An, and Menchi. Thanks to Netero bringing Zeno, they could go to their destination directly. The Bilgai Desert is located in the Republic of Rokario. There were several other countries close by like the NGL. Due to the Chimera Ant¡¯s invasion, those countries close by were taken over by the V5. While they were on their way, Netero expressed his doubt about their destination. Menchi directly answered his question. After hearing her brief exnation, Netero was surprised that the Bilgai Desert had ess to the outside world. An also took this opportunity to ask Netero about the dark continent. Netero didn¡¯t answer directly but first said: ¡°The world which we humans currently live in has six continents, ten regions, and thousands of countries. And these areas added up are on a hugeke called the Mobius. This Mobiuske, which carries billions of people is just a small part of this vast world. The Dark Continent is just outside of the Mobiuske, which is called the outer world in ancient books. But in fact, the dark continent, like the Mobiuske is just another small part of the world. No one actually knows howrge the world outside of the Mobiuske is. There is no way to know how many areas have life. Someone must explore and take the risk to get that knowledge.¡± ¡°So, what is outside the Mobius Lake? How far is it from the dark continent?¡± An asked curiously. Netero recalled for a bit: ¡°Thend we live on is surrounded by an ocean, on the outskirt of the Mobius Lake, there is a ck sea. Decades ago, I left the Mobiuske and it took me several months to cross the vast sea, before finally reaching the border of the Dark Continent.¡± Hearing this, An started thinking, since the whole world they are currently on is surrounded by the Mobius Lake, then why would there be a way out inside the Bilgai Desert? In that desert, is there a space-time gate? warp holes? Now, An started getting skeptical about Menchi¡¯s story. He even wondered if Menchi had deliberately fabricated a lie to deceive him. But he quickly threw this thought away. He was with Menchi for a long time and knew about her character better than most people. So what Menchi said should be true and there is no possibility that she was deceiving him. A dayter, An and Menchi along with Netero reached the republic of Rokario with Zeno¡¯s help. There are many restrictions here, even its own people can¡¯t just enter and leave as they wished. Only officials and hunters can enter. The Bilgai Desert was a restricted area. Just because this desert is extremely dangerous and many people went missing there, which made that desert known as the lostnd. Despite the effort of many rescue teams, not a single missing person was found. The rescue teams didn¡¯t just fail to find people, they even lost their way there and joined the list of missing people. Because of the many disappearances in that desert, it is a restricted area. In recent years, only a few people entered the desert. From the back of the Giant bird that was several thousand meters in the sky, An, Menchi, and Netero jumped down. An looked at Zeno and said: ¡°Mr. Zeno, thank you for giving us a ride, you saved us a lot of time. Zeno nodded and said: ¡°Then I will go back, I wish you all sess.¡± After jumping down, Menchi pulled out a map and said: ¡°Now, we are about 20 Kilometers away from the nearest town. We can go to this town to find a ce to rest, and then go to the local farm to get a few horses, get some supplies and then go on our way.¡± An and Netero didn¡¯t have a problem with this n and direct all three of them went to find a hotel. This ce didn¡¯t have anyrge hotels, no cars, no technology can be seen at all. Their mean of transportation was mostly horses and cart, or oxen and carts. The standards of living here are way behind most parts of the world. Because the nearest area to this ce was a desert, water was very precious, and poor people couldn¡¯t even afford some of it. They needed to move more than ten kilometers from the town to get some water. Menchi came here before, so she was familiar with the ce, so she exined the current situation in this region. The three of them rented three horses from the farm nearby. The horses weren¡¯t ordinary horses, but desert horses that are used to the harsh environment. After resting for the night, the three of them set off on the back of the horses. When they were close to the Bilgai Desert, three patrol officers stopped them from entering the desert. An, Netero, and Menchi showed their hunter licenses and exined that they were going in to do a biological investigation. With the license, the patrols couldn¡¯t stop them anymore. The patrol officers still warned them about the danger of the desert and exined that if they get in danger, then no one wille to rescue them. The trio justughed, because if they can¡¯te back, probably, no one can in this world. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 414! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 119! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 321: Bilgai Desert Chapter 321: Bilgai Desert In the endless Desert, An, Netero, and Menchi each rode on a horse crossing through the sandynds. Bilgai Desert was one of the most dangerous ces on the continent. Since the founding of the republic of Rokario, more than 100,000 people lost their way and were dered missing in the Bilgai Desert. 15 years ago, the Bilgai Desert was listed as a restricted area. But every year, there are some adventurous people who would ignore the danger and bypass the inspection to enter the desert illegally. This means that the 100,000 missing people were just the ones who came in legally. There are a few lucky ones who would enter the desert ande back safely. But after a while, the ce was rumored to have a man-eating monster and illusions that make people get lost inside. In short, this desert had countless rumors about the dangers it contained, but everyone knew that this ce was dangerous no matter the rumor. On the way, Menchi reminded Netero and An: ¡°This desert is very strange, I don¡¯t know when the weather would change and be a sand storm, so be careful, or else we will get separated.¡± Netero and An nodded. They weren¡¯t arrogant people to think they can take everything in the world. Especially not when faced with the danger of a natural environment. An wasn¡¯t that concerned about danger though, because thew of space granted him protection from almost anything. Netero was one of the strongest nen users in the world and with his buddha, he can face most danger without losing. The only one who isn¡¯t as well equipped is Menchi, but with her experience in wild environments, she can survive. As long as they take precautions, they won¡¯t have a problem. At this moment, a sand storm started forming in the distance. Seeing this, the three of them directly found a ce to hide temporarily. But the sand storm started getting bigger and bigger till it became huge and a tornado was formed. ¡°Damn it, an emperor dragon¡¯s tornado.¡± ¡°Emperor dragon¡¯s tornado?¡± ¡°Simply put, it¡¯s a sand stormbined with a tornado, and thergest scale of this kind of phenomenon was hundreds of tornados. The power it holds is so strong I don¡¯t think anyone can actually survive after being close to it¡±. An and Netero frowned. If it was an ordinary tornado, they were able to deal with it, but if it¡¯s of that size, they could only escape. The tornado was slowly approaching them. Seeing this, Netero was ready to activate his Nen ability to defend against the tornado. At this time, An said: ¡°Chairman, Menchi, stretch out your hand.¡± ¡°Hand?!¡± Both Menchi and Netero were puzzled. ¡°There is no time to exin, just give me your hands.¡± Hearing this, Menchi and Netero grabbed An¡¯s hands and decided to believe him. An immediately took their hands and suddenly they felt something strange happening as if strange energy was flowing into their bodies. The next second, the three of them disappeared. On the horses remained there. A few secondster, the tornado swept the horses and all the supplies along with them. Ten kilometers away from the storm, An, Menchi, and Netero appeared out of thin air. Menchi was surprised: ¡°This is¡­ What¡¯s going on?¡± She rained her head to look into the distance and saw that the tornado was moving away from them. She felt like she was in an illusion: ¡°Did the storm moves away or did we move away?¡± Even Netero was puzzled by this, but he quickly calmed down and said: ¡°It looks like we moved far away from the storm.¡± The two turned toward An as thetter exined: ¡°We are now ten Kilometers away from the tornado, we are safe.¡± Netero said: ¡°You took us ten Kilometers away in the blink of an eye, I didn¡¯t expect you to have this ability.¡± An shrugged: ¡°Well, I have the power to manipte space. I just teleported us away from the tornado. I can only teleport things I touch, and I can pass through anything in the way no matter the obstacle, but creating a space channel and moving at the speed of light.¡± ¡°That¡¯s a pretty powerful ability.¡± Netero¡¯s words weren¡¯t ttery, but admiration. This is the first time he encountered such a thing as teleportation. It was simply a magical ability. Menchi patted An¡¯s shoulder and said: ¡°In short, thanks to you, we are alive. I can tell that even with our Nen, I and chairman would¡¯ve been swallowed by that tornado.¡± An knew that no matter the power, it can¡¯t bepared to the power in nature. An then sighed: ¡°Although we managed to escape safely, the horses and supplies are gone, we can only use whatever we have on us now.¡± Netero replied: ¡°There is nothing we can do about that.¡± Menchi nced at the sky and said: ¡°It¡¯s getting dark, so let¡¯s find somece to rest because the temperature of this ce during the night will be quite cold.¡± Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 415! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 119! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 322: Menchi’s Sword technique Chapter 322: Menchi¡¯s Sword technique As night fell, the group of three found a ce in the desert to rest. As their supplies and horses were swept away by the tornado, they didn¡¯t have anything to eat. Fortunately, they were all Nen users and their vitality was quite strong, so even if they don¡¯t eat for a while, they won¡¯t have a problem. But the feeling of hunger is making them ufortable, especially An. He got used to the delicacy that Menchi made for him and now he can¡¯t stand it when he had to go without a meal for so long. An finally decided and said: ¡°You two stay here, I will go look for some food.¡± Menchi stood up and said: ¡°I will go with you since I¡¯m familiar with the ce. If you get lost, we¡¯ll be in trouble.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± An nodded. The two of them left, leaving Netero alone. On the way, Menchi reminded An: ¡°Be careful, there will be many monsters and beasts in the desert at night. They hide during the day ande out at the night to hunt.¡± An nodded, as he didn¡¯t want to be careless. Although they were strong, this ce wasn¡¯t the usual wilderness, but a restricted area without many unknown factors. It didn¡¯t take long for their eyes to get used to the darkness in the desert and although they can¡¯t see clearly, they can still see their surroundings. An used [In], to make a circle around him covering a hundred meters, just in case. Menchi asked curiously: ¡°An, how far can your [In] reach?¡± An pondered and said: ¡°Well, now, it can probably cover two hundred meters.¡± ¡°Two hundred meters is amazing; I can only cover about fifty meters.¡± An was about to reply, but suddenly, he felt something moving inside his [In]. ¡°The prey is here.¡± Soon, two beasts with green eyes appeared in An¡¯s sight, approaching both Menchi and An steadily. When he saw them, An asked: ¡°Wolves?¡± He asked because these beasts were different from the wolves he knew. They wererger and their fur was red. Menchi recognized them and said: ¡°They are Red Wolves, two to three timesrger than normal wolves. Their hair is red, their fangs are several times stronger than normal. They can even bite a human in half. Their sense of smell is quite developed as they can smell anything within a kilometer. Under normal circumstances, they act in pair, one male, one female.¡± An wasn¡¯t afraid, but instead, he was happy: ¡°They are so fierce, it means their meat must be delicious right? It should be a high-grade ingredient.¡± Menchi nodded: ¡°Well, they are indeed quite delicious, but it¡¯s limited to their front and hind legs, everything else is average.¡± In the eyes of a gourmet hunter, the red wolves were a level one target, which is the same as the red-haired pig. But if it¡¯s a pair, then their capture level will raise to two. A beast that reached level two, they can¡¯t be dealt with by normal people anymore, even with modern weapons. ¡°In that case, let me deal with them, I will capture them before they can get close,¡± An said. Menchi said: ¡°You have already worked hard when we dealt with the tornado, let me do this now.¡± An nodded: ¡°Okay, you handle it, but if you can¡¯t do it fast, I will intervene.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t underestimate thisdy.¡± Menchi snorted and then quickly rushed toward the two wolves. Suddenly, two short swords appeared in her hands. The left one was white, and the right one was ck. Menchi was a conjuring type Nen user, and those two swords were manifested through her Nen. When the wolves saw Menchi rushing toward them, they immediately roared and rushed toward her. Menchi didn¡¯t dodge them, instead, she suddenly picked up her pace and, in a sh, she passed the two wolves. It was too fast and only a cold sh was seen in the dark desert. Turning around, Menchi looked at the two wolves that were only on the ground dead already. ¡°Such a powerful technique, she killed the two of them in a split second.¡± Not far away, An admired the technique and its users. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 416! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 121! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 323: The Other End Of The Well Chapter 323: The Other End Of The Well After hunting down the wolves, An and Menchi returned to their resting ce with the food. They started a fire and Menchi proceeded to cook the meat. Menchi¡¯s short swords were both fighting weapons and kitchen utensils. After getting the meat ready, they put it on the fire to grill it. After spending the night in the desert smoothly, An, Menchi, and Netero set out the next morning. Their purpose was to fight the passage to the outside world which can also be called an exit. As for the exit¡¯s location, only Menchi knew. On the way, they encountered many beasts and dangers, but they were easily resolved one by one without any idents. After walking through the desert for three days, they reached an oasis. It was full of trees and shrubs almost like a forest. Both Netero and An held their breath from the breathtaking sight. Menchi said: ¡°I saw Komatsu in the forest of this Oasis, and the exit is inside it.¡± ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go in,¡± An said. Afterward, the three proceeded into the forest. They walked in the woods and bushes and gradually went deep into the jungle After an hour, they reached the depth of the forest. Menchi, who was walking in front of them stopped and said: ¡°Here, this is it.¡± Looking in the direction Menchi was pointing at, they saw a well. Both An and Netero wondered why a well would appear here. An and Netero looked at each other and walked over. ¡°This is¡­ a dry well?¡± Seeing the well dry as if it was abandoned for a long time and the vines around it, An threw a stone to see how deep the well was. But after waiting for a few minutes, he still didn¡¯t hear the sound of the stone reaching the bottom of the well. The stone seemed to disappear without making a sound. Both Netero and An frowned at how deep this well seemed. ¡°It¡¯s like a bottomless hole,¡± Netero said. An looked at Menchi and asked: ¡°Menchi, what¡¯s going on with this well? You should know its secret, right?¡± Menchi nodded: ¡°In fact, this well is the passage to the outside world, which is like a gate to a different dimension, as long as you enter it, you will go to another world.¡± Hearing this, An and Netero were both surprised. Menchi said: ¡°I met Komatsu here at the start, and when he left, he also left through the well.¡± ¡°Did Komatsu tell you where this well leads?¡± An asked. ¡°Yes, Komatsu said this well is connected to his world, a ce called earth.¡± ¡°Earth¡­ Earth?!!¡± Hearing Menchi mention earth, An¡¯s face changed and even his voice trembled. ¡°What happened to you?¡± Menchi and Netero noticed An¡¯s expression and asked. An didn¡¯t speed, but he was thinking about what Menchi just said. As a transmigrator, he came from a ce called earth. If it was true that at the end of the well is really earth, then he can go back home. However, An wasn¡¯t sure. Because Earth is just a name, other worlds can also be called earth. ¡°By the way, Menchi, did Komatsu leave you anything to prove he was from earth?¡± An asked suddenly. He always felt that the name Komatsu was familiar but he couldn¡¯t figure out where he heard it. But he was sure that Komatsu was a character from an Anime he watched. So, as long as he knew who Komatsu is, he can determine which world it really was. Menchi thought for a bit and said: ¡°I remember that when Komatsu left, he gave me a note and said that if I wanted to find him, I can open it and read it.¡± Then Menchi took out the note and read it to An. ¡°The note said that he is the head chef of a ten-star hotel called Hotel Gourmet.¡± Hearing this, An finally knew who Komatsu was. ¡°That¡¯s right, the Komatsu that Menchi met was Komatsu from Toriko, in other words, the world at the end of this well is Toriko¡¯s world which is also called earth. But it is hundreds of timesrger than my earth.¡± Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 417! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 121! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 324: Passing Through To Toriko’s World Chapter 324: Passing Through To Toriko¡¯s World If it¡¯s really Toriko¡¯s world on the other end of the well, then it¡¯s really great. An was excited and couldn¡¯t help looking forward to this. Although he didn¡¯t know how good the food in Toriko¡¯s world is, he thought that it should be really good as the world was full of rare ingredients. In that world, there are trees that could grow king crabs all year round. There are also super beasts that are more precious than gems. For example; the Emerald Dragon from the Drunken Frenzy Ind releases top-ss emerald wine. There is also the Regal Mammoth, which has meat so great that even 100 grams of it cost 5 million. The world of Toriko is veryrge, not inferior to the hunter¡¯s world, and it has two regions. The first is the human world, and the second is the continent that has yet to be conquered by humans. For a hunter, being able to venture into such a world is a great thing. Thinking about this, An already decided to go to Toriko¡¯s world. He looked at Netero and Menchi and said: ¡°Let¡¯s go and see.¡± ¡°Have you really decided?¡± Menchi asked. An nodded firmly and looked at Netero: ¡°Is Chairman going?¡± ¡°Well, this old man has been here with you from the start, there is no reason to quit now, so I will apany you to have a look now.¡± Netero agreed. As for Menchi, she decided to go from the start. ¡°Then let¡¯s cross over (transmigrate).¡± An said enthusiastically. ¡°Crossover?¡± Menchi didn¡¯t understand the meaning being that word. An exined: ¡°It means to travel from one world to another. If there is another world at the end of the well, then we are crossing over there.¡± After that, An was the first to jump into the well as his figure disappeared in an instant. Seeing this, Netero said: ¡°let¡¯s see if this well really has the ability to send people into other worlds.¡± After that, Netero jumped as well and disappeared from view. Menchi jumpedst. This well was indeed connected to another world. In the Baron archipgo north of the continent, three uninvited guests appeared near one of the inds. These three were Netero, Menchi, and An. After jumping into the dry Well, they entered a dimensional exit that led them to another world. ¡°Have we Crossed sessfully? Is this earth?¡± Menchi asked. ¡°I think we did cross over, and this should be the world where Komatsu came from,¡± An said uncertainly. He wasn¡¯t sure whether they were in another world or not because they were still in the water. They were a few Kilometers away from the Baron Archipgo. ¡°The inds are surrounded by rocks as if it was a defense mechanism against invaders,¡± Netero said as he looked around and frowned. Moreover, as a warrior who practiced Nen for more than half his long life, he was sensitive to auras and felt some dangerous auras on the inds. At this time, Menchi said: ¡°There seems to be something in this area, we shouldn¡¯t stay for long.¡± An said: ¡°In that case, let¡¯s swim to that ind. Can you both manage?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t underestimate me, I¡¯m still confident about my power even in the water,¡± Menchi said. Neteroughed: ¡°Although I¡¯m an old man, I can still swim more than ten kilometers easily.¡± ¡°Okay, let¡¯s see who can reach there first. Thest one to reach there will be responsible for our food, okay?¡± An said excitedly. Both Netero and Menchi didn¡¯t have a problem with this. So all of them started swimming toward the closest ind in the Baron Archipgo. They were powerful Nen users, and ten kilometers wasn¡¯t a problem for any of them. While they were swimming, a speedboat suddenly appeared not far away. The words Bishokumaru are written on the side of the boat, which trantes as The Gastro Gig. A man wearing white and a yellow hat on his head with a scarred face noticed three people swimming not far away. ¡°Who are those three guys, swimming in the dangerous area beside the Baron Archipgo?¡± However, he soon found that his guess was wrong. ¡°They aren¡¯t swimming, they are trying to get into the inds? Who are they?¡± The man couldn¡¯t help being curious about them, so he directly drove his boat toward them. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 418! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 121! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 325: Tom Chapter 325: Tom Allen, Menchi, and Netero, who were swimming toward the Ind, noticed the speedboat The Gastro Gig, but they didn¡¯t stop and continued swimming towards the ind at full speed. Because they had a game going, they can¡¯t stop. This is the sense ofpetition that hunters should have, and they can¡¯t give up halfway. ¡°Those weird people are ignoring me.¡± The scarred-faced man who was driving The Gastro Gig obviously didn¡¯t expect that he would be ignored. He couldn¡¯t help feeling a little unhappy because he nned to take the three of them into the boat, but at the same time, he was even more curious about their identities. ¡°Speaking of which, to be able to swim to the ind at that speed, their strength and endurance was above first-ss level among humans. Among the people I know, only Toriko canpare to them.¡± Thinking of this, the scar-faced man immediately took out his mobile phone and made a call: ¡°Hey, Toriko, I found three interesting people who are swimming toward an Ind in the Baron Archipgo right now, Would you like toe and see them?¡± On the other end of the phone came a rough man¡¯s voice: ¡°Baron Archipgo? That¡¯s the territory of the Gla Gator. If they are ordinary people, then they are looking for death to go there. Are those three people like me, gourmet hunters? ¡° The scar-faced man replied: ¡°I don¡¯t know their identities, but they are definitely not ordinary people. I can feel something strong from all three of them, so what will you do?¡± ¡°Feels strong? Okay, I¡¯ll go there when I have time, I¡¯m not near there now, can you help me keep an eye on them for now, Tom?¡± The scarred-faced man who was called Tom by Toriko said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I will keep an eye on them before youe, Toriko. I am personally interested in the identities of the three of them.¡± After finishing the call with Toriko, Tom nced into the distance and found that n, Menchi, and Netero had swum to the reef outside the Inds in a short period of time. After crossing that reef, they will be on the ind. ¡°Those three guys are so fast, who are they?¡± Tom was curious, and he decided to follow. There are too many reefs on the outskirts of the Baron Archipgo. No matter whether the tide is rising or falling, there is only one route to pass through the reefs, and only those who are very familiar with the route can drive boats across the reefs smoothly. Tom has entered the archipgo several times. He can tell the location and number of the rocks outside, and also know the route to enter there very well. He stepped on the elerator, turned the speedboat to the maximum speed, and drove The Gastro Gig towards the ind at a high speed, while sessfully passing the dangerous rocky reef. The entrance is nked by mangrove trees. On the other hand, because An and the others swam there, the route they took was different from Tom¡¯s, but they alsonded on the ind smoothly. The first to arrive on the ind was Netero, followed by An, and finally Menchi. But the difference between the three was only a few seconds. Allen looked at Netero and said in admiration: ¡°Chairman, even at your age, you¡¯re still really strong.¡± If An used thew of space, he could easily reach this ind, but he did not want that, instead, He chose to be fair and swim with Netero and Menchi. Facts have proved that Netero while old, is still strong, and worthy of his title as the strongest Nen user in the world. Even though he is over a hundred years old, his body still maintains the vitality of a youngster. Menchi pouted and said, ¡°I lost, I will prepare the food today.¡± Allen said: ¡°This ind should have good ingredients, but now we should see if there are people on this ind, and figure out where we are now.¡± Menchi said: ¡°When we swam over just now, wasn¡¯t there a man driving a speedboat close to us? If we find that guy, we should be able to know what we want to know from him, including the information about this ind.¡± Just as they were talking, a scar-faced man in white, and with a yellow hat walked out of the woods next to them. An and the others could see at a nce that this man was the one who approached them in the speedboat just now. Tom was the first to speak: ¡°The three of you are very strong. You actually swam here.¡± An said: ¡°If we had transportation, we would not choose to swim to the ind. That would be toobor-intensive.¡± Tom said: ¡°In other words, you are forced to do so?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right.¡± An didn¡¯t deny it. Tom said: ¡°just now, I was nning to use my Gastro Gig to take you for a ride, but you ignored me. ¡° ¡°Because the three of us were racing to see who can reach the ind first and no one wanted to lose.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± After Tom understood the reason why n and the others ignored him just now, he nodded, thinking that he had misunderstood them. ¡°By the way, after chatting for so long, I still don¡¯t know what your names are,¡± Tom asked. ¡°Aren¡¯t you supposed to introduce yourself before asking someone¡¯s name,¡± said An. ¡°My name is Tom, and I¡¯m a food ingredient seller.¡± Seeing Tom readily introducing himself, the other three also said gave their names. After learning the names of the three of them, Tom said curiously: ¡°I think the three of you are not ordinary people. Where are you from? What are you doing on this ind?¡± An asked back: ¡°Mr. Tom, before answering your question, can you tell us where this ce is?¡± ¡°No way, you don¡¯t know where we are now?¡± Tom was a little surprised. An said: ¡°To be honest, we came from another ce, so we don¡¯t know the situation here. For some reason, we appeared here, so I want to know where this ce is, and I hope you can tell us.¡± Hearing this, Tom pondered for a while and said, ¡°Although I don¡¯t quite understand what you mean, it sounds like you are from a faraway ce and are unfamiliar with everything here. Well, I can tell you what this ce is.. But, ordingly, after I tell you where this ce is, you must also tell me who you are.¡± An, Netero, and Menchii looked at each other, then nodded. ¡°Okay, Mr. Tom, as long as you tell me where we are and promise to be our guides, we can tell you who we are and where wee from. ¡± Allen said. ¡°Good, it¡¯s a deal,¡± Tom said cheerfully, he was really curious about their origins. Afterward, Tom told them that this was the Baron archipgo, and they are on the southernmost ind in the archipgo. Through Tom¡¯s answer, n finally determined that this is indeed Toriko¡¯s world. In other words, they really managed to cross into the world of Toriko. And Allen then told Tom that they were professional hunters, from the Hunter Association, who had crossed into this world through a magical dry well. After realizing this, Tom thought it was inconceivable and said: ¡°I didn¡¯t expect you toe from another world. In a way, you are indeed guests from afar.¡± Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 419! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 121! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 326: Baron Tiger Chapter 326: Baron Tiger As they were talking, a roar sounded from the jungle on the ind. Everyone became vignt instantly as An said: ¡°It¡¯s nearby.¡± Menchi added: ¡°Judging from the roar, It should be arge beast, at least three meters tall. A tiger-type beast most likely.¡± Tom on the side heard Menchi¡¯s analysis and said in admiration: ¡°You can tell the size and type of the creature from the roar alone? That¡¯s so cool.¡± ¡°After all, I¡¯m a Gourmet Hunter, and I¡¯ve dealt with many beasts previously.¡± ¡°A gourmet Hunter? So like Toriko.¡± Tom said. ¡°Who is Toriko?¡± Menchi asked curiously. ¡°A very powerful Gourmet Hunter,¡± Tom responded. Menchi said: ¡°Since we are colleagues if there is a chance, I¡¯d like to meet him.¡± Tom replied: ¡°There will be a chance.¡± An on the side heard Tom mentioning Toriko, and remembered that he was one of the Four Heavenly Kings. At this moment, Netero said: ¡°It¡¯s here.¡± An and the others jumped back directly as a huge beast appeared not far away from them. It was at least five meters tall. ¡°That¡¯s a huge a$$ tiger,¡± An said. Menchi said: ¡°From the fangs on both sides of its mouth, it seems to be a saber-toothed tiger, but much bigger than normal.¡± Tom frowned as he knew this beast: ¡°This is a Baron Tiger, it¡¯s a level 3 capture creature, you have to be careful. It¡¯s one of the most aggressive beasts here.¡± An, Netero, and Menchi were very calm. If it was an ordinary person, then indeed, the Baron tiger would be ferocious, but in front of the three of them, it didn¡¯t pose a threat An smiled and said: ¡°It seems today¡¯s dinner is here.¡± Then he looked at Tom and asked: ¡°Mr. Tom, is the tiger¡¯s meat good?¡± ¡°Meat?¡± Tom was puzzled. ¡°I mean, is the meat of the tiger delicious? Is it a high-end ingredient?¡± An asked. Tom was stunned for a moment then shook his head and said: ¡°I haven¡¯t eaten it before, but it should be quite good. Many people came here in the past to eat the meat of this tiger and only a few seeded.¡± An¡¯s eyes lit up and smiled: ¡°Hey, that¡¯s fine, it seems like the meat of this Baron tiger is quite the ingredient. It seems like today is your lucky day.¡± ¡°Lucky day?¡± Tom was a little puzzled before he asked: ¡°what are you going to do?¡± ¡°Of course, we will kill it and eat it,¡± An said. Tom never thought that An wanted to eat the tiger¡¯s meat and he couldn¡¯t help worrying: ¡°This Tiger is quite strong, so you better be careful.¡± An said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, we only see it as a big cat actually.¡± ¡°Cat?¡± Tom was speechless. He didn¡¯t expect the three of them to actually think of the baron tiger, the level 3 capture creature as a big cat. They seemed a little arrogant. An turned to Menchi and said: ¡°Menchi, you handle the tiger, you lost to me and the president in the race and you need to make us dinner.¡± ¡°No problem.¡± Menchi nodded. At this moment, the Baron Tiger raised its ws and was ready to pounce at them. An and Netero were unafraid. On the other hand, Tom stepped back timidly. But he still pretended to be calm. At this moment, Menchi jumped up and two daggers appeared in her hand. With a white light sh, Menchi appeared behind the tiger, which was already dead. Its head was severed as it copsed to the ground. She only took two seconds to deal with the Baron Tiger. Tom sucked in a deep cold breath as he looked at Menchi in surprise: ¡°That¡¯s really amazing, to kill the baron tiger so quickly and in a single strike.¡± Menchi said: ¡°Hey, I said that I¡¯m a gourmet hunter, if I can¡¯t handle a mere beast, then how would I be a gourmet hunter?¡± Tom could only smile awkwardly, as he knows now that Menchi was amazing. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 420! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 121! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 327: The Next Target, Galala Gator Chapter 327: The Next Target, Gla Gator As night fell, An, Menchi, Netero, and Tom sat in front of a fire, enjoying the barbecue of the baron Tiger. The Tiger was worthy of being a level 3 capture beast because its meat was a delicacy. ¡°It¡¯s not bad.¡± ¡°The meat of the Baron Tiger is way better than the red-haired pig.¡± Everyone praised the meat as they ate and enjoyed the vor. The Toriko world was really worthy of having the best food ingredient in all animes. There was no need for a kitchen or even cooking utensils, you just need to roast the beast on fire and you have a delicacy. If they hunt for beasts with higher capture levels, then the meat will certainly be even more delicious. Just thinking about made An drool. He decided to stop beingzy and hunt more beasts. ¡°Let¡¯s go inside the ind tomorrow and see if there is an even more delicious beast,¡± An said with his eyes glowing in excitement. Menchi said: ¡°This ind is full of resources, so we should be able to find good ingredients.¡± Tom who was eating the meat gulped down a mouthful and said: ¡°Thanks to you, I was fortunate enough to taste the Baron Tiger¡¯s meat, which made my trip worthwhile. If you don¡¯t mind, I will be your guide tomorrow as I¡¯m familiar with this ind.¡± Menchi said: ¡°We appreciate that, thanks.¡± An looked at Tom and said: ¡°Mr. Tom, your decision is wise, as long as you are our guide, you will get to eat delicious meat every day.¡± ¡°Then, that¡¯s settled, I¡¯m looking forward to the food then.¡± No one will say no to delicious food. An and the other two crossed over from another world and they were curious about this world, which made both Menchi and Netero agree to explore the ind. While they were eating barbecue and talking, many beasts appeared in their surroundings. They were staring at An and the others hungrily, or better yet, they were staring at the meat the four of them were eating. ¡°Those beasts aren¡¯t afraid of people, it seems,¡± An said. ¡°They were attracted to the smell of our food most likely,¡± Menchi said. Neteroughed: ¡°Interesting, even beasts can¡¯t resist the smell of delicacies.¡± ¡°But then again, what kind of beasts are these, and why are they strangely shaped,¡± An asked. The beasts weren¡¯t from the same species it seems. Some looked like boars, some like leopards, and others like monkeys. Tom exined: ¡°This ind has a tropical rain forest, and many beasts take that forest as their home. ording to a survey, about 200,000 species reside on the ind. However, most of them are not as ferocious as the Baron tiger, which is extremely rare.¡± ¡°So, which one is the most ferocious?¡± Menchi asked. ¡°The fiercest one here is a giant crocodile, called Gla Gator,¡± Tom said. ¡°Gla Gator?¡± Menchi asked as she didn¡¯t hear about this kind of beast before. But that should be normal, she wasn¡¯t from this world, so finding a beast unfamiliar wasn¡¯t because she iscking as a gourmet hunter. Tom said: ¡°The Gla Gator is a giant crocodile, its level of capture is 5, much more dangerous than the Baron Tiger.¡± Hearing this, Anughed and said: ¡°Is it the most powerful beast on the ind? Its meat should be quite the catch, right?¡± ¡°Well, that¡¯s for sure,¡± Tom said. ¡°Ok, then it¡¯s decided, our next target is the Gla Gator,¡± An said. Hearing An¡¯s words, Tom was surprised: ¡°The Gla Gator is really dangerous, are you sure you want to hunt it?¡± ¡°Of course, we¡¯re not afraid of it,¡± An said. ¡°Okay then.¡± Tom didn¡¯t say much, but he already started regretting being their guide tomorrow. After all, the Gla Gator is a lot more dangerous than the Baron Tiger. The next morning, after everyone ate breakfast, which was a weird snake that An took the lead to hunt, while Menchi was the one to cook it. ¡°I can¡¯t believe that this snake, which didn¡¯t look like a snake, or a frog that didn¡¯t seem like a frog is so delicious after cooking it,¡± An said after taking a bite of the snake frog¡¯s leg with a happy expression. ¡°The liver part of this Snake-frog is quite delicious as well.¡± Menchi praised. ¡°I have to say, the food here is really great.¡± Netero praised as he was satisfied with the food here. After eating, they continued deeper into the jungle, searching for the Gla Gator. On the way, Tom said: ¡°The Gla Gator is a nocturnal animal, so it doesn¡¯te out during the day. It resides in a swamp or wends, if you want to eat it, you need to do it during the day, or else, it will be even more dangerous during the night.¡± ¡°Then let¡¯s go before it gets dark,¡± n said. And with that, Tom led the group toward the habitat of the Gla Gator. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 421! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 124! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 328: Long Lost Choice System Chapter 328: Long Lost Choice System Along the way, they passed through the dense jungle and dangerous swamps. They encountered no less than 10,000 creatures. They were ferocious creatures such as swamp snakes and some types of crocodiles. After a while, An gained an understanding of the creatures on this ind. Half of the 200,000 creatures on the baron inds were herbivorous, they weren¡¯t aggressive and could only be food for the other half. As for the omnivores, although they were aggressive, they didn¡¯t take the initiative to attack humans. Onlyrge carnivorous beasts with only meat in their diet will attack humans. Of course, no matter how fierce the beasts were, in the eyes of An, Netero, and Menchi, they could only be ingredients. No matter how ferocious the beasts were, they can¡¯t pose a threat to the group. The group was attacked a few times by beasts for invading their territory, but they ended up eaten, while Menchi recorded all beasts, as it was her job as a gourmet hunter. When they passed through a swamp, a group of baron tigers suddenly appeared. They were at least 30 to 50 tigers and each was four meters tall. An and Netero were ready to deal with them, but they soon discovered that these tigers weren¡¯t attacking them, instead, they were running away from something. ¡°These tigers look like they¡¯re running for their lives,¡± An said. Menchi said: ¡°You¡¯re right, look, they seem afraid and panicked. Another beast is probably hunting them, so they had to escape.¡± ¡°A stronger predator? The Baron Tiger is one of the strongest on the ind, there are only a handful of creatures here that can hunt them.¡± Tom said. ¡°Could it be a Gla Gator hunting them?¡± An guessed. ¡°Yes, very likely,¡± Tom replied At this moment, the ground shook, and immediately afterward, a huge creature appeared and moved toward An and the others. It was a huge crocodile. This crocodile was at least ten timesrger than the normal crocodile. There is no doubt that this is the Gla Gator. ¡°Well damn, that crocodile is really huge, isn¡¯t it? No wonder Baron Tigers were afraid and fled in panic. Just one bite is enough to eat an entire tiger. If we were bitten, we can be stuck between its teeth.¡± Netero said. Hearing this, Menchi rolled her eyes and said: ¡°Chairman, are you joking, or are you worrying about nothing?¡± Neteroughed: ¡°I¡¯m just kidding.¡± An stared at the crocodile in the distance and said: ¡°I only care about whether its meat is delicious or not. ¡°Look at that guy¡¯s size, it¡¯s at least a hundred years old, you have to be careful.¡± Tom reminded. Menchi said: ¡°A hundred years? That is to say, this crocodile can live past a hundred years?¡± ¡°I¡¯m afraid so,¡± Tom said seriously. An turned his head to Netero and said: ¡°Chairman, did you hear that? This giant crocodile is about the same age as you, what do you think?¡± Netero said: ¡°I don¡¯t want to kill it, I will let you handle it.¡± Tom heard what An said to Netero and eximed in surprise: ¡°Did I hear you correctly? This old man, Netero, is already a hundred years old?¡± ¡°I¡¯m not just a hundred years old, but already passed it.¡± Tom was so shocked that he looked at Netero carefully. He couldn¡¯t believe that this energetic old man was already over a hundred years old. Today, Tom witnessed with his eyes the oldest living human being in his life. At this moment, the Gla Gator was about ten meters away from them. ¡°Let me do it.¡± Menchi stood up and was ready to take action. An suddenly heard a familiar voice for the first time in over a year. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Personally kill the Gla Gator. Reward: Gourmet Stomach!] [2: With Menchi and the others¡¯ help, kill the Gla Gator. Reward: Devil fruit Fragments.] Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 422! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 124! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 329: Gourmet’s Stomach Chapter 329: Gourmet¡¯s Stomach Facing the long-lost choice system, An was pleasantly surprised. Obviously, the reward for killing the Gla Gator alone was better, so An directly chose the first option and said to Menchi who was preparing for battle: ¡°Menchi, let me do it this time.¡± Unexpectedly, Menchi said: ¡°no, this is my prey, I want to see how fierce this guy is.¡± Hearing this, An was a bit troubled. He didn¡¯t want to argue with Menchi. The Gla Gator looked ferocious and all, but Menchi can handle it easily. If it wasn¡¯t for the reward, An would be toozy to make a move. After all, the Gla Gator can¡¯t even arouse his will to fight. But if Menchi insisted on killing the crocodile, he wouldn¡¯t be able to receive the reward from the system and this made An dissatisfied. At this time, the Gla Gator rushed at them. Its body was so huge it looked as if a hill was moving toward them. It suddenly turned around and swept its tail at them directly. Netero, An, and Tom immediately jumped back. And Menchi didn¡¯t want to avoid this attack, but she underestimated the Gla Gator¡¯s speed. Seeing the tail moving toward her, Menchi could only use her own strength to defend against it, but the Gla Gator¡¯s power was great. Menchi used her Nen to enhance her power but she was still pushed back. Although she wasn¡¯t injured, Menchi had to pay attention now. The Giant Crocodile swept its tail again and this time, Menchi just jumped up, avoiding the attack. Before the Crocodile could turn back, Menchi grabbed its tail and mmed it to the ground. She then picked it up and started turning it around and finally threw it away. The Gla Gator was actually thrown far away just like that, which made Tom Surprised: ¡°That¡¯s¡­ Amazing. She actually threw the giant, that weighed over ten tons, like it¡¯s nothing.¡± An and Netero weren¡¯t that surprised. After all, Menchi was a Nen user. With Nen, she can increase her power greatly. After throwing the Gla Gator, Menchi took advantage of the situation and went after it with her daggers. She tried to decapitate the crocodile, but to her surprise, the scales on its body were very hard. The daggers shed down but failed to take off its head. Seeing that Menchi could kill the Crocodile in one go, Netero said: ¡°Menchi, let An do it. I believe he can take that big guy in one move.¡± Menchi didn¡¯t insist on fighting and stepped back and said to An: ¡°Go ahead.¡± ¡°Well, here I go.¡± An didn¡¯t take his time, he just raised his head and used the power of space to cut the huge body of the Crocodile from its head. It didn¡¯t even take a few seconds and it¡¯s done. ¡°That¡¯s amazing!¡± Tom was shocked. Menchi was also amazed and said:¡± This is¡­ using air to cut.¡± The so-called space cut was just manipting the space and turning the air into sharp des that can cut the target. Of course, An can literally cut space, but that was too much to deal with the situation at hand. After killing the Crocodile, a notification appeared: [Ding! You sessfully killed the Gla Gator on your own and received the Gourmet¡¯s Stomach as a reward.] As soon as An acquired this new ability, he knew what it does. It allowed An to convert all the delicious food he eats into energy. The higher the grade of the food, the better the energy he receives. If this is converted into numbers, then An would get 0.01 energy from a bowl of rice and 0.1 energy from a chicken. If he eats 100 kg of meat, then he will get 10 points of energy. This energy refills his stamina generally and can also enhance the various aspect of his body, like strength and agility, and also, different ingredients had different effects. Menchi proceeded to prepare the BBQ. As An ate the Gla Gator¡¯s meat, he felt new energy pouring into his body. This was his new ability to convert food into energy. After eating, a notification appeared in front of An. [Ding! The Gla Gator¡¯s meat was great and you enjoyed it greatly. A total of 50 points of energy are transformed from the food.] An secretly rejoiced: ¡°Awesome, with the Gourmet¡¯s Stomach, I can eat delicious food and get stronger at the same time.¡± An decided there and then to look for delicious food to make his body stronger. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 423! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 125! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 330: New world Selection Chapter 330: New world Selection Time flew by and two years passed since An went to Toriko¡¯s world. After two years, An, Menchi, and Netero returned to Hunter world. Everybody gained a lot from those two years, especially Netero who regained his youth and strength. As for An, his gourmet¡¯s stomach absorbed so much food and produced energy, making his stamina, and strength improve by leaps and bounds. Moreover, An created a new fighting style. After returning to the Hunter world, An stayed on Whale Ind for half a year. [Ding! The host has stayed in the Hunter world for more than 1000 days andpleted the survival task. Congrattion to the host for getting a new opportunity to travel to another world.] Hearing this, An realized that he stayed here for almost three years. Now, he didn¡¯t have any reason to stay here anymore. ¡°Well, let¡¯s go to another world then.¡± After this, An went to Mito and called Gon, Killua, Netero, and Menchi to say goodbye while also telling them that he was from another world. When they learned that An was from another world, they believed him directly. After learning that he was leaving this world, they all expressed their blessings and urged him to visit them if there is a chance. Just like that, An decided to go to another world. [Ding! Make A Choice] [1: Go to Naruto world next and start your adventure. Reward: Chakra Cells of the Uzumaki.] [2: Go to One Piece world next and start your adventure. Reward: The six techniques of the marine.] [3: Go to Bleach world next and start your adventure. Reward: Zanpakuto: Ryujin Jakka!] After thinking about his choices, An made his decision. ¡°I chose to go to Naruto world.¡± After he said this, the space around him started warping and in the next instant, An disappeared. Naruto world, a certain forest. An appeared directly in this strange ce. [Ding! You have sessfully traveled to Naruto world and received the Uzumaki n¡¯s chakra cells.] Hearing this, An looked around and found himself in a forest. Although he wasn¡¯t sure where this forest is, he was sure that he is in Naruto¡¯s world after the notification. As for the reward, An was very satisfied, after all, when you can to Naruto¡¯s world, how can you go without chakra? However, unfortunately, he didn¡¯t know how to gather chakra. Sadly, An just crossed over and he didn¡¯t know how to refine chakra which felt like you have a treasure chest but you didn¡¯t have the key to open it. There are two ways to unlock chakra, the first is using your talent to slowly get a feel of chakra and with An¡¯s own experience with Nen, he can master it easily. The second way is to find a ninja a learn the method from him which is easier and faster. However, An wasn¡¯t in a hurry to do that just yet, after all, the most important thing now is to know where he was and what time he traveled to. Only after finding those things can he start refining chakra and learning about it. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 424! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 128! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 331: Kannabi Bridge Chapter 331: Kannabi Bridge Traveling alone in the forest, An¡¯s eyes were on full alert. The World of Naruto was dangerous and Ninjas walk around everywhere. If currently, the world was in the period of the great Ninja wars, any of them, he would be involved and it will be troublesome. Since he didn¡¯t want to get attacked suddenly, An spread his [IN] in a radius of fifty meters. If anyone approach him within a fifty meters radius, he would detect them easily. While heading east of the forest, he felt an abnormal vibration in the ground. He quickly put his hand down to determine from which direction the vibration came. The only possibility for this kind of tremor here is a Ninja battle. He just crossed over and needs to know where and what timeline he was currently in. He directly teleported toward the battle, since he can very well as whoever is there for information. An arrived at the top of a tree and looked down. The ground was dusty as if there was a battle a second ago. There should¡¯ve been a cave there, but the cave seemed to have copsed due to some kind of explosion. Not far away from the copsed cave, a man in a gray vest appeared. The man stared at the cave and sneered: ¡°You three brats wanted to bury me, although you prevented me frompleting my mission, I get to kill you, which is worth it.¡± After speaking, the man turned around from the cave and sat down to rest. He took a water bottle and started drinking. He seemed toe out of a battle and he wasn¡¯t in a good state. An stared at the man¡¯s forehead protector, and judging from the symbol on it, this Ninja was part of the Rock vige. ¡°The three brats that the Ninja spoke of should be Kakashi, Obito, and Rin, right?¡± An¡¯s expression changed slightly: ¡°Then it should be the third Ninja great War currently, and this should be the Kannabi Bridge¡¯s battle.¡± In this battle, The Rock vige led an army to attack the fire country, and Namikaze Minato led Hatake Kakashi, Uchiha Obito, and Nohara Rin to support the defense. The team was divided into two, Minato went as support in the frontline, and the rest went to sneak in and blow up the Kannabi bridge to cut the Rock¡¯s line of supply.¡± After sneaking behind the enemy line, Kakashi and the rest were attacked by the Rock Ninjas. After a fierce fight, Rin was kidnapped by the Rocks and Kakashi lost an eye and Obito obtained his Sharingan. After that, both boys went to rescue Rin and they fought inside a cave against the Rock Ninjas. Although they sessfully rescued Rin, one of the rocks managed to escape out of the cave using the Double Suicide Decapitation technique and blew the cave up causing a cave-in. As Kakashi and the others were escaping, a huge rock fell down, and with Kakashi¡¯s new blind spot due to his eye loss, he couldn¡¯t dodge in time, which made Obito sacrifice himself to get Kakashi out of the way and while Obito got half his body crashed under the rock. The next part should be where Kakashi gets his Sharingan from Obito and then kills the Rock Ninja. An looked at the Rock Ninja before narrowing his eyes. He still didn¡¯t know what he should do honestly. He may have a good rtionship with Konoha if he interferes. He also wants to avoid getting hunted by The Rock Nins in the future, since that would be troublesome. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 425! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 128! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 332: First Option, Or Else Chapter 332: First Option, Or Else ¡°Who is there?¡± Just when An was thinking about his next move, the rock Jonin noticed An standing on the tree and he be vignt. An didn¡¯t hide himself at all, since he was discovered, he simply jumped down before disappearing and arriving beside the other party. ¡°Fast!¡± Seeing An cross ten meters in an instant, the Jonin took a defensive stance. ¡°Let me ask you something, are the three brats you¡¯re talking about Konoha Shinobi?¡± An asked. Although he already guessed this, An still wanted to make sure of this. However, the Jonin didn¡¯t answer An¡¯s question, instead he asked: ¡°Who are you?¡± The reason for asking this is simple, he didn¡¯t see An wearing a forehead protector, and he couldn¡¯t guess to which side he belonged. Another point was An¡¯s speed, which shouldn¡¯t be something a Genin or a Chunin have. An smiled: ¡°Don¡¯t be nervous, I¡¯m not a ninja from Konoha, just a passerby.¡± ¡°Passerby?¡± Obviously, the Jonin didn¡¯t believe him. The atmosphere got intense and any move would start a battle. At this time, the system gave An a choice. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Participate in the Kannabi Bridge plot and kill the Rock Ninja. Reward: Rock clone Jutsu.] [2: It doesn¡¯t matter, just stay away from the original plot. Reward: Suffering.] An directly chose the first option. The first reason was the reward of the second choice, and the second reason was, by doing this, he can interact with the main characters of the world, which should trigger more choices. As long as he it¡¯s profitable, there is no harm in participating in the Ninja war, right? Since he wasn¡¯t someone from this world, anything he does will interfere with the plot anyways, so he should just do whatever his heart tells him and be happy. At this time, the Rock Jonin felt that An was about to make a move, and decided to make the first attack. As a Jonin, he wasn¡¯t weak. With his experience and power, he put the just promoted Kakashi in a hard life and death situation and almost took Obito¡¯s life. He was confident in his closebat and speed. He took two Kunai¡¯s from his waist and waved them at An. However, his attack failed as An disappeared. The Jonin¡¯s expression changed slightly as he thought: ¡°Body Flicker?¡± The body flicker was a move all strong Ninja mastered. As a Jonin from the Rock Vige, he also can use this move. But An¡¯s speed has exceeded everything he knew about that jutsu. An seemed to have disappeared, he even hid his aura. ¡°Where the hell is he?¡± The Jonin¡¯s eyes were full of vignce as he looked around. ¡°I¡¯m behind you.¡± The Jonin directly swung his arms without hesitation as soon as he heard the voice. But unfortunately, there was no one there. ¡°Damn!! Is it the Body Flicker Again?¡± An¡¯s speed was too much for him, he couldn¡¯t see his shadow, let alone touch him. ¡°It¡¯s not the Body flicker Technique, it¡¯s teleportation.¡± An voice once again sounded beside his ears, but this time, it was apanied with a strong killing intent. The Jonin was startled, just as he was about to wave his de, a transparent line passed over his neck and in the next second, his head fell down. [Ding! Congrattion on killing the Rock Jonin and participating in the Kannabi Bridge Plot. Your reward is Rock Clone (advanced)] In an instant, the information about the Ninjutsu entered An¡¯s mind like a warm wave and he directly mastered it. However, since An has yet to learn how to refine Chakra, he couldn¡¯t use any Ninjutsu yet. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 426! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 129! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 333: Another Choice Chapter 333: Another Choice After dealing with the Rock Ninja and receiving the reward, An revealed a satisfied smile. The Ninja techniques used in Naruto can bepared to the Ninjutsu in the hunter world. An smiled and moved toward the copsed cave. Kakashi and the others should be here. At this moment, the blockade on the cave exploded and a figure rushed out. Silver hair, a ck mask, a short sword, and a bloodstained Sharingan from Uchiha Obito. The Sharingan confirmed that this was Kakashi Hatake. Although he is still young, he was easily recognizable. Kakashi saw An standing outside and immediately showed hostility. He thought An was an enemy ninja and attacked. ¡°Wait right there, I¡¯m not your enemy.¡± An avoided Kakashi¡¯s attack as he exined. Kakashi didn¡¯t listen and continued attacking An like crazy. With the Sharingan, Kakashi¡¯s visual reflexes and reaction time were greatly enhanced, but he still couldn¡¯t follow An¡¯s movement. An got tired of this and directly sent Kakashi flying with a palm strike. Kakashi spat a mouthful of blood and red at An with killing intent. An didn¡¯t give Kakashi any chance to attack as he directly appeared beside him in an explosion of speed and snatched his short sword before grabbing him by the neck ¡°Calm down, I¡¯m not your enemy.¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, Kakashi finally calmed down a little after struggling for a few seconds. Seeing that he was no longer making a fuss, An let him go. Kakashi instantly distanced himself and stared at An. An raised his finger and pointed far away. Kakashi looked in that direction and noticed a Rock ninja dead on the ground. ¡°You killed him?¡± Kakashi¡¯s expression changed as he saw the Enemy Ninja dead on the ground. An didn¡¯t deny it and said: ¡°Yes, I killed him.¡± Kakashi asked with some doubt: ¡°Are you the reinforcement from Konoha?¡± An shook his head: ¡°I¡¯m not a ninja, I¡¯m just a passerby who happened to pass by here.¡± ¡°Passerby?¡± Obviously, Kakashi didn¡¯t believe him, but he had no way to confirm An¡¯s identity. At this time, a girl¡¯s voice rushed from the cave. ¡°Kakashi, what¡¯s wrong?¡± This was Rin Nohara without a doubt. Kakashi stepped toward the cave and replied: ¡°That Rock Ninja was killed, I will go down and save Obito.¡± Obito was trapped inside the cave, half of his body was covered by arge rock, and his left eye was tightly closed as blood gushed out of it. ¡°Kakashi, use that Sharingan wisely, make your name known throughout the world,¡± Obito said weakly. Kakashi replied gloomily: ¡°Obito, hold on, I will save you.¡± Obito said weakly but stubbornly: ¡°Don¡¯t worry about me Kakashi. I know my current situation, I¡¯m already dead, you take Rin and quickly leave. This is an enemy¡¯s territory. If you don¡¯t leave soon, none of us will be able to leave here.¡± How could Kakashi leave Obito just like that, but while he was hesitating, the enemy¡¯s reinforcement arrived? Several Rock Ninjas surrounded the cave, and even An was considered an enemy. ¡°Oh, this is getting troublesome.¡± An nced at the Rock Ninjas and thought: ¡®Do I help Kakashi and the others?¡¯ At this time, the System once again gave him a choice. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Kill all Rock Ninjas here. Reward: Mysterious Ninjutsu Chest x 1] [2: Escaping is the best strategy, leave Kakashi and the others to fend for themselves. Reward: Fuuma Shuriken x 1] After just a second, An decisively picked the first option. At the moment An made his choice, a dozen or so Ninjas from the Rock Vige attacked. ¡°Earth Release: Earth Spear!¡± Dozen of earth spears sprung forth from the ground with great force. The Rock Ninjas nned on burying everyone here. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 427! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 130! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 334: Kakashi’s Request Chapter 334: Kakashi¡¯s Request More than a dozen Rock Ninjas used the rock spear technique on An and the others, which made the already almost copsed cave to shake. Seeing that the crisis was imminent, An made a decisive move and instantly created a barrier and blocked all the spears that rushed toward everyone. This was a space ability developed by An using the spacew to create a barrier. Simply put, it creates a barrier that could block attacks, which currently did its job and protected Kakashi and the others. Kakashi was surprised at An¡¯s power and the ease he blocked the attack. Even a dozen of Ninjas attacking together couldn¡¯t prate his barrier which made them all look in disbelief at the amazing sight. Without waiting for the Ninjas to attack again, An disappeared using his space power and, in a few seconds, he killed all the Rock Ninjas. The system directly delivered An¡¯s reward. [Ding! You have sessfully killed all Rock Ninjas, you received a mysterious Ninjutsu chest x 1] Seeing that An killed all the rock ninjas, Kakashi said: ¡°You¡¯re strong.¡± ¡°I¡¯m alright.¡± An shrugged with indifference. In fact, those rock ninjas were nothing to An. Kakashi said seriously: ¡°No matter what, I have to thank you for this time. Without you, we would be in danger.¡± An waved his hand and said: ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go see your friend.¡± Kakashi nodded and then returned to the cave. An followed after him and saw Nohara Rin who was with Obito with half his body under a boulder. Obito looked really pale. Kakashi raised his right hand and an electric currently emerged as he tried to break the boulder. ¡°Rin, step back, I will try to break this rock.¡± ¡°Is that okay?¡± Rin¡¯s expression was filled with concern. ¡°There is no other way, if we want to bring Obito to Konoha to receive treatment, we have to do this,¡± Kakashi said anxiously. Obito was already struggling with his breaths. However, when Kakashi is about to use his Raikiri on the boulder, An stopped him and said: ¡°Let me do this, using Raikiri can cause damage to yourpanions, I have a way to remove the rock from the top of your friend without hurting him.¡± Hearing this, Kakashi was doubtful, but then remembered that An easily dealt with the rock Ninjas, he could only trust An: ¡°Okay, you do it.¡± An nodded, he stepped forward and raised his hand, and pressed his palms against the huge rock on top of Obito. He put his index and middle finger together and ced them on the side of his forehead. In the next instant, An and the huge rock disappeared in an instant. An appeared in the woods a kilometer away. ¡°Instant Transmission.¡± After that, An used thew of space once again and teleported back. Seeing An suddenly reappearing, Kakashi and Rin, along with Obito looked in disbelief at An. Kakashi curiously asked: ¡°Why did you suddenly disappear with the rock? How did you reappear here?¡± An shrugged: ¡°I just teleported with the rock, then teleported back.¡± Hearing this, Kakashi quickly understood: ¡°So, you have an ability like Minato Sensei¡¯s flying thunder god.¡± An said: ¡°Did you mean Minato Namikaze?¡± ¡°You know him?¡± Kakashi was a little surprised. An smiled lightly: ¡°Who doesn¡¯t know the Konoha yellow sh.¡± ¡°That¡¯s true.¡± Kakashi nodded. An said: ¡°Well then, what are you going to do now? Although I have helped you move the rock away, your friend¡¯s injury is too severe and he won¡¯t be able to make it far in that state.¡± Kakashi said seriously: ¡°Since you can teleport, can you take Obito to Konoha?¡± An shook his head and said: ¡°No, I have a limit to the distance which I can Teleport, and this ce is far away from here, and also, I didn¡¯t visit Konoha before and I can¡¯t be there without visiting at least once.¡± ¡°Then what should I do?¡± Kakashi looked worried. An replied: ¡°Your friend is seriously injured and moving him will aggravate his condition, the best way is to invite a professional here.¡± Kakashi nodded and said to Rin: ¡°Rin, there should be a medical unit on the front line, I will go there and get them to save Obito, you stay here with him.¡± Rin said: ¡°I know Kakashi, go ahead ande back quickly, be careful out there.¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Then Kakashi turned and looked at An and said: ¡°Although I don¡¯t know you name yet, can I trouble you to protect my friends?¡± [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Promise Kakashi to take care of Obito and Rin until he gets back. Reward: Lightning Chakra Nature.] [2: Reject Kakashi and teleport away. Reward: One explosive tag.] An picked the first choice and nodded to Kakashi: ¡°Go, I will stay here. As long as I¡¯m here, I can guarantee that no one will be able to hurt them. But you have toe back quickly or your friend won¡¯t survive.¡± ¡°Well, thank you, I wille back as fast as I can.¡± After saying this, Kakashi left the cave with a body flicker and went toward the front lines. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 430! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 130! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 335: Opening the Mysterious Ninjutsu Chest Chapter 335: Opening the Mysterious Ninjutsu Chest When Kakashi went to the frontline looking for a medic ninja, An squatted down outside the cave to protect Obito and Rin. This ce was under the Rock Ninjas, and since the Kannabi Bridge was less than a kilometer away, An decisively opened the Mysterious Ninjutsu Chest. Immediately, the system gave him a notification. [Ding! You¡¯ve opened a Mysterious Ninjutsu Chest, and you have obtained: Chakra Refinement. Basic academy three. Multiple Shuriken.] An was ecstatic since he obtained the chakra refinement finally. But he didn¡¯t expect that he would also get the academy three. Only by refining chakra can An use various Ninjutsu. An has the Uzumaki chakra cells, as long as he starts extracting chakra, his reserve would be immense. Because he had a good foundation, which is Nen techniques, An quickly started the chakra refinement sessfully. After chakra refining for a while, An tried to use ninjutsu, which he didn¡¯t have a lot of. An tried using The Mud Clone, and with one attempt, he sessfully used it. This meant that An had an earth chakra nature, along with the Lightning chakra nature he obtained from the system. Soon, Kakashi came back, and along with him, came a woman and a man, wearing green vests. The man had yellow hair and blue eyes, which was undoubtedly Minato Namikaze. As for the female ninja, she was very beautiful, a blond with a crystal ne around her neck. She was Tsunade Senju, one of the Sanin. After learning about Obito from Kakashi, Minato brought the best to treat his student. Tsunade arriving here means that Obito would very likely live through. As the best Medical Ninja in the world, she should be able to help Obito. At this time, Minato and Tsunade noticed An protecting the cave, which made Minato step forward: ¡°Hello, I¡¯m Minato Namikaze, I have heard from Kakashi that you saved them, and were here to protect them. Thank you very much.¡± An waved his hand and said: ¡°It¡¯s a trivial matter, you¡¯re wee. But you should quickly look at your student.¡± Minato nodded and said to Tsunade: ¡°Tsunade-sama, please help Obito.¡± As they walked into the cave, they saw Obito on the ground with Rin holding his hand. Obito looked pale and weak, his left eye was tightly closed since he gave it to Kakashi. Minato said with remorse: ¡°I¡¯m Sorry, Obito, I waste.¡± Seeing Obito like this made Minato filled with guilt. As their Sensei, he didn¡¯t protect his students. Obito replied weakly: ¡°It¡¯s not your fault, Minato-sensei.¡± Tsunade nced at Obito and said in a strict tone: ¡°Uchiha Obito¡¯s right half ispletely crushed, his injuries are too serious. It¡¯s a miracle that he is alive. I will need to start the treatment, and it will at least need a day. In the meantime, please take care of our surroundings and don¡¯t disturb me.¡± ¡°I understand, please Don¡¯t worry, Tsunade-sama,¡± Minato reassured. Afterward, everyone left the cave except for Tsunade and her patient. ¡°Sensei, will Obito be alright?¡± Rin asked anxiously. Minato said: ¡°Tsunade-sama is Konoha¡¯s, no, it¡¯s the world¡¯s best medical Ninja, so Obito should be fine.¡± Kakashi said: ¡°If it wasn¡¯t for me, Obito wouldn¡¯t have been hit by that rock, It¡¯s all my fault.¡± Minatoforted him: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Kakashi. It¡¯s not your fault, there are many unexpected things that happen in battle. Obito won¡¯t me you.¡± Kakashi replied: ¡°Obito has already awakened his Sharingan, when he is healed, I will return the Sharingan back to him.¡± An listened to the conversation in deep thought. His actions affected the entire story. Obito won¡¯t turn into a viin which will bring unexpected changes to the world. Obito was rescued by Madara Uchiha, who made him witness Kakashi shoving a Raikiri into Rin¡¯s stomach, which brought him to the dark side. Now with Tsunade healing him and Minato guarding the ce, it¡¯s impossible for Madara or Zetsu to get to him. And if Obito can¡¯t be taken, Madara would probably find another person to groom. All in all, because of An¡¯s intervention, Kakashi, Rin, and Obito¡¯s fates were changed drastically. This change in fate will affect many others, like Minato Namikaze and Madara Uchiha. This is thergest butterfly effect he caused ever. For now, he can¡¯t do anything but observe the changes he made. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 430! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 130! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 336: Flying Thunder God Technique Chapter 336: Flying Thunder God Technique After a while, Dozens of figures appeared, surrounding An, Minato, Kakashi, and Rin who were protecting the cave. Minato looked at the rock Ninjas calmly, before he said: ¡°There are a lot of them.¡± ¡°No matter how many there are, I must protect Obito.¡± Kakashi held a kunai and stared at the enemy. ¡°I will protect him as well.¡± Rin also took a kunai and said vigntly. As for An, he didn¡¯t join them, instead, he stood not far away with his arms folded and a pondering look on his face. Since Minato was there, An didn¡¯t need to make a move himself. In fact, he wanted to see Minato¡¯s Flying Thunder God and see how it works. The Rock Ninjas didn¡¯t attack directly, the leader in charge of them was a burly man who recognized Minato at a nce and said: ¡°I didn¡¯t expect the Yellow sh to appear here. That¡¯s really surprising. Weren¡¯t you fighting in the front lines?¡± Minato squatted down and whispered to Kakashi and Rin: ¡°Kakashi, Rin, throw the Hiraishin Kunai at them, I will deal with the rest. We can¡¯t let them disturb Tsunade-sama¡¯s treatment. ¡°Got it.¡± ¡°No problem.¡± Kakashi and Rin replied. Following that, Minato turned around and looked at An again, but he didn¡¯t say anything. An looked at Minato and nodded at him, saying that he didn¡¯t need to worry about him. Minato understood the hidden meaning and focused on the Rock Ninjas. Giving Rin and Kakashi the order, both threw the Kunai at the Rock Ninjas. Each Kunai held the Flying Thunder God seal on the handle. ording to what An knew about that technique, it¡¯s an instant movement technique that needs markers for the user to teleport to. An S ss Space Time Ninjutsu. The Technique doesn¡¯t need hand seals. At this moment, Minato started teleporting toward the marked Kunai that Kakashi and Rin threw. He was too fast that only a Yellow sh remained with each teleport. He killed each enemy without hesitation or mercy. He didn¡¯t want to risk Obito¡¯s treatment being interrupted, therefore, they are going to be annihted. Minato was colder than normal, and that was because he was facing Rock ninjas, who almost killed his student, and now that student was fighting for his life, and no one knew if he can make it. He med himself for not protecting Obito but also med the Rock Ninjas for doing that to his student, so he was like a killing machine on the battlefield. No one could stop him. Although Minato could deal with everyone without a problem, the enemy was scattered through the wood, and Minato had no way to teleport and hunt them. Therefore, those who slipped through Minato will have to face An. As the battle started, 4 people surrounded An before attacking him. An decisively attacked, killing all of them. As for Kakashi and Rin, they guarded outside the cave, as Minato Instructed. Minato¡¯s flying thunder god was so strong that he was called, Yellow sh, by his allies and enemies alike. And to deal with this, the more experienced Rock Ninjas used the Double suicide Decapitation technique to avoid him. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 434! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 130! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 337: Time Stop Chapter 337: Time Stop The double Suicide Decapitation Technique allowed the Rock Ninjas to hide under the earth and move freely without being seen. With the help of this technique, the Rock Ninjas escape the flying thunder god. At this moment a Rock Ninja appeared quietly behind Rin. The reason why the Rock Ninja aimed for Rin was because she seemed the weakest here. Just when the Rock Ninja appeared, Kakashi noticed the danger and warned. ¡°Rin, be careful.¡± It was toote, however, as the Rock Ninja attacked Rin. Kakashi wasn¡¯t close enough to defend Rin. Minato was also dealing with the Rock Ninja and didn¡¯t react fast enough. Just when the attack was about to reach Rin, An made his move. At this moment, space seemed to stagnate and time stopped flowing. This is another ability that An gained from the Space Law, which he called Time Stop. He can slow down time or even stop in the space he controls. An can¡¯t achieve aplete-time stop right now, but he was close enough. The radius of this technique was 500 meters, and within that range, all people and things were affected. Of course, he can¡¯t keep the time stop active for long, he can currently activate it only for three seconds. Moreover, this technique put a lot of stress on his mental power, and it would take him at least four hours of sleep to regain his energy. The three seconds time stop seemed to be short, but it was more than enough to rescue Rin and kill the Rock Ninja. An only needed less than a second to save Rin. When An released his technique, the surrounding Rock ninja, and everyone else didn¡¯t notice the anomaly. Only Minato felt that the Time flow seemed abnormal, but even so, he didn¡¯t know what was going on. But when they saw Rin was rescued by An, they sighed in relief and looked at An gratefully. ¡°Thank you.¡± ¡°You¡¯re wee.¡± ¡°Well, can you let me go¡± ¡°Oh, sorry.¡± Only then did An realize that he was still holding Rin in his hand. After Rin mentioned it, An quickly released her and continued the battle. Although Minato eliminated most enemies, there were still a few hidings below the ground. But they weren¡¯t suppressing their chakra well enough, which made Minato pinpoint their location. A blue chakra ball appeared in Minato¡¯s hand, spinning at high speed. An recognized the Rasengan at a nce since he used it previously. The Rasengan directly drilled into the ground killing the ninja hiding there. With the Rasengan and Flying Thunder God Combo, Minato destroyed all Ninjas hiding in the ground. Soon after, all enemy ninjas were annihted. After finishing the fight, Minato came over to An and said: ¡°Thank you for saving Rin just now.¡± An waved his hand and said: ¡°It¡¯s a trivial matter, don¡¯t worry. My name Is An by the way.¡± Minato then said: ¡°You have helped up a lot, I don¡¯t know where you are from, An-san, but you¡¯re really strong. The way you fought just now makes it seem like you used something simr to the flying Thunder God Technique I use.¡± An didn¡¯t hide his ability and exined: ¡°My ability is simr to your Flying Thunder God, as it allows me to teleport around as well. As for I¡¯m from, I am just a passerby, no special identity or residence.¡± Minato was slightly surprised: ¡°You have no residence and you¡¯re not affiliated with anyone? It seems like you¡¯re a wanderer.¡± An was toozy to exin that he was from another world and just nodded. ¡°What are you going to do next?¡± Minato asked curiously. An thought for a bit and said: ¡°I don¡¯t know. Probably wherever my legs take me.¡± An didn¡¯t really think about where he is going to go next. Minato saw the troubled An and suggested: ¡°You helped us many times and if you don¡¯t mind, you can stay in Konoha as a guest. We wee you there.¡± ¡°Go to Konoha?¡± An was stunned for a moment as he didn¡¯t expect Minato to take the initiative to invite him over. After thinking about it, An said: ¡°Well, since Konoha is the strongest of the five great Ninja viges, I¡¯m really curious about it. Since you invited me, then I¡¯m honored to ept.¡± ¡°That¡¯s great.¡± Minato smiled. Kakashi and Rin weed An as both of them were saved by him and liked him very much. Even though they didn¡¯t know who An was, it didn¡¯t prevent them from being grateful to him. ¡°I don¡¯t know if Obito can make it.¡± After dealing with the Rock Ninjas, Kakashi looked at the cave in worry. ¡°Don¡¯t worry Kakashi, with Tsunade-Sama here, Obito will definitively recover.¡± Rinforted. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 434! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 130! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 338: Escort Mission Chapter 338: Escort Mission A day passed quickly, and the Rock ninjas didn¡¯t appear again. At noon the next day, Tsunade finally came out of the cave. Minato, Kakashi, and Rin immediately greeted her and asked eagerly, ¡°Tsunade-Sama, what happened to Obito¡¯s ?¡± Tsunade¡¯s expression looked a little tired, as she had spent a lot of chakras to save Obito, but she said in a low tone: ¡°I barely saved his life, in order to really cure him, we need to bring back Konoha as we medical equipment. Fortunately, the boy¡¯s right eye was not damaged severely, and his vision has now been restored under my treatment.¡± Kakashi said, ¡°Since that¡¯s the case, let me transfer Obito back to the vige for treatment. Time is of the essence.¡± Tsunade looked at Minato and said, ¡°Minato, can you use the Flying Thunder God technique to transfer Obito back to the vige?¡± Hearing this, Minato shook his head and said, ¡°The distance is a bit far. With my current Chakra, I¡¯m afraid I can¡¯t do it.¡± Tsunade nodded, showing her understanding, and did not force Minato, saying, ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then I can only let Katsuyu take Obito back to the vige. Because slugs move slowly, it will take at least two days to get to Konoha from here. In order to ensure the safety of the road, someone needs to be an escort.¡± Hearing this, Kakashi was the first to say: ¡°Let me do it, I will definitely protect Obito.¡± ¡°I wille as well,¡± Rin said. ¡°What about you, Minato?¡± Tsunade asked. Minato Namikaze hesitated for a moment, then said: ¡¨Although I really want to escort Obito back in person, there is one more thing I need to do. ¡° After that, Minato looked at An who was not far away, and said, ¡°An-san, since you are going to Konoha anyway, can I ask you to protect them on the way as a favor for me?¡± At the same time, the system gave An another choice. ¡¾Ding! Make a Choice¡¿ [1. Agree to Minato Namikaze¡¯s request, and escort Obito back to Konoha with Kakashi. Reward: Rasengan ¡¿ [2. Reject the request of Namikaze Minato, and no longer participate in the subsequent plot development. Reward: One exploding tag. ¡¿ After thinking for a second, Allen decisively chose option one and agreed to Minato¡¯s request. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, you have already invited me to Konoha as a guest, I will definitely protect them.¡± Hearing An¡¯s answer, Minato Namikaze nodded and said, ¡°Then I will leave it to you.¡± Kakashi said: ¡°Minato-sensei, are you going toplete the unfinished task that we have notpleted? Blow up the Kannabi Bridge?¡± Minato Namikaze nodded: ¡°Yes, although it¡¯s a bitte to do it now, a mission is a mission, and it must be done for the vige.¡± Hearing this, Kakashi said: ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Sensei, this should have been my task, but now I have to trouble Sensei to do it.¡± Minato Namikaze smiled, patted Kakashi on the shoulder, and said, ¡°I don¡¯t me you, there are still many opportunities in the future.¡± After that, An and Kakashi were responsible for escorting the slug who was transporting Obito back to Konoha. As for Namikaze Minato, he went to the Kannabi Bridge alone and reced Kakashi and the others toplete the task of blowing it up. ording to the arrangement, the escort team was led by An and Kakashi, who were responsible for clearing the way and guarding against enemy attacks. Nohara Rin and Tsunade followed the slug, taking care of Obito. On the way, they didn¡¯t encounter any danger. Although it is during the third ninja war, they were inside the fire country, the risk is much less than outside. However, the less danger there is, the more vignt they should be. Never let your guard down just because you are not in danger. Maybe the enemy is hiding in the dark, waiting for an opportunity to strike. Sure enough, not long after, the enemy really appeared, and the enemy who appeared this time were Rock Ninjas. They used an earth wall to block An and the other¡¯s path. They nned to encircle An and the others within the earth wall and deal with them. An told Kakashi to break the wall with The Raikiri, and he took care of those Rock Ninjas. The two worked together very smoothly. Tsunade witnessed An¡¯s power for the first time. Seeing that An had dealt with Rock Ninjas so easily, she couldn¡¯t help but admire him, and at the same time, she was curious about his identity. After that, An and the others did not encounter any enemy again. In the afternoon of the second day, they finally arrived at Konoha. After entering Konoha, Anpleted this escort mission and also received the reward from the system, The Rasengan. n wasn¡¯t that happy about receiving the Rasengan because with his current power, the Rasengan wasn¡¯t necessary. In fact, being able toe to Konoha Vige made him even more excited. Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 434! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 132! Check out our new Korean Novel and Don¡¯t forget to give us a lovely Review on Novel Updates, share your opinion about this novel and the other ones, and have a nice day. Chapter 339: Konoha Chapter 339: Konoha Walking through the streets of Konoha, An looked around the shops and the crowd on both sides and sighed: ¡°Konoha is really prosperous. I¡¯vee to the right ce.¡± An really meant his words. Konoha was really a good ce filled with life and harmony. Kakashi said: ¡°Wee to Konoha, I hope you like it here.¡± An nodded. The idea of living here was great as he feltfortable in this ce. However, it wasn¡¯t easy for someone not from here to join the vige. Fortunately, An killed a few Rock Ninjas on the way here to bring Obito, which can give him a way to join Konoha. When the Hokage learns about this, he will definitively talk with him. Therefore, he could stay in Konoha. He also needed someone to vouch for him, and An thought of Minato. If Minato can vouch for him, he could stay here. Minato won¡¯t being back soon, so An wasn¡¯t in a harry. The group arrived at Konoha¡¯s hospital to escort Obito in. Tsunade nced at An, then at Kakashi, and said: ¡°Kakashi, your escort mission ispleted, after rushing here for two days, you should take a rest. You can take An-san here and look for a ce for him. I¡¯m going to Treat Uchiha Obito in the hospital. As for the report to Hokage-sama, Minato will do that when he gets back, so you don¡¯t have to report now.¡± ¡°Yes, Tsunade-Sama,¡± Kakashi replied. Rin followed Tsunade into the hospital as Obito kept muttering her name so she will be an important part of his recovery. An followed Kakashi out of the hospital and strolled around Konoha for a while. Kakashi asked: ¡°An-san, are you hungry? Let me treat you to some ramen.¡± ¡°Good idea.¡± An was getting hungry so he agreed readily. Kakashi took An to a ramen restaurant which was Ichiraku ramen for some reason. An ate ten bowls before he was satisfied which made Kakashi almost cry since he was the one paying. ¡°An-san, you¡¯re amazing.¡± Kakashi said to An after finishing his ramen An smiled and asked: ¡°Where are we going now?¡± Kakashi said: ¡°It¡¯s gettingte, so how about youe to my ce for tonight and I will prepare a ce for you until Minato Sensei returns. An shrugged and said: ¡°Is it convenient? Won¡¯t I be intruding?¡± ¡°It¡¯s okay, I¡¯m living alone and there are many vacant rooms to live in,¡± Kakashi said. ¡°Alright then, let¡¯s go.¡± Anughed. Soon after walking a few hundred meters, Kakashi entered apound. Kakashi pushed the door open and said: ¡°Come in, this is my house.¡± An looked around the house and said: ¡°Your family is quite rich.¡± Kakashi replied: ¡°My father was a famous Ninja and made a lot of money from missions.¡± ¡°What happened to him?¡± An asked knowingly. Kakashi¡¯s father was Konoha¡¯s white fang who is as strong if not stronger than the Sanin. But because he chose to save hisrades, he failed the mission and was criticized by almost everyone, which made himmit suicide. And just like that, a powerhouse fell. Soon enough, Kakashi replied: ¡°My fathermit suicide because of a mission.¡± ¡°Sorry, I asked something like that,¡± An said. Kakashi shook his head and said: ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter.¡± After that, Kakashi arranged a room for An. An will temporarily live in Kakashi¡¯s house and went to sleep. The next morning, when An woke up, he saw Kakashi holding a short sword and practicing in the yard. Judging from the way he was swinging his sword, Kakashi seemed proficient and his style seemed quite strong. Kakashi was young but he was well trained. After a while, Kakashi noticed Aning out of his room and said: ¡°An-san, Good morning.¡± An nodded and said: ¡°Kakashi, your swordsmanship is good.¡± Kakashi replied: ¡°My father left this sword for me and I¡¯m practicing the style he taught me.¡± ¡°Is that so.¡± An nodded as he already guessed that Kakashi¡¯s style was taught to him by the white fang. Kakashi asked: ¡°An-san, can you be my sparring partner? I want to evaluate my swordsmanship.¡± [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: ept Kakashi¡¯s request to be his sparring partner and defeat him. Reward: Ninjutsu Gift pack x 1] [2: Reject Kakashi¡¯s request, saying that you know nothing about swordsmanship and can¡¯t spare with him. Reward: Ninja Kit (Shuriken, Kunai, and stuff).] Thinking for a second, An picked option one and agreed to spar with Kakashi. ¡°Okay, Kakashi. I will spar with you for a while to see how good is your swordsmanship.¡± An said cheerfully. Kakashi replied: ¡°Thanks, An-san.¡± ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C ¡ª¨C Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 435! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 133! I Hope you Enjoy our novel and like our new Website looks! Please Leave a Comment and Support us with your reviews. Chapter 340: Kakashis swordsmanship Chapter 340: Kakashi''s swordsmanship In the yard, An hooked his finger at Kakashi and said with a smile: ¡°Okay, let¡¯s see how good is your swordsmanship.¡± Kakashi didn¡¯t do it directly as he saw An was unarmed and asked thoughtfully: ¡°An-san, are you fighting empty-handed? Do you want to use a weapon?¡± An didn¡¯t want to use a weapon at first but since Kakashi asked: ¡°Is there a kunai?¡± Hearing this, Kakashi took out a kunai and handed it to An. An waved it a few times and said: ¡°Even though it¡¯s the first time I use one, it feels good in my hand. Can you give it to me?¡± ¡°That¡¯s alright, An-san,¡± Kakashi replied. ¡°Thank you,¡± An said gratefully. ¡°An-san, can we start?¡± Kakashi asked. ¡°Well, yes, you can attack at any time.¡± ¡°Then, here Ie.¡± Kakashi directly rushed forward and shed at An. An held his kunai and blocked Kakashi¡¯s sword. Sparks flew as the metal weapons collided. An blocked Kakashi¡¯s first attack easily. Kakashi kept attacking An with everything he got, he used every attack he can use. The sound of metal colliding filled the yard as it grew intense. Kakashi was really fast, and he was also a good swordsman. Ordinary Ninjas won¡¯t be able to defend against him. Kakashi was already a Jonin and judging from his sword style, he was already a Jonin swordsman. However, facing an opponent of An¡¯s level, no matter how superb or strong he was, An could easily block his attacks. Seeing that his attacks were blocked easily by An, Kakashi held the sword with both hands and said: ¡°Next, I will show you my real skills.¡± Then, the short de suddenly radiated white light which made An narrow his eyes and said: ¡°White Chakra? This is the Kenjutsu inherited from Konoha¡¯s White Fang? It looks strong.¡± Hearing An mentions his father, Kakashi said: ¡°You know my father?¡± An replied: ¡°Only heard about him.¡± Kakashi said: ¡°This white chakra covering the de is quite sharp, be careful An-san.¡± ¡°Mm,e on.¡± An waved his Kunai in anticipation since he wanted to see how strong the white chakra was. When the Kunai and the white chakra de collided, a crack formed on the kunai. Another light taps and it would shatter. ¡°An-san, do you want to change your weapon? That kunai is cracked and will shatter soon.¡± Kakashi said. ¡°No, keep attacking.¡± An didn¡¯t care. Seeing this, Kakashi was puzzled, but he didn¡¯t say much as he attacked again. The white chakra and kunai collided again, and unexpectedly, the kunai in An¡¯s hand didn¡¯t shatter as expected. ¡°The Kunai didn¡¯t break, what¡¯s going on?¡± Kakashi asked with a strange expression. An showed a mysterious smile. He used his Nen to cover the Kunai and make it as hard as possible. After a few more moves, An kicked Kakashi¡¯s sword and then sent him flying with another kick. ¡°I won,¡± An said. At the same time, An heard the system giving him his reward. [Ding! You sessfully defeated Kakashi and Got a Ninjutsu Gift Pack.] ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C ¡ª¨C Novels Status on Patreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 436! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 133! I Hope you Enjoy our novel and like our new Website looks! Please Leave a Comment and Support us with your reviews. Chapter 341: Seeing The Hokage Chapter 341: Seeing The Hokage An didn¡¯t open the Ninjutsu Gift Pack. He nced at Kakashi and stretched his hand to pull him up then asked with concern: ¡°Sorry, Kakashi, are you okay?¡± Kakashi shook his head saying that it was alright. He knew that An was already holding back, otherwise, that kick was enough to kill him. Kakashi said with disappointment though: ¡°I lost, An you¡¯re really good.¡± His tone seemed slightly depressed. Kakashi was the best in his age group and generation. He was a genius who hardly suffered any losses in fights. But when he faced An, his Kenjutsu didn¡¯t have any effect on An which frustrated him. At the same time, it made him realize that he wasn¡¯t strong enough yet. An smiled and said: ¡°Kakashi, it¡¯s just a spar, it¡¯s not a life and death match, you don¡¯t have to be so serious.¡± Kakashi admired An¡¯s mentality and strength. In his opinion, An shouldn¡¯t be weaker than Minato. After the fight with Kakashi, An lost his Kunai. Because of the fight, the kunai cracked and broke just as the fight ended. Seeing that An felt bad for the Kunai, Kakashi said: ¡°An, I will give you a new Kunai.¡± Kakashi took his Ninja kit and said: ¡°There are three Kunai, Six Shuriken, two smoke bombs, and an explosive tag here.¡± Kakashi gave him the kit and An looked gratefully at him: ¡°Thanks, I just needed one Kunai.¡± Kakashi shook his head: ¡°You saved me and my teammates, and now you helped me train, so that¡¯s the least I could do, please ept it.¡± ¡°Okay, thank you.¡± An smiled and took the kit from Kakashi. Although this Ninja kit had no use for someone as strong as An, maybe it can be useful. After having breakfast, Kakashi asked: ¡°By the way An, can you give me your honest thoughts about my Kenjutsu?¡± An replied after some thought: ¡°You are quite proficient, to be honest. If you take some time to refine your Kenjutsu, you will definitively surpass your father.¡± Kakashi nodded and said: ¡°I will try my best.¡± At this moment, a figure suddenly appeared beside Kakashi in a yellow sh. An wasn¡¯t concerned about Minato appearing here out of nowhere. Kakashi saw Minato appearing beside him and said in surprise: ¡°Minato-sensei, how did you get here?¡± Minato replied: ¡°Didn¡¯t I give you the Flying Thunder God Kunai, I just teleported here.¡± ¡°Oh, right,¡± Kakashi remembered the Kunai. ¡°Then Minato-sensei, is the Kannabi Bridge¡¯s missionplete?¡± Kakashi asked in concern. ¡°Well, it¡¯s done, I just came back.¡± Minato looked a little tired. ¡°You worked hard, Sensei.¡± After chatting for a while with Kakashi, Minato looked at An and said: ¡°An-san, Hokage-sama wants to meet you.¡± ¡°let¡¯s go then.¡± An agreed readily. He also really wanted to meet Hiruzen Sarutobi. After all, in Naruto¡¯s world, he is called the professor, who knew every Jutsu in Konoha except for the n and bloodlimit ones. An was excited to meet a Kage-level powerhouse. Half an hourter, An followed Minato to the Hokage tower, which is practically andmark in Konoha. Inside the Hokage office, Hiruzen Sarutobi sat in front of his desk with Shimura Danzo standing next to him. They looked in their forties or fifties. Minato said: ¡°Hokage-sama, this is An.¡± Hiruzen nodded and looked at An and said: ¡°Hello, I¡¯m Sarutobi Hiruzen, the Third Hokage of Konoha. I¡¯ve heard from Minato that you saved Kakashi and the others, thank you for saving them.¡± ¡°You¡¯re wee,¡± An replied. Sarutobi then asked: ¡°So, is there anything you want?¡± An thought for a bit and said: ¡°If possible, I would like to stay in Konoha.¡± ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C ¡ª¨C Novels Status onPatreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 437! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 133! I Hope you Enjoy our novel and like our new Website looks! Please Leave a Comment and Support us with your reviews. Chapter 342: Danzo’s Questions Chapter 342: Danzo¡¯s Questions Hiruzen was surprised by An¡¯s request as he said: ¡°You mean you want to settle down here?¡± An nodded: ¡°That¡¯s right, I hope it isn¡¯t too much. I hope you can agree to my request, Sandaime Hogake.¡± Hiruzen stared directly at An and asked: ¡°Why do you want to stay in our vige? Is there a special reason?¡± An smiled lightly: ¡°Actually, there is no special reason, just that Konoha seemed pleasant to live in.¡± Hearing this, Hiruzen nced at Danzo, who understood what his former teammate and rival wanted. ¡°Although you saved the ninjas from our vige, we don¡¯t know anything about you, we don¡¯t even know if your name is real or not. It¡¯s not an easy thing to let you stay in Konoha and settle down. We need to verify your identity before we can decide whether to agree to your request or not.¡± An¡¯s expression turned cold. It was obvious that Hiruzen and Danzo were suspicious of him. He just sneered and said: ¡°I know that you two are suspicious of me. You might even think that I¡¯m a spy sent by an enemy and want to collect information here, right?¡± Danzo¡¯s expression cracked slightly as he didn¡¯t expect An to just say that bluntly. Hiruzen thought was calm as heughed and said: ¡°An, we don¡¯t suspect that you¡¯re a spy, but you made yourself suspicious by saying that.¡± An smiled: ¡°Although you two sirs didn¡¯t directly say that I¡¯m a spy, you are thinking about it and I don¡¯t me you for it. After all, my identity is indeed suspicious.¡± ¡°It¡¯s good that you know,¡± Danzo said. ¡°So, how do you want me to verify my identity?¡± An asked Danzo with a cold face. Danzo replied: ¡°Just tell me where you were born, who were your parents, and if you have family members. Your previous job, etc¡­ We will send someone to confirm your words and if there is really no problem with your identity, we can let you stay in Konoha.¡± Hearing this, An snorted coldly and nced at Hiruzen. It¡¯s obvious that Hiruzen shared the same thoughts. Those two old monsters suspected that he was a spy sent here for information, which made him quite unhappy. At this time, the system gave him a choice. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Facing the suspicion of being a spy, exin to Danzo and Hiruzen your real identity as a world traveler. Reward: an A-rank fire Ninjutsu gift pack.] [2: It¡¯s inconvenient and dangerous to say the truth, keep your identity hidden. Reward: a B rank Ninjutsu Gift pack.] [3: Use force to suppress Danzo and Hiruzen and make them agree to your request. Reward: An A-rank wind Ninjutsu Gift Pack.] An eliminated the first and third options without hesitation. Although their rewards were better, An still rejected them. The reason was simple, his identity as a world traveler would cause a lot of trouble and he didn¡¯t want to fight against Hiruzen and Danzo. If he were to fight both of them, then that means that the entire vige would fight against An and thetter didn¡¯t want that. Thinking about this, An shrugged and said: ¡°Hokage-sama, my identity doesn¡¯t need any verification, and I¡¯m not that suspicious. There is no need to waste manpower and time to verify this.¡± Hearing this, Danzo said: ¡°Is it that inconvenient to say or are you just a spy from another vige trying to infiltrate our vige?¡± With thest sentence, Danzo almost revealed a trace of killing intent. He was obviously very suspicious of An. If he was a spy, Danzo would quickly get rid of him, like many before him or so Danzo thought. Danzo won¡¯t show mercy for anyone who can be a danger to Konoha. An sneered at Danzo and said: ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter really, you can send people to verify my identity or if anyone knows me, but I will assure you that no matter who you send or how many, there won¡¯t be any information about me in this world.¡± Danzo said: ¡°No one canpletely hide their information, and our intelligencework is very strong, so we can find out whatever we want sooner orter. Hopefully, by then, you want to turn out to be a spy, An-san.¡± Hearing this, Anughed, and loudly at that. Hiruzen and Danzo, even Minato on the other side of the door were puzzled by An¡¯s suddenughter. Danzo angrily said: ¡°An-san, this is the Hokage¡¯s Office, restrain yourself. What are youughing at?¡± ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C ¡ª¨C Novels Status onPatreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 439! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 134! I Hope you Enjoy our novel and like our new Website looks! Please Leave a Comment and Support us with your reviews. Chapter 343: Minato’s Trust Chapter 343: Minato¡¯s Trust An restrained hisugh as he looked directly at Danzo and said: ¡°Iugh because you¡¯re too confident. Because you can¡¯t find information about me.¡± Hearing this, Danzo said: ¡°You are underestimating the Intelligence Network of Konoha.¡± An shook his head and said: ¡°I¡¯m not underestimating anything. Because in this world, there is nothing on me, no family, job, or identity. So, you won¡¯t find anything about me.¡± ¡°No one can be without a life, there should be something that we can find,¡± Danzo said as he didn¡¯t believe An. Hiruzenmented: ¡°If it is a war orphan, that would make sense. From he was born, he didn¡¯t have parents, in short, he lived alone for most of his life, without a single ce to stay in, like a wanderer, right?¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°I can only tell you that I came from a faraway ce. A continent that has nothing with your own, that¡¯s all I can say.¡± ¡°Trying to be mysterious,¡± Danzo muttered. Hiruzen said: ¡°Are you implying that you¡¯re not from this continent but from another one?¡± ¡°Possibly.¡± An shrugged. Danzo said: ¡°Hiruzen, that¡¯s absurd.¡± Thetter replied: ¡°Danzo, you should know that this world is vast, and we only see the surface of it, there are other people in other ces.¡± Danzo said: ¡°Of course, I know that, but this guy is still too suspicious.¡± At this moment, Minato intervened. ¡°Hokage-sama, Danzo-sama, An helped me and apanied me for a while, I think he is reliable and trustworthy. I hope you can allow him to stay and I will be responsible if anything happens.¡± Danzo replied: ¡°Minato, you¡¯re too na?ve.¡± Hiruzen pondered for a while before raising his hand and said: ¡°Okay since Minato trusts you, you can stay in Konoha.¡± ¡°Thank you.¡± Danzo warned: ¡°Don¡¯t think that you can live in Konoha without care, if I find that you disobey thew or do anything suspicious, we will throw you out, or even kill you.¡± ¡°I understand, I won¡¯t do anything bad, don¡¯t worry,¡± An replied. Although An wasn¡¯t afraid, he still wanted to stay in Konoha, so he didn¡¯t pay people like Danzo any mind. ¡°Minato, about where An should live, it¡¯s up to you to arrange his lodging for now,¡± Hiruzen said. ¡°Yes, Hokage-sama,¡± Minato replied. After walking out of the Hokage tower, An looked toward Minato and said: ¡°Minato, thank you, without you, I don¡¯t think I would¡¯ve convinced them that I don¡¯t mean any harm by staying here, and they wouldn¡¯t have allowed me to live in Konoha.¡± Minato smiled and said: ¡°You¡¯re wee, this is what I should do. Besides, it¡¯s our vige¡¯s honor to have a talent like you here.¡± An nodded before sighing inwardly at Minato¡¯s broad mind and vision, Danzo was nothingpared to him. ¡°By the way, Minato, Hokage-sama asked you to arrange a residence for me, do you have a ce in mind?¡± An asked curiously. Although he doesn¡¯t have any high requirements for a ce to live, he thought that it¡¯s better to be in a ce with a good environment. Minato replied: ¡°You¡¯re staying at Kakashi¡¯s ce right now, but if you want, you can stay with me for some time.¡± ¡°Your house?¡± An was surprised. Minato said: ¡°You don¡¯t want to?¡± An replied: ¡°Isn¡¯t it inconvenient to live in your house, won¡¯t your wifein about me?¡± Hearing this, Minatoughed hard. ¡°Hahahaha, I¡¯m not married yet, where did thisdye from?¡± ¡°I see, that means you live alone now.¡± An understood that Minato didn¡¯t marry Kushina yet. At this time, Kakashi appeared beside them. Hearing that An was looking for a ce to stay, Kakashi said: ¡°An-san, you should stay with me, after all, you can be my sparring partner and help me get stronger.¡± An shrugged and said: ¡°Well since you asked, I will stay in your ce. Minato, sorry, I will visit you when I have time and stay over if you want.¡± ¡°You¡¯re wee anytime.¡± Minato smiled. Just like this, An got his wish to stay in Konoha and he temporarily lived in Kakashi¡¯s house. In addition to sparring every day with Kakashi, An spends some of his time enjoying the new experience in Konoha. ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C ¡ª¨C Novels Status onPatreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 439! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 134! I Hope you Enjoy our novel and like our new Website looks! Please Leave a Comment and Support us with your reviews. Chapter 344: Testing the power of the Ninjutsu Chapter 344: Testing the power of the Ninjutsu Time flew by and before he knew it, An has been in Konoha for a month. An has been staying at Kakashi¡¯s house for the past month as he trained with Kakashi almost every day. In the woods a few kilometers away from Kakashi¡¯s house, An and Kakashi were sparring like usual. Kakashi attacked fiercely with his sword and An defended with a Kunai. After nearly a month of training with An, Kakashi progressed steadily in his swordsmanship. He was highly praised by An. ¡°An, thank you for apanying me in training for thest month,¡± Kakashi said gratefully. ¡°I¡¯m surprised by how fast you¡¯re progressing, Kakashi,¡± An replied. ¡°By the way, An-san, this is a Chakra Paper to test your nature¡¯s affinity as you¡¯ve asked.¡± Taking the Chakra paper from Kakashi, An smiled lightly: ¡°Thanks, I¡¯m going to test my chakra now.¡± Soon, his chakra passed through the paper and An was surprised that he had all five chakra natures. He had wind, lightning, water, earth, and fire which means that he can use all non-bloodlimit Ninjutsu. Only Hiruzen Sarutobi can use all five chakra natures in Konoha right now. Most Jonin had two and rarely three. Seeing he has an affinity for the five basic chakra natures, An wanted to try his Ninjutsu. At present, he can perform the academy three, which are the Transformation, the substitution, and the clone, he also knows Mud clone, Rasengan, Fire Release: Fireball, Lightning Release: False Darkness. An obtained the techniques from the ninjutsu gift boxes. The first he needed to test was the Rasengan, which didn¡¯t need a chakra nature, and was one of the few techniques that didn¡¯t need hand seals while also being one of the strongest techniques. If he add a Chakra nature to it, it would be at the peak of Rank S ninjutsu. Forming the Rasengan in his hand, An faced a boulder as he bellowed: ¡°Rasengan!¡± With one blow, a huge rock burst open. An nodded with satisfaction, Rasengan was indeed a powerful Ninjutsu, although he used it before in Hunter x Hunter world, he was still amazed at the power it packed. If he wanted it to be stronger, he needed to add a Chakra nature to it, but An didn¡¯t n on doing so anytime soon, since it was too time-consuming. The current version was sufficient. Besides, An had other ninjutsu other than the Rasengan, so after the test, he proceeded to make a few hand seals before he spews a huge fireball from his mouth. The Huge Fireball hit a tree burning it down quickly. However, there is a saying in Naruto¡¯s world that says: a fireball isn¡¯t enough to kill anyone, especially one that can¡¯t hit. That wasn¡¯t wrong, even though the fireball was strong, one of the strongest C rank ninjutsu, it was fast enough to actually hit even a genin. Fortunately, An wasn¡¯t expecting much from the Fireball technique, so he wasn¡¯t disappointed much. Finally, An was testing the Lightning Release: False Darkness, which should be quite powerful. Since he was testing a Lightning Release Jutsu, the best judge for that would be Kakashi, so An directly called him. Soon, Kakashi arrived ¡°Kakashi, I¡¯ve learned a new Lightning style Jutsu, can help me test its power?¡± ¡°Lightning? Sure, let¡¯s try it against my Chidori.¡± Kakashi readily agreed. In the next second, An¡¯s hand formed the seals required before shouting: ¡°Lightning Release: False Darkness.¡± Immediately, a lightning bolt rushed toward Kakashi at an extreme speed, who was prepared with his Chidori. ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C ¡ª¨C Novels Status onPatreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 439! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 134! I Hope you Enjoy our novel and like our new Website looks! Please Leave a Comment and Support us with your reviews. Chapter 345: Lightning Release: False Darkness Chapter 345: Lightning Release: False Darkness Seeing the Lightning attack rushing toward him, Kakashi didn¡¯t ck as he blocked it using his Chidori. Kakashi¡¯s face was serious as cold sweat dripped from his forehead. The False Darkness Jutsu An released was so strong that his Chidori almost couldn¡¯t stop, so he supercharged Chidori with chakra hoping to overpower the lightning Jutsu. Zizizizi! Although he was finally sessful in blocking it, it consumed a huge chunk of Kakashi¡¯s chakra. Seeing Kakashi struggle to stop his attack, An smiled satisfied at its power. False darkness was around B Rank, but An managed to make it reach A rank ninjutsu. ¡°What kind of Lightning Ninjutsu was that? It¡¯s amazing.¡± Kakashi asked curiously. He didn¡¯t expect to wear himself out like that just to block a lightning Jutsu. ¡°It¡¯s a lightning release ninjutsu, it¡¯s called False Darkness.¡± Kakashi hesitated for a bit before he asked: ¡°An, can you teach it to me?¡± Facing An¡¯s request, the system gave him a choice. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Agree to Kakashi¡¯s request and teach him Lightning Release: False Darkness. Reward: Water Clone Jutsu.] [2: Refuse Kakashi¡¯s request. Reward: Small Ninjutsu Gift Pack.] An picked the first option almost instantly. ¡°Okay, I will teach it to you.¡± Anughed. ¡°Thanks.¡± Kakashi was excited as he didn¡¯t expect An to agree. An actually didn¡¯t want to spend time teaching Kid Kakashi, but the reward from the system was good. Kakashi said: ¡°I will teach you Chidori then, it will be a Ninjutsu exchange between us.¡± ¡°Teach me Chidori?¡± An was a little surprised as he didn¡¯t expect that Kakashi would offer the Chidori. An said: ¡°Well, since that¡¯s the case, let¡¯s start, I will teach you Lightning Release: False Darkness, and you will teach me Chidori.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Kakashi had no problem with this. Two dayster, Kakashi Mastered False Darkness and can use it easily. An wasn¡¯t surprised by this, since Kakashi was really a genius. He created an A-rank Ninjutsu when he was ten. He actually could perform the False Darkness Jutsu in just half a day, while An took two days to learn Chidori. After Kakashi learned it, An got his water clone reward from the system. ¡°By the way, how is Obito right now?¡± After finishing their training, An asked Kakashi. It¡¯s been more than a month since the Kannabi bridge mission, and Obito was rescued by Tsunade. Kakashi replied: ¡°Obito is recuperating at home, Tsunade-sama said that although his body was repaired, he would need at least half a year to fully recover.¡± An nodded by the thought that with Obito¡¯s impatience, he would not stay at home and would definitively go out. At this time, Rines over running. Seeing this, Kakashi asked quickly: ¡°What happened, Rin?¡± Rin hurriedly exined: ¡°Obito¡¯s not home, I went to visit him, but I couldn¡¯t find him.¡± ¡°Did you ask around?¡± Kakashi asked. Rin shook her head and said: ¡°I searched around and couldn¡¯t find him. I also asked a few people and they said they didn¡¯t see him.¡± Kakashi frowned and started getting anxious. ¡°Kakashi, what should we do?¡± Rin asked. Kakashi thought for a while and said: ¡°You go inform Minato-sensei, and I will go look around to see if I find anything.¡± ¡°Okay, I¡¯m going.¡± Kakashi turned to An and asked: ¡°An, can you help us find Obito?¡± At this time, the system gave him another choice. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Help Kakashi and go find Obito with him. Find Obito within 24 hours. Reward: A rank Genjutsu: Kokuangyou Satsu (Illusion Technique: Infinite Darkness)] [2: Don¡¯t help out, making excuses about it being a private matter that doesn¡¯t concern you and having no time. Reward: Small Ninjutsu Gift Pack.] After seeing his choice, An picked the first option and nodded: ¡°I will help, let¡¯s go together.¡± ¡°Thank you,¡± Kakashi said gratefully. Afterward, An and Kakashi quickly moved toward Obito¡¯s house in the Uchiha npound. ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C ¡ª¨C Novels Status onPatreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 439! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 134! I Hope you Enjoy our novel and like our new Website looks! Please Leave a Comment and Support us with your reviews. Chapter 346: Obito in Danger Chapter 346: Obito in Danger The Nine Tails incident has yet to happen, so the Uchiha n Compound was still in the center of Konoha. After arriving there, An and Kakashi directly went toward Obito¡¯s house. Kakashi pointed and said: ¡°This is Obito¡¯s house, he usually lives with his grandma. I¡¯vee here a few times before.¡± Walking into the house, Obito¡¯s grandma saw Kakashi and said: ¡°Kakashi, it¡¯s been a long time since Ist saw you.¡± Kakashi replied: ¡°Grandma, do you know where Obito is?¡± She rubbed her chin and said: ¡°I don¡¯t know, I didn¡¯t see him when I woke up in the morning. I don¡¯t know where he went. Can you look for him? That kid is still recovering and is still running around.¡± Kakashi assured her: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, grandma, I will find Obito.¡± Kakashi then turned around and said to An: ¡°Let¡¯s go to the forest nearby and look there.¡± An nodded. After entering the wood, the two of them found several shuriken and kunai on the ground and on the trees around. ¡°There are traces of battle here,¡± An said. Kakashi followed: ¡°That¡¯s right, the Shuriken and Kunai should belong to Obito.¡± ¡°Someone was here for him.¡± Kakashi was now sure that Obito is in danger and became anxious for his friend. An patted Kakashi¡¯s shoulder and said: ¡°Calm down, Obito is probably still alive. We should split up and look for him. Also, be careful of enemies there, don¡¯t be careless.¡± ¡°I will be careful.¡± Kakashi nodded. The two of them split apart and each went to one side searching for Obito. A few momentster, An found something. In the depth of the forest, Obito¡¯s situation was bad. He was currently fighting a white man. An recognized Zetsu at a nce who seemed to want to take Obito forcibly to Madara since the original n didn¡¯t work. As for Obito, he was desperately resisting his kidnapper. It¡¯s a pity that his body was still far frompletely recovering and can only fight slightly with his left side. At this time, Zetsu held Obito¡¯s body and tried to devour him. Zetsu was also known as the will of Kaguya Otsutsuki. He had two forms, white and ck. At this time, it was White Zetsu who was attacking Obito. The White half is a clone that can copy the chakra signature easily and can be used as a reconnaissance mainly, but it still can fight. In another future, had An didn¡¯t intervene, Obito would¡¯ve been taken by Zetsu. But after he interfered, An thought that Zetsu wouldn¡¯t target Obito since he was in Konoha. After finding Obito, a new choice appeared in front of An. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Save Obito. Reward: Ninjutsu Treasure Chest.] [2: Sit back and watch as Obito is taken away. Reward: Ninjutsu small gift pack.] An decided to save Obito, and he had two reasons. The first is the reward, and the second is that he hates Zetsu¡¯s guts. Furthermore, An didn¡¯t want to see Madara resurrected, so he wouldn¡¯t let Obito be taken away. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s try the Genjutsu I just got.¡± An made hand seals and activated Infinite Darkness. This is a high-level Genjutsu that can create absolute darkness that prevented any type of light inside. At this time, Zetsu almostpletely possessed Obito. Obito temporarily lost consciousness because of the possession. Zetsu who was about to leave suddenly found his surroundings turning ck. Soon, he couldn¡¯t even see himself anymore. Zetsu who was rendered blind felt a sense of fear suddenly creep into his being. At this time, An quickly approached Zetsu who couldn¡¯t even notice him due to his panic and blindness. When he finally wanted to take action, he heard the sound of chirping birds. The disadvantage of Chidori was the need for high visual perception due to the tunnel vision created by the high speed of the user. An used Infinite Darkness to stop Zetsu in ce for a while and get an advantage by using Chidori¡¯s speed to plunge his hand into his enemy. This way, Zetsu won¡¯t be able to react and move to the side to avoid the Chidori. The Chidori stuck Zetsu who was paralyzed by the electricity running through him while he screamed in the darkness. ¡ª¡ª- ¡ª Novels Status onPatreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 442! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 135! I Hope you Enjoy our novel and like our new Website looks! Please Leave a Comment and Support us with your reviews. Chapter 347: Uzumaki Kushina Chapter 347: Uzumaki Kushina In the darkness, Zetsu was hit by a Chidori and was screaming from the pain. His body fell off Obito¡¯s like a liquid on the ground. An released the Infinite Darkness Genjutsu, returning the light to their surrounding. He saw Obito lying on the ground, but Zetsu was already gone. An knew that Zetsu wasn¡¯t that easily killed and he most likely escaped and couldn¡¯t help saying: ¡°You really run fast.¡± At this time, An received his reward. [Ding! You sessfully rescued Obito from Zetsu. Reward: Ninjutsu Treasure Chest.] ¡°Open the treasure chest,¡± An said. [Ding! You¡¯ve opened a ninjutsu treasure chest and received Earth Release: Earth-style Wall.] An obtained a defensive earth Ninjutsu which was quite good. At this time, Kakashi rushed over and saw Obito on the ground. An reassured: ¡°Obito is fine, he just fainted. I will tell you what happened when we go back.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Kakashi nodded as he carried Obito on his back toward the Hospital. After settling Obito in the Hospital, An informed Kakashi of what happened. ¡°That¡¯s the gest of it. That guy name Zetsu wanted to kidnap Obito, but I injured him and he ran away.¡± Hearing this, Kakashi asked: ¡°Why does he want Obito?¡± An shook his head, although he knew why he wasn¡¯t going to tell Kakashi that Zetsu was ordered by Madara Uchiha. Although he wanted to tell them that Madara was alive, he didn¡¯t have a reason to actually tell them. Furthermore, if he were to just announce that, they would suspect him further and he won¡¯t be able to stay in Konoha anymore. That¡¯s why An didn¡¯t intend to tell them about Madara. Soon, Rin and Minato came to visit Obito in the Hospital. They breathed a sigh of relief when they learned that Obito was fine. Kakashi informed them that a guy named Zetsu wanted to kidnap Obito, but An rescued him which made them very grateful. Minato brought An to the side as he said: ¡°I¡¯m really sorry that I let you save my student again, it appears that I¡¯m an ipetent teacher.¡± An smiled slightly: ¡°Don¡¯t say that. You have your missions to do and you won¡¯t find the time to always protect them.¡± Minato said: ¡°Do you have time this evening? I will treat you to dinner as thanks for saving Obito again.¡± [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: ept Minato¡¯s invitation. Reward: Body Flicker Technique.] [2: Reject Minato¡¯s invitation. Reward: Small Ninjutsu gift pack.] An epted Minato¡¯s invitation which directly gave him knowledge of the body flicker technique as a reward. An then asked: ¡°So, what are you treating me to?¡± Minato scratched the back of his head and said: ¡°Although I really want to invite you to eat at my house, my cooking skills are not very good. So I¡¯ll invite you to eat BBQ, what do you think?¡± ¡°BBQ? Yes, yes, that¡¯s good.¡± An readily agreed. In the evening, An along with Kakashi arrived at the busiest street in Konoha which was themercial street in the center of Konoha. An and Kakashi arrived at a BBQ shop, and thetter said: ¡°Minato-sensei should be already inside, let¡¯s go in.¡± An nodded and walked inside. As they went in, An found that Minato invite quite a few people, other than Kakashi and Rin, there is also Tsunade, who had a young body sitting next to her. There was also a red-haired woman on his left, which is obviously Kushina. Minato noticed An and immediately said: ¡°An, let me introduce you, this is Kushina.¡± ¡°Hello, I heard a lot about you from Minato, you¡¯re really strong.¡± Kushina took the initiative to greet An, who nodded back at Kushina and greeted her back. Then Minato pointed at the boy and said: ¡°This is Tsunade-sama¡¯s younger brother, Nawaki.¡± An¡¯s eyes moved from Kushina to Nawaki. ¡ª¡ª- ¡ª Novels Status onPatreon: HXH: G.O.C.S: Chapter 443! Reincarnated With the Book of Knowledge (RWBK): Chapter 135! I Hope you Enjoy our novel and like our new Website looks! Please Leave a Comment and Support us with your reviews. Chapter 348: The Drinking Competition Chapter 348: The Drinking Competition Nawaki and Tsunade both belonged to the Senju family, and Nawaki looked a lot like Naruto with a simr personality. Even their goals were the same, as both wanted to be Hokage. Naruto wasn¡¯t born yet, and originally, Nawaki would die during this Ninja war by an explosive tag, in a mission. Since Nawaki was still here, then he still didn¡¯t go on that mission, but if An let it be, then he would die in that same mission. Thinking about this, and although An wanted to tell him to be careful, he considered that he was meeting him for the first time and they didn¡¯t know each other, so he just couldn¡¯t show concern. So, in the end, An gave up on saying anything to Nawaki. Tsunade who was sitting next to Nawaki saw An¡¯s gaze linger on Nawaki and said: ¡°why are you staring at my brother all this time.¡± ¡°It¡¯s nothing.¡± An shook his head. At this time, Minato stood up with a cup in his hand and said: ¡°An, sorry that I don¡¯t drink, but let me give you a toast with tea for saving Obito today.¡± Being able to receive a toast from Konoha¡¯s yellow sh wasn¡¯t something easy. An raised his ss filled with wine and said: ¡°Cheers.¡± This was the first time An tasted Konoha¡¯s Sake. It didn¡¯t have a high concentration of Alcohol and was a little sweet, but his throat felt hot after drinking it. ¡°Oh? You seem to be a good drinker.¡± Seeing An drink the entire cup in one go, Tsunademented with admiration. ¡°I¡¯m decent.¡± An smiled. A mere ss of Sake is nothing to him. Seeing his confidence, Tsunade said: ¡°If that¡¯s the case, how about apanying me for a drink.¡± ¡°Drinking with you?¡± An was a little surprised. ¡°What, you¡¯re afraid?¡± Tsunade asked back. An wanted to refuse initially, but a sudden system interruption stopped him. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Drink with Tsunade, and outdrink her. Reward: Medical Ninjutsu: Mystical Palm Jutsu.] [2: Reject Tsunade. Reward: Small Ninjutsu Gift Pack.] An epted Tsunade¡¯s request without hesitation after seeing the option he got. ¡°Okay, I will apany you for a drink.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Seeing An agreeing, Tsunade nodded in satisfaction. An then said: ¡°Tsunade, are we the only two drinkings?¡± Tsunade nced at everyone and then asked Minato: ¡°Minato, do you want to drink?¡± Minato hurriedly shook his head: ¡°Tsunade-sama, you know I can¡¯t drink, I have a mission tomorrow.¡± Tsunade nodded before she looked at Kakashi and Rin: ¡°Both of you are still too young to drink.¡± Kakashi and Rin nodded quickly, as they had no interest, to begin with. ¡°Can I drink, Nee-san?¡± Nawaki sitting next to Tsunade Asked. ¡°As if you brat.¡± Tsunade rolled her eyes at Nawaki. In the end, Tsunade¡¯s gazended on Kushina, and said: ¡°Kushina, do you want to apany us for a drink?¡± Kushina hesitated for a moment before she nodded: ¡°Since Tsunade-sama asked, I will drink a little.¡± Tsunade nodded with satisfaction and looked at An and said: ¡°Okay, let us three starts.¡± An smiled lightly and said: ¡°How are we doing this? Bar Dice, or Boxing?¡± Tsunade¡¯s eyes lit up as she said: ¡°You know that as well? Then let¡¯s start with punches first.¡± ¡°Sounds good,¡± An replied. Kushina was a little embarrassed as she asked: ¡°I don¡¯t know anything about ¡®Boxing¡¯.¡± ¡°It¡¯s okay, I will teach you, it¡¯s very simple,¡± Tsunade said in a big sister voice. ¡°Ok then.¡± Kushina agreed. So next, An, Tsunade, and Kushina started the drinking game. The three of them sat together and whoever loses had to drink a cup. Because Kushina was new to this, she kept losing and had to drink 10 cups in just two minutes and started feeling funny. Even though she started feeling funny, Kushina had a strong personality and didn¡¯t want to appear weak in front of anyone. Minato, Kakashi, and the others were watching thepetition and were dumbfounded by Kushina¡¯s alcohol tolerance. Minato knew that Kushina was pushing herself and asked: ¡°Kushina, do you want me to drink instead of you?¡± ¡°Minato, didn¡¯t you say that you can¡¯t drink?¡± Kushina asked back. ¡°It¡¯s okay,¡± Minato replied. ¡°Okay then, you drink.¡± Kushina agreed. Minato did drink two cups, but after that, he waspletely drunk. Kushina was dumbfounded at this development, and An was speechless. He didn¡¯t expect Minato¡¯s tolerance to be so weak. When Kakashi saw this, he said: ¡°I will take Minato sensei back first.¡± An nodded and said: ¡°Go ahead.¡± ¡°Kakashi, I will help too,¡± Rin said. As they left, An asked Tsunade: ¡°Do you want to continue?¡± ¡°Yes, we¡¯re not drunk yet,¡± Tsunade replied. She wasn¡¯t just a gambler, but she was also addicted to alcohol. Tsunade then said to Nawaki: ¡°You go back home first.¡± Nawaki wanted to stay, but he couldn¡¯t argue with Tsunade, so he just went back home. So, only Kushina, Tsunade, and An were left there as they continued theirpetition. Kushina was losing badly, so An lost a few times on purpose to help her a bit. But Kushina noticed this and felt bad. An wasn¡¯t afraid of drinking because he had his gourmet stomach, which can turn any food or drink he consumes into energy. After drinking all night, Tsunade was drunk, while An looked fine. As for Kushina, she was the first to get drunk and drop out of the game. He made a clone to send Tsunade home while he dropped Kushina at her house before heading toward Kakashi¡¯s ce. Chapter 349: Old Man Madara Chapter 349: Old Man Madara In a dark underground cave, a thin old man sat on a stone chair. Although he was disheveled and skinny, his aura was still strong. This used to be one of the strongest people in the ninja world, this is the man who stood side by side with the god of shinobi Hashirama Senju, this was Madara Uchiha. This ce seemed like a ce between the underworld and the world of the living, it was simr to Limbo. Madara used Izanagi to deceive Hashirama and cheat death. It was due to that that he discovered this ce, a ce for him to n for the infinite Tsukuyomi project. ¡°Zetsu isn¡¯t back yet?¡± Madara whispered. Now, he was almost a hundred years old, his body was very weak and withering. Suddenly, Zetsu emerged from the ground. Seeing Zetsu, Madara said: ¡°Zetsu, what¡¯s the matter? Why are you back sote? Where is Uchiha Obito? Don¡¯t tell me you couldn¡¯t sneak into Konoha and bring him here?¡± Facing Madara¡¯s questioning, Zetsu¡¯s face looked contorted as he gritted his teeth: Madara-sama, I managed to sneak into Konoha and take control of Obito¡¯s body, and was alreadying here, but suddenly, someone attacked me and took him away. It¡¯s the same guy who rescued Obito on the Kannabi bridge. He first used a Genjutsu, Infinite Darkness to deprive me of my vision, and covered his hand in lightning and shoved it into my body. I only managed to escape and save my life, otherwise, that guy would¡¯ve killed me.¡± Hearing this, Madara looked at Zetsu suspiciously: ¡°You said he deprived you of vision using Infinite Darkness? Isn¡¯t that Tobirama¡¯s Jutsu? How did that guy manage to learn it? Is he from the Senju n?¡± Zetsu shook his head, he didn¡¯t know where that guye from. (T/N: Previously, it was white Zetsu talking.) At this time, ck Zetsu, said: That¡¯s right, that guy used the Infinite Darkness that Tobirama invented, and he used the Chidori developed by a kid named Kakashi. He seems to be quite versatile and hard to deal with.¡± Madara asked in a deep voice: ¡°What¡¯s his name?¡± ¡°He is called An.¡± Zetsu replied: ¡°He lives with the Kid named Kakashi in Konoha.¡± Madara said: ¡°Investigate that guy and find out every detail about him. I want to know about this guy that hindered my n over and over again.¡± ¡°Got it.¡± Both Zetsu¡¯s said at the same time. At this time, Zetsu once again went to Konoha to investigate An. At this time, Tsunade was in front of Kakashi¡¯s house as she called for An. An opened the door and said: ¡°Tsunade-sama, why are you here?¡± An asked curiously. ¡°Let¡¯s go to a bar and drink,¡± Tsunade said straight to the point. ¡°What drinking again?¡± An was speechless. ¡°What? You have anything else to do?¡± Tsunade asked. ¡°No.¡± An shook his head. ¡°So, you¡¯re free?¡± Tsunade asked. ¡°Very free.¡± An nodded. ¡°Isn¡¯t it fine then? I don¡¯t have anything to do either, so apany me to the bar,¡± Tsunade said. ¡°Ok.¡± An could only reluctantly agree. For some time now, after that BBQ night and the boxing they did, Tsunade woulde to An to apany her to a drink. For an alcoholic gambler like Tsunade, it¡¯s hard to find a drinking buddy like An, who won¡¯t lose in a drinkingpetition. For An, drinking Alcohol was like drinking water, no matter how much he drank, he won¡¯t get drunk. So, every time they drink together, it was always Tsunade who gets drunk. Tsunade was unwilling to ept her loss. After all, she was drinking for a long time and was good at it. But, she didn¡¯t seem to be able to outdrink An. Every time, she would be dead drunk, while not only was An not drunk, he can even send her drunk self back home safely. After some time, everyone in Konoha knew that Tsunade was drinking with a man named An recently. As soon as he became famous, all sorts of rumors started spreading. When An was walking down the street, he was receiving stares from many people, but An didn¡¯t care about their eyes. The gossip was naturally heard by Tsunade, and although she didn¡¯t care about what people said, she was still embarrassed that people¡¯s minds went to dirty ces when they saw An taking Tsunade home every time they drink together. However, she knew that while An sends her home, he never took advantage of her and was very disciplined. Tsunade knew this and appreciated An¡¯s behavior. Although they were ten years apart with her being older, it didn¡¯t affect the favorable impression she had of An. When Tsunade came again today for a drink, An wanted to refuse since there are so many rumors already and he didn¡¯t want them to continue. But Tsunade insisted and he had to agree again. After the two finished their drink, Tsunade said: ¡°Thank you for taking me home when I was drunk before. I have a mission tomorrow and I have to leave the vige, and won¡¯t be back for a while, so, we¡¯ll drink when I get back, okay?¡± ¡°Of course.¡± An agreed. ¡°Then it¡¯s settled.¡± Tsunade rarely showed a happy smile, but she smiled right now. Under a tree, a young man with long blue hair and wearing a ninja vest saw Tsunade¡¯s smile and his expression becameplicated. He had envy and jealousy in his eyes. He clenched his fists and mmed them against a tree as he wondered: ¡°Tsunade¡­ Why are you smiling happily at that guy? Could it be you like him?¡± After parting, An walked around since it was still early and he had nothing to do. Because he was close to Tsunade recently, many people know him and most of them think that he had a special rtionship with her. An didn¡¯t both exin those rumors. He and Tsunade were drinking buddies, nothing else. Just as he turned into an alley, a young man stood in front of An. An stopped and nced at the man, he was the same young man from before. An found this guy familiar, but couldn¡¯t remember his name. ¡°Who are you?¡± An asked. ¡°Kato Dan.¡± said the man. Oh, it turned out to be this guy. An suddenly remembered who Kato Dan was. Chapter 350: Kato Dan’s Challenge Chapter 350: Kato Dan¡¯s Challenge Kato Dan is a Jonin. Originally, he is Tsunade¡¯s first love. He had a sense of justice and wanted to bring peace to the vige and was inspired to be the Hokage. During a mission, he was seriously injured and Tsunade couldn¡¯t save him even with her superb medical skills, which led her to fear bloodter on. Now, Kato Dan was still alive, and An could guess why Kato Dan looked for him. It was mostly because of Tsunade since he was close to the blonde recently, but An still pretended that he didn¡¯t know anything and asked: ¡°You¡¯re looking for me? Is there something?¡± Sure enough, Kato Dan replied seriously: ¡°I know you have been close to Tsunadetely, and I hope you stop drinking with her.¡± Hearing this, An smiled and looked at Kato Dan: ¡°You should get your facts together, it was Tsunade looking for me to drink, and never the other way around.¡± Dan¡¯s face became ugly as he knew that he was wrong but still held firm: ¡°In short, I don¡¯t want you to get close to Tsunade again.¡± ¡°Oh? Why?¡± An¡¯s mouth rose in a slight smile while asking knowingly. ¡°Because¡­¡± Dan hesitated, he really didn¡¯t want people to know about his feelings for Tsunade. Seeing that he didn¡¯t speak, An said: ¡°If you¡¯re not saying anything, then I¡¯m leaving.¡± ¡°Because Tsunade and I are childhood friends, we are childhood sweethearts, is that good enough reason?¡± Kato Dan stated. An nodded and said: ¡°Understood, that means you like Tsunade, right?¡± ¡°I¡­¡± Dan said nothing because An was right, he had a secret crush on Tsunade, but he didn¡¯t confess his love to her. An shrugged and said: ¡°it¡¯s your business if you like Tsunade, but you have no right or qualification to stop me froming in contact with her, understand?¡± An didn¡¯t want to talk much with Dan, but seeing Dan¡¯s tone as he ordered him to leave Tsunade alone, he immediately wanted to oppose him. The more Dan wanted him to stay away from Tsunade, the more he will see her. In a word, he wanted to make Dan mad. Sure enough, An¡¯s word made Dan angry, he clenched his fists and said: ¡°I want to fight you for Tsunade.¡± ¡°Fight me? Are you serious?¡± An thought he heard wrong. Dan stated: ¡°That¡¯s right, I want to fight you, if you win, I won¡¯t stop you from talking and hanging out with Tsunade.¡± [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: ept Kato Dan¡¯s challenge and defeat him. Reward: Ninjutsu Gift Pack.] [2: Reject Kato Dan¡¯s challenge. Reward: Small Ninjutsu Gift Pack.] ¡°Okay, I will fight you.¡± For the reward¡¯s sake, An epted the challenge. Dan said: ¡°This is not a suitable ce for a fight, let¡¯s go to the nearby woods, so we don¡¯t attract attention.¡± An thought that no matter where he went, the result would be the same, but he still went to the wood. ¡°You think far ahead, even if you lose here, no one will know and you won¡¯t be embarrassed,¡± An said. Hearing this, Dan snorted coldly: ¡°Do you think you can beat me? As a Jonin from Konoha, I have confidence in my power.¡± An replied: ¡°You will know when you try.¡± As the battle started, Dan made a few hand seals beforeunching an attack on An. He attacked using a fireball, which was good. An formed hand seals and said: ¡°Fire Release: Fireball Jutsu.¡± In an instant, a huge fireball collided with Dan¡¯s own fireball. The two fireballs exploded creating a small crater on the ground. The high temperature made An and Dan take a step back. When Kato saw this, his hand formed seals again. ¡°Water Release: Water Colliding Wave Jutsu.¡± Water appeared in an instant from the ground and coiled around Dan before it rose like a tornado and headed toward An trying to engulf him. This was a technique created by Tobirama Senju, and Dan was able to master this move to a great degree which shows his power. An didn¡¯t move and after forming a few hand seals, he mmed his hands on the ground. ¡°Earth Release: Earth-style Wall Jutsu.¡± A huge earth wall emerged in front of An blocking the water from hitting An. Chapter 351: Ninjutsu Collision Chapter 351: Ninjutsu Collision ¡°It¡¯s amazing to be able to block my Exploding Water Colliding Wave with an earth wall.¡± As An blocked Kato Dan¡¯sst attack, thetter started making hand seals again and this time, he used Lightning Ninjutsu. Lightning attacks were the fastest attacks, and in terms of Chakra Nature, Lightning beats earth. Kato Dan wanted to take An¡¯s earth wall using a lightning attack. Immediately after taking down An¡¯s earth wall, Dan once againunched another attack. When An saw this, he quickly used his own lightning attack. ¡°Lightning Release: False Darkness.¡± In an instant two dazzling beams of lightning eventually canceled each other out. Kato Dan frowned as he looked serious right now. ¡°You actually can use Lightning release as well, and it¡¯s quite strong as well. You¡¯re quite good.¡± An looked at Dan¡¯s serious face andughed softly: ¡°Haha, What other Ninjutsu do have, use them all, I will counter each of them.¡± If An wanted, he could end the match instantly using his Power of Space. Although Kato Dan wasn¡¯t as famous as the Sanin, he wasn¡¯t that far away in skills at the current timeline. After all, his goal was to be Hokage and one of the requirements of that title is strength. Kato Dan used Fire release, Water release, and Lightning release sessively, but An blocked each attack with one of his own. At this moment, Kato Dan wanted to try Wind Ninjutsu, since wind counters lightning. The Wind attribute can sharpen anything and can cut almost anything in the world. It can also blow anything away, and increase speed which made it the most flexible chakra nature and one of the rarest. ¡°Wind Release: Great Breakthrough.¡± Dan quickly released an attack, and facing it, An raised another earth wall. Kato Dan expected this already and used another Wind Jutsu. ¡°Wind Release: Vacuum Sphere.¡± The earth wall was broken and An quickly evaded the wind attack. Kato Dan used this opportunity to move fast and engage An in a melee fight. After dozens of attacks, Kato Dan sessfullynded a kick on An¡¯s body, but to his surprise, An turned into a pile of mud. ¡°Mud Clone?¡± Dan¡¯s expression changed slightly, he never imagined that he was fighting against An¡¯s clone and didn¡¯t know when the change happened. He recalled the time An raised thest Earth wall. ¡°Was it at that time?¡± It was the only exnation that Kato Dan coulde to as there is no other way for An to rece himself with a clone. But he didn¡¯t know where the real An was right now. Dan looked around and suddenly found himself in apletely dark area. He could no longer see anything even his own body. ¡°Is this the Second Hokage¡¯s technique¡­ The Infinite Darkness?¡± As expected from Kato Dan, he actually knew of this technique. He was really surprised right now. He didn¡¯t expect that An would know a technique like this at all. Although Kato Dan was somewhat careless, he didn¡¯t underestimate An, but thetter went beyond his expectation. Chapter 352: Ninjutsu Gift Pack Chapter 352: Ninjutsu Gift Pack Although the infinite Darkness deprives the vision of the victim, the user can see anyone inside and it was actually real darkness. Bang! In the dark, Kato Dan was attacked by An¡¯s fists and kicks. An didn¡¯t use any ninjutsu as he didn¡¯t want to leave any injuries. Bang! Bang! Bang! After a few punches, Kato Dan¡¯s face was swollen as he became furious. An was literally pping him in the face. In the darkness, An said with a yful tone: ¡°If you continue this fight, your face will turn into a pig¡¯s head. I don¡¯t know how Tsunade will react if she saw that face.¡± Hearing Tsunade¡¯s name, Kato Dan got even angrier. ¡°Fire Release: Phoenix sage fire technique.¡± Kato Dan didn¡¯t want to keep the beating going, so he used a wide-range fire technique that could attack all directions. Since he can¡¯t see anything, Kato Dan decided to attack in every direction in hope of hitting An. Sure enough, An was forced to retreat facing Kato Dan¡¯s attack. Since he had an advantage, Kato Dan directly made another attack, and this time with Wind Jutsu. ¡°Wind Release: Great Breakthrough.¡± He was stupid enough to try and use the Wind Jutsu in hope of releasing the Infinite Darkness, but he can only be disappointed. Darkness isn¡¯t an existent object or matter. It¡¯s just theck of light. Kato Dan calmed down and tried using the standard Genjutsu Release. By releasing his chakra outward to disrupt the illusion, he underestimated the power of the Infinite Darkness. ¡°If this is the case, I can only use that trick to get out of the Illusion.¡± Kato Dan gritted his teeth and stabbed his left palm with a Kunai. Blood flowed out of his palm as his eyes regained vision and the darkness disappeared. Kato Dan was overjoyed. The Pain can cause the Illusion to dispel, and it did just that with the Infinite Darkness. He was just giving it a try and didn¡¯t think that he would be sessful at all. ¡°Amazing, you actually used self-inflicted pain to break through the infinite darkness technique.¡± At the same time, a Kunai touched Kato Dan¡¯s neck. An sneered and said: ¡°It seems like you¡¯ve lost.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think so,¡± Dan said back. ¡°Hm?¡± In the next second, Kato Dan¡¯s body turned into a log. ¡°Substitution?¡± An was surprised. At the same time, a figure rushed from behind and kicked at him. However, An¡¯s body turned into a water puddle. ¡°Water Clone?¡± Kato Dan Didn¡¯t expect An to know another Clone. An¡¯s figure appeared from him with a Kunai pressed against his neck. ¡°This time, you¡¯ve lost, right?¡± An sneered. Kato Dan sighed and said: ¡°I lost.¡± Although Dan still has a trump card, An could¡¯ve finished him twice right now, so he didn¡¯t want to fight anymore. An put the Kunai away and said: ¡°Since you admitted defeat, then you can¡¯t stop me from interacting with Tsunade in the future. No, it should be said that you can¡¯t stop Tsunade from contacting me.¡± Dan nodded and said: ¡°Although I will not stop you, I will tell you that I won¡¯t give up on Tsunade.¡± An shrugged: ¡°Whatever you want.¡± Kato Dan snorted coldly and turned away. He was frustrated by the loss and that Tsunade will continue seeing An. Judging from this battle, Dan understood that An was quite strong. As Dan left, An¡¯s reward arrived. [Ding! You sessfully defeated Kato Dan. Reward: Ninjutsu Gift Pack.] ¡°Open it,¡± An said. [Ding! You opened a Ninjutsu Gift Pack. You obtained Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique, Fire Release: Great Dragon Fire Technique, Wind Release: Great Breakthrough Technique.] An was quite surprised as he didn¡¯t expect three Ninjutsu at once and all three were from different attributes. It was a good deal to fight Kato Dan. Chapter 353: Angry Sarutobi Chapter 353: Angry Sarutobi Since it was the Shinobi world war, each vigepete to addnd to their territory. The five great viges were the leaders of the shinobi world. And almost all of the viges were hostile to each other. In the northern forest in thend of fire, a team of ninjas from Konoha responsible for supplying to the frontlines was suddenly in disarray as something exploded out of nowhere. The Chunin in charge detected the danger, but he was seriously injured non the less. At this time, dozens of enemies appeared, and the team which wasposed of five Chunin and Ten Genin was defeated and all their items were lost. At the Hokage Tower, in the Hokage¡¯s office, Hiruzen Sarutobi was currently sitting at his desk hearing the recent report. ¡°Hokage-sama, recently, one of our supply teams was ambushed near the border and all of them were killed and the items they had were taken. We still don¡¯t know which vige did this.¡± ¡°Immediately set up an investigation team.¡± Hiruzen Sarutobi shouted as he mmed his hand on the table. ¡°Hokage-sama, weck personals, almost all Jonin are on the frontlines.¡± Hiruzen thought about it and said: ¡°Go to the Roots and ask Danzo toe over.¡± Danzo arrived not long after and said: ¡°Hiruzen, why are you looking for me in such a hurry?¡± Hiruzen said: ¡°Yesterday, one of our supply teams was ambushed near the border and we suffered heavy losses. You already know this, right?¡± Danzo nodded: ¡°Well, I received the report.¡± Hiruzen said: ¡°I don¡¯t know who did it, so we¡¯re setting up an investigation team. At the same time, we need a new supply team.¡± ¡°How many people?¡± Shimura Danzo asked. ¡°The initial n is to have 22 people, 15 in the supply team and 7 in the investigation team. In addition, they must be apanied by two Jonin leaders to ensure the supply¡¯s safety.¡± Hiruzen exined. ¡°Good arrangement.¡± Shimura Danzo nodded. ¡°Currently, all Jonin are on the frontlines and weck personals here, so I need to borrow some of you people.¡± Danzo sighed helplessly: ¡°Hiruzen, most of my people are currently out on missions and I don¡¯t have many people left. I¡¯m afraid that I can¡¯t help you.¡± Hearing this, Hiruzen¡¯s face fell as he said: ¡°Danzo, it¡¯s not time to fight with me. The vige is in a crisis now, do you really want to stand by and watch?¡± Sarutobi was getting angry and Danzo quickly replied: ¡°Hiruzen, you misunderstood. As the leader of Root, I have always seen it as my responsibility to protect the vige. I sent almost all my men out as the war started and I don¡¯t have many people at hand to send out.¡± Hiruzen waved his hand as he didn¡¯t want to hear any more nonsense and asked directly: ¡°In a word, how many people do you have?¡± Danzo pondered for a bit and said: ¡°Well, I have seven at most, and it will take two days to call them back.¡± Hearing this, Hiruzen said: ¡°Then the investigation team will be left to you.¡± Danzo nodded and said: ¡°No problem. What about the supply team? You still need 15 people, where will you find them?¡± Hiruzen said: ¡°We can only call some people from the frontline. The items need to be prepared and that will take two to three days before the team can be dispatched.¡± Danzo said: ¡°Uchiha Obito and Nohara Rin, Minato¡¯s students, are still in the vige and they can be part of the supply team.¡± Hiruzen asked: ¡°Uchiha Obito was seriously injured before, how is he currently?¡± ¡°I heard that after Tsunade¡¯s treatment, he almost recovered,¡± Danzo replied. ¡°Well, I will arrange for the two of them to be part of the logistic team,¡± Sarutobi said. Danzo said: ¡°Besides those two, there is another person you can use.¡± ¡°Who?¡± Hiruzen asked curiously. Shimura Danzo replied: ¡°It¡¯s the guy named An, he¡¯s been in the vige for a while, and I sent someone to investigate him before. Although we didn¡¯t find anything about him, his behavior was quite normal, and didn¡¯t do anything suspicious while staying here. I think that since he wants to stay in the vige, he should do something about it. After all, our vige doesn¡¯t support idlers.¡± Hiruzen thought about it for a bit and said: ¡°Okay, I will ask him when the timees. If he doesn¡¯t agree, we can¡¯t force him to do it.¡± ¡°Then I will go back first.¡± Danzo left. Chapter 354: Severely Injured Zetsu Chapter 354: Severely Injured Zetsu After Danzo left, Sarutobi took his crystal ball and inspected the vige. Using the Crystal ball, Hiruzen could find anyone anywhere in the vige, but he needed to know the target¡¯s Chakra Signature. Sarutobi Hiruzen often used the Crystal Ball to check the security of the vige, and because he didn¡¯t know An¡¯s chakra signature, he had to look slowly through the vige. As soon as he found An, Sarutobi left his office and went toward An, who was currently holding a fishing rod in his hand and leisurely fishing in a river. Since arriving in Konoha, An practiced Ninjutsu almost all the time, but to rx, he started fishing. All his acquaintances weren¡¯t inside the vige. Tsunade, Minato, and Kakashi were all sent to the battlefield. So when he was bored, An woulde here to rx. At this moment, An noticed something and turned his head to look behind him. He felt a dark aura that made him feel ufortable in the woods. At this time, Zetsu, with his body warped in leaves appeared on the tree, his lower body wasn¡¯t even fully emerged from it. Zetsu is the best spy in the Akatsuki, as he can be anywhere he wants without anyone even detecting him. Zetsu sneaked into Konoha on the orders of Madara to look into An. In fact, he was already infiltrating Konoha for three days, hiding in the dark, but he still found nothing on An. ¡°Let¡¯s go back.¡± ck Zetsu said. ¡°Yeah.¡± White Zetsu agreed. However, at this moment, someone said: ¡°Since you¡¯re here, don¡¯t go back so quickly.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± ck Zetsu was taken aback and said: ¡°This is bad.¡± Zetsu immediately wanted to escape underground, however, his movement halted as if he was restricted by something. ¡°I¡­ Can¡¯t move?¡± ck Zetsu was scared. ¡°This is¡­¡± Zetsu seemed to have understood what happened and became horrified. ¡°This is¡­ Space-time ninjutsu?¡± The next second, lightning struck Zetsu¡¯s body as a hand prated his body which severely injured him. At the same time, An appeared in front of him. Just as he was fishing just now, An discovered that it wasn¡¯t an Anbu from Konoha monitoring him, so he decided to attack. Normally, some Anbu would keep an eye on him, which he really didn¡¯t care about. He instantly locked his target with his space lock. With his current ability, he can lock the space from a distance of 500 meters. As a result, Zetsu couldn¡¯t move at all for a few seconds, which was enough for An to attack. And since Zetsu was severely injured and his body paralyzed by the lightning attack, he wasn¡¯t able to move and couldn¡¯t escape. He could only stay there for An to attack him however he wanted. Chapter 355: Zetsus Shock Chapter 355: Zetsu''s Shock An knew very well that Zetsu isn¡¯t here on his own ord. That¡¯s why he decided to interrogate him before doing anything else. An smiled slightly and said: ¡°Don¡¯t be afraid, I don¡¯t eat, well, as long as they answer my questions that is. So answer me, and you get to go.¡± Zetsu saw An¡¯s smile and felt fear for the first time. An asked straight away: ¡°Tell me, did that old ghost Uchiha Madara ask you to monitor me?¡± Hearing An saying ¡®Madara Uchiha¡¯, Both sides of Zetsu were shocked. They were shocked that he knew Madara was alive, and furthermore that they were connected to him. This made them Curious about An¡¯s identity. Zetsu said: ¡°You actually know about Uchiha Madara, who are you?¡± An stepped on Zetsu¡¯s face and said: ¡°Figure that out yourself, I¡¯m the one asking the questions right now.¡± This was the first time Zetsu was trampled under someone¡¯s feet, and it felt extremely humiliating. As a product of Kaguya¡¯s Otsutsuki¡¯s will, in a sense, Zetsu was Kaguya herself. Kaguya was someone who ate the Chakra Fruit and the first immortal in Naruto¡¯s world, she was equivalent to a God in the Elemental nations. At this moment, ck Zetsu, who is Kaguya¡¯s will, was under An¡¯s foot and he couldn¡¯t do anything at all. ck Zetsu was furious, but he didn¡¯t have any ability to fight right now. At this moment, he replied: ¡°Yes, Madara Uchiha asked us to monitor you.¡± ¡°Sure enough, it¡¯s that old ghost.¡± An snorted coldly. Zetsu said: ¡°Originally, Madara¡¯s target was Uchiha Obito, but you stopped him, so Madara asked us to monitor you and get all information we could get.¡± ¡°So, did you find anything?¡± An sneered. Zetsu replied: ¡°No, we didn¡¯t find any information about you.¡± An said coldly: ¡°White Zetsu, ck Zetsu, listen to me, go back to Madara and tell him, don¡¯t mess with Me, or I will personally go to his underground cave and kill him.¡± An released his Killing Intent which made Both ck and white Zetsu tremble in fear. At the same time, ck Zetsu was extremely shocked. He didn¡¯t expect An knew about Madara, and he knew about him as well. Zetsu looked at An and asked: ¡°Who the hell are you, you even know about us.¡± An sneered: ¡°I know all your secrets, including your origin.¡± ¡°Impossible.¡± Zetsu replied. Seeing that ck Zetsu didn¡¯t believe him, An said: ¡°ck Zetsu, you are Kaguya Otsutsuki¡¯s Will. After Kaguya was sealed by Hagoromo and Hamura, you created a conflict between Hagoromo¡¯s children, which resulted in the Uchiha and Senju, and changed the Uchiha stone tablet. You incited Madara to fight Hashirama. You helped Madara get Hashirama¡¯s cells so he could get the Rinnegan, and when he read the tablet with his new eyes, he find that to save the Uchiha and help the world achieve piece, he needs to use the Infinite Tsukuyomi. Moreover, you pretended that Madara Uchiha created you, and used that old fool to help you in the Infinite Tsukuyomi n, but in fact, you just wanted to use Madara to revive your mother. As for White Zetsu, you¡¯re extracted from the Husk of the Juubi that was sealed in the moon.¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°That¡¯s impossible.¡± Hearing An¡¯s words, ck Zetsu was stunned, and the same for White Zetsu. ¡°You, who the hell are you? How do you know so much?¡± ck Zetsu asked with a trembling voice. He couldn¡¯t believe that there is someone in the world who knew his origin and ns. An smiled coldly and said: ¡°In short, don¡¯t mess with me.¡± After this, An ignored Zetsu and left. ¡°Why did he kill us? With his power, he would be able to do it.¡± Zetsu couldn¡¯t understand this. ¡°Maybe he thinks that we are just too weak for him to kill.¡± ¡°What should we do now?¡± White Zetsu asked. ¡°Let¡¯s go back to Madara¡¯s ce first.¡± ck Zetsu said. Afterward, Zetsu left Konoha. An guessed that Zetsu won¡¯t dare to step inside Konoha for a long time now. After solving this problem, An went back to the shore and continued fishing. What happened just now was just a small matter that didn¡¯t affect him. In An¡¯s eyes, he really didn¡¯t put Zetsu in his eyes. Even if Madara came himself, An wasn¡¯t afraid of him. What¡¯s more, Madara was already an old man with one foot on the grave, so An wasn¡¯t worried that thetter woulde for him. Soon after that, An left the river with his fishing rod in hand, and on his way, he was surprised by who he bumped into. ¡°Sandaime Hokage?¡± On his way back, An met Hiruzen Sarutobi. Chapter 356: Mission From Sarutobi Chapter 356: Mission From Sarutobi ¡°Hokage-sama, why are you here?¡± Seeing Sarutobi in front of him, An asked curiously. Hiruzenughed and said: ¡°I¡¯m here for you, An.¡± An was surprised: ¡°Looking for me? What¡¯s the matter?¡± Hiruzen directly went to the point and said: ¡°Recently, our supply team was attacked by an enemy and we suffered some losses. Now, most Ninjas were out on missions or on the battlefield and we are understaffed.¡± Hearing this, An smiled slightly: ¡°In other words, Hokage-sama wants me to help, right?¡± ¡°Correct.¡± Hiruzen nodded and continued: ¡°Since the previous team was ambushed, our supplies were stolen and the frontliners are facing some shortage. I¡¯m currently preparing the supply and preparing a team to deliver them to the frontline. There should be 15 members of the supply team. Uchiha Obito and Nohara Rin should be part of the team and I want you to apany the team as well. I just want you to help us deliver the supplies and lead the team.¡± At this time, the system gave An a choice. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: ept Hiruzen¡¯s request and lead a team with the supplies to the front line. Reward: Senju Tobirama Sensor ability.] [2: Reject Hiruzen¡¯s request, making an excuse that you¡¯re not a Ninja from Konoha. Reward: Ninjutsu Gift Pack.] Even if it was just for the reward¡¯s sake, An agreed to lead the team. ¡°Okay, I will lead the team.¡± ¡°Thank you.¡± Sarutobi Hiruzen was grateful as he didn¡¯t expect An to ept so easily. It was a dangerous mission after all. An was taking a risk by agreeing to this mission. Sarutobi didn¡¯t know that An epted so quickly because of the reward he would get. Well, he also had to do something for Konoha if he wanted to be considered one of them. Two dayster, Hiruzen prepared a team to deliver the supplies. At the gate of Konoha, Hiruzen stood in front of An and said: ¡°The task of delivering these items will be in your hand, be careful on the road.¡± ¡°Well, don¡¯t worry, I will send the supplies safely,¡± An assured. Hiruzen nodded as he believed that An would get the job done. In addition to An, Uchiha Obito and Nohara Rin were part of the team, along with four Anbu and the rest were Genins. One of the Anbu was an Anbu captain, while the other three were his teammates. The captain was a Jonin, and the others were either Chunin ranks or special Jonins. As the captain of the team, An had to ensure the safety of the team and the supplies. Most of the supplies were sealed in storage scrolls for easier transportation, but bulky items needed manpower to deliver. Only An, the Anbu captain, and his deputy didn¡¯t carry items. Their task was to lead the team forward and be alert to the danger around them and protect the others. After a few days, An and his party of 14 finally reached the border. At this time, the Anbu Captain took out a map and said: ¡°Going ahead, we will find we should encounter a forest, after that forest should be the camp.¡± ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go then,¡± An said. The Anbu captain said again: ¡°Thest team was attacked in the forest, we should be careful.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m here,¡± An assured them. Immediately after, An, along with his group entered the forest. Chapter 357: Danger in The Forest Chapter 357: Danger in The Forest The forest by the border was the main transportation route between Konoha and the camp. So it wasmon for ambushes to ur here. After An and the Anbu captain led the team into the forest, everyone seemed to be on guard. Suddenly, An made a stop gesture to the rest of the team. Everyone stopped instantly as the Anbu captain asked: ¡°Leader, did you find something?¡± An looked ahead and said seriously: ¡°There are people in front of us, but I can¡¯t sense the exact number.¡± Hearing this, the Anbu captain said: ¡°Are they, enemies? If that¡¯s the case, we should investigate.¡± An shook his head and said: ¡°No, just let theme.¡± An then squatted on the ground while touching the ground with two fingers. He sent chakra to the ground trying to sense the number and position of the enemies. Tobirama Senju could use his sensor ability to sense, the number, strength, and even the chakra nature of his target easily. And Since An got that same ability, he was the best sensor in the world. An quickly figured out the number of those ahead and said: ¡°There are 36 people ahead, about 200 meters away from us. Looks like they are waiting for us to pass before they attack.¡± ¡°Understood.¡± The Anbu captain nodded and was impressed by An Sensor¡¯s abilities. ¡°Be careful, the enemy is 200 meters ahead.¡± An turned around and reminded the rest of the team. ¡°Got it.¡± The entire team was ready. Uchiha Obito activated his Sharingan and waited. Since Obito Survived, Kakashi wanted to return the Sharingan back to him, but Obito refused and the eye remained with Kakashi. Obito only had one eye right now. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Rin, I will protect you,¡± Obito said. ¡°Thank you for caring, Obito, but I will take care of myself.¡± ¡°Leader, what should we do?¡± The Anbu captain asked An. As An was about to reply, the system gave him a choice. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Lead all members of the team to fight the enemy. Reward: B Rank wind Ninjutsu.] [2: As the team leader, protect all members of the team and annihte all enemies alone. Reward: Summoning: Triple Rashomon.] Triple Rashomon? An directly decided he wanted that. He turned around and said: ¡°You lead the team and protect everyone, I will deal with the enemies.¡± Hearing this, the Anbu captain was surprised: ¡°What? Are you going alone?¡± ¡°Yes, I will do it alone,¡± An said. ¡°There are 36 enemies ahead, how can you deal with them? Even if you are very strong, it¡¯s impossible to do it all alone.¡± An patted the Anbu captain¡¯s shoulder and said: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, you take care of the team and I will deal with them.¡± ¡°Ok, I got it.¡± Seeing that An made up his mind, The Anbu captain could only obey the order. ¡°I¡¯m going then,¡± An said. ¡°Okay, leader, be careful.¡± An directly disappeared from his ce. The Anbu captain turned around and said: ¡°The leader went to deal with the enemies, we will stay here on standby.¡± Hearing this, Obito directly said: ¡°I will go help the leader.¡± The Anbu captain directly stopped him: ¡°No, you have to stay here. The leader will deal with the enemies.¡± ¡°I have the Sharingan, and can definitively help captain.¡± ¡°No, you will stay where you stand. That¡¯s an order. You¡¯re not allowed to act until given orders.¡± The Anbu Captain said firmly. ¡°Ok.¡± Although Obito wanted to fight with those enemies, he had no choice but to obey orders. Rin persuaded him: ¡°Obito, you should listen to the orders.¡± ¡°Well, I listen to them, Rin.¡± Obito nodded. ¡°I hope that An can deal with them.¡± Rin looked ahead and said in a low voice. An rescued her team before, and she didn¡¯t want him to have an ident. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Rin, An is strong, he will be able to deal with the enemies ahead, believe in him.¡± Obito was saved by An twice, so he respected An from the bottom of his heart. At this time, An was fifty meters away from the enemies. An disappeared and reappeared on a tree branch. He stopped moving since wires covered almost every direction. These wires were to trigger traps. Amon Explosive tag trap. An casually made a few hand seals before he spat a Great Fireball at the explosive tags in the tree. After setting the first explosion, the other explosive tags were detonated. The Ninjas hiding in ambush thought that they seeded and were drawn out, little did they know that their traps were already discovered beforehand and no one was caught in them. An relied on his Sensor ability to read the position of all enemies before darkness covered a radius of 300 meters. Suddenly, the 36 enemies were deprived of their vision. An indeed used the Infinite Darkness illusion and caught all enemies in it. Chapter 358: Tsunade’s Request Chapter 358: Tsunade¡¯s Request All the ambush team was hit by the Infinite Darkness illusion and could no longer see anything. They didn¡¯t even know that they were in an illusion, and just thought that it was a weird Ninjutsu. After casting the Infinite Darkness, An made a few hand seals and created Mud Clones. ¡°Clone 1, you go to the three o¡¯clock direction, clone two, twelve o¡¯clock, and I will deal with the rest. Kill everyone as fast as possible.¡± An gave his instruction to the clones. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± An wasn¡¯t affected by the darkness and along with his clones, they dealt with the enemies in under a minute. After that, he piled the bodies together and discovered that they were Rock ninjas. In other words, it was those Rock Ninjas who attacked thest Supply team. But they weren¡¯t lucky enough, since they encountered An this time. After sessfully dealing with those 36 people, An got the Triple Rashomon as a reward. ¡°Leader.¡± The Anbu Captain along with the rest of the team greeted An who smiled lightly: ¡°I¡¯ve dealt with the enemy already.¡± Everyone present was surprised as they saw the pile of bodies. ¡°You¡¯re amazing, leader.¡± Obito looked at An with admiration. The Anbu Captain also said in reverence: ¡°To be able to annihte so many of them in such a short time is really amazing, such power makes people sigh in admiration.¡± Every member of the team admired An¡¯s power right now. ¡°Do we take their body to the vige?¡± ¡°No, we have to transport the supply to the front line, let¡¯s just burn those bodies.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°Leave it to me, Leader.¡± Obito stood up. ¡°Okay, you can handle it.¡± ¡°Of course.¡± Obito nodded and moved to the corpse pile, he made a few hand seals and said: ¡°Fire Release: Great Fireball Technique.¡± After burning the bodies, An said: ¡°Okay, let¡¯s move on.¡± An hourter, An and the rest of the team arrived at the camp. There were many tents present there. The camp had thousands of Ninjas, from fighters to medics. An and the others were greeted by Tsunade, one of the Sannin. Tsunade was the leader of the medical squad on the frontline. Due to a shortage of manpower, she often had to fight on the battlefield. When An and the rest of the supply team arrived, Tsunade sighed in relief and said: ¡°Great, you¡¯re finally here.¡± ording to Tsunade, the frontline fighter was in shortage of supplies for thest two days. With the supply they brought now, the crisis was averted. After finishing the delivery, An was prepared to lead the team back. Tsunade asked: ¡°Are you going back?¡± ¡°Yes, is there something?¡± An wondered. ¡°You¡¯re not going to stay with us?¡± Tsunade asked. ¡°You want me to stay and help?¡± An was a little surprised. Tsunade said seriously: ¡°An, you¡¯re strong, if you can help in the frontline, you can lighten our burden greatly. You¡¯re equivalent to Minato Namikaze, you can boost the morale of our ninjas. At present, Minato and Kakashi are fighting elsewhere, but Minato alone isn¡¯t enough, so we need your help.¡± Hearing this, An frowned and said: ¡°The problem is, I¡¯m not a ninja from Konoha, I¡¯m the leader of the supply team, I just promised Hokage-sama to help in this. Now that the mission isplete, I can¡¯t just stay and help in the frontline as well, right?¡± ¡°It¡¯s true that you don¡¯t have to stay and help, but if I ask you as a friend, will you agree?¡± Tsunade stared at An and her eyes seemed to be pleading with him. ¡°Ah¡­¡± An was troubled. At this time, another choice popped up. [Ding! Make a choice] [1: ept Tsunade¡¯s request and stay and fight in the frontline. Reward: Summoning: Red Snake.] [2: Refuse to help and return to Konoha. Reward: C Rank Ninjutsu.] Seeing the reward, An thought for a bit and chose the first option. He raised his head and looked at Tsunade: ¡°Okay, I will stay and help.¡± Hearing this, Tsunade Smiled and said: ¡°Thank you.¡± ¡°You¡¯re Wee.¡± An smiled lightly. An wouldn¡¯t have agreed to Tsunade¡¯s request easily if the reward wasn¡¯t there. After all, fighting in a war is troublesome. After agreeing to Tsunade¡¯s request, An got his reward directly. Hearing that An wanted to stay, Obito directly said: ¡°I also want to stay here. I won¡¯t go back.¡± Rin also said: ¡°I¡¯m the same.¡± Tsunade looked at them and said: ¡°I didn¡¯t ask you to stay because both of you aren¡¯t strong enough to be here.¡± Obito replied: ¡°Tsunade-sama, although were not as strong as Kakashi, we will work hard. We can definitively help, please let us stay and help.¡± ¡°Tsunade, since they want to stay so much, just let them be,¡± An said. ¡°Well, since you said so, then fine.¡± Tsunade agreed in the end. And like that, Obito and Rin joined the frontline. After that, An said to the rest of the team: ¡°You guys go back, I will stay here, along with Obito and Rin to help.¡± ¡°Then, we¡¯re going back first, leader.¡± The Anbu Captain said. ¡°Mm, you guys go back.¡± Chapter 359: Summoning: Red Snake Chapter 359: Summoning: Red Snake After agreeing to Tsunade¡¯s request, Ana and Obito were assigned their post on the battlefield. On a in, hundreds of Ninjas were fighting fiercely, they were Knonoha Ninjas and the Rock ninjas. At present, Konoha wasn¡¯t winning, therefore, An and Obito were deployed to this battlefield as reinforcement. ¡°Is this a battlefield? There are so many people.¡± This is the first time Obito was on the frontline and he looked really excited. On the other hand, An wasn¡¯t even a bit excited about this so-called Ninja war. ¡°Obito, be careful, don¡¯t get careless.¡± ¡°Understood.¡± Obito nodded to An¡¯s reminder. ¡°Let¡¯s quickly deal with this,¡± An said ¡°Okay, let go.¡± Obito took a kunai and activated his Sharingan. Soon, Obito was fighting a Rock Ninja. An also started getting ready for the fight. ¡°Fire Release: Great Fireball Technique.¡± An directly spat a fireball at a Rock ninja who didn¡¯t have time to dodge, instantly burning him. ¡°Wind Release: Great Breakthrough Technique.¡± A gust of wind blew against another Rock Ninja sending him flying. ¡°Lightning Release: False Darkness.¡± Another Rock Ninja was attacked. An kept using Ninjutsu on the Rock Ninjas before Konoha¡¯s forces gradually gained the upper hand forcing the Rock Ninjas to retreat. ¡°Who is that person? He is amazing, he singlehandedly helped us turn the tide of the battle.¡± A Konoha Jonin looked at An with admiration. On the other hand, the Rock Ninjas were looking at An in anger. More than a dozen Rock Ninjas suddenly surrounded An and attacked him together. ¡°Earth Release: Underground Split!¡± Andslide formed on the still-even ground and headed toward An. An stepped back quickly and dodged. Seeing this, the rock Ninjas continued their attacks. ¡°Earth Release: Earth Spear!¡± Countless sharp spears emerged from the ground under An¡¯s feet. An couldn¡¯t dodge and he was instantly impaled. However, before the rock ninja could be happy, they saw An¡¯s body turn into mud. It turned out that all this time, they were fighting a clone. The Rock Ninjas were shocked and angry. They didn¡¯t expect that An could use a technique from their vige. An ignored them, bit his finger, and started making hand seals, and finally, he ced his palm on the ground. ¡°Summoning Jutsu!¡± With a puff of smoke, arge snake appeared under An. It was the red Snake he got from thest reward. This snake was entirely red and was 20 meters long. An was on top of the snake¡¯s head and directly ordered: ¡°Kill them!¡± ¡°Yesss!¡± The Snake obeyed and directly rushed toward the Rock Ninjas. The Huge Red Snake was very strong, and those Rock Ninjas couldn¡¯t deal with it. The Red Snake swallowed the Rock Ninjas one after the other. Seeing this, the Rock Ninjas startedunching Ninjutsu and Shuriken at the Red Snake, however, the red snake¡¯s skin was very hard and their attacks couldn¡¯t hurt it. ¡°Retreat!! Retreat!¡± The Rock Ninjas knew that they wouldn¡¯t be able to win against that snake and that they would all die if they don¡¯t retreat, so they decisively retreated. An didn¡¯t chase after them. Soon the Rock ninjas fled the battlefield. The Ninjas of Konoha sat down on the ground in relief and took a rest. They were exhausted and if it weren¡¯t for An this time, it would¡¯ve been impossible for them to defeat their enemy. An dispelled the summon and stood on the ground. ¡°An-san, you¡¯re too strong,g the big snake just now was too cool.¡± Obito came to An¡¯s side and said in admiration. The Red Snake An summoned just now was really an eye-opener for Obito. An smiled: ¡°You¡¯re doing pretty well yourself, your Sharingan is strong.¡± Being praised by An made Obito shy. But he still said: ¡°The next time they return, I will make them know who Uchiha Obito is.¡± ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go back now,¡± An said. After that battle, An¡¯s name was known to almost all Konoha¡¯s ninjas. ¡°Why did youe back so quickly?¡± Seeing that An was back, Tsunade wondered. Hearing this, Obito replied: ¡°Tsunade-sama, it¡¯s done.¡± ¡°You won?¡± Tsunade was taken aback and looked at An. An nodded and said: ¡°Those rock Ninjas retreated.¡± ¡°Really?¡± Obito said excitedly: ¡°Tsunade-sama, this is all thanks to An-san, he summoned a big red snake and dealt with all Rock Ninjas.¡± ¡°Oh?¡± Tsunade was stunned and looked at An and said: ¡°Your summon is a snake?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± An nodded. Tsunade murmured: ¡°Isn¡¯t that the same as Orochimaru?¡± ¡°Orochimaru?¡± Of course, An knew Orochimaru, but he still acted as if he didn¡¯t know. Tsunade exined: ¡°Orochimaru, is also one of the Sannin, the same as me, he also summons snakes.¡± ¡°I see.¡±An nodded. He knew that Manda and the Red Snake he summoned were from the Ryushi Cave. Tsunade looked at An and said: ¡°Anyway, thank you for your help.¡± ¡°It was easy,¡± An said. ¡°By the way, Tsunade-sama, are Kakashi and Minato-sensei back, yet?¡± Obito asked. ¡°Not yet.¡± Tsunade shook her head and said: ¡°Minato and Kakashi are in charge of the first and second battlefields. There are too many enemies there, so the battle won¡¯t end quickly¡­¡± ¡°In that case, let¡¯s go and support them, anyway, the battle here is over,¡± Obito said. Chapter 360: Reward: Kusanagi no Tsurugi Chapter 360: Reward: Kusanagi no Tsurugi Hearing Obito¡¯s words, Tsunade nced at him and said: Uchiha kid, don¡¯t get toocent, you may die on the battlefield at any time.¡± Hearing this, Obito stopped smiling and said: ¡°Of course, I know that.¡± ¡°The war between Ninjas isn¡¯t child¡¯s y! No one knows whether they cane back alive or die on the battlefield, everyone who went there was ready to die.¡± Obito said seriously: ¡°I have already realized thisst time.¡± Seeing Obito¡¯s eyes, Tsunade nodded: ¡°Well, if you want to support them, go to the second battlefield and help Kakashi.¡± ¡°Okay, I will go.¡± Obito nodded. Tsunade looked at An and asked: ¡°Do you want to help?¡± At this time, An once again had a choice. [Ding! Make a choice] [1: Go support the other battlefields. Reward: Kusanagi no Tsurugi.] [2: You¡¯ve done your part, stay back and rest. Reward: C rank wind Ninjutsu.] An chose the first option without a second thought. Kusanagi no Tsurugi was a great sword. ¡°Okay, I¡¯m going to support them.¡± Hearing An¡¯s agreement, Tsunade and Obito were happy. After all, An was strong and can help greatly. It was because of him that the battle here ended so quickly after all. Knowing that An and Obito were going to support the other battlefields, several Jonin came back and expressed their desire to help as well. Tsunade looked at An and said: ¡°An, you lead them, let¡¯s go to the other battlefields.¡± ¡°Where do we go?¡± An asked. He wasn¡¯t familiar with the situation on the frontline. Tsunade said: ¡°Minato is on the first battlefield, let¡¯s go to the second where Kakashi is. Although the Kid is promoted to Jonin, he is still young and doesn¡¯t have enough battle experience.¡± ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go support Kakashi and the others.¡± An nodded. On the way, An had a simple conversation with different people there and had a preliminary understanding of their abilities. There are four eye-catching Jonins, the first was Shinku Y¨±hi, the second was Junto Sarutobi, the third was Akamichi Akira, and thest one was Hyuuga Takeshi. Three of the four were from the shinobi n and the first one was the father of Kurenai Yuhi. Adding Obito, they would have two dojutsu users, four n members, and a genjutsu expert. After an hour, the group reached the second battlefield, which was located in a gorge surrounded by mountains. Sarutobi said: ¡°The terrain here isplicated. There are many ces to hide andunch sneak attacks,pletely different from our previous battlefield. So be careful.¡± ¡°Alright, spread out.¡± They acted in a group of two, Yuhi and Sarutobi, Akimichi and Hyuuga. Obito was with An. An touched the ground with two fingers as he tried to locate the enemies. However, since An couldn¡¯t tell whether they were enemies or friends, he couldn¡¯t attack directly. An was able to sense Kakashi¡¯s position, since he trained with him, he was familiar with his chakra signature. ¡°Obito, you can go help Kakashi,¡± An said to Obito. ¡°No problem, but I don¡¯t know where he is.¡± ¡°I have already located him.¡± After telling Obito Kakashi¡¯s exact location, An watched him leave, then he started attacking every enemy he encounters. To determine if they were enemies or allies, all he had to do was look at their forehead protectors. An held the Kusanagi no Tsurugi in his hand as he attacks the Rock ninjas. There are 11 Kusanagi swords in total, each had a different special effect. The Kusanagi sword An could emit mes. In a sh, An was already behind a Rock Ninja and waved his sword. The Rock Ninja noticed and reacted directly. An sneered and shed his sword. The Sword in the rock ninja¡¯s hand snapped in half as it met the Kusanagi. The Rock Ninja didn¡¯t expect this and was stunned as An¡¯s sword fell on him. mes suddenly appeared all over the rock ninja as he fell down to the ground dead. An was satisfied with the Kusanagi¡¯s power. ¡°Alright, let¡¯s continue.¡± An¡¯s figure shed around the battlefield as he took out enemies quickly. On the other side of the battlefield, Obito soon reached Kakashi who was fiercely fighting two Rock Ninjas. They were both Chunins, but they weren¡¯t weak. In a two-on-one fight, Kakashi wasn¡¯t faring well. Kakashi was a genius for a reason, and he could analyze his opponent¡¯s strengths and weaknesses quickly in the midst of battle. Also, Kakashi had his Sharingan given by Obito. Still, fighting two-on-one was tough. Kakashi blocked a strike again, but this time, the other ninja seized this opportunity to attack a blind spot. At this critical time, Obito reached Kakashi and helped block the sneak attack sessfully. Chapter 361: Obito and Kakashi Fight Together Chapter 361: Obito and Kakashi Fight Together Obito blocked the sword of Cloud Ninja striking at Kakashi and kicked the cloud ninja away. Seeing this, the Cloud Ninja immediately retreated. ¡°Fire Release: Great Fireball Technique.¡± Obito quickly spat a ball of fire at his opponent. The Cloud Ninja quickly waved his sword to counter the fireball. ¡°Crescent Moon sh!¡± A flying energy sh emerged from the sword and collided with the fireball. Boom! The Fireball exploded and both attacks were nullified. After the attack, Obito and the Cloud ninja were far apart. The Cloud Ninja fighting Kakashi emerged beside hisrade while Kakashi joined Obito. ¡°Obito, why are you here?¡± Kakashi asked in surprise. Obito grinned and replied: ¡°Kakashi, of course, I will be here. I¡¯m here as a support.¡± Hearing this, Kakashi turned his head and said: ¡°Tsk, who needs your support? Don¡¯t ask me to save youter.¡± ¡°Kakashi, I just saved your a$$,¡± Obito shouted. Although he didn¡¯t want to admit it, Kakashi knew that Obito¡¯s timely intervention saved him just now. ¡°Kakashi, don¡¯t underestimate me, I have my Sharingan now, and I¡¯m not like I used to be before.¡± After saying this, Obito showed his Sharingan. Not far away, the Cloud Ninjas saw Obito¡¯s Sharingan and knew that Obito can¡¯t be underestimated. ¡°Who are you? State your name.¡± The Cloud Ninja who engaged Obito previously said in a deep voice. ¡°My name is Uchiha Obito, remember my name, because it will be resounding in the whole world in the future.¡± Obito boasted confidently. ¡°Uchiha Obito? Well, I will remember your name. You also remember that I, Daijuro of the Cloud vige will end you.¡± Said the Cloud ninja, who is called Daijuro. ¡°And my name is Tojuro.¡± The other Cloud ninja said. ¡°Tojuro and Daijuro are brothers, Jonin of the Cloud vige,¡± Kakashi said. Hearing this, Obito asked curiously: ¡°Kakashi, you know them?¡± ¡°We fought several times on the battlefield,¡± Kakashi replied. ¡°I see,¡± Obito said. Kakashi then reminded: ¡°Be careful, they are good at Swordsmanship and Lightning ninjutsu.¡± ¡°Got it,¡± Obito said. There was tension in the air. ¡°Daijuro, you deal with Uchiha Obito, and I will deal with Hatake Kakashi,¡± Tojuro said. ¡°Sure,¡± Daijuro replied. Kakashi and Obito exchanged looks before Kakashi said: ¡°Go.¡± Both quicklyunched an attack at the brothers at the same time. Although Obito wasn¡¯t a Jonin yet, his Sharingan allowed him topete with one. And Kakashi was already a Jonin without the Sharingan, and he honed his Kenjutsu greatly thest time he was in Konoha. Before Obito arrived, Kakashi was able to hold his ground against both brothers, and now he had only to fight one. Kakashi wasn¡¯t alone at first, he had a team under him, but as time went on, they separated because of the terrain. The total number of people on the battlefield was 60 from Konoha, each four had one Jonin leader and three Chunin, Genins were almost none existent on the battlefield. Kakashi fought Tojuro using his sword technique, and thetter responded with his own. On the other side, Obito fought using a Kunai in each hand against Daijuro¡¯s swordsmanship. Although Obito wasn¡¯t good at Kenjutsu, he could read and react quickly to each of Daijuro¡¯s attacks using his Sharingan. Daijuro said: ¡°The Uchiha¡¯s Sharingan is amazing.¡± ¡°Your Kenjutsu is not bad either,¡± Obito replied. As the two fought, for a while, Tojuro finally looked at Daijuro and said: ¡°Daijuro, we¡¯re retreating.¡± ¡°I got it.¡± ¡°You want to leave? It won¡¯t be easy.¡± Seeing Obito about to intercept them, Daijuro made a few hand seals and said: ¡°Lightning Release: Electromaic Murder.¡± A wave of Lightning traveled quickly toward Obito, who instantly retreated. As Obito avoided the lightning, the brothers already disappeared into the forest. ¡°Kakashi, let¡¯s go after them,¡± Obito said. Kakashi shook his head and said: ¡°Don¡¯t chase them, Obito. They¡¯re retreating temporarily, and we will have a chance to fight them again. Besides, I¡¯m running low on chakra.¡± ¡°I see, then I will deal with them the next time,¡± Obito said. ¡°You¡¯re energetic.¡± Kakashi sat on the ground and sighed. Obito smiled: ¡°Kakashi, how is the Sharingan I gave you, is it good?¡± Hearing this, Kakashi said: ¡°Yes yes, but because I¡¯m not an Uchiha, I can¡¯t turn it off.¡± ¡°What do you do then?¡± Obito asked curiously. Kakashi replied: ¡°If I keep it open all the time, it will consume too much chakra.¡± ¡°That¡¯s true,¡± Obito said. ¡°So, the Sharingan you gave me consumes my chakra like crazy, which is a burden.¡± Kakashi sighed. ¡°What will you do?¡± Obito asked. ¡°I have already decided, when we go back, let¡¯s get Tsunade-sama, and return it to you. After all, I¡¯m not an Uchiha, and using their Blood Limit may cause a problemter.¡± Hearing this, Obito said: ¡°How can I do that? It was a gift I gave you when you got your Jonin rank, I can¡¯t get it back.¡± As those two continued their discussion, An was fighting several Cloud Ninjas on the other side. Several Cloud ninjas knew that An was strong, so they decided to join hands in dealing with him. ¡°Be careful, the sword in his hand is strange, it¡¯s very sharp and if you get hit by it, you will get burned.¡± A Cloud Ninja quickly exined. Although An was only one person, he made them suffer great losses even though he was only using a sword without any ninjutsu. Chapter 362: Mysterious White-Haired Boy Chapter 362: Mysterious White-Haired Boy An was fighting several Ninjas in the woods. ¡°He¡¯s too strong.¡± The Cloud Ninjas were good at Kenjutsu but they weren¡¯t An¡¯s opponents. An¡¯s Kenjutsu was far superior to theirs. Although they had the advantage of numbers, it wasn¡¯t enough. In An¡¯s eyes, they were just like children ying with sticks. Furthermore, the Kusanagi sword in An¡¯s hands was stronger and sharper than their swords. What made the cloud ninjas angry was that An could easily defeat them all together, but he was just ying around. As soon as the Kusanagi sword touches an enemy, they would be directly lit ame without being able to ask for help. ¡°Bastard!!¡± The other cloud ninjas were angry and attacked together. An sneered as he shed his sword sideways, instantly breaking a few swords. The cloud ninjas instantly backed off since their weapons were now useless, and started fighting with Ninjutsu. ¡°Lightning Release: False Darkness technique!¡± The cloud ninjas used this technique together with each one merging and heading toward An. An directly used his own Lightning Release: False Darkness technique. An¡¯s false darkness collided with the cloud ninjas¡¯ false darkness and burst into light. After a sh of light, An¡¯s False darkness continued forward and hit several ninjas, instantly downing them. ¡°The rock and the cloud are not that strong it seems.¡± An sighed in disappointment. Suddenly, a dark-skinned white-haired boy appeared from the woods not far away. The boy¡¯s left eye was covered by his hair. On his left and right shoulder, there were tattoos of thunder and water respectively. The boy stared at An with hostility in his eyes. ¡°Lightning Release: Wave of Inspiration!¡± The boy suddenly spat arge water wave and immediately after blue current appeared in the water. As soon as this technique hit An, he was paralyzed and fell to the ground. Before the boy could be happy, An¡¯s body suddenly exploded in smoke and a log appeared in its ce. ¡°Substitution?¡± When the White-haired boy saw this, his expression changed slightly. At the same time, someone approached him from behind. As soon as he felt the danger, An kicked him. An sent the white-haired boy (T/N: Darui) crashing into a tree. An already noticed the white-haired boy for a while, so he sneaks and attacked him, An quickly used substitution. However, the boy¡¯s jutsu was quite good, if it was anyone else, they would be dead. The white-haired boy wiped the blood from the corner of his mouth and stared at An. An looked back with interest. The white-haired boy seemed the same age as Kakashi, at most, two or three years younger. ¡°What¡¯s your name?¡± An asked. ¡°Noment.¡± The boy replied. ¡°So how would I get you to tell me?¡± An asked again. ¡°Sorry, I¡¯m not obliged to tell my name to an enemy, unless you can defeat me.¡± The boy replied. ¡°That¡¯s easy.¡± Anughed. ¡°Come try it then.¡± The boy snorted coldly as he started going through hand seals. ¡°Water Release: Water Colliding Wave!¡± Water rushed at An who quickly put his hand on the ground. ¡°Earth Release: Mud Wall!¡± A huge mud wall rose from the ground blocking the water from reaching An. ¡°Storm Release: Laser Circus!¡± The boy suddenly used a bloodline limit. Several beams shot toward the earth wall and easily prated it and mmed into the one hiding behind the wall. An countered using his False Darkness. The lightning met the beams and canceled them out. ¡°Next, try this!¡± The boy formed a few hand seals and said: ¡°ck Lightning Panther!¡± True to its name, ck lightning emerged and formed a panther that rushed toward An. Seeing this, An quickly made a Chidori and met the panther head-on. The boy was surprised that An had such a strong lightning Jutsu. After dealing with the ck lightning panther, An said: ¡°Well, it¡¯s time for me to attack.¡± An knew that the boy was exhausted. The boy pulled a big sword from his back and clenched it tightly. Seeing this, An took out his Kusanagi. ¡°Let¡¯s start!¡± An disappeared from his ce suddenly. ¡°Fast!¡± The boy was focused, and quickly put his sword in front of him to block a strike. An shed heavily against the broadsword, which made the boy take a few steps back. An rushed again and attacked in a frenzy. Or so the white boy thought, but An was actually wielding his sword casually, without the slightest technique or aim. He just hit the broadsword each time. Finally, the boy couldn¡¯t hold into the sword anymore, and at this time, An kicked him. The boy struggled to get up, he was already injured. ¡°You lost,¡± An said. The boy was silent, he was indeed defeated. Chapter 363: Eight-tails Chapter 363: Eight-tails ¡°My name is Darui!¡± The white-haired boy who was defeated stated his name. An narrowed his eyes slightly as he looked at Darui. He already guessed his identity (T/N: As did I¡­), but he wasn¡¯t sure if Darui was so young back then. He was like Kakashi and isn¡¯t the Ninja An remembered him from the Anime. ¡°Why are you staring at me? Do you know me?¡± An shook his head. ¡°Since you already defeated me, you can kill me.¡± After saying this, Darui closed his eyes as if he was epting death. Being defeated on the battlefield was equivalent to death. An appreciated Darui¡¯s mentality. The boy was ready to ept the consequences of war withoutints. At this time, An got a choice. [Ding! Make a Choice!] [1: Kill Darui. Reward: One B Rank Lightning Technique.] [2: Spare Darui. Reward: Katon: G¨­ka Mekkyaku (Fire Release: Majestic me Destroyer.)] An decided to spare Darui, and it wasn¡¯t because of the reward, not at all¡­ Darui was indeed a genius Ninja, just like Kakashi. It would be a pity to kill him. After thinking for a bit, An said: ¡°Darui, right? I will remember you. So, you can go this time. After all, you¡¯re a kid with the potential to be the Raikage one day. It would be a pity to kill you here. And you are a good kid, it¡¯s just we¡¯re currently enemies because of our positions in the war.¡± Hearing those words, Darui couldn¡¯t believe his ears. An actually believed that he could be The Raikage one day. ¡°You¡­ What¡¯s your name?¡± Darui asked curiously. ¡°My name is An, from Konoha,¡± An said. ¡°Since you¡¯re with Konoha, why are you sparing an enemy? Just because of my potential?¡± Darui said in confusion. An smiled and said: ¡°Isn¡¯t that reason enough? I admire talents and I find it a pity that someone as talented as you has to die here.¡± Darui said: ¡°You¡¯re really a strange person. The higher the potential of the enemy, the greater the threat to you, right? If you let me go, I will grow stronger in the future, wouldn¡¯t that be troublesome for Konoha? Wouldn¡¯t you regret it then?¡± (T/N: The Kid really wants to die badly.) ¡°I won¡¯t regret it, I will look forward to you getting stronger.¡± Anughed. ¡°You¡¯re a very, very strange person, I don¡¯t know if you¡¯re an enemy or a friend.¡± Darui was speechless. ¡°Okay, go ahead, if someone saw us, I won¡¯t be able to let you go,¡± An said. Darui hesitated for a bit before saying: ¡°I will also remember you; I will definitively be stronger next time.¡± At this moment, a young man appeared beside Darui. ¡°Darui, are you alright?¡± The young man asked. ¡°Bee-sempai, you¡¯re here, I¡¯m fine, only slightly injured,¡± Darui said. (T/N: The Author is really confusing me. He says that this is Blue Bee, the previous Jinchuriki of Gyuki, the Eight-Tails, but in the third war, the Jinchuriki was Killer Bee.) An looked at Killer Bee, the Eight-tails Jinchuriki, and said: ¡°Hehe, it seems that finally, someone strong appeared.¡± Killer Bee nced around and saw several cloud ninjas dead before ncing at An. ¡°You killed several of myrades and also injured Darui. You seem quite strong as well, I¡¯m Killer Bee, say your name.¡± ¡°My name is An; you better remember it,¡± An said. ¡°An? You will soon die at my hands then, and I will avenge myrades.¡± ¡°Come on, let¡¯s see how strong a Jinchuriki is.¡± Hearing this, Bee¡¯s face changed as he said seriously: ¡°You actually know that I¡¯m the Eight-Tails Jinchuriki? It seems that you investigated me.¡± ¡°Stop this nonsense and let¡¯s fight. I¡¯m really looking forward to how strong you are.¡± ¡°You want to see the power of the eight tails? Then you need to defeat me first.¡± ¡°Come on.¡± An took out his Kusanagi and Bee Drew his swords. (T/N: This is getting annoying, Killer Bee uses seven or eight swords, and Blue Bee uses one katana or a Nodachi and can¡¯t control the Eight-Tails, while Killer Bee can. I don¡¯t want to change much, but the timeline is messed up.) Suddenly, both disappeared, rushed toward each other, and started a close battle. Bee was as strong as an elite Jonin. An fought without relying on his space-rted abilities. As they exchanged blows, Bee was surprised by An¡¯s power. He could tell that he would need the eight Tails to fight An. ¡°It¡¯s no wonder he is confident.¡± Bee understood why he wanted to try fighting the Bijuu. In terms of swordsmanship, An and Bee were almost equal, but An¡¯s sword was better which gave him the upper hand. After a while, Bee started using lightning ninjutsu, which was one of his strongest powers. He was easily ranked fifth in terms of Ninjutsu in the cloud vige. An responded by using lightning Ninjutsu as well, which shocked Bee greatly as An¡¯s lightning Ninjutsu wasparable to his own. Bee thought that An already reached the level of a Kage, but he wasn¡¯t sure yet. ¡°What about now? Am I strong enough to see the power of the eight-tailed beast?¡± An asked Bee. Bee replied: ¡°You¡¯re indeed strong, and deserve to see the power of the Eight-tailed beast.¡± Just as Bee was about to use that power, Darui suddenly stood in front of Bee. Darui shouted: ¡°Bee-sempai, stop fighting, don¡¯t use the Eight tail¡¯s power.¡± ¡°Darui, don¡¯t stop me, he wants to see the power of the Eight tail,¡± Bee said. ¡°Please, stop fighting, let¡¯s retreat first,¡± Darui said. ¡°No.¡± Bee replied. Darui insisted: ¡°If Bee-sempai wants to use the power of the eight tail, then kill me first.¡± Saying this, Darui spread his arms to block Bee¡¯s path. ¡°Darui, why are you defending this guy?¡± Bee looked puzzled. Darui replied: ¡°Sorry, Bee-sempai, although An is our enemy, he could¡¯ve killed me before you arrived, but he didn¡¯t. I owe him one. Therefore, Bee-sempai, if you want to use the eight tail¡¯s power, then I have to return that favor.¡± Bee looked at An and said: ¡°Why did you spare Darui?¡± An replied: ¡°Because I appreciate his talent.¡± ¡°Appreciate his talent?¡± Bee was puzzled. ¡°Darui is a genius, in the future, he may be the Raikage,¡± An said. ¡°You think that he may be the Raikage in the future?¡± Bee was shocked. He knew that Ai was optimistic about Darui. Thetter may even be the fifth Raikage. ¡°Do you still want to fight?¡± An asked. ¡°No, I won¡¯t do that for now. Since you let Darui go, I will retreat this time.¡± Bee said. ¡°That¡¯s a pity, I wanted to test the eight Tail¡¯s power,¡± An said. ¡°The next time we fight, I will be sure to use it,¡± Bee promised. ¡°Then, I will be waiting¡± Anughed. Bee took Darui and left. ¡°This is getting boring, let¡¯s see what Obito and Kakashi are doing.¡± An shook his head and left. Chapter 364: Orochimaru Chapter 364: Orochimaru Soon, An met with Obito and Kakashi. Kakashi said as he saw An: ¡°I didn¡¯t expect you toe here too.¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t want to. I was asked to do so.¡± An shrugged. On the side, Obito said: ¡°Have you finished your fight?¡± ¡°Well, yeah.¡± Obito was a little excited as he said: ¡°Kakashi and I teamed up and defeated the twins from the cloud, two Jonins.¡± ¡°Yes, you both seem quite the team, with good coordination.¡± An smiled lightly. ¡°Who has good coordination with this idiot!¡± Kakashi turned his head a little as he blushed. ¡°Wow, Kakashi, why are you blushing? Are you that ashamed that I helped you fight?¡± Obitoined. ¡°Who told you to be ate bloomer,¡± Kakashi said. ¡°I¡¯m no longer ate bloomer okay? I already have opened my Sharingan.¡± Obito replied heatedly. ¡°Yeah, but you will always be ate bloomer,¡± Kakashi said. ¡°What? If that¡¯s the case then let thiste bloomer fight with you the so-called genius and see who wins.¡± Obito said excitedly. ¡°Let¡¯s fight then, who is afraid of you,¡± Kakashi replied. The two took some distance and were ready to fight. Seeing this, An quickly moved between the two of them and said: ¡°Please, you two, this is a battlefield. If the enemy sees this, they will think that there is an internal strife in our forces.¡± Kakashi and Obito finally stepped down and what An said made sense. ¡°Kakashi, forget it this time, we will fight back at the vige,¡± Obito said. Kakashi snorted and replied: ¡°I will fight you anytime, let¡¯s see who is afraid of who.¡± An on the side shook his head speechlessly. Kakashi was being a Tsundere. He obviously thought that Obito was a good partner. ¡°By the way, what¡¯s the current situation on the battlefield?¡± An asked. Kakashi replied: ¡°It¡¯s almost over. The enemy started to retreat now. This battle should be regarded as our victory. Thanks to you and the others in the support team, otherwise, it would¡¯ve been a hard fight.¡± Obito grinned at this: ¡°Of course, we are strong.¡± ¡°Then, let¡¯s go back to the camp,¡± An said. At this moment, An and the others returned to the camp. ¡°It¡¯s great that you all are back, everyone is safe too.¡± Tsunade personally weed An and the others back to the camp. ¡°Tsunade-sama, Minato-sensei isn¡¯t back yet?¡± Kakashi asked. ¡°He is back, but he has some personal matters to deal with, so he went out again,¡± Tsunade replied. Kakashi nodded. He was relieved to know that Minato was fine. ¡°By the way An,e with me,¡± Tsunade said. ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± An asked curiously. ¡°Juste.¡± Tsunade insisted. ¡°Sure.¡± Seeing that Tsunade didn¡¯t want to say anything here, he knew that she had something private to say. An followed Tsunade to the other side of the camp and directly said: ¡°An, can I ask you to do one more thing?¡± ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± An asked. ¡°My brother Nawaki is going on a mission tomorrow. I hope you can do this mission and protect him by the side.¡± ¡°The mission isn¡¯t the objective, but protecting your brother is, that¡¯s why you want me on this mission right?¡± An said. ¡°Well, you¡¯re right.¡± Tsunade nodded embarrassedly. After all, she was one of the Sannin, but now she was asking for help, which was a little embarrassing for her. An said: ¡°Since Nawaki already has the strength to perform this mission, it shouldn¡¯t be a problem for him, why do you need me to protect him?¡± Tsunade exined: ¡°Because he is my little brother, and I¡¯m worried about him. Moreover, this time, he is going on an infiltration mission, and it¡¯s very dangerous.¡± ¡°Is there anyone else besides your brother in this mission?¡± An asked. ¡°Mm, there are seven people including my brother,¡± Tsunade replied. ¡°Who is in charge of the mission?¡± An asked. ¡°It¡¯s my little brother Nawaki, and this is his first mission as a team leader,¡± Tsunade said. An nodded: ¡°So that¡¯s the case. Since it is his first mission as a leader, you don¡¯t know if he canplete the mission smoothly and want me to protect him.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right,¡± Tsunade admitted. ¡°Why did you ask me to protect him? Isn¡¯t there anyone else?¡± An asked curiously. Tsunade smiled slightly: ¡°Because you are mysterious and strong and reliable. There is indeed another candidate though. He can protect my brother, but he has another mission.¡± ¡°Who is it?¡± An asked curiously. ¡°It¡¯s Nawaki¡¯s teacher, Orochimaru,¡± Tsunade replied. ¡°Orochimaru? One of the Sannin the same as you?¡± An said. ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°So your brother is his student,¡± An said thoughtfully. ¡°Okay, I said everything, can you protect my brother?¡± Tsunade asked. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: Agree to Tsunade¡¯s request. Reward: Earth Release: Hardening Technique.] [2: Refuse Tsunade¡¯s request. Reward: Small Ninjutsu Gift Pack.] An agreed to Tsunade¡¯s request. ¡°I will look after him,¡± An said. ¡°Well,e with me, he¡¯s in another camp,¡± Tsunade said. After moving about 20 kilometers, they arrived at another camp. The one in charge of this camp was Orochimaru. ¡°Tsunade, why are you here?¡± Orochimaru asked. At this time, Orochimaru noticed An. Tsunade said: ¡°I¡¯m here to find Nawaki, where is he?¡± ¡°That boy is training the new Ninjutsu I taught him, he should be in the woods over there,¡± Orochimaru replied. ¡°What new move?¡± Tsunade asked curiously. ¡°The shadow snake hand, Nawaki seemed really interested in it, so I taught him.¡± Orochimaruughed. ¡°Oh, you¡¯re really good to him.¡± Tsunade smiled. ¡°He is my only disciple after all,¡± Orochimaru replied. ¡°Well, good for him then,¡± Tsunade said. ¡°By the way, Tsunade, is this person An?¡± Orochimaru asked. ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s me,¡± An replied. At this time, An looked at Orochimaru. ¡°You¡¯re really worthy of being a Sannin. You seem strong.¡± An said. ¡°Hehe, You¡¯re not bad either.¡± Orochimaru smiled. Tsunade said: ¡°Orochimaru, isn¡¯t Nawaki going on a mission leading a team tomorrow? I was a little worried about him and wanted An to help him out, is that okay?¡± ¡°Oh, that¡¯s why you¡¯re here.¡± Orochimaru nodded and said: ¡°As long as Nawaki is okay with it. After all, he is in charge of leading the team this time and he has the final say in this. I will take you to find him.¡± Orochimaru let An and Tsunade toward Nawaki. Chapter 365: Rashomon Chapter 365: Rashomon When Nawaki saw Tsunade, he was happy. ¡°Big sister, why are you here? Are you here to see me?¡± Only then did Nawaki notice An standing behind her and said: ¡°You¡¯re here as well.¡± An smiled lightly and said: ¡°It¡¯s me.¡± Tsunade said: ¡°Nawaki, An will go with you on your mission tomorrow, is that okay?¡± Nawaki was puzzled and said: ¡°Big sis, why do you want him to go with me? Are you afraid that I¡¯m not strong enough toplete the mission?¡± ¡°No Nawaki, I¡¯m just trying to help youplete the mission smoothly. An is very strong, he can help you.¡± Nawaki shook his head and said: ¡°Don¡¯t try and fool me. You brought him here to protect me because you¡¯re worried.¡± ¡°Nawaki¡­¡± Tsunade was at loss for words. ¡°Big sis, I don¡¯t need anyone¡¯s help. Tomorrow¡¯s mission is my first mission as a leader, I can handle it myself.¡± Nawaki said. ¡°Nawaki¡­¡± Tsunade was embarrassed, she really wanted to help her little brother. At this time, Orochimaru interrupted: ¡°Nawaki-Kun, don¡¯t make this so awkward. Tsunade-hime did this because she is worried about you, just listen to her.¡± ¡°Well, since you say so, Orochimaru-sensei, then I will agree.¡± Nawaki sighed. ¡°Good then, let An apany you to your mission tomorrow.¡± Tsunade smiled. ¡°Okay.¡± Nawaki nodded. ¡°An, you can stay here then, I will go back first.¡± Tsunade patted An¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Well, see you around,¡± An replied. After Tsunade left, Orochimaru said: ¡°An, I heard that you¡¯re really strong. I wonder if you can show me.¡± ¡°Show you? Do you want to fight me?¡± An asked. ¡°Hehe, what you said is too straightforward, but I prefer to use the words ¡®discuss¡¯.¡± Orochimaruughed. [Ding! Make a Choice] [1: ept Orochimaru¡¯s challenge. Reward: A Rank Ninjutsu treasure Chest.] [2: Refuse Orochimaru¡¯s challenge saying that there is no time. Reward: Ninjutsu Gift Pack.] After thinking about it, An agreed to Orochimaru¡¯s ¡®discussion¡¯. ¡°Since you want to see how strong I¡¯m, I will dly oblige,¡± An said. Seeing that An was going to fight Orochimaru, Nawaki couldn¡¯t help but look forward to it. Orochimaru was his teacher and he admired him greatly, and An was brought by his sister, which means that she trusted him and his strength. A battle between two strong people will naturally be exciting. An and Orochimaru moved to a clearing for their spar. As the spar started, Orochimaru directly threw three Shuriken at An and formed hands seals. ¡°Shuriken Shadow Clone Jutsu.¡± In an instant, the three Shuriken multiplied, and more than a hundred of them appeared. ¡°As expected of you, you¡¯re so ruthless when you attack.¡± If it were someone weak, they wouldn¡¯t be able to avoid this attack. ¡°Mud wall!¡± An pped his palm on the ground making a wall appear in front of him, blocking the shuriken. Orochimaru narrowed his eyes slightly. ¡°Lightning Release: Snake Lightning!¡± A snake-shaped lightning appeared in Orochimaru¡¯s hand before moving toward An. Earth release can be countered by lightning release attack which has great prative power. The Mud wall was pierced and the attack mmed into An. An frowned slightly as he saw An¡¯s body turn into a pile of mud. ¡°Clone?¡± Orochimaru suddenly sensed danger and looked around to see An from his side attacking him with a water jutsu and sending him flying. An didn¡¯t rush to attack as he knew that Orochimaru won¡¯t be defeated so easily. Sure enough, a few secondster, a wet Orochimaru appeared. He wasn¡¯t affected by An¡¯s attack. Orochimaru attacks An directly. ¡°Many Hidden Shadow Snake Hands.¡± An took a Kunai and cut the snakes. ¡®How do I deal with so many snakes?¡¯ An thought. The Many Hidden Shadow Snake Hands had way more snakes than the normal Hidden Shadow Snake Hands. Sure enough, facing thatrge number of snakes, An was quickly trapped and unable to move. ¡°Now, how are you going to break free?¡± Orochimaru said with interest. ¡°Chidori!¡± Apanied by the sound of thousand birds chirping, An¡¯s palm was covered in lightning. An waved his hand and all snakes were cut off. ¡°Isn¡¯t that Kakashi¡¯s Chidori? I didn¡¯t expect you to master it.¡± Orochimaru said a little greedily. ¡°There are many things you don¡¯t know,¡± An said. ¡°Then, I have to see what you¡¯ve got,¡± Orochimaru said. ¡°Fire Release: Great Fireball Technique.¡± An spat arge fireball at Orochimaru. Orochimaru didn¡¯t move and was instantly engulfed by the mes. An knew that Orochimaru won¡¯t make such a newbie mistake, and soon enough, An saw Orochimaru¡¯s body turn into a pile of mud. It seems that Orochimaru used the mud clone. Suddenly, he appeared behind An: ¡°Wind Release: Great Breakthrough.¡± A powerful gust of wind moved toward An, who turned quickly and responded with the same technique. The collision between the two attacks uprooted a few trees. Both An and Orochimaru took a few steps back due to the wind. ¡°Earth release, Fire release, water release, lightning release, and now wind release. You actually can use the five chakra natures, the same as Sarutobi-sensei.¡± An smiled and then attacked again. ¡°Lightning Release: False darkness.¡± A ray of lightning sted toward Orochimaru, who frowned as he could see the power of this technique. ¡°Summoning: Rashomon!¡± Orochimaru suddenly summoned a huge gate to block off An¡¯s attack. As the Lightning hit Rashomon, a dazzling light shone over the ce. Chapter 366: Manda Chapter 366: Manda After stopping the se darkness, the huge gate was deformed. The False Darkness was strong, but it wasn¡¯t enough to pierce through the Rashomon. An wasn¡¯t surprised by this, and he also knew that Orochimaru can summon three Rashomon together. Since Orochimaru used a single Rashomon, he was sure that it was enough. At this time, Orochimaru spat out a long sword from his mouth. An realized that it was one of the Kusanagi swords. With a sneer, An decisively took out his own Kusanagi which surprised Orochimaru. ¡°You unexpectedly have a Kusanagi Sword.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s see how strong the Kenjutsu of one of the Sannin is.¡± An directly rushed at Orochimaru with his sword. Thetter didn¡¯t underestimate An and blocked quickly. With a few sparks, the two swords collided. The two continued their Kenjutsu fight for a while and exchanged over a hundred strikes. Orochimaru seemed clearly out of breath, while An seemed normal. In terms of Kenjutsu, both of them were evenly matched, but An had better stamina. Orochimaru knew this, and he instantly distanced himself to stop their Kenjutsu battle. Because it was just a spar, An didn¡¯t go after him. He instead put away his sword as he watched for Orochimaru¡¯s next move with great interest. Orochimaru bit his thumb before going for the summoning seals and mmed his hand on the ground. The next second, a huge snake appeared, and on top of it, Orochimaru stood. Orochimaru looked at An arrogantly. An¡¯s face changed, as Orochimaru summoned Manda, the snake boss summon. Only ninjas at the level of the Sannin can form a contract with animals that strong. ¡°So, how are you going to deal with this? Manda¡¯s temper is bad, I can¡¯t control it even if I wanted.¡± Orochimaru looked at An with a faint smile. Sure enough, Manda was dissatisfied and said: ¡°Orochimaru, why did you summon me again? I was resting.¡± ¡°There is a tricky guy, so I wanted your help.¡± Orochimaru sneered. ¡°Is that guy in front of you the one who is troublesome?¡± Manda looked at An with a cold glint in his eyes. An wasn¡¯t afraid of Manda as he met Manda¡¯s gaze indifferently. Orochimaru said: ¡°Okay, I think you are really courageous.¡± An smiled and said: ¡°I¡¯m ttered.¡± Orochimaru said: ¡°How are you going to deal with this?¡± ¡°Every problem has a solution.¡± Anughed. He didn¡¯t seem to take Manda seriously which obviously angered the overgrown snake as it attacked An. Although the snake was huge, it was extremely fast and flexible. Facing this attack, An used the body flicker to dodge. ¡°Fire Release: Great Fireball Technique.¡± After dodging a few times, An spat arge fireball from his mouth at Manda. Manda was huge, so it was easy to hit it even with a slow attack like the fireball. Manda wasn¡¯t huge, except for slight burns on his skin. Obviously, the Great fireball wasn¡¯t effective against his thick skin. ¡°Well, try this then.¡± An sneered as he made a few hand seals. Suddenly, he spat a small fire that seemed to grow once it touched the ground. ¡°Fire Release: Majestic me Destroyer!¡± The me kept on the ground as it seemed to be strong enough to destroy arge portion of the forest. ¡°What?!¡± Orochimaru was very surprised as this was the first time he saw such a technique. Manda couldn¡¯t move fast enough to escape and soon enough, his body waspletely engulfed in the mes. An was already a hundred meters away admiring his handiwork. At this time, An suddenly noticed a huge ck shadow inside the mes and noticed that only ayer of skin remained there. He instantly knew that Manda shed his skin to escape the fire. ¡°Boy, it¡¯s over.¡± Manda escaped unharmed and stared at An with killing intent. An¡¯s attack angered him greatly. Seeing that the fire-release attack didn¡¯t deal with Manda, An was toozy to deal with him physically, so he bit his thumb and went through a few seals. Looking at this, Orochimaru said: ¡°Do you want to use Summoning as well? What will you summon?¡± ¡°Summoning!¡± Suddenly, a big red snake appeared below An. This snake was the same size as Manda but in red. Orochimaru looked at this and said: ¡°Unexpectedly, your Summon is also from the Ryuchi Cave.¡± ¡°Garaga, this is ridiculous. You have be a human¡¯s summoned animal.¡± Garaga said: ¡°Hmph as if you weren¡¯t summoned by a human.¡± Manda said: ¡°Now that we are here, let¡¯s decide who¡¯s stronger.¡± Garaga said back: ¡°Come then, I¡¯m not afraid of you. It¡¯s not like we didn¡¯t fight before.¡± The battle between the two snake bosses was about to start. Chapter 367: Not Winning or Losing Chapter 367: Not Winning or Losing The battle caused by Garaga and Manda destroyed half of the forest. The two Summons were from the Ryuuchi Cave and their powers were far apart from each other. ¡°Manda, I¡¯m going to kill you. From now on, the Ryuuchi cave will be under me.¡± ¡°Hmph, Garaga, as long as I¡¯m still here, you will have nothing in the Ryuuchi cave.¡± Apparently, Manda was in control of the Ryuchi Cave, and since both of them were close in power, they wanted the power to control the Ryuuchi cave for themselves. Orochimaru and An thought that the fight between Manda and Garaga was unexpected. They were only sparring, not fighting to the death. But the two snakes wanted a fight to the death. At this time, Orochimaru looked at An and said: ¡°Well, it seems that the fight can¡¯t be decided for now. Let¡¯s stop and spar again when there is time.¡± Seeing that Orochimaru offered to stop the fight, An epted this and said: ¡°Okay, then I will look forward to our next fight. The two dispelled the summons at the same time. Since both snakes wanted to fight for the Ryuuchi cave, they can fight there. It had nothing to do with An and Orochimaru. After the spar ended, An received his reward from the system. An A-rank Ninjutsu treasure chest. ¡°Open the Treasure Chest.¡± [Ding! You opened a Treasure chest and obtained Rasengan.] (T/N: I¡¯m sure he received one before.) ¡°Rasengan?¡± An wasn¡¯t that satisfied with this, but it was still an A-Rank ninjutsu. The potential of the Rasengan was great since it can be upgraded by adding Nature Maniption. After this spar, An gained an understanding of Orochimaru¡¯s power. An fought without using most of his skills and mostly used Ninjutsu. Even without the Space ability he had, he was slightly inferior or even as strong as one of the Sannin. Given time, he would be able to surpass even a Sannin. It was almost Dusk, and An wanted to go back. As he was leaving, he saw Nawaki looking at him with stars in his eyes. Nawaki witnessed the fight just now even if it was only the first half. Nawaki looked at An and said: ¡°I didn¡¯t expect you to be able to fight Sensei like that. No wonder big sis asked you to protect me.¡± An smiled lightly: ¡°Neither I nor Orochimaru fought with full force, so we don¡¯t know who is stronger.¡± Nawaki said: ¡°There is no need to decide the winner, since everyone is from Konoha, winning or losing doesn¡¯t mean much.¡± An nodded: ¡°Well, you make sense.¡± Nawaki looked at An and said: ¡°Orochimaru-Sensei already arranged a ce for you to rest, tomorrow we leave at 7 Am.¡± ¡°Okay, no problem.¡± An agreed. That night, Orochimaru prepared a banquet for An. Apparently, An impressed him very much in their fight. As for An, he felt that Orochimaru had other motives behind the hospitality, but he didn¡¯t say anything. Orochimaru¡¯s personality was clear to anyone who knew theplete plot. An knew that Orochimaru would defect from Konoha sooner orter. That¡¯s why An didn¡¯t want anything to do with him. Chapter 368: Mission Chapter 368: Mission Early the next morning, Nawaki found Allen, and then set off with the other six ninjas. This time the special operation was led by Nawaki, and the other six members were Chunin. Nawaki is the only jonin on the team. (T/N: Ok!!) As for Allen, because he isn¡¯t a Ninja, he had no ninja rank. However, He was strong enough to fight Orochimaru. Except for Nawaki, the six members were all seeing Allen for the first time, so they expressed doubts about his identity and origin. As the captain, Nawaki simply introduced n to them but concealed that n was called by his sister Tsunade to protect him. On the way, Allen asked: ¡°Nawaki, what is the Mission?¡± Nawaki whispered: ¡°You are just called by my sister to protect me, so it is inconvenient for me to tell you the details of the mission. But it will be better if I tell you.¡± Afterward, Nawaki told Allen about the Mission they were going for. It turned out that this Mission was arranged for him by Orochimaru because Nawaki was his disciple, so Orochimaru wanted to train Nawaki¡¯s ability to lead a team. This Mission is not difficult. After all, Nawaki is the disciple of Orochimaru, and thetter won¡¯t let his disciple get in danger. And the specifics of the Mission are to sneak into a small vige. This vige is inside the water country, under the jurisdiction of Mist Vige. The Mission for Nawaki and others is to enter The vige and find out if there are ninja troops from the Mist stationed there. The task is not difficult, the only danger is that if there are ninjas from the Mist Vige there, then Nawaki and the others are very likely to be discovered once they sneak in. Orochimaru naturally took this into consideration, so he gave Nawaki a scroll. As for what¡¯s in the scroll, even Nawaki didn¡¯t know. He just epted Orochimaru¡¯s words, if you encounter danger, you can open the scroll, and you will be able to get out of danger. Hearing what Nawaki said, Allen felt that the scroll Orochimaru gave Nawaki might be some kind of seal, which could kill or dy enemies, and help Nawaki and the others have time to escape when they were in danger. As for why Orochimaru needs to know whether there are ninja troops from the Mist Vige stationed in a small vige or not, no one knows. But Allen knew that Orochimaru would never do useless things. He must have his own ideas for asking Nawaki to do this. In this war, Konoha was facing the four major viges at the same time. However, fortunately, the four hidden viges are not united, and they are still hostile to each other. Starting from the camp, after running for half a day, Nawaki and his group finally arrived at a mountain not far from the vige. Nawaki took out a map and said: ¡°That¡¯s the vige over there, we will go there when it gets dark.¡± Allen on the side saw that Nawaki was ordering in a serious manner, quite like a captain, so he couldn¡¯t help nodding, showing appreciation. Sneaking in the darkness of the night was best, as it makes it hard for anyone to detect them. As soon as the night fell, Nawaki and the others sneaked in together. The vige was under the Mist Vige¡¯s jurisdiction, so they might have some Ninjas and they might get discovered. After three hours of investigation, Nawaki and the others found at least 30 Ninjas in the Mist. At this point, Nawaki and the otherspleted at least half of the mission. Now, they only needed to leave and return back to report to Orochimaru. However, on the way back, one of the Chunin in the team triggered a trap in the forest and was instantly killed. Seeing one of his team members die, Nawaki was stunned, like the other team members for a moment, before grief filled their hearts. Especially one of the Chunin, who was close to the one who died. He was sad before the sadness turned to anger as he clenched his fists. But An felt something was wrong and said to Nawaki: ¡°Let¡¯s go, the enemy will be here soon.¡± But Nawaki shook his head and said: ¡°No, let¡¯s stay. I want to avenge him, so let¡¯s go take out the enemy.¡± The other five hesitated. They were in enemy territory, and the number of enemies wasrger than theirs. It¡¯s obviously not wise to fight with those circumstances. However, in this moment of anger, Nawaki didn¡¯t consider this point. Chapter 369: Enemy Chapter 369: Enemy After An used his Senses, he said to Nawaki: ¡°There are thirty enemies, and they are all elites, if you fight head-on, the entire team will die here. So, we should leave quickly.¡± Hearing this, except Nawaki, the other five all thought about retreating, but a Ninja must listen to his orders. Nawaki was the captain, and they must obey his orders. Since Nawaki didn¡¯t order a retreat, they will face the enemy with him. Disobeying the orders of your superior is considered treason. Nawaki clenched his fists and said: ¡°This is the first time I¡¯m leading a team; I didn¡¯t expect arade to die. This is my responsibility, now I have to face the enemy to avenge my team. Orochimaru-sensei expects me to be responsible.¡± ¡°I decided to stay here, you all go back quickly. I will dy them as much as I can.¡± Hearing Nawaki¡¯s words, the other five hesitated. On one hand, they had to obey their orders, on the other hand, they didn¡¯t want to see Nawaki left behind and fall into the enemy¡¯s hands. At this moment, An said: ¡°Nawaki, I¡¯m sorry.¡± In the next second, Before Nawaki could react, An hit the back of his neck, rendering him unconscious. An looked at the five Chunin and said: ¡°I don¡¯t think you want to see you¡¯re captain left behind, do you? So I knocked him out. Now, take him and go back first.¡± ¡°What about you?¡± Asked one of the ninjas. ¡°I will stay behind and stop them,¡± An said in a deep voice. Hearing this, everyone was stunned. An didn¡¯t want to talk nonsense for much longer: ¡°There is no time, so go ahead and return to the camp, don¡¯t worry about me, I can deal with anything.¡± ¡°No, let us stay here and help.¡± Seeing An¡¯s loyalty, the chunin was deeply moved and decided to fight together. However, An didn¡¯t need their help and said coldly: ¡°I don¡¯t need you to stay, go back now. You will only be a burden if you stay, I can deal with those guys alone, so don¡¯t stay here and force me to protect you all as well.¡± Hearing this, the five Chunin felt embarrassed. They didn¡¯t expect An to be so confident in his power and looked down on theirs. But since An already made himself clear, they couldn¡¯t stay much longer. After thanking him a few times, they took the unconscious Nawaki and left. ¡°Okay, now it¡¯s time for a solo dance.¡± After watching them leave, An prepared to deal with the enemies. To be honest, he didn¡¯t put them in his eyes, but they were many of them, so he had to be slightly careful while dancing with them. Soon the forest was surrounded by a dense fog. An knew that this is the Hidden Mist Technique. Everyone trapped in this technique won¡¯t be able to see even a few meters in front of them. At the same time, the Mist ninjas approached An within the fog. An stood still in his ce; he was confident. With his perception, he already sensed all the ninjas in the mist and knew every one of their moves. At this time, An made a few hand seals and said: ¡°Genjutsu: Infinite Darkness!¡± The Infinite Darkness was hard to dispel even if they knew about it. And the time they took to deal with the Infinite Darkness was all that An needed. Inside the Darkness in the forest, the screams of the Mist Ninjas echoed in the surroundings. Before they could react, they were killed one by one without being able to fight back. After a few minutes, An killed all thirty Mist Ninjas. Chapter 370: Return After A Huge Victory Chapter 370: Return After A Huge Victory After finishing the remaining Mist Ninjas, An used the Majestic me Destroyer, burning down most of the forest along with the Mist Ninjas. A few minutester, An sessfully reached the team. The five Chunins were happy to see An rejoin them so quickly. They were surprised by An¡¯s speed in disposing of the opposition and returning unscathed. By the time Nawaki woke up, An already went back to Tsunade. Orochimaru informed Nawaki of what happened while he was unconscious, and thetter was grateful to An. He felt lucky that Tsunade asked An to help him, otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t have made it back. After returning to the camp, An rejoined the front lines and fought six or seven battles that ended in their victory each time. An became famous after a few battles, and all the major viges knew that a super-strong ninja appeared in Konoha. He earned the Moniker God¡¯s King or the King of the God. That title was probably due to An¡¯s strength and the fact that he is working under the God of Shinobi, The Professor, Hiruzen Sarutobi. Konoha¡¯s victories allowed it to remain supreme as the strongest vige amongst the other viges, earning the Land of a fire a lot of advantages. After ten days, An and the others returned to Konoha victoriously. Hiruzen and Danzo, along with Koharu and Homura were at the gate of Konoha preparing to wee the returning of the Ninjas. The vigers were also out and waiting for the Heros¡¯ return. That night, the Hokage hosted a banquet for all the Ninjas of the Frontlines. An was naturally invited, and he was sitting with the Hokage, which meant great honor. It shows the importance the Hokage attached to An. At the Banquest, Hiruzen gave a speech praising the Ninjas¡¯ dedication and sacrifice in the war and toasted them. Along with An and Hiruzen, Tsunade, Orochimaru, Jiraiya, Minato, Dan, and other n heads sat at the same table. The people sitting there were all famous and well-known figures in the Ninja world. They were the strongest Lineup in the entire of Konoha. ¡°Here An, this Toast is for you.¡± An clicked his Sake Saucer with the Hokage and gulped it down. The Third Hokage did the same. He usually didn¡¯t drink, but this time, it was a special asion, Konoha won big time in this war, and he was very happy about it. After that, people toasted An one after the other. An¡¯s performance in the war was impressive, to say the least. ¡°Come on An, let¡¯s have a drinking contest.¡± Tsunade directly sat down next to An with undisguised appreciation on her face. An epted it heartedly, while Kato Dan and Jiraiya were jealous. One was Tsunade¡¯s childhood friend, and the other had a crush on her. Only Orochimaru wasn¡¯t affected as he said: ¡°An¡¯s power can match a Kage indeed, no wonder Tsunade values him so much.¡± Afterward, Uchiha Fugaku, Hiashi Hyuuga and a few others toasted An. An saw the enthusiasm of those big shots and epted their toasts. So far, An¡¯s reputation can match the Sanin and no one dares to underestimate him. Chapter 371: To a New World Chapter 371: To a New World After the war came to an end, Konoha finally had some peace. All the major viges signed a contract with each other and there won¡¯t be any more wars for a long time. At this time, An got the opportunity to go to another world. [Ding! You havepleted the requirement to leave Naruto¡¯s world, you can choose the next world for a new adventure.] [1: Go to One Piece¡¯s World. Reward: conqueror¡¯s Haki.] [2: Go to Dragon Ball¡¯s world. Reward: Increase Combat Power by 1,000 Points.] [3: Return to HunterxHunter¡¯s world. Reward: Increase Nen by 10,000 Points.] An immediately ruled out Dragon Ball¡¯s world. The Power level in Dragon Ball was too high, even if he went there with 1,000bat Power, he would be even weaker than Yamcha. He would be cannon fodder in that world. He can only choose One Piece¡¯s world, or return to the Hunter world. An already finished everything he wanted to do in the Hunter world, so there was no point in going back now. ¡°Okay, it¡¯s decided, let¡¯s go to One piece.¡± An decided. [Ding! The passage to One Piece¡¯s world is going to open. You will be teleported in 10 seconds.] Hearing the system¡¯s notification, An became a little nervous. After experiencing the adventure in Naruto and Hunter worlds, he was looking forward to one piece. The space in front of An rippled before it opened. An took a deep breath and stepped in, andpletely disappeared. ¡­ When An opened his eyes again, he seemed to be in a prison cell. His expression changed as he thought: ¡®This couldn¡¯t be Impel Down, right?¡¯ There were several prisoners in his cells, and currently, they were staring at An. ¡°Hey, when did that guy appear here?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know, there should be only us here.¡± ¡°He seemed to appear from nowhere.¡± The criminals stared at An and seemed really suspicious. Seeing the prisoners¡¯ expressions, An sighed as he didn¡¯t expect the system to teleport him to such a ce. However, An was still unsure of which prison he was in, and could only look at a prisoner and ask: ¡°Hey, which prison is this?¡± Facing An¡¯s question, the prisoners froze for a moment before a seemingly strong criminal shouted: ¡°A$$hole, who are you? How did you appear here?¡± An smiled coldly: ¡°Haha, it seems that you won¡¯t tell me the easy way.¡± Those prisoners were obviously not a group of obedient guys, so the most effective way to get his answer is to use violence. An looked at them and an invisible pressure fell onto them. Using the Conqueror¡¯s Haki should be enough to get those guys to talk. Some of them weren¡¯t scared and An used his hands to talk to them, finally, after they were beaten to a pulp, someone said: ¡°Reporting to Uncle, This is the second floor of Impel Down, the Wild Beast Hell.¡± ¡®Sure enough, I¡¯m in Impel Down.¡¯ An knew a little about this ce. The world¡¯srgest prison, with various levels that can turn even sane people insane. It was so secure that in the entire history of its founding, only one person broke out, that¡¯s before Luffy invaded and almost all prisoners escaped. The first floor is called Crimson Hell, the second floor is called Wild Beast Hell, the third floor is the Starvation Hell, the fourth is zing Hell, the fifth is the Freezing Hell, and finally the sixth floor is called the Eternal Hell. An didn¡¯t know how dangerous this ce was, and ording to the prisoners, there were various beasts here, from small torge. If someone wasn¡¯t strong enough to wander around, he would be eaten alive. Chapter 372: Impel Down Chapter 372: Impel Down Inside the second floor of the Impel down, An saw some ferocious beasts passing by the cell from time to time. These beasts were kept here to guard the prisoners on the second floor. They were like soldiers patrolling around. Once they see someone outside of the cell, they would attack him immediately. As lunchtime approached, some jailers were seen pushing carts and stopping in front of the cells one by one distributing food to each prisoner. The prisoners extended their hands from behind the bars to get their food, but the jailers were looking at the prisoners in disdain and disgust as if they weren¡¯t even humans. Of course, since the prisoners were here, they must¡¯ve done some horrible things outside. Each cell held about ten prisoners, but the guard only gave them three or four potions. In An¡¯s cell, the prisoners didn¡¯t dare take the food and directly looked at each other before giving him the food respectfully: ¡°Master, here is lunch, please enjoy.¡± An nced at the food and waved his hand: ¡°I will not eat food that is frozen.¡± ¡°But master, if you don¡¯t eat, you will starve and you have to wait for eight hours for the next time they give us food again.¡± A prisoner reminded. ¡°Take it away, I won¡¯t eat it. An insisted. ¡°Okay sir, since you don¡¯t want it, then we can eat it. After all, we don¡¯t want to die of hunger.¡± Although everyone didn¡¯t get to eat much, at least they ate something. An was already nning to leave impel down; however, it wasn¡¯t an easy task because they were currently deep underwater. [Ding! Make a choice!] [1: Escape from Impel Down. Reward: Paramecia World Tree Fruit.] [2: Wait to be released: Reward: Saber-tooth fruit.] Without thinking, An immediately chose the first option. If he wanted to wait to be released, he would have to wait for Luffy, and An didn¡¯t know the current timeline. An was sure that the jailers didn¡¯t know about his existence. Therefore, he can leave without them noticing, and create as much chaos as possible to increase his chances to escape. ¡°Hm?¡± At this moment, An suddenly looked at a corner. He saw someone squatting down. It was a prisoner, but An was familiar with this prisoner. It was actually Mr. 3. Mr. 3 was someone under Crocodile, he has the ability of the Candle fruit. An was surprised that Mr. 3 was only imprisoned on the second floor, as he wasn¡¯t that weak, but with this, An now knew that Luffy already defeated Crocodile and freed basta. An thought for a bit and nned to get Mr. 3 to help him escape. Thinking about this, An walked over and asked: ¡°Are you Mr. 3?¡± Mr. 3 looked at An in surprise as he didn¡¯t expect anyone to know him. ¡°Who are you?¡± Asked Mr. 3. He was sleeping the entire time and didn¡¯t know about An. An was a little speechless and said: ¡°Mr. 3, I¡¯m nning on escaping from this prison, are you willing to help?¡± Mr. 3 was surprised by this and replied: ¡°That¡¯s impossible, this prison is known to be inescapable. No one can escape, you should give up.¡± That was true for most people, but for An, it was possible. The most difficult thing in this prison was facing Magen, who was as strong as a vice admiral. For An, the luckiest thing that happened was him being on the second level of Impel Down, so his chance to escape was greater. It would¡¯ve been hard if he was imprisoned in the sixth level. Since An was just randomly teleported here, no one in Impel Down knows him. An¡¯s legs and hands were free, and apart from being inside the cell, he was free. An looked at Mr. 3 and said: ¡°I¡¯m going out now, you can decide whether you want to follow or not.¡± After saying this, An looked at the other prisoners and said: ¡°Listen well, I¡¯m leaving, if you listen obediently, I can consider taking you out.¡± ¡°Really?¡± ¡°Are you really willing to take us out?¡± After hearing this, the prisoners were filled with hope, not like Mr. 3, who was afraid. This had to do with Mr. 3¡¯s personality. He was extremely cautious and didn¡¯t want to take risks. Furthermore, he knows about the horror of this ce. The other prisoners were willing to gamble, and if there is even a small chance to escape, they were willing to go. Seeing that they agreed so readily, An smiled: ¡°Then I promise to take you away, but you should remain obedient.¡± The Prisoners nodded and promised topletely obey An¡¯s words and regarded him as the boss. Soon, An told them the way to leave Impel Down, which is to release all the prisoners to create Chaos in the prison. Chapter 373: Plan to escape Impel Down Chapter 373: n to escape Impel Down The first problem for An now is that he was trapped in a cell, first, he needed to get out. Every cell door was made of Sea Stone, so no devil fruit user could get past it. But that alone was easy for An, the real trouble was Magen since the other wardens were nothing to An. It would be troublesome if Magen was involved in An¡¯s escape. An was currently on the second floor of Impel Down, the power of the prisoners wasn¡¯t that high. Generally speaking, it was impossible for them to escape. In An¡¯s opinion, only the prisoners on the fifth and sixth floors can attract Magen¡¯s attention. As for the other four floors, normal wardens were enough. Moreover, the first thought that the wardens will have when someone escape is to suppress him first and then report to Magen. This means, if someone from the second floor actually escaped, Magen won¡¯t be informed directly, and that¡¯s what An actually nned to do. When the wardens realize that they can¡¯t deal with the prisoners, they would inform Magen. ¡®Let¡¯s create Chaos!¡¯ An smiled coldly with a n in mind. In An¡¯s cell, there are 10 prisoners including Mr. 3 and each of them were handcuffed. Mr. 3¡¯s handcuffs were made of Sea Stone which suppresses his ability. An said: ¡°Mr. 3 if I remove the handcuffs, are willing to follow me?¡± Hearing this, Mr. 3 was a little tempted as he asked: ¡°Can you get rid of the Sea Stone Handcuffs on my hands?¡± ¡°Of course, I can,¡± An assured. Mr. 3 pondered for a bit before he nodded and said: ¡°Well if you can do it, I will follow you.¡± ¡°Then it¡¯s decided.¡± An smiled. He got a lot of uses for Mr. 3¡¯s ability. Mr. 3 Asked curiously: ¡°How are you going to remove the Sea Stone Handcuffs, this isn¡¯t an ordinary one so it won¡¯t break. Are you a devil fruit user?¡± Facing Mr. 3 doubt, An smiled mysteriously and said: ¡°I¡¯m not a devil fruit user, as for how to get rid of the handcuffs, just open your eyes and watch.¡± The Sea Stone Handcuffs were indeed strong. An originally wanted to use Chidori to cut the Sea Stone but found out that he didn¡¯t have any chakra. It seems like he was restricted because hee to a new world. Simrly, couldn¡¯t use his Nen as well. An could only use thew of space now, and he had three different abilities. Teleportation, Space Freeze, Space sh, and Space Jump. The teleportation needs coordinates and the distance wasn¡¯t that big, if he were to teleport randomly, he might end up deep into the sea or inside a Sea King. As for the Space jump, it was the same as Teleportation but the distance was greater and it consumes more energy. Therefore, An could only get out and leave normally by boarding a ship. In the next second, An activated his Space sh and cut off the Sea Stone Handcuffs. ¡°You really did it?!¡± Seeing the Handcuffs fall down from his hands, Mr. 3¡¯s eyes widened. An was calm, as he knew the power the space sh had. Unless the Sea Stone had some greaterw than space, it would be still cut open. ¡°How on earth did you do it?¡± Mr. 3 asked. He couldn¡¯t see what An did, all he saw was a downward movement from An¡¯s arm and the handcuffs fell down. An looked at Mr. 3 and said: ¡°This is my ability, my hands can cut through anything, including Sea Stone.¡± An didn¡¯t exin anything else about thew of space. Hearing this, Mr. 3 just nodded: ¡°Your ability is simr to Mr. 1¡¯s devil fruit. But he can¡¯t cut Sea Stone, so you¡¯re stronger than him.¡± ¡°The Mr. 1 you¡¯re talking about is Daz Bones, right? I know him.¡± Mr. 3 nodded: ¡°That¡¯s right, it¡¯s Daz Bones, he can turn every part of his body into des. He was defeated by Roronoa Zoro, the bounty hunter that joined the straw hat pirates, in basta.¡± ¡°That is to say, Mr. 1 is also imprisoned here?¡± An asked knowingly. Mr. 3 shook his head and said: ¡°I don¡¯t know where he is locked up, since I didn¡¯t see him ever since we were arrested. But ording to my guess, Mr. 1 and my former boss, Crocodile, should be on the fifth or the sixth floor because they are stronger.¡± ¡°Well, let¡¯s get them out.¡± Anughed. Chapter 374: Wax-wax Fruit User Chapter 374: Wax-wax Fruit User Upon hearing that An intended to rescue Mr. 1 and Crocodile, Mr. 3 was puzzled. ¡°Excuse me, why do you want to save them?¡± In Mr. 3¡¯s opinion, both Mr. 1 and Crocodile were notorious pirates, especially Crocodile, a former member of the Seven Warlords. Despite being dismissed by the Marine headquarters, he was dangerous and should not be underestimated. Now, An was proposing to rescue such a dangerous person, which was difficult for Mr. 3 to understand. ¡°We¡¯re saving them to increase ourbat power during the escape,¡± An exined. ¡°The more people we have on our side, the better our chances. After all, this is the so-called impregnable city.¡± Mr. 3 nodded in understanding. ¡°That¡¯s true. Mr. 1 and Crocodile are both strong. With their help, our chances increase. Plus, there are many powerhouses imprisoned on the fifth and sixth floors, like Mr. 2. They¡¯re all former colleagues of mine from Baroque Works. If we rescue them together, we might actually be able to leave the Impel Down.¡± At this point, the other pirates in the cell asked An to help them open their handcuffs. Mr. 3 offered to use his ability as a ¡°wax-wax fruit¡± user to make keys and unlock their restraints. ¡°Oh, I see. I will leave it to you then,¡± An said. As a user of the Wax-Wax Fruit, Mr. 3 had the ability to melt his body like wax and change its shape at will, creating various tools and weapons. This ability would be particrly useful in their escape, especially when facing lock-based obstacles. ¡°Wow, I thought we¡¯d be stuck in here forever,¡± one pirate eximed in relief. ¡°Thanks to our boss, An, we¡¯ve managed to escape from that cell. But don¡¯t get too excited just yet. There¡¯s still a long way to go before we fully escape Impel Down. Those guards will be here soon.¡± An turned to the group of pirates and said, ¡°Quiet down, you guys.¡± The pirates immediately fell silent and stood still, like soldiers following orders. An then asked Mr. 3: ¡°While we have a moment before the guards arrive, can you use your ability to create more keys to open the doors of the other cells?¡± ¡°Of course,¡± Mr. 3 replied. He quickly made arge number of keys. An handed these keys to a dozen or so pirates and said, ¡°Use these keys to open the doors of the other cells and release as many prisoners as possible. Not just on the second floor, but also on the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth floors. Every door must be opened. We need to cause a big disturbance.¡± Turning to Mr. 3, An added, ¡°Mr. 3, follow me and help me deal with those guards. Block them as much as possible while the others release the prisoners.¡± ¡°Understood, boss,¡± Mr. 3 replied, earning apliment from An. Just then, a group of guards noticed the escape and charged toward An and Mr. 3. Bang bang bang The jail guards pulled their triggers, unleashing a hail of bullets at the two men. An was preparing to fight when Mr. 3 stepped forward and shouted, ¡°Wax Wall!¡± In an instant, a white wall of wax appeared in front of An and Mr. 3, blocking all of the bullets fired by the guards. As the user of the Wax-Wax Fruit, Mr. 3 could not only melt his own body but also create extremely hard wax for use in attack or defense. ¡°Come on, let¡¯s go,¡± An shouted, leading Mr. 3 and the others toward the guards. ¡°Your abilities are truly impressive,¡± An chuckled. ¡°I knew I made the right choice in picking you.¡± ¡°This isn¡¯t good, It¡¯s a Devil Fruit user.¡± The guards were stunned as they saw their bullets being blocked by a wall of candle wax. Bang bang bang The guards fired again, unleashing a hail of bullets. But the candle wax wall was too sturdy, and the bullets couldn¡¯t make it through. M, who was hiding behind the wax candle wall, asked An, ¡°Boss, should we go save Mr. Crocodile and Mr. 1?¡± ¡°Of course,¡± An answered. ¡°Then let¡¯s go to the third floor before their backup arrives,¡± Mr. 3 suggested. ¡°Alright,¡± An agreed. ¡°But before we leave, we have to deal with these pesky guys.¡± ¡°My ability is better suited for creation and defense, not offense,¡± Mr. 3 said worriedly. An nodded and said, ¡°That¡¯s fine. You can assist me while I handle the enemy. Can you make me a weapon?¡± ¡°What kind of weapon does the boss want?¡± Mr. 3 asked. ¡°A sword,¡± An replied. ¡°Wax Wax Sculpture: Sword,¡± Mr. 3 said as he quickly used his ability to create a wax sword. ¡°Although it¡¯s made of wax, its hardness can beparable to steel and should be enough for the boss to use,¡± Mr. 3 exined. An took the wax sword and tested it out, nodding in satisfaction. ¡°It looks good.¡± Just then, the group of jail guards were shooting and closing in on them. An sneered, ¡°Very well, let¡¯s see how effective this wax sword is on you guys.¡± He walked out from behind the wax wall and swung his sword. In a sh, a white energy sh shot straight at the jail guards, hitting them all and sending them flying. An was not one to kill without reason, so he used the slicing wave to severely injure the jail guards rather than kill them. ¡°That¡¯s a powerful sh. I didn¡¯t expect the BOSS to be a sword master,¡± Mr. 3 eximed in amazement. ¡°Here theye again,¡± An said as he saw arge group of jail guards approaching Chapter 375: The Rebellion at Impel Downs Second Floor Chapter 375: The Rebellion at Impel Down''s Second Floor Nestled in the peaceful waters of the first half of the Grand Line lies Impel Down, a prison surrounded by a plethora of Sea Kings. The structure is a towering, behemoth of a building, situated on the ocean floor. Imprisoned within its walls are wanted criminals of all sorts, from small-time pirates to those worth billions of berries. Impel Down is renowned for its impregnable walls, with six floors of cells and torture chambers. The guards, in addition to the Navy soldiers, areprised of members of the beast race, tasked with maintaining the security of the prison. These non-human guards possess greater strength than the Navy soldiers and make up a specialized unit within Impel Down. They are not often mobilized. Each cell in Impel Down is constructed from sea stone, designed to prevent prisoners with devil fruit abilities from escaping. The facility is also equipped with an abundance of monitoring Den Den Mushi, used to keep watch on the prisoners¡¯ movements. In the event of an escape attempt or disturbance, the worms will immediately alert the guards, who will take action to quell the rebellion. On this particr asion, a group of prisoners, led by An and locked up in the same cell as Mr. 3, sessfully revolted and fled toward the upper floors. Armed with the wax key crafted by Mr. 3, An and the other pirates broke out of their cells and freed the prisoners in the neighboring ones. The disturbance was not immediately noticed by the Navy soldiers tasked with guarding the second floor, as such an event had not urred in Impel Down in recent memory, causing the guards to becent. The first to detect themotion were the Den Den Mushi assigned to monitor the prisoners¡¯ activities. ced on the outside of each cell, they alerted the guards as soon as the prisoners made their move. As An and more than a dozen pirates fled from their cell, they were immediately spotted by the monitoring worms. The rm was raised on the second floor and a group of prison guards was dispatched to deal with the situation. However, the guards underestimated the strength of the pirates, especially An, who stood out as the only one not wearing a prisoner¡¯s uniform. In reality, he was not a prisoner at all, but had been locked up with the pirates and was therefore targeted by the guards. A single man, An, quickly took down the group of prison guards sent to quell the disturbance. By the time the Navy realized the severity of the situation, several more cells of prisoners had been released by Mr. 3. As the management of Impel Down discovered the elimination of the first group of guards and the escape of more prisoners, they finally understood the gravity of the situation. In response, arge number of Navy prison guards were dispatched to suppress the breakout. The guards pulled the triggers of their guns, attempting to use their bullets to capture the fleeing prisoners. This was a warning to the pirates. But it was clear that this method would not work. The gunfire not only failed to intimidate the rioting pirates but also ignited their rebellious spirit. In a short amount of time, the entire second floor of Impel Down was thrown into chaos. On this floor alone, there were over three or four hundred pirates. These pirates, who had reimed their freedom as prisoners, became active and transformed from oppressed lower-floor prisoners into vicious pirates. No longer wanting to return to the deste cells, they decided to make a break for it. As a result, more and more pirates gathered together, preparing to escape Impel Down. The prison guards of Impel Down had no mercy as they suppressed the rioting pirates. Escaping from the second floor was no easy feat for the pirates, as the two channels leading to the first floor were heavily guarded. The unarmed pirates had no chance of breaking out. The Navy, responsible for maintaining order in Impel Down, had a well-rehearsed strategy for dealing with such uprisings. They stationed arge number of soldiers at the two channels between the second and first floors, blocking the pirates¡¯ ess to the higher levels. Then, they began a step-by-step process of suppression, arresting the pirates and returning them to their cells. If the pirates couldn¡¯t be contained on the second floor, they would be forced to retreat to the third floor or lower levels of the prison. In short, as long as the pirates remained within Impel Down, it was only a matter of time before they were suppressed by the Navy, no matter which floor they were on. Each floor of the prison had a person in charge. At that moment, a guard captain led arge number of soldiers to the second floor of the Beast Hell prison, where the rioting pirates were causing chaos. ¡°Capture them all, leave no one behind!¡± The soldiers aimed their guns at the fleeing pirates and pulled the trigger. Bang bang bang! Gunfire echoed through the second floor of Impel Down as the prison guards relentlessly suppressed the rioting pirates. A warden approached The Guard Captain and reported anxiously, ¡°Sir, these pirates are too fierce. Should we request support from the prison guards on other floors?¡± The Guard Captain, confident in his abilities and those of his soldiers, replied coolly, ¡°No need. This is just a small uprising. Our soldiers on the second floor are more than capable of handling it. Trust me, just follow my orders and these pirates will soon surrender. They don¡¯t have weapons, they won¡¯t be able to withstand our assault for long.¡± In reality, the riot on the second floor was a minor event for The Guard Captain, the warden of Impel Down. He believed that mobilizing all the soldiers on the second floor was more than enough to suppress it, and there was no need to request support from the soldiers on other floors. Therefore, The Guard Captain did not inform the other floors wardens of the situation on the second floor. Subsequently, The Guard Captain led arge number of soldiers to the entrance between the first and second floors, and sessfully drove back the pirates attempting to escape to the first floor. Topletely cut off the possibility of the pirates escaping, The Guard Captain directly closed the channel connecting the first floor. A massive wall made of sea stone descended from the gate,pletely blocking the entrance between the first and second floors. At the same time, The Guard Captain sent another hundred prison guards to guard the entrance between the second and third floors, preventing the pirates from causing a new riot by escaping to the third floor. In this way, the pirates trapped on the second floor were cut off from all escape routes, like birds in a cage, and their suppression was only a matter of time. Chapter 376: Wild Beast Hell Chapter 376: Wild Beast Hell The second floor of Impel Down. At this very moment, a riot is breaking out. Under the guidance of An, the pirates of the second floor have been unleashed, causing chaos throughout the floor. The Guard Captain has sent arge number of soldiers to quell the uprising, but the pirates are proving to be a slippery bunch, trying to escape Impel Down like rats scurrying for cover. Unfortunately for them, the passage to the first floor has been sealed off and guarded by soldiers, so the only way for the escaped prisoners to go is to the third floor. However, some of the more daring pirates have decided to stand their ground and fight the soldiers instead of fleeing. These prisoners were already infamous for their hot tempers and vicious natures, havingmitted all sorts of crimes on the high seas before being caught by the Marines and thrown into the prison of Impel Down. The Marine headquarters has ssified the pirates ording to their original bounties and the crimes they havemitted, imprisoning them from the first to the sixth floor of Impel Down. Generally, pirates with bounties over 100 million are sure to be locked up on the sixth floor also known as The Eternal Hell, located at the very bottom of Impel Down. However, even some well-known pirates with lower bounties may find themselves on the sixth floor if their threats warrant it. Therefore, the prisoners imprisoned on the sixth floor are almost all notorious or well-known pirates with high bounties and strong abilities, posing a great threat to the Marines. Essentially, once imprisoned on the sixth floor, it is the equivalent of being thrown into a death cell and never being able to leave. Pirates with bounties above 50 million will be imprisoned on the fifth floor. Pirates with bounties below 50 million are generally imprisoned on the fourth floor or below. The pirates imprisoned on the second floor, where the riot is taking ce, generally have bounties ranging from 10 million to 20 million berries. For example, Mr. 3¡¯s bounty is 24 million berries, which is considered a rtively high level among the pirates on the second floor. If the bounty reaches 30 million berries, the pirate will be imprisoned on the third floor, Starvation Hell. At this time, the only floor in Impel Down experiencing a riot was the second floor. In the face of the pirates¡¯ fierce resistance, the soldiers could only use their weapons in self-defense. The jailers unhesitatingly aimed their guns at the pirates and pulled the triggers, trying to shoot them dead. The second floor of Impel Down, known as the Wild Beast Hell, is dangerous because it houses many monstrous beasts, such as ice wolves, vultures, man-faced lions, and venomous scorpions, all of which are extremely ferocious beasts. The pirates¡¯ rebellion naturally caught the attention of the fierce beasts. To them, these pirates are just food. The marine soldiers, who often discipline the beasts, are not actively attacked by them. Currently, the pirates must not only fight against the marine soldiers sent to suppress them but also against the fierce beasts. Some of the more dangerous beasts are even avoided by the vicious pirates, as they are too powerful to face head-on without weapons. If injured, the pirates face two potential oues: being eaten by the beasts as food, or being captured by the marines and returned to a life of imprisonment. Neither option is desirable for the pirates. ¡°Mr. 3, can you use your fruit ability to make some weapons for them? Otherwise, they¡¯ll eventually be caught and taken away,¡± An decides to help the pirates, as maintaining a chaotic situation is necessary for leaving Impel Down. The pirates are the best at creating chaos. Mr. 3, also known as the melting fruit ability user or candle man, can use candles to create various shapes and tools, including weapons. Upon hearing An¡¯s request, Mr. 3 readily agreed to help. However, creating a sufficient number of weapons for the pirates all at once was no easy feat. Using his fruit ability, Mr. 3 crafted hundreds of weapons including axes, knives, swords, guns, and sticks ¨C a diverse range that showcased Mr. 3¡¯s proficiency in using his fruit. The pirates, now armed with Mr. 3¡¯s creations, felt a surge in morale as they engaged in battle against the marine soldiers and fierce beasts. Each one was in high spirits, fighting desperately. Seeing this, An wore a satisfied smile. ¡°Well done, Mr. 3.¡± Upon receiving praise from An, Mr. 3 wryly smiled. ¡°Boss, I¡¯m feeling a bit exhausted right now. Can I take a break?¡± ¡°Of course, no problem,¡± An replied, understanding that creating hundreds of weapons for the pirates must have taken a toll on Mr. 3¡¯s physical and mental energy. ¡°You can follow behind me for now. I¡¯ll handle things from here.¡± Just then, a group of marine soldiers armed with guns charged against An and Mr. 3. ¡°Out of my way!¡± With a powerful swing of his sword, An unleashed a shing wave that sent dozens of marines flying. His strength was truly monstrous. Chapter 377: Fight Chapter 377: Fight After defeating several soldiers, An finally drew the attention of the guard captain, The Guard Captain. The Guard Captain led a group of fifty soldiers to surround An, along with Mr. 3. The Guard Captain immediately recognized Mr. 3 and angrily shouted, ¡°It¡¯s you causing trouble!¡± Mr. 3, who also knew The Guard Captain, replied calmly, ¡°I¡¯m just following orders from my boss.¡± The Guard Captain scoffed at the mention of the mysterious ¡°boss¡± and retorted, ¡°Crocodile? What a joke. He¡¯s currently imprisoned on the sixth level, Impel Down¡¯s Eternal Hell. How could he give you orders?¡± But Mr. 3 just sneered and revealed, ¡°Crocodile is just my former boss. I¡¯m no longer under hismand. My boss now is someone else.¡± Intrigued, The Guard Captain asked, ¡°Who is it?¡± Mr. 3 looked at An and ominously replied, ¡°The person standing right next to me.¡± The Guard Captain¡¯s gaze narrowed as he scrutinized An, trying to figure out his identity. It was clear that An was not a typical prisoner in Impel Down, as he was not wearing prisoner¡¯s clothes. Who was this mysterious figure standing before them? The tension in the air was palpable as the two sides faced off, ready for a showdown. ¡°Could it be that you¡¯re an outsider? Did you release those pirates?¡± The Guard Captain¡¯s expression changed. But then he thought it was impossible. Impel Down is located in the Calm Belt, built on the ocean floor, surrounded by Sea Kings, and is known as the impregnable. Normally, no one can enter without permission, unless they are part of the Marines. However, An is now standing with Mr. 3, and he is clearly not part of the Marines. This made The Guard Captain even more puzzled. He¡¯s not a prisoner and he¡¯s not part of the Marines, so who is he? In the face of The Guard Captain¡¯s doubts, An chuckled and said, ¡°My name is An. As for how I got in here, it¡¯s a long story and you probably wouldn¡¯t believe me. In any case, I want to leave Impel Down now. If you let me go, I can assure you that this won¡¯t escte into a bigger issue.¡± The Guard Captain snorted in response, ¡°Impel Down is not a ce where you cane and go as you please. Plus, you¡¯ve injured so many of our soldiers. Regardless, as the guard captain, I can¡¯t possibly let you leave.¡± An frowned, ¡°So there¡¯s no room for negotiation?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. The Marines will neverpromise with pirates.¡± The Guard Captain¡¯s voice was firm, showing his strong sense of justice and contempt for pirates. An saw this and said firmly, ¡°Let me make it clear, I¡¯m not a pirate.¡± The Guard Captain sneered, ¡°Don¡¯t try to deny it. You¡¯ve taken Mr. 3 as your subordinate, so you¡¯re clearly a fellow pirate. The Marines will never let you go.¡± At the same time, the option to connect to the server became avable. [Ding! Make a Choice.] [1. Confront the guard captain. Reward: Meito- Golden Wolf sword.] [2. Temporarily retreat. Reward: Ordinary iron sword.] Without a doubt, An¡¯s choice was to defeat The Guard Captain. Escape was not an option, so he had to fight. ¡°Guard captain, if you¡¯ve got the guts,e and catch me. I¡¯ll stay and fight.¡± In the face of An¡¯s challenge, The Guard Captain¡¯s face turned cold and he suddenlyunched an attack. ¡°sh!¡± The Guard Captain drew his Katana and, in a sh, swung it towards An. He was fast, as if he had suddenly vanished from his original spot. But only An could see that The Guard Captain had not vanished, but was charging towards him at an extremely fast speed. The distance of more than ten meters was crossed by The Guard Captain in the blink of an eye. Facing The Guard Captain¡¯s attack, An was well prepared. He only heard a ¡°ng¡± as he swung his sword to block The Guard Captain¡¯s Katana. The Guard Captain¡¯s expression didn¡¯t change as he continued tounch attacks, swinging his Katana and repeatedly hacking at An from all angles. His attacks were continuous and fierce, as if he was putting all his strength into trying to take An down in one go. ng ng ng ng ng ng¡­ After a lengthy duel, An¡¯s sword finally snapped in half due to the intense collision with The Guard Captain¡¯s de. The Guard Captain¡¯s Katana, on the other hand, remained untouched and shone with a sharp gleam. It was clear that The Guard Captain¡¯s weapon was a superior, high-quality swordpared to An¡¯s, which was made from wax by Mr. 3 and couldn¡¯t withstand the same level of force. The Guard Captain sneered at An, ¡°Without a sword, you¡¯re finished now.¡± An merely chuckled in response, ¡°We¡¯ll see about that.¡± The Guard Captain couldn¡¯t help feeling agitated by An¡¯s confidence. He knew that he hadn¡¯t truly bested An in swordsmanship; he had simply had the advantage of a better weapon. In fact, An¡¯s skill with a sword made from wax was impressive, and The Guard Captaincouldn¡¯t shake the feeling that An had been holding back during their fight. As The Guard Captain pondered this, Anunched an attack. The Guard Captain was stunned by An¡¯s incredible speed, which exceeded his own perception. Suddenly, An¡¯s voice sounded from behind him. ¡°Behind you.¡± Panicking, The Guard Captain turned just in time to be struck by a powerful kick from An, sending him flying into a nearby wall. The soldiers rushed over to check on their captain, whoy dazed and bruised. As they approached, An prepared for the worst, but to his surprise, the soldiers merely aimed their guns at him and pulled the triggers. The gunfire echoed throughout the ce, but An¡¯s body remained unscathed, protected by ayer of white energy created by his ¡°Nen¡± technique. The navy soldiers werepletely unaware of An¡¯s secret, shocked to see him apparently able to withstand bullets with his bare skin. They stared at him in horror, as if they had just witnessed a ghost. The Guard Captain struggled to his feet, his eyes locked onto An. ¡°Is it Haki?¡± he asked, referring to the mysterious power that some individuals possess, allowing them to enhance their physical abilities to superhuman levels. ¡°Haki, huh?¡± An sneered coldly and said, ¡°It¡¯s not just Haki that can block bullets, your knowledge is still too shallow.¡± The Guard Captain snorted and said ¡°Don¡¯t try to y me for a fool. I know a thing or two about Haki myself. You¡¯re not the only one with tricks up your sleeve.¡± ¡°Oh, really?¡± An challenged. ¡°Prove it then.¡± The tension in the room was palpable as The Guard Captain and An faced off, each man determined to prove their superiority. Chapter 378: Meito-Golden Wolf Chapter 378: Meito-Golden Wolf As The Guard Captain faced An¡¯s challenge, he let out a cold snort and his hands suddenly transformed into a pitch-ck color, as if covered in ayer of darkness. It was clear that he had activated his Armament Haki. The Guard Captain used this power to envelop his body and hands in a cloak of darkness, brandishing his Katana as he took on the appearance of a ck warrior. An sneered at the disy, saying, ¡°Armament Haki, huh? Impressive, but I wonder if it¡¯s just for show.¡± ¡°You¡¯re asking for it!¡± The Guard Captain shouted in anger and lunged at An. But An remained unfazed and chose to stand his ground, using his ¡°Nen¡± technique to concentrate 70% of his energy in his hands, boosting their attack and defense capabilities. He used the remaining 30% of his energy to protect the rest of his body from The Guard Captain¡¯s attacks. As the two engaged in a series of shes, it quickly became clear that The Guard Captain was no match for An. He was eventually kicked away and, as hey on the ground, An seized the opportunity to grab The Guard Captain¡¯s fallen sword and deliver a severe wound with a single sh. The Guard Captain¡¯s body was now marred with bone-deep gash, and his left arm had beenpletely severed. Overwhelmed by his injuries, The Guard Captain finally lost consciousness. An refrained from killing The Guard Captain mainly because he had no love for violence and was not a pirate himself. He preferred to avoid taking things to the extreme, so he chose to spare The Guard Captain¡¯s life rather than end it. After defeating the guard captain, An received a reward from the System ¨C the named sword Golden Wolf. Golden Wolf closely resembled a Tachi sword, but it was distinguished by its shimmering gold de, which was quite eye-catching. This named sword was considered a fine piece of art. As An swung it around, he was quite pleased with its performance. The Marines were taken aback by An¡¯s strength as he had inflicted serious injuries on The Guard Captain, a guard captain. They were also enraged that An had disregarded them as if they were nothing. ¡°Damn it, catch him!¡± ¡°He dared to hurt the guard captain. We can¡¯t let him get away with it.¡± In response, the Marines raised their guns and pulled the triggers. An snorted in contempt and said, ¡°Perfect, I¡¯ll use you all to test the power of Golden Wolf.¡± With a swift sh, An sent out a wave of golden energy that knocked out all the soldiers in front of him. ¡°Nice power!¡± An grinned in satisfaction. Mr. 3 approached and asked, ¡°Where did you get this sword?¡± An couldn¡¯t exactly exin how he obtained it, as it was a reward he received afterpleting a Choice from the system. He tried to brush the question off with a vague excuse. Fortunately, Mr. 3 didn¡¯t seem to be dwelling on it and changed the subject, asking: ¡°What¡¯s the n now? Do we go up or down?¡± An considered for a moment before saying: ¡°We stick to the original n and go rescue Crocodile and Mr. 1.¡± ¡°Alright,¡± Mr. 3 didn¡¯t object. Just then, another group of marine prison guards charged toward them. ¡°Get out of my way!¡± An shouted, slicing through them with a single swipe of his sword. The golden, blinding sh sent them all flying, heavily injured and defeated in an instant. An snarled: ¡°If you¡¯ve got the guts, call Magen over. Do you shrimp soldiers and crab generals think you can catch me? That¡¯s just a foolish dream!¡± Magen, the head of the prison at Impel Down, was the strongest marine in the area. He was the one responsible for suppressing all the pirates in Impel Down, and no one could stand up to him. An knew that Magen would definitelye, and with such a major disturbance on the second floor, it was likely that Magen, as the head, had already heard about it from his subordinates. He could be on his way here right now. But An wasn¡¯t afraid, rather, he seemed excited at the prospect of facing off against Magen. However, An didn¡¯t want to meet him so soon. He wanted to release more pirates and turn Impel Down upside down before he dealt with Magen. As Mr. 3 saw the calm expression on An¡¯s face, he said: ¡°I never would have thought you weren¡¯t afraid of Magen. That guy is a monster ¨C even Crocodile and Mr. 1 are wary of him. Boss, who are you exactly?¡± An chuckled softly, ¡°Well, all I can say is that I¡¯m not a pirate, and I don¡¯t have much fame to speak of.¡± Mr. 3 asked, a hint of worry in his voice, ¡°If Magen really shows up, do you think you can handle him, boss?¡± He had joined An for two reasons: to repay the debt of gratitude for being rescued from prison, and out of respect for An¡¯s formidable strength. However, he had no idea just how powerful An truly was. The sess of their escape from Impel Down might hinge on An¡¯s ability to take down Magen. Thus, the question. An patted Mr. 3¡¯s shoulder, sensing his concern. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, if we do run into Magen, I have confidence in taking him down. But before that, we have to free more pirates and cause chaos here. Plus, we need to rescue Crocodile and Mr. 1 to boost our fighting power, and then we¡¯ll have a shot at leaving Impel Down.¡± Mr. 3 was thrilled at the prospect of escape, ready to do whatever it took to make it happen. Freedom was the most important thing to a pirate like him. As they made their way from the second floor to the third, An and Mr. 3 encountered several groups of soldiers blocking their path, all of whom were effortlessly dispatched by An with his Golden Wolf. They were also attacked by various ferocious beasts. The second level of the prison is known as the ¡°beast hell,¡± so it¡¯s no surprise that An and the others be targets for attack by these fierce creatures. These beasts are even more vicious than ordinary lions and tigers, and it wouldn¡¯t be an exaggeration to call them demons. They have extremely powerful attack power and are no match for ordinary pirates. However, in the face of An¡¯s formidable strength, these beasts are nothing more than ants, unable to withstand a single blow. In this way, An led the pirates of the second level, defeating most of the soldiers and beasts andpletely liberating the second level. And An, unknowingly, became their leader. These pirates may be arrogant, but they respect An¡¯s formidable strength. This is the respect of the strong! On the way to the third level of the prison, An and the others encountered a problem. The staircase leading to the third level was blocked off by a stone door made of seastone. In order to enter the third level of the prison, they must break through this seastone door. A group of pirates tried their hardest, but they were unable to leave a mark on the seastone. It¡¯s clear that the seastone is incredibly hard and impossible for them to break. Now, the pirates are in a bind. They can¡¯t go down or up. In other words, they¡¯re stuck in the second level of the prison. ¡°Stand aside, I¡¯ll give it a try,¡± An dered at a crucial moment. Chapter 379: Impel Down’s Third Floor Chapter 379: Impel Down¡¯s Third Floor As everyone watched, An stepped forward, unsheathing the golden wolf from his waist. He swung the de heavily at the stone door, hoping to break through. But with a loud thud, the sea stone door remained unchanged, showing no sign of damage except for a faint scratch left by the sh. The pirates all looked disappointed at this result. Mr. 3 said, Boss, this stone door is made of Sea Stone, which is as hard as diamonds. Its not easy to break it. An nodded, not surprised by the oue. He knew that the golden wolfs strength was not enough to shatter the durable Sea Stone. But leaving a mark on the stone was a testament to the golden wolfs worth as a renowned de. Mr. 3 asked, Boss, didnt you find a way to break my Sea Stone handcuffs before? Do you have any way to destroy this stone door? An nodded and replied, Youll see. Breaking Sea Stone, one of the toughest materials in the world, was almost impossible. But An had a trick up his sleeve. He harnessed the power of space and used its regrity to divide the stone door into two. The indestructible Sea Tower stone crumbled before the power of space, as fragile as a piece of paper. The pirates erupted in joy, their cheers filling the air. Alright, lets go cause some chaos on the third floor, Anmanded, and hundreds of pirates swarmed into the third floor from the second, like a school of fish. Impel Down had six floors in total. The second floor was known as the Beast Hell, while the third was dubbed the Starvation Hell. The bounties of the pirates imprisoned here averaged over 30 million, with some exceeding 50 million for their heinous crimes. The heat emanating from the Inferno Hell on the fourth floor made the third floor scorching hot. Coupled with the guards cruel treatment of withholding food and water, the pirates on the third floor were left starving and near death, their plight even more pitiful than those in the Beast Hell on the second floor. Under Ans leadership, the hundreds of pirates who invaded the third floor from the second began wreaking havoc. They used keys crafted by Mr. 3s fruit ability to release theirrades, or they fought and stole keys from the guards. In short, they left no stone unturned in their efforts to free all the pirates locked up on the third floor. As the rm red throughout Impel Down, signaling the disturbance on the third floor, a horde of marines was dispatched to quell the anarchy unleashed by the pirates. On the other side, An ventured into the third level, Starvation Hell, opting to go solo instead of joining the pirates. As he arrived, he couldnt help but feel the heat emanating below the floor. Man, its hot as hell in here, he muttered to himself. The fourth level beneath the third was the zing Hell, causing the third level to be bathed in the scorching heat. Sweating profusely just from standing still, An knew he had to act fast. Ive got to release the pirates on this level and get out of here as soon as possible, he thought to himself, determination set in his eyes. And so, he set out on his mission, leaving the task of releasing the third levels pirates to those on the second level. His goal was to fend off the soldiers that hade to suppress the rebellion. It wasnt long before An encountered a group of soldiers numbering in the twenties. Seeing that he wasnt wearing prisoners attire, they didnt attack immediately. Hold it right there, who are you? one of them called out. But An had no time for idle chitchat. With a flourish of his sword, he sent a wave of golden energy slicing through the group, sending them flying without causing any harm. Having taken care of the nuisance, An continued on his way. As he moved forward, Ans next destination was the fourth level. In order to reach it, he would need to find the gateway leading to that floor. As he stood outside a prison cell, An stumbled upon Mr. 3. Hey there, Mr. 3. What are you up to? An inquired. Mr. 3 responded, Boss, Im looking for Mr. 2. He seems to have gotten locked up on this level. At the mention of Mr. 2, Ans mind conjured up the image of a man who looked like a ballet dancer. Chuckling, An said, Well, in that case, Ill join you in your search for him. Their search didnt take long, and soon enough, An and Mr. 3 discovered Mr. 2 locked up in a prison cell. Mr. 2, whose real name is Bentham or Bon y, is a high-ranking member of the Baroque Works organization and a colleague of Mr. 3. He is also a Devil Fruit user, possessing the ability to transform into anyone he touches. In addition to his Devil Fruit powers, Bon y is well-versed in martial arts, particrly the Okama Kenpo technique. Chapter 380: Rescuing Bon Clay Chapter 380: Rescuing Bon y As Mr. 3 approached Bon ys cell, thetter couldnt hide his shock. Mr. 3, how did you get here? Bon y asked disbelief etched on his face. I came to rescue you, Mr. 3 replied, a determined look in his eye. Bon ys heart swelled with gratitude. He had never expected his formerrade to take such a risk for him. Impel Down was known for its imprability. Few had ever seeded in rescuing a prisoner from its clutches. But now, as Mr. 3 stood before him, Bon y felt a glimmer of hope. Using his Devil Fruit powers, Mr. 3 made a key and effortlessly unlocked Bon ys seastone handcuffs. At longst, Bon y was free. He breathed a sigh of relief and basked in the feeling of finally being able to move freely again, the weight of his confinement lifted from his shoulders. With a pat on the back, Mr. 3 reminded Bon y, I couldnt have done it without BOSS help. If it werent for him, I wouldnt have even made it to the third level, let alone be able to rescue you. As pirates, the sea was their true home, not the dreary prison walls of Impel Down. And now, thanks to Mr. 3s bravery, Bon y was one step closer to returning to it. Bon ys eyes lit up upon hearing the news. Boss? You mean Crocodile, the President of Baroque Works? Where is he? However, Bon y looked left and right, but there was no sign of Crocodiles presence. Mr. 3 exined, Mr. 2, the boss Im referring to is this man standing next to me, not Crocodile. Allow me to introduce you to him. This is An. Bon y examined An with interest, wondering who he was and why Mr. 3 would be his subordinate. An stepped forward, offering his hand and a warm smile. Nice to meet you, Bon y. My name is An. Its a pleasure to make your acquaintance. Mr. 3 added, Bon y, I was imprisoned on the second floor before Allen saved me. Thats why hes my new boss. I follow his orders now. As for Crocodile, hes currently locked up on the sixth floor. Bon y nodded, newfound respect in his gaze as he looked at An. He shook Ans hand and said, Thank you for saving Mr. 3. I owe you a debt of gratitude. If you ever need anything, dont hesitate to ask. In that case, would you like to join me in causing some chaos here? Allen asked. Without hesitation, Bon y eagerly replied, Absolutely! Id love to join in on the fun. The reason was simple to repay n for rescuing him, and also to vent the resentment he had umted from being imprisoned in this ce for so long. He had long harbored the desire to seek revenge against the Marine. So, when An invited him to join in themotion, he eagerly epted. An exined that their goal was to use this opportunity to leave Impel Down with the help of everyones strength. Bon y finally understood, and his respect for An deepened. He secretly wondered if following this man could be his chance to escape from Impel Down. Just then, a group of soldiers stumbled upon them. An prepared to fight, but Bon y stepped forward first. Let me handle this. Its been a while since Ive had a chance to stretch my muscles. An nodded, curious to see Bon ys strength in action. In a sh, Bon y charged at the soldiers with lightning speed. He quickly employed his martial arts, a unique fighting style created by the Okama, and knocked out all of the soldiers with ease. Mr. 3 watched in amazement,menting, Mr. 2 has been locked up on the third floor for so long, I never would have guessed he had such power. Hes truly worthy of being a member of the Baroque Works. An was equally impressed with Bon ys performance. Grinning, he remarked, Looks like those Marine guys are in for some trouble now. Bon y approached, asking, Where are we headed? Up or down? n replied, Were going to take on the fourth floor first, then the fifth, and finally the sixth. Our ultimate goal is to release all the pirates on each floor and stir up more trouble. Bon y warned, The fourth floor is the zing hell, with even worse conditions than here. If we let the pirates loose there, itll be even more chaotic, and the marines will definitely have a headache. n pondered for a moment before asking, Is there anyone from the Baroque Works society being held on the fourth floor? Bon y replied, I remember Daz Bones was imprisoned there. n eximed, Daz Bones? Is he M.1? Thats him, Bon y confirmed. Chapter 381: Blazing Hell Chapter 381: zing Hell An nodded his head in agreement, ¡°Daz Bones is Baroque work¡¯s top underling and is extremely powerful. If we can bring him over to our side, it¡¯ll significantly boost our fighting capabilities.¡± With that in mind, An dered, ¡°In that case, let¡¯s head to the fourth floor now.¡± Bon y chimed in, ¡°I know the way to the fourth floor. Follow me.¡± Mr. 3 inquired, ¡°Boss, should we gather all the pirates together?¡± An shook his head, ¡°No need. The fourth floor¡¯s environment isn¡¯t suitable for ordinary pirates. It¡¯s just the three of us this time.¡± In reality, An wanted the pirates to stay on the third floor to create a distraction, thereby dispersing the soldiers¡¯ attention. As they journeyed to the fourth floor, An asked Bon y out of curiosity, ¡°Mr. 2, how did you end up getting locked up here?¡± Bon y proceeded to narrate the events that led to his imprisonment. It turned out that as a member of the Baroque Works, he had engaged in a fierce battle against the ckfoot, Sanji, and the Straw Hat pirates in basta. Despite his transformations into Nami repeatedly putting ckfoot in a tough spot, he was eventually defeated.¡± Afterward, when the Straw Hat pirates fled from basta, Bon y was moved by their friendship deration and, while protecting their escape, was captured by the Marines. He was sent to Impel Down and was subsequently imprisoned in the Starvation Hell, the third floor of Impel Down.Not long after, Bon y led the group to the middle of the third floor of Impel Down. An asked, curious about their destination.¡°What are we doing here?¡±¡°There¡¯s an exhaust port here that connects to the fourth floor,¡± Bon y exined. ¡°We can enter through it.¡±An followed Bon y¡¯s finger and saw the exhaust port, which was releasing a stream of hot air. He frowned.¡°The hot airing out of this exhaust port must be from the fourth floor. No wonder it¡¯s so hot on the third floor.¡±Bon y nodded. ¡°There are several exhaust ports like this, this is just one of them.¡±Mr. 3 looked nervous. ¡°Do we really have to go through this creepy ce?¡±¡°It¡¯s the quickest and most convenient way to enter the fourth floor,¡± Bon y replied.n nodded. ¡°Then let¡¯s go through the exhaust port.¡±But Bon y warned them, ¡°Be careful when you enter. The fourth floor of Impel Down is known as the zing Hell. The entire floor is extremely hot, like a giant iron pot filled with boiling Lava and a sea of fire. If you don¡¯tnd in the right ce, it won¡¯t be just a simple burn.¡±¡°Got it,¡± An said.Mr. 3 added, ¡°Just to be safe, I¡¯ll create some armor.¡± He used his fruit ability to create candle armor for himself, which provided high defense but would not protect him against the high temperature and could hinder his movement. As the heat became too much for Mr. 3 to bear, he was forced to abandon his armor. ¡°Alright,¡± An announced, ¡°let¡¯s go in.¡± He led the way into the exhaust port, with Bon y close behind. After some hesitation, Mr3 mustered up the courage to join them. The fourth floor of the city was a scorching inferno, the heat emanating from every inch like mes licking at their skin. Despite the challenges, the trio made their way through the exhaust port and into the fourth level. This floor, as Bon y had warned, was unbearably hot, like being trapped in a furnace. The pirates imprisoned here were subjected to constant torture, their bodies and wills tested by the unrelenting heat. It was a true zing hell, and only those with great willpower could hope to survive its trials. Those imprisoned on the fourth floor were some of the strongest pirates around, with bounties of over 50 million. They were able to withstand the brutal conditions, but even they would be pushed to their limits. ¡°We must hurry,¡± Bon y urged. ¡°Magen¡¯s office is on this floor.¡± An¡¯s eyes narrowed at the mention of the infamous warden¡¯s name. He had long wanted to meet the man but now was not the time. Their mission was to rescue the pirates on this floor and stir up as much chaos as possible. As An considered his options, an idea struck him. ¡°Bon y, do your abilities allow you to mimic the appearance of other people?¡± he inquired. Bon y shot him a quizzical look but didn¡¯t question how An knew of his powers. Instead, he simply nodded, ¡°Yes, I have the power of the Imitation Devil Fruit. ¡°Well then, why don¡¯t you transform into Magen and order the soldiers to release all the pirates from their cells? Juste up with a believable excuse,¡± An suggested. Bon y nodded in agreement, ¡°That¡¯s a great n. My Imitation Fruit not only allows me to perfectly mimic someone¡¯s appearance but also their voice. Even if the marines are suspicious, they won¡¯t suspect that I am a fake Magen.¡± And so, Bon y transformed into a spot-on imitation of Magen.But as he did so, he couldn¡¯t help but grimace. ¡°There¡¯s just one problem,¡± he said with a wry smile. ¡°The clothes?¡± An guessed. Bon y sighed in frustration. ¡°The issue is with the clothes. I can transform into the appearance of other people, but I can¡¯t change what I¡¯m wearing. It¡¯s not like I can just be Magen without his signature outfit and expect to pass as the real deal. I¡¯ll be gged as a suspicious character in an instant.¡± ¡°That is a bit of a problem,¡± An remarked, frowning in thought.At present, Bon y had sessfully taken on the appearance of Magen, but he was still d in his prisoner¡¯s garb. It was unlikely that the Warden chief of Impel Down would be seen in such attire. If Bon y were to try and impersonate Magen while dressed like this, it would be obvious to even the most dimwitted of Marine officers that something was amiss. Chapter 382: Plan B Chapter 382: n B n let out a sigh and said, ¡°Looks like our n is a no-go.¡± if Bon y were to simply transform into the appearance of Magen without the corresponding outfit, there was no way he could fool the soldiers. Thus, they had to abandon the transformation n. Bon y bitterly chuckled and changed his appearance once more. Mr. 3 inquired, ¡°Now what do we do? If we don¡¯t act quickly, we¡¯ll be caught.¡± At this moment, the three of them were hiding near the exhaust port on the fourth floor. The area was rtively hot and thus unguarded. Meanwhile, the pirates on the third floor were causing a disturbance, and nobody had noticed that An and the others had slipped away to the fourth floor. However, their actions had not gone unnoticed by the higher-ups in Impel Down. It was only a matter of time before they were discovered. An pondered for a moment before saying, ¡°Since our Magen disguise won¡¯t work, we¡¯ll have to move on to n B.¡± ¡°What¡¯s n B?¡± Bon y and Mr. 3 asked in unison. n gestured for them toe closer and whispered, ¡°I¡¯ll draw the attention of the soldiers while the two of you rescue the imprisoned pirates and find the staircase to the fifth floor. After causing amotion on the fourth floor, I¡¯ll head to the fifth floor as fast as I can.¡±¡°Understood.¡± Mr. 3 nodded. Bon y, on the other hand, was worried as he asked, ¡°Are you sure it¡¯s okay for you to go alone? Magen¡¯s office is on the fourth floor. If you go and attract the attention of the soldiers, you might run into him.¡± ¡°Magen? I¡¯ve been wanting to meet him for a while now,¡± An said confidently, eager for the chance to face him. Mr. 3 chuckled, ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Mr. 2. The BOSS can even break through a Seastone. Have some faith in his strength.¡± Bon y was shocked at this revtion. ¡°He can even break through a Sea stone? I¡¯ve never heard of such a thing.¡± ¡°Alright, let¡¯s split up and take action. Time is of the essence and we can¡¯t afford to waste any more of it.¡± An said. Meanwhile, in a monitoring room on the fourth floor, a high-ranking official addressed his subordinates. ¡°Pay close attention. There has been a revolt on the second and third floors. If there are any abnormalities on the fourth floor, report it immediately.¡± ¡°Understood. We will keep a close watch,¡± the subordinates replied in unison. In the office of the prison warden on the fourth floor, Magen was writhing in pain from stomach cramps. ¡°Warden Magen, are you sure you¡¯re okay?¡± Domino asked in concern. As Magen, the prison chief warden spoke with a slightly weak voice from inside the toilet, ¡°It¡¯s nothing, just a stomachache. I¡¯ll just use the bathroom a few more times and get rid of it.¡± But Domino, worried and helpless, replied, ¡°Chief, something is happening in the prison now. You should go and check it out.¡± Despite being the prison chief warden, he was not taking the situation seriously at this crucial moment. ¡°I told you,¡± Magen brushed off the concern. ¡°Don¡¯t bother me with small matters. The pirates cause trouble all the time. It¡¯s nothing new. Just send more jailers to deal with them. Each floor has a guard captain, if there¡¯s any problem just go to them. As the chief warden of Impel Down, I¡¯m very busy. I don¡¯t have time to deal with the petty issues of ordinary pirates. If there isn¡¯t a riot on the sixth floor, there wouldn¡¯t be a problem. Leave it to the other guard captains to handle.¡± Sarcastically, Dominomented, ¡°You¡¯re busy going to the bathroom and taking a dump, right?¡± Magen¡¯s voice boomed once more, ¡°Yes, go find Hannyabal. Have him take some people to deal with the pirates. He¡¯s the chief warden, if he doesn¡¯t do it, then who will?¡± Domino reassured, ¡°You don¡¯t have to say it, Hannyabal has already taken care of it.¡± Magen confidently concluded, ¡°Well then, no problem.¡± Domino furrowed her brow, her expression grave. ¡°This isn¡¯t going to be easy. There was a full-blown revolt on the second and third floors. The second-floor pirates all fled to the third floor, which is now packed with at least three or four hundred of them. Suppressing them won¡¯t be a simple task.¡± After a while, Magen emerged from the bathroom. ¡°Chief Magen, are you alright?¡± Domino asked concern etched on her face. ¡°Yes, I¡¯m much better now,¡± Magen replied, taking a seat at his desk. ¡°Then pleasee with me to quell the rebellion,¡± Domenico requested. Magen, the head of Impel Down, was the most formidable presence here. With him leading the charge, those pirates wouldn¡¯t stand a chance. ¡°Domino,¡± Magen began, his tone serious. ¡°You mentioned that there was a revolt on the second and third floors. But who let them out? You know that each cell is made of sea stone ¨C it would take more than brute force to break out. There must be someone pulling the strings behind all of this.¡± Domino nodded, impressed. ¡°Chief Magen, as usual, you see right through to the heart of the matter. There¡¯s definitely a mastermind orchestrating this rebellion.¡± Magen signaled for Domino to continue, and she obliged, ¡°After reviewing the security footage, it became evident that the unrest originated on the second floor of Impel Down. The initial group of prisoners to break free was housed in cell 303. Among them was a notorious Devil Fruit user by the name of Mr. 3, formerly of the Baroque Works. His ability allows him to craft a variety of tools using wax. It¡¯s likely that all the escapees were able to flee due to Mr. 3¡¯s power, as he likely used it to make keys and unlock their cells. There was also a mysterious and suspicious aplice who fled alongside the others from cell 303.¡± Chapter 383: No Worthy Opponent Chapter 383: No Worthy Opponent Magen furrowed his brow in confusion: ¡°You say there¡¯s an inmate of suspicious origin? Pray tell, who is this individual?¡± Domino¡¯s eyes narrowed, her tone conveying a hint of unease. ¡°We don¡¯t know yet. This person is not donned in the standard prison garb, and there is no record of their arrest in Impel Down. To put it simply, they are not a registered prisoner within our confines. And their identity is most perplexing.¡± Magen rubbed at his chin in thought. ¡°If they aren¡¯t a prisoner, how did they end up within our walls? And why were they released from cell 303?¡± Domino shook her head, the gesture one of frustration. ¡°We¡¯ve reviewed the surveince footage at the entrance. But the methods used to gain ess to Impel Down elude us. Even the cameras could not reveal how they entered.¡± Magen¡¯s gaze turned spective. ¡°Could it be that they infiltrated our ranks, disguised as a Navy soldier?¡± Domino scoffed, ¡°Unlikely. Every Navy soldier goes through a thorough search before entering Impel Down. That possibility can be ruled out.¡± Magen nodded in agreement. ¡°Indeed. This inmate remains a mystery.¡± Domino¡¯s voice took on a serious note, ¡°Though we may not know their identity, we can be certain that the rebellion on the second and third levels, is directly tied to this person. It¡¯s highly probable that they instigated the inmates¡¯ escape. Furthermore, the Navy personnel and guards on the second level, including the chief guard Saldeath, have all been subdued.¡± ¡°What? Even Saldeath was defeated?¡± Magen eximed, his expression contorting from shock.He knew all too well that each level¡¯s guard was an appointed Navy captain, their strength rivaling that of pirates with bounties in the hundred thousand berries. Yet, now one of these formidable individuals had been defeated by an enigmatic inmate. At this thought, Magen ordered Domino, ¡°Find that mysterious inmate as soon as possible. I want to see for myself who dares cause trouble on my territory.¡± On the other side, in a corridor on the fourth level. ¡°Halt! Who goes there?¡± Two guards on duty spotted An and immediately issued a warning. An¡¯s lips curled upward in a smirk, his trusty sword, Golden Wolf, in hand as he walked straight towards them, showing no indication of stopping. ¡°Dammit, if you don¡¯t stop, we¡¯ll shoot!¡± The guards aimed their guns at An, issuing another warning. An paid them no heed, continuing to advance. Bang bang! The guards pulled the trigger without hesitation. But their bullets failed to hit the target. In the next moment, An had vanished from his spot. The guards, who hadn¡¯t even had a chance to react, nowy unconscious on the ground. An, after defeating the guards, continued on his journey, making no effort to conceal his presence. His n was to draw the attention of the Impel Down guards, allowing Bon y and Mr. 3 to take the opportunity to release the pirates imprisoned on the fourth level, so he couldn¡¯t hide. Soon, a patrol of about ten navy soldiers discovered An. This time, An didn¡¯t wait for them to attack, he swung his Golden Wolf, with a casual sh and easily defeated the patrol, showcasing his formidable strength. An¡¯s appearance quickly caused amotion on the fourth level. rm sirens rang out, and nearby guards rushed toward him. Within a minute, over thirty guards had arrived to block Allen¡¯s path. ¡°Quite a crowd, but it¡¯s pointless.¡± Allen sneered. ¡°Open fire!¡± Without hesitation, the guards aimed their guns at An and pulled the trigger. In an instant, dozens of bullets flew toward him. Bang bang bang bang¡­ Faced with the barrage of bullets, An blocked them all with his sword, leaving the guards bbergasted. They couldn¡¯t believe that An could block bullets with just one sword, his speed and reflexes were nothing short of superhuman. ¡°It¡¯s my turn.¡± After blocking the bullets, An followed up with a powerful sh. In an instant, a golden light shone, as a golden shockwave swept over the guards. The guards were nothing more than ordinary soldiers, and there wasn¡¯t a single formidable opponent among them. Under the powerful impact of his flying sh, they all fell and lost the ability to fight. ¡°None of them was worth fighting.¡± An shook his head in disappointment, surprised that the guards on the fourth level of Impel Down were so weak. ¡°Is there not a single worthy opponent in Impel Down? ¡± An muttered to himself, he was looking forward to a good fight. ¡°Now that I think about it, Bon y and Mr. 3, they should have made their move by now?¡± As An was deep in thought, another group of guards appeared from the distance. In addition, there were four Jailer beasts. An looked up and saw that the leader was a very young woman. The woman had golden curly hair, wearing a pink outfit, her long bangs covering her eyes, and wore a white earring shaped like a candle on her head, she had a unique appearance that makes one know that she is not an ordinary Guard. At the sight of her, An¡¯s eyes lit up, this woman seems to be the Warden, Sadi. Sure enough, the woman opened her mouth: ¡°I am Chief Guard Sadi, you¡¯re the one causing trouble here? What¡¯s your name?¡± Chapter 384: Angry Little Sadi Chapter 384: Angry Little Sadi Faced with the questioning of the prison guard chief, Sadi, An chuckled and announced his name, ¡°My name is An, I stumbled into Impel Down by ident, I couldn¡¯t help but wonder if Sadi would be kind enough to guide me out of here.¡± But, Sadi was far from amused, sneering with anger, ¡°How dare you address me by name, I am the chief of the prison guards in Impel Down, do you really think I¡¯ll let a criminal like you walk away?¡± ¡°Criminal? No, no, no, I assure you, I am no pirate, Sadi, your assumptions are incorrect,¡± An exined, trying to clear his name. Sadi¡¯s temper red, ¡°You scoundrel, whether you¡¯re a pirate or not, the fact remains that you¡¯ve harmed many of my men. As chief of the prison guards, it is my duty to capture and interrogate you. Wise up and surrender or else you¡¯ll be in for a rough time. Also, you are never to address me by name again.¡± As Sadi¡¯s hostility towards him grew, An couldn¡¯t help but shrug nonchntly, ¡°Well, if that¡¯s the case, there¡¯s nothing left to say. But, if you expect to catch me with just your position as chief of the prison guards, it¡¯s not going to be enough. And let me remind you, I would rather noty my hands on a woman, especially not one as beautiful as yourself. You wouldn¡¯t want that pretty face to be marred now, would you?¡± Sadi was livid, ¡°How dare you! Do you have any idea who I am? I am the chief of the prison guards in Impel Down, second only to Magen, and I have an army of skilled men at my disposal. And yet, you dare to look down on me? I¡¯ll make sure you pay for your insolence.¡± However, in An¡¯s eyes, Sadi was undeniably beautiful, even in her furious state, she exuded a certain charm. It was a shame that Sadi was a marine, and as a traveler, he knew there could never be anything between them. Thus, An dismissed the idea of Sadi bing hispanion. ¡°What are you all waiting for? Capture that scoundrel, and remember, I want him alive,¡± Sadimanded her guards, pointing a furious finger at An. The guards, clearly intimidated by Sadi, rushed toward An.Sadi¡¯s orders were to capture An alive, so the guards did not shoot, instead, they attempted to overwhelm An with sheer numbers, wearing him down before capturing him.The group of guards numbered at least a hundred, all handpicked and specially trained from the Marine headquarters. Each guard was as strong as at least ten ordinary marines.¡°Excellent, now let us all sit back and enjoy the show as our guards capture that scoundrel. I can¡¯t wait to interrogate him,¡± Sadi said with a smirk, as she stood back with the remaining four guards. In her mind, even if a hundred guards couldn¡¯t capture An, they would at least tire him out. ¡°There is no way that¡¯s possible,¡± Sadi thought to herself in disbelief. In the blink of an eye, An had already taken down over a hundred prison guards, leaving them unconscious on the ground. An, showing that he is not a ruthless criminal like a pirate, used the back of his sword to knock them out instead of killing them. This further disyed his overwhelming strength, it is impossible to be defeated with mere numbers.¡°As I said, Sadi, you and your men are not enough to take me down,¡± An taunted.Sadi was speechless, she realized that she had seriously underestimated An¡¯s power.¡°You think this is over? I still have four powerful warriors at my disposal,¡± Sadi growled through gritted teeth.¡°Four powerful warriors?¡± An raised an eyebrow, ncing at the four prison guard beasts behind Sadi. ¡°If they attack me, I won¡¯t hold back,¡± An sneered. ¡°I¡¯ll take them all down.¡± Sadi¡¯s mind raced as she felt the overwhelming power emanating from An. This was no joke. Despite her hesitation, Sadi took a step back, unsure of what to do. Faced with An¡¯s deadly aura and his harsh words, she couldn¡¯t help but wonder if her prized four prison guards would be killed in a fight against him. They were her pride and joy, the pets she had raised since they were young, they were loyal and obedient to her, and she had a deep bond with them. If they were killed by An, Sadi couldn¡¯t bear to lose them. Thus, at that moment, Sadi could not bring herself to unleash her guards on An. Seeing her fear, An also relented, the killing intent dissipating. He said, ¡°That¡¯s right, it¡¯s the right choice not to let them attack me.¡± Sadi red at An, she had never felt such a strong desire to capture someone before. An, for the first time, hadpletely shattered her sense of pride. ¡°Alright, Sadi, if there¡¯s nothing else, I¡¯ll be on my way.¡± As An turned to leave, Sadi couldn¡¯t help but blurt out, ¡°You, you scoundrel, you can¡¯t leave.¡± Sadi attacked An in anger. An was surprised, he never thought that Sadi would take matters into her own hands, her anger had obviously gotten the best of her, causing her to act so recklessly. Chapter 385: Four Jailer Beasts Chapter 385: Four Jailer Beasts With a loud whistle, Sadi flicked her ck whip towards An, its speed as fast as a bullet. But to Sadi¡¯s surprise, the whip passed right through An¡¯s body, as he had vanished into thin air. ¡°What? ¡± Sadi eximed, unable to believe that An had dodged her fierce strike. ¡°What just happened? Did that guy see through my attack, or did he just luck out and avoid it?¡± Sadi thought as sheunched another attack. With another whistle, the ck whip struck out again like a venomous serpent, but this time An did not dodge. He quickly grabbed hold of the whip. ¡°Shit!¡± Sadi eximed, unable to believe that not only had she missed, but An now held her own weapon. A sudden feeling of danger washed over Sadi, and in the next second, An yanked the whip with great force, pulling Sadi towards him. ¡°Wow, such strength.¡± Sadi thought as she lost her grip on the whip, crashing onto the ground and narrowly avoiding being pulled face-to-face with An. She quickly retreated, pulling away from An, and moved to the side of her four beasts guards, clearly shaken and terrified of An¡¯s strength, which far exceeded her expectations. Now, she was regretting her decision to provoke him. ¡°Though I said I don¡¯t hit women, you did attack me first, Sadi. I can¡¯t just let this slide, it¡¯s time for a lesson for a woman who doesn¡¯t know her ce,¡± An said as he approached her.¡°Protect me! Quickly!¡± Sadi cried out in fear as An closed in. As An advanced, the four Jailer guards finally stirred. The first guard, Minotaurus, had the appearance of arge bull and wields arge spiked club. The second guard, Minorhinoceros, was a blue rhinoceros, armed with two small spiked clubs. The third guard, Minoko, had the appearance of a Ko. The fourth guard, Minozebra, resembling a zebra, had red curly hair and wielded a mace with spikes all around the iron ball at the end of the rod. These four guards were not only physically massive but all awakened fruit users. And so, these creatures, be it in terms of strength, defense, or recovery, were incredibly formidable and could only be described as monsters. Their distinguishing feature was their runny noses, while they appeared to be both cute and unkempt at the same time. But there was no denying that they were a formidable force that couldn¡¯t be overlooked in Impel Down. At Sadi¡¯smand, the four prison guard beastsunched their attack on An. An had long been curious about their abilities and as they approached, he unsheathed his sword, the golden wolf, to meet their charge. The first to reach An was the Jailer beast, Minotaurus, wielding arge spiked club as it swung down towards An¡¯s head. The club mmed into the ground where An had been standing, leaving a deep crater in its wake, its power was undeniable. Even for An, getting hit head-on by that kind of strike would not have been pleasant. ¡°As expected from a Zoan type, their strength is formidable,¡± An¡¯s battle spirit was ignited. Minotaurus has already picked up his club and this time he swung at An with all his might. This time, An didn¡¯t dodge, he swung his sword and met the mace head-on. The ng of the collision was deafening and the released energy was astounding. As the standoff between Allen and Minotaurus continued, it quickly became clear that An was at a disadvantage in terms of strength. Minotaurus was not only physically powerful, to begin with, but he was also a Devil Fruit user, so in terms of raw power, An couldn¡¯t match him. At the same time, the second Jailer beast, Minoko, alsounched an attack on Allen. As the beast swung its fists at Allen, he pushed Minotaurus away and quickly raised his sword, the Kinryu, to defend himself against Minoko¡¯s attack. The Minoko¡¯s weapon is spiked brass knuckles, so his punches are incredibly powerful. If he had been hit full-on, it would have been unbearable. Even with the protection of his sword, An did not dare to face Minoko¡¯s attack head-on. With a sudden burst of power, An pushed Minoko back, and then with a powerful swing and a roar, he sent a golden strike crashing down on the beast, sending him flying. The third Jailer beast, Minorhinoceros, and the fourth Jailer beast Minozebra both charged forward simultaneously, wielding their weapons as they pounded down on An. With both beasts attacking together, An also couldn¡¯t back down. Chapter 386: Making a Fuss Chapter 386: Making a Fuss ¡°Boom!¡± An faced two enemies with fierce determination, wielding his de, the Golden Wolf. He bravely stepped forward to intercept their attack and managed to deflect a joint strike from both the Minotaurus and Minozebra. ¡°Get out of my way!¡± With a sudden surge of strength, n flexed his biceps and violently pushed them back. In a split second, he grasped the hilt of his de and swung with all his might. A dazzling golden light burst from the de as An unleashed an unstoppable blow. Wham! The golden de carried an unrivaled aura, instantly sending Minotaurus and Minozebra flying several dozen meters away, leaving visible wounds on their bodies. Meanwhile, Bon y and Mr. 3 had taken advantage of the chaos and freed all the pirates on the fourth floor. The soldiers were no match for the two, as most of the elite guards had been redirected to deal with An and had been defeated. An¡¯s bravery made it possible for Bon y and Mr. 3 to rescue the fourth-floor pirates with ease. The fourth floor held no more than a hundred pirates, but each of them was once a notorious pirate in the sea, with bounties ranging from around fifty to a hundred thousand. They were released by Bon y and Mr. 3, and their primal savagery was on full disy. ¡°Haha, I¡¯ve finally been released! I¡¯ll beat those Marines to a pulp, otherwise, I won¡¯t be able to calm my anger.¡± ¡®Yeah, I¡¯m going to ughter that damn Magen!¡¯ The freed pirates revealed their menacing expressions as they prepared to wreak havoc.¡°And Little Sadi, Domino, Jailer Beast, those bastard officials, they all need to be taught a lesson.¡± The fourth-level pirates were released, they were all shouting to seek revenge from the high-level officials of Impel Down. They have been imprisoned on the fourth level, some for as long as ten years, some for a few months, so they have suffered greatly from torture and wear and tear, so they hate the naval forces of the advancement city. Therefore, the first thing to escape was to settle ounts with them. In a certain hallway on the fourth level, a tall man with an Egyptian Pharaoh-style headdress angrily shouted at his subordinates: ¡°Who released the fourth-level pirates?¡± This tall man is the vice prison chief of the advancement city, Hannyabal. Hannyabal¡¯s appearance, like his name, is a pale face, with an Egyptian Pharaoh-style headdress, a belly like a devil, and an unpleasant guy. After learning that the fourth-level pirates had escaped, Hannyabal was immediately anxious because the prisoners in the fourth level were heinous criminals with rewards of several tens of thousands, notparable to ordinary pirates. Therefore, faced with these escaped pirates, Hannyabal was angry and anxious, wishing to wear a pair of wings and capture all those pirates and put them back in prison. However, capturing these vicious pirates is not a simple task, it is not only risky but also very hard. Therefore, Hannyabal had toe to Magen¡¯s office. In Magen¡¯s office, only the guard captain, Domino, was present, but Magen¡¯s figure was nowhere to be seen. ¡°Captain Hannyabal? Why did youe here?¡± Domino was surprised to see the angry Hannyabal. Hannyabal angrily said, ¡°Where¡¯s the boss? I have something to report.¡± ¡°Uh, the boss is not convenient right now, he¡­ is having diarrhea,¡± Domino replied helplessly. Hearing this, Hannyabal was also speechless: ¡°That guy is having diarrhea again, it¡¯s really annoying.¡± ¡°So, Captain Hannyabal, what¡¯s the matter?¡± Domino asked. Hannyabal said, ¡°The pirates in the fourth level of the jail have all escaped, and they are causing amotion now.¡± ¡°Ah, even the pirates in the fourth level have escaped, how did this happen?¡± Domino was worried because the pirates on the fourth level were very dangerous criminals. ¡°Right, where is Sadi?¡± Hannyabal asked. ¡°Sadi is with the jailers to find that mysterious man,¡± Domino replied. ¡°Mysterious man?¡± ¡°Yes, the guy who appeared with the beasts from the second level of the beast hell and the pirate Mr. 3, the second and third levels have riots, which seem to be rted to that person. ording to the surveince video, he seems to havee to the fourth level now.¡± Hearing this, Hannyabal frowned and said, ¡°So, the reason the fourth-level pirates escaped is because of that guy causing trouble.¡± Domino nodded, ¡°Yeah, it must be rted to that mysterious person.¡± ¡°Do you know who he is?¡± Hannyabal asked. Domino shook his head, ¡°Not for sure, he¡¯s not a prisoner here, and we don¡¯t even know how he got in.¡± Hannyabal eximed, ¡°That¡¯s so mysterious. Could it be that he just appeared out of nowhere?¡± Domino replied, ¡°The only thing we can confirm is that this mysterious person is very powerful and has already defeated many prison guards and officials. We need to catch him soon.¡± Hannyabal thought for a moment, ¡°Since Sadi has already led the guards to look for him, I¡¯ll take my men to suppress the pirate rebellion first. If Magen finishes his business, tell him toe to help us.¡± ¡°I got it. You go ahead,¡± Domino replied. And so, Hannyabal led arge group of navy soldiers to suppress the pirate rebellion on the fourth floor. Chapter 387: Night Demon Shura Chapter 387: Night Demon Shura On the other hand, An is fighting the four jail beasts single-handedly. These four jail beasts, as the result of eating Devil Fruits, have formidable defensive abilities and rapid recovery rates. Even after being wounded by An¡¯s sword, the Golden Wolf, they quickly recover and be even stronger in battle. However, their strength still falls far short of An¡¯s. An¡¯s level far surpasses these jail beasts, with just one serious attack, he can inflict a heavy wound on one of them. However, he is now facing abined attack from the four jail beasts, so it is not an easy task to defeat or even kill them all at once. In fact, An¡¯s fighting spirit ignited slightly by this, but he has not yet taken any serious action. Serious action means using his true strength. To deal with these four big guys, this sword is enough.With these words, An cuts with a de. The golden cutting wave directly strikes them. The four jail beasts are not afraid at all, and they wield their weapons to resist. With a loud ¡°bang,¡± they jointly block this strong wave. Upon seeing the situation, An sneered coldly, ¡°Hmph, not bad. So next, I should take it seriously too.¡± Immediately, An raised his right hand, holding a knife high. His feet spread apart and his body slightly bowed. He grabbed the wrist joint of his right hand with his left hand, looking in a very strange posture. ¡°What is this guy going to do?¡± In the distance, Sadi, who was watching the battle, saw An¡¯s bizarre posture and felt a hint of doubt. At this time, the four prison beasts had already rushed toward An. At the same time, An finally made his move. Night Demon Shura, Demon God sh! A dark purple breath emanated from the knife de, bringing an unspeakable killing intent. In an instant, the four prison beasts that were rushing towards An were suddenly affected by this breath, showing a frightened expression. Yes, the prison beasts felt fear for the first time. This ce seemed to have be a hellish Shura field, filled with eerie and strange breath that makes one¡¯s heart pound and hair stand on end. In their eyes, An seemed to have turned into a Night Demon Shura. Yes, at this moment, An had be a Shura, wielding the Shura de, with a demon god¡¯s manner, heunched a brutal sh at the four prison beasts that were stunned in ce due to fear. Swish, swish, swish! In the blink of an eye, four wounds, each half a meter long, appeared on the prison beasts. With this heavy blow, the four prison beasts lost the ability to continue fighting. Despite their remarkable regenerative abilities, they couldn¡¯t regenerate such a wound. Sadi, who saw this scene, was somewhat in disbelief. After all, these four Jailor Beasts were all awakened Zoan Devil Fruit users. In terms of strength, defense, and physical recovery abilities, they are considered ¡°monster¡± level beasts, and to defeat them all at the same time, in her opinion, is almost impossible. However, now, the impossible has be a reality. The four prison beasts arepletely unable to continue fighting and now only Sadi remained. An cast his gaze at Sadi and walked towards her step by step. Sadi, at this time, did not know if she was scared or paralyzed by his killing intent, and actually stayed in ce without moving, staring, with a ¡°frightened¡± expression, and her face seemed to be writing ¡°Don¡¯te over.¡± Looking at Sadi, who was unable to move because of the killing intent, An pointed the knife at her and said, ¡°Well, what should we do now? Should I kill you or let you go?¡± ¡°Monster¡­ Don¡¯t kill me.¡± Sadi tearfully said she was really scared. Under the pressure of An¡¯s killing intent, Sadi¡¯s will haspletely disintegrated and she didn¡¯t dare to fight anymore. Looking at the crying Sadi, An mysteriously smiled, ¡°Not kill you? Sure, but I have a condition.¡± Hearing this, Sadi hesitated and asked, ¡°What¡­condition?¡± An didn¡¯t waste any time and directly said, ¡°I need you to be my servant, and then prepare a ship so I can leave Impel Down.¡± ¡°This¡­this is impossible,¡± Sadi said, showing that it was difficult to aplish. ¡°Can¡¯t do it? Then I¡¯m sorry,¡± An said, making a move to cut down with his sword. Seeing this, Sadi quickly said, ¡°No, don¡¯t kill me, I will do it.¡± An sneered coldly, ¡°Very well, then you go prepare, remember not to y any tricks.¡± ¡°I, I understand,¡± Sadi nodded and left. Not long after Sadi left, An saw arge group of marines pursuing seven or eight pirates in prisoner uniforms anding in his direction. The seven or eight pirates fought and retreated, quite disheveled. And the soldiers in the marines were very brave, led by a tall man wearing a Pharaoh¡¯s hat. Chapter 388: Defeat Chapter 388: Defeat As An opened his eyes, he quickly recognized the man wearing a fez as the Vice Warden of Impel Down, Hannyabal. At the moment, Hannyabal was leading hundreds of Marines in pursuit of seven or eight pirates. Seeing the scene, An¡¯s lips curled into a smile: ¡°It seems Bon y and Mr. 3 have already seeded in freeing those guys.¡± Those pirates who were being chased by Hannyabal were naturally prisoners who were previously imprisoned on the fourth level. However, An did not see Bon y and Mr. 3. That is to say, they were still in another hallway on the fourth level. ¡°I will go find them.¡± Just as An was about to leave, a prompt suddenly popped up: [ Ding! Make a Choice.] [1. Defeat the Vice Warden of Impel Down, Hannyabal. Reward: Armament Haki.] [2. Ignore Hannyabal and leave directly. Reward: One Mysterious Chest.] An, who had originally nned to go straight to find Bon y and Mr.3, decisively chose the first option from the prompt, as the reward was still worth his effort. At this moment, Hannyabal also noticed An not far away from him. However, he was currently capturing those seven or eight pirates, so he did not have the time to pay attention to An.Those seven or eight pirates were not weak, but because they had been imprisoned for a long time, they were physically weak and were no match for Hannyabal. Hannyabal effortlessly sent his opponents flying with a disy of formidable strength. Meanwhile, An drew his de. An, armed with his sword, Golden Wolf, hacked down. The golden sh wave shot forth like a golden arrow, barreling straight toward Hannyabal with lightning speed. Recognizing the threat, Hannyabal dared not underestimate it, immediately swinging his double-ded naginata in defense with both hands. The powerful sh wave pushed Hannyabal back several meters, and the unleashed power also overwhelmed the Marines behind him. Thanks to An¡¯s swift action, the pirates who had been beaten by Hannyabal were luckily not captured. After expressing his gratitude, An let the pirates leave, choosing to stay behind and face Hannyabal himself. It was not because An wanted to help the pirates, but simply because he wanted to im the reward. To defeat Hannyabal, he naturally had to defeat the Marines who had apanied him as well. At the moment, Hannyabal had no leisure to chase after the escaping pirates. He gazed intently at An. ¡°Who are you?¡± Hannyabal asked. ¡°I am An,¡± he replied. ¡°So it is you, the mysterious person. It was because of you that the pirates caused amotion,¡± Hannyabal said. ¡°I simply want to leave this ce, and take a few people with me,¡± An said coldly. ¡°Foolish thinking. I will capture you,¡± Hannyabal dered. Upon hearing the challenge, An sneered, ¡°You? No way. You don¡¯t have what it takes.¡± This dismissive attitude from An incensed Hannyabal, who gritted his teeth and snarled, ¡°How dare you underestimate me! You¡¯re going to know the true terror of Hannyabal.¡± An had intentionally provoked Hannyabal with his words, and it was clear that he had seeded. Enraged, Hannyabal brandished his double-ded naginata and charged toward An with ferocity, like a demon. An chuckled coldly and drew his sword, the Golden Wolf, ready to face the challenge. As the deputy warden of Impel Down, Hannyabal was indeed a formidable opponent. During the fight, An discovered that Hannyabal was not only skilled in hand-to-handbat, but also mastered the art of the weapon-based Haki and the observation-based Haki, forcing him to re-evaluate Hannyabal¡¯s strength. However, after a grueling and intense battle thatsted for several rounds, Hannyabal made a mistake. An¡¯s Golden Wolf struck his naginata, causing it to fly out of his hands. ¡°Crap!¡± Hannyabal¡¯s expression changed slightly and his aura seemed to copse without his weapon. In just a few moves, An shed and wounded him, even though he had used his Armament Haki to protect himself. Seizing the opportunity, An jumped and kicked Hannyabal, sending him flying. ¡°Dammit, that guy is really powerful.¡± Hannyabal, nursing his wound and holding his side, mbered to his feet and red at An from a distance. ¡°What are you all waiting for? Grab him!¡± Hannyabal took a step back, wincing in pain. He was well aware that he was no match for An at the moment, and it would be foolish to engage in a fight with him. As a Vice Warden, he ordered the marines to attack An, hoping to wear him down so that he could make a run for it and seek reinforcements. The reinforcements he had in mind were none other than the Warden of Impel Down, Magen. He believed that only Magen had what it took to defeat Allen. However, just as he was about to make a break for it, he was shocked to see that the marines were no match for An and were easily defeated by his powerful wave-cutting sh. Hannyabal was stunned by An¡¯s immense strength. It was clear that no matter how many marines he sent, it would be in vain. In an instant, An appeared before Hannyabal, his shadow casting over the Vice Warden. ¡°Think you can run away?¡± An taunted. ¡°Dammit!¡± Hannyabal roared, throwing a punch and activating his Armament Haki. However, that punch was lightly deflected by An. ¡°Hmph, I told you, you¡¯re not good enough yet.¡± The next moment, An raised his knife and fell, directly cutting off Hannyabal¡¯s left arm with one stroke. ¡°Ah!¡± Hannyabal let out a pained cry and instantly lost the ability to continue fighting. At the same time, a voice echoed in An¡¯s mind: ¡°You have defeated Hannyabal and obtained Armament Haki Mastery.¡± Immediately, knowledge and experience regarding Armament Haki filled An¡¯s mind. With An¡¯s talent, he quickly became able to use Armament Haki proficiently. ¡°Dammit, how dare you cut off my hand¡­¡± Hannyabal stared at An with a furious face, having lost one hand greatly reduced hisbat power. An coldlyughed and said, ¡°I didn¡¯t kill you, that¡¯s already enough kindness.¡± With that, An no longer paid attention to Hannyabal and walked toward the front. Chapter 389: Regrouping Chapter 389: Regrouping Not long after, An sessfully reunited with Bon y and Mr. 3. Additionally, there was one more person. This man was tall, bald with a darkplexion and a well-toned physique. There was arge ¡°Spring¡± character tattooed on his chest, showcasing his formidable power. An¡¯s eyes lit up as he immediately recognized the bald man as the strongest underling of Crocodile, Mr. 1, Daz Bones. Despite being in prison attire, his cold assassin¡¯s demeanor was still palpable. he had consumed a Devil Fruit, granting him the superhuman ability of Cut-Cut Fruit. His Devil Fruit ability was extremely lethal, allowing him to freely transform any part of his body into a de, such as his hands or feet, into sharp cutting tools. He could also harden his skin into steel-like hardness,parable to armor. Mr. 1 was born in West Blue and was once a well-known and notorious bounty hunter, also known as a killer.However, he failed in his attempt to assassinate Crocodile and was defeated by thetter. Crocodile was impressed by Mr. 1¡¯s strength and cold killer aura, and so instead of killing him, he made Mr. 1 one of his subordinates. Defeated, Mr. 1 submitted to Crocodile¡¯s immense power and joined Baroque Works, earning the title of Mr. 1. A few months ago, after he and Crocodile were defeated by the Straw Hat Pirates in basta, they were both incarcerated in the underwater prison Impel Down and imprisoned in the fourth level, the zing Hell. Now, with the help of M.2 and M.3, Mr. 1 was sessfully rescued. Despite being weakened after being imprisoned in the fourthyer of the prison for a long time, he still had an intimidating presence, befitting the first assassin of the Baroque Works organization. After a brief conversation, An also got to know Mr. 1, Aka Daz Bones. ¡°The president of the Baroque Works organization is imprisoned in the sixthyer of infinite hell, and I have to go save him,¡± said Daz Bones in a low voice. ¡°I have the same intention,¡± replied An. ¡°Let¡¯s go to the sixthyer together.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know why you want to save us, but I¡¯ll express the gratitude of the Baroque Works organization on behalf of the president. Thank you,¡± said Daz Bones. ¡°I just feel that it¡¯s a waste for people like you to be imprisoned here,¡± said An. ¡°So I¡¯m helping out. Furthermore, escaping from Impel Down is not an easy task, so the more hands the better. Crocodile was a member of the Seven Warlords, and with his help, our chances of escaping will be greater.¡± ¡°In that case, we shouldn¡¯t waste any time,¡± said Daz Bones. ¡°Let¡¯s go. To reach the sixthyer, we first need to enter the fifthyer. I know where the staircase to the fifthyer is, follow me.¡± ¡°Okay,¡± said An, nodding. He and the other three, Mr. 1, M.2, and Mr. 3, headed toward the fifthyer. Meanwhile, in the medical room of the fourthyer of Impel Down. Hannyabal, who had his arm chopped off by An, was undergoing emergency treatment. ¡°Dammit, An, that bastard. I won¡¯t let him get away with it. He actually cut off my arm¡­ Oh, it hurts. Doctor Leno, do you have any anesthesia?¡± Hannyabal, lying on the hospital bed, cursed bitterly while receiving the doctor¡¯s surgical treatment. He was obviously very unhappy with his current situation. ¡°Hey there, Hannyabal, calm down. If you keep moving around, that arm you lost won¡¯t be able to be reattached.¡± The doctor teased. Hearing this, Hannyabal immediately closed his mouth, after all, treatment was the most important thing right now. At the same time, he was also thankful that after his arm was chopped off, he was immediately brought to the medical room by his subordinates for rescue, otherwise, his arm would have been gone for good. A few minutester, Chief Warden Magen, who had just finished taking a dump, arrived at the medical room with Domino to visit Hannyabal who was undergoing surgery. ¡°Hey, what happened to you, Hannyabal? You¡¯re hurt pretty badly.¡± Magen expressed sympathy in the medical room. Hannyabal grumbled, ¡°Magen, you must be enjoying this, right?¡± Magen shook his head, ¡°Not at all, I¡¯m not the kind of person who takes pleasure in others¡¯ misfortunes.¡± Hannyabal said, ¡°It¡¯s all your fault for always taking a dump. As the first person in charge of Impel Down, you should be suppressing pirates, notzing around in your office eating all the time.¡± In response to Hannyabal¡¯s usations, Magen says, ¡°Very well, I¡¯vee here, so who hurt you like this? Your strength is not weak, who exactly is this guy who did this to you? Tell me, I¡¯ll seek revenge for you.¡± Hannyabal responds, ¡°It¡¯s that mysterious person, he¡¯s called An.¡± Magen thinks for a moment and says, ¡°I¡¯ve never heard of this person before, he must be a recent arrival.¡± Hannyabal says, ¡°He should still be on the fourth floor. Magen, you must quickly go and capture him. He is an absolute danger and you should not underestimate him.¡± ¡°Okay, I understand. I¡¯m going to find that guy now,¡± says Magen before leaving the medical room. ¡°Domino, any news about Sadi?¡± Magen asks his subordinate as he leaves the medical room. Domino shakes his head, ¡°Sadi¡¯s prison beasts have all been defeated, but we don¡¯t know where Sadi went.¡± ¡°Oh well, it doesn¡¯t matter, the most important thing now is to capture An. Magen¡¯s face bes serious,¡± says Magen. ¡°The governor is finally taking action,¡± Domino says with anticipation. Chapter 390: Conquerors Haki Chapter 390: Conqueror''s Haki (T/N: I was wrong about the guard captain on the second floor, it wasn¡¯t Saldeath.) As An and his group were on their way to the stairs leading to the fifth floor, they encountered a group of Marines in a corridor on the fourth floor. The leader of the group was a very short person. ¡°huh, a little kid?¡±mented An and hispanions. ¡°I am Saldeath, the chief jailer,¡± the young man continued. Mr. 2, standing next to An, waved his hand dismissively and said, ¡°Hey, small fry, get out of our way. We don¡¯t have time to waste here.¡± ¡°Damn it, don¡¯t call me small fry!¡± Saldeath retorted angrily. Although he did not like being referred to as short, the truth was that Saldeath was indeed small, and he could not argue with that fact. This made him all the easier to provoke. An and hispanions did not take Saldeath seriously at all, as he appeared to be no threat to them. ¡°Get out of the way, small fry, or we won¡¯t be so friendly anymore,¡± Mr.2 said with a menacing expression, which, to be honest, was ratherical.¡°How dare you mock me! I¡¯ll catch all of you!¡± Saldeath shouted in anger. Immediately, Saldeath ordered a group of jailers behind him to attack An and his group. ¡°You guys go and grab all four of them. I¡¯ll teach them a lesson!¡± Saldeath said. ¡°Yes, sir!¡± the group of Marines replied in unison. About twenty Marines charged at An and his group, but this small number of soldiers was not enough to intimidate An and hispanions. ¡°Let me handle this,¡± Mr.1 said, as he transformed his hands into sharp des. ¡°No, you guys step back. I¡¯ll handle this.¡± An extended his arm to stop Mr. 1, who was preparing to attack. The reason was simple: An knew that as an assassin, once Mr. 1 struck, blood would be spilled, and he would not spare these Marines. But An didn¡¯t want to see these soldiers killed, after all, they were not all bad people. Mr. 1, who was about to strike, could only step back a few meters with Mr. 2 and Mr. 3 as An unleashed an immense pressure from his body. The charging Marines were instantly overwhelmed and fell to the ground, unconscious. ¡°How¡­how is this possible?¡± Saldeath, the chief warden responsible formanding the troops from behind, was dumbfounded, wearing an expression of disbelief. With his experience, he naturally had no idea that An was using Haoshoku Haki. But he couldn¡¯t be med for hisck of knowledge, after all, Haoshoku Haki was not something that ordinary people could master. Only one in a million people possessed such talent. Therefore, Saldeath was also seeing Haoshoku Haki for the first time. ¡°Let¡¯s go. We¡¯re leaving.¡± An took Mr. 1 and the others and directly bypassed Saldeath, not even bothering to give him a second nce. After witnessing the disy of An¡¯s Haki, Saldeath was left dumbfounded, frozen in ce, and unable to stop them. He waspletely intimidated by An¡¯s Conqueror¡¯s Haki, and the fear rendered him incapable of attacking them. On their way to the fifth level, Bon y was curious and asked, ¡°An, what kind of power did you use just now? You made all the marines lose consciousness in an instant.¡± Mr. 3 was also amazed and still shaken by the experience. ¡°It was incredible. Even we standing behind were affected. What was that exactly?¡± Mr. 1, Daz Bones, looked at An with a serious expression and said, ¡°If I¡¯m not mistaken, you just used Conqueror¡¯s Haki, right?¡± ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right,¡± An confirmed with a nod. Mr. 1 continued, ¡°I heard that only those with the potential to be kings can possess this type of Haki. It¡¯s a force that can create a pressure that overwhelms and knocks people unconscious. I can¡¯t believe you possess this kind of power. This means that you¡¯re one of those people who have the potential to be a king.¡± An smiled and replied, ¡°It¡¯s not as mystical as you make it sound.¡± Mr. 1 said, ¡°Even President Crocodile doesn¡¯t have this kind of Haki, which just shows how amazing you are.¡± As they spoke, they arrived at the staircase leading to the fifth level, but it was already blocked by arge group of prison guards and beasts. Though these guards and beasts were just ordinary ones and not as powerful as the four they had faced before, their sheer numbers were daunting, with dozens of them blocking the way. ¡°It looks like we have to take care of these guys before we can get to the fifth level,¡± frowns Bon y. ¡°I can¡¯t wait to leave this hellhole of a fourth level,¡±ins Mr. 3. ¡°As a wax man, I can¡¯t stand this scorching heat.¡± ¡°You think you¡¯re the only one suffering?¡± retorts Mr. 1, Daz Bones, in a deep voice. ¡°I was imprisoned on this fourth level, and I was constantly tormented by the searing heat every moment of every day. If there¡¯s anyone who wants to leave this level the most, it¡¯s me.¡± ¡°Then it¡¯s your turn this time,¡± said An. ¡°Very well, leave it to us,¡± replies Mr. 2, Bon y, showing his willingness to fight. Mr. 1, Mr. 2, and Mr. 3 charge towards the guards and beasts engaging them in a fierce battle. An stood back, taking the opportunity to regain his strength and prepare for the fight toe. He remains vignt for any sign of other marines, as Impel Down is their territory, and they could appear at any moment. Chapter 391: Impel Down’s Fifth Level, Magellan on the move Chapter 391: Impel Down¡¯s Fifth Level, Magen on the move After a fierce battle, Mr. 1, Mr. 2, and Mr. 3 sessfully took down the prison guards, demonstrating their impressive abilities. They then proceeded to the fifth level of Impel Down through the staircase, which was the opposite of the scorching fourth level: it was extremely cold, living up to its name as the ¡°Freezing Hell.¡± ¡°Indeed, this ce is worthy of its name,¡± M3 shivered, hugging his arms. Mr. 2 added, ¡°I heard that the prisoners held on this level are all infamous pirates worth over a hundred million berry, second only to those in the Infinite Hell on the sixth level.¡± ¡°Well then, let¡¯s release them all,¡± An sneered. The group sprang into action. As the temperature on this level was below freezing, it was essentially a massive freezer, and there were fewer surveince devices and patrolling guards. However, despite being a prison, the area was still enormous, with a forest where many fierce beasts known as ¡°The Wolves Unit¡± lived. These beasts were even more ferocious than those on the second level and fully adapted to the cold environment. ¡°We¡¯ve gotpany,¡± An suddenly spoke up. In front of them appeared ten beasts resembling wolves butrger in size. ¡°I believe those are the Wolves unit that inhabits the fifth level. They¡¯re extremely savage,¡± Mr. 1, Daz Bones, remarked.¡°Extremely violent?¡± asked Mr. 3. ¡°They eat people,¡± Mr. 1 replied. ¡°You three just fought the beasts on the fourth level. Now it¡¯s my turn to show off,¡± said An. They nodded in agreement as they were looking forward to seeing An in action once again. ¡°Alright, you savage beasts without a shred of humanity. Come at me together. I¡¯ll use this sword to cut you all down,¡± An said, his sword in hand and his aura suddenly bing sharp and fierce. ¡°Although he hasn¡¯t made a move yet, I can already sense his strength,¡± Mr.1 marveled. He had fought with Roronoa Zoro before, so he could tell that An was no ordinary swordsman. ¡°One Sword Style: Golden Wolf sh!¡± Swoosh! A golden sh tore through the air, devouring the ten wolves at an incredible speed before sending them flying with a powerful strike. Boom! The enormous impact of the strike inflicted heavy damage on all ten wolves, leaving them lying on the ground, gasping for breath and unable to get up. With just one move, An had taken out all the wolves. Mr.1 and the others watched in awe. This kind of power was already at the level of a great swordsman. ¡°Alright, let¡¯s go,¡± said An, having dealt with the troublesome wolves. Meanwhile, the prison guards stationed on the fifth level had noticed the invasion of An and his group and attempted to capture them. Facing the encirclement of the jailers, An and the other three all took action. In less than a minute, nearly two hundred jailers were defeated, and of course, An¡¯s strength was the greatest. With just one sh of his sword, he could send arge group of people flying, disying his incredibly powerful swordsmanship. Soon, the pirates imprisoned on the fifth level were released. Although there weren¡¯t many of them, each one was a notorious pirate with a bounty of over a hundred million berry. Even though they had been weakened by years of imprisonment in the cold, they were not to be underestimated. ¡°Go ahead and make some noise,¡± An said to them. ¡°Where are you going? Let use with you,¡± they asked. When the pirates saw An leaving, they followed him. ¡°We¡¯re going to the sixth level. Are you sure you want toe with us?¡± An asked. Upon hearing this, the pirates shook their heads and stopped in their tracks. They knew that the sixth level was where the most vicious criminals were held, and even they didn¡¯t want to set foot there. Therefore, as An and his group made their way to the sixth level, the pirates from the fifth level chose to go to the fourth level instead. However, as soon as they arrived at the scorching Hell of the fourth level, they ran into the most terrifying person in the entire Impel Down: the Warden, Magen! ¡°Damn it, we ran into this guy right off the bat.¡± ¡°No, I don¡¯t want to go back to that cold Hell. I¡¯m going to escape.¡± ¡°If we all team up, maybe we can take him down.¡± ¡°Hmph, you think you can take me down? It seems you haven¡¯t experienced my terror in a long time.¡± ¡°Damn it, let¡¯s fight!¡± The pirates on the fifth level charged towards Magen, ready to risk it all. Magen¡¯s eyes were full of disdain. These pirates, each with a bounty of over a hundred million, might pose a threat to others, but in his eyes, they were just a group of ants. ¡°Hydra!¡± As a user of the Doku Doku no Mi Devil Fruit, Magen can release poisonous gas to attack his opponents. At this moment, a purple poison dragon was released by Magen. This evil dragon, formed from poison instantly devoured the charging pirates on the fifth level. The pirates devoured by the poison dragon all fell to the ground, their bodies corroded and eroded by the toxic gas, writhing in extreme pain. ¡°The warden is truly amazing. With just one move, he took down all the powerful pirates on the fifth level.¡± The Marines standing behind Magen looked at him with admiration and awe. As long as Magen made a move, no pirate could stop him. They firmly believed that this pirate rebellion would soon be quelled and suppressed. ¡°Hey, who let you out of the fifth level? Answer me!¡± Magen directly grabbed one of therge pirates that the poison dragon had just devoured, and questioned him. This pirate had a bounty of one hundred and fifty million, but he was still no match for Magen in front of the poison dragon. ¡°I¡­I don¡¯t know. I only know one of them.¡± ¡°They should be from the Baroque works. I¡¯m in so much pain! Please, Magen, you¡¯ve got to give me the antidote. I don¡¯t want to die,¡± pleaded the pirate, his face contorted in agony. The poison coursing through his body had begun to corrode his skin, and he was in a sorry state. But Magen remained unmoved. ¡°You all deserve this punishment, and there¡¯s no way I¡¯m giving you an antidote,¡± he said coldly, before striding past the group of pirates and leading a contingent of the Marine forces out of the prison. ¡°What about them, sir?¡± Magen¡¯s second-inmand, Domino, asked as she caught up to him. Magen¡¯s voice was devoid of emotion. ¡°There¡¯s no cure for my Hydra poison. The only way to survive is to endure it, and if they can¡¯t, then they¡¯ll die.¡± Domino nodded in agreement. ¡°You¡¯re right, sir. Your poison is lethal.¡± ¡°I¡¯m the highest-ranking official in Impel Down, and I have the power to govern life and death over these criminals,¡± Magen said. ¡°Theymitted a capital offense by attempting to escape from the fifth level, so they deserve to die. There¡¯s no reason to pity them.¡± ¡°Where should we go now?¡± Domino asked. ¡°Of course, we¡¯re going to the fifth level to hunt down those fools,¡± Magen replied. ¡°In my opinion, they might try to make their way to the sixth level.¡± ¡°I¡¯ll inform the guards on the sixth level to be on high alert,¡± Domino said, before pulling out a Den Den Mushi to make the call. Chapter 392: Sixth Level Chapter 392: Sixth Level The sixth level of Impel Down, the Infinite Hell, is where the worst of the worst are held. These are the inmates whose heinous crimes or wicked identities have earned them a lifetime of imprisonment in this deste ce, where they will never again see the light of day. Unlike the man-eating beasts and scorching heat of previous levels, the prisoners here are spared hunger and cold, but at the cost of utter boredom. They are confined to dark, icy cells, where they will remain until they die, with only the prison guards who deliver their meals providing any human contact. For these once fearsome pirates, who once ruled the seas with an iron fist, this monotonous existence of waiting for death is a truly unbearable fate. When An, apanied by Mr. 1, Mr. 2, and Mr. 3, arrives at the sixth level from the fifth, their presence is quickly detected by the guards in the surveince room. ¡°Intruders detected on the sixth level! Report to Warden Magen!¡± the guards immediately spring into action. The cells on this level are enormous, each containing varying numbers of prisoners. Some hold only one inmate, while others contain several. As An and hispanions explore the level, they soon find themselves trapped at the staircase, which has been sealed shut by massive iron bars. ¡°Oh no, the staircase is closed! We¡¯re stuck here,¡± Mr. 3 exims. ¡°That gate must be made of Seastone,¡± Mr. 2 theorizes.¡°Judging from their behavior, it seems like they intend to keep us trapped here on this level and then capture us,¡± Mr. 1 furrowed his brow. These three members of the Baroque Works are all Devil Fruit users. Faced with seastone, they have no way of defending themselves. Once they are trapped on the sixth level, it is a death sentence for them. Feeling increasingly anxious, the three of them worry that they won¡¯t be able to leave the sixth level. Seeing this, An remains calm and reassures them, ¡°Don¡¯t worry, these mere iron bars can¡¯t hold us. I have the ability to get us out.¡± Having witnessed An¡¯s strength before, the three of them have no reason to doubt him ¡°Let¡¯s first go find Crocodile. Do any of you know which cell he¡¯s being held in?¡± An asks. All three of them shake their heads. It¡¯s their first time on the sixth level and they have no idea which cell Crocodile is in. They will have to search one by one. Just as An and the others are about to start their search, a white gas suddenly emerges from the staircase, seeping through the iron chains. The gas is so noxious that it makes them feel extremely ufortable. ¡°This is bad, it¡¯s knockout gas,¡± Bon y exims. Mr.1 reminds them, ¡°Don¡¯t inhale this gas, or you¡¯ll fall unconscious.¡± An and the others quickly retreat to avoid inhaling the gas. As the Knockout gas spread, the pirates imprisoned on the sixth level began to feel uneasy. Trapped in their cells, they had nowhere to hide. The gas kept pouring in as if it wanted to engulf the entire level. ¡°Hey, you four!¡± yelled the imprisoned pirates. ¡°We don¡¯t know who you are, but don¡¯t you dare get us into more trouble, you bastards!¡± Clearly, they were ming An and his group. If they hadn¡¯t appeared, the jailers wouldn¡¯t have released the hypnotic gas. Ignoring the protests of the sixth-level pirates, An turned to Mr. 3 and asked, ¡°Mr. 3, can you use your wax to seal the staircase?¡± ¡°I¡¯ll try,¡± said Mr. 3. Soon, Mr. 3 had sealed off the staircasepletely with his wax. The Knockout gas was now contained, but a small amount had already seeped into the level. Fortunately, it didn¡¯t seem to affect An and his group too much. ¡°Good job,¡± said An. Mr. 3 let out a bitterugh, unable to share An¡¯s optimism. ¡°We might have blocked the gas, but now we¡¯re even more trapped. It¡¯ll be even harder for us to escape.¡± At this, Mr. 1 and Mr. 2 became agitated. It was indeed a problem. However, An seemed unfazed and calmly said, ¡°Don¡¯t worry, there must be other exits or passages to leave from, otherwise how did those jailers get in to capture us?¡± ¡°You make a good point,¡± Bon y agreed, and with that, the three of them finally breathed a sigh of relief. ¡°Let¡¯s go find Crocodile now,¡± An suggested. ¡°I believe the jailers won¡¯t being down so soon. After all, the stairway has been blocked off, so they should being in through other means. Once we find Crocodile, we can leave through the same way the jailers came in.¡± ¡°Should we also free the others?¡± Mr. 3 asked. ¡°I originally nned to free them, but they didn¡¯t seem too pleased with our arrival earlier, so let¡¯s just release Crocodile and leave the others behind,¡± An replied. Upon hearing An¡¯s decision, none of the others objected. After all, except for Crocodile, the pirates on the sixth floor had no rtion to them, so whether or not they were rescued was inconsequential. Furthermore, the pirates had disyed rude behavior towards them earlier, so there was no telling if they would even be appreciated if they were freed. Hence, it was better to just leave them behind. The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and continue reading tomorrow, everyone!